Please 

handle  this  volume 

with  care. 

The  University  of  Connecticut 
Libraries,  Storrs 


hbl,  stx 


RV        3.T52 
Tfionjsonian  materia  medica: 


3    1153    D0Sb7QS2    fl 


H 


;.v'grert  puix^ 


C  yht^^  7^x^<^-t.^cyf    e^/x^?^'T^^^'X 


His  S//yh//i  ,///,/ ^-rtti  ■//,/■  ^ '/•//////////////  //■////  //////sr//; 
/U'/n  Fr/r  ."  "77^>V 


THE 

THOMSOMAN  MATERIA  MEDICA, 
BOTANIC  FAMILY  PHYSICIAN 

COMPRISING 

A  PHII.OSOPHICAL.  THEORY, 

THE 

NATURAL  ORGANIUTION  AND  ASSUMED  PRINCIPLES 

OF 

ANIMAL  AND  VEGETABLE  LIFE: 

TO  WHICH  ARE  ADDED  THE 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLANTS  AND  THEIR  VARIOUS  COMPOUNDS: 

TOGETHER  WITH 

PRACTICAL  ILLUSTRATIONS, 

INCLUDING    MUCH    OTHER    USEFUL    MATTER. 
WITH  PLATES. 

BY  SAMUEL  THOMSON. 


"  See  thyself  reflected  here." 

"He  that  wishes  to  be  counted  among  the  benefactors  of  posterity,  must 
odd  by  his  own  toil,  to  the  acquisition  of  his  ancestors." — Rambler. 


TWELFTH  EDITION, 

ENLARGEDj  CORRECTED,  REVISED  AND  IMPROVED. 


ALBANY: 

PRINTED  BY  J.  MUNSELL,  STATE  STREET. 

1841. 


3    . 
T52 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  year  1841,  by 

SAMUEL  THOMSON  AND  JOHN  THOMSON, 

in  the  Clerk's  office  for  the  Northern  District  of  New-York. 


TO  BENJAMIN  WATERHOUSE,  M.  D.  LL.  D. 

FELLOW    OF    THE    MEDICAL    SOCIETY,    LONDON  ; 

AND  OF  BATH  AND  MANCHESTER,  ENGLAND: 

OF  THE  ACADEMY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES,  BELLES-LETTRES,  INSCRIPTIONS 

AND  COMMERCE,  MARSEILLES  J 

AND  OF  THE  NATIONAL  MEDICAL  SCHOOL  OF  FRANCE  : 

FELLOW  OF  THE  AMERICAN  ACADEMY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  : 

OF  THE  PHILOSOPHICAL  SOCIETY  OF  PHILADELPHIA  J 

AND  PROFESSOR    OF    THE    THEORY   AND    PRACTICE  OF   PHYSIC   IN  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CAMBRIDGE,  MASSACHUSETTS,  IN  THE 

UNITED  STATES  OF  NORTH  AMERICA  J 

AS  A  MARK  OF  RESPECT  FOR  HIS  PRIVATE  CHARACTER, 

PROFESSIONAL  KNOWLEDGE, 

INDEPENDENCE  IN  GIVING  COUNTENANCE  TO  THE  TRUTH, 

AND   JIEDICAL    FACTS,   WITHOUT    REGARD    TO    EARLY   EDUCATION, 

OR   PROFESSIONAL    PREJUDICES  ; 

INVESTIGATING  THE  PRINCIPLES,    ADVOCATING  THE  PRACTICE, 

WITHOUT  REFERENCE  TO  POPULAR  OPINION  ; 

AND    FOR    OTHER    KIND    OFFICES    AND    SUGGESTIONS, 

THIS  WORK  IS  MOST  RESPECTFULLY  DEDICATED, 

BT 

THE  AUTHOR. 


TO  THE  READER. 


In  compiling,  condensing,  collecting,  re-writing  and  composing  matter 
for  the  present  work,  it  has  been  the  principal  object  of  the  subscriber 
to  present  many  additional  facts,  to  strengthen  and  make  more  steadfast 
if  possible,  that  which  was  immovable  before — the  system  and  medical 
practice  discovered  by  his  father,  which  has  acquired  standing  and  repu- 
tation for  the  time,  unparalleled  in  the  annals  of  the  world.  All  pre- 
vious systems  of  medicine,  like  the  dew  of  the  morning,  when  investi. 
gated  under  the  sun-light  of  science,  have  vanished  into  thin  air,  to  give 
place  to  another  theory,  yet  to  be  still  overthrown  in  its  turn,  by  some 
future  ambitious  aspirant  after  a  medical  reputation.  The  more  such 
theories  are  investigated  and  compared  with  truth  and  reason,  the  more 
rapidly  they  go  to  decay.  Where  are  the  theories  of  Paracelsus,  Cullen, 
Brown,  Rush,  and  many  others  of  like  reputation  in  their  day?  Alas  for 
the  instability  of  the  inventions  of  men,  that  are  not  founded  in  truth  and 
experience!  They  are  among  the  things  that  were!  The  closer  the  in- 
vestigation, the  less  confidence  in  the  principles  laid  down.  Not  so  with 
the  system  of  practice  of  Samuel  Thomson,  The  closer  the  criticism  the 
more  confidence  in  its  utility.  Or  like  silver,  the  more  it  is  burnished 
the  brighter  it  shines.  For  those  who  examine  it  become  its  permanent 
friends.  In  this  case  there  is  no  drawback,  and  all,  in  time,  must  become 
Thomsonians.  Hence  the  certainly  of  its  durability  to  the  latest  genera- 
tions. Doct.  Samuel  Thomson  has  the  solid  satisfaction  of  knowing  that 
he  has  established  for  himself,  by  his  system  of  practice,  a  monument  in 
the  hearts  of  the  people  more  durable  than  marble,  and  more  valuable 
than  precious  metals. 

Whatever  inaccuracies  or  errors  may  appear  in  this  work,  in  relation 
to  the  Thomsonian  theory  or  practice,  I  assume;  knowing  as  I  do  my 
inability  to  do  the  work  that  justice,  which  the  nature  and  importance  of 
the  subject  requires.  But  for  the  want  of  a  more  experienced  person,  I 
with  diffidence,  attempt  to  do  justice  to  a  work  that  requires  a  gigantic 
mind  to  perform.  My  method  of  arriving  at  facts  may  appear  crude  and 
undigested  to  many  minds,  but  my  object  has  been  to  get  at  the  facts 
in  that  way,  and  manner,  in  which  I  could  make  myself  best  understood — 
whether  by  comparison,  anecdote  or  fable.  And  therefore  we  are  in  hopes 
that  the  matter,  nnd  not  the  manner,  ■will  be  the  guiding  star  to  the  reader. 
We  desire,  therefore,  that  our  motives  may  be  duly  appreciated,  and  our 
errors  excused,  as  emanating  from  an  honest  intention  to  do  justice  to  the 
name  of  a  venerable  parent,  who  has  cast  into  the  general  fund  his  mite 
for  the  health,  peace,  comfort  and  happiness  of  future  generations. 

Mbany^  January,  18U.  JOHN  THOMSON. 


Key  to  the  Arfangement  of  this  Work. 


Page 

1.  The  apology  to  the  reader,  4 

2.  Prefatory  remarks,,  or  a  comparison  between  the  Thomsonian  and 

regular  physician — giving  a  brief  history  of  the  rise,  progress,  op- 
position, and  persecution,  which  those  who  embrace  the  Thomso- 
nian, or  new  system  of  practice,  have  to  contend,  5 

3.  The  Thomsonian  theory,  or  the  philosophy  of  respiration,  and  the 

principles  necessary  to  be  observed,  to  continue  it  illustrated  by  an 
egg,  with  the  history  of  the  growth  of  the  different  functions  of  the 
animal  with  which  it  is  inhabited,  13,  14 

4.  On  vitality  or  animation,  or  the  principles  of  life,  23 
o.  Scientific  Botany,  by  which  vitality  is  sustained,  30 


THE  ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  HUMAN  SYSTEM. 

1.  Matter,  or,  earth,  water,  air,  and  fire,  and  their  constituents,  of  which 

the  human  system  is  composed,  170 

2.  Matter  organized,  or  the  outlines  of  anatomy  and  physiology,  with 

plates,  exhibiting  in  miniature,  diflerent  views  of  the  human  skele- 
ton, and  the  internal  vicera  or  internal  organs  of  the  body,  both  col- 
lectively and  sepai-ately,  by  illustrations,  together  with  the  muscles, 
fascia,  arteries,  veins,  nerves,  &c.,  211 

3.  Matter  organized  and  animated;  or,  man  possessing  his  faculties  under 

the  influence  of  the  five  senses,  whicli  makes  him  subject  to  disease 
and  death,  and  a  return  to  matter  again,  to  assist  in  the  organization 
and  animation  of  other  bodies,  illustrating  the  organs  of  sense,  by 
cuts,  representing  the  eye,  ear,  skin,  Sec,  457 

4.  The  history  of  the  efforts  of  Doctor  Samuel  Thomson  to  sustain  his 

system  of  vitality  in  matter,  embracing  much  of  his  practical  life 
and  experience,  492 

.').  A  description  of  the  vegetable  substances  used  by  Doctor  Thomson  to 
sustain  his  system  of  vitality  in  matter,  581 

<3.  Introduction  to  the  theory  of  disease,  and  the  preparation  and  use  of 
medicine,  together  with  rules  to  be  observed  by  practitioners  in  the 
treatment  of  disease,  691 


11  KEY. 

Page 
~.  Medical  compounds,  or  rules  for  tlie  compounding  and  preparation  of 
a  great  variety  of  medicines,  for  the  use  of  the  sick,  when  the 
elements  become  deranged  in  their  equilibrium,  and  appear  disposed 
to  resolve  back  to  their  original  matter,  699 

8.  Philosophical  observations  upon  the  various  climates,  complexions, 

habits,  forms  of  disease,  derangements,  and  accidents,  to  which  mat- 
ter becomes  subject,  by  being  organized  and  animated.  Also,  useful 
observations  to  man,  or  animated  matter,  how  to  resist  or  repel  the 
encroachments  upon  his  territory,  by  this  enemy  to  his  organized 
and  animated  state,  which  requires  constant  vigilance  and  warfare 
upon  his  part,  to  repel  the  intrusions  of  the  invader,  or  this  enemy 
to  life,  by  food,  drink,  Avarmth,  clothing,  fuel,  and  such  other  means 
as  are  calculated  to  make  the  body  and  mind  secure  and  happy,  by 
being  far  removed  from  the  giasp  of  this  fell  destroyer— death,  742 

9.  Rules  to  be  observed  in  rescuing  for  a  time,  from  dissolving  nature, 

animated  matter,  which  has  fallen  within  the  grasp  of  this  enemy  to 
life.  Or,  rules  to  be  observed  in  rescuing  persons  who  have  fallen 
into  deep  water.     Also,  for  resuscitating  the  drowned,  773, 774, 775 

10.  The  Thomsonian  theorj"^,  or  unit  of  disease,  showing  that  all  disease 

originates  from  the  same  cause,  directly  or  indirectly — which  brings, 
sooner  or  later,  all  flesh  back  to  primitive  matter,  from  whence  it 
originated,  and  the  spirit  returns  to  God,  who  gave  it — thus  winding 
up  man's  career  upon  this  stage  of  action,  780 

11.  Disease  receives  its  name  from  the  part  which  has  become  so  weak 
as  to  be  subject  to  its  attack  by  the  loss  of  vitality  or  animal  warmth : 
hence,  if  the  liver  be  the  weak  part,  it  is  the  liver  complaint — if  the 
pleura,  the  pleurisy — but  if  the  lungs,  it  is  the  consumption — or  if  it 
be  the  bowels,  cholera  or  cholera  morbus;  notwithstanding  the  dif- 
ferent names  these  various  complaints  so  called,  assume,  they  were 
brought  about  by  one  general  cause,  that  is,  the  loss  of  vitality,  ani- 
mal warmth,  or  taking  cold  ;  and  the  name  arises  from  the  diiTerent 
symptoms,  forms,  and  location,  which  the  disease  assumes  in  the 
body,  780 


DmECTIONS  TO  AGENTS. 

In  filling  out  a  certificate  for  a  family  right,  where  the  individual  makes 
his  first  purchase  of  one,  the  price  is  invariably  twenty  dollars, — and  llie 
blank  should  be  made  out  as  follows: — "  Received  of  A  B,  twenty  dollars,  in 
full  for  Ihc  first  right  of  preparing  and  using,"  &c.  But  if  the  individual  has 
legitimately  purchased  one  of  the  old  rights  of  a  regular  constituted  agent, 
and  has  not  disposed  of  it  again,  he  is  entitled  to  one  of  this  edition  by  paying 
ten  dollars,  and  giving  up  his  old  certificate  to  the  agent.  Then  his  certificate 
should  be  made  out, — "  Received  of  A  B,  ten  dollars,  in  full  for  tlie  seco7td 
rtj/i(  of  preparing  and  using,"  &c.  J.  T. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


FRONTING  TITLE. 

1.  Doctor  Samuel  Thomson's  Portrait. 

2.  Certificate  of  Family  Right. 


ON  ANATOMY. 

OSTEOLOGy. 

Page. 
No.    1.  Front  view  of  the  skeleton, 228 

2.  Back  view  of  the  skeleton, 230 

ON    THE    VISCERA    OF    THE    BODY,   AS    ORGANIZED. 

3.  Front  and  first  view  of  the  chest  and  abdomen, 234 

4.  Second  view  of  the  chest  and  abdomen, 236 

5.  Third  view  of  the  chest  and  abdomen, 238 

6.  Fourth  view  of  the  chest  and  abdomen, 340 

7.  First  view  of  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  viscera,  from  behind,    242 

8.  Second  view  of  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  viscera,  from  behind,  244 

ON    THE    VISCERA    OF    THE    BODY,    SEPARATELY. 

9.  First  view  of  the  heart 246 

10.  Second  view  of  the  heart, 247 

11.  A  view  of  the  trunk,  or  thora.\,  abdomen,  and  pelvis, 248 

12.  Anterior  view  of  the  thorax, .249 

13.  Anatomy  of  the  circulation  through  the  heart,     250 

14.  Posterior  view  of  the  larynx, 263 

do.  Side  view  of  the  larynx, 263 

15.  Reflections  of  the  peritoneum, 271 

16.  The  pharynx  laid  open  from  behind, 280 

17.  The  upper  surface  of  the  liver, 287 

18.  The  under  surface  of  the  liver, 289 

19.  The  lobules  of  the  liver. 292 

20.  A  section  of  the  kidney, 302 

21.  A  side  view  of  the  male  pelvis  in  situ, 305 

22.  A  tranverse  section  of  the  testicle, 316 

ANATOMY    OF    THE    F(ETUS. 

23.  The  foetal  circulation, 324 

24.  A  section  of  the  thymus  gland, 329 

25.  The  course  and  termination  of  the  absorbent  ducts, 330 


IV  ILRUSTRATIONS. 

Page 

ON    THE    MUSCLES. 

No.  26.  Muscles  of  the  head  and  face, 337 

27.  Muscles  of  the  eye-ball, 338 

28.  The  two  pterygoid  muscles, 339 

29.  The  muscles  of  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  neck, 340 

30.  The  styloid  muscles  and  the  muscles  of  the  tongue, 341 

31.  A  side  view  of  the  muscles  of  the  ptarynx, 342 

32.  The  muscles  of  the  soft  palate, 343 

33.  The  prsevertebral  group  of  muscles  of  the  neck, 344 

34.  The  first,  second,  and  part  of  the  third  layer  of  muscles  of  the 

back, 345 

35.  The  fourth,  fifth,  and  part  of  the  sixth  layer  of  muscles  of  the 

back, 346 

36.  The  muscles  of  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  trunk, 348 

37.  Lateral  view  of  the  trunk  of  the  bod}', 349 

33.  The  under  or  abdominal  side  of  the  diaphragm, 351 

39.  The  muscles  of  the  perineum, 353 

40.  The  muscles  of  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  upper  arm, 356 

41.  A  posterior  view  of  the  upper  arm,  showing  the  triceps  muscles,  357 

42.  A  superficial  layer  of  muscles  of  the  fore  arm, 357 

43.  The  deep  layer  of  muscles  of  the  fore  arm, 358 

44.  The  superficial  layer  of  muscles  on  the  posterior  aspect  of  the 

fore  arm, 358 

45.  The  deep  layer  of  muscles  on  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  fore 

arm, 359 

46.  The  muscles  of  the  hand, 360 

47.  The  muscles  of  the  gluteal  region, 362 

48.  The  muscles  of  the  anterior  femoral  region, 364 

49.  The  muscles  of  the  posterior  femoral  and  gluteal  regions, 364 

50.  The  muscles  of  the  anterior  tibial  region, 366 

51.  The  superficial  muscles  of  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  leg, 366 

52.  The  deep  layer  of  muscles  of  the  posterior  tibial  region, 367 

53.  First  layer  of  muscles  in  the  sole  of  the  foot, •  '368 

54.  The  third  and  a  part  of  the  second  layer  of  muscles  of  the  sole 

of  the  foot, 36S 

THE    FASCIjE    of    THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 

55.  A  transverse  section  of  the  neck, 370 

56.  A  transverse  section  of  the  pelvis, 373 

57.  The  pubic  arch,  with  the  attacliments  of  the  perineal  fascice,. . .  .374 
68.  A  side  view  of  the  viscera  of  the  pelvis, 375 

59.  A  section  of  the  structures  which  pass  beneath  the  femoral  arch,  376 

THE   ARTEKIES. 

60.  The  large  vessels  which  proceed  from  the  root  of  the  heart,  with 

their  relations, 379 

61.  The  carotid  arteries,  with  the  branches  of  the  external  carotid,  ..383 

62.  The  branches  of  the  right  subclavian  artery, 386 


ILLUSTRATIONS.  V 

Page. 
Xo.  63.  The  circle  of  Willis, 3S}> 

64.  The  axillary  and  brachial  arteries,  with  their  branches, 391 

65.  The  arteries  of  the  fore  arm, "  *  • 394 

66.  The  abdominal  aorta,  ■with  its  branches, 396 

67.  The  distribution  of  the  branches  of  the  cccHac  axis, 397 

68.  The  course  and  distribution  of  the  superior  mesentric  arter}-, 399 

69.  The  distribution  and  branches  of  tbe  inferior  mesentric  artery,.. 400 

70.  The  distribution  of  the  branches  of  the  iliac  arteries, ••-  • 402 

71.  The  arteries  of  the  perineum, 4041 

72.  View  of  the  anterior  and  inner  aspect  of  the  thigh,  showing  the 

courses  and  branches  of  the  femoral  artery, 406 

73.  The  anterior  aspect  of  the  leg  and  foot, ....••  .408 

74.  A  posterior  view  of  the  leg,. ...   •  •  • 409 

75.  The  arteries  of  the  sole  of  the  foot, 410 

OF    THE   TEINS. 

76.  The  sinuses  of  the  uppsr  and  back  part  of  the  skull, •  •  •41.5 

77.  The  sinuses  of  the  base  of  the  skull, 416 

78.  The  veins  of  the  fore  arm  and  bend  of  the  elbow, 4l7 

79.  The  veins  of  the  trunk  and  neck, 419 

SO.  The  portal  vein, 420 

81.  The  course  and  termination  of  the  thoracic  duct, 430 

THE    KTERVOrs    ST5TEJI. 

82.  The  lateral  ventricles  of  tlie  cerebrum, 440- 

83.  The  mesial  surface  of  a  longitudinal  section  of  the  brain. 442 

84.  The  under  surface,  or  base  of  the  brain, 444 

85.  The  base  of  the  brain, 445 

86.  The  anatomy  of  the  sides  of  the  neck,  showing  the  nerves  of  the 

tongue, 447 

87.  The  distribution  of  the  fascial  nerves,  and  the  branches  of  the 

cervical  plexus, 44*^ 

88.  Origin  and  distribution  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves •  -449 

89.  A  diagram,  showing  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves,  with  its  branches,.  .450 

90.  The  axillary  ple.\us  of  nerves,  with  its  branches,  and  their  dis- 

tribution,   45.2 

91.  The  lumbar  and  sacral  plexuses,  with  the  nerves  of  the  lower 

extremity,. ... 453 

92.  The  cranial  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  nerve, ^ . . .  454 

THE    OaGAKS    OF    SENSE. 

93.  A  longitudinal  section  of  the  globe  of  the  eye, 461 

94.  The  anterior  segment  of  a  transverse  section  of  the  globe  of  the 

eye,  as  seen  within, 463 

95.  The  posterior  segment  of  a  transverse  section  of  the  globe  of 

the  eye,  as  seen  within, 465 


VI  IT.LUSTRATIONS. 

Page. 

No.  96.  A  diagram  of  the  ear, 472 

97.  The  anatomy  of  the  skin, 4S1 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PLANTS. 

No.     1    Lobelia  inflata — emetic  herb, 581 

2.  Capsicum  baccatum — cayenne  pepper, 590 

3.  Myrica  cerifera — bayberry, 597 

4.  Nymphx'a  odorata — white  pond  lily, 598 

5.  Statice  limonium — marsh  rosemary, 601 

6.  Rhus  glabrum — sumac,    602 

7.  Hamamelis  virginica — witch-hazel, 603 

8.  Rubus  strigosus — red  raspberry, 604 

9.  Chelone  glabra — balmony, 613 

10.  Populus  tremuloids — wild  poplar  tree, 615 

11.  Populus  angulata — balm  of  Gilead, 615 

12.  Cypripedium  pubescens — yellow  lady  slipper, 632 

13.  Solanum  dulcamara — bitter-sweet,  •  • 639 

14.  Myrica  gale — meadow  fern, 649 

15.  Xanthoxylum  fraxineum — prickly  ash, 650 

.16.  Galium  aparine — clivers, 661 

n.  Ulmus  fulva — slippery  elm, 668 


ERRATA. 

In  page  SOS,  for  prostRAXE  read  i>rostate  gland.  Some  other  typographical 
errors,  &c.,  have  occurred  :  but  they  are  probably  unimportant,  and  may  be 
•corrected  by  the  reader. 


GENERAL  INTRODUCTION. 


To  '■^become  all  things  to  all  men,''^  as  St.  Paul  said, 
may  be  appropriately  applied  to  the  Thomsonian  Practition- 
er ;  because  in  order  to  gam  the  confidence  of  the  people,  we 
must  satisfy  them,  that  there  are  virtues  in  our  iKedicines 
and  truth  in  our  practice.  To  attain  that  object,  we  must 
"  he  wise  as  serpents^  and  harmless  as  dovesJ^ 

How  much  has  been  lost  to  the  Thomsonian  practice, 
by  the  attempts  of  those  who  had  full  confidence  in  it,  to 
convince  others  of  the  correctness  of  their  opinions,  before 
the  mind  was  ripe  for  the  conviction.  For  instance,  a  man 
who  has  had  his  mind  and  habits  formed  in  a  family  where 
the  regular  practice  has  always  been  employed  for  the 
benefit  of  its  inmates,  is  very  scrupulous  of  any  innova- 
tion upon  that  theory.  If  a  Thomsonian  says  to  him,  the 
calomel  and  opium  which  your  doctor  applies  to  the 
use  of  the  sick  are  poisons,  and  not  to  be  administered, 
the  mind  of  man  at  once,  and  without  regard  to  the  rea- 
soning upon  the  subject,  refers  back  and  enquires,  who 
ought  to  know  best,  the  doctor,  who  has  studied  the  hu- 
man system  anatomically,  physiologically,  and  the  theory 
and  practice  of  medicine,  or  this  Thomsonian,  who  knows 
nothing  about  the  subject,  except  what  he  has  learned  from 
Samuel  Thomson's  book,  which  is  of  recent  origin,  and 
very  doubtful  as  to  the  correctness  of  the  principles  laid 
down.  The  natural  conclusion  is,  then,  that  it  is  impos- 
sible to  reason  with  such  people  so  satisfactorily  as  for 
them  to  be  willing  to  employ  a  Thomsonian  when  sick. 
They  may  talk  and  reason  like  rational  men  while  in 
health,  but  the  moment  the  hand  of  disease  is  laid  upon 
them,  they  seem  to  say  by  their  actions  this  is  no  time  to 
try  experiments,  and  go  for  the  old  physician.  He  comes 
and  commences  his  attendance  as  usual.  The  arguments 
of  the  botanic  physician  are  fresh  in  his  mind ;  he  watches 
narrowly  the  operations,  and  the  rationale  of  the  medicine 
given  by  the  doctor,  and  compares  the  arguments  of  the 


6  GENERAL  INTRODUCTION. 

two  individuals.  And  notwithstanding,  the  Thomsonian 
may  have  the  best  of  the  argument,  iie  overcomes  this 
obstruction  by  the  anatomical  and  physiological  knowledge 
of  the  doctor,  without  once  asking  himself  this  question, 
is  it  absolutely  necessary  that  a  physician  should  know  the 
name  of  every  bone  of  the  foot,  and  every  muscle  of  the 
arm,  to  be  able  to  relieve  pain  in  the  bowels?  If  that  were 
necessary,  the  remedies  of  the  aborigines  of  our  country, 
and  the  valuable  services  of  our  venerable  and  worthy 
matrons  in  time  of  sickness,  have  been  given  to  the  wind. 
But  fortunately  this  is  not  the  case.  Who  does  not  know 
the  value  of  the  attention  paid  by  good  nurses  in  time  of 
sickness?  also  the  many  cures  effected  by  them,  as  well  as 
the  most  ignorant  aborigines  of  our  country,  after  the  skill 
of  these  beautiful  theorists  (the  doctors,)  have  failed  ? 

The  doctor  continues  his  attentions.  He,  vulgarly 
speaking,  builds  up  with  one  hand,  and  pulls  down  with 
the  other ;  or  in  other  words,  he  gives  soup  to  day,  and  poi- 
sons to-morrow.  One  to  kill  a  little,  and  the  other  to  heal 
a  little.  But  generally,  the  poisons  get  the  best  of  the 
bargain,  as  the  patient  gradually  sinks  under  the  treatment, 
and  at  length  is  not  expected  to  live.  Yet  after  all  these 
symptoms  of  death  staring  him  in  the  face,  the  man  can- 
not give  up  the  bugbear,  if  so  you  please  to  call  it,  that  a 
knowledge  of  every  bone  and  muscle  in  the  body,  is  ne- 
cessary to  constitute  a  good  physician.  And  upon  this 
last  hope,  he  will  cling  until  the  doctor  pronounces  him 
incurable ;  or  that  the  patient  from  the  almost  certainty  of 
death,  breaks  the  bonds  of  his  superstition,  and  says,  I 
must  die  as  I  am,  and  I  can  but  die  if  I  send  for  the  botanic 
physician.  This  is  a  fairspecimen  of  the  manner  in  which 
the  Thomsonian  practitioners  generally  first  obtain  em- 
ployment. Now  the  new  doctor  has  a  chance  to  prove 
his  theory  by  his  'practice,  and  what  is  still  better  for  the 
patient,  the  doctor  has  no  knowledge  of  the  regular  theory 
and  practice  of  medicine,  nor  of  anatomy,  or  surgery,  un- 
der which  to  shield  his  mal-practice  as  a  physician.  And 
if  his  practice  is  bad,  he  cannot  arrogate  to  himself  the 
Latin  or  Greek  names  of  his  remedies,  as  well  as  the 
names  of  the  different  functions  of  the  body,  which  he 
has  learned  of  others,  and  which  he  uses  as  a  shield  to 
screen  himself  and  his  quackery  from  public  indignation, 
as  his  predecessor  has  done.  In  this  state  of  the  facts,  the 
fable  of  truth  and  falsehood  is  very  appropriate.  These 
two  worthies  being  on  a  journey  together,  came  to  a  river, 


GENERAL  INTRODUCTION.  7 

Falsehood  wished  Truth  to  divest  himself  and  try  the 
stream ;  unsuspecting  as  usual,  Truth  threw  off  his  clothes 
and  swam  the  river,  and  Falsehood,  as  was  natural  for 
him,  took  the  advantage  of  Truth's  honesty,  and  clad  him- 
self in  his  garments,  under  which  Falsehood  to  this  day, 
assumes  the  robes  of  Truth,  Honesty,  and  Righteousness, 
to  play  off  his  villiany  upon  the  world.  While  unsuspect- 
ing Truth  has  nothing  to  conceal,  he  repudiates  Greek, 
Latin,  and  every  other  dead  language  that  may  tend  to 
confuse  or  embarrass  the  free  communication  of  his  frank, 
unsophisticated  ideas,  in  the  plainest  possible  manner,  for 
the  benefit  of  mankind.  In  these  two  different  lights,  I 
place  the  regular  and  irregular  practitioner.  One  depend- 
ing upon  his  theory  of  poisons,  with  his  shield  of  techni- 
calities behind  which  to  screen  himself,  when  Honesty 
wishes  to  examine  his  hydra-head  and  other  deformities. 
While  the  plain  unassuming  Thomsonian  takes  his  reme- 
dies in  one  hand,  confidence  in  the  other,  and  truth  for  his 
shield,  grapples  with  the  hydra;  and  with  these  Herculean 
clubs,  we  see  the  heads  of  the  monster  dropping  daily. 
The  patient  is  assured  of  one  thing  that  consoles  him ; 
that  is,  he  is  not  taking  poisons  for  medicines,  consequent- 
ly, he  is  in  no  danger  in  that  respect.  But  the  next  thing 
is,  does  the  name  of  the  doctor,  or  his  Greek  and  Latin 
names,  alter  the  qualities  of  his  medicines .?  Is  not  arse- 
nic ratsbane?  And  is  not  ratsbane  poison?  And  will  not 
this  poison  kill  if  administered  in  sufficient  quantities  by 
either  a  wise  man  or  a  fool  ?  So  we  may  ask  of  mercury, 
antimony,  saltpetre,  and  every  other  deadly  article,  used  in 
the  long  catalogue  of  mineral  and  vegetable  poisons  in  the 
regular  materia  medica.  Now  can  the  diploma,  or  the  high 
medical  attainments  of  any  man,  alter  the  poisonous  quali- 
ties of  these  articles,  which  are  poisons  by  nature?  Or, 
could  the  ignorance  of  the  Thomsonian  be  so  great  as  to 
make  red  raspberry,  witch  hazel  or  peach  leaves  poisonous, 
when  in  themselves  naturally  they  are  innocent  substan- 
ces? Who  believes  that  any  man,  because  he  can  talk 
Latin,  has  the  power  to  metamorphose  an  article  that  is 
naturally  poisonous,  into  an  innocent  medicine  ?  Or  on 
the  other  hand,  can  the  fool  convert  an  innocent  vegetable 
substance  into  a  poison,  because  he  does  not  understand 
the  dead  languages  ?  No,  it  is  impossible  that  the  abilities 
of  the  man,  either  natural  or  acquired,  should  alter  the 
qualities  of  the  substances  which  God  by  nature  has  placed 
upon  this  terrestrial  ball  for  either  goo^  or  evil.     The  ra- 


8  GENERAL  INTRODUCTION. 

tional  conclusion  then  is,  poison  is  poison,  and  harmless 
medicines  are  harmless  in  whatever  state  they  may  be 
found;  and  that  the  different  hands  do  not  alter  the  quali- 
ties of  the  articles  that  pass  through  them. 

The  fact  is  irresistable  then,  that  the  dead  languages  for 
the  practitioner,  unexplained  to  the  sick,  are  unnecessary; 
and  that  the  honest  physician  will  never  use  them  to  de- 
ceive, with  regard  to  the  articles  of  medicine  he  may  be 
giving  to  his  patient.  Would  it  not  be  attended  with  much 
less  trouble  for  the  physician,  to  induce  his  patient  to  take 
a  dose  of  conium  macidatum,  or  datura  stramonium^  than 
if  he  should  frankly  say,  I  wish  to  give  you  a  dose  of  the 
poiiison  hemlock,  or  of  the  thorn  apple,  both  of  which  are 
well  known  to  be  potent  poisons?  It  certainly  would  be. 
We  take  many  things  in  ignorance  that  we  would  not 
have  taken  with  full  knowledge  of  their  properties.  And 
for  the  want  of  correct  knowledge  in  relation  to  medicine, 
the  sick  man  is  compelled  to  risk  his  life  many  times,  where 
he  would  not  risk  a  shilling  in  like  chances  for  loss,  in  the 
ordinary  transactions  of  life. 

It  takes  much  longer  for  the  student  to  make  his  shield, 
or  to  learn  the  Latin  names  in  anatomy,  physiology,  and 
the  theory  and  practice  of  medicine,  in  order  to  deceive 
the  people  successfully,  than  to  learn  all  the  medical  com- 
pounds used  in  the  regular  materia  medica ! 

The  Thomsonian's  shield,  is  the  confidence  in  his  sys- 
tem and  practice,  and  the  curing  of  his  patients  after  the 
regulars  have  pronounced  them  incurable.  Here  is  the 
true  definition  of  quackery  made  manifest  to  every  intelli- 
observer.  One  boasts  of  his  acquirements,  his  book  knowl- 
edge, and  his  diploma ;  while  the  other  modestly  shows 
you  his  patients  in  health,  after  having  taken  them  from 
the  hands  of  this  man  of  science. 

The  Thomsonian,  it  is  true,  labors  under  many  disad- 
vantages. He  is  not  popular,  because  the  regular  phy- 
sicians who  are  now  in  the  ascendant  in  public  opinion, 
not  only  throw  upon  them  the  full  weight  of  their  disap- 
probation, but  enlist  that  of  all  their  friends.  And  having 
the  advantages  of  Greek  and  Latin  names  at  hand,  they  can 
always  throw  a  veil  over  their  bad  practice,  or  any  incon- 
sistencies that  may  arise  in  argument,  by  retreating  behind 
this  shield.  In  this  manner  they  force  themselves  along 
upon  their  assumed  knowledge,  every  body  admitting  them 
to  be  learned  and  skillful,  because  they  do  not  understand 


GENERAL  INTRODUCTION.  \) 

the  medical  phraseology  which  they  use,  and  which  is  as 
likely  to  be  wrong  as  right,  in  many  instances. 

Tfie  Thomsonian  is  required  to  give  a  rational  account 
of  himself,  to  the  understanding  of  those  with  whom  he 
reasons,  dirested  of  all  technicalities,  and  by  this  means 
his  theory  is  discussed,  his  medicines  analyzed,  the  consis- 
tency of  his  practice  criticised,  and  the  summing  up  is  com- 
paring his  theory  and  practice  together,  and  then  casting 
fibout  to  see  how  many  he  has  killed,  and  how  many  cured, 
and  whether  he  has  been  as  successful  as  the  neighboring 
physicians. 

The  question  is  frequently  asked,  why  do  you  not  re- 
quire your  practitioners  to  be  better  qualified  to  practice 
medit?ine  '.'     Or,  why  dont  you  get  more  reputable  persons 
to  take  hold  of  your  practice,  and  elevate  it  in  the  scale  of 
popular  opinion  ?  To  which  we  reply,  those  we  would  like 
for  practitioners  have  generally  other  business, and  those  who 
have  not  ambition  to  seek  business  for  themselves,  we  cer- 
tainly do  not  want.     There  are  three  classes  of  individu- 
als who  would  become   Thomsonian   physicians.     The 
first,  and  best  class,  are  those  who  have  been  restored  to 
health  from  the  last  stage  of  disease,  by  the  use  of  this  me- 
dicine.    They  know  practically  the  operations  of  the  me- 
dicines upon  themselves,  and  their  experience  in  its  use, 
gives  them  confidence  to  apply  it  in  other  cases.     From  ill 
health,  they  have  generally  become  broken  down,  or  bank- 
rupts, as  to  property  and  business — the  doctor  taking  what 
little  property  they  may  have  had,  the  new  doctor  finds 
the  patient  not  only  pennyless,  but  broken  down  in  consti- 
tution, and  run  out  in  credit.     Therefore  the  doctor  must 
take  him  upon  the  strength  of  his  promise  to  pay  when  he 
recovers,  or  lose  what  he  does  for  him.     If  he  restores  the 
patient  to  health,  and  he  has  no  other  business,'  he  gene- 
rally commences  practice  upon  the  fund  of  practical  or 
empirical  knowledge,  which  he  may  have  acquired  in  his 
own  case,  while  taking  medicine  ;  and  his  practice  is  gene- 
rally successful,  in  proportion  as  he  has  had  perseverance 
and  judgment,  in  the  business  in  which  he  was  engaged 
before   he  was  taken  sick.      This  is  the  only  way  we 
can  form  an   opinion  of  the  person's  fitness  for  a  prac- 
titioner of  medicine.     If  he  is  a  man  of  common  sense 
in  ordinary  business,  he  will  be  that  also  in  the  capacity  of 
a  doctor. 

The  second  is,  the  broken  down  merchant,  manufacturer 
or  mechanic,  who  is  out  of  employ,  and  casting  about  ia 

2 


10  GENERAL  INTRODUCTION. 

his  mind  for  the  business  by  which  he  can  obtain  a  living 
with  the  least  capital.  He  sees  that  the  Thomsonians 
have  plenty  of  business,  with  good  success  attending  the 
patients,  and  as  it  requires  but  a  small  capital  to  commence 
with,  his  mind  is  made  up  at  once  to  become  a  Thomson!- 
an.  This  man,  like  the  regular  physicians,  must  acquire 
his  knowledge  by  rending  the  theory,  and  commence  his 
practice  by  what  he  has  read,  and  not  by  experience  upon 
himself,  as  the  other  has.  And  like  the  theorist  who  has 
read  books  upon  agriculture,  he  is  not  so  safe  a  man  to 
take  charge  of  a  farm  as  if  he  had  touched  the  work  by 
the  hand  of  experience.  While  he  who  has  been  restored, 
by  the  use  of  the  medicine  upon  himself,  can  enter  into 
every  little  minutias  of  sympathy  and  feeling  with  his  pa- 
tients, and  can  increase  or  diminish  his  medicines,  or  dis- 
continue them  altogether,  as  he  may  think  the  state  of  his 
patient  corresponded  with  his  own,  when  sick.  In  fact, 
there  are  a  thousand  little  things,  where  the  experienced 
man  may  render  his  patient  comfortable,  that  the  inexpe- 
rienced would  not  think  of  Therefore,  as  life,  health  and 
happiness  are  made  up  of  particles  of  comfort,  we  should 
seek  them  wherever  they  are  most  likely  to  be  found  ;  and 
that  is,  from  the  fountain  of  long  experience.  On  which 
account,  we  prefer  the  man  who  has  obtained  his  know- 
ledge or  theory  by  his  practice,  instead  of  him  who  has 
obtained  his  theory  before  his  practice. 

The  third  class,  and  worst  of  all,  are  those  who  are  des- 
titute entirely  of  the  ingredients  necessary  to  constitute  a 
man  of  business  of  any  kind.  These  poor  objects,  being 
dregs  on  hand,  their  parents  would  gladly  rid  themselves 
of  the  dolts.  They  generally  live  for  a  day,  and  die  out 
for  want  of  business,  and  return  like  spurious  coin  to  him 
that  first  issued  it,  to  lay  on  hand  until  another  occasion 
offers  to  try  its  currency.  Many  of  this  class  we  sec  filling 
reputable  stations,  entirely  upon  their  acquired  abilities  and 
the  respectability  and  wealth  of  their  friends,  without  re- 
gard to  their  own  natural  talents.  But  they  will  not  do  for 
Thomsonians.  For  in  that  case,  nature  must  have  a  hand 
in  the  work  to  give  them  common  sense  at  least.  Again, 
it  is  asked,  why  do  not  the  respectable  and  wealthy  have 
their  sons  study  our  practice,  if  a  person  can  acquire  a 
Knowledge  of  it  so  soon,  and  the  practitioner  becomes  so 
successful  in  restoring  the  sick  to  health?  To  which  1 
reply,  did  you  ever  see  the  son  of  a  rich  and  respectable 


GENERAL  INTRODUCTION.  11 

person,  but  what  was  designed  by  his  parents  to  be  made 
a  great  and  popular  man? 

Those  people  who  have  become  wealthy  from  indigent 
circumstances,  would  have  us  believ^e  that  they  were  never 
poor,  consequently  would  not  demean  their  sons  by  edu- 
catincrthem  for  botanic  physicians.  They  are  destined  for 
the  law,  physic,  or  divinity.  Do  you  think  such  gentlemen 
would  suffer  their  sons  to  adopt  a  profession  that  is  so  un- 
popular;^ Impossible  !  So  you  see  we  are  obliged  to  take 
such  as  we  can  obtain,  instead  of  such  as  we  would  have. 

Under  all  these  circumstances,  who  can  look  upon  the 
prosperity  of  the  Thomsonian  practice  of  medicine  at  the 
present  day  without  admiration — spread  as  it  has  from 
Mexico  to  Canada,  and  from  the  sea  shore  back  to  the  Pa- 
cific, also  in  Europe  and  South  America,  originating  with 
the  illiterate  New-Hampshire  farmer,  less  than  fifty  years 
since. 

The  mind  that  can  conceive,  and  put  into  execution,  so 
gigantic  a  scheme,  and  have  perseverance  sufficient  to  buf- 
fet the  torrent  of  opposition,  which  has  been  arrayed  against 
Samuel  Thomson,  evinces  that  true  nobility  of  character 
which  was  ever  Napoleon's  criterion  while  selecting  his 
military  family.  Marshal  Soult  was  taken  from  the  ranks 
on  account  of  his  merit;  and  who  does  not  know  his  mili- 
tary success  and  reputation?  Said  Napoleon,  ^^behold  my 
right  arm,''  having  reference  to  Soult  as  a  military  man. 
Lord  Walpole  believed  true  nobility  of  character  comes  by 
wealth,  and  favor  from  the  crown.  With  such  sentiments 
and  opinions,  he  saw,  with  jealousy,  the  laurels  that  were 
falling  so  abundantly  upon  the  brow  of  Doct.  Franklin  the 
American  printer,  while  in  England.  And  he  thought  on 
one  occasion  at  least,  he  would  gratify  his  caprice  at  the 
Doctors  expense  and  mortification,  byexposingf  to  the  mul- 
titude the  low  cast  or  grade  from  which  the  Doctor  origin- 
ated. So  when  the  greatest  number  of  lords  and  noble- 
men were  paying  their  respectful  attention  to  the  Doctor, 
while  explaining  his  scientific  theories:  says  the  noble 
lord.  Doct.  Franklin  I  understand  you  were  brou2;ht  up  in 
a  soap  and  tallotv  c]iandler''s  factory ;  to  which  the  Doctor 
smiled,  bowed  respectfully,  and  replied,  I  was  sir,  and  I 
think  if  you  had  been,  you  would  have  been  there  now. 

So  we  see,  'the  race  is  not  always  to  the  swift,  nor  yet 
the  battle  to  the  strong,  but  to  those  who  hold  out  to  the 
end  of  the  race,'  in  doing  good  to  their  fellow  beings,  re- 


12  GENERAL  INTRODUCTION. 

gardless  of  the  persecution  and  opposition  which  they  may 
have  to  encounter  for  the  sake  of  truth. 

JOHN  THOMSON. 

Note. — To  assist  us  in  the  progression  of  this  work,  upon  animal  and 
Tegetable  life,  we  have  consulted  Hippocrates,  Galen,  Bacon,  Boerhaave, 
Sylvius,  CuUen,  Brown,  Hunter,  Goldsmith,  Darwin,  Thomson,  Water- 
house,  Blane,  Mitchell,  Hearsey,  Robinson,  Ingalls,  Eaton,  Tully,  Barton, 
Rush,  and  various  other  authors;  for  the  theory  and  practice  or  the 
adaptation  of  animal  and  vegetable  substances  to  sustain  life,  or  vitality 
in  animal  matter,  Samuel  Thomson.  J.  T. 


THE  THOMSONIAN  THEORY. 

"What  is  Man?" 


In  publishing  a  new  edition  of  the  Thomsonian  System 
of  Practice  we  shall  add  many  improvements  and  new  remedies. 
We  have  also  thought  that  a  philosophical  theory  would  be  ac- 
ceptable to  all  who  might  wish  to  adopt  our  practice.  We 
have  accordingly  put  our  views  before  our  readers,  and  leave 
the  subject  for  them  to  accept  or  reject  as  circumstances  may 
dictate. 

In  the  first  place,  why  is  here  a  new  system  of  medicine 
springing  into  existence  so  opposite  to  the  principles  of  the  long 
estabUshed  and  popular  systems  of  the  present  age  ?  I  answer, 
that  it  was  by  the  failure  of  this  long  established  practice  to  re- 
store those  to  health  whom  we  are  accustomed  to  cherish  above 
all  other  earthly  objects;  that  the  mind  was  led  into  the  wide 
region  of  philosophy,  unguided  by  any  human  theory  except 
reason  and  common  sense.  My  father's  family  had  been  much 
subject  to  siclmess,  and  he  was  anxious  to  have  the  best  medi- 
cal attendance  in  his  vicinity ;  and  he  actually  induced  the  best 
phj'^sician  residing  within  several  miles,  to  remove  and  locate 
himself  upon  his  farm.  And  while  a  resident  upon  the  farm, 
and  within  the  space  of  a  few  years,  five  different  members  of 
his  family  had  been  pronounced  by  the  doctor  as  incurable  ; 
and  when  the  patient  had  been  thus  abandoned,  my  father  was 
stimulated  to  try  what  he  could  do  to  mitigate  or  alleviate  the 
sufferings  of  tlie  patient,  and  happily  succeded  in  restoring  every 
individual  to  health.  He  then  thought  if  this  long  established 
system  of  medicine,  failed  to  restore  the  different  members  of  his 
family  to  health,  and  he  must  then  commence  and  do  for  them 
what  was  expected  of  those  who  have  the  credit  of  superior 
skill,  was  not  his  treatment  the  best?  From  that  time  forward, 
which  is  now  near  fifty  years,  he  has  never  employed  a 
regular  physician.  The  neighbors  who  were  called  together, 
as  is  usual  in  country  neighborhoods  in  time  of  sickness,  and 
more  especially,  when  the  sick  were  supposed  dangerous,  were 
led  to  notice  the  least  change  that  took  place  with  the  patient ; 
and  observing  the  happy  effects  of  my  father's  nursing  upon 
the  members  of  his  own  family,  became  the  first  messengers  to 
herald  the  Thomsonian  system  of  practice  to  the  world.    In 


14  THE   THOMSONIAN 

the  course  of  time,  many  of  the  relations  or  friends  of  those 
neighbors  were  stricken  down  by  the  hand  of  disease  ;  and  the 
physicians  being  employed  as  usual,  as  the  best  judges  of  the 
appropriate  remedies  for  the  sick,  as  in  the  case  of  his 
family,  in  many  instances,  gave  over  the  patient  as  incurable. 
The  human  mmd  now  being  upon  the  rack  for  a  remedy  that 
would  in  the  least  mitigate  the  pains  of  the  sufferer,  it  would 
flash  upon  the  mind,  why  not  send  for  Samuel  Thomson  and 
have  him  nurse  the  patient  in  his  peculiar  way,  as  he  does 
those  of  his  ov/n  family.  This  course  was  usually  adopted, 
and  Samuel  Thomson  never  lost  a  patient  to  the  knov.'ledge  of 
the  writer,  in  his  own  neijrhborhood. 

Thus  my  father's  plan  of  nursing  was  adopted  by  his  near 
neighbors,  and  from  them  it  was  promulgated  from  house  to 
house,  from  town  to  town,  and  from  state  to  state,  until  now  it 
is  known  and  extensively  practiced  in  every  state  in  the  Union. 
It  was  by  the  philosophical  experiments  upon  those  who  were 
abandoned  as  incurable,  and  the  happy  results  attendant  upon 
the  same,  that  first  reminded  him  of  the  language  of  the  poet 
who  said,   '•'  the  jjroper  study  of  mankind  is  man''' 

Havmg  been  thus  successful  in  nursing,  he  was  led  to  inquire 
upon  what  principles  the  animal  functions  were  brought  into 
action ;  and  by  what  agency  they  ceased  to  act.  The  prac- 
tical operation  of  his  medicines  was  narrowly  investigated  ;  and 
a  reason  for  the  rpecific  operation  of  each  article  upon  the  sys- 
tem, required.  He  at  last  settled  down  upon  the  principle, 
that  the  human  system  was  a  species  of  animal  machine,  sub- 
ject to  the  action  of  the  elements,  and  when  disordered,  was  to 
be  put  in  order  by  a  judicious  temperament  of  the  same  ele- 
ments by  a  competent  repairer,  whose  duty  it  is  to  know  partic- 
ularly the  principles  by  which  the  machine  is  deranged  ;  and 
by  understanding  the  deficiency,  may  know  how  to  restore  the 
absent  power  in  all  cases,  where  the  principle  of  life  is  not  so 
far  gone  as  not  to  leave sufllcient  to  buiid  upon,  or  the  machine 
is  so  far  decayed  as  to  be  beyond  restoration. 

For  example ;  the  foetus*  is  formed  by  nature  with  all  those 

•  The  best  desmption  of  the  coxception,  progression  and  final  consumma- 
tion 0/  ANIMAL  ORGANIZATION,  and  the  VITALITY  which  COnstitutcS  the  PER- 

TECT  MAN,  can  be  better  comprehended  by  a  description  of  a  heii-s  egg;  with  the 

HISTORY  of   the    GROWTH    OF    THE    DIFFERENT    FUNCTIONS    OF    THE   ANIMAL 

•WITH  WHICH  IT  IS  INHABITED.     TMs  is  as  far  as  God  in  his  wisdom  has  per- 
mitted  inquisitive  7nan,  by  occular  demonstration,  to  penetrate  the  veil. 

Immediatelj^  under  the  shell,  lies  the  common  membrane  or  skin,  which 
lines  it  on  the  inside,  adhering  closely  to  it  every  where,  except  at  the  broad 
end,  where  a  little  cavity  is  left,  that  is  filled  with  air;  which  increases  as  the 
animal  grows  larger.  Under  this  membrane  are  contained  ttvo  whites,  though 
seeming  to  us  to  be  only  one ;  each  wrapped  up  in  a  membrane  of  its  own,  one 
white  within  the  other.  They  differ  from  each  other  in  specific  gravity.  In 
the  midst  of  all  is  the  yolk,  \\Tapt  round  likewise  with  its  own  membrane.    At 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  15 

little  intricacies  of  machinery,  that  are  designed  for  usefuhiess 
in  life,  viz:  the  organs  of  respiration,  digestion,  the  nervous 
and  arterial  systems,  &c.  But  iu  its  present  state,  the  mother's 
breath,  food  and  beverage,  and  other  support,  is  that  of  the  child. 
Its  birth  changes  the  scene ;  the  child  then  acts  for  itself;  it 
changes  a  temperature  of  about  98  degrees  of  Fahrenheit,  for 
one  of  from  65  to  80  degrees.  The  moment  this  low  tempera- 
ture strikes  the  surface,  the  outward  warmth  is  checked,  or  re- 
each  end  of  this  are  iwo  ligaments,  called  chalaza,  which  are  v/hite  dense 
substances,  made  from  the  juembranes,  and  serving  to  keep  the  wliite  and  the 
yolk  in  their  places.     They  are  called  chalaztc  from  their  resemblance  to  hail. 

The  ekalricula  is  the  part  where  tlie  animal  hrst  begins  to  shew  signs  of 
life ;  it  resembles  a  vetch  or  small  pea,  lying  on  one  side  of  the  yolk  and  with- 
in its  membranes.  The  outer  membranes  and  ligaments  preserve  the  fluids  in 
their  proper  places,  the  white  serves  as  nourishment ;  and  the  yolk  with  its 
membraues  after  a  time,  becomes  a  part  of  the  chicken's  body.  This  is  the 
description  of  the  hcn''s  egg,  and  answers  to  all  others,  how  large  or  how  smaU 
soever. 

Previously  to  putting  the  eggs  to  the  hen,  Malpighi  and  Holier  first  exam- 
ined this  cicatricula,  v.iiich  they  consider  as  the  most  important  part  of  the 
egg.  This,  which  some  call  the  pundiim  saliens  or  punctum  vitm,  was  found 
in  those  that  were  impregnated  by  the  male  to  be  large,  but  in  otliers  small. 
Upon  examination  with  the  microscope  it  was  found  to  be  a  kind  of  bag,  con- 
taining a  transparent  liquor,  in  the  midst  of  v.hich  tlie  embryo  was  seen. 
The  embryo  resembled  a  composition  of  little  threads,  which  the  warmth  of 
future  incubations  tended  to  enlarge. 

Upon  placina:  the  egg  in  a  proper  warmth,  after  six  hours  the  vital  speck  be- 
gins to  dilate  like  the  pupil  of  the  eye.  The  head  of  the  chicken  is  distinctly 
seen,  with  the  back-bone  something  resembling  a  tadpole  floating  in  its  am- 
bient fluid,  but  as  yet  seeming  to  assume  none  of  the  functions  of  animal  life. 
About  six  hours  more  the  little  anim.al  is  seen  more  distinctly;  the  head  be- 
comes more  plainly  visible,  and  the  vertebrae  of  the  back  become  more  easily 
perceivable.  All  these  signs  of  preparation  for  life  are  increased  in  six  hours 
more ;  and,  at  the  end  of  twentv-four,  the  ribs  begin  to  take  their  places,  the 
neck  begins  to  lengthen,  and  the  head  to  turn  to  one  side. 

At  this  time,  the  fluids  in  the  egg  seem  to  have  changed  places  ;  the  yolk 
which  was  before  in  the  centre  of  the  shell,  approaches  nearer  the  broad  end. 
The  watery  part  of  the  white  is  diminished,  the  grosser  part  sinks  to  the  small 
end ;  and  the  little  animal  appears  to  turn  towards  the  part  of  the  broad  end 
in  which  a  cavity  has  been  described,  and  with  its  yolk  seems  to  adhere  to 
tlie  membrane  there. 

At  the  end  of  forty  hours,  the  great  work  of  life  seems  fairly  begun,  and 
the  animal  plainly  appears  to  move  ;  the  backbone  thickens ;  the  first  rudi- 
ments  of  the  eyes  begin  to  appear ;  the  heart  beats,  and  the  blood  begins  al- 
ready to  circulate.  The  parts,  however,  as  yet  are  fluid ;  but,  by  degrees, 
tecome  more  and  more  tenacious.  At  the  end  of  two  days,  the  liquor  in 
which  the  chicken  swims,  seems  to  increase  5  the  head  appears  with  two  lit- 
tle bladders  in  place  of  eyes ;  the  heart  beats  in  the  manner  of  every  embryo 
where  the  blood  does  not  circulate  through  the  lungs.  In  about  fourteen 
hours  after  this,  the  chicken  is  grown  more  strong ;  the  veins  and  arteries 
begin  to  branch,  in  order  to  form  the  brains;  and  the  spinal  marrow  is  seen 
stretching  along  the  backbone.  In  three  days  the  whole  body  of  the  chicken 
appears  bent;  the  head  with  its  tv/o  eye-balls,  with  their  different  humors, 
now  distinctly  appear  ;  and  five  other  vesicles  are  seen,  which  soon  unite  to 
form  the  rudiments  of  the  brain.  The  outlines  also  of  the  thighs,  and  wings, 
begin  to  be  seen,  and  the  body  begins  to  gather  flesh.  At  the  end  of  the  fourth 
day,  the  vesicles  that  go  to  form  the  brain  approach  each  other  ;  the  wings 
and  thighs  appear  more  solid  ;  the  whole  body  is  covered  with  a  jelly  like 


16  THE  THOMSONIAN 

duced,  having  the  same  effect  as  the  immersion  in  water  of  the 
same  temperature.  The  atmospheric  pressure  being  near  IGlbsi 
weight  to  the  square  inch,  presses  in  upon  the  kings,  or  organs 
of  respiration,  and  they  are  at  once  inflated.  The  temperature 
being  so  much  greater  upon  the  hinsfs.  (say  98*)  than  upon  the 
surface  (from  65  to  80")  that  the  inward  warmth  immediately 
rarifies  the  air  to  nearly  the  temperature  of  the  blood  ;,  by  which 
it  becomes  so  light  and  expanded  that  the  external  pressure 
will  not  admit  of  its  continuing  longer  upon  the  lungs  ;  and, 

flesh ;  the  heart  that  was  hitherto  exposed,  is  now  covei-ed  up  within  the  body, 
by  a  very  thin  transparent  membrane ;  and  at  the  same  time,  the  umbilical 
vessels,  that  unite  the  animal  to  the  yolk,  now  appear  to  come  forth  from 
the  abdomen.  After  the  fifth  and  sixth  days  the  vessels  of  the  brain  begin  to 
be  covered  oA'er ;  the  wings  and  the  thighs  lengthen;  the  belly  is  closed  up, 
and  turned ;  the  liver  is  seen  within  it,  very  distinctly,  not  yet  grown  red,  but 
of  a  dusky  white  ;  both  the  ventricles  of  the  heart  are  discerned,  as  if  they 
■were  two  separate  hearts,  beating  distinctly;  the  whole  body  of  the  animal  is 
covered  over,  and  the  traces  of  the  incipient  feathers  are  already  to  be  seen. 
The  seventh  day  the  head  appears  very  large;  the  brain  is  entirely  coA'ered 
over;  the  bill  begins  to  appear  betwixt  the  eyes,  and  the  wings,  the  thighs, 
and  the  legs,  have  acquired  their  perfect  figure.  Hitherto,  however,  the  anW 
mal  appears  as  if  it  had  two  bodies;  the  }olk  is  joined  to  it  by  the  umbilical 
vessel  that  comes  from  the  belly;  and  is  furnished  with  its  vessels,  through 
Avhich  the  blood  circulates,  as  through  the  rest  of  the  body  of  the  chicken,  mak- 
ing a  bulk  greater  than  that  of  the  animal  itself.  But  towards  the  end  of  i]> 
cubation,  the  umbilical  vessel  shortens  the  yolk,  and  M'ith  it  the  intestines  ar» 
thrust  up  into  the  body  of  the  chicken  by  the  action  of  the  muscles  of  the  bellj^ 
and  the  two  bodies  are  thus  formed  into  one.  During  this  slate  all  the  organs 
are  found  to  perform  their  secretions ;  the  bile  is  found  to  be  separated,  as  ia 
grown  animals ;  but  it  is  transparent,  and  without  bitterness;  the  chickeo 
then  also  appears  to  have  lungs.  On  the  tenth,  the  muscles  of  the  wings  apw 
pear,  and  the  feathers  begin  to  push  out.  On  the  eleventh,  the  heart  which 
hitherto  had  appeared  divided,  begins  to  unite,  the  arteries  which  belong  to  it, 
join  into  it,  like  the  fingers  into  the  palm  of  the  hand.  All  these  appearances 
come  more  into  view,  because  the  fluids  the  vessels  had  hitherto  secreted, 
were  more  transparent ;  but  as  the  color  of  the  fluids  deepen,  their  operations 
and  circulations  are  more  distinctly  seen.  As  the  animal  thus,  by  the  eleventh 
day,  completely  formed,  begins  to  gather  strength,  it  becomes  more  uneasy  ip 
its  situation,  and  exerts  its  animal  powers  with  increasing  force. 

For  some  time  before  it  is  able  to  break  the  shell  in  which  it  is  imprisoned^ 
it  is  heard  to  chirrup,  receiving  a  sufficient  quantity  of  air  for  this  furposOf 
from  that  cavity  which  lies  between  the  membrane  and  the  shell,  and  which 
must  contain  air  to  resist  the  external  pressure.  At  length,  upon  tiie  20tb 
day,  in  some  birds  sooner,  and  later  in  others,  the  enclosed  animal  breaks  th& 
shell  within  which  it  has  been  confined,  with  its  beak  ;  and  by  repeated  ef- 
forts, at  last  procures  its  enlargement. 

From  this  history  we  perceive  that  those  parts  which  are  most  conducive 
to  life,  are  the  first  that  are  begun  ;  the  head  and  the  backbone,  which  no 
doubt  enclose  the  brain  and  the  spinal  marrow,  thousli  botli  are  too  limpid  to 
be  discerned,  are  the  first  that  are  seen  to  exist ;  the  beating  of  the  heart  ia 
seen  soon  after ;  the  less  noble  parts  seem  to  spring  from  these,  the  wings,  the 
thighs,  the  feet,  and  lastly  the  bill.  The  resemblance  between  tlic  beginning- 
animal  in  the  egg,  and  the  embryo  in  the  womb,  is  very  striking.  An  eifSf 
may  be  considered  as  a  womb,  detached  from  tlie  body  of  the  parent  animal, 
in  which  the  embryo  is  but  just  beginning  to  be  formed.  It  may  be  regarded 
as  a  kind  of  incomplete  delivery.  The  similitude  between  the  ess  and  the 
embryo  in  the  womb  has  induced  many  to  assert  (and  with  great  probability) 
that  aU  animals  are  produced  from  eggs. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  17 

the  air*  by  its  expansion  and  buoyancy  acquired  from  the  inter- 
nal warmth,  seeks  its  equilibrium  by  rising  in  consequence  of 
the  heavy  external  pressure  upon  the  region  of  the  chest,  which 
ejects  it  from  the  lungs,  and  with  it  the  first  sound  of  the 
voice,  is  a  cry.  This  is  the  first  movement  of  the  machine  in 
producing  sound,  which  by  cultivation  is  made  to  e-xpress  every 
passion,  and  emotion,  and  want,  both  of  the  body  and  the  mind. 
A  judicious  practitioner  of  medicine,  is  the  proper  repairer  of 
this  machine.  To  keep  it  in  active  operation  until  it  wears  out 
in  old  age,  every  wheel  having  borne  its  proportion  of  labor. 
This  frail  bark  beincr  thrown  into  life,  and  he  that  modeled 


•  Respiration  is  the  scientific  name  of  the  process  of  breathing,  or  drawing 
air  into  the  lungs,  and  expelling  it  again.  A  full  grown  person,  who  respires 
20  times  in  a  minute,  inhales  each  time  40  cubic  inches  of  air,  which  is  48,000 
solid  inches  in  an  horn',  or  1,152,000  cubic  inches  in  a  day :  a  quantity  equal  to 
nearly  70  hogsheads. 

The  room  in  which  I  sit,  is  a  chamber  of  modern  size,  say  15  feet  square, 
and  74  high.  At  the  above  rate,  a  person  would  respire  once  over,  all  the  air  in  it, 
in  about  2^  days;  or  twelve  persons,  in  five  hours.  But  twelve  persons  can- 
not breathe  in  a  close  room  with  safety,  till  the  air  has  aU  been  breathed  once 
aver.  The  whole  becomes  in  a  degree  impure  from  mixture,  long  before.  Bo- 
Bides,  the  bad  air  is  heavier  than  other  air,  and  is  most  abundant  in  the  lower 
part  of  the  room. 

I  have  seen  many  a  school-room,  not  larger  than  this,  with  forty  children  in 
it.  If  shut  up  closely,  and  the  room  air  tight.  I  think  they  would  breathe  the 
whole  over,  as  high  as  their  heads,  in  about  forty  minutes.  It  happens,  how- 
ever, that  rooms — school-rooms  especially — are  not  thus  air  tight. 

Atmospheric  air  is  supposed  to  contain  21  parts  of  oxygen  to  79  parts  of 
nitrogen ;  and  in  proportion  as  either  of  these  principles  is  increased  or  dimin- 
ished, the  air  becomes  more  or  less  unfit  for  respiration.  Heat,  that  subtle 
agent  in  nature,  by  its  powers  of  penetration,  rarifies  the  air  witliin  its  influ- 
ence, so  as  to  cause  it  to  ascend,  and  the  cold  or  dense  air,  presses  in  to  sup- 
ply its  place.  So  there  is,  or  should  be,  a  perpetual  motion  in  this  elastic  fluid. 
But  when  it  is  confined,  in  a  tight  room,  continually  receiving  heat  from  a, 
stove,  furnace  or  fire-place,  and  rarified  hv  the  heat,  the  warm  or  light  aix 
cannot  make  its  escape,  neither  is  there  as  free  access  of  cool  or  fresh  air  by 
«-hich  the  body  may  be  continually  kept  pure.  After  a  room  has  been  thus 
enclosed  till  all  the  air  in  it  becomes  heated,  let  a  person  enter  it,  and  he  im- 
mediately experiences  symptoms  of  suflbcation ;  and  if  a  door  be  left  partly 
open,  he  may  observe  a  current  of  air  forcing  its  way  out  at  the  top  of  the 
door,  and  a  pouring  in  at  the  bottom.  It  is  the  rarified  air  that  passes  out  of 
the  room,  and  the  pure  cool  air,  that  seeks  admittance. 

One  reason  why  heated  air  gives  suffocating  feelings,  is  becair  c  the  oxygen 
Is  considerably  diminished,  therefore  we  inhale  too  freely  of  the  light  air,  coiv- 
taining  an  undue  proportion  of  nitrogen,  which  causes  an  unnatural  distention 
of  the  lungs,  closes  the  air  vessels,  and  liinders  the  free  circulation,  by  which 
means  respiration  soon  becomes  laborious  and  difficult. 

Great  precaution  is  necessary,  in  regard  to  airing  rooms  where  sick  people 
ate  confined.  The  effluvia,  arismg  from  the  sick-bed  render  the  atmosphere 
In  the  room  very  unwholesome,  both  for  the  sick  and  those  persons  in  attends 
ance.  Where  opportunity  affords,  such  rooms  should  be  frequently  ventilated. 
The  best  method  is,  to  drop  a  window  down  from  the  top,  when  they  are  ecu- 
8-tructed  so  that  it  can  be  done  conveniently,  and  the  putrid  air  passes  iff;  or 
when  it  has  become  very  much  impregnated  by  filth,  to  burn  vinegar  or  any 
regetable  acid  on  a  heated  metal  supplies  the  deficiency  or  oxygen,  and  de- 
stroys the  stench.  Pure,  wholesome,  fresh  air,  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to 
the  sick. 


18  THE    THOMBONIAN 

it  pronounced  it  "very  good,"  therefore,  he  does  not  design, 
that  we  should  take  away  any  part,  more  than  that  we  should 
add  t'>  it;  since  we  can  do  the  one  in  a  philosophical  point  of 
view,  as  well  as  the  other. 

The  physician  as  t!ie  repairer,  has  only  to  remove  the  clogs 
and  obstructions  that  retard  tlie  motion  of  the  Avholc  without 
removing  any  part  of  the  machinery.  For  if  you  take  away 
any  portion  of  the  complicated  works,  it  is  never  as  perfect  af- 
terwards; and  you  obstruct  to  a  certain  degree,  the  whole  work 
the  same  as  in  any  artificial  machine,  for  instance  a  clock  of 
steam-engine. 

The  cliild  if  healthy,  commences  and  continues  to  grow ; 
his  arms,  legs,  body  and  face,  are  plump  and  full ;  you  see  no 
indications  of  old  age,  such  as  wrnikles,  or  loss  of  flesh :  he 
comes  up  to  youth,  to  manhood,  or  the  meridian  of  life,  which 
is  from  25  to  35  years  of  age  ;  the  members  of  his  body  may 
now  be  said  to  have  acquired  their  full  vigor ;  and  it  may  be 
truly  said  of  the  man,  as  of  fruit,  he  is  ripe.  He  turns  tlie  point 
or  meridian  of  life  from  the  zenith,  and  begins  to  go  to  decay. 
You  will  hear  him  remark,  "  I  cannot  do  quite  as  much  as  I 
could  once  ;  my  food  does  not  appear  to  afford  me  that  substan- 
tial support  as  formerly;  my  rest  is  deficient ;  my  nerves  have, 
become  tremulous  ;  wrinkles  are  fast  gathering  in  my  face  and 
hands  ;  my  limbs  fall  away,"  and  why  is  all  this  decay  7  The 
man  does  not  know ;  he  says  "  I  am  growing  old  ;"  but  that 
does  not  answer  the  question.  The  fact  is,  the  first  part  that 
gives  away  is,  the  organs  of  digestion,  by  which  the  whole  fab- 
ric is  supported.  These  organs  have  first  become  blunted,  and 
are  not  capable  of  extracting  the  same  quantity  of  nourishment 
from  a  given  quantity  of  food  as  before  the  man  had  attained 
the  meridian  of  life,  or  before  the  fruit  became  ripe. 

Well,  under  this^state  of  things  something  must  be  done  to 
keep  up  vital  energy.  It  should  be  remembered  that  wlijle 
the  man  was  coming  to  maturity  he  was  laying  up  in  store 
strength  of  blood,  size  of  muscle  and  bone,  and  a  good  siore  of 
flesh — the  fuel  of  life.  If  his  appetite  and  digestion  should  fail, 
the  man  would  not  die  until  his  flesh  is  exhausted,  and  he  be-- 
comes  literally  a  wreck  of  skin  and  bones.  For  in  proportion 
as  the  organs  of  digestion  fail,  the  appetite  is  lost  and  the  taste 
vitiated  and  gone.  Nature  now  calls  upon  the  stock  or  supply 
of  flesh  and  blood,  already  in  store,  which  was  accumulated 
in  early  life  to  support  the  body  in  its  decline,  the  same  as  a 
man  who  is  ambitious  in  youth  to  lay  up  a  suflicient  compe^ 
tency  for  the  interest  to  support  him  ;  but  if  the  interest  fails  ici 
giving  him  n  good  and  sufficient  support  he  must  make  drafts 
upon  the  principal,  light  or  heavy  as  the  circumstances  of  tho 
case  may  require. 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  19 

It  is  precisely  the  same  with  the  human  system.  You  will 
perceive  an  old  gentleman  far  advanced  in  life,  if  he  has  not 
injured  his  constitution  in  his  younger  days  by  taking  medi- 
cine,or  lost  any  of  the  vigorous  properties  of  the  first  or  primi- 
tive stock  of  his  blood  by  taking  a  part  of  it  away  or  by  weak- 
ening the  same  by  injuring  the  digestion,  through  which  the 
blood  and  from  it  the_  body  receives  its  support,  by  animal  or 
vegetable  poisons,  he  will  run  gradually  down.  As  the  digest- 
ive powers  fail,  the  drafts  upon  the  substance  of  the  flesh  and 
blood  are  more  urgent  and  heavy,  and  it  is  not  unfrequent  that 
we  see  the  person  at  the  advanced  age  of  seventy,  eighty,  nine^ 
£y,  and  even  one  hundred  years,  while  apparently  in  his 
nsual  health,  die  sitting  in  his  chair,  in  the  field,  or  in 
(he  midst  of  his  avocation,  the  fuel  of  life  having  become  com- 
pletely exhausted,  or  the  lamp  of  life  being  drained  to  the  very 
bottom,  and  the  light  become  extinct  for  the  want  of  oil  ;  or 
nature  having  completely  exhausted  from  her  store  house  the 
means  necessary  to  sustain  life.  Such  a  constitution  we  con- 
sider has  been  under  the  supervision  of  a  judicious  engineer  or 
physician  if  you  please;  has  been  brought  to  maturity  by  pro^ 
per  management ;  has  nurtured  and  invigorated  a  robust  con* 
stitution,  and  by  prudent  manasfement  has  laid  aside  for  future 
use,  a  suitable  quantity  of  the  requisite  material  to  sustain  and 
prolong  life  after  the  person  has  passed  the  meridian  to  bus  last 
moment. 

Thus  you  will  perceive  the  Thomsonians,  by  understanding 
tlie  above  theory  and  practicing  upon  the  same  principles,  are 
treating  the  human  system  philosophically.  As  our  th.eorv  was 
formed  from  our  practice,  and  our  remedies  are  in  harmony 
with  life  ;  as  they  will  assist  nature  in  her  most  depressed  situ- 
ations, or  when  there  is  sufficient  left  to  build  upon,  and  the 
remedies  will  not  prove  detrimental  if  jriven  by  the  practitioner 
whose  juds^ment  has  been  matured  and  regulated  by  a  scale  es- 
tablished by  extensive  experience  and  observation  by  the  bed- 
side of  the  sick,  no  other  standard  can  so  readily  be  depended 
upon. 

How  applicable  to  the  Thomsonian  cause  are  the  remarks  of 
Sir  Gilbert  Blane,  Bart.*  who  after  fifty  years  service  in  the 
State  and  in  that  of  his  Majesty's  Persox  and  Family,  says : 
"If  the  benefits  derivable  to  medicine  from  physiological 
science,  are  so  limited,  from  what  other  and  better  source 
is  improvement  to  arise  ?  The  answer  is,  from  accurate  ob- 
servation;  in  other  words,  from  evliffhtened  ewpiricism.  It 
seems  an  abuse  of  words,  to  restrict  the  term  science  to  physi- 

•  Sir  Gilbert  Blank,  Bart.,  fellow  of  the  Royal  Societies  of  London,  Edin- 
burgh,  and  Gottingen;  member  of  the  Imperial  Academy  of  Science  of  St.  Pe- 
tersburgh ;  and  Phtsician  to  the  King. 


20  THE    THOMSONIAN 

ology  and  pathology,  and  to  withhold  it  from  those  processes  of 
the  understanding,  by  which  lacts  are  ascertained  and  accumu- 
lated, and  useful  inferences  deduced  from  them  constituting 
OBSERVATION.  Shall  we  dignify  with  the  title  of  science,  the 
absurd  positions  of  Pitcairn,  the  puerile  and  shallow  hypothesis 
of  Boerhaave,  and  Silvius.  and  deny  it  to  those  solid  and  ap- 
plicable trutiis,  the  fruits  of  chaste  observation  and  sober  experi- 
ence, ascertained  by  those  methods  of  induction  which  it  was 
the  great  aim  of  Bacon  to  recommend,  and  his  great  glory  to  in- 
troduce as  the  only  parent  of  legitimate,  substantial,  and  useful 
knowledge?  Oti  the  contrary,  the  tnit/i  seems  to  be,  that  a 
higher  order  of  intellect,  a  more  rare  and  happy  genius,  a 
more  correct  and  better  tutored  understanding,  is  required  to 
elicit  j)rac!ical  truths  by  observation,  than  to  invent  tlieories. 

By  empiricism,  is  vulgarly  understood  that  knowledg-e  of  the 
virtues  of  divers  medicines,  whicii  have  been  ascertained  by  ex- 
perience ;  as  applicable  to  their  respective  maladies. 

We  have  already  more  than  once  adverted  to  that  profound 
wisdom  displayed  in  the  constitution  of  our  mental  faculties, 
whereby  they  are  made  responsive  to  the  constitution  of  exter- 
nal nature,  in  the  same  manner  as  our  senses,  and  that  this  is 
strikingly  exemplified  by  the  susceptibility  of  the  human  mind 
to  those  associations  and  habits  which  arise  out  of  the  repetition 
of  events  durably  connected  together  by  the  constancy  of  the 
laws  of  nature.  Unless  these  were  indelibly  imprinted,  or  re- 
corded, as  it  were,  in  the  mind  during  the  early  stages  of  our 
existence,  life  could  not  be  maintained ;  all  those  instincts,  by 
which  we  pursue  what  is  salutary,  and  eschew  what  is  noxious 
and  dangerous,  being  founded  on  this  principle.  The  avoiding 
of  fire,  and  of  precipices,  the  collision  of  hard  and  pointed  bodies, 
may  be  quoted  as  examples  of  this.  And  what  is  called  saga- 
city, in  the  adult  stage  of  life  is  a  sort  of  approach  to,  or  imita,- 
tion  of  this  intuitive  faculty  ;  biu,  instead  of  being  the  immedi- 
diate  sug;o;eslion  of  nature,  is  acquired  by  cultivation,  so  that 
by  practice  we  learn  to  connect  cause  and  effect,  means  and 
end,  operations  which,  in  well  turned  minds,  are  performed 
with  promptitude  and  precision,  by  interpreting  fairly  the  ap^ 
pearance  of  nature,  and  stripping  them  of  those  adventitious 
fallacies,  which  mislead  ordinary  minds.  In  order  to  attain 
this  there  are  required  an  appropriate  natural  capacity,  the 
good  fortune  of  not  having  been  beset  ivith  prejudices  iii  early 
life,  and  habitual  exercise  in  the  observation  of  nature,  a  can- 
did and  ingenious  disposition,  an  ardent  love  of  truth,  an 
exalted  sense  of  duty,  a  large  store  of  facts  in  a  correct  and 
tenacious  memory,  the  poicer  of  combiuing,  cotnparing,  and 
discriminating  these,  by  an  intuitive  glance,  in  the  momeyit 
9f  0'Ppi!/^"a  them  to  the  practical  end  in  vieio.    This  is  what 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  21 

is  understood  by  the  term  tacijin  English  and  French.  From 
this  it  will  be  seen,  how  vain  all  acquired  knowledj^e  is  without 
practical  habits.  It  is  evident,  that,  as  the  action  of  life  must 
depend  on  the  compound  operation,  and  reciprocal  influence  of 
all  these  powers,  those  who  propose  to  found  practical  medicine 
on  their  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  life,  must  encounter  such 
difficulties  in  estimating  and  ascertaining  the  result  of  them,  as 
must  appal  the  boldest  theorist.  For,  as  in  an  algebraical  prob- 
lem, if  any  one  element  of  the  calculation  should  be  omitted, 
or  mis-stated,  the  result  must  be  erroneous ;  so  if  in  taking  our 
measures  in  medicine,  if  due  weight  is  not  assigned  to  each  of 
those  influences,  our  practical  inferences  must  bo  illusory. 
Ths  knou'ledge  of  nature^  in  all  its  branches,  is  an  i?idispen- 
sable  requisite  in  the  cultivation  of  the  mind.  There  is 
nothing  better  known  to  those,  who  are  conversant  in  medical 
practice  than  that  the  most  ignorant  and  shallow,  those  of  the 
least  learning,  nay  those  of  no  learning  at  all,  are  the  most  ad- 
dicted to  hypothetical  reasoning,  the  most  infected  with  pre- 
sumption and  self-conceit.  The  only  means,  therefore  of 
guarding  ourselves  from  being  misled  by  false  theories,  or  by 
the  misapplication  of  those  that  are  true,  is  to  gain  a  thorough 
acquaintance  with  both.  When  it  is  considered,  what  a  mass  of 
credulity  and  error  has  actually  accumulated  in  medicine  from 
the  presumptuous  attempt  to  grasp  at  such  objects,  and  to  make 
hasty  and  dangerous  application  of  them  to  practice ;  when  we 
cast  our  eyes  upon  our  shelves,  loaded  with  volumes,  few  of 
which  contain  any  genuine  profitable  knowledge,  the  greater 
part  of  them  composed  chiefly  of  matter,  either  migatory,  erro- 
neous, viapjAicable,  or  mischievous,  in  u'hich  the  dear  bought 
grain  is  to  besought  in  the  bushel  of  chaff,  m^ay  it  not  be 
questioned,  whether  such  researches  have  not  tendedj  more  to 
RETARD  and  CORRUPT,  than  to  advance  and  imqnove  practi- 
cal medicine.  The  study  of  riature  is  surely  the  most  salu- 
tary of  all  intellectual  exercises  iri  the  practical  arts,  partic- 
ularly that  of  medicine,  inasmuch  as  it  comprises  the  know- 
ledge of  the  mutual  agencies,  about  lohich  it  is  conversant. 

The  habitual  meditation onnatural  causes,  tends  to  banish 
superstition,  and  to  abolish  the  frivolous  practices  riveted  in 
ordinary  minds  by  early  impressions  and  imjwsing  author- 
ities, or  sanctified  by  immemorial  usage  and  tradition.  It  is 
very  remarkable,  that  theories  though  widely  diflerent  do 
often  wonderfully  coincide  in  matters  of  practice  with  each 
other  and  with  well  established  empirical  usages,  eacli  bending 
and  conforming  in  order  to  do  homage  to  truth  and  expe- 
rience.^^ 

Such  are  the  natural  qualifications,  says  the  learned  Doct. 
Blane,  to  constitute  a  judicious,  and  successful  practitioner  of 


22  THE    THOMSONIAN 

medicine.  If  Doct.  B.  had  been  inspired  to  have  given  a  de- 
scription of  Samuel  Tliomson,  his  early  impressions,  education, 
natural  abilities,  turn  of  mind,  promptitude  and  decision  of 
character,  his  ability  to  treasure  up  useful  knowledge  in  medicine, 
and  accumulate  facts,  the  power  of  comparing,  combining  and 
discriminating  at  a  glance,  at  the  moment,  in  the  time  of  distress, 
he  could  not  have  entered  more  completely  into  every  minutiae 
and  have  given  a  more  perfect  picture.  VVe  are  led  to  exclaim 
with  the  poet  "  see  thyself  reflected  herer  If  such  is  the  opinion 
of  a  '■'•giant  in  medicine,''  in  relation  to  empiricism,  or  Thom- 
sonis'm  if  you  please,  why  should  Thomson  regard  the  thou- 
sands of  pigmies  in  intellect  which  are  flooding  the  country  like 
the  locust  of  Egypt,  or  like  an  overgrown  incubus  settled  upon 
the  peace,  prosperiti/  and  happiness  of  the  community,  and 
are  described  by  Doct.  Blane  as  follows  :  "  There  is  nothing 
better  known  to  those  v/ho  are  conversant  in  medical  practice, 
than  that  the  most  ignorant  and  shallow,  those  of  the  least 
learning,  nay,  those  of  no  learning  at  all,  are  the  most  addicted 
to  hypothetical  reasoning,  the  most  infected  with  presumption 
and  self-conceit."  Who  will  presume  that  the  Doctor  had  no 
correct  knowledge  of  these  facts  vSies  fjly  years  of  experience 
in  the  army,  navy  and  royal  family  of  Great  Britain  ? 

The  presumptive  evidence  is  then  that  the  Thomsonians 
have  the  right  track.  Therefore,  as  in  nautical  phrase,  after 
having  run  by  dead  reckoning,  guided  only  by  philosophy  and 
reason,  for  near  fifty  years,  we  are  happy  to  find  on  comparing 
notes  with  so  experienced  a  seaman,  that  our  calculations  agree. 
The  latitude,  longitude,  bearing,  and  distances  of  the  breakers 
and  quicksands,  place  us  both  upon  the  same  and  safe  ground. 

Thus  it  is  truly  cheering  to  the  weary  mariner,  who,  after 
having  been  beat  about  by  storms  and  tempests  upon  the  track- 
less ocean  without  a  guiding  star  from  heaven,  after  the  toils, 
dangers  and  doubts  that  iiarrass  his  mind  haA^e  passed,  to  find 
on  the  first  glimpse  of  light  from  the  firmament,  that  his  calcu- 
lations are  correct,  and  will  compare  with  the  most  experienced 
seamen.  He  can  pursue  his  usual  course  with  renewed  confi- 
dence that  ultimately  he  will  be  crowned  with  success  at  the 
conclusion  of  the  voyage.  J.  T. 


METERIA    MEDICA.  23 


ON  VITALITY  OR  ANIMATION. 

"  Soul*  of  surrounding  worlds  ! 
AVithout  whose  quickening  glance,  this  cumbrous  earth 
Would  be  a  lifeless  mass,  inert  and  dead, 
And  not,  as  now,  the  green  abode  of  life." 

The  subject  of  animation  is  not  merely  curious,  but  leads 
to  usefulness.  It  has  arrested  the  attention  of  philosophers  in 
almost  every  age  of  the  world.  Some  of  the  ancients  reasoned 
thus  on  it :  Matter  of  itself  cannot  move,  yet  it  is  evident  all 
things  change,  and  that  nothing  is  lost;  the  sum  total  of  mat- 
ter in  tlie  Universe  remains  perfectly  the  same  ;  and  as  it  was 
the  work  of  0^I^7IP0TENCE  to  create  something  out  of  nothing, 
the  same  Omnipotence  is  required  to  reduce  any  thing  back  to 
nothing.  It  is  apparent  that  there  is  an  universal  change,  or 
mutation  of  all  things  into  all,  then  must  there  be  some  one 
primary  matter,  common  to  all  things  out  of  which  they  were 
made — They  went  still  further,  and  enquired  into  the  moving 
principle^  the  efficient  cause,  that  is  to  say,  that  cause,  which 
associates,  the  elements  of  natural  substances,  and  which  em- 
ploys them  v/hen  associated,  according  to  their  varions  and 
peculiar  characters.  This  moving  principle  they  called  the 
Anima.  3'Iimdi,  the  SrAil  of  the  World. 

Thales,  one  of  the  seven  wise  men  of  Greece,  maintained, 
that  Water  was  the  subtle  principle  that  moved  all  things.  He 
concluded  that  matter  was  chiefly  dealt  out  in  moisture  ;  that 
the  seeds  of  plants  so  long  as  they  are  in  a  grov\nng  state,  are 
moist;  and  that  a  vegetable  will  grow  to  a  considerable  size 
from  v/ater  alone  ;  that  the  earth  is  refreshed,  recruited,  and 
made  fruitful  by  water  : — that  the  air  itself  is  but  an  expansion, 
or  expiration  of  water.  He  reminds  us  of  the  immense  quanti- 
ties in  the  subterraneous  reigns,  v.'hence  fountains,  and  river?, 
like  so  many  veins  in  the  body,  convey  water  over  the  sur- 
face, and  through  the  bowels  of  our  globe,  to  vivify  and  sustain 
the  whole. 

Heraclitus  maintained  a  very  different  doctrine.  He 
taught  that  ^re  was  the  vivifying  principle  of  all  things.  He 
allowed  the  truth  of  Thale's  doctrine,  but  observed  that  j?re  had 
such  an  universal  sway  in  nature,  that  water  itself  v/r.s  not  with- 
out a  mixture  of  it ;  for  that  water  grows  hard  and  congeals 
into  ice  whsn  fire  leaves  it,  and  is  only  restored  to  its  fluidity 
by  entering  it  again.  He  remarked  that  the  whole  mass  of  wa/- 
ters  in  the  sea,  was  actually  an  ocean  of  fire,  seeing  there  were 
not  two  distinct  drops  of  water,  which  do  not  owe  their  fluidity 

•  The  sun. 


24  THE    THOMSONIAN 

to  some  portion  of  fire  enclosed  within  them.  So  deeply  root- 
ed was  the  doctrine  that  fire  was  the  first  or  animating  principle, 
that  there  were,  and  still  are,  whole  nations  who  worship  it  as 
a  deity.* 

An'aximenes  contradicted  both  these  philosophers  ;  and  con- 
tended that  Air  was  the  vivifying  principle  and  first  mover  of 
all  things.  He  observed  that  ahhouCTh  the  water  of  Tliales 
could  not  subsist  without  the  fire  of  HeraclUits,  yet  fire  itself 
could  not  exist  without  Air.  which  was  the  very  spirit  of  flame, 
and  the  breath  of  life  :  that  no  seed  of  vegetables,  eggs  of  ani- 
mals, be  they  ever  so  ripe,  or  pregnant,  and  cherished  with  ever 
so  kindly  a  warmth,  will  ever  bring  forth  the  embryos  contain- 
ed in  them,  if  they  be  totally  deprived  cf  air.  We  shall  see 
hereafter  the  necessity  of  attending  to  these  powerfiil  agents, 
Jire  and  air,  in  the  resuscitation  of  those  apparently  dead  by 
suspension,  submersion,  or  frost. 

Let  us  now  examine  the  subject  of  animation  with  the  light 
afforded  us  by  more  modern  Philosophers. 

From  them  we  learn  that  matter  is  inert ;  that  any  one  par- 
ticle of  matter  left  to  itself  will  continue  always  in  the  same 
state,  with  regard  to  its  motion  or  rest.  There  are,  however, 
certain  powers,  which  tico  particles  of  matter  have  of  acting  on 
one  another,  as  in  gravitation  and  cohesion.  We  learn  also 
that  there  is  an  attraction  of  cri/staUizatio7i,  by  which  bodies 
when  fluid  become  in  time  solid,  and  assume  a  particular  figure ; 
that  there  is  an  attraction  of  magnetism,  by  which  a  piece  of 
iron  in  certain  circumstances,  attracts  another  piece  of  iron  ; 
that  there  is  an  attraction  of  electricity,  by  which  a  substance 
charged  with  more  electric  matter  flies  to  another  charged  with 
less.  There  is  moreover,  chemical  attraction,  by  which  tvi"o 
particles  of  diflerent  bodies  rush  together,  and  form  one.  If  we 
add  that  most  of  these  have  their  opposite  repulsions,  we  can 
say  that  they  are  all  the  known  properties  of  mere  matter ;  and 
there  is  nothing  in  them  that  can  merit  the  name  oi  vitality. 

But  there  is  in  a  growing  vegetable  a  power  beyond  all  this, 
viz  :  a  power  which  ^r.?/  moves,  and  then  conducts  that  latent 
process  by  which  a  seed  becomes  a  plant. 

Now,  every  body  capable  of  growing,  has  a  certain  internal 

•That  venerable  sect  of  Philosophers,  the  Stoics,  taus^ht  that  there  was  one 
Infinite,  eternal,  almighty  mind,  which,  diffused  throuijh  the  whole  universe 
of  well  ordered  and  regularly  disposed  matter,  actuates  every  part  of  it,  and 
is  as  it  were  the  soul  of"  this  vast  body.  The  parts  of  this  body  they  say,  are 
of  two  sorts,  viz.  the  Celestial,  as  the  planets  and  fixed  stars  :  and  the  Terres- 
trial, as  the  earth,  and  all  the  other  elements  about  it.  The  celestial  continue 
without  change,  or  variation.  But  the  whole  sublunary  world,  is  not  only  lia- 
ble to  dissolution,  but  often  hath  been,  and  shall  again  be  dissolved  by  fire; 
and  that  the  reciprocal  deaths,  dissolutions  and  digestions,  which  support  by 
turns  all  the  substances  which  we  see,  are  the  efi'ects  oCfire. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  25 

adjustment,  disposition,  or  arrangement  of  its  matter,  which  is 
called  organization  ;  and  being  capable  of  increasing  in  bulk, 
has  a  certain  degree  oivitality.  There  is  a  scale  of  life,  stretch- 
ino"  in  uniform  gradation  from  human  excellence  downwards, 
tilf  it  disappearsin  a  shade  of  ambiguity,  in  the  living  state  of 
vegetables.  Life,  says  the  Bishop  of  Landaff,  belongs  alike 
to  both  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdom ;  and  seems  to  depend 
on  the  same  principle  in  both.  Stop  the  motion  of  a  fluid  in  an 
animal  limb,  by  a  strong  ligature,  the  limb  mortifies  beyond  the 
ligature  and  drops  off;  a  branch  of  a  tree,  under  like  circum- 
stances, grows  dry  and  rots  away.  Both  animals  and  vegeta- 
bles are  subject  to  be  frost  bitten  and  to  consequent  mortifica- 
tions ;  both  experience  extravasation  of  juices  from  repletion, 
and  pinings  from  inanition  ;  both  can  suffer  amputation  of 
limbs  without  being  deprived  of  life,  and  in  a  similar  manner 
both  from  a  callus  ;  both  are  liable  to  contract  disease  by  infec- 
tion ;  both  are  strengthened  by  air  and  motion. 

Every  seed  of  a  plant  is  an  organized  body  endowed  with 
vessels,  and  contains  under  several  membranes  the  plant  in 
miniature.  If  this  seed  be  put  into  the  moist  earth  and  a  cer- 
tain degree  oi  heat  applied,  with  access  of  air,  the  three  princi- 
ples of  the  ancient  Philosophers,  the  juice  in  these  vessels  will 
expand  by  the  warmth  ;  and  being  thus  once  put  in  motion 
gradually  increase,  and  grow  up  into  a  plant;  which  plant  pro- 
duces a  similar  seed  capable  of  propagating  its  kind  forever. 

In  like  manner,  an  e^g  is  an  organized  body,  which  contains 
under  several  envelopements  the  chicken  in  miniature  ;  and 
may  be  considered  as  a  womb,  detached  from  the  body  of  the 
parent  animal,  in  which  the  embryo  is  just  beginning  to  be 
formed  ;  if  warmed  to  a  certain  degree,  whether  by  the  parent 
animal,  or  by  art,  the  fluids  which  surround  that  speck  in  the 
egg  called  the  punctuin  vitcc,  expand,  and  the  little  vessels 
swell  and  extend  themselves ;  and  the  motion  or  oscillation 
once  began,  it  develops,  by  degrees,  until  it  becomes  a  perfect 
animal,  capable  of  all  the  fimctions  common  to  its  kind. 

The  seed  of  the  vegetable,  and  the  egg  of  the  animal  would 
remain,  or  rather  become  effete  and  inanimate,  unless  some 
stimulus,  some  agent  from,  without^  excited  or  began  a  motion 
in  them.  But  what  is  this  agent,  or  stimulus?  For  that  is  the 
question. 

This  stimulus,  or  animating  principle  in  a  natural  body,  does 
not  depend  on  its  organization,  nor  its  figure,  nor  any  of  those 
inferior  forms,  which  make  up  the  system  of  its  visible  qualities ; 
but  it  is  the  power,  "  which  not  being  that  organization,  nor 
that  figure,  nor  those  qualities,  is  yet  able  to  produce,  to  pre- 
serve, and  to  employ  tbem.     It  is  therefore  the  -power,  which 

3 


26  THE    THOMSONIAN 

departing;,  the  body  ceases  to  live,  and  the  members  soon  pass 
into  putrefaction  and  decay."* 

From  an  attentive  observation  of  animated  nature,  we  dis- 
cover that  life  is  caused,  and  continued  by  something  which 
acts  from  without ;  and  this  somethin«;  is,  as  lar  as  we  can  dis- 
cover, heat^  acting  on  the  seed  or  egg.  I  say  heat^  according 
to  the  common  acceptation  of  the  term:  but  to  speak  more  phi- 
losophically, it  is  that  subtle  electric  fluid,  which  Jills  the  iin- 
mejise  space  of  the  whole  universe,  pervades  all  bodies,  and 
actuates  every  particle  of  matter.  Heat  is  only  one  eti'ect  of 
its  motion. 

In  whatever  manner  a  susceptible,  or  irritable  body  is  ope- 
rated upon  by  this  exciting  power,  a  certain  quantity  of  it,  or  a 
certain  energy,  is  assigned  and  belongs  to  every  individual  sys- 
tem upon  the  commencement  of  its  living  state. 

Now  a  living  animal  lias,  besides  those  attributes  common  to 
all  bodies,  as  solidity,  extension  and  gravity,  a  peculiar  some- 
thing, which  distinguishes  it  from  a  dead  one  ;  for  a  muscular 
fibre  will  contract,  and  that  not  by  the  power  of  gravitation,  co- 
hesion, crystaUization,  magnetism,  or  chemical  attraction. 

That  state  of  an  animal  fibre,  in  which  a  contraction,  or  os- 
cillation, is  produced  by  the  influx  or  contact  of  a  stimulus,  is 
called  irritability,  or  snsceptibiliiy,  and  excitability. 

That  principle  in  animals,  on  which  sensation,  motion,  and 
all  the  animal  powers  depend,  is  called  the  Vis  Vitalls. 

By  the  action  of  stimuli  on  the  solids,  particularly  heat,  the 
vis  vitalis  is  excited  and  preserved  ;  when  diminished  it  may 
be  increased,  and  when  suspeiided  it  onay  be  restored. 

Within  every  one  of  us,  there  is  an  innate  and  active  poiver, 
which  ceases  not  its  work,  when  sense  and  appetite  are  asleep; 
which  without  any  conscious  co-ojieration  of  the  man  himself, 
carries  him  from  a  seed  or  embryo,  to  his  destined  magnitude. 
This  is  strictly  speaking  the  Animal  (Economy,  and  is  as  per- 
fect in  the  brutal  Hottentot,  as  in  the  brightest  genius  of  human 
kind. 

All  this  depends  on  a  principle  which  some  call  the  Vis 
Actuosa,  others  the  Impetxcni  Fociens.  This  power  is  innate. 
and  is  that  by  which  man  lives  :  it  forms  him,  it  nourishes  him, 
moves  him,  animates  him.  By  it  he  feels,  he  desires,  refuses, 
sleeps  and  wakes  ;  nevertheless,  it  is  totally  different  from  the 
Mind ;     For, 

In  our  bodies  is  found  something  of  quite  a  different  nature 
from  what  has  been  mentioned  ;  a  power  of  thinking,  reflect- 
ing, comparing,  choosing,  and  representing  to  itself  past,  pre- 
sent and  to  come.  This  power  in  relation  to  its  several  opera- 
tions, is  termed  comprehension,  understanding,  reason,  mind, 

•  See  page  14. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  27 

will,  freedom,  or  collectively,  by  the  single  word  Soul.  But 
to  return  to  the  innate  principle  of  animation  in  man. 

Every  body  knows  that  although  the  child  is  formed,  and 
lives,  and  grows,  and  moves  in  the  womb  of  its  mother,  it  never 
breathes  there.  It  receives  its  animating  principle,  its  heat, 
motion  and  life,  from  the  mother,  by  a  nerve  and  artery,  which 
enters  at  its  navel  and  conveys  the  blood  to  the  heart  of  the  in- 
fant, without  ever  passing  through  the  lungs.  The  blood  in 
this  case  goes  directly  on  through  the  body  of  the  heart,  by  an 
opening  called  the  Foramen  Ovale,  and  from  thence  to  the 
Aorta,  or  great  artery,  by  which  it  is  driven  to  every  part  of 
its  body  ;  so  that  the  circulation,  nutrition  and  life,  are  kept  up 
with  the  motlier,  as  if  they  were  not  t\ro  bodies  but  one.  It  is 
remarkable  that  the  fruit  of  vegetables  is,  in  like  manner,  nour- 
ished, and  supported  by  a  slender  stalk  issuing  from  the  parent 
stock. 

When  the  child  is  born  it  becomes  dependent  on  a  neio  prin- 
ciple for  the  continuance  of  its  existence.  When  it  passes  from 
the  watery  habitation  into  the  atmosphere,  a  new  determination 
takes  place ;  and  instead  of  the  umbilical  cord  from  the  mother, 
the  common  air  becomes  the  main-nprijig  of  all  its  actions  and 
functions.  When  the  child  opens  its  mouih  to  cry,  in  rushes 
the  air,*  and  expands  the  lungs.  The  blood,  which  had  hitherto 
passed  through  the  heart,  now  takes  a  wider  circuit,  and  the 
foramen  ovale  closes  forever.  The  lungs  which  had,  till  this 
time,  been  inactive,  now  first  begin  their  functions,  and  they 
cease  not  their  motion  as  long  as  life  continues. 

Hence  then  it  appears  that  next  to  the  expanding  power  of 
heat,  Respiration,  or  breathing  is  the  privium  mobile  in  the 
human  machine. 

Atmospheric. air  contains  a  certain  vivifying  spirit,  Vfhich.  is 
necessary  to  continue  the  lives  of  animals,  and  this,  in  a  gallon 
of  air,  is  said  to  be  sufficient  for  one  man  during  the  space  of  a 
minute,  and  not  much  longer.  Air  that  has  lost  its  vivifying 
spirit,  deadens  fire,  extinguishes  flame,  and  destroys  life. 

It  is  well  known  that  there  is  a  set  of  vessels  in  the  lunges 
which  contain  air,  and  another  which  contain  blood. 

The  air  in  the  lungs  is  in  constant  motion  ;  for  either  that 
which  is  at  present  contained  in  the  cells,  is  passing  through 
the  wind-pipe  into  the  atmosphere;  ora  fresh  parcel  is  passing 
from  the  external  atmosphere  throuo-h  the  windpipe  into  those 
cells.    The  whole  of  this  compound  motion  is  called  respiration. 

If  the  air  continue  at  rest  in  the  lungs  for  many  minutes  ;  or 
if  a  man  continue  to  respire  the  same  air  ;  or  if  he  breathe  air 
that  has  served  for  the  inflammation  of  fuel ;  or  pure  fixable 
air,  or  any  other  vapour,  excepting  respirable  air,  he  dies. 

•  See  page  14,  atmospheric  pressure. 


28  THE    THOMSONIAN 

From  the  organs  of  respiration  ;  or  rather  from  what  may  be 
called  the  systema  spirituale  jineiimoniciim^  all  the  actions  of 
the  body,  and  all  the  power  which  it  exerts  are  ultiniutely  de- 
rived. 

It  appears  from  a  train  of  experiments,  that  the  common  air 
communicates  a  vivifyinj^  something  to  the  blood,  when  drawn 
into  the  lungs,  and  gives  to  it  a  stimulating  quality,  by  which 
it  is  fitted  to  excite  the  heart  to  action  ;  and  that  the  chemical 
quality,  which  the  blood  acquires  in  i)assing  through  the  lungs, 
is  necessary  to  keep  up  the  action  of  the  heart,  and  consequent- 
ly the  health  of  the  animal.  For  no  sooner  are  the  lungs  qui- 
escent than  the  heart  ceases  to  contract,  the  blood  stops,  all  the 
intellectual  operations  cease,  sensation  and  voluntary  motion 
are  suspended,  and  all  external  signs  of  life  disappear.  All 
which  are  admirably  explained  by  Dr.  Edmund  Goodwin. 

When  the  fluids  in  the  human  machine  are  thus  at  rest,  what 
do  we  see?  A  mere  carcase — we  see  the  person  dead.*  But 
after  what  manner?  Hero  are  all  the  solids,  and  all  tlie  fluids 
too.  What  then  is  lacking  ?  A  gentle  oscillation,  or  motion  of 
the  fluids,  a  circumgyration  of  the  liquors  ;  for  let  there  be  by 
what  means  soever  an  oscillation,  a  concussion,  or  excitement 
of  the  nervous  enerjjy,  which  may  impel  the  fluids  to  move  the 
lungs  and  heart,  life  immediately  returns,  with  the  usual  circu- 
lation of  the  blood  and  other  fluids,  heat,  colour,  agility,  cogita- 
tion, and  every  vital,  natural,  and  human  action. 

If  it  be  asked,  roJiat  is  that  vivifying  something  which, 
through  the  medium  of  the  atmosphere,  gives  this  oscillation 
or  concussion,  and  continues  life  ? 

I  answer  ;  it  is  a  portion  of  tJiat  suhtile  electric  fluid,  which 
fills  the  immense  space  of  tlie  wliole  universe,  'pervades  all  bo- 
dies, and  actuates  every  parti  ch  of  matter.  By  it  the  j)heno- 
mena  of  'magnetism,  fire,  and  light  are  produced  ;  and  on  it 
the  various  and  astonishing  phenomena  0/ Vegetation  and 
Animation  depend.  If  it  be  asked  further,  what  and  where 
is  the  source  of  this  all  powerful  agent  ?  I  answer,  the  Sun  is 
the  efficient  cause  of  the  motions  of  this  fluid,  and  the  various 
j)henomena  of  our  system  are  the  effects  of  these  ^notions. 

I  am  aware  that  analogical  arguments  are  probable,  but  not 
conclusive ;  and  that  plausible  inferences  from  well  known 
facts  in  brutes,  have  occasioned  many  errors  respecting  man. 
Yet  I  cannot  but  believe  from  what  we  observe  in  the  resuscita- 


*  There  are  several  instances  of  people  buried  alive,  even  in  this  country. 

Oh  reader  !  But  that  I  am  forbid 

To  tell  the  secrets  oi  the  prison-house, "| 
I  could  a  tale  unfold,  whose  lightest  word 
Would  harrow  up  th}'  soul,  freeze  thy  young  blood, 
Make  thy  two  eyes,  like  stars,  start  from  their  spheres. 
X  The  Grave. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  29 

tion  of  swallows,  after  lyine:  four  months  in  the  bottom  of  a 
pond;  of  snakes  frozen  stiff  as  a  stick;  of  flies  corked  up  in  a 
bottle  of  Madeira  in  Virginia,  and  brought  to  life  again  in  Great 
Britain  ;  I  say,  I  cannot  help  believing  from  these  and  similar 
facts,  tliat  it  is  possible  to  restore  to  life  a  human  being  who  has 
been  frozen  some  days.  We  have  well  authenticated  accounts 
of  not  only  birds  frozen  to  death  (as  it  is  called)  but  of  the  hu- 
man species  too,  who  were  even  for  days,  without  pulse,  breath- 
ing, or  the  least  natural  heat,  and  yet  resuscitated.* 

In  this  case,  the  application  of  heat  should  be  conducted,  says 
Dr.  Goodxcin,  on  the  same  plan,  which  nature  points  out  for 
the  hybernating,  or  torpid  animal ;  that  is  to  say  ;  it  should  be 
applied  gradually  and  uniformly.  It  may  be  raised  to  98  de- 
grees of  Farenheit,  but  not  above  100.  To  blow  one's  own 
breath  into  the  lungs  of  another,  is  an  absurd  and  pernicious 
practice. 

The  consideration  of  the  facts  just  related,  have  led  some  to 
conceptions  of  the  *Som7,  which  have  puzzled  them,  and  created 
doubts  rather  unfavourable  to  the  opinions  entertained  by  the 
majority  of  christians.  '•  What  is  the  condition,  say  they,  of  the 
soul  all  this  time." — In  animal  bodies  there  are  only  two  gener- 
al conditions,  life  and  death ;  and  if  by  death  we  understand 
the  privation  of  life,  there  can  be  no  intermediate  state  between 
them,  says  Dr  Goodwin ;  for  no  human  art  can  communicate 
life  to  dead  matter.  Dr.  Whytte  thinks  it  is  not  only  probable, 
but  even  demonstrable,  that  the  soul  does  not  immediately  leave 
the  body  upon  a  total  stoppaoe  of  the  heart's  motion,  and  of  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  that  is,  upon  what  we  usually  call 
deaths  but  that  it  continues  for  some  time  at  least  present  with 
it,  and  ready  to  actuate  it.  He  thinks,  with  Gassendi,  Dr.  H. 
More,  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  Dr.  S.  Clarke,  and  some  other  of  the 
greatest  philosophers  of  the  last  and  present  age,  that  the  soul 
is  extended. 

The  apparently  dead  carcase,  therefore,  which  has  lain  three 
or  four  hours  under  water,  is  as  much  alive  as  a  sound  hen's 
es,g  ;  they  v/ould  both  putrify  and  dissolve  if  let  alone  ;  but  ap- 
ply a  due  and  uniform  degree  oiheat  to  either,  and  you  change 
the  seemingly  dead  body  into  a  live  and  active  animal. 

The  union  of  soul  with  body,  is  the  most  abstruse  contempla- 
tion that  can  exercise  the  mind  of  man.  "How  is  it  that  one 
painful  idea  alter  the  course  of  the  blood!  Who  can  explain 
how  the  blood  in  return,  carries,  its  irregularities  to  the  mind  ! 
What  incomprehensible  mechanism  has  subjected  the  organs  to 
sentiment  and  thought !  What,  says  Voltaire,  is  that  unknown 
Jiuid,  which  is  quicker  and  more  active  that  light,  and  flies  in 

•  See  the  writings  of  Rcdi  and  Whytte.  The  Flora  Siberica.  Also  Payer 
Knatom. 


30 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  through  all  the  channels  of  life  ;  pro- 
duces memory,  sorrow  or  joy,  reason  or  frenzy,  recalls  with  hor- 
ror what  one  would  wish  to  forget,  and  makes  of  a  thinking  be- 
ing, an  object  of  admiration,  or  a  subject  of  pity  and  tears  !" 

The  intellectual  scheme,  says  the  autlior  of  Hermes.,  which 
never  forgets  Deity,  postpones  every  thing  corporeal  to  the 
PRIMARY  MENTAL  CAUSE.  It  is  here  it  looks  tor  the  origin  of 
intelligible  ideas,  even  of  those,  which  exist  in  human  capaci- 
ties. For  though  sensible  objects  may  be  the  destined  medium, 
to  awaken  the  dormant  energies  of  man's  undprstanding,  yet 
are  those  energies  tliemselves,  no  more  contained  in  sense,  than 
the  explosion  of  a  cannon  in  the  spark  which  gave  it  fire. 

This  then,  like  all  other  sound  philosophy,  leads  us  at  lasf, 

Dp  to  the  GREAT  FIRST  CAUSE,   the   ENS   ENTIUM,  the  SUPREME 

AUTHOR  OF  ALL,  who  is  evcr  to  be  adored  with  the  most  pro- 
found reverence  by  the  reasonable  part  of  this  creation.* 


BOTANY: 

OR,  VEGETABLE  MATTER  AND  ORGANIZATION. 

-"  Who,  ere  the  morn  of  time, 


On  wings  outstretch'd,  o'er  Chaos  liung  sublime; 
Warm'd  into  life  the  bursting  Egg  of  Night, 
And  gave  young  Nature  to  admiring  Light. 

We  shall  now  present  our  readers  with  a  concise  History  of 
Botany  from  the  earliest  ages,  until  this  Science  came  finished 
from  the  hands  of  our  great  master  LinuEeus. 

*  It  would  seem  that  the  Parent  of  Universal  Nature  has  ordained,  that  to  a 
certain  degree  of  exquisite  organization  tlie  soul  should  adhere;  for  between 
organization  and  function  there  exists  a  coi\nexion  proportioned  and  insepara- 
ble. When  that  subtile  organiziiticn  is  ruined,  the  soul  flies  back  again,  like 
quenched  fire,  to  the  source  whence  it  came.  If  so,  then  are  not  our  bodies 
vessels,  immersed  in  the  vivifj'ing  spirit,  the  "  anima  mundi?"  If  the  mate- 
rials, which  compose  these  vessels  be  arranged  after  a  certain  manner,  life,  or 
the  spirit  adheres  to  us.  If  the  vessel  is  cracked,  to  a  certain  degree,  it  can  hold 
no  water.  If  the  body  be  to  a  certain  degree  marred,  it  can  hold  no  lif'e.  If 
the  deranged  organization  banish  life,  for  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes,  as  in  per- 
sons who  have  lain  that  time  under  water;  and  if,  bv  communication  of  warmth, 
and  agitation  of  the  lungs,  and  of  the  heart,  life  should  be  restored,  what  shall 
we  say  then?  where?  and  in  what  state  was  the  soul,  or  immortal  part?  We 
can  only  say,  that  being  still  immersed  in  the  anima  mundi,  the  body  is  ren- 
dered, Ijy  the  means  used,  capable  of  imbibing  again  the  needful  portion  of  that 
spirit  in  whicli  "  we  live,  move,  and  have  our  being."  I  say,  imbibing  again; 
{oT  in  the  heg'inmng '' He  breathed  info  man  the  breath  of  life,  and  the  conse- 
quence was,  "  he  became  a  living  soul." 

We  are  confident  that  there  is  something  in  us  that  can  be  without  us,  and 
•will  be  after  us ;  what  it  was  before  us  we  know  not ;  nor  can  we  tell  how  it 
entered  us. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  31 

BoTavT]  in  the  Greek  language  means  an  herb,  whence  is  de- 
rived botany,  which  at  this  day  signifies  the  science  relating  to 
vegetables,  for  which  the  ancients  had  no  name;  as  it  was  not 
in  their  days  erected  into  a  regular  science. 

Although  botany,  as  a  science,  may  appear  to  some  a  study 
too  dull  for  an  exalted  and  refined  genius;  yet  if  we  cast  our 
eyes  back  on  the  earlier  ages,  and  trace  this  branch  of  knowl- 
edge down  to  our  own  times,  we  shall  find  that  it  has  been  cul- 
tivated by  those  of  the  brightest  parts,  and  fostered  by  men  of 
great  distinction.  We  need  only  mention  him  who  is  called  by 
way  of  pre-eminence  "^Ae  ivise  many  Though  born  to  a 
throne  and  destined  to  rule  over  a  powerful  people,  yet  was 
Solomon  so  captivated  with  the  charms  of  botany,  that  he  is 
said  in  the  scriptures  to  have  known  plants  ^^from  the  cedar 
of  Lebanon  to  the  hyssop  that  spriiigeth  out  of  the  ivallf 
and  we  find  in  his  ''book  of  wisdom,"  that  he  not  only  ^^knew 
the  diversities  of  plants,  but  the  virtues  of  their  roots.^' 

Solomon  flourished  about  170  years  after  the  siege  of  Troy, 
or  in  the  year  of  the  world  2129,  and  is  said  to  be  the  first  bo- 
tanist on  our  records  of  mankind.  But  on  examining  the  old- 
est book  we  have,  the  Bible,  we  find  an  account  of  a  plan  for 
establishing  a  Botanical  Garden  as  early  a  899  years  before 
Christ.  The  account  of  it  is  contained  in  less  than  three  ver- 
ses in  the  first  book  of  Kings; — jbid  it  came  to  pas5,  after 
these  things,  that  Naboth,  the  Jezreelite,  had  a  vineyard, 
which  loas  in  Jezreel,  hard,  by  the  palace  of  Ahab,  king  of 
Samaria.  ^«c^  Ahab  spake  unto  Naboth,  saying,  Give  me 
thy  vineyard  that  1  m,ay  have  it  for  a  garden  of  herbs, 
because  it  is  near  to  my  house.  And  Naboth  said  to  Ahab, 
God  forbid !  But  in  order  to  force  it  from  him,  they  set  two 
sons  of  Belial  to  bear  soilness  against  him,  saying,  Thou 
didst  blaspheme  God  and  the  king :  and  they  stoned  hiin  so 
that  he  died.  But  divine  justice,  which  forever  pursues  dis- 
honorable and  base  deeds,  avenged  the  cause  of  persecuted  Na- 
both ;  for  the  dogs  in  the  streets  licked  up  the  blood  of  the  two 
principal  contrivers  of  this  plot. 

We  find  no  mention  of  a  botanist,  from  the  glorious  Solo- 
mon down  to  the  venerable  father  of  medicine,  Hippocrates. 
He  gives  us  the  names  and  virtues  of  two  hundred  and  thirty- 
four  plants,  but  no  description  by  which  we  can  ascertain  what 
they  were.  Cotemporary  with  the  father  of  physic,  lived  Cra- 
tevas,  who  he  calls  the  prince  of  botanists.  A  considerable 
space  after  him  appeared  Theophrastus  ;  who  wrote  ten  books 
on  plants,  of  which  nine  have  reached  our  hands.  These  merit 
the  highest  encomiums. 

Theophrastus  was  a  disciple  of  Aristotle,  and  flourished  in 
the  third  century :  he  may  justly  be  considered  as  the  father  of 


JZ  THE    THOMSONIAN 

botaily.  He  treats  of  the  vegetable  life  ;  and  the  anatomy  and 
construction  of  plants,  and  of  their  origin  and  propagation.  He 
divides  vegetables  into  seven  classes,  which  division  is  founded 
on  the  generation  of  plants,  their  place  of  growth,  their  size,  as 
trees  and  shrubs,  their  use,  and  their  lactescence,  which  last 
circumstance  respects  every  kind  of  liquor,  of  whatever  color, 
that  flows  in  great  abundance  from  them  when  cut.  This 
golden  monument  of  botany  cannot  be  too  strongly  recommend- 
ed to  the  curious. 

The  Romans  were  devoted  to  Victoria  ;  a  deity  so  adored  by 
that  rough  people,  that  they  paid  little  attention  to  natural  his- 
tory. Pliny  says  that  they  were  strangers  to  botany  till  Pom- 
pey  conquered  Mithridates.  the  most  philosophic  king  of  the 
age.  His  observations  on  the  medicinal  virtues  of  plants  fall- 
ing into  the  hands  of  Pompey,  were,  by  his  orders,  translated 
into  Latin.  Dioscorides,  tliough  by  birth  a  Grecian,  lived  un- 
der the  Roman  empire.  He  was  the  next  botanist  of  note  after 
Theophrastus.  It  is  highly  probable,  that  several  botanists 
lived  between  the  time  of  Theophrastus  and  Dioscorides,  a 
space  of  nearly  400  years;  yet  if  we  except  Antonius  Mnsa, 
Euphorbius,  and  Jilmilius  Macer,  who  was  a  soldier,  poet,  and 
botanist,  and  the  first  who  clothed  botany  in  poetry,  we  find  no 
mention  of  any  one  who  paid  attention  to  this  science.  Dios- 
corides mentions  about  six  hundred  plants:  four  hundred  and 
ten  of  which  he  described,  together  with  their  medicinal  vir- 
tues; about  five  hundred  of  them  are  mentioned  by  the  father 
of  botany.  Dioscorides  arranged  plants,  from  their  uses  in 
medicine  and  domestic  economy,  into  four  classes,  viz.  aromat- 
ics,  alimentary  vegetables^  medicinal,  and  vinous;  a  vague 
and  fallacious  distinction. 

Pliny,  in  his  immense  compilation,  called  the  history  of  the 
world,  mentions  four  hundred  plants  more  than  are  to  be  found 
in  Dioscorides  ;  and  yet  he  lived  but  about  forty  years  after 
him.  lie,  who  wishes  to  see  all  the  natural  history  of  the  an- 
cients at  a  glance,  may  consult  Pliny  to  advantage. 

The  famous  Galen  flourished  about  130  years  after  Christ. 
He  was,  for  that  day,  a  great  traveler,  and  might  have  increas- 
ad  the  catalogue  of  plants  ;  but  he  contented  himself  in  des- 
canting on  the  medicinal  virtues  of  those  mentioned  by  his 
predecessor. 

After  the  sixth  century,  learning  was  almost  entirely  abolish- 
ed by  the  Goths.  Whilst  a  swarm  of  northern  barbarians  were 
destroying  taste  and  learning  in  the  western  empire,  the  Ara- 
bians who  were  followers  of  the  renowned  IMahomet,  over-ran 
the  eastern.  By  conquering  Greece,  they  monopolized  all  the 
writings  of  that  famous  nation.  During  400  years  there  was 
no  attempt  to  draw  from  its  obscurity  the  botany  of  the  ancients. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  33 

At  lena^th  one  of  the  Saracen  califs  ordered  the  Greek  books  on 
medicine  to  be  translated  into  Arabic,  or  their  mixed  Saracen 
ians^naoe;  and  botany,  which  is  a  branch  of  medicine,  attract- 
ed their  notice.  Serapio  collected  the  Greek  and  Arabian  au- 
thors, who  had  written  on  plants  ;  and  after  him  followed  Razis, 
Avicenna,  Averhoes,  Actnarins,  and  several  others  of  less  note. 
They  were  more  attentive  to  the  materia  medica  in  general  than 
to  plants  in  particular.  To  them  we  owe  the  knowledge  of 
sugar,  of  distilled  spirits,  of  rheubarb,  senna,  and  most  of  the 
milder  cathartics. 

After  a  dark  and  dismal  period,  emphatically  styled  the  bar- 
barous or  dark  ages,  a  dawn  of  light  began  to  appear,  first,  in 
Italy,  and  from  thence,  a  second  time,  over  the  world,  when 
Medicine,  and  her  hand-maid  Botany,  emerged  from  the  gloom 
of  barbarism;  for  in  1440  Theodore  Gaza,  a  Greek  refugee  at 
Rome,  resuscitated  philosophy  by  making  elegant  translations 
of  Aristotle  and  Theophrastus,  who  were  commented  on  in  the 
sequel  by  Scaliger  and  Stapel.  Dioscorides  was  likewise  trans- 
lated into  pure  and  beautiful  Latin  by  a  "Venetian  nobleman. 

John  Parkinson  wrote  his  Paradisus  Terrestris  in  1629. 
He  was  apothecary  to  the  king.  The  history  of  flowers  he  gave 
at  great  length.  In  his  Theatrum  Botanicum  he  has  com- 
prehended more  species  of  plants,  than  were  to  be  found  in  any 
history  of  plants  published  before  liis  time. 

Among  public  gardens,  in  which  plants  were  demonstrated 
by  professors,  that  of  Padua  is  the  oldest.  It  commenced  about 
the  year  1530.  From  that  period,  professors  of  botany  have 
been  established  in  almost  every  school  of  medicine. 

The  famous  Cosmo  de  Mef/ici5  founded  a  botanic  garden  at 
Pisa  ;  and  committed  it  to  the  care  oi  Andreas  Casalphms,  a 
celebrated  physician,  botanist,  and  anatomist,  the  father  of  the 
botanic  system  and  professor  of  botany  at  Padua. 

Prosper  Alpimis  v/as  nearly  as  eminent  in  botany  as  in 
physic.  He  made  a  large  and  rare  collection  of  plants  in  Egypt, 
and  afterwards  read  lectures  on  botany  at  Venice. 

The  famous  Henry  the  fourth  of  France  founded  the  botanic 
garden  at  Montpelier  in  1598;  the  care  of  which  has  success- 
ively been  committed  to  distinguished  botanists,  who  were  also 
physicians. 

Francis  the  first  was  a  great  admirer  of  botany,  and  a  lib- 
eral encourager  of  every  plan  that  could  improve  and  ad- 
vance it. 

Lewis  the  fonrtee7ith  founded  a  noble  garden  in  the  suburbs 
of  St.  Victoris  at  Pans,  and  put  it  under  the  care  of  Heroard, 
his  chief  physician,  and  Guide  Borossceas,  his  physician  in  or- 
dinary. 

It  is  about  150  years  since  botanic  gardens  were  established 


34  THE    THOMSOWIAN 

in  England.  Those  at  Chelsea  and  Oxford  are  the  most  an- 
cient. About  the  same  time,  botanic  gardens  were  formed  in 
Holland.  The  garden  at  Leyden  is  the  most  celebrated.  The 
great  Boerhaave  was  professor  of  botany  there,  at  the  same 
time  that  he  filled  Europe  with  his  fame  as  a  professor  of 
physic. 

Prior  to  this  period  two  illustrious  brothers  appeared,  who 
alone  have  done  more  for  the  advancement  of  botany,  tlian  all 
the  rest  together,  who  preceded  and  followed  them,  until  Tourne- 
fort.  Rare  geniuses  !  says  the  celebrated  Rousseau,  whose  vast 
knowledge  and  solid  labors,  consecrated  to  botany,  rendered 
them  worthy  of  that  immortality  which  they  have  acquired. 
For.  till  this  part  of  natural  history  foils  nito  oblivion,  the 
names  of  John  and  Caspar  Bauhin  will  live  along  with  it  in 
the  memory  of  mankind.  Each  of  these  indefatigable  men, 
par  nobile  fratrum^  undertook  an  universal  history  of  plants 
and  to  add  to  it  a  synomjmy,  or  exact  list  of  the  names  that 
every  plant  bore  in  all  the  writers  v/hich  preceded  them. 

John  nearly  completed  his  undertaking  in  three  volumes 
folio,  but  did  not  live  to  publish  the  whole.  Caspar  labored 
forty  years,  but  the  life  of  man  is  too  short  for  the  execution  of 
a  plan  so  extensive.  Their  works  are  still  the  guide  to  all 
those,  who  wish  to  consult  ancient  authors  on  botany.  John 
Bauhin  was  born  at  Lyons  in  1541,  and  died  in  1624.  Caspar 
was  born  1560,  and  died  162-4. 

After  this  period,  scarcely  an  author  wrote  on  medicine,  but 
wrote  more  or  lesson  botany;  of  these  we  must  not  omit  Fuch- 
sius,  who  in  1530  published  five  hundred  and  ten  figures  of 
plants  ;  nor  Rondeletius,  a  physician  of  Montpelier.  Nor  may 
we  forget  Turner  a  learned  English  physician,  who  published 
the  first  history  of  plants  in  English,  with  most  of  the  figures 
of  Fuchsius.  He  gave  the  names  of  the  plants  in  Latin,  Greek, 
German,  and  French,  in  alphabetical  order. 

Hyeeronymus  Bone,  a  German,  was  the  first  of  the  moderns 
who  has  given  a  methodical  distribution  of  vegetables.  In  his 
history  of  plants  published  1532  he  divides  the  eight  hundred 
species  there  described,  into  three  classes,  founded  on  their 
qualities,  habit,  figure  and  size  ;  Clusius  endeavored  soon  after 
to  establisli  the  natural  distinction  of  Theophrastus,  which  was 
into  trees,  shrubs,  and  under-shrubs.  Others  attempted  to  char- 
acterize plants  by  the  roots,  stems  and  leaves,  but  all  were  found 
insufficient. 

If  Natural  History  forms,  as  Lord  Bacon  says,  the  basis  of 
all  the  sciences^  it  is  certainly  a  study  of  the  first  importance. 
It  is  of  more  importance  than  even  Natural  Philosophy,  which 
only  aims  to  teach  those  quiescent  forms  of  Nature,  which  all 
fjodies  indiscriminately  possess,  as  extension,  figure,  durability, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  35 

and  vis  inertia  :  whereas  the  natural  historian  describes  and 
aims  to  explain  the  growing,  or  living  state  of  organized  bodies, 
as  well  as  their  structure  after  life  has  departed. 

It  is  not,  as  they  conceive  merely,  a  dry  description  of  tiiat 
which  strikes  the  eye  only  of  the  spectator.  The  Natural  His- 
torian is  led  to  explore  the  origin,  or  primordinm  of  organized 
bodies;  and  to  trace  their  gradual  developeraent  to  a  perfect 
plant  or  animal,  and  to  expatiate  on  their  accretion,  or  growth  up 
to  their  destined  magnitude  ;  and  from  thence  to  their  dissolu- 
tion. The  naturalist  treats  not  only  of  matter^  as  an  ele- 
mentary constituent  in  composite  substances,  which  appertains 
in  common  to  all  bodies,  but  he  is  compelled  to  investigate  also 
that  efficient  cause,  or  movins'  principle  which  associates  these 
elements  ;  and  which  employs  them  when  associated,  accord- 
ing to  their  various  and  peculiar  characters.  Within  this  wide 
view  of  Nature,  its  historian  discovers,  or  imagines  that  he  dis- 
covers a  division  of  things,  which  he  calls  the  Three  Kinct- 
DOMS  of  Nature,  namely — the  Mineral,  the  Vegetable,  and  the 
Animal.  One  of  them  only  attracts  our  attention,  at  this  time, 
viz.  the  Vegetable. 

We  wish  to  give  to  the  term  i?o^ony  a  wider  scope  than  is  gen- 
erally allowed  to  it.  We  would  define  Botany  to  be  that 
branch  of  Natural  History  which  teaches  the  anatomy,  physi- 
ology and  economy  of  vegetables. 

We  shall  give  our  doctrine  a  dress  partaking  more  of  the 
popular,  than  of  the  scientific  garb  ;  as  much  of  the  former,  as 
not  to  disguise  this  beautiful  handmaid  of  Medicine  ;  and  yet 
not  so  divested  of  the  latter,  as  to  displease  the  eye  of  the  most 
rigid  disciple  of  the  Linnasan  school.  AVe  avow  Linn.^us  to 
be  our  lawful  chief;  and  his  Philosnphia  Botanica  our  rally- 
ing point  and  standard.  In  acknowledging  him  our  teacher 
and  leader  in  the  field  of  Botany,  we  wish  to  refer  the  learned 
reader  to  his  admirable  writings  for  the  reasons  of  this  our  at- 
tachment. 

Whoever  casts  his  eyes  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  in  June, 
will  .see  that  it  is  covered  and  adorned  with  a  beautiful  green 
carpet  of  vegetables,  which  carpet  is  spread  anew  every  year. 
If  after  viewing  and  admiring  its  agreeable  effect,  and  after  re- 
flecting on  its  annual  renovation,  the  student  of  nature  should 
take  the  pains  of  examining  any  individual  plant,  of  which 
this  carpet  is  composed,  he  will  find  that  the  stem,  or  trunk  of 
each  vegetable  is  not  lilve  a  lump  of  clay,  or  piece  of  dough  ;: 
but  that  it  has  an  internal  adjustment,  arrangement,  or  disposi- 
tion of  its  matter  into  tubes  and  vessels,  which  is  called  for  that 
reason,  organization.  If  he  view  the  plant  through  a  micro- 
scope, he  will  discover  in  it  different  orders  of  vessels,  like 
those  of  an  animal ;  and  should  he  submit  it  to  a  careful  and 


36  THE    THOMSONIAN 

nice  anatomical  investigation,  he  will  be  convinced  that  a  plant 
posseses  a  vascniar  system.  If  he  compares  it  with  those  things 
which  belong  to  the  otlier  two  kingdoms,  he  will  see  that  a 
plant  occupies  a  middle  space  between  animals  and  minerals. 
On  still  closer  examination  he  will  find  that  it  partakes  of  the 
nature  of  both.  If  he  pluck  it  up  by  the  roots,  he  perceives 
that  its  appearance  is  directly  changed,  for  it  loses  its  turges- 
cency,  color  and  specific  odor ;  or  in  other  words,  it  fades,  wilts 
and  dies,  and  is  finally  decomposed.  Hence  the  inquirer  learns 
that  a  growing  plant  is  not  only  a  regularly  organized  body, 
possessing  avascular  system,  but  is,  while  attached  to  the  ground 
by  its  roots,  a  living  one.  That  this  view  of  a  plant  is  agreea- 
ble to  truth  may  be  inferred  from  consulting  the  best  authors 
on  Botany  :  thus  the  illustrious  Boerhaave  defines  a  plant 
to  be  a  hydraulic  body,  containhig  vessels,  replete  with  dif- 
ferent juices,  by  means  of  which  it  derives  the  matter  of  its 
nutriment  and  growth ;  to  which  he  miofht  have  added,  pos- 
sessing the  power  of  producing  its  kind  forever  by  seed. 

Although  agriculture  and  gardening  are  of  prime  impor- 
tance to  civilized  man,  they  have  continued  to  be  only  arts, 
consisting  of  detached  facts,  and  vague  opinions,  without  a 
true  history  to  connect  them.  And  the  first  step  towards 
giving  Botany  the  stability  of  a  science  is  to  submit  a  plant 
to  anatomical  investigation,  as  we  do  animals  ;  that  being, 
says  Dr.  A.  Hunter,  the  only  rational  method  of  arrivinof  at 
any  certainty  concerning  the  laws  of  the  vegetable  economy ; 
and  witliout  it,  agriculture,  that  useful,  important,  and  hon- 
ourable profession,  must  ever  remain  a  vague  and  uncertain 
study. 

In  teaching  Botany,  different  authors  have  adopted  different 
plans.  Some  begin  with  a  description  of  the  leaf;  then  of  the 
stem  ;  next  the  flower ;  afterwards  the  fruit,  strictly  so  called, 
and  lastly  the  seed.  Others  commence  with  the  flower,  then 
they  describe  the  fruit  and  seed  conjunctly,  and  lastly  the  root. 
We  shall  pursue  a  difterent  order.  We  shall  begin  with  des- 
cribing a  seed  ;  after  demonstrating  its  structure,  we  shall 
show  that  every  seed  contains,  under  several  membranes,  the 
future  plant  in  miniature.  There  we  may  see  by  the  help  of  a 
microscope,  that  the  embryo  plant  has,  not  only  a  little  radicle, 
which  is  hereafter  to  become  the  root,  but  also  two  diminutive 
leaves,  which  hereafter  become  the  herb.  We  shall  then  en- 
deavor to  show  how  the  embryo  plant,  when  placed  in  a  due 
degree  of  moisture,  and  a  just  degree  of  heat,  and  at  such  a 
proper  depth  in  the  ground,  as  not  to  exclude  it  from  the  vivi- 
fying influence  of  the  air,  gradually  unfolds  itself;  the  radicle 
extending  itself  into  a  root,  which  attaches  itself  to  the  earth, 
and  the  little  leaf  aspiring  into  a  stem.     We  shall  show  how 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  37 

the  foetal  plant  is  supported  by  that  part  of  the  seed,  which  an- 
swers to  the  albumen,  or  white  of  an  egg,  until  it  is  able  to  ap- 
pear above  ground,  when  this  temporary  nutritive  part  drops 
off  and  decays,  leaving  the  plant,  in  future,  to  ^row,  and  to 
flourish,  by  imbibing  solid  nourishment  from  its  mother  earth ; 
and  by  inspiring  vital  air  ;  and  by  inhaling  the  celestial  light. 

Delightful  as  Natural  History  really  is,  tlie- study  of  it  is  not 
here  recommended  to  amuse  the  idle,  or  gratify  the  fanciful. 
We  Americans  dwell  in  an  agricultural  country  ;  and  agricul- 
ture is  the  sure  and  certain  support  of  a  nation.  It  gives  to  a 
country  the  only  riches  that  it  can  call  its  own.  Tacitus  says, 
that  the  Romans  were  several  times  reduced  nearly  to  famine. 
by  dependig  on  Egypt  and  Africa  for  gram;  instead  of  relying 
on  the  prolific  vigor  of  their  own  Italian  soil  :  and  thus  says 
this  celebrated  historian,  were  the  lives  of  the  Roman  people 
committed  to  the  caprice  of  the  winds  and  waves.  If  commerce 
bind  the  world  together  in  a  golden  chain,  that  chain  is  fre- 
quently broken  by  the  wars  of  men,  and  by  the  wars  of  the  ele- 
ments ;  while  agricnlture  gives  us  the  staff  of  life,  and  the  chief 
support  of  our  independence. 

Commerce  is  congenial  to  all  of  us  who  sojourn  near  the 
sea;  and  is  indeed  the  grand  source  of  wealth,  comfort  and 
power :  but  with  riches,  commerce  too  often  imports  effeminat- 
ing luxuries;  whereas  agriculture  is  an  athletic  task,  kindly 
imposed  upon  man  by  a  beneficent  Creatok,  as  the  best  means 
of  preserving  his  healti;  and  his  innocence. 

Now  the  ground-work  of  this  salutiferous  and  honorable  pro- 
fession is  the  science  of  Botany,  in  the  enlarged  sense,  which 
we  have  given  to  this  branch  of  Natural  History. 

Some  complain  that  the  science  of  Botany  is  incumbered, 
and  overloaded  with  technical  terms.  Our  great  master  Lin- 
N.'Eus  wrote  in  Latin.  Sometimes  he  gives  generic  names  com- 
pounded of  two  entire  Latin  words;  but  he  uses  commonly, 
such  cofupound  words  in  the  Greek  language,  as  are  more  ex- 
pressive as  well  as  more  beautiful.  Beginners  are  sometimes 
daunted  by  this  terrific  style.  They  are  apt  to  conclude  that 
good  sense  has  not  fair  play  when  thu§  oppressed  by  hard 
words.  They  do  not  perhaps  know  that  Linn^us  has  simpli- 
fied the  botanical  language  of  his  predecessors.  Before  his  day, 
we  had  HydrophyUocMr poderidrou ,  and  Slachyarpogophora. 
To  convey  botanical  descriptions  in  a  plain,  simple,  yet  intelli- 
gible languaofo  to  the  merely  English  reader  is  a  difficulty  still 
to  be  encountered.  There  is  another  difficulty  of  a  more  deli- 
cate nature.  The  sexual  system  of  Botany  is  founded  on  a 
discovery  that  there  is  in  vegetables  as  in  animals,  a  distinction 
of  sexes.  But  there  are  those  who  think  that  Linnteus  has 
drawn  the  analogy  too  close  and  continued  it  too  long.     The 


38  THE    THOMSONIAN. 

analogy  between  the  structure  and  functionsof  the  higher  class 
of  animals  and  vegetables  is  remote  ;  but  the  analogy  between 
the  higher  order  of  vegetables  and  those  outskirts  of  animated 
nature,  the  Vermes,  and  Insects,  is  closer  than  is  commonly 
known. 

SEED  AND  FOOD  OF  PLANTS. 

In  describing  a  Plant,  we  shall  adopt  a  different  order  from 
that  commonly  pursued  by  botanists.  We  deem  it  more  agree- 
able to  the  laws  of  botanical  philosophy,  to  begin  with  the  de- 
scription of  a  seed  ;  and  to  trace  its  gradual  development  into 
a  perfect  plant,  producing  seed  again,  then  to  reverse  this  pro- 
cedure, as  is  commonly  done,  by  treating  of  the  seed  last. 

A  seed  of  a  plant  and  an  egg  of  a  bird  are  so  analagous  in 
their  structure  and  economy,  that  we  may,  without  impropriety, 
use  the  same  term  for  either.  By  a  seed  then  we  mean  an  or- 
ganized particle,  produced  by  a  plant,  or  animal,  from  which 
new  plants,  and  new  animals  are  generated.  All  seeds  of  plants 
and  all  eggs  of  animals  have  essentially  the  same  structure,  and 
the  same  mode  of  development. 

A  perfect,  or  fecundated  hen's  egg  is  an  organized  body,  per- 
vaded by  vessels,  and  endowed  with  that  humble  portion  of 
life,  or  capability  of  living,  which,  in  the  scale  of  vitality,  we 
denote  by  the  term  excitability  ;  and  is  replete  with  a  movea- 
ble fluid,  and  inclosing,  under  divers  membranes,  the  animal  ni 
miniature.  The  egg-shell  is  almost  entirely  filled  with  a  glu- 
tinous substance,  laid  up  for  tbe  nourisliment  of  the  fostal  ani- 
mal :  the  one  is  called  the  albumen,  or  v/hite  ;  the  other,  vitel- 
lu9,  or  yolk.  In  the  latter  is  the  cicali  icula,  or  punclu?}i  vita;, 
which  is  about  the  size  of  the  seed  of  the  vetch,  or  small  pea, 
and  has  a  considerable  resemblance  to  the  pupil  of  the  eye.  It 
is  in  this  spot  that  the  first  palpitation,  or  signs  of  life  appear, 
in  consequence  of  the  apphcation  of  heat. 

If  the  etrg  be  kept  in  a  certain  degree  of  warmth,  whether  by 
the  natural  heat  of  tlie  parent  animal,  or  by  art,  as  in  stoves, 
it  occasions  an  increased  action  of  that  vis  vita,  or  living  pow- 
er, which  every  organized  body,  susceptible  of  stimulus,  natur- 
ally possesses;  and  which,  being  a  momentary  distension  of  the 
smallest  vessels,  is  similar  to  a  blush,  or  ratber  tliat  state  of 
them,  which  immediately  precedes  the  slightest  inflammation. 
Motion  thus  begun,  the  vessels,  surrounding  and  pervading  tbe 
pxiuctuin  vilcc,  expand  ;  and  tbe  embryo  appears  spontaneously 
to  unfold  itself,  until  by  slow  degrees  it  develops,  like  a  flower, 
and  becomes  a  perfect  animal,  capable  of  producing  a  similar 

Now  every  seed  of  a  plant  is,  in  like  manner,  an  organized 


METER  [A    MEDICA.  39 

body,  endowed  with  vessels,  and  contains,  under  several  mem- 
branes, the  plant  in  miniatnre,  which  seed  requires  a  due  por- 
tion of  moisture,  and  a  just  degree  of  heat  for  exciting  the  dor- 
mant vegetative  life,  which  distending  gradually  the  vessels, 
expands  Uie  several  membranes,  and  develops  the  plant.  The 
embryo  plant  lies  in  a  sleeping  state,  though  alive  ;  but  exerts 
not  its  lite,  until  it  is  put  in  proper  circurnstcvnces,  which  pro- 
per circumstances  are  moisturejieat,  and  some  exposure  to  the 
influence  of  the  air. 

Every  seed  of  a  vegetable,  and  every  e^g  of  an  animal  hith- 
erto examined;  are  in  structure  essentially  the  same.  To  grow, 
that  is,  to  nourish  itself,  by  changing  a  foreign  matter  into  its 
own  substance,  and  to  continue  its  kind,  is  the  end  and  aim  of 
every  living  organized  body.  Let  us  examine  the  seed  of  a 
vegetable,  that  we  may  see  how  far  such  a  body  is  adapted  to 
effect  these  important  purposes.  The  Windsor  bean,  or.  as  wg 
call  it  in  this  country,  the  English  hean,  from  its  size  and 
shape,  affords  us  the  fairest  example.  .If,  when  such  a  bean  is 
fully  ripe,  you  cut  through  its  membranes  lengthwise,  in  the 
direction  of  the  eye,  hilian,  or  little  scar,  it  will  naturally  sepa- 
rate into  halves.  Simple  maceration  will  have  the  same  effect 
without  cutting.  These  smooth  and  equal  parts  of  the  bean 
are  called  seedlobes  by  gardeners,  and  cotyledons  by  botanists. 
Of  tiiose  seeds,  that  we  use  for  food,  they  form  the  more  farina- 
ceous or  nutritive  part:  thus  in  wheat,  rye,  and  Indian-corn, 
they  form  the  meal,  while  the  investing  membranes  form  the 
bran. 

The  most  important  part  of  ths  seed  is  the  embryo  ;  and 
the  most  important  part  of  the  embryo  is  the  corculum,  or  little 
heart,  punctum  vita°,  or  speck  of  life  ;  because  at  this  point  in 
the  lien's  e^g  the  first  pulsation  of  life  is  discovered  ;  but  in  the 
seed  of  a  plant  there  is  no  palpable  motion.  The  whole  semi- 
nal apparatus  contained  within  the  external  membrane  of  the 
bean,  and  which  corresponds  with  the  albumen,  and  viielhts, 
in  the  bird's  ecrg^  conspires,  when  acted  upon  by  heat,  to  elicit 
the  latent  spark  of  vegetative  life ;  and  to  nourish  afterwards 
the  unborn  plant. 

When  the  miniature  plant  is  separated  from  the  seed  lobes, 
we  can  easily  discern  the  leaf  which  is  called  the  plvimila,  or 
that  part  which  is  hereafter  to  beconie  the  herb  of  the  bean  ; 
and  likewise  the  rostellufn,  or  radicle,  which  creeping  down- 
wards becomes  the  root.  The  cotyledons,  or  lobes  of  the  bean 
taken  collectively,  without  any  discrimination  of  albumen,  or 
viielius,  appear  through  a  microscope,  to  be  of  a  glandular  struc- 
ture ;  and  to  have  a  regular  system  of  vessels,  resembling  the 
placental  veins  in  quadrupeds  ;  and  to  run  together,  like  them, 
in  a  {Q'fi  trunks,  precisely  at  that  point  of  the  lobe  where  the 
embryo  grows  to  the  cotyledons. 


40  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Botanists  define  cotyledons  to  be  the  lateral,  bibulous,  per- 
ishable lobes  or  placenta  of  the  seed,  destined  to  nourish 
the  corculum,  and  then  to  fall  off.  Now,  these  lobes  afford 
a  nutritive  juice,  resembling  milk,  for  the  sustenance  of  the 
unborn  plant :  but  when  the  tender  veo^etable  is  so  far  ad- 
vanced as  to  merit  the  name  of  an  infantile  plant,  these  evan- 
escent lobes  are  converted  into  a  pair  of  thick  seed-leaves, 
which  compose  a  shield  of  defence,  until  the  plant  has  fairly 
and  firmly  taken  root  in  the  earth  ;  then  these  two  protect- 
mg  leaves  drop  off  and  decay.  And  now  the  little,  erect  plant, 
depends,  like  the  just  born  infant,  on  a  new  principle  for  its 
future  existence. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  is  apparent,  that  when  a 
hen's  egg  is  alive,  it  is  fit  to  be  eaten  ;  but  if  killed,  whether 
by  too  much  heat,  or  by  too  great  cold,  or  by  violent  con- 
cussion, or  by  being  sat  upon  by  the  bird,  and  then  aban- 
doned, it  soon  becomes  rotten.  So  in  like  manner  a  seed, 
though  kept  several  years,  is  not  a  dead  substance,  like  a 
pebble  or  a  pearl ;  but  is  a  body  regularly  organized,  and 
arranged  harmoniously  into  a  system  of  vessels,  glands,  and 
membranes,  and  it  is  moreover,  like  a  prolific  egg,  aUve,  or 
at  least  in  a  state  or  fitness  to  be  acted  upon  by  certain  ex- 
ternal agents,  which  agents  are  fire,  air  and  water. 

Some  seeds  will  retain  the  vegetative  life  a  great  number 
of  years.  Indian  corn  has  vegetated  after  keeping  it  upwards 
of  seventy  years.  We  neglected  to  mention  that  there  was 
a  smvill  quantity  of  vital  air  in  a  sack,  bladder,  or  partition, 
at  the  big  end  of  every  bird's  egg;  and  we  presume  that 
there  is  a  portion  of  the  same  kind  of  fluid  in  every  seed; 
or  it  may  be  oxygen  in  a  concentrated  state,  which  is  after- 
wards combined  with  caloric  in  the  process  of  incubation.  It 
appears  also,  that  the  most  important,  nay  the  essenlial  part 
of  that  organized  body  denominated  a  seed,  is  the  embryo; 
for  it  is  that  part  alone  which  grows  into  a  new  plant,  be- 
ginning again  a  new  prog;eny.  It  likewise  appears,  that  all 
the  other  parts  of  the  seed  are  subservient  to  this  ;  and  that 
they  are  employed  chiefly  in  converting  the  farina,  or  mealy 
substance  of  the  seed  into  a  lactescent  fluid,  which  is  con- 
veyed by  the  lactiferous  vessels  to  the  embryo  for  its  nour- 
ishment, which,  like  the  infantile  animal,  is  supplied  with 
milk,  until  it  can  stand  alone  m  the  ground. 

AUhoui::h  nature  has  establislied  a  marked  uniformity  in  the 
internal  structure  of  seeds,  she  nevertheless  displays  an  as- 
tonishiu":  variety  in  their  external  appearance.  Neither  math- 
ematician nor  painter  can  ever  convey  adequate  ideas  of  their 
different  shapes  and  variegated  colors.  Some  shine  like  sil- 
ver, and  some  like  gold  ;  whilst  others  appear  like  little  balls 
of  fire.     It  is  remarkable  that  seeds  are  seldom  of  the  same  color 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  41 

with  the  flower,  which  produced  them.     Seeds  of  a  deep  green 
aj'e  rare  ;  blue  still  more  uncommon. 

Beside  the  essential  parts  of  a  seed  already  described,  there 
are  certain  accessory  parts,  which,  whilst  they  add  to  the  beauty 
of  the  seeds,  serve  important  purposes  in  their  migration  :  such, 
for  example,  are  the  feathery  crowns,  or  aigrettes^  which  serve 
as  wings  to  waft  them  to  a  distance,  as  we  see  in  the  Dande- 
lion, Lettuce,  and  Thistle.  Who,  walking  the  fields,  has  not 
observed. 

Wide  o'er  the  thistly  lawn,  as  swells  the  breeze, 
A  whit'ning  shower  of  vegetable  down  ' 

Amusive  float?  Thomson. 

If  seeds  are  diversified  in  shape  and  color,  they  vary  as  re- 
markably in  their  size.  One  thousand  and  tiuelve  seeds  of  the 
tobacco  plant  weigh  but  a  single  grain,  while  a  single  cocoa-nut 
weighs  several  pounds.  The  Ferns  dx^ax  from  other  plants  in 
having  their  seeds  in  the  leaves.  They  are  very  small,  and 
when  mclosed  in  the  seed  vessel,  they  altogether  form  a  round 
ball  with  a  notched  band  or  rim  of  a  beautiful  structure.  They 
have  some  resemblance  to  the  fingers  shut  up,  or  clenched  so 
as  to  form  the  fist;  and  when  the  seeds  are  quite  ripe  and  dry, 
they  become  very  elastic  ;  in  which  state  the  seed  vessel  bursts 
open,  not  unlike  the  suddenly  throwing  open  of  the  fingers,  in 
changing  their  position  from  the  clenched  fist  to  that  of  the 
open  palm.  This  sudden  action  throws  the  seed  to  a  consider- 
able distance  ;  and  then  we  see  the  two  hemispheres,  which 
composed  the  ball,  in  the  situation  of  two  empty  cups.  This 
is  well  expressed  by  an  engraving  in  Swammerdani's  book  of 
Nature. 

PABULUM,  OR  INOURISHMENT  OF  PLANTS. 

"  Hence  when  a  Monarch,  or — a  Mushroom  dies, 

A  while  extinct  Ih'  organic  matter  lies; 

But — as  a  few  short  hours,  or  years  revolve, 

Alchemic  powers  the  changing  mass  dissolve; 

Born  to  new  life  iinnumber'd  insects  pant — 

New  buds  surround  the  microscopic  plant.     Temfle  of  Nature. 

Natural  things  which  are  common,  are  disregarded  because 
they  are  common  :  while  rare  and  monstrous  productions  are 
gazed  at  with  idle  curiosity  and  stupid  admiration.  What  is 
more  common  than  a  seed  or  grain  ?  Yet  how  few  give  them- 
selves the  exertion  of  inquiring  what  a  seed  really  is !  If  a  seed 
or  grain  answer  the  whole  purpose  for  which  the  farmer  sup- 
poses it  was  created,  that  of  fattening  his  cattle,  and  feeding  his 
family,  he  neither  searches  into  its  curious  structure,  nor  in- 
quires into  its  physiology.  Nor  is  this  to  be  wondered  at.  But 
that  the  lawyer,  the  physician,  and  the  minister  of  religion 

4 


42  THE    THOMSOMAN 

should  fifo  on  throusrh  life  as  most  of  them  do,  without  once 
stopping  to  inquire  into  the  laws  by  which  the  acorn  becomes 
an  oak,  is  to  the  botanist  surprising!  There  are  few  httle 
things  in  nature  more  worthy  of  attention  than  a  seed.  It  is  a 
system^  or  complete  whole,  wrought  up  into  a  narrow  compass, 
retaining  a  living  principle.  By  system  we  mean  a  combina- 
tion of  many  tilings  reduced  to  regular  dependence  and  co-op- 
eration. If  we  contemplate  closely  the  vegetative  life  and 
growth  in  a  seed,  our  admiration  will  increase  at  every  view, 
so  that  our  baffled  reason  will  be  compelled  to  seek  a  solution 
of  its  difficulties  in  a  Power  anterior  to  Water — Air — Fire — 
or  Li^ht.  Some  of  the  wise  ancients  were  so  impressed  with 
the  philosophy  of  the  e^g,  or  seed,  that  they  taught  that  the 
tnirndcme  system  itself  sprung  from  an  eo^^r^  hatched  by  JSlox. 

It  is  only  organized  bodies  that  are  capable  of  growth.  Every 
organized  body  grows;  and  beside  tliem  none.  There  are 
accretions  among  minerals ;  and  concretions  and  crystalliza- 
tions without  end  ;  but  these  do  not  rise  up  to  our  idea  of 
^/•026'M,  which  implies  matter  organized  into  vessels,  containing 
a  moveable  succus,  or  juice,  operated  upon  by  a  very  gentle 
heat;  whereas  the  changes  wrought  in  the  mineral  kingdom, 
are  commonly  by  a  very  violent  one.  If  we  knew  how  a  single 
fibre  grew,  we  could  tell  how  the  whole  plant  or  animal  grows; 
for  the  bodies  of  both  of  them  are  only  assemblages  of  fibres  dif- 
ferently formed  and  combined.  Growth  always  operates  by 
nutrition;  and  nutrition  incorporates  into  the  fibre,  external 
matter,  or  matter  taken  in,  ah  extra,  and  this  process  always 
requires  heat.  Now  all  bodies  in  nature  are  imbued,  surround- 
ed, and  penetrated  in  every  way  by  fire,  or  rather  caloric,  whicli 
is  a  better  and  more  expressive  term  for  that  all  powerful  agent 
which  transforms  solids  into  fluids,  and  fluids  into  vapor. 

Although  heat,  or  caloric,  which  is  the  fluid  matter  of  heat, 
expands  the  c.^^  and  causes  it  to  grow  up  into  a  living  animal ; 
and  although  it  agitates  and  gently  unfolds  the  plant,  causing 
it  to  grow  from  an  acorn  up  to  the  magnificent  oak,  yet  this 
query  arises  naturally  in  the  mind  of  the  young  student  of  na- 
ture, xvhat  is  the  pahuhtm,  or  matter,  which  adds  to  the  bulk, 
and  increases,  to  a  certain  size,  the  vegetable  and  the  animal? 
For  it  is  evident  that  heat  only  causes  an  absorption  of  a  fo- 
reign matter.  Nutrition,  or  growth,  implies  life;  but  in  some 
vegetables,  this  life  is  so  low  in  the  scale  of  vitality  as  to  be 
almost  down  to  where  Nature  has  marked  her  degree  of  o. 

That  an  animal  receives  its  pabulum  or  matter  of  nourish- 
ment and  increase  from  without,  is  known  to  every  one  from 
the  irresistible  calls  of  hunger,  and  the  destruction  that  follows 
famine.  But  that  plants  were  nourished,  and  sustained  by 
food^  in  nearly  the  same  way,  has  not  been  so  generally  under- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  43 

Stood.  The  animal  has  a  warm  receptacle,  or  stomach,  of  about 
98  detjrees  of  heat,  with  a  due  quantity  of  moisture,  and  pecu- 
har  compound  motion  ;  whereas  the  plant  has  no  such  recep- 
tacle, nor  any  other  stomach  than  the  cold  earth,  which  is  about 
53  degrees  of  Fahrenheit.  The  possession  of  a  stomach  lays 
the  discriminating  line  between  the  animal  and  vegetable  king- 
dom.    All  other  distinctions  fail  us. 

Besides  air  and  water,  to  which  we  may  add  fire,  animals 
stand  in  need  of  aliment,  or  food  taken  by  the  mouth,  digested 
by  the  stomach,  forming  there  a  milky  liquor,  called  chyle. 
The  constituent  parts  of  the  chyle  of  quadrupeds  and  birds,  as 
well  as  most  other  animals,  are,  water— sugar — nmcilage — 
oil — cai'hon — phosphorus,  and  calcareous  earth.  The  con- 
stituent parts  of  the  sap-juice,  which  is  the  chyle  of  vegetables, 
is,  in  like  manner,  water — sugar — mucilage — oil — carbon — 
phosphorus,  and  calcareous  earth.*  Now,  sap-juice,  or  the 
chyle  of  vegetables,  is  absorbed  from  the  earth,  by  the  roots, 
which  have  a  peculiar  structure,  adapting  them  to  that  opera- 
tion ;  and  from  this  juice,  farther  elaborated,  refined  and  exalt- 
ed, is  formed  the  various  fluids  in  the  stem,  leaf,  flower,  fruit 
and  seed.  Some  plants  can  extract,  or  compose  these  nutritive 
substances  from  water,  and  apparently  from  the  air  alone.  We 
however  find  by  repeated  experiments,  that  there  are  certain 
substances,  which  contribute  more  to  the  production  of  this 
vegetable  chyle  than  others.  Let  us  then  inquire  what  these 
materials  are,  that  afford  the  food  of  'plants?  The  suliject 
is  not  merely  curious,  but  of  high  importance  to  our  country  ; 
for  if  we  can  ascertain  the  appropriate  aliment  or  food  of  any 
particular  family  of  our  most  useful  vegetables,  we  shall  be 
able  to  increase  their  size  with  as  much  certainty  as  a  farmer 
fattens  his  cattle  by  giving  them  corn. 

It  is  known  from  experiment  that  a  plant  will  grow  in  sand 
alone  moistened  with  water,  purified  by  distillation  from  all  ear- 
thy particles,  and  m  the  purest  air. 

But  a  plant  will  grow  better  in  a  mixture  of  satid  and  clay, 
in  which  the  tenacity  is  adapted  to  the  pushing  power  of  its 
roots,  than  in  sand  alone ;  and  it  will  grow  better  still,  if  a  pro- 
per quantity  of  water  be  applied.  But  with  both  these  advan- 
tages it  will  not  flourish  so  well  as  in  a  rich  soil. 

If  a  plant  be  put  in  a  proper  mixture  of  sand  and  clay,  and 
duly  supplied  with  water,  it  will  grow  better  than  in  the  same 
mixture,  exposed  to  the  hazards  of  the  weather,  and  the  chances 
of  being  too  moist  or  too  dry  ;  but  it  will  grow  still  better  in  a 
rich  soil.     There  is,  therefore,  in  a  I'ich  soil,  something  inde- 


*  Calcareous  earths  are  marie  of  all  sorts,  limestone,  chalk,  plaster  of  Paris, 
and  all  earths,  formed  from  the  bodies  of  animals,  especially  the  shells  offish. 


44  THE   THOMSONIAN 

pendent  of  texture,  or  the  retention  of  water,  which  contributes 
to  the  flourishing  of  plants. 

From  observing  the  fertih'ty  after  the  ground  was  divided  by 
the  plough,  some  have  imagined  that  the  earth  was  the  food  of 
plants.  To  this  opinion  succeeded  another  equally  erroneous, 
that  water  was  their  aliment,  when  in  fact  it  is  only  the  vehicle 
of  their  nourishment. 

The  upper  stratum  of  earth,  or  garden  mould,  contains  some 
articles  that  are  soluble  in  water,  and  some  that  are  not.  Those 
which  are  insoluble  in  water  are,  according  to  Fohdyce,  sa7id, 
clay,  calcareous  earthy  rnagnc<iia,  oxydes  of  ahini,  earth  of 
metals^  particularly  of  iron.  These  carmot  enter  the  vessels  of 
the  roots  of  plants  ;  but  they  may  contribute  to  the  production 
of  substances  which  are  soluble  in  water,  and  that  may  en- 
ter them. 

Substances  found  in  this  black  garden  mould,  that  are  solu- 
ble in  water,  are,  says  the  same  author,  iiuicilage.  nitrous  am- 
moniac^ nitrons  selenites,  common  amviotnac  and  fix6d  ammo- 
niac. We  find  all  these  salts  in  the  juice  of  vegetables  ;  a  proof 
that  they  pass  into  the  plant  along  with  the  water. 

From  numerous  well  conducted  experiments,  it  appears  that 
a  MUCILAGE,  produced  by  the  decomposition  of  vegetable  and 
animal  recrements,  constitutes  the  food,  or  aliment  of  plants. 
This  mucilage  is  formed  from  stable  manure  ;  from  rain  water 
putrefied,  from  dew,  as  well  as  from  dead  animals,  and  vegeta- 
bles. But  mucilaginous  juices  are  of  two  kinds;  one,  when 
dissolved  in  water,  forms  a  sort  of  jelly,  and  is  an  immediate 
aliment :  the  other  forms  a  gummy,  or  rather  saccharine  liquid, 
and  must  putrefy  before  it  can  become  a  proper  food  or 
manure. 

To  reconcile  the  doctrine  taught  by  some,  that  salt  is  the  ac- 
tive principle  in  manures,  it  should  be  remembered  that  putre- 
faction has  tioo  stages  ;  that  the  first  converts  animal  and  vege- 
table substances  into  a  mucilage  ;  and  the  second  converts  that 
mucilage  mto  one  or  more  species  of  salt. 

As  mucilaginous  substances  were  known  to  invigorate  roots, 
by  affording  them  good  nourishment,  it  was  natural  for  agri- 
culturists not  enlightened  by  chemistry,  to  infer  tliats/ee;^/??^ 
seeds  in  mucilaginous,  or  oleaginous  liquors  would  increase 
their  powers  of  vegetation ;  especially  if  a  portion  of  nitre,  com- 
mon salt,  and  lime  were  added.  This  opinion  prevailed  among 
the  ancients,  as  we  learn  from  Pliny,  and  is  also  recommended 
by  Lord  Bacon.  A  belief  in  the  efficacy  of  the  fructifying  li- 
quors still  prevails  in  many  parts  of  Europe,  notwithstanding 
Duhamel  in  France,  and  Dr.  A.  Hunter  in  England,  have  ex- 
posed their  futility. 

Dr.  Hunter  assures  us,  that  he  sprouted  all  kinds  of  grain  in 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  45 

a  variety  of  "  steeps.'"  so  called  in  England ;  and  always  found 
that  the  radicle  and  germ  of  the  embryo  plant  never  appeared 
so  healthy,  as  when  sprouted  by  pure  water.  He  tells  us  that 
he  constantly  observed  that  steeps  containing  nitre,  sea-salt,  and 
lime,  rendered  tlie  radicle  and  germ  yellow  and  sickly.  He 
then  steeped  a  variety  of  seed  in  broth,  as  coming  nearer  to  the 
nature  of  the  mucilage  beforementioned,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
put  an  equal  number  of  the  seeds  in  pure  water.  The  result 
was.  that  the  radicle  and  germ,  produced  by  the  broth,  were 
weaker,  and  less  healthy  than  those  sprouted  by  simple  water. 
Here  the  scientific  agriculturists  have  been  led  from  the  path 
of  truth  and  nature,  by  following  some  erroneous  notions  of  the 
physicians,  who  conceive,  that  if  they  give  their  weak,  emaci- 
ated, hectic  patients  milk,  broth,  or  jellies,  they  will  pass  as  such 
into  the  blood  vessels,  without  giving  any  labor  or  trouble  to 
the  debilitated  organs  of  digestion  ;  not  considering  that  milk, 
for  example,  is  first  hardened  in  the  stomach,  by  the  coagulating 
property  of  its  internal  coat,  into  a  curd,  and  then  gradually 
digested,  atid,  in  a  degree  animalized,  before  it  enters  the  blood 
vessels  ;  and  these  messes  occasion  more  trouble  to  the  stomach 
than  a  piece  of  beef.  The  milk  which  nourishes  the  embryo 
plant,  is  as  far  distant  from  the  steeps  used  by  Dr.  Hunter,  as 
eggs  and  milk  are  from  the  animalized  lymph  in  the  blood 
vessels.  The  same  philosophical  physician  proves  that  the 
opinion  is  erroneous  which  is  entertained  by  some  gardeners 
and  farmers,  that  small  thin  sfrain  may  be  so  impregnated  by 
steeps,  as  to  make  them  equal,  in  vegetative  force,  to  the  largest. 
He  found,  by  repeated  experiments,  that  the  largest  and  plump- 
est seeds,  from  the  same  heap,  were  superior  in  goodness  to  the 
small,  thin  ones,  though  steeped  ever  so  carefully. 

If  what  we  have  said  of  the  office  of  the  seed  lobes,  be  just, 
that  the  farina,  or  meal  of  which  they  are  composed,  is  convert- 
ed into  milk;  that  it  serves  to  nourish  the  infantile  plant  until 
its  roots  are  lars-eenouofh  to  imbibe  mucilaffinous  food  from  the 
earth,  it  follows,  that  the  vegetative  powers  of  seed  will  be  in 
proportion  to  the  quantity  of  iheir  mealy  substance.  If  so,  then 
it  will  remain  an  established  truth,  that  plump  seeds,  j^laced  at 
a  just  depth,  in  a  good  soil,  and  at  a  j^^^oper  season,  will 
never  disappoint  the  gardener. 

From  the  preceding  doctrine  it  also  follows,  that  the  food  of 
plants,  or  manures,  are  of  tiao  kinds ;  the  one  adds  nourish- 
ment to  the  soil ;  such  as  all  animal,  and  other  putrescible  sub- 
stances, from  which  a  mucilage  is  formed:  the  other  gives  no 
nourishment  to  the  soil  ;  hni  forces  it,  by  agitating  and  prepar- 
ing the  nourishment  already  there.  Hence  we  see  how  sub- 
stances, of  opposite  natures,  contribute  to  the  growth  of  vegeta- 
bles— putrescent  animal  substances  on  one  hand ;  and  hme, 
marie,  and  plaster  of  Paris  on  the  other. 


46  THE    THOMSONIAN 

PLANTS    PASS   INTO    EACH   OTHER   BY 
DECOMPOSITION. 

"  And  so  each  part  returns  when  bodies  die, 

What  came  from  earth  to  earth,  what  from  the  sky 

Dropt  down,  ascends  again,  and  mounts  on  high. 

For  Death  doth  not  destroy  but  disunite 

The  seeds,  and  change  their  order,  and  their  site: 

Then  makes  new  combinations,  whence  arise 

In  bodies  all  those  great  varieties 

Of  shape  and  color."  Creech's  Translation. 

Every  thing  generated  by  nature,  or  made  by  art,  is  generated 
or  made  out  of  something  else  ;  and  this  something  else  is  call- 
ed its  substance,  or  matter.  But  there  can  be  no  change  of 
one  thing  into  another,  where  the  two  changing  beings  do  not 
participate  the  same  matter.  Hence  were  there  not  a  conge- 
niality between  the  food  and  the  plant,  and  the  food  and  the 
animal,  these  two  organized  bodies  could  not  be  nourished; 
but  the  material  imbibed,  would  operate  as  a  medicine,  instead 
of  being  assimilated  as  an  aliment. 

Whoever  attends  closely  to  the  operations  of  nature  will  be 
convinced,  that  every  recent  production,  whether  vegetable  or 
animal,  that  daily  occurs,  is  not  absolutely  a  fresh  creation,  an 
evocation,  or  calling  of  something  out  of  nothing  :  for  that  is 
impossible.  ^'- Ex  nihilo  nihil  Jit. ^^  What  then  is  it.  'Tis  a 
change,  or  a  mutation  of  son)ething  which  before  existed. 
Every  thing  around  us  is  in  motion.  No  terrestrial  thing  is 
stationary.  On  every  earthly  thing  mutability  is  written  ;  and 
substances  of  every  kind,  either  immediately^  or  intermediate' 
ly  pass  into  one  another  ;  and  reciprocal  deaths,  dissolutions 
and  digestions  support,  by  turns,  all  substances  out  of  each 
other. 

We  have  said  that  every  living  thing,  or  organized  being,  de- 
rives its  origin  from  an  e^^.^  or  seed  ;  and  this  doctrine  maybe 
extended  beyond  the  objects  of  sight.  When  tiie  Supreme 
Creator,  says  the  eloquent  Count  Bnffon.  formed  the_^r5^  in- 
dividuals of  each  species  of  vegetables  and  animals,  he  gave  a 
certain  degree  of  animation  to  what  has  been  called  "  the  dust 
of  the  earth  f^  by  infusing  into  it  a  greater,  or  smaller  quantity 
of  living  organic  particles,  or  seeds,  which  infinilessimally 
small  seeds,  or  particles  are  indestructible,  and  common  to  every 
organized  being.  These  particles,  or  original  seeds,  pass  from 
body  to  body,  and  are  equally  the  cause  of  life,  nutrition  and 
growth.  When  an  organized  body  dies,  the  organic  particles 
survive,  for  death  has  no  power  over  them,  but  they  circulate 
through  the  universe,  pass  into  other  beings,  producing  life  and 
nourishment.  A  growing  vegetable  receives  these  invisible 
seeds,  or  organic  particles  from  the  earth,  from  water,  and  from 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  47 

the  air  ;  and  their  reception  perfects  the  plant.  A  quadruped 
receives  the  plant  into  its  stomach  for  food  ;  when  its  digestive 
powers  destroy  its  vegetative  life,  should  any  be  remaining,  and 
then  the  digesting  apparatus  animalizes  the  vegetable,  and  gra- 
dually converts  it  into  the  nature,  and  substance  of  the  creature. 
And  when  this  animal  dies,  his  constituent  particles  fly  off  in 
vapour  :  these  are  absorbed  by  the  growing  plant  with  avidity, 
they  being  its  appropriate  food  ;  and  this  absorption  of  putrid 
vapour  causes  them  to  grow,  and  to  flourish  ;  and  thus  do  ani- 
mals and  vegetables  mutually  nourish  and  support  each  other; 
so  that  what  was  yesterday  grass,  is  to  day  part  of  a  sheep,  and 
tomorrow  becomes  part  of  a  man. 

From  the  foregoing  doctrine  may  be  deduced  the  true  theory 
of  the  action  of  manures  ;  or  thr3  sustentation  of  a  plant  by  its 
appropriate  food.  This  is  the  corner  stone  in  the  foundation 
of  that  Temple  of  Ceres,  which  we  hope  to  see  reared  in  Ame- 
rica. It  will  moreover  illustrate  that  doctrine  which  teaches, 
that  in  this  world  which  we  inhabit,  there  is  an  universal 
change,  or  mutation  of  all  things  into  all ;  that  nothing  is  lost, 
but  the  sum  total  of  matter  in  the  universe  remains  perfectly 
the  same;  and  that  what  some  consider  as  fresh  creations,  or 
calling  of  something  out  of  nothing,  is  only  a  change  or  muta- 
tion of  something  which  before  existed. 

From  the  experiments  previously  recorded,  we  learn,  that 
there  is  something  in  a  rich  soil  beside  water,  which  contri- 
butes to  the  crrowth  of  a  plant ;  and  it  appears  that  there  is  a 
mucilage  produced  by  the  decomposition  of  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal recrements  which  aflbrds  the  matter,  pabtihmi,  or  proven- 
der for  the  support  of  plants.  If  it  be  inquu'ed  farther — of  what 
is  this  mucilage  composed  'I  We  answer,  that  its  base  is  a  glu- 
ten resembling  the  coagulable  lynvpli  in  our  own  blood  vessels. 
The  oxygenous  principle  concerned  in  germination  v^'ill  be 
spoken  of  hereafter. 

The  growth  of  organized  bodies  is  a  mysterious  process. 
Philosophers  who  believe  with  Lucretius  and  Eiiffon,  in  the 
pre  existence  of  germs,  or  seeds,  organic  particles,  or  7nolecit Ice, 
denominate  them  which  you  will,  have  endeavored  to  sooth  the 
imagination  by  an  hypothesis.  They  have  supposed  that  these 
very  subtle  germs,  or  seeds  of  things,  were  merely  susceptible 
of  life  by  the  application  of  a  due  degree  of  heat ;  and  that  they 
were,  at  the  creation  of  the  world, dispersed  universally  into  all 
parts  of  this  terraqueous  globe,  that  are  accessible  to  air,  and  to 
light ;  so  that  they  are  in  the  waters,  as  well  as  in  the  earth. 

So  that  the  production  of  vegetables,  or  any  other  organized 
body  is  only  a  dissemination  of  what  before  existed.  They 
grew  or  unfolded  themselves  only  when  they  fell  into  a  proper 
matrix,  or  nidus,  adapted  by  nature  to  their  support  and  growth. 


48  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Thus  for  example,  if  the  eggs  of  certain  insects  fall  on  my 
writing  desk,  thev  perish:  because  the  cloth  which  covers  it, 
is  not  the  proper  nidus,  or  matrix  for  them;  but  if  they  are  de- 
posited on  a  piece  of  cheese,  that  beins:  their  proper  matrix, 
they  soon  become  animated.  This  doctrine  opens  to  our  view 
an  host  of  comforting  facts,  that  banish  entirely  the  dismal  one 
of  equivocal  generation.  Now  we  presume  that  while  a  vege- 
table is  growing  and  flourishing,  it  attracts  and  absorbs  these 
origmal  seeds,  or  moleculse,  from  the  earth,  and  Irom  the  icater, 
and  hom  the  air,  and  that  this  imbibition  is  continued  until  the 
plant  attains  its  full  perfection  ;  and  when  it  has  risen  to  its 
acme,  it  rejects  their  further  admission  into  all  its  parts  ;  and 
therefore  instead  of  being  distributed  as  heretofore  all  over  the 
plant,  they  now  tend  to  the  seed  vessels  only,  and  there  form 
and  perfect  the  seed,  which  increase  very  rapidly  ;  and  become 
an  organic  particle  of  a  larger  size.  Nearly  the  same  process 
takes  place  in  animals. 

To  scrutinize  how  an  organized  body  first  began,  is,  per- 
haps, a  presumptuous  attempt,  but  to  inquire  after  what  man- 
ner, when  once  begun,  they  have  been  continued,  is  a  work 
more  suited  to  human  abilities,  and  is  gratifying  to  the  tower- 
ing faculties  of  reason,  and  honorable  to  religion  ;  provided  we 
substitute  for  the  disconsolate  doctrine  of  blind  and  vague 
chance,  conspicuous  in  Lucretius,  that  of  an  intelligent,  and 
sorereign  Creator  and  Legislator  of  the  universe,  the  Al- 
mighty Director,  and  merciful  Controller  of  that  never  ceasing 
change,  or  circulation,  through  which  every  thing  on  this 
evanescent  globe  is  doomed  to  pass. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  appears  that  a  seed,  the  garden 
bean,  for  example,  is  a  body  regularly  organized,  and  arranged 
into  a  system  of  vessels,  glands  and  membranes  ;  and  that  it  is 
in  a  degree,  alive  ;  so  far  at  least,  as  to  be  in  a  state,  or  fitness 
to  be  acted  upon  by  certain  external  agents,  which  agents  are, 
fire,  air,  and  water,  or  to  speak  more  correctly,  a  certain  vivi- 
fying principle,  in  the  air,  and  in  the  water,  called  oxygen, 
which  is  the  very  spirit  of  fire  and  flame.  This  oxygenous 
principle  lies  in  a  dormant  state  in  the  hen's  e^.^,  until  it  is  a- 
wakened  by  fire,  or  caloric,  which  combining  with  it,  expands, 
and  agitates  the  subtle  fluids,  and  the  very  minute  vessels  of 
the  egg,  so  that  the  wheel  of  life  begins  to  oscillate  ;  and  then 
slowly  to  rotate  ;  and  at  length,  the  membranes  thicken  and  all 
the  parts  gradually  unfold  themselves:  the  same  thing  takes 
place  in  the  seed,  or  bean,  when  placed  in  the  earth. 

But  we  cannot  advance  with  confidence  a  step  fiirther  with- 
out some  knowledge  of  the  properties  ofthe  wonderful  affent/re; 
which  alike  animates  and  sustains  the  great  system  ofthe  world, 
and  the  diminutive  system  in  a  seed.    What  shall  we  say  on  this 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  49 

subtile  subject  ?  Fire  or  caloric  by  a  gentle  agitation  enlivens  all 
entire  organized  bodies,  and  conducts  tliem  by  slow  degrees  to 
their  destined  perfection.  It  foments  the  embryo  plant  in  the 
seed,  and  the  miniature  branch  in  the  bud.  But  fire  illudes 
inquiry  by  its  being  totally  invisible  ;  for  it  becomes  visible  only 
when  it  borrows  a  body  to  appear  in.  It  seems  secretly  to  unite 
itself  to  an  inflammable  something,  and  when  united  with  this 
inexplicable  principle,  it  enters  into  the  composition  of  other 
bodies.  But  a  mind  that  has  scarcely  ceased  vibratinor  between 
the  Priestlian  doctrine  of  p/ilogistou,  and  the  Lavoisieriau  doc- 
trine o(  oxi/nrt'i',  feels  the  utmost  diffidence  in  speaking  of  a 
subject  in  which  a  Bacon,*  a  INewton,  and  a  Boerhaave,  a 
Priestly,  and  a  Lavoisier,  have  all  guessed  ditierently. 
The  Botanist  ceases  to  wonder  that  sensible  nations,  not  bless- 
ed with  a  revelation  from  heaven,  have  worshipped  the  sun,  or 
a  flame  of  fire,  as  the  Deity.  He  believes  that  this  vivifying 
something  called  ^/-e,  or  caloric,!  fills  the  immense  space  of  the 
whole  universe,  pervades  all  bodies,  and  actuates  every  parti- 
cle of  matter  ;  and  that  by  it  the  phenomena  of  magnetism,  fire 
and  light  are  produced ;  and  that  on  it  the  various  and  aston- 
ishing phenomena  of  vegetation  and  animation,  depend.  He 
moreover  believes  that  the  Sun  is  the  efficient  cause  of  the  mo- 
tions of  this  fluid  ;  and  that  the  various  phenomena  of  our  sys- 
tem, are  the  eflects  of  these  motions  ;  but  the  modus  operandi 
of  this  anima  mundi  is,  like  its  great  Author,  past  finding  out! 

Let  us  turn  from  this  difficult  subject  to  one  that  is  more 
within  the  management  of  human  abilities.  It  appears  from 
experiments  that  oxygen  gives  seeds  their  first  determination 
to  germinate  ;  just  as  the  same  vivifying  principle  first  excites 
the  movements  of  life  in  a  bird's  egg.  Old  seeds,  that  would 
not  germinate,  even  in  the  most  favorable  soil  and  situation, 
have  been  made  to  vegetate,  by  sprinkling  the  earth,  in  which 
they  were  planted,  wUh  Avater,  to  which  was  added  some  oxy- 
genated muriatic  acid.  Garden  cresses,  thus  treated,  germi- 
nated in  six  hours  ;  while  those,  treated  with  common  water, 
required  thirty-six  to  produce  the  same  effect.  Metalic  oxydes, 
or  calces  of  ores,  and  burnt  clay,  are  good  manures,  because 
tliey  abound  with  oxygen. 

Whoever  takes  an  extensive  view  of  those  slow  operations 
tliat  are  going  forward  on  the  globe  which  we  inhabit,  will  per- 

•  Lord  Bacon  pronounced  heat  to  be  the  effect  of  an  intestine  motion,  or  mu- 
tual collision  of  the  particles  of  the  body  heated;  an  expansive  undulatory 
motion  in  the  minute  particles  of  the  body,  by  which  they  tend  with  somo 
rapiditj'  towards  the  circumference,  and,  at  the  same  time,  inclined  a  little 
upwards. 

t  The  chemists  of  the  present  day  use  the  word  heat  to  express  the  sensation, 
and  have  adopted  the  word  caloric  to  express  the  cause  of  the  sensation  of  heat. 


60  THE    THOMSOIS'IAN 

ceive  that  the  decay  of  animals  increases  the  quantity  of  such 
matter  as  is  fitted  to  become  the  food  of  vegetables,  and  vice 
versa.  Calcareous  earth  is  produced  by  the  exuviae,  recrements 
or  remains  of  animals,  especially  their  shells,  Nvhich  shells,  left 
at  the  bottom  of  the  ocean,  until  they  have  become  wonderfully 
accumulated,  and  since  elevated  by  submarine  fires,  constitute, 
at  this  day,  those  immeasurable  strata  of  chalk,  marble,  and 
lime-stone,  which  arc  found  here  and  there,  throughout 
the  earth.  The  strata  incumbent  on  these,  consisting  of  coal, 
iron,  clay,  and  marie,  are  principally  products  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom.  Thus  are  all  tliese  strata  of  materials  fabricated, 
circulated,  and,  in  the  course  of  countless  ages,  refabricated, 
and  recirculated  by  the  procedure  of  vegetable  and  animal  life, 
and  decay.  Hence  may  we  not  conclude  with  the  modern  Lii^ 
cretins,  that  vegetables  and  animals,  during  their  growth,  in- 
crease the  quantity  of  matter  which  is  fit,  or  capable  of  being 
fitted  for  the  food  of  each  other  ;  while  they  elaborate  a  part  of 
the  materials  of  which  they  consist,  from  the  simple  elements 
of  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  carbon,  phosphorus,  and  ox^^gen,  into 
which  modern  chemistry  has  resolved  them  by  analysis  7 

This  transmutation  of  animal  to  vegetative  nature;  and  of 
the  vegetable  again  to  animal,  may  be  rendered  perhaps  more 
intelligible  by  the  following  example  from  Darwin.  In  animal 
nutrition,  the  organic  matter  of  dead  animals  and  vegetables, 
taken  into  the  stomach  is  there  decomposed  ;  and  the  most  nu- 
tritive parts  are  absorbed  by  the  lacteals,  and  so  become  part  of 
the  creature.  In  vesretable  nutrition,  the  organic  matter  of  dead 
animals  and  vegetables  suffers  likewise  decomposition,  and  un- 
dergoes new  combinations,  on,  or  beneath  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  while  the  more  nutritious  parts  are  absorbed  by  the  roots 
of  the  plant  in  contact  with  it. 

THE  SEED  OF  PLANTS. 

We  have  said  that  there  are  few  little  things  in  nature  more 
truly  surprising  than  a  seed  ;  that  each  seed  was  a  system,  or 
complete  whole,  wrought  up  into  a  narrow  compass,  and  re- 
taining a  living  principle. 

The  ancients,  from  the  scarcity  of  books,  and  some  other 
causes,  had  their  attention  less  divided  than  the  moderns.  They 
therefore  viewed  Nature  with  keener  eyes,  and  more  concen- 
trated attention,  than  those  who  have  lived  since  the  multipli- 
cation of  books  by  the  discovery  of  the  art  of  printing.  They 
were  of  opinion  that  every  thing,  even  the  great  globe  itself, 
sprang  from  an  Egg;  which  egg,  their  poets  say,  was  hatched 
by  Nox,  night,  or  obscurity;  or  something  behind  a  dark  veil, 
which  they  could  not  see  through. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  51 

Some,  less  diffident  than  the  sagacious  ancients,  imagine  that 
they  have  penetrated  this  veil,  and  illumined  the  obscurity  by 
saying  that  fire  is  the  primary  cause  of  the  development  of  a 
seed.  Be  it  so.  But  what  do  we  mean  by  ^re,  or  ca/oric  ?  Is 
it  here  any  thing  more  than  a  mere  word  denoting  the  last  term 
of  our  analytical  results?  We  moderns  have  decomposed  sub- 
stances, which  under  the  ancient  doctrines  of  philosophy,  had 
passed  for  elements,  not  susceptible  of  decomposition.  We  have 
been  able  to  dissect  Light,  analyze  Air,  and  decompose  Wa- 
ter, and  have  discovered  substances  which  all  previous  inves- 
tigation had  found  too  subtle  lor  the  detection  of  the  senses; 
but  we  have  not  yet  detected  the  essence  of  fire.  When  there- 
fore, we  attempt  to  investigate  the  primary  motion  in  seeds,  we 
should  not  stop  at  the  visible  effects,  but  push  forward  to  the 
invisible  cause.  Thus  when  we  speak  of  the  motive  powers  of 
magnetism,  or  electricity,  we  should  strive  to  raise  our  minds 
beyond  these  visible  effects  to  the  cause  of  them.  In  such  an 
intense  view  of  things,  we  must  exclude  the  word  spontaneity 
from  the  book  of  Na.ture.  We  must  not  grant  it  even  to  fire, 
which  constitutes  fluidity. 

If  proud  science  be  humbled  by  speculations  of  this  sort,  the 
agriculturist  may  indulge  his  pride  by  considerations  of  an- 
other kind  ;  by  reflecting  that  he  is,  in  some  degree,  a  ])artaker 
in  the  power  and  privilege  of  the  Creator  ;  who  has  enabled 
him  to  rear  from  a  few  organized  particles,  a  field  of  vegetables, 
a  variegated  garden,  or  a  forest  of  trees.  Man  alone,  says  the 
chemist  C/iaptal,  possesses  the  rare  advantage  of  knowing  a 
part  of  the  laws  of  nature;  of  preparing  events;  of  predicting 
results ;  of  producing  effects  at  pleasure ;  of  removmg  what- 
ever is  noxious  ;  of  appropriating  whatever  is  beneficial  ;  and 
of  composing  substances,  which  nature  herself  never  forms : 
in  this  point  of  view,  himself  a  creator,  he  appears  to  partake 
with  the  Supreme  in  the  most  eminent  of  his  prerogatives  ! 

From  this  digression  we  turn  again  into  the  path,  whence 
we  musingly  wandered  ;  which  path  is  to  lead  us  to  a  full  view 
of  that  Neniorale  Temylum^  which  christian  philosophy  con- 
secrates to  the  honor  of  the  Parent  of  Universal  Nature  ! 

Of  the  A7iatomy  of  a   Vegetable. 

The  principal  vessels  of  plants  are  of  two  kinds,  tubes  and 
cells.  The  tubes  run  from  the  roots  to  the  different  parts  of 
the  plant  in  separate  bundles,  communicating  with  each  other, 
but  not  branching  and  joining,  or  anastomosing,  as  in  animals. 
These  tubes  contain  the  sap-juice,  or  chyle  of  the  plant.  When 
immersed  in  a  watery  fluid,  they  fill  themselves  on  the  princi- 
ple, some  suppose,  of  capillary  attraction  ;  but  as  this  principle 
i£  not  yet  clearly  settled  among  philosophers,  we  are  inclined  to 


52  THE    THOMSONIAN 

believe  with  Fordi/ce,  that  it  is  from  a  power  similar  to  the  mus- 
cular power  in  animals,  by  which  this  absorption,  and  all  other 
motions  of  vegetables  are  performed.  These  tubes  terniinate  in 
cells,  which  cells  contain  the  peculiar  juices  of  the  plant. 

In  the  root  of  a  plant  certain  cells  surround  the  tubes  ;  which 
are  opened  only  at  the  extreme  point  of  them  ;  and  fluids  can- 
not be  absolved  any  where  else.  The  tubes  are  not  simply 
open  at  the  end  of  these  radicle  fibres ;  but  there  is  a  particu- 
lar structure,  or  configuration,  which  adapts  ihem  to  the  im- 
bibition of  fluids  ;  so  that  if  the  ends  of  all  the  fibres  of  the 
roots  of  any  vegetable  be  cut  off,  the  growth  of  that  vegetable 
is  stopped  until  a  fresh  configuration  is  formed.  As  roots  can 
only  absorb  nutriment  from  the  very  points  of  their  fibres,  the 
configuration,  just  mentioned,  defends  the  absorbing  tubes  from 
a  superabundance  of  water.  The  roots  of  some  plants  will 
bear  without  injury  a  greater  quantity  of  moisture  than  others. 
Those  of  aquatic  plants  have  a  peculiarly  firm  structure,  for 
defending  them  from  the  etfects  of  long  maceration. 

LiNN.Eus  has  not  rejected  the  idea  of  certain  philosophers, 
who  defined  a  plant  to  be  an  inverted  animal.  He  considers 
its  roots  as  its  lacteals ;  the  earth  as  its  stomach  ;  the  trunk 
and  branches  the  bones,  and  the  leaves  its  lungs.  There  is, 
however,  this  difierence  between  them;  an  animal  is  an  organ- 
ized body,  or  a  kind  of  hydraulic  machine,  nourished  by  roots, 
or  syphons,  or  in  other  words  the  lacteals  placed  within  him. 
A  plant  is  in  like  manner  an  organized  body,  or  kind  of  hydrau- 
lic machine,  nourished  by  means  of  roots,  made  up  of  lacteal 
vessels,  or  syphons,  placed  on  the  outside  of  it.  Moreover,  is 
not  the  long  cylindrical  absorbent  vessel,  which  runs  from  the 
roots  of  trees  up  to  the  caudex  of  each  bud,  and  which  enters 
at  the  foot  stalk  of  each  leaf  analogous  to  the  thoracic  dtict  n\ 
animals. 

Every  part  of  a  plant  that  is  under  ground  is  not  its  root. 
iSome  ve<reiables,  as  the  onion,  the  tulip,  and  all  the  tribe  of 
lilies,  terminate  in  a  large  bulb.  But  this  bulb  is  not  the  root ; 
but  the  hyhernacvla,  or  winter  quarters  of  the  vegetable  ens. 
It  is  a  subterraneous  bud,  inclosing  the  embryo  plant,  and  pro- 
tecting it  from  the  destructive  efllects  of  frost.  The  radicles, 
or  stringy  appendages,  proceeding  from  the  bulb,  as  in  the 
onion  and  tulip,  are  in  fact  the  roots  ;  becaiise  they  alone  con- 
tain those  absorbing  tubes,  through  which  nutriment  is  imbibed 
from  the  earth.  The  Marquis  de  St.  Simon,  however,  contro- 
verts fhis  doctrine;  and  imputes  the  absorbing  power  to  the 
middle  part  of  the  bulb.  Tlie  absorbents  in  a  plantdifler  from 
those  in  animals  in  the  facility' with  which  they  carry  fluids 
either  way.  Invert  a  plant,  and  its  roots,  now  in  the  air,  will 
produce  leaves  ;  and  its  branches,  now  in  the  ground,  will  shoot 
forth  into  roots  ;  or  rather  radicles,  or  ligneous  absorbents. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  53 

The  roots  of  plants  show  a  remarkable  instinct  in  searching 
for  food,  by  creeping  towards  collections  of  water,  and  into  a 
rich  soil.  The  roots  of  plants,  says  Bishop  Watso7i,  seem  to 
turn  away  with  a  kind  of  abhorrence,  from  whatever  they  meet 
with,  which  is  hurtful  to  them;  and  to  desert  their  ordinary 
direction  and  to  tend  with  a  kind  of  irresistible  impulse  to- 
wards collections  of  water,  placed  within  their  reach.  Thus 
the  willow  creeps  into  our  wells,  after  water;  and  has  been 
known  to  form  a  mat,  or  netting  across  them.  The  Lomhardy 
poplars,  which  now  ornament  most  of  the  cities,  and  many  of 
the  villages  in  America,  have  very  extensive  roots,  rnnning 
horizontally  at  a  small  distance  from  the  surface  of  the  ground. 
They  injure  our  gardens,  and  damage  our  pavements  in  the 
streets,  in  search  of  water,  or  of  air.  This  growing  evil,  will 
perhaps  compel  us  to  eradicate  these  handsome  trees  from  the 
streets,  which  they  at  present  adorn. 

In  summing  up  all  that  has  been  said,  it  appears  that  a  seed 
is  the  sexual  offspring  of  a  plant,  containing  not  only  the  rudi- 
ments of  the  future  vegetable,  but  also  a  quantity  of  aliment  laid 
up  witliin  its  membranes  for  its  early  nourishment.  A  whitish 
substance  of  a  delicate  nature  forms  the  substance  of  the  seed. 
Small  vessels,  which  proceed  from  the  germ  are  in  every  part 
of  this  substance,  dividing,  and  subdividing  it  every  where. 
After  the  seed  has  laid  in  the  ground,  moistened  and  warmed 
to  a  certain  degree,  it  gently  expands,  and  then  begins  to  shoot 
forth;  the  radicle  down  wards,  and  the  plumula  upwards.  The 
warmth,  which  had  penetrated  its  outward  folds,  operates  on 
their  moisture,  and  dissolves  the  mealy  substance  of  the  seed 
lobe,  and  mixes  with  it.  Of  this  mixture  is  formed  a  kind  of 
milk,  which  being  conveyed  to  the  infantile  plant  by  a  con- 
course of  vessels,  terminating  in  a  little  protuberance  or  papilla 
furnishes  it  with  nourishment,  adapted  to  its  tender  age,  and  ex- 
treme delicacy. 

By  these  means  tlie  radicle,  or  incipient  root  unfolds  itself, 
and  increases  in  bulk  and  extent  every  day.  In  a  short  time, 
it  seems  to  become,  like  the  chicken  in  the  eg^,  sensible  of  too 
close  confinement,  and  it  makes  an  efibrt  to  come  forth.  The 
small  orifice,  v/hich  may  be  observed  on  the  outside  of  the  bean, 
and  every  other  seed,  facilitates  its  egress.  Then  the  radicle 
creeps  downwards  into  the  earth,  and  soon  af\er  the  jjlumula 
stretches  upwards  to  taste  the  air,  while  the  seed  lobes,  emulat- 
ing leaves,  serve  as  shields  to  defend  the  infant  plant  from  harm. 
As  the  plant  acquires  size  and  strength,  these  are  no  longer 
useful,  but  dropping  off,  perish;  and  from  this  time  forward  the 
plant  depends  for  its  coarser  nourishment  on  certain  fluids  in 
the  earth  ;  and  on  more  subtle  and  refined  ones  from  the  atmos- 
phere.    For  it  is  with  plants  as  with  ourselves,  while  our  sto- 


64  THE    THOMSONIAN 

machs  are  digesting  coarser  food,  our  lungs  are  digesting  air  ; 
so  that  while  plants  are  receiving  mucilage  from  the  earth,  their 
leaves,  or  lungs,  inspire  the  oxygenous,  or  vital  principle  from 
the  atmospi'.ere. 

From  this  view  given  of  the  seed,  and  its  economy,  the  asser- 
tion will  no  longer  appear  strange,  that  the  spacious  oak  once 
existed  in  an  acorn. 


THE  ANATOMY  OF  A  VEGETABLE ;    BEING  THE 

EXAMINATION  OF  A  TRUNK  OF  A  TREE 

FROM  WITHOUT  INWARDS. 

The  pulpy  acorn,  e'er  it  swells,  contains 
Tlis  oak's  vast  branches  in  its  milky  veins. 

Grain  within  grain,  successive  harvests  dwell, 
And  boundless  forests  slumber  in  a  shell. 

We  left  the  infantile  plant  struggling  for  life,  and  extending 
its  roots,  which  contain  those  vessels  that  answer  to  the  lacte- 
als  m  animals,  in  order  to  imbibe  nutriment  from  its  mother 
earth  ;  while  the  pluimda,  or  little  stem  and  leaf  were  aspiring 
to  drink  the  vital  air,  which  soon  changes  it  from  a  yellowish 
white  to  a  beautiful  green  color.  That  leaves  do  not  acquire 
this  splendid  green  before  they  enjoy  the  light  of  heaven,  is 
known  to  every  one  who  has  noticed  plants  growing  in  dark 
cellars,  or  covered  over  with  boards,  or  otherwise  secluded  from 
the  sun's  rays.*  We  shall  resume  this  subject  when  we  speak 
of  the  office  of  the  leaves  in  cleansing  a  foul  atmosphere  from 
putrid  exhalations. 

In  cutting  the  trunk  of  a  tree  from  the  circumference  to  the 
centre,  the  instrument  passes  through  seven  distinct  parts,  in 
the  following  order : 

I.  The  Epidermis. 
II.  The  Cortex. 

III.  The  Liber. 

IV.  The  Alburnum. 

V.  The  Vascular  Series. 
VI.  The  Lignum. 
VII.  The  Medulla,  or  Pilh. 

Under  which  of  these  heads  must  we  place  the  silver  grain, 
or  those  bricjht  radii  which  pass  from  the  centre  to  the  circum- 
ference? Are  these  anything  more  than  mechanical  braces  of 
the  ligneous  part  of  the  tree,  a  sort  of  dovetailing  to  preserve 
the  limb  from  breaking  into  concentric  circles,  on  suffering  vio- 

•  The  operation  called  bleaching,  or  etiolation,  renders  plants  less  acrid, 
and  is  usually  performed  on  endive  and  celery. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  55 

lent  flexures  in  high  winds  and  storms  ?  Or  do  they  contain  the 
air  vessels,  passing-  from  the  epidermis  to  the  centre  ? 

The  Epidermis  is  a  deUcate,  but  firm,  transparent  mem- 
brane, covering  the  plant  every  where.  It  is  impenetrable  to 
water,  and,  like  the  cuticle  of  the  human  body,  is  sooner  ele- 
vated in  the  form  of  a  blister,  than  destroyed  by  any  corrosive 
fluid.  The  epidermis  of  vegetables  is,  as  in  the  human  scarf- 
skin,  a  single  membrane,  although  Duhamel  says  that  he  count- 
ed six  in  the  birch  tree,  and  our  countryman,  Dr.  Barton,  dis- 
tinguished twice  that  number.  Notwithstanding  this  respecta- 
ble authority,  we  apprehend,  that  both  these  naturalists  were 
deceived.  We  admit,  as  a  well  established  opinion,  that  the 
epidermis,  or  cuticle  of  a  tree,  is  renewed  every  year  ;  and  that 
where  we  discover  several  layers,  they  are  only  the  old  ones, 
beneath  the  recent  one.  Some  trees,  says  Darwin,  have  as 
many  cuticles,  as  they  are  years  old  ;  others  cast  them  more 
easily,  as  a  snake  casts  its  skin.  Hence  the  service  of  currying 
or  scratching  trees.* 

The  use  of  the  epidermis  is  to  protect  the  ultimate  ramifica- 
tions of  the  aerial  and  aqueous  vessels;  those  minute  vessels 
by  which  they  are  enabled  to  absorb  aeriform  fluidities,  which 
are  needful  to  the  life,  health,  and  beauty  of  the  plant. 

On  removing  the  epidermis, 

The  Cortex^  or  hide  of  the  plant,  as  the  word  imports,  ap- 
pears. This  is  the  part  known  to  every  one  by  the  name  of 
bark.  It  consists  of  vessels,  glands,  and  Utricles^  which  are 
little  bags  or  cells,  inosculated,  contorted,  interwoven  and  com- 
pacted, in  such  a  manner  as  to  render  it  very  difiicult  of  de- 
monstration. It  is  among  this  compounded  structure  of  the 
cortex,  or  bark,  that  the  work  of  digestion  is  performed;  and 
the  product  of  this  digestion  is  conveyed  through  the  whole  ve- 
getable, till  at  length  the  leaf  and  the  flower,  the  first  the  lungs^ 
the  last  the  face,  mouth  and  entrails,  perfect  the  plant.  It  \sm 
the  bark  of  the  plant  that  the  medicinal  virtues  principally  re- 
side. In  this  reticular  substance  are  found  the  oils,  resins^ 
gums,  balsams,  and  more  occult  virtues,  so  precious  to  the 
healing  art.  The  Peruvian  bark  and  the  cinnamon  have 
stamped  celebrity  on  this  part  of  vegetable. 

After  the  bark  is  stripped  off",  we  discover  the  third  integu- 
ment, namely  the  liher  ;  which  consists  of  laminae,  or  plates, 
bound  together  by  a  cellular  matter,  which,  when  dissolved  by 

*  It  is  said,  if  you  continue  to  scratch  the  curvature  of  a  crooked  tree,  it  will 
in  time  become  straight.  It  resembles  in  this  respect  a  contracted  leg  or  anrty 
which  is  sometimes  restored  by  friction.  We  should  be  careful  not  to  scratch 
trees  that  exude  a  gum,  such  as  peach  trees.  An  insect  will  sometimes  injure 
the  bark  of  the  peach  tree  near  the  surface  of  the  ground,  which  occasions  aa 
exudation  of  gum,  and  soon  after  the  tree  becomes  sickly  and  at  length  dies. 


56  THE    THOMSO>fIAN 

maceration  in  water,  detaches  these  plates  or  coatings  from  each 
other ;  when  they  resemble  the  leaves  of  the  books  of  the  an- 
cients ;  whence  arose  the  name  of  Zi6er.  The  liber  is  softer 
aixl  more  juicy  than  the  cortex.  It  grows,  however,  harder 
and  harder,  until  it  assumes  the  quality  and  name  of  lignum, 
or  wood. 

Between  the  liber  and  lignum  is  interposed  a  peculiar  sub- 
stance called  alburnum  by  Linnceus,  blea  by  the  British,  are- 
bier  by  the  French,  and  sap-ivood  by  the  American  yeomanry. 
It  is  whiter  and  softer  than  either  the  cortex  or  liber.  It  is  not 
at  all  times  easy  to  distinguish  between  the  alburnum  and  the 
wood,  the  structure  being  similar.  Indeed,  the  alburnum  ap- 
pears to  be  but  the  infantile  stage  of  the  wood,  progressing  from 
a  mucilagenous  to  the  adult  state. 

We  have  said  that  the  liber  grows  harder  and  harder  till  it 
assumes  the  quality  and  name  of  lignum;  but  Du  Hamel  says 
that  in  certain  circumstances  the  wood  is  capable  of  producing 
new  bark,  A  cherry  tree  stripped  of  its  bark  exuded  from  the 
whole  surface  of  its  wood,  in  little  points,  a  gelatinous  matter, 
which  gradually  extended  ov^er  the  whole,  and  became  a  new 
bark;  under  which  a  laj'^er  of  new  wood  was  speedily  formed. 
This  gelatinous  substance,  or  matter  of  organization  is  called 
Cambiu?)i,  (from,  I  presume,  the  Italian  word  canibio,  or  cam- 
biere,  to  e.vcha?ige,  or  cominutate^)  which  Mirbel  supposes  to 
produce  the  liber,  or  young  bark;  and  at  the  same  time,  by  a 
peculiar  arrangement  of  the  vascular  parts,  the  alburnum,  or 
new  wood.  Is  this  a  process  similar  to  the  exudation  of  that 
part  ot  our  blood  called  coagulable  lymph  in  consequence  of  in- 
flammation in  the  human  body.?  When,  by  inflammation,  a 
vascular  part  of  the  body  is  roused  to  an  extraordinary  action, 
then  millions  of  vessels  are  called  into  existence,  and  glands 
also,  which  secrete  the  coagulable  lymph,  or  matter  of  organiza- 
tion, which  is  one  link  in  the  chain  of  renovation.  Oris  it  like 
the  exudation  that  repairs  the  broken  shell  of  the  snail  ?  Or 
the  exudation  which  forms  the  callus  that  reunites  a  fractured 
bone. 

Between  the  alburnum  and  the  wood  lies  a  fifth  ring,  or  cir- 
cle of  vessels,  called  the  vascular  series.  Its  structure  is  sim- 
ple, being  a  single  course  of  greenish  vessels,  lodged  between 
two  cellular  membranes.  It  terminates,  says  Dr.  Hunter,  in 
the  neciaria  of  the  flower.  Some  botanists  consider  the  vascu- 
lar series  as  part  of  the  alburnum. 

The  sixth  part  in  order  is  the  lignum,  or  wood,  which  is  the 
most  solid  part  of  the  trunk,  and  is  defined  by  our  great  master 
to  be  the  alburnum  and  liber  of  the  preceding  year,  deprived  of 
their  juice,  hardened  and  firmly  agglutinated.  The  wood  is 
composed  of  concentric  rings.     The  centre  of  these  circles  is 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  57 

generally  observed  to  be  nearer  the  north  than  the  south  side 
of  the  tree. 

On  examining  a  transverse  section  of  a  triinlc.  or  large  limb 
of  a  tree,  an  oak  for  example,  we  can  generally  observe,  that 
the  interior  rings  are  harder  than  the  exterior.  It  is  a  preva- 
lent opinion,  that  one  of  these  rings  is  added  every  year,  and 
that,  regarding  the  number  of  circles,  we  can  ascertain  the  age 
of  the  tree.  Some  have  ventured  to  deny  this  criterion,  al- 
though they  knew  that  Linnaeus  himself  examined  very  aged 
oaks  in  some  of  the  islands  of  the  Baltic,  with  that  principle  for 
his  guide.  This  illustrious  secretary  of  nature  was  persuaded, 
that  he  could  point  out  by  the  ligneous  circle  the  severe  winters 
of  1587,  1687,  and  1709,  as  they  were  thinner  than  the  rest. 
This  circimistance  merits  the  attention  of  our  rural  philoso- 
phers. Who  knows,  but  we  may  hence  form  a  probable  con- 
jecture of  the  age  of  those  surprising  antiquities  discovered  in 
this  new  world,  on  the  banks  of  the  Ohio  and  Muskingum? 

Substantial  as  is  the  wood,  or  ligneous  part  of  the  tree,  it  is 
nevertheless  so  far  from  beinsr  an  essential  part,  that  many 
plants  are  without  it.  The  arundacious  plants,  as  the  reeds 
and  the  grasses,  and  indeed  all  the  graniina,  are  imturally  hol- 
low. How  often  do  we  see  trees  so  internally  decayed  as  to  be 
kept  alive  merely  by  a  vigorous  stale  of  ilie  bark? 

The  seventh  and  last  part  is  the  medulla,  or  jiifh.  This  is 
a  spongy  or  vesicular  substance,  placed  in  the  centre  of  the 
wood,  and  is,  according  to  Linnaeus,  essential  to  the  life  of  the 
vegetable.  In  the  new  production  of  trees  it  consists  of  a  num- 
ber of  oval,  greenish,  moist  bladders,  which  at  length  become 
empty,  dry,  and  spherical,  and  by  degrees  assume  a  whitish 
color.  We  know  but  little  of  the  minute  structure  of  the  pith. 
It  resists  the  tincture  of  the  most  subtle  colorins"  fluids,  and  is  as 
impenetrable  to  water  as  the  pith  of  a  goose  quill.  Ought  we 
to  infer,  that  the  pith  is  destitute  of  vessels?  May  it  not  be 
like  the  most  subtle  parts  of  the  brain  of  animals,  the  vessels  of 
which  elude  the  sharpest  sight,  by  renson  of  their  exility?  In 
plants  which  have  hollow  stems,  the  tube  is  lined  with  pith. 

Linnaeus  attributes  great  importance  to  the  pi(h,  and  asserts, 
after  Bradley,  that  it  gives  birth  to  the  buds.  Some  botanists 
of  the  first  rank  beheve,  that  the  pith  is,  in  a  plant,  what  the 
brain  and  spinal  marrow  are  in  the  inferior  order  of  animals. 
The  pith,  says  Darwin,  appears  to  be  the  first  or  most  essential 
rudiments  of  the  new  plant,  like  the  brain,  spinal  marrow,  and 
medulla  oblongata,  which  is  the  first  visible  part  of  the  figure 
of  every  animal  foetus,  from  the  tadpole  to  mankind.  It  seems, 
however,  that  the  pith  is  not  essential  or  absolutely  necessary 
to  vegetation,  as  we  often  observe  trees  to  live  and  thrive  with- 
out it.     The  guaicum,  or  lignum  vitas,  it  is  said,  has  no  pith. 

5 


69  THE    THOMSONIAN. 

If  the  pith  be  the  brain  of  a  tree,  may  it  not  be  with  some  trees 
as  in  some  animals,  in  which  the  brain  is  not  confined  to  the 
head,  but  spread  all  over  them,  as  in  the  earth  worm  and  po- 
lypus, the  parts  of  which,  though  cut  in  pieces,  live  and  become 
entire  animals?  Some  annnals,  like  some  vegetables,  are  more 
vivacious  than  others.  A  tortoise  will  live  and  crawl  several 
days  after  decapitation  ;  because  his  body  is  replete  with  gang- 
lions, which  are  subordinate  brains,  having  an  innate  energy 
independent  in  some  measure  of  the  capital  portion  in  the  skull. 
After  all,  the  office  of  the  medulla  or  pith  in  vegetables  is  among 
the  desiderata  iti  the  science  of  botany.* 

There  is  no  part  of  the  anatou:iy  of  a  vegetable  involved  in 
more   intricacy  and   uncertainty  than  the  Vascular  System, 
Linnaeus  speaks  of  three  kinds  of  vessels, 
I.  The  Sap  vessels. 

II.  The  Vasa  propria,  or  proper  vessels,  and 

III.  The  Air  vessels  ; 
but  later  botanists  have  increased  their  number  to  seven. 

The  sap  vessels  convey  the  sap  juice  or  chyle  of  the  vegeta- 
ble. They  rise  perpendicularly,  and  pass  principally  through 
and  between  the  wood  and  the  bark ;  and  though  impercepti- 
ble, they  must  pervade  the  other  parts  of  the  plant. 

The  vasa  propria,  proper,  or  peculiar  vessels,  are  so  called 
because  they  contain  the  peculiar  or  specific  secreted  fluids,  as 
the  gum  in  the  peach  tree,  and  the  resin  in  the  fir.  In  these 
vessels  are  found  the  medicinal  qualities  peculiar  to  a  plant. 
The  utricles  are  small  repositories,  which  contain  the  coloring 
matter  of  the  plant.  In  them  the  nutritive  juice  of  the  plant  is 
lodo-ed,  just  as  the  marrow  is  preserved  in  bones,  whence  it  is 
taken  both  in  animals  and  vegetables,  when  they  are  not  sufii- 
ciently  supplied  with  chyliferous  nutriment. 

The  air  vessels  are  called  Irachece,  from  their  resemblance 
to  the  respiratory  organs  of  insects.  They  are  found  in  the 
wood  and  in  the  alburnum,  but  not  in  the  bark.  In  order  to 
detect  them,  you  must  take  a  young  branch  of  a  vine  and  clear 
away  the  bark,  and  then  break,  it  by  drawing  the  two  extremi- 
ties in  opposite  directions,  when  the  air  vessels  may  be  seen  in 
the  form  of  small  cork  screws.  See  engraved  representations 
of  them  in  Grew's  Anatomy  of  Plants,  and  Darwin's  Phyto- 

losria. 

These  tracheae,  or  air  vessels,  carry  other  fluids  beside  air. 
Darwin  says  they  are  absorbent  vessels  of  the  adult  vegetable, 
and  the  umbilical  ones  of  the  embryon  bud. 

•  Some  have  conjectured  that  the  pith  was  a  reservoir  of  moisture,  asjainst 
a.  dry  season,  like  the  deposites  of  marrow  in  the  bones,  or  rather  the  fat  in 
onr  bodies,  and  on  which  it  is  supposed  we  subsist  during  the  emaciating  state 
of  fevers. 


METERIA    MEDICA.  59 

As  to  the  absorbent,  the  excretory,  and  the  secretory  vessels, 
we  shall  speak  of  them  when  we  describe  the  leaves. 

To  the  foregoing  description  of  the  parts  of  a  plant,  should 
be  added  that  which  contemplates  it  as  a  whole.  Linnsus  in 
some  measure  helps  us  to  that  view  of  it,  when  he  says,  that 
the  cortex  of  the  flower  terminates  in  the  calyx;  the  liber  in 
the  PETALS,  or  painted  leaves:  the  lignum  in  the  stamina: 
the  vascular  series  in  the  nectaria  ;    and  the  pith  in  the 

SEEDS. 

It  is  very  diflicult  to  convey  a  clear  idea  of  these  difTerent 
parts  of  a  plant;  we  would  therefore  refer  the  reader  to  Grew's 
admirable  engravings,  copied  after  magnified  specimens  of  va- 
rious parts  of  a  x^egetable,  which,  though  executed  more  than  a 
century  ago.  have  not  been  surpassed. 

Dr.  Greio^nd  Blalpighi  began  their  anatomy  of  plants  about 
the  same  time,  unknown  to  each  other — one  in  England,  the 
other  in  Italy.  Much  praise  is  due  to  the  Italian,  but  more  to 
the  Englishman.  So  finished  are  his  descriptions,  that  he  has 
left  but  little  to  his  successors  but  admiration. 

The  best  solar  and  lucernal  microscopes  of  the  present  day 
serve  to  increase  our  admiration  of  the  accuracy  and  industry 
of  Dr.  Nehemiah  Grew  in  the  anatomy  of  plants.  His  excel- 
lencies are  numerous,  and  his  mistakes  ^e\v.  Darwin  con- 
tends, that  what  Grew  and  Malpighi  called  brorichia,  or  air 
x-essels,  are  really  absorbents;  that  they  have  been  erroneously 
thought  air  vessels,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  arteries  of  the 
human  body  were  supposed  by  the  ancients  to  convey  air,  till 
the  great  Harvey,  by  more  exact  experiments  and  juster  reason- 
ing, evinced  that  they  were  blood  vessels. 

We  are  not  entirely  satisfied  with  the  account  here  given  of 
the  anatomy  of  a  vegetable,  from  the  epidermis  to  the  centre. 
Grew,  Hales,  Da  Hamel,  Linnaeus,  and  Darwin,  with  many 
living  naturalists,  have  examined  the  minute  structure  of  a 
plant,  but  every  one  of  them  has  left  a  wide  field  for  discove- 
ries to  his  successor.  We  in  America  have  not  all  the  means 
for  examining  these  things,  as  have  our  elder  brethren  in  Eu- 
rope. It  is  but  lately  that  we  have  begun  to  construct  micro- 
scopes ;  by  whose  magical  powers  men  have  called  things  that 
are  not  into  existence,  as  well  as  established  the  existence  of 
others  that  were  doubtful. 


60  THE  THOMSONIAN 

FORM  AND  STRUCTURE  OF  PLANTS. 

When  cruder  juices  swell  the  leafy  vein, 
Stint  the  young  germ,  the  tender  blossom  stain  ; 
On  each  lopp'd  shoot  a  foster  scion  bind, 
Pith  press'd  to  pith,  and  rind  applied  to  rind. 
So  shall  the  trunk  with  loftier  crest  ascend, 
And  wide  in  air  robuster  arms  extend, 
Nurse  the  new  buds,  admire  the  leaves  unknown, 
And  blushing  bend  with  fruitage  not  its  own. 

Several  philosophers  distinguished  for  sagacity  and  industry 
have  devoted  a  considerable  portion  of  tiieir  hves  to  the  exam- 
ination of  the  structure  of  plants,  and  to  the  study  of  the  pro- 
cess of  vegetation ;  yet  the  subtile  organization  of  vegetables 
has  baffled  their  sight,  though  armed  with  the  microscope  ;  and 
the  laws  of  vegetation  have  been  but  imperfectly  explored. 
Who  has  been  able  to  discriminate  that  peculiar  organization  in 
each  kind  of  plant  which  gives  the  specific  medicinal  quality  to 
each?  If  matter,  considered  as  mere  matter,  give  not  the  pe- 
culiar qualities  to  bodies,  they  must  result  from  the  different  ar- 
rangement of  the  same  matter  in  diflerent  vegetables.  It  is 
from  the  different  modification  of  vegetable  matter,  wliich  pro- 
duces those  various  and  opposite  qualities,  obscrvjible  in  two 
plants  growing  in  the  same  bed  of  a  garden,  and  breathing  the 
same  air,  and  which  prodnces  both  bread  and  poison  out  of  the 
same  soil.  It  is,  says  Dr.  Hunter,  from  the  different  elaboration 
of  a  mass  of  innocent  earth,  that  gives  life  and  vigor  to  the  bit- 
ter aloes  and  to  the  sugar  cane,  to  the  cool  house-leek  and  to 
the  fiery  mustard,  to  the  nourishing  grain  of  wheat  and  corn, 
to  the  deadly  night-shade  and  the  still  more  deadly  vpas. 

It  is  imcompatible  with  our  plan  to  exercise  much  attention 
in  describing:  the  different  forms  and  strnciure  of  the  trunks  or 
stems  of  plants.     Seven  are  enumerated  by  Linnaeus. 

1.  The  cmilis,  or  stem  properly  so  called,  bearing  the  leaves 
and  the  flower. 

2.  The  ciib7ius,  or  straw,  which  species  of  stem  is  generally 
hollow,  as  in  grasses. 

3.  The  scapus,  or  stalk,  which  bears  the  fructification  only, 
the  leaves  not  being  raised  above  the  ground,  as  in  the  dande- 
lion. 

4.  The  pedwicuhis,  or  flower  stalk,  which  bears  the  flower 
or  fructification  from  the  caul  is.  It  is  the  stalk  or  immediate 
support  of  a  single  flower  or  fruit. 

5.  The  peiiohis,  or  stalk  of  a  leaf.  It  fastens  the  leaves,  but 
not  the  fructification. 

6.  The  frons,  a  vague  term,  generally  used  to  signify  that 
the  root,  stem,  leaf  and  fructification  are  all  in  one,  as  in  ferns. 

7.  The  stipes,  which  is  the  stalk  or  trunk  of  a  frons,  and  is 
applied  only  to  palms,  Jilices,  SLudfiwgi. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  61 

Turning  from  these  things,  let  us  examine  some  other  ob- 
jects, of  more  importance,  viz. 

THE  BUDS. 

A  bud  is  a  protuberance,  hard  body,  or  pointed  button,  being 
a  compendium  or  epitome  of  its  parent  plant,  jutting  out  from 
its  stem  or  branches.  A  bud  is  composed  externally  of  scales, 
which  are  elongations  of  the  inner  bark.  It  is  commonly  co- 
vered with  a  resinous  varnish,  to  protect  it  from  cold,  insects, 
and  moisture;  and  it  contains  the  rudiments  of  the  leaves,  or 
flower,  or  both,  which  are  to  be  expanded  or  exfoliated  the  fol- 
lowing year.  Buds  are  called  by  Virgil  gefnmcB.  As  many 
plants  have  no  buds,  and  some  that  have  are  divested  of  them 
when  removed  from  cold  to  warm  climates,  it  is  evident  that 
the  buds  are  not  parts  essential  to  a  vegetable.  They  are  how- 
ever so  very  common  in  these  northern  states,  that  oi#  Flora 
would  appear  awkward  without  her  gems.  Of  the  arborescent 
plants  growing  among  us,  which  have  no  buds,  all  of  them 
have  been  brought  from  warm  climates,  as  the  orange,  lemon, 
acacias,  geraniums,  the  oleander  and  guiacum. 

If  you  examine  a  twig  of  almost  any  of  our  trees  in  Decem- 
ber, especially  the  horse  chesnut,  you  will  find  that  the  bud  is 
rooted  in  or  protuberates  from  the  pith.  You  will  also  find, 
that  wherever  a  new  bud  is  generated  in  the  stem  or  twig,  or  in 
the  bosom  of  a  leaf,  there  a  membraneous  diaphragm  divides 
the  cavity.  This  division,  which  is  covered  with  a  medullary 
or  pithy  substance,  distinguishes  the  insertion  of  one  bud  from 
another.  Beside  the  scales  of  the  bark,  and  the  rudiments  of 
the  leaves,  we  discover  by  searching  deeper,  that  the  bud,  like 
the  seed,  contains  the  parent  plant  in  miniature. 

Seeds  are  vegetable  eggs,  and  buds  are  foetal  plants,  both 
equally  adapted  to  continue  their  species  forever.  A  bud  on 
the  stem  or  twig  of  a  tree  in  winter,  as  well  as  the  bulb  of  a 
tulip,  is  the  hybernacula,  or  winter  quarters,  of  the  vegetable 
ens,  where  the  embryo  plant  sleeps  in  safety  during  the  seve- 
rity of  winter,  secure  from  the  destructive  effects  of  frost,  moist- 
ure or  insects. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  buds;  one  containing  a  flower,  an- 
other containing  only  leaves,  and  a  third  containing  both.  A 
just  discrimination  of  these  three  kinds  of  buds  is  important  to 
g;ardeners.  Leaf-buds  should  be  always  selected  for  inocula- 
tion, although  flower-buds  are  commonly  chosen  for  that  pur- 
pose, because  they  are  fuller,  thicker,  less  pomted,  and  resemble 
plump  seed;  whereas  if  they  should  be  transplanted  into  the 
bark  of  a  tree,  they  are  more  apt  to  disappoint  the  expectations 
of  the  ingrafter  than  if  he  used  the  leaf-buds.  An  accurate 
knowledge  of  these  things  will  tend  to  explode  the  vague  terms 


62  THE    THOMSONIAN 

of '•' barren  buds"  and  "fertile  buds."  Another  illnstration  of 
our  former  assertion,  that  anatomical  investigation  is  the  only 
certain  and  rational  method  of  arrivmo-  at  certainty  in  the  laws 
01  vegetation. 

By  the  term  foliation,  botanists  mean  the  complicaiio7i,  or 
folded  state  of  the  lea\'es  while  concealed  within  die  buds.  This 
intricate  and  complicated  structure  was  first  evolved  and  dis- 
played by  our  great  master  Linujtus,  who  has  taught  us,  that 
the  leaves  in  buds  are  either 

Involute,  that  is.  rolled  in,  when  their  lateral  margins  are 
roiled  spirally  inwards  on  both  sides. 

Revolutk,  rolled  back,  when  their  lateral  margins  are  roll- 
ed spirally  backwards  on  both  sides. 

Obvolute,  rolled  a^-ainst  each  other,  when  their  respective 
margins  alternately  embrace  the  straight  margin  of  the  oppo- 
site leaP 

Convolute,  rolled  together,  when  the  margin  of  one  side 
surrounds  the  other  margin  of  the  same  leaf,  in  the  manner  of 
a  cawl  or  hood. 

Imbricate,  when  they  w^e  jmrallel,  with  a  straight  surface, 
and  lie  one  over  the  other. 

EauiTANT,  riding,  when  the  sides  of  the  leaves  lie  parallel, 
and  approach  in  such  a  manner  as  that  the  outer  embrace  the 
inner,  which  is  not  the  case  with  the 

CoNDUPLiCATE,  or  doubled  together,  that  is,  when  the  sides 
of  the  leaf  are  parallel  and  approach  each  other. 

Plicate,  p/a«7ec/,  v/hen  their  complication  is  in  plaits 
lengthwise. 

Reclinate,  reclined,  when  the  leaves  are  reflexed  dovv'n- 
wards  towards  the  -petiole. 

CiRciNvL,  compassed,  or  in  rings,  when  the  leaves  are  roll- 
ed in  spirally  downwards. 

Although  Loejling's  natural  history  of  buds  has  not  been 
surpassed,  as  any  naturalist  will  be  convinced  if  he  peruses  his 
paper  entitled  "  GenuncB  Arborvni,^^  in  the  Amaifilatcs  Acad- 
emiccE,  yet  Darwin  is  more  to  our  purpose,  which  is  to  u.ix  the 
utile  with  the  dulce. 

Dr.  Darwin,  in  his  '■'•Philosophy  of  Agricvlivre  and  Gar- 
dening,^'' says,  "  if  a  bud  be  torn  from  a  branch  of  a  tree,  or  cut 
out,  and  planted  in  the  earth,  with  a  glass  cup  inverted  over  it, 
to  prevent  the  exhalation  from  being  at  first  greater  than  its 
power  of  absorption  ;*  or  if  it  be  inserted  into  the  bark  of  ano- 
ther tree,  it  will  grow,  and  become  a  plant  in  every  respect  like 
its  parent.     This  evinces,  that  every  bud  of  a  tree  is  an  indi- 

*  In  this  siUiation,  a  greater  heat  may  be  given  them  than  in  hot  house«y 
■without  increasing  their  quantity  of  perspiration,  which  ceases  as  sooa  as  th* 
air  in  the  glass  is  saturated  with  moisture. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  63 

vidual  vefjetable  beinji ;  and  that  a  tree  tfierefore  is  a  family  or 
swarm  of  individual  plants,  like  the  polypus,  with  its  youns: 
growing  out  of  its  sides,  or  like  the  brandling  cells  of  the  coral 
insect." 

"  When  the  old  oaks  or  willows  lose  by  decay  almost  all  their 
solid  internal  wood,  it  frequently  happens  that  a  part  of  the 
shell  of  the  trunk  or  stem  continues  to  tlonrish  with  a  few  heal- 
thy branches.  Whence  it  appears,  tliat  no  part  of  the  tree  is 
alive,  but  the  buds  and  the  bark  and  the  root  fibres;  that  the 
bark  is  only  an  intertexture  of  the  candexes  of  the  numerous 
buds,  as  they  pass  down  to  shoot  their  radicles  into  the  earth; 
and  that  the  solid  timber  ceases  to  be  alive,  and  is  then  only  of 
service  to  support  the  numerous  family  of  buds  in  the  air, 
above  the  herbaceous  vegetables  in  their  vicinity." 

"A  bud  of  a  tree,  tiierefore,  like  a  vegetable  arising  from  a 
seed,  consists  of  three  parts — the  pluraula  or  leaf,  the  radicle  or 
root-fibres,  and  the  part  which  joins  these  tu^o  together,  which 
is  called  caudex  by  Linnegus,  when  applied  to  entire  plants  ; 
and  may  therefore  be  termed  caudex  gemmcc,  when  applied  to 
buds. 

"  An  embryon  bud,  whether  it  be  a  leaf  bud  or  a  flower  bud, 
is  the  viviparous  offspring  of  an  adult  leaf  bud:  and  is  as  m- 
dividual  as  a  seed,  which  is  its  oviparous  offspring. 

"As  the  season  advances,  the  leaf  bud  puts  forth  a  plumula, 
like  a  seed,  which,  stimulated  by  the  o.vi/s'cn  of  the  atmosphere, 
rises  upwards  into  leaves  to  acquire  its  adapted  pabulun),  which 
leaves  constitute  its  luuffs.  The  flower  bud  under  similar  cir- 
cumstances puts  forth  its  bractes,  or  floral  leaves,  which  serve 
the  oflice  of  lungs  to  the  pericarp  and  the  calyx,  and  expand  its 
petals,  which  again  serve  the  office  of  the  lungs  to  the  anthers 
and  stigmas  ;  and  thus,  like  the  leaf  bud,  it  becomes  an  adult 
vegetable  being,  with  the  power  of  producing  seed." 

Close  observers  of  nature  have  remarked^  that  about  mid- 
summer there  is  a  kind  of  pause  in  vegetation,  for  perhaps  a 
fortnight;  and  it  is  believed  that  leaf  buds  maybe  changed  into 
flower  buds,  and  flower  buds  into  leaf  buds.  The  probability 
of  this  idea  of  transmuting  flower  buds  and  leaf  buds  into  each 
other  is  confirmed,  says  the  ingenious  author  of  "  The  Flower 
Garden,"  by  the  curious  conversion  of  the  parts  of  the  flowers 
of  some  vegetable  ?nousters*  into  green  leaves,  if  they  be  too 
well  nourished  after  they  are  so  far  advanced  as  to  be  unchange- 
able inio  leaf  buds.  Instances  of  this  luxuriance  are  sometimes 
seen  in  the  chaffy  scales  of  the  calyx  of  the  everlasting,  in 
the  pink^  and  in  the  rose  willoio.     The  artificial  method  of 

*  Double,  or  very  luxuriant  flower?,  however  beautiful  in  the  eye  of  the  flo- 
tiJit,  are  called  monsters  by  botanists. 


64  THE    TIIOMSONIAN 

converting"  leaf  buds  into  flower  buds,  is  by  disturbing^  the  natu- 
ral course  of  vegetation,  by  bindinor  some  of  the  most  vigorous 
stalks  or  roots  with  strong  wire.  The  success  of  this  operation 
depends  on  weakening  or  strengthening  the  growth  of  the  last 
year's  buds. 

Instead  of  planting  buds  in  the  earth,  we  plant  them  xvithin 
the  bark  of  another  tree  ;  taking  care  to  place  them  so  that  the 
pith  of  the  bud  comes  in  close  contact  with  the  pith  of  the 
branch,  in  which  the  slit  is  made.  This  mode  of  propagation 
is  called  inoculation." 

An  argument,  among  others,  that  the  Chinese  had  no  com- 
municalion  with  either  Greeks  or  Romans,  is  their  total  igno- 
rance of  the  art  of  ingrafting  or  inoculation. 

THE  LEAF. 

So  from  the  root 
Springs  lighter  the  gieen  stallc ;  from  thence  tlie  leaves 
More  airy  ;  last,  the  bright  consummate  flower. 

His  praise,  ye  winds,  tliat  from  four  quarters  blow, 

Breathe  soft  or  loud  ;  and  wave  your  tops,  ye  pines  ? 

With  every  plant,  in  sign  of  worship,  wave  ? 

0,  universal  Lord  ?  be  bounteous  still, 

To  give  us  only  good  ;  and  if  the  night 

Have  gather'd  aught  of  evil —  . 

Disperse  it,  as  now  light  dispels  the  dark. — Milton. 

By  foliation,  English  botanists  menu  the  complication  or 
folded  state  of  leaves,  while  concealed  in  the  bud ;  but  this 
term  expresses  not  that  procedure  of  nature  by  which  the 
leaves  are  renewed  and  developed  every  spring,  so  accurately 
as  does  the  Latin  word  vernalio. 

We  have  shown,  that  the  bud  springs  from  the  medulla,  or 
pith  of  tlie  plant ;  and  by  searching  info  the  bud  we  have  seen 
the  rudiments  of  the  leaves  ;  and  when  we  penetrate  still  deep- 
er, we  discover  that  the  bud,  like  the  seed,  contained  the  epito- 
me of  the  future  plant ;  but  during  winter  it  wants  the  power 
of  unfolding  its  parts.  Both  seeds  and  buds  contain  the  pri- 
niordia  pbintaritm  ;  buds  therefore  differ  from  seeds,  only  as 
the  living  fcetus  differs  from  the  e^r^g  of  the  animal ;  so  that 
buds  are  seeds  in  a  more  advanced  stjige  of  vefjetation.  We 
have  already  remarked,  that  some  buds  contain  flowers,  some 
leaves,  and  some  both  ;  and  that  an  accurate  discrimination  of 
them  was  of  importance  in  the  process  of  htidding.  To  watch 
the  vernation  of  the  embryo  bud,  the  gradual  unfolding  of  the 
fcetal  leaves  and  infantile  flower,  is  a  pleasing  speculation  ;    for 

•  In  France  and  in  Switzerland  they  improve  the  fruit  of  a  tree  by  ingraft- 
ing it  with  a  scion  from  its  own  branches.  This  is  found  to  ameliorate  the 
quality  of  the  fruit,  and  increase  the  size  of  it. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  65 

the  leaves  are  completely  formed,  and  fairly  rolled  np  for  evo- 
lution, many  months  before  they  begin  to  expand.  The  study 
of  the  anatomical  structure  of  the  full  expanded  leaf  is  equally 
delightful. 

We  shall  pass  silently  over  the  nomenclature  of  leaves,  which 
is  apt  to  discourage  young  botanists,  unused  to  geometiicaJ 
writers  in  the  Latin  tongue,  and  shall  pursue  the  more  pleasant 
task  of  exhibitinof,  as  far  as  we  are  able,  the  structure  and  the 
functions  of  the  leaf 

When  we  are  told  that  "a  leaf  is  a  part  of  a  plant,  extended 
into  length  and  breadth,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  have  one  side 
distin2:uishable  from  the  other,"  the  naturalist  receives  but  lit- 
tle information  ;  and  we  obtain  but  little  more,  when  we  are 
told  that  they  are  "  the  organs  of  motion  ;"'  but  when  we  say, 
that  the  leaves  are  the  hwgs  of  a  plant,  we  convey  an  idea  more 
consonant  to  truth  and  nature  ;  for  we  find  that  a  leaf  will  die 
if  its  upper  or  varnished  surface  is  annointed  with  any  gluti- 
nous matter,  or  when  placed  in  an  exhausted  receiver.  If  we 
should  say,  that  the  leaf  combines  the  othce  of  lacteah  and 
lungs,  we  shall  come  still  nearer  the  truth.  While  our  stom- 
achs dioest  solid  food,  our  lungs  digest  air  ;  so  that  what  is 
performed  by  two  organs  in  animals,  is  performed  by  one  in 
plants.     Let  us  then  examine  this  organ  and  its  functions. 

The  leaf  is  attached  to  the  branch  of  the  plant  by  a  short 
foot  stalk.  From  these  foot-stalks  a  number  of  fibres  issue, 
which,  ramifying  in  every  direction,  communicate  with  each 
other  in  every  part  of  the  leaf,  and  thereby  form  a  curious  net- 
work. The  intermediate  substance  is  greenish,  and  may  be 
eaten  by  insects  or  destroyed  by  putrefaction,  while  the  fibrous 
part  remains  entire,  constituting  the  skeleton  of  the  leaf.  There 
are,  however,  two  layers  of  fibres  in  every  leaf,  forming  two 
distinct  skeletons,  the  one  belono:ing  to  the  upper  part  of  the 
leaf,  the  other  pertaining  to  the  lower.  It  is  very  diflicult  to 
demonstrate  the  anatomy  of  a  leaf;  but  we  have  reason  to  con- 
clude that  the  seven  essential  parts  of  a  plant  enumerated  are  ex- 
tended, rolled  out,  and  extenuated  throughout  the  leaf;  so  that 
if  you  slit  a  leaf  with  scissors,  you  cut  through  as  many  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  plant,  as  if  you  cut  through  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 
The  whole  leaf  is  covered  with  a  portion  of  the  epidermis,  or 
the  scarfskin,  which  covers  the  stem  and  stalk  of  the  plant. 
Between  this  thin  membrane  and  the  corticle  net  work  are 
placed  the  absorbent  vessels,  toofether  with  what  we  presume 
to  be  the  absorbent  glands.  Dr.  Darwin  assures  us,  that  there 
is  an  artery  and  a  vein  in  a  leaf,  and  that  the  artery  carries  the 
sap  to  the  extreme  surface  of  the  upper  side  of  the  leaf,  and 
there  exposes  it,  under  a  thin  moist  membrane,  to  the  action  of 
the  atmospheric  air ;  then  the  veins  collect  and  ret.urn  this  cir- 


66  THE  THOMSONIAN 

culating  fluid  to  the  foot-stalk,  just  as  the  artery  and  vein  ope- 
rate in  our  lungs.  It  is  hardly  fair  to  compare  the  leaves  of  a 
plant  with  the  respiratory  organs  of  the  more  perfect  animals; 
but  rather  to  the  breathing  apparatus  of  insects,  or,  what  is  per- 
haps more  to  our  purpose,  to  the  ^ills  of  fish. 

When  the  structure  of  any  organized  body  is  too  subtle  to 
come  within  the  scrutiny  of  the  human  senses,  we  must  have 
recourse  to  analogy ;  and  from  the  truths  we  discover,  and  the 
observations  we  make,  we  must  judge  of  the  operations  in  sim- 
ilar bodies  ;  for  we  can  form  our  opinion  of  that  we  know  not, 
only  by  placing  it  in  comparison  with  something  similar  to 
what  we  do  know.  The  structure  of  certain  large  leaved 
pl.ants  that  grow  in  water  is  remarkably  conspicuous  ;  and  the 
gills  offish  resemble,  in  structure  and  office,  the  leaves  of  these 
aquatic  plants.  Duverny  and  Monro  have  scrutinized  the  gills 
of  fish  ;  the  former  found  that  those  of  a  carp  contained  four 
thousand  three  hundred  and  eighty-six  bones,  which  were 
moved  by  sixty-nine  muscles  :  and  the  latter  informs  us,  that  in 
the  gills  of  a  skate  fish  there  exists  one  Jntndred  and  forty- 
four  thousand  iold'i,  or  subdivisions.  This  manifold  structure 
gives  this  respiratory  organ  a  surprising  extent  of  surface. 
These  subdivisions,  terminating  in  innumerable  points,  resem- 
ble fringe,  but  when  examined  by  the  microscope  appear  like 
down  ;  yet  is  every  part  crowded  with  blood  vessels,  being  ra- 
mifications of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  vein.  The  whole  ex- 
tent of  the  gills  is  covered  by  an  exceedingly  fine  menibrane, 
in  which  the  microscope  discovers  a  still  finer  net-work  of  ves- 
fich.  By  such  a  structure  the  fish  exposes  a  greater  surface  of 
blood  to  the  water,  than  is  exposed  to  the  air  by  the  internal 
membrane  of  the  air  cells  of  the  lungs  of  quadrupeds  ;  and  that 
for  the  same  purpose,  namely,  imbibing  uncombined  oxygen, 
which  is  the  materia!,  or  pabidum  vitcp,  equally  necessary  to 
fish  as  to  land  animals.  Now,  if  we  compare  the  f-tructure  of 
the  gills  of  fish  with  that  of  the  leaf  of  aquatic  plants,  we  can 
discern  a  great  similarity. 

The  gills  of  fish  present  an  immense  surface  to  the  water  in 
which  they  live,  in  consequence  of  their  innumerable  folds  of 
nerves,  blood  and  air  vessels.  The  divisions  and  subdivisions 
of  this  organ  are  so  fine  that  they  resemble  a  most  delicate 
fringe.  In  like  manner  certain  aquatic  plants,  growing  in  the 
ponds  in  this  vicinity,  have  snbaquatic  leaves,  resembling 
fine  moss,  or  rather  that  kind  of  silk  called  floss,  the  structure 
and  use  of  which  are  the  same  as  the  gills  in  fish.  While  those 
leaves,  which  are  growing  under  water,  have  this  delicate 
structure,  the  leaves  of  the  same  plant,  when  it  has  shot  up  out 
of  the  water,  being  produced  wholly  in  air,  become  entire  and 
firm,  having  none  of  those  segments  or  slits  which  distinguish 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A.  67 

them  when  subaquatic  ;  so  that  the  one  leaf  under  water  has 
the  structure  and  function  of  gills,  while  the  next  above  it  is  a 
firm  leaf,  or  lungs,  by  reason  of  its  breathing  the  open  air. 
Here  a  change  takes  place  in  an  amphibious  plant,  like  that 
which  is  observed  in  an  amphibious  animal  on  its  passing  from 
the  tadpole  to  the  frog  state  ;  for  in  the  former  state  it  has  gills 
and  in  the  latter  lungs. 

As  a  tree  cannot  go  in  search  of  food,  like  an  animal,  it  is 
forced  to  draw  its  nourishment  from  within  the  narrow  sphere 
of  its  existence;  it  therefore  extends  its  roots  through  the  sur- 
rounding earth,  by  which  it  draws  in  sustentation,  as  through 
so  many  syphons.  These  imbibing  vessels  of  the  roots  may  be 
compared  to  the  lacteals  in  animals.  This  chyle,  or  sap,  as- 
cends to  the  leaves,  and  is  there  channjed  into  a  more  perfect 
fluid,  answering  to  tlie  blood  of  animals  ;  it  is  still  further  ex- 
alted in  the  flower,  in  order  to  perfect  the  seed  and  continue  its 
kind.  The  roots  are  sufficient  to  supply  nourishment  to  a 
large  tree  durins:  winter,  when  divested  of  its  leaves,  and  when 
the  vegetative  life  reposes  in  winter  quarters:  but  stimulated  by 
the  warmth  of  spring,  the  vegetable  ens  awakes  ;  and  when  the 
process  oi  vernation  has  fairly  begun,  then  the  tree  has  no  more 
to  do  than  merely  to  support  its  own  existence,  and  therefore  it 
spreads  through  the  air  its  numberless  leaves,  which  are  nearly 
equivalent  to  the  stomach  and  lungs  of  animals. 

That  the  sap  ascends  to  the  leaves,  is  proved  by  the  bleeding 
of  vines  early  in  the  spring,  before  the  leaves  are  formed,  there 
being  no  leaves  to  receive  it ;  but  when  these  elaborate  organs 
are  formed  the  vine  ceases  to  bleed,  because  the  sap  flows  into 
them  for  rectification  ;*  for  while  a  vegetable  is  growing  it  is 
continually  goins:  through  a  reofular  series  of  changes,  losing 
the  properties  of  one  substance  and  assuminij  those  of  another  ; 
thus  mucilage  in  a  young  plant  becomes  starch  in  the  old  ;  what 
in  green  fruit  is  acid,  in  a  ripe  fruit  is  sugar. 

13ut  the  function  of  the  leaf  is  not  perpetual  and  uniform,  as 
in  the  lungs  of  the  more  perfect  animals  ;  its  operations  differ 
in  the  day  and  in  the  night.  In  the  day,  the  leaves  of  plants 
exhale  moisture  and  oxygen  gas  ;  but  during  the  night,  ihey 
emit  carbonic  acid  gas,  and  absorb  oxygen  gas.  In  plainer 
terms,  they  exhale,  in  the  light  of  the  sun,  salutary  or  vital  air; 
but  in  the  dark  they  emit  a  noxious  air.  One  of  these  opera- 
tions is  performed  by  the  varnished  side  of  the  leaf,  and  the 
other  fr.)m  the  rough  or  under  side.  This  varnish  of  the  leaf 
is  found  to  be  bees-wax. 

As  air  and  heat  are  necessary  to  the  life  of  a  plant,  so  is  light 

•  Rcetificalion,  in  the  language  of  chemists,  means  drawing  any  thing  over 
again  by  distillation,  to  make  it  yet  higher  and  liner. 


68  THE    THOMSOMAN 

to  its  health.*  Tlie  want  of  light  prevents  a  plant's  forming 
its  proper  juices,  deprives  it  of  its  green  color,  and  prevents  the 
impregnation  of  its  seed.  It  is  the  smooth  side  of  the  leaf  that 
is  acted  upon  by  the  light ;  and  is  that  part  t)y  which  a  plant 
in  a  great  measure  lives  ;  hence  the  leaves  of  many  delicate 
plants  shut  up,  so  as  to  cover  this  smooth  side  on  exposure  to 
noxious  vapor,  or  darkness,  or  to  screen  it  from  an  extremely 
fierce  sunshine.  In  order  to  make  a  distinction  between  the 
sensation  of  heat  and  the  cause  of  it,  the  word  caloric  has  been 
adopted.  Caloric  is  a  body,  and  so  is  light.  The  sun  is  the 
source  of  both  ;  for  he  emits  two  kinds  of  rays,  one  calorific^ 
tlie  other  colorific  ;  the  first  occasions  heat^  the  other  color. 

With  what  different  eyes  do  the  philosopher  and  the  unin- 
formed husbandman  view  a  tree,  waving  in  the  fiiU  glory  of  its 
luxuriant  foliage  !  Ask  the  woodsman  for  what  a  tree  was 
made— he  will  tell  you,  to  bear  nuts,  to  be  cut  into  boards,  to 
burn  to  keep  him  warm,  and  to  cook  his  victuals.  Ask  the  na- 
turalist, and  he  will  tell  you,  that  they  are  an  important,  nay 
indispensable  link  in  the  chain  of  human  existence;  insomuch 
that  were  the  Parent  and  Legislator  of  nature  to  cause  every 
vegetable  on  earth  at  once  to  be  annihilated,  the  atmospheric 
air  would  directly  become  a  putrid  mais  of  every  thing  that  is 
noxious,  and  man,  and  other  terrestrial  animals  of  similar  con- 
struction, would  soon  turn  into  a  mortified  lump  of  corruption. 
The  leaves  of  ail  sorts  of  vegetables  are  in  fact  so  many  labor- 
atories for  purifying  the  air  we  breathe. 

During  winter,  when  the  surface  of  the  earth  is  bound  np 
with  frost,  encrusted  with  ice  and  covered  with  snow,  little  or 
no  putrefaction  takes  place  ;  then  the  vegetable  kingdom  ap- 
pears as  if  dead  ;  the  trees,  divested  of  leaves,  seem  like  so  ma- 
ny dead  sticks  ;  but  when  the  sun  begins  to  diffuse  its  warmth 
over  the  earth,  promoting  that  general  tendency  to  corruption 
to  which  all  dead  bodies  are  liable,  then  the  trees  soon  exhibit 


It  is  remarkable,  that  the  leaves  cannot  prosper  without  light ;  }'et  seeds 
germinate  best  in  the  dark. 

Light  is  an  elastic  fluid,  that  is  reflected  from  certain  bodies  which  it  can- 
not penetrate  ;  it  is  also  possessed  of  chemical  affinities,  by  which  it  enters 
into  combination  with  other  substances  ;  sometimes  occasioning  their  decom- 
position, and  sometimes  it  is  extricated  from  its  combinations.  It  gives  to 
Tegetables  their  color,  and  contributes  to  their  smell,  and  balsamic  principle. 
It  enables  the  leaves  of  vegetables  to  emit  streams  oi"  oxygen  gas,  or  pure  vi- 
tal air. 

OxvGEN-,  or  the  acidifying  principle,  is  found  only  in  its  combinations.  The 
o'^ygen  gas  is  the  result  of  the  combination  of  oxygen  with  caloric.  It  exists 
in  atmospheric  air,  in  the  proportion  of  27  to  100,  and  is  heavier  than  the  air 
of  the  atmosphere.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  respiration — hence  termed 
VITAL  AiK.  Durino;  the  action  of  breathing,  it  enters  our  blood  by  the  vessels 
of  the  lungs,  giving  to  it  a  vermillion  color,  and  nn  augmentation  of  vital  po-w- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  69 

a  pleasing  scenery,  and  the  leafless  branches,  by  bursting  their 
buds,  and  by  displaying  all  at  once  their  foliage,  increase  their 
surfaces  many  tlionsand  times.  The  leaves  are  so  arranged  on 
the  branches  as  to  expose  their  varnished  surface  to  the  direct 
influence  of  the  sun  ;  and  if  forced  out  of  that  position  they 
will  turn  themselves ;  for  leaves  an^,  more  greedy  for  the  light 
of  the  sun  than  for  the  influence  of  heat. 

It  is  Ironi  the  under  or  rough  side  of  the  leaf,  that  the  azotic 
or  rather  carbonic  acid  gas,  or  unwholesome  air,  is  emitted  ; 
while  the  oxygen  gas,  or  pure  vital  air,  emanates  from  the  up- 
per or  smooth  varnished  surface;  but  not  before  the  sun  has 
shone  some  time  upon  it.  This  distillation  of  pure  vital  air  by 
the  leaf  diminishes  towards  the  close  of  day,  and  ceases  alto- 
gether after  sunset,  when  unwholesome  air  is  emitted  by  the 
rough  side  of  the  leaf;  and  the  next  day.  soon  after  tlie  rising 
of  the  sun,  the  smooth  or  upper  side  recommences  its  function. 
Hence  we  see  the  reason  why  it  is  unhealthy  to  tarry  in  the 
deep  shade  of  the  forest  during  the  night.  "  /Surgajfius,'^  says 
the  shepherd  in  Virgil,  "solet  esse  gravis  conta7itibi{s  nm- 
bra.''  Let  us  r?se,  for  the  evening  shade  is  vnlLcalthy  to 
singers ;  and  he  adds,  even  the  juniper  is  voiv  noxious.  Ill- 
scented  and  even  poisonous  plants  equally  aflbrd  salubrious  air 
in  sunshine. 

It  is  remarkable,  however,  that  while  leaves  are  performino- 
this  salutary  process,  Jlov)e7's  render  the  surrounding  air  noxious 
even  iu  the  day  time.  The  effluvia  of  a  lar^e  quantity  of  «rath- 
ered  fruit,  has  at  all  times  a  deleterious  quality.  A  peach^in  a 
few  hours,  rendered  a  body  of  air,  six  times  its  own  bulk,  so  en- 
tirely poisonous,  that  an  animal  could  not  breathe,  nor  a  candle 
burn  in  it.  A  rose  kept  in  a  glass,  so  much  infected  the  air  as 
to  render  it  unfit  for  respiration.  Persons  have  been  found  dead 
in  their  beds,  whose  lodging  rooms  had  been  crowded  with  flow- 
ers; others  Imve  been  suddenly  affected  with  dizziness,  nausea, 
and  head  ache,  on  going  into  a  green-house  of  flowers  that  had 
been  shut  up  closely  during  the  night.*  "While  a  growing  ve- 
getable is  capable  of  this  two-fold  operation,  it  absorbs  whatever 
putrescent  particles  it  finds  in  the  surroundino^  earth  and  air. 
A  sprig  of  mint  put  into  a  jar  of  air  rendered  foul  by  animal 
putrescency,  though  faded,  will  revive,  and  grow  surprisingly ; 
and  will  moreover  correct  air,  so  that  an  animal  shall  be  able  to 
breathe  in  it. 

Here  is  the  proper  place  to  remark,  that  the  ocean  when  agi- 
tated by  winds,  yields  oxygenous  gas  ;  and  the  azotic,  mephitic. 


*  Ingenhouz  placed  twenty-four  French  beans  in  a  quart  jar,  which  render- 
ed the  air,  in  one  night,  so  poisonous,  that  a  chicken,  put  into  it  died  in  about 
twenty  seconds. 


70  THE    THOMSONIATi 

or  noxious  air,  is  corrected  by  being  strongly  shaken  with 
water.  Hence  we  learn  that  the  two  grand  correctors  of  the 
atmospheric  air  are,  first,  the  agitated  ocean,  and  secondly, 
living  vegetables  ichile  operated  njjon  by  the  rays  of  the  sun. 

If  we  reflect  upon  what  has  been  said,  it  will  appear  that 
plants  have  their  private  virtues,  and  their  public  ones.  Be- 
sides the  pecahar  medicinal  and  nutritive  qualities  which  some 
possess,  the  great  family  of  plants,  or  what  is  called  the  vege- 
table kingdom,  conspire  to  form  one  grand  apparatus  for  puri- 
fying the  atmosphere  and  rendering  it  fit  for  respiration;  these 
may  be  called  their  public  virtues.  In  this  view,  no  vegetable 
grows  in  vain,  whether  in  the  interior  of  this  vast  continent  or 
in  the  wilds  of  Africa ;  for  the  leaves  of  all,  whether  ill  scented, 
acrid  or  poisonous,  elaborate  the  air  they  contain,  and  pour 
down  a  shower  of  depurated  oxygenous  or  vital  air,  which, 
diffusing  itself  through  the  common  mass  of  the  atmosphere^ 
renders  it  more  fit  for  animal  life.  In  this  salutiferous  process, 
the  fragrant  rose  and  the  violet,  the  deadly  night-shade  and  the 
still  more  deadly  laurel,  co-operate.  The  animal  and  vegeta- 
ble kingdom  operate  on  each  other.  Putrid  animal  effluvia, 
noxious  to  man,  is  food  for  plants;  while  plants  transmit  a  sal- 
utary air  to  man. 

The  winds  convey  vitiated  air  from  us,  for  our  relief ;  and 
they  return  salubrious  gales,  for  our  refreshment ;  "and  if  these 
salutary  gales  rise  to  storms  and  hurricanes,  let  us  trace  and  re- 
vere the  ways  of  a  benificcnt  being,  who,  not  fortuitously,  but 
with  design  ;  not  in  wrath,  but  in  mercy,  shakes  the  waters  and 
the  air  together,  to  bury  in  the  deep  those  putrid  and  pestilen- 
tial effluvia,  which  the  vegetables  on  the  face  of  the  earth  had 
been  insufficient  to  consume." 

These  traits  of  wisdom,  visible  in  the  economy  of  those  de- 
partments of  nature  which  have  come  under  our  scrutiny,  clear- 
ly instruct  us  how  kindly  Providence  restrains,  impels,  and 
directs  all  things  to  a  beneficent  end,  but  in  no  instance  is  it 
more  apparent  than  in  the  rays  of  the  sun  correcting,  through 
the  agency  of  the  leaves  of  vegetables,  the  noxious  influences 
of  the  night. 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  71 

WATER. 

Resistless,  roaring  dreadful,  down  it  comes, 
From  the  rude  mountains,  and  the  inossy  wild, 
Trembling  through  rocke  abrupt,  and  sounding  far; 
Then  o'er  the  sandy  valley  iloating  spreads, 
Calm,  sluggish,  silent ;  till  again  constrained 
.  Between  iVo  meeting  hills,  it  bursts  away 
Where  rocks  and  woods  o'erhang  the  turbid  stream, 
There  gathering  triple  force,  rapid  and  deep. 
It  boils  and  wheels,  and  foams  and  thunders  through ; 

Till  pouring  on,  it  proudly  seeks  the  deep  ; 

Whose  vanquish'd  tide,  recoiling  from  the  sho.ck, 

Yields  to  this  liquid  weight  of  half  the  globe.  Thomson. 

It  is  asked,  '-Is  this  season,  so  full  of  the  bloom  of  nature, 
nn propitious  to  the  unfolding  of  the  petals  of  elocution  7" 
Let  the  great  Montesquieu  answer  tlie  question.  Put  a  man, 
says  this  sage,  in  a  warm,  confined  place,  and  he  will  feelfaint- 
ness  and  lassitude.  Thus  circumstanced,  if  you  propose  a  bold 
enterprise  to  him,  you  find  him  very  little  disposed  towards  it. 
His  weakness  will  niduce  a  despondency ;  he  will  be  afraid  of 
every  thing,  because  he  feels  himself  capable  of  nothing.  Faint- 
ness  of  body,  produced  by  tlte  heat  of  the  climate,  is  soon  com- 
municated to  the  mind  ;  and  then  there  is  no  curiosity,  no  noble 
enierprize,  no  generous  sentiment.  The  inclinations  are  pas- 
sive, and  indolence  constitutes  his  utmost  happiness. 

Althougli  the  botanist  has  been  ready  to  exclaim  with  Thom- 
son, 

All-conquering  heat,  oh  intermit  thy  wratli! 

yet  he  has  not  been  an  idle  spectator  of  the  transitory  blossoms. 

For  as  the  vernal  sun  awak'd  the  torpid  sap, 
he  watched  the  infant  bud  and  embryo  flower;  and  marked,  as 
they  gradually  unfolded,  the  beauties  of  the  breathing  leaf. 
And  when  the  bursting  calyx  gave  the  struggling  petals  to  the 
admiring  sight,  he  hung  over  their  elegant  forms  and  resplen- 
dent hues  enraptured.  But  while  gazing  at  the  glories  of  the 
full  blown  flower,  and  contemplating  its  wondrous  economy,  it 
shrunk  from  the  intrusion,  and,  like  the  hopes  of  man,  withered 
on  the  stalk.     So  passeth  away  the  splendor  of  this  world  ! 

During  dry  and  fervid  seasons,  the  vegetable  race  has  a 
more  melancholy  aspect,  than  in  the  Irozen  gloom  of  winter, 
when  tlie  vegetative  ens  naturally  retires  to  its  cradle,  hyherna- 
cula,  or  winter  quarters,  and  is  resuscitated  by  the  next  vernal 
sun.  But  in  this  arid  and  adust  state  of  the  earth  and  the  air, 
every  aimual  plant  is  threatened  with  speedy  destruction  :  For 
want  of  the  cherishing  influence  of  supernal  rain, 

Distressful  nature  pants. 
The  very  streams  look  languid  from  afar.  Thornton. 

To  the  laborious  husbandman,  the  gardener,  and  the  botanist, 
the  descent  of  rain  on  the  parched  soil  and  thirsty  plants  is  the 


72  THE    THOMSOMAN 

most  grateful  phenomenon  in  the  whole  economy  of  nature. 
Let  us  put  by  our  flowers  then,  for  the  present,  that  we  may 
consider  the  nature,  and  contemplate  the  source  of  this  pre- 
cious fluid,  which  gives  heaUh,  beauty  and  vigor  to  all  that 
lives. 

Indeed  wafer  is  a  wondrous  element!  Well  might  the  Gre- 
cian sage  contend,  that  water  was  the  original  matter,  or  prin- 
ciple of  all  things ;  and  that  even  the  air  was  but  an  offspring, 
expansion,  or  expiration  of  water.  We  actually  find  that  water 
bears  a  part  in  the  formation  of  every  body  in  the  three  king- 
■doms  of  nature.  It  enters  into  all  the  food  of  every  animal,  and 
every  vegetable  in  creation.  It  is  necessary  to  the  free  exercise 
of  every  animal  function  and  action:  and  although  it  is  the 
common  cement  of  all  terrestrial  bodies,  it  nevertheless  hastens 
and  facilitates  the  requisite  dissolution  of  every  animal  and  ve- 
getable, when  life  has  departed  ;  and  is  therefore  an  important 
agent  in  that  never  ceasino;  process  of  mutation,  by  which  one 
thing  is  changed  out  of^  and  into  every  other  in  creation. 

Can  a  Naturalist  do  better,  than  solicit  the  attention  of  his 
young  readers  of  both  sexes,  to  the  means  nature  uses  to  provide 
the  earth  with  rivers  of  water ;  beasts  with  running  brooks  ; 
plants  with  refreshing  showers;  and  man  with  every  thing?  It 
is  possible  that  they  may  never  once  have  reflected  on  the  con- 
nexion between  the  sea  and  vegetatio7i — between  the  moun- 
tains and  the  ocean — between  the  rivers  under  ground  and  the 
atmosphere  above  it.  They  may  never  have  considered,  that 
the  Atlantic  ocean  conspires  with  our  loftiest  mountains  to  fur- 
nish us  with  an  element  indispensably  necessary  to  the  life,  to 
the  health,  and  to  the  beauty  of  plants,  as  well  as  of  men. 

The  clouds  dispensing  refreshing  showers,  "turning  the 
wilderness  into  a  standing  water,  and  the  dry  ground  into  water 
springs-,""  the  flow  of  rivers,  with  their  long  train  of  beneficial 
consequences,  could  hardly  escape  the  notice  of  any  thinking 
being  in  any  age  of  the  world.  We  accordingly  find  the  sup- 
ply of  water  frequently  mentioned,  in  the  oldest  book  we  have, 
among  the  most  wonderful,  as  well  as  valuable  of  Heaven's 
blessinofs-  whilst  the  heathen  world  imagined  every  river  to  be 
under  the  guardianship  of  some  particular  deity,  wbo  they  be- 
lieved created  it,  because  they  knew  a  river  of  wjiter  to  be  of 
more  than  mortal  formation. 

It  has  probubly  impressed  others,  as  well  as  the  writer,  with 
something  bordering  on  wonder,  that  during  seven  and  twenty 
centuries,  wherein  the  memory  and  learning  of  mankind  have 
been  exercised,  there  has  not  been  found  one  philosopher  so  well 
instructed  in  the  laws  of  nature,  as  to  be  able  to  give  a  complete 
history  and  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  ascent  of  fresh  wa- 
ter Jrom  the  salt  ocean;  the  susj^ensioii  of  vapors  in  the  air; 


MATKRIA    MEDICA.  78 

the  formation  of  distinctly  defined  clouds;  and  the  descent  of 
raiti,  together  with  a  connected  chain  of  causes.  What  facts  and 
reasonings  we  have  on  these  subjects  are  mere  fragments  wide- 
ly scattered. 

Seeing  the  earth  covered  annually  with  a  rich  and  beautiful 
carpet  of  vegetables  ;  and  these  surprisingly  diversified,  varie- 
gated, and  developing  between  "seed  time  and  harvest  time," 
must  have  led  those  of  ancient  days  to  recognize  the  proximate 
cause,  the  warmth  of  the  sun  and  the  moisture  from  the  clouds ; 
and  these  again  to  that  perpetual  circulation  subsisting  between 
the  ocean  and  the  mountains,  through  the  instrumentality  of 
the  air,  and  by  the  medium  of  rivers  to  the  ocean  again.  But 
the  philosophy,  or  explanation  of  this  vivifying  phenomenon  is 
spoken  of  as  something  past  finding  out.  They  did  then,  as 
we  do  now,  push  our  investigations  as  high  as  ever  we  can,  as 
in  the  case  of  gravitation  ;  and  beyond  that  principle  say  with 
them,  it  is  "  the  hand  of  Godf'  an  expression  denoting  only  the 
last  term  of  our  analytical  results.  Unable  to  discover  the  es- 
sence of  light  and  of  fire,  the  Deity  was  called  by  the  name 
of  these  inscrutable  agents. 

In  early  times,  when  the  knowledge  of  nature  was  confined 
to  narrow  limits,  they,  like  our  Indians, 

"  Saw  God  in  clouds,  and  heard  him  in  the  -wind." 

Hence  they  styled  the  Deity,  ^^the  father  of  the  rains^  and 
represented  him,  as  "  calliyig  forth  the  loaters  of  the  sea,  and 
■pouring  them,  down  according  to  the  vapor  thereof."  Whence 
we  infer  that  they  believed  that  the  water  rose,  in  form  of 
vapor  from  the  salt  ocean  ;  and  that  it  became  freshened  in  its 
passage  through  the  air.  It  moreover  appears,  that  they  be- 
lieved that  this  process  was  regularly  and  perpetually  perform- 
ing, in  an  unceasing  circulation ;  for  they  remarked  that,  al- 
though ''  all  the  rivers  run  into  the  sea,  yet  was  the  sea  not 
full;  unto  the  place  ivhence  the  rivers  come,  thither  they  re- 
turn again."  They  seem  also  to  have  known,  that  mountains 
made  a  part  of  this  grand  apparatus  ;  and  to  have  believed 
that  it  was  not  a  fortuitous  or  casual  operation  ;  but  regulated 
as  we  now  find  it,  by  weight  and  measure.  May  not  this 
be  inferred  from  the  sublime  question  of  Isaiah — »  Who  hath 
measured  the  waters  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand,  and  weigh- 
ed the  MOUNTAINS  in  scales  ?" 

The  people  of  ancient  times  discerned  in  part  this  magnificent 
apparatus  ;  and  saw  its  effects;  but  were  restrained  by  a  religious 
awe,  from  attempting  the  investigation  of  it ;  because  storms, 
lightning,  and  hail^  were  conceived  to  be  the  precursors  of 
the  chariot  of  the  Deity  ;— »  Who  maketh  the  clouds  his 
chariot — who  walketh  on  the  wings  of  the  wind"  accompanied 

6 


74  THE    THOMSONIAN 

with  "Aai/  stones'''  and  ^'firey  The  origin  and  the  course  of 
the  winds,  ^^  whence  they  come,  and  v:hither  they  go,''  were  all 
for  these  reasons  deemed  mysterious.  Hence,  instead  of  scru- 
tinizing the  cause,  their  pious  minds,  overwhelmed  with  awe, 
sunk  into  undiscerning  amazement.  Under  such  solemn  im- 
pressions, I  cease  to  wonder,  that  he  who  wrote  that  ancient 
drama,  the  book  of  Job,  puts,  among  the  most  difficult  of  his 
questions,  that  which  demands  an  explanation  of  "  the  balanc- 
ing of  the  clouds.'' 

The  never-ceasing  circulation  of  water  between  the  ocean 
and  terra  fu'T?ia  has,  it  seems,  been  contemplated  from  the  ear- 
liest ages  with  grateful  admiration  ;  but  not  being  altogether  an 
object  of  sight,  was  ranked  among  the  inexplicable  works  of 
Deity. 

Des  Cartes,  Niewentyte,  Halley,  and  a  few  others  among 
the  moderns,  have  amused  the  literary  public  with  their  hypo- 
theses; but  of  their  learned  theories,  which  of  them  is  notclosf- 
ged  with  objections  /  That  all  the  rivers  of  fresh  water  are  de- 
rived from  the  salt  ocean,  no  one  doubts  ;  but  how  it  rises  from 
the  sea  is  the  question.  Some  contend,  that  the  particles  of 
water  are  formed  into  hollow  splierules,  or  diminutive  balloons, 
which  being  lighter  than  common  air,  ascend  and  are  buoyant 
in  it;  and  that  they  rise  or  fall,  or  move  horizontally,  accord- 
ing to  the  impulse  given  by  attraction,  repulsion,  by  winds,  or 
by  electricity.  The  public  have  generally  acquiesced  in  the 
theory  of  Dr.  Halley,  as  they  commonly  do  with  every  hypothesis 
presented  them  in  the  imposing  garb  of  mathematics.  Dr.  Hal- 
ley took  a  vessel  of  certain  dimensions,  filled  to  a  certain  depth 
with  water,  and  warmed  to  such  a  degree  as  the  air  is  in  the 
hottest  summer  months.  After  standmg  two  hours,  he  found 
on  weighing  it  what  it  had  lost  by  evaporation.  From  this  da- 
tum he  proceeded  in  his  calculations,  and  found  that  a  square 
mile  yields  six  thousand  nine  hundred  and  fourteen  tons,  and 
consequently  that  a  degree  square  will  evaporate  about  thirty- 
three  million  of  tons.  He  calculated  the  surface  of  the  Medi- 
terranean, and  estimated  that  it  must  lose  in  vapor  every  sum- 
mer's day  five  thousand  tico  hundred  and  eighty  inillion  of 
ions.  Dr.  Halley  considers  a  certain  grade  of  heat  absolutely 
necessary  to  the  ascent  of  vapors  from  the  ocean  ;  tut  we  find 
that  this  evaporation  goes  forward  with  equal  rapidity  in  the 
coldest  weather,  nay  in  caves  at  the  coldest  season,  in  the  fro- 
zen regions  of  the  north. 

Strange  !  what  extremes  should  thus  preserve  the  snow, 
High  on  the  Alps,  or  in  deep  caves  below. — Waller. 

We  must  then  seek  some  other  cause  beside  heat ;  and  the 
chemico-philosophers  have  tried  to  soothe  disputants  by  an  hy- 
pothesis which  is  void  of  it.   They  consider  that  the  air  is  a  men- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  75 

stnmm,  capable  of  dissolvins:,  suspending,  and  intimately  mix- 
ing the  particles  of  water  with  itself  That  as  a  given  quanti- 
ty of  water  will  take  up  just  so  much  salt  and  no  more,  without 
becoming  turbid,  and  at  length  precipitating  it  to  the  bottom,  so 
air,  the  most  powerful  solvent  in  nature  next  to  fire,  will  take 
up,  intimately  mix,  and  suspend,  just  so  much  Vv'ater,  and  re- 
main clear.  The  mixture  will  continue  transparent  just  this 
side  saturation  ;  when  satvrated,  the  abundant  waters  float 
in  form  of  clouds ;  but  when  supersaturated^  it  lets  go  the 
water,  which,  like  a  supersaturated  solution  of  salt,  falls  from 
the  clouds  on  the  earth  in  the  form  of  rain. 

Is  the  probability  of  this  theory  diminished  by  the  new  chem- 
ical doctrine,  which  teaches  ihat  water  is  formed  by  an  union 
oi hydrogen  and  oxygen  I-  Tlie  pneumatic  chemists  have,  by 
their  curious  discoveries,  removed  the  boundaries  which  sepa- 
rated, as  we  once  thought,  air  from  water,  and  have  led  us  to 
respect  that  very  ancient  idea  which  conceived  them  to  be  one 
element. 

The  salt  ocean,  which  covers  by  far  the  greatest  part  of  this 
globe,  has  a  three-fold  motion.  The  first  is  gentle,  like  the 
breathing  of  an  animal  ;  by  it  the  sea  swells  and  rises  up 
against  the  shores,  and  enters  gradually  the  bays  and  mouths  of 
rivers,  durins;  the  space  of  six  hours.  Then  it  seems  to  rest  for  a 
quarter  of  an  hour,  and  then  as  gradually  slides  down  again; 
when,  after  another  pause  of  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  it  begins  to 
flow  aorain  as  before.  The  second  motion  is  more  vehement 
and  incessant,  and  is  like  that  of  the  heart,  circulatory;  where- 
as that  of  the  tides  is  merely  backward  and  forward.  It  comes 
in  the  course  of  the  trade  winds,  which  blow  everlastingly  from 
east  to  west — runs  past  the  West  India  islands — pours  into  the 
bay  of  Mexico — and  rushing  rapidly  out  forms  the  gulf  of  Flo- 
rida ;  which  sweeping  along  the  American  shore  carries  the 
waters  of  the  Atlantic  into  the  North  Sea,  whence  they  pass  in 
a  never-ceasing  circulation  around  the  globe. 

The  other  motion  is  from  th«  atmosphere,  when  agitated  by 
winds.  It  is  local  and  variable,  and  seems  subservient  to  the 
transpiration  of  the  ocean.  It  rufiles  the  surface  merely,  and 
from  this  superficial  agitation  begins  that  hitherto  inexplicable 
dist'dlatio  per  ascensiim. 

By  whatever  means  the  water  ascends  into  the  air  from  the 
ocean,  this  is  briefly  the  course  of  it ;  in  rising  from  the  ocean 
it  leaves  the  salt  behind,  as  in  the  common  process  of  distilla- 
tion. The  ascended  vapor  is  probably  decomposed,  when  it 
forms  clouds  which  are  distinctly  visible ;  these  float  in  the 
general  atmosphere,  which  appears  to  be  then  a  different  fluid 
from  these  circumscribed  clouds.  Antiquity  conceived  a  cloud 
to  be  a  congeries  of  watery  vapor,  a  conservator)'-,  in  which  the 


76  THE    THOMSONIAN 

rain  is  kept  as  "in  bottles."  As  clouds  become  fuller  of  water 
they  gravitate,  or  are  attracted  by  the  loftiest  mountains,  when 
they  pour  upon  them  their  abundant  rains.  But,  according  to 
an  ingenious  chemist,  there  are  two  steps  in  the  process  be- 
tween evaporation  and  rain,  of  which  at  present  we  are  com- 
pletely ignorant: 

1st.  What  becomes  of  the  vapor  after  it  enters  into  the  at- 
mosphere ? 

2d.  What  makes  it  lay  aside  the  new  form,  which  it  must 
have  assumed,  and  return  again  to  its  state  of  vapor,  and  fall 
down  in  rain? 

And  till  these  two  steps  be  discovered  by  experiments  and 
observations,  it  will  be  impossible  for  us  to  give  a  satisfactory  or 
a  useful  theory  of  rain.  There  are  mountains  so  very  large, 
that  even  provinces  are  found  embosomed  near  their  summits, 
as  those  of  Q,nito.  The  tops  of  such  mountains  are  constantly 
enveloped  with  clouds,  especially  during  the  night,*  and  the 
waters  are  constantly  dripping  down  through  the  crannies  and 
crevices  of  the  stones,  forming  kindred  brooks  ;  when,  uniting 
with  other  streams,  it  rushes  with  accelerated  force  to  the 
plains  below,  forcing  a  passage  through  every  pliable  thing  in 
its  way. 

The  river,  after  rolling  its  waters  into  the  ocean,  is  destined  to 
be  again  exhaled  in  vapors,  and  to  re-enter  afresh  the  channels 
of  this  magnificent  circulation  ! 

FLOWERS. 

"  Last,  the  bright,  consummate  flower, 
Spirits  odorous  breathes." — Milton. 

We  hail  with  gratitude  the  returning  of  spring!  In  winter 
when  the  earth  is  bound  up  with  ice,  and  covered  with  a  bed 
of  snow  ;  when  the  trees  are  divested  of  their  leaves,  and  ap- 
pear dead,  and  the  very  herbage  seems  annihilated,  then  "  the 
lord  of  the  soil"  casts  his  eyes  over  the  barren  waste  with  a  sigh. 
As  his  reason  alone  could  not  lead  him  to  believe  that  the  tree 
would  ever  again  blossom,  or  the  earth  be  again  clothed  with  a 
beautiful  carpet  of  vegetables ;  so  his  heart  sinks  within  him,from 
a  fearful  apprehension  that  the  Lord  of  all  is  unmindful  of  his 
necessities.  This,  ye  Legislators!  is  the  period  when  you 
should,  in  imitation  of  the  churches  of  Rome  and  of  England, 
appoint  your  days  of  humiliation  and  solemn  fasts  ;  for  it  is 
at  this  gloomy  season  that  man  feels  his  dependency  on  a  pow- 
er above  him.  But  when  the  sun  so  diffuses  its  warmth  through 
the  air  as  to  loosen  the  flinty  brook,  and  edge  it  with  green ; 
and  when  the  fuU-bladed  grass  appears,  and  awakened  nature 

*  It  rains  perpetually  among  the  Andes,  while  in  Egypt  seldom  or  never. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  77 

sees  a  new  creation,  then  the  husbandman  exclaims  with  exult- 
ation, ''  Man  is  not  forgotten  !  for  here  and  there  are  pledges 
of  an  adorable  reminiscence,  and  traits  of  a  wonderful  renova- 
tion !" 

If  in  winter  the  husbandman 

"  Marks  not  the  Mighty  Hand 

Thai,  ever  busy,  wheels  the  sileat  spheres," 

he  cannot  miss  it  in 

"  The  fair  profusion  that  o'erspreads  the  spring." 

The  poets  have  conveyed  their  idea  of  spring,  by  describing 
this  genial  season  as  a  youth  of  most  beautiful  air  and  shape, 
with  a  blooming  countenance,  expressive  of  satisfaction  and 
joy,  and  clothed  in  a  flowing  mantle  of  green,  interwoven  with 
flowers ;  a  chaplet  of  roses  on  his  head,  a  narcissus  in  his 
hand,  while  primroses  and  violets  spring  up  under  his  feet.* 
The  ornament  and  pride  of  spring,  Milton's  "bright,  consum- 
mate flower,"  must  therefore  be  our  present  theme. 

Every  one  may  think  he  knows  precisely  what  is  di  Jlower : 
it  is  however  remarkable,  that  botanists  have  been  not  a  little 
puzzled  in  fixing  their  definition  of  it.  The  celebrated  French 
botanist  Tournafort  tells  us,  that  "a  flower  is  a  part  of  a  plant, 
very  often  remarkable  for  its  peculiar  colors,  for  the  most  part 
adhering  to  the  young  fruit,  to  which  it  seems  to  alford  the  first 
nourishment,  in  order  to  explicate  its  most  tender  parts."  Is  this 
&  definition  ?  Pontedra,  in  his  Anthology,  tells  us  that  "a flower 
is  a  part  of  a  plant,  unlike  the  rest  in  form  and  nature."  Jus- 
sieu  says,  "  that  is  properly  a  flower,  which  is  composed  of  sta- 
mina and  of  a  pistillum."  But  some  flowers  have  no  pistil  lum. 
Vaillant  advanced  one  step  beyond  his  predecessors,  and  asserts, 
that  "the  flower  ought,  strictly  speaking,  to  be  reckoned  the 
organs,  which  constitute  the  difierent  sexes  in  plants;  for  that 
the  petals  which  immediately  envelope  them  are  only  the  coats 
to  cover  and  defend  them ;"  but  he  adds,  »  these  coats  are  the 
most  conspicuous  and  most  beautiful  parts  of  the  composition  ; 
and  therefore  to  these,  according  to  the  common  idea,  shall  I 
give  the  name  of  flower."  Martyn  went  a  little  farther,  and 
deefined  "  a  flower  to  be  the  organs  of  generation  of  both  sex- 
es, adhering  to  a  common  placenta,  together  with  their  com- 
mon coverings."  Nay,  if  we  consult  Johnson's  Dictionary  for 
a  definition,  we  shall  find  that  "a  flower  is  that  part  of  a  plant 
which  contains  the  seeds" — which  definition  is  more  applicable 
to  a  pea-pod.     The  early  botanists  meant  by  the  term  anthos 

*  The  poets  have  described  Spring;  accompanied  by  Flora  on  one  hand  and 
Vertumnus  on  the  other,  and  immediately  followed  by  a  stern  figure  in  shin- 
In^  armor.  This  is  Mars,  who,  they  say,  has  long  usxirped  a  place  among  the 
atteadaots  of  Spring. 


78  THE   THOMSONIAN 

Jlos,  or  flou'er,  what  is  now  understood  in  common  conversa- 
tion by  that  term,  namely,  the  rich  and  deUcate  painted  leaves 
or  petals  which  adhere  to  the  seed  vessel,  or  rudiment  of  the 
future  fruit.  In  truth,  botany  was  unknown  to  the  ancients  as 
a  science.  They  had  no  distinct  term  to  express  the  petals  of 
a  flower,  so  as  to  disting-nish  it  from  the  green  leaves  of  the 
plant.  Virijil.  in  describing  his  ameHiis,  which  is  a  species  of 
aster,  the  flower  of  which  has  a  yellow  disk  and  purple  rays, 
calls  it  a  golden  flower  surrounded  with  purple  leaves.  All  his 
translators,  excepting  Martyn.  the  botanist,  have  mistaken  his 
description. 

Addison  makes  the  leaves  of  the  plant  purple,  Dryden  makes 
the  bough  purple,  and  Trapp  gives  the  steifi  a  g-olden  hue.  All 
this  confusion  has  arisen  from  the  want  of  a  word  in  the  Latin 
language  to  express  the  petals  of  the  corolla,  as  distinct  from 
the  common  leaves  of  the  plant. 

Since  the  adoption  of  the  sexual  system,  the  petals,  which 
excite  the  admiration  of  the  florist,  are  considered  by  the  bota- 
nist as  coverings  only  to  the  essential  parts  of  the  flower.  A 
flower,  therefore,  in  modern  botan}',  differs  from  the  same  term 
in  former  \vriters,  and  from  the  common  acceptation  of  it ;  for 
the  calyx,  the  petals,  nay,  the  filaments  of  the  stamina,  may  all 
be  wanting  ;  and  yet  it  is  a  flower,  provided  the  anthers  and 
stigma  can  be  traced.  The  essence  of  a  flower,  then,  consists 
in  the  anthera  and  the  stigma  ;  and  they  constitute  a  flower, 
whether  they  be  supported  by  a  calyx,  or  surrounded  by  a  pe- 
tal or  j^etals,  forming  that  chaplet,  coronet,  or  little  crown,  deno- 
minated in  Latin  corolla.  A  patient  observer  may  find  these 
nice  distinctions  illustrated  in  ferns.  7?iosses,  mushrooms,  lin- 
chens  and  sea-weeds. 

Let  us  now  examine  a  complete  or  perlect  flower  ^  and  let  us 
first  look  at 

The  Calyx:  which  originally  meant  the  green  bottom  of  a 
rose  bud ;  but  it  is  now  extended  to  that  green  flower  cup, 
which  is  generally  composed  of  five  small  leaves,  and  which 
encloses,  sustains  and  embraces  the  corolla,  or  painted  petals,  at 
the  bottom  of  every  flower,  and  indeed  envelops  it  entirely  be- 
fore it  opens,  as  in  the  rose.  The  calyx  which  accompanies 
almost  all  other  flowers,  is  wanting  in  the  tulip,  the  hyacinth, 
the  narcissus,  and  indeed  the  greater  part  of  the  liliaceous  tribe. 
The  admirably  accurate  Greiv  called  this  part  of  the  flower  the 
empalement,  and  defines  it  to  be  the  outermost  part  of  the  flow- 
er, compassing  the  other  two,  namely,  the  corolla,  or  what  he 
called  the  foUature,  and  the  stamina  and  pistillum,  which  he 
called  the  attire. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  79 

The  terms  perianthum,  hivolucntm,  amentlnmi^  spatha, 
gliima,  calj/ptra  and  volva,  are  but  different  appellations  of  the 
varied  calyx.  Linnaeus  tells  us,  that  the  cah'x  is  the  termina- 
tion of  the  cortical  epidermis,  or  outer  bark  of  the  plant,  which, 
after  accompanying:  the  trunk  or  stem  through  all  its  branches, 
breaks  out  at  the  bottom  of  the  flower,  in  the  Ibrm  of  the  flower 
cup.  In  the  sexual  system,  or,  as  some  will  have  it,  the  alle- 
gory of  the  illustrious  Swede,  the  calyx  is  rarely  of  one  entire 
piece,  but  of  several,  one  laid  over  the  other.  This  structure 
serves  to  keep  the  whole  flower  or  composition  tight,  and  at  the 
same  time  allows  it  to  recede  as  the  parts  of  fructification  in- 
crease in  size.  It  is  like  slackening  the  laces  of  the  stays,  sto- 
macheJ's,  or  bodices,  in  cases  and  circumstances  not  entirely 
dissimilar.  Flowers  standing  on  a  Urni  basis,  as  tulips,  have 
no  calyx ;  but  where  the  foot  of  each  petal  is  long,  slender  and 
numerous,  as  in  pinks,  they  are  kept  within  compass  by  a  dou- 
ble calyx.  In  a  few  instances,  the  calyx  is  tinctured  with  a 
different  color  than  green,  and  then  it  is  not  easy  to  distinguish 
the  painted  calyx  from  the  painted  corolla.  Linnajus,  howe- 
ver, gives  this  simple  rule — the  corolla,  in  point  of  situation,  is 
ranged  alternatehj  with  the  stamina,  whereas  the  segment  of 
the  calyx  stands  opposite  to  the  stamina.  Thus  much  for  the 
calyx. 

The  Corolla  is  the  circle  of  beautiful  colored  leaves  which 
stand  within  the  calyx,  forming  a  chaplet,  composed  of  a  petal 
or  petals  ;  for  so  we  call  those  delicately  painted  leaves,  which 
excel  in  beauty  every  other  part  of  the  plant.  In  the  piony, 
the  petals  are  blood  red  ;  in  our  garden  lily,  a  rich  and  delicate 
white;  and  in  tulips  and  violets,  charmingly  variegated.  The 
number  of  petals  in  a  flower  is  to  be  reckoned  from  the  base  of 
the  corolla,  and  the  number  of  the  segments  from  the  middle  of 
it.  If  the  petals  are  quite  distinct  at  the  bottom,  the  flower  is 
said  to  be  polypetalous,  or  to  consist  of  more  petals  than  one ; 
but  if  the  petals  be  united  at  bottom,  though  ever  so  slightly, 
then  the  flower  is  monopetalous,  or  consisting  of  one  petal  on- 
ly ;  thus  the  cranberry  is  monopetalous,  and  not  tretapetalous, 
because,  though  the  petals  fall  ofl"  in  four  distinct  parts,  they 
were  originally  united  at  the  base.  A  bell-shaped  flower  con- 
sists of  one  petal,  and  is  denominated  corolla  campcamlata, 
and  a  funnel-shaped  flower,  corolla  infundib'nUforinis  ;  a  gap- 
ing flower,  corolla  rbis-eiis :  but  the  corolla  crvciformeris 
consists  of  four  petals ;  and  the  butterfly-shaped  flower,  or  co- 
rolla papilio7iacea,  consists  of  five  petals,  as  in  the  pea  blossom. 
The  number  _^ue  is  most  remarkably  predominant  in  the  petals 
of  flowers. 

There  are,  moreover,  irregular  flowers,  consisting  of  dissimi- 
lar parts,  which  are  generally  accompanied  with  a  nectarium, 


80  THE    THOMSONIAN 

as  in  the  larkspur.  The  nectarium,  so  called  from  nectar,  the 
fabled  drinlc  of  the  gods,  is  that  part  or  appendage  of  the  petals 
appropriated  for  containing,  if  not  secreting,  the  honey,  whence 
it  is  taken  by  the  bees.  All  flowers  are  not  provided  with  this 
receptacle  for  honey,  although  it  is  probable  that  every  flower 
has  a  honey  secreting  gland.  The  irregularity  of  the  form  and 
position  of  this  receptacle  frequently  puzzles  young  botanists. 
Sometimes  the  nectarium  makes  part  of  the  calyx  ;  sometimes  it 
is  fixed  in  the  common  base  or  receptacle  of  the  plant.  Plants  in 
which  the  nectaria  are  distinct  from  the  petals,  that  is.  not  lodged 
within  their  substance,  are  generally  poisonous.  If  the  necta- 
rium do  not  exist  as  a  distinct  visible  part,  it  probably  exists  as 
a  pore  or  pores  in  every  plant.*  It  may  hereafter  be  demon- 
strated, that  this  secretory  apparatus  is  primarily  necessary  to 
the  fructification  of  the  plant  itself  Rousseau  says,  that  the 
nectaria  are  one  of  those  instruments  destined  by  nature  to  unite 
the  vegetable  to  the  animal  kingdom,  and  to  make  them  circu- 
late from  one  to  the  other.  A  flower  and  an  insect  have  great 
resemblance  to  each  other.  An  insect  is  nourished  by  honey. 
May  it  not  be  needful  that  the  flower,  during  the  process  of 
fructification,  should  be  nourished  by  honey  from  the  necta- 
ries ?  Sugar  is  formed  in  the  joints  of  the  canes,  for  perhaps  a 
similar  purpose. 

THE  STAMINA,  AND  THE  PISTILLA. 

Within  the  corolla  stands  what  Grew  called  the  attire  ;  but 
what  are  now  called  the  stamens  and  pistils,  which  in  the  sex- 
ual system  and  Linnsean  hypothesis  of  generation  are  the  most 
important  organs  of  a  plant;  for  on  the  number  and  respective 
position  of  the  stamens  and  pistils,  that  prince  of  botanists  has 
founded  his  famous  sexual  system. 

The  stamina  are  filaments  or  threads  issuing  from  aboui 
the  middle  of  the  flower.  Each  stamen  or  thread  is  surmount- 
ed by  a  prominence  or  button,  containing  a  fine  powder.  This 
protuberance  is  called  the  anthera,  which  is  a  capsule  with  one, 
two,  or  more  cavities.  The  summit  of  each  stamina  is  called 
by  way  of  pre-eminence,  anthera,  or  Jlower.  It  contains  the 
pollen,  which  term  means  in  Latin  the  very  fine  dust  in  a  mill. 
Some  conceive  this  dust  to  be  infinitessimally  small  eggs  or 
seeds,  or  rather  organic  particles,  or  moJecvles  ;  others  com- 
pare it  to  the  seminal  fluid  in  animals.  This  pollen,  or  fecun- 
dating powder,  is  very  conspicuous  in  the  tall,  white  garden 
lily.  This  powder  is  collected  by  the  bees,  and  is  formed  by 
some  secret  process  in  their  bodies  into  wax,  which  is  a  singu- 

•  All  the  grasses  have  nectaries.     In  the  Passion  flower  it  is  a  triple  crova 
or  glorjr. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  81 

lar  species  of  vegetable  oil,  rendered  concrete  by  a  peculiar  acid 
in  the  insect. 

The  pistilliim,  which  is  the  Latin  word  for  a  pestle,  stands 
in  the  centre  of  the  flower  :  this  term  has  been  adopted,  from 
the  fancied  resemblance  of  a  pestle  in  a  mortar.  It  is  placed 
on  the  orermen,  or  seed  bud;  its  summit  is  called  stigma,  and 
in  many  flowers  resembles  that  bone  of  the  arm  denominated  the 
OS  humeri ;  but  its  form  varies  in  different  kinds  of  flowers.  The 
surface  of  the  stigma  is  covered  with  a  glutinous  matter,  to 
which  the  fecundating  powder  of  the  anthera  adheres. 

The  r^ermen  is  then  the  base  of  the  pistillum,  and  contains 
the  rudiments  of  the  seed,  which  in  the  process  of  vegetation 
swells  and  becomes  the  seed  vessels.  It  answers  to  the  ovari- 
um, or  rather  uterine  apparatus  of  animals.  The  pericarpiuna 
is  the  germen  grown  to  maturity,  or  the  plant  big  with  seed. 

The  receptacle  is  the  base,  which  connects  the  before  men- 
tioned parts  together. 

Fructification  is  a  very  significant  term  ;  it  is  derived  from 
fructus,  fruit,  and  facio,  to  make.  We  are  not  entirely  satis- 
fied with  the  definition  which  our  great  master  has  given  of 
this  compound  word  ;  he  says,  it  is  a  temporary  part  of  plants 
appropriated  to  generation,  terminating  the  old  vegetable,  and 
beginning  the  new.  We  have  just  described  the  seven  parts 
of  fructification  ;  when  recapitulated,  they  are  in  order  as  fol- 
lows : 

I.  The  Calyx. 
II.  The  Corolla. 

III.  The  Stamina. 

IV.  The  Pistillum.  * 

V.  The  Germen,  or  Pericarpium. 
VI.  The  Seed  ;  and 
VII.  The  Receptacle. 

Having  described  the  seven  several  component  parts  of  that 
beautiful  offspring  of  a  plant  denominated  a  flower.,  we  have 
now  leisure  to  make  a  few  remarks  on  the  whole  composition. 

We  cannot  readily  believe,  with  most  botanists,  that  the  pe- 
tals, or  to  take  them  collectively,  the  corolla,  have  no  other  use 
in  the  vegetable  economy  than  merely  to  cover  and  guard  the 
sexual  organs.  It  militates  against  one  of  the  most  conspicu- 
ous laws  of  nature,  where  we  never  see  a  complicated  contri- 
vance for  a  simple  end  or  purpose,  but  always  the  reverse. 
There  is  a  pulmonary  or  breathing-  system  in  every  vegetable. 
An  artery  belongs  to  each  portion  of  the  corolla,  which  conveys 
the  vegetable  blood  to  the  extremities  of  the  petal,  there  expos- 
ing it  to  the  light  and  to  the  air,  under  a  delicate  membrane, 
which  covers  the  internal  surface  of  the  petal,  where  it  often 
changes  its  color,  and  is  seen  beautifully  in  party-colored  tulips 


82  THE    THOMSONIAN 

and  poppies.  The  vegetable  blood  is  collected  at  the  extremi- 
ties of  what  Darwin  calls  the  coral  arteries,  and  is  returned  by 
correspondent  veins,  exactly  as  he  describes  it  in  the  ,s;reen  fo- 
liage. 

It  is  presumed,  that  this  breathina:  ^^^^  circulating  structure 
has  for  its  end  the  sustenance  of  the  anthers  and  stigma,  as 
well  as  for  the  elaboration  of  honey,  wax  and  essential  oil,  and 
for  perfecting  the  prolific  powder.  The  poetical  author  of  the 
Botanic  Garden  imagines,  that  as  the  glands  which  secrete  the 
honey,  and  perfect  the  pollen,  and  prepare  and  exalt  the  odor- 
iferous essential  oil,  are  attached  to  the  petals,  and  always  fall 
off  and  perish  with  them,  it  is  an  evidence  that  the  vegetable 
blood  is  elaborated  and  osi/g-enated  in  this  pulmonary  system 
of  the  flower,  for  the  express  purpose  of  these  important  secre- 
tions. We  leave  to  the  philosophic  botanist  to  determine,  whe- 
ther there  be  more  of  hypothesis  than  demonstration  in  this  as- 
sertion. We  should,  however,  bear  in  mind  this  fact,  tliat  as 
the  green  leaves  constitute  the  organs  of  respiration  to  the 
leaf-buds,  so  the  hractes  perform  the  same  office  to  the  flower- 
buds. 

Assuredly  there  are  iew  things  in  nature  that  deliglit  the 
eye  and  regale  the  smell  like  what  Milton  calls  "the  bright, 
consummate  flower.''^  Some  of  them  far  exceed  the  finest  fea- 
thers, the  most  brilliant  shells,  or  the  most  precious  stones,  or 
costly  diamonds.  This  appears  to  have  been  the  judgnient  of 
the  learned  and  tasteful  in  all  oges.  The  iexm  flower  has  been 
always  used  to  express  the  most  excellent  and  valuoble  part  of 
a  thing  ;  it  is  synonymous  with  embellishment,  or  ornament ; 
it  is  used  to  express  the  prime,  acme,  or  perfection,  of  an  indi- 
vidual in  the  animal  kingdom,  as  well  as  the  most  distinguish- 
ed and  most  valuable  mental  acquirement;  as  the  flower  of  the 
family,  the  flower  of  the  army,  the  flower  of  chivalry.  To  say 
that  "he  crept  the  flowers  of  every  virtue,"  is  to  express  all 
that  can  be  conceived  of  human  perfection. 

By  tlie  expressive  term  oi  friictification*  botanists  mean, 
not  only  the  evanescent  flower,  but  the  green  or  imperfect  fruit, 
for  they  cannot  well  be  separated  ;  as  a  growing  plant,  like  a 
living  animal,  remains  not  a  moment  the  same,  but  is  contum- 
ally  changing  ;  hence  fructification  is  defined  by  Linnaeus  to 
be  a  temporary  part  of  plants,  terminating  the  old  vegetable, 
and  beginning  the  new.  The  perfection  of  the  vegetable  con- 
sists in  its  fructification  ;  the  essence  of  the  fructification  con- 
sists in  the  flower  and  fruit ;  the  essence  of  the  flower  consists 
in  the  antherae  and  stigma ;  and  the  essence  of  the  fruit  consists 

•  Fructification  comprehends  the  now  state  of  the  flower,  and  the  fuiuri- 
tion  of  the  fruit. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  83 

in  the  seed  ;  and  the  essence  of  the  seed  consists  in  the  corcu- 
kim;  which  is  fastened  to  the  cotyledon ;  and  the  essence  of 
the  corculum  consists  in  the  pkimnla,  in  which  is  the  piinctum 
vitcB  of  the  plant  itself;  very  minute  in  its  dimensions,  but  ca- 
pable, by  the  combination  of  intrinsic  caloric  with  its  innate 
oxyo-en,  of  increasing  like  a  bud,  to  infinity. 

From  this  view  of  the  produce  of  frnctitication,  the  disciples 
of  Linnaeus  have  learned  the  following  principles: 

1st.  That  every  vegetable  is  furnished  with  flower  and  fruit ; 
there  being  no  species  where  these  are  wanting. 

2d.  That  there  is  no  fructification  without  anthera,  stigma, 
and  seed. 

3d.  That  the  anthera  and  stigma  constitute  a  flower,  whether 
the  petals  or  corolla  be  present  or  not. 

4th.  That  the  seed  constitutes  a  fruit,  whether  there  be  a  pe- 
ricarpium  or  not. 

LinuEcus's  theory  of  fructification  is  this  :  he  supposes  that 
the  medullary  part  of  a  plant,  that  is  to  say,  the  pith,  must  be 
joined  with  the  external,  or  cortical  part,  for  the  purpose  of 
producing  a  new  one.  If  the  medulla  be  so  vigorous  as  to  burst 
through  its  containing  vessels,  and  thus  mix  with  the  cortical 
part,  a  bud  is  produced,  either  on  the  branches  or  the  roots  of 
vegetables  :  otherwise  the  medulla  is  extended  till  it  terminates- 
in  the'pistillum,  or  female  part  of  the  flower ;  and  the  cortical 
part  is  likewise  elongated,  till  it  terminates  in  the  anthera.  or 
male  part  of  the  flower;  and  then  the  fecundating  dust,  from 
the  latter,  being  joined  to  the  prolific  juices  of  the  former,  pro- 
duces the  seeds,  or  new  plants  ;  at  the  same  time  the  inner  rind 
is  extended  into  the  petals  or  corolla,  and  the  outer  bark  into  the 
calyx.  This  view  of  a  plant  will  illustrate  our  assertion,  that 
the  seven  essential  parts,  discoverable  in  the  section  of  a  trunk 
of  a  tree,  may  be  discerned  in  its  blossom. 

Plants,  more  especially  "the  bright,  consummate  flower, 
spirits  odorous  breathe.''^  On  what  does  this  agreeable  odor 
depend?  The  chemists  say,  on  the  oil  ;  but  this  is  not  going 
far  enough. 

ESSEiNTIAL  OILS  OF  PLANTS. 

The  bright,  consummate  Fi.ower,  say  the  most  learned  of 
poets,  ^^  spirits  odorous  breathes.^'  Let  us  now  enquire  on 
what  this  odor  depends.  The  chemist  tells  us,  that  it  depends 
on  the  oil  of  the  plant.  But  we  are  dissatisfied  with  this  vague 
answer.  A  vegetable  distils  two  kinds  of  oil,  differing  very 
much  from  each  other;  the  one  is  fixed,  and  the  other  volatile. 
The  fixed  oil  is  combined  with  mucilage  ;  the  volatile,  with  the 
aroma,  or  spiritus  rector  of  the  plant.     The^:re^  oil  is  found 


84  THE  TMOMSONIAN. 

only  in  the  seeds  ;  and  is  confined  almost  entirely  to  those 
which  have  two  cotyledons,  as  in  the  fltix-seed,  almonds  and 
rape-seed.  But  the  volatile  oil  is  found  in  every  part  of  a  plant, 
except  the  cotyledons  of  the  seeds,  where  it  never  occurs;  and 
is  distinguished  pre-eminently  in  Miltoti's  bright,  consummate 
flower. 

When  we  say  that  the  fine  fragrance  of  a  flower  depends  on 
its  volatile  o'\\]  or  that  its  aromatic  virtue  is  contained  in  it, 
and  hence  called  its  essential  oil,  we  do  not  go  quite  far  enouo-h. 
We  are  so  ftir  from  being  admitted,  says  the  profound  Locke 
into  the  secrets  of  nature,  that  we  scarcely  approach  the  first 
entrance.  We  overlook  the  operations  of  those  invisible  fluids, 
which  encompass  them,  upon  whose  motions  and  operations 
depend  those  qualities,  for  which  they  are  most  remarkable. 
Thus  this  essential  oil  contains  something  more  subtile  and  act- 
ive than  itself;  a  spirit^  an  exceedingly  minute,  volatile,  and 
scarcely  ponderable  spirit,  which,  when  separated,  leaves  no- 
thing peculiar  in  the  remaining  oil.  This  is  the  spiritus  rec- 
tor of  the  old  chemists,  the  predominant,  prevailing,  paramount, 
or  ruling  spirit  of  the  plant.  This  aeriform  fluidity,  gas,  or 
spirit,  denominate  it  which  you  will,  and  which  is  inimitable 
by  art,  imparts  that  smell,  taste,  and  medicinal  virtue  to  that 
peculiar  species  of  plants,  and  is  found  in  no  other.  The^^^red! 
oil  of  a  plant  is  innate;  but  the  essential  oil  is  the  eflect,  or 
the  result  of  the  vegetable  economy,  operating  in  perfect  health, 
and  in  full  perfection,  while  drawing  its  sustentation  from  its 
native  earth  and  air. 

The  essential  oils  of  plants  have  their  respective  characteris- 
tics from  their  aroma,  or  spirits.  The  volatile  oil  serves,  in 
some  degree,  for  enveloping,  arresting,  and  preventing  a  too 
sudden,  and  too  copious  expenditure  of  them ;  while  the  fixed 
oil  serves  only  for  connecting  the  solid  parts  together,  like  the 
oil  or  fat  in  animals.  The  diflerence  in  the  nature  of  these  two 
oils,  is  therefore  very  wide.  How  different  must  be  the  medi- 
cinal virtues  of  the  root — the  wood — the  leaf— the  flower — the 
fruit,  and  the  seed  of  the  same  plant?  Yet  physicians  have 
been  in  the  habit  of  pounding  up  an  entire  vegetable  in  a  mor- 
tar, and  squeezing  out  the  juices  of  it,  and  of  giving  this  mix- 
ture of  every  thing  to  the  sick  ;  and  from  its  operations  we  pro- 
nounce on  its  predominant  medicinal  virtue. 

Those  who  filled  our  systems  of  Materia  Medica  with  Ga- 
lenical preparations,  had  no  idea  of  the  subtile  structure  and 
economy  of  a  vegetable.  While  transforming  a  plant  into  an 
ointment,  who  ever  thinks  of  its  structure  ?  And  who  that  has 
attended  closely  to  its  structure  and  economy,  can  rely  on  its 
analysis  by  fire,  which  reduces  every  plant  to  the  same  coaly 
the  same  earth,  and  the  same  salt  7 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  85 

Some  of  our  readers  may  be  of  the  opinion,  that  by  fixing 
our  eyes  too  intently  on  the  poetical  flower  of  Milton,  we  have 
strayed  from  the  enlightened  path  of  modern  chemistry,  into 
such  a  thicket  of  odoriferous  flowers,  as  to  become,  if  not  stupi- 
fied,  at  least  so  far  bewildered  as  not  to  be  able  to  find  our  way 
out.  We  are  aware  that  the  term  spirit  is  not  fashionable. 
We  mean  by  it,  the  finest  and  most  subtile  parts  of  bodies  ;  the 
most  active  part  of  matter,  with  regard  to  its  facility  of  motion, 
in  comparison  with  the  grosser  parts  :  we  mean  that  which  is 
discoverable  by  its  smartness  to  the  smell,  and  that  whicli  rises 
first  in  distillation.  The  name  of  spirit  was  formerly  given  to 
any  subtile,  volatile  substance,  that  exhaled  from  bodies  in  a 
given  degree  of  heat ;  and,  by  a  sort  of  imaginary  analogy,  was 
transferred  to  the  human  system  ;  hence  the  term  animal  spi- 
rits, which  was  ingeniously  supposed  to  reside  in  the  nervous 
fluid,  as  the  spiritus  rector  resides  in  the  essential  oil  of 
plants. 

If  the  term  spirit  should  displease  the  fastidious  critic,  we 
would  remind  him,  that  spirit,  in  the  German  language,  is 
gascht ;  whence  is  derived  the  English  word  ghost,  or  spirit ; 
and  hence  our  fashionable  word  gas,  or  gaz  ;  by  which  we 
are  to  understand  an  excedingly  rare,  highly  elastic,  and  invi- 
sible fluid,  not  condensible  by  cold.  Should  the  critic  persist 
in  refusing  his  imprimatur  to  the  term  spirit,  or  spiriivs  rec- 
tor, we  will  compound  with  him  by  giving  him  in  its  stead  the 
word  quintessence  ;  by  which  we  mean  the  specific  essence, 
the  active  principle,  by  the  power  ol  which  medicines  ope- 
rate. By  this  term  was  meant  the  predominant,  rulins:,  or  dis- 
tinguishing part  of  medicinal  simples,  which  can  be  separated 
in  imagination  from  the  tangible  body,  leaving  its  organization 
entire.  To  be  still  more  particular  :  the  ancient  philosophers, 
and  after  them  our  old  chemists,  conceived  that_^re — air — wa- 
ter and  earth,  contributed  to  the  composition  of  all  vegetables ; 
to  all  which  was  added  bl  fifth  thing,  or  ens,  which  enriched 
and  distinguished  the  whole,  by  its  own  particular  efiicacy ; 
and  on  which  the  odor,  taste,  and  virtue  of  each  plant  depend- 
ed :  they  therefore  asserted,  that  each  species  of  plants  was 
made  up  of  the  four  common  elements  ;  but  to  these  was  add- 
ed Q.  fifth,  which,  though  small  in  quantity,  was  the  most  pow- 
erful, efficacious  and  predominant  of  its  component  parts;  this, 
therefore,  they  called  the  fifth  essence — or,  as  expressed  m  La- 
tin, the  quinta  essentia. 

The  knowledge  of  quintessences  was  considered  two  hun- 
dred years  ago,  as  the  utmost  bounds,  the  ne  plus  ultra  of 
chemical  perfection.  Is  not  this  precisely  the  case,  at  present, 
with  the  knowledge  of  gases,  or  spirits  7 

We  have  said,  that  all  aromatic  plants  contain  a  volatile  oil ; 


86  THE    THOMSONIAN 

but  this  aromatic  oil  does  not  reside  in  the  same  part  in  every 
kind  of  plant:  sometimes  indeed  we  find  it  distributed  through 
the  whole  plant,  as  in  the  Bohemian  angelica:  sometimes  it 
exists  only  in  the  bark,  as  in  cinnamon.  Balm,  mint,  rose- 
mary., and  icormwood  contain  their  essential  oil  in  their  leaves 
and  stems;  while  the  eleca7npane  and  Jlorentine  iris  de\)Osite 
it  in  their  roots.  All  the  terebinihcnate,  or  resin-bearing  tree, 
have  it  in  their  young  branches  ;  while  the  chamomile  and  the 
rose  have  it  in  their  petals.  Many  fruits  contain  it  throughout 
their  whole  substance,  as  pepper  and  juniper.  Oranges  and 
lejnons  contain  it  in  their  rmd  or  peel.  The  mitm.eg-tree 
bears  its  essential  oil  in  the  nut,  and  its  immediate  envelopment, 
or  rather  its  second  envelopment,  which  is  mace.  The  seeds 
of  the  umheWferovs  plants,  such  <xs  fennel,  cummin  and  anise 
have  the  vesicles  of  essential  oil  along  the  projecting  lines  of 
their  skins. 

Passing  from  the  aroma  of  plants  to  those  qualities  which 
powerfully  affect  the  organs  of  taste,  we  remark  that  the  taste 
of  essential  oils  is  pungent,  or  hot.  But  it  is  curious  that  the 
taste  of  the  plant  does  not  always  influence  that  of  its  essential 
oil ;  for  the  oil  of  pepper  has  no  extraordinary  acrimony.;  and 
that  which  is  obtained  from  wormwood  is  not  biuer  :  and  so  of 
color:  the  oil  oired  roses  is  tvhlte ;  the  oil  of  lavender  ijelloiv  ; 
and  that  of  chamomile  a  fine  bine.  The  oil  of  parsley  is  of  a 
briirht  green,  and  that  of  millefoil  a  sea  green.  This  is  a  va- 
luable part  of  botany,  alid  ought  to  be  diligently  pursued  in 
this  country, 

TO  OUR  FAIR  COUNTRY  WOMEN. 

If  love  be  any  refinement,  conjugal  love  must  be  certainly  so  in  a  much 
higher  degree.  It  is  the  parent  of  substantial  virtues  and  agreeable  qualities, 
and  cultivates  the  mind  while  it  improves  the  behavior. 

Spectator,  No.  525. 

We  dedicate  the  present  chapter  to  such  of  our  fair  country 
women,  as  honor  tliese  essays  with  perusal.  Our  Flora,  ou 
this  occasion,  has  bound  her  cheerful  brow  with  myrtle  and 
placed  the  lohite  rose  in  her  bosom.*  We  have  moreover  .se- 
lected for  a  motto,  a  passage  from  that  accomplished  scholar 
and  friend  of  the  sex,  Addison,  as  containing  a  charming  sen- 
timent, every  way  proper  to  precede  the  history  of  a  female, 
who  not  only  shone  with  uncommon  splendor  as  an  aritst  and 
a  botanist,  but  was  rendered  still  more  conspicuous  by  the  ad- 
ditional lustre  of  conjugal  affection,  which  virtue  she  exercised 
at  the  darkest  periods,  and  during  the  most  distressful  pangs  of 
human  calamity. 

•  Plants  sacred  to  love  in  ancient  mythology. 


METER  I A    MEDICA.  87 

0«r  fair  readers  will  pardon  us,  if  we  should  fail  in  celebrating 
conjii2:al  affection,  the  ground  work  of  all  the  domestic  virtues. 
Teaeliers  of  righteousness  themselves  may  excuse  us,  if  we 
cast  a  look  of  regret  to  this  too  much  neglected  portion  of  mor- 
al pliilosophy.  We  have  colleges  for  teaching  every  art  and 
science.  We  have  minute  directions  in  gardening  and  agricul- 
ture. We  have  numberless  books  on  the  doctrine  of  business; 
on  self  policy,  or  the  art  of  rising  in  life;  on  oratory,  and  on 
politics  ;  while  that  which  is  worth  them  all,  the  doctrine  of 
domestic  happiness,  is  left  comparatively  uncultivated ;  yet 
this  is  that  philosophy,  spoken  of  by  Lord  Bacon,  which  of  all 
others  '^conies  home  to  inen^s  business  and  boso?ns." 

The  history  of  every  civilized  nation,  nay  every  man's  own 
recollection,  affords  abundant  proofs,  that  the  female  mind  is 
equally  capable  with  that  of  the  male.  It  is  situation  and  cir- 
cumstances that  rouse  the  latent  etiergies  of  the  female  soul. 
Whence  is  it  that  the  children  of  widows  become  generally 
better  men  and  better  women,  than  children  brought  up  in  con- 
junction with  the  fatlier  ?  It  IS  because  afflictive  circumstan- 
ces have  called  forth  the  dormant  energies  of  heroic  woman, 
and  perfected  a  virtue  peculiar  to  the  sex  ;  a  virtue  which  ori- 
ginated in  conjugal  affection.  Can  this  evanescent  world,  this 
anxious  scene,  exhibit  a  more  interesting  sight  to  a  philoso- 
pher, than  a  virtuous  widow  weeping  over  her  ^'houseless 
child  of  u-ant  V  Yes  ;  there  is  one  picture  still  more  affect- 
ing. It  is  where  the  father  and  husband  is  worse  than  dead 
through  his  folly  and  his  crimes.  Here,  if  conjugal  love  has 
not  been  ripened  into  maternal  affection,  and  grown  up  into 
the  highest  of  stoical  virtues,  nay  more,  sublimed  into  reli- 
gion, the  wretched  woman  sinks  into  intemperance,  or  is  lost  in 
despair.  An  over  anxious  and  unrestrained  fondness  is  not 
true  maternal  affection.  The  fowls  of  the  air  and  the  beasts  of 
the  field  have  also  a  blind  and  furious  fondness  for  their  youno-. 
Maternal  affection  is  where  judgment  draws  more  closely  the 
bonds  of  nature. 

The  happiness  of  the  conjugal  state  appears  heightened,  says 
Addison,  to  the  highest  degree  it  is  capable  of,  when  we  see  two 
persons  of  accomplished  minds  not  only  united  in  the  same  in- 
terests and  affections,  but  in  their  taste  of  the  same  improve- 
ments, pleasures,  and  diversions.  Pliny,  one  of  the  finest  o-en- 
tlemen  and  politest  writers  among  the  Romans,  has  left  us,  in 
his  letter  to  Hispulla,  his  wife's  aunt,  one  of  the  most  agreeable 
family  pieces  of  this  kind  ever  seen.  We  refer  our  readers  to 
the  525th  number  of  the  Spectator  for  the  letter  itselfj  and  has- 
ten to  give  an  account  of  an  ingenious  and  excellent  woman, 
who  enlivened  the  dungeon  of  her  husband  with  flowers,  and 
entwined  his  fetters  with  the  white  rose  and  the  myrtle. 


88  THE    THOMSONIAN 

It  is  a  singular  fact,  says  Dr.  Pnlteney,  that  physic  is  indebt- 
ed for  the  most  complete  set  of  fissures  of  the  medical  plants  to 
the  genius  and  industry  of  a  lady,  exerted  on  an  occasion  that  re- 
dounded highly  to  her  praise.     The  name  of 

MRS.  ELIZABETH  BLACKWELL 

is  well  known,  both  from  her  own  merit  and  the  fiite  of  her  un- 
fortunate husband,  who,  condemned  for  crimes  of  state,  suffered 
death  on  the  scaffold  in  Sweden,  in  the  year  1747. 

We  are  informed  she  was  the  daughter  of  a  merchant  in  the 
neighborhood  of  Aberdeen,  of  which  city  Dr.  Alexander  Black- 
well,  her  husband,  was  a  native,  and  where  he  received  a  univer 
sity  education,  and  was  early  distinguished  for  his  knowledge. 
After  having  failed  in  his  attemptto  introduce  himself  in  practice, 
first  in  Scotland  and  afterwards  in  London,  he  became  corrector 
to  a  printing  press,  and  soon  after  commenced  printing  himself. 
But  being  prosecuted  by  the  trade,  and  at  length  involved  in  debt, 
was  thrown  into   prison.      To  relieve  these  distresses   Mrs. 
Blackwell  having  a  genius  for  drawing  and  painting,  exerted 
all  her  talents  ;   and,  understanding  that  an  herbal  of  medicinal 
plants  was  greatly  wanted,  she  exhibited  to  sir  Hans  Sloane, 
Dr.  Mead,  and  other  physicians,  some  specimens  of  her  art  in 
painting  plants,  who  approved  so  highly  of  them,  as  to  en- 
courage her  to  prosecute  a  work  by  the  profits  of  which  she 
is  said  to  have  procured  her  husband's   liberty,  after  a  con- 
finement of   two  years.      Dr.  Isaac    Rand    was  at  that  time 
Demonstrator  to  the  Company  of  Apothecaries,  in  the  garden 
at  Chelsea.     By  his  advice  she  took  up  her  residence  oppo- 
site the  Physic  Garden,  in  order  to  facilitate  her  design  by 
receiving  the  plants  as  fresh  as  possible.     He  not  only  pro- 
moted her  work  with  the  public,  but,  together  with  the  cel- 
ebrated Philip  Miller,  aflbrded  her  all  possible  direction  and 
assistance  in  the  execution  of  it.      After  she  had  completed 
the   drawings,    she  engraved    them   on  copper,    and    colored 
the  prints  with  her  own  hands.     During  her  abode  at  Chel- 
sea,  she  was    frequently  visited   by  persons  of  quality,  and 
many  scientific  people,  who  admired  her  performances,  and 
patronized  her  undertaking. 

On  publishing  the  first  volume,  in  1737,  she  obtained  a  recom- 
mendation from  Dr.  Mead,  Dr.  Sherard,  Dr.  Rand,  and  others, 
to  be  prefixed  to  it.  And  being  allowed  to  present,  in  person, 
a  copy  to  the  College  of  Physicians,  that  body  made  her  a  pre- 
sent, and  gave  her  a  public  testimonial  of  their  approbation; 
with  leave  to  prefix  it  to  her  book.  The  second  volume  was 
finished  in  1739,  and  the  whole  published  under  the  following 
title  :  A  curiojis  Herbal,  containing  500  cuts  of  the  most  nse- 
ful  plants  which  are  now  used  in  the  2>J'cictice  ofphysiC)  en- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  89 

graved  on  folio  copper  plates,  after  drawings  taken  from  the 
life.  By  Elizabeth  Blackwell.  To  which  is  added,  a  short 
description  of  the  Plants,  and  their  common  tises  in  Physic. 
1739."     2Vol.  fol. 

The  drawings  are  in  general  faithful  ;  and  if  there  is  want- 
ing that  accuracy  which  modern  improvements  have  rendered 
necessary  in  delineating  the  more  minute  parts,  yet,  upon  the 
whole,  the  figures  are  sutliciently  distinctive  of  the  subject. 
Each  plate  is  accompanied  with  an  engraved  page,  containing 
the  Latin  and  English  officinal  names,  followed  by  a  short  de- 
scription of  the  plant,  and  a  summary  of  its  qualities  and  uses. 
After  these,  occur  the  name  in  various  other  languages.  These 
illustrations  were  the  share  her  husband  took  in  the  work. 
This  ill-fated  man,  after  his  failure  in  physic,  and  in  printing, 
became  an  unsuccessful  candidate  for  the  place  of  secretary  to 
the  Society  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning.  He  was  made 
superintendent  of  the  works  belonging  to  the  Duke  of  Candos, 
at  Cannons,  and  experienced  those  disappointments  incident  to 
projectors.  He  formed  schemes  in  agriculture,  and  wrote  a 
treatise  on  the  subject,  which  we  are  told  was  the  cause  of  his 
being  engaged  in  Sweden.  In  that  kingdom  he  drained  marsh- 
es, practised  physic,  and  was  even  employed  in  that  capacity 
for  the  king.  At  length  he  was  involved  in  some  state  cabals, 
or,  as  some  accounts  have  it,  in  a  plot  with  Count  Tessin,  for 
which  he  suffered  death,  protesting  his  innocence  to  the  last. 

So  respectable  a  performance  as  Mrs.  Blackwell's,  attracted 
the  attention  of  physicians  on  the  continent.  It  was  translated 
into  German,  and  republished  at  Norimburg  in  1750.  To  this 
edition  was  prefixed  a  most  elaborate  and  learned  catalogue  of 
botanical  authors.  In  1773,  a  supplemental  volume,  exhibiting 
plants  omitted  by  Mrs.  Blackwell,  was  published  under  the  di- 
rection of  Ludwig,  Ptose  and  Boehmer.  In  this  form,  the  worjc 
of  this  learned  and  ingenious  lady  surpassed  all  that  had  been 
published.  We  hope  the  patrons  of  botany  will  gratify  the  la- 
dies of  America  witli  a  sight  of  these  splendid  books,  not  merely 
as  a  valuable  treasure  of  botanical  knowledge,  but  to  show  the 
men  to  what  a  degree  of  perfection  the  other  sex  may  ascend, 
when  their  talents  are  brought  forth,  and  sublimed  by  conjugal 
aflection. 

Prior  to  the  time  of  Mrs.  Blackwell,  flourished  the  very  in- 
genious and  indefatigable 

MARIA    SYBIL    MERIAN, 

Who  was  born  in  Francfort,  in  1G47.  Her  father  was  a  cele- 
brated engraver,  and  from  him  she  acquired  a  knowledge  of 
drawing.  He  placed  her  under  the  instruction  of  an  eminent 
painter,  from  whom  she  learnt  a  remarkable  neatness  of  maa- 

7 


90  THE    THOMSONIAN. 

aging  the  pencil,  and  delicacy  of  coloring.  She  was  particu- 
larly fond  of  painting  snbjects  of  natural  history,  such  as  plants, 
reptiles,  and  insects,  which  she  most  commonly  drew  from  na- 
ture: at  the  same  lime  she  studied  those  objects  with  a  curi- 
osity and  with  the  inquisitive  spirit  of  a  naturalist ;  so  that  her 
knowledge  of  nature  and  the  work  of  her  hands  rendered  her 
every  day  more  and  more  celebrated.  She  most  commonly 
painted  her  subjects  on  vellum,  and  in  water  colors,  and  she 
finished  an  astonishing  number.  She  painted  the  caterpillar, 
in  all  its  various  changes  and  forms  in  which  they  successive- 
ly appear,  from  their  quiescent  state  till  they  become  butterflies. 
Not  contented  with  pcunting  the  plants,  insects,  and  reptiles  of 
her  own  country,  this  enterprising  woman  crossed  the  Atlantic 
and  visited  Surinam,  to  paint  those  plants,  insects,  and  reptiles 
which  were  peculiar  to  that  climate.  At  her  return  to  Europe, 
she  published  two  volumes  of  engravings,  which  she  executed 
from  her  own  paintings,  and  which  hold  a  high  rank  in  that 
art.  But  they  are  not  equal  to  her  paintings  ;  for  her  glistening 
serpents,  her  wet  frogs,  and  her  crawling  spiders,  are  executed 
with  horrible  precision.  This  celebrated  woman  died  in  1717. 
She  left  a  daughter,  who  painted  in  the  same  style,  and  who 
had  accompanied  her  mother  to  Surinam.  This  young  lady 
published  a  third  volume  in  folio,  collected  from  the  designs  of 
her  mother,  which  complete  work  has  been  always  admired  by 
the  learned,  as  well  as  by  the  professors  of  painting. 

We  cannot  too  strongly  recommend  to  our  fair  readers  the 
art  of  delineation  or  drawing.  What  a  decided  superiority  does 
a  facility  in  this  art  give  to  the  person  who  possesses  it,  over 
the  one  who  does  not?  If  the  time  consumed  by  our  young 
ladies,  in  learning  to  play  tolerably  ill  on  sundry  musical  in- 
struments, were  devoted  to  the  charming  art  of  copying;  nature, 
aijd  acquiring  some  knowledge  of  her  works,  how  beautifully 
would  it  embellish  our  system  of  female  education  ?  This  art 
is  not  merely  in  itself  amusinof,  but  may  be  highly  useful  and 
important,  in  a  change  of  fortune  and  utiderthe  pressure  of  ad- 
verse circumstances,  as  has  been  illustrated  in  the  history  of 
the  amible  but  unfortunate  Elizabeth  Blackwell. 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  PLANTS. 

The  indefatigable  John  and  Casper  Baiikin  undertook  an 
universal  history  of  plants,  with  a  synonymy,  or  exact  list  of 
the  names  that  every  plant  bore  in  all  the  writers  who  preceded 
them.  Their  works,  which  are  examples  of  vast  knowledge 
and  solid  labors,  are  still  the  guide  to  all  those  who  wish  to  con- 
sult ancient  authors  on  botany.  After  their  death,  which  hap- 
pened between  the  years  1624  and  1630,  scarcely  any  author 
wrote  on  medicine,  but  wrote  more  or  less  on  botany. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  91 

Hyeromjmns  Bouc,  a  German,  was  the  first  of  the  moderns 
who  has  given  a.??iethodical  distribution  of  vegetables.  In  his 
history  of  plants,  published  in  1532,  he  divides  the  eight  hun- 
dred species  there  described  into  three  classes,  founded  on  their 
qualities,  habit,  figure  and  size.  Clusius  endeavored  soon  af- 
ter to  establish  the  natural  distijiction  of  Theophrastus,  which 
was  into  trees,  shrubs,  and  undershrubs.  Others  attempted  to 
characterize  plants  by  the  roots,  stems,  and  leaves,  but  all  were 
found  insufficient.  It  was  thirty  years  from  this  time  that  Ges- 
ner  suggested  the  first  idea  of  a  system  founded  on  the  flower 
and  fruit.  But  the  application  of  this  suggestion  was  not 
made  till  twenty  years  afterwards  by  Ccesaralpinus,  a  physician 
and  professor  of  botany  at  Padua.  Yet  this  system  of  Caesaral- 
pinus,  founded  on  scientific  principles,  perished,  or  rather  slept 
for  nearly  a  century,  when  it  was  awakened  by  Dr.  Morison  of 
Aberdeen.  The  next  systematical  arrangement  of  plants  was 
given  by  the  learned  and  pious  Mr.  Ray.  His  general  history 
of  plants  contains  eighteen  thousand  six  hundred  and  fifty-five 
species  and  varieties.  He  allows  one  division  to  such  plants  as 
grow  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea  ;  or  upon  rocks  that  are  surround- 
ed by  that  element ;  but  naturalists  have  now  removed  these 
from  the  vegetable  to  the  animal  kiiio^dom.  Then  Herman  of 
Leyden  [uiblisiied  his  systematic  arransfement ;  and  soon  after 
the  iamous  Boerhaaveia.vored  the  public  u'ith  his  plan.  About 
this  time,  or  a  little  anterior,  viz.  the  year  1700,  the  celebrated 
Toiirnefort  came  forth  with  his  learned  and  extensive  botanical 
system;  then  Knaut,  Ludwig,  Po7iledra  and  Magnolms.  It 
appears  that  Ceesaralpinus  followed  Gesner  ;  Morison,  Caesaral- 
pinus ;  Ray  improved  upon  Morison;  Knaut  abridged  Ray; 
Herman  formed  himself  partly  on  Morison,  and  partly  on  Ray; 
while  Boerhaave  took  the  indefatiirable  Herman  for  his  guide. 
But  it  was  Tonrnefort  of  France  who  surnasssed  all  his  prede- 
cessors in  supplying  a  clue  to  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Intricate 
as  is  this  system,  it  was  the  most  complete  the  world  had  ever 
seen.  The  French  nation  were  proud  of  it ;  and  gloried  in 
^ivins:  an  everlasting  botanical  syst(>m  to  an  admiring  world. 
Yet  Tournefort  did  but  clear  the  way  for  one  still  greater  than 
himself;  for  in  the  year  173.5  arose  the  sun  of  the  botanical 
world,  LiNX.EUs;  of  whose  system  we  can  ^ive  here  only  a 
mere  sketch  or  outline. 

Excepting  Aristotle^  the  ancient  writers  on  Natural  History 
had  no  systematical  arrangement ;  but  described  plants  and  ani- 
mals as  they  came  to  hand.  The  boundaries  of  natural  history 
have  been  so  enlarged  by  modern  enterprise  and  industry,  that 
it  has  become  necessary  to  class  and  sort  this  vast  multitude,  or 
the  student  of  nature  would  be  lost  in  the  exuberance  before 
him.     It  is  natural  enough,  says  that  pleasant  writer,  Gold- 


92  THE  THOMSONIAN 

smith,  for  ignorance  to  lie  down  in  hopeless  uncertainty  ;  and 
to  declare,  that  to  particularize  each  body  is  utterly  impossible  ; 
but  it  is  otherwise  with  the  active,  searching  mind  :  no  way  in- 
timidated with  the  immense  variety,  it  begins  the  task'  of  num- 
bering, grouping  and  classing  all  the  various  kinds  that  fall 
within  its  notice ;  finds  every  day  new  relations  between  the 
several  parts  of  creation,  acquires  the  art  of  considering  several 
at  a  time  under  one  point  of  view  ;  and  at  last  begins  to  find 
that  the  variety  is  neither  so  great,  nor  so  inscrutable  as  was 
first  imagined.  It  is  a  diflicult  task  to  find  out  a  particular  man 
in  an  immense  crowd,  or  mob  of  people  ;  but  if  this  promiscu- 
ous jumble  of  people  be  systematized,  or  arranged  into  brigades, 
regiments,  companies,  and  platoons,  we  shall  be  able  to  find  the 
individual  without  much  difficulty.  It  is  thus  in  a  systematical 
arrangement  of  vegetables.  Bo7inet  has,  in  a  great  measure, 
disregarded  system ;  and  Biiffon  has  treated  it  with  contempt. 
But  the  eloquent  author  of  the  '■^  History  of  the  Earth  and 
Animated  iVa^z/re"  justly  remarks,  that  books  are  written  with 
opposite  views,  some  only  to  be  read,  and  some  only  to  be  occa- 
sionally consulted;  that  the  methodists  have  sacrificed  to  order 
alone  all  the  delights  of  the  subject,  all  the  acts  of  heightening, 
awakening,  or  continuing  curiosity.  But  he  adds,  that  system- 
atical arrangements  "have  the  same  use  in  science  that  a  dic- 
tionary has  in  language  :  but  with  this  difference,  that  in  a  dic- 
tionary we  proceed  from  the  name  to  the  definition  ;  in  a  sys- 
tem of  natural  history  we  proceed  from  the  definition  to  find 
out  the  thing.  Without  the  aid  of  system.  Nature  must  still 
have  lain  undistinofuished,  like  furniture  in  a  lumber-room; 
every  thing  we  wish  for  is  there  indeed,  but  we  know  not  where 
to  find  it." 

The  opinion  of  Sir  Joseph  Banks  had  no  small  influence  in 
diverting  a  celebrated  Botanist  from  his  project ;  for  while  under 
the  influence  of  it,  he  had  written  to  that  celebrated  Naturalist. 
He  in  answer  says  : — •'  How  can  you  and  I  correspond  about  a 
plant,  which  you  may  have  found  in  America,  or  1  in  Europe,  and 
is  known  to  but  one  of  us,  unless  we  have  agreed  on  a  technical 
language,  by  which  we  can  describe  to  each  other  the  constitu- 
ent parts ;  and  by  that  means  agree  to  what  known  plant  it 
bears  the  greatest  resemblance.  The  Jiinna-an  system  is  not 
certainly  to  be  considered  as  free  from  faults.  All  human  con- 
trivance will  abound  with  them.  But  still  I  cannot  help  allow- 
ing that,  as  far  as  I  know,  it  is  the  best  hitherto  invented,  by  a 
great  interval  ;  and  as  such,  is  now,  in  a  manner  invariably  re- 
ceived by  the  whole  learned  world." 

We  therefore  present  our  readers  with  a  sketch  of  this  famous 
system. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


93 


THE  OUTLINES  OF  LINN^US'S  SYSTEM  OF 
VEGETABLES. 

The  sexual  system,  as  invented  and  given  to  the  world  by 
Linnceus,  is  built  or  founded  on  the  male  and  female  parts  of 
FRUCTIFICATION.  By  fructificatiou  is  meant^ower  and/n«^; 
and  is  disposed  accordino;  to  the  number,  proportion  and  situa- 
tion of  the  stame)ts  or  pistils,  or  the  male  and  female  organs. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  of  expression,  he  has  had  recourse  to 
the  Greek  language.  Andria,  from  Av/;p,  a  husband,  he  has 
applied  to  the  stamen  ;  and  gynia.  from  ^ivr;.  a  wife,  to  the  pis- 
til. The  STAMEN  consists  of  two  parts  : — first,  ihe  filament  is 
that  part  which  elevates  the  anthera; — second,  the  anthera  is 
the  part  that  bears  the  pollen,  or  farina  faecundans,  that  impreg- 
nates the  pistillum  or  germen. 

First,  The  pistullum  consists  of  three  parts;  i\\e  germen 
or  embryo  of  the  future  fruit ; — second,  the  style,  which  ele- 
vates the  stigma;  third,  ihe stigma  or  summit,  which  is  cover- 
ed with  a  moisture,  that  dissolves  the  farina  fascundans  of  the 
anthera,  fitting  it  for  vivification. 

Of  the  CLASSES  and  orders,  with  the  names  of  plants  exem- 
plifying them. 

MONANDRIA 

CONTAINS    II  ORDERS. 

One  Stamen  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Flower. 

ria=c  r         S  Order  I.       Monogynia        ?    „    p     5  Canna. 
Class  I.        ^  Qj.^g^  jj      Digynia  ^    e-  g-    ^  Blitum. 

DIANDRIA 

CONTAINS  HI  ORDERS. 

Tvx)  Stamens  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Flower. 

Order  I        Monogynia       )  C  Monarda. 


Class  II.     <  Order  II.     Digynia  >   E.  g.    <  Anthoxanthum. 

(  Order  III.  Trigynia  }  (  Piper. 

TRIANDRIA 

CONTAINS  III  ORDERS. 

Three  Stamens  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Flower. 
Order  I.      Monogynia       )  C  Crocus. 


COrd 

{  Ord 
(Ord 


Class  III.    <(  Order  II.     Dizynia  >    e.  G.    <  Avenna. 

Order  III.   Trigynia  )  ( MoUuggo. 

TETRANDRIA 

CONTAINS  III  ORDERS. 

Four  Stamens  in  the  Fower  with  the  Fruit. 
{If  two  proximate  Stamens  are  shorter,  let  it  be  referred  to  Class  XIV.) 

C  Order  I.      Monogynia       ")  C  Dipsacus, 

Class  IV.     <  Order  II.     Digynia  >   E.  G.    <  Hammamelis. 

(  Order  III.  Tetragynia       )  ( Polamogeton. 


94 


THE    TUOMSONIAN 


Class  V. 


PENTANDRIA 

CONTAINS  VI  ORDERS. 

Five  stamens  in  the  Herinaphrodite  Flower. 


f*  Order  I.  3Ionogmia 

Order  II.  Digynia 

!  Order  III.  Trv^xjnia 

Order  lA'.  Tetragytiia 

Order  V.  Pentagynia 

Order  VI.  Polyginia 


f  Nerium. 
I  Anethum. 
1  Tumer.i. 
1  Parnassia. 
I  Crassula. 
l_  JVlyosurus. 


HEXANDRIA 


CONTAINS  V  ORDERS. 


Six  Stamens  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Flower. 
{If  of  this,  tivo  opposite  Stamens  are  shorter,  it  belongs  to  Class  XV.) 

1 


Class  VI. 


f  Order  I.       Monogynia 

I  Order  II.     Digynia  \ 

{  Order  III.  Trigynia  }    e.  g. 

I  Order  IV.    Tdragynia  | 

( Order  V.      Polyginia  ) 


f  Amaryllis. 
I  Oryza. 

Rumex. 

Petiveria. 

Alisraa. 


HEPTANDRIA 

CONTAINS  IV  ORDERS. 

Seven  Stamens  in  the  ."ame  Flower  with  the  Pistillum. 


(Order  I.  Monogynia 

Order  II.  Digynia, 

Order  III.  Telraginia 

(  Order  IV.  Heptagynia 


) 


Aesculus. 

Limeum, 
■j  Saururus. 
[Septas. 


OCTANDRIA 

CONTAINS  IV  ORDERS. 

Eight  Stamens  in  the  same  Flower  with  the  Pistillum. 


Class  VIII. 


(  Order  I. 
Order  II. 


Monogynia 
Digynia 


Order  III.   Trigyma 
Order  IV.   Tetragijnia 


f  Oenothera. 
Galenia. 
Polygonum. 
Adoxa. 


Class  IX. 


ENNEANDRIA 

CONTAINS  III  ORDERS. 

Nine  Stamens  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Fov^er. 

C  Order  I.       Monogynia        ) 

<  Order  II.     Trigynia  >    e.  g. 

(  Order  III.  Hexagynia        ) 


C  Cassyta- 
<  Rheum. 
(  BiUomus. 


DECANDRIA 

CONTAINS  V  ORDERS. 

Ten  stamens  in  the  Hemaphrodite  Flower, 


^ Order  I.       Monogynia 
I  Order  II.     Digynia 
Class  X.      I  Order  III.  Tryginia 

Order  IV.   Pcnlagynia 
(  Order  Y.    Decagynia 


E.  G. 


fKalmia. 
Saxifraga. 
Stellaria. 
I  Oxalis. 
[^  Phytolacca- 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


95 


DODECANDRIA 

CONTAINS  V  ORDERS. 

Stamens,  from  twelve  to  nineteen  in  the  Hermaphrodite  Flower. 


Class  XL 


f  Order  I.  Monogynia  ^ 

Order  II.  Digijnia  \ 

OrJcT  III.  Trigynia.  }    e.  g. 

Order  IV.  Pentagynia  I 

[  Order  V.  Dodccagynia  ) 

ICOSANDRIA 

CONTAINS  V  ORDERS. 


f  Asarum. 
I  Agrimonia. 
<^  Euphorbia. 
1  Glinus. 
I,  Sempervium. 


The  Stamens  inserted  (not  in  the  Receptacle,  but)  in  the  inside  of  the  Calyx.- 
Commonly  twenty,  often  more. 


Class  XII. 


f  Order  I. 
I  Order  II. 
\  Order  III. 
I  Order  IV. 
(,  Order  V. 


Monogynia 

Digynia 

Trigynia 

Pentagynia 

Polyginia 


/'Punlca. 
I  CratJEgus. 
\  Sorbus. 
Pyrus. 
[Rubus. 


POLYANDRIA 


CONTAINS  VII  ORDERS. 


The  Stamens  inserted  in  the  Receptacle  from  twenty  to  an  hundred,  in  the  same 
with  the  Pistil  in  the  Flower, 


Class  XIII.  <; 


f  Order  I.       Monogynia 
Order  II.     Digynia 
Order  III.  Trigynia 
Order  IV.  Tetragynia 

I  Order  V.  Pentagynia 
Order  VI.  Hexagynia 
Order  VII.  Polygnia 


'Sarracenia. 

Fothergilla. 

Aconitum. 

Tatracera. 

Aquilegia. 

Stratiotes. 
,  Ranunculus. 


DIDYNAMIA 

V  CONTAINS  II  ORDERS. 

Four  Stamens,  of  which  two  are  close  together,  and  are  longer. 

Melittis. 
Melianthus. 


Class  XIV.    SS'"^"'";,    Gymnosper7ma 
(  Order  11.  Agiospermia 


E.  G. 


TETRADYNAMIA 

CONTAINS    II    ORDERS. 

Six  Stamens ;  four  of  which  are  long,  the  two  opposite  short. 


Class  XV. 


(  Or 
^Or 


der  I. 
Order  II. 


Silicitlosa 
Siliquosa 


Lunaria. 
Cheiranthus. 


MONADELPHIA 

CONTAINS  V  ORDERS. 

The  Filaments  of  the  Stamens  grown  together  into  one  Body 


Class  XVI. 


r  Order  I. 
I  Order  II. 
■i  Order  III. 
I  Order  IV. 
I  Order  V. 


Pcntandria 

Enneandria 

Dccandria 

Dodtcandria 

Polyandria 


] 

}     E.  G. 


(  Hermannia. 
I  Dryandra. 
^  Geranium, 
j  Pentapetes. 
I.  Alcea. 


96 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


DIADELPHIA 

CONTAINS  IV  ORDERS. 

The  Filaments  of  the  Stamens  grotvn  together  into  two  Bodies. 

/'Order  I.       Pentandria       ^  ^Monnieria. 

V17-TT  ]  Order  II.     Hexandria         I    x-  r-  i  Fumaria. 

UassAVll.j  Qj.jgj.  jjj    octandria  [    ^- ^-  )  Polygala. 

( Order  IV.  Deeandriu         )  (.  Lathyrus. 


POLYDELPHIA 

CONTAINS  III  ORDERS. 

The  Filaments  of  the  Stamens  grow  together  imto  three  or  more  Bodies. 


C  Order  I.      Pentandria 

Class  XVIII.  <  Order  II.     Icosandria 

(  Order  III.  Polyandria 


Theobroma. 

Citrus. 

Hypericum. 


SYNGENESIA 

CONTAINS  VI  ORDERS. 

The  stamens  with  the  Antheras  grown  together  in  the  form  of  a  cylinder 
(having  rarely  Filaments.) 

_      ("Order  I.      Polygamia  JEqualis       ")  fLeontodon. 

5*      I  Order  II.     Polygamia  Supen-flita      I  I  Xeranthemum. 

g;      J  Order  III.  Polygamia  Frustranea  I    _  „  1  Helianthus. 

^      j  Order  IV.  Polygamia  Nccessaria    f  f  Calendula. 

^      i  Oi  der  V.    Polygamia  Segregata      1  |  Echinops. 

•        (^  Order  VI.  Monogamia.  j  (^Lobelia. 


GYNANDRIA 

CONTAINS  VIII  ORDERS 

The  Stamens  inserted  on  the  Pistil  (not  on  the  Receptacle.} 


Class  XX. 


(  Order  I. 
Order  II. 
Order  III. 
Order  IV. 
Order  V. 
Order  VI. 
Order  VII, 


Diandria 

Triandria 

Tetrandria 

Pentandria 

Hexandria 

Dccandria 

Dodecandria 


_  Order  Ylll.Polyandria 


'Orchis. 
Sisyrinchium. 

Nepenthes. 

Passiflora. 

Aristolochia. 

Helicteres. 

Cytinus. 

Arum. 


MONOECIA 

CONTAINS  XI  ORDERS. 

The  Male  and  Female  Flowers  on  the  same  Plant. 


Class  XXI. 


Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VIIl 

IX." 

X. 

XI. 


Monandria 

Diandria 

Triandria 

Tdrandria 

Pentrandria 

Hexandria 

Hcptandria 

Polyandria 

Monadelphia 

Syngenesia 

Gynandria 


E.  G.    < 


''  Zanichellia. 

Lemna. 

Tripsacum. 

Urtica. 

Parthenium. 

Pharus. 
j  Guettarda. 
I  Juglans. 
j  Pinus. 
I  Momordica, 
[  Andrachne. 


MATERIA    MI:DICA. 


97 


DIOECIA 

CONTAINS  XIV  ORDERS. 

The  Male  Flowers  on  a  different  Plant  from  the  Female. 


Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 
Order 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VIII 

IX. 

X. 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII 

XIV 


Monandria 
Diandria 
Triandria 
Tetrandria 
Pentandria 
Hexandria 
Octandria 
.Enneandria 
Decandria 
Dodccand.ria 
Polyandria 
Monadelphia 
.Syngenesia 
.Gynandria 


Pandanus. 

Salix. 

Empetruni. 
Viscum. 
Humulus. 
Tamus. 
Populus. 
Mercurialis. 
Kiggelaria. 
Menispermum. 
Cliflortia. 
Juniperus. 
Ruscus. 
tClutia. 


POLYGAMIA 

CONTAINS  III  ORDERS. 

Hermaphrodite  and  Male  or  Female  Flowers  on  the  same  Plant. 


Class  XXIII.  • 


Monoecia 

Dioecia 

Trioecia 


CRYPTOGAMIA 

CONTAINS    IV    ORDERS. 


The  Flowers  within  the  Fruit;  or  in  so  singular  a  mode  as  not  to  be  perceptibli 

to  the  eye. 


("Order  I.        Filices 
Class  AAl  V .  J  Qj.jgj.  jjj      ji^^ 
{  Order  IV.     Fungi 


/"Polypodium. 
)  Bryum. 
j  Fucus. 
(  Agaricus. 


PALM.^. 

Class  XXV.     Palms :  the  flowers  borne  on  a  spadix,  and  witliin  a  spathe. 
E.  G.  Cocos. 


The  ORDERS  are  taken  from  the  females,  or  pistils,  as 
the  classes  are  from  the  males,  or  stamens  ;  but  in  the  classes 
of  the  Syngenesia  the  orders  differ  from  the  rest. 

POLYGAMIA  .EQUALIS. 

That  is,  Of  many  Fosculi  furnished  with  stamens  and  pistils. 
Flowers  of  this  sort  are  for  the  most  part  commonly  called 
Jlosculous. 

POLYGAMIA  SPURIA. 

That  is,  Where  hermaphrodite  flosculi  occupy  the  disk,  and 
that  female  flosculi  surround  the  margin,  which  are  deprived 
of  stamina,  and  that  in  a  three-fold  manner. 


98  THE    THOMSOMAN 

SUPEUFLUOUS. 

That  is.  That  when  the  flowers  of  the  hermaphrodite  disk  are 
furnished  with  a  stigma,  and  produce  seeds,  the  female  flowers 
also,  that  constitute  the  radius,  produce  seeds  in  like  manner. 

FRUSTUANKOUS. 

That  is,  When  the  flowers  of  the  hermaphrodite  disk  are  fur- 
nished with  a  stigma,  and  produce  seeds  ;  but  the  flosculi 
constituting'  the  radius,  being  deprived  of  a  stigma,  cannot 
produce  seeds. 

NECRSSARY. 

That  is,  When  the  hermaphrodite  flowers,  through  a  defect  of 
the  stigma  or  pistil,  cannot  perfect  their  seeds;  but  female 
flowers  in  the  radius  produce  perfect  seeds, 

SEGREGATED. 

That  is,  When  several  floriferous  calyxes  are  contained  in  a 
calyx  common  to  all,  so  as  to  form  only  one  flower. 

The  young  student  of  botany  will  understand  the  preceding 
sketch  of  the  Linna3an  System,  if  he  have  recourse  to  the 
Letters  on  the  Elements  of  Botamj,  addressed  to  a  Lady,  by 
the  celebrated  J.  J.  Rousseau,  translated  by  Dr.  Martin.  If  to 
this  pleasant  guide,  he  should  add  .lohn  Miller's  engraved  il- 
lustrations of  the  sexual  system  of  Linnaeus,  lie  will  be  soon 
able  to  proceed  without  the  help  of  books,  as  it  regards  the 
system.  It  is  superfluous  to  add  a  word  to  what  has  been  said 
respecting:  the  botanical  writings  of  Linnaeus.  But  "  botany 
is  not  to  be  learnt  in  the  closet :  you  must  go  into  the  garden  or 
the  fields,  and  there  become  familiar  with  Nature  hersell';  with 
that  beauty,  order,  regularity,  and  inexhaustible  variety,  which 
is  to  be  found  in  the  structure  of  vegetables  ;  and  that  wonder- 
ful fitness  to  its  end,  which  we  perceive  in  every  Avork  of  crea- 
tion. 

LINN^US. 

The  figure  which  this  learned  physician,  and  illustrious  na- 
turalist made  while  living,  and  the  great  reputation  of  his  works 
now  he  is  dead,  will  justify  us  in  devoting  some  space  to  his 
honor. 

Charles  Von  Linne,  or  as  the  learned  throughout  the  world 
have  Latinized  it,  Carolus  Linn^us,  was  born  at  Smaland  in 
Sweden,  in  the  year  1707.  It  has  almost  always  happened  that 
those  who  have  occupied  some  of  the  highest  seats  in  the  tem- 
ple of  fame,  have  been  obliged  to  climb  up  to  it  through  the 
rough,  dirty  and  difficult  road  of  poverty,  calumny  and  opposi- 
tion. It  was  remarkably  so  with  Linnaeus,  who  was  the  son  of 
an  obscure  clergyman,  of  an  inconsiderable  village  in  a  gloomy 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  99 

region  of  the  globe.  His  father's  income  was  so  snml],  and  his 
family  so  large  and  straightened  in  their  circumstances,  that  this 
prince  of  naturalists  was  on  the  point  of  being  bound  to  a  me- 
chanic. The  design  of  binding  Linnasus  to  a  shoemaker  was 
over-ruled  by  his  uncle,  and  he  was  sent  to  scbool  when  he  was 
ten  years  ot  age.  At  this  early  period,  liis  chief  amusement  was 
gathering  plants  and  hunting  after  insects. 

Almost  all  young  men,  when  just  stepping  on  the  stage  of 
busy  life,  press  forward  to  the  acquisition  of  riches,  as  the  surest 
road  to  power  and  reputation  ;  whilst  a  few,  a  very  few,  consider 
wealth  as  a  secondary  object,  and  pursue  with  ardor  fame  or 
reputation  as  the  first.  Hence  there  have  not  been  many  very 
famous  literary  characters  who  have  not  commenced  their  ca- 
reer in  poverty;  and  most  of  them  have  found  that  ^'■Slow  rises 
worth  by  jioverty  depress' d.^'' 

In  the  year  1728,  he  removed  to  Upsal,  where  he  obtained 
the  patronage  of  several  eminent  men,  particularly  of  Olaus 
Celsius,  at  that  time  Professor  of  Divinity,  and  the  restorer  of 
natural  history  in  Sweden.  Under  such  encouragement  he 
made  rapid  progress  in  his  studies,  and  in  the  esteem  of  the  Pro- 
fessors. We  have  this  striking  proof  of  his  nierits  and  attain- 
ments, that  after  only  two  years  residence,  he  was  thouoht  suf- 
ficientlyqualified  to  give  lectures,  occasionally,  from  the  botanic 
chair,  in  the  room  of  Professor  Rudbeck. 

In  1731  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences,  having  a  desire  to 
improve  the  natural  history  of  Sweden,  deputed  Linna3us  to 
make  the  tour  of  Lapland,  with  the  sole  view  of  exploring  the 
natural  history  of  the  arctic  region,  to  which  liis  reputation,  as 
a  scholar  and  a  naturalist,  and  his  tough  constitution,  equally 
recommended  him.  He  traversed  the  Lapland  desert,  which 
was  destitute  of  villages,  roads,  cultivation,  or  any  convenien- 
ces. He  spent  about  five  months  in  this  tour,  suffering  innu- 
merable hardships  and  privations  ;  and  that  too  for  a  very  small 
stipend,  scarcely  enough  to  buy  him  shoes,  which  must  have 
been  an  important  article  of  clothing  ;  for  poor  Linnaeus  traveled 
ten  degrees  of  latitude  on  foot.  Several  years  after  he  traveled 
through  Holland,  Brabant,  and  France,  in  the  same  manner, 
gathering  plants  on  the  way,  and  searching  for  minerals. 

In  1733  this  indefatigable  naturalist  was  sent  by  the  govern- 
ment to  visit  the  mines  in  Sweden.  On  his  return  to  Upsal,  he 
gave  lectures  on  mineralofry  in  the  university.  In  1735,  when 
he  took  his  degree  of  Doctor  of  Physic,  he  published  the  first 
sketch  of  his  Systema  Natur.e,  in  a  very  compendious  way, 
and  in  the  form  of  tables,  in  twelve  pages  only.  By  this  it  ap- 
pears, that  he  had  at  a  very  early  period,  before  he  was  twenty- 
four  years  of  age,  laid  the  basis  of  that  magnificent  work,  which 
he  afterwards  raised,  and  which  will  ever  remain  a  lasting  mon- 


100  THE    THOMSOMAN 

ument  of  his  genius  and  industry.  In  the  same  year  he  retired 
to  Fahhini,  a  town  in  Dalecarha,  where  he  gave  lectures  on 
mineralogy  and  the  docimastic  art ;  and  where  he  practised 
physic,  in  1736  he  passed  over  into  England,  carrying  letters 
of  recommendation  from  the  famous  Boerhaave,  who  was  at 
that  time  Professor  of  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  Physic  at 
Leyden,  the  glory  of  the  medical  world,  and  one  of  the  best 
botanists  of  the  age.  That  the  sagacious  Boerhaave  penetrated 
the  true  character  of  Linnasus,  and  predicted  his  future  fame 
and  greatness,  appears  by  his  letter  of  introduction  to  Sir  Hans 
Sloarie.  Although  Boerhaave  particularly  recommended  him  to 
Sir  Hans  Sloane,  President  of  the  Royal  Society,  Sir  Hans  paid 
him  but  little  attention  ;  for  Linnasus  was  not  one  of  those  gay 
young  men  that  attract  much  personal  attention.  He  was  ne- 
gligent of  dress  and  diminutive  of  stature.  The  patronage  of 
so  illustrious  a  man  rendered  Linnaeus  still  more  conspicuous  ; 
Boerhaave  himself  being  a  cultivator  of  natural  history  and 
botany,  the  merits  of  Linnasus  could  hardly  escape  his  perspi- 
cacity. 

Boerhaave's  friendship  for  Linnaeus  continued  to  the  latest 
period  of  his  existence.  When  Linnaeus  visited  him  in  his 
last  sickness,  and  but  a  short  time  before  this  light  of  the  medi- 
cal world  was  extinguished,  Boerhaave  taking  an  affectionate 
leave  of  his  young  friend,  said,  ='  f  have  lived  my  time  out,  and. 
my  days  are  at  an  end.  1  have  done  every  thing  that  was  in 
my  power.  May  God  protect  thee,  with  whom  this  duty  re- 
mains!  What  the  world  required  of  me,  it  has  got;  but  from 
thee,  my  dear  Linnaeus,  it  expects  much  more  !" 

In  1737  Linnaeus  published  the  Genera  Pla?itari(ni,  which 
completely  untblded  the  sexual  system,  as  far  as  related  to 
classical  and  generical  characters  ;  and  in  the  same  year  exem- 
plified it  in  the  species  by  the  Flora  Lappo7iica,  and  tlie  Hoi'- 
tus  Clijfortianns.  At  the  same  time,  he  dedicated  to  Dil- 
LENius,  the  Critica  Botanica.,\n  which  he  explains  his  reasons 
for  the  change  of  names,  and  for  the  establishment  of  new  dis- 
tinctions, both  of  which,  he  well  knew,  would  be  considered  as 
dangerous  innovations. 

In  1738  Linnaeus  really  imagined,  that  he  had  fixed  down 
for  the  last  time  in  the  practice  at  Stockholm ;  for  being  now 
married,  he  concluded  it  was  time  to  settle  down  for  life,  and 
give  over  gathering  plants  in  the  arctic  circle,  and  searching 
the  bowels  of  the  earth  for  minerals.  He  however  met  with 
great  opposition  in  his  business.  He  was  too  learned  and  too 
eminent  not  to  excite  all  that  envy  and  jealousy  could  engender 
and  inflict.  At  Stockholm  his  enemies  oppressed  him  with 
many  difficulties  ;  but  the  abilities  and  persevering  spirit  of 
Linnaeus  surmounted  them  all,  so  that  he  came  at  length  into 


MATERIA    MEDICA,  101 

extensive  practice  as  a  physician.  But  his  vast  and  ardent  mind 
would  not  allow  him  to  coniine  it  to  such  drudgery  ;  especially 
when  the  fruit  of  his  labor  was  to  be  only  money.  Co7int  Tes- 
sen  was  his  patron,  througli  wliose  influence  medals  were  struck 
in  his  honor.  He  enjoyed  also  a  stipend  from  the  citizens  of 
Stockholm  for  giving  lectures  in  botany. 

In  1741  Linnaeus  was  appointed  joint  Professor  of  Physic 
with  Rosen.  These  two  coUeao-ues  agreed  to  divide  the  medi- 
cal  department  between  them.  Professor  Rosen  took  anatoiny, 
phi/siologi/,  pathology,  and  iherapeiUics ;  whilst  Professor 
Linnaeus  toook  'natural  history,  botany,  materia  niedica,  diet- 
etics, and  the  diagnosis  morhorwn.  The  systematic  genius  of 
this  prince  of  naturalists  displayed  itself  in  his  mode  of  teaching 
medicine  ;  for  he  arranged  in  the  form  of  a  table  all  the  diseases 
that  afflict  mankind.  Sauvaije  in  France  followed  his  plan, 
and  made  many  improvements  ;  and  tlie  late  Dr.  Cullen  carried 
it  to  a  high  degree  of  perfection.  According  to  this  plan,  dis- 
eases are  arranged,  in  imitation  of  botanists,  into  classes,  orders, 
genera,  and  species.  This  mode  of  arranging  disorders  is  call- 
ed Nosology,  The  reputation  of  the  Swedish  University  at 
Upsal  rose  to  a  height  before  unknown,  during  the  time  when 
its  medical  department  was  under  the  direction  of  Linnaeus. 
But  that,  which  has  established  forever  the  name  of  Lin- 
naeus ;  and  which  has  reflected  honor  on  his  country,  is  the 
Systema  Natupi.e.  Nothing  since  the  labors  of  Aristotle  can 
be  compared  to  it  for  depth  of  knowledge  and  extent  of  research. 

From  this  period  the  reputation  of  Linnaeus  bore  some  pro- 
portion to  his  merit;  and  extended  itself  to  distant  countries; 
insomuch  that  there  was  scarcely  a  learned  society  in  Europe 
but  was  eager  to  elect  him  a  member  ;  scarcely  a  crctwned 
head  but  sought  some  means  to  honor  him.  His  emolument 
kept  pace  with  his  fame  and  honors.  It  was  no  longer  landa- 
tur  et  alget.*  His  practice  as  a  physician  became  lucrative : 
and  we  find  him  possessed  of  his  country  house  ;md  gardens 
in  the  vicinity  of  the  capital,  Linnaeus  received  one  of  the 
most  flattering  testimonies  of  the  extent  and  magnitude  of  his 
fame,  that  perhaps  was  ever  shown  to  any  literary  character, 
the  state  of  the  nation  that  conferred  it,  with  all  its  circumstan- 
ces, duly  considered.  This  was  an  invitation  to  Piladrid  from 
the  king  of  Spain,  there  to  preside  as  a  naturalist,  with  the  of- 
fer of  an  annual  pension  of  2,000  pistoles,  letters  of  nobility, 
and  the  perfect  free  exercise  of  his  religion.  But,  after  the 
most  perfect  acknowledgements  of  the  singular  honor  done  him, 
he  returned  for  answer,  '<  that  if  he  had  any  merits,  they  icere 
due  to  his  oxen  country.^'' 

*  Starviag  on  universal  praise  j   or  living  in  splendid  wretchedness. 


102  THE    THOMSONIAN 

This  extraordinary  man  died  January  11th,  1778,  in  the 
71st  year  of  his  life,  leaving  a  glorioLis  reputation.  Uncom- 
mon respect  was  shown  to  his  memory.  At  the  commemora- 
tion of  his  death,  by  the  Royal  Academy  of  Sciences,  the  king 
of  Sweden  honored  the  assembly  with  his  presence  ;  nay  far- 
ther, in  his  speech  from  the  throne  to  the  Swedish  parliament, 
that  philosophic  monarch  lamented  the  death  of  Linnaeus  as  a 
public  calamity.  He  said,  "  I  have  lost  a  man  whose  fame  was 
as  great  all  over  the  world,  as  the  honor  was  bright,  which  his 
country  derived  from  him  as  a  citizen.  Long  will  Upsal  re- 
member the  celebrity  which  it  acquired  by  the  name  of  Lin- 
iiagus!" 

Linnaeus  had  a  good  constitution,  though  often  grievously 
afflicted  with  the  headache,  and  in  the  latter  part  of  his  life  with 
the  gout.  This  great  man  was  of  a  dimmutive  stature,  his 
head  large,  and  its  hinder  part  very  hisfh.  His  look  was  ar- 
dent, piercing,  and  apt  to  daunt  the  beholder  ;  and  his  temper 
quick;  nevertheless  his  conduct  towards  his  numerous  oppo- 
nents shows  a  diii^nified  spirit  of  forbearance.  He  disavowed 
controversy,  and  seldom  replied  to  the  numerous  attacks  on  his 
doctrine.  He  however,  when  attacked  by  Siegesbeck,  and 
some  other  virulent  calumniators,  wrote  a  reply,  entitled  Orbis 
eruditi  judicium  de  Caroli  Linncci  scripiis ;  and  with  it 
gave  a  mem^^randa  of  his  life.  This  Siegesljeck  was  a  brother 
professor.  He  laid  it  down  as  a  firm  maxim,  that  every  sys- 
tem must  finally  rest  on  its  intrinsic  merit ;  and  he  willingly 
committed  his  own  to  the  judgment  of  posterity. 

Diminutive  as  was  the  stature  of  Linnajus,  his  mind  \vas  of 
gigantic  size.  He  was  possessed  of  a  lively  imagination,  cor- 
rected by  a  strong  judgment,  and  fjuided  by  the  laws  of  system ; 
added  to  these,  a  most  retentive  memory,  an  unremitting  indus- 
try, and  the  greatest  perseverance  in  ail  his  pursuits  ;  as  is  evi- 
dent from  that  continued  vigor  v/ith  which  he  prosecuted  the 
design,  that  he  appears  to  have  formed  so  early  in  life,  o{  total- 
ly refonning  and  fabricating  anew  the  whole  science  of  natu- 
ral history ;  and  this  he  actually  performed,  and  gave  to  it  a 
degree  of  perfection  before  unknown.  He  had  moreover  the 
the  uncommon  felicity  of  living  to  see  his  own  structure  raised 
above  all  others,  notwithstanding  every  discouragement  its  au- 
thor at  first  labored  under,  and  the  opposition  it  afterwards 
met  Vvith.  Neither  has  any  writer  more  cautiously  avoided  that 
common  error  of  building  his  own  fame  on  the  ruin  of  another 
man's.  He  every  vv^ere  acknowledo^es  the  several  'nerits  of  each 
author's  system;  and  no  man  appears  to  be  more  sensible  of  the 
partial  defect  of  his  own. 

Linnasus  was  of  a  noble  mind  ;  and  his  mind  was  made  bet- 
ter by  struggling  with  adversity.  To  be  poor,  and  to  be  at  the 
same  time  struggling  on  with  some  new  discovery,  or  precious 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  103 

improvement,  is,  in  the  strict  sense  of  the  word,  to  be  in  adver- 
sity ;  for  one  thus  circumstanced  never  fails  to  have  a  numer- 
ous host  against  iiim,  chietiy  composed  of  the  jealous,  the  envi- 
ous, and  ihe  knavish.  But  has  adversity  no  consolations?  Is 
it  not  the  ijest  course  of  discipline  a  wise  man  can  endure  ?  He 
who  lias  never  been  acquainted  with  adversity,  says  Seneca,  is 
ignorant  of  half  the  scenes  of  nature  ;  for  prosperity  very  much 
obstructs  tlie  knowledge  of  ourselves.  And  he  who  was  great- 
er than  Seneca,  I  mean  Johnson,  observes,  that,  that  fortitude, 
which  has  to  encounter  no  danger ;  that  prudence,  which  has 
surmounted  no  difficulties  ;  that  integrity,  which  has  been  at- 
tacked by  no  temptations,  can  at  best,  be  considered  as  gold  not 
yet  brought  to  the  test;  of  which  therefore  the  true  value  can- 
not be  assigned. 

When  Linnaeus  first  pul)lished  his  sexual  system  of  botany, 
he  experienced  the  same  treatment  which  generally  falls  to  the 
lot  of  those  who  have  enli2:htened  the  world  by  the  rays  of  their 
genius  and  learning  :  a  tew  admired  and  extolled  him ;  others 
ridiculed  him,  while  some  laboured  to  prove  that  he  was  desti- 
tute of  common  sense  ;  and  that  he  wrote  about  that  which  he 
did  not  himself  understand.  That  those  rivals  who  dwelt  in 
the  same  city  should  view  him  with  an  ^^  evil  eye"  that  is,  an 
eye  made  sore,  by  reason  of  his  extraordinary  light,  which  gave 
it  pain,  and  which  they  therefore  sought  to  veil,  or  put  out,  is 
not  to  be  wondered  at :  but  that  it  should  give  pain  to  the  eye 
of  count  Buffon,  and  other  celebrated  men  in  France,  is  indeed 
pitiful.  In  England,  and  in  some  other  parts  of  Europe,  they 
received  the  new  doctrine  with  all  that  caution  which  became 
an  enligiitened  age  and  people  ;  and  Nature  was  traced  experi- 
mentally through  all  her  operations  in  the  vegetable  economy 
before  the  sexual  doctrine  of  LinncEus  was  acknowledged.  It 
is  now  firmly  established  as  any  law  in  nature. 

Linnaeus  not  only  silenced  all  gainsayers ;  but  had  the  un- 
common good  fortune  of  living  to  see  the  fruits  of  his  own  great 
exertions.  He  lived  to  see  Natr.ral  History  raise  herself  in 
his  own  native  country  under  his  culture,  and  the  fostering 
hand  of  the  government  to  a  state  of  perfection  unknown 
elsewhere.  He  lived  to  see  it  diffused  thence  all  over  the 
civilized  world.  He  lived  to  see  the  sovereigns  of  Europe  es- 
tablishing societies  for  cultivating  that  science  to  which  he 
had  so  long  devoted  his  head  and  heart.  And  when  he 
ceased  to  live,  the  philosopher  saw  with  grateful  admiration 
the  sovereign  of  Sweden  pronouncing  the  eulogy  of  Linnaeus 
from  his  throne,  and  lamenting  his  death  as  a  public  calamity. 

Linnaeus  was  well  acquainted  with  the  art  of  recommend- 
ing science  by  eloquence  of  language,  and  embellishing  phi- 
losophy with    polite  hterature.     INo'man  of  the  age   had    a 


104  THE    THOxMSONIAN 

more  happy  command  of  the  Latin  tongue  than  Linnaeus ; 
and  no  man  ever  apphed  it  more  successfully  to  iiis  purpose, 
or  gave  to  description  such  copiousness,  precision,  and  ele- 
gance. The  glarmg  paint  of  Buffon  suffers  in  comparison 
with  the  pleasing  but  solid  manner  of  Linnaeus  ;  fo.r  this  prince 
of  naturalists  possessed  the  sound,  distinct,  and  comprehensive 
knowledge  of  Bacon,  with  all  the  beautiful  light  graces  and 
embellishments  of  Addison.  He  knew,  that  those  authors  who 
would  find  many  readers,  and  those  lecturers  who  would  secure 
attentive  hearers,  must  please,  whilst  they  instruct. 

Physiology  owes  much  to  Linnssus.  But  Pathology,  the 
foundation  of  the  whole  medical  art,  and  of  all  medical  theory, 
has  been  more  improved  by  Linnaeus  in  his  Clavis  Medicina, 
of  eight  pages  only,  which  is  a  master  piece  in  its  way,  and  one 
of  the  greatest  treasures  in  medicine,  than  by  a  hundred  authors 
and  books  in  folio. 

The  Materia  Medica  was  in  a  confused  state,  and  many 
articles  were  imperfectly  known,  until  Linnaeus  reformed  it. 
He  was  the  first  who  said  that  all  our  principal  medicines  are 
"poisons  ;  and  that  physicians  ought  not  to  condemn  poisons, 
but  to  use  them,  as  surgeons  do  their  knives,  cautiously. 

Besides  medals  there  are  several  monuments  erected  to  the 
honor  of  this  great  naturalist  in  the  gardens  of  his  admirers  in 
different  places  in  Europe.  In  1778,  Dr.  Hope  laid  the  founda- 
tion stone  of  a  monument,  since  finished,  in  the  botanic  garden 
at  Edinburgh,  to  the  memory  of  Linnaeus. 

CONRAD  GESNER. 

The  state  of  botanical  method  was  quite  unsettled  when 
Conrad  Gesner  of  Switzerland  turned  his  eye  to  the  Jioicer' 
and  fruit  ;  and  sus:gested  the^rs^  idea  of  a  systemiitic  arrange- 
ment. It  was  in  1506  that  Gesner  proposed  to  the  world  his 
idea  of  an  arrangement  from  the  parts  of  the  tiov/er  and  fruit. 
No  plan  however  was  established  by  Gesner  upon  this  princi- 
ple;  he  merely  suggested  the  idea;  but  the  application  of  it 
was  made,  twenty  years  after,  by  CcBsaralpinus,  a  physician 
and  professor  of  botany  at  Padua,  who  thus  favored  the  world 
with  the ^/-^^  5?/.9/e77i  of  botany  ;  which  occurrence  marks  the 
second  grand  era  in  the  history  of  this  science. 

It  might  have  been  expected,  that  a  method,  founded  like 
that  of  Caesaralpinus  upon  genuine  scientific  principles,  would 
have  been  immediately  adopted  by  the  learned,  and  in  estab- 
lishing itself,  have  totally  extirpated  those  insufficient  charac- 
ters, which  during  so  many  ages  have  disgraced  the  science. 
The  fact  however  is,  that  this  system  of  Cccsaralpinus  perished 
almost  as  soon  as  it  had  existence  ;  for  with  this  learned  physi- 
cian died  his  plan  of  arrangement ;  and  it  was  not  till  nearly  a 


METERIA    MEDICA.  106 

century  after,  that  Dr.  Robert  Morison  of  Aberdeen,  attaching 
himself  to  the  principles  of  Gesner  and  Cassaralpinus,  re-estab- 
Ushed  their  scientific  arrangement  upon  a  sohd  foundation ; 
and  from  being;  only  the  restorer  of  a  system,  has  been  generally 
celebrated  as  its  founder. 

Imperfect  as  is  the  mode  of  distribution  by  Morison,  it  has 
furnished  many  useful  hints  to  Ray^  Toiirnefort  and  Liniicius, 
those  great  luminaries  of  the  science,  who  were  not  ashamed 
to  acknowledge  the  obligation. 

Rat/  proposed  his  method  to  the  world  in  1682.  It  origin- 
ally consisted  of  twenty-five  classes,  two  of  which  respect  trees 
and  shrubs,  and  the  remaining  twenty-three  herbaceous  plants. 
The  distinction  into  herbs  and  trees,  which  Ray's  method  sets 
out,  acknowledges  a  different,  though  not  more  certain  princi- 
ple, than  that  of  Cassaralpinus  and  Morison.  The  former,  in 
making  this  distinction,  had  an  eye  with  the  ancients,  to  the 
duration  of  the  stem,  the  latter  to  its  consistence.  Ray  has  called 
in  the  buds  as  an  auxiliary,  and  denominates  trees,  all  such 
plants  as  bear  buds;  herbs,  such  as  bear  no  buds.  The  objec- 
tion, which  lies  against  Linnseus's  distinction  into  shrubs  and 
trees,  from  the  same  principle,  may  be  still  more  powerfully 
urged  in  the  present  case  ;  for  though  all  herbaceous  plants  rise 
without  buds,  all  trees  are  not  furnished  with  them  ;  many  of 
the  largest  trees  in  warm  climates,  and  some  shrubby  plants  in 
every  country,  being  totally  devoid  of  that  scaly  appearance, 
which  constitutes  the  essence  of  a  bud. 

Ray  allots  one  division  to  submarine  plants,  or  such  as  grow 
at  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  or  upon  rocks  that  are  surrounded  by 
that  element.  They  are  either  of  a  hard  stony  nature,  as  the 
plants  termed  lithophyta,  of  a  substance  resembling  horn,  as 
the  corallines,  or  of  a  softer  herbaceous  texture,  as  the /wci, 
spmiges,  and  sea  mosses.  It  is  curious,  that  the  corallines 
have  successively  passed  through  each  of  the  three  kingdoms 
of  nature.  Some  liave  classed  them  with  the  mineral  king- 
dom; the  greater  part  have  arranged  them  with  vegetables; 
but  naturalists  have  now  demonstrated,  that  they  belong  to  the 
animal  kingdom.  The  aniraality  of  this  slna'ular  tribe  of 
natural  bodies  was  hinted  at  by  Imperati^  an  Italian,  in  the 
year  1599,  and  afterwards  by  Pei/sso7iel,  in  1727  ;  but  it  is  to 
M.  Bernard  Jussieu,  a  French  academician,  and  Mr.  Ellis,  of 
London,  that  we  owe  decisive  facts,  and  a  regular  detail,  de- 
monstrating that  corallines  are  ramified  animals.  Mr.  Ellis 
has,  in  his  natural  history  of  corallines,  parcelled  them  out  into 
their  several  genera,  by  means  of  fixed  and  invariable  charac- 
ters, obvious  in  their  appearance. 

Ray's  general  history  of  plants  contains  eighteen  thousand 


106  THE    THOMSONIAN 

six  hundred  and  fifty-five  species  and  varieties.  His  method 
was  followed  by  Sir  Hans  SLoane,  in  his  natural  history  of  Ja- 
maica; by  Fetiver,  in  his  British  herbal;  by  Dillenius^  in  his 
synopsis  of  British  plants ;  and  by  Martj/7i,  in  his  catalogue  of 
plants  that  grow  in  the  neighborhood  of  Cambridge,  in  Eng- 
land. 

Dr.  Herman,  professor  of  botany  at  Leyden,  was  the  first 
who  introduced  into  Holland  a  genuine  systematic  arrangement 
of  plants  from  the  parts  of  fructification.  Morison's  method 
hud  been  left  incomplete  ;  and  Ray's,  though  perfect  from  its 
first  appearance,  did  not  all  at  once  attract  the  attention  of  the 
learned;  and  was  indeed  for  many  years  studied  chiefly  in 
England,  the  native  country  of  its  author.  Ray  labored  under 
some  disadvantages;  he  was  not  a  physician,  but  a  divine. 
The  defects  of  Ray's  orig-inal  method,  and  its  im practicability, 
did  not  elude  the  observations  of  Dr.  Herman.  He  had  applied 
himself  with  unremitting  ardor,  from  his  earliest  years,  to  the 
study  of  plants  ;  had  examined  with  attention  every  plan  of 
arrangement,  and  actually  undertaken  a  long  and  perilous  ex- 
pedition into  India,  with  the  sole  view  of  promoting  his  favor- 
ite science.  Herman  exhibited  such  marks  of  unwearied  dili- 
gence, that  he  alone,  it  is  said,  reared  twice  as  many  plants  in 
the  garden  at  Leyden  as  had  been  introduced  by  all  his  prede- 
cessors put  together,  in  the  long  space  of  an  hundred  and  fifty 
years.  Such  a  man  merited  the  applause  of  the  public,  and  at- 
tained it. 

Dr.  Herman's  method  consists  of  twenty-five  classes,  which 
are  founded  upon  the  size  and  duration  of  plants;  the  presence 
or  absence  of  the  petals  and  calyx  ;  the  number  of  capsules, 
cells  and  naked  seeds;  the  substance  of  the  leaves  and  fruit; 
the  form  and  consistence  of  the  roots ;  the  situation  and  dispo- 
sition of  the  flowers,  leaves  and  calyx,  and  figure  of  the  fruit. 
The  method  proposed  by  Herman  excels  all  which  preceded  it, 
in  the  uniformity  of  its  classical  characters. 

The  famous  Boerhaave,  the  glory  of  the  medical  art,  was 
appointed  professor  of  botany  at  Leyden  in  1700.  His  method 
was  a  mixture  of  Ray's,  Herman's  and  Tournefort's,  The  sub- 
^narine  and  imperfect  plants,  which  find  no  place  in  the  system 
of  Herman,  are  borrowed  by  Boerhaave  from  Ray.  Boer- 
haave's  classes  are  thirty-four  in  number,  and  subdivide  them- 
selves into  an  hundred  and  four  sections,  which  have  for  their 
characters  the  figure  of  the  leaves,  stem,  calyx,  petals  and  seeds; 
the  number  of  petals,  seeds  and  capsules  ;  the  substance  of  the 
leaves;  the  situation  of  the  flowers,  and  their  diflerence  in  point 
of  sex.  13y  this  method,  Boerhaave  arranged  six  thousand 
plants,  the  produce  of  the  botanical  garden  at  Leyden,  which 
he  carefully  superintended  for  the  space  of  twenty  yeais,  and 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  '    107 

left  to  his  successor,  Mr.  Adrien  Royen,  in  a  much  more  flou- 
rishing state  than  he  had  himself  received  it. 

Botanical  writers  were  disposed  to  walk  in  the  track  of  their 
predecessors.  Few  had  sufficient  courage  to  venture  upon  an 
unbeaten  path.  Morison  followed  Csesaralpinus  ;  Ray  improv- 
ed upon  Morison  ;  Knaut  abridged  Ray  ;  and  Boerhaave  makes 
Herman  his  guide.  Rivinus,  a  professor  of  physic  and  botany 
at  Leipsic,  was  the  first  who,  in  1690,  relinquishing  the  pursuit 
of  affinities,  and  convinced  of  the  insufficiency  of  the  fruit,  set 
about  a  method,  which  would  atone  by  its  facility  for  the  want 
of  numerous  relations  and  natural  families.  A  method  purely 
artificial  appeared  to  Rivinus  the  best  adapted  for  the  purpose 
of  vegetable  arrangement.  It  rests  upon  the  number  and  equal- 
ity of  the  petals ;  a  system  no  less  admired  for  its  simplicity, 
than  for  the  regularity  and  uniformity  of  its  plan. 

TOURNEFORT. 

The  celebrity  of  Tournefort  requires  that  we  should  dwell  a 
little  on  his  history  and  character. 

Jusep/i  Pltton  de  Tournefort  was  born  at  Aix,  in  Provence, 
in  1656.  He  was  educated  in  the  Jesuits'  college  in  Aix,  and, 
like  the  great  Boerhaave,  intended  for  a  divine;  but,  like  that 
great  man,  quitted  divinity  for  physic.  In  early  life,  he  was 
nearly  as  fond  of  anatomy  and  chemistry  as  of  botany.  In 
1679  he  went  to  Montpelier,  where  he  perfected  himself  in  an- 
atomy and  physic.  The  botanic  garden,  established  in  that 
city  by  Henry  IV.  rich  as  it  was,  could  not  satisfy  his  unbound- 
ed curiosity.  He  ransacked  all  the  tracts  of  ground  within 
more  than  ten  leagues  of  Montpelier,  Then  he  explored  the 
Pyrenean  mountains  and  the  Alps,  and  afterwards  examined 
the  vegetables  in  Provence,  Languedoc,  Dauphine  and  Catalo- 
nia. He  travelled  through  Spam  and  Portugal.  He  took  his 
degree  of  doctor  in  physic  in  169S,  when  he  published  his  His- 
tory of  the  Plants  ivhich  groiv  about  Paris,  together  with  an- 
accouiit  of  their  iise  in  Medicine. 

In  the  year  1700,  Dr.  Tournefort  received  an  order  from 
the  king  to  travel  into  Greece,  Asia  and  Africa,  not  only  to  dis- 
cover plants,  but  to  make  observations  on  natural  history  in  o-e- 
neral ;  upon  ancient  and  modern  geography;  and  even  upon 
the  customs,  religion,  and  commerce  of  the  people.  From  this 
grand  tour  he  brought  home  one  thousand  three  hundred  and 
sixty-six  new  species  of  plants,  most  of  which  ranged  them- 
selves under  one  or  other  of  the  six  hundred  and  seventy-three 
genera  he  had  already  established  ;  and  for  all  the  rest  he  had 
but  twenty-five  genera  to  create,  without  being  obliged  to  aug- 
ment the  number  of  classes  ;  a  circumstance  which  sufficiently 
proves  the  advantage  of  a  system  to  which  so  many  foreign  and 


108  THE  TMOMSONIAN. 

unexpected  plants  were  easily  reducible.  When  Tonrneforl 
returned  to  Paris,  he  thought  of  resuming  the  practice  of  phy- 
sic, which  he  had  sacrificed  to  his  botanical  expedition  ;  but  ex- 
perience shows  us,  says  his  biographer,  that  in  every  thing  de- 
pending on  the  taste  of  the  public,  especially  affairs  of  this  na- 
ture, delays  are  dangerous.  Dr.  Tournefort  found  it  difficult 
to  resume  his  practice.  He  was  at  the  same  time  professor  of 
physic;  the  functions  of  the  academy  employed  some  of  his 
time  ;  the  arrangement  of  his  memoirs  still  more  of  it.  This 
multiplicity  of  business  affected  his  health  ;  and  when  in  this 
uncomfortable  state,  he  accidentally  received  a  blow  on  his 
breast,  which  in  a  few  months  put  an  end  to  his  active,  useful, 
and  honorable  life,  which  happened  in  December,  1708. 

Tournefort  surpassed  all  his  predecessors  in  siipplyingacluc 
to  the  immense  labyrinth  which  the  vegetable  kingdom  exhibit- 
ed to  the  astonished  botanist.  He  gave  the  first  complete  regu- 
lar arrangement,  and  cleared  the  way  for  one  still  greater  than 
himself.  For  in  1735  rose  the  sun  of  the  botannical  world, 
LinncBUs. 

MARK  CATESBY 

Was  (says  Dr.  Pulteney,)  one  of  those  men  whom  a  passion 
for  natural  history  very  early  allured  from  the  interesting  pur- 
suits of  life  ;  and  it  led  him  at  length  to  cross  the  Atlantic,  that 
he  might  read  the  volume  of  nature  in  a  country  but  imper- 
fectly "explored,  and  where  her  beauties  were  displayed  in  a 
more  extended  and  magnificent  scale  than  the  narrow  bounds 
of  his  native  country  exhibited.  It  is  but  too  true,  that  the 
world  at  large  will  forever  treat  with  ridicule  and  disdain,  that 
man,  who,  thus  deserting  the  paths  that  lead  to  riches,  to  pre- 
ferment, or  to  honor,  gives  himself  up  to  what  are  coiumonly 
deemed  unimportant  and  triflins:  occupations.  Few  will  give 
him  credit  for  that  secret  satislaction,  for  that  inexhaustible 
pleasure,  which  the  investigation  of  nature,  in  all  her  objects^ 
incessantly  holds  forth  to  his  mind  ;  or  believe  that  such  em- 
ployment can  possibly  compensate  for  the  solid  treasures  of 
gain. 

Mark  Cateshy  was  born  about  the  latter  end  of  1679,  or  th«? 
beginning  of  the  next  year.  He  acquaints  us  himselt".  that  he 
had  very  early  a  propensity  to  the  study  of  nature,  and  that  his 
wish  for  higher  gratifications  in  this  way  first  led  him  to  Lon- 
don, which  he  emphatically  styles  "tl>e  centre  o-f  science,"  and 
afterwards  impelled  him  to  seek  further  sources  in  distant  parts 
of  the  globe.  The  residence  of  soiue  relations  in  Tirginia  fa- 
vored his  design  ;  and  he  went  to  that  country  in  1712,  where 
he  staid  seven  years,  admiring  and  collecting  the  various  pro- 
ductions of  the  country,  without  having  laid  any  direct  plan  for 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  109 

the  work  he  afiervrards  accomplished.  During  this  residence, 
he  conveved  seeds  and  specinaens  of  plants,  both  dried  and 
m  asTTowm?  state,  to  Mr.  Dale,  of  Braintree  in  Essex :  and  some 
of  hl«  observations  ou  the  country  bemg  communicated  by  this 
means  to  Dr.  Witham  Sherard,  procured  him  the  friendship 
and  patronage  of  that  srentleman. 

On  his  return  to  Cn2land.  1719,  he  was  encouraged  by  the 
assistance  of  several  of  the  nobility,  of  Sir  Hans  iSioan,  Dr.  She- 
rard. and  other  naturalists,  whose  names  he  has  recorded,  to 
return  to  America,  with  the  professed  design  of  describing,  de- 
iineaiinsr,  and  paintin?  the  more  curious  objects  of  nature. 
Carolina  was  fixed  on  as  the  place  of  his  residence,  where  he 
arrived  in  May,  1722.  He  first  examined  the  lower  part  of  the 
country,  making  excur^ions  from  Charleston;  and  afterwards 
sojourned  in  some  rtme  amon?  the  Indians,  in  the  mountain- 
ous regions  at  and  about  Fort  Moore.  He  then  extended  his  re- 
searches through  Georsria  and  Florida:  and  ha vId?  spent  near- 
ly three  years  on  the  continent,  he  visited  the  Bahama  islands, 
takine  his  residence  in  the  isle  of  Providence,  carrying  on  his 
plan,  and  particularly  making  collections  of  fishes  and  subma- 
rine productions. 

On  his  return  to  England,  in  the  year  1726.  his  labors  met 
with  the  approbation  of  his  patrons.  Caiesby  made  binoself 
master  of  the  art  of  etching :  and,  retiring  to  Hoxton,  emplored 
himself  in  carryinz  on  his  ereat  work,  which  he  published  in 
numbers  of  twenty  plants  each.  The  first  appeared  in  the  lat- 
ter end  of  the  year  1730 :  and  the  first  volume,  consisting  of 
one  hundred  plates,  was  finished  in  1732:  the  second  in  1743; 
and  the  appendix,  of  twenty  plates,  in  the  year  1748. 

A  rezular  account  of  each  number,  written  by  Dr.  Cromwell 
Mortimer,  secretary  of  the  Royal  Society,  was  laid  before  the 
society  as  it  appeared,  and  printed  in  the  Philosophical  Trans- 
actions, in  which  the  Doctor  has  sometime  interspersed  illns- 
trative  observations. 

The  whole  work  bears  the  following  title  "  The  Natural  His- 
tory of  Carolina.  Florida,  and  the  Bahama  Islands  :  contain- 
ing the  fiifures  of  birds,  beasts,  fishes,  serpents,  insects,  and 
plants  :  pariicularly  the  forest  trees,  shrubs,  and  plants,  not  hi- 
therto described,  or  very  incorrectly  fienred  by  authors;  together 
'.rith  their  descriptions,  in  French  and  English.  To  which  are 
added  observations  on  the  air,  soil,  and  waters  :  with  remarks 
upon  agriculture,  grain,  pnlse,  roots.  To  the  whole  is  prefixed 
a  new  and  correct  map  of  the  countries  treated  of  By  Mark 
Catesby.  f.  r.  8. 

The  number  of  subjects  described  and  figured  in  this  work 
stands  as  below : 


110  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Plants.  -  -  -  171 

Quadrupeds,      .  -  -  9 

Birds,        -        -  -  -  111 

Amphibia,  .  _  .  33 

Fishes,  ...  46 

Insects,  -  -  -  31 

In  this  splendid  performance,  the  curious  are  gratified  with 
the  figures  of  many  of  the  most  beautiful  trees,  shrubs  and  her- 
baceous plants,  that  adorn  the  gardens  of  the  present  time. 
Many  also  of  the  most  useful  in  the  arts,  and  conveniencies  of 
life,  and  several  of  those  used  in  medicine,  are  here  for  the  first 
time  exhibited  in  the  true  proportion  and  natural  colors.  It  is 
only  to  be  regretted,  that  in  this  work  a  separate  exhibition  of 
the  flower  in  all  its  parts  should  be  wanting  ;  in  the  defect  of 
which,  several  curious  articles  have  not  been  ascertained.  It 
is  a  requisite  of  modern  date,  and  without  it  every  figure,  espe- 
cially of  a  new  species,  must  be  deemed  imperfect. 

Most  of  the  plates  of  plants  exhibit  also  some  subject  of  the 
animal  kingdom.  To  these  our  plan  does  not  extend.  As 
Catesby  etched  all  the  figures  himself,  from  his  own  paintings, 
and  the  colored  copies  were  at  first  done  under  his  own  inspec- 
tion, and  where  it  was  possible  every  subject  in  its  natural  size: 
this  work  was  the  most  splendid  of  its  kind  that  England  had 
ever  produced.  We  do  not  know  that  it  had  been  equalled  on 
the  continent,  unless  by  that  of  Madam  Merian,  which,  how- 
ever, falls  greatly  short  in  extent.  Seventy-two  plates  of  Cates- 
by's  work  were  copied  by  the  Nuremberg  artists,  and  published 
in  1750.  His  "  Observations  on  Carolina,^''  6cc.  were  sepa- 
rately printed  in  folio,  at  the  same  place,  in  1767. 

Catesby  was  the  author  of  a  paper,  printed  in  the  44th  vol- 
ume of  Philosophical  Transactions,  page  435,  "  On  Birds  of 
Passage,"  in  which,  in  opposition  to  the  opinion  that  birds  lie 
torpid  in  caverns  and  at  the  bottom  of  waters,  he  produces  a 
variety  of  reasons,  and  several  facts  which  his  residence  in 
America  offered,  in  support  of  their  migration  in  search  of 
proper  food.  His  voyages  across  the  Atlantic  had  taught  him 
the  ability  of  these  wanderers  to  take  long  flights.  He  mentions 
in  another  place,  his  having  seen  hawks,  swallows,  and  a  spe- 
cies of  owl,  in  twenty-six  degrees  of  north  latitude,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  600  leagues  from  land.  He  shows,  that  birds  before 
unknown  to  the  country  find  their  way  annually  into  various 
parts  of  North  America,  since  the  introduction  of  several  kinds 
of  grain  ;  of  this  the  Rice  bird,  Emberiza  orizivoria,  and  the 
white  faced  duck.  Anas  discors,  are,  among  others,  instances 
sufiiciently  known  and  felt  by  the  inhabitants. 

Catesby  was  elected  a  Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society  soon  after 
his  second  return  from  America,  and  lived  in  acquaintance  and 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  Ill 

friendship  with  many  of  the  most  respectable  members  of  that 
body  ;  beino^  "greatly  esteemed  for  his  modesty,  ingenuity,  and 
upright  behavior." 

He  removed  from  Hoxton  to  Fnlham,  and  afterwards  to  Lon- 
don, and  died  Dec.  23d,  1749,  aged  70,  leaving  a  widow  and 
two  children. 

His  work  has  been  re-published,  in  1754  and  1771.  To  the 
last  edition  a  Linnaean  index  has  been  annexed  ;  but  it  is  by 
no  means  so  copious  or  perfect  as  a  work  of  such  merit  and 
magnificence  demands. 

BOTANICAL   GARDENS. 

Says  Solomon,  /  viade  me  gardens  and  orchards,  and  I 
flanted  trees  in  them  of  all  kinds  of  jruits.  1  made  me  2?ools 
of  water' to  water  thereioith  the  trees. 

The  island  of  Crete  was  the  physic  garden  of  Rome.  The 
emperors  maintained  in  that  island  gardeners  and  herbarists  to 
provide  the  physicians  of  Konie  with  simples.  The  establish- 
ment of  professorships,  gave  rise,  in  modern  times,  to  Botanical 
gardens;  a  new  species  of  luxury  to  the  botanist. 

The  first  public  botanical  garden  of  this  sort  was  that  of  Pa- 
dua, established  in  1533. 

The  utility  of  these  institutions  is  self-evident.  By  public 
gardens  medicinal  plants  are  at  the  command  of  the  teacher  in 
every  lesson  ;  the  eye  and  the  mind  are  perpetually  gratified 
with  the  succession  of  curious,  scarce,  and  exotic  luxuries  ; 
here  the  botanist  can  compare  the  doubtful  species,  and  exam- 
ine them,  through  all  the  stages  of  growth,  with  those  to  which 
they  are  allied  ;  and  all  these  advantages  are  accumulated  in  a 
thousand  objects  at  the  same  time. 

The  first  botanic  garden  in  Switzerland  was  constructed  at 
Zurich,  by  Gesner,  in  1560. 

The  botanic  fjarden  at  the  University  of  Oxford  was  founded 
in  1632,  by  Henry,  carl  of  Danby;  who  gave  for  this  purpose 
five  acres  of  ground,  erected  gieen-houses  and  stoves,  endowed 
handsomely  the  establishment,  and  planted  in  it  as  supervisor, 
Rohart,  a  German,  who  published  in  1648  Catcdogus  Planta- 
rtwi  Horti  tnedici  Oxoiiiensis,  tj'c,  which  contained,  if  we 
read  rightly,  sixteen  hundred  species. 

The  botanical  garden  at  Edinburgh  was  founded  by  Sir  An- 
drew Balflonr  in  1680 ;  and  may  be  considered  as  the  first  in- 
troduction of  natural  history  in  Scotland.  This  garden  was 
so  successfully  cultivated,  that  it  is  said  to  have  contained  three 
thousand  species  of  plants,  disposed  according  to  Morison's 
method. 

Among  those  public  institutions,  which  in  a  singular  man- 
ner invigorated  the  spirit  of  natural  history  in  England,  the 


112  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Royal  ^^ociety  claims  the  most  distinguished  notice.  In  its  de- 
sign, as  in  its  progress,  it  was  the  fostering  parent,  and  guardian 
of  natural  knowledo;e.  Such  was  the  respectability  of  this  so- 
ciety, both  as  a  body,  and  in  its  individuals,  that  through  its 
means  the  whole  nation  may  be  said  to  have  amply  contributed 
to  its  aggrandizements.  Under  the  auspices  of  this  illustrious 
society,  the  anatomy  and  philosophy  of  plants  were  illustrated 
by  Grew  and  Hales. 

We  mention,  in  connection  with  the  Royal  Sf^ciety,  the 
Physic  Garden  at  C/ieZ.*?ea,  founded  by  the  company  of  apoth- 
ecaries in  1673,  but  which  was  not  eflectually  constructed  till 
thirteen  years  after ;  so  slow  and  gradual  is  the  progress  of  such 
institutions  at  their  commencement. 

From  the  time  o[  Jolinson*  who  was  the  editor  of  that  cele- 
brated English  botanist,  Gerard,  a  custom  had  prevailed  among 
the  London  apothecariest  to  form  a  society  each  summer,  and 
make  excursions  to  investigate  plants.  The  Itinera^  published 
by  Johnson,  may  be  considered  as  the  fruit  of  such  expeditions 
in  his  day.  After  the  foundation  of  Chelsea  garden  this  lauda- 
ble practice  was  fixed  to  stated  periods,  and  put  under  regula- 
tions, the  herbarizing  being  nou'*  distinguished  into  private  and 
general.  They  first  begin  on  the  second  Tuesday  in  April ; 
and  are  held  monthly  on  the  same  day  till  September  inclusive- 
ly, in  some  of  the  villages  in  the  immediate  neighborhood  of 
London.  These  are  for  the  benefit  of  pupils.  At  the  end  of 
the  season  the  premium  o(  Hudson's  Flora  Anglica  is  present- 
ed to  the  youno  man  who  has  been  the  most  successful  in  dis- 
covering and  investigating  the  greatest  number  of  plants.  The 
general  herbarization  is  annually  in  July :  when  the  demon- 
strator and  others  of  the  court  of  a.ssistants  belonging  to  the 
company,  make  an  excursion  to  a  considerable  distance  from 
the  city,  collect  the  scarce  plants,  and  dine  together  near  Lon- 
don. 

This  institution  at  Chelsea  was  rendered  more  stable,  and 
received  permanency  from  the  liberality  of  Sir  Hans  Sloane  ; 
who  in  172]  gave  foiir  acres  of  ground  to  the  company,  en  con- 
dition that  the  demonstrator  should,  in  the  name  of  the  compa- 
ny, deliver  to  the  Royal  Society  fifty  new  plants,  till  the  num- 
ber should  amount  io  two  thousand  ;  all  specifically  different 
from  each  other ;  the  list  of  which  was  published  yearly  in  the 

*  Johnson  received  a  deLree  of  M.  D.  at  Oxford  in  1643  ;  the  year  following 
he  was  kiiied  in  a  desperate  action  with  the  parliamentary  troops.  He  was 
lieutenant-colonel  in  Sir  INtarmadune  Rawdon's  regiment.  Botany  owes  much 
to  this  accomplished  scholar  and  soldier. 

tin  England  an  apothecary  is  not,  as  with  ns,  a  render  of  drugs  ;  but  a 
prarlitioner  of  physic  and  surgew,  and  differs  principally  from  a  physician  in 
not  iiaving  taken  a  degree  in  medicine. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  113 

Philosophical  Transactions.  The  first  was  printed  in  1722, 
and  the  catalncrues  have  been  continued  till  1773;  at  which 
time  the  number  of  two  thousand  five  hundred  and  fifty  was 
completed.  These  specimens  are  duly  preserved  in  the  archives 
of  the  society,  for  ihe  inspection  of  the  curious. 

Under  excellent  superintendents  Chelsea  Garden  has  flour- 
ished ;  having  been  excelled  perhaps  by  no  public  institution 
of  the  kind  in  Europe,  for  the  number  of  curious  exotics  it  con- 
tains. Of  this  Millers  Dictionary  afibrds  sufficient  proofs. 
In  justice  to  the  memory  of  those,  who  filled  the  place  of  lec- 
turers and  demonstrators  in  Chelsea  garden,  we  recite  the 
names  of  the  following  gentlemen.  They  were  all  practitioners 
in  physic. 

Is:iac  Rand  from  1722  to  1729 

Joseph  Miller  1740      1746 

John  Wilmer  1747      1767 

William  Hudson  1765      1769 

Stanesby  Alchhorne  •  1770      1772 

William  Curtis  1773  to  his  death. 

Soon  after  the  restoration  of  Charles  II.,  a  growing  taste  for 
the  cultivation  of  exotics  sprung  up  among  the  great  and  opu- 
lent in  England.  Archibald,  dnke  of  Argyle,  was  one  of  the 
first  who  was  conspicuous  for  the  introduction  of  foreign  trees 
and  shrubs.  Evelyn,  both  by  his  writings  and  example,  en- 
couraged the  same  taste  ;  and  the  royal  gardens  at  Hampton 
court  were  n)ade  rich  in  fine  plants.  Dr.  Compton,  bishop  of 
London,  had  a  garden  richly  stored  with  plants  at  Fulham  ; 
and  many  private  ofentlemen  vied  with  each  other  in  these  ele- 
gant and  useful  atnusements.  The  growing  commerce  of  the 
British  nation,  and  the  more  frequent  intercourse  with  Holland, 
where  immense  collections  from  the  Dutch  colonies  had  been 
made,  rendered  the  gratifications  more  easily  attainable,  than 
before,  and  from  these  happy  coincidences,  science  in  general 
reaped  great  benefit. 

We  oua:ht  not  to  pass  over  some  eminent  British  gardeners, 
who,  while  others  were  increasing  the  catalogue  of  plants  and 
giving  accurate  descriptions  of  exotics,  were  equally  servicea- 
ble to  real  science  in  the  art  of  culture.  Fairchilds,  Knowl- 
ton,  Gordon,  Miller,  and  Forsytlie,  have  distinguished  them- 
selves in  the  useful  and  healthy*  exercise  of  horticulture.  In 
the  xxxii.  vol.  of  Philosophical  Transactions  there  is  a  paper  by 
Fairchilds  on  the  motion  of  the  sap.  Knowlton  was  gardener 
to  the  Earl  of  Burlington,  and  was  much  noticed  by  Sir  Hans 
Sloane.     Several  of  his  communications  are  to  be  found  in  the 


•  Cadogan  says,  he  never  knew  a  gardener  affliected  with  the  gout,  unless 
he  was  notoriously  intemperate. 


114  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Philosophical  Transactions,  He  died  in  1782,  aged  ninety. 
Gordon  was  eminent  for  his  successfnl  cultivation  of  exotics. 
He  maintained  a  correspondence  with  Linnaeus,  and  has  a 
plant  named  after  him. 

The  extraordinary  merit  of  Philip  Miller  demands  a  more 
particular  notice,  as  he  raised  himself  to  an  eminence  never  be- 
fore equalled  by  a  gardener.  He  was  born  in  1691.  His  fa- 
ther was  gardener  to  the  company  of  apothecaries  at  Chelsea  ; 
and  he  himself  succeeded  in  that  station  in  1722.  It  is  not  un- 
common to  give  the  name  of  botanist  to  any  man,  who  con  re- 
cite by  name  the  plants  of  his  garden  ;  but  Mr.  Miller  rose 
much  above  this  ordinary  attainment.  He  added  to  the  knowl- 
edge of  the  theory  and  practice  of  gardening  that  of  the  struc- 
ture and  character  of  plants,  and  was  early  and  practically  ver- 
sed in  the  methods  of  Ray  and  Tournefort.  To  his  superior 
skill  in  his  art  we  owe  the  culture  and  preservation  of  a  variety 
of  fine  plants,  which,  in  less  skilful  hands,  would  have  failed  to 
adorn  the  conservatories  of  the  curious. 

Mr.  Miller  maintained  an  extensive  correspondence  with  per- 
sons in  distant  parts  of  the  globe,  from  the  cape  of  Good  Hope 
to  Siberia.  He  was  emphatically  styled  by  foreigners  Hortiila' 
norum  Princeps.  His  Gardener''s  Dictionary  was  first  pub- 
lished in  folio  in  1731,  and  has  been  translated  into  various  lan- 
guages ;  the  reception  it  has  every  where  met  with  is  a  suffici- 
ent proof  of  its  superiority.  Linnaeus  said  of  his  dictionary, 
Non  erit  Lexicon  Hor till o nor ntn,  sed  Botanicornm.  He  was 
not  only  a  member  of  the  Royal  Society,  but  of  its  council.  This 
"prince  of  gardeners"  died  in  1771,  aged  eighty  years. 

While  Padiia^  Paris,  Madrid,  Upsal,  Oxford,  Leyden,  and 
Montpelier,  had  flourishing  botanical  gardens,  London,  so  cele- 
brated in  the  annals  of  science,  could  boast  of  no  public  botani- 
cal garden  until  1780. 

This  garden  is  situated  at  Queen's  Elm,  on  the  road  to  Ful- 
ham.  The  site  must  be  allowed  to  have  been  well  chosen,  for 
the  grounds  lie  open  to  the  south  and  west,  except  where  the 
plantations  are  intended  to  exclude  the  sun,  while  the  north- 
east wind,  by  being  impregnated  with  the  ignited  air  of  the 
capital,  loses  much  of  its  sharpness,  and  becomes  far  less  perni- 
cious than  it  would  otherwise  be,  to  such  plants  as  require  a 
bland  and  genial  climate.  Its  extent  is  about  three  acres  and 
a  half,  including  the  ground  occupied  by  the  hot  house,  green 
Iiouses  and  library;  and  seven  acres  more,  immediately  adjoin- 
ing, and  now  in  the  occupation  of  the  proprietor,  con  at  any 
time  be  included. 

The  arrangement  is  strictly  Linnaean  ;  and  every  tree,  shrub 
and  plant,  is  labelled,  so  as  to  afford  the  advantage  of  an  easy- 
reference  to  the  correspondent  numbers  in  the  catalogue. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  115 

On  approaching  from  Fulham  road,  the  stranger  perceives  a 
door,  situated  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  plantation  ;  and,  on 
ringins:  a  bell,  will  be  immediately  admitted.  A  broad  walk, 
extending  across  the  garden,  presents  a  parterre  on  each  side, 
in  which  all  the  different  varieties  and  beautiful  hues  of  Flora 
are  exhibited,  in  regular  gradation,  according  to  the  season. 

"  Along  these  blushing  borders,  bright  with  hue, 
Fair-handed  Spring  unbosoms  every  grace." 

No.  1,  contains  all  those  plants  that  are  considered  useful  in 
agriculture.  Persons  skilled  in  this  art  have  an  opportunity  of 
seeing,  distinctly  arranged,  with  their  proper  names  and  spe- 
cies, every  tree,  grass  and  shrub,  that  is  cultivated  as  food  for 
both  man  and  beast.  This  is  a  most  important  branch  of 
natural  economy. 

No.  2  is  the  medicinal  quarter,  in  which  the  student  will  find 
the  plants  of  the  London  and  Edinburgh  Dispensatories ;  and 
whether  he  himself  is  destined  to  prescribe,  or  to  make  up  the 
prescriptions  of  others,  will  here  have  an  opportuity  of  becom- 
ing acquainted  with  the  characters  of  those  herbs  which  form  a 
part  of  the  Materia  Medica. 

Among  the  curious  ones  will  be  found  the  Assafcelida ; 
while  the  poisonous  tribe,  only  thirteen  of  which  will  thrive  in 
the  open  air  in  Britain,  are  arranged  so  as  to  be  hereafter  de- 
tected by  simple  inspection  alone. 

No.  3,  the  foreign  grass  quarter,  contains  the  Lygeum,  Spar- 
tum,  the  Melica  Ciliata,  the  Triticum  gsstivum,  the  Juncus  ni- 
veus,  &.C. 

No.  4,  the  British  grass  quarter.  Here  the  agriculturist 
will,  at  one  view,  behold  and  distinguish  those  gramini  which 
constitute  the  real  wealth  and  fertility  of  a  country.  These  in- 
clude every  species  serving  for  food  for  the  horse,  the  cow,  the 
ass,  the  sheep,  and  the  goat. 

In  this  interesting  collection  is  to  be  found  the  Meadow  Fox- 
tail, (the  Alopecurus  Pratensis  of  Linnseus,)  which  is  the  most 
fattening  of  this  tribe;  also  the  Anthoxanthum  Odoratiim.,  or 
the  sweet  scented  vernal  meadow  grass,  that  confers  a  fine  aro- 
matic flavor  on  our  hay,  together  with  a  complete  collection  ot 
all  the  British  species  of  gramina,  may  be  seen  in  great  perfec- 
tion in  this  quarter. 

No.  5,  contains  the  British  plants  of  large  growth. 
No.  6,  the  British  wood. 

No.  7,  is  dedicated  to  British  rock  plants  and  aquatics. 
No.  8,  the  hot  house  and  green  house.  Here  may  be  found  the 
Dioncea  Miiscipula,  a  fine  specimen  of  which  was  lately  pre- 
sented to  the  president  of  the  Linnsean  Society,  for  the  purpose 
of  elucidating  his  lectures  at  the  Royal  Institute.  They  have  also 
the  Strelitzia  Regincn,  so  called  out  of  compliment  to  the 


116 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


queen  ;  the  PoHlandia,  the  Plumieria,  the  Vanilla,  Catesbea 
^pi/iosa,  the  Ipomcea  bona  tiox,  the  Amaryllis  reticulata,  to- 
gether with  the  Crinum  crubescens,  all  in  fine  bloom. 

Ill  the  green  house  is  to  be  met  with,  the  double  Camella 
Japonica,  the  Phormium  tenax,  with  a  very  excellent  collec- 
tion of  plants  from  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  and  New  Holland. 

No.  y,  the  library.  This  is  an  oblonor  building,  with  a  lattice 
work  towards  the  south,  through  which  it  is  intended  that  the 
ornithologist  should  be  recreated  with  the  view  of  British  birds, 
and  enabled  to  study  their  habits  and  manners  while  alive. 

Tne  collection  consists  of  useful  works,  either  on  or  imme- 
diately connected  with  the  science  of  botany,  in  all  about  500 
volumes,  uicluding  the  most  celebrated  agricultural  works  of 
Young,  Marshall,  Dickson,  &c. 

No.  10,  a  green  house,  entirely  dedicated  to  heaths,  chiefly 
from  the  coast  of  Africa,  of  which  there  are  one  hundred  and 
fifty  different  species. 

No.  11,  is  appropriated  to  bulbs  and  flower  roots. 

No.  12,  foreign  annual  plants. 

No.  13.  This  quarter  contains  upwards  of  one  thousand 
different  species  of  foreign  hardy  herbaceous  plants. 

No.  14,  foreign  Alpine  plants. 

No.  1,5,  American  plants,  and  foreign  wood  quarter. 

No.  16,  is  a  double  border  of  foreign  trees  and  shrubs,  ex- 
tending all  round  the  boundaries  of  the  gaiden,  on  each  side  of 
the  walk. 

The  above  is  intended  as  a  popular  rather  than  a  scien- 
tific description  of  a  spot,  where  either  the  student  or  the  adept 
may  satisfy  his  curiosity,  by  means  of  an  arrangement  executed 
in  strict  conformity  to  the  system  of  the  great  Swedish  natural- 
ist. Those,  also,  who  delight  in  the  contemplation  of  nature, 
are  recreated  at  a  very  trifliny  expense  ;  and  flowers,  plants, 
and  trees,  at  every  season  of  the  year,  present  an  almost  endless 
variety  of  interesting  objects. 

Mr.  Salisbury  is  often  honored  with  the  presence,  not  only  of 
some  of  the  first  botanists  of  England  and  other  countries,  but 
also  with  many  of  the  British  nobility  ;  and  he  has  often  beheld, 
with  grateful  satisfaction,  different  branches  of  the  royal  family, 
who  have  honored  it  with  their  patronage,  walking  along  the 
paths,  appearing  delighted  with  the  arrangement. 

Such  is,  at  present,  the  Botanic  Garden  at  (Queen's  Elms;  in 
the  further  improving  of  which  no  pains  or  labor  are  spared  to 
render  it  still  more  useful  to  the  public.  It  remains  lor  a  nation, 
not  only  fond  of  science,  but  ever  considered  as  its  munificent 
patron  and  generous  protector,  to  enable  the  proprietor  to  com- 
plete his  plans,  extend  his  views  in  favor  of  genius  ;  and  finally 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  117 

to  form  an  establishment  equally  worthy  of  science,  and  of  the 
noted  liberality  of  Great  Britain. 

A  GENERAL  LANGUAGE  TO  DESIGNATE  PLANTS. 

/  have  always  thou;^ht  it  possible  to  be  a  very  great  bo- 
tanist, says  the  celebrated  Rousseau,  ivithout  knowing  so 
much  as  one  plant  by  name.  He  nevertheless  exhorts  his 
pupil  to  pass  from  his  closet  to  the  gardens  and  fields,  to  study 
the  sacred  scriptures  of  nature,  instead  of  books  written  by 
men.  This  famous  Genevan  had  doubtless  seen  persons  who 
bestowed  all  their  attention  on  the  nomenclature  and  classifi- 
cation of  vegetables,  and  thought  themselves  botanists.  The 
celebrated  /.  Hunter*  knew  not  the  names  of  every  individu- 
al in  the  armies  of  Britain  ;  nor  the  discriminating  mark  of 
each  company  in  each  and  every  regiment ;  yet  he  knew  most 
accurately  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  every  individual. 

One  universal  languu'jre  should  be  adopted  by  botanists; 
and  it  is  important  that  it  should  be  well  understood  :  but  it  is 
absurd  to  make  this  the  primary  object.  If  the  study  of  plants 
do  not  lead  to  a  knowledge  of  their  uses  in  rural  economy, 
and  to  their  medicinal  virtues,  the  attention  to  the  aspect  and 
names  of  plants  is  of  very  little  importance  to  the  public.  Be- 
fore the  Spanish  overran  Mexico,  Montezuma  transplanted  in- 
numerable vegetables  from  the  woods  and  fields  into  his  royal 
garden  ;  and  it  was  the  business  of  his  physicians  to  investi- 
gate and  announce  the  medicinal  virtues  of  his  vast  collection. 
Would  it  not  be  well,  if  the  philosophers  of  the  north  should 
imitate  the  wise  example  of  these  more  than  half  civilized  peo- 
ple of  the  south'? 

The  first  step  we  should  take  towards  perfecting  the  science 
of  botany,  is  to  transplant  vegetables  from  our  woods,  bogs, 
fields,  and,  if  possible,  marshes,  into  one  garden  :  and  then  at- 
tempt the  naturalization  of  tropical  and  other  exotics.  We 
must  not  expect  to  have  a  garden  in  which  every  plant  of  eve- 
ry country  will  prosper,  or  even  grow.  To  effect  this  we 
must  imagine  a  garden  planted  on  a  mountain  directly  under 
the  equator,  and  gradually  sloping  to  the  height  of  more  than 
two  miles  above  the  level  of  the  ocean.  There  every  plant  of 
every  climate  would  grow.  Alexander  de  Humboldt,  a  Prus- 
sian gentleman,  has  given  us  some  very  interesting  facts  to 
this  purpose,  collected  within  a  few  years  past,  in  the  equato- 
rial region.  The  vast  range  of  elevation,  from  the  shores  of 
the  Atlantic  to  the  heights  of  the  Andes,  affords  every  possible 
degree  of  temperature,  and  exhibits  all  the  diversity  of  the  ve- 
getable tribes.     This  distinguished  traveler  represents  the  dif- 

•  Late  Surgeon-Geaeral  in  Ihe  British  army. 


118  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ferent  kinds  of  plants  as  following  each  other  in  a  regular  suc- 
cession up  the  mountains. 

We  are  told  that  the  inhabitants  of  New-Spain  distinguished 
the  cultivated  part  of  the  country  into  three  zones.  1.  The 
tierras  calientes,  or  warm  grounds,  which  never  rising  above 
one  thousand  feet  above  the  sea,  have  a  heat  of  eighty  degrees, 
and  yield  abundantly,  sugar,  indigo,  cotton,  and  plantains  or 
bananas.  2.  The  tierras  templ'ades^  or  temperate  grotmds 
whicli  lying  on  the  declivity  of  the  great  ridge,  at  an  aUitude, 
from  four  to  five  thousand  feet,  enjoy  a  mild,  vernal  tempera- 
ture, of  sixty-eight,  or  seventy  degrees,  that  seldom  varies  ten 
deo'rees  through  the  whole  year.  3.  The  tierras  frias,  or  cold 
fjrounds,  having  an  elevation  of  eight  thousand  feet,  and  com- 
prehending the  high  plains,  or  table  land,  such  as  that  of  Mex- 
ico, of  which  the  temperature  is  generally  under  sixty-three  de- 
o-rees,  and  never  exceeds  seventy  de2:rees. 

ALTITUDE    OR    LOCATION    OF    PLANTS. 

The  following  account  of  the  succession  of  plants  from  the 
low  grounds  up  to  the  boundary  of  perpetual  congelation,  as 
marked  on  the  Andes,  we  esteem  both  curious  and  instructive. 
They  are  the  remarks  of  Humboldt  as  given  to  the  English 
reader  by  the  Edinburgh  Review  for  1810. 

"  Under  the  equator,  from  the  coast  to  the  height  of  three 
thousand  feet,  grow  the  scitaminem  of  Jussieu, — the  palms,  the 
sensitive  plants,  and  the  most  odoriferous  of  the  liliaceous  tribe. 
In  that  sultry  zone,  where  vegetation  wantons  in  the  rankest 
luxuriance,  appear  likewise  the  theophrasla,  the  /ii/meti(ca,the 
cecropia  peltata,  the  allionia,  the  conocMrpiis,  the  convolvulus 
littoralis,  the  cactus  pereskia,  the  sesuvimn,  portulacastruvh, 
the  toluifera  halsamum^  and  cuspariafehrifiiga,  or  ihe  quin- 
quina of  Carony.  Between  three  thousand  and  six  thousand 
feet  of  elevation,  occur  the  nielastomcc,  the  clusiii  alba,  the  prii- 
nus  occidenlalis,  iheficuSy  the  moroia,  the  calicarpa,  the  acros- 
ticiim,  the  solanum,  the  dolichos  croton,  and  the  passijlora  to- 
mentosa.  Above  those  limits,  the  sensitive  plant  ceases  to  ap- 
pear. The  tree  ferns  range  from  the  height  of  fifteen  hundred 
to  that  of  five  thousand  feet.  The  tracts  which  have  an  eleva- 
tion from  six  to  nine  thousand  feet,  and  enjoy  a  mild  tempera- 
ture, varying  between  thirty-four  and  seventy-two  degrees,  pro- 
duce the  fuc/isifn,  the  lobclirc,  the  sty  rax,  the  tropmolum,  the 
begonia,  and  the  columella.  Towards  the  upper  part  of  that 
zone,  the  accena,  the  dichondra,  the  nier ember gia,  the  hydro- 
cotile,  the  nerteria,  and  the  alche)nilla,  cover  the  surface  with 
a  fine  herbage.  This  is  the  region  of  the  oak,  or  the  quercns 
granatensis,  which  annually  sheds  its  leaves,  and  from  an  ele- 
vation of  nine  thousand  two  hundred  feet,  never  descends  near 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  119 

the  equator  below  that  of  five  thousand  five  hundred  feet,  though 
it  occurs,  under  the  parallel  of  Mexico,  at  the  height  of  only- 
two  thousand  six  hundred  and  twenty  feet.     The  ceroxylon 
andicola,  or  wax-palm,  whose  trunk  is  one  hundred  and  eighty- 
feet  hii^h,  grows  on  the  mountahisof  Q,uindiu.  from  six  to  nine 
thousand  feet  above  the  sea.     Beyond  this  limit  of  nine  thou- 
sand feet,  the  larger  trees  of  every  kind  cease  to  appear.     Some 
dwartish  pines,  uideed,  rise   to  near  thirteen  thousand   feet. 
The  several  species  of  the  cinchona^  which  furnishes  the  salu- 
tary Peruvian  bark,  are  scattered  along  the  chain  of  the  Andes, 
over  au  extent  of  two  thousand  miles,  at  an  elevation  from  two 
thousand  three  hundred  to  nine  thousand  five  hundred  feet, 
and  therefore  exposed  to  great  variety  of  climate.     The  Za?ici- 
folia  and  cordifolia  prefer  the  plains ;  the  ohlongifoUa  and 
loni,nJlora  occur  somewhat  higher  ;  but  the  noted  quinquina 
of  LiOxa,  and  which  Humboldt  proposes  to  name  the  cinchona 
con.fla7ninea,  grows  at  heights  from  six  thousand  two  hundred 
and  fifty  to  eight  thousand  feet,  where  the  mean  temperature 
varies  between  fifty-nme  and  sixty-two  degrees,  on  a  botlom  of 
micaceous  schist  in  the  woods  of  Caxanuma  and  Uritucinga. 
This  precious  shrub  forms  one  continued  forest  on  the  eastern 
declivity  of  the  Andes,  as  far  as  the  province  of  Jaen,  and  the 
liills  above  the  river  Amazons.     Bark  of  a  similar  quality  is  thus 
obtained  from  very  distinct  kinds  of  the  cinchoria  ;  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  caoutchouc,  or  common  elastic  gum,  is  procured 
from  the  inspissated  juice  of  a  variety  of  different  vegetables — 
from  the  ficus,  the  hevea,  the  lobelia,  the  castilloa,  and  several 
species  of  the  euphorbium.     The  icintera  and  escallonia  occur 
at  an  altitude  from  nine  thousand  two  hundred  to  ten  thousand 
eight  hundred  feet,  and  form  scrubby  bushes  in  the  cold  and 
moist  climate  at  the  ;ja;'rt77Z05.    Above  the  height  of  ten  thou- 
sand five  hundred  feet,  the  arborescent  vegetables  disappear. 
The  alpine  plants  occupy  an  elevation  from  six  thousand  five 
hundred  to  thirteen  thousand  five  hundred  feet:  there  grow  the 
gentians,  the  stcelina,  and  the  espeletia  frailexon,  whose  hairy- 
leaves  often  afford  cover  to  the  shivering  Indians,  when  be- 
nighted in  those  upland  regions.     The  grasses  appear  at  a 
height  from  thirteen  thousand  five  hundred  to  fifteen  thousand 
one  hundred  feet.     In  this  zone,  where  snow  falls  at  times,  the 
jarava,  and  a  multitude  of  new  species  of  'panicum  agrostis^ 
avena,  and  dactylis,  cover  the  soil  with  a  yellow  carpet,  which 
the  inhabitants  call  pajonel.     From  the  height  of  about  fifteen 
thousand  feet,  to  the  boundary  of  perpetual  congelation,  the  only- 
plants  visible  are  the  linchens  which  cover  the  face  of  the  rocks 
and  seem  even  to  penetrate  under  the  snow. 

It  is  a  most  curious  fact,  that  those  plants  which  seem  to 


120  THE  THOMSONIAN 

constitute  the  natural  riches  of  the  equatorial  regions,  are 
never  found  growing  spontaneously.  The  carica  papaya, 
the  jatropha  manihot,  or  cassava,  the  plantain  and  maize,  from 
which  the  native  Americans  drew  (heir  principal  subsistence, 
were  no  where  seen  by  Humboldt  in  the  wild  state,  nor  could 
he  discover  the  potatoe,  though  this  valuable  root  is,  along  with 
the  cheiiopodium  quinoa,  cultivated  in  the  high  country  of 
New-Grenada.  In  the  lower  grounds  between  the  tropics,  the 
natives  raise  cassava,  cocoa,  maize,  and  plantains.  It  is  the  re- 
gion of  the  ftiammea^  of  oranges,  pine-apples,  and  the  most  de- 
licious fruits.  The  Europeans  have  introduced  indigo,  sugar, 
cotton,  and  coffee,  which  they  cultivate  to  near  the  height  of 
five  thousand  feet  above  the  sea,  chiefly  by  the  labor  of  negro 
slaves.  Indigo  and  cocoa  require  great  heat,  but  cotton  and 
coffee  will  grow  at  a  considerable  elevation,  and  sugar  is  cul- 
tivated even  with  success  in  the  temperate  parts  of  Q,uito. 
This  is  the  habitation  of  the  cerealia^  or  bread-corn.  The 
introduction  of  wheat  into  New  Spain,  is  traced  to  three  or 
four  grains  which  a  negro  servant  of  Cortez  picked  out  from 
among  rhe  stores  of  rice  that  had  been  sent  from  Europe, 
for  subsisting  the  troops.  The  monks  of  Q,uito  still  preserve, 
as  a  precious  relic,  the  earthen  jar  in  which  Father  Rixi  of 
Ghent  gathered  the  first  crop,  from  a  spot  of  ground  cleared 
away  in  front  of  the  convent.  Wheat,  under  the  equator, 
will  seldom  form  an  ear  below  the  elevation  of  four  thou- 
sand five  hundred  feet,  or  ripen  it  above  that  of  ten  thou- 
sand eight  hundred.  Barley  is  made  to  grow  somewhat  high- 
er, but  then  with  the  utmost  difficulty.  Between  the  altitudes 
of  six  and  nine  thousand  feet,  lies  the  climate  best  suited  for 
the  culture  of  all  kinds  of  European  grain.  In  the  same 
tract  is  raised  the  chenopodium  quinoa.  From  the  elevation 
of  four  thousand  three  hundred  feet  to  that  of  six  thousand 
two  hundred  feet,  grows  the  erythroxylum  peruvianiim,  whose 
leaves,  called  cocca^  being  mixed  with  quick  lime,  serve  to  stim- 
ulate the  exhuasted  force  of  the  Indian,  during  his  long  and 
toilsome  journies  over  the  heights  of  the  Andes.  In  the  space 
between  the  altitudes  of  nine  thousand  eight  hundred  and  thir- 
teen thousand  feet,  potatoes  and  the  tropoeolum  esculenium  are 
generally  cultivated." 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  121 

IMPROVED  SYSTEM  OF  BOTANY,  AS  TAUGHT 
AT  THE  PRESENT  DAY. 

GENERAL    PHYSIOLOGY    OF    PLANTS. 

Phytology,  or  the  physiology  of  vegetables,  may  properly  be 
divided  into,  1st.  The  germination  and  growth  of  plants  from 
the.  seed  ;  2.  The,  propagation  of  plants  ;  3d.  The  increase  of 
plants,  or  the  enlargement  of  their  volume. 

1.   The  Germination  and  Growth  of  Plants  from  the  Seed. 

If  a  seed  be  immersed  in  warm  water  for  a  considerable  time, 
and  then  subjected  to  a  high  magnifying  power,  the  elementary 
form  of  the  future  plant  may  be  seen.  In  some  seeds  even  the 
embryo  of  the  future  flower  becomes  manifest.  Therefore  it 
may  not  be  absurd  to  say,  that  the  germination  and  growth  is 
efl:ected  by  the  development  of  the  embryo  plant  contained  in 
the  seed  ;  and  that  this  development  goes  on  by  means  of  suc- 
cesssive  supplies  of  nutriment,  which  are  taken  into  an  oro-an- 
ized  structure  adapted  to  their  reception. 

But  where  shall  we  stop  in  our  views  of  these  elementary 
forms?  Shall  we  say,  that  within  the  embryo  of  the  future 
flower  which  sometimes  becomes  manifest  under  the  micro- 
scope, tiiere  is  probably  another  seed  containing  the  elementa- 
ry form  of  the  next  generation,  and  so  on  ad  injinitiivi  7 

Fortunately,  the  present  state  of  the  science  presents  the  means 
of  fixing  the  limit  in  the  most  satisfectory  manner.  For  noth- 
ing in  the  physiology  of  organized  beings  is  better  established, 
than  that  a  perfect  future  seed  cannot  be  produced  without  the 
application  of  pollen  from  a  stamen  to  the  pistil  of  a  stigma.  But 
if  the  future  seed  were  perfect  in  tiie  present  one,  such  an  ope- 
ration would  not  be  necessary.  Therefore,  by  the  aid  of  the 
microscope  and  this  established  law,  we  are  enabled  to  infer 
that  a  seed  may  contain  the  elements  of  a  future  plant  as  far  as 
the  flower  and  empty  tegument  of  the  future  seed,  and  no  far- 
ther. 

2.   The  Propagation  of  Plants. 

There  are  two  methods  of  propagating  plants.  First,  by  re- 
prodiiction ;  second,  by  continvation. 

1.  A  plant  is  reproduced,  when  it  grows  immediately  from 
the  seed.  The  potatoe  is  reproduced,  when  the  seed  is  taken 
from  the  berry,  planted  and  grows.  Apple  trees  are  reprodu- 
ced in  the  nurseries  from  seeds,  &c. 

2.  A  plant  is  continued.,  when  parts  taken  from  its  roots,  stem, 
branches,  its  buds,  (fcc.  are  transferred  to  difl^erent  places,  and 
so  cultivated  as  to  continue  to  grow  in  several  places  at  the 


122  THE   THOMSONIAN 

same  time.  The  living  branches  or  twigs  of  the  same  apple 
tree  may  continue  to  grow  from  the  original  root  and  from  hun- 
dreds  of  other  roots  in  different  countries  at  the  same  time.  And 
it  is  a  A\ct  now  well  established,  that  those  twigs  or  grafts,  how- 
ever recently  inserted,  feel  the  effects  of  age  in  the  same  degree 
with  the  twigs  remaining  on  the  original  tree  ;  all  other  cir- 
cumstances being  similar. 

The  roots  of  potatoes  continue  in  succession  in  their  native 
torrid  regions  year  after  year  for  a  limited  period,  like  the  Mal- 
axis  and  some  others  of  the  Orchis  family  in  our  latitude.  Ag- 
riculturists and  gardeners  aid  their  progress  here,  by  housing 
the  roots  in  winter,  and  selling  them  in  the  earth  again  in  the 
spring  season.  These  too  are  greatly  distributed  ;  so  that  this 
plant  is  vastly  extended  by  the  continuation  of  the  same  indivi- 
dual. But  in  due  time  the  effects  of  age  become  manifest  to 
the  cultivator,  and  he  finds  it  necessary  to  reproduce  this  useful 
plant  from  the  seed. 

The  Lombardy  popular  is  becoming  enfeebled  with  age  in 
our  country,  so  that  very  recent  shoots  will  hardly  withstand  a 
severe  winter.  The  reason  is  manifest.  There  has  never  been 
a  pistillate  tree  introduced  from  Europe  ;  consequently  this  tree 
has  never  been  reproduced  here  from  the  seed.  We  therefore 
see  but  the  feeble  limbs  of  an  exile  in  dotage  though  yet  sus- 
tained in  a  thousand  localities. 

3.    The  increase  of  Plants^  or  the  enlargement  of  their  vol- 

time. 

After  the  first  season  of  growing,  all  woody  plants  continue 
to  increase  their  size,  if  no  accident  occurs,  until  age  terminates 
their  vital  energies.  Their  volun)e  is  not  enlarged  hom  an  ex- 
tension of  each  fibre  or  pore;  but  from  the  annual  acquisition 
of  new  ones.  These  new  ones  are  always  deposited  between 
the  bark  and  wood. 

In  the  spring  season  a  mucilage  is  formed  between  the  bark 
and  wood,  called  the  camb,  or  camhivm.  Towards  the  decline 
of  the  year  it  becomes  considerably  indurated,  and  !?eparates  it- 
self into  two  concentric  hollow  cylinders  of  very  difi'erent  thick- 
nesses. The  thiner  one  is  attached  to  the  bark,  and  forms  its 
inner  membrane.  The  thick  one  is  attached  to  xV.c  wood,  and 
becomes  the  outer  layer  of  the  wood  for  the  next  year. 

It  is  on  this  account  that  those  trees  which  long  retain  their 
expanding  cuticles,  present  to  our  land  surveyers  those  para- 
doxical magic-like  marks.  A  beech  tree,  for  example,  if  lettered 
or  figured  with  a  board  marker,  will  present  these  marks  twen- 
ty or  thirty  years  afterwards,  both  on  the  cuticle  and  on  the 
wood,  of  the  year  when  marked  ;  while  the  intervening  layers 
are  sound  and  without  a  scar.     These  mterposed  woody  layers, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  123 

originatinor  in  mucilage  annually  deposited  between  the  bark 
and  wood,  gradually  separate  the  marked  bark  and  cuticle  from 
the  marked  wood,  while  they  grow  between  these  marks  and 
become  continuous. 

ELEMENTARY  ORGANS. 

Every  plant  is  either  phenogamous  or  cryptogamous. 

Phenogaraous  plants  have  their  stamens  and  postils  sufficient- 
ly mariifest  for  examination. 

Cryptogamous  plants  either  lose  the  staminate  organs  before 
they  become  manifest,  or  they  are  too  minute  for  inspection. 

The  Classes,  Orders  and  Genera  of  the  Linnaean  system,  are 
founded  wholly  on  the  seven  elementary  organs  of  fructifica- 
tion. 

These  are, 

1.  Calyx.     The  outer  or  lower  part  of  the  flower,  generally  not 

colored.* 

2.  Carol.     The  colored  hlo.ssom,  within  or  above  the  calyx. 

3.  iS'lamens.     The  organs  immediately  surrounding  or  adjoin- 

ing the  central  one  ;  consisting  of  mealy  or  glutinous  knobs, 
either  sessile  or  supported  on  filaments. 

4.  Pistil.     The  central  organ  of  the  flov/er,  whose  base  be- 

comes the  pericarp  and  seed. 

5.  Pericarp.     The  covering  of  the  seed,  whether  pod,  shell, 

bag,  or  pulpy  substance. 

6.  Seed.     The  essential  part  containing  the  rudiment  of  a  new 

plant. 

7.  Receptacle.     The  base  which  sustains  the  other  six  parts, 

being  at  the  end  of  the  flower  stem. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE  CALYX. 

Every  calyx  is  either  movophylloiis,  consisting  of  one  leaf, 
or  pohiphi/llons,  consisting  of  more  than  one  leaf. 

1,  Perianth.     That  calyx  which  adjoms  and  surrounds  the 

other  parts  of  the  flower,  as  of  the  apple,  rose,  &c.     About 
two  thirds  of  all  plants  have  perianths. 

2.  Involucre.     That  calyx  which  comes  out  at  soip.e  distance 

below  the  flower,  and  never  encloses  it.     It  is  commonly 
.    at  the  origin  of  the  pedimcles  of  imibels,  and  sometimes  at 
tached  to  other  aggregate  flowers. 

hivolucres  are  either  universal,  placed  at  the  origin  of 
the  universal  umbel,  as  in  caraway,  lovage,  &c. ;    or  j)ar- 


*  In  the  language  of  Botany,  any  part  of  a  plant  is  not  colored  when  it  is 
green  ;  as  the  calyx  of  the  apple  is  said  not  to  be  colored,  because  it  is  gi-een  j 
and  that  of  the  nasturtion  is  coloured,  because  it  is  not  green. 


124  THE    THOMSOiMAN 

iial,  placed  at  the  origin  of  a  particular  umbel,  as  in  cori- 
ander; or  proper,  placed  beneath  a  single  flower. 

3.  Spathe.     A  kind  of  membrane,  which  at  first  encloses  the 

flower,  and  after  it  expands  is  left  at  a  distance  below  it,  as 
daffodil,  onion,  Indian  turnip. 

4.  Glmne.     That  kind  of  calyx  which  is  composed  of  one, 

two  or  three  valves  or  scales,  commonly  transparent  at  the 
margin,  and  often  terminated  by  a  long  awn  or  beard.  All 
grasses  have  glume  calyxes. 

5.  Anient.     An  assemblage  of  flower-bearing  scales,  arranged 

on  a  slender  thread  or  receptacle ;  each  scale  generally 
constituting  the  lateral  calyx  of  a  flower,  as  in  the  willow, 
chesnut,  pine,  (fcc. 

6.  Calyptre.     The  cap  or  hood  of  pistillate  mosses,  resembling 

in  form  and  position  an  extinguisher  set  on  a  candle.  Con- 
spicuous in  the  common  hair-cap  moss. 

7.  Volva.     The  ring  or  wrapper  at  first  enclosing  the  pileus  or 

head  of  a  fungus;  and  which,  after  the  plant  has  arrived 
to  maturity,  contracts  and  remains  on  the  stem  or  at  the 
root. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE  COROL. 

.  Every  corol  is  either  monope talons,  consisting  of  one  petal 
or  flower-leaf ;   or  polypetalous,  consisting  of  more  than  one. 

Monopetaloiis  Carols  are, 

1.  Bell  form.     Hollowed  out  within  the  base,  and  generally  di- 

verging upwards,  as  Canterbury  bells,  gentian,  &,c. 

2.  Funnel-form.     With  a  tubular  base,  and  the  border  opening 

gradually  in  the  form  of  a  tunnel,  as  the  thorn-apple,  the 
morning  glory. 

3.  Salver-foiyn.     Having  a  flat  spreading  limb  or  border,  pro- 

ceeding from  the  top  of  a  tube,  as  lilac,  the  trailing  arbu- 
tus, &c. 

4.  Wheelform.     Having  a  spreading  border  without  a  tube, 

or  with  an  exceeding  short  one,  as  borage,  laurel. 

5.  Labiate.     A  labiate  corol  is  divided  into  two  general  parts, 

somewhat  resembling  the  lips  of  a  horse  or  other  animal. 
Labiate  corols  are  either  fersonate,  (with  the  throat  muf- 
fled) as  snap-dragon  ;  or  ringent,  (with  the  throat  open)  as 
mint,  motherwort,  catnip,  monkey-flower. 

Polypetalous  Corols  are, 

1.  Cruciform.     Consisting  of  four  equal  petals,  spreading  out 

in  the  form  of  a  cross,  as  radish,  cabbage,  mustard,  «fcc. 

2.  Caryophylleous.    Having  five  single  petals,  each  terminal- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  125 

ing  in  a  long  claw,  enclosed  in  a  tabular  calyx,  as  pink, 
catch-fly,  cockle,  (fcc. 

3.  Liliaceous.     A  corol  with  six  petals,  spreading  gradually 

from  the  base,  so  as  altogether  to  exhibit  a  bell-form  ap- 
pearance, as  tulip,  lily,  &.c. 

4.  Rosaceous.     A  corol  formed  of  roundish  spreading  petals, 

without  claws,  or  with  extremely  short  ones,  as  rose,  ap- 
ple, strawberry,  &c. 

5.  Papilionaceous.     A  flower  which  consists  of  a  banner,  two 

wings  and  a  keel,  as  pea,  clover,  &c. 
If  a  corol  agrees  with  none  of  the  above  descriptions,  it  is 
called  anomalous. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE  STAMEN. 

1.  Anther.     The  knob  of  the  stamen,  which  contains  the  pol- 

len ;  very  conspicuous  in  the  lily,  &c.     Never  wanting. 

2.  Pollen.     The  dusty,  mealy,  or  glutinous  substance  contain- 

ed in  the  anthers.     Never  wantinaf. 

3.  Filament.     That  part  of  the  stamen  which  connects  the  an- 

ther with  the  receptacle,  calyx  or  pistil.     Often  wanting. 

SUHDIVrSIONS  OF  THE  PISTIL. 

1.  Stigma.     The  organ  which  terminates  the  pistil  ;  very  con- 

spicuous in  the  lily,  and  hardly  distinguishable  in  the  In- 
dian corn.     Never  wanting. 

2.  Germ.     That  part  of  the  pistil  which  in  maturity  becomes 

the  pericarp  and  the  seed,  as  in  the  cherry,  the  pompion. 
Never  wanting. 

3.  Style.     That  part  of  the  pistil  which  connects  the  stigma 

and  the  germ;  very  conspicuous  in  the  lily.  Wanting  in 
the  tulip  and  some  other  flowers. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE   PERICARP. 

1.  Silique.    That  kind  of  pod  which  has  a  longitudinal  parti- 

tion, with  the  seeds  attached  alternately  to  its  opposite 
edges,  as  radish,  cabbage,  &c. 

2.  Legume.     A  pod  without  a  longitudinal  partition,  with  the 

seeds  attached  to  one  suture  only,  as  the  pea,  &c. 

3.  Capsule.     That  kind  of  percicarp  which  opens  by  valves  or 

pores,  and  becomes  dry  when  ripe,  as  the  poppy,  which 
opens  by  pores,  and  the  mullein  by  valves. 

4.  Drupe.     That  kind  of  a  pericarp  which  consists  of  a  thick 

fleshy  or  cartilaginous  coat  enclosing  a  nut  or  stone,  as  in 
the  cherry,  in  which  it  is  said  to  be  berry-like  ;  and  in 
the  walnut,  where  it  is  diy. 

5.  Pome.    A  pulpy  pericarp  without  valves,  which  contains 

within  it  a  capsule,  as  apples,  quinces,  &.c. 


126  THE  THOMSONIAN 

6.  Berry.     A  pulpy  pericarp,  enclosing  seeds  without  any  cap- 

sule, as  currant,  grape,  cucumber,  melon. 

7.  Strobile.     An  anient  with  woody  scales,  as  the  fruit  of  the 

pine. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE  SEED. 

1.  Cotyledon.     The  thick  fleshy  lobes  of  seeds  ;  very  manifest 

in  beans  ;  whose  cotyledons  grow  out  of  the  ground  in  the 
form  of  two  large  succulent  leaves.  Many  plants,  as  Indian 
corn,  wheat,  the  grasses,  &,c.,  have  but  one  cotyledon — 
mosses,  (fcc.  none. 

2.  Corcle.     The  rudiment  of  the  future  plant,  always  proceed- 

ing from  the  cotyledon  ;  easily  distinguished  in  chesnuts, 
acorns,  &.c. 

3.  Tegument.     The  skin  or  bark  of  seeds;    it  separates  from 

peas,  beans,  Indian  corn,  &c.  on  boiling. 

4.  Hihmi.     The  external  mark  or   scar  on  seeds,   by  which 

they  were  affixed  to  their  pericarps.  In  beans  and  the  like 
it  is  called  the  eye. 

SUBDIVISIONS  OF  THE  RECEPTACLE. 

1.  Proper.     That  which  belongs  to  one  flower  only. 

2.  Common.     That  which  connects  several  distinct  flowrets,  as 

in  the  sun-flower,  daisy,  teasel. 

3.  Rachis.     The  filiform  receptacle,  connecting  the  florets  in 

a  spike,  as  in  the  heads  of  wheat. 

4.  Colum,ella.     The  central  column  in  a  capsule,  to  which  the 

seeds  are  attached. 

5.  SpadLv.     An  elongated  receptacle  proceeding  from  a  spathe, 

as  Indian  turnip. 

GENERAL  DIVISIONS  OF  FLOWERS. 

1.  Simple.    Having  a  single  flower  on  a  receptacle,  as  in  the 

quince,  tulip,  «fcc. 

2.  Aggregate.     Having  on  the  same  receptacle  several  flow- 

ers, whose  anthers  are  not  united,  as  teasel,  button-bush, 
&c. 

3.  Compound.    Having  several  florets  on  the  same  receptacle, 

with  their  anthers  united,  as  sun-flower,  China-aster,  <fcc. 

4.  Staminate.    Having  stamens  only,  as  those  in  the  tassels  of 

Indian  corn. 

5.  Pistillate.     Having  pistils  only,  as  the  fertile  flower  of  the 

cucumber. 

6.  Perfect.    Having  both  stamens  and  pistils. 

7.  Neutral.    Having  neither  stamens  nor  pistils. 


MATERIA    MKDICA.  127 

INFLORESCENCE. 

The  manner  in  which  Flowers  are  situated  on  Plants. 

1.  Whorl.     In  which  the  flowers   grow  around  the  stem  in 

rings  one  above  another,  as  motherwort,  catnip. 

2.  Raceme.     Having  the  florets  on  short  undivided  pedicels, 

arranged  along  a  general  peduncle,  as  currants. 

3.  Panicle.     Having  some  of  the  pedicels,  along  the  general 

peduncle  of  tlie  raceme,  divided,  as  in  oats.  A  panicle 
contracted  into  a  compact,  somewhat  ovate  form,  as  in  li- 
lac, is  called  Lhyrse. 

4.  Spike.     Having  the  florets  sessile,  or  nearly  so,  on  the  elon- 

gated general  receptacle,  as  wheat,  mullein,  (fcc. 

5.  Umbel.     Having  the  flower  stems  diverging  from  one  place, 

like  the  braces  of  an  umbrella,  bearing  florets  on  their  ex- 
tremities, as  carrot,  dill,  fennel,  <fcc. 

6.  Cyme.     It  agrees  v/ith  the  umbel  in  having  its  oreneral  flow- 

er stems  spring  from  one  centre,  but  differs  in  having  those 
stems  irregularly  subdivided,  as  elder,  (fcc. 

7.  Corymb,     In  the  corymb  the  peduncles  take  their  rise  from 

different  heights  along  the  main  stem;  but  the  lower  ones 
being  longer,  they  form  nearly  a  level  or  convex  top,  as 
yarrow. 

8.  Fascicle.     In  general  external  appearance  it  resembles  the 

umbel,  but  the  foot  stalks  are  irregular  in  their  origin  and 
subdivisions,  as  sweet-william. 

9.  Head.     In  this  the  flowers  are  heaped  together  in  a  globu- 

lar form  without  peduncles,  or  with  very  short  ones,  as 
clover, 

ROOTS  AND  HERBAGE. 

The  substance  cf  Roots  and  Herbage  consists  of, 

1.  Cuticle.     The  thin  outside  coat  of  the  bark,  which  seems  to 

be  without  life,  and  often  transp^arent.  Very  conspicuous 
on  some  kinds  of  birch,  cherry,  currant  bushes,  &,c. 

2.  Cellular  Iii.tegnment.      The  parenchymous  substance  be- 

tween the  cuticle  and  bark,  often  green.  Easily  seen  in 
the  elder,  &c.  after  removing  the  cuticle. 

3.  Bark.     The  inner  strong  fibrous  part  of  the  covering  of  ve- 

getables. 

4.  Camb.     The  mucilaginous  or  gelatinous  substance,  which 

in  the  spring  of  the  year,  abounds  between  the  bark  and 
the  wood  of  trees, 

5.  Wood.     The  most  solid  part  of  the  trunks  and  roots  of  herbs 

and  trees, 

6.  Pith.     The  spongy  substance  in  the  centre  of  the  stems  and 

roots  of  most  plants.     Large  in  the  elder. 


128  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Roots  are  the  descending  parts  of  vegetables,  and  are  annual^ 
biennial,  or  perennial.     They  are  of  seven  kinds. 

1.  Branching.     Having  the  whole  root  divided  into  parts  as  it 

proceeds  downwards,  as  the  oak,  apple  tree,  &c. 

2.  Fibrous.     The  whole  root  consisting  of  filiform  parts,  ori- 

ginating immediately  from  the  base  of  the  stem,  as  many 
of  the  grasses. 

3.  Creeping.     Extending  itself  horizontally,  and  sending  out 

fibrous  radicles,  as  gill-overground,  mint,  tfcc. 

4.  Spindle.     Thick  at  the  top  and  tapering  downward,  as  car- 

rot, parsnip,  &.c. 

5.  Tuberous.     Roots  which  are  thick  and  fleshy,  but  not  of 

any  regular  globular  form.  They  are  knobbed,  as  the  po- 
tatoe  ;  oval,  as  those  of  orchis  ;  abrupt,  as  the  birdsfoot-vi- 
olet ;  or  fascicled,  as  asparagus. 

6.  Bulbous.     Fleshy  and  spherical.     They  are  either  solid,  as 

the  turnip ;  coated,  as  the  onion  :  or  scaly,  as  the  garden 
lily. 

7.  Gramdated.     Consisting  of  several  little  knobs  in  the  form 

of  grains,  strung  together  along  the  sides  of  a  filiform  ra- 
dicle, as  the  wood  sorrel. 

Herbage  is  all  the  plant  except  the  root  QX\di  fructification.    It 
includes  steins,  leaves  and  appendages. 

STEMS. 

1.  Tidge,  or  proper  stem.     The  ascending  herbage-bearing 

trunk  or  stem  of  all  phenogamous  plants,  except  the  grass- 
es, as  the  trunk  of  the  oak,  the  grape-vine,  the  mullein- 
stalk. 

2.  Culm.     The  stalk  or  stem  of  the  grasses,  as  wheat-straw, 

sugar  cane,  &c, 

3.  Scape.     That  kind  of  flower  bearing  stem  which  springs 

immediately  from  the  root,  and  is  destitute  of  leaves,  as 
dandelion. 

4.  Peduncle.     Tlie  flower  bearing  stem  which  springs  from 

any  part  of  the  stem  or  branches,  as  apple,  cucumber,  &,c. 

5.  Petiole.     The  foot-stalk  of  the  leaf. 

6.  Frond.     Applied   entirely  to  cryptogamous  plants.     It  in- 

cludes the  herbaceous,  leathery,  crustaceous,  or  gelatinous 
substance,  from  which  the  fruit  is  produced. 

7.  Stijie.     The  stem  of  a  fern,  of  a  fungus,  of  compound  egret, 

and  of  a  pericarp  when  elevated  from  the  receptacle;  as 
of  maiden-hair,  of  a  mushroom,  ol  a  dandelion,  and  of 
spurge  caper. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  129 

Leaves  are  evergreen  or  deciduous. 

FORMS  OF  SIMPLE  LEAVES. 

1.  Orbiatlar.     Nearly  circular,  as  the  leaves  of  red  clover,  of 

cabbage,  &c. 

2.  Ovate.     Resembling  the  longitudinal  section  of  an  egg,  the 

base  being  broader  than  the  extremity.     One  of  the  most 
common  forms  of  leaves. 

3.  Oval.     Differing  from  ovate,  in  having  both  ends  equal  in 

breadth. 

4.  Oblong.     The  length  more  than  twice  the  breadth,  and  the 

sides  somewhat  parallel. 

5.  Obovate.     Ovate  with  the  narrowest  end  towards  the  stem, 

as  those  of  red  clover. 

6.  Cordate.     Heart-shaped,  the  hind  lobes  being  rounded,  as 

lilac. 

7.  Obcordate.     Cordate,  with  the  apex  or  narrowest  end  to- 

wards the  stem,  as  of  wild  indigo. 

8.  Kidney -for  in.     Hollowed  in  at  the  base,  with  rounded  lobes 

and  rounded  ends,  as  mallows. 

9.  Lanceolate.     In  the  form  of  the  ancient  lance,  tapering  from 

near  the  base  to  the  apex,  and  of  some  length,  as  the  leaves 
of  most  of  the  willows,  of  ribwort,  &,c. 

10.  Linear.     Continningof  the  same  width  through  nearly  the 

whole  length ;  usually  pointed  at  one  or  both  ends,  as  most 
grasses. 

11.  Awl-form.     Linear  at  the  base,  and  becoming  more  or  less 

curved  at  the  point. 

12.  Acutninate.  Any  kind  of  leaf  terminating  more  or  less 
suddenly  in  a  point  turned  towards  one  edge  of  the  leaf. 

13.  Arrow-form.     Shaped  like  an  arrow-head  ;    diftering  from 

cordate  in  having  the  hind  lobes  more  or  less  acute. 

14.  Halbert-form.  Hastate.  Shaped  like  an  halbert,  as  field 
sorrel,  creeping  snapdragon. 

15.  Guitar-form.  Oblong,  broadish  near  the  base,  and  con- 
tracted at  the  sides. 

16.  Lobed.     Deeply  parted,  and  the  divisions  large,  with  round- 

ed sides  or  ends,  as  the  white  oak. 

17.  Palmate.     Resembling  the  hand  with  the  fingers  spread, 

as  horse-chesnut. 

18.  Pedate.     Resembling  a  bird's  foot. 

19.  Sinuate.  Having  the  margin  hollowed  with  deep  sinuses 
or  bays,  as  the  white  oak. 

20.  Pinnatifid.     Divided  transversely  by  deep  incisions,  not 

extending  to  the  midrib. 

21.  Lyrate.  Pinnatifid,  with  the  largest  division  at  the  apex, 
and  diminishing  from  thence  to  the  base,  as  hedge-mus- 
tard. 


130  THE    THoMSOxMAN. 

22.  Runcinate.  Pinnatifid.  with  the  divisions  pointing  back- 
wards, as  dandelion. 

EDGES  OF  LEAVES. 

23.  Serrate.     Having  sharp   notches,  resembling'  saw  teeth, 

along  the  margin,  and  pointing  towards  the  apex,  as  those 
of  clierry  trees,  roses,  <fcc. 

24.  Toothed.  Having  projections  from  the  margin  of  its  own 
substance,  which  are  neither  serratures  nor  crenatures.  as 
those  of  blue-bottle. 

25.  Crenate.  Having  uniform  notches  on  the  margin  of  the 
leaf,  which  incline  towards  the  apex,  or  the  base,  or  nei- 
ther, as  gill-overground. 

ENDS  OF  LEAVES. 

26.  Emarginate.     Notched  at  the  termination  of  the  midrib. 

27.  Retuse.     Emarginate  with  a  shallow  sinus. 

28.  Obtuse.     Having  the  apex  of  the  leaf  more  or  less  rounded. 

29.  Acute.     Terminating  in  an  angle  ;  that  is,  not  rounded. 

SURFACES  OF  LEAVES. 

1.  Hairy.     Having  distinct  straight  hairs. 

2.  Downy.     Covered  with  fine  cotton-like  down. 

3.  Silky.     Covered  with  soft  close-pressed  hairs. 

4.  Bristly.     Set  with  stiff  hairs. 

5.  Ciliate.     Edged  with  parallel  hairs  or  bristles,  resembling 

eye-lashes. 

6.  Nerved.    Furnished  with  midrib-like  fibres,  running  from 

the  base  to  the  apex. 

7.  Veined.     Having  tendinous  fibres  variously  branched. 

POSITIONS  OF  LEAVES. 

1.  Decurrent.     When  two  edjies  of  the  leaf  extend  along  the 

stem  below  the  place  of  insertion. 

2.  Clasping.     Sessile  with  the  base  more  or  less- heart-form,  so 

as  entirely  or  in  part  to  surround  the  stem. 

3.  Sheathing.     With  the  leaf  prolonged  down  the  stem,  so  as 

to  cover  it,  in  the  manner  of  the  grasses. 

4.  Perfoliate.     Having  the  stem  passinof  through  the  leaf. 

5.  Connate.     Leaves  opposite,  with  their  bases  united. 

6.  Peltate.     With  the  foot  stalk  attached  to  the  lower  side  of 

the  leaf,  so  as  to  resemble  a  shield. 

7.  Opposite.     Standing  at  the  same  height,  with  base  against 

base. 

8.  Whorled.    Surrounding  the  stem  in  horizontal  rings,  or 

rows. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  131 

9.  Imbricate.     Lying-  over  each  other,  like  shingles  on  a  roof, 

so  as  to  "  break  joints." 

10.  Fascicled.     Growing  in  bunches  from  the  same  point, 

11.  Radical.     Proceeding  immediately  from  the  root. 

COMPOUND  LEAVES. 

1.  Ternate.     Having  three  leafets  proceeding  from  the  end  of 

one  petiole. 

2.  BUernate.     Twice  ternate;  when  the  petiole  is  ternate,  and 

each  division  bears  three  leafets. 

3.  Triternate.     Three  times  ternate. 

4.  Pinnate.     With  distinct  leafets  arranged  on  opposite  sides 

of  the  same  petiole,  as  locust. 
6.  Bipinnate.     Twice  pinnate. 

6.  Tripinnate.     Thrice  pinnate. 

7.  Interruptedly -pinnate.     Having  smaller   leafets   dispersed 

among  the  larger,  as  potatoe. 

APPENDAGES. 

1.  Stipule.     A  leafet  or  scale  at  or  near  the  base  of  a  petiole. 

2.  Bract.     A  leaf  amons;  or  near  the  flowers,  different  from  the 

other  leaves  of  the  plant. 

3.  Thorn.     A  sharp  process  from  the  woody  part  of  a  plant. 

4.  Prickle.     A  sharp  process  from  the  bark,  as  those  on  rasp- 

berry bushes,  &c. 

5.  Sting.     Hair-like  processes,  mostly  from  the  leaves,  as  net- 

tles. 

6.  Gland.     A  roundish,  generally  minute,  appendage  to  differ- 

ent parts  of  plants. 

7.  Tendril.    The  filiform  appendage  by  which  cHmbing  plants 

support  themselves  on  other  bodies. 

NUMERALS. 

The  Latin  and  Greek  numerals  are  so  frequently  compound- 
ed with  other  words  by  botanical  writers,  that  an  English  stu- 
dent ought  to  commit  them  to  memory,  as  here  laid  down. 


LATIN. 

NOS. 

GREEK. 

Unus, 

I 

Monos, 

(single) 

Bis,         (twice) 

2 

Dis, 

(twice) 

Tres, 

3 

Treis, 

(thrice) 

Quatuor, 

4 

Tettares, 

Q,uinque, 

5 

Pente, 

Sex, 

6 

Ex,  (pronounced  hex) 

Septem, 

7 

Epta,  (pron.  hepla) 

Octo, 

8 

Octo, 

Novem, 

9 

Ennea, 

132  THE    THOMSOJ^IAN 


LATIN. 

NOS. 

GREEK. 

Decern, 

10 

Deka, 

Undecem, 

11 

Endeka, 

Diiodecem, 

12 

Dodeka, 

Tredecem, 

13 

Decatreis, 

Q,uatuordecim, 

14 

Dekatettares, 

Q,Liindecim, 

15 

Dekapente, 

Sexdecim, 

16 

Dekaex, 

Septendecim, 

17 

Dekaepta, 

Octodecim, 

18 

Decaocto, 

Novendecim, 

19 

Decaennea, 

Vio^inti, 

20 

Eikosi, 

Miiltus, 

many. 

Pol  us. 

LINN^AN  SYSTEM  OF  VEGETABLES.. 

All  vegetables  are  divided  into  twenty-two*  classes.  These 
classes  are  divided  into  orders.  Orders  are  divided  into  geyi- 
era.  Genera  are  divided  into  species.  Species  are  frequent- 
ly chauired  into  varieties.  Varieties,  however,  are  more  pro- 
perly within  the  province  of  the  gardener  than  of  the  botanist ; 
at  least  the  method  of  procuring  varieties. 

When  a  botanist  finds  a  plant  which  he  never  saw  before, 
and  wishes  to  know  its  name  and  uses,  he  proceeds  as  follows: 

1.  He  compares  the  stamens  of  the  unknown  flower  with  the 
description  of  each  class,  until  he  finds  the  class  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

2.  He  then  goes  to  the  orders  of  that  class  and  finds  its  order 
in  the  same  way. 

3.  If  the  order  in  which  he  finds  his  plant  is  subdivided  into 
sections,  he  reads  the  characters  of  the  sections  also. 

4.  Next  he  goes  to  the  genera  of  that  order  or  section,  and 
reads  their  descriptions,  until  he  finds  the  genus  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

5.  At  last,  he  looks  over  the  species  of  that  geiius,  until  he 
finds  the  exact  description  of  his  plant. 

6.  If  he  is  desirous  to  compare  the  plant  with  its  natural  as- 
sociates, and  to  ascertain  its  general  properties,  he  refers  it  to 
the  natural  orders  of  Linnaeus,  by  the  first  number  next  to  the 
generic  name  ;  or  to  that  of  Jussieu,  by  the  second  number. 

LINNyEAN  CLASSIFICATION. 

PlanCs  are  classified  upon  two  distinct  plans — the  Artificial 
and  Natural.     The  object  of  the  Artificial  system  is  merely  to 

*  Linnaeus  divided  them  into  24  classes.  But  farther  discoveries,  since  his 
death,  have  proved  the  classes  Polyadelphia  and  Polygamia  to  be  too  uncer- 
tain and  variable  to  be  any  longer  retained.  Persoon,  therefore,  and  other 
eminent  botanists  have  rejected  them. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  133 

furnish  a  method  for  ascertaining  the  name  of  a  plant.  The 
object  of  the  Natural  system  is  to  bring  together  into  small 
groups,  plants  which  resemble  each  other  in  their  botanical  af- 
finities,  sensible  qualities,  and  medicinal  properties.  The  Arti- 
ficial system  has  been  very  aptly  compared  to  the  dictionary, 
and  the  Natural  to  the  orrammar  of  a  languacre. 

Artificial  Classes. 

The  Linnsean  Artificial  Classes  are  founded  upon  thu  four 
lollowing  circumstances  of  the  stamens — ?in??iber,  position^  re- 
lative length,  and  connexion.  The  first  eleven  classes  are  dis- 
tinguished by  the  number  of  stamens — the  twelfth  and  ihirteeth 
by  number  and  position — the  fourteenth  and  fifteejiih  by  num- 
ber and  relative  length — the  sixteenth,  seventeenth  and  eigh- 
teenth by  connexion — the  nineteenth,  twentieth  and  ttoc/iti/- 
first  by  position.  IMie  last,  ov  twenty-second  class,  being  a  na- 
tural one,  is  not  distinguished  by  any  circumstance  of  the  sta- 
mens. 

The  first  thirteen  classes  are  named  by  prefixing  Greek  nu- 
merals expressive  of  the  number  of  stamens  to  andria,  which  is 
a  Greek  derivative,  used  metaphorically  for  stamens. 

1.  Monandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers,  with  but  one  stamen  to  each — as  the  blite  and  sam- 
phire.    It  is  a  very  small  class. 

2.  Diandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers, with  two  stamens  to  each — as  hedge-hyssop  and  lilac.  Part 
of  this  class  of  plants  bears  naked  seeds,  and  forms  a  natural 
union  with  those  of  the  first  order  of  the  fourteenth  class,  as 
sage,  rosemary,  mountain  mint. 

3.  Triandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers, with  three  stamens  to  each — as  the  iris  and  oats.  Most  of 
the  grass-like,  or  culmiferous  plants,  are  included  in  this  class. 
The  rough  coarse  grasses,  as  bog-rush  and  cotton  grass,  which 
have  closed  sheaths  or  no  sheaths  to  the  leaves,  have  but  one 
style  to  the  pistil :  but  the  finer  grasses,  as  timothy  grass  and 
blue  grass,  which  have  open  sheaths  to  the  leaves,  have  two 
styles. 

4.  Tetrandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers, with  four  stamens  to  each — as  plantain  and  dog-wood. 
This  class  is  wholly  artificial,  consequently  the  plants  included 
in  it  are  easily  found  out. 

5.  Peniandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers with  five  stamens  to  each — as  comfrey,  mullein,  tobacco, 
potatoe,  ginseng,  parsnip,  elder  and  flax.  This  is  a  very  exten- 
tensive  class.  It  includes  a  natural  assemblage  of  rough  leaved 
plants,  as  the  borage;  of  nauseous  narcotics,  as  tobacco  and 
henbane;  of  umbelliferous  narcotics  and  stomachics,  as  poison 


134  THE    THOMSONIAN 

hemlock,  water  parsnip  and  fennel;  also  many  plants  which 
orently  disagree  in  botanical  affinities.  The  rough  leaved  and 
umbelliferous  plants  of  this  class  resemble  each  other  so  nearly, 
that  students  find  much  difficulty  in  distinguishing  the  genera. 

6.  Hexandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers with  six  stamens  to  each — as  the  lily,  tulip,  dock,  and  water 
plantain. 

7.  Hepta7idria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  seven  stamens  to  each — as  the  chick  wintergreen 
and  horse  chesnut.  This  is  a  very  small  class,  and  the  num- 
ber of  stamens  variable  in  most  flowers  found  in  it. 

8.  Octandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers with  eight  stamens  to  each — as  the  marsh  cranberry,  nas- 
turtion  and  buckwheat. 

9.  Enneandria.  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  nine  stamens  to  each — as  the  sassafras  and  rhu- 
barb. It  is  a  very  small  class,  and  the  number  of  stamens  very 
variable  in  all  the  flowers  found  in  it. 

10.  Decandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers with  ten  stamens  to  each — as  the  whortleberry,  pink,  coc- 
kle, and  poke-weed.  Some  flowers  in  this  class  have  but  half 
the  number  of  stamens  required,  in  part  of  the  species  of  a  ge- 
nus. 

11.  Dodecandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers,  generally  with  twelve  stamens  to  each — as  the  wild 
ginger  or  white  snake-root,  and  purslane.  If  the  number  of 
stamens  is  more  than  twelve,  provided  it  does  not  exceed  nine- 
teen, still  the  plant  belongs  to  this  class,  as  the  agrimony,  mig- 
nanette  and  house-leek.  This  class  has  been  abolished  by 
some  botanists,  and  the  plants  included  in  it  distributed  among 
other  classes. 

12.  Icosaiidria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  twenty  stamens  to  each,  growing  on  the  calyx — 
as  the  peach,  apple,  and  thorn.  If  the  number  of  stamens  is 
more  than  twenty,  provided  they  are  placed  on  the  calyx,  still 
the  plant  belongs  to  this  class,  as  the  strawberry  and  the  rose. 
Some  flowers  in  this  class  have  but  half  the  number  of  stamens 
required,  as  some  species  of  thorn,  &c. 

13.  Polyandria.,  uicludes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect  flow- 
ers, with  stamens  more  numerous  than  those  of  any  other  class, 
growing  on  the  receptacle — as  the  pond  lily,  and  common  St. 
John's  wort.  If  the  number  of  stamens  does  not  exceed  twen- 
ty, provided  they  are  not  placed  on  the  calyx,  still  the  plant  be- 
longs to  this  class.  This  is  an  extensive  class,  and  the  number 
of  stamens  is  more  variable  in  this  than  in  all  the  other  classes. 
When  several  flowers  on  the  same  plant  have  a  variable  num- 
ber of  stamens  placed  on  the  receptacle,  we  may  generally  pre- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  135 

sume  that  the  plant  belongs  to  this  class,  even  if  none  are  found 
with  so  many  as  twenty  stamens — as  the  American  cowslip. 

The  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  classes  are  named  by  prefixing 
the  Greek  numerals  expressive  of  the  number  of  long  stamens, 
to  dynamia,  winch  is  a  Greek  derivitive  signifying  power,  im- 
portnig  that  the  longest  stamens  are  most  powerful. 

14.  Didynamia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  four  stamens  to  each,  two  of  which  are  longest — 
as  savory,  scull-cap,  snap-dragon.  This  class  embraces  plants 
of  two  very  natural  assemblages.  The  first  order  contains 
plants  with  naked  seeds,  none  of  which  are  poisonous ;  the  se- 
cond order  contains  plants  with  seeds  in  capsules,  all  of  which 
are  said  to  be  poisonous.  Most  flowers  of  both  orders  have  la- 
biate corols. 

15.  Tetr adynamia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  six  stamens  to  each,  four  of  which  are  longest — as 
mustard,  cabbage  and  radish.  This  class  embraces  a  very  na- 
tural family  of  plants,  bearing  cruciform  flowers. 

The  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  classes  are  named  by  prefix- 
ing Greek  numerals,  expressive  of  the  number  of  parcels  into 
which  the  stamens  are  united  by  their  filaments,  to  the  word 
adel/j/iia,  which  is  a  Greek  derivative  used  to  signify  brother- 
hood. 

16.  Mono  del  phia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  whose  stamens  are  united  laterally  by  their  filaments  in 
one  group  or  set — as  the  hollyhock  and  mallows.  But  if  the 
flowers  are  papilionaceous,  they  belong  to  the  next  class,  even 
if  the  stamens  are  so  united,  as  the  lupine.  Some  species  of 
genera  which  belong  to  this  class  have  the  stamens  broad  and 
membranous  at  the  base,  but  not  attached  at  all,  as  some  spe- 
cies of  geranium.  They  generally  recede  from  the  base  of  the 
petals,  by  approaching  the  pistil,  presenting  a  columnar  form. 

17.  Diadclphia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  whose  stamens  are  united  laterally  by  their  filaments  in 
two  wroups  or  sets — as  the  pea,  bean,  and  locust  tree.  In  most 
cases  nine  stamens  are  united  in  one  set,  and  one  stamen  stands 
alone.  In  some  flowers  the  stamens  are  all  united  in  one  set, 
which  is  the  proper  character  of  the  preceding  class;  though  if 
the  coral  is  papilionaceous  it  belongs  here.  But  if  the  stamens 
are  not  united  at  all,  the  plant  does  not  belong  here,  even  if  the 
coral  is  pa|)ilionaceous ;  as  the  cassia  and  wild  indigo  belong 
to  the  tenth  class.  Genera  of  the  tenth  order  in  this  class  re- 
semble each  other  so  nearly,  that  students  find  considerable  dif- 
ficulty in  distinguishing  them. 


136  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  eighteenth  class  is  named  by  prefixing  syn,  (a  Greek 
derivative  from  sun,)  signifying  together,  to  genesia,  a  Greek 
derivative,  signifying  produced  or  growing  up.  The  name  is 
intended  to  signify  that  the  anthers  grow  up  together,  or  in  an 
united  state. 

18.  Si/ngiiiesia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect, 
staminate,  pistillate,  or  neutral  florets,  in  which  those  bearing 
anthers  have  them  united  laterally,  so  as  to  form  a  hollow  cy- 
linder. To  this  definition  should  be  added,  that  the  plants  of 
this  class  all  bear  compound  flowers,  as  the  sun-flower,  thistle, 
and  dandelion,  to  exclude  the  lobelia,  some  species  of  violet, 
the  jewel-weed,  &.c,  which  belong  to  the  fifth  class,  though  their 
anthers  are  united.  This  is  a  very  extensive  and  perfectly  na- 
tural class. 

The  nineteenth  class  is  named  by  prefixing  an  abbreviation 
o(  gt/iiia,  a  Greek  derivative  used  metaphorically  to  signify  the 
pistil,  to  andria,  as  the  stamen  and  pistil  are  united  in  this 
class. 

19.  Gynandria,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  perfect 
flowers  with  the  stamens  standing  on  the  pistil — as  ladies-slip- 
per, and  ochris.  To  this  definition  should  be  added,  that  the 
stamens  are  inserted  at  a  distance  from  the  place  where  the  ca- 
lyx and  corol  are  inserted.  For  the  stamens  are  inserted  on 
the  germ  of  the  pistil  in  all  plants  of  the  class  syngenesia,  &c. 
but  they  are  inserted  in  connexion  with  the  corol. 

The  twentieth  and  twenty-first  classes  are  named  by  prefix- 
in":  Greek  numerals  expressive  of  the  number  of  plants  occu- 
pied by  the  stamens  and  pistils  in  order  to  complete  a  species, 
to  cecia,  a  Greek  derivative  from  oikos,  a  house.  The  name  is 
intended  to  signify  that  the  stamens  and  pistils  inhabit  the  same 
or  different  tenements. 

20.  Monoecia,  includes  those  plants  which  bear  imperfect 
flowers  with  the  staminate  and  pistillate  flowers  on  the  same 
plant — as  the  oak,  chesnut,  and  Indian  corn. 

21.  Dioecia,  includes  tho.se  plants  which  bear  imperfect  flow- 
ers, with  the  staminate  and  pistillate  flowers  on  separate  plants 
. — as  the  hemp,  hop,  willow,  and  poplar. 

Most  plants  of  these  two  last  classes  are  united  in  one  class 
by  Pursh,  called  Diclinia. 

The  twenty-second  class  is  named  by  prefixing  Crypto,  a 
Greek  derivative  signifying  concealed,  \o  gamio,  a  Greek  deri- 
vative used  metaphorically  for  the  strewing  of  pollen  from  the 
anthers  upon  the  stigmas  of  pistils.    It  is  intended  to  signify, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  137 

that  the  operation  of  strewing  the  fertihzing  pollen  upon  stig- 
mas, so  manifest  in  lilies,  poplars,  Indian  corn,  &.C.,  is  con- 
cealed in  plants  of  this  class  ;  though  it  is  probable  that  such 
operations  are  as  regularly  performed  in  crytoganions  as  in 
phenogamous  plants. 

22.  Cnjpto^amia^  includes  those  plants  whose  stamens  are 
not  manifest,  even  under  the  lens.  They  are  known  by  habit, 
or  natural  affinities  ;  as  ferns,  mosses,  liver-worts,  sea-weeds, 
lichens,  and  fungi. 

ARTIFICIAL  ORDERS. 

Each  class  is  subdivided  into  two  or  more  orders.  These 
subdivisions  are  founded  upon  the  number  of  styles  (or  stigmas 
when  style"  are  wanting — the  covering  or  nakedness  of  seeds — 
the  relative  lengths  of  pods — the  comparison  between  disk  and 
ray  florets  of  compound  flowers — and  the  characters  of  pre- 
ceding chisses.  The  orders  of  the  class  cryptogainia  are  dis- 
tinguished by  natural  family  characters. 

The  orders  of  the  first  thirteen  classes  are  distinjruished  by 
the  number  of  styles,  and  named  by  prefixing  Greek  numerals 
expressive  of  the  number  of  styles,  to  gr/nia,  a  Greek  deriva- 
tive used  metaphorically  for  style  or  stigma.  The  styles  are 
numbered  at  their  origin  on  the  germ.  Their  subdivisions 
above  the  germ  are  not  taken  into  view  in  determining  the 
number  of  the  order.  Sometimes  the  style  is  wanting,  leav- 
ing the  stigma  to  sit  down  upon  the  germ;  in  such  cases  the 
stigmas  are  numbered  in  deterniining  the  number  of  the  order. 

1.  Monogynla^  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thir- 
teen classes,  which  bear  flowers  with  but  one  style,  or  one  ses-' 
sile  stigma  to  each — as  the  samphire  in  the  first  class,  the  lilac 
in  the  second,  the  iris  in  the  third,  the  plantain  in  the  fourth, 
the  mullein  in  the  fifth,  the  lily  in  the  sixth,  the  horse-chesnut 
in  the  seventh,  the  scabish  in  the  eighth,  the  sassafras  in  the 
ninth,  the  prince's  pine  in  the  tenth,  the  purslane  in  the  elev- 
enth, the  cherry  in  the  twelfth,  and  the  poppy  in  the  thirteenth. 

2.  Digynia,  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thirteen 
classes,  which  bear  flowers  with  two  styles,  or  two  sessile  stio-- 
mas  to  each — as  timothy  grass  in  the  third  class,  and  the  pink 
in  the  tenth  class. 

3.  Trigynia.  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thirteen 
classes,  which  bear  flowers  v.Mth  three  styles,  or  three  sessile 
stigmas  to  each — as  the  elder  in  the  fifth  class,  and  the  buck- 
wheat in  the  eighth  class. 

4.  Tetragi/nia,  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thir- 
teen classes,  which  bear  flowers  with  four  styles  or  four  sessile 

10 


138  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

Stigmas — as  the  holly  in  the  fourth  class,  and  the  lizard's  tail  in 
the  seventh  class. 

5.  Pentagynia,  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thir- 
teen classes,  which  bear  flowers  with  five  styles  or  five  sessile 
stigmas  to  each — as  spikenard  in  the  fifth  class,  and  cockle  in 
the  tenth  class. 

6.  Hexagynia.  We  have  no  plant  of  this  order  in  our  dis- 
trict. 

7.  Heptagynia.  We  have  no  plant  of  this  order  in  our  dis- 
trict. 

8.  Octogynia.  We  have  no  plant  of  this  order  in  our  dis- 
trict. 

9.  Enneagynia.  No  plant  has  ever  been  found  with  nine 
styles. 

10.  Decagynia.  We  have  no  plant  of  this  order  in  our  dis- 
trict. 

13.  Polyginia,  includes  those  plants  in  any  of  the  first  thir- 
teen classes,  which  bear  flowers  with  any  number  of  styles  or 
sessile  stigmas  above  ten — as  the  house-leek  in  the  eleventh 
class,  the  rose  in  the  twelfth,  and  the  crow-foot  in  the  thir- 
teenth. 

The  orders  of  the  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  classes  are  but  two 
in  each.  Those  in  the  fourteenth  are  named  by  prefixing 
gynmo,  a  Greek  derivative  signifying  naked,  or  avgio,  a  Greek 
derivative  signifying  bag  or  sack,  to  spermia.  a  derivative  sig- 
nifying seed.  In  the  fifteenth  they  are  named  by  using  a  deri- 
vative from  the  Latin  siliqna,  a  pod ;  and  from  the  diminutive 
of  the  same,  silicula. 

1.  Gymnospermia,  includes  those  plants  of  the  fourteenth 
class  which  bear  seeds  without  any  pericarp.  They  generally 
lie  naked  in  the  bottom  of  the  calyx — as  of  motherwort  and 
hyssop. 

2.  Angiospermia,  includes  those  plants  of  the  fourteenth 
class  which  bear  seeds  in  a  capsule — as  the  fox-glove  and  snap- 
dragon. 

i.  Silicidosa,  includes  those  plants  of  the  fifteenth  class 
which  bear  silique  pods,  with  the  length  and  breadth  nearly 
equal — as  the  shepherd's  purse. 

2.  Slliqiwsa,  includes  those  plants  of  the  fifteenth  class 
which  bear  silique  pods,  with  the  length  considerably  exceed- 
ing the  breadth,  always  more  than  double — as  the  mustard. 

The  orders  of  the  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  nineteenth,  twenti- 
eth and  twenty-first  classes,  are  distinguished  by  the  characters 
of  preceding  classes,  and  assume  the  same  names.  Therefore, 
when  a  plant  is  found  in  either  of  these  five  classes,  we  inquire 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  139 

which  nearest  preceding  class  it  would  fall  into,  if  its  particular 
classic  character  were  wanting.  To  answer  this  inquiry  gives 
the  order. 

1.  Monandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  but  one  stamen  to  each — as  or- 
chis in  the  19th  class,  and  sea  eel-grass  in  the  20th. 

2.  Diandria^  when  used  for  an  order  of  the  16th,  17th,  19th, 
20th  or  2lst  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said  classes 
which  bear  flowers  with  two  stamens  to  each — as  ladies'-slipper 
in  class  19,  duck-meat  in  class  20,  and  willow  in  class  21. 

3.  Triandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  inch.ides  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  three  stamens  to  each — as  blue- 
eyed  grass  in  class  16,  Indian  corn  in  class  20,  and  the  fig  in 
class  21. 

4.  Tetra?id)'ia,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  four  stamens  to  each — as  the 
nettle  in  the  20th  class,  and  the  bayberry  in  the  21st  class. 

5.  Pentandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  five  stamens  to  each — as  the 
passion-flower  in  the  16th  class,  the  hog- weed  in  the  20th,  and 
the  hemp  in  the  21st. 

6.  Hexandria^  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  six  stamens  to  each — as  .water- 
oats  in  the  20th  class,  and  the  green-briar  in  the  21st. 

7.  Heptandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  seven  stamens  to  each — as  the 
stork-geranium  in  class  16. 

8.  Octandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  2lst  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  eight  stamens  to  each — as  the 
seneca  snake-root  in  class  17,  and  poplar  in  class  21. 

10.  Decandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  2lst  class,  includes  tliosc  plants  in  eitlier  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  ten  stamens  to  each — as  the 
geranium  in  class  16,  and  the  pea  in  class  17, 

13.  Polyandria,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  16th,  17th, 
19th,  20th  or  21st  class,  includes  those  plants  in  either  of  said 
classes  which  bear  flowers  with  more  than  ten  stamens  to  each 
— as  the  holly-hock  m  class  16,  the  butternut  in  class  20,  and 
the  moon-seed  in  class  21. 

16.  Monadelphia,  when  used  for  an  order  in  the  20th  or 


140  THE  THOMSOIVIAN 

21st  class,  (it  is  never  used  in  the  16th,  17th,  or  I9th,)  includes 
those  plants  in  either  ot  said  classes  which  bear  flowers  with 
the  stamens  united  by  their  filaments  in  one  set — as  the  cucum- 
ber in  class  20,  and  the  red  cedar  in  class  21. 

The  four  first  orders  of  class  eighteen  are  distinguished  by 
comparing  the  disk  and  ray  florets.  The  first,  second  and 
third  orders  have  perfect  florets  in  the  disk,  the  fourth  has  sta- 
minate  florets  only  in  the  disk.  The  first  has  perfect  florets  in 
the  ray,  the  second  and  fourth  have  pistillate,  and  the  third  has 
neutral.  The  fifth  order  has  partial  perianth  calyxes  to  all  the 
florets;  whereas  none  of  the  other  orders  have  any  but  the  ge- 
neral calyx — the  egret,  when  present,  being  a  substitute  for  the 
perianth.  The  orders  of  this  class  are  named  by  joining  the 
word  poli/gamia  to  an  appropriate  adjective.  Polygamia  is  a 
Greek  derivative,  used  metaphorically  to  signify  numerous  or- 
gans for  carrying  on  the  process  of  strewing  tlie  fertilizing  pol- 
len upon  stigmas.  The  adjective  (nqualis  is  used  to  signify, 
that  the  organs  for  furnishing  pollen  are  equalized,  or  duly  pro- 
portioned to  the  stigmas  to  be  fertilized ;  superflua,  that  the 
pistillate  florets  in  the  margin  or  ray  are  superfluous,  each  fer- 
tile floret  of  the  disk  having  stamens  and  pistils  in  due  propor- 
tion ;  frustranea^  that  the  ray  florets  are  empty  or  vain,  having 
no  stamens  or  pistils  ;  necessaria,  that  the  ray  florets  are  ne- 
cessary for  the  production  of  seed,  the  disk  florets  being  all  sta- 
minate  ;  segregata^  that  the  florets  are  disjoined,  or  separated 
from  each  other  by  partial  calyxes. 

1.  Polygamia  crqualis,  includes  those  plants  of  the  ISth 
class,  which  bear  flowers  with  perfect  florets  in  both  the  disk 
and  ray — as  the  dandelion,  thistle,  and  burdock. 

2.  Polygamia  svperjiua,  includes  those  plants  of  the  18th 
class,  which  bear  flowers  with  perfect  florets  in  the  disk,  and 
pistillate  florets  in  the  ray — as  ox-eyed  daisy  and  yarrow. 

3.  Polygamia  frustirmea,  includes  those  plants  of  the  ISth 
class,  which  bear  flowers  with  perfect  florets  in  the  disk,  and 
neutral  florets  in  the  ray — as  the  sunflower  and  hlue-bottle. 

4.  Polygamia  necessaria,  includes  those  plants  of  the  ISth 
class,  which  bear  flowers  with  staminate  florets  in  the  disk,  and 
pistillate  florets  in  the  ray — as  the  pot-marygold,  and  high-wa- 
ter shrub. 

5.  Polygamia  segregata,  includes  those  plants  of  the  18th 
class,  which  bear  flowers  with  a  perianth  to  each  floret — as  the 
globe-thistle,  and  elephant's  foot. 

The  orders  of  the  twenty-second  class  are  distinguished  by 
natural  family  characters  ;  this  class  embracing  six  natural  fa- 
milies. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  141 

1.  Filices,  includes  all  the  ferns.  These  plants  bear  fruit 
on  the  back  of  the  leaves,  or  some  part  of  the  leaves  seem  as  it 
were  metamorphosed  into  a  kind  of  fruit  bearing  spike — as  the 
brake,  and  maidenhair.  A  sub-order,  which  may  be  denomi- 
nated Apteres,  or  Peteroides,  includes  those  which  bear  fruit  in 
a  peculiar  appendasfe,  as  a  spike  or  protuberance  in  the  axils  or 
at  the  base  of  the  leaves — as  ground-pine,  scouring-rush,  and 
quill-wort. 

2.  31iisci,  includes  the  proper  mosses.  These  plants  bear, 
on  Icufy  stems  and  branches,  one-celled  capsules,  opening  at 
the  top,  where  they  are  crowned  by  a  peculiar  lid.  The  cap- 
sules do  not  open  by  valves,  and  are  generally  elevated  on 
stems  or  stipes,  as  hair-cap  moss. 

3.  HepaticcB,  includes  those  more  succulent  moss-like  plants 
which  are  called  liver-worts.  They  bear  four-valved  capsules, 
which  distinguishes  them  from  mosses — as  brook  liver-wort, 
and  platted  moss. 

4.  Als^cB,  includes  the  sea-weeds  and  frog-spittle.  These 
plants  bear  vesiculous  or  filamentous  fruit,  mostly  in  gelatinous 
fronds.  The  fruit  frequently  requires  a  high  magnifying  pow- 
er to  be  rendered  visible — as  common  sea-weed  and  river  green- 
hair. 

5.  Lichenes^  includes  the  proper  lichens.  These  plants 
appear  in  somewhat  circular  patches,  on  stones,  trees,  and  old 
fences,  also  in  fibres  suspended  from  branches,  (fcc.  They  are 
generally  pale  green,  yellow,  white,  or  black:  but  they  are 
found  of  all  colors.  They  bear  exceedingly  minute  fruit  in  re- 
ceptacles on  compact  or  gelatinous  fronds.  These  receptacles 
are  divided  into  twelve  kmds,  translated  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Smith  in- 
to clefts,  spangles,  puffs,  buttons,  tubercles,  hollows,  cellules, 
globules,  shields,  tarjrets,  orbs,  and  knobs.  All  of  these  terms 
are  separately  defined  in  the  Vocabulary. 

6.  Fungi,  includes  such  plants  as  the  mushroom,  the  touch- 
wood, mould,  blight,  (fcc.  They  are  destitute  of  herbage,  con- 
sisting: of  a  spongy,  P'llpY)  leathery,  or  woody  substance,  and 
bear  fruit  in  a  naked  dilated  membrane,  or  within  the  substance 
of  the  plant. 

Retnark.  For  a  more  full  account  of  these  orders,  the  reader 
is  referred  to  the  Natural  Orders  of  Jussieu. 

N.  B.  When  a  star  (*)  is  placed  before  generic  names  at  the 
end  of  an  order,  it  is  to  be  understood  that  though  some  species 
of  these  genera  fall  here  by  the  rules  of  the  artificial  system,  yet 
that  as  no  natural  genus  must  be  divided,  these  stragglers  must 
be  referred  back  to  their  natural  genera  for  descriptions.  They 
may  thus  be  referred  back  by  aid  of  the  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment of  generic  names,  where  the  species  are  described. 


142 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Note  2.  When  exercising  pupils  in  the  artificial  classes,  the 
instructor  should  direct  them  to  begin  by  comparing  the  sta- 
mens of  the  plant  under  examination  with  the  characters  of  the 
highest  numbered  class,  and  to  proceed  downwards  towards  the 
first  class.  Because  the  characters  of  the  lower  classes  are 
sometimes  included  in  the  higher. 


No  .of 
stamens. 


No.  and 
position. 

No.  and 
length. 


Connex- 
ion. 


Position. 


Natural. 


SYNOPSIS  OF  ARTIFICIAL  CLASSES. 

1.  Monandria,  1  stamen  in  the  flower, 

2.  Diaadria,  2  stamens. 

3.  Triandria,  3  stamens, 

4.  Tetrandria^  4  stamens. 

5.  Penta?idria,  5  stamens. 

6.  Hexandria,  6  stamens. 

7.  Heptandria,  7  stamens. 

8.  Octandria,  8  stamens. 

9.  Enneandria.  9  stamens. 

10.  Decandria,  10  stamens. 

11.  Dodeca7idria,  12  to  19  stamens, 

L2.  Icosandria,  about  20  or  more,  standing  on  the 
calyx. 

L3.  Polyandria^  always  20  or  more,  on  the  recep- 
tacle. 

L4.  Didi/namia,  4  stamens,  2  of  them  uniformly 
the  longest. 

L5.  Tetradynamia,  6  stamens,  4  of  them  uniform- 
ly the  longest. 

L6.  Monadelphia,  stamens  united  by  their  filaments 
in  one  set — anthers  generally  separate. 

17.  Diadeljj/iia,  stamens  united  by  their  filaments 

in  two  sets,  sometimes  in  one  set,  with  papi- 
lionaceous corols. 

18.  Si/ng-e7iesia,  stamens  5,  united  by  their  an- 

thers in  one  set,  flowers  compound. 

19.  Gynandria^  stamens  stand  on  the  germ,  style 

or  stigma,  separate  from  the  base  of  the  calyx 
and  corol. 

20.  Moncecia,  stamens  and  pistils  in  separate  flow- 

ers on  the  same  plant. 

21.  Dioecia,  stamens  and  pistils  on  separate  plants. 

22.  Cryptogamia,  stamens  and  pistils  so  obscure 

that  the  plants  can  only  be  classed  by  natural 
families. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


143 


SYNOPSIS  OF  ARTIFICIAL  ORDERS. 


CO 


GO 


ja 

t- 

rn 

9} 

^ 

< 

«£> 

o 

w 

^ri 

14 

iO 

1^ 

o 

w 

A 

x: 

rt 

r!< 

o 

TS 

CO 

c  o 


COO 


aj   oj   o   D 


^2.^     <U     O     <1>     3J 


CHh 


c^r^ 


HHhe^ 


-d     bio  bJD  bJD  be  bJD  bjp  be  b  jO 


be  be 


o 


o 


CL, 


K 


C    G 
O    O 


1  'B 


O   I 


n:3 


be 


!^   X   X   _ 

O    (D    O)    3 


.       .     ^.       .       .       .    O) 

E  S  be  C  C  S  J3 
oi  c  1^  q:i  c^  ID  o 
Ph  pL,  CO  Ph  Oh  Ph  "i 


1 
1 

d 

a;   XI 

0^ 

hH 

1 

^ 

't_i 

fl4 

•r  ■-  i^ 

^     S-c     Qj 


£-.5  «  ctf  § 


a, 


o 
bO 

a. 


c3 


ooococcoco  >,— 


G    G    C 
O    O 


Pm 


o 


Q 


144  THE    THOMSONIAN 

NATURAL  ORDERS. 

Plants  of  (he  same  natural  order  agree  in  habit,  and  mostly 
in  nipdicinal  properties.  When  they  differ  in  these  properties^ 
the  ditference  is  indicated  by  the  odor. 

The  natural  orders  of  Linnaeus  are  retained,  on  account  of 
the  books  in  use  which  refer  to  them.  Jussieu  has  improved 
upon  Linnaeus  o-reatly.  Medical  students  ouo;ht  to  arrange 
their  plants  according  to  Jussieu  in  the  herbarium. 

Students  should  be  told,  that  many  plants  may  possess  the 
qualities  of  the  orders  to  wfiich  they  belong,  though  in  a  very 
feeble  and  scarcely  perceptible  degree. 

NATURAL  ORDERS  OF  LINN.EUS. 

[Defnilions.) 

1.  Palmce.  Palms  and  their  relatives  ;  as  cocoanut,  frog's- 
bit.     Farinaceous  diet. 

2.  Piperita^.  Pepper  and  its  relatives.  In  crowded  spikes; 
as  Indian  turnip,  sweet-flag.      Tonics  and  stomachics. 

3.  Calamarice.  Reed-like  grasses  with  culms  without  joints ; 
as  cat-tail,  sedge.     Coarse  cattle  fodder. 

4.  Gramina.  The  proper  grasses  with  jointed  culms  ;  as 
wheat,  rye,  oats,  timothy-grass,  Indian  corn.  Farinaceous  diet 
and  cattle  fodder. 

5.  Tripetaloidecc.  Corol  three  petalled,  or  calyx  three  leav- 
ed ;  as  water  plantain,  rush-grass,  arrow-head.  Tonics,  and 
rough  cattle  fodder. 

6.  Ensatce.  Liliaceous  plants,  with  sword-form  leaves;  as 
iris,  blue  eyed  grass,  Virginian  spider-wort.  Antiscorbutics  and 
tonics. 

7.  OrchidecB.  With  fleshy  roots,  stamens  on  the  pistils,  pol- 
len glutinous,  flowers  of  singular  structure,  with  the  germ  in- 
ferioi  ;  as  ladies-slipper,  arethusa.  Farinaceous  diet,  and  sto- 
machics. 

8.  iScitaminecc.  Liliaceous  corols,  stems  herbaceous,  leaves 
broad,  gferm  blunt  angular ;  as  ginger,  turmeric.  Warming- 
sto77iachics. 

9.  Spathaceca.  Liliaceous  plants  with  spathes  ;  as  daffodil, 
onion,  snow-drop.     Secernant  stimulants."^ 

10.  Coronarice.  Liliaceous  plants  without  spathes;  as  lily, 
tulip,  star-grass.  The  nauseous  scented  and  bitter  are  anti- 
scorbutic and  cathartic  ;   the  others  emollient. 

11.  Snrnientaceoi.  Liliaceous  corols  with  very  weak  stems  ; 
as  smilax,  asparagus,  bell-wort.  Tonics  and  secernant  stimu- 
lants. 

12.  OleracecB,  or  Holeracece.    Having  flowers  destitute  of 

*  Which  promote  the  secretion  of  perspirable  matter,  &c. 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A.  145 

beauty,  at  least  of  gay  coloring  ;  as  beet,  blight,  pig- weed,  dock, 
pepperage.  If  nauseous,  cathartic;  others,  mild  stimulants 
and  nutrieniics* 

13.  Succidentoi.  Plants  with  very  thick  succulent  leaves ; 
as  prickly-pear,  house-leek,  purslain.  Antiscorbutic  and  eiJiol- 
lieiit. 

14.  Gruinnles.  Corols  with  five  petals,  capsules  beaked; 
as  flax,  wood-sorrel,  crane-bill.      Toiiics  tind  refrigerants. 

15.  Innndatcc.  Growing  under  water,  and  having  flow- 
ers destitute  of  beauty  ;  as  hippnris,  pond-weed.    Astringents. 

IG.  Calt/ciflorm.  Plants  without  corols,  with  the  stamens 
on  the  calyx;  as  poet's  cassia,  seed  buckthorn.  Astringents 
and  refrigerants. 

17.  Calycanihemce.  Calyx  on  the  germ,  or  growing  to  it, 
flowers  beautiful ;  as  willow-herb,  Ludwigia,  (Enothera.  To- 
nics. 

18.  Bicornes.  Anthers  with  two  straight  horns  ;  as  whor- 
tleberry, spicy  and  bitter  wintergreen,  laurel.     Astringents. 

19.  Hesperides.  Sweet-scented,  leaves  evergreen  ;  as  myr- 
tle, cloves,  mock-orange.     Astringent  and  stomachic. 

20.  Rotacecc.  Corals  wheel-form ;  as  St.  Johnswort.  To- 
nics. 

21.  Preci(n.  Plants  with  early  spring  flowers  of  an  elegant 
specious  appearance;  as  primrose.     Astringents. 

22.  Caryophyllece.  Plants  with  caryophyllous  corols  ;  as 
pink,  cockle.     Astringents  and  secern  ant  stimulants. 

23.  TrihilatcB.  Flowers  with  three  stiofmas,  capsules  in- 
flated and  winged,  and  generally  three  seeded,  with  distinct  hi- 
lums;  as  nasturtion,  horse-chesniit.      Tonics  and  nvtrientics. 

24.  Corydales.  Corols  spurred  or  anomalous;  as  fumitory, 
touch-me-not.     Narcotic  and  antiscorbutic. 

25.  PutaminecB.  Plants  which  bear  shell  fruit ;  as  caper- 
bush.     Detergent  and  antiscorbutic. 

26.  MidtisiliqncB.  Having  several  pod-form  capsules  to  each 
flower;  as  columbine,  larkspur,  rue,  American  cowslip.  Ca- 
thartic, narcotic  and  caustic. 

27.  RhceadecB.  Plants  with  caducous  calyxes,  and  capsules 
or  siliques  ;  as  poppy,  blood-root,  celandine.  Anodyne  and  an- 
tiscorbnfic. 

28.  Lnridce.  Corols  lurid,  mostly  monopetalous ;  flowers 
pentandrous  or  didynamous,  with  capsules;  as  tobacco,  thorn- 
apple,  niii^htshade,  foxglove.     Narcotic  and  atitiscorbi/.tic. 

29.  Campanacem,  Havins:  bell-form  corols,  or  those  whose 
general  aspect  is  somewhat  bell-form  ;    as  morning-glory,  bell- 


•  Nutrientics  of  Darwin,  which  serve  as  nutriment  merely,  without  produc- 
ing any  extroardinary  effects. 


146  THE  THOMSONIAN 

flower,  violet,  cardinal-flower.     Cathartics,  and  secernanf  sii- 
mulants. 

30.  Contort(B.  Gorols  twisted  or  contorted  ;  as  milk-weed, 
periwinkle,  clioke-dos^.     Cathartics  and  antiscorbutics. 

31.  Veprecidce.  Having  monophyllous  calyxes,  colored  like 
corols  ;  as  leather-wood,  thesium.     Antiscorbutic  wwd  emetic. 

32.  PapilionacecB..  Havino:  papilionaceons  flowers  ;  as  peas, 
beans,  locust-tree,  clover.     Emollient,  diuretic,  initrientic. 

33.  Lomentaceoi  Having  legumes  or  loments,  but  not  perfect 
papilionaceous  flowers  with  united  filaments  ;  as  cassia,  sensi- 
tive plant.     Emollient.,  astringent,  catharitc. 

34.  CucurbitacecB.  Fruit  pumpkin-like,  anthers  mostly  unit- 
ed ;  as  melons,  cucumbers,  passion  flower.  Cathartic  and  re- 
frig-erant. 

35.  jSenticosce.  Prickly  or  hairy,  with  polypetalous  corols, 
and  a  number  of  seeds  either  naked  or  slightly  covered  ;  as  rose, 
raspberry,  strawberry.     Astringent  and  refrigerant. 

36.  Pomacecc.  Having  many  stamens  on  the  calyx,  and 
drupaceous  or  pomaceous  fruit ;  as  pear,  currant,  peach,  cher- 
ry.    Refrigerants. 

37.  Columnifer(B.  Stamens  united  in  the  form  of  a  column; 
as  hollyhock,  mallows,  cotton.     Einollieni: 

38.  TricocccB,  Having  three-celled  capsules ;  as  castor-oil 
plant,  spurge,  box.     Cathartic. 

39.  Siliquosce.  Having  silique  pods  ;  as  cabbage,  mustard, 
shepherd's  purse.     Diuretic,  Antiscorbutic,  Nutrientic. 

40.  PersonwtCB.  Having  personate  corols  ;  as  snap-dragon, 
monkey-flower,     Deobstrnents  and  cathartics. 

41 .  AsperifolicB.  Corols  monopetalous,  with  five  stam.ens, 
seeds  five,  naked,  leaves  rough ;  as  comfrey,  stone-seed,  (li- 
thospermum.)     Astringents  txn^  deobstrnents. 

42.  Verticillata.  Having  labiate  flowers ;  as  sage,  thyme, 
catmint,  motherwort.     /Stomachics  and  astringents. 

43.  Dumosa..  Bushy  pithy  plants  with  small  flowers,  petals 
in  four  or  five  divisions  ;  as  sumach,  elder,  holly.  Tonic  and 
cathartic. 

44.  Sepiarioi.  Having  mostly  tubular  divided  corols  and  few 
stamens,  being  ornamental  shrubs;  as  lilac,  jasmine.  Astrengent. 

45.  UmbellatcB.  Flowers  in  umbels,  with  five-petal  led  co- 
rols, stamens  five,  styles  two,  and  two  naked  seeds ;  as  fennel, 
dill,  carrot,  poison  hemlock.     Stomachic  and  iinrcotic. 

40.  Hederacecc.  Corols  five-cleft,  stamens  five  to  ten,  fruit 
berry-like  on  a  compound  raceme ;  as  grape,  ginseng,  spike- 
nard.    Tonics  and  refrigerants. 

47.  Stellatce.  Corols  four-cleft,  stamens  four,  seeds  two,  na- 
ked, leaves  mostly  whorled ;  as  bed-straw,  dog-wood,  venus'- 
pride.     Tonics  and  deobstrnents. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  147 

48.  Aggre^atcB.  Having  ag-gre^ate  flowers;  as  button-bush, 
marsh  rosemary.      Tonics  and  secernant  stimulants. 

49.  CompositcB.  All  the  compound  flowers  ;  as  sun-flower, 
boneset,  tansey,  thisde.      Tonics  and  secernant  stimvlants. 

50.  Anientacea.  Bearing  pendant  aments ;  as  hazle,  oak, 
chesnut,  willow.     Astringents. 

51.  ConifercB.  Bearing  strobiles;  as  pine,  juniper,  cedar. 
Tonics  and  stomachics. 

52.  CoadmiatcB.  Several  berry-like  pericarps,  which  are  ad- 
nate  ;  tulip-tree,  magnolia.      Tonics. 

53.  (^cabridce.  Leaves  rough,  flowers  destitute  of  beauty ; 
as  nettle,  hemp,  hop,  elm.     Astringents. 

54.  Miscellanea;.  Plants  not  arranged  by  any  particular 
character  ;  as  pond-lily,  poke-weed,  amaranth.  Their  qualities 
are  various. 

55.  Filices.  All  ferns;  as  brakes,  maidenhair.  Secernant 
stimulants. 

56.  Musci.  All  mosses;  as  polytrichum.  Cathartics  and 
secernant  stimulants. 

57.  AlgecB.  All  hverworts,  lichens,  and  sea-weeds  ;  as  jun- 
germannia,  fucus,  usnea.      Tonics. 

58.  Fungi.  All  funguses;  as  mushroom,  toad-stool,  puflf- 
ball,  touch-wood,  mould.     Tonics  and  cathartics. 

VEGETABLE  SKELETON. 

The  preparations  of  leaves,  fruits,  roots,  &c.  called  ve2:etable 
skeletons,  are  made  in  this  manner.  Choose  for  this  purpose 
the  leaves  of  trees  or  plants,  which  are  somewhat  substantial 
and  tough,  and  have  woody  fibres,  such  as  the  leaves  of  orange, 
jesmine,  bay,  laurel,  cherry,  apricot,  peach,  plum,  apple,  pear, 
poplar,  oak,  and  the  like  ;  but  avoid  such  leaves  as  have  none 
of  the  woody  fibres,  which  are  to  be  separated  and  preserved  by 
this  method  ;  such  are  the  leaves  of  tlie  vine,  lime-tree,  and  the 
like.  The  leaves  are  to  be  gathered  in  the  months  of  June  or 
July,  and  such  to  be  chosen  as  are  sound  and  untouched  by 
caterpillars,  or  other  insects.  These  are  to  be  put  into  an  ear- 
then or  glass  vessel,  and  a  large  quantity  of  rain-water  to  be 
poured  over  them  ;  and  after  this  they  are  to  be  left  to  the  open 
air,  and  to  the  heat  of  the  sun,  without  covering  the  vessel. 
When  the  water  evaporates,  so  as  to  leave  the  leaves  dry,  more 
must  be  added  in  its  place  :  the  leaves  will  by  this  means  pu- 
trefy, but  they  require  a  different  time  for  this  ;  some  will  be 
finished  in  a  month,  and  others  will  require  two  months  or  lon- 
ger, according  to  the  hardness  of  the  parenchyma  of  them. 
When  they  have  been  in  a  state  of  putrefaction  some  time,  the 
two  membranes  will  begin  to  separate,  and  the  green  part  of  the 


148  THE  THOMSONIAN 

leaf  to  become  fluid  :  then  the  operation  of  clearing  is  to  be  per- 
formed. The  leaf  is  then  to  be  put  upon  a  flat  white  earthen 
plate,  and  covered  with  clear  water ;  and  being  gently  squeez- 
ed with  the  finger,  the  membranes  will  begin  to  open,  and  the 
green  substance  will  come  out  at  the  edoes  ;  the  membranes 
must  be  carefully  taken  off  with  a  finger,  and  great  caution  must 
be  used  in  separating  them  near  the  middle  rib.  When  once 
there  is  an  opening  towards  the  separation,  the  whole  mem- 
brane always  follows  easily  :  when  both  membranes  are  taken 
ofl",  the  skeleton  is  finished,  and  it  is  to  be  washed  clean  with, 
water,  and  then  preserved  between  the  leaves  of  a  book. 

The  fruits  are  divested  of  their  pulp,  and  made  into  skeletons 
in  a  different  manner.  Talce,  for  instance,  a  fine  large  pear 
that  is  soft,  and  not  strong  ;  let  it  be  nicely  pared  without  squeez- 
ing it,  and  without  hurting  either  the  crown  or  the  stalk  ;  then 
put  it  into  a  pot  of  rain-water,  cover  it,  set  it  over  the  fire,  and 
let  it  boil  gently  till  it  is  perfectly  srft,  then  take  it  out,  and  lay 
it  in  a  dish,  filled  with  cold  water ;  then  hold  it  by  the  stalk 
with  one  hand,  and  with  the  other  hand  rub  off"  as  much  of  the 
pulp  as  you  can  with  the  finofer  and  thumb,  beginning  at  the 
stalk,  and  rubbinc{  it  regularly  towards  the  crown.  The  fibres 
are  most  tender  toward  the  extremities,  and  therefore  to  be  treat- 
ed with  great  care  there.  When  the  pulp  is  thus  cleared  pret- 
ty well  off",  the  point  of  a  fine  penknife  may  be  of  use  to  pick 
away  the  pulp  stickinsf  to  the  core.  In  order  to  see  how  the 
operation  advances,  the  foul  water  must  be  thrown  away  from 
time  to  time,  and  clean  poured  on  in  its  place.  When  the  pulp 
is  in  this  manner  perfectly  separated,  the  clean  skeleton  is  to  be 
preserved  in  spirit  of  wine. 

Skeletons  of  roots  which  have  woody  fibres,  such  as  turnips, 
and  the  like,  must  be  made  by  boiling  the  root,  without  peeling 
it,  till  it  be  soft,  then  the  pulp  may  be  squeezed  away  by  the  fin- 
gers in  the  same  manner,  in  a  dish  of  water.  Many  kinds  of 
roots  are  thus  made  into  elegant  skeletons,  and  the  same  meth- 
od succeeds  with  the  barks  of  several  kinds  of  trees  ;  which, 
when  thus  treated,  afford  extremely  elegant  views  of  their  con- 
stitute fibres. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  149 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  AVOIDING  POISONS. 

Plants  not  Poisonous. 

1.  Plants  with  vl  glume  calyx,  never  poisonous.  As  wheat, 
Indian  corn,  foxtail  grass,  sedge  grass,  oats.^ — Linnaeus. 

2.  Plants  whose  stamens  .stand  on  the  calyx,  never  poison- 
ous.    As  currant,  apple,  peach,  strav/berry,  ihorn.—  Smith. 

3.  Plants  with  cruciform  flowers,  rarely  if  ever  poisonous. 
As  mustard,  cabbage,  water-cress,  turnip. — Smith. 

4.  Plants  with  iJapilionaceous  flowers,  rarely  if  ever  poison- 
ous.    As  pea,  beau,  locust-tree,  wild  indigo,  clover. — Smith. 

5.  Plants  with  labiate  corols,  bearing  seeds  without  peri- 
carps, never  poisonous.  As  catmint,  hyssop,  mint,  mother- 
wort, niarjoram. — Smith. 

6.  Plants  with  compound  flowers,  rarely  poisonous.  As  sun- 
flower, dandelion,  lettuce,  burdock. — Milne. 

Poisonous  Plants. 

1.  Plants  with  five  stamens  and  one  pistil,  with  a  dull  color- 
ed lurid  corol,  and  of  a  nauseous  sickly  smell,  always  poison- 
ous. As  tobacco,  thorn-apple,  henbane,  nightshade.  The  de- 
gree of  poison  is  diminished  where  the  flower  is  brighter  colored 
and  the  smell  is  less  nauseous.  As  potatoe  is  less  poisonous, 
though  of  the  same  genus  with  nightshade. — Smith. 

2.  Umbelliferous  plants  of  the  aquatic  kind,  and  of  a  nau- 
seous scent,  are  always  poisonous.  As  water-hemlock,  cow- 
parsley.  But  if  the  smell  be  pleasant,  and  they  grow  in  dry 
land,  they  are  not  poisonous.  As  fennel,  dill,  coriander,  sweet 
cicely. — Smith. 

3.  Plants  with  labiate  corols  and  seeds  in  capsules,  frequent- 
ly poisonous.     As  snap-dragon,  foxglove. — Smith. 

4.  Plants  from  which  issues  a  milky  juice  on  being  broken, 
are  poisonous,  unless  they  bear  compound  flowers.  As  milk- 
weed, dogbane,  Milne's  contorlcB  and  lactescentia. 

5.  Plants  having  any  appendage  to  the  calyx  or  corol,  and 
twelve  or  more  stamens,  generally  poisonous.  As  columbine, 
crowfoot. — LinncBUs. 

Most  General  Rule. 

Plants  with  few  stamens  not  frequently  poisonous,  except  the 
number  be  five  ;  but  if  the  number  be  twelve  or  more,  and  the 
smell  nauseous  and  sickly,  the  plants  are  generally  poisonous. 
Milne's  multisiliquas  and  sapor. 

Note.  Many  plants  possess  some  degree  of  the  narcotic  prin- 
ciple, which  are  still  by  no  means  hurtful. 


150  THE  THOMSONIAN 


VOCABULARY. 


Abrupt  leaf.     A  pinnate  leaf,  which  has  not  an  odd  or  terminal  leafet. 
Accessory.     Additional.     Annexed,  and  of  a  different  kind  when  applied  to 

the  border,  &c.  of  the  receptacle  of  a  lichen. 
AciNACiFORM  leaf.     Sabre-form.     One  edge  sharp  and  convex,  the  other  thick- 
er and  straight  or  concave.     Cutlass-form. 
AciNE.     One  of  the  little  globules  constituting  a  compound  berry ;   as  the 

raspberry. 
Acuminate.     Any  kind  of  leaf  terminating  more  or  less  suddenly  in  a  point 

turned  towards  one  edge  of  the  leaf 
Acute.     Terminating  in  an  angle ;  that  is,  not  rounded. 
Adnate.     Adhering.     Any  two  or  more  parts  of  the  plant  being  attached  to 

each  other. 
Aggregate.    Having  on  the  same  receptacle  several  flowers,  whose  anthers 

are  not  united,  as  teasel,  button-bush,  kc. 
Aigrette,  Egret.     The  dying,  feathery,  or  hairy  crown  of  seeds ;    as  the 
down  of  thistles  and  dandelions.     It  includes  whatever  remains  on  the  top 
of  the  seed  after  the  corol  is  removed. 

stiped  (stipulatus)  when  it  is  supported  on  a  foot-stem. 

simple  (simplex)  when  it  consists  of  a  bundle  of  simple  hairs,  without 

branches. 

plumose  (plumosus)  when  each  hair  has  other  little  hairs  arranged  along 

its  sides,  like  the  beards  on  a  feather. 

membranous,  thin  transparent  leaves. 

Alternate.  Branches,  leaves,  flowers, &c.  are  alternate,  when  arranged  up- 
on opposite  sides  of  the  stem,  or  whatever  supports  them;  beginning  at  dif- 
ferent distances  from  its  base,  and  continuing  in  nearly  equal  series.  Some- 
times they  are  in  three  series. 
Ament.  An  assemblage  of  flower-bearing  scales,  arranged  on  a  slender 
thread  or  receptacle  ;  each  scale  generally  constituting  the  lateral  calyx  of 
a  flower — as  in  the  willow,  chesnut,  pine,  &c. 
Angular.    By  means  of  intervening  grooves,  the  stems,  calyxes,  capsules, 

&c.  have  ridges  running  lengthwise. 
Annual.     Which  springs  up,  perfects  fruit,  and  dies  in  the  same  year. 
Anodynes.     Substances  which  promote  sleep. 

Anomalous.     Whatever  forms  an  exception  to  the  assumed  rules  or  sj'stems. 
Anther.     The  knob  of  the  stamen,  which  contains  the  pollen. 
Antiscorbutics.     Substances  which  cure  eruptions. 
Apetalous.     a  flower  without  a  corol. 
Apex.     The  tip  or  top  end. 

Apophysis.     A  process  from  the  base  of  the  capsule  of  a  raoss. 
Appendage — stipule,  a  leafet  or  scale  at  or  near  the  base  of  a  petiole. 

. -bract,  a  leaf  among  or  near  the  flowers,  different  from  the  other  leaves  of 

the  plant. 

.thorn,  a  sharp  process  from  the  woody  part  of  a  plant. 

. prickle,  a  sharp  process  from  the  bark,  as  those  on  raspberry-bushes,  &c. 

sting,  hair-like  processes,  mostly  from  the  leaves,  as  nettles. 

gland,   a  roundish,   generally  minute,  appendage   to  different  parts  of 

plants. 
tendril,  the  filiform  appendage  by  which  climbing  plants  support  them- 
selves on  other  bodies. 
AquATic.     Growing  most  naturally  in  or  near  water. 
Arachnoideus.     Resembling  a  spider  web. 

Aril,  Jnllus.    The  outer  coat  of  a  seed,  which,  not  contracting  with  it  in  ri- 
pening, falls  off. 
Arrow-form.    Shaped  like  an  arrow-head,  differing  from  cordate  in  having 

the  hind  lobes  more  or  less  acute. 
Ascending.     Rising  gradually  between  a  horizontal  and  vertical  position. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  151 

Astringents.  Substances  which  condense  the  fibres  and  consolidate  relaxed 
parts.  They  brace  up  debilitated  intestines,  and  applied  externally  restrain 
bleeding  wounds,  Sec.  , 

AucTus  CALYX.     Having  an  outer  row  of  leafets,  as  the  dandelion. 

Awl-form.  Linear  at  the  base,  and  becoming  more  or  less  curved  at  the 
point. 

AwL-poiNTKD.     Acuminate. 

Awn.  A  short  slender  process  or  stifi"  beard,  proceeding  from  the  top  or  back 
of  glumes  or  chaff. 

Axil.  The  arm-pit.  Applied  to  vegetables,'  it  means  the  angle  formed  by 
the  meeting  of  a  leaf  or  petiole  with  the  stem,  or  of  a  branch  with  the  main 
siem. 

Axillary.     Any  thing  growing  from  the  axils. 

Banner.     The  upper  petal  in  a  papilionaceous  flower. 

Bark.     The  inner  strong  fibrous  part  of  the  covering  of  vegetables. 

Basis.  Base.  The  part  of  a  stem,  leaf,  flower,  &.c.  nearest  to  the  place 
through  which  it  derives  its  nutriment. 

Beaked,     Terminated  by  a  process  formed  like  a  bird's  bill. 

Bell-form.  Hollowed  out  within  the  base,  and  generally  diverging  upwards, 
as  Canterbury-bells,  gentian,  &c. 

Berry.  A  pulpy  pericarp  enclosing  seeds  without  any  capsule,  as  currant, 
grape,  cucumber,  melon. 

Biennial.  Springing  up  one  summer,  flowering  and  dying  the  next,  as  wheat. 

Bifurcate.     Forked  twice. 

Bipinnate.     Twice  pinnate. 

BiPiNNATiFiD.  Doubly  pinnatifid.  When  the  divisions  of  a  pinnatifid  leaf 
are  cut  in,  or  pinnatifid  again. 

Biternate.  Trice  ternate ;  when  the  petiole  is  terminate,  and  each  division 
bears  three  leafets. 

Boat-form.  Hollow  one  side,  with  a  compressed  longitudinal  ridge  on  the 
opposite  side. 

Border  in  Lichens.  The  edging  of  their  receptacles  (apothecium.)  It  is 
proper,  when  of  the  same  substance  and  color  of  the  receptacle.  It  is  ac- 
cessory, when  of  a  different  substance  or  color  from  the  disk  of  the  recepta- 
cle. 

Bract.     See  Appendage. 

Branching.  Having  the  whole  root  divided  into  parts  as  it  proceeds  down- 
wards, as  the  oak,  apple-tree,  &c. 

Bristle-form.     Resembling  a  bristle. 

Bristly.     Set  witli  stiff'  hairs. 

Bulbous-roots.  Fleshy  and  spherical.  They  are  either  solid,  as  the  turnip  ; 
coated,  as  the  onion  ;  or  scaly,  as  the  garden  lily. 

Buttons,  Tricae.    Tliat  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which,  when  magnified 
resembles  a  coiled  horse-hair.     They  are  roundish,  sessile,  unexpanding' 
compact,  black  and  solid;  continued  along  their  whole  surface.    Upper  side 
they  are  in  concentric,  or  coiled,  plaited,  and  twisted  folds  ;    covered  every 

where  with  the  same  membrane ;  containing  seeds  without  cells  or  cases 

Smith. 

Caducous.  Any  part  of  a  plant  is  caducous  which  falls  off  earlier,  compared 
with  other  parts  of  the  same  plant,  than  is  usual  for  similar  parts  in  most 
plants ;  as  the  calyx  of  the  poppy  falls  off  before  the  corol  is  hardly  expand- 
ed. 

CjEspitose.  Turfy.  Several  plants  growing  together,  or  from  the  same  root, 
forming  a  turf. 

Calycled.     See  auctus. 

Calyptra.  The  cap  or  hood  of  pistillate  mosses,  resembling  in  form  and  po- 
sition an  extinguisher  set  on  a  candle.  Conspicuous  in  the  common  hair- 
cap  moss. 

Calyx.     The  outer  or  lower  part  of  the  flower. 

CAMn.  The  mucilaginous  or  gelatinous  substance  which  in  the  spring  of  the 
year  abounds  between  the  bark  and  the  wood  of  trees. 

Capillary.    Hair-form  ;   longer  than  bristle-form,  in  proportion  to  its  thick- 


152  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Capitate.    Head-form  ;  growing  in  heads. 

Capsule.    That  kind  of  pericarp  which  opens  by  valves  or  pores  and  becomes 

,  dry  when  ripe ;  as  the  poppy,  which  opens  by  pores,  and  the  mullein  by 
valves. 

Carinate,  see  keeled. 

Cartilaginous.  Hard  and  somewhat  flexible.  It  applies  to  a  leaf,  when  it 
is  bound  around  with  a  strong  margin,  dillerent  from  the  disk  of  the  leaf. 

Caryophylleous.  Having  live  single  petals,  each  terminating  in  a  long 
claw,  enclosed  in  a  tubular  calyx  as  pink,  &,c. 

Catkin.     See  anient. 

Cathartics.     Substances  v/hich  stimulate  the  intestines  so  as  to  hasten  and 
increase  evacuations. 

Cauline.     Growing  on  the  main  stem. 

Caustics.  Substances  which  corrode,  burn,  or  dissolve  the  part  with  which 
they  come  in  contact. 

Cell.  The  hollow  part  or  cavity  of  a  pericarp  or  anther.  It  is  more  gene- 
rally applied  to  the  cavities  of  pericarps;  where  seeds  are  lodged.  i\ccord- 
ing  10  the  numbers  of  these,  the  pericarps  are  called  one  celled,  tu-o  celled, 
&c. 

Cellular  integument.  The  parenchymous  substance  between  the  cuticle 
and  bark,  oftea  green.  Easily  seen  in  the  elder,  &c.  after  removing  the  cu- 
ticle. 

Cellules,  cistulce.  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  is  globose,  termi- 
nal, and  formed  of  the  substances  of  the  frond.  It  is  lilled  willi  uncoated 
seeds,  intermixed  with  fibres  ;  at  length  it  bursts  irregularly. — Sviith. 

Cespitose.     See  caespilose. 

Channelled.  Hollowed  out  longitudinally  with  a  rounded  groove  of  consi- 
derable depth. 

Ciliate.     Edged  with  parallel  hairs  or  bristles,  resembling  eye-lashes. 

Clasping.  Sessile  with  the  base  more  or  less  heart-form,  so  as  entirely  or  in 
part  to  surround  the  stem. 

Clavate.     Clubform.     Growing  larger  towards  the  end. 

Claw.  The  lower  narrow  part  of  a  petal,  by  which  it  is  fixed  on  the  calyx 
or  receptacle.     It  can  exist  only  in  polypctalous  corols. 

Cleft.  Split  down  not  exceeding  halfway  to  the  base;  with  nearly  straight 
edg-es  on  both  sides  of  the  fissure.  The  parts  into  which  it  is  split  are 
numbreed  in  descriptions  ;  as  once  split,  making  two  divisions,  is  called  2- 
cleft ;  two  splits,  3-cleft,  &C. 

Clefts,  lirellec.  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  is  open,  elongated, 
sessile,  black,  very  narrow  or  linear,  with  a  somewhat  spongy  disk ;  the 
border  is  parallel  on  each  side,  and  proper.  Sometimes  it  has  an  accessory 
border  from  the  crust  besides.  The  clefts  are  either  simple  and  solitary,  or 
aggregate,  confluent  and  branched. — Smith. 

CLiMniNG.  Ascending  by  means  of  tendrils,  as  grapes ;  by  leaf-stalks,  as  vir- 
gin's bower ;  by  cauline  radicles,  or  rootlets,  as  the  creeping  American  ivy, 
(rhus  radicans.)     It  differs  from  Ixviaing,  which  see. 

Club-form.     See  Clavate. 

Cobwebbed.     See  arachnoidcus. 

CocHLEATE.     Coilcd  Spirally  like  a  snail-shell. 

Coiled.  Twisted  lilc*  a  rope,  or  rather  resembling  the  form  of  one  thread  of 
a  rope  after  the  otiier  threads  are  removed. 

CoLORcd.  In  the  language  of  botany,  any  part  of  a  plant  is  not  colored  when 
it  is  green;  as  the  calyx  of  the  apple  is  said  not  to  be  colored,  because  it  is 
green  ;  and  that  of  the  nasturtion  is  colored,  because  it  is  not  creen. 

(Columella.  The  central  column  in  a  capsule,  to  which  the  seeds  are  at- 
tached. 

Commissure.     The  joining  sides  of  pairs,  as  of  fennel  seeds. 

Common.  Any  part  is  common  which  serves  to  include  or  sustain  several 
parts,  similar  among  themselves 

• perianth.     Including  several  florets,  as  in  the  thistle. 

involitcre.    Surrounding  the  base  of  the  peduncles  in  an  umbel,  which  are 
subdivided  above. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  153 

This  term  is  often  used  for  frequent  also. 

Complete.     Ha» ing  both  calyx  and  corol. 

Compound.  Having  several  florets  on  the  same  receptacle,  with  their  an- 
thers united,  as  siin-flowcr,  china-aster,  Sec. 

Conic.     With  a  broad  base,  and  approacliing  a  point  towards  the  top. 

Connate.     Leaves  opposite,  with  their  bases  united. 

Contrary.     See  partition. 

Converging.     Approaching  or  bending  towards  each  other. 

Convex.     Swelling  out  in  a  roundish  form. 

CoRCLE.  The  rudiment  of  the  future  plant,  always  proceeding  from  the  co- 
tyledon. 

Cordate.     Heart-shaped,  the  hind  IoIjcs  being  rounded,  as  lilac. 

Coriaceous.     Leathery,  or  parchmenl-lil<e. 

Cornered.  Having  angles  or  corners.  Three-cornered,  four-cornered,  &c. 
is  often  expressed  trigonus.  Sec. 

CoROL.    The  colored  blossom,  within  or  above  the  calyx. 

Corymb.  Li  the  corymb  the  peduncles  lake  their  rise  from  different  heights 
along  the  main  stem  ;  but  the  lower  ones  being  longer,  they  form  nearly  a 
level  or  convex  top,  as  yarrow. 

Cotyledon.  The  thick  fleshy  lobes  of  seeds;  very  manifest  i;i  beans,  whose 
cotyledons  grow  out  of  the  ground  in  the  form  of  two  large  succulent  leaves. 
Many  plants,  as  Indian  corn,  wheat,  the  grasses,  &c.  have  but  one  cotyle- 
don ;  mosses  &c.  none. 

Cowled.  When  the  edges  meet  below  and  expand  above,  and  generally  se- 
parate ;  as  the  spathe  of  the  arum,  Indian  turnip. 

Creeping.     Extending  itself  horizontally,  and  sending  out  fibrous  radicles 
as  gill-overground,  mint,  &c. 

Crenate.  Having  uniform  notches  on  the  margin  of  the  leaf,  which  incline 
towards  the  apex,  or  the  base,  or  neither,  as  gill-overground. 

Crested.  Having  an  appendage  somewhat  resembling  a  cock's  comb  in 
form. 

Cruciform.  Consisting  of  four  equal  petals,  spreading  out  in  the  form  of  a 
cross,  as  cabbage,  radish,  mustard,  &c. 

Cryptoga.mous.  Cryptogamous  plants  either  lose  the  staminate  organs  be- 
fore they  become  manifest,  or  they  are  too  minute  for  inspection. 

Culm.    The  stalk  or  stem  of  the  grasses,  as  wheat-straw,  sugar-cane,  &c. 

Culmiferous.     Having  culms. 

Cup-KOR.M.     Hollow  within,  resembling  a  little  cup. 

Cuspidate.  Having  a  sharpened  point,  and  that  tipped  with  a  bristle  a 
prickle,  or  lengthened  apex,  not  curved.  See  mucronate,  and  observe  the 
distinction ;  also  acuminate. 

Cuticle.  The  thin  outside  coat  of  the  bark,  which  seems  to  be  without  life 
and  often  transparent.  Very  conspicuous  on  some  kinds  of  birch,  cherry' 
currant-bushes,  8cC. 

Cyathtkorm.    Wineglass-form.     Cylindric,  widening   gradually  upwards ■ 

marsin  not  revolute. 

Cylindric  A  circular  shaft  of  nearly  equal  dimensions  throughout  its  whole 
extent. 

Cyme.  It  agrees  with  the  umbel  in  having  its  general  fiov.-er  stems  spring 
from  one  centre,  but  differs  in  having  those  stems  irregularly  subdivided  as 
elder,  8ic.  ' 

Deciduous.  Falling  off  in  the  usual  season  for  similar  parts  to  fall-  as 
leaves  falling  at  the  decline  of  the  year  ;  corols  falling  off  at  the  time'  the 
stamens  fall,  &c.    See  caducous  and  permanent. 

Decumb-ent.  When  the  base  is  erect,  and  the  remainder  lies  on  the  ground. 
It  applies  to  stems,  stamens,  ike. 

Decurrf.nt.  When  two  edges  of  the  leaf  extend  along  the  stem  below  the 
place  of  insertion. 

Decussate.  _  When  leaves  or  branches  arc  opposite  in  pairs,  and  each  pair 
stands  at  right  angles  with  the  next  pair  above  or  below  on  the  same  stem. 

Deflected.     Bending  down  archwise. 

Deuiscent.    The  natural  opening  of  capsules  in  the  proper  season. 

11 


154  THE    TUOMSONIAN 

Deltoid.  A  leaf -with  four  corners  ;  that  is,  one  at  the  stem,  one  at  the  apex, 
and  one  on  each  side  ;  but  tlte  side  ones  are  nearer  to  the  base  than  to  the 
apex.  When  the  side  angles  are  about  as  near  to  tlie  apex  as  to  tlie  base,  it 
is  called  a  rhomboid  leaf.     Both  kinds  are  called  diamond-fo)  m  in  English. 

Dense.  Close,  compact.  A  panicle  with  abundance  oi' flowers  very  close,  is 
dense.     See  thyrse. 

Dentate.     Toothed. 

Denticulate.    Having  very  small  teeth. 

Deobstruents.     Substances  which  remove  obstructions. 

Detergents.     Substances  calculated  for  cleansing. 

Diaphoretics.  Those  secernant  stimulants  which  promote  perspiration  more 
particularly. 

DicHOTOMous.  Forked.  Stem,  &c.  parted  in  pairs,  each  branch  parted  ia 
pairs  a?ain,  and  so  on.  When  it  is  parted  but  once,  it  is  more  properly 
called  forked. 

Didynamous.     Belonging  to  or  varying  into  the  class  didynamia. 

Diffused,     Spreading.     Expanded  in  an  open  loose  manner. 

Digitate.  Fingered.  When  the  base  of  several  leafels  rests  on  the  end  of 
one  petiole  ;  as  the  strawberry  and  fivefinger. 

Dilated.     Expanded,  wi  !ened. 

DiCECious.     Belonging  to  or  varying  into  the  class  dicecia. 

Discoid.     Having  a  disk  without  rays. 

Disk.  The  whole  surtace  of  a  leaf,  or  of  the  top  of  a  compound  flower,  as 
opposed  to  its  edge  or  periphery.  This  term  is  also  applied  to  the  aggre- 
gate florets  of  an  umbel. 

Dissilient.  a  pericarp  is  dissilient  when  it  bursts  open  with  a  spring,  as  the 
touch-me-not,  (impatiens.) 

Diuretics.  Those  secernant  stimulants  which  increase  urine  more  particu- 
larly. 

Divaricate.  Branches  spreading  out  from  the  stem  so  far  as  to  form  more 
than  a  risht  angle  with  it  above. 

Dorsal.  Fixed  to  the  back.  Awns  are  dorsal,  when  proceeding  from  the 
outside  of  a  glume,  and  net  from  the  tip. 

Down,  or  Downy.     Covered  with  fine  cotton-like  down. 

Drupe.  That  kind  of  pericarp  which  consists  of  a  thick,  fleshy,  or  cartilage- 
nous  coat,  enclosing  a  nut  or  stone,  as  in  the  cherry,  in  which  it  is  said  to 
be  berry-like;  and  in  the  walnut,  where  it  is  dry. 

Drupaceous.     Bearing  drupes,  or  fruit  resembling  them. 

Eared.  This  term  applies,  1st,  to  tlie  round,  extended,  or  appcndaged  lobes 
of  a  heart-form  leaf;  2d,  to  tlie  side  lobes  near  the  base  of  some  leaves  ; 
and  3i,  to  twisted  parts,  in  some  ferns  and  some  liverworts,  which  are  sup- 
posed to  resemble  the  conchus,  or  passage  into  the  outer  ear. 

Echinate.     Hedgehog-like.     Beset  with  erect  prickles. 

Eggform.     See  ovate. 

Egret.     See  aigrette. 

Elastic.     See  dissilient. 

Eliptic.  Longer  than  wide,  rounded  at  or  near  both  ends,  and  nearly  equal 
in  breadth  towards  both  base  and  apex. 

Elongated.  Lengthened  out,  as  if  extended  beyond  what  is  usual  in  similar 
parts. 

Emarginate.     Xotched  at  the  termination  of  the  midrib. 

Emetics.     Substances  which  excite  vomiting. 

Emollients.      Substances  which  soften  tumors,  or  any  hardness  or  dry- 
ness of  the  skin. 

Ensiform.  Sword-form.  Two  edged,  tapering  from  base  to  apex  mostly, 
and  a  little  arching  towards  one  edge  ;  as  flag  and  cattail,  (iris  and  t)'pha.) 

Entire.  Continued  without  interruption.  A  margin  of  a  leaf,  calyx,  coroJ, 
&c.  is  entire,  when  it  is  neither  serrate,  toothed,  notched,  nor  in  any  manner 
indented. 

Equal.  Similar  parts  equal  among  themselves.  The  calyx,  corol,  &.c.  are 
equal,  when  the  leafets,  petals,  or  subdivisions,  are  similar  in  form,  size, 
and  direction.     Opposed  to  unequal. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  155 

Erect.    Upright. 

Erose.  Gnawed.  Unequally  sinuated,  as  if  the  sinuses  had  been  eaten  by 
insects. 

Evergreens.  Such  plants  as  retain  their  leaves  throughout  the  year,  as  lau- 
rel, white  pine,  &c. 

Exotic.  Plants  not  growing  spontaneously  in  a  wild  state  in  that  particular 
country,  or  section  of  a  country. 

Exsert.  Standing  out.  Stamens  are  exsert,  when  protruded  out  of  the  co- 
rols. 

Factitious  character.     Added  to  more  essential  distinctions. 

Fa.milies.     See  gentes. 

Fascicle.  A  bundle.  In  general  external  appearance  it  resembles  the  um- 
bel ;  but  the  foot-stalks  are  irregular  in  their  origin  and  subdivisions,  as 
sweet-william. 

Fascicled.     Producing  fascicles,  as  asparagus. 

Fastigiate.     Level-topped,  or  a  little  convex. 

Faux.  Jaws.  The  throat  or  opening  into  a  corol.  That  precise  spot  where 
the  tubular  part  of  a  ringent  corol  begins  to  separate  or  expands  into  lips 
or  mouth,  is  the  faux. 

Fibre.     Any  thread-form  part. 

Fibrous.  The  whole  root  consisting  of  filiform  parts,  originating  immediate- 
ly from  the  base  of  the  stem,  as  many  of  the  grasses. 

Filamext.  That  part  of  the  stamen  which  connects  the  anther  with  the  re- 
ceptacle, calyx,  or  pistil. 

Filiform.     Thread-like. 

Fissure.     A  cleft  or  slitted  aperture. 

Flexuose.     Bending  and  frequently  changing  direction. 

Floret.  Little  flower.  Whether  the  flower  is  large  or  small,  it  is  a  floret, 
if  it  is  one  of  a  number,  all  of  which  constitute  an  aggregate  or  compound. 

Follicle.  A  pericarp  with  one  valve,  which  opens  lengthwise  on  one  side 
only,  as  milk-weed,  (asclepias.  ) 

FooT-sT.vLK.     See  peduncle  and  petiole  :  it  is  put  for  both. 

Forked.     Sec  dichotomous. 

Fron-d.  Applied  entirely  to  cryptogamous  plants.  It  includes  the  herbaceous, 
leathery,  crustaceous,  or  gelatinous  substance,  from  which  the  fruit  is  pro- 
duced. 

Fructification.  The  temporary  part  of  vegetables,  which  is  destined  for 
the  re-production  of  the  species,  terminating  the  old  individual  and  begin- 
ning the  new. 

Fruit-dots.     Assemblages  of  capsules  on  the  backs  of  ferns. 

Fugacious.     Soon  disappearing.     Flying  off. 

Funnel-form.  With  a  tubular  base,  and  the  border  opening  gradually  in  the 
form  of  a  tunnel. 

Furrowed.     See  sulcate. 

Fusiform.  Spindle-form.  Thick  at  the  top,  and  tapering  downward,  as  car- 
rot, parsnip,  8cc. 

Galls.  Excrescences  produced  by  the  stings  of  insects.  The  balls  found  on 
oaks,  which  are  used  in  dyeing,  tlie  common  large  green  oak  balls,  the  sin- 
gular green  lumps  found  on  the  wild  honey-suckle,  Sec.  are  examples. 

Gashed.     See  incised. 

General.     See  partial. 

Generic  name.    The  name  of  a  genus. 

Geniculate.  Kneed.  Forming  a  very  obtuse  angle,  like  a  moderate  bend- 
ing of  the  knee. 

Gentes.  Xations.  Linnaeus  divided  plants  into  nine  great  natural  tribes  or 
casts.  1.  Pal.ms  (palmae,)  as  the  date  and  cocoa-nut.  2.  Grasses  (grami- 
na,)  as  wheat,  Indian  corn,  sugar  cane,  rice,  timothy  grass,  &c.  3.  Lilies 
(lilia,)  as  lily,  tulip,  daffodil,  &c.  4.  Herbs  (herbas,)  as  thistles,  nettles, 
peas,  mint,  potatoes,  hemp,  plantain,  beets,  and  all  other  herbaceous  plants 
except  the  above.  5.  Trees  (arbores,)  as  oak,  che=nut.  pine,  willow,  dog- 
wood,  currants,  lilac,  whortleberry,  cranberrv,  and  all  other  plants  with  a 
woody  stem.      6.  Ferns  (filices,)  as  brake,  polypod,  maidenhair,  ground 


156  THE    THOMSOiNIAN 

pine,  and  all  other  plants  of  this  order,  which  see.  7.  Mosses  (musci,)  see 
the  order.  8.  Alg;e.  This  tribe  includes  the  plants  of  the  orders  hcpatica, 
ale;a  and  lichencs,  which  see.  9.  Fungi. — as  mushroom,  tcad-stool,  puff- 
ball,  mould,  blight,  &c. 

Gents,  (plural  genera.)  A  number  of  plants  which  agree  with  one  another  in 
the  habit  and  structure  of  the  flower  and  fruit. 

Germ.  That  part  of  tiie  pistil  which  in  maturitj'  becomes  the  pericarp  and 
the  seed. 

Glabrous.     Sleek.     Having  no  pubescence. 

Gland.  A  roundish,  generally  minute,  appendage  to  difierent  parts  of 
plants. 

Glaucous.  Clothed  with  a  sea-green  mealiness,  which  is  easily  rubbed  off. 
It  is  sometimes  put  for  a  greenish-grey  color. 

Globose.    Spherical,  round  on  all  sides  like  a  ball. 

Globules.  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  is  globose,  solid  and 
crustaceous,  formed  of  the  substance  of  the  frond  and  terminating  its  points 
or  branches ;  from  whence  they  fall  off  entire,  leaving  a  pit  or  cavity.  They 
are  supposed  to  be  covered  all  over  with  a  colored,  seed-bearing  membrane. 

Glume.  That  kind  of  calyx  which  is  composed  of  one,  two,  or  three  valves 
or  scales,  commonly  transparent  at  the  margin,  and  often  terminated  by  a 
long  awn  or  beard.     All  grasses  have  glume  calyxes. 

Glutinous.     Having  on  some  part  more  or  less  of  adhesive  moisture. 

Gnawed.     See  erose. 

Granulate.  Having  several  little  knobs  in  the  form  of  grains,  strung  toge- 
ther along  the  sides  of  a  filiform  radicle,  as  the  wood  sorrel. 

Grooved.     See  sulcate. 

Guitar-form.     Oblong,  broadish  near  the  base,  and  contracted  at  the  sides. 

Habitat.  The  native  residence  of  plants ;  or  the  situation  wherein  they 
grow  most  naturally. 

Habit.  The  external  appearance  of  a  plant,  by  a  general  view  of  which  we 
know  it  without  attending  to  any  of  its  essential  characters.  A  knowledge 
of  the  habits  of  plants  is  to  be  acquired,  by  first  seeing  them  in  a  growing 
state,  and  then  by  repeatedly  reviewing  them  in  a  herbarium. 

Halbert-fobm.     Shaped  like  an  halbert. 

Hastate.     Halbert-form. 

He.\d.  In  this  the  flowers  are  heaped  together  in  a  globular  form,  without 
peduncles,  or  with  very  short  ones,  as  clover. 

Herbaceous.     Not  woody. 

Herbage.     All  the  plant  except  the  root  and  fructification. 

Herbarium.    A  collection  of  dried  plants. 

Hexagonal.     Six  cornered. 

Hilum.  The  external  mark  or  scar  on  seeds,  by  which  they  were  afBxed  to 
their  pericarps.     In  beans  and  the  like  it  is  called  the  eye. 

Hirsute.     Rough-haired. 

Hispid.     Bristly.     Beset  with  stiff  hairs. 

Hollows,  (thalamia.)  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens,  whicJi  is  sphe- 
rical,  nearly  closed,  lodged  in  the  substance  of  the  frond,  lined  with  its  pro- 
per coat,  under  which  are  cells  2  or  4-seeded.  Each  hollow  finally  opens  by 
an  orifice  in  the  surface  of  the  frond  above. 

Hooded.     See  cowled. 

Horizontal.  Parallel  to  the  horizon.  Leaves  are  horizontal,  when  they 
form  right  angles  with  erect  stems. 

Horn.     See  spur. 

Imbricate.  Lying  over  each  other  like  shingles  on  a  roof,  so  as  to  "  break 
joints." 

Imperfect.     Wanting  the  stamen  or  pistil. 

Incised.     Cut  in  like  a  gash  with  a  knife. 

Incurved.     Bent  inwards. 

Indigenous.  Plants  growing  naturally  and  originally  in  a  country  are  indige- 
nous to  that  country. 

Indurated.     Becoming  hard,  tough,  or  lenthery. 

Inferior.  Below.  A  calyx  or  corol  is  inferior  when  it  comes  out  below  the 
germ.    See  germ. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  157 

Intlated.     Appearinc;  as  if  blown  up  with  wind. 

Inflkxed.     The  same  as  incurved. 

Inflorescence.     The  manner  in  which  flowers  are  situated  on  plants. 

I.VTERRUPTEDLY  PiNNATE.  Haviug  Smaller  leafets  dispersed  among  the  larg- 
er, as  potatoe. 

iNTaoDUCED.     Not  Originally  native.     Brought  from  some  other  country. 

Involucre.  That  calyx  which  comes  out  at  some  distance  below  the  flower, 
and  never  encloses  it. 

Involucres  are  either  universal,  placed  at  the  origin  of  the  universal  um- 
bel, as  in  caraway,  lovase,  &c.,  or  partial,  placed  at  the  origin  of  a  parti- 
cular umbel,  as  in  coriander  ;  or  proper,  placed  beneath  a  single  flower. 

Involucres  of  ferns  generally  lie  on  the  tops  of  capsules,  like  a  piece  of 
linen  spread  out  to  dry.  They  are  said  to  open  inwards,  when  they  sepa- 
rate from  the  frond  so  as  to  leave  the  capsules  naked  on  the  side  next  the 
midrib. 

Involute.     Rolled  inwards. 

Irregular.  Diflfering  in  figure,  size,  or  proportion  of  parts,  among  them- 
selves. 

Keel.    A  ridge  resembling  the  keel  of  a  boat. 

Keeled.     Having  keels,  ridged. 

Kidney. FORM.  Hollowed  in  at  the  base,  with  rounded  lobes  and  rounded 
ends,  as  mallows. 

Kneed.     See  geniculate. 

Knobs,  (cephalodia.)  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  is  convex, 
more  or  less  globular,  covered  externally  with  a  colored  seed-bearing  crust, 
and  placed  generally  at  the  extremities  of  stalks,  originating  from  the  frond, 
permanent ;  rarely  sessile.  Sometimes  they  are  at  first  spangles  on  filamen- 
tous lichens,  and  afterwards  become  convex  irregular  knobs.  They  are  sim- 
ple, compound,  or  conglomerate. 

L.\BiATE.  Divided  into  two  general  parts,  somewhat  resembling  the  lips  of  a 
horse  or  other  animal.  Either  personate,  (with  the  throat  muffled)  as  snap- 
dragon ;  or  ringent,  (with  the  throat  open)  as  mint,  &,c. 

Lacerated.     Torn.     Cut,  or  apparently  torn  into  irregular  segments. 

Lacunose.     Pitted. 

Lamina.  Thin  plate.  The  broad  upper  part  of  the  petal  of  a  polypetalous 
corol. 

Lanceolate.  In  the  form  of  the  ancient  lance,  taperiny  from  near  the  base 
to  the  apex,  and  of  some  length,  as  the  leaves  of  most  of  the  willows,  of  rib- 
wort, 8cc. 

Lance-ovate,  &c.  Partaking  of  the  lanceolate  form,  and  of  that  with  which 
it  is  compounded. 

Lateral.     On  one  side. 

Leafet,  or  Leaflet.  One  of  the  lesser  leaves,  which,  with  others,  consti- 
tute a  compound  leaf.     A  simple  leaf  is  never  a  leafet,  however  small. 

Legume.  A  pod  wiihout  a  longitudinal  partition,  with  the  seeds  attached  to 
one  suture  only,  as  tlie  pea,  &c. 

LIGUL.A.TE.  That  kind  of  floret  in  some  compound  flowers,  which  consists  of 
a  single  strap-like  petal,  which  becomes  tubular  at  the  base  only — as  all  the 
florets  in  a  dandelion,  and  the  ray  florets  in  a  sunflower. 

Liliaceous.  A  corol  with  six  petals,  spreading  gradually  from  the  base,  so 
as  altogether  to  exhibit  a  bell-form  appearance,  as  tulip,  lily,  &c. 

Limb.     The  broad  spreadim;  part  of  the  petal  of  a  monopetalous  corol. 

Linear.  Continuinu;  of  the  same  width  through  nearly  the  whole  length,  usu- 
ally pointed  at  one  or  both  ends,  as  most  grasses. 

Lion-toothed.  See  renunciate.  Pinnatifid,  with  the  divisions  pointing  back- 
wards, as  dandelion. 

Lobe.  Divisions,  which  are  rounded,  or  parted  by  rounded  or  curved  inci- 
'sions. 

LoBEn.  Deeply  parted,  and  the  divisions  large,  with  rounded  sides  or  ends, 
as  the  while  oak. 

Loment.    a  legume  pod  with  transverse  partitions. 


158  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Lurid.  Of  a  palish,  dull,  deathly  color.  Most  plants  with  lurid  petals  are 
more  or  less  poisonous — as  tobacco,  henbane,  thorn  apple. 

Lyratk.  Pinnatitid,  with  the  largest  division  at  the  apex,  and  diminishing 
thence  to  the  base,  as  hedge-mustard. 

Lyrate-pinnate.     Pinnate  with  the  odd  terminal  leafet  largest. 

Many.  Whenever  there  are  more  than  are  usually  numbered;  as  we  say,  1- 
seeded,  2-seeded,  3-seeded,  4-seeded,  many-seeded. 

Marcescent.     See  withering. 

Marginated.     Having  a  margin  different  in  some  measure  from  the  disk. 

Mature.     Full  grown,  but  not  entered  upon  a  state  of  decay. 

Membranaceous,  or  Membrane.  Made  up,  apparently,  of  the  two  plates  of 
the  cuticle,  without  any  cellular  integument  between  them.  Nearly  trans- 
parent, very  thin,  and  often  colorless. 

Midrib.  The  main  or  middle  rib  of  a  leaf,  running  from  the  stem  to  the 
apex. 

Moncecious.     Belonging  to  or  varying  into  the  class  monoccia. 

MoNOPETALOus.     Consisting  of  one  petal  or  flower  leaf. 

MoNOPHYLLOus.     Consisting  of  one  leaf. 

Monstrous.  Plants  producing  any  part  different  from  the  same  part  when 
growing  wild.  As  the  rose  has  but  five  petals  in  a  wild  state  ;  but  by  rich 
cultivstion  in  gardens,  the  stamens  are  mostly  changed  to  petals.  Carna- 
tions and  peony  are  examples  also.     These  are  all  monsters. 

Mucronate.  Having  a  rounded  end,  tipped  with  a  prickle,  which  often  ap- 
pears rather  an  extension  of  the  midrib. 

Muricate.     Armed  with  sharp  spines.     Covered  with  subulate  prickles. 

Naked.  Wanting  a  covering  analagous  to  that  of  most  plants.  As  a  stem 
without  leaves,  leaves  without  pubescence,  corol  without  a  calyx,  seed  with- 
out a  pericarp,  receptacle  without  chaff,  pubescens,  &c. 

Narcotics.  Those  poisons  which,  in  small  doses,  stimulate  at  first  and  pro- 
mote secretions — afterwards  induce  dullness  and  sleep  ;  but  in  large  doses, 
produce  delirium,  convulsions,  and  death.  Some  narcotics  inflame  the  sto- 
mach. 

Natant.     Floating. 

Nectary.  That  part  of  a  flower  which  secretes  honey.  It  is  either  a  dis- 
tinct horn,  gland,  spur,  scale,  cup,  &c.  or  the  claw  or  some  other  part  of  the 
corol  secreting  honey.  This  name  is  applied  to  any  appendage  to  the  flow- 
er, which  has  no  other  name. 

Nerved.  Furnished  with  midrib-like  fibres,  running  from  the  base  to  the 
apex. 

Neutral.     Having  neither  stamens  nor  pistils. 

Nodding.     See  nutant. 

Nucleus.  Nut  or  kernel.  The  inner  seed  or  kernel  is  properly  the  nucleus  j 
and  its  hard  shell  is  the  putamen.  But  the  whole,  including  the  putamen 
and  nucleus,  is  the  nut,  iiux. 

Nut.     See  nucleus. 

Nutant.  Nodding.  When  above  half  of  whatever  it  is  applied  to  droops  or 
hangs  down. 

NuTRiENTics.     Substances  which  serve  for  food. 

Obcordate.  Cordate,  with  the  apex  or  narrowest  end  towards  the  stem,  as 
of  wild  indigo 

Oblanceolate.     Lanceolate,  with  the  base  narrowest. 

Oblique.  A  position  between  horizontal  and  vertical,  or  between  the  per- 
pendicular and  the  plane  of  the  base.  It  is  also  applied  to  leaves,  petals, 
calyxes,  &.c.  which  are,  as  it  were,  cut  obliquely,  or  whose  bases  are  shorter 
on  one  side  than  on  the  other. 

Oblong.  The  length  more  than  twice  the  breadth,  and  the  sides  somewhat 
parallel. 

Obovate.  Ovate,  with  the  narrowest  end  towards  the  stem,  as  those  of  red 
clover. 

Obsolete.  When  teeth,  notches,  serratures,  &c.  are  obscure,  and  appear  as 
if  worn  out. 

Obtuse.    Having  the  apex  of  the  leaf  more  or  less  rounded. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  159 

Officinalis.  Suck  plants  as  are  sold  ia  the  shops  for  some  use,  either  in  me- 
dicine or  the  arts. 

Opposite,     btaiiiing  at  the  same  height,  with  base  against  base. 

Okbicular.     Nearly  circular,  as  the  leaves  of  cabbage,  &c. 

Orbs.  That  kini  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  is  flat,  orbicular  and  dilated, 
of  the  substance  of  the  frond,  terminal,  peltate,  without  a  border,  but  often 
surrounJed  with  radiating  shoots.  The  membrane  or  disk  under  which  the 
seeds  are  lodged  is  smooth,  nearly  of  the  color  of  the  frond.  Spurious  orbs, 
bordered  like  shields  or  spangles  when  young,  are  sometimes  found  in  the 
genus  coniicularia. 

Oval.     Differing  from  ovate,  in  having  both  ends  equal  in  breadth. 

Ovate.  Resembling  the  longitudinal  section  of  an  egg,  the  base  being  broad- 
er than  the  extremity. 

Palmate.     Resembhng  a  hand  with  the  fingers  spread,  as  horse-chesnut. 

Panicle.  Having  some  of  the  pedicels,  along  the  general  peduncle  of  the  ra- 
ceme, divided,  as  in  oats.  A  panicle  contracted  into  a  compact,  somewhat 
ovate  form,  as  in  lilac,  is  called  thyrse. 

Papilionaceous.  A  flower  consisting  of  a  banner,  two  wings  and  a  keel,  as 
pea,  clover,  &c. 

Papill.?:.     a  fleshy  process  or  point. 

Papilose.     Furnished  or  covered  with  fleshy  points. 

Parallel.  Two  lines  or  opposite  sides,  running  nearly  equal  distances  from 
each  other. 

Par.a.sitic.  Drawing  support  from  another  plant.  Growing  out  of  another  j 
as  the  dodder. 

Partial.  Particular,  not  general.  The  perianth,  involucre,  petiole,  &c.  of 
one  floret,  or  of  a  separate  part  of  all  the  florets,  which  with  others  consti- 
tute  a  compound  or  a2;gregate. 

Partitio.v.  The  membrane,  &,c.  which  divides  pericarps  into  cells.  It  is 
parallel,  when  it  unites  with  the  valves,  where  they  unite  with  each  other. 
It  is  contrary  or  transverse,  when  it  meets  a  valve  in  the  middle,  or  in  any 
part  not  at  its  suture,  or  juncture  with  another. 

Parted.     Deeply  divided,  almost  to  the  base. 

Pedate.     Resembling  a  bird's  foot. 

Pedicel.     A  partial  peduncle,  or  other  partial  stem. 

Peduncle.  The  flower-bearins  stem  which  springs  from  any  part  of  the 
stem  or  branches,  as  apple,  cucuml)er. 

Peltate  With  tlie  foot  stalk  attached  to  the  lower  side  of  a  leaf,  so  as  to 
resemble  a  shield. 

Pendulous.     When  the  whole  of  the  part  droops  or  hangs  down. 

Perennial.     Continuing  more  than  two  years. 

Perfect  flower.     Having  both  stamens  and  pistils. 

Perfoliate.     Having  the  stem  passing  through  the  leaf. 

Perforate.     Having  holes  as  if  pricked  through,  or  lucid  dots. 

Perianth.  That  caly.x  which  adjoins  and  surrounds  the  other  parts  of  the 
flower,  as  of  the  apple,  rose,  &,e. 

Pericarp.  The  covering  of  the  seed,  whether  pod,  shell,  bag,  or  pulpy  sub- 
stance. 

Pericheth.  Involucre-like  leaves  surrounding  the  base  of  the  peduncle  of  a 
moss. 

Peristome.  The  fringe,  teeth,  or  membrane,  around  the  mouth  of  the  cap- 
sules of  vnosses,  under  the  lid. 

Permanent  or  persistent.  Any  part  of  a  plant  is  permanent,  which  re- 
mains longer  compared  with  other  parts  of  the  same  plant  than  is  usual  for 
similar  parts  in  most  plants.  As  the  calyx  of  the  quince  remains  on  the  end 
of  the  fruit  till  it  ripens. 

Personate.     Labiate  corols  with  the  throat  muffled,  as  snap-dragon,  are  per- 
sonate 
Petal.    The  colored  Ipaf  or  leaves  of  the  corol.     The  petal  of  a  monopeta- 
lous  corol  is  divided  into  the  tube  and  limb.     Each  petal  of  a  polypetalous 
corol  is  divided  into  the  claw  and  lamina. 
PiTAL-FOEM.     Resembling  a  petal  in  shape. 


160  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Petiole.    The  foot  stalk  of  the  leaf. 

Ph.^merogamous.  PHtt;NOGAMoii.s.     Plants  having  their  stamens  and  pistils 

sufficiently  manifest  for  examination. 
PiLEDS.     The  hat  of  a  fungus. 
Pilose.     Hairy. 

Pixx.vTE.     With  distinct  leafets  arranged  on  opposite  sides  of  the  same  peti- 
ole, as  locust. 
Pi.wATiFiD.     Divided   transversely  by  deep  incisions,  not  extending  to  the 

midrib. 
Pistillate  flower.     Having  pistils  only — as  the  fertile  flower  of  the  cucum- 
ber. 
Pistil.     The  central  organ  of  the  flower,  whose  base  becomes  the  pericarp 

and  seed. 
Pitcher  form.     See  urceolate. 
Pith.     The  spongy  substance  in  the  centre  of  the  stems  and  roots  of  most 

plants. 
Pits,  (cyphellae.)     That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens,  which  consists  of  open^ 
cup-like,  naked,  white  or  yellow  little  spots,  on  the  under  side  of  the  frond, 
which  is  generally  downy.     They  are  at  the  first  immersed,  globose,  mi- 
nute dots,  which  at  length  burst  with  an  irregular  margin,  and  discharge  a 
powder. 
Plaited.     Folded  somewhat  like  a  fan,  when  nearly  full  spread. 
Plant.      Any  substance   growing  from  seed.      As   trees,  grass,  puff-ball, 

mould. 
Plicate.     Plaited. 
Plu.mose.     Feather-like. 
Plu.mose  egret.     Feather-like  down.      When  a  hair  of  egret  has  other  hairs 

arranged  on  opposite  sides  of  it. 
Pod.     That  kind  of  pericarp  whicii  is  composed  of  two  valves  with  the  seeds 
attached  to  one  or  both  sutures,  or  a  longitudinal  partition  at  the  edges 
immediately  adjoining  the  sutures.      The  pod  is  either  a  legume  or  a  si- 
lique. 
Pollex.     The  dusty,  mealy,  or  glutinous  substance,  contained  in  the  anthers 

— never  wanting. 
PoLYADELPHiA.      (Polus,  many;    adelphos,  brother.)      Many  brotherhoods. 
The  name  of  the  abolished  eishtcenth  class,  as  first  established  byLinnse- 
us.     This  class  includes  all  plants  with  perfect  flowers,  whose  stamens  are 
United  by  their  filaments  in  three  or  more  sets  or  brotherhoods. 
Polyadelphous.     Belonging  to  or  varying  into  the  class  polyadelphia. 
Polygamia.     The  name  of  the  twentj'-third  class  as  rslablished  by  Linnseus- 
It  comprises  all  plants  which  have  some  perfect  flowers,  and  others  which 
are  staminate  and  pistillate,  or  both  kinds.     This  class  is  divided  into  three 
orders.     1.  Moneecia,  having  perfect  flowers,  and  either  staminate  or  pistil- 
late ones  or  both  on  the  sam<-  plants.     2.  Bicecia,  having  perfect  flowers  on 
some  plants,  and  either  staminate  or  pistillate  flowers  on  others  of  the  same 
species.     3.  Triepcia,  having  perfect  flowers  on  some  plants,  staminate  on 
others,  and  pistillate  on  others  of  the  same  species.     This  class,  like  the 
IRth,  is  abolished  by  Persoon  and  others,  and  the  plants  under  it  distributed 
among  the  other  classes 
Polygamous.     Varying  into  or  inclining  to  the  class  polygamia. 
Polypetalous.     Consisting  of  more  than  one  petal. 
PoLYPHiLLous.     Consisting  of  more  than  one  leaf 
Pome.     A  pulpy  pericarp  without  valves,  which  contains  within  it  a  capsule^ 

as  apples,  quinces,  &c. 
Prickle.     A  sharp  process  from  the  bark,  as  those  on  raspberry  bushes,  &c. 
Prismatic.     Linear  with  several  flaiish  sides.     A  cylinder  with  flat  sides. 
Process.     A  projecting  part. 
Procumbent.     Lying  on  the  ground. 
Proliferous.     Putting  forth  branches  or  flowers  from  the  centre  of  the  top  of 

a  preceding  one. 
Proper.    That  which  belongs  to  one  flower  only. 
Pubescent.    Hairy.     Having  hairs,  wool,  down,  glandular  hairs,  &c. 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  161 

Puffs,  (pilidia.)  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  which  consists  of  little 
round  bordeied  knobs,  whose  disk  finallj'  turns  to  powder.  It  is  at  first  co- 
vered with  a  membrane  and  often  clothed  with  a  fine  grey  hcaririess.  These 
receptacles  ire  elongated  below  into  a  stalk  fixed  to  the  crust,  but  totally 
different  from  it. 

Pu.vcTATE.  Dotted  or  sprinkled  with  colored,  generally  diaphanous,  specks. 
See  perforated. 

PuTAMEX.     Kut  slicll.     See  nucleus. 

Qualities  of  plants.  Richard  says,  that  plants  of  the  same  taste  and  odor 
are  generally  possessed  of  similar  qualities.  Also  that  the  smell  and  taste 
are  always  the  same.  He  divides  the  odors  of  the  plants  into,  1.  Fragrant. 
2.  Aromatic.  3.  jlinbrosiac,  (resembling  amber.)  4.  AUiaceovs,  (resem- 
bling garlic.)  5.  Fcetid,  (as  asafoetida,  &.c.)  (5.  Nauseous,  (causing  the 
Stomach  to  heave.)  As  the  fragrant,  the  aromatic  and  ambrosiac,  are  al- 
ways free  from  all  hurtful  qualities,  and  as  the  fcetid  and  nauseous  are  ge- 
nerally poisonous,  it  seems  that  mankind  have  in  some  measure  an  instinct- 
ive principle  by  which  food  is  to  be  selected. 

Raceme.  Having  the  florets  on  short  undivided  pedicels,  arranged  along  a 
general  peduncle,  as  currants. 

Eachis.  The  filaform  receptacle,  connecting  the  florets  in  a  spike,  as  in  the 
heads  of  wheat. 

Radiate.  The  spreading  florets  around  the  margin  of  a  compound  flower — 
as  the  sunflower. 

Radical.     Proceeding  immediately  from  the  root. 

Radicle.     The  little  fibrous  branches  proceeding  from  the  main  root. 

Ray.     The  outer  margin  or  circumference  of  a  compound  flower. 

Receptacle.  The  base  which  sustains  the  other  parts,  being  at  the  end  of 
the  flower  stem. 

Recurved.     Curved  downwards. 

Reflexed.     Bent  back,  nearly  or  quite  to  touch  the  stem  or  peduncle. 

Refrigerants.     Substances  which  directly  reduce  the  heat  of  the  body. 

Regular.     See  equal. 

Reniform.     See  kidney-form. 

Resupinate.     Upside  down. 

Reticulate.     Netted.     Having  veins  crossing  each  other  like  net-work. 

Retuse.     Emarginate  with  a  shallow  sinus. 

Rib.     a  nerve-like  support  to  a  leaf. 

Rigid.     Stiff,  infle.xible,  or  not  pliable. 

Ring.     The  band  around  the  capsules  of  ferns  which  is  elastic. 

RiNGENT.  Having  the  throat  open,  as  mi^t,  motherwort,  catnip,  monkey- 
flower. 

Roots.  The  descending  parts  of  vegetables,  being  annual,  biennial  or  peren- 
nial. 

Rosaceous.  A  corol  formed  of  roundish  spreading  petals  without  claws,  or 
with  extremely  short  ones,  as  rose,  apple,  kc. 

Rotate.  Wbecl-form,  having  a  spreading  border  without  a  tube,  or  with  an 
exceeding  short  one,  as  borage,  laurel. 

Rough.     Covered  with  dots  which  are  harsh  to  the  touch. 

Rugose.  Wrinkled  or  humped.  Veins  more  contracted  than  the  disk,  so  that 
the  intermediate  pyrenchyma  rises  up  between  them. 

Runcinate.  Pinnatifid,  with  the  divisions  pointing  backwards,  as  the  dan- 
delion. 

Sabre-form.     See  acinaciform. 

Sagitate.     Shaped  like  an  arrow  head  ;  differing  from  the  cordate  in  having 

the  hind  lohes  more  or  less  acute. 
Salver-form,     Having  a  flat  spreading  limb  or  border,  proceeding  from  the 

top  of  a  ttl  e,  as  lilac.  Sic. 
Samara.    A  winged  pericarp  not  opening  by  valves,  as  the  maple. 
SAucEn-roR.M.     Shaped  like  a  common  tea  saucer. 
ScAiiRous.     Rough. 
Scalv.    Covered  more  or  less  with  scaly  appendages,  as  fern  roots  ;   or  con- 


162  THE    THOMSONIAN 

sisting  of  substances  in  some  measure  resembling  coarse  fish  scales — as  the 
scales  of  lily  roots. 

ScAPK.  That  kind  of  flower-bearing  stem  which  springs  immediately  from  the 
root,  and  is  destitute  of  leaves,  as  dandelion. 

ScARious.     Ury  and  membranous,  generally  transparent. 

Scattered,     standing  without  any  rcsular  order. 

ScROBicui.ATE.     Deep  round  pits  on  the  receptacle  give  it  this  name. 

Secernant  STIMULANTS.  Substauccs  which  increase  perspiration  or  promote 
the  secretion  of  other  substances  which  it  is  desirable  to  have  evacuated 
from  the  system. 

Segment.     The  parts  into  v,'hich  a  calyx,  corol,  leaf,  Stc.  is  divided  or  cut. 

Sericeus.     Covered  with  soft  close-pressed  hairs. 

Serrate.  Having  sharp  notches  resembling  saw  teeth  along  the  margin,  and 
pointing  towards  the  apex,  as  those  of  chery  trees,  roses,  Stc. 

Serrulate.     When  a  serrate  leaf  has  the  teeth  serrate  again. 

Sessile.  Sitting  down.  When  a  leaf,  flower,  seed-down,  pileus  of  a  fungus, 
receptacle  of  a  lichen,  &c.  are  destitute  of  a  petiole,  peduncle,  stipe,  &.c. 

Setaceous.     Bristle  form. 

Setose.     Bristly. 

Sharp.     Tapering  to  a  point. 

Sheath.     The  lengthening  a  leaf  down  the  stem,  which  it  encloses. 

Sheathing.  With  the  leaf  prolonged  down  the  stem  so  as  to  cover  it,  in  the 
manner  of  the  grasses. 

Shields,  scuttella.  That  kind  of  receptacle  of  lichens  •which  is  open,  orbicu- 
lar, saucer-like.  The  under  side  and  border  are  of  the  substance  and  color 
of  the  frond.  The  disk  is  of  a  different  color  and  substance  from  the  bor- 
der and  frond,  containing  the  seeds  in  extremely  minute  vertical  cells.  The 
shields  are  thick  and  tumid  when  they  are  sessile,  and  membranous  when 
stalked  or  elevated.     Very  rarely  they  are  perforated  in  the  centre. 

SiLiCLE.     A  little  silique,  whose  length  and  breadth  are  nearly  equal. 

Silique.  That  kind  of  pod  which  has  a  longitudinal  partition,  Aviih  the  seeds 
attached  alternately  to  its  opposite  edges,  as  radish,  &c. 

SiLiQUE-FORM.     Shaped  like  a  silique,  without  its  essential  character. 

Silky.     Covered  with  soft  close-pressed  hairs. 

Simple.     Having  a  single  flower  on  a  receptacle,  as  in  the  quince,  tulip,  ?cc. 

Sinuate.  Having  the  margin  hollowed  with  deep  sinuses  or  bays,  as  the 
white  oak. 

Sinuate  serrate.     Having  serratures  hollowed  out 

Solitary.     Standing  alone,  or  very  distant  from  others  of  the  same  kind. 

Somewhat.  Used  as  a  diminutive  ;  implying  in  some  degree  not  fully.  Pre- 
sident Smith  translates  sub  hy  somewhat,  when  combined  with  an  adjective  ; 
as  subtriftdus,  somewhat  three-cleft. 

Spadix.     An  elongated  receptacle  proceeding  from  a  spathe,  as  Indian  turnip. 

Spangles,  patellula.  Open  and  orbicular,  like  shields,  but  sessile,  and  not 
formed  of  any  part  of  the  crust,  from  which  they  differ  in  color,  being  most 
usually  black.  The  seeds  are  lodged  beneath  the  membrane  that  covers  their 
disk,  as  in  the  former ;  and  the  disk  is  surrounded  by  a  yro-per  border. 
Their  seeds  are  observed  to  be  naked  in  the  cellular  substance  of  the  disk, 
not  enclosed  in  cases.  Disk  sometimes  concave  or  flat — cftencr  convex, 
and  even  globose,  without  any  apparent  border  when  in  an  advanced  state. 

Spathe.  A  kind  of  membrane  which  at  first  encloses  the  flower,  and  after  it 
expands  is  left  at  a  distance  below  it,  as  daffodil,  onion,  8cc. 

Spatulate.     Roundish,  and  diminishing  into  a  long,  narrow,  linear  base. 

Spherules.     Small  globular  masses. 

Spike.  Having  the  florets  sessile,  or  nearly  so,  on  the  elongated  general  re- 
ceptacle, as  wheat,  mullein,  &c. 

Spikelet.     One  of  the  subdivisions  of  a  spike. 

Spindle-form.  Thick  at  the  top,  and  tapering  downward,  as  carrot,  par- 
snip, &,c. 

Spinose.     Thorny. 

Spieal.    Twisted  like  a  screw. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  163 

Spur.     An  elongated  process  from  the  base,  or  from  near  the  base  of  the  ca- 
^'  lyx,  or  corofor  nectary,  somewhat  resembling  a  horn  or  cock's  spur. 
Squakkose.     Ragged.     When  the  points  of  scales,  &c.  bend  outwards,  so  as 
to  make  a  ragged  appearance.    It  is  also  used  for  scurfy,  or  when  covered 
with  a  bran-like  scurf. 
Stamens.     The  organs  immediately  surrounding  or  adjoining  the  central  one; 
consisting  of  mealy  or  glutinous  knobs,  either  sessile  or  supported  on  fila- 
ments. 
StaimiiVate.     Having  stamens  only — as  those  in  the  tassels  of  Indian  corn. 
Stellate.     Spreading  out  in  a  radiate  manner.     Leaves  are  stellate,  when 

three  or  more  surround  the  stem  in  a  whorl. 
Stem.     The  main  base  or  supporter  of  the  fructification  and  herbage. 
Stigma.     The  organ  which  terminates  the  pistil. 
Sting.     Hair-like  processes,  mostly  from  the  leaves,  as  nettles. 
Stipe.     The  stem  of  a  fern,  of  a  fungus,  of  compound  egret,  and  of  a  peri- 
carp when  elevated  from  the  receptacle. 
Stipule.     A  leafet  or  scale  near  the  base  of  a  petiole. 
Stomachics.     Substances  which  directly  excite  and  strengthen  the  action  of 

the  stomach. 
Striate,  streaked.     Marked  or  grooved  with  slender  lines. 
Strigose.     Armed  with  small,  close,  rigid  bristles,  which  are  thickest  below. 
Strobile.     An  anient  with  woody  scales,  as  the  fruit  of  the  pine. 
Style.     That  part  of  the  pistil  which  connects  the  stigma  and  the  germ. 
Sub.     Used  in  combination  as  a  diminutive  for  somewhat. 
Subulate..    Linear  at  the  base,   and  becoming  more  or  less  curved  at  the 

point. 
Sulcate,  svlcatus.     Furrowed — marked  with  deep  lines. 
Superior.    A  calyx  or  corol  is  superior  when  it  proceeds  from  the  upper  part 

of  the  germ. 
Suture.     A  seam-like  appearance  at  the  meeting  of  two  parts,  as  the  valves 

of  pea  pods. 
Sword-form.     See  ensiform. 
Tegument.     The  skin  or  bark  of  seeds. 

Tendril.     The  filiform  appendage  by  which  climbing  plants  support  them- 
selves on  other  bodies. 
Terete.     Round,  columnar,  and  tapering  from  the  base  to  the  other  end. 
Terminal.      Proceeding  from,    or  occupying,   the  end   of  a   stem,  branch, 

style,  &,c. 
Ternate.     Having  three  leafets  proceeding  from  the  end  of  one  petiole. 
Thorn,  or  spine,      A  sharp  process  from  the  bark,  as  those  on  raspberry- 
bushes  &c. 
Throat.     See  faux. 
Thyrse.     a  panicle  contracted  into  a  compact,  somewhat  ovate  form,  as  in 

lilac. 
TiDGE.    The  ascending  herbage-bearing  trunk  or  stem  of  all  phenogamous 
plants,  except  the  grasses,  as  the  trunk  of  the  oak,  the  grape  vine,  the  mul- 
lein stalk. 
ToMENTOsE.     Covered  with  fine  downy  or  cottony  substance,  matted  together. 
Tonics.     Substances  which  give  strength  to  the  system.    They  are  stimulants 

which  are  permanent  in  their  operation. 
Toothed.     Having  projections  from  the  margin  of  its  own  substance,  which 

are  neither  serratures  nor  crenatures — as  those  of  blue-bottle. 
ToRULOsE.     With  swelling  ridges  or  humps,  like  the  muskmellon,  or  horse- 
radish pod. 
Translucent.     Transmitting  light  faintly. 
Transverse.     Crosswise. 
Triangular.     Having  three  angles  or  corners.    It  is  applied  to  a  leaf  with 

three  points  or  corners. 
Tripinnate.     Thrice  pinnate. 
Tripinnatifid.     a  pinnatifid  leaf,  with  the  divisions  pinnatifid,  and  those 

latter  divisions  pinnatifid  again. 
Triternate.    Three  times  ternate. 


164  THE    THOMSOiMAN 

Truncate.     The  end  appearing  as  if  cut  off. 

Tube.     The  lower  hollow  cylinder  of  a  nionopetalous  corol. 

Tubercles.  That  kind  of  receptacles  of  lichens  which  is  spherical  or  slightly 
conic,  nearly  closed,  crustaceous,  black  ;  more  or  less  immersed  in  the  sur- 
face of  the  crustaceous  frond,  which  it  elevates ;  or  sometimes  it  is  exposed, 
being  merely  sessile.  Each  contains  a  ball  or  mass  of  connected  seeds,  des- 
titute of  cells,  enveloped  in  a  common  membrane.  The  whole  mass  of  seeds 
is  at  length  discharged  together  by  an  orihce  at  the  top  of  the  tubercle.  We 
often  lind  these  tubercles  after  the  seeds  are  discharged. 

Tuberous.  Hoots  which  are  thick  and  fleshy,  but  not  of  any  legular  globular 
form. 

TuBULOUs,  tubulose.  That  co"  ol  of  a  compound  flower  which  forms  a  whole 
tube,  not  a  ligulate  floret.  It  is  also  applied  to  a  perianth,  if  the  whole  or 
the  lower  part  is  a  hollow  cylinder. 

Turbinate      Top  form. 

TuROiD.     Thickened,  swollen,  but  not  inflated. 

Twining.     Ascending  spirally. 

Valve.  The  several  pieces  of  a  pericarp  which  separate  naturally  on  ripen- 
ing are  called  valves  ;  also,  the  leaves  or  chaffs  of  a  glume.  Each  piece  is 
called  a  valve.  This  name  is  sometimes  applied  to  the  scales  which  close 
the  tube  in  some  corols. 

Variety.  The  changes  produced  among  plants  of  the  same  species  by  acci- 
dental causes — as  by  soil,  situation,  culture,  climate,  &c.  These  changes 
respect  magnitude,  fulness  of  flowers,  crUying  of  leaves,  color,  taste,  and 
smell.  If  the  same  kind  of  plant  can  possibly  be  produced  from  the  seed  of 
other  kinds,  these  are  but  varieties  of  the  same  species.  All  apples  are  but 
varieties  of  the  same  species. 

Vaulted.     Arched  over  like  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

Veined.     Havins  tendinous  fibres  variously  branched. 

Ventricose.     Swelling  out  as  if  blown  up  with  wind. 

Vertical.  Standing  or  hanging  up  and  down  at  right  angles  with  the  hori- 
zon— or  parallel  to  the  stem. 

Vesicular.     Containing  or  consistinsr  of  a  cellular  substance. 

ViLLOSE.     Having  a  superficial  coverins  of  long,  soft,  whitish  hairs. 

Viscid.     Covered  superficially  with  a  sticky  juice. 

Umbel.  Having  the  flower  stems  diverging  from  one  place,  like  the  braces 
of  an  umbrella,  bearing  florets  on  their  extremities,  as  carrot,  dill,  fennel. 

U-MBELLiFERous.     Bearing  umbcls,  as  carrot,  dill,  fennel. 

Umbillicate.  Having  a  kind  of  central  roundish  hollow  or  protuberance, 
as  on  the  end  of  an  apple  or  of  a  pompion. 

U.varmed.     Having  no  thorns  or  prickles. 

Undulate.     Wavy. 

Unequal.     The  parts  not  corresponding  in  size,  form  and  duration. 

Volva.  The  rins  or  wrapper  at  first  enclosing  the  head  of  a  fungus  ;  and 
which,  after  the  plant  has  arrived  at  maturity,  contrasts  and  remains  on  the 
stem  or  at  the  root. 

Urceolate.     Swelling  out  like  a  pitcher,  and  not  contracting  much  at  top. 

Urn-form.  Swelling  in  the  middle,  and  contracting  at  the  top — as  the  calyx 
of  the  rose. 

Utricles.     The  little  bag-like  reservoirs  for  sap. 

Utriculus.     a  little  bladder. 

Wedge-form.     Obovate  with  straightish  sides. 

Wheel-form.  Having  a  spreading  border  without  a  tube,  or  with  an  exceed- 
ing short  one,  as  borage,  laurel. 

Whorled.  Surrounding  the  stem  in  nttmbers  at  intervals ;  as  the  leaves  of 
bedstraw  and  the  flowers  of  motherwort. 

Wings.     The  two  side  petals  in  a  papilionaceous  corol. 

Withering.  Having  a  shriveled  and  decaying  appearance,  though  not  actu- 
ally in  a  state  of  decay  ;  as  the  flowers  of  elm. 

Wood.    The  most  solid  part  of  the  trunks  and  roots  of  herbs  and  trees. 

Zigzag.    See  flexuose. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  165 

THE  GROWTH  AND  EXTRACTIVE  MATTER  OF 
VEGETATION. 

Vegetable.  Vegetahilis.  One  of  the  three  great  divisions 
of  nature.  The  most  obvious  difference  between  ve<(etables 
and  animals  is,  that  the  latter  are,  in  general,  capable  of  con- 
veying themselves  from  place  to  place:  whereas  vegetables,  be- 
ing fixed  in  the  same  place,  absorb,  by  means  of  their  roots  and 
leaves,  such  support  as  is  within  their  reach. 

The  nutrition  or  support  of  plants  appears  to  require  water, 
earth,  light,  and  air.  There  are  various  experiments  which 
have  been  instituted  to  show,  that  water  is  the  only  aliment  which 
the  root  draws  from  the  earth.  Van  Helmot  planted  a  willow, 
weighing  fifty  pounds,  in  a  certain  quantity  of  earth  covered 
with  sheet  lead ;  he  watered  it  for  five  years  with  distilled  wa- 
ter ;  and  at  the  end  of  that  time  the  tree  weighed  one  hundred 
and  sixty-nine  pounds  three  ounces,  and  the  earth  in  which  it 
had  vegetated  was  found  to  have  suffered  a  loss  of  no  more 
than  three  ounces.  Boyle  repeated  the  same  experiment  upon 
a  plant,  which  at  the  end  of  two  years  weighed  fourteen  pounds 
more,  without  the  earth  in  which  it  had  vegetated  having  lost 
any  perceptible  portion  of  its  weight. 

buhamel  and  Bonnet  supported  plants  with  moss,  and  fed 
them  with  mere  water  ;  they  observed,  that  the  vegetation  was 
of  the  most  vigorous  kind  ;  and  the  naturalist  of  Geneva  ob- 
serves, that  the  flowers  were  more  odoriferous,  and  the  fruit  of 
a  higher  flavor.  Care  was  taken  to  change  the  supports  before 
they  could  suffer  any  alteration.  Tillet  has  likewise  raised 
plants,  more  especially  of  the  gramineous  kind,  in  a  similar 
manner,  with  this  difference  only,  that  his  supports  were  pound- 
ed glass,  or  quartz  in  powder.  Hales  has  observed,  that  a  plant 
which  weighed  three  pounds  gained  three  ounces  after  a  heavy 
dew.  Do  we  not  every  day  observe  hyacinths  and  otlier  bulb- 
ous plants,  as  well  as  gramineous  plants,  raised  in  saucers  or 
bottles  containing  mere  water?  And  Braconnot  has  lately 
found  mustard-seed  to  germinate,  grow  and  produce  plants,  that 
came  to  maturity,  flowered  and  ripened  their  seed,  in  litharge, 
flowers  of  sulphur,  and  very  small  unglazed  shot.  The  last  ap- 
peared least  favorable  to  the  growth  of  the  plants,  apparently 
because  their  roots  could  not  penetrate  between  it  so  easily. 

All  plants  do  not  demand  tlie  same  quantity  of  water ;  and 
nature  has  varied  the  oro-ans  of  the  several  individuals  confor- 
mably to  the  necessity  of  their  being  supplied  with  this  food. 
Plants  which  transpire  little,  such  as  the  mosses  and  the  lich- 
ens, have  no  need  of  a  considerable  quantity  of  this  fluid  ;  and 
accordingly  they  are  fixed  upon  dry  rocks,  and  have  scarcely 
any  roots ;  but  plants  which  require  a  larger  quantity,  have 


166  THE   THOMSONIAN 

roots  which  extend  to  a  great  distance,  and  absorb  humidity 

throughout  their  whole  surface. 

The  leaves  of  plants  have  likewise  the  property  of  absorbing 
water,  and  of  extracting  from  the  atmosphere  the  same  princi- 
ple which  the  root  draws  from  the  earth.  But  plants  which 
live  in  the  water,  and  as  it  were  swim  in  the  element  which 
serves  them  for  food,  have  no  need  of  roots  ;  they  receive  the 
fluid  at  all  their  pores  ;  and  we  accordingly  find,  that  the  fucus, 
the  ulva,  &c.  have  no  roots  whatever. 

The  dung  which  is  mixed  with  earths,  and  decomposed,  not 
only  affords  the  alimentary  principles  we  have  spoken  of,  but 
hkewise  favours  the  growtli  of  the  plant  by  that  constant  and 
steady  heat  which  its  ulterior  decomposition  produces.  Thus 
it  is  that  Fabroni  affirms  his  having  observed  the  development 
of  leaves  and  flowers  in  that  part  of  the  tree  only,  winch  was 
in  the  vicuiity  of  a  heap  of  dung. 

From  the  preceding  circumstances  it  appears,  that  the  influ- 
ence of  the  earth  in  vegetation  is  almost  lotally  confined  to  the 
conveyance  of  water,  and  probably  the  elastic  products  from 
putrefying  substances,  to  the  plant. 

Vegetables  cannot  live  without  air.  From  the  experiments 
of  Priestley,  Ingenhousz,  and  Sennebier,  it  is  ascertained,  that 
plants  absorb  the  azotic  part  of  the  atmosphere  ;  and  this  prin- 
ciple appears  to  be  the  cause  of  the  fertility  which  arises  from 
the  use  of  putrefying  matters  in  the  form  of  manure.  The  car- 
bonic acid  is  likewise  absorbed  by  vegetables,  when  its  quanti- 
ty is  small.     If  in  large  quantity,  it  is  fatal  to  them. 

Chaptal  has  observed,  that  carbonic  acid  predominates  in  the 
fungus,  and  other  subterraneous  plants.  But,  by  causing  these 
vegetables,  together  with  the  body  upon  which  they  were  fixed, 
to  pass,  by  imperceptible  gradations,  from  an  almost  absolute 
darkness,  into  the  light,  the  acid  very  nearly  disappeared  ;  the 
vegetable  fibres  being  proportionally  increased,  at  the  same 
time  that  the  resin  and  coloring  principles  were  developed, 
which  he  ascribes  to  the  oxygen  of  the  same  acid.  Sennebier 
has  observed,  that  the  plants  which  he  watered  with  water  im- 
pregnated with  carbonic  acid,  transpired  an  extraordinary  quan- 
tity of  oxygen,  which  likewise  indicates  a  decomposition  of  the 
acid. 

Light  is  almost  absolutely  necessary  to  plants.  In  the  dark, 
they  ijrow  pale,  languish,  and  die.  The  tendency  of  plants  to- 
wards the  light  is  remarkably  seen  in  such  vegetation  as  is  ef- 
fected in  a  chamber  or  place  where  the  light  is  admitted  on  one 
side  ;  for  the  plant  never  fails  to  grow  in  that  direction.  Wheth- 
er tfie  matter  of  light  be  condensed  into  the  substance  of  plants, 
or  whether  it  act  merely  as  a  stimulus  or  agent,  whithout  which 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  167 

the  other  requisite  chemical  processes  cannot  be  eftected,  is  un- 
certain. 

It  is  ascertained,  that  the  processes  in  plants  serve,  like  those 
in  animals,  to  produce  a  more  equitable  temperature,  wbich  is 
for  the  most  part  above  that  of  the  atmosphere.  Dr.  Hunter, 
quoted  by  Clutptal,  observed,  by  keeping  a  thermometer  plun- 
ged in  a  hole  made  in  a  sound  tree,  that  it  constantly  indicated 
a  temperature  several  degrees  above  that  of  the  atmosphere, 
when  it  was  below  the  fifty-sixth  division  of  Fahrenheit ;  where- 
as the  vegetable  heat,  in  hotter  weather,  was  always  several  de- 
grees below  that  of  the  atmosphere.  The  same  philosopher  has 
likewise  observed,  that  the  sap  which,  out  of  the  tree,  would 
freeze  at  32  degrees,  did  not  freeze  in  the  tree  unless  the  cold 
augmented  15  degrees  more. 

The  vegetable  heat  may  increase  or  diminish  by  several 
causes,  of  the  nature  of  disease ;  and  it  may  even  become  per- 
ceptible to  the  touch  in  very  cold  weather,  according  to  Butfon. 

The  principles  of  which  vegetables  are  composed,  if  we  pur- 
sue their  analysis  as  fiir  as  our  means  have  hitherto  allowed, 
are  chiefly  carbon,  hydrogen,  and  oxygen.  Nitrogen  is  a  con- 
stituent principle  of  several,  but  for  the  most  part  in  small 
quantity.  Potassa,  soda,  lime,  magnesia,  silex,  alumina,  sul- 
phur, phosphorus,  iron,  manganese  and  muriatic  acid,  have 
likewise  been  reckoned  in  the  number  ;  but  some  of  these  oc- 
cur only  occasionally,  and  chiefly  in  very  small  quantities; 
and  are  scarcely  more  entitled  to  be  considered  as  belonging  to 
them  than  gold,  or  some  other  substances,  that  have  been  oc- 
casionally procured  from  their  decomposition. 

The  fiilowing  are  the  principal  products  of  vegetation  : 

1-  ks'uei-ar.  Crystalizes.  Soluble  in  water  and  alcohol. 
Taste  sweet.     Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

2.  Sarcocol.  Does  not  crystal ize.  Soluble  in  water  and  al- 
cohol. Taste  bitter  sweet.  Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields 
oxalic  acid. 

3.  Asparagin.  Crystalizes.  Taste  cooling  and  nauseous. 
Soluble  in  hot  water.  Insoluble  in  alcohol.  Soluble  in  nitric 
acid,  and  converted  into  bitter  principle  and  artificial  tannin. 

4.  Gtnn.  Does  not  crystalize.  Taste  insipid.  Soluble  in 
water,  and  forms  mucilage.  Insoluble  in  alcohol.  Precipitat- 
ed by  silicated  potassa.  Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  forms  mu- 
cous and  oxalic  acids. 

5.  Ulmiii.  Does  not  crystalize.  Taste  insipid.  Soluble  in 
water,  and  does  not  form  mucilage.  Precipitated  by  nitric  and 
oxy muriatic  acids  in  the  state  of  resin.     Insoluble  in  alcohol. 

6.  Iniilin.  A  white  powder.  Insoluble  in  cold  water.  So- 
luble in  boiling  water ;  but  precipitates  unaltered  after  the  so- 


168  THE    THOMSONIAN 

lution  cools.     Insoluble  in  alcohol.     Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and 
yields  oxalic  acid. 

7.  Starch.  A  white  powder.  Taste  insipid.  Insoluble  in 
cold  water.  Soluble  in  hot  water;  opaque  and  ^rhiti'ious. 
Preci[)itated  by  an  infusion  of  ntitcralls  ;  precipitate  redissolved 
by  a  heat  of  120deg.  Insoluble  in  alcohol.  Soluble  in  dilute 
nitric  acid,  and  precipitated  by  alcohol.  With  nitric  acid 
yields  oxalic  acid  and  a  waxy  matter. 

8.  Indigo.  A  blue  powder.  Taste  insipid.  Insoluble  in 
water,  alcohol,  asther.  Soluble  in  sulpliuric  acid.  Soluble 
in  nitric  acid,  and  converted  into  bitter  principle  and  artificial 
tannin. 

9.  Ghiten.  Forms  a  ductile  elastic  mass  with  water.  Par- 
tially soluble  in  water ;  precipitated  by  infusion  of  uutgalls 
and  oxys^enized  muriatic  acid.  Soluble  in  acetic  acid  and  mu- 
riatic acid.  Insoluble  in  alcohol.  By  fermentation  becomes 
viscid  and  adhesive,  and  then  assumes  the  properties  of  cheese. 
Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

10.  Albumen.  Soluble  in  cold  water.  Coarfulated  by  heat, 
and  becomes  insoluble.  Insoluble  in  alcohol.  Precipitated  by 
infusion  of  nutgalls.     Soluble  in  nitric  acid.     Soon  putrefies. 

11.  Fibrin.  Tasteless.  Insoluble  in  water  and  alcohol. 
Soluble  in  diluted  alkalies,  and  in  nitric  acid.     Soon  putrefies. 

12.  Gelatin.  Insipid.  Soluble  in  water.  Does  not  coagu- 
late when  heated.     Precipitated  by  infusion  of  galls. 

13.  Bitter  Princijde.  Color  yellow  or  brown.  Taste  bit- 
ter. Equally  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol.  Soluble  in  nitric 
acid.     Precipitated  by  nitrate  of  silver. 

14.  Extractive.  Soluble  in  water  and  alcohol.  Insoluble 
inasther.  Precipitated  by  oxygenized  muriatic  acid,  muriate  of 
tin,  and  muriate  of  alumina  ;  but  not  by  gelatin.  Uyes  fawn 
color. 

15.  Tannin.  Taste  astringent.  Soluble  in  water  and  in  al- 
cohol of  O.SIO.  Precipitated  by  gelatin,  muriate  of  alumina, 
and  muriate  of  tin. 

1(3.  Fixed  oils.  No  smell.  Insoluble  in  water  nnd  alcohol. 
Forms  soaps  with  alkalies.  Coagulated  by  earthy  and  metallic 
salts. 

17.  Wax.  Insoluble  in  wati>r.  Soluble  in  alcohol,  ather, 
and  oils.     Forms  soap  with  alkalies.     Fusible. 

18.  Volatile  oil.  Strong  smell.  Insoluble  in  water.  Solu- 
ble in  alcohol.  Liquid.  Volatile.  Oily.  Ry  iiUric  acid  in- 
flamed, and  converted  into  resinous  substances. 

19.  Camphor.  Strong  odor.  Crystalizes.  Very  little  solu- 
ble in  water.  Soluble  in  alcohol,  oils,  acids.  Insoluble  in  al- 
kalies.    Burns  with  a  clear  flame,  and  volatilizes  before  melting. 


MATERIA    MKDICAi  169 

20.  Birdlime.  Viscid.  Taste  insipid.  Insoluble  in  water. 
Partially  soluble  in  alcohol.  Very  soluble  in  aether.  Solution 
green, 

21.  Resins.  Solid.  Melt  when  heated.  Insoluble  in  wa- 
ter. Soluble  in  alcohol,  a3ther,  and  alkalies.  Soluble  in  acetic 
acid.     By  nitric  acid  converted  into  artificial  tannin. 

22.  Guaiacum.  Possesses  the  characters  of  resins  ;  but  dis- 
solves in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid  and  no  tannin. 

23.  Balsa?ns.  Possesses  the  characters  of  resins  ;  but  have 
a  strong'  smell ;  when  heated,  benzoic  acid  sublimes.  It  sub- 
limes also  when  they  are  dissolved  in  sulphuric  acid.  By  ni- 
tric acid  conv^erted  into  artificial  tannin. 

24.  Caoutchouc.  Very  elastic.  Insoluble  in  water  and  al- 
cohol. When  steeped  in  a3ther,  reduced  to  a  pulp  which  ad- 
heres to  every  thing.  Fusible  and  remains  liquid.  Very  com- 
bustible. 

25.  Gum  resins.  Form  milky  solutions  with  water,  trans- 
parent with  alcohol.  Soluble  in  alkalies.  With  nitric  acid 
converted  into  tannin.  Strong  smell.  Brittle,  opaque,  infusi- 
ble. 

26.  Cotton.  Composed  of  fibres.  Tasteless.  Very  com- 
bustible. Insoluble  in  water,  alcohol,  and  aether.  Soluble  in 
aljcalies.     Yields  oxalic  acid  to  nitric  acid. 

27.  Suher.  Burns  bright,  and  swells.  Converted  by  nitric 
&c\A  into  suberic  acid  and  wax.  Partially  soluble  in  water  and 
alcohol. 

28.  Wood.  Composed  of  fibres.  Tasteless.  Insoluble  in 
water  and  alcohol.  Soluble  in  weak  alkaline  lixivium.  Pre- 
cipitated by  acids.  Leaves  much  charcoal  when  distilled  in  a 
red  heat.     Soluble  in  nitric  acid,  and  yields  oxalic  acid. 

To  the  preceding  we  may  add,  emetin,  fungin,  hematin,  ni- 
cotin,  pollenin  ;  the  new  vegetable  alkalies,  aconita,  atropia, 
brucia,  cicuta,  datura,  delphia,  hyosciama,  morphia,  picrotoxia, 
strytchnia,  veratria ;  and  the  various  vegetable  acids. 


12 


170  THE  THOMSONIAN 

MATTER. 

"  The  Lord  God  formed  man  of  the  dust  of  the  ground^ 
and  breathed  into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  life  ;  and  man 
became  a  living;  soul.''^     Gen.  ii,  chap.  7. 

We  shall  first  treat  of  the  four  elements,  as  matter  ;  second- 
ly, the  elements,  or  matter  organized  ;  thirdly,  the  elements  or 
matter  animated,  or  with  life;  ^nd  fourthly ^  ihe.  diseases  to 
which  the  elements  or  matters  become  subject  in  consequence 
of  animation. 

Man  is  formed  of  the  four  elements,  earth,  water,  air  and 
fire,  and  which  we  divide  into  two  classes,  viz :  passive  and 
active,  or  matter  without  and,  xoith  organization  and  motion. 

Earth  and  water  being  the  passive,  and  fire  and  air  the 
active.  The  union  of  which  produce  the  peculiar  e?is,  quini- 
escence  or  irritability  and  excitability,  that  is  called  life,  and 
thus  a  forced  state  of  existance  is  commenced  and  is  nieiintain- 
ed  for  a  time,  when  it  is  decomposed  and  returns  to  earth 
again  to  nourish  and  invigorate  other  bodies  in  its  turn.  In 
this  species  of  green-house  state  of  existence,  we  are  compelled 
constantly  to  be  tempering  our  bodies  to  the  various  vicissitudes 
of  atmosphere  to  which  we  are  subject,  by  adding  to  or  dimin- 
ishing the  quantity  and  quality  of  our  clothing,  as  well  as  our 
fuel,  food  and  every  other  convenience  that  is  desirable  to 
make  life  tolerable,  in  so  frail  a  body,  during  its  transitory 
abode  upon  earth. 

The  earth  and  water  being  the  component  parts  ;  (  The 
Lord  God  formed  man  of  the  duU  of  the  ground.)  The  fire 
and  air  keep  him  in  motion  by  excitement  and  irritation  ;  [and 
breathed  into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  life,*  and  man  became 
a  living  soul.)  We  shall  first  analyze  the  passive  part,  viz  : 
earth  and  water,  and  then  in  due  course,  the  active  or  excit- 
ing principle,  fire  and  air.  After  which,  it  is  our  design,  to  ex- 
hibit diff"erent  portions  of  the  human  body  in  miniature  in 
anatomy  and  physiology,  in  order  to  give  the  reader  a  more 
just  conception  of  the  animated  mass  of  creation  of  which  he 
forms  so  minute  a  portion. 

We  shall  also  examine  the  different  functions  of  animal  or- 
ganization and  motion,  together  with  the  five  senses,  with  the 
powers  of  speech,  to  express  the  different  passions  and  wants 
to  other  animated  matter,  thus  constituting  the  perfect  man. 

1st.    THE  PASSIVE: 

OR,  EARTH  AND  WATER,  AND  THEIR  COMPONENT  PARTS. 

Although  there  seems  to  be  an  almost  infinite  variety  of 
earthy  substances  scattered  on  the  surface  of  this  globe,  yet 
when  we  examine  them  with  a  chemical  eye,  we  find,  not 

*  Vitality. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  171 

without  surprise,  that  all  the  earth  and  stones  which  we  tread 
under  our  feet,  and  which  compose  the  largest  rocks,  as  well 
as  the  numerous  different  specimines  which  adorn  the  cabinets 
of  the  curious,  are  composed  of  a  very  few  simple  or  elemen- 
tary earths.  "  Analysis  has  shown,  that  the  various  stony  or 
pulverulent  masses,  which  form  our  mountains,  valleys,  and 
plains,  might  be  considered  as  resulting  from  the  combination 
or  intermixture,  in  various  numbers  and  proportions,  of  nine 
primitive  earths,  to  which  the  following  names  were  given : 

*1.  Barytes.  2.  Strontites.  3.  Lime.  4.  Magnesia.  5. 
Alumina,  or  clay.  6.  Silica.  7.  Glucina.  8.  Zirconia.  9. 
Yttria. 

Alkalies,  acids,  metallic  ores,  and  native  metals,  were  sup- 
posed to  be  of  an  entirely  dissimilar  constitution. 

1.  BARYTES.  ~ 

*{From  Barys,  heavy ;  so  called  because  it  is  very  preponderous.)  Cauk; 
Calk;  Terra  ponderosa;  Baryta.  Ponderous  earth ;  Heavy  earth.  United  with 
the  sulphuric  acid,  it  forms  the  mineral  called  sulphate  of  barytes,  or  barosele- 
nite.  When  united  to  carbonic  acid,  it  is  called  aerated  barytes,  or  carbonate 
of  barytes.     See  Heavy  spar. 

Barytes,  is  a  compound  of  barium  and  oxygen.  Oxygen  combines  with  two 
portions  of"  barium,  forming,  1.  Barytes.    2.  Deutoxide  of  barium. 

1.  Barytes,  or  protoxide  of  barium,  "  is  best  obtained,  by  igniting,  in  a  cov- 
ered crucible,  the  pure  crystalized  nitrate  of  barytes.  It  is  procured  in  the 
state  of  hydrate,  by  adding  caustic  potassa  or  soda  to  a  solution  of  the  muri- 
ate of  nitrate.  And  barytes,  slightly  covered  with  charcoal,  may  be  obtained 
by  strongly  igniting  the  carbonate  and  charcoal  mixed  together  in  fine  pow- 
der. Barytes  obtained  from  the  ignited  nitrate  is  of  a  whitish-gray  color  ; 
more  caustic  than  strontites,  or  perhaps  even  lime.  It  renders  the  syrup  of 
violets  green,  and  the  infusion  of  tumeric  red.  Its  specific  gravity  by  Four- 
croy  is  4.  When  water  in  small  quantity  is  poured  on  the  dry  earth,  it  slakes 
like  quicklime,  but  perhaps  with  evolution  of  more  heat.  When  swallowed 
it  acts  as  a  violent  poison.     It  is  destitute  of  smell. 

When  pure  barytes  is  exposed,  in  a  porcelain  tube,  at  a  heat  verging  on  ig- 
nition, to  a  stream  of  dry  oxygen  gas.  it  absorbs  the  gas  rapidly,  and  passes 
to  the  state  of  deutoxyde  of  barium.  But  when  it  is  calcined  in  contact  with 
atmospheric  air,  we  obtain  at  first  this  deutoxyde  and  carbonate  of  barytes  ; 
the  former  of  which  passes  very  slowly  into  the  latter,  by  absorption  of  car- 
bonic acid  from  the  atmosphere. 

2.  The  deutoxyde  of  barium  is  of  a  greenish-gray  color,  it  is  caustic,  renders 
tlie  syrup  of  violets  green,  and  is  not  decomposable  by  heat  or  light.  The 
voltaic  pile  reduces  it.  Exposed  at  a  moderate  heat  to  carbonic  acid,  it  ab- 
sorbs it,  emitting  oxygen,  and  becoming  carbonate  of  barytes.  The  deu- 
toxyde is  probably  decomposed  by  sulpluiretted  hydrogen  at  ordinary  temper- 
atures. Aided  by  heat,  almost  all  combustible  bodies,  as  well  as  many  me- 
tals, decompose  it.  The  action  of  hydrogen  is  accompanied  with  remarkable 
phenomena. 

Water  at  .50^  F.  dissolves  one-twentieth  of  its  weight  of  barytes,  and  at  212'' 
about  one-half  of  its  weight.  It  is  colorless,  acrid,  and  caustic.  It  acts  pow- 
erfully on  the  vegetable  purples  and  yellows.  Exposed  to  the  air,  it  attracts 
carbonic  acid,  and  the  dissolved  barytes  is  converted  into  carbonate,  which 
falls  down  in  insoluble  crusts. 

Sulphur  combines  with  barytes,  when  they  are  mixed  together,  and  heated 
in  a  crucible.  The  same  compound  is  more  economically  obtained  by  igniting 
a  mixture  of  sulphate  of  barytes  and  charcoal  in  fine  powder.  This  sulphu- 
ret  is  of  a  reddish  yellow  color,  and  when  dry  without  smell.  W^hen  this  sub- 
stance is  put  into  hot  water,  a  powerful  action  is  manifested.    The  water  is 


172  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  brilliant  discovery  by  Sir.  H.  Davy,  in   1808,  of  the 
metallic  basis  of  potassa,  soda,  barytes,   strontites,  and  Hme, 

decomposed,  and  Iwo  new  products  are  formed,  namely,  hydrosulphuret,  and 
hydrocuretted  sulphiiret  of  barytes.  The  first  crystalizes  as  the  liquid  cools, 
the  second  remains  dissolved;  The  hydrosulphuret  is  a  compound  of  9.75  of 
barytes  with  2.125  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  Its  crystals  should  be  quickly  se- 
parated by  filtration,  and  dried  by  pressure  between  the  folds  of  porous  paper. 
They  arc  white  scales,  have  a  silky  lustre,  are  soluble  in  water,  and  yield  a 
solution  having  a  greenish  tinge.  Its  taste  is  acrid,  sulphureous,  and  when 
mixed  with  the  hydroguretted  sulphuret,  eminently  corrosive.  It  rapidly  at- 
tracts oxygen  from  the  atmosphere,  and  is  converted  into  the  sulphate  of  ba-  * 
rytcs.  The  hydroguretted  sulphuret  is  a  compound  of  9.75  barytes  with  4.125 
bisulphuretted  hydrogen :  but  contaminated  with  sulphite  and  hyposulphite 
in  unknown  proportions.  The  dry  sulphuret  consists  probably  of  2  sulphur 
-f-9.75  barytes.  The  readiest  way  of  obtaining  barj^les  water  is  to  boil  the 
solution  of  the  sulphuret  with  deutoxyde  of  copper,  which  seizes  the  sulphur, 
while  the  hydrogen  fljes  off,  and  the  barytes  remains  dissolved, 

Phosphuret  of  barytes  may  be  easily  formed  by  exposing  the  constituents  to- 
gether to  heat  in  a  glass  tube.  Their  reciprocal  action  is  so  intense  as  to 
cause  ignition.  Like  phosphuret  of  lime,  it  decomposes  water,  and  causes 
the  disengagement  of  phosphuretted  hydrogen  gas,  which  spontaneously  in- 
flames with  contact  of  air.  When  sulphur  is  made  to  act  on  the  deutoxyde  of 
barytes,  sulphuric  acid  is  formed,  which  unites  to  a  portion  of  the  earth  into 
a  sulphate. 

The  salts  of  barytes  are  white,  and  more  or  less  transparent.  AU  the  solu- 
ble sulphates  cause  in  the  soluble  salts  of  barytes  a  precipitate  insoluble  in  ni- 
tric acid.  They  are  all  poisonous  except  the  sulphate  ;  and  hence  the  proper 
eounter-poison  is  dilute  sulphuric  acid  for  the  carbonate,  and  sulphate  of  so- 
da for  the  soluble  salts  of  barytes." 

Pure  barytes  has  a  much  stronger  affinity  than  any  other  body  for  sulphti- 
ric  acid  ;  it  turns  blue  tincture  of  cabbage  green.  It  is  entirely  fusible  by 
heat  alone,  but  melts  when  mixed  with  various  earths.  Its  specific  gravity  is 
4.000.  It  changes  quickly  in  the  air,  swells,  becomes  soft,  and  falls  into  a 
white  powder,  with  the  acquisition  of  about  one-fifth  of  its  weight.  This  slak- 
ing is  much  more  active  and  speedy  than  that  of  lime.  It  combines  with  phos- 
phorus, v.fhich  compound  decomposes  water  rapidly.  It  unites  to  sulphur  by 
the  dry  and  humid  way.  It  has  a  powerful  attraction  for  water,  which  it  ab- 
sorbs with  a  hissing  noise,  and  consolidates  it  strongly.  It  is  soluble  in  twen- 
times  its  weight  of  cold,  and  twice  its  weight  of  boiling  v.ater.  Its  crystals 
are  long  four-sided  prisms  of  a  satin  like  appearance.  It  is  a  deadly  poison 
to  animals. 

2.  STRONTIA. 

(So  called  because  it  was  first  found  in  a  lead  mine  at  Strontian,  in  Scot- 
land.) A  grayish  white-colored  earth,  found  in  combination  with  carbonic 
acid,  in  the  mineral  called  Strontianite. 

Pure  Strontia  is  of  a  grayish-white  color  ;  a  pungent,  acrid  taste  ;  and  when 
powdered  in  a  mortar,  the  dust  that  rises  irritates  the  lunts  and  nostrils.  Its 
specific  gravity  approaches  that  of  barytes.  It  requires  rather  more  than  160 
parts  of  water  at  60  deg.  to  dissolve  it;  but  of  boiling  water  much  less.  On 
cooling,  it  crystalizes  in  thin,  transparent,  quadrangular  plates,  generally 
parallelograms,  seldom  exceeding  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  length,  and  fre- 
quently adhering  together.  The  edges  are  rnost  frequently  bevelled  from 
each  side.  Sometimes  they  assume  a  cubic  form.  These  crystals  contain 
about  .68  of  water ;  are  soluble  in  51.4  times  their  weight  of  water  at  60  deg., 
and  in  little  more  than  twice  their  weight  of  boiling  water.  They  give  a 
blood-red  color  to  the  flame  of  burning  alcohol.  The  solution  of  strontia 
changes  vegetable  blues  to  a  green.  Strontia  combines  with  sulphur  either  in 
the  wet  or  dry  way,  and  its  sulphuret  is  soluble  in  water. 

In  its  properties,  strontia  has  a  considerable  affinity  to  barytes.  It  differs 
from  it  chiefly  in  being  infusible,  much  less  soluble,  of  a  different  form,  weak- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  173 

subverted  the  ancient  ideas  regarding  the  earth,  and  taught  us 
to  regard  them  as  all  belonging,  by  most  probable  anologies,  to 
the  metallic  class. 

er  in  its  affinities,  and  not  poisonous.  Its  saline  compounds  aflord  diHerences 
more  mai-ked. 

The  basis  of  strontia  is  strontium,  a  metal  first  procured  by  Sir  H.  Davy,  in 
1808,  precisely  in  the  same  raannner  as  barium,  to  which  it  is  very  analogous, 
but  has  less  lustre.  It  appeared  fixed,  diliicultly  fusible,  and  not  volatile.  It 
became  converted  into  strontia  by  exposure  to  air,  and  when  thrown  into  wa- 
ter, decomposed  it  with  great  violence,  producing  hydrogen  gas,  and  making 
the  water  a  solution  of  strontia.  By  igniting  the  mineral  sti'ontianite  intense- 
ly with  charcoal  powder,  strontia  is  cheaply  procured. 

3.  LIME. 
Calx.  1.  The  oxide  of  calcium,  one  of  the  primitive  earths.  It  is  found  in 
great  abundance  in  nature,  though  never  pure,  or  in  an  uncombined  state.  It 
is  always  united  to  an  acid,  and  very  frequently  to  the  carbonic  acid,  as  in 
chalk,  common  lime-stone,  marble,  calcareous  spar,  &c.  It  is  contained  in  the 
waters  of  the  ocean  ;  it  is  lound  in  vegetables  ;  and  is  the  basis  of  the  bones, 
shells,  and  other  hard  parts  of  animals.  Its  combination  with  sulphuric  acid 
is  known  by  the  name  of  sulphate  of  lime  (o^ypsuvi,  or  plaster  of  Paris). 
Combined  with  flouric  acid  it  constitutes  fluate  of  lime,  or  Derbyshire  spar. 

Properties. — Lime  is  in  solid  masses,  of  a  white  color,  moderatelj'  hard,  but 
easily  reducible  to  powder.  Its  taste  is  bitter,  urinous  and  burning.  It  chang- 
es blue  cabbage  juice  to  a  green.  It  is  unalterable  by  the  heat  of  our  furna- 
ces. It  splits  and  falls  into  powder  in  the  air,  and  loses  its  strona;  taste.  It 
is  augmented  in  weight  and  in  size  by  slowly  absorbing  water  and  carbonic 
acid  trom  the  atmosphere.  Its  specific  gravity  is  2.3.  It  combines  with  phos- 
phorus by  heat.  It  unites  to  sulphur  both  in  the  dry  and  humid  way.  It  ab- 
sorbs sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas.  It  unites  with  some  of  the  metallic  oxides. 
Its  slaking  by  water  is  attended  with  heat,  hissing,  splitting  and  swelling  up, 
while  the  water  is  partly  consolidated  and  partly  converted  into  vapor  ;  and 
the  lime  is  reduced  into  a  very  voluminous  dry  powder,  when  it  has  been 
sprinkled  with  only  a  small  quantity  of  water.  It  is  soluble  when  well  pre- 
pared in  about  450  parts  of  water.  It  unites  two  acids.  It  renders  silex  and 
alumine  fusible,  and  more  particularly  these  two  earths  logether. 

Method  of  obtaining  Lime. — Since  the  carbonic  acid  may  be  separated  from 
the  native  carbonate  of  lime,  this  becomes  a  means  of  exhibiting  the  lime  in  a 
state  of  tolerable  purity.  For  this  purpose,  introduce  into  a  porcelain,  or 
earthern  retort,  or  rather  into  a  tubeof  green  glass,  well  coated  over  with  lute, 
and  placed  across  a  furnace,  some  powdered  Carara  marble,  or  oyster-shell 
powder.  Adapt  to  its  lower  extremity  a  bent  tube  of  glass,  conveyed  under  a 
bell.  If  we  then  heat  the  tube,  we  obtain  carbonic  acid  gas  :  and  lime  will  be 
found  remaining  in  the  tube  or  retort. 

The  burning  of  lime  in  the  large  waj',  depends  on  the  disengagement  of  the 
carbonic  acid  by  heat;  and,  as  lime  is  infusible  in  our  furnaces,  there  would 
be  no  danger  from  too  violent  a  heat,  if  the  native  carbonate  of  lime  were  per- 
fectly pure  ;  but  as  this  is  seldom  the  case,  an  extreme  degree  of  heat  produ- 
ces a  commencement  of  vitrification  in  the  mixed  stone,  and  enables  it  to  pre- 
serve its  solidity,  and  it  no  longer  retains  the  qualities  of  lime,  for  it  is  cover- 
ed with  a  sort  of  crust,  which  prevents  the  absorption  of  the  water  when  it  is 
attempted  to  be  slaked.    This  is  called  over-burnt  lime. 

In  order  to  obtain  lime  in  a  state  of  very  great  purity,  the  following  method 
may  be  had  recourse  to. 

Take  Carara  marble,  or  oyster  shells ;  reduce  them  to  powder,  and  dis- 
solve the  powder  in  pure  acetic  acid  ;  precipitate  the  solution  by  carbonate  of 
ammonia.  Let  the  precipitate  subside,  wash  it  repeatedly  in  distilled  water, 
let  it  dry,  and  then  expose  it  to  a  white  heat  for  some  hours. 

The  acetic  acid,  in  this  operation,  unites  to  the  lime,  and  forms  acetate  of 
lime,  disengaging  at  the  same  time  the  carbonic  acid,  which  flies  ofi  in  the 


174  THE  THOMSONIAN 

To  the  above  nine  earthy  substances,  BerzeHus  has  lately 
added  a  tenth,  whic  he  calls  thorina.     Whatever   may  be  the 

gaseous  state :  on  adding  to  the  acetate  of  lime  carbonate  of  ammonia,  ace- 
tate of  ammonia,  and  an  artificial  carbonate  of  lime  are  formed  ;  from  the  lat- 
ter the  carbonic  acid  is  again  expelled,  by  exposure  to  heat,  and  the  lime  is 
left  behind  in  a  state  of  perfect  purity. 

4.  MAGNESIA. 

1.  The  ancient  chemists  gave  this  name  to  such  substances  as  they  con- 
ceived to  have  the  power  of  attracting  any  principle  from  the  air.  Thus  an 
earth  which,  on  being  exposed  to  the  air,  increased  in  weight,  and  yielded  vit- 
riol, they  called  magnesia  vitriolata:  and  later  chemists,  observing  in  their 
process  for  obtaining  magnesia,  that  nitrous  acid  was  separated,  and  an  earth 
left  behind,  supposing  it  had  attracted  the  acid,  called  it  magnesia  nitri,  which, 
from  its  color,  soon  obtained  the  name  oi magnesia  alba. 

2.  The  name  of  one  of  the  primitive  earths,  having  a  metallic  basis,  called 
magnesium.     It  has  been  found  native  in  the  state  of  hydrate. 

Magnesia  may  be  obtained  by  pouring  into  a  solution  of  its  sulphate  a  solu- 
tion of  subcarbonate  of  soda,  washing  the  precipitate,  drying  it,  and  exposing 
it  to  a  red  heat.  It  is  usually  procured  in  commerce,  by  acting  on  magnesian 
limestone  with  the  impure  muriate  of  magnesia,  or  bittern  of  the  sea-salt  man- 
ufactories. The  muriatic  acid  goes  to  the  lime,  forming  a  soluble  salt,  and 
leaves  behind  the  magnesia  of  both  the  bittern  and  limestone.  Or  the  bittern 
is  decomposed  by  a  crude  subcarbonate  of  ammonia,  obtained  from  the  distil- 
lation of  bones  in  iron  cylinders.  Muriate  of  ammonia  and  subcarbonate  of 
magnesia  result.  The  former  is  evaporated  to  dryness,  mixed  with  chalk,  and 
sublimed.  Subcarbonate  of  ammonia  is  thus  recovered,  with  which  a  new 
quantity  of  bittern  may  be  decomposed  ;  and  thus,  in  ceaseless  repetition, 
formiag  an  elegant  and  economical  process.  100  parts  of  crystalized  Epsom 
salt,  require  for  complete  decomposition  56  of  subcarbonate  of  potassa,  or  44 
dry  subcarbonate  of  soda,  and  yield  16  of  pure  magnesia  after  calcination. 

Magnesia  is  a  white,  soft  powder.  Its  sp.  gr.  is  2.3  by  Kirwan.  It  renders 
the  syrup  of  violets,  and  infusion  of  red  cabbage,  green,  and  reddens  turmeric. 
It  is  infusible,  except  by  the  hydroxygen  blow-pipe.  It  has  scarcely  any 
taste,  and  no  smell.  It  is  nearly  insoluble  in  water;  but  it  absorbs  a  quanti- 
ty of  that  liquid  with  the  production  of  heat.  And  when  it  is  thrown  down 
from  the  sulphate  by  a  caustic  alkali,  it  is  combined  with  water  constituting  a 
hydrate,  which,  however,  separates  at  a  red  heat.  It  contains  about  one-fourth 
its  weight  of  water. 

When  magnesia  is  exposed  to  the  air,  it  very  slowly  attracts  carbonic  acid. 
It  combines  with  sulphur,  forming  a  sulphuret. 

The  metallic  basis,  or  magnesium,  may  be  obtained  in  the  state  of  amal- 
gam with  mercury  by  electrization. 

When  magnesia  is  strongly  heated  in  contact  with  2  volumes  of  chlorine, 
this  gas  is  absorbed,  and  one  volume  of  oxygen  is  disengaged.  Hence  it  is 
evident  that  there  exists  a  combination  of  magnesium  and  chlorine,  or  a  true 
chloride.  The  salt  called  muriate  of  magnesia  is  a  compound  of  the  chloride 
and  water.  When  it  is  acted  on  by  a  strong  heat,  by  far  the  greatest  part  of 
the  chlorine  unites  to  the  hydrogen  of  the  water,  and  rises  in  the  form  of  mu- 
riatic acid  gas  ;  while  the  oxygen  of  the  decomposed  water  combines  with  the 
magnesium  to  form  magnesia. 

Magnesia  is  often  associated  with  lime  in  minerals,  and  their  perfect  separ- 
ation becomes  an  interesting  problem  in  analysis. 

Properties. — Pure  magnesia  does  not  form  with  water  an  adhesive  ductile 
mass.  It  is  in  the  form  of  a  very  white  spongy  powder,  soft  to  the  touch,  and 
perfectly  tasteless.  It  is  very  slightly  soluble  in  water.  It  absorbs  carbonic 
acid  gradually  from  the  atmosphere.  It  changes  very  delicate  blue  vegetable 
colors  to  green.  Its  attraction  to  the  acids  is  weaker  than  those  of  the  alka- 
lies. Its  salts  are  partially  decomposed  by  ammonia,  one  part  of  the  magne- 
sia being  precipitated,  and  the  other  forming  a  iriple  compound.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  about  2.3.    It  is  infusible  even  by  the  most  intense  heat  j  but  when 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  175 

revolutions  of  chemical  nomenclature,  mankind  will  never 
cease  to  consider  as   earths,  those   solid  bodies  composing  the 

mixed  with  some  of  the  other  eai'ths  it  becomes  fusible.  It  combines  with 
sulphur.  It  does  not  unite  to  phosphorus  or  carbon.  It  is  not  dissolved  by 
alkalies  in  the  humid  way.  When  heated  strongly,  it  becomes  phosphores- 
cent. With  the  dense  acids  it  becomes  ignited.  With  all  the  acids  it  forms 
salts  of  a  bitter  taste,  mostly  very  soluble. 

5.  ALUMINA. 

Alumine.  Terra  Alumina.  Earth  of  alum.  Pure  clay.  One  of  the  pri- 
mitive earths,  which,  as  constituting  the  plastic  principle  of  all  clays,  loams, 
and  boles,  was  called  argil,  or  the  argillaceous  earth,  but  now,  as  being  ob- 
tained in  greatest  purity  from  alum,  is  styled  alumina.  It  was  deemed  ele- 
mentary matter  till  Sir  H.  Davy's  celebrated  electro-chemical  researches  led 
to  the  belief  of  its  being,  like  barytes  and  lime,  a  metallic  oxyde. 

The  purest  native  alumina  is  found  in  the  oriental  gems,  the  sapphire  and 
ruby.  They  consist  of  nothing  but  this  earth  and  a  small  portion  of  coloring 
matter.  The  native  porcelain  clays  or  kaolins,  hoAvever  white  and  soft,  can 
never  be  regarded  as  pure  alumina.  They  usually  contain  fully  half  their 
weight  of  silica,  and  frequently  other  earths.  To  obtain  pure  alumina  we 
dissolve  alum  in  20  times  its  weight  of  water,  and  add  to  it  a  little  of  the  solu- 
tion of  carbonate  of  soda,  to  throw  down  any  iron  which  may  be  present.  We 
then  drop  the  supernatant  liquid  into  a  quantity  of  the  water  of  ammonia,  tak- 
ing care  not  to  add  so  much  of  the  alummous  solution  as  will  saturate  the  am- 
monia. The  volatile  alkali  unites  with  the  sulphuric  acid  of  the  alum,  and 
the  earthy  basis  of  the  latter  is  separated  in  a  white  spongy  precipitate. 
This  must  be  thrown  on  a  filter,  washed,  or  edulcorated,  as  the  old  chemists 
expressed  it,  by  repeated  affusions  of  water,  and  then  dried.  Gr  if  an  alum 
made  with  ammonia  instead  of  potassa,  as  is  the  case  with  some  French  al- 
ums, can  be  got,  simple  ignition  dissipates  its  acid  and  alkaline  constituents, 
leaving  pure  alumina. 

Alumina  prepared  by  the  first  process  is  white,  pulverulent,  soft  to  the 
touch,  adheres  to  the  tongue,  forms  a  smooth  paste  without  grittiness  in  the 
mouth,  insipid,  inodorous,  produces  no  change  in  vegetable  colors,  insoluble 
in  water,  but  mixes  with  it  readily  in  every  proportion,  and  retains  a  small 
quantity  with  considerable  force ;  is  infusible  in  the  strongest  heat  of  a  fur- 
nace, experiencing  merely  a  condensation  of  volume  and  consequent  hardness 
but  is  in  small  quantities  melted  by  the  oxyhydrogen  blowpipe.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  2.000  in  the  state  of  powder,  but  hj  ignition  it  is  augmented. 

Every  analogy  leads  to  the  belief  that  alumina  contains  a  peculiar  metal 
which  may  be  called  aluminum.  The  first  evidences  obtained  of  this  position 
are  presented  in  Sir  H.  Davy's  researches.  Iron  negatively  electrified  by  a 
very  high  power  being  fused  in  contact  with  pure  alumina,  formed  a  globule 
Tfhiter  than  pure  iron  which  effervesced  slowly  in  water,  becoming  covered 
with  a  white  powder.  The  solution  of  this  in  muriatic  acid,'decomposed  by  an 
alkali,  afforded  alumina  and  oxyde  of  iron.  By  passing  potassium  in  vapor 
through  alumina  heated  to  whiteness,  the  greatest  part  of  the  potassium  be- 
came converted  into  potassa,  which  formed  a  coherent  mass  with  that  part  of 
the  alumina  not  decompounded  ;  and  in  this  mass  there  were  numerous  gray 
particles,  having  the  metallic  lustre,  and  which  became  white  when  heated  in 
the  air,  and  which  slowly  effervesced  in  water.  In  a  similar  experiment  made 
by  the  same  illustrious  chemist,  a  strong  red  heat  only  being  applied  to  the 
alumina,  a  mass  was  obtained,  which  took  fire  spontaneously  by  exposure  to 
air,  and  which  effervesced  violently  in  water.  This  mass  was  probably  an 
alloy  of  aluminum  and  potassium.  The  conversion  of  potassium  into  its  den- 
toxyde,  dry  potassa,  by  alumina,  proves  the  presence  of  oxygen  in  the  latter. 
When  regarded  as  an  oxyde.  Sir  H.  Davy  estimates  its  oxygen  and  basis  to  be 
to  one  another  as  15  to  33  ;  or  as  10  to  22.  The  prime  equivalent  of  alumina 
would  thus  appear  to  be  1.0-f2.2=3.2  But  Berzelius's  analysis  of  sulphate 
of  alumina  seems  to  mdicate  2.136  as  the  quantity  of  the  earth  which  com- 
bines with  five  of  the  acid.  Hence  aluminum  will  come  to  be  represented  bv 
2.136+1=1.136.  ^  ' 


176  THE    THOMSONIAN 

mineral  strata,  which  are  incombustible,  colorless,  not  convert- 
ible into  metals   by  all   the  ordinary  methods  of  reduction,  or 

Alumina  which  has  lost  its  plasticity  by  ignition,  recovers  it  by  being  dis- 
solved in  an  acid  or  alkaline  menstruum,  and  then  precipitated.  In  this  state 
it  is  called  a  hydrate,  for  when  dried  in  a  steam  heat  it  retains  much  Avater  j 
and  therefore  resembles  in  composition  wavellite,  a  beautiful  mineral,  con- 
sisting almost  entirely  of  alumina,  with  about  28  per  cent,  of  water. 

Alumina  is  widely  diffused  in  nature.  It  is  a  constituent  of  every  soil,  and 
of  almost  every  rock.  It  is  the  basis  of  porcelain,  pottery,  bricks,  and  cruci- 
bles. Its  affinity  for  vegetable  coloring  matter,  is  made  use  of  in  tlie  prepara- 
tion of  lakes,  and  in  the  arts  of  dyeing  and  calico  printing.  Native  combina- 
tions of  alumina,  constitute  the  fullers'  earth,  ochres,  boles,  pipe-clays,  &.C. 

The  salts  of  alumina  have  the  following  general  characters : 

1.  Most  of  them  are  very  soluble  in  water,  and  their  solutions  have  a  sweet- 
ish acerb  taste. 

2.  Ammonia  throws  down  their  earthy  base,  even  though  they  have  beCQ 
previously  acidulated  with  muriatic  acid. 

3.  At  a  strong  red  heat  they  give  out  a  portion  of  their  acid. 

4.  Phosphate  of  ammonia  gives  a  white  precipitate. 

5.  Hydriodate  of  potassa  produces  a  flocculent  precipitate  of  a  white  color, 
passing  into  a  permanent  yellow. 

6.  They  are  not  affected  by  oxalate  of  ammonia,  tartaric  acid,  ferroprussir- 
ate  of  potassa,  or  tincture  of  galls:  by  the  first  two  tests  they  are  distinguish- 
able from  jrttria  ;  and  by  the  last  two,  from  that  earth  and  glucina. 

7.  If  bisulphate  of  potassa  be  added  to  a  solution  of  an  aluminous  salt  mod- 
erately concentrated,  octahedral  crystals  of  alum  ydll  form. 

6.   SILICA. 

(Selag,  Hebrew.)  Silcx.  One  of  the  primitive  earths  is  the  principal  con- 
stituent part  of  a  very  great  number  of  tlie  compound  earths  and  stones  fcrmi- 
ing  the  immense  mass  of  the  solid  nucleus  of  the  globe.  It  is  the  basis  of  al- 
most all  the  scintillating  stones,  sucli  as  Jlint,  rock,  crystal,  quartz,  agate,  cal~ 
cedony,  jasper,  8,-c.  The  sand  of  rivers,  and  of  the  sea-shore,  chiefly  consist 
of  it.  It  is  deposited  in  vegetable  substances  forming  petrified  wood,  &c.  IS 
is  likewise  precipitated  from  certain  springs  in  a  stalactical  form.  It  has  been 
discovered  in  several  waters  in  a  state  of  solution,  and  is  found  in  many  plants, 
particularly  grasses  and  equisetums.  Professor  Davy  has  proved  that  it  forms 
a  part  of  the  epidermis  of  these  vegetables.  It  is  never  met  with  absolutely 
pure  in  nature. 

Properties. — Silica,  when  perfectly  pure,  exists  in  the  form  of  a  white  pow- 
der. It  is  insipid  and  inodorous.  It  is  rough  to  the  touch,  cuts  glass,  and 
scratches  or  wears  away  metals.  Its  specific  gravity  is  about  2.C6.  It  is 
unalterable  by  the  simple  combustible  bodies.  When  mixed  witli  water  it 
does  not  form  a  cohesive  mass.  Its  moleculse,  when  diffused  in  Mater,  are 
precipitaied  with  the  utmost  facility.  It  is  not  acted  on  by  any  acid,  except 
the  fluoric.  When  in  a  state  of  extreme  division  it  is  soluble  in  alkalies  ;  fu- 
sed with  them  it  forms  glass.  It  mells  with  the  phosphoric  and  boracic  acids. 
It  is  unchangeable  in  the  air,  and  unalterable  by  oxysen  and  other  gaseous  flu- 
ids. It  has  been  considered  as  insoluble  in  water,  but  it  appears  when  in  a 
state  of  extreme  division  to  be  soluble  in  a  minute  quantity. 

Method  of  obtaining  Silcx. — Silex  may  be  obtained,  tolerably  pure,  from 
flints,  by  the  following  process  :  Procure  some  common  gun-flints  ;  expose 
them  in  a  crucible  to  a  red  heat,  and  then  plunge  them  into  cold  water:  by 
this  treatment  they  will  become  brittle,  and  easily  reducible  to  poM'dcr.  Mil 
them,  when  pulverized,  with  three  or  four  times  their  weight  of  carbonate  of 
potassa,  and  let  the  mixture  be  fused,  in  a  dull  red  heat,  in  a  silver  crucible. 
We  shall  thus  obtain  a  compound  of  alkali  and  silex,  called  silicious  potassa. 
Dissolve  this  compound  in  water,  filter  the  solution,  and  add  to  it  dilute  sul- 
phuric or  muriatic  acid.  An  immediete  precipitation  now  ensues,  and  as  long 
as  this  continues,  add  fresh  portions  of  acid.    Let  tlie  precipitate  subside  ; 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  177 

when  reduced  by  scientific  refinements,  possessing  but  an 
evanescent   metallic   existence,  and   which  either  alone,  or  at 

pour  off  the  fluid  that  floats  above  it ;  and  wash  the  precipitate  with  hot  wa- 
ter till  it  comes  off  tasteless.     This  powder  when  dry  is  siiica. 

In  this  process  the  acid  added  to  the  solution  of  tlint  unites  to  the  potasss', 
and  forms  sulphate  or  muriate  of  potassa  ;  the  silicious  earth  is  therefore  pre- 
cipitated. 

It  is  necessary  to  add  an  excess  of  acid,  in  order  that  all  the  foreign  earths 
which  are  present  may  be  separated. 

If  the  solution  of  iliuts  be  diluted  with  a  great  quantity  of  water,  as  for  in- 
stance, in  the  proportion  of  24  parts  to  one,  and  in  this  state  an  acid  be  poured 
upon  it,  no  perceptible  precipitation  will  ensue ;  the  silex  continues  suspended 
in  the  fluid,  and  is  invisible  on  account  of  its  transparency  ;  but  it  may  be 
made  to  appear  by  evaporating  part  of  the  water. 

The  solution  of  flint,  on  account  of  its  aifinity  with  the  carbonic  acid,  is  also 
in  course  of  time  decomposed  by  mere  contact  with  air. 

Another  method  of  obtaining  silica  exceedingly  pure  is  to  separate  it  from 
fluoric  acid.  In  consequence  of  Sir  11.  Davy's  researches  on  the  metallic  ba- 
ses of  the  alkalies  and  earths,  this  earth  has  been  recently  regarded  as  a  com- 
pound of  a  peculiar  combustible  principle  with  oxygen.  If  we  ignite  powder- 
ed quartz  with  three  parts  of  pure  potassa  in  a  silver  crucible,  dissolve  the 
fuSed  compound  in  water,  add  to  the  solution  a  quantity  of  acid,  equivalent  to 
saturate  the  alkali,  and  evaporate  to  dryness,  we  shall  obtain  a  fine  gritty 
powder,  w^hich  being  well  washed  with  hot  water,  and  ignited,  will  leave  pure 
silica.  By  passing  the  vapor  of  potassium  over  silica  in  an  ignited  tube.  Sir 
H.  Davy  obtained  a  dark-colored  powder,  which  apparently  contained  silicon, 
or  silicium,  the  basis  of  the  earth.  Like  boron  and  carbon,  it  is  capable  of 
sustaining  a  high  temperature  without  suffering  any  change. 

7.  GLUCINA. 

(From  Ghicus,  which  signifies  sweet,  because  it  gives  that  taste  to  the  salts 
in  forms.)  The  name  of  an  earth,  for  the  discovery  of  which  we  are  indebted 
to  Vauquelin,  who  found  it,  in  1795,  in  the  Aigue-marine  or  beryl,  a  transpa 
rent  stone,  of  a  green  color,  and  in  the  emerald  of  Peru.  It  exists  combined 
with  silex,  alumine,  lime,  and  oxide  of  iron,  in  the  one  ;  and  with  the  same 
earths,  and  oxide  of^ciirome,  in  the  other.  It  has  lately  been  discovered  in  the 
gadolinite  by  Mr.  Ekeberg. 

Glucina  is  while,  light,  and  soft  to  the  touch.  It  is  insipid,  and  adheres  to 
the  tongue  ;  and  is  infusible  by  itself  in  the  lire.  Its  specific  gravity  is  2.967. 
It  is  soluble  in  alkalies  and  their  carbonates,  and  in  al'  the  acids  except  the 
carbonic  and  phosphoric,  and  forms  with  them  saccharine  and  slightly  astrin- 
gent salts.  It  is  exceedingly  soluble  in  sulphuric  acid  used  to  excess.  It  is 
fusible  with  borax,  and  forms  with  it  a  transparent  glass.  It  absorbs  one- 
fourth  of  its  weight  of  carbonic  acid.  It  decomposes  sulphate  of  alumine.  It 
is  not  ])recipit;iied  by  the  hydro-sulphurets  nor  by  prussiate  of  polasssj 
but  by  all  the  succinates.  Its  aliinily  for  the  acids  is  intermediate  between 
magnesia  and  alumine. 

To  obtain  this  earth;  reduce  some  beryl  to  an  impalpable  powder,  fuse  it 
with  three  times  its  weight  of  potassa,  and  dissolve  the  mass  in  muriatic  acid. 
Separate  the  silex  by  evaporation  and  filtration,  and  decompose  the  remaining 
fluid  by  adding  carbonate  of  potassa  ;  redissolve  the  deposite  when  washed 
in  sulphuric  acid,  and  by  mingling  this  solution  with  sulphate  of  potassa,  aJ- 
um  will  be  ohtaincd,  which  crystalizes. 

Then  mix  the  fluid  with  a  solution  of  carbonate  of  ammonia,  which  must  be 
used  in  excess ;  filter  and  boil  it,  and  a  white  powder  will  gradually  fall  down, 
which  is  glucine. 

8.  ZIRCONIA. 
Zircon.     An  earth  discovered  in  the  year  1793,  by  Klaproth  of  Berlin,  in  the 
Zircon  or  Jargon,  a  gem  first  brought  from  the  island  of  Ceylon,  but  also  found 
in  France,  Spain,  and  other  parts  of  Europe.    Its  color  is  either,  gray,  greea- 


178  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

least  when  combined  with  carbonic  acid,  are  insipid  and  inso- 
luble in  water. 

ish,  yellowish,  reddish-brown,  oi  purple.  It  has  little  lustre,  and  is  nearly 
opaque.  Zircon  is  likewise  found  in  another  gem  called  the  hyacinth.  This 
stone  is  of  a  yellowish-red  color,  mixed  with  brown.  It  possesses  lustre  and 
transparency.  To  obtain  it,  the  stone  should  be  calcined  and  thrown  into  cold 
water,  to  render  it  friable,  and  then  powdered  in  an  agate  mortar.  Mix  the 
powder  with  nine  parts  of  purs  potassa,  and  project  the  mixture  by  spoonfulls 
into  a  red-hot  crucible,  taking  care  that  each  portion  is  fused  before  another 
is  added.  Keep  the  whole  in  fusion,  with  an  increased  heat,  for  an  hour  and 
a  half.  When  cold,  break  the  crucible,  separate  its  contents,  powder  and  boil 
In  water,  to  dissolve  the  alkali.  Wash  the  insoluble  part ;  dissolve  in  muria.' 
tie  acid  ;  heat  the  solution;  that  the  silex  may  fall  down;  and  precipitate  the 
zircon  by  caustic  fixed  alkali.  Or  the  zircon  may  be  precipitated  by  carbon^ 
ate  of  soda,  and  the  carbonic  acid  expelled  by  heat. 

Neil)  process  for  preparing  pure  Zirconia. — Powder  the  zircons  very  fine, 
mix  them  with  two  parts  of  pure  potassa,  and  heat  them  red  hot  in  a  silver 
crucible,  for  an  hour.  Treat  the  substance  obtained  with  distilled  water,  pour 
it  on  a  filter,  and  wash  the  insoluble  part  well  ;  it  will  be  a  compound  of  zir- 
conia, silex,  potassa,  and  oxide  of  iron.  Dissolve  it  in  muriatic  acid,  and  eva- 
porate to  dryness,  to  separate  the  silex.  Redissolve  the  muriates  of  zirconia 
and  iron  in  water;  and  to  separate  the  zirconia  which  adheres  to  the  silex, 
•wash  it  with  weak  muriatic  acid,  and  add  this  to  the  solution.  Filter  the  flu- 
id, and  precipitate  the  zirconia  and  iron  by  pure  ammonia  ;  wash  the  preeipi- 
tates  well,  and  then  treat  the  hydrates  with  oxalic  acid,  boiling  them  well  to- 
gether, that  the  acid  may  act  on  the  iron,  retaining  it  in  solution,  while  an  in, 
Boluble  oxalate  of  zirconia  is  formed.  It  is  then  to  be  filtered,  and  the  oxalate 
washed,  until  no  iron  can  be  detected  in  the  water  that  passes.  The  earthy 
oxalate  is,  when  dry,  of  an  opaline  color.  After  being  well  washed,  it  is  to  ba 
decomposed  by  heat  in  a  platinum  crucible. 

Thus  obtained,  the  zirconia  is  perfectly  pure,  but  is  not  affected  by  acida. 
It  must  be  reacted  on  by  potassa  as  before,  and  then  washed  until  the  alkali 
is  removed.  Afterwards  dissolve  it  in  muriatic  acid,  and  precipitate  by  am^ 
monia.  The  hydrate  thrown  down,  when  well  washed,  is  perfectly  pure,  and 
easily  soluble  in  acids. 

Zircon  is  a  fine  white  powder,  without  taste  or  smell,  but  somewhat  harsh 
to  the  touch.  It  is  insoluble  in  water  ;  yet  if  slowly  dried,  it  coalesces  into  a 
semitransparent  yellowish  mass,  like  gum-arabic,  which  retains  one-third  its 
weight  of  water.  It  unites  with  all  the  acids.  It  is  insoluble  in  pure  alka- 
lies ;  but  the  alkaline  carbonates  dissolve  it.  Heated  with  the  blowpipe,  il 
does  not  melt,  but  emits  a  yellowish  phosphoric  light.  Heated  in  a  crucible 
of  charcoal,  bedded  in  charcoal  powder,  placed  in  a  stone  crucible,  and  exposed 
to  a  good  forge  fire  for  some  hours,  it  undergoes  a  pasty  fusion,  which  unites 
its  particles  into  a  gray  opaque  mass,  not  truly  vitreous,  but  more  resembling 
porcelain.  In  this  state  it  is  sufficiently  hard  to  strike  fire  with  steel,  and 
scratch  glass;  and  is  of  the  specific  gravity  of  4.3. 

There  is  the  same  evidence  for  believing  that  zirconia  is  a  compound  of  a 
metal  and  oxygen,  as  that  aflorded  by  the  action  of  potassium  on  the  other 
earths.  The  alkaline  metal,  when  brought  into  contact  with  zirconia  ignited 
to  whiteness,  is,  for  the  most  part,  converted  into  potassa,  and  dark  particles, 
which,  when  examined  by  a  magnifying  glass,  appear  metallic  in  some  parts, 
otja  chocolate-brown  in  others,  are  found  diffused  through  the  potassa  and  the 
decompounded  earth. 

According  to  Sir  H.  Davy,  4.66  is  the  prime  equivalent  of  zirconium  on  the 
oxygen  scale,  and  5.66  that  of  zirconia. 

9.  YTTRIA. 

This  is  a  new  earth  discovered  in  1794,  by  Professor  Gadolin,  in  a  stono 
from  Ytterby,  in  Sweden. 

It  may  be  obtained  most  readily  by  fusing  the  gadolinate  with  two  parts  of 
eaustic  potassa,  washing  the  mass  with  boiling  water,  and  filtering  the  liquor, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  179 

Vf  ATER.— {Aqua.) 

This  fluid  is  so  well  known,  as  scarcely  to  require  any  defi- 
nition. 

It  is  transparent,  without  color,  smell,  or  taste ;  in  a  very 
slight  degree  compressible  ;  when  pure,  not  liable  to  spontane- 
ous change  ;  liquid  in  the  common  temperature  of  our  atmos- 
phere, assuming  the  solid  form  at  32  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and 
the  gaseous  at  212  degrees,  but  returning  unaltered  to  its  liquid 
state  on  resuming  any  degree  of  heat  between  those  points  ;  ca- 
pable of  dissolvmg  a  greater  number  of  natural  bodies  than  any 
other  fluid  whatever,  and  especially  those  known  by  the  name 
of  the  saline  ;  performing  the  most  important  functions  in  the 
vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms,  and  entering  largely  into  their 
composition  as  a  constituent  part. 

Native  water  is  seldom,  if  ever,  found  perfectly  pure.  The 
waters  that  flow  within  or  upon  the  surface  of  the  earth,  con- 

which  is  of  a  fine  green.  This  liquor  is  to  be  evaporated,  till  no  more  oxide 
of  manganese  falls  down  from  it  in  a  black  powder;  after  which  the  liquid  is 
to  be  saturated  with  nitric  acid.  At  the  same  time  digest  the  sediment  that 
was  not  dissolved,  in  very  dilute  nitric  acid,  which  will  dissolve  the  earth  with 
much  heat,  leaving  the  silex,  and  the  highly  oxided  iron,  undissolved.  Mix 
the  two  liquors,  evaporate  them  to  dryness,  redissolve  and  filter,  which  will 
separate  any  silex  or  oxide  of  iron  that  may  have  been  left.  A  few  drops  of  a 
solution  of  carbonate  of  potassa  will  separate  any  lime  that  may  be  present, 
and  a  cautious  additionofhydi-o-sulphuret  of  potassa  will  throw  down  the  ox- 
ide of  manganese  that  may  have  been  left ;  but  if,too  much  be  employed,  it 
will  throw  down  the  yttria  likewise.  Lastly,  the  yttria  is  to  be  precipitated 
by  pure  ammonia,  well  washed  and  dried. 

Yttria  is  perfectly  white,  when  not  contaminated  with  oxide  of  manganese, 
from  which  it  is  not  easily  freed.  Its  specific  gravity  is  4.842.  It  has  neither 
taste  nor  smell.  It  is  infusible  alone  ;  but  with  borax  melts  into  a  transparent 
glass,  or  opaque  white,  if  the  borax  were  in  excess.  It  is  insoluble  in  water, 
and  in  caustic  fixed  alkalies  ;  but  it  dissolves  in  carbonate  of  ammonia,  though 
it  requires  five  or  six  times  as  much  as  glucine.  It  is  soluble  in  most  of  the 
acids.  The  oxalic  acid,  or  oxalate  of  ammonia,  forms  precipitates  in  its  so- 
lutions perfectly  resembling  the  muriate  of  silver.  Prussiate  of  potassa,  crys- 
talized  and  redissolved  in  water,  throws  it  down  in  white  grains  ;  phosphate 
of  soda,  in  white  gelatinous  flakes  ;  infusion  of  galls,  in  brown  flocks. 

Some  chemists  are  inclined  to  consider  yttria  rather  as  a  metallic 
than  as  an  earthy  substance  :  their  reasons  are,  its  specific  gravity,  its  forming 
colored  salts,  and  iis  property  of  oxygenizing  muriatic  acid  after  it  has  under- 
gone a  long  calcination. 

When  yttria  is  treated  with  potassium  in  the  same  manner  as  the  other 
earths,  similar  results  are  obtained  ;  the  potassium  becomes  potassa,  and  the 
earth  gains  appearances  of  metallization ;  so  that  it  is  scarcely  to  be  doubted, 
says  Sir  H.  Davy,  that  yttria  consists  of  inflammable  matter,  metallic  in  its  na- 
ture, combined  with  oxygen.  The  salts  of  yttria  have  the  following  general 
characters : — 

1.  Many  of  them  are  insoluble  in  water. 

2.  Precipitates  are  occasioned  in  those  which  dissolve,  by  phosphate  of  so- 
da, carbonate  of  soda,  oxalate  of  ammonia,  tartrate  of  potassa,  and  ferropnis- 
siate  of  potassa. 

3.  If  we  except  the  sweet-tasted  soluble  sulphate  of  yttria,  the  other  salts  of 
this  earth  resemble  those  witU  the  base  of  lime  in  their  solubility. 


180  THE    THOMSONIAN 

tain  various  earthy,  saline,  metallic,  vegetable,  or  animal  parti- 
cles, according  to  the  substances  over  or  through  which  they 
pass.  Rain  and  snow  waters  are  much  purer  than  these,  al- 
though they  also  contain  wliatever  floats  in  the  air,  or  has  been 
exhaled  along  with  the  watery  vapors. 

The  purity  of  water  may  be  known  by  the  following  marks 
or  properties  of  pure  water  : 

1.  Pure  water  is  lighter  than  water  that  is  not  pure. 

2.  Pure  water  is  more  fluid  than  water  that  is  not  pure. 

3.  It  has  no  color,  smell,  or  taste. 

4.  It  wets  more  easily  than  the  waters  containing  metalic  and 
earthy  salts,  called  hard  waters,  and  feels  softer  when  touched. 

5.  Soap,  or  a  solution  of  soap  in  alcohol,  mixes  easily  and 
perfectly  with  it. 

6.  It  is  not  rendered  turbid  by  adding  to  it  a  solution  of  gold 
in  aqua  regia,  or  a  solution  of  silver,  or  of  lead,  or  of  mercury, 
in  nitric  acid,  or  a  solution  of  acetate  of  lead  in  water. 

Water  was,  till  modern  times,  considered  as  an  elementary 
or  simple  substance. 

Previous  to  the  month  of  October,  1776,  the  celebrated  Mac- 
quer,  assisted  by  Sigaud  de  la  Fond,  made  an  experiment  by 
burning  hydrogen  gass  in  a  bottle  without  explosion,  and  hold- 
ing a  white  china  saucer  over  the  flame.  His  intention  appears 
to  have  been  that  of  ascertaining  whether  any  fuliginous  smoke 
was  produced,  and  he  observes,  that  the  saucer  remained  per- 
fectly clean  and  wli^te,  but  was  moistened  with  perceptible 
drops  of  a  clear  fluid,  resembling  water  ;  and  which,  in  fact, 
appeared  to  him  and  his  assistant  to  be  nothing  but  pure  water. 
He  does  not  say  whether  any  test  was  applied  to  ascertain  this 
purity,  neither  does  he  make  any  remark  on  the  fact. 

In  the  month  of  September,  1777,  Bucquet  and  Lavoisier, 
not  being  acquainted  with  the  fact  which  is  incidentally  and 
concisely  mentioned  by  Macquer,  made  an  experiment  to  dis- 
cover what  is  produced  by  the  combustion  of  hydrogen.  They 
fired  five  or  six  pints  of  hydrogen  in  an  open  and  wide-mouthed 
bottle,  and  instantly  poured  two  ounces  of  lime  water  through 
the  flame,  agitating  the  bottle  during  the  time  the  combustion 
lasted.  The  result  of  this  experiment  showed,  that  carbonic 
acid  was  not  produced. 

Before  the  month  of  April,  1781,  Mr.  John  Warltire,  encou- 
raged by  Dr.  Priestley,  fired  a  mixture  of  common  air  and  hy- 
drogen <jas  in  a  close  copper  vessel,  and  found  its  weight  dimi- 
nished. ~  Dr.  Priestley,  likewise,  before  the  same  period,  fired  a 
like  mixture  of  hydrogen  and  oxysfen  gass  in  a  closed  glass 
vessel,  Mr.  Warltire  beinsf  present.  The  inside  of  the  vessel, 
thousfh  clean  and  dry  before,  became  dewy,  and  was  lined  with 
a  sooty  substance.    These  experiments  were  afterward  repeated 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  181 

by  Mr,  Cavendish  and  Dr.  Priestley ;  and  it  was  found,  that 
the  diminution  of  weight  did  not  take  place,  neither  was  the 
sooty  matter  perceived.  These  circumstances,  therefore,  must 
have  arisen  from  some  imperfection  in  the  apparatus  or  materi- 
als with  which  the  former  experiments  were  made. 

It  was  the  summer  of  the  year  1781,  that  Mr.  Henry  Caven- 
dish was  busied  in  examining  what  becomes  of  the  ear  lost  by 
combustion,  and  made  those  valuable  exoeriments  which  were 
read  before  the  Royal  Society  on  the  15th  of  January,  1784. 
He  burned  500,000  grain  measures  of  hydrogen  gas,  with  about 
two  and  a  half  times  the  quantity  of  common  air,  and  by  caus- 
ing the  burned  air  to  pass  thjough  a  glass  tube  8  feet  in  length, 
135  grains  of  pure  water  were  condensed.  He  also  exploded  a 
mixture  of  19,500  grain  measures  of  oxygen  gass,  and  37,000 
of  hydrogen,  in  a  close  vessel.  The  condensed  liquor  was 
found  to  contain  a  small  portion  of  nitric  acid,  when  the  mix- 
ture of  the  air  was  such,  that  the  burned  air  still  contained  a 
considerable  portion  of  oxygen.  In  this  case  it  may  be  pre- 
sumed, that  some  of  the  oxygen  combines  with  a  portion  of  ni- 
trogen present.  ■ 

in  the  mean  time,  Lavoisier  continued  his  researches,  and 
during  the  winter  of  1781-1782,  together  with  Gingembre,  he 
filled  a  bottle  of  six  pints  with  hydrogen,  which  being  fired, 
and  two  ounces  of  lime-water  poured  in,  was  instantly  stopped 
with  a  cork,  through  which  a  flexible  tube  communicating  with 
a  vessel  of  oxygen  was  passed.  The  inflammation  ceased,  ex- 
cept at  the  orifice  of  the  tube,  through  which  the  oxygen  was 
pressed,  where  a  beautiful  flame  appeared.  The  combustion 
continued  a  considerable  time,  during:  which  the  lime-water 
was  agitated  in  the  bottle.  Neither  this,  nor  the  same  experi- 
ment repeated  with  pure  water,  and  with  a  weak  solution  of  al- 
kali instead  of  lime-water,  afforded  the  information  sought  after, 
for  these  substances  were  not  at  all  altered. 

The  inference  of  Mr.  Warltire,  respecting  the  moisture  on 
the  inside  of  the  glass  in  which  Dr.  Priestley  first  fired  hydro- 
gen and  common  air,  was,  that  these  airs,  by  combustion,  de- 
posited the  moisture  they  contained.  Mr.  Watt,  however,  in- 
ferred from  these  experiments,  that  water  is  a  compound  of  the 
burned  airs,  which  have  given  out  their  latent  heat  by  combus- 
tion ;  and  communicated  his  sentiments  to  Dr.  Priestley,  in  a 
letter  dated  April  26,  1783. 

It  does  not  appear,  that  the  composition  of  water  was  known 
or  admitted  in  France  till  the  summer  of  1783,  when  Lax^oisier 
and  De  la  Place,  on  the  24th  of  June,  repeated  the  experiment 
of  burning  hydrogen  and  oxygen  in  a  glass  vessel  over  mercu- 
ry, in  a  still  greater  quantity  than  had  been  burned  by  Mr.  Ca- 
vsadish.      The  result  was  nearly  five  gros  of  pure  water. 


182  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Monge  made  a  similar  experiment  at  Paris,  nearly  at  the  same 
time,  or  perhaps  before. 

This  assiduous  and  accurate  philosopher  then  proceeded,  in 
conjunction  with  Meusnier,  to  pass  the  steam  of  water  through 
a  red  hot  iron  tube,  and  found  that  the  iron  was  oxydized,  and 
hydrogen  disengaged  ;  and  the  steam  of  water  being  passed 
over  a  variety  of  other  combustible  or  oxidable  substances  pro- 
duced similar  results,  the  water  disappearing  and  hydrogen  be- 
ing disengaged.  These  capital  experiments  were  accounted 
for  by  Lavoisier,  by  supposing  the  water  to  be  decomposed  into 
its  component  parts,  oxygen  and  hydrogen,  the  former  of  which 
unites  with  the  ignited  substance,  while  the  latter  is  disen- 
gaged. 

The  grand  experiment  of  the  composition  of  water  by  Four- 
croy,  Vauquelin,  and  Seguin,  was  begun  on  Wednesday,  May 
13,  1790,  and  was  finished  on  Friday,  the  22d  of  the  same 
month.  The  combustion  was  kept  up  185  hours  with  liitle  in- 
terruption, during  which  time  the  machine  was  not  quitted  for 
a  moment.  The  experimenters  alternately  refreshed  themselves 
when  fatigued,  by  lying  for  a  few  hours  on  mattresses  in  the 
laboratory. 

To  obtain  the  hydrogen,  1.  Zinc  was  melted  and  rubbed  in- 
to a  powder  in  a  very  hot  mortar.  2.  This  metal  was  dissolved 
in  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with  seven  parts  of  wa- 
ter. The  air  procured  was  made  to  pass  through  caustic  alka- 
li. To  obtain  the  oxygen,  two  pounds  and  a  half  of  crystal- 
lized hyperoxmuriate  of  potassa  were  distilled,  and  the  air  was 
transferred  through  caustic  alkali. 

The  volume  of  hydrogen  employed  was  25963.568  cubic 
inches,  and  the  weight  was  1039.358  grains. 

The  volume  of  oxygen  was  12570.942,  and  the  weight  was 
6209.869  grains. 

The  total  weight  of  both  elastic  fluids  was  7249.227. 

The  weight  of  water  obtained  was  7244  grains,  or  12  ounces 
4  gros  45  grains. 

The  weight  of  water  which  should  have  been  obtained  was 
12  ounces  4  gros  49.227  grains.     The  deficit  was  4.227  grains. 

The  quantity  of  azotic  air  before  the  experiment  was  415.256 
cubic  inches,  and  at  the  close  of  it  467.  The  excess  after  the 
experiment  was  consequently  51.744  cubic  inches.  This  aug- 
mentation is  to  be  attributed,  the  academicians  think,  to  the 
small  quantity  of  atmospheric  air  in  the  cylinders  of  the  gasomo- 
ters  at  tlie  time  the  other  airs  were  introduced.  These  additional 
51  cubic  inches  could  not  arise  from  the  hydrogen,  for  experi- 
ment showed  that  it  contained  no  azotic  air.  Some  addition  of 
this  last  fluid,  the  experimenters  think,  cannot  be  avoided,  oa 
account  of  the  construction  of  the  machine. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  183 

The  water  being  examined,  was  found  to  be  as  pure  as  dis- 
tilled water.  Its  specific  gravity  to  distilled  water  was  as  18671 : 
18670. 

The  decomposition  of  water  is  most  elegantly  effected  by 
electricity. 

The  composition  of  water  is  best  demonstrated  by  exploding 
two  volumes  of  hydrogen  and  one  of  oxygen  in  the  eudiometer. 
They  disappear  totally,  and  pure  water  results.     A  cubic  inch 
of  this  liquid  at  60  degrees  weighs  252.52  grains,  consisting  of 
28.06  grains  hydrogen,  and 
224.46  oxygen. 

The  bulk  of  the  former  gas  is  1325  cubic  inches. 

That  of  the  latter  is  662 


1987 


Hence  there  is  a  condensation  of  nearly  two  thousand  vol- 
umes into  one  ;  and  one  volume  of  water  contains  662  volumes 
of  oxygen.  The  prime  equivalent  of  water  is  1.125  :  composed 
of  a  prime  of  oxygen  =  l.O-j-a  prime  of  hydrogen  =  0.125;  or 
9  parts  by  weight  of  water,  consisting  of  8  oxygen-[-l  hydro- 
gen. 

The  simple  waters  are  the  following: 
1.  Distilled  Water. 

This  is  the  lightest  of  all  others,  containing  neither  solid  nor 
gaseous  substances  in  solution,  is  perfectly  void  of  taste  and 
smell,  colorless  and  beautifully  transparent,  has  a  soft  feel,  and 
wets  the  fingers  more  readily  than  any  other.  It  mixes  uni- 
formly with  soap  into  a  smooth  opaline  mixture,  but  may  be 
added  to  a  solution  of  soap  in  spirit  of  wine  without  injuring 
its  transparency.  The  clearness  of  distilled  water  is  not  im- 
paired by  the  most  delicate  chemical  reagents,  such  as  lime- 
water,  a  solution  of  barytes  in  any  acid,  nitrated  silver,  or  acid 
of  sugar.  When  evaporated  in  a  silver  vessel  it  leaves  no  resi- 
duum ;  if  preserved  from  access  of  foreign  matter  floating  in  the 
air,  it  may  be  kept  for  ages  unaltered  in  vessels  upon  which  it 
has  no  action,  as  it  does  not  possess  within  itself  the  power  of 
decomposition.  As  it  freezes  exactly  at  32  degrees  of  Fahren- 
heit, and  boils  at  212  degrees,  under  the  atmospherical  pressure 
of  29.8  inches,  these  points  are  made  use  of  as  the  standard  ones 
for  thermometrical  division ;  and  its  specific  weight  being  al- 
ways the  same  under  the  mean  pressure  and  temperature,  it  is 
employed  for  the  comparative  standard  of  specific  gravity. 

Pure  distilled  water  can  only  be  procured  from  water  which 
contains  no  volatile  matters  that  will  rise  in  distillation,  and 
continue  still  in  union  with  the  vapor  when  condensed.  Many 
substances  are  volatile  during  distillation,  but  most  of  the  gas- 


184  THE  THOMSONIAN 

es,  such  as  common  air,  carbonic  acid,  and  the  Hke,  are  inca- 
pable of  unitinof  with  water  at  a  high  temperature  :  other  bo- 
dies, however,  such  as  vegetable  essential  oil,  and,  in  general, 
much  of  that  which  gives  the  peculiar  odor  to  vegetable  and 
animal  matter,  will  remain  in  water  after  distillation.  So  the 
steam  of  many  animal  and  vegetable  decoctions  has  a  certain 
flavor  which  distinguishes  it  from  pure  water;  and  the  aque- 
ous exhalation  from  living  bodies,  which  is  a  kind  of  distilla- 
tion, has  a  similar  impregnation. 

To  obtain  distilled  water  perfectly  pure,  much  stress  was  laid 
by  former  chemists  on  repeating  the  process  a  great  number  of 
times  ;  but  it  was  found  by  Lavoisier,  that  rain  water  once  dis- 
tilled, rejecting  the  first  and  last  products,  was  as  pure  a  water 
as  could  be  procured  by  any  subsequent  distillations. 

Distilled  water  appears  to  possess  a  higher  power  than  any 
other  as  a  resolvent  of  all  animal  and  vegetable  matter,  and 
these  it  holds  in  solution  as  little  as  possible  altered  from  the 
state  in  which  they  existed  in  the  body  that  yielded  them.  Hence 
the  great  practical  utility  of  that  kind  of  chemical  analysis 
which  presents  the  proximate  constituent  parts  of  these  bodies, 
and  which  is  effected  particularly  by  tlie  assistance  of  pure  wa- 
ter. On  the  other  hand,  a  saline,  earthy,  or  otherwise  impure 
water,  will  alter  the  texture  of  some  of  the  parts,  impair  their 
solubility,  produce  material  changes  in  the  coloring  matter,  and 
become  a  less  accurate  analyzer  on  account  of  the  admixture  of 
foreign  contents. 

Distilled  water  is  seldom  employed  to  any  extent  in  the  pre- 
paration of  food,  or  in  manufactures,  on  account  of  the  trouble 
of  procuring  it  in  large  quantities  ;  but  for  preparing  a  great 
number  of  medicines,  and  in  almost  everyone  of  the  nicer  che- 
mical processes  that  are  carried  on  in  the  liquid  way,  this  water 
is  an  essential  requisite.  Tbe  only  cases  in  which  it  has  been 
used  largely  as  an  article  of  drink,  have  been  in  tiiose  impor- 
tant trials  made  of  the  practicability  of  procuring  it  by  condens- 
ing the  steam  of  sea  water,  by  means  of  a  simple  apparatus 
adapted  to  a  ship's  boiler  ;  and  these  have  fully  shown  the  ease 
witli  which  a  large  quantity  of  fresh  water,  of  the  purest  kind, 
may  be  had  at  sea,  at  a  moderate  expense,  whereby  one  of  the 
most  distressing  of  all  wants  may  be  relieved.  There  are  one 
or  two  circumstances  which  seem  to  show  that  water,  when  not 
already  loaded  with  foreign  matter,  may  become  a  solvent  for 
concretions  in  urinary  passages.  At  least,  we  know  that  very 
material  advantage  has  been  derived  in  these  cases  from  very 
pure  natural  springs,  and  hence  a  course  of  distilled  water  has 
been  recommended  as  a  fair  subject  of  experiment. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  185 

2.  Rain  Water, 

The  next  in  purity  to  distilled  water,  is  that  which  has  un- 
dergone a  natural  distillation  from  the  earth,  and  is  condensed 
in  the  form  of  rain.  This  is  a  water  so  nearly  approaching  to 
absolute  purity  as  probably  to  be  equal  to  distilled  water  for 
every  purpose  except  in  the  nicer  chemical  experiments.  The 
foreign  contents  of  rain  water  appear  to  vary  according  to  the 
state  of  the  air  through  which  it  falls.  The  heterogeneous  at- 
mosphere of  a  smoky  town  will  give  some  impregnation  to  rain 
as  it  passes  through  ;  and  this,  though  it  may  not  be  at  once 
perceptible  on  chemical  examination,  will  yet  render  it  liable  to 
spontaneous  change ;  and  hence,  rain  water,  if  long  kept,  espe- 
cially in  hot  climates,  acquires  a  strong  smell,  becomes  full  of 
animalcula,  and  in  some  degree  putrid.  According  to  Mar- 
graaff,  the  constant  foreign  contents  of  rain  water  appear  to  be 
some  traces  of  the  muriatic  and  nitric  acids  ;  but  as  this  water 
is  always  very  soft,  it  is  admirably  adapted  for  dissolving  soap, 
or  for  the  solution  of  alimentary  or  coloring  matter,  and  it  is 
accordingly  used  largely  for  these  purposes.  The  specific  gra- 
vity of  rain  water  is  so  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  distilled  wa- 
ter, that  it  requires  the  most  delicate  instruments  to  ascertain 
the  ditFerence.  Rain  that  falls  in  towns  acquires  a  small  quan- 
tity of  lime  and  calcareous  matter,  from  the  mortar  and  plaster 
of  the  houses. 

3.  Ice  and  Snow  Water. 

This  equals  rain  water  in  purity,  and  when  fresh  melted  con- 
tains no  air,  which  is  expelled  during  freezing.  In  cold  cli- 
mates and  in  high  latitudes,  thawed  snow  forms  the  constant 
drink  of  the  inhabitants  during  winter;  and  the  vast  masses  of 
ice  which  float  on  the  polar  seas  afford  an  abundant  supply  to 
the  mariner.  It  is  well  known,  that  in  a  weak  brine,  exposed 
to  a  moderate  freezing  cold,  it  is  only  the  v/atery  part  that  con- 
geals, leaving  the  unfrozen  liquor  proportionably  stronger  of 
the  salt.  The  same  happens  with  a  dilute  solution  of  vegetable 
acids,  with  fermented  liquors,  and  the  like  ;  and  advantage  is 
taken  of  this  property  to  reduce  the  saline  part  to  a  more  con- 
centrated form.  Snow  water  has  long  lain  under  the  imputa- 
tion of  occasioning  those  strumous  swellings  in  the  neck  which 
deform  the  inhabitants  of  many  of  the  Alpine  valleys  ;  but  this 
opinion  is  not  supported  by  any  well  authenticated,  indisputa- 
ble facts,  and  is  rendered  still  more  improbable,  if  not  entirely 
overturned,  by  the  frequency  of  the  disease  in  Sumatra,  where 
ice  and  snow  are  never  seen,  and  its  being  quite  unknown  in 
Chili  and  Thibet,  though  the  rivers  of  these  countries  are  chief- 
ly supplied  by  the  melting  of  the  snow,' with  which  the  moun- 
tains are  covered. 

13 


186  THE    THOMSON! AN 

4.  Spring-  Water. 

Under  this  comprehensive  class  are  incUided  all  waters  that 
spring  from  some  depth  beneath  the  soil,  and  are  used  at  the 
fountain  head,  or  at  least  before  they  have  run  any  consiaerable 
distance  exposed  to  the  air.  It  is  obvious,  that  spring  water 
will  be  as  various  in  its  contents  as  the  substances  that  compose 
the  soil  through  which  it  flows.  When  the  ingredients  are  not 
such  as  to  give  any  peculiar  medical  or  sensible  properties,  and 
the  water  is  used  for  common  purposes,  it  is  distinguished  as  a 
hard  or  soft  spring,  sweet  or  brackish,  clear  or  turbid,  and  the 
hke.  Ordinary  springs  insensibly  pass  into  mineral  springs,  as 
their  foreign  contents  become  more  notable  and  uncommon; 
though  sometimes  waters  have  acquired  great  medical  reputa- 
tion from  mere  purity. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  springs  are  cold  ;  but  as  they 
take  their  origm  at  some  depth  from  the  surface,  and  below  the 
influence  of  the  external  atmosphere,  their  temperature  is  in  ge- 
neral pretty  uniform  during  every  vicissitude  of  season,  and  al- 
waj'-s  several  degrees  higher  than  the  freezing  point.  Others, 
ao-ain,  arise  constantly  hot,  or  with  a  temperature  always  ex- 
ceeding the  summer  heat;  and  the  warmth  possessed  by  the 
water  is  entirely  independent  of  that  of  the  atmosphere,  and  va- 
ries little,  winter  or  summer. 

One  of  the  principal  inconveniencies  in  almost  every  spring 
water,  is  its  hardness,  owing  to  the  presence  of  earthy  salts, 
which,  in  by  far  the  greater  number  of  cases,  are  only  the  insi- 
pid substances,  chalk  and  selenite,  which  do  not  impair  the 
taste  of  the  water;  while  the  air  which  it  contains,  and  its 
orrateful  coolness,  render  it  a  most  agreeable,  and  generally  a 
perfectly  innocent  drink  ;  though  sometimes  in  weak  stomachs 
it  is  apt  to  occasion  an  uneasy  sense  of  weight  in  that  organ, 
followed  by  a  degree  of  dispepsia.  The  quantity  of  earthy  salts 
varies  considerably  ;  but  in  general  it  appears  that  five  grains 
of  these  to  a  pint  will  constitute  a  hard  water,  unfit  for  washing 
with  soap,  and  for  many  other  purposes  of  household  use  or 
manufactures.  The  water  of  deep  wells  is  always,  ceiei'is  pa- 
ribus, much  harder  than  that  of  springs  which  overflow  their 
channel ;  for  much  agitation  and  exposure  to  an*  produce  a  gra- 
dual deposition  of  the  calcareous  earth  ;  and  hence  spring  wa- 
ter often  encrusts  to  a  considerable  thickness  the  inside  of  any 
kind  of  tube  through  which  it  flows  as  it  arises  from  the  earth. 
The  specific  gravity  of  these  waters  is  also  in  general  greater 
than  that  of  any  other  kind  of  water,  that  of  the  sea  excepted. 
Springs  that  overflow  their  channel,  and  form  to  themselves  a 
hmited  bed,  pass  insensibly  into  the  state  of  stream  or  river  wa- 
ter, and  become  thereby  altered  in  some  of  their  chemical  pro- 
perties. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  187 

5.  River  Water. 
This  is  in  general  much  softer,  and  more  free  from  earthy 
salts  than  thelast,  but  contains  less  air  of  any  kind ;  for  by  the 
a2:itation  of  a  long  current,  and  in  most  cases  a  great  increase 
of  temperature,  it  loses  common  air  and  carbonic  acid,  and, 
with  this  last,  much  of  the  lime  which  it  held  in  solution.  The 
specific  gravity  thereby  becomes  less,  the  taste  not  so  harsh,  but 
less  fresii  and  aa^reeable,  and  out  of  a  hard  spring  is  often  made 
a  stream  of  suiiicient  purity  for  most  of  the  purposes  where  a 
soft  water  is  required.  Some  streams,  however,  that  arise  from 
a  clean  silicious  rock,  and  flow  in  a  sandy  or  stony  bed,  are 
from  the  outset  remarkably  pure.  Such  are  the  mountain  lakes 
and  rivulets  in  the  rocky  districts  of  Wales,  the  source  of  the 
beautiful  waters  of  the  Dee,  and  numberless  other  rivers  that 
flow  through  the  hollow  of  every- valley.  Switzerland  has  long 
been  celebrated  for  the  purity  and  excellence  of  its  waters, 
which  pour  in  copious  streams  from  the  mountains,  and  give 
rise  to  some  of  the  finest  rivers  in  Europe.  Some  of  them  never 
freeze  in  the  severest  winter,  the  cause  of  which  is  probably,  as 
Haller  conjectures,  that  they  spring  at  once  out  of  a  subterrane- 
ous reservoir  so  deep  as  to  he  out  of  the  reach  of  frost ;  and  dur- 
ing their  short  course,  when  exposed  to  day,  they  have  not  time 
to  be  cooled  down  from  53  deg.,  their  original  temperature,  to 
below  the  freezing  point. 

Some  river  waters,  however,  that  do  not  take  their  rise  from 
a  rocky  soil,  and  are  indeed  at  first  considerably  charged  with 
foreign  matter,  during  a  long  course,  even  over  a  rich  cultiva- 
ted plain,  become  remarkably  pure  as  to  saline  contents,  but 
often  fouled  with  mud,  and  vegetable  or  animal  exuviae,  which 
are  rather  suspended  than  held  in  true  solution.  Such  is  that 
of  the  Thames,  which,  taken  up  at  London  at  low  water,  is  a 
very  soft  and  good  water,  and,  after  rest  and  filtration,  it  holds 
but  a  very  small  portion  of  any  thing  that  could  prove  noxious 
or  impede  any  manufacture.  It  is  also  excellently  fitted  for 
sea-store  :  but  it  here  undergoes  a  remarkable  spontaneous 
change.  No  water  carried  to  sea  becomes  putrid  sooner  than 
that  of  the  Thames.  When  a  cask  is  opened  after  being  kept 
a  month  or  two,  a  quantity  of  inflammable  air  escapes,  and  the 
water  is  so  black  and  offensive  as  scarcely  to  be  borne.  Upon 
racking  it  off,  however,  into  large  earthen  vessels  (oil  jars  are 
commonly  used  for  the  purpose),  and  exposing  it  to  the  air,  it 
gradually  deposites  a  quantity  of  black  slimy  mud,  becomes 
clear  as  crystal,  and  remarkably  sweet  and  palatable.  The 
Seine  has  as  high  a  reputation  in  France,  and  appears  from 
accurate  experiments  to  be  a  river  of  great  purity.  It  misfht  be 
expected  that  a  river  which  has  passed  by  a  large  town,  and 
received  all  its  impurities,  and  been  used  by  numerous  dyers, 


188  THE  THOMSONIAN 

tanners,  hatters,  and  the  like,  that  crowd  to  its  banks  for  the 
convenience  of  plenty  of  water,  should  thereby  acquire  such  a 
foulness  as  to  be  very  perceptible  to  cheinical  examination  for  a 
considerable  distance  below  the  town  ;  but  it  appears,  from  the 
most  accurate  examination,  that  where  the  stream  is  at  all  con- 
siderable, these  kinds  of  impurity  have  but  little  influence  in 
permanently  altering  the  quality  of  the  water,  especially  as  they 
are  for  the  most  part  only  suspended,  and  not  truly  dissolved  ; 
and,  therefore,  mere  rest,  and  especially  filtration,  will  restore 
the  water  to  its  original  purity.  Probably,  therefore,  the  most 
accurate  chemist  would  find  it  difficult  to  distinguish  water 
taken  up  at  London  from  that  procured  at  Hampton  Court,  af- 
ter each  has  been  purified  by  simple  filtration. 

6.  Stagnated  Waters. 

The  waters  that  present  the  greatest  impurities  to  the  senses, 
are  those  of  stagnant  pools,  and  low  marshy  countries.  They 
are  filled  with  the  remains  of  animal  and  vegetable  matter  un- 
dergoing decomposition,  and,  during  that  process,  becoming  in 
part  soluble  in  water,  thereby  affording  a  rich  nutriment  to  the 
succession  of  living  plants  and  insects  which  is  supplying  the 
place  of  those  that  perish.  From  the  want  of  sufficient  agita- 
tion in  these  waters,  vegetation  goes  on  undisturbed,  and  the 
surface  becomes  covered  with  conferva  and  other  aquatic 
plants  ;  and  as  these  standing  waters  are  in  general  shallow, 
they  receive  the  full  influence  of  the  sun,  which  further  pro- 
motes all  the  changes  that  are  going  on  within  them.  The 
taste  is  generally  vapid,  and  destitute  of  that  freshness  and 
agreeable  coolness  which  distinguish  spring  water.  However, 
it  should  be  remarked,  that  stagnant  waters  are  generally  soft, 
and  many  of  the  impurities  are  only  suspended,  and  therefore 
separable  by  filtration  ;  and  perhaps  the  unpalatableness  of  this 
drink  has  caused  it  to  be  in  worse  credit  than  it  deserves,  on 
the  score  of  salubrity.  The  decidedly  noxious  effects  produced 
by  the  air  of  marshes  and  sta2:aant  pools,  have  been  often  sup- 
posed to  extend  to  the  internal  use  of  these  waters  ;  and  often, 
especially  in  hot  climates,  a  residence  near  these  places  has 
been  as  much  condemned  on  the  one  account  as  on  the  other  ; 
and,  in  like  manner,  an  improvement  in  health  has  been  as 
much  attributed  to  a  change  of  water  as  of  air. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  189 

2d.     THE  ACTIVE: 

OR,  FIRE  AND  AIR,  AND  THEIR  CONSTITUENTS. 

FIRE. 

Ignis.  A  very  simple  and  active  element,  the  principal 
agent  in  nature  to  balance  the  power  and  natural  effect  of  at- 
traction. The  most  useful  acceptation  of  the  word  fire  compre- 
hends heat  and  light.  There  have  been  several  theories  pro- 
posed respecting  fire,  but  no  one  as  yet  is  fully  established.* 

CALORIC. 

(Caloricum;  from  caZor,  lieat.)     Heat;  Igneous  fluid. 

Heat  and  cold  are  perceptions  of  ■which  we  acquire  the  ideas  from  the  sen- 
ses ;  they  indicate  only  a  certain  state  in  which  we  find  ourselves,  independent 
of  any  exterior  object.  But  as  these  sensations  are  for  the  most  part  produced 
by  bodies  around  us,  we  consider  them  as  causes,  and  judging  by  appearan- 
ces, we  apply  the  terms  hot,  or  cold,  to  the  substances  themselves ;  calling 
those  bodies /iof,  which  jiroduce  in  us  the  sensation  of  heat,  and  those  coZd, 
■which  communicate  the  contrary  sensation. 

This  ambiguity,  though  of  little  consequence  in  the  common  afiairs  of  hu- 
man life,  has  led  unavoidably  to  confusion  and  perplexity  in  philosophical 
discussions.  It  was  to  prevent  this,  that  the  framers  of  the  new  nomencla- 
ture adopted  the  word  caloric,  which  denotes  that  which  produces  the  sensa- 
tion of  heat. 

Theories  of  Heat. 

Tv/o  opinions  have  long  divided  the  philosophical  world  concerning  the  na- 
ture of  heat. 

1.  The  one  is  ;  that  the  cause  which  produces  the  sensation  of  heat,  is  a  re- 
al, or  distinct  substance,  universally  pervading  nature,  penetrating  the  parti- 
cles or  pores  of  all  bodies,  with  more  or  less  facility,  and  in  different  quan- 
tities. 

This  substance,  if  applied  to  our  system  in  a  greater  proportion  than  it  al- 
ready contains,  warms  it,  as  we  call  it,  or  produces  the  sensation  of  heat;  and 
hence  it  has  been  called  caloric,  or  calorific. 

2.  The  other  theory  concerning  heat  is  ;  that  the  cause  which  produces 
that  sensation  is  not  a  separate  or  self-existing  substance  ;  but  that  it  is  mere- 
ly like  gravity,  a  property  of  matter  ;  and  that  it  consists  in  a  specific  or  pecu- 
liar motion,  or  vibration  of  the  particles  of  bodies. 

The  arguments  in  favor  of  the  first  theory  have  been  principally  deduced 
from  the  evolution  and  absorption  of  heat  during  chemical  combinations ; 
those  of  the  latter  are  chiefly  f^ounded  on  the  production  of  heat  by  friction. 
For  it  has  been  observed,  that  whatever  is  capable  of  producing  motion  in  the 
particles  of  any  mass  of  matter,  excites  heat.  Count  Rumford  and  Professor 
Davy  have  paid  uncommon  attention  to  this  fact,  and  proved,  that  heat  conti- 
nues to  be  evolved  from  a  body  subjected  to  friction,  so  long  as  it  is  applied, 
and  the  texture  or  form  of  the  body  not  altered. 

All  the  effects  of  heat  according  to  this  theory,  depend  therefore  entirely  up- 
on the  vibratory  motion  of  the  particles  of  bodies.  According  as  this  is  more 
or  less  intense,  a  higher  or  lower  temperature  is  produced  ;  and  as  it  predomi- 
nates over,  is  nearly  equal  or  inferior  to  the  attraction  of  cohesion,  bodies  ex- 
ist in  the  gaseous,  fluid,  or  solid  state. 

Different  bodies  are  susceptible  of  it  in  different  degrees,  and  receive  and 
communicate  it  with  different  celerity.  From  the  generation,  communication, 
and  attraction  of  this  repulsive  motion,  under  these  laws,  all  the  phenomena 
ascribed  to  heat  are  explicable. 

Each  of  these  theories  has  been  supported  by  the  most  able  philosophers, 
and  given  occasion  to  the  most  important  disputes  in  which  chemists  have 
been  engaged  :  which  has  contributed  in  a  very  particular  manner  to  the  ad- 

*  See  Caloric  and  Light. 


190 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Tancement  of  the  science.    The  obscurity  of  the  subject,  however,  is  snch, 
that  both  parties  have  been  able  to  advance  most  plausible  arguments. 

Setting  aside  all  inquiries  concerning  the  merits  of  these  different  doctrines, 
we  shall  confine  ourselves  to  the  general  effects  which  heat  produces  on  dif- 
ferent bodies.  For  the  phenomena  which  heat  presents,  and  their  relation  to 
each  other,  may  be  investigated  with  sutiicient  precision,  though  the  materi- 
ality, or. immateriality  of  it,  may  remain  unknown  to  us. 

Nature  of  Heat. 

Those  who  consider  heat  as  matter,  assert  that  caloric,  exists  in  two  states, 
namely,  in  combination,  or  at  liberty. 

In  the  first  state  it  is  not  sensible  to  our  organs,  nor  indicated  by  the  ther- 
mometer ;  it  forms  a  constituent  part  of  the  body ;  but  it  may  be  brought  back 
to  the  state  of  sensible  heat.  In  this  state  it  affects  animals  with  the  sensa- 
tion of  heat.  It  therefore  has  been  called  sensible  or  free  heat,  or  fire  ;  and 
is  synonymous  with  uncombined  caloric,  thermometrical  caloric,  caloric  of 
temperature,  interposed  caloric,  &c.  expressions  now  pretty  generally  super- 
seded. 

From  the  diversity  of  opinions  among  chemists  respecting  the  nature  of  ca- 
loric,  several  other  expressions  have  been  introduced,  which  it  is  proper  to  no- 
tice. For  instance,  by  specific  heat  is  understood,  the  relative  quantities  of  ca- 
loric contained  in  equal  weights  of  different  bodies  at  the  same  temperature. 
Latent  heat  is  the  expression  used  to  denote  that  quantity  of  caloric  which  a 
body  absorbs  when  changing  its  form.  It  is,  however,  more  properly  called 
caloric  of  fluidity.  The  disposition,  or  property,  by  which  different  bodies 
contain  certain  quantities  of  caloric,  at  an)^  temperature,  is  termed  their  capa- 
city for  heat.  By  the  expression  of  absolute  heat,  is  understood  the  whole 
quantity  of  caloric  which  any  body  contains. 

Methods  of  exciting  and  collecting  Heat. 

Of  the  different  methods  of  exciting  heat,  the  following  are  the  most  usual : 

1.  Percussion  or  Collision.  This  method  of  producing  heat  is  the  simplest, 
and  therefore  it  is  generally  made  use  of  in  the  common  purposes  of  life  for 
obtaining  fire. 

When  a  piece  of  hardened  steel  is  struck  with  a  flint,  some  particles  of  the 
metal  are  scraped  away  from  the  mass,  and  so  violent  is  the  heat  which  fol- 
lows the  stroke,  that  it  melts  and  vitrifies  them.  If  the  fragments  of  steel  are 
caught  upon  paper,  and  viewed  with  a  microscope,  most  of  them  will  be  found 
perfect  spherules,  and  very  highly  polished.  Their  sphericity  demonstrates 
that  they  have  been  in  a  fluid  state,  and  the  polish  upon  their  surface,  shows 
them  to  be  vitrified. 

No  heat,  however,  has  been  observed  to  follow  the  percussion  of  liquids, 
nor  of  the  softer  kind  of  bodies  which  yield  to  a  slight  impulse. 

2.  Friction.  Heat  may  likewise  be  excited  by  mere  friction.  This  practice 
is  still  retained  in  some  parts  of  the  world.  The  natives  of  New  Holland  are 
said  to  produce  fire  in  this  manner,  with  great  facility,  and  spread  it  in  a  won- 
derful manner.  For  that  purpose  they  take  two  pices  of  dry  Avood  ;  one  is  a 
stick,  about  eight  or  nine  inches  long,  and  the  other  piece  is  flat ;  the  stick 
they  bring  to  an  obtuse  point  at  one  end,  and  pressing  it  upon  the  other  piece, 
tliey  turn  it  very  nimbly,  by  holding  it  between  both  hands,  as  we  do  a  choco- 
late-mill, often  shifting  their  hands  up,  and  then  moving  down  upon  it,  in  order 
to  increase  the  pressure  as  much  as  possible.  By  this  method  they  get  fire  in 
a  few  minutes,  and  from  the  smallest  spark  they  increase  it  with  great  speed 
and  dexterity. 

•  If  the  irons  at  the  axis  of  a  coach-wheel  are  applied  to  each  other,  without 
the  interposition  of  some  unctuous  matter  to  keep  them  from  immediate  con- 
tact, they  will  become  so  hot  when  the  carriage  runs  swiftly  along,  as  to  set 
the  wood  on  fire  ;  and  the  fore-wheels,  being  smallest,  and  making  most  revo- 
lutions in  a  given  time,  will  be  most  in  danger. 

The  same  will  happen  to  mill-work,  or  to  any  other  machinery. 

It  is  no  uncommon  practice  in  this  country,  for  blacksmiths  to  use  a  plate 
of  iron  as  an  extemporaneous  substitute  for  a  tinder-box ;  for  it  may  be  ham- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  191 

mered  on  an  anvil  till  it  becomes  red-hot,  and  will  fire  a  brimstone  match.  A 
strong  man  Avho  strikes  quick,  and  keeps  turning  the  iron  so  that  both  sides 
may  be  equally  exposed  to  the  force  of  the  hammer,  will  perform  this  in  less 
time  than  would  be  expected. 

If,  in  the  coldest  season,  one  dense  iron  plate  1)e  laid  on  another,  and  pressed 
together  by  a  weight,  and  then  rubbed  upon  each  other  by  reciprocal  motions, 
they  will  gradually  grow  so  hot  as,  in  a  short  time,  to  emit  sparks,  and  at  last 
become  ignited. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  substances  should  be  very  hard ;  a  cord  rubbed 
backwards  and  forwards  swiftly  against  a  post  or  a  tree  will  take  fire. 

Count  Rumford  and  Professor  Pictet  have  made  some  very  ingenious  and 
valuable  experiments  concerning  the  heat  evolved  by  friction. 

3.  Chemical  Action.  To  this  belongs  the  heat  produced  by  combustion. 
There  are,  besides  this,  many  chemical  processes  wherein  rapid  chemical  ac- 
tion takes  place,  accompanied  with  a  developcment  of  heat,  or  fire,  and  flame. 

4.  Solar  heat.  It  is  well  known  that  the  solar  raj's,  when  collected  by  a 
mirror,  or  lens,  into  a  focus,  produce  the  most  astonishing  effects. 

Dr.  Herschel  has  discovered  that  there  are  rays  emitted  from  the  sun,  which 
have  not  the  power  of  illuminating  or  producing  vision :  and  that  these  are  the 
rays  which  produce  the  heat  of  the  solar  light. 

Consequently,  heat  is  emitted  from  the  sun  in  raj'S,  but  these  rays  are  not 
the  same  with  the  rays  of  light. 

5.  The  Electric  Spark,  and  Galvanism.  The  effects  of  electricity  are  too 
well  known  in  this  point  of  viev/  to  need  any  description. 

Galvanism  has  of  late  become  a  powerful  instrument  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
citing heat.  Not  only  easily  inflammable  substances,  such  as  phosphorus, 
sulphur,  &,c.  have  been  fired,  but  likewise,  gold,  silver,  copper,  tin,  and  the 
rest  of  the  metals,  have  been  burnt  by  means  of  galvanism. 

General  Effects  of  Heat. 

The  first  and  most  obvious  effect  which  heat  produces  on  bodies,  is  its  ex- 
pansive property.  Experience  has  taught  us  that,  at  all  times,  vv'hen  bodies 
become  hot,  they  increase  in  bulk.  The  bodies  experience  a  dilatation  which 
is  greater  in  proportion  to  the  accumulation  of  caloric,  or  in  other  words,  to 
the  intensity  of  the  heat.  This  is  a  general  law,  which  holds  good  as  long  as 
the  bodies  have  suflered  no  change  either  in  their  combination  or  in  the  quan- 
tity of  their  chemical  principles. 

This  power,  which  heat  possesses,  consists,  therefore,  in  a  constant  tenden- 
cy to  separate  the  particles  of  bodies.  Hence  philosophers  consider  heat  as 
the  repulsive  power  which  acts  upon  all  bodies  whatever,  and  which  is  in  con- 
stant opposition  to  the  power  of  attraction. 

The  phenomena  which  result  from  these  mutual  actions,  seem,  as  it  were, 
the  secret  springs  of  nature.  Heat,  however,  docs  not  expand  all  bodies 
equally,  and  we  are  still  ignorant  of  the  laws  which  it  foilov/s. 

1.  Expansion  of  Fluid  Bodies.  Take  a  glass  globe,  with  a  long  slender 
neck  (called  a  bold  heat);  fill  it  up  to  the  neck  with  water,  ardent  spirit,  or 
any  other  fluid  which  may  be  colored  with  red  or  black  ink,  in  order  to  be 
more  visible,  and  then  immerse  the  globe  of  the  instrument  in  a  vessel  of  hot 
water  ;  the  included  fluid  will  instantly  begin  to  mount  into  the  neck.  If  it  be 
taken  out  of  the  water  and  brought  near  the  fire,  it  will  ascend  more  and  more, 
in  proportion  as  it  becomes  heated  ;  but,  upon  removing  it  from  the  source  of 
heat,  it  will  sink  agrain  :  a  clear  proof  that  caloric  dilates  it,  so  as  to  make  it 
occupy  more  space  when  hot  than  when  cold.  These  experiments  may,  there- 
fore, serve  as  a  demonstration  that  heat  expands  fiuid  bodies. 

2.  Expansion  of  Aeriform  Bodies.  Take  a  bladder  partly  filled  with  air, 
the  neck  of  which  is  closely  tied,  so  as  to  prevent  the  enclosed  air  from  escap- 
ing:, and  let  it  be  held  near  a  fire.  The  air  will  soon  begin  to  occupy  more 
space,  and  the  bladder  will  become  gradually  distended;  on  continuing  the  ex- 
pansion of  the  air,  by  increasing  the  heat,  the  bladder  will  burst  with  a  loud 
report. 

3.  Expansion  of  Solid  Bodies. '  If  we  take  a  bar  of  iron,  six  inches  long,  and 
put  it  into  fire  till  it  becomes  red-hot ;  and  then  measure  it  in  this  state  accu- 


192  THE   THOMSONIAN 

rately,  it  will  be  found  l-20th  of  an  inch  longer  than  it  was  before  ;  that  is, 
about  120th  part  of  the  whole.  That  the  metal  is  proportionably  expanded  in 
breadth,  will  be  seen  by  trying  to  pass  it  tlirough  an  aperture  which  is  fitted 
exactly  when  cold,  but  which  will  not  admit  it  when  red-hot.  The  bar  is, 
therefore,  increased  in  length  and  diameter. 

To  discover  the  minutest  changes  of  expansion  by  heat,  and  the  relative 
proportions  thereof,  instruments  have  been  contrived,  called  Pyrometers,  the 
sensibility  of  which  is  so  .delicate  as  to  show  an  expansion  of  1-100, 000th  of 
an  inch. 

It  is  owing  to  this  expansion  of  metals,  that  the  motion  of  time-pieces  is  ren- 
dered erroneous  ;  but  the  ingenuity  of  artists  has  discovered  methods  of  obvi- 
ating this  inaccuracy,  by  employing  the  greater  expansion  of  one  metal,  to 
counteract  the  expansion  of  another ;  tliis  is  effected  in  what  is  called  the  grid- 
iron pendulum.  Upon  the  same  principle,  a  particular  construction  of  watch- 
es has  been  contrived. 

The  expansion  of  metals  is  likewise  one  of  the  principal  reasons  that  clocks 
and  watches  vary  in  winter  and  summer,  whenwornin  tliepocket,  r  exposed 
to  the  open  air,  or  when  carried  into  a  hotter  or  a  colder  climate.  For  the  num- 
ber of  the  vibrations  of  the  pendulum  is  always  in  the  sub-duplicate  ratio  uf 
its  length,  and  as  the  length  is  changed  by  heat  and  cold,  the  times  of  vibra- 
tion will  also  be  changed.  The  quantity  of  alteration,  v\rhen  considered  in  a 
single  vibration,  is  exceedingly  small,  hut  when  they  are  often  repealed,  it 
will  be  very  sensible.  An  alteration  of  one-thousandth  part  in  the  time  of  a 
single  vibration  of  a  pendulum  which  beats  seconds,  will  make  a  change  of 
eighty-six  Avhole  vibrations  in  twenty  four  hours. 

As  different  metals  expand  differently  with  the  same  degree  of  heat ;  th.ose 
musical  instruments,  whose  parts  are  to  maintain  a  constant  true  proportion, 
should  never  be  strung  with  different  metals.  It  is  on  this  account  that  harp- 
sichords, &c.  are  out  of  tune  by  a  change  of  temperature. 

Bodies  which  are  brittle,  or  which  Avant  flexibility,  crack  or  break,  if  sud- 
denly heated.  This  likewise  depends  upon  the  expansive  force  of  heat, 
stretching  the  surface  to  which  it  is  applied,  while  the  other  parts,  not  being 
equally  heated,  do  not  expand  in  the  same  ratio,  and  are  therefore  torn  asun- 
der or  break.  Hence  thin  vessels  stand  heat  better  than  thick  ones.  The 
same  holds,  when  they  are  suddenly  cooled. 

Mcasitreinent  of  Heat. 

Upon  the  expansive  property  of  heat,  which  we  have  considered  before,  is 
founded  its  artificial  measurement.  Various  means  have  been  employed  to 
assist  the  imperfection  of  our  sensations  in  judging  of  the  different  degrees  of 
heat ;  for  our  feelings,  unaided,  afford  but  very  inaccurate  information  con- 
cerning this  matter;  they  indicate  the  presence  of  heat,  only  when  the  bodies 
presented  to  them  are  hotter  than  the  actual  temperature  of  our  organs  of 
feeling.  When  these  bodies  are  precisely  of  the  same  temperature  with  our 
body,  which  we  make  the  standard  of  comparison,  we  then  are  not  sensible  of 
the  presence  of  heat  in  them.  When  their  temperature  is  less  than  that  of 
our  bodies,  their  contact  gives  us  what  is  called  the  sensation  of  cold. 

The  effects  of  heat  upon  material  bodies  in  ceneral,  which  are  easily  visi- 
ble to  us,  aflord  more  precise  and  determinate  indications  of  the  intensity,  than 
can  be  derived  from  our  feelings  alone.  The  ingenuity  of  the  philosopher  and 
artist  has  therefore  furnished  us  with  instruments  of  measuring  tlie  relative 
heat  or  temperature  of  bodies.  These  instruments  are  called  Thermometers 
and  Pyrometers.  By  these,  all  degrees  are  measurable,  from  the  slightest  to 
that  of  the  most  intense  heat. 

Exceptions  to  the  Expansion  by  Heat. 

Philosophers  have  noticed  a  few  exceptions  to  the  laAV  of  heat  expanding 
bodies.  For  instance ;  water,  when  cooled  down  within  about  7  deg.  of  the 
freezing  point,  instead  of  contracting  on  the  farther  deprivation  of  heat,  actu- 
ally expands. 

Another  seeming  exception  is  manifested  in  alumine,  or  clay  ;  others  occur 
in  the  case  of  cast-iron,  and  a  few  other  metals.     Alumine  contracts  on  being 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  *       193 

heated,  and  cast-iron,  bismuth  &c.  when  fully  fused,  are  mere  dense  than -when 
solid  ;  for,  as  soon  as  they  become  so,  they  decrease  in  density,  they  expand 
in  the  act  of  cooling,  and  hence  the  sharpness  of  figures  upon  iron  which  has 
been  cast  in  moulds,  compared  to  that  of  many  other  metals. 

Some  philosophers  have  persuaded  themselves  that  these  exceptions  are  on- 
ly apparent,  but  not  really  true.  They  say,  when  water  freezes,  it  assumes  a 
crystaline  form,  the  crystals  cross  each  other  and  cause  numerous  vacuities, 
and  thus  the  ice  occupies  more  space.  The  same  is  the  case  Avith  fused  iron, 
bismuth  and  antimony.  The  contraction  of  clay  is  considered  owing  to  the 
loss  of  water,  of  which  it  loses  a  part  at  every  increased  degree  of  tempera- 
ture hitherto  tried ;  there  is,  therefore,  a  loss  of  matter ;  and  a  reduction  of 
volume  must  follow :  but  others  assert,  that  this  only  happens  to  a  certain 
extent. 

Mr.  Tilloch  has  published  a  brief  examination  of  the  received  doctrines  re- 
specting heat  and  caloric,  in  which  these  truths  are  more  fully  considered,  to- 
gether with  many  other  interesting  facts  relative  to  the  received  notions  of 
heat. 

Equal  Distribution  of  Heat. 

If  a  number  of  bodies  of  different  temperatures  are  placed  in  contact  with 
each  other,  they  will  all  at  a  certain  time  acquire  a  temperature,  which  is  in- 
termediate ;  the  caloric  of  the  hottest  body  will  diffuse  itself  amoug  those 
which  are  heated  in  a  less  degree,  till  they  have  all  acquired  a  certain  mean 
temperature.  Thus,  if  a  bar  of  iron,  which  has  been  made  red-hot,  be  kept 
in  the  open  air,  it  does  not  retain  the  heat  which  it  had  received,  but  becomes 
gradually  colder  and  coldei-,  till  it  arrives  at  the  temperature  of  the  bodies  in 
its  neighborhood.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we  cool  down  the  iron  bar  by  keep- 
ing it  for  some  time  covered  with  snow,  and  then  carry  it  into  a  warm  room, 
it  does  not  retain  its  low  temperature,  but  becomes  gradually  hotter,  till  it  ac- 
quires the  temperature  of  the  room.  It  is  therefore  obvious,  that  in  the  one 
instance  the  temperature  is  lowered,  and  in  the  other  it  is  raised. 

These  changes  of  temperature  occupy  a  longer  or  a  shorter  time,  according 
to  the  nature  of  the  body,  but  they  always  take  place  at  last.  This  law  itself 
is,  indeed,  familiar  to  every  one:  when  we  wish  to  heat  a  body,  we  carry  it 
toward  the  fire  :  when  we  wish  to  cool  it,  we  surround  it  by  cold  bodies. 

Propagation  of  Heat. 

We  have  seen,  that  when  bodies  of  higher  temp'^rature  than  others  are 
brought  into  contact  with  each  other,  the  heat  is  propagated  from  the  first  to 
the  second,  or  the  colder  body  deprives  the  warmer  of  its  excess  of  heat.  We 
shall  now  see  that  some  bodies  do  so  much  more  quickly  than  others.  Through 
some  bodies  caloric  passes  with  undiminished  velocity,  through  others  its  pas- 
sage is  prodigiously  retarded. 

This  disposition  of  bodies,  of  admitting,  under  equal  circumstances,  the  re- 
frigeration of  a  heated  body  within  a  shorter  or  a  longer  time,  is  called  i/ue 
power  of  conducting  heat ;  and  a  body  is  said  to  be  a  better  or  worse  conductor 
of  heat,  as  it  allows  the  refrigeration  to  go  on  quicker  or  slower.  Those  bod- 
ies, therefore,  which  possess  the  property  of  letting  heat  pass  with  lacility, 
are  called  good  conductors,  those  tlirough  which  it  passes  with  difficulty  are 
called  bad  conductors,  and  those  through  which  it  is  supposed  not  to  pass  at  all, 
are  called  non-conductors  ;  thus  we  say,  in  common  language,  some  bodies  are 
warm,  or  capable  of  preserving  warmth,  and  from  this  arises  the  great  differ- 
ence in  the  sensation  excited  by  different  bodies,  when  applied  at  the  same 
temperature  to  our  organs  of  feeling.  Hence,  if  we  immerse  our  hand  in  mer- 
cury, wejfeel  a  greater  sensation  of  cold  than  when  we  immerse  it  in  water,  and 
a  piece  of  metal  appears  to  be  much  colder  than  a  piece  of  wood,  though 
their  temperatures,  when  examined  by  means  of  the  thermometer,  are  pre- 
cisely the  same. 

It  is  probable  that  all  solids"conduct  heat  in  some  degree,  though  they  dif- 
fer very  much  in  their  conducting  power.  Metals  are  the  best  conductors  of 
heat;  but  the  conducting  powers  of  these  substances  are  by  no  means  equal. 
Stones  seem  to  be  the  next  best  conductors.     Glass  conducts  heat  very  sic  wly  ; 


194 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


wood  and  charcoal  still  slower ;  and  feathers,  silk,  wool,  and  hair  are  still 
worse  conductors  than  any  of  the  substances  yet  mentioned. 

The  best  conductors  of  electricity  and  galvanism  are  also  the  best  conduo 
tors  of  heat. 

Experiment. — Take  a  number  of  straight  wires,  of  equal  diameters  and 
lengths,  but  of  different  metals;  for  instance,  gold  silver,  copper,  iron,  &c. ; 
cover  each  of  them  with  a  thin  coat  of  wax,  or  tallow,  and  plunge  their  extre. 
mities  into  water  kept  boiling,  or  into  melted  lead.  The  melting  of  the  coat  of 
wax  will  show  that  caloric  is  more  quickly  transmitted  tlirough  some  metals 
than  others. 

It  is  on  this  account  also,  that  the  end  of  a  glass  rod  may  be  kept  red-hoi 
for  a  long  time,  or  even  meltetl,  without  any  inconvenience  to  the  hand  which 
holds  the  other  extremity ;  though  a  similar  metallic  rod,  heated  in  the  same 
manner,  would  very  soon  become  too  hot  to  be  held. 

Liquid  and  Aeriform  Bodies  convey  Heat  by  an  actual  Change  in  the  Situation 
of  their  Particles. 

Count  Rumford  was  the  first  who  proved  that  fluids  in  general,  and  aerir 
form  bodies,  convey  heat  on  a  difierent  principle  from  that  observed  in  the  so- 
lids.  This  opinion  is  pretty  generally  admitted,  though  various  ingenious  ex* 
periments  have  been  made,  by  different  philosophers,  to  prove  the  contrary. 
In  water,  for  instance,  the  count  has  proved  that  caloric  is  propagated  princi^ 
pally  in  consequence  of  the  motion  which  is  occasioned  in  the  particles  of  thai 
fluid. 

All  fluids  are  considered  by  him,  strictly  speaking,  in  a  similar  respect  ng 
non-conductors  of  caloric.  They  can  receive  it,  indeed,  from  other  substances, 
and  can  give  it  to  other  substances,  but  no  particle  can  either  receive  it  from 
or  give  it  to  another  particle  of  tlie  same  kind.  Before  a  fluid,  therefore,  can 
be  heated  or  cooled,  every  particle  must  go  individually  to  the  substance  from 
which  it  receives  or  to  which  it  gives  out  caloric.  Heat  being,  therefore,  oi> 
ly  propagated  in  fluids,  in  consequence  of  the  internal  motion  of  their  particles, 
which  transport  the  heat ;  the  more  rapid  these  motions  are,  the  more  rapid 
is  the  communication  of  heat.  The  cause  of  these  motions  is  the  change  in 
the  specific  gravity  of  the  fluid,  occasioned  by  the  change  of  temperature,  and 
the  rapidity  is  in  proportion  to  the  change  of  the  specihc  gravity  of  tlie  liquid 
by  any  given  change  of  temperature.  The  following  experiment  may  serve 
to  illustrate  this  theory  : 

Take  a  thin  glass  tube,  eight  or  ten  inches  long,  and  about  an  inch  in  dia» 
meter.  Pour  into  the  bottom  part,  for  about  the  depth  of  one  inch,  a  littl'3 
water  colored  with  Brazil-wood,  or  litmus,  and  then  fill  up  the  tube  with  coni- 
mon  water,  extremely  gently,  so  as  to  keep  the  two  strata  quite  distinct  from 
each  other.  Having  done  this,  heat  the  bottom  part  of  the  tube  over  a  lamp  ; 
the  colored  infusion  will  then  ascend,  and  gradually  tinge  the  whole  fluid  ;  on 
the  contrary,  if  the  heat  be  applied  above,  the  water  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
tube  may  be  made  to  boil,  but  the  coloring  matter  will  remain  at  the  bottom 
ondisturbed.     The  heat  cannot  act  downwards  to  make  it  ascend. 

By  thus  being  able  to  make  the  upper  part  of  a  fluid  boil  witliout  heating 
the  bottom  part,  water  may  be  kept  boiling  for  a  considerable  time  in  a  glass 
tube  over  ice,  without  melting  it. 

Other  experiments,  illustrating  the  same  principle,  may  be  found  in  CounI 
Rumford's  excellent  essays,  especially  in  essay  the  7th ;  1797, 

To  this  indefatigable  philosopher  we  are  wholly  indebted  for  the  above 
facts :  he  was  the  first  who  taught  us  that  air  and  water  were  nearly  non-con^ 
ductors.  The  results  of  his  experiments,  which  are  contained  in  the  above 
essay,  are  highly  interesting;  they  also  show  that  the  conducting  power  of 
fluids  is  impaired  by  the  admixture  of  fibrous  and  glutinous  matter. 

Count  Rumford  proved  that  ice  melted  more  than  80  times  slower,  when 
boiling  hot  water  stood  on  its  surface,  than  when  the  ice  was  placed  to  swim 
on  the  surface  of  the  hot  water.  Other  experiments  showed  that  water,  only 
eight  degrees  of  Fahrenheit  above  the  freezing  point,  or  at  the  temperature  of 
forty  degrees,  melts  as  much  ice,  in  any  given  time,  as  an  equal  volume  of 
that  fluid  at  any  higher  temperature,  provided  the  water  stands  on  the  surface 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  195 

of  the  ice.  Water,  at  the  temperature  of  41  deg.,  is  found  to  melt  more  ice, 
when  standing  on  its  surface,  than  boiling  water.  It  appears,  however,  that 
liquids  are  not,  as  he  supposes,  complete  non-conductors  of  caloric:  because, 
if  heat  be  applied  at  top,  it  is  capable  of  making  its  way  downwards,  ihrough 
water,  for  example,  though  very  imperfectly  and  slowly. 

It  becomes  farther  evident,  from  the  Count's  ingenious  experiments,  that  of 
the  different  substances  used  in  clothing,  hares'  fur  and  eider-down,  are  the 
warmest;  next  to  these,  beavers'  fur,  rawsilk,  sheep's  wool,  cotton  wool, and 
lastly,  lint,  or  the  scrapings  of  fine  linen.  In  fur,  the  air  interposed  among  its 
particles  is  so  engaged  as  not  to  be  driven  away  by  the  heat  communicated 
thereto  by  the  animal  body ;  not  being  easily  displaced,  it  becomes  a  barrier  to 
defend  the  animal  body  from  the  external  cold.  Hence  it  is  obvious  that  those 
skins  are  warmest  which  have  the  finest,  longest,  and  thickest  fur;  and  that 
the  furs  of  the  beaver,  otter,  and  other  like  quadrupeds,  which  live  much  in 
the  water,  and  the  feathers  of  water-fowl,  are  capable  of  confining  the  heat  of 
those  animals  in  winter,  notwithstanding  the  coldness  of  the  water  which  they 
frequent.  Bears,  and  various  other  animals,  inhabitants  of  cold  climates, 
which  do  not  often  take  the  water,  have  their  fur  much  thicker  on  their  backs 
than  on  their  bellies. 

The  snow  which  covers  the  surface  of  the  earth  in  winter,  in  high  latitudes, 
is  doubtless  designed  as  a  garment  to  defend  it  against  the  piercing  winds  from 
the  polar  regions,  which  prevail  during  the  cold  season. 

Without  dwelling  farther  upon  the  philosophy  of  this  truth,  we  must  briefly 
remark  that  the  happy  application  of  this  law,  satisfactorily  elucidates  some 
of  the  most  interesting  facts  of  the  economy  of  nature. 

Theory  of  Caloric  of  Fluidity,  or  Latent  Heat. 

There  are  some  bodies  which,  when  submitted  to  the  action  of  caloric,  di- 
late to  such  a  degree,  and  the  power  of  aggregation  subsisting  among  their 
particles  is  so  much  destroyed  and  removed  to  such  a  distance  by  the  interpo- 
sition of  caloric,  that  they  slide  over  each  other  in  every  direction,  and  there- 
fore appear  in  a  fluid  state.  This  phenomena  is  cn]led  fusion.  Bodies  thus 
rendered  fluid  by  means  of  caloric,  are  said  to  hefiisedf  or  melted;  and  those 
that  are  subject  to  it  are  cn.]led  fusible. 

The  greater  number  of  solid  bodies  may,  by  the  application  of  heat,  be  con- 
verted into  fluids.  Thus  metals  may  be  fused  ;  sulphur,  resin,  phosphorus, 
may  be  melted  ;  ice  may  be  converted  into  water,  &.c. 

Those  bodies  which  cannot  be  rendered  fluid  by  any  degree  of  heat  hitherto 
known,  are  called  infusible. 

If  the  effects  of  heat,  under  certain  circumstances,  be  carried  still  farther 
than  is  necessary  to  render  bodies  fluid,  vaporization  begins  ;  the  bodies  then 
become  converted  into  the  vaporous  or  gaseous  state.  Vaporization,  iiowever, 
does  not  always  require  a  previous  fusion.  Some  bodies  are  capable  of  being 
converted  into  the  vaporous  state,  without  previously  becoming  fluid,  and  oth- 
ers cannot  be  volatilized  at  any  temperature  hitherto  known  :  the  latter  arc 
termed  fixed. 

Fluidity  is,  therefore,  by  no  means  essential  to  any  species  of  matter,  but 
always  depends  on  the  presence  of  a  quantity  of  caloric.  Solidity  is  the  natu- 
ral state  of  all  bodies,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  every  fluid  is  capable  cf 
being  rendered  solid  by  a  due  reduction  of  temperature  ;  and  every  solid  may 
be  fused  by  the  agency  of  caloric,  if  the  latter  does  not  decompose  them  at  a 
temperature  inferior  to  that  which  would  be  necessary  for  their  fusion. 

Caloric  of  Fluidity. 

Dr.  Black  was  the  first  who  proved  that,  whenever  caloric  combines  with  a 
solid  body,  the  body  becomes  heated  only,  until  it  is  rendered  fluid  :  and 
that,  while  it  is  acquring  the  fluid  state,  its  temperature  remains  stationary, 
though  caloric  is  continued  to  be  added  to  it.  The  same  is  the  case  Avhen  flu- 
ids are  converted  into  the  aeriform  or  vaporous  state. 

From  these  facts,  the  laws  of  latent  heat  have  been  inferred.  The  theory 
may  be  illustrated  by  means  of  the  following  experiments : 

If  a  lump  of  ice,  at  a  low  temperature,  suppose  at  22  deg.,  be  brought  into  a 


196  THE    THOMSONIAN 

■warm  room,  it  will  become  gradually  less  cold,  as  may  be  discovered  by  means 
of  the  thermometer.  After  a  very  short  time,  it  will  reach  the  temperature 
of32deg.  (the  freezing  point);  but  there  it  stops.  The  ice  then  begins  to 
melt  J  but  the  process  goes  on  very  slowly.  During  the  whole  of  that  time 
its  temperatere  continues  at  32  deg.;  and  as  it  is  constantly  surrounded  by 
warm  air,  we  have  reason  to  believe  that  caloric  is  constantly  entering  into  it ; 
yet  it  does  not  become  hotter  till  it  is  changed  into  water.  Ice,  therefore,  is 
converted  into  water,  by  a  quantity  of  caloric  uniting  with  it. 

It  has  been  found  by  calculation,  that  ice  in  melting  absorbs  140  deg.  of 
caloric,  the  temperature  of  the  water  produced  still  remaining  at  32  deg. 

This  fact  may  be  proved  in  a  direct  manner. 

Take  one  pound  of  ice,  at  32  deg.,  reduced  to  a  coarse  powder;  put  it  into 
a  wooden  bowl,  and  pour  over  it  one  pound  of  water,  heated  to  172  deg.;  aU 
the  ice  will  become  melted,  and  the  temperature  of  the  whole  fluid,  if  exam- 
ined by  a  thermometer,  will  be  32  deg.;  140  deg.  of  caloric  are  therefore  lost, 
and  it  is  this  quantity  v/hich  was  requisite  to  convert  the  ice  into  water.  This 
experiment  succeeds  better,  if,  instead  of  ice,  fresh-fallen  snow  be  employed. 

This  caloric  has  been  called  latent  caloric,  because  its  presence  is  not  meas- 
urable by  the  thermometer  :  also  more  properly  caloric  of  fluidity. 

Dr.  Black  has  also  ascertained  by  experiment,  that  the  fluidity  of  melted 
wax,  tallow,  spermaceti,  metals,  &c.  is  owing  to  the  same  cause  ;  and  Land- 
riani  proved,  that  this  is  the  case  with  sulphur,  alum,  nitrate  of  potassa,  &,c. 

We  consider  it  therefore  as  a  general  law,  that  whenever  a  solid  is  convert- 
ed into  a  fluid,  it  combines  with  caloric,  and  that  is  the  cause  of  fluidity. 

Conversion  of  Solids  and  Fluids  into  the  Aeriform  or  Gaseous  State. 

We  have  seen  before,  that,  in  order  to  render  solids  fluid,  a  certain  quanti- 
ty of  caloric  is  necessary,  which  combines  with  the  body,  and  therefore  can- 
not be  measured  by  the  thermometer  ;  we  shall  now  endeavor  to  prove  that 
the  same  holds  good  in  respect  to  the  conversion  of  solids  or  fluids  into  the  va- 
porous or  gaseous  state. 

Take  a  small  quantity  of  carbonate  of  ammonia,  introduce  it  into  a  retort,  the 
neck  of  which  is  directed  under  a  cylinder  filled  with  mercury,  and  inverted  in 
a  basin  of  the  same  fluid.  On  applying  heat  to  the  body  of  the  retort,  the  car- 
bonate cf  ammonia  will  be  volatilized,  it  will  expel  the  mercury  out  of  the  cyl- 
inder, antl  become  an  invisible  gas,  and  would  remain  so,  if  its  temperature 
was  not  lowered. 

The  same  is  the  case  with  benzoic  acid,  camphire,  and  various  other  sub- 
stances. 

All  fluids  may,  by  the  application  of  heat,  be  converted  into  an  aeriform 
elastic  state. 

When  we  consider  water  in  a  boiling  state,  we  find  that  this  fluid,  when  ex- 
amined by  the  thermometer,  is  not  hotter  after  boiling  several  hours,  than 
"when  it  began  to  boil,  thougli  to  maintain  it  boiling  a  brisk  fire  must  necessa- 
rily be  kept  up.  What  then,  we  may  ask,  becomes  of  the  wasted  caloric  ?  It  is 
not  perceptible  in  the  water,  nor  is  it  manifested  by  the  steam;  for  the  steam, 
il"not  compressed,  upon  examination,  is  found  not  to  be  hotter  than  boiling 
water.  The  caloric  is  therefore  absorbed  by  the  steam,  and  although  what  is 
so  absorbed,  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  conversion  of  water  into  the  form 
of  steam;  it  does  not  increase  its  temperature,  and  is  therefore  not  apprecia- 
ble by  llie  thermometer. 

The  conclusion  is  farther  strengthened  by  the  heat  given  out  by  steam  on  its 
being  condensed  by  cold.  This  is  particularly  manifested  in  the  condensation 
of  this  fluid  in  the  process  of  distilling,  where,  upon  examining  the  refrigera- 
tory, it  will  be  found  that  a  much  greater  quantity  of  caloric  is  communicated 
to  it,  than  could  possibly  have  been  transmitted  by  the  caloric  which  was  sen- 
sibly acting  before  the  condensation.  This  may  easily  be  ascertained  by  ob- 
serving the  quantity  of  caloric  communicated  to  the  water  in  the  refrigeratory 
of  a  still,  by  any  given  quantity  of  liquid  that  passes  over. 

1.  The  boiling  point,  or  the  temperature  at  which  the  conversion  of  fluids 
into  gases  takes  place,  is  different  in  dilferent  fluids,  but  constant  in  each,  pro- 
vided the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  be  the  same. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  197 

Put  any  quanty  of  sulphuric  oetlier  into  a  Florence  flask,  suspend  a  thermo- 
meter in  it,  and  hold  the  flask  over  an  Argand's  lamp,  the  aether  will  immedi- 
ately begin  to  boil,  and  the  thermometer  will  indicate  98deg.,  il'the  aether  has 
been  highly  rectified. 

If  highly  rectified  ardent  spirit  is  heated  in  a  similar  manner,  the  thermome- 
ter will  rise  to  176  deg.,  and  there  remain  stationary. 

If  water  is  substituted  it  will  rise  to  212  deg. 

If  strong  nitrous  acid  of  commerce  be  made  use  of,  it  will  be  found  to  boil 
at  248  deg.;  sulphuric  acid  and  linseed-oil  at  600  deg.;  mercury  at  656  deg.,&c. 

2.  The  boiling  point  of  fluids  is  raised  by  pressure. 

Mr.  Watt  heated  water  under  a  strong  pressure  to  400  deg.  Yet  still,  when 
the  pressure  was  removed,  only  part  of  the  water  was  converted  into  vapor, 
and  the  temperature  of  this  vapor,  as  well  as  that  of  the  remaining  fluid;  was 
no  more  than  212  deg.  There  was,  therefore,  18S  deg.  of  caloric  suddenly 
lost.  This  caloric  was  carried  ofl'  by  the  steam.  Now  as  only  about  one-fifth 
of  the  water  was  converted  into  steam,  that  steam  must  contain  not  only  its 
own  18S  deg.,  but  also  the  1S8  deg.  lost  by  each  of  the  other  four  parts ;  that 
is  to  say,  it'must  contain  188  X  5  deg.,  or  about  940  deg.  Steam,  therefore,  is 
water  combined  with  at  least  940  deg.  of  caloric,  the  presence  of  which  is  not 
indicated  by  the  thermometer. 

3.  When  pressure  is  removed  from  the  surface  of  bodies,  their  conversion 
into  the  gaseous  state  is  greatly  facilitated,  or  their  boiling  point  is  lowered. 

In  proof  of  this  the  following  experiments  may  serve  : 

Let  a  small  bottle  be  filled  w-ith  highly  rectified  sulphuric  aether,  and  a  piece 
of  wetted  bladder  be  tied  over  its  orifice  around  its  neck.  Transfer  it  under 
the  receiver  of  an  air-pum.p,  and  take  away  the  superincumbent  pressure  of 
the  air  in  the  receiver.  When  the  exhaustion  is  complete,  pierce  the  bladder 
by  means  of  a  pointed  sliding  wire,  passing  through  a  collar  of  leather  which 
covers  the  upper  opening  of  the  receiver.  Having  done  this,  the  aether  will 
instantly  begin  to  boil,  and  become  converted  into  an  invisible  gaseous  fluid. 

Take  a  small  retort  or  Florence  flask,  fill  it  one  half  or  less  with  water,  and 
make  it  boil  over  a  lamp  ;  v/hen  kept  briskly  boiling  for  about  Ave  minutes, 
cork  the  mouth  of  the  retort  as  expeditiously  as  possible,  and  remove  it  from 
the  lamp. 

The  water,  on  being  removed  from  the  source  of  heat,  will  keep  boiling  for 
a  few  minutes,  and  when  the  ebullition  begins  to  slacken,  it  may  be  renewed 
by  dipping  the  retort  into  cold  water,  or  pouring  cold  water  upon  it. 

The  water  during  boiling  becomes  converted  into  vapor  ;  this  vapor  expels 
the  air  of  the  vessel,  and  occupies  its  place  ;  on  diminishing  the  heat  it  con- 
denses  ;  when  the  retort  is  stopped,  a  partial  vacuum  is  formed ;  the  pressure 
becomes  diminished,  and  a  less  degree  of  heat  is  sufficient  to  cause  an  ebulli- 
tion. 

For  the  same  reason,  water  may  be  made  to  boil  under  the  exhausted  re- 
ceiver at  94  deg.Fah.,  or  even  at  a  lower  degree  ;  alcohol  at .56  deg.,  and  ether 
at— 20  deg. 

On  the  conversion  of  fluids  into  gases,  is  founded  the  following  experiment, 
by  which  water  is  frozen  by  means  of  sulphuric  aether. 

Take  a  thin  glass  tube,  four  or  five  inches  long,  and  about  two  or  three 
eighths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  a  two  ounce  bottle  furnished  v.'ith  a  capil- 
lary tube  fitted  to  its  neck.  In  order  to  n\ake  ice,  pour  a  little  water  into  the 
tube,  taking  care  not  to  wet  the  outside,  nor  to  leave  it  moist.  Having  done 
this,  let  a  stream  of  sulphuric  cether  fall  through  the  capillary  tube  upon  that 
part  of  it  containing  the  water,  which  by  this  means  will  be  converted  into  ice 
in  a  few  minutes,  and  this  it  will  do,  even  near  a  fire,  or  in  the  midst  of  sum- 
mer. 

If  the  glass  tube  containing  the  water  be  exposed  to  the  brisk  thorough  air, 
or  free  draught  of  an  open  window,  a  large  quantity  of  water  may  be  frozen 
in  a  shorter  time;  and  if  a  thin  spire  of  wire  be  introduced  previous  to  the 
congelation  of  the  water,  the  ice  will  adhere  to  it,  and  may  thus  be  drawn  out 
conveniently. 

A  person  might  be  easily  frozen  to  death  during  very  warm  weather,  by 
merely  pouring  upon  his  body  for  some  time  sulphuric  aether,  and  keeping  hira 
exposed  to  a  thorough  draught  of  air. 


198 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Artificial  Refrigeration. 

The  cooling  or  refrigeration  of  rooms  in  the  snramer  season  by  sprinkling 
them  with  water,  is  on  the  principle  of  evaporation. 

The  method  of  making  ice  artificially  in  the  East  Indies,  depends  on  the 
same  principle.  The  ice  makers  at  Benares  dig  pits  in  large  open  plains,  the 
bottom  of  which  they  strew  with  sugar  canes,  or  dried  stems  of  maize,  or  In- 
dian corn.  Upon  this  bed  they  place  a  number  of  unglazed  pans,  made  of  so 
porous  an  earth  that  the  water  penetrates  through  their  whole  substance. 
These  pans  are  filled  toward  evening  in  the  winter  season  with  water  that  has 
boiled,  and  left  in  that  situation  till  morning,  when  more  or  less  ice  is  found 
in  them,  according  to  the  temperature  and  other  qualities  of  the  air ;  there 
being  more  formed  in  dry  and  warm  weather  than  in  that  which  is  cloudy, 
though  it  may  be  colder  to  the  human  body. 

Every  thing  in  this  process  is  calculated  to  produce  cold  by  evaporation  : 
the  beds  on  which  the  pans  are  placed  suffer  the  air  to  have  a  free  passage  to 
their  bottoms  ;  and  the  pans  constantly  oozing  out  water  to  their  external  sur- 
face, are  cooled  by  the  evaporation  of  it. 

In  Spain  they  use  a  kind  of  earthen  jars,  called  buxaros,  which  are  only  half 
baked,  the  earth  of  which  is  so  porous  that  the  outside  is  kept  inoist  by  the 
■water  which  filters  through  it ;  and  though  placed  in  the  sun,  the  water  in  the 
jar  becomes  as  cold  as  ice. 

It  is  a  common  practice  in  China  to  cool  wine  or  other  liquors  by  \iTapping 
the  bottle  in  a  wet  cloth  and  hanging  it  up  in  the  sun.  The  water  in  the  cloth 
becomes  converted  into  vapor,  and  thus  cold  is  produced. 

The  blacks  in  Senegambia  have  a  similar  method  of  cooling  water,  by  fill- 
ing tanned  leather  bags  with  it,  which  they  hang  up  in  the  sun ;  the  water 
oozes  more  or  less  through  the  leather,  so  as  to  keep  the  outer  surface  wet, 
which  by  its  quick  and  continued  evaporation  cools  the  water  remarkably. 

The  winds  on  the  borders  of  the  Persian  gulf  are  often  so  scorching,  that 
travellers  are  suddenly  suflocated,  unless  they  cover  their  heads  with  a  wet 
cloth.  If  this  be  too  wet,  they  immediately  feel  an  intolerable  cold,  whidi 
would  prove  fatal  if  the  moisture  was  not  speedily  dissipated  by  the  heat. 

Condensation  of  Vapor. 

If  a  cold  vessel  is  brought  into  a  warm  room,  particularly  where  many  peo- 
ple are  assembled,  the  outside  of  it  will  soon  become  covered  with  a  sort  of 
dew. 

Before  some  changes  of  weather,  the  stone  pavements,  the  walls  of  a 
house,  the  balustrades  of  stair-cases  and  other  solid  objects,  feel  clammy  and 
damp. 

In  frosty  nights,  when  the  air  abroad  is  colder  than  the  air  within,  the 
dampness  of  this  air,  for  the  same  reason,  settles  on  the  glass  panes  of  the 
windows,  and  is  there  frozen  into  curious  and  beautiful  figures. 

Thus  fogs  and  ileivs  take  place,  and  in  the  higher  regions  clouds  are  formed 
from  the  condensed  vapor.  The  still  greater  condensation  produces  7nists  and 
rain. 

Capacity  of  Bodies  for  containing  Heat. 

The  property  which  different  bodies  possess,  of  containing  at  the  same  tem- 
perature, and  in  equal  quantities,  either  of  mass  or  bulk,  nnef|ual  quantities  of 
heat,  is  called  their  capacity  for  heat.  The  capacities  of  bodies  for  heat  are 
therefore  considered  as  great  or  small  in  proportion  as  their  temperatures  are 
cither  raised  by  the  addition,  or  diminished  by  the  deprivation  of  equal  quan- 
tities of  heat,  in  a  less  or  greater  degree. 

In  homogeneous  bodies,  the  quantities  of  caloric  which  they  contain  are  in 
the  ratio  of  their  temperature  and  mass  ;  when,  therefore,  equal  quantities  of 
water,  of  oil,  or  of  mercurj'^,  of  unequal  temperatures,  are  mingled  together, 
the  temperature  of  the  whole  will  be  the  arithmetical  mean  bcween  the  tem- 
perature of  the  two  quantities  that  had  been  mixed  together.  It  is  a  self-evi- 
dent truth  that  this  should  be  the  case,  for  the  particles  of  diflerent  portions  of 
the  same  substance  being  alike,  their  effects  must  be  equal. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  199 

For  instance, 

Mix  a  pound  of  water  at  172  deg.  with  a  pound  at  32  deg.,  half  the  excess 
of  heat  in  the  hot  water  will  quit  it  to  go  over  into  the  colder  portion  ;  thus 
the  hot  water  will  be  cooled  70  deg.,  and  the  cold  Avill  receive  70  deg.  of  tem- 
perature j  therefore,  172 — 70,  or  32-f-70  ='102,  will  give  the  heat  of  the  mix- 
ture. To  attain  the  arithmetical  mean  very  exactly,  several  precautions,  how- 
fiver,  are  necessary. 

When  heterogeneous  bodies  of  different  temperature  are  mixed  together, 
the  temperature  produced  is  never  the  arithmetical  mean  of  the  two  original 
temperatures. 

lu  order  to  ascertain  the  comparative  quaniities  of  heat  of  different  bodies, 
equal  weights  of  them  are  mingled  together,  the  experiments  for  this  purpose 
being  in  general  more  easily  executed  than  those  by  which  they  are  compared 
from  equal  bulks. 

Thus,  if  one  pound  of  meixury  heated  to  410  deg.  Fahren.  be  added  to  one 
pound  of  water  of  44  deg.,  the  temperature  of  the  blended  fluids  will  not  be 
changed  to  77  deg.,  as  it  would  be  if  the  surplus  of  heat  were  divided  among 
those  fluids  in  the  proportion  of  their  quantities.  It  will  be  found,  on  exami- 
nation, to  be  only  47  deg. 

On  the  contrary,  if  the  pound  of  mercury  be  heated  to  44  deg.  and  the  water 
to  110  deg.,  then,  on  stirring  them  together,  the  common  temperature  will  be 
107  deg. 

Hence,  if  the  quicksilver  loses  by  this  distribution  63  deg.  of  caloric,  an 
equal  weight  of  water  gains  only  3  deg.  from  this  loss  of  63  deg.  of  heat.  And, 
On  the  contrary,  if  the  water  loses  3  deg.  the  mercury  gains  63  deg. 

When,  instead  of  comparing  the  quantities  of  caloric  which  equal  tceighis 
of  different  bodies  contain,  we  compare  the  quantities  contained  in  equal  vol- 
umes, we  still  iind  that  an  obvious  difference  takes  place.  Thus  it  is  found  by 
experiment,  that  the  quantity  of  caloric  necessary  to  raise  the  temperature  of 
a  given  volume  of  water  any  number  of  degrees,  is,  to  that  necessary  to  raise 
an  equal  volume  of  mercury  the  same  number  of  degrees,  as  2  to  1.  This  is, 
therefore,  the  proportion  between  the  comparative  quantities  of  caloric  which 
these  two  bodies  contain,  estimated  by  their  volumes ;  and  similar  differences 
exist  with  respect  to  every  other  kind  of  matter. 

From  the  nature  of  the  experiments  by  which  the  quantities  of  caloric  whicli 
bodies  contain  are  ascertained,  it  is  evident  that  we  discover  merely  the  com- 
parative, not  the  absolule  quantities.  Hence  water  has  been  chosen  as  a  stand- 
ard, to  which  otlier  bodies  may  be  referred;  its  capacity  is  stated  as  the  arbi- 
trary term  of  1000,  and  with  this  the  capacities  of  other  bodies  are  compared. 

It  need  not  be  told,  that  pains  have  been  taken  to  estimate  on  these  experi- 
ments that  portion  of  heat  Vv'hich  diffuses  itself  into  the  air,  or  into  the  vessels 
where  the  mercury  and  water  are  blended  together.  As,  however,  such  valu- 
ations cannot  be  made  with  complete  accuracy,  the  numbers  stated  above  are 
Only  an  approximation  to  truth. 

Radiation  of  Caloric. 

Caloric  is  thrown  off  or  radiates  from  heated  bodies  in  right  lines,  and 
moves  through  space  with  inconceivable  velocity.  It  is  retarded  in  its  pass- 
age by  atmospheric  air,  by  colorless  fluids,  glass,  and  other  transparent  bo- 
dies. 

If  a  glass  mirror  be  placed  before  a  fire,  the  mirror  transmits  the  rays  of 
light,  but  not  the  rays  of  heat. 

If  a  plate  of  glass,  talc,  or  a  glass  vessel  filled  with  water,  be  suddenly  in- 
terposed between  the  fire  and  the  eye,  the  rays  of  light  pass  through  it,  but 
the  rays  of  caloric  are  considerably  retarded  in  its  passage  ;  for  no  heat  is 
perceived  until  the  interposed  substance  is  saturated  with  heat,  or  has  reach- 
ed it?  maximum.  It  then  ceases  to  intercept  the  rays  of  caloric,  and  allows 
them  to  pass  as  freely  as  the  rays  of  light. 

It  lias  been  lately  shown  by  Dr.  Herschel,  that  the  rays  of  caloric  are  re- 
frangible, but  less  so  than  the  rays  of  light;  and  the  same  philosopher  has  al- 
so proved  by  experiment,  that  it  is  not  only  the  rays  of  caloric  emitted  by  the 


200  THE    THOMSONIAN 

8un  which  are  refrangible,  but  likewise  the  rays  emitted  by  common  fires,  by 
candles,  by  heated  iron,  and  even  by  hot  water. 

Whether  the  rays  of  caloric  are  did'erentiy  refracted,  in  difl'erent  mediums, 
lias  not  yet  been  ascertained.  We  are  certain,  however,  that  they  are  refract- 
ed by  all  transparent  bodies  which  have  been  employed  as  burning  glasses. 

The  rays  of  caloric  are  also  reflected  by  polished  surfaces  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  rays  of  light. 

This  was  long  ago  noticed  by  Lambert,  Saussure,  Scheele,  Pictet,  and  lately 
by  Dr.  Herschel. 

Professor  Pictet  placed  two  concave  metallic  mirrors  opposite  to  each  other 
at  the  distance  of  about  twelve  feet.  When  a  hot  body,  an  iron  bullet  for  in- 
stance, was  placed  in  the  focus  of  one,  and  a  mercurial  thermometer  in  that  of 
tire  other,  a  substance  radiated  from  the  bullet ;  it  passed  with  incalculable 
velocity  through  the  air,  it  was  rellected  from  the  mirrors,  it  became  concen- 
trated, and  influenced  the  therraomeier  placed  in  the  focus,  according  to  the 
degree  of  its  concentration. 

An  iron  ball  tAVo  inches  in  diameter,  heated  so  that  it  was  not  luminous  in 
the  dark,  raised  the  thermometer  not  less  than  ten  and  a  half  degrees  of  Rau- 
mer's  scale,  in  six  minutes. 

A  lighted  candle  occasioned  a  rise  in  the  thermometer  nearly  the  same. 

A  Florence  flask  containing  two  ounces  and  three  drachms  of  boiling  water 
raised  Fahrenheit's  thermometer  three  degrees.  He  blackened  the  bulb  of  his 
thermometer,  and  found  that  it  was  more  speedily  influenced  by  the  radiation 
tlian  before,  and  that  it  rose  to  a  greater  height. 

M.  Pictet  discovered  another  very  singular  fact ;  namely,  the  apparent  radia- 
tion of  cold.  When  instead  of  a  heated  body,  a  Florence  flask  full  of  ice  or  snow 
is  placed  in  the  focus  of  one  of  the  mirrors,  the  thermometer  placed  in  the  fo- 
cus of  the  other  immediately  descends,  and  ascends  again  whenever  the  cold 
body  is  removed. 

This  phenomenon  maybe  explained  on  the  supposition,  that  from  everybo- 
dy at  every  temperature  caloric  radiates,  but  in  the  less  quantity  as  the  tem- 
perature is  low  ;  so  that  in  the  above  experiment,  the  thermometer  gives  out 
more  caloric  by  radiation  than  it  receives  from  the  body  in  the  opposite  focus, 
and  therefore  its  temperature  is  lowered.  Or,  as  Pictit  has  supposed,  when 
several  bodies  near  each  other  have  the  same  temperature,  there  is  no  radiation 
of  caloric,  because  in  all  of  them  it  exists  in  a  state  of  equal  tension  ;  but  as 
60on  as  a  body  at  an  inferior  temperature  is  introduced  the  balance  of  tension 
is  broken,  and  caloric  begins  to  radiate  from  all  of  them,  till  the  temperature 
of  that  body  is  raised  to  an  equality  with  theirs.  In  the  above  experiment, 
therefore,  the  placing  the  snow  or  ice  in  the  focus  of  the  mirror  causes  the  ra- 
diation of  caloric /ro?/i  the  thermometer,  and  hence  the  diminution  of  tempe- 
rature which  it  suffers. 

These  experiments  have  been  since  repeated  by  Dr.  Young  and  Professor 
Davy,  at  the  theatre  of  the  Royal  Institution.  These  gentlemen  inflamed 
phosphorus  by  reflected  caloric,  and  proved  that  the  heat  thus  excited  was  ve- 
ry sensible  to  the  organs  of  feeling. 

It  is  therefore  evident,  that  caloric  is  thrown  off  from  bodies  in  rays,  which 
are  invisible,  or  incapable  of  exciting  vision,  but  which  are  capable  of  exciting 
heat. 

These  invisible  rays  of  caloric  are  propagated  by  right  lines,  with  extreme 
velocity;  and  are  capable  of  the  laws  of  reflection  and  refraction. 

The  heating  agency  however  is  difl'erent  in  the  different  colored  rays  of  the 
prismatic  spectrum.  According  to  Dr.  Herschel's  experiments,  it  follows  in- 
versely the  order  of  the  refrangibility  of  the  rays  of  light.  The  least  refran- 
gible, possessing  it  in  the  greatest  degree. 

Sir  Henry  Englefield  has  lately  made  a  series  of  experiments  on  the  same 
subject,  from  which  we  learn,  that  a  thermometer  having  its  ball  blackened, 
rose  when  placed  in  the  blue  ray  of  the  prismatic  spectrum  in  3  min.  from  55 
des.  to  56  deg.;  in  the  green,  in  3  rain,  from  54  deg.  to  58  deg.;  in  the  rjclloic, 
in  3  min.  from  56  deg.  to  62  deg.;  in  ihc  full  red,  in  2  1-2  min.  from  56  deg.  to 
72  deg.;  in  the  confines  of  the  red,  in  2  1-2  min.  from  58  deg.  to  73  1-2  deg.;  and 
quite  out  of  the  visible  light,  in  2  1-2  min.  from  61  deg.  to  79  deg. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  201 

Between  each  of  the  observations,  the  thermometer  was  placed  in  the  shade 
so  lonij  as  to  sink  it  below  the  heat  to  which  it  had  risen  in  the  preceding  ob- 
servation ;  of  course  its  rise  above  that  point  could  only  be  the  eil'ect  of  the 
ray  to  which  it  was  exposed.  It  was  continued  in  the  focus  long  after  it  had 
ceased  to  rise;  therefore  the  heats  given  are  the  greatest  efl'ects  of  the  sever- 
al rays  on  the  thermometer  in  each  observation.  A  thermometer  placed  con- 
stantly in  the  shade  near  the  apparatus,  was  found  scarcely  to  vary  during  the 
^periments. 

Sir  Henry  made  other  experiments  with  thermometers  with  naked  balls,  and 
with  olliers  whose  bails  were  painted  white,  for  which  we  refer  the  reader  to 
Uie  interesting  paper  of  the  Baronet,  from  which  the  above  experiments  are 
transcribed. 

Production  of  Artificial  Cold,  bij  means  of  Frigorific  Mixtures. 

A  number  of  experiments  have  been  lately  made  by  different  philosophers, 
especially  by  Pepys,  Walker,  and  Lowitz,  in  order  to  produce  artificial  cold. 
And  as  these  methods  are  often  employed  in  chemistry,  with  a  view  to  expose 
bodies  to  the  inliuence  of  very  low  temperatures,  we  shall  enumerate  in  a  ta- 
bular form  the  different  substances  Avhich  may  be  made  use  offer  that  pur- 
pose, and  the  degrees  of  cold  which  thcj'  are  capable  of  producing. 

To  produce  the  efiects  stated  in  the  table,  the  salts  must  be  reduced  to  pow- 
der, and  contain  their  full  quantity  of  water  of  crystalization.  The  vessel  in 
wiiich  the  freezing  mixture  is  made,  should  be  very  thin,  and  just  large  enough 
ta  hold  it,  and  the  materials  should  be  mixed  together  as  expeditiously  as  pos- 
sible, taking  care  to  stir  the  mixture  at  the  s."me  time  with  a  rod  of  glass  or 
wood. 

In  order  to  obtain  the  full  effect,  the  materials  ought  to  be  first  cooled  to  the 
temperature  marked  in  the  table,  by  introducing  them  into  some  of  the  other 
frigorific  mixtures,  and  then  mingling  them  together  in  a  similar  mixture.  If, 
for  instance,  we  wish  to  produce — 46  deg.,  the  snow  and  diluted  nitric  acid 
ought  to  be  cooled  down  to  0  deg.,  by  putting  the  vessel  which  contains  each 
of  them  into  t!ie  fifth  freezing  mixture  in  the  following  table,  before  they  are 
mingled  together.  If  a  more  intense  cold  be  required,  the  materials  to  pro- 
duce it  are  to  l)e  brought  to  the  proper  temperature  by  being  previously  placed 
in  the  second  freezing  mixture. 

This  process  is  to  be  continued  till  the  required  degree  of  cold  has  been  pro- 
cured. 

A  TABLE  OF  FREEZING  MIXTURES. 

Mixtures.  Thermometer  sinks. 

Muriate  cf  ammonia 5  parts  ) 

Nitrate  of  Potassa 5  >         From  50  desr.  to  10  deg. 

Water 16  ) 

Muriate  of  ammonia 5  parts  "I 

Nitrate  of  Potassa 5  1  -r,         k,^  i       *     i  i 

Sulphate  of  soda 8  ^^^"^  50  deg.  to  4  deg. 

Water 16  J 

Sulphate  of  soda 3  parts?  t^         ca  i        *       n  i 

Diluted  nitric  acid 2  <,         From  50  deg.  to-3  deg. 

Sire  liT.".!-.:.;-.-.:;-.  I  "'""^  \    ■'™°  ^^o  deg,  ,o  o  de^. 
£l;,e-;r-.oia::::;;::.:  l'"'|    F™.t3o,eg.,„odeg. 

Snow,  or  pounded  ice •.  2  parts  >          -r,         ^  ,       ^       ^   , 

Muriate  of  soda 1  part   \         ^"^^"^  ^  ^^^-  ^^-^  ^eg. 

Snow,  or  pounded  ice 12  parts ") 

Muriate  of  soda 5            I        '  t-             c  j       .        ,n  j 

Muriate   of  ammonia   and  f          From —5  deg.  to— IS  deg. 

nitrate  of  potassa 5           J 

14 


202 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


Snow,  or  pounded  ice 12  parts  ^ 

Muriate  of  soda 5            > 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 5            ) 

Snow 3  parts  } 

Diluted  nitric  acid 2            > 

Muriate  ol^  lime 3  parts  > 

Snow 2            ) 

Potassa 4  parts  > 

Snow 3            y 

Snow 8  parts  ^ 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid. . ..  3             > 

Diluted  nitric  acid 3            ) 

Snow 1  part   > 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid. .. .  1'            $ 

Muriate  of  lime 2  parts  ) 

Snow 1  part    ^ 

Muriate  of  lime 3  parts  ? 

Snow 1  part    ) 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid. ...  10  parts  > 

Snow 8             y 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 1  part    > 

Water 1             ^ 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 1  part   i 

Carbonate  of  soda 1             > 

Water. 1             ; 

Sulphate  of  soda .....  6  parts ") 

Muriate   of  ammonia 4             1 

Nitrate  of  potassa 2             f 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4            ) 

Sulphate  of  soda 6  parts  i 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 5             > 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4            ) 

Phosphate  of  soda 9  parts  ) 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4             ^ 

Phosphate  of  soda 9  parts  i 

Nitrate  of  ammonia 6             > 

Diluted  nitric  acid 4            ) 

Sulphate  of  soda 5  parts  > 

Diluted  sulphuric  acid....  4            ) 


From  —18  deg.  to  —25  deg. 

From  0  deg.  to — 46  deg. 
From  32  deg.  to  —50  deg. 
From  32  deg.  to  —51  deg. 

From — 10  deg.  to  —56  deg. 

From  20  deg.  to  —60  deg. 
From  0  deg.  to  — 66  deg. 
From  —40  deg.  to  —73  deg. 
From— 68  deg.  to— 91  deg. 
From  50  deg.  to  4  deg. 

From  50  deg.  to  — 7  d6g. 

From  50  deg.  to  — 10  deg. 

From  50  deg.  to  — 14  deg. 
From  50  deg.  to — 12(  deg. 
From  50  deg.  to  21  deg. 
From  50  deg.  to  3  de^. 


LIGHT.— Zmx. 

The  nature  of  light  has  occupied  much  of  the  attention  of  philosophers,  and 
numerous  opinions  have  been  entertained  concerning  it.  It  has  been  some- 
times considered  as  a  distinct  substance,  at  other  times  as  a  quality  ;  some- 
times as  a  cause,  frequently  as  an  eifect;  by  some  it  lias  been  considered  as  a 
compound,  by  others  as  a  simple  substance.  Philosophers  of  the  present  day 
£tre  mostly  agreed  as  to  the  independent  existence  of  light,  or  the  cause  by 
which  we  see. 

Nature  of  Light . 

Light  is  that  which  proceeds  from  any  body  producing  the  sensation  of  vi- 
sion, or  perception  of  other  bodies,  by  depicting  an  image  of  external  objects 
on  the  retina  of  the  eye.  Hence  it  announces  fo  animals  the  presence  of  the 
bodies  which  surround  them,  and  enables  them  to  distinguish  these  bodies  in- 
to transparent,  opaque,  and  colored.    These  properties  are  so  essentially  eon- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  203 

nected  with  llie  presence  of  light,  that  bodies  lose  them  in  the  dark,  and  be- 
come undistinguishable. 

Light  is  regarded  by  philosophers  as  a  substance  consisting  of  a  vast  niuu> 
ber  of  exceedingly  small  particles,  which  are  actually  projected  from  luminous 
bodies,  and  which  probably  never  return  again  to  the  body  from  which  they 
were  emitted. 

It  is  universally  expanded  through  space.  It  exerts  peculiar  actions,  and 
is  obedient  to  the  laws  of  attraction,  and  other  properties  of  matter. 

Explanation  of  certain  terms  of  light. 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  doctrine  of  light,  Ave  shall  shortly  explain  a  few 
terras  made  use  of  by  philosophers  when  treating  of  it;  namely, 

A  ray  of  light  is  an  exceedingly  small  portion  of  light  as  it  comes  from  a 
luminous  body. 

A  medium  is  a  body  which  affords  a  passage  for  the  rays  of  light. 

A  beam  of  light  is  a  body  of  parallel  rays. 

A  pencil  of  rays  is  a  body  of  diverging  or  converging  rays. 

Converging  rays  are  rays  which  tend  to  a  common  point. 

Diverging  rays  are  those  which  come  from  a  point,  and  continually  separate 
as  they  proceed. 

The  rays  of  light  are  parallel,  when  the  lines  which  they  describe  are  so. 

The  radiant  point  is  the  point  from  which  diverging  rays  proceed. 

The  focus  is  the  point  to  which  the  converging  rays  are  directed. 

Sources  of  Light. 

Light  is  emitted  from  the  sun  and  fixed  stars,  and  other  luminous  bodies. 
It  is  produce!  by  percussion,  during  electrization,  combustion,  and  in  various 
other  chemical  processes. 

Why  the  sun  and  stars  are  constantly  emitting  light,  is  a  question  which 
probably  will  forever  baffle  human  understanding. 

The  light  emitted  during  combustion,  exists  previously,  either  combined 
with  the  combustible  body,  or  with  the  substance  which  supports  the  combus- 
tion. The  light  liberated  during  chemical  action,  formed  a  constituent  part  of 
the  bodies  which  act  on  each  other. 

Chemical  Properties  of  Light. 

The  chemical  effects  of  light  have  much  engaged  the  nttentioft  of  philoso- 
phers. Its  influence  upon  animal,  vegetable,  and  other  substances,  is  as  fol- 
lows : 

1.  On  Vegetables. 

Every  body  knows,  that  most  of  the  discous  flowers  follow  the  sun  in  his 
course  ;  that  they  attend  him  to  his  evening  retreat,  and  meet  his  rising  lustre 
in  the  morning  with  the  same  unerring  law.     It  is  also  well  known,  that  the 
change  of  position  in  the  leaves  of  plants  at  different  periods  of  the  day,  is  en- 
tirely owins  to  the  agency  of  light,  and  that  plants  which  grow  in  windows  in 
the  inside  of  houses,  are  as  it  were  solicitous  to  turn  their  leaves  towards  the 
light.     Natural  philosophers  have  long  been  aware  of  the  influence  of  light  on 
vegetation.     It  was  first  observed,  that  plants  srowing  in  the  shade,  or  dark- 
ness, are  pale  and  without  color.     The  term  etiolation  has  been  given  to  this 
phenomenon,  and  the  plants  in  which  it  takes  place  are  said  to  be  etiolated  or 
blanched.    Gardeners  avail  themselves  of  the  knowledge  of  this  fact  to  furnish 
our  tables  with  white  and  tender  vegetables.     When  the  plants  have  attained 
a  certain  height,  they  compress  the  leaves,  by  tying  them  together,  and  by 
these  means,  (or  by  laying  earth  over  them,)  deprive  them  of  the  contact  of 
light:    and  thus  it  is,,  that  our  white  celery,  lettuce,  cabbage,  endive,  &c.  are  . 
obtained.     For  the  same  reason,  wood  is  white  under  the  green  bark  ;    and 
roots  are  less  colored  than  plants ;    some  of  them  alter  their  taste,  8cc. ;    they 
even  acriuire  a  deleterious  quality  when  suffered  to  grow  exposed  to  light. 
Potatoes  are  of  this  kind.     Herbs  that  grow  beneath  stones,  or  in  places  ut- 
terly dark,  are  white,  soft,  aqueous,  and  of  a  mild  and  insipid  taste.    The  more 
plants  are  exposed  to  the  light,  the  more  color  they  acquire.    Though  plants. 


204  THE    THOMSON  IAN 

are  capable  of  being  nourished  exceedingly  well  in  ihe  dark,  and  in  that  state 
grow  much  more  rapidly  than  in  the  sun,  (proA'ided  the  air  that  surrounds 
them  is  fit  for  vegetation,)  they  are  colorless  and  unfit  for  use. 

Professor  Davy  found  by  e.xperiment,  that  red  rose  trees,  carefully  excluded 
from  tlie  light,  produce  roses  almost  white.  He  likewise  ascertained  that  this 
flower  owes  its  color  to  light  entering  into  its  composition  ;  that  pink,  orange, 
and  yellow  fiowers,  imbibe  a  smaller  portion  of  light  than  red  ones,  and  that 
white  fiowers  contain  no  light.  But  vegetables  are  not  only  indebted  to 
the  light  for  their  color  ;  taste  and  odor  are  likewise  derived  Irom  the  same 
source. 

Light  contributes  greatly  to  the  maturity  of  fruits  and  seeds.  This  seems 
to  be  the  cause  why,  under  the  burning  sun  of  Africa,  vegetables  are  in  gene- 
ral mo;'e  odoriferous,  of  a  stronger  taste,  and  more  abounding  with  resin. 
From  the  same  cause  it  happens,  that  hot  climates  seem  to  be  the  native  coun- 
tries of  perfumes,  odoriferous  fruits,  and  aromatic  resins. 

The  action  of  light  is  so  powerful  on  the  organs  of  vegetables,  as  to  cause 
them  to  pour  forth  torrents  of  pure  air  from  the  surface  of  their  leaves  into 
the  atmosphere,  while  exposed  to  the  sun ;  whereas  on  the  contrary,  when  in 
the  shade  they  emit  an  air  of  a  noxious  quality.  Take  a  few  handfuls  of  fresh 
gathered  leaves  of  mint,  cabbage,  or  any  other  plant ;  place  them  in  a  bell- 
glass,  filled  with  fresh  water,  and  invert  it  into  a  basin  with  the  same  fluid. 
If  the  whole  be  then  exposed  to  the  direct  I'ays  of  the  sun,  small  air  bubbles 
will  appear  upon  the  surface  of  the  leaves,  which  will  gradually  grow  larger, 
and  at  last  detatch  themselves,  and  become  collected  at  the  surface  of  the  wa- 
ter.    This  is  oxygen  gas,  or  vital  air. 

All  plants  do  not  emit  this  air  v.'itli  the  same  facility;  there  are  seme  which 
j-^ield  it  the  moment  the  sun  acts  upon  them  ;  as  the  jaccbcea  or  ragwort,  la- 
vender, peppermint,  and  some  other  aromatic  plants.  The  leaves  aflbrd  more 
air  when  attached  to  the  plant  than  when  gathered  ;  the  quantity  is  also  great- 
er, the  fresher  and  sounder  they  arc,  and  if  full  grown  and  collected  during 
dry  weather.  Green  plants  afiord  more  air  than  those  Avhich  are  of  a  yellow- 
ish or  white  color.  Green  fruits  aflbrd  likewise  oxygen  gas;  but  it  is  not  so 
plentifully  furnished  by  those  which  are  ripe.  Flowers  in  general  render  the 
air  noxious.  The  nasturtion  indicum,  in  the  course  of  a  fcvf  hours,  gives  out 
more  air  than  is  equal  to  the  bulk  of  all  its  leaves.  On  the  contrary ,"if  a  like 
bell-glass,  prepared  in  the  same  manner,  be  kept  in  the  dark,  another  kind  of 
air  will  be  disengaged,  of  an  opposite  quality. 

There  is  not  a  substance  which,  in  well  closed  glass  vessels,  and  exposed  to 
the  sun's  light,  does  not  experience  some  alteration. 

Camphor,  kept  in  glass  bottles,  exposed  to  light,  crystallizes  into  the  most 
beautiful  symmetrical  figures,  on  that  side  of  the  glass  which  is  exposed  to  the 
light. 

Yellow  wax  exposed  to  the  light  loses  its  color  and  becomes  bleached.  Gum 
guaiacum,  reduced  to  powder,  becomes  green  on  exposure  to  light.  Vegeta- 
ble colors,  such  as  those  of  saliron,  log- wood,  &c.  become  pale,  or  white,  &c. 

2.  0?i  Jlnimals. 

The  human  being  is  equally  dependent  on  the  influence  of  light.  Animals 
in  general  droop  wlien  deprived  of  light;  they  become  unhealthy,  and  even 
sometimes  die.  When  a  man  has  been  long  confined  in  a  dark  dungeon, 
(though  well  aired)  his  whole  complexion  becomes  sallow ;  pustules,  filled  with 
aqueous  humors,  break  out  on  his  skin;  and  the  person  who  has  been  thus 
deprived  of  light  becomes  languid,  and  frequently  dropsical.  Worms,  grubs, 
and  caterpillars,  which  live  in  the  earth,  or  in  wood,  are  of  a  whitish  color ; 
moths,  and  other  insects  of  the  night,  are  likewise  distinguishable  from  those 
•which  fly  by  day.  by  the  Avant  of  brilliancy  in  their  color.  The  diflerence  be- 
tween those  insects,  in  northern  and  southern  parts,  is  still  more  obvious. 

The  parts  offish  which  are  exposed  to  light,  as  the  back,  fins,  &c.  are  uni- 
formly  colored,  but  the  belly,  which  is  deprived  of  light,  is  Avhite  in  all  of 
them. 

Birds  which  inhabit  the  tropical  conutries  have  much  brighter  plumage  than 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  205 

those  of  the  north.  Those  parts  of  the  birds  which  are  not  exposed  to  the 
light  are  iinit'oimly  pale.  The  feathers  on  the  belly  of  a  bird  are  generally 
pale  or  white;  the  back,  which  is  exposed  to  the  light,  is  almost  always  co- 
lored; the  bi-east,  which  is  particularly  exposed  to  light  in  most  birds,  is 
brighter  than  the  belly. 

Butterflies,  and  various  other  animals  of  equatorial  countries,  are  brighter 
colored  than  those  of  the  polar  regions.  Some  of  the  northern  animals  are 
even  darker  in  summer  and  paler  in  winter. 

3.  On  other  substances. 
Certain  metallic  oxydes  become  combustible  when  exposed  to  light ;   and 
acids,  as  the  nitric,  8cc.  are  decomposed  by  its  contact,  and  various  other  sub- 
stances change  their  nature. 

AIR. 

This  term  was,  till  lately,  used  as  the  generic  name  for  such 
invisible  and  exceeeding-ly  rare  fluids  as  possess  a  very  high 
degree  of  elasticity,  and  are  not  condensible  into  the  liquid 
state  by  any  degree  of  cold  hitherto  produced  ;  but  as  this  term 
is  commonly  employed  to  signify  that  compound  of  aeriform 
liuids  which  constitutes  our  atmosphere,  it  has  been  deemed 
advisable  to  restrict  it  to  this  signification,  and  to  employ  as  the 
generic  term  the  word  Gas,  for  the  different  kinds  of  air,  ex- 
cept what  relates  to  our  atmospheric  compound. 

Air,  atmospheric. 

"The  immense  mass  of  permanently  elastic  fluid  which  sur- 
rounds the  globe  we  inhabit,"  says  Dr.  Ure,  "  must  consist  of 
a  general  assemblage  of  every  kind  of  air  which  can  be  formed 
by  the  various  bodies  that  compose  its  surface.  Most  of  these, 
however,  are  absorbed  by  water  :  a  number  of  them  are  decom- 
posed by  combination  with  each  other;  and  some  of  them  are 
seldom  disengaged  in  considerable  quantities  by  the  processes 
of  nature.  Hence  it  is  that  the  lower  atmosphere  consists 
chiefly  of  oxygen  and  nitrogen,  together  with  moisture  and  the 
occasional  vapors  or  exhalations  of  bodies.  The  upper  atmos- 
phere seems  to  be  composed  of  a  large  proportion  of  hydrogen, 
a  fluid  of  so  much  less  specilic  gravity  than  any  other,  that  it 
must  naturally  ascend  to  the  highest  place,  where,  being  occa- 
sionally set  on  fire  by  electricity,  it  appears  to  be  the  cause  of 
the  aurora  borealis  and  fire-balls.  It  may  easily  be  understood, 
that  this  will  only  happen  on  the  confines  of  the  respective 
masses  of  connnon  atmospherical  air,  and  of  the  inflammable 
air  ;  that  the  combustion  will  extend  progressively,  though  ra- 
pidly, in  flashings  from  the  place  where  it  commences  ;  and 
that  when  by  any  means  a  stream  of  inflainmableair,  in  its  pro- 
gress toward  the  upper  atmosphere,  is  set  on  fire  at  one  end, 
its  ignition  may  be  much  more  rapid  than  what  happens  higher 
up,  where  oxygen  is  wanting,  and  at  the  same  time  more  defi- 


206  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Dite  in  its  figure  and  progression,  so  as  to  form  the  appearance 
of  a  fire-ball. 

That  the  air  of  the  atmosphere  is  so  transparent  as  to  be  in- 
visible except  by  the  blue  color  it  reflects  when  in  large  mass- 
es, as  is  seen  in  the  sky  or  region  above  us,  or  in  viewing  ex- 
tensive landscapes  ;  that  it  is  without  smell,  except  tliat  of  elec- 
tricity, which  it  sometimes  very  manifestly  exhibits  ;  altogeth- 
er without  taste  and  impalpable  :  not  condensible  by  any  de- 
gree of  cold  into  the  dense  fluid  state,  though  easily  changing 
its  dimensions  with  its  temperature  ;  that  it  gravitates  and  is 
highly  elastic  ;  are  among  the  numerous  observations  and  dis- 
coveries which  do  honor  to  the  sagacity  of  the  philosophers  of 
the  seventeenth  century.  They  likewise  knew  that  this  fluid 
is  indispensably  necessary  to  combustion,  but  no  one,  except 
the  great,  though  neglected,  John  Mayow,  appears  to  have 
formed  any  proper  notion  of  its  manner  of  acting  in  that  pro- 
cess. 

The  air  of  the  atmosphere,  like  other  fluids,  appears  to  be 
capable  of  holding  bodies  in  solution.  It  takes  up  water  in  con- 
siderable quantities,  with  a  diminution  of  its  own  specific  gra- 
vity :  from  which  circumstance,  as  well  as  from  the  considera- 
tion that  water  rises  very  plentifully  in  the  vaporous  state  in 
vacuo,  it  seems  probable  that  the  air  suspends  vapor,  not  so 
much  by  a  real  solution,  as  by  keeping  its  particles  asunder, 
and  preventing  their  condensation.  Water  likewise  dissolves 
or  absorbs  air. 

Mere  heating  or  cooling  does  not  aflect  the  chemical  proper- 
ties of  atmospherical  air  ;  but  actual  combustion,  or  any  pro- 
cess of  the  same  nature,  combines  its  oxygen  and  leaves  its  ni- 
trogen separate.  Whenever  a  process  of  this  kind  is  carried  on 
in  a  vessel  containing  atmospherical  air,  which  is  enclosed  ei- 
ther by  inverting  the  vessel  over  mercury,  or  by  stopping  its 
aperture  in  a  proper  manner,  it  is  found  that  the  process  ceases 
after  a  certain  time  ;  and  that  the  remaining  air  (if  a  combusti- 
ble body  capable  of  solidifying  the  oxygen,  such  as  phosphorus, 
have  been  employed,)  has  lost  about  a  fifth  part  of  its  volume, 
and  is  of  such  a  nature  as  to  be  incapable  of  maintaining  any 
combustion  for  a  second  time,  or  of  supporting  the  life  of  ani- 
mals. From  these  experiments  it  is  clear,  that  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing deductions  must  be  true: — 1.  The  combustible  body 
has  emitted  some  principle,  which,  by  combining  with  the  air, 
has  rendered  it  unfit  for  the  purpose  of  further  combustion  ;  or, 
2.  It  has  absorbed  part  of  the  air  which  was  fit  for  that  pur- 
pose, and  has  left  a  residue  of  a  different  nature  ;  or,  3.  Both 
events  have  happened ;  namely,  that  the  pure  part  of  the  air 
has  been  absorbed,  and  a  principal  has  been  emitted,  which  has 
changed  the  original  properties  of  the  remainder. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  207 

The  facts  must  clear  up  these  theories.  The  first  inductioa 
caunot  be  true,  because  the  residual  air  is  not  only  of  less  bulk, 
but  of  less  specific  gravity,  than  before.  The  air  cannot  there- 
fore have  received  so  much  as  it  has  lost.  The  second  is  the 
doctrine  of  the  philosophers  who  deny  the  existence  of  phlogis- 
ton, or  a  principle  of  inflammability ;  and  the  third  must  be 
adopted  by  those  who  maintain  that  such  a  principle  escapes 
from  bodies  during  combustion.  This  residue  was  called  phlo- 
gisticated  air,  in  consequence  of  such  an  opinion. 

In  the  opinion  that  inflammable  air  is  the  phlogiston,  it  is 
not  necessary  to  reject  the  second  inference  that  the  air  has  been 
no  otherwise  changed  than  by  the  mere  subtraction  of  one  of 
its  principles  ;  for  the  pure  or  vital  part  of  the  air  may  unite 
with  inflammable  air  supposed  to  exist  in  a  fixed  state  in  the 
combustible  body  ;  and  if  the  product  of  this  union  still  conti- 
nues fixed,  it  is  evident,  that  the  residue  of  the  air,  after  com- 
bustion, will  be  the  same  as  it  would  have  been  if  the  vital  part 
had  been  absorbed  by  any  other  fixed  body.  Or,  if  the  vital 
air  be  absorbed  while  inflamnjable  air  or  phlogiston  is  disenga- 
ged, and  unites  with  the  aeriform  residue,  his  residue  will  not 
be  heavier  than  before,  unless  tiie  inflanmiable  air  it  has  gained 
exceeds  in  weight  the  vital  air  it  has  lost ;  and  if  the  inflamma- 
ble air  fafls  short  of  that  weight  the  residue  will  be  licrhter. 

These  theories  it  was  necessary  to  mention  ;  but  it  has  been 
sufficiently  proved  by  various  experiments,  that  combustible 
bodies  take  oxygen  from  the  atmosphere,  and  leave  nitrogen,; 
and  that  when  these  two  fluids  are  again  mixed  in  due  propor- 
tions, they  compose  a  mixture  not  diflering  from  atmospherical 
air. 

The  respiration  of  animals  produces  the  same  effect  on  at- 
mospherical air  as  combustion  does,  and  their  constant  heat  ap- 
pears to  be  an  effect  of  the  same  nature.  When  an  animal  is 
included  in  a  limited  quantity  of  atmospherical  an*,  it'dies  as 
soon  as  the  oxygen  is  consumed ;  and  no  other  air  will  main- 
tain animal  life  but  oxygen,  or  a  mixture  which  contains  it. 
Pure  oxygen  maintains  the  life  of  animals  much  longer  than  at- 
mospherical air,  bulk  for  bulk. 

It  is  to  be  particularly  observed,  however,  that,  in  many  ca- 
ses of  combustion,  the  oxygen  of  the  air,  in  combining  with  the 
combustible  body,  produces  a  compound,  not  solid,  or  liquid, 
but  aeriform.  The  residual  air  will  therefore  be  a  mixture  of 
the  nitrogen  of  the  atmosphere  with  the  consumed  oxygen,  con- 
verted into  another  gas.  Thus,  in  burning  charcoal,  the  car- 
bonic acid  gas  generated,  mixes  with  the  residual  nitrogen,  and 
makes  up  exactly,  when  the  effect  of  heat  ceases,  thebulk  of 
the  original  air.    The  breathing  of  animals,  in  like  manner, 


208  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

changes  the  oxygen  into  carbonic  acid  gas,  without  altering  the 
atmospherical  volume. 

There  are  many  provisions  in  nature  by  which  the  propor- 
tion of  oxygen  iu  the  atmosphere,  which  is  continually  consu- 
med in  respiration  and  combustion,  is  again  restored  to  that  flu- 
id. In  fact  there  appears,  as  far  as  an  estimate  can  be  formed 
of  the  great  and  general  operations  of  nature,  to  be  at  least  as 
great  an  emission  of  oxygen  as  is  sufficient  to  keep  the  general 
mass  of  the  atmosphere  at  the  same  degree  of  purity.  Thus, 
in  volcanic  eruptions,  there  seems  to  be  at  least  as  much  oxy- 
gen emitted  or  extricated  by  fire  from  various  minerals,  as  is 
saflicient  to  maintain  the  combustion,  and  perhaps  even  to  me- 
liorate the  atmosphere.  And  in  the  bodies  of  plants  and  ani- 
mals, which  appear  in  a  great  measure  to  derive  their  susten- 
ance and  augmentation  from  the  atmosphere  and  its  contents, 
it  is  found  tliat  a  large  proportion  of  nitrogen  exists.  Most 
plants  emit  oxygen  in  the  sunshine,  from  which  it  is  highly 
probable  that  they  imbibe  and  decompose  the  air  of  the  atmos- 
phere, retainincr  carbon,  and  emitting  the  vital  part.  Lastly,  if 
to  this  we  add  the  decomposition  of  water,  there  will  be  numer- 
ous occasions  in  which  this  fluid  will  supply  us  with  disenga- 
ged oxygen  ;  while,  by  a  very  rational  supposition,  its  hydro- 
gen may  be  consideied  as  having  entered  into  the  bodies  of 
plants  for  the  formation  of  oils,  sugars,  mucilages,  &c.,  from 
which  it  may  be  again  extricated. 

To  determine  the  respirability  or  purity  of  air,  it  is  evident 
that  recourse  must  be  had  to  its  comparative  eflicacy  in  main- 
taining combustion,  or  some  other  equivalent  process. 

From  the  latest  and  most  accurate  experiments,  the  propor- 
tion of  oxygen  in  atmospheric  air  is  by  measure  about  21  per 
cent, ;  and  it  appears  to  be  very  nearly  the  same,  wiiether  it  be 
in  this  country  or  on  the  coast  of  Guinea,  on  lov;  plains  or  lofty 
mountains,  or  even  at  the  height  of  7250  yards  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  as  ascertained  by  Gay  Lussac,  in  his  aerial  voyage  in 
September,  1805.  The  remainder  of  the  air  is  nitrogen,  v.'ith  a 
small  portion  of  aqueous  vapor,  amounting  to  about  one  per 
cent,  in  the  driest  weather,  and  a  still  less  portion  of  carbonic 
acid,  not  exceeding  a  thousandth  part  of  the  wliole. 

As  oxygen  and  nitrogen  differ  in  specific  gravity  in  the  pro- 
portion of  135  to  121,  according  to  Kirwan,  and  of  139  to  120, 
according  to  Davy,  it  has  been  presumed,  that  the  oxygen 
would  be  more  abundant  in  the  lower  regions,. and  the  nitrogeu 
in  the  higher,  if  they  constituted  a  mere  mechanical  mixture, 
which  appears  contrary  to  the  fact.  On  the  other  hard,  it  has 
been  urged,  that  they  cannot  be  in  the  state  of  chemical  combi- 
nation, because  they  both  retain  their  distinct  properties  unal- 
tered, and  no  change  of  temperature  or  density  takes  place  on 


MATERIA  MEDICA,  209 

their  union.  But  perhaps  it  mnv  be  said,  that,  as  they  have  no 
repugnance  to  mix  witli  each  otlier,  as  oil  and  water  have,  the 
continual  agitation  to  which  the  atmosphere  is  exposed,  maybe 
suflicient  to  prevent  two  fluids,  diflering  not  more  than  oxygen 
and  nitrogen  in  i^^ravity,  iVom  separating  by  subsidence,  though 
simply  mixed.  On  the  contrary,  it  may  be  argued,  that  to  say 
chemical  combination  cannot  take  place  without  producing  new 
properties,  which  did  not  exist  belbre  in  the  component  parts, 
IS  merely  begging  the  question  ;  for  though  this  generally  ap- 
pears to  be  the  case,  and  often  in  a  very  striking  manner,  yet  corn^ 
bination  does  not  always  produce  a  change  of  properties,  as  ap- 
pears in  M.  Biot's  experiments  with  various  substances  ;  of 
which  we  may  instance  water,  the  refraction  of  which  is  pre- 
cisely the  mean  of  that  of  the  oxygen  and  hydrogen,  which  are 
indisputably  combined  in  it. 

To  get  rid  of  the  difliculty,  Mr.  Dalton  of  Manchester  framed 
an  ingenious  hypothesis,  tliat  the  particles  of  different  gases 
neither  attract  nor  repel  each  other  ;  so  that  one  gas  expands 
by  the  repulsion  of  its  own  particles,  without  any  more  inter- 
ruption from  the  presence  of  another  gas,  than  if  it  were  in  a 
vacuum.  This  would  account  for  the  stale  of  atmospheric  air, 
it  is  true,  but  it  does  not  agree  with  certain  facts.  In  the  case 
of  the  carbonic  acid  gas  in  the  Grotto  del  Cano,  and  over  the 
surface  of  brewers'  vats,  why  does  not  this  gas  expand  itself 
freely  upward,  if  the  superincimibent  gases  do  not  press  upon 
it?  Mr.  Dalton  himself,  too,  instances  as  an  argument  for  his 
hypothesis,  that  oxygen  and  h^^drogen  gases,  when  mixed  by 
agitation,  do  not  separate  on  standing.  But  why  should  either 
oxygen  or  hydrogen  require  agitation,  to  difluse  it  through  a 
vacuum,  in  which,  according  to  Mr.  Dalton,  it  is  placed? 

The  theory  of  Berthollet  appears  consistent  with  all  the  facts, 
and  sufficient  to  account  for  the  phenomenon.  If  two  bodies 
be  capable  of  chemical  combination,  their  particles  must  havQ 
a  mutual  attraction  for  each  other.  This  attraction,  however, 
may  be  so  opposed  by  concomitant  circumstances,  that  it  may 
be  diminished  in  any  decree.  Thus  we  know,  that  the  affinr- 
ty  of  asfgregation  may  occasion  a  body  to  combine  slowly  with 
a  substance  for  which  it  has  a  powerful  affinity,  or  even  entire- 
ly prevent  its  combining  with  it ;  the  presence  of  a  third  sub>- 
gtance  may  equally  prevent  the  combination  ;  and  so  may  the 
absence  of  a  certain  quantity  of  caloric.  But  in  all  these  cases 
the  attraction  of  the  particles  must  subsist,  though  diminished 
or  counteracted  by  opposing-  circuiustances.  Now  we  know 
that  oxygen  and  nitrogen  are  capable  of  combination  ;  ti.eil' 
particles,  therefore,  must  attract  each  other  ;  but  in  the  circunf> 
stances  in  which  they  are  placed  in  our  atmosphere,  that  atirao 
tion  is  prevented  from  exerting  itself,  to  such  a  degree  as  to 


210 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


form  them  into  a  chemical  compound,  though  it  operates  with 
sufficient  force  to  prevent  their  separating  by  their  difference 
of  specific  gravity.  Tluis  the  state  of  the  atmosphere  is  ac- 
counted for,  and  every  difficulty  obviated,  without  any  new  hy- 
pothesis. 

The  exact  specific  gravity  of  atmospherical  air,  compared  to 
that  of  water,  is  a  very  nice  and  important  problem.  By  redu- 
cing to  60  deg.  of  Fahr.  and  to  30  inches  of  the  barometer,  the 
results  obtained  with  great  care  by  Biot  and  Arago,  the  specific 
gravity  of  atmospherical  air,  appears  to  be  0.001220,  water  be- 
ing represented  by  1.000000.  This  relation  expressed  fraction- 
ally is  1-S20,  or  water  is  820  times  denser  than  atmospherical 
air.  Mr.  Rice,  in  the  77th  and  78th  numbers  of  the  Annals  of 
Philosophy,  deduces  from  Sir  George  Shuckburgh's  experi- 
ments 0.00120855  for  the  specific  gravity  of  air.  This  number 
gives  water  to  air  as  827.437  to  1,  If  with  Mr.  Rice  we  take 
the  cubic  inch  of  water=2.52.525  gr.,  then  100  cubic  inches  of 
air  by  Biot's  experiments  will  weigh  30.808  grains,  and  by  Mr. 
Rice's  estimate  30.519,  He  considers  with  Dr.  Prout  the  at- 
mosphere to  be  a  compound  of  4  volumes  of  nitrogen,  and  I  of 
oxygen  ;  the  specific  gravity  of  the  first  being  to  that  of  the  se- 
cond as  l.llU  to  0.9722.     Hence 

0.8  vol  nitr.  sp.  gr.  0.001166=0,000933 

0.2        oxy.  0.001340=0.00026.8 


0.001201 
The  numbers  are  transposed  in  the  Annals  of  Philosophy  by 
some  mistake. 

Biot  and  Arago  found  the  specific  gravity  of  oxygen  to  be 

1.10359 

and  that  of  nitrogen,  0.96913 

air  being  reckoned,  1.00000 

Or  compared  to  water  as  unity, — 


Nitrogen  is 
Oxygen, 
And  0.8  nitrogen 
0.2  oxygen 


And  0.79  nitrogen, 
0.21  oxygen 


0.001182338 
0.001346379 


=0.00094587 
=0.00026927 

0.00121514 

=0.000934 
=0.000283 


0.001217 
A  number  which  approaches  very  nearly  to  the  result  of  expe- 
riment. Many  analogies,  it  must  be  confessed,  favor  Dr. 
Prout's  proportions  ;  but  the  greater  number  of  experiments  on 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  211 

the  composition  and  density  of  the  atmosphere  agree  with  Bi- 
ot's  results.  Nothing  can  decide  these  fundamental  chemical 
proportions^  xcept  a  new,  elaborate,  and  most  minutely  accu- 
rate series  of  experiments.  We  shall  then  know  whether  the 
atmosphere  contains  in  volume  20  or  21  per  cent." — Ure's 
Cheni.  Diet. 

2d.  matter  organi^ed-or  the  outlines  of 

ANATOMY. 

When  we  look  at  the  wonderful  machine  which  the  Deity 
has  placed  upon  the  earth,  to  preside  over  his  creation — when 
we  consider  the  beautiful  adaptation  of  its  various  parts  to  the 
purposes  for  which  they  are  designed — we  are  struck  with  awe 
and  admiration,  even  upon  a  superficial  glance  at  its  beauty 
and  propriety.  But  when  we  penetrate  beneath  the  surface,  and 
behold  the  play  of  its  ten  thousand  arteries  carrying  sustenance 
to  every  part  of  the  system — the  veins  returning  their  purple 
current  to  the  heart  and  lungs,  to  be  re-supplied  with  the  ele- 
ments of  life;  when  we  observe  the  lacteals  taking  up  the  nu- 
tritious particles  from  the  bowels,  and  conveying  them  through 
countless  channels  to  be  mingled  with  the  blood — the  absorb- 
ents removinsf  those  parts  which  are  no  longer  fitted  to  fulfil 
their  duty,  and  the  glands  rejectmg  them  from  the  body  as  use- 
less incumbrances,  while  the  vessels  again  supply  their  place  with 
fresh  materials;  when  v/e  reflect,  I  say,  that  this  most  intricate 
machine  is  so  constantly  undergoing  waste  and  repair,  that  in 
a  very  few  years  it  loses  every  individual  atom  which  formed  a 
part  of  Its  original  structure,  v/hile  it  still  preserves  its  form  and 
motions  unimpaired,  we  are  lost  in  wonder;  not  less  at  the 
wise  ordinations  of  Nature  that  regulate  its  operations,  than  at 
the  audacity  of  those  who  dare  to  interfere  with  her  arrange- 
ments, even  when  disorder  is  perceived  among  the  wheels  and 
springs  of  this  masterpiece  of  Divine  wisdom  and  power. 

But  Nature  governs  all  her  works  by  a  few  simple  laws  ;  and 
when  these  laws  are  discovered,  the  explanation  of  her  most 
involved  phenomena  are  often  brought  within  the  grasp  of  hu- 
man reason.  By  contemplating  the  fall  of  an  apple,  Newton 
was  enabled  to  expose  the  hidden  cause  of  all  the  movements  of 
the  heavenly  bodies.  Now,  although  we  have  not  arrived  at 
nearly  the  same  simplicity  in  the  study  of  the  science  of  life 
which  that  philosopher  has  reached  in  speculating  on  natural 
philosophy,  we  have  discovered  many  general  principles  which 
shed  no  inconsiderable  light  on  the  otherwise  incomprehensible 
operations  of  the  human  frame,  in  health  and  in  disease.  Let 
us  then  proceed  to  elucidate  these  principles,  as  far  as  the  limits 
and  the  object  of  this  work  will  permit. 

The  simplest  of  all  animals,   which  mostly  reside  in  the 


212  THE  THOMSOMAN 

water,  appear  to  be  entirely  divested  of  feeling,  or  voluntary 
motion;  tliey  have  no  blood-vessels,  no  nerves,  no  intestines. 
no  organs;  they  are  composed  of  a  kind  of  membrane  contain- 
ing many  cells  and  fibres  of  different  shapes  and  sizes,  filled 
and  surrounded  with  a  peculiar  fluid.  In  structure  they  are 
not  unlike  a  sponge,  enclosed  in  a  bladder  of  tlie  same  sub- 
stance, and  shaped  into  different  forms  according  to  the  species. 
Iti  composition  tliis  membrane  does  not  differ  very  widely  from 
the  white  of  an  e^rg  when  boiled.  Such  is  the  picture  of  the 
simplest  specimens  of  animal  life  ;  and  although  the.  labors  of 
recent  naturalists  have  proved  the  existence  of  more  complex 
organs  in  many  of  the  tribes  of  miiuite  beings,  whose  existence 
is  scarcely  perceptible,  except  by  the  aid  of  powerful  micro- 
scopes, there  are  not  wanting  many  of  much  larger  size,  and, 
therefore,  open  to  accurate  observation,  in  whom  the  whole  bo- 
dy is  devoid  of  any  systematic  arrangement,  other  than  that 
which  has  been  just  described. 

These  animals  live  by  imbibing  their  sustenance  tiirough  the 
skin  from  the  fluid  m  which  they  swim,  and  as  they  select  such 
particles  as  are  fitted  to  their  wants,  they  may  be  said  to  per- 
form a  kind  of  external  digestion.  The  membrane  of  which 
they  are  composed  is  supposed  to  contract  when  touched,  and 
also  when  acted  on  by  light,  heat,  electricity,  and  perhaps  other 
causes  ;  thus  the  fluids  which  it  contains  are  agitated  and  mov- 
ed from  place  to  place,  so  that  an  imperfect  kind  of  circulation 
is  effected  without  the  aid  of  blood-vessels,  and  all  parts  of  the 
body  are  nourished  and  furnished  with  the  means  of  growth. 
If  respiration  be  necessary  to  these  animals,  it  must  be  effected 
by  the  external  surface,  and  whatever  matters  require  to  be 
ejected  from  the  body  are  compelled  to  pass  by  the  same  route. 
This  substance  of  which  they  arc  composed,  and  which  is  call- 
ed cellular  membrane,  or  cellular  (issue,  seems,  therefore,  to  be 
capable  of  fulfilling  all  the  fiuictions  of  life,  as  far  as  they  are 
necessary  to  the  existence  of  the  most  simple  animals  ;  and, 
strangle  as  it  may  appear,  even  the  human  embryo,  when  it  first 
becomes  visible,  and  for  some  time  afterward,  cannot  be  distin- 
guished from  a  small  .mass  of  cellular  tissue  !  Although  it  is 
obvious  that  it  must  be  endowed  witb  life,  it  contains  no  vessels 
nor  organs,  but  resembles  a  mere  piece  of  asiimated  jelly. 

AViieu  we  beoMu  to  examine  animals  more  and  more  advanc- 
ed in  the  scale  of  nature,  we  find  that  those  which  are  designed 
to  move  about  in  search  of  food,  instead  of  having  their  food 
brought  to  them,  require  to  be  furnished  with  organs  especially 
devoted  to  this  purpose.  ']' hey  have  muscles;  for  the  occa- 
sional, and,  as  it  wert>,  accidental,  contractions  of  the  cellulai? 
tissue,  are  too  irregular  iuid  uncertain  to  answer  their  necessi- 
ties, and  they  require  an  apparatus  for  locomotion.     From  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  213 

moment  that  the  character  of  perfect  simphcity  is  thus  lost,  it 
seems  that  mere  absorption  from  the  surface  is  insufiicient  to 
supply  the  materials  for  the  different  organs,  and  the  animal  is 
supplied  with  an  internal  cavity  or  stomach,  and  bowels  more 
or  less  complex  in  structure,  in  which  food  may  be  enclosed 
until  it  can  undergo  a  more  careful  and  deliberate  digestion. 
Still  these  muscles  of  which  we  have  spoken,  though  they  look 
like  fibres  of  considerable  length,  are  thought  by  most  to  be  in 
reality  composed  of  globules  or  particles,  ranged  in  rows  in  the 
midst  of  the  cellular  tissue,  which  ties  them  together  in  bun- 
dles, and  keeps  each  particle  in  its  proper  place  ;  they  are  strict- 
ly interstitial  deposites,  filling  the  cavities  and  adhering  to  the 
layers  of  the  membrane. 

Now  the  movements  of  the  muscles  would  bo  embarrassed, 
and  perhaps  destroyed,  if  the  liquids  which  support  life  were 
permitted  to  pervade  the  whole  body  in  these,  as  they  do  in  the 
simplest  animals,  which  have  no  well  defined  organs  ;  the  nu- 
tritive fluid  or  blood  is,  therefore,  generally  enclosed  in  distinct 
vessels,  formed  ultimately  of  the  same  cellular  tissue,  but  hav- 
ing no  communication  with  its  cells.  These  vessels  divide  and 
re-divide,  carrying  the  blood  to  every  part  of  the  body,  and  re- 
turning it  ao-ain  to  a  reservoir,  or  heart,  which  forms  the  cen- 
tre of  the  circulation. 

As  every  part  of  the  body  receives  its  nourishment  from  the 
blood,  it  is  obvious  that  this  fluid  is  constantly  undergoing  con- 
siderable waste ;    nature  has,  therefore,   provided  a  system  of 
vessels  which  is  rather  an  appendage  to  tlie  circulatory  appara- 
tus than  a  part  of  it.     These  vessels,  which  physicians  call  the 
lacieals,  arise  in  countless  numbers  from  every  part  of  the 
bowels.     They  take  up,  by  some  invisible  means,  such  parts  of 
the  food  as  are  suited  to  enter  t!ie  blood,  leaving  the  rest  to  be 
ejected  from  the  body  by  the  natural  passages.     They  pursue  a 
winding  course,  uniting  gradually  with  each  other,  and  thus 
becoming  larger,  as  the  little  streams  from  a  thousand  springs 
are  slowly  collected  first  into  rivulets,  then  into  brooks,  until  at 
length  they  give  rise  to  a  noble  river.     The  river  of  the  lacte- 
als  into  which  they  are  all  finally  collected,  is  in  man,  a  vessel 
about  as  large  as  a  crow-quill,  which,  running  for  some  distance 
along  the  spine,  near  the  back  part  of  the  chest,  empties  its  con- 
tents into  one  of  the  principal  veins  of  the  body,  just  before  it 
enters  the  heart. 

The  heart  is  a  strons:  hollow  muscle,  which  alternately  re- 
ceives the  blood  as  it  flows  toward  it,  and  then  forces  it  by  a 
strong  contraction  through  vessels,  which  go  on  continually 
branching  until  they  reach  every  part  of  the  system,  like  the 
limbs  and  twigs  of  a  great  tree. 

The  principal  trunk  and  great  branches  of  this  class  of  ves- 


214  THE    THOMSOIs'IAN 

sels  are  termed  arteries  ;  the  blood  is  propelled  through  them 
chiefly  by  the  direct  force  ot"  the  heart,  but  they  are  provided 
with  a  coat  or  envelope  of  fibres  resemblino;  those  of  muscles, 
which  aid  in  urging  the  current  more  uniformly  in  proper  di- 
rections, and  as  the  arteries  grow  smaller,  these  fibres  increase 
in  their  relative  strength,  as  the  bark  of  the  smaller  twigs  be- 
comes thicker  jn  proportion  than  that  of  the  body  of  the  tree. 
At  length  these  little  arteries  become  capable  of  hastening  or 
retarding  the  flow  of  blood,  and  sometimes  perhaps  they  check 
it  altogetlier  for  a  moment.  They  now  change  their  name,  and 
are  called  the  capillaries. 

It  is  through  the  capillaries  that  all  those  particles  which  are 
required  for  the  growth  and  preservation  of  the  body  and  its 
several  organs  are  separated  from  the  blood  and  placed  in  their 
proper  stations.  The  same  vessels  are  supposed  by  some  to 
take  up  and  mingle  with  the  blood  those  particles  which  have 
done  their  duty  and  are  worn  out  in  the  service,  in  order  that 
they  may  be  disposed  of,  in  tlie  manner  in  which  most  bodies 
corporate  reward  the  past  services  of  friends  no  longer  found 
necessary;  that  is,  by  being  turned  out  of  doors.  In  this  most 
thankless  duty,  however,  they  are  certainly  aided  by  a  subsidi- 
ary class  of  vessels  called  the  absorbents,  which  convey  only  co- 
lorless fluids  collected  from  all  parts  of  the  body.  Most  of  these 
last  named  vessels  finally  empty  their  contents  into  the  common 
trunk  of  the  lacteals,  and  thus  into  the  veins,  but  some  of  them 
reach  the  same  destination  by  a  more  direct  route. 

This  constant  addition  of  nutritive  matter  to  the  blood  bij  the 
lacteals,  its  distribution  to  every  organ  of  the  animal  iy  the 
heart  and  arteries,  its  separation  from  the  mass  of  circulation, 
and  its  application  to  the  growth  and  repair  of  all  parts  by  the 
capillaries,  together  with  the  removal  of  injured,  useless  or  de- 
bilitated particles  by  the  absorbents,  are  subjects  connected  with 
the  all-important  process  oi  nutritiov. 

After  the  blood  has  passed  the  capillaries  it  falls  into  another 
system  of  vessels  called  the  veins,  by  which  it  is  returned  to  the 
heart.  The  veins  are  destitute  of  the  seemingly  muscular  coat 
of  the  arteries  and  capillaries,  and  although  the  blood  is  con- 
stantly pushed  into  them  by  the  joint  action  of  the  heart,  the 
arteries  and  the  capillaries,  they  are  unable  to  propel  it  by  any 
effort  of  their  own  ;  they  are  mere  passive  conduits.  To  sup- 
ply this  apparent  defect,  they  are  provided  with  numerous 
valves,  set  here  and  there  along  their  course,  which  permit  the 
blood  to  pass  toward  the  heart,  but  prevent  its  return  in  the 
opposite  direction.  By  the  constant  motion  of  the  muscles  in 
breathino:,  walking,  coughing,  sneezing,  &c.,  the  veins  are  very 
frequently  compressed,  and  their  contents  urged  forward  more 
rapidly;    hence  the  healthful  ness  of  exeicise  EOid  gymnastics. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  215 

All  the  veins  of  the  hody  are  gradually  collected  into  a  few- 
great  trunks  or  canals,  which  pour  their  contents  into  the  heart, 
and  those  which  belong  to  the  general  circulation — that  circu- 
lation which  is  destined" to  supply  nutriment  to  the  body — form, 
in  the  more  perfect  animals,  two  great  conduits;  one  coming 
down  from  the  head  and  upper  extremities,  the  other  coming 
up  from  the  trunk  and  inferior  extremities.  These  conduits 
meet  directly  end  to  end,  so  as  to  form  but  one  trunk,  which 
opens  into  the  heart  by  a  gap  at  the  side. 

The  blood  thus  returned  is  of  course  altered,  in  the  first  place 
by  having  parted  with  a  great  deal  of  matter  for  the  repair  and 
growth  of  the  diiferent  ors:ans,  and  secondly,  by  being  loaded 
with  all  the  useless  particles  which  the  absorbents  have  taken 
np.  In  order,  then,  that  it  may  be  fitted  for  circulation  again, 
it  must  receive  considerable  additions,  and  it  must  cast  off"  con- 
siderable impurities.  The  former  are  supplied  by  the  lacteals, 
but  the  latter  process  requires  a  different  set  of  vessels,  endowed 
with  other  powers. 

One  of  the  chief  impurities  which  the  blood  receives  from  the 
absorbents  is  carbon  or  charcoal.  To  rid  it  of  this,  a  part,  and 
in  the  more  perfect  animals  the  whole  of  the  blood,  is  made  to 
pass  through  an  organ  where  the  vessels  come  almost  into  con- 
tact with  the  element  in  which  the  animal  lives,  as  the  water 
in  fishes,  and  the  air  in  birds  and  man.  Both  these  elements 
contain  oxygen,  or  vital  air,  and  by  some  hidden  means  the 
carbon  of  the  blood,  being  supposed  by  most  to  unite  with  this 
vital  air,  escapes  through  the  thin  coats  of  the  vessels  in  the 
form  of  carbonic  acid  gas,  the  same  gas  that  rises  from  ferment- 
ed liquors,  soda  water,  &c.  Thus  we  see  some  animals  breath- 
ing water,  and  others  air.  The  former  generally  have  the 
breathing  organs  placed  externally  ;  they  are  termed  hranchim 
or  gills ;  in  the  latter,  they  are  situated  within  the  body,  and 
are  called  lungs,  or  lights.  The  function  performed  by  these 
organs  is  called  respiration. 

It  is  believed  by  many  physiologists,  that  nature,  always  nn- 
willing  to  perform  any  useless  labor,  and  anxious  to  efiect  as 
many  operations  as  possible  with  a  very  few  materials,  has  so 
ordered  the  laws  of  respiration  that  it  shall  preserve  the  warmth 
of  the  animal  at  the  same  time  that  it  purifies  the  blood.  While 
the  blood  is  acted  upon  by  the  atmosphere  in  the  lunos,  or  by 
the  water  in  the  gills,  it  is  supposed  to  absorb  a  great  quantity 
of  heat;  and  as  it  flows  toward  every  part  of  the  body,  under- 
going a  gradual  change,  it  is  thought  to  throw  out  this  heat, 
and  thus  to  keep  every  part  at  its  proper  temperature. 

The  effects  of  respiration  are  not  sufficient  to  remove  all  the 
impurities  of  the  blood,  and  therefore  a  nurhber  of  ciirious  or- 
gans called  glands  are  provided,  some  of  which  aid  in  separat- 


216  THE    THOMSONIAN 

hig  many  of  these  impurities,  each  gland  furnishing  its  own 
pecuUar  fluid,  which  it  pours  out  eiiher  into  the  bowels  or  into 
tlie  skin.  The  product  of  many  of  these  glands  is  made  useful 
for  various  purposes  before  it  is  thrown  oti'from  the  body;  thus 
the  liver,  the  largest  of  the  glands,  iorms  the  ii/e,  which  is  the 
natural  purgative,  producing,  when  healthy,  regular  and  com- 
fortable stools ;  and  when  diseased,  occasioniug  costiveness,  or 
bowel  complaints:  the  pancreas  and  the  glands  about  the  mouth 
pour  out  the  spittle,  which  assists  digestion.  These  useful  flu- 
ids are  called  secretions ;  but  those  which  are  ejected,  like  the 
urine,  without  fulfilling  any  important  purpose,  are  called  ex- 
a'etions.. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  is  obvious  that  tlie  motions  ne- 
cessary to  maintain  life,  even  in  very  simple  animals,  are  nume- 
rous and  complex.  The  stomach  and  intestines  must  receive 
and  digest  food;  the  lacteals  must  take  up  the  nutritious  part 
of  the  food  and  carry  it  to  the  blood;  the  arteries  must  convey 
this  blood  to  the  diflerent  orofans;  the  capillaries  must  supply 
the  ijrowth  and  waste  of  those  organs;  thi-;  absorbents  must  aid 
the  capillaries  in  taking  away  the  v/orn  out  and  useless  parts, 
to  mingle  them  with  the  blood  in  the  veins;  these  vessels  must 
convey  the  blood  back  to  the  heart,  which  must  then  pass  it  to 
tlie  lungs,  to  be  deprived  of  some  of  its  impurities,  and  to  ena- 
ble it  to  sustain  the  heat  of  the  body.  In  addition  to  all  this, 
the  glands  must  assist  in  purifying  the  blood,  or  they  must  fur- 
nish fluids  to  aid  in  digestion  and  other  functions,  or  to  purge 
away  those  useless  remains  of  the  food  which  cannot  be  digest- 
ed. So  many  diflerent  motions  all  dc^pendent  on  each  other, 
would  necessarily  produce  continual  confusion,  by  actmg  irre- 
gularly and  to  cross  purposes,  if  they  had  not  some  common 
bond  of  union  by  which  they  can  mutually  inform  each  other, 
OS  it  were,  of  their  several  wants  and  actions.  This  bond  of 
union  is  furnished  by  the  nerves. 

In  the  more  simple  animals,  we  find  only  a  few  nervous  fi- 
bres, running  in  different  directions,  with  here  and  there  little 
knots  called  ganqlions,  joining  several  fibres  together.  When 
any  impression  is  made  upon  one  of  these  fibres,  it  is  instantly 
comma nicated  to  the  parts  with  which  it  is  connected,  and  calls 
them  into  action.  If  the  fibre  is  united  with  others,  or  with  one 
or  more  of  the  little  knots  just  mentioned,  they  are  also  called 
into  action,  and  several  different  parts  are  then  put  in  motion  at 
once.  Thus  when  food  enters  the  stomach,  its  nerves  receive 
the  impression  and  cause  the  capillaries  of  that  orcran  to  dilate, 
in  order  to  receive  the  blood  required  to  carry  on  the  process  of 
(ligestion  ;  they  also  give  notice  to  the  heart,  which,  if  necessa- 
ry^ acts  with  more  force  in  hastening  the  circulation,  and  the 
capillaries  of  tlie  skin  contract,  and  drive  the  blood  from  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  217 

surface  toward  the  bowels.  This  is  the  cause  of  the  sHght  chill 
and  consequent  fever  so  often  felt  during-  and  after  a  hearty- 
dinner.  The  animal,  however,  remains  unconscious  of  all  this 
hurry  of  business  within,  and  the  nerves  which  are  the  messen- 
gers and  agents  of  the  manufactory  are  called  the  nerves  of  or- 
ganic life.  They  are  altogether  independent  of  the  will,  and 
are  found  in  animals  supposed  to  have  no  brain. 

in  beings  of  a  higher  order,  that  are  obliged  to  choose  their 
food  with  judgment  and  to  travel  far  in  search  of  it,  other  nerves 
are  required  to  enable  them  to  recognize  its  presence  ;  these 
are  the  jierves  of  sensation.  There  must  also  be  a  brain,  to 
enable  the  animal  to  judge  of  its  impressions,  and  to  perceive 
its  wants,  and  another  system  of  nerves  is  required  to  pass  from 
the  brain  to  the  different  muscles,  by  which  the  former  may  di- 
rect the  latter  ;  these  are  the  nerves  of  voluntary  motion.  All 
these  several  systems,  though  in  some  degree  independent,  are 
connected  together  by  the  brain  and  the  httle  knots  or  gangli- 
ons, so  that  they  mutually  influence  each  other. 

Finally,  to  enclose  and  protect  this  multiform  and  delicate 
structure,  there  is  a  coat  of  condensed  cellular  tissue  covering 
tlie  whole  body,  and  called  the  true  skin,  over  which  is  spread 
a  thin  layer  of  horny  matter,  called  the  cuticle,  or  scarf  skin. 
This  cuticle  is  totally  insensible,  and  forms  a  mere  crust  which 
protects  the  delicate  and  exquisitely  sensitive  surface  of  the 
true  skin.  The  horns,  nails,  hairs,  spines,  shells,  and  crusty 
coverings  of  various  animals,  are  all  classed  properly  with  the 
cuticle,  being  either  excrescences  of,  or  substitutes  for,  that 
membrane. 

Each  of  the  parts  of  an  animal  that  have  now  been  enume- 
rated may  be  found  even  in  a  common  snail,  or  in  the  meanest 
of  the  reptiles;  but  as  we  ascend  in  the  scale  of  nature,  every 
system  of  organs  is  observed  to  become  more  and  more  complex 
in  structure,  and  capable  of  actions  more  and  more  various. 

Man,  the  most  perfect  of  animals,  not  only  requires  the  whole 
of  this  complex  apparatus,  but  his  brain  also  contains  systems 
of  nervous  fibres,  for  the  exercise  of  the  higher  instincts,  moral 
feelin^rs,  and  reasonins:  faculties.  He  is  at  first  nothino:  but  a 
little  mass  of  cellular  tissue;  but  as  the  infant  in  the  mother 
increases  in  size,  one  organ  is  added  after  another,  nearly  in  the 
order  described,  and  many  of  his  parts  do  not  reach  their  full 
developement  until  he  approaches  middle  life. 


15 


218  THE  THOMSONIAN 

SKELETON, 

In  anatomy^  is  the  assemblage  and  combination  of  all  the 
bones  in  the  body,  except  the  os  hyoides  ;  it  constitutes  the  ba- 
sis or  ground-work  of  the  animal  frame,  being  the  point  of  sup- 
port and  union  for  all  the  other  organs.  Its  component  parts 
form  a  series  of  levers,  of  which  the  muscles  are  the  moving 
powers ;  thus  the  skeleton  conjprehends  one  division  ot  the 
moving  organs.  Its  constituent  pieces  in  some  cases  form  ca- 
vities, as  tFiose  of  the  head,  chest,  and  pelvis,  which  contain 
the  important  internal  organs,  and  protect  them  from  external 
force. 

The  connexions  of  the  different  pieces  of  the  skeleton  are 
called  joints^  and  differ  very  considerably  from  each  other — 
some  of  them  admitting  of  no  motion,  some  an  inconsiderable 
motion,  and  others  allowing  them  to  move  freely,  either  in  cer- 
tain directions  or  in  every  way.  The  word  skeleton  denoting 
the  bony  fabric  in  its  united  state,  of  course  includes  the  joints, 
or  media  of  union ;  and  in  this  respect  we  distinguish  two  kinds 
of  skeletons.  A  iiatural  skeleton,  is  that  in  which  the  bones 
are  all  joined  by  their  natural  connexions  ;  that  is,  the  articular 
ends  are  covered  by  their  cartilaginous  strata,  tied  together  by  li- 
gaments, and  enveloped  by  synovial  membranes :  in  this  sense 
the  skeleton  includes,  besides  the  bony  system,  the  accessory 
structures  of  cartilage,  ligament,  and  synovial  membranes. 
When  all  the  soft  parts  have  been  allowed  to  putrefy  and  rot, 
and  the  separated  bones,  after  being  cleaned  and  dried,  have 
been  joined  again  by  wires,  &c.,  so  as  to  be  reunited  artificially 
in  their  former  order,  an  artificial  skeleton  is  formed.  In  the 
spine  and  the  ribs,  the  places  of  the  cartilages  which  are  lost  in 
cleaning  the  bones,  are  supplied  by  portions  of  leather,  cork,  or 
other  materials. 

The  latter,  exhibiting  merely  the  assemblage  of  the  dried 
bones,  is  applicable  to  the  study  of  osteology  only  in  the  me- 
chanical points  of  figure,  size,  &c. ;  and  although  extremely 
useful  to  the  anatomist  and  surgeon,  by  representing  the  parts 
in  their  natural  connexion  and  relations,  is  less  convenient  than 
the  separate  bones  for  the  study  of  many  points,  particularly 
the  articular  ends  of  the  bones. 

For  the  formation  of  artificial  skeletons,  the  bones  are  depriv- 
ed of  their  soft  parts,  either  by  boiling  or  by  maceration  in  water. 
The  boiling  must  be  continued  until  the  tendons,  ligaments, 
periosteum,  (fee,  are  so  loosened  as  to  admit  of  being  easily  de- 
tached. The  bony  texture  acquires  in  this  method  a  dirty  and 
greasy  appearance,  which  cannot  be  entirely  got  rid  of  by  any 
after  process.  For  the  purpose  of  maceration,  the  bones  with 
the  flesh,  (fee,  roughly  cut  off,  must  be  left  in  the  same  water 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  219 

for  some  months  ;  the  soft  parts  will  then  fall  off,  and  leave  the 
bones  of  a  much  better  color,  and  freer  from  grease,  than  when 
they  have  been  'boiled.  Exposure  to  the  air,  and  frequently- 
wetting  them,  will  make  them  beautifully  white  after  they  have 
been  well  macerated.  Their  color  may  be  often  much  improv- 
ed by  exposure  to  chlorine  (oxymuriatic  gas).  The  bones  which 
possess  large  medullary  cavities  should  be  bored  at  the  articu- 
lar ends,  to  get  out  the  fatty  substance. 

Emaciated  and  particularly  anasarcous  subjects,  are  the  best 
for  making  skeletons;  because  there  is  no  fat  in  the  bones,  and 
they  consequently  continue  dry  and  clean,  when  they  have 
been  originally  well  prepared.  Persons  dying  in  good  health, 
or  from  sudden  attacks,  have  so  much  adipous  matter  in  the 
interior  of  their  bones,  that  they  continue  greasy,  particularly 
at  the  articular  ends,  whatever  pains  may  be  taken  to  clean 
them. 

In  natural  skeletons,  the  cartilages,  ligaments,  and  synovial 
membranes  being  all  left,  the  joints  possess  their  natural  mo- 
bility. But  in  order  to  keep  them  in  this  state,  they  must  be 
preserved  in  spirits,  or  some  other  fluid  capable  of  preventing 
the  putrefaction  of  the  soft  parts.  This  is  particularly  neces- 
sary with  the  skeletons  of  young  subjects,  which  are  in  a  great 
part  cartilaginous.  When  a  natural  skeleton  is  dried,  the  soft 
parts  shrink  and  are  shrivelled  up ;  the  cartilages  become  con- 
tracted, and  thus  the  natural  figure  is  greatly  impaired.  The 
contraction  of  the  cartilages  diminishes  the  height  by  an  inch 
or  more. 

So  long  as  the  bones  are  composed  of  separate  pieces,  and 
have  more  or  less  cartilage  in  their  structure,  the  osseous  sys- 
tem can  only  be  studied  in  natural  skeletons ;  but  when  the  os- 
sification is  complete,  artificial  skeletons  are  preferable. 

The  bones,  being  the  levers  by  which  the  motions  of  the  bo- 
dy are  performed,  have  the  muscles  or  moving  powers  fixed  to 
them.  But  as  they  are  subservient,  in  the  construction  of  our 
frame,  to  other  purposes  besides  those  of  motion,  there  are  some 
bones,  though  very  few,  to  which  no  muscles  are  attached ; 
such  are  the  incus  in  the  ear,  the  ethmoid  and  inferior  turbin- 
ated bones,  and  some  bones  of  the  carpus. 

Although  the  form  of  the  bones  is  variously  modified,  accord- 
ing to  the  figure  of  the  parts  in  which  they  are  placed,  or  to 
their  destinations,  they  may  be  classed  under  the  three  divi- 
sions of  broad  or  flat  bones,  cylindrical  bones,  and  short  bones. 
The  broad  bones  represent  flat  shells,  and  consist  of  an  inner 
stratum  of  reticular  or  spongy  bony  substance,  which  is  cover- 
ed on  its  surfaces  with  thicker  or  thinner  plates  of  compact  bony 
matter.  The  cylindrical,  or  long  bones,  form  long  shafts,  ex- 
panded at  their  extremities  into  thicker  heads,  and  containing  a 


220  THE    THOMSONIAN 

medullary  cavity  internally.  The  short  bones  are  such  as  are 
nearly  equal  in  their  length,  breadth,  and  thickness  ;  variously 
shaped,  according  to  their  situations  and  offices,  and  consist  of 
the  loose  spongy  texture,  covered  by  a  thin  rind  of  compact  bone. 

The  long  bones  belong  in  general  to  the  locomotive  appara- 
tus, where  they  form  levers,  moved  by  the  muscles  in  various 
directions.  They  are  all  placed  in  the  limbs,  where  they  form 
a  central  column,  movable  in  various  directions.  They  dimi- 
nish in  length  and  increase  in  number,  successively  from  above 
downwards,  from  the  humerus  and  femur  to  the  phalanges  of 
the  fingers  and  toes.  Hence  the  upper  part  of  the  limbs  is  cha- 
racterized by  extent  of  motion,  the  lower  by  multiplicity  and 
variety  of  movements. 

The  broad  bones  have  not  much  to  do  with  locomotion,  ex- 
cept as  they  afford  extensive  surfaces  for  the  attachment  of 
muscles.  They  compose  cavities,  such  as  those  of  the  cranium 
and  pelvis,  for  which  their  form  is  well  adapted.  Several  are 
united  to  form  one  cavity,  and  this  circumstance  adds  to  the 
solidity  of  the  structure,  as  the  effect  of  external  force  is  lost  in 
the  joints.  They  are  generally  concave  and  convex  on  their 
two  surfaces. 

The  short  bones  are  found  in  parts  which  unite  mobihty  and 
solidity,  as  the  vertebral  column,  the  carpus  and  tarsus.  They 
are  always  of  inconsiderable  size,  and  therefore  are  found  in 
large  number  in  the  parts  which  they  compose.  These  parts 
are  strong,  because  external  force  is  lost  in  the  articulations  ; 
they  are  movable,  because  the  combinations  of  several  small 
motions  produce  a  considerable  effect. 

The  skeleton  is  divided  into  the  head,  trunk,  and  extremities 
or  limbs.  As  almost  all  the  bones  are  formed  originally  of 
more  than  one  piece,  which  separate  portions  of  osseous  matter 
gradually  come  together,  and  are  ultimately  consolidated,  the 
number  of  dis-tinct  pieces  of  bone  belonging  to  the  skeleton  is 
different  at  different  ages.  The  following  is  the  number  of 
bones  when  the  ossification  is  complete,  that  is,  about  the  twen- 
tieth year. 

I.  In  the  Head,  consisting  of  the  cranium,  and  the  FACE,^i 
the  former  is  made  up  of  V| 

1  or  2  ossa  frontis, 

2  ossa  parietalia,  i 

1  OS  sphenobasilare,  or  spheno-occipitale,  I 

2  ossa  temporum, 
2  mallei, 

2  incudes, 

2  Etapedes,  and  1  os  ethmoideum. 
The  latter  of 

2  ossa  maxillaria  superiora, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  221 


2  ossa  palatina, 

2  ossa  malarum,  or  zygoraatica, 

2  ossa  nasi, 

2  ossa  lacrymalia, 

2  ossa  turbinata  inferiora, 

1  vomer, 

1  maxilla  inferior, 
32  teeth. 
The  whole  amotint  of  bones  in  the  head 
five  pieces  of  the  os  hyoides  added  to  these, 

is  59  or 
make  64 

60. 
or 

The 
65. 

11.  The  Trunk,  comprehending  the  spine,  chest  and 
consists  of 

7  cervical,  ) 
12  dorsal,     \  vertebrge, 
5  lumbar,    ) 

2  or  3  bones  of  the  sternum, 
24  ribs, 

pelvis, 

1  sacrum, 

4  ossa  coccygis, 
2  ossa  innominata. 

57  or  58 

III.  The  Extremities. 

The  upper  contain, 

T    *i      u     ^A       ^2  clavicles, 
In  the  shoulders,  I    g  ^.^p^^i^' 

In  the  arms,  2  humeri. 

In  the  fore-arms,  j    ^  '^"^'^^ 

2  ossa  navicularia,  or  scaphoidea, 

2  ossa  lunaria, 

2  ossa  cuneiformia, 

2  ossd  pisiformia,  or  orbicularia, 
In  the  wrists,        .j    2  ossa  trapezia,  or  multangula  majora, 

2  ossa  trapezoidea,  or  multangula  mino- 
ra, 

2  ossa  capitata, 

2  ossa  unciformia,  or  hamata. 
In  the  metacarpi,  ^  10  ossa  metacarpi. 

^  10  first  or  metacarpal  phalanges, 

In  the  fino-er«5       i    ^  ™^^^^  °^  ^^^°°^  phalanges, 
°     '       I  10  third  or  unguinal  phalanges, 
[    8  sesamoid  bones. 

72 


222 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


The  lower  extremities  contain. 


In  the  thighs, 


In  the  leofs. 


In  the  tarsi, 


In  the  metatarsi. 


In  the  toes, 


2  femora. 

2  tibiae, 

2  patellae,, 

2  fibulae. 

2  astragali, 

2  calcanei,  or  ossa  calcis, 

2  ossa  navicularia, 

2  ossa  cuneiformia  magna, 

2     '•  "  parva, 

2    «  «  media, 

2  ossa  cuboidea. 

10  ossa  metatarsi. 

C  10  first  or  metatarsal  phalanges, 

I    S  middle  or  second  phalanges, 

I  10  third  or  unguinal  phalanges, 
[    6  sesamoid  bones. 

66 


The  whole  number  of  bones  will  be  259,  or  261.  There  is 
frequently  a  small  bone  of  the  sesamoid  kind  in  the  tendon  of 
the  external  head  of  the  gastrocnemius ;  and  a  roundish  bit  in 
the  hyo-thyroid  ligament.  If  both  these  should  exist,  we  must 
add  4  to  the  preceding  number. 

A  complete  dry  natural  skeleton  of  a  male  subject  of  the  mid- 
dle size  weighs  from  150  to  200  ounces ;  that  of  a  female,  from 
100  to  160  ounces. 

Of  the  bones  just  enumerated,  the  frontal,  spheno-occipital, 
vomer,  lower  jaw,  vertebrae,  sacrum,  coccyx,  sternum,  and  os 
linguale  medium,  are  single,  (imparia,)  and  being  placed  on  the 
middle  line  of  the  body,  symmetrical ;  all  the  others  are  double, 
or  in  pairs,  (paria,)  each  pair  being  composed  of  a  right  and  left 
corresponding  bone.  Hence  the  structure  of  the  whole  skele- 
ton is  symmetrical ;  that  is,  if  we  imagine  a  perpendicular  line 
to  be  drawn  through  the  whole  body,  from  before  backwards,  it 
will  divide  the  skeleton  into  two  corresponding  halves,  a  right 
and  left — the  single  bones  having  their  right  and  left  sides  ex- 
actly alike. 

This  observation,  however,  of  the  symmetry  of  the  skeleton, 
is  not  to  be  understood  rigorously ;  since  the  right  and  left  of 
the  double  bones,  or  the  right  and  left  sides  of  the  single  ones, 
are  not  accurately  alike.  The  right  or  left  bone,  or  the  right 
or  left  side  of  a  bone,  may  be  longer  or  shorter,  broader  or  nar- 
rower, (fcc,  than  the  other.  The  vomer  is  generally  bent  to  one 
side — the  internal  surface  of  the  skull  is  seldom  symmetricaL 
The  last  rib  is  often  an  inch  longer  on  one  side  than  ou  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  223 

Other.  The  sternum  is  seldom  symmetrical ;  and  the  carti- 
lages of  the  ribs  are  not  fixed  to  it  exactly  opposite  to  each  oth- 
er. The  articulations  of  the  ribs  with  the  spine  often  differ 
considerably  on  the  two  sides.  But  the  symmetry  of  the  exter- 
nal form  is  not  disturbed  by  these  differences.  If  the  right  side 
of  a  vertebra  is  more  elevated  than  the  left,  the  corresponding 
part  of  the  neighboring  bone,  or  of  the  intervertebral  cartilage, 
is  accommodated  to  the  deviation,  so  that  the  perpendicular  line 
of  the  spinal  column  is  not  impaired,  &c. 

The  single  bones  may  be  regarded  as  the  media  of  union  of 
the  two  lateral  halves  which  constitute  the  skeleton;  they  join 
together  these  two  halves  into  one  solid  whole.  In  this  respect 
there  is  a  marked  difference  between  the  bones  and  the  other 
organic  instruments  of  locomotion,  the  muscles.  The  dia- 
phragm is  the  only  muscle  placed  on  the  median  line,  and  its 
structure  is  not  symmetrical ;  it  belongs  in  a  great  measure  to 
the  internal  or  organic  life,  and  corresponds,  in  its  want  of  sym- 
metry, to  the  arrangements  of  the  internal  organs.  The  skele- 
ton, being  the  basis  or  point  of  support  of  the  muscles,  as  well 
as  of  all  the  other  organs,  constitutes  an  entire  aud  firm  fabric; 
an  attribute  which  it  derives  from  the  single  bones,  which  may 
be  regarded  as  the  key-stones  of  the  building.  The  muscles, 
not  contributing  to  the  solidity  of  the  animal  structure,  are  not 
united  into  such  a  single  aud  firm  assemblage. 

The  observation  which  we  have  made  of  the  bones  in  gene- 
ral, that  they  influence  and  determine  the  form  of  the  soft  parts, 
holds  good  more  particularly  of  the  whole  skeleton.  Its  form, 
in  all  men,  and  in  all  stages  of  their  life,  corresponds  so  entirely 
to  the  configuration  of  their  body,  that  an  experienced  eye 
would  easily  determine,  from  a  tolerably  preserved  skeleton,  not 
only  the  age  and  sex,  but  the  growth  and  most  striking  charac- 
ters of  bodily  formation  of  the  individual  to  whom  it  had  be- 
longed. Hence  it  is  not  enough  for  an  artist  to  know  the  mus- 
cles :  he  must  begin  with  studying  the  skeleton.  However  nu- 
merous the  differences  of  individual  configuration  in  the  human 
race,  still  retaining  its  general  character  and  resemblance,  ac- 
curate examination  will  show  us  not  fewer  diversities  in  the 
structure,  form,  size,  greater  or  less  elegance,  and  even  greater 
or  less  fineness  and  firmness  in  the  grain  of  the  bone,  in  hu- 
man skeletons,  which  still  preserve  the  general  character.  Be- 
sides th-.-se  endless  individual  traits,  distinguishing  each  skele- 
ton from  others,  we  find  very  striking  differences  according  to 
age  and  sex. 

With  respect  to  the  former  of  these  circumstances,  skeletons 
have  bnten  divided  into  perfect  and  imperfect ;  the  latter  not  ve- 
ry well  ;^.hosen  term  being  applied  to  fostuses,  to  childien,  and 
subject:   m  whom  the  epiphyses  are  not  yet  consolidated  with 


224  THE   THOMSONIAN 

the  bodies  of  the  bones,  or  converted  into  true  apophyses;  al- 
though, in  relation  to  the  rest  of  the  structure,  the  bones  are 
then  as  perfect  as  in  the  aduU.  The  youns;er  the  subject,  the 
more  cartilage  does  the  skeleton  contain.  Reckoning  from  the 
twentieth  year  backwards,  the  younger  the  subject  the  larger  is 
the  head,  compared  to  the  trunk  and  limbs ;  (the  head  is  about 
one  half  of  the  body  in  the  second  month  of  utero-gestation  ;  one 
fourth  in  the  ninth  month :  one  fifth  at  the  age  of  three  years  ; 
and  one  eighth  when  the  growth  is  complete :)  the  smaller  are 
the  bones  of  the  face,  and  the  larger  the  organ  of  hearing,  in 
comparison  to  the  cranium  ;  the  larger  are  the  fontanelles  ;  the 
flatter  is  the  lower  part  of  the  face;  the  larger  the  chest  in  re- 
lation to  the  pelvis  ;  the  shorter  the  limbs ;  the  larger  the  clavi- 
cles ;  the  smoother  and  flatter  the  broad  bones,  and  the  rounder 
the  cylindrical  bones. 

The  male  and  female  skeletons  difler.  not  only  in  the  whole 
combination,  or  the  o-eneral  impression,  from  a  comparative  sur- 
vey, but  also  in  the  form  and  properties  of  the  individual  parts. 
These  differences,  however,  are  not  clearly  perceptible,  until 
some  years  have  elapsed  after  birth.  Soemmering  enumerates 
the  following  as  the  charticters  of  the  female. 

The  female  skeleton  is  smaller  and  slenderer  in  all  parts  than 
the  male.  The  ratio  of  the  head  including  the  teeth  to  the  rest 
of  the  bony  structure,  is  greater  than  in  the  male  ;  the  numbers 
are  as  1  to  6  in  the  former,  1  to  8  or  10  in  the  latter.  The  cir- 
cumference of  the  female  skull  is  larger  on  the  first  view,  in 
skeletons  of  the  same  height.  The  skull  is  larger  in  proportion 
to  the  face  ;  its  foramina,  the  palatine  arch,  and  the  whole  ca- 
vity of  the  mouth,  are  smaller.  The  whole  thorax  is  shorter; 
larger  above,  as  far  as  the  fourth  rib,  narrower  below  ;  more 
movable,  less  conical;  more  convex  in  front:  more  distant  from 
the  pelvis,  the  interval  between  the  last  rib  and  the  os  innomi- 
natum  being  greater  ;  less  prominent  anteriorly,  so  that  when 
the  trunk  is  supine,  the  symphysis  pubis  is  the  highest  point  in 
the  female,  the  thorax  in  the  male  subject.  Generally,  the  car- 
tilages of  the  true  ribs  are  longer  in  proportion  to  the  bone. 
The  vertebral  canal  is  more  capacious,  and  the  lateral  openings 
lor  the  nerves  are  also  larger.  The  spinous  processes  are  less 
prominent;  the  sternum  is  shorter,  ending  at  the  plane  of  the 
fourth  rib,  while  it  reaches  to  the  plane  of  the  fifth  in  the  male. 

The  loins  are  longer,  and  the  angle  between  the  last  lumbar 
vertebra  and  the  sacrum,  constituting  the  promontory,  is  more 
acute. 

All  the  diameters  of  the  pelvis  are  greater  ;  the  cristae  and 
tuberosities  of  the  ossa  innominata  further  apart ;  the  space  be- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  225 

tween  the  ossa  pubis  wider,  and  the  Hgaments  of  the  symphysis 
consequently  broader,  although  shorter. 

The  sacrum  is  turned  more  backwards,  so  that  the  apex  and 
the  coccyx  do  not  project  so  much  into  the  pelvis.  The  aceta- 
bula  are  fartiier  apart,  and  hence  the  unsteady  gait  of  the  sex  ; 
they  are,  however,  nearer  to  the  front  of  the  pelvis,  so  that, 
when  in  the  progress  of  pregnancy  the  centre  of  gravity  is 
thrown  more  torwards,  its  equiilibrium  is  better  preserved. 

The  lower  limbs  form  a  more  acute  angle  with  the  pelvis  ; 
the  feet  are  smaller. 

The  shoulders  are  more  slanting,  and  the  articulations  near- 
er together  ;  the  upper  limbs  are  shorter,  and  the  fingers  more 
pointed. 

Female  bones  are  distinguished  from  the  male  by  having 
fewer  asperities,  smaller  spmes  and  protuberances,  shallower 
impressions,  smaller  articulations,  and  being,  on  the  whole, 
smoother  and  more  finely  turned.  The  shaft  or  body  of  a  cy- 
lindrical bone  is  more  slender,  in  comparison  to  the  articular 
ends ;  and  hence  the  fact  which  was  specified  above,  of  the 
greater  weight  of  the  head  in  proportion  to  the  rest  of  the  ske* 
leton. 

The  bones  are  not  so  hard  in  the  female ;  they  liave,  on  the 
whole,  a  something  peculiar — a  feminine  character —  which  is 
not  easily  described.  Their  extremities  remain  longer  cartila- 
ginous. 

The  frontal  sinuses  are  smaller  ;  the  interval  between  them, 
or  the  glabella,  less  elevated  ;  and  the  superciliary  arches  less 
prominent.  All  the  bones  of  the  face  are  more  slender.  The 
figure  of  the  alveolar  circle  is  more  ellipticcl  in  both  jaws  ;  in 
man  more  circular.  The  teeth  are  smaller.  The  os  hyoides 
more  slender. 

In  the  vertebrae,  the  bodies  are  longer,  and  'more  hollowed 
at  the  sides;  the  transverse  processes  are  directed  more  back- 
wards, so  that  thechannels  on  each  side  of  the  spinous  processes 
are  deeper.  The  spinous  processes  are  sharper  pointed,  short- 
er, and  more  slanting. 

The  ribs  are  more  slender,  and  flatter ;  their  margins  are 
consequently  sharper. 

That  the  cartilages  of  the  upper  ribs  are  more  frequently  os- 
sified ;  that  those  of  the  middle  ribs  are  broader,  and  those  of 
the  lower  longer,  which  has  been  asserted  by  some  anatomists, 
does  not  seem  clearly  made  out. 

Tiie  first  bone  of  the  sternum  is  lono-er  in  comparison  to  the 
second.  The  latter  is  more  than  double  the  length  of  the  former 
in  the  male  skeleton ',  but  in  the  female  it  is  ofien  not  so  much 
as  double.  It  is  also  thicker,  in  comparison  with  the  second 
bone,  in  the  female.  These  differences  are  observable  in  the 
embryo. 


226  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  lumbar  vertebrge  are  lons^er  and  more  slender ;  the  sa- 
crum broader  and  more  excavated. 

The  ossa  coccygis  are  smaller,  more  moveable,  and  directed 
more  forwards.  Some  have  observed,  that  five  of  these  bones 
are  met  with  more  frequently  in  the  female  than  in  the  male. 

The  ossa  innominata  are  broader,  flatter,  and  more  expanded 
horizontally.  The  angle  formed  between  the  descending  ra- 
mus of  the  pubes  and  the  symphysis  is  more  open.  The  angle 
between  the  ossa  pubis  is  acute  in  the  male,  but  of  SO  deg.  to 
90  deg.  in  the  female,  where  it  approaches  much  more  to  the 
figure  of  an  arch. 

The  ischiatic  tuberosities  are  larger  and  smoother.  The 
space  between  the  tuberosity  and  the  acetabulum  is  smaller; 
the  ischiatic  notch  more  considerable  ;  the  foramen  ovale  larg- 
er ;  the  notch  for  the  tendon  of  the  obturator  externus  less  con- 
siderable. 

The  clavicles  are  less  strongly  curved,  so  that  the  scapulae 
are  thrown  backwards  ;  the  male  clavicles  are  more  arched,  and 
the  shoulders  therefore  brought  more  forwards.  In  the  male 
skeleton,  the  clavicles  are  inclined  a  little  downwards,  so  as  to 
form  an  obtuse  angle  with  the  sternum ;  while  they  form  near- 
ly a  right  angle  in  the  fem.ale. 

The" female  scapulae  are  smaller,  slenderer,  flatter,  and  have 
acuter  angles. 

In  the  female,  the  thigh  bones  are  bent  more  forwards;  the 
neck  forms  a  greater  angle  with  the  body;  the  internal  condyle 
is  larger,  more  prominent,  and  longer,  in  comparison  with  the 
external. 

There  are  diSerences  in  some  parts  of  the  skeleton  in  the  va- 
rious races  of  mankind ;  that  is,  certain  characters  by  which 
they  can  be  distinguished  from  each  other.  The  head  is  the 
part  in  which  the  strongest  distinctive  marks  are  observable. 

The  national  differences  in  stature,  in  the  size,  length,  and 
proportion  of  the  limbs,  &.C.,  must  be  accompanied  with  corres- 
ponding variations  in  the  bony  fabric.  But  there  are  no  pecu- 
liarities of  form  in  the  individual  bones,  no  varieties  in  the  con- 
figuration of  processes,  or  articular  heads  or  cavities,  nor  in 
their  mutual  adaptation. 

The  individual  diversities  of  size  and  form  must  be  attended 
with  differences  in  the  skeleton.  The  bones  are  sometimes 
longer,  sometimes  thicker.  The  head  may  be  comparatively 
large  or  small;  the  shoulders  broad  or  contracted ;  the  thorax 
flat  or  prominent;  the  vertebral  column  more  or  less  curved; 
tlie  loins  thick  or  slender;  the  thighs  or  legs,  the  fingers  and 
toes,  longer  or  shorter,  &c. 

Food  seems  to  have  no  influence  on  the  skeleton. 

External  causes  have  certainly,  in  some  instances,  ifluenced 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  227 

particular  parts  in  individuals  ;  as  the  application  of  artificial 
pressure  to  the  head  of  the  newly  born.  The  effect  of  analo- 
gous pressure  in  contracting  the  feet  of  the  Chinese  women, 
producing  anchylosis  of  the  articulations,  and  thus  rendering 
these  instruments  of  locomotion  nearly  useless,  is  well  known. 

But  a  more  destructive  process  is  that  of  the  tight  laced  stays 
of  females,  who  choose  to  fancy  that  beauty  consists  .in  having 
the  chest  large  above  and  narrow  below,  although  nature  has 
reversed  these  proportions.  The  ribs  are  contracted ;  the  infe- 
rior aperture  of  the  chest  narrowed ;  the  liver,  stomach,  and 
other  abdominal  viscera,  subjected  to  a  severe  and  most  injuri- 
ous pressure,  by  this  barbarous  practice  of  civilized  people.  We 
have  seen  the  figure  of  the  thorax  quite  altered  by  this  prac- 
tice ;  the  lower  ribs  being  pushed  in  on  the  liver,  and  having 
left  deep  indentations  in  that  organ. 

The  effect  of  artificial  causes  in  modifyins:  the  form  has,  how- 
ever, been  much  exaggerated ;  the  round  shape  of  the  skull  in 
the  Turks  being  ascribed  to  their  turbans,  &.c.  A  change  is 
only  to  be  effected  by  considerable  and  continued  pressure  on 
the  bones  in  their  growing  state.  These  alterations  are  merely 
individual ;  they  do  not  affect  the  race ;  as  the  offspring  are 
born  with  the  ordinary  formation  and  characters  of  the  species. 

Note. — Calcined  human  hones,  according  to  Berzelius,  are 
composed,  in  100  parts,  of  81.9  phosphate  of  lime,  3  fiuate  of 
lime,  10  lime,  1.1  phosphate  of  magnesia,  2  soda,  and  2  car- 
bonic acid.  100  parts  of  bones  by  calcination  are  reduced  to 
63.  Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin  found  the  following  to  be  the 
composition  of  100  parts  of  ox  bones  : — 51  solid  gelatin,  37.7 
phosphate  of  lime,  10  carbonate  of  lime,  and  1.3  phosphate  of 
magnesia;  but  Berzelius  gives  the  following  as  their  constitu- 
ents :  33.3  cartilage,  55.35  phosphate  of  lime,  3  fiuate  of  hme, 
3.85  carbonate  of  lime,  2.05  phosphate  of  magnesia,  and  2.45 
soda,  with  a  little  common  salt. 


228 


THE  THOMSONIAN. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


229 


FRONT  \"IEW  OF  THE  SKELETON, 


1 

2 
3 

4 
5 
6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

n 

12 

13 
14 
15 
16 

17 
18 
19 
20 

21 

22 
23 
24 
25 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
SI 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 

40 

41 
42 
43 
44 
45 
46 
47 
48 
49 


The  Head.  50 

Os  frontis.  51 

Right  OS  parietale  or  bregmatis.      52 
Squamous  portion  of  the  right  os  53 

temporis.  54 

Mastoid  process.  55 

Meatus  auditorius  externus.  56 

Condyloid  process  of  inferior  max-  57 

ilia.  58 

Coronoid  proces  f  59 

Angle  >  of  infer.maxilla.  60 

Symphysis  )  61 

Right  superior  maxilla. 
Right  OS  malae  or  jugale. 
Left  ditto. 

The  Trunk. 
Seventh  cervical  vertebra. 
First  rib. 

Eighth  or  first  false  rib. 
First  lumbar  vertebra. 
Sacrum. 
Ileum. 
Pubes. 
Ischium. 

Upper  Extremities. 
Clavicle. 
Scapula. 
Acromion. 
Coracoid  process. 
Humerus. 
Greater  tuberosity. 
Smaller  ditto. 
Eminence  for  the  radius. 
Trochlea. 
Internal  condyle. 
Radius. 

Tubercle  of  the  radius. 
Ulna. 

Coronoid  process  of  the  ulna. 
Os  naviculare,  or  scaphoides. 
Os  lunare. 

Os  cuneiforme,  or  ti-iquetrum. 
Os  pisiforme. 


62 

63 
64 
65 
66 
67 

68 

« 

69 
70 
71 
72 
73 
74 
75 
76 
77 
78 
79 
80 
81 
82 
83 
84 
85 
86 
87 
88 
89 
90 

Os  trapezium,  or  multangulum  ma-  91 
jus,  92 

Ostrapezoides,  or  multangulum  mi-  93 
nus.  94 

Os  capitatum.  95 

Os  unciforme,  or  hamatnm.  96 

Metacarpal  bone  of  the  thumb.         97 
Do.  do.  of  the  fore  finger.  98 

Do.  do,  of  the  middle  finger.  99 

Do.  do.  of  the  ring  finder  100 

Do.  do.  of  the  little  finger.  101 


Sesamoid  bones. 

First  phalanx      i 

Second  phalanx  >  of  fore  finger. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

First  phalanx      ^ 

Second  phalanx  >  of  middle  finger. 

Third  phalanx     ) 

First  phalanx      ^ 

Second  phalanx  >  of  ring  finger. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

First  phalanx      ^ 

Second  phalanx  >  of  little  finger. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

Lower  Extremities. 
Thigh  bone. 
Trochanter  major. 
Trochanter  minor. 
Internal  condyle. 
External  condyle. 
Patella. 

Semilunar  cartilage. 
Tibia. 

Internal  condyle. 
External  condyle. 
Tuberosity. 
Internal  malleolus. 
Fibula. 
Its  head. 

External  malleolus. 
Astragalus. 
Os  calcis. 
Os  naviculare, 
Os  cuneiforme  primum. 
Do.         dn.         secundum. 
Do.         do.         tertium. 
Os  cuboideum. 

Mesta tarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  second  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  third  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  fourth  toe. 
Do.  do  of  the  fifth  toe. 
First  phalanx 


Second  phalanx 
First  phalanx      ' 
Second  phalanx 
Third  phalanx 
First  phalanx      ' 
Second  phalanx 
Third  phalanx 
First  phalanx      ' 
Second  phalanx 
Third  phalanx    ' 
First  phalanx      " 
Second  phalanx 
Third  phalanx    ' 


of  the  great  toe. 


of  the  second  toe. 


of  the  third  toe. 


of  the  fourth  toe. 


of  the  fifth  toe. 


230 


THE    THOMSOJSIAN 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


231 


BACK  VIEW  OF  THE  SKELETON. 


Head.  50 

1  Os  parietalCj  or  bregmatis.  51 

2  Foramen. parietale.  52 

3  Malar  process  of  the  os  frontis.        53 

4  Os  malae.  54 

5  Zygoraa.  55 

6  Squamous  portion  of  the  temporal  56 

bone.  57 

7  Mastoid  foramen.  58 

8  Mastoid  process.  59 

9  Styloid  process.  60 

10  Os  occipitis.  61 

11  Lower  jaw.  62 

Trunk.  63 

12  Seventh  cervical  vertebra. 

13  Twelfth  dorsal  vertebra.  64 

14  Fifth  lumbar  vertebra.  "        65 

15  Sacrum.  66 

16  Os  coccygis.  67 

17  Ileum.  68 

18  Pubes.  69 

19  Ischium.  * 

20  Foramen  ovale.  70 

21  First  rib.  71 

22  Eighth  or  first  false  rib.  72 

23  Twelfth  rib.  73 

Upper  Extremities.  74 

24  Clavicle.  75 

25  Scapula.  76 

26  Spine  of  the  scapula.  77 

27  Acromion.  78 

28  Humerus.  79 

29  Greater  tuberosity.  80 

30  External  condyle.  81 

31  Internal  condyle.  82 

32  Radius.  83 

33  Its  head.  84 

34  Ulna.  85 

35  Olecranon.  86 

36  Os  naviculare.  87 

37  Os  lunare.  88 

38  Os  cunieforme,  or  triquetrum.  89 

39  Os  pisiforme.  90 

40  Os  multangulum  majus.  91 

41  Os  multangulum  minus.  92 

42  Os  capitatum.  93 

43  Os  hamatum,  or  unciforme.  94 

44  Metacarpal  bone  of  the  thumb.         95 

45  Do.  do.  of  the  fore  finger.  96 

46  Do.  do.  of  the  middle  finger.  97 

47  Do.  do.  of  the  ring  finger.  98 

48  Do.  do.  of  the  little  finger.  99 

49  Sesamoid  bone.  100 


of  the  thumb. 


First  phalanx 

Second  phalanx 

First  phalanx      ) 

Second  phalanx  >  of  fore  finger. 

Third  plialanx    j) 

First  phalanx      ^ 

Second  phalanx  >  of  middle  finger. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

First  phalanx      ^ 

Second  phalanx  >  of  ring  finger.   . 

Third  phalanx    ) 

First  phalanx      i 

Second  phalanx  >  of  little  finger. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

Lower'  Extremities. 
Thigh  bone. 
Its  neck. 

Trochanter  major. 
Trochanter  minor. 
External  condyle. 
Internal  condyle. 
Semilunar  cartilage. 
Tibia. 

Its  external  condyle. 
Its  internal  condyle. 
Internal  malleolus. 
Fibula. 
Its  head. 

External  malleolus. 
Astragalus. 
Os  calcis. 
Os  cuboideum. 
Os  naviculaie. 
Os  cuneiforme  primum. 
Do.        do.        secundum. 
Do.         do.         tertium. 
Metatarstal  bone  of  the  great  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  second  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  third  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  fourth  toe. 
Do.  do.  of  the  fifth  toe. 

?  Sesamoid  bones. 

First  phalanx  of  the  great  toe. 

Do.  do.  of  the  second  toe. 

Do.  do.  of  the  third  toe. 

Second  phalanx  of  the  third  toe. 

First  phalanx     j) 

Second  phalanx  >  of  the  fourth  toe. 

Third  phalanx    ) 

First  phalanx 

Second  phalanx 

Third  phalaax    ' 


of  the  fifth  toe. 


232  THE    TIIOMSONIAN 

DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  TRUNK,  INTERNAL  OR- 
GANS, AND  EXTREMITIES. 

In  natural  philosophy,  all  bodies  are  divided  into  ponderable 
and  imponderable. 

The  first  are  those  which  may  act  upon  several  of  our  sen- 
ses, and  of  which  the  existence  is  sufficiently  established:  of 
this  kind  are  solids,  fluids,  and  gases.  The  second  are  those 
which,  in  general,  only  act  on  one  of  our  senses,  the  existence 
of  which  is  by  no  means  demonstrated,  and  which,  perhaps,  are 
only  forces,  or  a  modification  of  other  bodies  ;  such  are  caloric, 
light,  the  electric  and  magnetic  fluids. 

Ponderable  bodies  are  endowed  with  common  or  general 
properties,  and  likewise  with  particular  or  secondary  properties. 

The  general  properties  of  bodies  are — extent,  divisibility, 
impenetrability,  mobility.  A  ponderable  body,  of  whatever 
kind,  always  presents  these  four  properties  combined.  Second- 
ary properties  are  variously  distributed  among  different  bodies, 
as  hardness,  porosity,  elasticity,  fluidity,  &c.  They  constitute, 
by  their  combination  with  the  general  properties,  the  condition 
or  state  of  bodies.  It  is  by  gaining  or  losing  some  of  these  se- 
condary properties  that  bodies  change  their  state ;  for  instance, 
water  may  appear  under  the  form  of  ice,  of  a  fluid,  or  of  vapor, 
although  it  is  always  the  same  body. 

Bodies  are  simple  or  compound. 

Simple  bodies  are  rarely  met  with  in  nature ;  they  are  almost 
always  the  product  of  art,  and  we  even  name  them  simple,  only 
because  art  has  not  arrived  at  their  decomposition.  At  present, 
the  bodies  regarded  as  simple  are  the  following:  oxygen,  chlo- 
rine, iodine,  fluorine,  sulphur,  hydrogen,  boracinm,  carbon, 
phosphorus,  azote,  silicium,  zirconium,  aluminum,  yttrium,  glu- 
cium,  magnesium,  calcium,  strontium,  barium,  sodium,  potas- 
sium, manganese,  zinc,  iron,  tin,  arsenic,  molybdenum,  chromi- 
fljfei,  tungsten,  columbium,  antimony,  uranium,  cerium,  cobalt, 
titanium,  bismuth,  copper,  tellurium,  nickel,  lead,  mercury,  os- 
mium, silver,  rhodium,  palladium,  gold,  platinum,  iridium,  se- 
lenimn,  lithium,  thorenum,  wood,  anium,  cadmium. 

Compound  bodies  occur  every  where ;  they  form  the  mass  of 
the  globe,  and  of  all  the  beings  which  are  seen  on  its  surface. 

This  diversity  of  bodies  is  extremely  important ;  it  divides 
them  naturally  into  two  classes;  bodies  the  composition  of 
which  is  constant  are  named  brute,  or  gross,  inert,  inorganic; 
but  those  [the  elements  of  which  continually  vary,  afe  called 
living,  organized  bodies. 

Brute  and  organized  bodies  differ  from  each  other,  in  respect 
1st  of  form — 2d  of  compositipa — 3d  of  the  laws  which  regulate 
their  changes  of  state. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  233 

The  human  body  is  divided  by  anatomists  into  the  trunk 
and  extremities,  i.  e.  the  head,  and  inferior  and  superior  extre- 
mities, each  of  which  have  certain  regions  before  any  part  is 
removed,  by  which  the  pliysician  is  enabled  to  direct  the  appli- 
cation of  stimulants  and  the  like,  and  the  situation  of  diseases 
is  better  described. 

The  head  is  distinguished  into  the  hairy  part  and  the  face. 
The  former  has  five  reg-ions,  viz.  the  crown  of  the  head,  or 
vertex — the  fore  part  of  the  head,  or  sinciput — the  hind  part, 
or  occiput — and  the  sides,  'partes  laterales  capitis.  In  the 
latter  are  distinguished,  the  region  of  the  forehead, /rons — tem- 
ples, or  tempora — the  nose,  or  nosiis — the  eyes,  or  ociili — the 
mouth,  or  os — the  cheeks,  hucca — the  chin,  or  meiiiimi — and 
the  ears,  or  aures. 

The  trunk  is  distinguished  into  three  principal  parts — the 
neck,  thorax,  and  abdomen.  The  neck  is  divided  into  the  an- 
terior region,  or  pars  a?Uica,  in  which,  in  men,  is  an  eminence 
called  pormim  Adami ;  the  posterior  region  is  called  nucha 
colli :  and  the  lateral  regions,  partes  laterales  colli. 

The  thorax  is  distinguished  into  the  anterior  region,  in  which 
are  the  stei'jiiwi  and  manimoi,  and  at  the  inferior  part  of  which 
is  a  pit  or  hollow  called  scrobicuhis  cordis :  a  posterior  region, 
called  dorsum ;  and  the  sides,  or  latera  thoracis. 

The  abdomen  is  distinguished  into  an  anterior  region,  pro- 
perly called  the  abdo?fie?i ;  a  posterior  region,  called  the  loins, 
or  lumbiy  and  lateral  regions  or  flanks,  called  latera  abdomi- 
nis. The  anterior  region  of  the  abdomen,  being  very  extensive, 
is  subdivided  into  the  epigastric,  hypochondriac^  umbilical, 
and  hypogastric  regions.  Immediately  below  the  abdomen  is 
the  mons  veneris,  and  at  its  sides  the  groins,  or  ingiiina.  The 
space  between  the  organs  of  generation  and  the  a7ius,  or  funda- 
ment, is  called  the  perina:wn. 

The  superior  extremity  is  distinguished  into  the  shoulder,,^ 
summitas  humeri,  under  which  is  the  arm-pit,  called  axilla, 
ox  fovea  axillaris  ;  the  brachium,  or  arm ;  the  antebrachium, 
or  fore-arm,  in  which  anteriorly  is  the  bend  of  the  arm,  where 
the  veins  are  generally  opened,  cnWe^  Jlexura  antibrachii ;  and 
posteriorly  the  elbow,  called  anguhis  cubiti  ;  and  the  hand,  m 
which  are  the  carpus,  or  wrist,  the  back,  or  dorsum  manus, 
and  the  palm,  or  vola. 

The  inferior  extremity  is  divided  into,  1.  the  region  of  the 
femur,  in  which  is  distinguished  the  coxa,  or  regio-ischiadica, 
forming  the  outer  and  superior  part ;  2.  the  leg,  in  which  are 
the  knee,  or  genu,  the  bend,  or  cavum  poplitis,  and  the  calf, 
or  sura;  3.  the  foot,  in  which  are  the  outer  and  inner  ankle,  or 
malleotus  externus  and  internus.  the  back,  or  dorsum,  &nd  tlie 
sole,  or  planta. 

16 


234 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  235 

VISCERA, 

III  anatomy,  is  a  term  originally  applied  to  the  bowels  or  in- 
testines, but  now  used  indiscriminately  for  the  organs  contain- 
ed in  any  cavity  of  the  body — as  the  Heart,  Lungs,  Thymus, 
Stomach,  Intestines,  Liver,  Spleen,  Pancreas,  Epiploon,  and 
Generation. 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  3, 

Being  a  front  view  of  the  chest  and  abdomen  m  a  newly 
born  child  ;  the  sternum  and  neighborino:  part  of  the  ribs,  with 
the  corresponding  pleurEE,  the  front  of  the  abdominal  parietes 
and  diaphragm,  having  been  cut  through  and  removed. 

Os  hyoides. 

Portion  of  the  sterno-hyoideus  and  omo-hyoideus  mus- 
cles. 

Portion  of  the  sterno-thyroideus  turned  back. 

Thyroid  cartilage. 

Hyo-thyroideus. 

Thyroid  gland.     7  Trachea. 

Portion  of  the  sterno-cleido  mastoideus. 

Clavicle.     10  10  First  rib. 

Ninth  rib.     12  Thymus. 
13-15  Right  lung  :  13,  its  superior  lobe;  14,  middle  lobe ;  15, 

inferior  lobe. 
16  17  Left  lung  :  16,  ihe  superior  lobe  ;  17,  the  interior  lobe. 

18  Pericardium.     19  19  Diaphragm. 
20  21  Liver:  20,  the  right  lobe  ;  21,  the  left  lobe. 

22  Suspensory  ligament  of  the  liver. 

23  The  umbilical  vein  turned  back.    24  The  spleen. 

25  26  Great  omentum:  25,  its  portion  lying  on  the  mesocolon; 

26,  loose  portion. 
27  27  Arch  of  the  colon. 

28  Left  portion  of  the  colon.     29  The  right  portion. 

30  30  30  The  jejunum,  filled  partly  with  meconium,  partly 

with  air. 

31  31  31  The  ileum. 

32  Urinary  bladder,  with  its  fundus  turned  forwards. 
33  33  Umbilical  artery.     34  Urachus. 
35  Internal  surface  of  the  peritoneum. 

36  36  Internal  jugular  vein. 

37  37  Thyroid  vein. 

38  38  Subclavian  vein. 

39  39  Common  caroted  artery. 

40  40  Subclavian  artery.     41  (Esophagus. 


1 

2 

2 

3 

3 

4 

5 

5 

6 

6 

8 

8 

9 

9 

11 

11 

236 


THE     THOMSONIAN 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  237 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  4, 

Exhibiting-  the  same  view  as  the  last^  except  that  the  thymus 
and  pericardium  have  been  removed,  and  the  hver  turned  up 
towards  the  right,  so  as  to  expose  the  stomach. 
1 — 4  The  heart:    1,  appendix  of  the  right  auricle  ;  2  pulmo- 
nary ventricle  ;  3,  appendix  of  the  left  auricle  ;  4,  aor- 
tic ventricle.     (The  outline  of  the  heart  is  marked  by 
a  dotted  line  ou  the  surface  of  the  liver.) 

5  Pulmonary  artery. 

6  Aorta, 

7  Left  subclavian  artery. 

8  Left  carotid. 

9  Arteria  innominata. 

10  Right  carotid. 

11  Right  subclavian  artery. 

12  Superior  vena  cava. 

13  14  Right  internal  jugular  vein  :    13,  portion  in  the  chest ; 
,     14,  portion  in  the  neck. 
15  Right  subclavian  vein. 
16  17  Left  internal  jugular  vein  :    16,  thoracic  portion  ;    17, 
cervical  portion. 
IS  Left  subclavian  vein. 
19-22  Concave  or  under  surface  of  the  liver  :    19,  right  lobe ; 
20,  square  portion  ;    21,  left  lobe  ;    22,  lobulus  spigelii, 
seen  through  tKe  small  omentum. 
23  Part  of  the  superior  or  convex  surface. 

24  24  24  Thin  edge. 

25  25  Thick  edge. 

26  Umbilical  vein  cut  through  and  turned  back. 

27  The  pons  covering  the  notch  of  the  umbihcal  vein. 
2S  Gall-bladder. 

29  Part  of  the  diaphragm. 

30  Spleen. 

31  (Esophagus  entering  the  stomach. 

32  (Esophagus  in  the  neck. 

33  Stomach. 

34  Pylorus. 

35  Duodenum. 

36  36  36  Transverse  portions  of  the  colon. 

37  Right  portion  of  the  colon.     The  other  parts  are  the 
same  as  in  the  preceding  plate. 


238 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  239 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  5. 

The  heart  and  large  vessels  only  are  seen  in  the  chest,  the 
other  parts  having  been  removed.  The  small  intestine  is  re- 
moved from  the  abdomen,  and  the  arch  of  the  colon  is  turned 
upwards. 

1  Right  or  pulmonary  ventricle  of  the  heart. 

2  Aortic  or  left  ventricle. 

3  Appendix  of  the  right  auricle. 

4  Appendix  of  the  left  auricle. 

5  Piihnonary  artery. 
G  Aorta. 

7  Arteria  innoniinata. 

S  Rifjht  carotid. 

9  Right  subclavian. 

10  Left  carotid. 

11  Left  subclavian. 

12  Inferior  vena  cava  covered  by  the  pericardium. 

13  Superior  vena  cava. 

14  Right  internal  jugular  vein. 

15  Left  internal  jugular  vein. 

16  Trachea. 

17  17  Thyroid  gland.     18  Thyroid  cartilage. 

19  19  Thyro-ho'ideus. 

20  20  Sterno-thyroideus  detached   and  turned   back.      (The 

sterno-hoideus  is  removed.) 

21  21  Part  of  the  sterno-cleido  mastoideus. 

22  22  Clavicle. 

23  23  First  rib.     24  24  Second  rib. 
25  25  Cut  edge  of  the  diaphragm. 

26  Arch  of  the  colon. 

27  Right  portion  of  the  colon. 

28  Part  of  the  left  colon. 

29  Transverse  mesocolon. 

30  Stomach  seen  obscurely  through  the  mesocolon. 

31  Left  or  great  extremity  of  the  stomach. 

32  Spleen. 

33  Right  kidney. 

34  Right  portion  of  the  colon. 

35  Caecum  and  appendix  vermiformis. 

36  End  of  the  ileum. 

37  Commencement  of  the  jejunum. 

38  Mesentery. 

39  39  Sigmoid  flexure  of  the  colon. 

40  Its  mesocolon.     41  Rectum. 

42  Urinary  bladder,  turned  forwards  and  downwards. 
43  43  Umbilical  arteries.     44  Urachus. 


240 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  241 

DESCRIPTION  OP  PLATE  6. 

All  the  thoratic  visceia  are  removed;  also,  the  diaphragia 
and  the  small  intestine,  excepting  the  duodenum.  The  perito- 
neum is  cleared  from  the  kidney  and  larger  vessels. 

1  1  Thyroid  gland. 

2  2  Portion  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoideus. 

3  3  Sterno-thyroideus  detached  and  turned  back. 

(The  sterno-hyoideus  is  removed.) 

4  4  Thyro-hyoideus. 

5  Thyroid  cartilage. 
6     6  Clavicle.     7  Trachea. 

8    S  (Esophagus ;   its  longitudinal  muscular  fibres  are  ex- 
posed. 
9-11  Stomach  moderately  distended, 

9  The  cardia.     10  The  blind  pouch.     11  Pylorus. 
12-14  Duodenum:    12,  the  first  curvature;    13,  the  second; 
14,  the  third. 
15  Pancreas.     16  Spleen. 
17  Right  kidney.     18  Left  kidney. 
19  Right  renal  capsule.     20  Portion  of  diaphragm. 

21  Arch  of  the  aorta  with  its  three  great  branches. 

See  plate  3,  No.  7,  10,  11. 

22  Canalis  arteriosus. 

23  Descending  thoracic  aorta. 

24  Descending  abdominal  aorta. 

25  Right  iliac  artery.     26  Left  iliac  artery. 

30  30  Spermatic  artery  and  vein,     31  31  Ureter. 

32  The  cut  orifice  of  the  rectum. 

33  Urinary  bladder  turned  down. 
34  34  Umbilical  artery. 

35  Urachus.    36  36  First  rib. 


242 


THE  THOMSON  I  AX 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  243 

DESCRIPTION  OF  VLATE  7. 

View  of  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  viscera  from  behind. — 
The  muscles  of  the  neck  and  back,  the  back  of  the  ribs  and  the 
spinous  processes  of  the  vertabree  are  removed. 

1     1  First  rib.     2  2  Eleventh  rib. 

3  3  Twelfth  rib.  with  the  diaphragm  and  abdominal  muscles 

still  attached.     The  ribs  are  gently  drawn  aside,  to 
expose  the  lungs. 

4  4  Sixth  cervical  vertebra.     5  5  Sacrum. 

6     6  Gluteus  maximus.     7  7  Gluteus  medius. 

8     8  8  The  vertebral  theca  of  the  dura  mater. 

9  The  same,  covering  the  oauda  equina. 

10  10  The  scapulas  a  little  drawn  aside. 

11  12  The  left  lung:    11,  superior  lobe;  12,  inferior  lobe. 
13-15  Right  lunof:  13,  superior  lobe  ;  14,  middle  lobe  ;  15,  in- 
ferior lobe. 

16-18  Diapliragm:  16,  covering  the  left  lobe  of  the  liver,  sto- 
mach and  spleen  ;  17,  covering  the  right  lobe ;  18  18, 
attached  to  the  twelfth  rib. 

19  Right  renal  capsule. 

20  Left  kidney.     21   Right  kidney. 

22  Interior  surface  of  tlie  riaht  lobe  of  the  liver. 

23  Left  part  of  the  colon. 

24  Sigmoid  flexure  of  ihe  colon. 

25  Portion  of  the  ileum. 


244 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  245 

DESCRIPTION  OF  PLATE  8. 

"View  of  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  viscera  from  behind — 
the  vertebral  column,  together  with  part  of  the  os  innomina- 
tLim,  bemg  removed. 

1  1  First  rib.     2  2  Eleventh  rib. 

3  3  Scapula  drawn  aside. 

4  4  Internal  jugular  vein. 

5  5  Common  carotid  artery. 
G  6  Subclavian  artery. 

7     7  Inferior  thyroid  artery. 
8  Part  of  the  aortic  arch. 
9-10  l^escending  aorta :  9,  thoracic  ;  10,  abdominal, 

11  Division  of  the  aorta  into  the  common  iliacs. 

12  Midddle  sacral  artery.     The  intercostal,  renal  and  lum- 

bar arteries  are  not  numbered. 

13  Vena  azygos  cut  off. 

14  Inferior  vena  cava.     15  Left  renal  vein. 
1(3  Right  renal  vein,  double  in  this  subject. 

17  Union  of  the  iliac  veins  to  form  the  inferior  cava. 
IS  IS  Par  vagum 

19  19  Thyroid  gland;   the  blood-vessels  are  drawn  aside  by  a 
hook  on  the  left  side. 

20  Lower  part  of  the  pharynx. 
21  21  Thyroid  cartilage.     22  (Esophagus. 

23  Oesophagus  entering  the  stomach. 

24  Part  of  the  stomach. 

26  27  Superior  and  inferior  lobes  of  the  left  lung. 

28  29  30  Superior,  middle,  and  inferior  lobes  of  the  right  lung. 

31  31  31  Diaphragm.     32  32  Abdominal  muscles. 

33  Spleen.     34  Part  of  the  pancreas. 
35-37  Left  and  riorht  lobes  and  processus  caudatus  of  the  liver. 

38  Left  renal  capsule.     39  Right  renal  capsule. 

40  Left  kidney.     41  Riijht  kidney. 

42  Left  ureter.     43  Right  ureter. 
44  44  Spermatic  vessels. 

45  Left  portion  of  the  colon. 

46  Sigmoid  flexure. 

47  Part  of  the  jejunum  seen  through  the  peritoneum. 

48  Rectum.    49  Portion  of  the  ilium. 


246  THE    THOMSONIAN 

No.  9.— FIRST  VIEW  OP  THE  HEART. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  PLATE. 

(The  convex  or  superior  surface.) 

1  Riii^ht  auricle.     2  Its  appendix. 

3  Left  auricle.     4  Its  appendix. 

6  Left  pulmonary  veins.     7  Superior  vena  cava. 

8  Place  from  wliich  the  pulmonary  artery  has  been  cut  off, 

9  Aorta.     10  Arteria  innominata. 

11  Left  carotid  artery.     12  Left  subclavian  artery. 

13  Right  or  inferior  coronary  artery. 

14  Left  or  superior  coronary  artery. 

16  Anterior  branch  of  the  great  coronary  vein. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


247 


No.  10.— SECOND  VIEW  OF  THE  HEART. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  PLATE. 

(The  heart  and  blood-vessels  seen  on  the  inferior  or  flat  surface.) 

1  Rie:ht  auricle. 

2  Inferior  vena  cava  cut  off  and  tied. 

3  Superior  vena  cava.     4  Left  auricle.     5  Its  appendix. 
6     7  Ricrht  pulmonary  veins. 

8  One  of  the  left  pulmonary  veins. 

9  Right  coronary  artery. 

10  Circumflex  branch  of  the  left  coronary  artery. 
12  Great  posterior  branch  of  the  great  coronary  vein. 
13  14  Smaller  posterior  branches. 

15  Smull  branch  from  the  right  auricle. 

16  Trunk  of  the  great  coronary  vein  ending  in  the  right 

auricle. 

17  A  small  vein  of  the  heart  opening  into  the  right  auricle. 


248 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


THE  TRUNK. 

This  term,  in  anatomy,  is  applied  to  the  body  strictly  so  call- 
ed. It  is  divided  into  the  thorax,  or  chest— the  abdomen,  or 
belly — and  the  pelvis. 

No.  11. 


DESCEIPTIO:^  OF  THE  PLATE. 

1  1  Thyroid  cartilao;e. 

2  2  Internal  jugular  veins  coming  from  the  head. 

3  3  The  principal  veins  from  the  arms,  coming  to  join  the  great 

vein. 

4  5  The  great  vein  descending  from  the  head  aad  upper  extre- 

mities,  called  the  vena  cava. 
6  Right  ventricle  of  the  heart.     7  Left  ventricle  of  do. 

8  The  great  artery  of  the  body  called  the  aorta. 

9  Aortic  ventricle.     10  Right  lung.     11  Left  lung. 

12  12  Diaphragm.     13  13  Right  and  left  lobes  of  the  liver, 

14  Round  ligament  of  the  liver. 

15  Gall-bladder.     16  Stomach. 
17  17  Small  intestines.     18  Spleen. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  249 

THORAX. 

The  thorax  is  the  conical  cavity,  situated  at  the  upper  part 
of  the  trunk  of  the  body ;  it  is  narrow  above  and  broad  below, 
and  is  bounded  in  front  by  the  sternum,  six  superior  costal  car- 
tilao;es,  ribs,  and  intercostal  muscles  ;  laterally,  by  the  ribs  and 
intercostal  muscles  ;  and  behind,  by  the  same  structures,  and 
by  the  vertebral  column,  as  low  down  as  the  upper  border  of 
the  last  rib  and  the  first  lumbar  vertebra;  snjieriorly,  by  the 
thoracic  focia  and  first  ribs  ;  and  inferiorly  by  the  diaphragm. 
It  is  much  deeper  on  the  posterior  than  on  the  anterior  wall,  in 
consequence  of  the  obliquity  of  the  diaphragm,  and  contains 
the  heart,  enclosed  in  its  pericardium,  with  the  great  vessels; 
the  lungs,  with  their  serous  coverings,  the  pleurae;  the  oeso- 
phagus ;  some  important  nerves  ;  and,  in  the  foetus,  the  thymus 
gland. 

NO.  12. — ANTERIOR  VIEW  OF  THE  THORAX.* 


*  Description  of  the  plate. — 1.  The  superior  piece  of  the  sternum.  2. 
The  middle  piece.  3.  The  inferior  piece,  or  ensiform  cartilage.  4.  The  first 
dorsal  vertebra.     5.  The  last  dorsal  vertebra.     6.  The  iirst  rib.    7.  Its  head. 

8.  Its  neck,  resting  against  the  transverse  process  of  the  first  dorsal  vertebra. 

9.  Its  tuberosity.  10.  The  seventh  or  last  true  rib.  11.  The  costal  cartila- 
ges of  the  true  ribs.  12.  The  two  last  false  ribs — the  floating  ribs.  13.  The 
groove  alonjr  the  lower  border  of  a  rib,  for  the  lodgment  of  the  intercostal 
vessels  and  nerve. 


17 


250 


THE    THOMSO.MAN 


THE  HEART. 

The  central  orsfan  of  circulation,  the  heart,  is  situated  be- 
tween the  two  layers  of  pleura,  which  constitute  the  mediasti- 
num, and  is  enclosed  in  a  proper  membrane,  the  pericardium. 

Pericardhun. — The  pericardium  is  a  fibro-serous  membrane 
like  the  dura  mater,  and  resembles  that  membrane  in  deriving 
its  serous  layer  from  the  reflected  serous  membrane  of  the  vis- 
cus  which  it  encloses.  It  consists,  therefore,  of  two  layers,  an 
external  fibrous,  and  an  internal  serous.  The  fibrous  layer  is 
attached,  above,  to  the  great  vessels  at  the  root  of  the  heart, 
where  it  is  continuous  with  the  thoracic  facia;  and  belov;,  to 
the  tendinous  portion  nf  the  diaphragm.  The  serous  mem- 
brane invests  the  heart  with  the  commencement  of  its  great  ves- 
sels, and  is  then  reflected  upon  the  internal  surface  of  the  fi- 
brous layer. 

NO.  13. ANATOIMY  OF  THE  HEART.* 


*  Description  of  the  pi,ate. — 1.  The  right  auricle.  2.  The  entrance  of 
the  superior  vena  cava.  3.  The  entrance  of  the  inferior  cava.  4.  the  open- 
ing of  the  coronary  vein,  half  closed  by  the  coronary  valve. 


The  Eusta- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  251 

The  heart  is  placed  obliquely  in  the  chest,  the  base  being  di- 
rected upwards  and  backwards  towards  the  right  shoulder  ;  the 
apex  forwards,  and  to  the  left,  points  to  the  space  between  the 
fifth  and  sixth  ribs,  at  about  two  or  three  inches  from  the  ster- 
num. Its  under  side  is  flattened,  and  rests  upon  the  tendinous 
portion  of  the  diaphragm  ;  its  upper  side  is  rounded  and  con- 
vex, and  formed  principally  by  the  right  ventricle,  and  partly 
by  the  left.  Surmounting  the  ventricles  are  the  corresponding 
auricles,  whose  auricular  appendages  are  directed  forwards, 
and  sliyhtly  overlap  the  root  of  the  pulmonary  artery.  The 
pulmonary  artery  is  the  large  anterior  vessel  at  the  root  of  the 
heart;  it  crosses  obliquely  the  commencement  of  the  aorta. 
The  heart  consists  of  two  auricles  and  two  ventricles,  which 
are  respectively  named  from  their  position,  right  and  left.  The 
right  IS  the  venous  side  of  the  heart;  it  receives  into  its  auricle 
the  venous  blood  from  every  part  of  the  body,  by  the  superior 
and  inferior  cava  and  coronary  vein.  From  the  auricle  the 
blood  passes  into  the  ventricle,  and  from  the  ventricle,  through 
the  pulmonary  artery,  to  the  capillaries  of  the  lungs.  From 
these  it  is  returned  as  arterial  blood  to  the  left  auricle ;  from 
the  left  auricle  it  passes  into  the  left  ventricle ;  and  from  the 
left  ventricle  is  carried  through  the  aorta,  to  be  distributed  to 
every  part  of  the  body,  and  again  returned  to  the  heart  by  the 
veins.     This  constitutes  the  course  of  the  adult  circulation. 

The  heart  is  best  studied  in  situ.  If,  however,  it  be  remov- 
ed from  the  body,  it  should  be  placed  in  the  position  indicated 
in  the  above  description  of  its  situation.  A  transverse  incision 
should  then  be  made  along  the  ventricular  margin  of  the  right 

chian  valve.  6.  The  fossa  ovalis,  surrounded  by  the  annulus  ovalis.  7.  The 
tuberculum  Loweri.  8.  The  muscular  pectinati  in  the  appendix  auriculae. 
9.  The  auriculo-ventricular  opening.  10.  The  cavity  of  the  rignt  ventricle. 
11.  The  tricuspid  valve,  attached  by  the  chordae  tendinae  to  the  carnae  colum- 
nae  (12).  13.  The  pulmonary  artery,  guarded  at  its  commencement  by  three 
semilunar  valves.  14.  the  right  pulmonary  artery,  passing  beneath  the  arch 
and  behind  the  ascending  aorta.  15.  The  left  pulmonary  artera,  crossing  in 
front  of  the  descending  aorta.  The  remains  of  the  ductus  arteriosus,  acting 
as  a  ligiment  between  the  pulmonary  artery  and  arch  of  the  aorta.  The  ar- 
rows mark  the  course  of  the  venous  blood  through  the  right  side  of  the  heart. 
Entering  the  auricle  by  the  superior  and  inferior  cavae,  it  passes  through  the 
auriculo-ventricular  opening  into  the  ventricle,  and  thence  through  the  pulmo- 
nary artery  to  the  lungs.  1(3.  The  left  auricle.  17.  The  openings  of  the  four 
pulmonary'veins.  18.  The  auriculo-ventricular  opening.  19.  The  left  ventri- 
cle.  20.  The  mitral  valve,  attached  by  its  chordae  tendinie  to  two  large  co- 
lumnae  carnse,  which  project  from  the  walls  of  the  ventricle.  21.  The  com 
menceraent  and  course  of  the  ascending  aorta  behind  the  pulmonary  artery, 
marked  by  an  arrow.  The  entrance  of  the  vessel  is  guarded  by  three  semi- 
lunar valves.  22.  The  arch  of  the  aorta.  The  comparative  thickness  of  the  two 
ventricles  is  shown  in  the  diagram.  The  course  of  the  pure  blood  through 
the  left  side  of  the  heart  is  marked  by  arrows.  The  blood  is  brought  from 
the  lungs  by  the  four  pulmonary  veins  into  the  left  auricle,  and  passes  through 
the  auriculo-ventricular  opening  into  the  left  ventricle,  from  whence  it  is  con- 
veyed by  the  aorta  to  every  part  of  the  body. 


252  THE  THOMSONIAN 

auricle,  from  the  appendix  to  its  right  border,  and  crossed  by  a 
perpendicular  incision,  carried  from  the  side  of  the  superior  to 
the  inferior  cava.  The  blood  must  then  be  removed.  Some 
fine  specimens  of  white  fibrin  are  frequently  found  wuh  the  co- 
agula;  occasionally  they  are  yellow  and  gelatinous.  This  ap- 
pearance deceived  the  older  anatomists,  who  called  these  sub- 
stances "polypus  of  the  iieart:"'  they  are  also  frequently  found 
in  the  right  ventricle,  and  sometimes  in  the  left  cavities. 

The  rig'ht  auricle  is  larger  than  the  leit,  and  is  divided  into 
a  principal  cavity  or  sinus,  and  an  appendix  auncula?.  The 
interior  of  the  sinus  presents  for  examination  five  openings  ; 
two  valves,  two  relicts  of  icalal  structure,  and  two  peculiarities 
in  the  proper  structure  of  the  auricle.  They  may  be  thus  ar- 
ranged : 

I"  Superior  cava, 

1  Inferior  cava, 
Openings    -    -    -    -        \  Coronary  vein, 

I  Foramina  Thebes;  i, 

i  Auriculo-ventriculnr  opening. 

^  Eustachian  valve, 
^^'''^^^ j  Coronary  valve. 

r,  1-  .     ^  J-  ,  1    s      s        ^  Annulus  ovalis. 
Relicts  of fcBtal  structure      p^ssa  ovalis. 

cy.      ,  r ,,  .,       (  Tuberculum  Loweri, 

Structure  of  the  auricle      |  ^^^^^,,x,  pectinati. 

The  superior  cava  returns  the  blood  from  the  upper  half  of 
the  body,  and  opens  into  the  upper  and  front  part  of  the  auri- 
cle. 

The  inferior  cava  returns  the  blood  from  the  lower  half  of 
the  body,  and  opens  into  the  lower  and  posterior  wall,  close  to 
the  partition  between  the  auricles  (septum  auricularum).  The 
direction  of  these  two  vessels  is  such,  that  a  stream  forced 
through  the  superior  cava  would  be  directed  towards  the  auri- 
culo-ventricular  opening.  In  like  manner,  a  stream  rushing 
upwards  by  the  inferior  cava,  would  force  its  current  against 
the  septum  auricularum  ;  this  is  the  proper  direction  of  the  two 
currents  during  fcctal  life. 

The  coronary  vein  returns  the  venous  blood  from  the  sub- 
stance of  the  heart ;  it  opens  into  the  auricle  between  the  infe- 
rior cava  and  the  auriculo-ventriculav  opening,  under  cover  of 
the  coronary  valve. 

The  foramina  Thehesil  are  minute  pore-like  openings,  by 
which  the  venous  blood  exhales  directly  from  the  muscular 
structure  of  the  heart  into  the  auricle,  without  entering  the  ve- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  253 

nous  current.     These  openings  are  also  found  in  the  left  auri- 
cle, and  in  the  right  and  left  ventricles. 

The  auricnlo-vc utricular  openiug  is  the  large  opening  of 
communication  between  the  auricle  and  ventricle. 

The  Eustachian  valve  is  a  part  of  the  apparatus  of  foetal  cir- 
culation, and  serves  to  direct  the  placental  blood  from  the  infe- 
rior cava,  through  the  foramen  ovale,  into  the  left  auricle.  In 
the  adult  it  is  a  mere  vestige  and  imperfect,  though  sometimes 
it  remains  of  large  size.  It  is  formed  by  a  fold  of  the  lining 
membrane  of  the  auricle,  containing  some  muscular  fibres,  is 
situated  between  the  opening  of  the  inferior  cava  and  the  auri- 
culo-ventricular  opening,  and  is  generally  connected  with  the 
coronary  valve. 

The  coronary  valve  is  a  semilunar  fold  of  the  lining  mem- 
brane, stretching  across  the  mouth  of  the  coronary  vein,  and 
preventing  the  reflux  of  the  blood  in  the  vein  during  the  con- 
traction of  the  auricle. 

The  anmdus  ovalis  is  situated  on  the  septum  auricularum, 
opposite  the  termination  of  the  inferior  cava.  It  is  the  rounded 
margin  of  the  septum,  which  occupies  the  place  of  the  foramen 
ovale  of  the  foetus. 

The  fossa  ovalis  is  an  oval  depression  corresponding  with 
the  foramen  ovale  in  the  foetus.  The  opening  is  closed  at  birth 
by  a  thin  valvular  layer,  which  is  continuous  with  the  left 
margin  of  the  annulus,  and  is  frequently  imperfect  at  its  upper 
part.  The  depression  or  fossa  in  the  right  auricle  results  from 
this  arrangement.     There  is  no  fossa  ovalis  in  the  left  auricle. 

The  tnherculujn  Loioeri  is  the  portion  of  auricle  intervening 
between  the  openings  of  the  superior  and  inferior  cava.  Being 
thicker  than  the  walls  of  the  veins,  it  forms  a  projection,  which 
was  supposed  by  Lower  to  direct  the  blood  from  the  superior 
cava  into  the  auriculo-ventricular  opening. 

The  musculi  psctinati  are  small  muscular  columns  situated 
in  the  appendix  auricula;.  They  are  very  numerous,  and  are 
arranged  parallel  with  each  otiier ;  hence  their  cognomen — ■ 
'^  pectinati,''^  like  the  teeth  of  a  comb. 

The  right  ventricle  is  triangular  and  three-sided  in  its  form. 
Its  anterior  side  is  convex,  and  forms  the  larger  proportion  of 
the  front  of  the  heart.  The  inferior  side  is  flat,  and  rests  upon 
the  diaphragm;  and  the  inner  side  corresponds  with  the  parti- 
tion between  the  two  ventricles,  septum  ventriculorum. 

The  right  ventricle  is  to  be  laid  open  by  making  an  incision 
parallel  with,  and  a  little  to  the  right  of,  the  middle  line  from 
the  pulmonary  artery  in  front,  to  the  apex  of  the  heart,  and 
thence  by  the  side  of  the  middle  line  behind,  to  the  auriculo- 
ventricular  opening. 

It  contains,  to  be  examined,  two  openings,  the  auriculo-ven- 


254  THE    THOMSONIAN 

tricalar  and  that  of  the  pulmonary  artery  :  two  apparatuses  oi* 
valves,  the  tricuspid  and  semilunar  ;  and  a  muscular  and  ten- 
dinous apparatus  belonging  to  the  tricuspid  valves.  They  may 
be  thus  arranged : 

Auriculo-ventricular  opening, 

Opening  of  the  pulmonary  artery, 

Tricuspid  valves, 
Semilunar  valves, 

Chordas  tendineas, 
CarneBB  columncc. 

The  aiiriculo-ventricAdar  opening  is  surrounded  by  a  fi- 
brous ring,  covered  by  the  lining  membrane  of  the  heart.  It  is 
the  opening  of  communication  between  the  right  auricle  and 
ventricle. 

The  opening-  of  the  i^iihnonary  artery  is  situated  close  to 
the  septum  ventriculorum,  on  the  left  side  of  the  right  ventri- 
cle, and  upon  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  heart. 

The  tricuspid  valves  are  three  triangular  folds  of  the  lining 
membrane,  strengthened  by  a  thin  layer  of  fibrous  tissue.  They 
are  connected  by  their  base  around  the  auriculo-ventricular 
opening  ;  and  by  their  sides  and  apices,  which  are  thickened, 
give  attachment  to  a  number  of  slender  tendinous  cords,  colled 
chorda3  tendineas.  The  diordcn  tendinem  are  the  tendons  of  the 
thick  muscular  columns  [coliwma,  carnecB)  which  stand  out 
from  the  walls  of  the  ventricle,  and  serve  as  muscles  to  the 
valves.  A  number  of  these  tendinous  cords  converge  to  a  sin- 
gle muscular  attachment.  The  tricuspid  valves  prevent  the 
regurgitation  of  blood  into  the  auricle  during  the  contraction  of 
the  ventricle,  and  they  are  prevented  from  being  themselves 
driven  back,  by  the  chorda)  tendinea3  and  their  muscular  attach- 
ments. 

This  connection  of  the  muscular  columns  of  the  heart  to  the 
valves,  has  caused  their  division  into  active  and  passive.  The 
active  valves  are  the  tricuspid  and  mitral ;  the  passive,  the 
mere  folds  of  lining  membrane,  viz.  the  semilunar,  Eustachian, 
and  coronary. 

From  the  remarkable  arrangement  of  the  valves,  it  follows, 
that  if  the  right  ventricle  be  over  distended,  the  thin  or  "yield- 
ing wall"  will  give  way,  and  carry  with  it  the  columns  of  the 
anterior  and  right  valves.  The  cords  connected  with  these 
columns  will  draw  down  the  edges  of  the  corresponding  valves, 
and  produce  an  opening  between  the  curtains,  through  which 
the  superabundant  blood  may  escape,  and  the  ventricle  be  reliev- 
ed from  over  pressure.  This  beautiful  mechanism  is  therefore 
adapted  to  fulfil  the  function  of  a  safety  valve. 

The  cohimncB  carnem  (fieshy  columns)  is  a  name  expressive 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  255 

of  the  appearance  of  the  internal  walls  of  the  ventricles,  which 
seem  (ormed  of  muscuhir  coUminSj'interlacino:  in  almost  every 
direction.  They  are  divided  nito  three  sets,  according  to  the 
manner  of  their  connection.  1.  The  greater  nnmber  are  at- 
tached by  the  whole  of  one  side,  and  merely  form  convexities 
into  the  cavity  of  the  ventricle.  2.  Others  are  connected  by 
both  extremities,  being  free  in  the  middle.  3.  A  few  (colum- 
nae  papillares)  are  attached  by  one  extremity  to  the  walls  of  the 
heart,  and  by  the  other  give  insertion  to  the  chordos  tendinee. 

The  semilunar  valves,  three  in  number,  are  situated  around 
the  commencement  of  the  pulmonary  artery,  being  formed  by  a 
folding  of  its  lining  membrane,  strengthened  by  a  thin  layer  of 
fibrous  tissue.  They  are  attached  by  their  convex  borders,  and 
free  by  the  concave  which  are  directed  upwards  in  the  course 
of  the  vessel,  so  that,  during  the  current  of  blood  along  the  ar- 
tery, they  are  pressed  against  the  sides  of  the  cylinder  ;  but  if 
any  attempt  at  regurgitation  ensue,  they  are  immediately  ex- 
panded,  and  effectually  close  the  entrance  of  the  tube.  The 
margins  of  the  valves  are  thicker  than  the  rest  of  their  extent, 
and  eacli  valve  presents  in  the  centre  of  this  margin  a  small 
fibro-cartilaginous  tubercle,  called  corpus  Araniii,  which  locks 
in  with  the  two  others  during  the  closure  of  the  valves,  and  se- 
cures tlie  triangular  space  that  would  otherwise  be  left  by  the 
approximation  of  three  semilunar  folds. 

Between  the  semilunar  valves  and  the  cylinder  of  the  artery 
are  three  pouches,  called  the  pulmonary  sinuses.  Similar  si- 
nuses are  situated  beneath  .the  valves  at  the  commencement  of 
the  aorta,  and  are  much  larger  and  more  capacious  than  those 
of  the  pulmonary  artery. 

.  The  pulmonary  artery  commences  by  a  scalloped  border, 
corresponding  with  the  three  valves,  which  are  attached  along 
its  edge.  It  is  connected  to  the  ventricle  by  muscular  fibres, 
and  by  the  lining  membrane  of  the  heart. 

The  left  auricle  is  somewhat  smaller  than  the  right;  of  a  cu- 
boid form,  and  situated  more  posteriorly.  Tlie  appendix  au- 
riculce  is  constricted  at  its  junction  with  the  auricle,  and  has  an 
aborescent  appearance  ;  it  is  directed  forwards  towards  the  root 
of  the  pulmonary  artery,  to  which  the  auriculae  of  both  sides  ap- 
pear to  converge. 

The  left  auricle  is  to  be  laid  open  by  an- shaped  incision,  the 
horizontal  section  being  n)ade  along  the  border  which  is  attach- 
ed to  tlx'  base  of  the  ventricle. 

It  presiMits  for  examination  five  openings,  and  the  muscular 
structure  of  the  appendix;  these  are — 

Four  pulmonary  veins, 
Auriculo- ventricular  opening, 
Musculi  pectinati. 


256  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  'piilmonary  veins,  two  from  the  right  and  two  from  ihe 
left  lung^,  open  into  the  corresponding  sides  of  the  auricle.  The 
two  left  pulmonary  veins  terminate  frequently  by  a  common 
opening. 

The  miricnlo-ventricular  oj^ening  is  the  aperture  of  commu- 
nication between  the  auricle  and  ventricle. 

The  7misculi  jyeciinati  are  fewer  in  number  than  in  the  right 
auricle,  and  are  situated  only  in  the  appendix  auricula3. 

Left  ventricle. — The  left  ventricle  is  to  be  opened  by  mak- 
ing an  incision  a  little  to  the  left  of  the  septum  ventriculorum, 
and  continuing  it  around  the  apex  of  the  heart,  to  the  auriculo- 
ventricular  opening  behind. 

The  left  ventricle  is  conical,  both  in  external  figure  and  in 
the  form  of  its  internal  cavity.  It  forms  the  apex  of  the  heart, 
by  projecting  beyond  the  right  ventricle,  while  the  latter  has 
the  advantage  in  length  towards  the  base.  Its  walls  are  about 
seven  lines  in  thickness,  those  of  the  right  ventricle  being  about 
two  lines  and  a  half. 

It  presents  for  examination  in  its  interior,  two  openings,  two 
valves,  and  the  tendinous  cords  and  muscular  columns ;  they 
may  be  thus  arranged : 

Auriculo-ventricular  opening, 
Aortic  opening. 

Mitral  valves. 
Semilunar  valves. 

Chordas  tendines, 
Columnoe  earner. 

The  auriculo-ventricular  ojtening  is  a  dense  fibrous  ring;, 
covered  by  the  lining  membrane  of  the  heart,  but  smaller  jn 
size  than  that  of  the  right  side. 

The  initral  valves  are  attached  around  the  auriculo-ventri- 
cular opening,  as  are  the  tricuspid  in  the  right  ventricle.  They 
are  thicker  than  the  tricuspid,  and  consist  of  only  two  segments, 
of  which  the  larger  is  placed  between  the  auriculo-ventricular 
opening  and  the  commencement  of  the  aorta,  and  acts  the  part 
of  a  valve  to  that  foramen,  during  the  filling  of  the  ventricle. 
The  difference  in  size  of  the  two  valves,  both  being  triangular, 
and  the  space  between  them,  has  given  rise  to  the  idea  of  a 
«' bishop's  mitre,"  after  which  they  are  named.  These  valves, 
like  the  tricuspid,  are  furnished  with  an  apparatus  of  tendinous 
cords,  chordoi  tendinea,  which  are  attached  to  two  very  large 
column'ce.  carnece. 

The  cobannm  carneoi  admit  of  the  same  arrangement  into 
three  kinds  as  on  the  right  side.     Those  which  are  free  by  one 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  257 

extremity,  the  columnae  papillares,  are  only  two  in  nunnber,  and 
much  larger  than  those  on  the  opposite  side. 

The  semiliDiar  valves  are  placed  around  the  commencement 
of  the  aorta,  like  those  of  the  pulmonary  artery;  they  are  simi- 
lar in  structure,  and  are  attached  to  the  scalloped  border  by 
which  the  aorta  is  connected  with  the  ventricle.  Tiie  tubercle 
in  the  centre  of  each  Ibid  is  larger  than  those  in  the  pulmonary 
valves,  and  it  was  these  that  Arantius  particularly  described  ; 
but  the  term  corpora  arantii  is  now  applied  indiscriminately  to 
both.  The  fossa  between  the  semilunar  valves  and  the  cylin- 
der of  the  artery  are  much  larger  tlian  those  of  the  pulmonary 
artery;  they  are  called  the  ^- sirms  aortici.^' 

STRUCTURE  OF  THE  HEART. 

The  arrangement  of  the  fibres  of  the  heart  has  been  made 
the  subject  of  careful  and  accurate  investigation. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness  of  description,  the  fibres  of  the  ven- 
tricles have  been  divided  into  three  layers — superficial,  middle, 
and  internal — all  of  which  are  disposed  in  a  spiral  direction 
around  the  cavities  of  the  ventricles.  The  mode  of  formation 
of  these  three  layers  will  be  best  understood  by  adopting  the 
plan  pursued  by  Mr.  Searle  in  tracing  the  course  of  the  fibres 
from  the  centre  of  the  heart  towards  its  periphery. 

The  left  surtace  of  the  septum  ventriculorum  is  formed  by  a 
broad  and  thick  layer  of  fibres,  which  proceed  backwards  m  a 
spiral  direction  around  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  left  ventricle, 
and  become  augmented  on  the  outer  side  of  that  ventricle,  by 
other  fibres  derived  from  the  bases  of  the  two  columnae  papil- 
lares. The  broad  and  thick  band  formed  by  the  fibres  from 
these  two  sources  curves  around  the  apex  and  lower  third  of 
the  left  ventricle,  to  the  anterior  border  of  the  septum,  where  it 
divides  into  two  bands — a  short  or  apicial  band,  and  a  long  or 
basial  band. 

The  short  or  apicial  band  is  increased  in  thickness  at  this 
point  by  receiving  a  layer  of  fibres  (derived  from  the  root  of  the 
aorta  and  carnoe  columneas)  upon  its  internal  surface,  from  the 
right  surface  of  the  septum  ventriculorum  ;  it  is  then  continued 
onwards  in  a  spiral  direction  from  left  to  right,  around  the  low- 
er third  of  the  anterior  surfoce,  and  the  middle  third  of  the  pos- 
terior surface  of  the  rio;ht  ventricle  to  the  posterior  border  of  the 
septum.  From  the  latter  point  the  short  band  is  prolonged 
around  the  posterior  and  outer  border  of  the  left  ventricle  to  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  base  of  that  ventricle,  and  is  inserted  in- 
to the  anterior  border  of  the  left  auriculo-ventricular  ring,  and 
the  anterior  part  of  the  root  of  the  aorta  and  pulmonary  artery. 

The  long  or  basial  band,  at  the  anterior  border  of  the  sep- 
tum, passes  directly  backwards  through  the  septum,  forming  its 


258  THE  THOMSONIAN 

middle  layer,  to  the  posterior  ventricular  groove,  where  it  be- 
comes joined  by  fibres  derived  from  the  root  of  the  pulmonary 
artery.  It  then  winds  spirally  around  the  middle  and  upper 
third  of  the  left  ventricle  to  the  anterior  border  of  the  septum, 
where  it  is  connected  by  means  of  its  internal  surface  with  the 
superior  fibres  dirived  from  the  aorta,  which  form  part  of  the 
right  wall  of  the  septum.  From  this  point  it  is  continued  around 
the  upper  third  of  the  anterior  and  posterior  surface  of  the  right 
ventricle  to  the  posterior  border  of  the  septum,  where  it  is  con- 
•nected  with  the  fibres  constituting  the  right  surface  of  the  sep- 
tum ventriculorum.  At  the  latter  point  the  fibres  of  this  band 
begin  to  be  twisted  upon  themselves,  like  the  strands  of  a  rope, 
the  direction  of  the  twist  beins:  from  below  upwards.  This  ar- 
rangement of  fibres  is  called  by  Mr.  Searle  "the  rope  ;"'  it  is  con- 
tinued spirally  upwards,  forming  the  brim  of  the  left  ventricle, 
to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  base  of  that  ventricle,  where  the 
twisting  of  the  fibres  ceases.  The  long  band  then  curves  in- 
wards towards  the  septum,  and  spreads  out  upon  the  left  sur- 
face of  the  septum  into  the  broad  and  thick  layer  of  fibres  with 
which  this  description  commenced. 

The  most  inferior  of  the  fibres  of  the  left  surface  of  the  sep- 
tum ventriculorum,  after  winding  spirally  around  the  internal 
surface  of  the  apex  of  the  left  ventricle,  so  as  to  close  its  extre- 
mity, form  a  small  fasciculus,  which  is  excluded  from  the  inte- 
rior of  the  ventricle,  and  expands  in  a  radiated  manner  over  the 
surface  of  the  lieart,  constituting  its  superficial  layer  of  fibres. 
The  direction  of  these  fibres  is,  for  the  most  part,  oblique,  pass- 
ing from  left  to  right  on  the  anterior,  and  from  right  to  left  on 
the  posterior  surface  of  the  heart,  becoming  more  longitudinal 
near  its  base,  and  terminating  by  being  inserted  into  the  fibrous 
rings  of  the  auriculo-ventricular  openings,  and  of  the  pulmonary 
artery  and  aorta.  Over  the  right  ventricle  the  superticial  fibres 
are  increased  in  number  by  the  addition  of  accessory  fibres 
from  the  right  surface  of  the  septum,  which  pierce  the  middle 
layer,  and  take  the  same  direction  with  the  superficial  fibres 
from  the  apex  of  the  left  ventricle,  and  of  other  accessory  fibres 
from  the  surface  of  both  ventricles. 

From  this  description  it  will  be  perceived,  that  the  svperjicial 
laijer  of  fibres  is  very  scanty,  and  is  pretty  equally  distributed 
over  the  surface  of  both  ventricles.  The  middle  layer  of  both 
.  ventricles  is  formed  by  the  two  bands,  short  and  long.  But  the 
internal  layer  of  the  two  ventricles  is  very  difterently  consti- 
tuted :  that  of  the  left  is  formed  by  the  spiral  expansion  of  the 
fibres  of  the  rope,  and  of  the  two  columnac  piapillares;  that  of 
the  right  remains  to  be  described.  The  septum  ventriculorum 
also  consists  of  three  layers — a  left  layer ^  the  radiated  expan- 
sion of  the  rope  and  carnese  columnse  ;    a  middle  layer,  the 


»  MATERIA  MEDICA.  259 

long  band  ;  and  a  right  layer.,  belonging  to  the  proper  wall  of 
the  right  ventricle,  and  continuous  botli  in  front  and  behind 
with  the  long  band,  and  in  front  also  with  the  short  band,  and 
with  the  superficial  layer  of  the  right  ventricle. 

The  internal  layer  of  the  right  ventricle  is  formed  by  fasci- 
culi of  fibres  which  arise  from  the  right  segment  of  the  root  of 
the  aorta,  from  the  entire  circumference  of  the  root  of  the  pul- 
monary artery,  and  from  the  bases  of  the  columuce  papillares. 
The  fibres  from  the  root  of  the  aorta,  associated  with  some  from 
the  carnea3  columnas,  constitute  a  layer  which  passes  obliquely 
forwards  upon  the  right  side  of  the  septum.  The  superior  fi- 
bres coming  directly  from  tlie  aorta  join  the  internal  surf;\ce  of 
the  long  band  at  the  anterior  border  of  the  septum,  while  the 
lower  two  thirds  of  the  layer  aie  continuous  with  the  internal 
surface  of  the  short  band,  some  of  its  fibres  piercing  that  band 
to  augment  the  number  of  superficial  fibres.  The  fibres  deriv- 
ed from  the  root  of  the  pulmonary  artery,  conjoined  with  those 
from  the  base  of  one  of  the  columns  papillares,  curve  forwards 
from  their  origin,  and  wind  obliquely  downwards  and  back- 
wards around  the  internal  surface  of  the  wall  of  the  ventricle 
to  the  posterior  border  of  the  septum,  where  they  become  con- 
tinuous with  the  long  band,  directly  that  it  has  passed  back- 
wards through  the  septum. 

Fibres  of  the  auricles. — The  fibres  of  the  auricles  are  dis- 
posed in  two  layers,  external  and  internal.  The  internal  layer 
is  formed  of  fasciculi  which  arise  from  the  fibrous  rings  of  the 
auriculo-ventricular  openings,  and  proceed  upwards,  to  enlace 
with  each  other,  and  constitute  the  appendices  auricularum. 
These  fasciculi  are  parallel  in  their  arrangement,  and  in  the 
appendices  form  projections,  and  give  rise  to  the  appearance 
which  is  denominated  musculi  pectinati.  In  their  course  they 
give  off  branches,  which  connect  adjoining  fasciculi,  and  form 
a  columnar  interlacement  between  them. 

External  layer. — The  fibres  of  the  right  auricle  having 
completed  the  appendix,  wind  from  left  to  right  around  the  right 
border  of  this  auricle,  and  along  its  anterior  aspect,  beneath  the 
appendix,  to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  septum.  From  the  sep- 
tum they  are  continued  to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  left  auri- 
cle, where  they  separate  into  three  bands — superior,  anterior, 
and  posterior.  'l^hQ  superior  hand  proceeds  onwards  to  the 
appendix,  and  encircles  the  apex  of  the  auricle.  The  anterior 
hand  passes  to  the  left,  beneath  the  appendix,  and  winds  as  a 
broad  layer  completely  around  the  base  of  the  auricle,  and 
through  the  septum  to  the  root  of  the  aorta,  to  which  it  is  partly- 
attached,  and  from  this  point  is  continued  onwards  to  the  ap- 
pendix, where  its  fibres  terminate  by  interlacino  with  the  mus- 
culi pectinati.     The  posterior  band  crosses  the  left  auricle  ob- 


260  THE    THOMSONIAN 

liqiiely  to  its  posterior  part,  and  winds  from  left  to  right  around 
its  base,  encircling:  the  openins^s  of  the  pulmonary  veins ;  some 
of  its  fibres  are  lost  upon  the  surface  of  the  auricle,  others  are 
continued  onwards  to  the  base  of  the  aorta;  and  a  third  set, 
forming  a  small  band,  is  prolonged  along  the  anteVior  edge  of 
the  appendix  to  its  apex,  where  it  is  continuous  with  the  supe- 
rior band.  The  septum  anricularum  has  four  sets  of  fibres  en- 
tering into  its  formation  : — 1.  The  fibres  arising  from  the  auri- 
culo-vetricular  rings  at  each  side;  2.  Fibres  arising  from  the 
root  of  the  aorta,  which  pass  upwards  to  the  transverse  band, 
and  to  the  root  of  tile  superior  cava  ;  3.  Those  fibres  of  the  an- 
terior band  that  pass  through  tlie  lower  part  of  the  septum  in 
their  course  around  the  left  auricle;  and,  4.  A  slender  fascicu- 
lus, which  crosses  through  the  septum  from  the  posterior  part 
of  the  right  auriculo-venlricular  ring  to  the  left  auricle. 

It  wiU  be  remarked  from  this  description,  that  the  left  auricle 
is  considerably  thicker  and  more  muscular  than  the  right. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  arteries  supplying  the  heart  are 
the  anterior  and  posterior  coronary. 

The  veins  accompany  the  arteries,  and  empty  themselves  by 
the  common  coronary  vein  into  the  right  auricle.  The  lym- 
phatics terminate  in  the  glands  about  the  root  of  the  heart. 
The  jierves  of  the  heart  are  derived  from  the  cardiac  plexuses, 
which  are  formed  by  communicating  filaments  from  the  sym- 
pathetic and  pneumogastric. 

ORGANS  OF  RESPIRATION  AND  VOICE. 

The  organs  of  respiration  are  the  two  lungs,  with  their  air- 
tube,  the  trachea,  to  the  upper  part  of  which  is  adapted  an  ap- 
paratus of  cartilages,  constituting  the  organ  of  voice,  or  larynx. 

LARYNX. 

The  larynx  is  situated  at  the  fore  part  of  the  neck,  between 
the  trachea  and  the  base  of  the  tongue.  It  is  composed  of  car- 
tilages, ligamc7its.  viziscles,  vessels,  and  nerves,  and  mucus 
membrane. 

The  cartilages  are — the 

Thyroid, 
Cricoid, 

Two  Arytenoid, 
Epiglottis. 
The  thyroid  is  the  largest  cartilage  of  the  larynx;    it  con- 
sists of  two  lateral  portions,  or  alee,  which  meet  at  an  acute  an- 
gle in  front,  and  form  the  projection  which  is  known  by  the 
name  o( pomuin  Adami.     Where  the  pomum  Adami  is  promi- 
nent, a  bursa  mucosa  is  often  found  between  it  and  the  skin. 
Each  ala  is  quadrilateral,  and  forms  a  rounded  border  posteri- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  261 

orly,  which  terminates  above  in  the  superior  cornu,  and  below 
in  the  inferior  cornu.  Upon  tlie  side  of  the  ala  is  an  oblique 
line,  into  which  the  sterno-thyroid  muscle  is  inserted,  and  from 
which  the  thyro-hyoide  takes  its  origin.  Behind  this  is  a  ver- 
tical line,  which  gives  origin  to  the  inferior  constrictor  muscle. 
In  the  receding  angle  formed  by  the  meeting  of  the  two  alae 
upon  the  inner  side  of  the  cartilage,  and  near  to  its  lower  bor- 
der, are  attached  the  epiglottis,  the  chordtx;  vocales,  the  thyro- 
arytenoid, and  thyro-epiglottidean  muscles. 

The  cricoid  is  a  ring  of  cartilage,  narrow  in  front  and  broad 
behind,  where  it  is  surmounted  by  tico  rounded  surfaces,  which 
articulate  with  the  arytenoid  cartilages.  Upon  the  middle  line, 
posteriorly,  is  a  vertical  ridge  which  gives'  attachment  to  the 
GBSophagus,  and  on  each  side  of  the  ridge  are  the  depressions 
which  lodge  the  crico-arytenoidei  postici  muscles.  On  either 
side  of  the  ring  is  a  glenoid  cavity,  which  articulates  with  the 
inferior  cornu  of  the  thyroid  cartilage. 

The  arytenoid  cartilages,  two  in  number,  are  triangular  in 
form.  They  are  broad  below,  where  they  articulate  with  the 
upper  border  of  the  cricoid,  and  give  attachment  to  the  crico- 
arytenoidei  postici,  crico-arytenoidei  laterales,  and  thyro-aryte- 
noidei  muscles,  and  chordas  vocales;  and  pointed  above,  where 
they  articulate  with  two  little  curved  cartilages,  called  corni- 
cula  laryngis  (capitula  laryngis).  On  the  posterior  surface 
they  are  concave,  and  lodge  the  arytenoideus  muscle. 

The  epiglottis  is  a  fibro-cartilage  of  a  yellowish  color,  stnd- 
ed  with  a  small  number  of  mucus  glands,  which  are  lodo^cd  in 
shallow  pits  upon  its  surface.  It  is  shaped  like  a  cordate  leaf, 
and  is  placed  immediately  in  front  of  the  opening  of  the  larynx, 
which  it  closes  completely  when  the  larynx  is  drawn  up  be- 
neath the  base  of  the  tongue.  It  is  attached  by  its  point  to  the 
receding  angle,  between  the  two  alas  of  the  thyroid  cartilage. 

Two  small  cartilaginous  tubercles  (cuneiform)  are  often  found 
in  the  folds  of  the  mucous  membrane  which  bound  the  openino- 
of  the  larynx  laterally. 

Ligaments. — The  ligaments  of  the  larynx  are  numerous, 
and  may  be  arranged  into  four  groups:  I.  Those  that  articu- 
late the  thyroid  with  the  os  hyoides.  2.  Those  which  connect 
it  with  the  cricoid.  3.  Ligaments  of  the  arytenoid  cartilages. 
4.  Ligaments  of  the  epiglottis. 

1.  The  ligaments  which  connect  the  thyroid  cartilage  with 
the  OS  hyoides  are  three  in  number: 

The  two  thyro-hyoidean  ligameiits  pass  between  the  supe- 


262  THE    THOMSONIAN 

rior  cornua  of  the  thyroid  and  the  extremities  of  the  greater 
coriiua  of  the  os  hyoides;  a  sesamoid  bone  is  found  in  each. 

The  thyro-hyoidean  membrane  is  a  broad  membranous  lay- 
er, occupying  the  entire  space  between  the  thyroid  cartilage 
and  OS  hyoides.  It  is  pierced  by  the  superior  laryngeal  nerve 
and  artery. 

2.  The  ligaments  connecting  the  thyroid  to  the  cricoid  car- 
tilage are  also  three  in  number: 

Two  capsular  liga?ne}its,  with  their  synovial  membranes, 
which  form  the  articulation  between  the  inferior  cornua  of  the 
thyroid  and  the  sides  of  the  cricoid,  and  the  crico-thyroidean 
membrane^  throusfh  which  the  operation  of  laryngotomy  is  per- 
formed. The  latter  is  generally  crossed  by  a  small  artery,  the 
inferior  laryngeal. 

3.  The  ligaments  of  the  arytenoid  cartilages  are  four  in  num- 
ber: 

Two  capsular  ligaments  and  synovial  membranes,  which 
articulate  the  arytenoid  cartilages  with  the  cricoid;  and  the 
thyro-arytenoid  ligaments^  or  chorda:,  vocales^  which  pass 
backwards  from  the  receding  angle  of  the  thyroid  cartilage, 
near  to  its  lower  border,  to  be  inserted  into  the  bases  of  the  ary- 
tenoid cartilages.  The  space  between  these  two  ligaments  is 
the  glottis,  or  rima  glotiidis. 

4.  The  ligaments  of  the  epiglottis  are  live  in  number: 

1.  Three  folds  of  mucous  membrane,  one  at  the  middle,  and 
one  on  each  side,  called  fra.na  epiglottidis,  which  hold  the 
epiglottis  back  to  the  tongue.  2.  Epiglotto-hyoideaji  liga- 
m,ent,  which  connects  the  epiglottis  to  the  posterior  surface  of 
the  OS  hyoides.  3.  The  ligament  which  attaches  the  epi2:lottis 
to  the  receding  angle  of  the  thyroid  cartilage. 

l^he  muscles  o{  the  larynx  are  eight  in  number:  the  five 
larger  are  the  muscles  of  the  chordae  vocales  and  rima  glottidis ; 
the  three  smaller  are  muscles  of  the  epiglottis. 

The  five  muscles  of  the  chordas  vocales  and  rima  glottidis 
are — the 

Crico-thyroid, 

Crico-arytenoideus  posticus, 
Crico-arytenoideus  lateralis, 
Thyro  arytenoideus, 
Arytenoideus. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  263 

NO.  14. — POSTERIOR*  AND  SIDEt  VIEWS  OF  THE  LARYNX. 


The  crico-ihyroid  muscle  arises  from  the  anterior  surface  of 
the  cricoid  cartilage,  and  is  inserted  into  the  lower  and  inner 
border  of  the  thyroid. 

The  cricoaiytenoideus  postiats  arises  from  the  depression 
on  the  posterior  surface  of  tliecroicoid  cartilage,  and  is  niserted 
into  the  outer  angle  of  the  base  of  the  arytenoid. 

The  crico-arytenoidens  lateralis  arises  from  the  upper  bor- 
der of  the  side  of  the  cricoid,  and  is  inserted  into  the  outer  an- 
gle of  the  base  of  the  arytenoid  cartilage. 

The  thyro-arytenoideiis  arises  from  the  receding  angle  of 
the  thyroid  cartilage,  close  to  the  outer  side  of  the  chorda  voca- 
lis,  and  passes  backwards  parallel  with  the  chord,  to  be  inserted 
into  the  base  of  the  arytenoid  cartilage. 

The  aryf.enoideus  muscle  occupies  the  posterior  concave  sur- 
face of  the  arytenoid  cartilages,  between  which  it  is  stretched. 
It  consists  of  three  planes  of  transverse  and  oblique  fibres ; 
hence  it  was  formerly  considered  as  several  muscles,  under  the 
names  oi  transversi  and  obUqvi.. 

The  three  muscles  of  the  epiglottis  are — the 

Thyro-epiglottideus, 
Aryteno-epiglottideus  superior, 
Aryteno-epiglottideus  inferior  (Hilton's  muscle). 

*  1.  The  thyroid  cartilage.  2.  One  of  its  ascending  cornua.  3.  One  of 
the  descendina;  cornua.  4.  The  cricoid  cartilage.  5,  5.  The  arytenoid  carti- 
lages. 6.  The  arytenoideus  muscle,  consisting  of  oblique  and  transverse  fas- 
ciculi.   7.  The  crico-arytcnoidei  postici  muscles.     8.  The  epiglottis. 

t  [One  ala  of  the  thyroid  cartilage  has  been  removed.]  1.  The  remaining 
ala  of  the  thyroid  cartilage.  2.  One  of  the  arytenoid  cartilages.  3.  One  of 
the  cornicula  laryngis.  4.  The  cricoid  cartilage.  5.  The  crico-arytenoideus 
posticus  muscle.  G.  The  crico-arytenoideus  lateralis.  7.  The  thyro-aryte- 
noideus.  8.  The  crico-thyroidean  membrane.  9.  One  half  of  the  epiglottis. 
10.  The  upper  part  of  the  trachea. 


264  THE  THOMSOMAN. 

The  thyro-epiglottideus  appears  to  be  formed  by  the  upper 
fibres  of  the  tliyro-arytenoideus  muscle  ;  tliey  spread  out  upon 
the  external  surface  of  the  sacculus  laryngis,  on  which  they  are 
lost;  a  few  of  the  anterior  fibres  being  continued  onwards  to 
the  side  of  the  epiglottis. 

The  aryteno-epiglottidevs  superior  consists  of  a  few  scat- 
tered fibres,  which  pass  forwards  in  the  fold  of  mucus  mem- 
brane forming  the  latteral  boundary  of  the  entrance  into  the  la- 
rynx from  the  apex  of  the  arytenoid  cartilage  to  the  side  of  the 
epiglottis. 

The  aryteno-epiglottidejis  inferior. — This  muscle  was  dis- 
covered by  Mr.  Hilton,  and  is  very  important  in  relation  to  the 
sacculus  laryngis,  willi  which  it  is  closely  connected.  It  may 
be  found  by  raising  the  mucous  membrane  immediately  above 
the  ventricle  of  the  larynx.  It  arises  by  a  narrow  and  fibrous 
origin  from  the  arytenoid  cartilage,  just  above  the  attachment 
of  the  chorda  vocalis;  and  passing  forwards,  and  a  little  up- 
wards, expands  over  the  upper  half,  or  two  thirds  of  the  saccu- 
lus larygnis,  and  is  inserted  by  a  broad  attachment  into  the  side 
of  the  epiglottis. 

Actions. — The  crico-thyroid  and  arytenoid  muscles  are  con- 
tractors of  the  rima  giottidis  ;  the  crico-arytenoideus  posticus 
and  lateralis,  and  the  thyro-arytenoideus,  are  dilators. 

The  crico-thyroid  muscles  elongate,  and  thereby  bring  toge- 
ther the  chordse  vocales,  by  drawing  the  thyroid  cartilage  down- 
wards and  forwards ;  their  posterior  attachment  at  the  aryte- 
noid cartilages  being  fixed.  The  arytenoid  muscle  approxi- 
mates the  arytenoid  cartilages,  and  consequently  the  chordge 
vocales,  directly.  The  crico-thyroidei  postici  being  attached  to 
the  outer  angles  of  the  bases  of  the  arytenoid  carti leges,  draw 
them  from  each  other,  and  stretch  the  chorda3  vocales.  The 
crico-arytenoidei  laterales  draw  the  arytenoid  cartilages  from 
each  other,  but  relax  the  chordas  vocales  ;  and  tiie  thyro-aryte- 
noidei  increase  the  width  of  the  glottis,  by  directly  relaxing  the 
chordos  vocales. 

The  thyro-epiglottider;s  acts  principally  by  compressing  the 
glands  of  the  sacculus  laryngis  and  the  sac  itself:  by  its  attach- 
ment to  the  epiglottis  it  v/ould  act  feebly  upon  that  valve.  The 
aryteno-epiglottideus  superior  serves  to  keep  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  sides  of  tlie  opening  of  the  glottis  tense,  when  the 
larynx  is  drawn  upwards,  and  the  opening  clo.sed  by  the  epi- 
glottis. Of  the  aryteno-epiglottideus,  the  functions  appear  to 
be,  to  compress  the  subjacent  glands  which  open  into  the 
pouch  ;  to  diminish  the  capacity  of  that  cavity,  and  change 
its  form ;  and  to  approximate  the  epiglottis  and  the  arytenoid 
cartilage. 

Mucous  membrane. — The  larynx  is  lined  by  the  mucous 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  266 

membrane,  which  is  continued  from  the  mouth  and  pharynx, 
and  prolonjred  onwards  throucjh  the  trachea  and  bronchi  to  the 
bronchial  cells.  The  chordas  vocales  form  two  horizontal  pro- 
jections of  the  mncons  membrane,  and  constitute  the  lateral 
boundaries  of  the  ^/c»//w,  ovrimaglotlidis.  Immediately  above 
the  horizontal  projection  of  the  chorda  vocalis,  at  each  side,  is  a 
depressed  fossa,  the  ventricle  of  the  larynx.  The  superior 
boundary  of  the  ventricle  is  an  arched  border  of  mucous  mem- 
brane, which  is  very  incorrectly  termed  the  superior  chorda 
vocalis.  If  the  rounded  extremity  of  a  probe  be  introduced  in- 
to the  ventricle  of  the  larynx,  and  then  directed  upwards,  it  will 
enter  a  considerable  pouch,  which  has  been  recently  described 
by  Mr.  Hilton  as  the  sacculus  laryngis.  From  the  ventricle 
of  the  larynx  the  sacculus  is  continued  upwards,  nearly  as  high 
as  the  upper  border  of  the  thyroid  cartilage,  and  sometimes  be- 
yond it.  When  dissected  from  the  interior  of  the  larynx,  it  is 
found  covered  by  the  aryteno-epiglottideus  muscle,  and  a 
fibrous  membrane,  which  is  attached  to  the  superior  chorda  vo- 
calis below  ;  to  the  epiglottis  in  front ;  and  to  the  upper  border 
of  the  thyroid  cartilage  above.  If  examined  from  the  exterior 
of  the  larynx,  it  will  be  seen  to  be  covered  by  the  thyro-epiglot- 
tideus  muscle.  On  the  surface  of  its  mucous  membrane  are  the 
openings  of  sixty  or  seventy  small  follicular  glands,  which  are 
situated  in  the  sub-mucous  tissue,  and  give  its  external  surface 
a  rough  and  ill-dissected  ap[)earance.  This  mucous  secretion 
is  intended  for  the  lubrication  of  the  chordee  vocales,  and  is  di- 
rected upon  them  by  two  small  valvular  folds  of  the  mucous 
membrane,  which  are  situated  at  the  entrance  of  the  sacculus. 

The  entrance  of  the  larynx-  is  formed  by  two  folds  of  mu- 
cous membrane,  stretched  between  the  apices  of  the  arytenoid 
cartilages  and  the  sides  of  the  epiglottis.  The  arytenoid  glands 
and  superior  aryteno-epiglottidean  muscles  are  situated  within 
these  folds. 

The  glands  of  the  larynx  are — 1.  The  e/)i^/oi;i!tc— most  im- 
properly named — for  it  consists  merely  of  a  mass  of  fot,  situat- 
ed between  the  convexity  of  the  epiglottis  and  the  thyro-hyoid 
membrane.  2.  The  arytenoid  glands^  some  small  granules 
found  in  the  folds  of  mucous  membrane  near  the  apex  of  the 
arytenoid  cartilage. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  ar^erfe^  of  the  larynx  are  derived 
from  the  superior  and  inferior  thyroid.  The  Jierves  are  the  su- 
perior laryngeal  and  recurrent  laryngeal ;  both  branches  of  the 
pneumogastric.  The  two  nerves  communicate  with  each  oth- 
er freely;  but  the  superior  laryngeal  is  distributed  principally 
to  the  mucous  membrane  at  the  entrance  of  the  larynx;  the  re- 
current, to  the  muscles. 

In  children,  and  in  the  female,  the  larynx  is  less  developed 

18 


266  THE    THOMSONIAN 

than  in  the  adult  male ;  the  thyroid  cartilage  forms  a  more  ob- 
tuse angle  and  is  less  firm :  in  the  male  the  angle  is  acute,  and 
the  cartilages  often  converted  into  hone. 

TBE  TRACHEA. 

The  trachea  extends  from  opposite  the  fifth  cervical  verte- 
bra to  opposite  tlie  third  dorsal,  where  it  divides  into  the  two 
bronchi.  The  right  bronchus,  larger  than  the  lelt,  passes  oft" 
at  nearly  right  angles,  to  the  upper  part  of  the  corresponding 
lung.  The  left  descends  obliquely,  and  passes  beneath  the  arch 
of  the  aorta,  to  the  left  lutJg. 

The  trachea  is  composed  of — 

Fibro-cartilaginous  rings, 
Fibrous  membrane, 
Mucous  membrane, 
Lotiofitudinal  elastic  fibres, 
Muscular  fibres, 
Glands. 
The  fihrocartilnrrinous  rings  are  from  fifteen  to  twenty  in 
number,  and  extend  for  two  tlurds  around  the  cylinder  of  the 
trachea.     'J'hey  are  deficient  at  the  posterior  part,  where  the 
tube  is  completed  by  fibrous  membrane.     The  last  ring  has 
usually  a  triano:ular  form  in  front.     The  rings  are  connected 
to  each  other   by  a  membrane  of  yellow  elastic  Jihrovs  tissue, 
which  in  the  space  between  the  extremities  of  the  cartilages, 
posteriorly,  forms  a  distinct  layer. 

The  longitudinal  elastic  fibres  are  situated  immediately  be- 
neath the  mucous  membrane,  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  tra- 
chea, and  enclose  the  entire  cylinder  of  the  bronchial  tubes,  to 
their  ultimate  terminations. 

The  fmiscular  fibres  form  a  thin  layer,  extending  transverse- 
ly betw^een  the  extremities  of  the  cartilages.  On  the  posterior 
surface  they  are  covered  by  a  ccllulo-fibrous  lamella,  m  which 
are  lodged  the  tracheal  glands.  These  are  small  flattened 
ovoid  bodies,  situated  in  a  great  number  between  the  fibrous 
and  muscular  layers  of  the  membranous  portion  of  the  trachea, 
and  also  between  the  two  layers  of  elastic  fibrous  tissue  con- 
necting the  rings.  They  pour  their  secretion  upon  the  mucous 
membrane. 

Thyroid  gland. — The  thyroid  gland  is  one  of  those  organs 
which  it  is  found  extremely  difficult  lo  classify,  from  the  ab- 
sence of  any  positive  knowledge  with  regard  to  its  function.  It 
is  situated  upon  the  trachea,  and  in  an  anatomical  arrangement 
should  therefore  be  considered  in  this  place,  althousfh  bearins: 
no  part  in  the  function  ot  respiration. 

This  gland  consists  of  two  lobes,  which  are  placed  one  on 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  267 

each  side  of  the  trachea,  and  are  connected  with  each  other  by 
means  of  an  isthmus,  which  crosses  its  upper  rings.  There  is 
considerable  variety  in  the  situation  and  breadth  of  this  isth- 
mus ;  which  should  be  recollected  in  the  performance  of  ope- 
rations upon  the  trachea.  In  structure  it  appears  to  be  com- 
posed of  a  dense  cellular  parenchyma,  enclosuig  a  great  num- 
ber of  vessels.  The  gland  is  larger  in  young  subjects,  and  in 
females,  than  in  the  adult  and  males.  It  is  the  seat  of  an  en- 
largement called  broncliocele,  goitre,  or  the  Derbyshire  neck. 

A  muscle  is  occasionally  found  connected  with  its  upper  bor- 
der or  with  its  isthmus;  and  attached,  superiorly,  to  the  body 
of  the  OS  hyoides,  or  the  thyroid  cartilage.  It  was  named  by 
Soemmering  the  levator  glandnla:.  thyroidcB. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — It  is  abundantly  supplied  with  blood 
by  the  superior  and  inferior  thyroid  arteries.  Sometimes  an 
additional  artery  is  derived  from  the  arteria  innominata,  and 
ascends  upon  the  front  of  the  trachea,  to  be  distributed  to  the 
gland.  The  wound  of  this  vessel  in  tracheotomy  might  be  fa- 
tal to  the  patient.  The  nerves  are  derived  from  the  superior 
laryngeal  and  sympathetic. 

THE  LUNGS. 

The  lungs  are  two  conical  organs,  situated  one  on  each  side 
of  the  chest,  embracing  the  heart,  and  separated  from  each  oth- 
er by  a  membranous  partition,  the  mediastinum.  On  the  ex- 
ternal or  thoracic  side  they  are  convex  and  correspond  with  the 
form  of  the  cavity  of  the  chest ;  internally  they  are  concave,  to 
receive  the  convexity  of  the  heart.  Superiorly,  they  terminate 
in  a  tapering  cone,  which  extends  above  the  level  of  the  first 
rib;  and  inferiorly  they  are  broad  and  concave,  and  rest  upon 
the  convex  surface  of  the  diaphragm.  Their  posterior  border 
is  rounded  and  broad,  the  anterior  sharp  and  marked  by  one  or 
two  deep  fissures,  and  the  inferior  which  surrounds  the  base  is 
also  sharp. 

The  color  of  the  lungs  is  pinkish  grey,  mottled,  and  various- 
ly marked  with  black.  The  surface  is  figured  with  irregularly 
quadrilateral  and  pentagonal  outlines,  which  represent  the  lo- 
bules of  the  organ,  and  the  area  of  each  of  these  quadrilateral 
and  pentagonal  spaces  is  crossed  by  lighter  lines. 

Each  lung  is  divided  into  two  lobes,  by  a  long  and  deep  fis- 
sure, which  extends  from  the  posterior  surface  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  organ,  downwards  and  forwards  to  near  the  anterior  an- 
gle of  its  base. 

In  the  right  lung  the  upper  lobe  is  subdivided  by  a  second 
fissure,  which  extends  obliquely  forwards  from  the  middle  of 
the  preceding  to  the  anterior  border  of  the  organ,  and  marks 
off  a  small  triangular  lobe. 


268  THE  THOMSONIAN 

The  right  lung'  is  larger  than  the  left,  in  consequence  of  the 
inclination  of  the  heart  to  the  left  side.  It  is  also  shorter,  from 
the  great  convexity  of  the  liver,  which  presses  the  diaphragm 
upwards  upon  the  right  side  of  the  chest  considerably  above  the 
level  of  the  left.     It  has  three  lobes. 

The  left  lung  is  smaller,  has  but  two  lobes,  but  is  longer  than 
the  right. 

Each  lung  is  retained  in  its  place  by  its  root,  which  is  form- 
ed by  the  pulmonary  artery,  pulmonary  veins,  and  bronchial 
tubes,  together  with  the  bronchial  vessels  and  pulmonary  plex- 
uses of  nerves.  The  larire  vessels  of  the  root  of  each  lun2;  are 
arranged  in  a  similar  order,  from  before  backwards,  on  both 
sides,  viz : — 

Pulmonary  veins, 
Pulmonary  artery, 
Bronchus. 

From  above,  downwards,  on  the  right  side,  this  order  is  ex- 
actly reversed  ;    but  on  the  left  side  the  bronchus  has  to  stoop 
beneath  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  which  alters  its  position  to  the 
vessels.     They  are  thus  disposed  on  the  two  sides  : — 
Ri^ht.  Left. 

Bronchus,  .  Artery, 

Artery,  Bronchus, 

Veins.  Veins. 

Structure. — The  lungs  are  composed  of  the  ramifications  of 
the  bronchial  tubes  which  terminate  in  bronchial  cells  (air  cells) 
of  the  ramifications  of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  veins,  bron- 
chial arteries  and  veins,  lymphatics  and  nerves.  The  whole 
of  these  structures  being  held  together  by  cellular  tissue,  which 
constitutes  their  parenchyma. 

Bronchial  tubes. — The  two  bronchi  proceed  from  the  bifur- 
cation of  the  trachea  to  their  corresponding  lungs.  The  right 
takes  its  course  nearly  at  right  angles  with  the  trachea,  and  en- 
ters the  upper  part  of  the  right  lung,  while  the  left,  longer  and 
smaller  than  the  right,  passes  obliquely  beneath  the  arch  of  the 
aorta,  and  enters  the  lung  at  about  the  middle  of  its  root.  Up- 
on entering  the  lungs  they  divide  into  two  branches,  and  each 
of  these  divides  and  subdivides  dichotomously  to  their  ultimate 
termination  in  small  dilated  sacs,  the  bronchial  or  pulmonary 
cells. 

The  fibro-cartilaginous  rings  which  are  observed  in  the  tra- 
chea become  incomplete  and  irregular  in  shape  in  the  bronchi, 
and  in  the  smaller  bronchial  tubes  are  lost  altogether.  At  the 
termination  of  these  tubes  the  fibrous  and  muscular  coats  be- 
bome  extremely  thin,  and  are  probably  continued  upon  the  li- 
ninof  mucous  membrane  of  the  air  cells. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  269 

The  fmlmonary  artery^  conveying  the  dark  and  impure  ve- 
nous blood  to  the  lungs,  terminates  in  capillary  vessels,  which 
form  a  minute  net-work  upon  the  parietes  of  the  bronchial 
cells,  and  then  converge,  to  form  the  pulmonary  veins  by  which 
the  arterial  blood,  purified  in  its  passage  through  the  capillaries, 
is  returned  to  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart. 

The  bronchial  arteries,  branches  of  the  thoracic  aorta,  rami- 
fy upon  the  bronchial  tubes  and  m  the  tissue  of  the  lungs,  and 
supply  them  with  niitrilion,  while  the  venous  blood  is  returned 
by  the  bronchial  veins  to  the  vena  azygos. 

The  lymphatics,  commencing  upon  the  surface  and  in  the 
substance  of  the  lungs,  terminate  in  the  bronchial  glands.  These 
glands,  very  numerous  aud  often  of  large  size,  are  placed  at  the 
roots  of  the  lungs,  .around  the  bronchi,  and  at  the  bifurcation  of 
the  trachea.  In  early  life,  they  resemble  lymphatic  glands  in 
other  situations;  but  in  old  age,  and  often  in  the  adult,  they 
are  quite  black,  and  filled  with  carbonaceous  matter,  and  occa- 
sionally with  calcareous  deposits. 

The  nerves  are  derived  from  the  pneumogastric  and  sympa- 
thetic. They  form  two  plexuses — anterior  jndmonary  plexus 
situated  upon  the  front  of  the  root  of  the  lungs,  and  composed 
chiefly  of  filaments  from  the  great  cardiac  plexus  ;  and  poste- 
rior pulmonary  plexus,  on  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  root  of 
the  lungs,  composed  principally  of  branches  from  the  pneumo- 
gastric. The  branches  from  these  plexuses  follow  the  course 
of  the  bronchial  tubes,  and  are  distributed  to  the  bronchial 
cells. 

PLEURA. 

Each  lung  is  enclosed,  and  its  structure  maintained,  by  a  se- 
rous membrane,  the  pleura,  which  invests  it  as  far  as  the  root, 
and  is  thence  reflected  upon  the  parietes  of  the  chest.  That  por- 
tion of  the  membrane  which  is  in  relation  with  the  lungf  is  call- 

•  •  • 

ed  pleura  pulmonalis,  and  that  in  contact  with  the  parietes, 

pleura  costalis.  The  reflected  portion,  besides  forming  the  in- 
ternal lining  to  the  ribs  and  intercostal  muscles,  also  covers  the 
diaphragm  and  the  thoracic  surface  of  the  vessels  at  the  root  of 
the  neck. 

The  pleura  must  be  dissected  from  off"  the  root  of  the  lung, 
to  see  the  vessels  by  which  it  is  formed,  and  the  pulmonary 
plexuses. 

MEDIASTINUM. 

The  approximation  of  the  two  reflected  pleurae  in  the  middle 
line  of  the  thorax  forms  a  septum  which  divides  the  chest  into 
the  two  pulmonary  cavities.  This  is  the  mediastinum.  The 
two  pleuras  are  not,  however,  in  contact  with  each  other  at  the 
middle  line  in  the  formation  of  the  mediastinum,  but  leave  a 


270 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


space  between  them  which  contains  all  the  viscera  of  the  chest, 
with  the  exception  of  the  lungs.  The  mediastinum  is  divided 
into  the  anterior,  middle,  and  posterior. 

The  anterior  mediastinum  is  a  triangular  space,  bounded  in 
front  by  the  sternum,  and  on  each  side  by  the  pleura.  It  con- 
tains a  quantity  of  loose  cellular  tissue,  in  which  are  found 
some  lymphatic  glands  and  vessels  passing  up  from  the  liver; 
the  remains  of  the  thymus  gland,  the  origins  of  the  sterno-hy- 
oid  and  sterno-thyroid  muscles,  and  the  internal  mammary  ves- 
sels of  the  left  side. 

The  7niddle  mediastinum  contains  the  heart  enclosed  in  its 
pericardium,  the  ascending  aorta,  the  superior  vena  cava,  the 
bifurcation  of  the  trachea,  the  pulmonory  arteries  and  veins,  and 
the  phrenic  nerves. 

The  posterior  mediastinum  is  bounded  behind  by  the  ver- 
tebral column,  in  front  by  the  pericardium,  and  on  each  side  by 
the  pleura.  It  contains  the  descendinof  aorta,  the  o-reater  and 
lesser  azygos  veins  and  superior  intercostal  vein,  the  thoracic 
duct,  the  oesophagus  and  pneumogastric  nerves,  and  the  great 
splanchnic  nerves. 

ABDOMEN. 

The  abdomen  is  the  inferior  cavity  of  the  trunk  of  the  body; 
it  is  bounded  in  front  and  at  the  sides  by  the  lower  ribs  and  ab- 
dominal muscles  ;  behind,  by  the  vertebral  column  and  abdo- 
minal muscles:  above,  by  the  diaphragm,  and  below  by  the 
pelvis  ;  and  contains  the  alimentary  canal,  the  organs  subservi- 
ent to  digestion,  viz.  the  liver,  pancreas,  and  spleen,  and  the  or- 
gans of  excretion,  the  kidneys,  with  the  supra-renal  capsules. 

Regions. — For  convenience  of  description  of  the  viscera,  and 
reference  to  the  morbid  atfections  of  this  cavity,  the  abdomen  is 
divided  into  certain  districts  or  regions.  Thus,  if  two  trans- 
verse lines  be  carried  around  the  body,  the  one  parallel  with  the 
convexities  of  the  ribs,  the  other  with  the  highest  points  of  the 
crests  of  the  ilia,  the  abdomen  will  be  divided  into  three  zones. 
Again,  if  a  perpendicular  line  be  drawn  at  each  side,  from  the 
cartilage  of  the  eighth  rib  to  the  middle  of  Poupart's  ligament, 
the  three  primary  zones  will  each  be  subdivided  into  three  com- 
partments or  regions,  a  middle  and  two  lateral. 

The  middle  region  of  the  upper  zone  being  immediately  over 
the  small  end  of  the  stomach,  is  called  episcastric.  The  two 
lateral  regions  beinw  under  the  cartilages  of  the  ribs,  are  called 
hypochondriac.  The  middle  region  of  the  middle  zone  is  the 
umbilical ;  the  two  lateral,  the  btmbar.  The  middle  region  of 
the  infeior  zone  is  the  hypogastric,  and  the  two  lateral  the  iliac. 
In  addition  to  these  divisions,  we  constantly  use  the  term  ingui- 
nal  region,  in  reference  to  the  vicinity  of  Poupart's  ligament. 

Position  of  the  viscera. — lu.  the  upper  zone  will  be  seen  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


271 


liver,  extending  across  from  the  ri2:ht  to  the  left  side;  the  sto- 
mach and  spleen  on  the  left,  and  the  pancreas  and  dnodenum 
behind.  In  the  middle  zone  is  the  transverse  portion  of  the  co- 
lon, with  the  upper  part  of  the  ascending  and  descending  colon, 
omentum,  small  intestines,  mesentery,  and  behind,  the  kidneys 
and  supra-renal  capsules.  In  the  inlerior  zone  is  the  lower  part 
of  the  omentum  and  small  intestines,  the  Ccccum,  ascending  and 
descendmg  colon,  with  the  sigmoid  flexure  and  ureters. 

The  smooth  and  polished  surface  which  the  viscera  and  pa- 
riates  of  the  abdomen  present,  is  due  to  the  peritoneum,  which 
should  in  the  next  place  be  studied. 

PLATE  15.* 


•  The  Reflections  of  the  Peritoneum.     D.  The  diaphragm.     S.  The  stomach. 
C.  The  transverse  colon.      D.  The  transverse  duodenum.     P.  The  Pancreas. 

1.  The  small  intestines.  R.  The  Rectum.  B.  The  urinary  bladder.  1.  The 
anterior  layer  of  the  peritoneum,  linina;  the  under  surface  of  the  diaphragm. 

2.  The  posterior  layer.  3.  The  two  layers  passing  to  tlie  posterior  border  of 
the  liver,  and  forming  the  coronary  ligament.  4.  The  lesser  omentum  ;  the 
two  layers  passing  from  the  under  surface  of  the  liver  to  the  lesser  curve  of 
the  stomach.  .O.  The  two  layers  meeting  at  the  greater  curve,  then  passing 
downwards  and  returning  upon  themselves,  forming  (6)  the  greater  oment- 
um.    7.  The  transverse  meso-colon.    8.  The  posterior  layer  traced  upwards 


272  THE    THOMSONIAIf 

PERITONEUM. 

The  peritoneum  is  a  serous  membrane,  and  therefore  a  shni 
sac  ;  a  single  exception  exists  in  the  iiiiman  subject  to  this  cha- 
racter, viz.  in  the  female,  where  the  peritoneum  is  perforated 
by  the  open  extremities  of  the  Fallopian  tubes,  and  is  continu- 
ous with  their  mucous  lining. 

The  simplest  idea  that  can  be  given  of  a  serous  membrane, 
which  may  apply  equally  to  all,  is,  that  it  invests  the  viscus  or 
viscera,  and  is  then  reflected  upon  the  parietes  of  the  contain- 
ing cavity.  If  the  cavity  contain  only  a  single  viscus,  the  con- 
sideration of  the  serous  membrane  is  extremely  simple.  But  in 
the  abdomen,  where  there  are  a  number  of  viscera,  the  serous 
membrane  passes  from  one  to  the  other  until  it  has  invested  the 
whole,  before  it  is  reflected  on  the  parietes.  Hence  its  reflec- 
tions are  a  little  more  complicated. 

In  tracing  the  reflections  of  the  peritoneum  in  the  middle 
line,  we  commence  with  the  diaphragm,  which  is  lined  by  two 
layers,  one  from  the  parietes  in  front,  anterior,  and  one  from 
the  parieties  behind,  posterior.  These  two  layers  of  the  same 
membrane,  at  the  posterior  part  of  the  diaphragm,  descend  to 
the  upper  surface  of  the  liver,  forming  the  coronary  and  lateral 
ligaments  of  the  liver.  They  then  surround  the  liver,  one  go- 
ing in  front,  the  other  behind  that  viscus,  and,  meeting  at  its 
under  surface,  pass  to  the  stomach,  forming  the  lesser  omen- 
tum. They  then,  in  the  same  manner,  surround  the  stomach, 
and,  meeting  at  its  lower  border,  descend  for  some  distance  in 
front  of  the  intestines,  and  return  to  the  transverse  colon,  forn> 
ing  the  great  omentum  ;  they  then  surround  the  transverse  co- 
lon, and  pass  directly  backw-ards  to  the  vertebral  column,  form- 
ing the  transverse  meso-colon.  Here  the  two  layers  separate  ; 
the  posterior  ascends  in  front  of  the  pancras  and  aorta,  and  re- 
turns to  the  posterior  part  of  the  diaphragm,  where  it  forms  the 
posterior  layer  with  which  we  commenced.  The  anterior  de- 
scends, invests  all  the  small  intestines,  and  returning  to  the  ver- 
tebral column  forms  the  mesentery.  It  then  descends  into  the 
pelvis  in  front  of  the  rectum,  which  it  holds  in  its  place  by 
means  of  a  fold  called  meso-rectuTn,  forms  a  pouch,  the  recto- 
vesical fold,  between  it  and  the  bladder,  ascends  upon  the  pos- 
terior surface  of  the  bladder,  forming  its  false  ligaments,  and 

in  front  of  D,  the  transverse  duodenum,  and  P,  the  pancreas,  to  become  con* 
tinuous  with  the  posterior  layer  (2).  9.  The  foramen  of  Winslow ;  the  dot- 
ted line  bounding  this  foramen  inferiorly,  marks  the  course  of  the  hepatic  ar- 
tery forwards,  to  enter  betweeii  the  layers  of  the  lesser  omentum.  10.  The 
mesentery  encircling  the  small  intestine.  l\.  The  rccto-vesical  fold,  formed 
by  the  descending  anterior  layer.  12.  The  anterior  layer  traced  upwards  up- 
on the  internal  surface  of  the  abdominal  parietes  to  the  layer  (])_vwith  whidi 
the  examination  commenced. 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A. 


273 


returns  upon  the  anterior  parietes  of  the  abdomen,  to  the  dia- 
phragm, whehce  we  first  traced  it. 

In  the  female,  after  descending  into  the  pelvis  in  front  of  the 
rectum,  it  is  reflected  upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the  vagina 
and  uterus.  It  then  descends  on  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
uterus,  and  forms  at  either  side  the  broad  ligaments  of  that  or- 
gan. From  the  uterus  it  ascends  upon  the  posterior  surface  of 
the  bladder  and  anterior  parietes  of  the  abdomen,  and  is  conti- 
nued, as  in  the  male,  to  the  diaphragm. 

•In  this  way  the  continuity  of  the  peritoneum,  as  a  whole,  is 
distinctly  shown,  and  it  matters  not  where  the  examination 
commence  or  where  it  terminate  ;  still  the  same  continuity  of 
surface  will  be  discernable  throughout.  If  we  trace  it  from 
side  to  side  of  the  abdomen,  we  may  commence  at  the  umbili- 
cus ;  we  then  follow  it  outwards  lining  the  inner  side  of  the 
parietes  to  the  ascending  colon  ;  it  surrounds  that  intestine  ;  it 
then  surrounds  the  small  intestine,  and  returning  on  itself  forms 
the  mesentery.  It  then  invests  the  descendina:  colon,  and 
reaches  the  parietes  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  abdomen,  from 
whence  it  may  be  traced  to  the  exact  point  from  which  we 
started. 

The  viscera,  which  are  thus  shown  to  be  invested  by  the  pe- 
ritoneum m  its  course  downwards,  are — the 

Liver, 

Stomach, 

Transverse  colon, 

Small  intestines, 

Pelvic  viscera. 

The  folds  formed  between  these  and  between  the  diaphragm 
and  the  liver,  are — 

(Diaphragm.) 

Broad,  coronary,  and  lateral  ligaments. 

(Liver.) 

Lesser  omentum. 

(Stomach.) 

Greater  omentum. 

(Transverse  colon.) 

Transverse  meso-colon. 
Mesentery, 
Meso-rectum, 
Recto-vesical  fold. 

False  ligaments  of  the  bladder. 

And  in  the  female,  the 

Broad  ligaments  of  the  uterus. 


274  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  ligaments  of  the  liver  will  be  examined  with  that  organ. 

The  lesser  omentum  is  the  duplicature  passing  between  the 
liver  and  the  upper  border  of  the  stomach.  It  is  extremely 
thin,  excepting  at  its  right  border,  where  it  is  free,  and  con- 
tains between  its  layers,  the 

Hepatic  artery, 

Ductus  communis  choledochus, 

Portal  vein. 

Hepatic  plexus  of  nerves,  , 

Lymphatics. 

The  structures  are  enclosed  in  a  loose  cellular  tissue,  called 
Glisson's  capsule.  The  relative  position  of  the  three  vessels  is, 
the  artery  to  the  left,  the  duct  to  the  right,  and  the  vein  between 
and  behind. 

If  the  finger  be  introduced  behind  this  right  border  of  the 
lesser  omentum,  it  will  be  situated  in  an  opening  called  the  fo- 
ramen of  WinsloiD.  In  front  of  the  finger  will  lie  the  right 
border  of  the  lesser  omentum;  behind  it  the  diaphragm,  cover- 
ed by  the  ascending  or  posterior  layer  of  the  peritoneum  ;  be- 
low, the  hepatic  artery,  curving  forwards  from  the  coeliac  axis; 
and  abov^e,  the  lobus  Spigelii.  These,  therefore,  are  the  boun- 
daries of  the  foramen  of  VVinslow,  which  is  nothing  more  than  a 
constriction  of  the  general  cavity  of  the  peritoneum  at  this  point, 
arising  out  of  the  necessity  for  the  hepatic  and  gastric  arteries 
to  pass  forwards  from  the  coeliac  axis  to  reach  their  respective 
viscera. 

If  the  air  be  blown  through  the  foramen  of  Winslow,  it  will 
descend  behind  the  lesser  omentum  and  stomach  to  the  space 
between  thedesending  and  ascending  pair  of  layers,  forming  the 
great  omentum.  This  is  sometimes  called  the  lesser  cavity  of 
the  peritoneum,  and  that  external  (o  the  foramen  the  greater 
cavity;  in  which  case  the  foramen  is  considered  as  the  means 
of  communication  between  the  two.  There  is  a  great  objection 
to  this  division,  as  it  might  lead  the  inexperienced  to  believe 
that  there  were  really  two  cavities.  There  is  but  one  only,  the 
foramen  of  Winslow  being  merely  a  constriction  of  that  one,  to 
facilitate  the  communication  between  the  nutrient  arteries  and 
the  viscera  of  the  upper  part  of  the  abdomen. 

The  great  oi?ieviin?i  consists  of  four  layers  of  periionctim, 
the  two  which  descend  from  the  stomach,  and  the  same  two, 
returning  upon  themselves  to  the  transverse  colon.  A  quantity 
of  adipose  substai.'ce  is  deposited  around  the  vessels  which  ram- 
ify through  its  structure.  It  would  appear  to  perform  a  double 
function  in  the  economy.  1st.  Protecting  the  intestines  from 
cold;  and,  2dly.  Facilitating  the  movement  of  the  intestines 
upon  each  other  during  theirvermicular  action. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  275 

The  transverse  meso-colon  is  the  medium  of  connection  be- 
tween the  transverse  colon  and  the  posterior  wall  of  the  abdo- 
men. It  also  afibrds  to  the  nutrient  arteries  a  passage  to  reach 
the  intestine  ;  and  encloses  between  its  layers,  at  the  posterior 
part,  the  transverse  portion  of  the  duodenum. 

The  mesentery  is  the  medium  of  connection  between  the 
small  intestines  and  the  posterior  wall  of  the  abdomen.  It  is 
oblique  in  its  direction,  being  attached  to  the  posterior  wall, 
from  the  left  side  of  tiie  second  lumbar  vertebra  to  the  right 
iliac  fossa.  It  retains  the  small  intestines  in  their  places,  and 
gives  passage  to  the  mesenteric  arteries,  veins,  nerves,  and  lym- 
phatics. 

The  meso-rectiwi,  in  like  manner,  retains  the  rectum  in  con- 
nection with  the  front  of  the  sacrum.  Besides  this,  there  are 
some  minor  folds  in  the  pelvis,  as  the  recto-vesical  fold,  the 
false  ligaments  of  the  bladder,  and  broad  ligaments  of  the 
uterus. 

The  appendices  epiploicce  are  small  irregular  pouches  ot 
peritoneum,  filled  with  fat,  and  situated  like  fringes  upon  the 
large  intestine. 

Three  other  duplicatures  of  peritoneum  are  situated  'n\  the 
sides  of  the  abdomen  ;  they  are  the  gastro-splenetic  omentum, 
the  ascending  and  descending  meso-colon.  The  gasiro-sple- 
nic  omentum  is  the  duplicature  which  connects  the  spleen  to 
the  stomach ;  and  the  ascending  and  descendiiig  meso-cnla.  are 
the  folds  which  retain  the  corresponding  portions  of  the  colon 
in  their  situations. 

Structure  of  serous  m,enibrane. — Serous  membrane  consists 
of  two  layers,  an  external  or  cellular  layer,  and  an  interiial  lay- 
er, or  epithelium.  The  cellular  layer  upon  its  outer  surface  is 
rough  and  vascular,  and  adherent  to  surrounding  structures; 
but  on  its  inner  surface  is  dense  and  smooth,  and  wholly  defi- 
cient of  vessels  carry  ins:  red  blood.  The  smooth  and  brilliant 
surface  of  serous  membrane  is  due  to  a  distinct  epithelium, 
which  has  been  shown  to  be  composed  of  laminae  of  viscicles, 
and  of  flattened  polygonal  scales  with  central  nuclei,  like  the 
epithelium  of  mucous  membrane.  This  structure  may  be  easi- 
ly demonstrated  with  a  good  microscope  upon  the  surface  of  all 
the  serous  membranes  of  the  body,  upon  the  surface  of  the  li- 
ning membrane  of  arteries  and  veins,  and  upon  synovial  mem- 
branes. 

The  general  characters  of  a  serous  membrane  are  its  resem- 
blance to  a  shut  sac,  and  its  secretion  of  a  peculiar  fluid  resem- 
bling the  serum  of  the  blood;  but  neither  of  these  characters  is 
absolutely  essential  to  the  identity  of  a  serous  membrane  ;  for 
in  the  internal  ear  we  have  an  instance  of  a  mucous  membrane 
being  a  shut  sac,  a  condition  not  uncommon  among  animals. 


276  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Again,  as  we  have  shown,  the  peritoneum  in  the  female  is  per- 
forated by  the  extremities  of  the  Fallopean  tubes;  while  in  rep- 
tiles there  is  a  direct  communication  between  its  cavity  and  the 
medium  in  which  they  hve. 

From  the  variable  nature  of  the  secretion  of  these  membranes, 
they  have  been  divided  into  two  classes — the  true  serous  mem- 
branes, viz.  the  arachnoid,  pericardium,  pleuras,  peritoneum  and 
tunicse  vaginales,  which  pour  out  a  secretion  containing  but  a 
small  proportion  of  albumen  ;  and  the  synovial  membranes  and 
bursae,  which  secrete  a  fluid  containing  a  larger  quantity  of  al- 
bumen. 

ALIMENTARY  CANAL 

The  alimentary  canal  is  a  musculo-membranous  tube,  ex- 
tending- from  the  mouth  to  the  anus.  It  is  variously  named  ia 
the  diifereut  parts  of  its  course;  hence  it  is  divided  into  the 

Mouth, 
Pharynx, 
.  Oesophagus, 
Stomach, 

C  Duodenum, 
Small  intestine     <  Jejunum, 

(  Ileum, 

I  Cascum, 
Large  intestine    <  Colon, 

I  Rectum. 

The  mouth  is  the  irregular  cavity  which  contains  the  organs 
of  taste  and  the  principal  instruments  of  mastication.  It  is 
bounded  in  front  by  the  lips,  on  either  side  by  the  internal  sur- 
face of  the  cheeks;  above,  by  the  hard  palate  and  teeth  of  the 
upper  jaw;  below,  by  the  tongue,  by  the  mucous  membrane 
stretched  between  the  arch  of  the  lower  jaw  and  the  under  sur- 
face of  the  tongue,  and  by  the  teeth  of  the  inferior  maxilla;  and 
behind  by  the  soft  palate  and  fauces. 

The  lips  are  two  fleshy  folds,  formed  externally  by  common 
integument,  and  internally  by  mucous  membrane,  and  contain- 
ing between  these  two  layers  the  muscles  of  the  lips,  a  quantity 
of  fat,  and  numerous  small  labial  glands.  They  are  attached 
to  the  surface  of  the  upper  and  lower  jaw,  and  each  lip  is  con- 
nected to  the  gum  in  the  middle  line  by  a  fold  of  mucous  mem^ 
brane,  the  fr,i;num  labii  superioris,  and  fra;num  labii  inferioris, 
the  former  beino^  the  larsfer. 

The  cheeks  (buccns)  are  continuous  on  either  hand  with  the 
lips,  and  form  the  sides  of  the  face  ;  they  are  composed  of  inte- 
gument, a  large  quantity  of  fat,  muscles,  mucous  membrane, 
and  buccal  glands. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  277 

The  mucous  membrane  lining  the  cheeks  is  reflected  above 
and  below  upon  the  sides  of  the  jaws,  and  is  attached  posterior- 
ly to  the  anterior  margin  of  the  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw.  At 
about  its  middle,  opposite  to  the  second  molar  tooth  of  the  up- 
per jaw,  is  a  papilla,  upon  which  may  be  observed  a  small  open- 
ing, the  entrance  of  the  duct  of  the  parotid  gland. 

The  hard  palate  is  a  dense  structure,  composed  of  mucous 
membrane,  palatal  5:lands,  fibrous  tissue,  vessels,  and  nerves, 
and  firmly  connected  to  the  palate  processes  of  the  superior  max- 
illary and  palate  bones.  It  is  bounded  in  front,  and  on  each 
side,  by  the  alveolar  processes  and  gums,  and  is  coniinuons  be- 
hind with  the  soft  palate.  It  is  marked  along  the  middle  \\iw 
by  an  elevated  raphe,  and  presents  upon  each  side  of  the  raphe 
a  number  of  transverse  ridges  and  grooves.  Near  the  anterior 
extremity,  and  immediately  behind  the  middle  incisor  teeth,  is 
a  papilla  which  corresponds  with  the  termination  of  the  naso- 
palatine caaal,  and  has  been  supposed  to  be  endowed  with  a 
peculiar  sensibility. 

The  gums  are  composed  of  a  thick  and  dense  mucous  mem- 
brane, which  is  closely  adherent  to  the  periosteum  of  the  alveo- 
lar processes,  and  embraces  the  necks  of  the  teeth.  They  are 
remarkable  for  their  hardness  and  insensibility,  and  for  their 
close  contact,  without  adhesion,  to  the  surface  of  the  tooth. 
From  the  neck  of  the  tooth  they  are  reflected  into  the  aveolus, 
and  become  continuous  with  the  periosteal  membrane  of  that 
cavity. 

The  tongue  has  been  described  as  an  oro-an  of  sense ;  it  is 
invested  by  mucous  membrane,  which  is  reflected  from  its  un- 
der part  upon  the  inner  surface  of  tlie  lowf^r  jaw,  and  consti- 
tutes, with  the  muscles  beneath,  the  floor  of  the  month.  Upon 
the  under  surface  of  the  tongue,  near  to  its  anterior  part,  the 
mucous  membrane  forms  a  considerable  fold,  which  is  called 
the  frcenum  lingutc  ;  and  on  each  side  of  the  fr£enum  is  a  large 
papilla,  the  commencement  of  the  duct  of  the  submaxillary 
gland,  and  several  smaller  openings,  the  ducts  of  the  sublmgual 
gland. 

The  soft  palate  (velum  pendulum  pnlati)  is  a  fold  of  mucous 
membrane,  situated  at  the  posterior  part  of  the  mouth.  It  is 
continuous  superiorly  with  the  hard  palate,  and  is  composed  of 
mucous  membrane,  palatal  glands,  and  muscles.  Hanging  from 
the  middle  of  its  inferior  border  is  a  small  rounded  process,  the 
uvula:  and  passing  outwards  from  the  uvula  on  each  side  are 
two  curved  folds  of  the  mucous  membrane,  the  arches  or  pillars 
of  the  palate.  The  anterior  pillar  is  continued  downwards  to 
the  side  of  the  base  of  the  tongue,  and  is  formed  by  the  projec- 
tion of  the  palato-glossus  muscle.  The  posterior  pillar  is  pro- 
longed downwards  and  backwards  into  the  pharynx,  and  is 


278  THE  THOMSONIAN 

formed  by  the  convexity  of  the  palato-pharyngeus  muscle. 
These  two  pillars,  closely  united  above,  are  separated  below  by 
a  triangular  interval  or  niche,  in  which  the  tonsil  is  lodged. 

The  tonsils  (amygdalae)  aie  two  glandular  organs,  shaped 
like  almonds,  and  situated  between  the  anterior  and  posterior 
pillar  of  the  soft  palate,  on  each  side  of  the  fauces.  They  are 
cellular  in  texture,  and  composed  of  an  assemblage  of  mucous 
follicles,  which  open  upon  the  surface  of  the  gland.  External- 
ly, they  are  invested  by  the  pharyngeal  fascia,  which  separates 
them  from  the  superior  constrictor  muscle  and  internal  carotid 
artery,  and  prevents  an  abscess  opening  in  that  direction.  In 
relation  to  surrounding  parts,  they  correspond  with  the  angle 
of  the  lower  jaw. 

The  space  included  between  the  soft  palate  and  the  root  of 
the  tongue  is  the  isthmua  of  the  fauces.  It  is  bounded  above 
by  the  sott  palate  ;  on  each  side,  by  the  pillars  of  the  soft  palate 
and  tonsils  ;  and  beloio,  by  the  root  of  the  tongue.  It  is  the 
opening  between  the  mouth  and  pharynx. 

SALIVARY    GLANDS. 

Communicating  with  the  mouth  are  the  excretory  ducts  of 
three  pairs  of  salivary  glands,  the  parotid,  submaxillary,  and 
sublingual. 

The  parotid  gland,  the  largest  of  the  three,  is  situated  im- 
mediately in  front  of  the  external  ear,  and  extends  superficially 
for  a  short  distance  over  the  masseter  muscle,  and  deeply  behind 
the  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw.  It  reaches  inferiorly  to  below  the 
level  of  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  posteriorly  to  the  mas- 
toid process,  slightly  overlapping  the  insertion  of  the  sterno- 
mastoid  muscle.  Embedded  in  its  substance  is  the  external  ca- 
rotid artery,  temporo-maxillary  vein,  and  facial  nerve;  and, 
emerging  from  its  anterior  border,  the  transverse  facial  artery, 
and  blanches  of  the  pes  anserinus  ;  and,  above,  the  temporal 
artery. 

The  duct  of  the  parotid  gland  commences  at  the  papilla  upon 
the  internal  surface  of  the  cheek,  opposite  the  second  molar 
tooth  of  the  upper  jaw  ;  and,  piercing  the  buccinator  muscle, 
crosses  the  masseter  to  the  anterior  border  of  the  gland,  where 
it  divides  into  several  branches,  which  subdivide  and  ramify 
through  its  structure,  to  terminate  in  the  small  coecal  pouches 
of  which  the  gland  is  composed.  A  small  branch  is  generally 
given  off  from  the  duct  while  crossing  the  masseter  muscle, 
which  forms,  by  its  ramifications  and  terminal  dilatations,  a 
small  glandular  appendage,  the  socia  parotidis.  Stenon's  duct 
is  remarkably  dense  and  of  considerable  thickness,  while  the 
area  of  its  canal  is  extremely  small. 

The  submaxillary  gland  is  situated  in  the  posterior  angle 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  279 

ot  the  submaxillary  triangle  of  the  neck.  It  rests  upon  the 
hyo-glossus  and  nivlo-hyoideus  muscles,  and  is  covered  in  by 
the  body  of  the  lower  jaw  and  by  the  deep  cervical  fascia.  It 
is  separated  from  the  parotid  gland  by  the  stylo-maxillary  liga- 
ment, and  from  the  sublingual  by  the  mylo-hyoideus  muscle. 
Embedded  among  its  lobules  is  the  facial  artery  and  the  sub- 
maxillary ganglion. 

The  excretory  duct  (Wharton's)  of  the  submaxillary  gland 
commences  upon  the  papilla,  by  the  side  of  the  frsenum  hnguce, 
and  passes  backwards  beneath  the  mylo  hyoideus  and  resting 
upon  the  hyo-glossus  muscle,  to  the  middle  of  the  gland,  where 
it  divides  into  numerous  branches,  which  ramify  through  the 
structure  of  the  gland  to  its  ca3cal  terminations.  It  lies  in  its 
course  against  the  mucous  membrane  forming  the  floor  of  the 
mouth,  and  causes  a  projecting  ridge  upon  its  surface. 

The  sublino-ual  is  an  elongated  and  flattened  gland,  situated 
beneath  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  floor  of  the  mouth,  on 
each  side  of  the  frasnum  linguee.  It  is  in  relation,  above,  with 
the  mucous  membr^ ;  in  front.,  with  the  depression  by  the 
side  of  the  symphysiM)f  the  lower  jaw  ;  externally,  wWh  the 
mylo-hyoideus  muscle ;  and  internally,  with  the  lingual  nerve 
and  genio-hyo-glossus  muscle. 

It  pours  its  secretion  into  the  mouth  by  seven  or  eight  small 
ducts,  which  commence  by  small  openings  on  each  side  of  the 
frsenum  linguae. 

Structure. — The  salivary  are  conglomorate  glands,  consist- 
ing of  lobes,  which  are  made  up  of  angular  lobules,  and  these 
of  still  smaller  lobules. 

The  smallest  lobule  is  apparently  composed  of  granules,  which 
are  minute  coecal  pouches,  formed  by  the  dilatation  of  the  ex- 
treme ramifications  of  the  ducts.  These  minute  ducts  unite  to 
form  lobular  ducts,  and  the  lobular  ducts  constitute  by  their 
union  a  single  excretory  duct. 

The  coecal  pouches  are  connected  by  cellular  tissue,  so  as  to 
form  a  minute  lobule  :  the  lobules  are  held  together  by  a  more 
condensed  cellular  layer  ;  and  the  larger  lobes  are  enveloped 
by  a  dense  cellulo-fibrous  capsule,  which  is  firmly  attached  to 
the  deep  cervical  fascia. 

Vessel.<i  and  Nerves. — The  parotid  gland  is  abundantly  sup- 
plied with  arteries  by  the  external  carotid  ;  the  submaxillary, 
by  the  facial ;  and  the  sublingual,  by  the  sublingual  branch  of 
the  lingual  artery. 

The  nerves  of  the  parotid  gland  are  derived  from  the  auricu- 
lar branch  of  the  inferior  maxillary  nerve,  from  the  auricularis 
magnus,  and  from  the  nervi  moUes  of  the  external  carotid  ar- 
tery. The  sub-maxillary  gland  is  supplied  by  the  branches  of 
the  submaxillary  ganglion,  and  by  filaments  from  the  mylo-hy- 


280 


THE  thomso:hian 


PLATE  16.* 


oidean  nerve  ;  and  the  sublingual  by  filaments  from  the  sub- 
maxillary ganglion  and  gustatory  nerve. 

PHARYNX. 

The  pharynx  is  a  miisculo-membranous  sac,  situated  upon 
the  cervical  portion  of  the  vertebral  column,  and  extending  from 
the  base  of  the  skull  to  a  point  corresponding  with  the  cricoid 
cartilage  in  front,  and  the  fifth  cervical  vertebra  behind.  It  is 
composed  of  mucous  membrane,  muscles,  vessels  and  nerves, 
and  is  invested  by  a  strong  fascia,  situated  between  the  mucous 
membrane  and  muscles,  which  serves  to  connect  it  with  the 
basilarprocess  of  the  occipital  bone 
and  with  the  petrous  portions  of 
the  temporal  boues.  Upon  its 
anterior  part  it  is  incomplete, 
and  has  opening  into  it  seven 
foramina,  viz : — 

Posterior  nares,  two, 
Eustachian  tubes,  two, 
Mouth, 
Larynx, 
(Esophagus. 
The  posterior  nares  are  the  two 
large  openings  at  the  upper  and 
front  part  of  the  pharynx.     On 
each  side  of  these  openings,  and 
slightly  above  the  posterior  termi- 
nation of  the   inferior  turbinated 
bone,  is  the  irregular  depression 
in  the  mucous  membrane,  marking  the  entrance  of  the  Eiista- 
ehian  tube.     Beneath  the  posterior  nares  is  the  large  opening 
mio  {\\Q  mouth,  partly  veiled  by  the  soft  palate;  and,  beneath 
the  root  of  the  tongue,  the  opening  of  the  larynx.     Thecesopka- 
geal  opening  is  the  lower  constricted  portion  of  the  pharynx- 

(Esophagus. — The  cesophagus  commences  at  the  termina- 
tion of  the  pharynx,  opposite  the  lower  border  of  the  cricoid 
cartilage  and  fifth  cervical  vertebra,  and  descends  the  neck,  be- 
hind and  rather  to  the  left  of  the  trachea.     It  ti;en  passes  behind 


'The  Pharijnx  laid  open  from  behind. — 1.  A  section  carried  transverselr 
through  the  base  of  the  skull.  2,  2.  The  walls  of  the  pharynx  drawn  to  eacn 
side.  3,  3.  The  posterior  nares,  separated  by  tlie  Tomer.  4.  Tlie  extremity 
of  the  Eustachian  tube  of  one  side.  5.  The  soft  palate.  6.  The  posterior 
pillar  of  the  soft  palate.  7.  Its  anterior  pillar;  the  tonsil  is  seen  situated  in 
the  niche  between  the  two  pillars.  8.  The  root  of  the  tongue,  partly  concealed 
by  the  uvula.  9.  The  epiglottis,  overhanging  (10)  the  openins;  of  the  elottis. 
11.  The  posterior  part  of  the  larynx,  12.  The  opening  into  the  cesophagui. 
13.  The  external  surface  of  the  cEsophagus.    14.  The  trachea. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  281 

the  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  along  the  posterior  mediastinum,  ly- 
ing in  front  of  the  thoracic  aorta,  to  the  oesophageal  opening  in 
the  diaphragm,  where  it  enters  the  abdomen,  and  terminates  at 
the  cardiac  orifice  of  the  stomach. 

THE    STOMACH. 

The  stomach  is  an  expansion  of  the  ahmentary  canal,  situ- 
ated in  the  left  hypochondriac,  and  extending  into  the  epigas- 
trie  region.  On  account  of  the  peculiarity  of  its  form,  it  is  di- 
vided into  a  greater,  or  splenic,  and  a  lesser,  or  pyloric  end,  a 
lesser  curvature  above,  and  a  greater  curvature  below,  a  car- 
diac orifice  and  a  pyloric  orifice.  The  great  end  is  not  only  of 
large  size,  but  expands  beyond  the  pointof  entrance  of  the  ceso- 
phagus.  The  pylorus  is  the  small  and  contracted  extremity  of 
the  organ.  The  two  curvatures  give  attachment  to  the  perito- 
neum ;  the  upper  curve  to  the  lesser  omentum,  and  the  lower 
to  the  greater  omentum. 

Small  Intestines. — The  small  intestine  is  divisible  into  three 
portions,  duodenum,  jeju?iti7n,  and  ileum. 

The  duodenum  is  named  from  being  equcl  in  length  to  the 
breadth  of  twelve  fingers.  Commemcing  at  the  pylorus,  it  as- 
cends obliquely  to  the  under  surface  of  the  liver;  it  next  de- 
scends perpendicularly  in  front  of  the  right  kidney,  and  then 
passes  nearly  transversely  across  the  vena  cava  and  aorta,  op- 
posite to  the  third  lumbar  vertebra.  It  terminates  in  the  jejunum 
on  the  left  side  of  the  second  lumbar  vertebra.  The  first  part 
of  its  course  is  completely  enclosed  by  the  peritoneum  ;  the  se- 
cond is  in  apposition  with  the  peritoneum  only  in  front-  and 
the  third  lies  between  the  diverging  layers  of  the  transverse  me- 
so-colon.  The  transverse  portion  of  the  duodenum  is  crossed 
by  the  superior  mesenteric  artery  and  vein,  and  the  perpendi- 
cular portion  is  pierced  obliquely  by  the  ductus  communis  cho- 
ledochus,  and  pancreatic  duct,  near  to  its  lower  ano-le. 

The  jejunum  is  named  from  being  generally  found  empty. 
It  forms  the  upper  two  fifths  of  the  small  intestine,  commencino" 
at  the  duodenum  on  the  left  side  of  the  second  lumbar  vertebra 
and  terminating  in  the  ileum.  It  is  thicker  to  the  touch  than 
the  rest  of  the  intestine,  and  has  a  pinkish  tinge,  from  contain- 
ing more  mucous  membrane  than  the  ileum. 

The  ileuin  includes  the  remaining  three  fifths  of  the  small 
intestine.  It  is  thinner  in  texture  and  paler  than  the  jejunum  • 
but  there  is  no  mark  by  which  to  distinguish  the  termination  of 
the  one  or  the  commencement  of  the  other.  It  terminates  in 
the  right  iliac  fossa,  by  opening  into  the  colon. 

Large  intestine. —The  large  intestine  is  divided  into  the  cce- 
cum,  colon,  and  rectum. 

The  cacum  (blind)  is  the  blind  pouch,  or  cul-de-sac,  at  the 
commencement  of  the  large  intestine.    It  is  situated  in  the  right 

19  ^ 


282  THE  THOMSONIAN 

iliac  fossa,  and  is  retained  in  its  place  by  the  peritoneum,  which 
passes  over  its  anterior  surface;  its  posterior  surface  is  connect- 
ed by  loose  cellular  tissue  with  the  ihac  fascia.  Attached  to 
its  extremity  is  the  appendix  vermiforniis,  a  long  worm-shaped 
tube,  the  rudiment  of  the  lengthened  caecum,  found  in  all  mam- 
miferous  animals  except  man  and  the  higher  quadrumana. 

The  colon  is  divided  into  ascending,  transverse  and  descend- 
ing. The  ascenduig  colon  passes  upwards  from  the  right  iliac 
fossa,  through  the  right  lumbar  region,  to  the  under  surface  of 
the  liver.  It  then  bends  inwards,  and  crosses  the  upper  part  of 
the  umbilical  region  under  the  name  of  transverse  colon,  and 
on  the  left  side  descends  (descending  colon.)  through  the  left 
lumbar  region  to  the  left  iliac  fossa,  where  it  makes  a  remarka- 
ble curve  upon  itself,  which  is  called  the  sigmoid  flexure. 

The  rectum  is  the  termination  of  the  large  intestine.  It  has 
received  its  name,  not  so  much  from  the  direction  of  its  course, 
as  from  the  straightness  of  its  form  in  comparison  with  the  co- 
•lon.  It  descends  from  opposite  the  left  sacro-iliac  symphasis, 
in  front  of  the  sacrum,  forming  a  gentle  curve  to  the  right  side, 
and  then  returning  to  the  middle  line.  At  the  lower  part  of 
the  pelvis  it  becomes  considerably  dilated,  and  near  the  extre- 
mity of  the  coccyx  curves  backwards,  to  terminate  at  the  anus. 
The  rectum,  therefore,  forms  a  double  tiexufe  in  its  course,  the 
one  being  directed  from  side  to  side,  the  other  from  before  back- 
wards. 

With  reference  to  its  relations,  the  rectum  is  divided  into 
three  portions;  the  first,  including  half  its  length,  extends  to 
about  the  middle  of  the  sacrum,  is  completely  surrounded  by 
peritoneum,  and  connected  to  the  sacrum  by  means  of  the  me- 
so-rectum. 

The  second  portion,  about  three  inches  in  length,  is  closely 
attached  to  the  surface  of  the  sacrum,  and  covered  by  perito- 
neum only  in  front ;  it  is  in  relation  by  its  lower  part  with  the 
base  of  the  bladder,  vesical  as  seminales,  and  the  commencement 
of  the  prostrate  gland. 

The  third  portion  curves  backwards  from  opposite  the  pros- 
trate gland,  to  terminate  at  the  anus ;  it  is  embraced  by  the  le- 
vatores  ani,  and  is  about  one  inch  and  a  half  in  length. 

Structure  of  the  Intestinal  Canal — The  pharynx  has  three 
coats ;  a  mucous  coat,  a  fibrous  coat,  derived  from  the  pharyn- 
geal fascia,  and  a  muscular  layer.  The  oesophagus  has  but  two 
coats,  the  mucous  and  the  muscular.  The  stomach  and  intes- 
tines have  three,  mucous,  muscular,  and  an  external  serous  in- 
vestment, derived  from  the  peritoneum. 

Mucous  coat. — The  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth  invests 
the  whole  internal  surface  of  that  caviity,  and  is  reflected  along 
the  parotid,  submaxillary,  and  sublingual  ducts,  into  the  cor- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  283 

respondinjT  glands.  It  terminates  anteriorly  npon  the  outer 
margin  of  the  red  border  of  the  lips,  and  posteriorly  is  continu- 
ous with  the  mucous  lining  of  the  pharynx.  The  raucous 
membrane  of  the  pharynx  is  continuous  with  the  mucous  lining 
of  the  Eustachian  tubes,  the  nares,  the  mouth,  and  the  larynx. 
In  the  cesophagus  it  is  disposed  m  longihidinal  plica.  In  the 
stomach  it  is  arranged  in  n/^ce  (wrinkles),  and  at  the  pylorus 
forms  a  spiral  fold,  called  the  jiyloric  valve.  In  the  lower  half 
of  the  duodenum,  the  whole  length  of  the  jejunum,  and  upper 
part  of  the  ileum,  it  forms  valvular  folds,  called  valvidcB  conni- 
ventes.  These  folds  do  not  entirely  surround  the  cylinder  of 
the  intestine,  but  extend  for  about  three  fourths  of  its  circum- 
ference. In  the  lower  half  of  the  ileum,  the  mucous  lining  is 
without  folds ;  hence  the  thinness  of  the  coats  of  this  intestine, 
as  compared  with  the  jejunum  and  duodenum.  At  the  termi- 
nation of  the  ileum  in  the  caecum,  the  mucous  membrane  forms 
two  folds,  which  are  strengthened  by  the  muscular  coat,  and 
project  into  the  csecnm.  These  are  the  ilio-cacal  valve.  In 
the  caaecum  and  colon  the  mucous  membrane  is  raised  into  cre- 
scentic  folds,  which  correspond  with  the  sharp  edges  of  the  sac- 
culi;  and  in  the  rectum  it  forms  three  valvular  folds,  one  of 
which  is  situated  near  the  commencement  of  the  intestine;  the 
second,  extending  from  the  side  of  the  tube,  is  placed  opposite 
the  middle  of  the  sacrum;  and  the  third,  which  is  the  largest 
and  most  constant,  projects  from  (he  anterior  wall  of  the  intes- 
tine opposite  the  basin  of  the  bladder. 

Structure  of  the  Mucous  Memhraiie. — This  membrane  is 
analagous  to  the  cutaneous  covering  of  the  exterior  of  the  body, 
and  resembles  that  tissue  very  closely  in  its  structure.  It  is 
composed  of  three  layers,  an  epithelium^  ajjroper  mucoiis,  and 
^fibrous  layer. 

The  epithelium  is  the  cuticle  of  the  mucous  membrane. 
Throughout  the  pharynx  and  aesophagus  it  resembles  the  cuti- 
cle, both  in  appearance  and  character.  It  is  continuous  with 
the  cuticle  of  the  skin  at  the  margin  of  the  lips,  and  terminates 
by  an  irregular  border  at  the  cardiac  orifice  of  the  stomach.  In 
the  mouth  it  is  composed  of  laminae  of  oval  vescicles  and  thin 
angular  scales,  both  possessing  central  nuclei.  The  vescicles 
form  the  deepest  layer,  and  become  gradually  flattened  and  con- 
densed as  they  approach  the  surface.  In  the  stomach  and  in- 
testines these  bodies  are  pyriform  in  shape,  and  have  a  colum- 
nar arrangement,  the  apices  being  applied  to  the  papillary  sur- 
face of  the  membrane,  and  the  bases  forming,  by  their  approxi- 
mation, the  free  intestinal  surface.  Each  column  is  provided 
with  a  central  nucleus,  which  gives  its  middle  a  swollen  ap- 
pearance .  and,  from  the  transparency  of  its  structure,  the  nu- 
cleus may  be  seen  through  the  base  of  the  column,  when  exam- 


284  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

ined  from  the  surface.  Around  the  circular  vilH,  the  columns, 
from  being  placed  perpendicularly  to  the  surface,  have  a  radi- 
ated arrangement. 

The  proper  mucous  or  papillary  layer,  is  analagous  to  the 
papillary  layer  of  the  skin,  and,  like  it,  is  the  secreting  structure 
by  which  the  epithelium  is  produced.  Its  surface  presents  se- 
veral varieties  of  appearance,  when  examined  in  the  different 
parts  of  its  extent.  In  the  stomach  it  forms  polygonal  cells,  in- 
to the  floor  of  which  the  gastric  follicles  open.  In  the  small 
intestine  it  presents  numerous  minute  projecting  papillae,  called 
villi.  The  villi  are  of  two  kinds,  cylindrical  and  lanwiated, 
and  so  abundant  as  to  give  to  the  entire  surface  a  beautiful  vel- 
vety appearance.  In  the  large  intestine,  the  surface  is  compos- 
ed of  a  fine  network  of  minute  polygonal  cells,  more  numerous 
than  those  of  the  stomach,  but  resembling  them  in  receiving 
the  secretion  from  the  numerous  perpendicular  follicles  into 
their  floors. 

The  fibrous  layer  (sub-mucous  nervous)  is  the  membrane  of 
support  to  the  mucous  membrane,  as  is  the  coriumto  the  papil- 
lary layer  of  the  skin.  It  gives  to  the  mucous  membrane  its 
strength  and  resistance,  is  but  loosely  connected  with  the  mu- 
cous layer,  but  is  firmly  adherent  to  the  muscular  coat,  and  is 
called,  in  the  older  works  on  anatomy,  the  "  nervous  coat." 

In  the  loose  cellular  tissue  connecting  the  mucous  with  the 
fibrous  layer,  are  situated  the  glands  and  follicles  belonging  to 
the  mueous  membrane :  these  are — the 

(Esophageal  glands, 

Gastric  follicles. 

Duodenal  glands  (Brunner's), 

Glandulas  solitaros, 

Glandula3  aggregatse  (Peyer's), 

Simple  follicles  (Lieberkuhn's). 

The  oesophageal  glands  are  small  lobulated  bodies,  situated 
in  the  submucous  tissue,  and  opening  upon  the  surflice  of  the 
oBsaphagus  by  a  long  excretory  duct,  which  passes  obliquely 
through  the  mucous  membrane. 

The  gastric  follicles  are  long  tubular  follicular  glands,  sit- 
uated perpendicularly  side  by^side  in  every  part  of  tlie  mucous 
mumbrane  of  the  stomach.  At  their  terminations  they  are  di- 
lated into  small  lateral  pouches,  which  give  them  a  clustered 
appearance.  This  character  is  more  clearly  exhibited  at  the 
pyloric  than  at  the  cardiac  end  of  the  stomach.  They  are  in- 
tended, very  probably,  for  the  secretion  of  the  gastric  fluid. 

The  duodenal,  or  Brumier^s  glands,  are  small  flattened  gra- 
nular bodies,  compared  collectively  to  a  second  pancreas.  They 
resemble  in  structure  the  small  salivary  glands  so  abundant  be- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  285 

neath  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth  and  lips  ;  and,  like 
them,  they  open  upon  the  surface  by  minute  excretory  ducts. 
They  are  limited  to  the  duodenum. 

The  solitary  glands  are  of  two  kinds,  those  of  the  small  and 
those  of  the  large  intestine.  The  former  are  small  circular 
patches,  surrounded  by  a  zone  or  wreath  of  simple  follicles. 
When  opened,  they  are  seen  to  consist  of  a  small  flattened  sac- 
cular cavity,  containing  a  mucous  secretion,  but  having  no  ex- 
cretory duct.  They  are  chiefly  found  in  the  lower  part  of  the 
ileum.  The  solitary  glands  of  the  large  intestine  are  the  most 
abundant  in  the  csecum  and  appendix  casci ;  they  are  small  cir- 
cular projections,  flattened  upon  the  surface,  and  perforated  in 
the  centre  by  a  minute  excretory  opening. 

The  agfrregate^  or  Peyer's  glands^  are  situated  near  to  the 
lower  end  of  the  ileum,  and  occupy  that  portion  of  the  intestine 
which  is  opposite  the  attachment  of  the  mesentery.  To  the 
naked  eye  they  present  the  appearanc^e  of  oval  disks,  covered 
with  small  irregular  fissures  ;  but  with  the  aid  of  the  micro- 
scope they  are  seen  to  be  composed  of  nianerous  small  circular 
patches,  surrounded  by  simple  follicles,  like  the  solitary  glands 
of  the  small  intestine.  Each  patch  corresponds  with  a  flatten- 
ed and  closed  sac,  situated  beneath  the  membrane,  but  having 
no  excretory  opening,  and  the  interspace  between  the  patches 
is  occupied  by  laminated  villi. 

The  simple  follicles,  or  follicles  of  Lieberkahn,  are  small 
pouches  of  ihe  mucous  layer,  dispersed  in  immense  numbers 
over  every  part  of  the  mucous  membrane. 

Musciilar  coat. — The  muscular  coat  of  the  pharynx  consists 
of  five  pairs  of  nniscles,  which  have  been  already  described. 
The  muscular  coat  of  the  rest  of  the  alimentary  canal  is  com- 
posed of  two  planes  of  fibres,  an  external  lovgititdinal,  and  an 
internal  circular. 

The  (Esophagus  is  very  muscular  ;  its  longitudinal  fibres  are 
continuous  above  with  the  pharynx,  and  are  attached  in  front 
to  the  vertical  ridge  on  the  posterior  surface  of  the  cricoid  car- 
tilage. Below,  both  sets  of  fibres  are  continued  upon  the  sto- 
mach. On  the  stomach,  the  longitudinal  fibres  are  most  appa- 
rent along  the  lesser  curve,  and  the  circular  at  the  smaller  end. 
At  the  pylorus,  they  are  aggregated  into  a  thick  circular  ring, 
which,  with  the  spiral  fold  of  mucous  membrane,  constitutes  the 
pyloric  valve.  At  the  great  end  of  the  stomach  a  new  order  of 
fibres  is  introduced,  having  for  their  object  to  strengthen  that 
extremity  of  the  organ.  They  are  directed  more  or  less  hori- 
zontally from  the  great  end  towards  the  lesser  end,  and  are  ge- 
nerally lost  upon  the  sides  of  the  stomach,  at  about  its  middle  ; 
these  are  the  oblique  fibres. 

The  small  intestine  is  provided  with  both  layers,  equally 


286  THE    THOMSONIAN 

distributed  over  the  entire  surface.  At  the  termination  of  the 
ileum  the  circular  fibres  are  continued  into  the  two  folds  of  the 
ilio-CGBcal  valve,  while  the  longitudinal  fibres  pass  onwards  to 
the  large  intestine.  In  the  caecum  and  colon  these  longitudinal 
fibres  are  collected  into  three  bands,  which,  being  shorter  than 
the  intestine,  give  it  the  puckered  and  sacculated  appearance 
which  is  characteristic  of  the  large  intestine.  The  circular 
fibres  are  very  thin.  In  the  rectum  the  three  longitudinal 
bands  spread  out  and  form  a  thick  and  very  muscular  longitu- 
dinal layer. 

The  circular  fibres  are  very  much  attenuated,  exceptina:  at 
its  lower  extremity,  where  they  are  aggregated  into  the  thick 
muscular  ring  which  is  called  the  infernal  sphincter  aiii. 

Serous  coat. — The  pharynx  and  oesophagus  have  no  cover- 
ing of  serous  membrane.  The  alimentary  canal  wilhin  the 
abdomen  has  a  serous  layer,  derived  from  the  peritoneum. 

The  stojnach  is  completely  surrounded  by  the  peritoneum. 
The  first  or  oblique  portion  of  the  ditodeniwi  is  also  complete- 
ly included  by  the  serous  membrane.  The  descending  portion 
has  merely  a  partial  covering  on  its  anterior  surface.  The 
transverse  portion  is  also  behind  the  peritoneum,  being-  situated 
between  the  two  layers  of  the  transverse  meso-colun.  and  has 
but  a  partial  covering.  The  rest  of  the  small  intestines  are 
completely  invested  by  it.  The  ccecnm  and  commencement  of 
the  colon  have  the  serous  membrane  only  on  their  anterior 
two  thirds  ;  to  the  rest  of  the  colon  it  forms  a  complete  cover- 
ing. The  upper  third  of  the  rectum  is  completely  enclosed  by 
the  peritoneum;  the  middle  third  has  an  anterior  covering  on- 
ly, and  the  inferior  third  none  whatsoever. 

The  expression  complete  covering,  in  the  above  description, 
must  be  received  with  limitation.  No  peritoneal  investment 
can  be  perfectly  complete,  as  a  certain  space  must  necessarily 
be  left  uncovered  in  every  viscus  for  the  entrance  and  exit  of 
vessels.  This  interval  corresponds  with  the  point  of  reflection 
of  the  serous  membrane. 

Vessels  and  nerves.  The  arteries  of  the  alimentary  canal, 
as  they  supply  the  tube  from  above  downwards,  arc  the  ascend- 
ing pharyngeal,  superior  thyroid,  and  inferior  thyroid  in  the 
neck  ;  oesophageal  in  the  thorax;  gastric,  hepatic,  splenic,  su- 
perior and  inferior  mesenteric  in  the  abdomen  ;  and  inferior 
mesenteric,  iliac,  and  internal  pudic  in  the  pelvis.  The  veins 
from  the  abdominal  alimentary  canal  unite  to  form  the  vena 
portac.  The  lymphatics  and  lacieals  open  into  the  thoracic 
duct. 

The  nerves  of  the  pharynx  and  oesophagus  are  derived  from 
the  glosso-pharyngeal,  pneumogastnc,  and  sympathetic.  The 
nerves  of  the  stomach  are  the  pneumogastric  and  sympathetic 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


287 


branches  from  the  solar  plexus ;  and  those  of  the  intestinal  ca- 
nal are  the  superior  and  inferior  mesenteric  and  hypogastric 
plexuses.  The  extremity  of  the  rectum  is  supplied  by  the  coc- 
cygeal nerves  from  the  spinal  cord. 

THE  LIVER. 

The  liver  is  a  conglomerate  gland  of  large  size,  appended  to 
the  alimentary  canal,  and  performing  the  double  office  of  sepa- 
rating impurities  from  the  venous  blood  of  the  chylo-poietic  vis- 
cera previous  to  its  return  into  the  general  venous  circulation, 
and  o(  secreting  a  fluid  necessary  to  chylihcation — the  bile.  It 
is  the  largest  organ  in  tlie  body,  weighing  about  four  pounds, 
and  measuring  througli  its  lono;est  diameter  about  twelve  inch- 
es. It  is  situated  in  the  right  hypochondriiic  reo-ion,  and  ex- 
tends across  the  epigastrmm  into  the  left  hypochondriac,  fre- 
quently reaching  by  ils  left  extremity  to  the  upper  end  of  the 
spleen.  It  is  placed  obliquely  in  the  abdomen,  its  convex  sur- 
face looking  upwards  and  forwards,  and  the  concave  down- 
wards and  backwards.  TTie  anterior  border  is  sharp  and  free, 
and  marked  by  a  deep  notch,  and  the  posterior  rounded  and 
broad.  It  is  in  relation,  superiorly  and  posteriorly  with  the  di- 
aphragm, and  inferiorly  with  the  stomach,  ascending  portion 
of  the  duodenum,  transverse  colon,  right  supra-renal  capsule, 
and  right  kidney,  and  corresponds  by  its  free  border  with  the 
lower  margin  of  the  ribs. 

The  liver  is  retained  in  its  place  by  five  ligaments;  four  of 
which  are  formed  by  duplicatures  of  the  peritoneum,  and  are 

PLATE  17*. 


*  The  Upper  Surface  of  the  Liver.— 1.  The  right  lobe.  2.  The  left  lobe. 
3.  The  anterior  or  free  border.  4.  The  posterior  or  rounded  border.  5,  The 
broad  ligament.  6.  The  round  ligament.  7,  7.  The  two  lateral  ligaments. 
8,  8.  The  space  left  uncovered  by  the  peritoneum,  and  surrounded  by  the  co- 
ronary  ligament.  9.  The  inferior  vena  cava.  10.  The  point  of  the  lobus 
Spigelii. 


288  THE  THOMSONIAN 

situated  upon  the  convex  surface  of  the  organ;  the  fifth  be- 
ing a  fibrous  cord  which  passes  through  a  fissure  in  its  under 
surface,  from  the  umbiUcus  to  the  inferior  vena  cava.  They 
are — the 

Longitudinal, 
Two  hiteral, 
Coronary, 
Round. 

The  longitudinal  liga7nent  is  an  antero-posterior  fold  of  pe- 
ritoneum, extending  from  the  notch  on  the  anterior  margin  of 
the  liver  to  its  posterior  border.  Between  its  two  layers  in  the 
anterior  and  free  margin,  is  the  round  ligament. 

The  two  lateral  Uganienls  are  fomerd  by  the  two  layers  of 
peritoneum  which  pass  from  the  under  surface  of  the  diaphragm 
to  the  posterior  border  of  the  liver  ;  they  correspond  with  its  la- 
teral lobes. 

The  coronary  ligament  is  formed  by  the  separation  of  the 
two  layers  forming  the  lateral  ligaments  near  their  point  of  con- 
vergence. The  posterior  layer  is  continued  unbroken  from  one 
lateral  ligament  into  the  other,  but  the  anterior  quits  the  poste- 
rior at  each  side,  and  is  continuous  with  the  corresponding  lay- 
er of  the  longitudinal  ligament.  In  this  way  a  large  oval  sur- 
face on  the  posterior  border  of  the  liver  is  left  uncovered  by  pe- 
ritoneum, and  is  connected  to  the  diaphragm  by  a  dense  cellu- 
lar tissue.  This  space  is  formed  principally  by  the  right  lateral 
ligament,  and  is  pierced  near  its  left  extremity  by  the  inferior 
vena  cava,  previously  to  the  passage  of  that  vessel  through  the 
tendinous  opening  in  the  diaphragm. 

The  round  ligament  is  a  fibrous  cord  resulting  from  the  ob- 
literation of  the  umbilical  vein,  and  situated  between  the  two 
layers  of  peritoneum  in  the  anterior  border  of  the  longitudinal 
ligament.  It  may  be  traced  from  the  umbilicus,  along  the  lon- 
gitudinal fissure  upon  the  under  surface  of  the  liver  to  the  in- 
ferior vena  cava  to  which  it  is  connected. 

The  under  surface  of  the  liver  is  marked  by  five  fissures, 
which  divide  its  surface  into  five  compartments  or  lobes,  two 
principal  and  three  minor  lobes :  they  are — the 

Fissures.  Lobes. 

Longitudinal  fissure,  Ri2:ht  lobe, 

Fissure  for  the  ductus  venosus,  Left  lobe, 

Transverse  fissure,  Lobus  quadratns. 

Fissure  for  the  gall  bladder,  Lobus  Spiirelii, 

Fissure  for  the  vena  cava.  Lobus  caudatus. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  289 

The  longitudinal  fissure  is  a  deep  groove  running  from  the 
notch  upon  the  anterior  margin  of  the  liver,  to  the  posterior  bor- 
der of  the  organ.  At  about^one  third  from  its  posterior  extre- 
mity it  is  joined  by  a  sfiort  but  deep  fissure,  the  transverse,  which 
meets  it  transversely  from  the  under  part  of  the  right  lobe. 

The  longitudinal  fissnre  in  front  of  this  junction  lodges  the 
fibrous  cord  of  the  umbilical  vein,  and  is  generally  crossed  by  a 
band  of  hepatic  substance  called  the  pons  hepatis. 

The  fissure  for  the  ductus  venosiis  is  the  shorter  portion  of 
the  longitudinal  fissure,  extending  from  the  junctional  termina- 
tion of  the  transverse  fissure  to  the  posterior  border  of  the  liver, 
and  containing  a  small  fibrous  cord,  the  remains  of  the  ductus 
venosus.  This  fissure  is  therefore  but  a  part  of  the  longitudinal 
fissure. 

The  transverse  fissure  is  the  short  and  deep  fissure,  about 
two  inches  in  length,  through  which  the  hepatic  ducts,  hepatic 
artery,  and  portal  vein,  enter  the  liver.  Hence  this  fissure  was 
considered  by  the  older  anatomists  as  the  gate  (porta)  of  the  liv- 
er ;  and  the  large  vein  entering  the  organ  at  this  point,  the  por- 
tal vein.     At  their  entrance  into  the   transverse  fissure,  the 

PLATE  18.* 


•  Thi  Under  Surface  of  the  Liver.— \.  The  right  lobe.  2.  The  left  lobe. 
3.  The  lobus  quadratus.  4.  The  lobus  Spigelii.  5.  The  lobus  caudatus.  6. 
The  longitudinal  fissure,  in  which  is  seen  the  rounded  cord,  the  remains  of  the 
umbilical  vein.  7.  The  pons  hepatis.  8.  The  fissure  for  the  ductus  venosus ; 
the  obliterated  cord  of  the  ductus  is  seen  passing  backwards  to  be  attached  to 
the  coats  of  the  inferior  vena  cava  (9).  10.  The  gall  bladder,  lodged  in  its 
fossa.  11.  The  transverse  fissure,  containing  from  before  backwards,  the  he- 
patic duct,  hepatic  artery,  and  portal  vein.  12.  The  vena  cava.  13.  A  de- 
pression corresponding  with  the  curve  of  the  colon.  14.  A  double  depression 
produced  by  the  right  kidney  and  its  supra-renal  capsule.  1.5.  The  rough 
si|irface  on  the  posterior  border  of  the  liver  left  uncovered  by  peritoneum  ; 
the  cut  edge  of  peritoneum,  bounding  it  anteriorly,  forms  part  of  the  corona- 
ry ligament.  16.  The  notch  on  the  anterior  border,  separating  the  two  lobes. 
17.  The  notch  on  the  posterior  border,  corresponding  with  the  vertebral  co- 
lumn. 


290  THE    THOMSOJNIAN 

branches  of  the  hepatic  duct  are  the  most  anterior,  next  those  of 

the  artery,  and  most  posteriorly  the  portal  vein. 

'^rhe  fissure  f 07'  the  gall-bladder  is  a  shallow  fossa  extendin.^^ 
forwards  parallel  with  the  longitudinal  fissure  from  the  right 
extremity  of  the  transverse  fissure  to  the  free  border  of  the  liver, 
where  it  frequently  forms  a  notch. 

The  fissure  for  the  vena  cava,  is  a  deep  and  short  fissure  oc- 
casionally a  rounded  tunnel,  which  proceeds  from  a  little  be- 
hind the  riffht  extremity  of  the  transverse  fissure  to  the  posteri- 
or border  of  the  liver,  and  lodges  the  inferior  vena  cava. 

These  five  fissures  taken  collectively  resemble  an  inverted  y, 
the  base  correspondmg  with  the  free  margfin  of  the  liver,  and 
the  apex  with  its  posterior  border.  Viewing  them  in  this  way, 
the  two  anterior  branches  represent  the  longitudinal  fissure  on 
the  left,  and  the  fissure  for  the  gall-bladder  on  the  right  side  ; 
the  two  posterior,  the  fissure  for  the  ductus  venosus  on  the  left, 
and  the  fissure  for  the  vena  cava  on  the  ri^hr  side,  and  the  con- 
necting bar  the  transverse  fissure. 

Lobes. — The  right  lobe  is  four  or  six  times  larger  than  the 
left,  from  which  it  is  separated  on  the  concave  surface  by  the 
longitudinal  fiissure,  and  on  the  convex  by  the  longitudinal  liga- 
ment. It  is  marked  npon  its  under  surfiice  by  the  transverse 
fissure,  and  by  the  fissures  lor  the  gall-bladder  and  vena  cava, 
and  presents  three  depressions,  one  in  front  for  the  curve  of  the 
ascending  colon,  and  two  behind  for  the  right  supra-renal  cap- 
sule, and  kidney. 

The  left  lobe  is  small  and  flattened,  convex  upon  its  upper 
surface,  and  concave  below,  where  it  lies  in  contact  with  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  stomach.  It  is  sometimes  in  contact  by 
its  extremity  with  the  upper  end  of  the  spleen,  and  is  in  rela- 
tion by  its  posterior  border  with  the  cardiac  orifice  of  the  sto- 
mach, and  left  pneiimocrastric  nerve. 

The  lobus  quadratus  is  a  quadrilateral  lobe  situated  upon 
the  under  surface  of  the  right  lobe:  it  is  bounded  in  front  by 
the  free  border  of  the  liver;  behind,  by  the  transverse  fissure  ; 
to  the  right,  by  the  gall  bladder  :  and  to  the  left,  by  the  longi- 
tudinal fissure. 

The  lobus  iSpigelii  is  a  small  triangular  lobe,  also  situated 
upon  the  under  surface  of  the  right  lobe  ;  it  is  bounded  in  front 
by  the  transverse  fissure  ;  and  on  the  sides,  by  the  fissures  for 
the  ductus  venosus  and  vena  cava. 

The  lobus  caudatus  is  a  small  tail-like  appendage  to  the  lo- 
bus Spigelii,  from  which  it  runs  outwards  like  a  crest  into  the 
right  lobe,  and  serves  to  separate  the  ri^ht  extremity  of  the 
transverse  fissure  from  the  commencement  of  the  fissure  for  the 
vena  cava.  In  some  livers  this  lobe  is  extremely  well  marked, 
in  others  it  is  small  and  ill-defined. 


MATERIA    MEDICA,  29-1 

Reverting  to  the  comparison  of  the  fissures  with  an  inverted 
y,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  quadrilateral  interval,  in  front  of 
the  transverse  bar.  represents  the  lobus  quadratus  ;  the  triangu- 
lar space  behind  the  bar,  the  lobns  Spigelii ;  and  the  apex  of 
the  letter,  the  point  of  union  between  the  mferior  vena  cava, 
and  the  remains  of  the  ductus  venosns. 

The  vessels  entering  into  the  structure  of  the  liver  are  also 
Jive  ill  number  ;  they  are,  the 

Hepatic  artery, 
Portal  vein, 
Hepatic  veins, 
Hepatic  ducts, 
Lymphatics. 

The  hepatic  artenj,  portal  vein,  and  hepatic  duct  enter  the 
liver  at  the  transverse  fissure,  and  ramify  throngh  portal  canals 
to  every  part  of  the  organ.  So  that  their  general  direction  is 
from  below  upwards,  and  from  the  centre  towards  the  circum- 
ference. 

Tlie  hepatic  veins  commence  at  the  circumference  and  pro- 
ceed from  before  backwards,  to  open  into  the  vena  cava,  on  the 
posterior  border  of  the  liver.  Hence  the  branches  of  the  two 
veins  cross  each  other  in  their  course. 

The  portal  vein,  hepatic  artery,  and  duct  are  moreover  en- 
veloped in  a  loose  cellular  tissue,  the  capsule  of  Glisson,  which 
permits  them  to  contract  upon  themselves  when  emptied  of 
their  contents;  the  hepatic  veins,  on  the  contrary,  are  closely 
adherent  by  their  parietes  to  the  surface  of  the  canals  in  which 
they  run,  and  are  unable  to  contract.  By  these  characters  the 
anatomist  is  enabled,  in  any  section  of  tlie  liver,  to  distinguish 
at  once  the  most  minute  branch  of  the  portal  vein  from  the  he- 
patic vein  :  the  former  will  be  found  more  or  less  collapsed,  and 
always  accompanied  by  an  artery  and  duct,  and  the  latter  wide- 
ly open  and  solitary. 

The  lymphcttics  are  described  in  the  portion  dedicated  to 
those  vessels. 

The  nerves  of  the  liver  are  derived  from  the  systems  both  of 
animal  and  of  organic  life;  the  former  proceed  from  the  right 
phrenic  and  pneuraogastric  nerves,  and  the  latter  from  the  he- 
patic plexus. 

Structure  and  minute  Anatomy  of  the  Liver,  according  to 
Mr.  Kiernan. 

The  liver  is  composed  of  lobules,  of  a  connectino"  medium, 
called  Glisson^ s  capsule,  of  the  ramifications  of  the  portal  vein, 
hepatic  duct,  hepatic  artery,  hepatic  veins,  lymphatics,  and 
nerves,  and  is  enclosed  and  retained  in  its  proper  situation  by 
the  peritoneum. 


292  THE    THOMSONIAN 

The  lobules  are  small  granular  bodies,  of  about  the  size  of  a 
millet  seed,  of  an  irregular  form,  and  presenting  a  number  of 
rounded  projecting  processes  upon  their  surface.  When  divid- 
ed longitudinally,  they  have  a  foliated  appearance,  and  trans- 
versely, a  polygonal  outline,  with  sharp  or  rounded  angles,  ac- 
cording to  the  smaller  or  greater  quantity  of  Glisson's  capsule 
contained  in  the  liver. 

Each  lobule  is  divided  upon  its  exterior  into  a  base  and  a 
capsular  surface.  The  base  corresponds  with  one  extremity  of 
the  lobule,  is  flattened,  and  rests  upon  a  hepatic  vein,  which  is 
thence  named  sublobidar.  The  capsular  surface  includes  the 
rest  of  the  periphery  of  the  lobule,  and  has  received  its  desig- 
nation from  being  enclosed  in  a  cellular  capsule  derived  from 
the  capsule  of  Glisson.  In  the  centre  of  each  lobule  is  a 
small  vein,  the  intralobular^  which  is  formed  by  the  conver- 
gence of  six  or  eight  minute  venules  from  the  rounded  pro- 
cesses situated  upon  the  surface.  The  intralobular  vein  thus 
constituted,  takes  its  course  through  the  centre  of  the  longitu- 
dinal axis  of  the  lobule,  pierces  the  middle  of  its  base,  and  opens 
into  the  sublobular  vein.  The  circumference  of  the  lobule, 
with  the  exception  of  its  base,  which  is  always  closely  attached 
to  a  sublobular  vein,  is  connected  by  means  of  its  cellular  cap- 
sule with  the  capsular  surfaces  of  surrounding  lobules.  The 
cellular  interval  between  the  lobules  is  the  interlobular  fissure, 
and  the  angular  interstices  formed  by  the  apposition  of  several 
lobules  are  the  interlobular  spaces. 

PALTE  19.* 


•  The  Lobules  of  the  Liver. — A.  The  lobules  as  they  are  seen  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  liver,  or  when  divided  transversely.  1.  The  intralobular  vein  in 
the  centre  of  each  lobule.  2.  The  interlobular  fissure.  3.  The  interlobular 
space.  B.  A  longitudinal  section  of  two  lobules.  1.  A  superficial  lo- 
bule, terminating  abruptly,  and  resembling  a  section  at  its  extremity.  2.  A 
deep  lobule,  showing  the  f"oliated  appearance  of  its  section.  3.  The  intralo- 
bular vein,  with  its  converging  venules  :  the  vein  terminates  in  a  sublobular 
vein.    4.  The  external  or  capsular  surface  of  the  lobule. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  293 

The  lobules  of  the  centre  of  the  liver  are  angular,  and  some- 
what smaller  than  those  of  the  surface,  from  the  greater  com- 
pression to  which  they  are  submitted.  The  superficial  lobules 
are  incomplete,  and  give  to  the  surface  of  the  organ  the  appear- 
ance and  all  the  advantages  resulting  from  an  examination  of  a 
transverse  section. 

Each  lobule  is  composed  of  a  plexus  of  biliary  duets,  of  a  ve- 
nous plexus,  formed  by  branches  of  the  portal  vein,  of  a  branch 
(intralobular)  of  an  hepatic  vein,  and  of  minute  arteries;  nerves 
and  absorbents,  it  is  to  be  presumed,  also  enter  into  their  formation, 
but  cannot  be  traced  into  them.  Examined  with  the  micro- 
scope, a  lobule  is  apparently  composed  of  numerous  minute  bo- 
dies of  a  yellowish  color,  and  of  various  forms,  connected  with 
each  other  by  vessels.  These  minute  bodies  are  the  acini  of 
Malpighi.  If  an  uninjected  lobule  be  examined  and  contrasted 
with  an  injected  lobule,  it  will  be  found  that  the  acini  of  Mal- 
pighi in  the  former  are  identical  with  the  injected  lobular  bilia- 
ry plexus  in  the  latter,  and  the  blood-vessels  in  both  will  be  ea- 
sily distinguished  from  the  ducts, 

Glissotts  capsule  is  the  cellular  tissue  which  envelopes  the 
hepatic  artery,  portal  vein,  and  hepatic  duct,  during  their  pass- 
age through  the  right  border  of  the  lesser  omentum,  and  which 
continues  to  surround  them  to  their  ultimate  distribution  in  the 
Bubstance  of  the  lobules.  It  forms  for  each  lobule  a  distinct  cap- 
sule, which  invests  it  on  all  sides  with  the  exception  of  its  base, 
connects  all  the  lobules  together,  and  constitutes  the  proper 
capsule  of  the  entire  organ.  But  "  Glisson'a  capsule,"  observes 
Mr.  Kiernan,  "  is  not  mere  cellular  tissue ;  it  is  to  the  liver 
what  the  pia  mater  is  to  the  brain  ;  it  is  a  cellulo-vascular  mem- 
brane in  which  the  vessels  divide  and  subdivide  to  an  extreme 
degree  of  minuteness  ;  which  lines  the  portal  canals,  forming 
sheaths  for  the  larger  vessels  contained  in  them,  and  a  web  in 
which  the  smaller  vessels  ramify  ;  which  enters  the  interlobular 
fissures,  and  with  the  vessels  forms  the  capsules  of  the  lobules ; 
and  which  finally  enters  the  lobules,  and  with  the  blood  ves- 
sels expands  itself  over  the  secreting  biliary  ducts."  Hence 
arises  a  natural  division  of  the  capsule  into  three  portions,  a  va- 
ginal, an  interlobular,  and  a  lobular  'portion. 

The  vaginal  portion  is  that  which  invests  the  hepatic  artery, 
hepatic  duct,  and  portal  vein,  in  the  portal  canals ;  in  the  laro-er 
canals  it  completely  surrounds  these  vessels,  but  in  the  smaller 
is  situated  only  on  that  side  which  is  occupied  by  the  artery  and 
duct.  The  interlobular  portion  occupies  the  interlobular  fissures 
and  spaces,  and  the  lobular  portion  forms  the  supporting  tissue 
to  the  substance  of  the  lobules. 

The  portal  vein,  entering  the  liver  at  the  transverse  fissure, 
ramifies  through  its  structure  in  canals  which  resemble,  by  their 


^94  THE   THOMSONIAN 

surfaces,  the  external  superficies  of  the  liver,  and  are  formed  by 
the  capsular  surfaces  of  the  lobules, — "  all  their  canals  being," 
as  it  were,  "tubular  inflections  inwards  of  the  superfices  of  the 
liver."  These  are  the  portal  canals,  and  contain,  besides  the 
portal  vein  with  its  ramifications,  the  artery  and  duct  with  their 
branches. 

In  the  larger  canals,  the  vessels  are  separated  from  the  parie- 
tes  of  the  cavity  by  a  v;eb  of  Glisson's  capsule  ;  but,  in  the 
smaller,  the  portal  vein  is  in  contact  with  the  surface  of  the  ca- 
nal for  about  two-thirds  of  its  cylinder,  the  opposite  third  being 
in  relation  with  the  artery  and  duct  and  their  mvesting  capsule. 
If,  therefore,  the  portal  vein  were  laid  open  by  a  longitudinal 
incision  in  one  of  these  smaller  canals,  the  coats  being  transpa- 
rent, the  outline  of  the  lobules,  bounded  by  their  interlobular 
fissures,  would  be  as  distinctly  seen  as  upon  the  external  sur- 
face of  the  liver,  and  the  smaller  venous  branches  would  be  ob- 
served entering  the  interlobular  spaces. 

The  branches  of  the  portal  vein  are,  the  vaginal,  interlobular, 
and  lobular.  The  vaginal  branches  are  those  which,  being 
given  otf  in  the  portal  canals,  have  to  pass  through  the  sheath 
(vagina)  of  Glisson's  capsule,  previously  to  entering  the  inter- 
lobular spaces.  In  this  course  they  form  an  intricate  plexus, 
the  vaginal  plexus,  which,  depending  for  its  existence  on  the 
capsule  of  Glisson,  necessarily  surrounds  the  vessels,  as  does 
that  capsule  in  the  larger  canals,  and  occupies  the  capsular  side 
only  in  the  smaller  canals.  The  interlobular  branches  are 
given  off  from  the  vaginal  portal  plexus  where  it  exists,  and  di- 
rectly from  the  portal  veins,  in  that  part  of  the  smaller  canals 
where  the  coats  of  the  vein  are  in  contact  with  the  walls  of  the 
canal.  They  then  enter  the  interlobular  spaces  and  divide  into 
branches,  which  cover  with  their  ramifications  every  part  of  the 
surface  of  the  lobules  with  the  exception  of  their  bases,  and 
those  extremities  of  the  superficial  lobules  which  appear  upon 
the  surfaces  of  the  liver.  The  interlobular  veins  communicate 
freely  with  each  other,  and  with  the  corresponding  veins  of  ad- 
joining fissures,  and  establish  a  general  portal  anastomosis 
throughout  the  entire  liver.  The  lobular  branches  are  derived 
from  the  interlobular  veins ;  they  form  a  plexus  within  each 
lobule,  and  converge  from  the  circumference  towards  the  cen- 
tre, where  they  terminate  in  the  minute  radicles  of  the  intralo- 
bular vein.  This  plexus,  interposed  between  the  interlobular 
portal  veins  and  the  intralobular  hepatic  vein,  constitutes  the 
venous  part  of  the  lobule,  and  may  be  called  the  lobular  venous 
plexus.  The  irregular  islets  of  the  substance  of  the  lobules, 
seen  between  the  meshes  of  this  plexus  by  means  of  the  micro- 
scope, are  the  acina  of  Malpighi,  and  are  shown  by  Mr.  Kier- 
nan  to  be  portions  of  the  lobular  biliary  plexus. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  295 

The  portal  vein  returns  the  venous  blood  from  the  chylopoi- 
etic  viscera,  to  be  circulated  through  the  lobules  ;  it  also  receives 
the  venous  blood  which  results  from  the  distribution  of  the  he- 
patic artery. 

The  hepatic  duct ^  entering  the  liver  at  the  transverse  fissure, 
divides  into  branches,  which  ramify  through  the  portal  canals, 
with  the  portal  vein  and  hepatic  artery,  to  terminate  in  the  sub- 
stance of  the  lobnies.  Its  brauciies,  like  those  of  the  portal  vein, 
are  vaginal,  interlobular  and  lobular. 

The  vaginal  i?'a«cAf?.<f  ramify  through  the  capsule  of  Glis- 
son,  and  form  a  vaginal  biliary  plexus,  which,  like  the  vaginal 
portal  plexus,  surrounds  the  vessels  in  tlie  large  canals,  but  is 
dehcient  on  that  side  of  the  smaller  canals  near  which  the  duct 
is  placed.  The  branches  given  off  by  the  vaginal  biliary  plexus, 
are  interlobular  and  lobular.  The  interlobular  branches  pro- 
ceed from  the  vaginal  biliary  plexus  where  it  exists,  and  direct- 
ly from  the  hepatic  duct  on  that  side  of  the  smaller  canals 
against  which  the  duct  is  placed.  They  enter  the  interlobular 
spaces,  and  ramify  upon  the  capsular  surface  of  the  lobules,  in 
the  interlobular  fissures,  where  they  communicate  freely  with 
each  other.  The  lobular  ducts  are  derived  chiefly  from  the 
interlobular  ;  but  to  those  lobules  forming  the  walls  of  the  por- 
tal canals,  they  pass  directly  from  the  vaginal  plexus.  They 
enter  the  lobule  and  form  a  plexus  in  its  interior,  the  lobular 
biliary  plexus,  which  constitutes  the  principal  part  of  the  sub- 
stance of  the  lobule.  The  ducts  terminate  most  probably  ia 
caccal  extremities. 

The  coats  of  the  ducts  are  very  vascular,  and  supplied  with 
a  number  of  mucous  follicles,  which  are  distributed  irregularly 
in  the  larger,  but  are  arranged  in  two  parallel  longitudinal  rows 
in  the  smaller  ducts. 

The  hepatic  artery  enters  the  liver  with  the  portal  vein  and 
hepatic  duct,  and  ramifies  with  those  vessels  through  the  portal 
canals.  Its  branches  are  the  vaginal,  interlobular  and  lobular. 
The  vaginal  branches,  like  those  of  the  portal  vein  and  hepatic 
duct,  form  Kvaginal  plexus,  which  exists  throughout  the  whole 
extent  of  the  portal  canals,  with  the  exception  of  that  side  of  the 
smaller  canals  which  corresponds  with  the  artery.  The  ijiter- 
lobular  branches,  arising  from  the  vaginal  plexus  and  from  the 
parietal  side  of  the  artery  in  the  smaller  canals,  ramify  through 
the  interlobular  fissures,  and  are  principally  distributed  to  the 
coats  of  the  interlobular  ducts. 

"From  the  superficial  interlobular  fissures,  small  arteries 
emerge,  and  ramify  in  the  proper  capsule,  on  the  convex  and 
concave  surface  of  the  liver,  and  in  the  ligaments.  These  are 
the  capsular  arteriesP  Where  the  capsule  is  well  developed, 
« these  vessels  cover  the  surfaces  of  the  liver  with  a  beautiful 


^296  THE    THOMSONIAN 

plexus  "  and  "  anastomose  with  branches  of  the  phrenic,  inter- 
nal mammary,  and  supra-renal  arteries,"  and  with  the  epigas- 
tric. 

The  lobular  branches,  extremely  minute  and  few  in  num- 
ber, are  the  nutrient  vessels  of  the  lobules,  and  terminate  in  the 
lobular  venous  plexus. 

All  the  venous  blood  resulting  from  the  distribution  of  the 
hepatic  artery,  even  that  from  the  vasa  vasorum  of  the  hepatic 
veins,  is  returned  into  the  portal  vein. 

The  hepatic  veins  commence  in  thesubstanceof  each  lobule 
by  minute  venules,  which  receive  the  blood  from  the  lobular 
venous  plexus,  and  converge  to  form  the  intralobular  vein. 
The  intralobular  vein  passes  through  the  central  axis  of  the 
lobule,  and  through  the  middle  of  its  base,  to  terminate  in  a 
sublobular  vein  ;  and  the  union  of  the  sublobular  veins  consti- 
tutes the  hepatic  trunks,  which  terminate  in  the  inferior  vena 
cava.  The  hepatic  venous  system  consists,  therefore,  of  three 
sets  of  vessels  ;  intralobular  veins,  sublobular  veins,  and  hepa- 
tic trunks. 

The  sublobular  veins  are  contained  in  canals  formed  solely 
by  the  bases  of  the  lobules,  with  which,  from  the  absence  of 
Glisson's  capsule,  they  are  in  immediate  contact.  Their  coats 
are  thin  and  transparent ;  and,  if  they  be  laid  open  by  a  longi- 
tudinal incision,  the  bases  of  the  lobules  will  be  distinctly  seen, 
separated  by  interlobular  fissures,  and  perforated  through  the 
centre  by  the  opening  of  the  intralobular  vein. 

The  hepatic  trunks  are  formed  by  the  union  of  the  sublobu- 
lar veins;  they  are  contained  in  canals  (hepatic  venous)  similar 
in  structure  to  the  portal  canals,  and  lined  by  a  prolongation  of 
the  proper  capsule.  They  proceed  from  before  backwards,  and 
terminate  by  two  large  openings,  corresponding  to  the  right  and 
left  lobe  of  the  liver  in  the  inferior  vena  cava. 

It  is  \.o  Kiernan  that  anatomical  science  is  indebted  for  the 
clear,  distinct,  and  intelligible  idea  of  the  structure  of  this  most 
complicated  organ,  which  has  been  furnished  by  the  researches 
of  that  anatomist.  To  value  this  knowledge  as  it  deserves,  we 
have  but  to  reflect  upon  the  unsuccessful,  though  not  fruitless, 
labors  of  those  great  discoverers  in  structural  anatomy,  Malpighi 
and  Ruysch,  upon  the  same  subject.  It  is  not,  however,  in  an 
anatomical,  or  even  a  physiological  point  of  view  merelj^,  that 
we  have  to  admire  these  discoveries  ;  for  in  their  practical  ap- 
plication to  the  elucidation  of  pathological  appearances,  and  the 
explanation  of  the  phenomena  of  disease,  they  are  still  more  in- 
teresting. 

Summary. — The  liver  has  been  shown  to  be  composed  of 
lobules ;  the  lobules  (excepting  their  bases)  are  invested  and 
connected  together,  the  vessels  supported,  and  the  whole  organ 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  297 

enclosed  by  Glisson''s  capsule  ;  and  they  are  so  arranged,  that 
the  base  of  every  lobule  in  the  liver  is  in  contact  with  an  hepa- 
tic vein  (sublobular). 

The  ]>ortal  vein  distributes  its  numberless  branches  through 
portal  canals,  which  are  channelled  through  every  part  of  the 
organ  ;  it  brings  the  returning  blood  from  the  chylopoictic  vis- 
cera ;  it  collects  also  tlie  venous  blood  from  the  ultimate  ramifi- 
cations of  the  hepatic  artery  in  the  liver  itself.  It  gives  off 
branches  in  tiie  canals,  which  are  called  vaginal,  and  form  a 
venous  vaginal  plexus  ;  these  give  off  interlobular  branches, 
and  the  latter  enter  the  lobules  and  form  lobular  venous  plex- 
uses, from  the  blood  circulating  in  which  the  bile  is  secreted. 

Tiic  bile  in  the  lobule  is  recaived  by  a  network  of  minute 
ducts,  the  lobular  biliary  ])lexus  ;  it  is  conveyed  from  the  lo- 
bule into  the  interlobular  ducts  :  it  is  thence  poured  into  the 
biliary  vaginal  plexus  of  the  portal  canals,  and  tlience  into  the 
excreting  ducts,  by  which  it  is  carried  to  the  duodenum  and 
gall-bladder,  after  being  mingled  in  its  course  with  the  mucous 
secretion  from  the  numberless  muciparous  follicles  in  the  walls 
of  the  ducts. 

The  hepatic  artery  distrilintcs  branches  through  every  por- 
tal canal  ;  gives  off  vaginal  branches,  which  form  a  vaginal 
hepatic  plexus,  from  which  the  interlobtilar  branches  arise,  and 
those  latter  terminate  ultimately  in  the  lobular  venous  plexuses 
of  the  portal  vein.  The  artery  ramifies  abundantly  in  the  coats 
of  the  hi:^patic  ducts,  enabling  them  to  provide  their  mucous  se- 
cretion :  and  supplies  the  vasa  vasorum  of  the  portal  and  hepa- 
tic veins,  and  the  nutrient  vessels  of  the  entire  organ. 

The  hepatic  veins  commence  in  the  centre  of  each  lobule  by 
minute  radicles,  which  collect  the  impure  blood  from  the  lobu- 
lar venous  plexus  and  convey  it  into  the  intralobular  veins, 
and  the  sublobular  veins  unite  to  form  the  large  hepatic  trunks 
by  which  the  blood  is  conveyed  into  the  vena  cava. 

The  physiological  deduction  arising  out  of  this  anatomical 
arrangement  is,  that  the  bile  is  wJtolly  secreted  from  venous 
blood,  and  not  from  a  mixed,  venous  and  arterial  blood  ;  for  al- 
though the  portal  vein  receives  its  blood  from  two  sources,  viz. 
from  the  chylopoictic  viscera  and  from  the  capillaries  of  the  he- 
patic artery,  yet  the  very  fact  of  the  blood  of  the  latter  vessel 
having  passed  through  its  capillaries  into  the  portal  vein,  or  in 
extremely  small  quantity  into  the  capillary  network  of  the  lo- 
bular venus  plexus,  is  sufficient  to  establish  its  venous  charac- 
ter. 

The  pathological  deductions  depend  upon  the  following  facts: 
Each  lobule  is  a  perfect  gland,  of  uniform  structure,  of  uniform 
color,  and  possessing  the  same  degree  of  vascularity  through- 
out.    It  is  the  seat  of  a  double  venous  circulation,  the  vessels  of 

20 


298  •  THE  THOMSONIAN 

the  one  (hepatic)  being  situated  in  the  centre  of  the  Jobule,  and 
those  of  the  other  (portal)  in  the  circumference.  Now  the  co- 
lor of  the  lobule,  as  of  the  entire  liver,  depends  chiefly  upon  the 
proportion  of  blood  contained  in  these  two  sets  of  vessels  ;  and 
so  ionor  as  the  circulation  is  natural,  the  color  will  be  uniform. 
But  the  instant  that  any  cause  is  developed  which  shall  inter- 
fere with  the  free  circulation  of  either,  there  will  be  an  imme- 
diate diversity  in  the  color  of  the  lobule. 

Thus,  if  there  be  any  impediment  to  the  free  circulation  of 
the  venous  blood  throuiih  the  heart  or  lungs,  the  circulation  in 
the  hepatic  veins  will  he  retarded,  and  the  sublobular  and  the 
intralobular  veins  will  become  congested,  giving  rise  to  a  more 
or  less  extensive  redness  in  the  centre  of  each  of  the  lobules, 
while  the  marginal  or  non-congested  portion  presents  a  distinct 
border  of  a  yellowish  white,  yellow,  or  green  color,  according 
to  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  bile  it  may  contain.  This  is 
passive  congestion  of  the  liver,  the  usual  and  natuial  state  of 
the  organ  alter  death  ;  and,  as  it  commences  with  the  hepatic 
vein,  it  may  be  called  the  first  stage  of  hepatic  venous  conges- 
tion. 

But  if  the  causes  which  produced  this  state  of  congestion 
continue,  or  be  from  the  beginning  of  a  more  active  kind,  the 
congestion  will  extend  through  the  lobular  venous  plexuses  in- 
to those  branches  of  the  portal  vein  situated  in  the  ivlcrlohvlar 
Jissures,  but  not  to  those  in  the  sjmces,  which,  being  larger, 
and  giving  origin  to  those  in  the  fissures,  are  the  last  lo  be  con- 
gested. In  tills  second  stage,  the  liver  has  a  mottled  appear- 
ance;  the  noncon^ested  substance  is  arranged  in  isolated,  cir- 
cular, and  ramose  patches,  in  the  centres  of  which  the  spaces 
and  parts  of  the  fissures  are  seen.  This  is  an  extended  degree 
of  hepatic  xenons  congestion ;  it  is  active  congestion  of  the 
liver,  and  very  commonly  attends  diseases  of  the  heart  and 
lungs. 

There  is  anotlier  form  of  partial  venous  congestion,  whicli 
commences  in  the  portal  vein  ;  this  is,  therefore,  portal  venous 
con<restion.  It  is  of  very  rare  occurrence,  and  Mr.  Kiernan 
has  observed  it  in  children  only.  In  this  form,  the  congested 
substance  never  assumes  the  deep  red  color  which  characterizes 
hepatic  venous  congestion  ;  the  interlobular  fissures  and  spaces, 
and  the  marginal  poriions  of  the  lobules,  are  of  a  deeper  color 
than  usual ;  the  congested  substance  is  continuous  and  cortical, 
the  noncon«"ested  substance  being  medullary,  and  occupying  the 
centres  of  the  lobules.  The  second  stage  of  hepatic  venous 
congestion,  in  which  the  congested  substance  appears,  but  is 
not  cortical,  may  be  easily  confounded  with  portal  venoas  con- 
gestion. 

These  are  instances  o(  partial  congesiion,hut  there  i»some- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  299 

times  general  congestion  of  the  or^an.     In  general  congestion 
the  whole  liver  is  of  a  red  color,  but  the  central  portions  of  the 

lobules  are  usually  of  a  deeper  hue  than  the  marginal  portions. 

GALL-BLADDER. 

The  gall-bladder  is  the  reservoir  for  the  bile  ;  it  is  a  pyriform 
sac,  situated  in  a  fossa,  upon  the  under  surface  of  the  right  lobe 
of  the  liver,  and  extending  from  the  right  extremity  of  the  trans- 
verse fissure  to  its  free  margin.  It  is  divided  into  a  body,  fun- 
dus, and  neck — the  fundus,  or  broad  extremity  in  the  natural 
position  of  the  liver,  is  placed  downwards,  and  frequently  pro- 
jects beyond  the  free  margin  of  the  liver,  while  the  neck,  small 
and  constricted,  is  directed  upwards.  This  sac  is  composed  of 
three  coats,  serous,  fibrous,  and  mucous.  The  serous  coat  is 
partial,  is  derive^d  from  the  peritoneum,  and  covers  that  side 
only  which  is  unattached  to  the  liver.  The  middle  or  fibrous 
coat  is  a  thin  but  strong  cellulo-fibrous  layer,  intermingled  with 
tendinous  fibres.  It  is  connected  by  one  side  to  the  liver,  and 
by  the  other  to  the  peritoneum.  The  internal  or  mucous  coat 
is  but  loosely  connected  with  the  fibrous  layer ;  it  is  every- 
where raised  into  minute  rugae,-  which  give  it  a  beautifully  re- 
ticulated appearance,  and  forms  at  the  neck  of  the  sac  a  spiral 
valve. 

It  is  continuous  through  the  hepatic  duct  with  the  mucous 
membrane,  lining  all  the  ducts  of  the  liver,  and  through  the 
ductus  communis  choledochus,  with  the  mucous  membrane  of 
the  ailmentary  canal. 

The  biliary  ducts  are  the  ductus  communis  choledochus,  the 
cystic  and  the  hepatic  duct. 

The  ductus  communis  choledochus  is  the  common  excretory 
duct  of  the  liver  and  gall-bladder  ;  it  is  about  three  inches  in 
length,  and  commences  upon  the  papilla,  situated  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  cylinder  of  the  perpendicular  portion  of  the  duode- 
num. Passing  obliquely  between  the  mucous  and  muscular 
coats,  it  ascends  behind  the  duodenum,  and  through  the  right 
border  of  the  lesser  omentum,  and  divides  into  two  branches, 
the  cystic  duct  and  hepatic  duct.  It  is  constricted  at  its  com- 
mencement in  the  duodenum,  and  becomes  dilated  in  its  pro- 
gress upwards. 

The  cystic  duct,  about  an  inch  in  length,  passes  outwards  to 
the  neck  of  the  gall-bladder,  with  which  it  is  continuous. 

The  hepatic  duct  continues  onwards  to  the  transverse  fissure 
of  the  liver,  and  divides  into  two  branches,  which  ramify 
through  the  portal  canals  to  every  part  of  the  liver. 

The  coats  of  the  hepatic  ducts  are  an  external  or  fibrous,  and 
an  internal  or  mucous. 

The  external  coat  is  composed  of  a  contractile  fibrous  tissue, 


300  THE    THOMSONIAN 

which  is  probably  muscular ;  but  its  muscularity  has  not  yet 
been  demonstrated  in  the  human  subject. 

The  mucous  coat  is  continuous  on  the  one  hand  with  the  li- 
ning membrane  of  the  hepatic  ducts  and  gall-bladder,  and  on 
the  other  wiih  that  of  the  duodenum. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  gall-bladder  is  supplied  with  blood 
by  the  cystic  artery,  a  branch  of  the  hepatic.  Its  veins  return 
their  blood  into  the  portal  vein.  The  nerves  are  derived  from 
the  hepatic  plexus. 

THE  PANCREAS. 

The  -pancreas  is  a  long,  flattened,  conglomerate  gland,  ana- 
logous to  the  salivary  glands;  it  is  situated  transversely  across 
the  posterior  wall  of  the  abdomen,  behind  the  stomach,  and 
restintr  upon  the  aorta,  vena  portee.  inferior  vena  cava,  and  the 
oris^in  of  the  superior  mesenteric  artery,  opporite  to  the  second 
luinbar  vertebra.  It  is  divided  into  a  body,  and  a  greater  and  a 
smaller  extremity;  the  great  end  or  head  is  placed  towards  the 
iio-ht,  and  is  surrounded  by  the  curve  of  the  duodenum  ;  the 
lesser  end  extends  to  the  left  nearly  as  fur  as  the  spleei] ;  along 
its  upper  border  is  the  splenic  artery  and  vein,  and  it  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  transverse  portion  of  the  duodenum  below  by  the 
superior  mesenteric  artery  and  portal  vein. 

In  structure,  it  is  composed  of  reddish  yellow  angular  lo- 
bules ;  these  consist  of  smaller  lobules,  and  tliese  latter  are  made 
up  of  the  arborescent  ramifications  of  muiute  ducts,  terminating 
in  csecal  pouches. 

The  pancreatic  duct  commences  at  the  papilla  upon  the  in- 
ner surface  of  the  perpendicular  portion  of  the  duodenum,  close 
to  the  origin,  and  sometimes  in  common  with  the  ductus  com- 
munis choledochus,  and  passing  obliquely  between  the  mucous 
and  muscular  coats,  runs  from  right  to  left  through  the  middle 
of  the  gland,  lying  nearer  to  its  anterior  than  to  its  posterior 
surface.  At  about  the  comn:iencement  of  the  apicial  third  of 
its  course,  it  divides  into  two  parallel  terminal  branches.  It 
gives  otf  numerous  small  branches,  which  are  distributed 
through  the  lobules,  and  constitute  by  their  ramifications  the 
substance  of  the  gland.  One  of  these  branches,  larger  than  the 
rest,  receives  the  secretion  from  the  head  of  the  pancreas,  and 
pours  it  into  the  pancreatic  duct,  near  to  the  duodenum.  It  has 
been  named  the  ductus  leaner eaticiis  minor. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — 'I'he  arteries  of  the  pancreas  are  branch- 
es of  the  splenic,  hepatic,  and  superior  mesenteric;  the  veins 
open  into  the  splenic  vein ;  the  lymphatics  terminate  in  the 
lumbar  glands.    The  nerves  are  filaments  of  the  splenic  plexus. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  301 

THE  SPLEEN. 

The  spleen  is  an  oblong,  flattened  organ,  of  a  dark  bluish 
red  color,  situated  in  the  left  hypochondriac  region.  The  ex- 
ternal surface  is  convex,  the  internal  slightly  concave,  and  in- 
dented along  the  middle  line,  for  the  entrance  and  exit  of  ves- 
sels; this  isihe  lulus  llenis.  The  upper  extremity  is  some- 
what larger  than  the  lower,  and  rounded ;  the  inferior  is  flat- 
tened ;  the  posterior  border  is  obtuse  ;  the  anterior  is  sharp  and 
marked  by  several  notches. 

The  spleen  is  in  relation,  by  its  external  or  convex  surface 
with  the  diaphragm,  by  its  concave  surface  with  the  great  end 
of  the  stomach,  by  its  upper  end  with  the  diaphragm,  and  some- 
times with  the  extremity  of  the  left  lobe  of  the  liver,  and  by  its 
lower  end  with  the  anterior  surface  of  the  left  kidney.  It  is 
connected  to  the  stomach  by  the  gastro-splenic  omentum  and 
the  vessels  contained  in  that  dnplicature.  A  second  ?pleen  is 
sometimes  found  suspended  to  one  of  the  branches  of  the  sple- 
nic artery,  near  to  the  great  end  of  the  stomach  :  when  it  ex- 
ists, it  is  round  and  of  very  small  size,  rarely  larger  than  a  ha- 
zle-nnt. 

The  spleen  is  invested  by  the  peritoneum,  and  by  a  tunica 
propria  of  yellow  elastic  tissue,  which  enables  it  to  yield  to  the 
greater  or  less  distension  of  its  vessels.  The  elastic  tunic  forms 
sheaths  for  the  vessels  in  their  ramifications  through  the  organ, 
and-  from  these  sheaths  small  fibrous  bands  are  given  ofl^  in 
all  directions,  which  become  attached  to  the  internal  surface  of 
the  elastic  tunic,  and  constitute  the  cellnlar  framework  of  the 
spleen.  The  substance  occupying  the  interspaces  of  this  tissue 
is  soft  and  jjranular,  and  of  a  bright  red  color;  in  animals  it  is 
interspersed  with  small  white  soft  corpuscules. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — T.ie  splenic  artery  is  of  very  large 
size  in  proportion  to  the  bulk  of  the  spleen  ;  it  is  a  division  of 
the  coeiiac  axis,  l^he  splenic  vein  returns  its  blood  into  the 
portal  vein.  The  lymphatics  are  remarkable  for  their  number 
and  large  size,  and  terminate  in  the  lumbar  glands.  The 
nerves  are  the  splenic  plexus,  derived  from  the  solar  plexus. 

THE  SUPRA-RENAL  CAPSULES. 

The  supra-renal  capsules  are  two  small  yellowish  and  flat- 
tened bodies,  surmounting  the  kidneys,  and  inclining  inwards 
towards  the  vertebral  column.  The  right  is  somewhat  three 
cornered  in  shape,  the  left  more  semilunar  ;  they  are  connected 
to  the  kidneys  by  the  common  investing  cellular  tissue,  and 
each  capsule  is  marked  upon  its  anterior  surface  by  a  fissure 
which  appears  to  divide  it  into  two  lobes.  They  are  larger  in 
the  foetus  than  in  the  adult,  and  appear  to  perform  some  office 
connected  with  embryonic  life. 


302  THE    THOMSONIAN 

In  structure,  it  is  composed  of  two  substances,  conical  and 
medullary.  The  cortical  substance  is  of  a  yellowish  color,  and 
consists  of  straight  parallel  fibres,  placed  perpendicularly  side 
by  side.  The  medullary  substance  is  generally  of  a  dark 
brown  color,  double  the  quantity  of  the  yellow  substance,  soft 
in  texture,  and  contains  within  its  centre  the  trunk  of  a  Jarge 
vein,  the  vena  supra-renalis.  It  is  the  large  size  of  this  vein 
that  gives  to  the  fresh  supra-renal  capsule  the  appearance  of  a 
central  cavity;  the  dark  colored  pulpy  or  fluid  contents  of  the 
capsule  at  a  certain  period  after  death,  are  produced  by  soften- 
ing of  the  medullary  substance. 

Dr.  Nagle  has  shown,  that  the  appearance  of  straight  fibres 
in  the  cortical  substance  is  caused  by  the  direction  of  a  plexus 
of  capillary  vessels.  Of  the  numerous  minute  arteries,  supply- 
ing the  supra-renal  capsule,  he  says,  the  greater  number  enter 
the  cortical  substance  at  every  point  of  its  surface,  and,  after 
proceeding  for  scarcely  half  a  line  in  its  substance,  divide  into 
a  plexus  of  straight  capillary  vessels.  Some  few  of  the  small 
arteries  pierce  the  cortical  layer,  and  give  off  several  branches 
in  the  medullary  substance,  which  proceed  in  different  direc- 
tions, and  re-enter  the  cortical  layer,  to  divide  into  a  capillary 
plexus  in  a  similar  manner  with  the  preceding.  From  the  ca- 
pillary plexus  composing  the  cortical  layer,  the  blood  is  receiv- 
ed by  numerous  small  veins  which  form  a  venous  plexus  in  the 
medullary  substance,  and  terminate  at  acute  angles  in  the  large 
central  vein. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  supra-renal  arteries  are  derived 
from  the  aorta,  from  the  renal,  and  from  the  phrenic  arteries; 
they  are  remarkable  for  the  innumerable  minute  arteries  into 
which  they  divide  previously  to  entering  the  capsule.  The  su- 
pra-refial  vei7i,  collecting  the  blood  from  the  medullary  venous 
plexus,  and  receiving  several  branches  which  pierce  the  corti- 
cal layer,  opens  directly  into  the  vena  cava  on  the  right  side^ 
and  into  the  renal  vein  on  the  left. 

The  lymphatics  are  large  and  vexy  numerous  ;  they  termi- 
nate in  the  lumbar  glands.  The  nerves  are  derived  from  the 
renal  and  from  the  phrenic  plexus. 

THE  KIDNEYS. 

The  kidneys  are  situated  in  the  lumbar  regions,  behind  the 
peritoneum,  and  on  each  side  of  the  vertebral  column,  which 
they  approach  by  their  upper  extremities.  They  are  usually 
enclosed  in  a  quantity  of  fat,  and  rest  upon  the  diaphragm  and 
the  anterior  lamella  of  the  transversalis  muscle,  which  separates 
them  from  the  quadratus  lumborum. 

The  right  kindey  is  somewhat  lower  than  the  left,  from  the 
position  of  the  liver,  and  is  in  relation  by  its  anterior  surface 


MATERIA   MEDICA. 


303 


PLATE 


20. 


with  the  liver  cand  descending  portion  of  the  duodenum  which 
rest  upon  it.  and  is  covered  in  by  the  ascending  colon  and  by- 
its  flexure. 

The  hft  kidney,  hiafher  than  the  right,  is  covered  in  front 
by  the  spleen,  descending  colon  with  its  flexure,  and  by  a  por- 
tion of  the  small  intestines.  The  convex  border  of  the  kidney 
is  turned  outwards,  towards  the  parietes  of  the  abdomen;  the 
concave  border  looks  inwards  towards  the  vertebral  column, 
and  is  excavated  by  a  deep  fissure — the  hilus  renaiis — in  which 
are  situated  the  vessels  and  nerves  and  pelvis  of  the  kidney,  the 
renal  vein  being  the  most  anterior,  next  the  renal  artery,  and 
lastly  the  pelvis. 

The  kidney  is  invested  by  a  proper 
fibrous  capsule,  which  is  easily  torn 
from  its  surface.  AVhen  divided  by  a 
longitudinal  incision,  carried  from  the 
convex  to  the  concave  border,  it  pre- 
sents in  its  interior  two  structures,  an 
external  or  vascular  (cortical)  and  an 
internal  or  tubular  (medullary)  sub- 
stance. The  tubular  portion  is  form- 
ed of  pale  reddish  colored  conical  bo- 
dies, corresponding  by  their  ba!=es  with 
the  vascular  structure,  and  by  their 
apices  with  the  hilus  of  the  organ. — 
These  bodies  are  named  cones,  and  are 
from  eight  to  fifteen  in  number.  The 
vascular  portion  is  composed  of  blood 
vessels,  and  of  the  plexiform  convolutions  of  urimferous  tubulij 
and  not  only  forms  the  surface  of  the  kidney,  but  dips  between 
the  cones  and  surrounds  them  nearly  to  their  apices.  The  tu- 
buU  uriniferi  communicate  frequently  with  each  other  in  the 
vas  cular  structure  of  the  kidney,  and  terminate  in  anastomosing 
loops  and  caecal  extremities.  They  are  each  surrounded  by  a 
fine  network  of  capillary  vessels.  When  examined  with  a  lens 
of  low  power,  a  multitude  of  small  globular  bodies  (glomeruli) 
are  seen  to  be  interspersed  through  the  vascular  structure  of 
the  organ,  and  to  be  connected  to  the  minute  twigs  of  the  arte- 
ries. They  are  about  one  l30th  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  are 
composed  of  an  aggregated  plexus  of  capillary  vessels,  and  en- 
close a  small  central  cavity,  the  use  of  which  is  as  yet  un- 
known. 


•  A  Section  of  the  Kidney — surmounted  by  the  supra-renal  capsule.  1.  The 
supra-renal  capsule.  2.  The  vascular  portion.  3,3.  Its  tubular  portion,  con- 
sistins?  of  cones.  4,4.  Two  of  the  calices,  rceiving  the  apex  of  their  corres- 
ponding cones.  5,5,5.  The  three  infundibula.  G.^The  pelvis.  7.  The  ure- 
ter. 


304  THE  THOMSONIAN 

The  cones  are  composed  of  minute  straight  tiibuli  uriniferi, 
of  aboiU  the  diameter  of  a  fine  hair ;  they  divide  into  parallel 
branches  in  their  course,  and  commence  by  minute  openings 
upon  the  apex  or  papilla  of  each  cone.  The  papillae  are  in- 
vested by  mucous  membrane,  which  is  continuous  with  the  li- 
ning membrane  of  the  tubuli,  and  forms  a  cup-like  pouch,  the 
calyx,  around  each  papilla. 

The  calices  communicate  with  a  common  cavity  of  larger 
size,  situated  at  each  extremity  and  in  the  middle  of  the  or^an  ; 
and  these  three  cavities — the  bifundibvla — constitute  by  their 
union  the  larjre  membranous  sac,  which  occupies  the  hilus  re- 
nalis,  {he  pelvis  of  the  ki'dney. 

The  kidney  in  the  embryo  and  fffitus  consists  of  lobules.  [See 
the  anatomy  of  the  foetus.] 

The  ureter,  the  excretory  duct  of  the  kidney,  is  a  dilated 
tube  of  about  the  diameter  of  a  goose-quill,  and  nearly  eighteen 
inches  in  length  ;  it  is  continuous  superiorly  with  the  pelvis  of 
the  kidney,  and  is  constricted  inferiorly,  where  it  lies  in  an  ob- 
lique direction  between  the  muscular  and  mucous  coats  of  the 
base  of  the  bladder,  and  opens  upon  its  mucous  surface.  Ly- 
ing along  the  posterior  wall  of  the  abdomen,  it  crosses  the  psoas 
muscle,  the  common  iliac  arter^'',  and  the  vas  deferens. 

The  ureter,  the  pelvis,  the  infundabula,  and  the  calices,  are 
composed  of  two  coats,  an  external  or  fibrous  coat,  the  tunica 
propria,  and  an  internal  mucous  coat  which  is  continuous  with 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  blndder  inferiorly,  and  with  the 
hning  of  the  tubuli  uriniferi  above. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  renal  artery  is  derived  from  the 
aorta  ;  it  divides  into  several  large  branches  before  entering  the 
hilus. 

The  veiiis  terminate  in  the  vena  cava  by  a  single  large 
trnnk,  the  left  renal  vein  receiving  the  left  spermatic  vein.  In- 
jections thrown  into  the  renal  artery  and  returnins^  by  the  vein 
generally  make  their  way  into  those  vessels  by  rupture  ;  and 
when  the  injection  returns  by  the  tubuli  uriniferi,  it  always  oc- 
curs from  the  bursting  of  the  capillary  vessels  of  the  ducts  into 
their  cavities.  The  lymphatic  vessels  terminate  in  the  lumbar 
glands. 

Tlie  nerves  are  derived  from  the  renal  [)lexus,  which  is  form- 
ed partly  by  the  solar  plexus,  and  partly  by  the  lesser  spkuich- 
nic  nerve.  The  renal  plexus  gives  branches  to  the  spermatic 
plexus,  and  branches  which  accompany  the  ureters:  hence  the 
morbid  sympathies  which  exits  between  the  kidney,  the  ureter, 
and  the  testicle  ;  and  by  the  communications  with  the  solar 
plexus,  with  the  stomach  and  diaphragm,  and,  indeed,  with  the 
whole  system. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


305 


THE  PELVIS. 

The  cavity  of  the  pelvis  is  that  portion  of  the  gfreat  abdomi- 
nal cavity  which  is  included  within  the  bones  of  the  pelvis,  be- 
low the  level  of  the  linea-ilio-pectinea  and  the  promontory  of 
the  sacrum.  It  is  bounded  by  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen  above, 
and  the  perineum  below  ;  aud  its  inter  parietes  are  formed  in 
front,  below,  and  at  the  sides,  by  the  peritoneum,  pelvic  fascia, 
levator  ani  muscles,  obturator  fasciae,  and  muscles  ;  and  behind 
by  the  sacrum  and  sacral  plexus  of  nerves. 

The  viscera  of  the  p(!lvis  in  the  male,  are  the  nrinary  blad- 
der, the  prostrate  gland,  vesiculaj  seminales,  and  the  rectum. 

PLATE  21.* 


*  A  Side  View  of  the  Viscera  of  the  Male  Pelvis  in  situ.. — (The  riglit  side 
of  the  pelvis  has  been  removed  by  a  vertical  section  tlirough  tbe  cs  pvibis, 
near  to  the  sj'mphysis  :  and  another  through  the  middle  cf  the  sacrum.)  1. 
The  divided  surfuce  of  the  os  pubis.  2.  The  divided  suiface  of  the  sncrum. 
3.  The  body  of  ihe  bladder.  4.  Its  fundus;  from  the  apex  is  seen  passing 
upwards  the  urachus.  .3.  The  base  of  the  bladder.  6.  the  ureter.  7.  The 
neck  of  the  bladder.  8,  8.  The  pelvic  fascia ;  the  fibres  immediately  above  7 
are  siven  otT  from  the  pelvic  fascia,  and  represent  the  anterior  lisraments  of 
the  bladder.  9.  The  prostrate  gland.  10.  The  membranous  portion  of  the 
urethra,  between  the  two  layers  of  the  deep  perineal  fascia.  11.  The  deep 
perineal  fascia,  formed  of  two  layers.  12.  One  of  Cowpcr's  glands,  between 
the  two  layers  of  deep  perineal  fascia,  and  beneath  the  membranous  portion 
of  the  uretha.  13.  The  bulb  of  the  corpus  spongiosum.  14.  The  body  of  the 
corpus  spongiosum.  1.5.  The  ri^i^t  crus  penis.  16.  The  upper  part  of  the 
first  portion  of  the  rectum.  17.  The  recto-vesical  fold  of  peritrmeum.  18. 
The  second  portion  of  the  rectum.  19.  The  right  vesicula  seminalis.  £0.  The 
vas  deferens.  21.  The  rectum  covered  with  the  descending  layer  of  the  deep 
perineal  fascia,  just  as  it  is  making  its  bend  backwards  to  constitute  the  third 
portion.  22.  A  part  of  the  levator  ani  muscle  investing  the  lower  part  cf  the 
rectum.  23.  The  external  sphincter  ani.  24.  The  interval  between  the  deep 
and  superficial  perineal  fascia  ;  they  are  seen  to  be  continuous  beneath  th* 
figure. 


306  THE    THOMSOMAN 

BLADDER. 

The  bladder  is  an  oblong  membranous  viscus,  situated  be- 
hind the  pubis  and  in  front  of  the  rectum.  It  is  lar^^er  in  its 
vertical  axis  than  frou)  side  to  side  ;  and  is  divided  into  body, 
fundus,  base,  and  neck.  The  body  comprehends  the  middle 
zone  of  the  organ  ;  the  fundus,  its  upper  segment ;  the  base, 
the  lower  broad  extremity,  which  rests  upon  the  rectum  ;  and 
the  neck,  the  narrow  constricted  portion  which  is  applied 
against  the  prostrate  gland. 

This  organ  is  retained  in  its  place  by  ligaments,  which  are 
divided  into  true  and  false ;  the  true  ligaments  are  seven  in 
number,  two  anterior,  two  lateral,  two  umbilical,  and  the  ura- 
chus ;  the  false  ligaments  are  folds  of  the  peritoneum,  and  are 
four  in  number,  two  anteiior  and  two  posterior. 

The  anterior  ligaments  are  formed  by  the  pelvic  fascia, 
which  passes  from  the  inner  surface  of  the  os  pubis,  on  each 
side  of  the  symphysis,  to  the  front  of  the  bladder. 

The  lateral  ligaments  are  formed  by  the  reflection  of  the 
pelvic  fascia  from  the  levatores  ani  muscles,  upon  the  sides  of 
the  base  of  the  bladder. 

The  innbilical  ligaments  are  the  fibrous  cords  which  result 
from  the  obliteration  of  the  umbilical  arteries  of  the  foetus  ;  they 
pass  forwards  on  each  side  of  the  fundus  of  the  bladder,  and 
ascend  beneath  the  peritoneum  to  the  luubilicus. 

The  urachus  is  a  small  fibrous  cord,  formed  by  the  oblitera- 
tion of  a  tubular  canal  existing  in  the  embryo ;  it  is  attached 
to  the  apex  of  the  bladder,  and  thence  ascends  to  the  umbili- 
cus. 

The/aZse  ligaments  are  folds  of  peritoneum,  the  two  lateral 
correspond  with  the  passage  of  the  vasa  deferentia,  from  the 
sides  of  the  bladder  to  the  internal  abdominal  ring,  and  the  two 
posterior  with  the  course  of  the  umbilical  arteries,  to  the  fun- 
dus of  the  organ. 

The  bladder  is  composed  of  three  coats,  an  external  or  se- 
rous coat,  a  muscular,  and  a  mucous  coat.  The  serous  coat  is 
partial,  and  derived  from  the  peritoneum,  which  invests  the 
posterior  surface  and  sides  of  the  bladder,  from  about  opposite 
the  point  of  termination  of  the  two  ureters  to  its  summit,  where 
it  is  guided  to  the  anterior  wall  of  the  abdomen  by  the  umbili- 
cal ligaments  and  urachus. 

The  inuscular  coat  consists  of  two  layers,  an  external  layer 
composed  of  longitudinal  fibres,  the  detrusor  urinae,  and  an  in- 
ternal layer  of  oblique  and  transverse  fibres  irregularly  distri- 
buted. The  anterior  longitudinal  fibres  commence  by  four 
tendons  (the  tendons  of  the  bladder  or  of  the  detrusor  urinae), 
two  superior  from  the  os  pubis,  and  two  inferior  from  the  ra- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  307 

mils  of  the  ischium  on  each  side,  and  spread  out  as  they  ascend 
the  anterior  surface  of  the  bladder  to  its  fundus  ;  they  then  con- 
verge upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the  organ,  and  descend  to 
its  neck,  where  tliey  are  inserted  into  the  isthmus  of  the  pros- 
trate gland,  and  into  a  ring  of  elastic  tissue,  which  surrounds 
the  commencement  of  the  prostatic  portion  of  the  urethra. 
Some  of  the  anterior  fibres  are  also  attached  to  this  ring.  The 
lateral  fibres  commence  at  the  prostrate  gland  and  the  elastic 
ring  of  the  urethra  on  one  side,  and  spread  out  as  they  ascend 
upon  the  side  of  the  bladder,  to  descend  upon  the  opposite  side, 
and  be  inserted  into  the  prostrate  and  opposite  segment  of  the 
same  ring. 

It  has  been  shown,  that  there  are  no  fibres  at  the  neck  of  the 
bladder  capable  of  forming  a  sphincter  vesicae.  The  fibres 
corresponding  with  the  trigonuni  vesicas  are  transverse. 

Sir  Astley  Cooper  has  demonstrated  around  the  neck  of  the 
bladder,  within  the  prostrate  gland,  a  ring  of  elastic  tissue, 
which  has  for  its  object  the  mechanical  closing  of  the  urethra 
against  the  involuntary  passage  of  the  urine.  It  is  into  this 
elastic  ring  that  the  longitudinal  fibres  of  the  detrusor  urinae 
are  inserted,  so  that  this  muscle  taking  a  fixed  point  at  the  os 
pubis  will  not  only  compress  the  bladder,  and  thereby  tend  to 
force  its  contents  along  the  urethra,  but  will  at  the  same  time, 
by  means  of  its  attachment  to  this  ring,  dilate  the  entrance  of 
the  urethra,  and  afford  a  free  egress  to  the  contents  of  th^  blad- 
der. 

The  mucous  coat  is  thin  and  smooth,  and  exactly  moulded 
upon  the  muscular  coat,  to  which  it  is  connected  by  a  some- 
what thick  layer  of  submucous  tissue,  called  by  some  anatomists 
the  nervous  coat ;  its  papillae  are  very  minute,  and  there  is 
scarcely  a  trace  of  mucous  follicles.  This  mucous  membrane 
is  continuous  through  the  ureters  with  the  linins:  membrane  of 
the  uriniferous  ducts,  and  through  the  urethra,  with  that  of  the 
prostatic  ducts,  tubuli  semenifery,  and  Cowper's  glands. 

Upon  the  internal  surface  of  the  base  of  the  bladder  is  a  tri- 
angular smooth  plane,  of  a  paler  color  than  the  rest  of  the  mu- 
cous membrane  ;  the  trigonum  vesicae,  or  trigove  vesicale. 
This  is  the  most  sensitive  part  of  the  bladder,  and  the  pressure 
of  calculi  upon  it  gives  rise  to  great  suffering.  It  is  bounded 
on  each  side  by  the  raised  ridge,  correspondins:  with  the  mus- 
cles of  the  ureters  ;  at  each  posterior  angle  by  the  openings  of 
the  ureters,  and  in  front  by  a  slight  elevation  of  the  mucous 
membrane  at  the  entrance  of  the  urethra,  called  the  uvula  ves- 
ica. 

The  external  surface  of  the  base  of  the  bladder,  correspond- 
ing with  the  trigonum,  is  also  triangular,  and  is  separated  from 
the  rectum  merely  by  a  thin  layer  of  fibrous  membrane,  the 


308  THE  THOMSONIAN 

recto-vesical  fascia.  It  is  bounded  behind  by  the  recto-vesical 
fold  of  peritoneum,  and  on  each  side  by  the  vas  deferens  and 
vesicLila  seminalis,  which  converge  almost  to  a  point  at  the  base 
of  the  prostrate  gland.  It  is  through  this  space  that  the  open- 
ing is  made  in  the  recto-vesical  operation  for  puncture  of  the 
bladder. 

PROSTRATE  GLAND. 

The  prostrate  gland  is  situated  in  front  of  the  nectC  of  the 

bladder,  behind  the  deep  perineal  fascia,  and  upon  the  rectum, 
through  which  it  may  be  distinctly  felt.  It  surrounds  the  com- 
mencement of  the  urethra  for  a  little  more  than  an  inch  of  its 
extent,  and  resembles  a  Spanish  chesnut  both  in  size  and  form, 
the  base  beingdirected  backwards  towards  the  neck  of  the  blad- 
der, the  apex  forwards,  and  the  convex  side  towards  the  rec- 
tum. It  is  retained  firmly  in  its  position  by  the  two  superior 
and  the  two  inferior  tendons  of  the  bladder,  by  the  attachments 
of  the  pelvis  fascia,  and  by  a  process  of  the  internal  layer  of  the 
deep  perineal  fascia,  which  forms  a  sheath  around  the  mem- 
branous iirethra,  and  is  inserted  into  the  apex  of  the  gland.  It 
consists  of  three  lobes,  two  lateral  and  a  middle  lobe  or  isthmus; 
the  lateral  lobes  are  distinguished  by  an  indentation  ujion  its 
base,  and  by  a  slight  furrow  upon  the  upper  and  lower  surface 
of  the  gland.  The  tliird  lobe  or  isthmus  is  a  small  transverse 
band,  which  passes  between  the  two  lateral  lobes  at  the  base  of 
the  organ. 

In  structure,  the  prostrate  gland  is  composed  of  ramified 
ducts,  terminating  in  lobules  of  Ibllicular  pouches,  which  are  so 
closely  compressed  as  to  give  to  a  thin  section  of  llie  gland  a 
cellular  appearance  beneath  the  microscope.  It  is  pale  in  tex-" 
ture  and  hard,  splits  easily  in  the  course  of  its  ducts,  and  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  plexus  of  veins  which  are  enclosed  by  the  strong 
fibrous  membrane  with  which  it  is  invested.  Its  secretion  is 
poured  into  the  prostatic  portion  of  the  urethra  by  fifteen  or 
twenty  excretory  ducts.  The  urethra  in  passing  ihrouuh  the 
prostrate,  lies  one  third  nearer  to  its  upper  tlian  its  lower  sur- 
fiice. 

VEsrcUL.E  SEMINALES. 

Upon  the  under  surface  of  ilie  base  of  the  bladder,  and  con- 
verging towards  the  ba^e  of  the  prostrate  gland,  are  two  lobu- 
lated  and  somewhat  pyriforni  bodies,  about  two  inches  in 
length — the  vesiculse  seminales.  Their  upper  surface  is  in 
contact  wit.'i  the  base  of  the  bladder;  the  under  side  rests  upon 
the  rectum,  separated  only  by  the  recto-vesical  fascia;  the  larg- 
er extremities  are  direct(  d  backwards  and  outwards,  and  the 
smaller  ends  almost  meet  at  the  base  of  the  prostrate.  They 
enclose  between  them  a  triangular  space,  which  is  bounded 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  309 

posteriorly  by  the  recto-vesical  fold  of  peritoneum,  and  which 
corresponds  with  the  trigonuin  vesicae  on  the  interior  of  the 
bladder. 

Each  vesicnla  is  formed  by  the  convolutions  of  a  single  tube, 
which  gives  off  several  irregular  ca:cal  branches.  It  is  enclos- 
ed in  a  dense  fibrous  membrane,  derived  from  the  pelvic  fascia, 
and  is  constricted  beneath  the  isthmus  of  the  prostrate  gland 
into  a  small  excretory  duct.  The  vas  deferens,  somewhat  en- 
larged and  convoluted,  lies  along  the  inner  border  of  each  vesi- 
cnla, and  is  included  in  its  fibrous  investment.  It  conmiuni- 
cates  with  the  duct  of  the  vesicnla,  beneath  the  isthmus  of  tlie 
prostrate,  and  lorms  the  ejacnlatory  duct. 

The  ejacnlatory  duct  is  about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  in 
length,  and  running  forwards,  first  between  the  base  of  the  pros- 
trate and  the  isthmus,  and  then  through  the  elastic  tissue  of  the 
veru  montanum,  opens  upon  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  ure- 
thra, near  its  fellow  of  the  opposite  side,  at  the  anterior  extre- 
mity of  that  process. 

MALE  ORGANS  OF  GENERATION. 

The  organs  of  generation  in  the  male  are,  the  penis  and  the 
testes,  with  their  appendages. 

The  penis  is  divided  into  a  body,  root,  and  extremity.  The 
hodi/  is  surrouiided  by  a  thin  integument,  which  is  remarkable 
for  the  looseness  of  its  cellular  connection  with  the  deeper  parts 
of  the  organ,  and  for  containing  no  adipose  tissue.  The  rool 
is  broad,  and  firmly  adherent  to  the  rami  of  the  pubis  and  is- 
chium by  two  strong  processes,  the  crura,  and  is  connected  to 
the  symphysis  pubis  by  a  fibrous  membrane,  the  li^amentum 
suspensorium. 

The  extremity,  or  glans  pefiis.,  resembles  an  obtuse  cone, 
somewhat  compressed  from  above  downwards,  and  of  a  deeper 
red  color  than  the  surrounding  skin.  At  its  apex  is  a  small 
vertical  slit,  the  meatus  urinarius,  which  is  bounded  by  two 
more  or  less  protuberant  labia;  and,  extending'  backwards  from 
the  meatus,  is  a  depressed  raphe,  to  which  is  attached  a  loose 
fold  of  mucous  membrane,  the  frEcuum  prscputii.  The  base  of 
the  glans  is  marked  by  a  projectino-  collar,  tl)e  corona  glandis, 
upon  which  are  seen  a  number  of  small  papillary  elevations 

formed  by  the  aggregation  of  minute  sebaceous  glands the 

glandula?  Tysoni.  Behind  the  corona  is  a  deep  fossa,  bound- 
ed by  a  circular  fold  of  integument,  the  prceputivm,  which,  in 
the  quiescent  state  of  the  organ,  may  be  drawn  over  the  glans, 
but  in  its  distended  state  is  obliterated,  and  serves  to  facHitate 
its  enlargement.  The  internal  surface  of  the  prepuce  is  lined 
by  mucous  membrane,  covered  by  a  thin  cuticle;  this  mem- 
brane, upon  reaching  the  base  of  the  glans,  is  reflected  over  the 


310  THE  THOMSONIAN 

glans  penis,  and,  at  the  meatus  urinarius,  becomes  continuous 
with  tlie  mucous  lining  of  the  urethra. 

The  penis  is  composed  of  the  corpus  cavernosum  and  corpus 
spongiosum,  and  contains  in  its  interior  the  largest  portion  of 
the  urethra. 

The  corpus  cavernosum  is  distinguished  into  two  lateral 
portions  by  an  imperfect  septum  and  by  a  superior  and  inferior 
groove,  and  is  divided  posteriorly  into  two  crura.  It  is  firmly 
adherent,  by  means  of  its  crura,  with  the  ramus  of  the  pubis 
and  ischium.  It  forms  anteriorly  a  single  rounded  extremity, 
which  is  received  into  a  fossa  in  the  bose  of  the  glans  penis ; 
the  superior  groove  lodges  the  dorsal  vessels  of  the  organ,  and 
the  interior  receives  the  corpus  spongiosum.  Its  fibrous  tunic 
is  thick,  elastic,  and  extremely  firm,  and  sends  a  number  of  fi- 
brous bands  and  cords  (trabecula3)  inwards  from  its  inferior 
groove,  which  cross  its  interior  in  a  radiating  direction,  and  are 
inserted  into  the  inner  walls  of  the  tunic.  These  trabeculge 
are  most  abundant  on  the  middle  line,  where  they  are  ranged 
vertically,  side  by  side,  somewhat  liK'e  the  teeth  of  a  comb,  and 
constitute  the  imperfect  partition  of  the  corpus  cavernosum,  the 
septum  pecteniforme.  This  septum  is  more  complete  at  its 
posterior  than  towards  its  anterior  part. 

The  tunic  of  the  corpus  cavernosum  consists  of  strong  longi- 
tudinal fibrous  fasciculi,  closely  interwoven  with  each  other. 
Its  internal  structure  is  composed  of  erectile  tissue. 

The  corpus  spongiosum  is  situated  along  the  under  surface 
of  the  corpus  cavernosum,  in  its  inferior  groove.  It  commen- 
ces by  its  posterior  extremity  between  and  beneath  the  crura 
penis,  where  it  forms  a  considerable  enlargement,  the  biilb,  and 
terminates  anteriorly  by  another  expansion,  the  glans  penis. 
Its  middle  portion  or  body  is  nearly  cylindrical,  and  tapers  gra- 
dually from  its  posterior  towards  its  anterior  extremity.  The 
bulb  is  adherent  to  the  deep  perineal  fi\scia,  by  means  of  the 
tubular  prolongation  of  the  anterior  layer,  which  surrounds 
the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra;  in  the  rest  of  its  ex- 
tent the  corpus  spongiosum  is  attached  to  the  corpus  caverno- 
sum by  cellular  tissue,  and  by  veins  which  wind  around  that 
body  to  reach  the  dorsal  vein.  It  is  composed  of  erectile  tissue, 
enclosed  by  a  dense  fibrous  tissue,  much  thinner  than  that  of 
the  corpus  cavernosum,  and  contains  in  its  mterior  the  spongy 
portion  of  the  urethra,  which  lies  nearer  to  its  upper  than  its 
lower  wall. 

Erectile  tissue  is  a  peculiar  cellulo-vascular  structure,  enter- 
ino-  in  considerable  proportion  into  the  composition  of  the  or- 
o-ans  of  generation.  It  consists  essentially  of  a  plexus  of  veins 
so  closely  convoluted  and  interwoven  with  each  other,  as  to 
give  rise  to  a  cellular  appearance  when  examined  upon  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  311 

surface  of  a  section.  The  veins  forming  this  plexus  are  small- 
er in  the  glans  penis,  corpus  spongiosnm,  and  circumference  of 
the  corpus  cavernosa m,  than  in  the  central  part  of  the  latter, 
where  they  are  laro-e  and  dilated.  They  have  no  other  coat 
than  the  internal  lining  prolonged  from  the  neighboring  veins; 
and  the  interstices  of  the  plexus  are  occupied  by  a  peculiar  red- 
dish fibrous  substance.  They  receive  their  blood  from  the  ca- 
pillaries of  the  arteries,  in  the  same  manner  with  veins  gene- 
rally. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  arteries  of  the  penis  are  derived 
from  the  internal  pudic;  they  are  the  arteries  of  the  bulb,  arte- 
ries of  the  corpus  cavernosum,  and  dorsales  penis.  Its  veins  are 
superficial  and  deep.  The  deep  veins  run  by  the  side  of  the  deep 
arteries,  and  terminate  in  the  internal  pudic  veins.  The  super- 
ficial veins  emerge  in  considerable  number  from  the  base  of  the 
glans,  and  converge  on  the  dorsum  penis,  to  form  a  large  dor- 
sal vein,  which  receives  other  veins  from  the  corpus  caverno- 
sum and  spon2:iosum  in  its  course,  and  passes  backwards  be- 
tween two  layers  of  the  ligamentum  suspensorium,  and  through 
the  deep  fascia  beneath  the  arch  of  the  pubis,  to  terminate  in 
the  prostatic  and  vesical  plexus. 

The  lyjuphatics  terminate  in  the  inguinal  glands.  The 
nerves  are  derived  from  the  internal  pudic  nerve,  from  the  sa- 
cral plexus,  and  from  the  hypogastric  plexus. 

URETHRA. 

l^he  nreihra  is  the  membranous  canal  extending  from  the 
neck  of  the  bladder  to  the  meatus  urinarius.  It  is  sigmoid  in 
its  course,  and  is  composed  of  two  layers,  a  mucous  coat  and 
an  elastic  fibrous  coat.  The  mucous  coat  is  thin  and  smooth* 
it  is  continuous,  internally,  with  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
bladder;  externally,  with  the  investing  membrane  of  theglans" 
and,  in  certain  points  of  its  extent,  with  the  lining  membrane 
of  the  numerous  ducts  of  mucous  glands — of  those  of  Cowper's 
glands,  the  prostrate  ffland,  vasa  deferentia,  and  vesiculas  sem- 
inales.  The  elastic  fibrous  coat  varies  in  thickness  in  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  course  of  the  urethra  :  it  is  thick  in  the  pros- 
tate gland,  forms  a  firm  investment  for  the  membranous  portion 
of  the  canal,  and  is  thin  in  the  spongy  portion,  where  it  serves 
as  a  bond  of  connection  between  the  mucous  membrane  and 
the  corpus  spongiosum.  The  urethra  is  about  nine  inches 
in  length,  and  is  divided  into  a  prostatic,  membranous,  and 
spongy  portion. 

The  prostatic  portion,  a  little  more  than  an  inch  in  leno-th 
is  situated  in  the  prostrate  gland,  about  one-third  nearer  to  its 
upper  than  its  lower  surface,  and  extending  from  its  base  to  its 
apex.    Upon  its  lower  circumference  or  floor  is  a  longitudinal 


312  THE  THOMSOISIAN 

fold  of  mucous  membrane — the  vej-u  mo7ilaniim,  or  caput  jL^al- 
linagiiiis — and  on  each  side  of  llie  veru  a  suppressed  fossa — the 
prostatic  sinus — in  which  are  seen  the  numerous  openings  of 
the  prostatic  ducts.  At  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  veru  mon- 
tanum  are  the  openings  of  the  two  ejaculat.^ry  ducts,  and  be- 
tween them  a  third  opening,  which  leads  backwards  into  a  di- 
hited  sac — the  sinus  pocuiaris.  The  prostatic  portion  of  the 
uretlira,  when  distended,  is  the  most  dilated  part  of  the  canal  : 
but,  excepting  during  the  passage  of  the  urine,  is  completely 
closed  by  means  of  a  ring  of  elastic  tissue  which  encircles  the 
urethra  as  far  as  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  veru  niontanum. 
In  the  contracted  state  of  the  urethra,  the  veru  montanum  acts 
as  a  valve,  being  pressed  upwards  against  the  upper  wall  of  the 
canal;  but,  during  the  action  of  the  detrusor  muscle  of  the 
bladder,  the  whole  elastic  ring  is  expanded  by  tlie  muscular 
fibres  which  are  inserted  mto  it ;  and  trie  veru  is  especially 
drawn  downwards  by  two  delicate  tendons,  which  have  been 
traced  by  Mr.  Tyrrell,  from  ;he  posterior  fibres  of  the  destrusor 
into  the  tissue  of  this  process. 

The  discovery  of  this  beautiful  structure  is  due  to  Sir  Asilcy 
Cooper,  and  is  one  other  instance  of  the  marvellous  indications 
of  design  evinced  in  the  structure  of  tlie  animal  frame.  In- 
stead of  a  muscular  apparatus,  liable  to  fatigue,  Nature  has 
employed,  for  the  purpose  of  retaining  the  urine,  an  clastic 
substance,  which  closes  the  urethra  constantly,  by  an  unwea- 
rying physical  property.  Expulsion,  on  the  contrary,  oc- 
curring only  at  intervals,  demands  the  exercise  of  muscular 
action,  that  action  bein^:  immediately  applied  to  the  elastic 
agent  and  drawing  it  aside.  It  is  by  means  of  this  interesting 
provision  that  the  semen  and  the  last  drops  of  urine  are  expel- 
led from  the  urethra  without  a  chance  of  reflux  into  the  blad- 
der, and  that  the  urine  is  enabled  to  pass  freely  alonir  in  its  ca- 
nal, without  danger  of  entering  the  prostatic  or  ejaculatory 
ducts. 

The  membranous  portion,  the  narrowest  part  of  the  canal, 
is  somewhat  less  than  an  inch  in  length.  It  is  situated  be- 
tween the  two  layers  of  the  deep  perineal  fiiscia,  and  is  sur- 
rounded by  tlie  fan  like  expansions  of  the  upper  and  lower 
segments  of  the  compressor  uretlias  muscle,  which  meet  at  the 
raphe  along  its  upper  and  lower  surface.  It  is  continuous 
posteriorly  with  the  prostratic  urethra,  and  anteriorly  wiili  the 
spongy  portion  of  the  canal.  Its  coverings  are  the  mucous 
membrane,  elastic  fibrous  layer,  compressor  urethrae  niusclcj 
and  a  partial  sheath  from  the  deep  perineal  fascia. 

The  spongy  portion  forms  the  Test  of  the  extent  of  the  ca- 
nal, and  is  lodged  in  the  corpus  spongiosum  from  its  com- 
mencement at  the  deep  perineal  fascia  to  the  meatus  urinarius. 


MATERIA    MfcDICA.  313 

It  is  narrowest  in  the  body,  and  becomes  dilated  at  either  extre- 
mity, posteriorly  in  the  bulb,  where  it  is  named  the  bulbous 
portion,  and  anteriorly  in  the  glans  penis,  where  it  forms  the 
Ibssa  navicularis.  The  meatus  urinarius  is  the  most  constricted 
part  of  the  canal ;  so  that  a  catheter  which  will  enter  that  open- 
in^''  may  be  passed  freely  through  the  whole  extent  of  a  healthy 
urethra.  Opening  into  the  bulbous  portion,  are  two  small  ex- 
cretory ducts,  about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  in  length,  which 
may  be  traced  backwards  between  the  coats  of  the  urethra  and 
the  bulb  to  the  interval  between  the  two  layers  of  the  deep  pe- 
rineal fascia,  where  they  ramify  in  two  small  lobulated  and 
somewhat  compressed  glands  of  about  the  size  of  peas.  These 
are  Cowper's  glands ;  they  are  situated  immediately  beneath 
the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra,  and  are  enclosed  by 
the  lower  segment  of  the  compressor  urethras  muscle,  so  as  to 
be  subject  to  muscular  compression. 

Upon  the  whole  of  the  internal  surface  of  the  spongy  portion 
of  the  urethra,  particularly  along  its  upper  wall,  are  numerous 
small  openings,  or  lacunas,  which  are  the  entrances  of  mucous 
glands  situated  in  the  submucous  cellular  tissue.  The  open- 
ings of  these  lacunai  are  directed  forwards,  and  are  liable  occa- 
sionally to  intercept  the  point  of  a  small  catheter  in  its  passage 
to  the  bladder.  At  about  an  inch  and  an  half  from  the  opening 
of  the  meatus,  one  of  these  lacuncc  is  generally  found  much 
larger  than  the  rest,  and  is  named  the  lacuna  magna. 

TESTES. 

The  testes  are  two  small  glandular  organs,  suspended  from 
the  abdomen  by  the  spermatic  cords,  and  enclosed  in  an  exter- 
nal tegumentary  covering,  the  scrotum. 

The  scrotum  is  distinghished  into  two  lateral  halves  by  a 
raphe,  which  is  continued  anterierly  along  the  under  surface 
of  the  penis,  and  posteriorly  along  the  middle  of  the  perineum 
to  the  anus.  Of  these  two  lateral  portions  the  left  is  somewhat 
longer  than  the  right,  and  corresponds  with  the  greater  length 
of  the  spermatic  cord  on  the  left  side. 

The  scrotum  is  composed  of  two  layers,  the  integument  and 
a  proper  covering,  the  dartos  ;  the  integument  is  extremely 
thin,  transparent  and  abundant,  and  beset  by  a  number  of  hairs, 
whicii  issue  obliquely  from  the  skin  and  have  prominent  roots. 
The  dartos  is  a  thin  layer  of  a  peculiar  contractile  fibrous  tis- 
sue, intermediate  in  properties  between  muscular  fibre  and  elas- 
tic tissue ;  it  forms  the  proper  tunic  of  the  scrotum,  and  sends 
inwards  a  distinct  septum,  which  divides  it  into  two  cavities  for 
the  two  testes.  The  dartos  is  continuous  around  the  base  of 
the  scrotum  with  the  common  superficial  fascia  of  the  abdomen 
and  perineum. 


314  THE  THOMSON  IAN 

The  sper7natic  cord  is  the  medium  of  communication  be- 
tween the  testes  and  the  interior  of  the  abdomen  ;  it  is  compos- 
ed of  arteries,  veins,  lymphatics,  nerves,  the  excretory  duct  of 
the  testicle  and  its  proper  coverings.  It  commences  at  the  in- 
ternal abdominal  ring,  where  the  vessels  of  which  it  is  compos- 
ed converofe,  and  passes  obliquely  along  the  spermatic  canal ; 
the  cord  then  escapes  at  the  external  abdominal  rincf,  and  de- 
scends through  the  scrotum  to  the  posterior  border  of  the  testi- 
cle. The  left  cord  is  somewhat  longer  than  the  right,  and  per- 
mits of  the  greater  depth  of  the  left  testicle. 

The  arteries  of  the  spermatic  cord  are,  the  spermatic  artery 
from  the  aorta,  the  deferential  artery,  accompanying  the  vas  de- 
ferens from  the  superior  vesical,  and  the  cremasteric  branch, 
from  the  epigastric  artery. 

The  spermatic  veins  form  a  plexus  which  constitutes  the 
chief  hulk  of  the  cord  ;  they  are  provided  with  valves  at  short 
intervals,  and  the  smaller  veins  have  a  peculiar  tendril-like  ar- 
rangement, which  has  obtained  for  them  the  name  of  vassa 
pampiniformia. 

Tne  lymphatics  are  of  large  size,  and  terminate  in  the  lum- 
bar glands. 

The  nerves  are  the  spermatic  plexus,  which  is  derived  from 
the  aortic  and  renal  plexus,  and  genital  branch  of  the  genito- 
crural  nerve,  and  the  scrotal  branch  of  the  ilio-scrofal. 

The  vas  deferens,  the  excretory  duct  of  the  testicle,  is  situ- 
ated along  the  posterior  border  of  the  cord,  where  it  may  easily 
be  disUnguished  by  the  hard  and  cordy  sensation  which  it  com- 
municates to  the  fingers.  Its  parietes  are  very  thick  and  tough. 
and  its  canal  extremely  small,  and  lined  by  the  mucous  mem- 
brane continued  from  the  urethra. 

The  coverings  of  the  spermatic  cord  are  the  spermatic  fas- 
cia, creinaster  muscle,  and  fascia  propria. 

The  spermatic  fascia,  is  a  prolouijation  of  the  intercolunuiar 
fascia  derived  from  the  borders  of  the  external  abdominal  ring 
during  the  descent  of  the  testicle  in  the  fcetus. 

The  cremasteric  covering  (erythroid)  is  the  thin  muscular 
expansion  formed  by  the  spreading  out  of  the  fibres  of  the  cre- 
master,  which  is  likewise  carried  down  by  the  testis  during  its 
descent. 

The  fascia  propria  is  a  continuation  of  the  infundibiliform 
process  from  the  transversalis  fascia  which  immediately  invests 
the  vessels  of  the  cord,  and  is  also  obtained  during  the  descent 
of  the  testis. 

The  testis  (testicle)  is  a  small  oblong  and  rounded  gland, 
somewhat  compressed  upon  the  sides  and  behind,  and  suspend- 
ed in  the  cavity  of  the  scrotum  by  the  spermatic  cord. 

Its  position  ia  the  scrotum  is  oblique,  so  that  the  upper  extre- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  315 

mity  is  directed  upwards  and  forwards,  and  a  little  outwards  ; 
the  lower  downwards  and  backwards,  and  a  little  inwards;  the 
convex  surface  looks  forwards  and  downwards,  and  the  iiatten- 
ed  surface,  to  which  the  cord  is  attached,  backwards  and  up- 
wards. Lying  against  its  outer  and  posterior  border,  is  a  flat- 
tened body,  which  follows  the  course  of  the  testicle  and  extends 
from  its  upper  to  its  lower  extremity ;  this  body  is  named,  from 
its  relatibn  to  the  testis,  epididymis  ;  it  is  divided  into  a  central 
part  or  body,  an  upper  extremity,  or  globus  major,  and  a  lower 
extremity,  globus  minor  epididymis.  The  globus  major  is  si- 
tuated upon  the  upper  end  of  the  testicle,  to  which  it  is  closely 
adherent ;  the  globus  minor  is  placed  at  its  lower  end,  is  at- 
tached to  the  testis  by  cellular  tissue,  and  curves  upwards,  to 
become  continuous  with  the  vas  deferens. 

The  testis  is  invested  by  three  tunics — tunica  vaginalis,  tu- 
nica albuginea,  and  tunica  vasculosa ;  and  is  connected  to  the 
inner  surface  of  the  dartos  by  a  large  quantity  of  extremely 
loose  cellular  tissue,  in  which  fat  is  never  deposited,  but  which 
is  very  susceptible  of  serous  infiltration. 

The  tmiica  vaginalis  is  a  pouch  of  serous  membrane  deriv- 
ed from  the  peritoneum  in  the  descent  of  the  testis,  and  after- 
wards obliterated  from  the  abdomen  to  within  a  short  distance 
of  the  gland.  Like  other  serous  coverings,  it  is  a  shut  sac,  in- 
vesting the  organ,  and  thence  reflected,  so  as  to  form  a  bag 
around  its  circumference  ;  hence  it  is  divided  into  the  tunica 
vaginalis  propria,  and  tunica  vaginalis  reflexa.  The  tunica 
vaginalis  propria  covers  the  surface  of  the  tunica  albuginea, 
and  surrounds  the  epididymis,  connecting  it  to  the  testis  by 
means  of  a  distinct  duplicature.  The  tunica  vaginalis  reflexa 
is  attached  by  its  external  surface,  through  the  medium  of  a 
quantity  of  loose  cellular  tissue,  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  dar- 
tos. Between  the  two  layers  is  the  smooth  surface  of  the  shut 
sac,  moistened  by  its  proper  secretion. 

The  tunica  albuginea  is  a  thick  fibrous  membrane,  of  a  blu- 
ish white  color,  and  the  proper  tunic  of  the  testicle.  It  is  adhe- 
rent externally  to  the  tunica  vaginalis  propria,  and  fro^m  the 
imion  of  the  serous  with  a  fibrous  membrane,  is  considered  a 
fibro-serous  membrane,  like  the  dura  mater  and  pericardium. 
After  surrounding  the  testicle,  the  tunica  albuginia  is  reflected 
from  its  posterior  border  into  the  interior  of  the  gland,  and 
forms  a  projecting  longitudinal  ridge,  which  is  called  the  me- 
diastinum testis,  from  which  numerous  fibrous  cords  are  giv- 
en oil,  to  be  inserted  into  the  inner  surface  of  the  tunic.  The 
mediastinum  serves  to  contain  the  vessels  and  ducts  of  the  tes- 
ticle in  their  passage  into  the  substance  of  the  organ,  and  the 
fibrous  cords  are  admirably  fitted  to  prevent  compression  of  the 
gland. 


!16 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


PLATE  22/ 


If  a  transverse  section  be  made  of  the  testis,  and  the  surface 
of  the  mediastinum  examined,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  blood 
vessels  of  the  substance  of  the  organ  are  situated  near  the  pos- 
terior border  of  the  mediastinum,  while  the  divided  ducts  oc- 
cupy a  place  nearer  to  the  free  margin. 

The  tunica  vasculosa  is  the  nutrient 
membrane  of  the  testis  ;  it  is  situated  imme- 
diately within  the  tunica  albuginia,  and  en- 
closes the  substance  of  the  gland,  sending 
processes  inwards  between  the  lobules,  in  the 
same  manner  that  the  pia  mater  is  reflected 
between  the  convolutions  of  the  brain. 

The  substance  of  the  testis  consists  of  nu- 
merous conical  flattened  lobules,  the  bases 
being  directed  towards  the  surface  of  the  or- 
gan,  and  the  apices  towards  the  mediasti- 
num. The  lobules  are  composed  of  a  mul- 
titude of  minute  convoluted  tubes,  having 
the  same  diameter  throughout ;  these  are 
the  tuhuli  seminiferi;  they  are  of  a  bright  yellow  color,  and 
terminate  at  the  apices  of  the  lobules  in  small  straight  ducts  of 
somewhat  larger  size,  the  vasa  recta ;  the  vasa  recta,  entering 
the  mediastinum,  form  a  vertical  plexus  of  ducts,  the  rete  testis, 
which  proceeds  from  below  upwards,  and  terminates  at  the  up- 
per extremity  of  the  organ,  in  eight  or  ten  larger  ducts,  which 
quit  the  testicle  under  the  name  of  vasa  efferenlia.  The  vasa 
efferentia,  having  emerged  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  upper 
end  of  the  organ,  form  a  series  of  conical  convolutions,  which 
are  called  coni  vasculosi ;  from  the  bases  of  these  cones  tubes 
of  larger  size  proceed,  which  constitute  by  their  complex  con- 
volutions the  body  of  the  epididymis.  The  tubes  become  gra- 
dually larger  towards  the  lower  end  of  the  epididymis,  and  ter- 
minate in  a  single  large  and  convoluted  duct,  the  vos  deferens. 

The  epididymis  is  formed  by  the  convolutions  of  the  excre- 
tory seminal  ducts,  externally  to  the  testis,  previously  to  their 
termination  in  the  vas  deferens.  The  more  numerous  convo- 
lutions and  the  aggregation  of  the  coni  vasculosi  at  the  upper 
end  of  the  organ,  form  the  globus  major ;   the  continuation  of 


*  Transverse  Seclion  of  the  Testicle. — 1.  The  carity  of  the  tunica  vaginalis  ; 
the  most  external  layer  is  the  tunica  vasjinalis  reflexa  ;  and  that  in  contact 
with  the  organ,  the  tunica  vaginalis  propria.  2.  The  tunica  albuginea.  3. 
The  raeJiastinum  testis,  chiving  off  numerous  fihrous  cords  in  a  radiated  direc- 
tion to  the  internal  surface  of  the  tunica  albuginea.  The  cut  extreniitics  of 
the  vessels  in  front  of  the  number  belong  to  the  rete  testis,  and  those  behind 
to  the  arteries  and  veins  of  the  organ.  4.  The  tunica  vasculosa,  or  pia  mater 
testis.  5,  5.  The  lobules,  consisting  of  the  convolutions  of  the  tubuli  semini- 
t-eri,  and  terminating  by  single  ducts  the  vasa  recta,  6.  Section  of  the  epidi- 
dymis 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  317 

the  convolutions  downwards  is  the  body,  and  the  smaller  num- 
ber of  convolutions  of  the  single  tube  iit  the  lower  extremity, 
the  globus  minor.  The  tubuli  are  connected  together  by  a  ve- 
ry delicate  cellular  tissue,  and  are  enclosed  by  the  tunica  vagi- 
nalis. 

A  small  convoluted  duct,  of  variable  length,  is  generally  con- 
nected with  the  duct  of  the  epididymis  immediately  before  the 
commencement  of  the  vas  deferens.  This  is  the  vascnlum  aber- 
rans  of  lialler;  it  is  attached  to  the  epididymis  by  the  cellular 
tissue  in  which  that  body  is  enveloped.  .Sometimes  it  becomes 
dilated  towards  its  extremity,  but  more  frequently  retains  the 
same  diameter  throughout. 

The  vas  deferens^ ma.Y  be  traced  upwards  in  the  course  of 
the  seminal  fluid  from  the  globus  minor  of  the  epididymis  along 
the  posterior  part  of  the  spermatic  cord  to  the  internal  abdomi- 
nal ring.  From  the  ring  it  is  reflected  inwards,  to  the  side  of 
the  fundus  of  the  bladder,  and  descends  along  its  posterior  sur 
face,  crossing  the  direction  of  the  ureter,  to  the  iimer  border  of 
the  vesicula  seminalis.  In  this  situation  it  becomes  somewhat 
larger  in  size  and  convoluted,  and  terminates  at  the  base  of  the 
prostrate  gland,  by  uniting  with  the  duct  of  the  vesicula  semi- 
nalis, and  constituting  the  ejaculatory  duct.  The  ejaculatory 
duct,  which  is  thus  formed  by  the  junction  of  the  duct  of  the 
vesicula  seminalis  with  the  vas  deferens,  passes  forwards  to  the 
anterior  extremity  of  the  veru  montanum,  where  it  terminates 
by  opening  into  the  prostatic  urethra, 

FEMALE  PELVIS. 

The  peculiarities  in  the  form  of  the  female  pelvis  have  alrea- 
dy been  examined  with  the  anatomy  of  the  bones.  Its  lining 
boundaries  are  the  same  with  those  of  the  male.  The  contents, 
are,  the  bladder,  vagina,  uterus  with  its  appendages,  and^the 
rectum.  Some  portion  of  the  small  intestines  also  occupy  the 
upper  part  of  its  cavity. 

The  bladder  is  in  relation  with  the  pubis  in  front,  and  with 
the  vagina  beneath.  Its  form  corresponds  with  that  of  the  pel- 
vis, being  broad  from  side  to  side,  and  often  bulging  more  on 
one  sidelhan  on  the  other.  This  is  particularly  evident  after 
frequent  parturition.  The  coats  of  the  bladder  are  the  same  as 
those  of  the  male. 

The  urethra  is  about  an  inch  and  a  half  in  length,  and  is 
lodged  in  the  upper  wall  of  the  vagina,  in  its  course  forwards, 
beneath  the  arch  of  the  pubis,  to  the  meatus  urinarius.  It  is 
lined  by  mucous  membrane,  which  is  continuous  internally 
with  that  of  the  bladder,  and  externally  with  the  vulva,  and  is 
surrounded  by  a  proper  coat  of  elastic  tissue,  to  which  the  mus- 
•salar  fibres  of  the  detrusor  urinae  are  attached.     It  is  to  this  tis- 


318  THE  THOMSONIAN 

sue  that  is  due  the  remarkable  dilatabUity  of  the  female  urethra^ 
and  its  speedy  return  to  its  orio-inal  diameter.  The  meatus  is 
encircled  by  a  rins^  of  fibrous  tissue,  which  prevents  it  from  dis- 
tending with  the  same  facility  as  the  rest  of  the  canal,  hence  is 
becomes  necessary  in  performing  this  operation  to  divide  its  naar- 
giii  slightly  with  a  knife. 

Vagina. — The  vagina  is  a  membranous  canal,  leading  from 
the  vulva  to  the  uterus,  and  corresponding  in  direction  with  the 
axis  of  the  outlet  of  the  pelvis.  It  is  constricted'  at  its  com- 
mencement, but  near  the  uterus  becomes  considerably  dilated. 
Its  length  is  very  variably :  but  it  is  always  longer  upon  the 
posterior  than  upon  the  anterior  wall,  the  former  being  usually 
five  or  six  inches  in  length,  and  the  latter  four  or  five.  It  is  in- 
serted into  the  cervic  of  the  uterus,  which  projects  into  the  up- 
per extremity  of  the  canal. 

In  structure  the  vagina  is  composed  of  a  mucons  lining,  a 
layer  of  erectile  tissue,  and  an  external  tunic  of  a  fibrous  struc- 
ture, resembling  the  dartos  of  the  scrotum.  The  upper  half  of 
the  posterior  wall  of  the  vagina  is  covered,  on  its  pelvic  sur- 
face, by  the  peritoneum  ;  and  in  front,  the  peritoneum  is  reflect- 
ted  from  its  upper  part  to  the  posterior  surface  of  the  bladder. 

The  tnucous  me??ibrane  presents  a  number  of  transverse 
papillcB  or  rugce  upon  its  upper  and  lower  surfaces,  which  ex- 
tend outwards  on  each  side  from  a  middle  raphe.  The  trans- 
verse papillae  and  raphe  are  more  apparent  upon  the  upper  than 
upon  the  lower  surface,  and  the  two  raphe  are  called  the  col- 
umns of  the  vagina.  The  mucous  membrane  is  covered  by  a 
thin  cuticular  epithelium,  which  is  continued  from  the  labia» 
and  terminates  by  a  fringed  border  at  the  inner  margin  of  the 
OS  uteri. 

The  e.Tternal,  or  darloid  layer  of  the  vagina,  serves  to  con- 
nect it  to  the  surrounding  viscera.  Thus,  it  is  very  closely 
adherent  to  the  under  surface  of  the  bladder,  and  drags  that 
organ  down  with  it  in  prolapsus  uteri.  To  the  rectum  it  is 
Jess  closely  connected,  and  that  intestine  is  therefore  less  fre- 
quently affected  in  prolapsus. 

UTERUS. 

The  vtcrus  is  a  flattened  organ  of  a  pyriform  shape,  having 
the  base  directed  upwards  and  forwards,  and  the  apex  down- 
wards and  backwards  in  the  line  af  the  axis  of  the  inlet  of  the 
pelvis,  and  forming  a  considerable  angle  with  the  course  oi 
the  vagina.  In  the  unimpregnated  state  it  is  about  three  inch- 
es in  length,  two  in  breadth  across  the  broadest  part,  and  one 
in  thickness,  and  is  divided  into  fundus,  body,  cervix,  and  o? 
uteri. 

The/?mrf«5  and  body  are  enclosed  in  a  duplicature  of  peri- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  319 

toneum,  which  is  connected  with  the  two  sides  of  the  pelvis, 
and  forms  a  transverse  septem  between  the  bladder  and  rectum. 
The  folds  formed  by  this  duplicature  of  peritoneum  on  either 
side  of  the  organ  are  the  broad  ligaments  of  the  uterus.  The 
cervix  is  the  Tower  portion  of  the  organ  v;hich  is  distinguished 
from  the  body  by  a  well-marked  constriction  ;  to  its  upper  part 
is  attached  the  upper  extremity  of  the  vagina,  and  at  its 
extremity  is  a  transverse  opening — the  os  uteri — bounded 
before  and  behind  by  two  labia,  the  posterior  labium  be- 
ing the  larger  and  more  projecting.  The  transverse  open- 
ing of  the  OS  uteri  is  of  considerable  size,  and  is  named 
the  orificium  uteri  externum  ;  the  canal  then  becomes  nar- 
rowed, and  at  the  upper  end  of  the  cervix  is  constricted  into 
a  smaller  opening — the  orificium  internum.  At  this  point  the 
canal  of  the  cervix  expands  into  the  shallow  triangular  cavity 
of  the  uterus,  the  inferior  angle  corresponding  vv^ith  the  orifici- 
um internum,  and  the  two  superior  angels  with  the  commence- 
ment Of  the  Fallopian  tubes.  In  the  canal  of  the  cervix  uteri 
are  two  or  three  longitudinal  folds  to  which  numerous  oblique 
folds  converge  so  as  to  give  the  idea  of  branches  from  the  stem 
of  a  tree  ;  hence  this  appearance  has  been  denominated  the  ar- 
bor viicB  uterina.  Between  these  folds,  and  around  the  os  ute- 
ri, are  occasionally  seen  some  enlarged  mucous  follicles  which 
have  been  named  the  ocida  of  Nahoth. 

Structure. — The  uterus  has  three  coats,  an  internal  or  mu- 
cous^ zi  fibrous  or  muscular,  and  a  peritoneal  coat.  In  the  un- 
impregnated  state  the  fibrous  structure  is  dense  and  pale,  and 
very  indistinct ;  but  in  the  impregnated  uterus  it  is  decidedly 
muscular,  and  may  be  clearly  demonstrated.  The  fibres  are 
then  observed  to  be  disposed  in  three  layers,  an  external  con- 
sisting: of  longitudinal  fibres  ;  a  9niddle,  of  oblique  fibres,  some 
of  which  pass  off  upon  the  Fallopian  tubes,  and  others  upon  the 
round  li«-aments  ;  and  a  third  layer  consists  of  concentric  cir- 
cles of  fibres,  having  their  centre  at  the  commencement  of  the 
Fallopian  tubes.     In  the  cervix  uteri  the  fibres  are  circular. 

Vessels  and  Nerves. — The  arteries  of  the  uterus  are  the 
uterine  from  the  internal  iliac,  and  the  spermatic  from  the  aorta. 
The  veiiis  are  very  large  and  remarkable  ;  in  the  impregnated 
uterus  they  are  called  sinuses,  and  consist  of  canals  channelled 
through  the  substance  of  the  organ,  being  merely  lined  by  the 
internal  membrane  of  the  veins.  The  lymphatics  terminate  in 
the  lumbar  glands. 

The  nerves  are  derived  from  the  hypogastric  and  spermatic 
plexuses,  and  from  the  sacral  plexus. 

The  appendages  of  the  uterus  are  enclosed  by  the  lateral 
duplicatures  of  peritoneum,  called  the  broad  ligaments.  They 
are  the  Fallopian  tubes  and  ovaries. 


320  THE    THOMSOJSIAN 

FALLOPIAN   TUBES. 

The  Fallopian  tubes  ate  two  tubular  prolongations  which 
pass  off,  one  on  each  side,  from  the  upper  angles  of  the  uterus. 
At  their  commencement  they  are  small,  but  they  gradually  m- 
crease  as  they  pass  outwards,  and  terminate  by  expanded  fim- 
briated extremities.  One  of  these  fringes,  longer  than  the  rest, 
is  attached  to  the  ovary,  and  serves  to  guide  the  tube  in  its 
seizure  of  that  organ. 

The  tube  is  lined  by  mucous  membrane,  wliich  is  arranged 
in  tortuous  longitudinal  folds:  it  is  continuous  internally  with 
that  of  the  uterus,  and  externally  at  the  fimbriated  extremity 
with  the  peritoneum.  This  is  the  only  instance,  in  man,  of  a 
natural  opening  existing  in  a  serous  membrane.  The  external 
covering  is  derived  froaii  the  peritoneum,  and  the  middle  coat  is 
composed  of  a  I'cry  vascular  cellulo-fibrous  ti:isne  into  which 
some  few  muscular  fibres  have  been  traced  from  the  uterus. 

OVARIES. 

The  ovaries  arc  two  oblong  flattened  bodies  of  a  whitish 
color,  situated  in  the  posterior  folds  of  the  broad  ligaments. 
They,  are  connected  to  the  upper  angles  of  the  uterus  at  each 
side  by  a  rounded  cord,  the  ligaments  of  the  ovary. 

The  structure  of  the  ovary  is  a  spongy  vascular  tissue,  con- 
taining serous  vesicles^  and  enclosed  in  a  dense  fibrous  tunie, 
covered  by  peritoneum.  These  vesicles  are  simple  cysts  con- 
taining a  transparent  albuminous  fluid,  of  various  size,  and  from 
ten  to  fifteen  in  number  in  each  ovary.  They  are  the  ova  in 
which  the  future  embryo  is  developed.  Bauer  states,  that  the 
vesicles  which  are  nearest  the  surface  ha\'e  a  minute  floating 
body  in  their  interior,  which  is  the  rudiment  of  the  germ. 

Afier  conception,  a  yellow  spot  is  often  found  in  one  or  both 
ovaries,  and  has  been  named  the  corpus  lutcu?n.  It  is  formed 
of  yellow,  condensed  substance,  deposited  in  the  place  of  the 
ovum,  which  has  escaped.  This  was  formerly  considered  a 
certain  evidence  of  conception  having  taken  place;  butnotiiing 
can  be  more  fallacious.  It  is  often  absent  in  women  who  have 
borne  children,  and  it  has  been  found  in  virgins,  and  even  in  a 
child  five  years  of  age. 

Vessels  and  Nerves. — The  arteries  of  tlie  ovaries  are  the 
spermatic.     Its  nerves  are  derived  from  the  spermatic  plexus. 

The  round  ligaments  are  two  cellulo-fibrous  cords  situated 
between  the  layers  of  the  broad  ligaments,  and  extending  from 
the  upper  angles  of  the  uterus,  and  along  the  spermatic  canals 
to  the  labia  majora,  in  which  they  are  lost.  They  are  accom- 
panied by  a  small  artery  and  by  several  filaments  of  the  sper- 
matic plexus  of  nerves,  and  serve  to  retain  the  uterus  in  con- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  321 

nection  with  the  anterior  walls  of  the  abdomen  (luring  its  in- 
crease in  bulk. 

EXTERNAL  ORGANS  OF  GENERATION. 

The  female  organs  of  generation  are  divided  into  the  internal 
and  external;  tiie  internal  are  contained  within  the  pelvis,  and 
have  been  already  described — they  are  the  vogina,  u terns,  ova- 
ries, and  Fnllopian  tubes.  The  external  organs  are  the  mons 
veneris,  labia  majora,  labia  minora,  clitoiis,  meatus  urinarius, 
and  the  opening  of  the  vagina. 

Tlie  Qnans  veneris  is  the  eminence  of  integument,  situated 
upon  the  front  of  the  pubis.  Its  cellular  tissue  is  loaded  with 
adipose  substance,  and  the  surface  covered  with  hairs. 

The  labia  majora  are  two  large  longitudinal  folds  of  integu- 
ment, consisting  of  fat  and  loose  cellular  tissue.  They  enclose 
an  elliptic  opening  called  thevw/rcr,  which  is  bounded  anterior- 
ly by  the  cominissura  superior,  and  posteriorly  by  the  commis- 
sura  inferior.  Stretching  across  the  posterior  commissure  is  a 
small  transverse  fold,  the  frcenuluin  labiornm  or  fourchette, 
which  is  ruptured  during  parturition,  and  immediately  within 
this  fold  is  a  small  cavity,  ihe  fossa  navicidaris.  The  breadth 
of  the  perineum  is  measured  from  the  posterior  commissure  to 
the  martrin  of  the  anus,  and  is  usually  not  more  than  an  inch 
across.  The  external  surface  of  the  labia  is  covered  with  hairs ; 
the  inner  surface  is  smooth,  and  lined  by  mucous  membrane, 
which  contains  a  number  of  sebaceous  follicles,  and  is  covered 
by  a  thin  cnticular  epithelium.  The  use  of  the  labia  majora  is 
to  favor  the  extension  of  the  vulva  during  parturition  ;  for,  in 
the  |)assage  of  the  head  of  the  foetus,  the  labia  are  completely 
unfolded  and  ellaced. 

The  labia  minora^  or  nynfphcc^  are  two  smaller  folds  situ- 
ated within  tlie  labia  majora.  Superiorly  they  are  divided  into 
two  processes,  which  surround  the  glans  clitoridis,  the  superior 
fold  forming  the  prEeputium  clitoridis,  and  the  interior  its  frse- 
nuluni.  Inferiorly,  they  diminish  gradually  in  size,  and  are 
lost  on  the  sides  of  the  opening  of  the  vagina.  The  nymphse 
consist  of  mucous  membrane,  covered  by  a  thin  cuticular  epi- 
thelium. They  are  provided  with  a  number  of  sebaceous  folli- 
cles, and  contain,  in  their  interior,  a  layer  of  erectile  tissue. 

The  clitoris  is  a  srhall  elongated  organ  situated  in  front  of 
the  pubis,  and  supported  by  a  suspensory  ligament.  It  is  form- 
ed by  a  small  body,  which  is  analogous  to  the  corpus  caverno- 
sum  of  the  penis,  and,  like  it,  arises  from  the  ramus  of  the  pubis 
and  ischmm  on  each  side,  by  two  crura.  The  extremity  of  the 
clitoris  is  called  its  glans.  It  is  composed  of  erectile  tissue, 
enclosed  in  a  dense  layer  of  fibrous  membrane,  and  is  suscepti- 


322  THE    THOMSONIAN 

ble  of  erection.  Like  the  penis,  it  is  provided  with  two  small 
muscles,  the  erectores  ditoridis. 

At  about  an  inch  beneath  the  clitoris  is  the  enlTaiice  of  the 
vagina^  an  elliptic  opening,  marked  by  a  projecting  margin. 
The  entrance  to  the  vagina  is  closed  in  the  virgin  by  a  mem- 
brane of  a  semilunar  form,  which  is  stretched  across  the  open- 
ing ;  this  is  the  hymen.  Sometimes  the  membrane  forms  a 
complete  septum,  and  gives  rise  to  great  inconvenience  by  pre- 
venting the  escape  of  the  menstrual  effusion.  It  is  then  called 
an  hnperforate  hymen.  The  hymen  must  not  be  considered 
a  necessary  accompaniment  to  virginity,  for  its  existence  is  very 
uncertain.  When  present  it  assumes  a  variety  of  appearances  : 
it  may  be  a  membranous  fringe,  with  a  round  opening  in  the 
centre,  or  it  is  a  semilunar  fold,  leaving  au  opening  in  front ; 
or  a  transverse  septum,  having  an  opening  both  in  front  and 
behind. 

The  rupture  of  the  hymen  or  its  rudimentary  existence,  gives 
rise  to  the  appearance  of  granulation  around  the  opening  of  the 
vagina  ;  these  are  called  canmcula  myrtijormes. 

The  triangular  smooth  surface  beneath  the  clitoris  and  the 
entrance  of  the  vagina,  which  is  bounded  on  each  side  by  the 
upper  portions  by  the  nymphae,  is  the  vestibule. 

At  the  upper  angle  of  the  vagina  is  an  elevntion  formed  by 
the  projection  of  the  upper  wall  of  the  canal ;  and  immediately 
in  front  of  this  tubercle,  and  surrounded  by  it,  is  the  opening  of 
the  urethra,  the  meatus  urinarhis. 

MAMMARY  GLANDS. 

The  tnamrncB  are  situated  in  the  pectoral  region,  and  are  se- 
parated from  the  pectoralis  major  muscle  by  a  thin  layer  of  su- 
perficial fascia.  They  exist  in  the  male  as  well  as  in  the  fe- 
male, but  in  a  rudimentary  state,  unless  excited  into  growth  by 
some  peculiar  action,  such  as  the  loss  or  atrophy  of  the  testes. 

Their  base  is  somewhat  elliptical,  the  long  diameter  corres- 
ponding with  the  direction  of  the  fibres  of  the  pectoralis  major 
muscle.  The  left  mamma  is  generally  a  little  larger  than  the 
riffht. 

Near  the  centre  of  the  convexity  of  each  mamma  is  a  small 
projection  of  the  integument,  called  the  nipple,  which  is  sur- 
rounded by  an  areola  having  a  colored  tint.  In  the  female  be- 
fore impregnation  the  color  is  a  delicate  pink;  after  impregna- 
tion it  assumes  a  brownish  hue,  whicli  deepens  in  color  as  preg- 
nancy advances;  and  after  the  birth  of  .a  child,  the  brownish 
tint  continues  through  life. 

The  areola  is  furnished  v/ith  a  considerable  number  of  seba- 
ceous follicles,  which  secrete  a  peculiar  substance  for  the  pro- 
tection of  the  delicate  cuticle  around  the  nipple  against  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  323 

friction  of  dress.  During  suckling  these  follicles  are  very  much 
increased  in  size,  and  have  the  appearance  of  small  pimples, 
projecting  from  the  skin.  At  this  period  they  serve  by  their  in- 
creased secretion  to  defend  the  nipple  and  areola  from  the  ex- 
coriating action  of  the  saliva  of  the  infant. 

In  structure,  the  mamma  is  a  conglomerate  gland,  and  con- 
sists of  lobes,  which  are  held  together  by  a  dense  and  firm  cel- 
lular tissue;  the  lobes  are  composed  of  lobules,  and  the  lobules 
of  minute  caecal  vesicles,  the  ultimate  termination  of  the  excre- 
tory ducts. 

The  excretory  ducts,  from  ten  to  fifteen  in  number,  com- 
mence by  small  openings  at  the  apex  of  the  nipple,  and  pass  in- 
wards, parallel  with  each  other,  towards  the  central  part  of  the 
gland,  where  they  form  dilations  and  give  oif  numerous  branch- 
es to  ramify  through  the  gland  to  their  ultimate  terminations 
in  the  minute  lobules. 

The  ducts  and  cascal  vesicles  are  lined  throughout  by  a  mu- 
cous membrane,  which  is  continuous  at  the  apex  of  the  nipple 
with  the  integument. 

In  the  nipple  the  excretory  ducts  are  surrounded  by  a  tissue 
analogous  to  thedartos  of  the  scroium,  to  which  they  owe  their 
power  of  erectility.  There  is  no  appearance  of  any  structure 
resembling  erectile  tissue. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  mammae  are  suppHed  with  arte- 
ries from  the  thoracic  branches  of  the  axillary,  from  the  inter- 
costals,  and  from  the  internal  mammary. 

The  hjmphatics  follow  the  border  of  the  pectoralls  major  to 
the  axillary  glands. 

The  7ierves  are  derived  from  the  thoracic  and  intercostals. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  FCETUS. 

The  medium  weight  of  a  child  at  the  full  period,  at  birth,  is 
seven  pounds,  and  its  length  nineteen  inches.  The  head  is  of 
large  size,  and  lengthened  from  before  backwards — the  face 
small.  The  upper  extremities  are  greatly  developed,  and  the 
thorax  expanded  and  full.  The  upper  part  of  the  abdomen  is 
large,  from  the  great  size  of  the  liver  ;  the  lower  part  is  small 
and  conical.  And  the  lower  extremities  are  very  small  in  pro- 
portion to  the  rest  of  the  body.  The  external  genital  organs 
are  very  large,  and  fully  developed. 

Osseous  system. — The  developement  of  the  osseous  system 
has  been  treated  of  The  ligamentous  system  presents  no  pe- 
culiarity deserving  of  remark. 

Muscular  system. — The  muscles  of  the  fcetus  at  birth  are 
large  and  fully  formed.  They  are  of  a  lighter  color  than  those 
of  the  adult,  and  of  a  softer  texture.     The  transverse  stride  up- 


324 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


on  the  fibres  of  animal  life  are  not  distinguishable  until  the 
sixth  month  of  foetal  life. 

Vascular  system. — The  ciicnlatin^  system  presents  several 
peculiarities:  1st,  in  the  heart;  there  is  a  communication  be- 
tween tiie  two  auricles  by  means  of  the  foramen  ovale.  2dly, 
In  the  arterial  system;  there  is  a  communication  between  the 
pulmonary  artery  and  descendins:  aorta,  by  means  of  a  large 
trunk — the  ductus  arteriosiis.  3dly,  Also  in  the  arterial  sys- 
tem; the  internal  iliac  arteries,  under  the  name  of  hypogastric 
and  umbilical^  are  continued  from  the  foetus  to  the  placenta,  to 
which  they  return  tlie  blood  which  has  circulated  in  the  system 
of  the  foetus.  4thly,  In  the  venous  system  ;  there  is  a  commu- 
nication between  the  umbilical  vein  and  the  inferior  vena  cava, 
called  the  ductus  venosus. 

FCETAL  CIRCULATION. 

PLATE  23.* 


*  The  Fatal  Circulation.— I.  Tlic  umbilical  cord,  consisting  of  the  umbi- 
lical vein  and  two  umbilical  arteries,  proceeding  from  the  placenta  (2).    3. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  325 

The  pure  blood  is  brous^ht  from  the  placenta  by  the  umbili- 
cal vein.  The  umbilical  vein  passes  through  the  umbilicus, 
and  enters  the  liver,  where  it  divides  into  several  branches, 
which  may  be  arranged  under  three  heads: — 1st,  two  or  three 
which  are  distributed  to  the  left  lobe.  2dly.  A  single  branch 
which  communicates  with  the  portal  \^ein  in  the  transverse  fis- 
sure, and  supplies  the  right  lobe.  3dly.  A  large  branch,  the 
ductus  vonosus,  which  passes  directly  backwards  and  joins  the 
inferior  cava. 

In  the  inferior  cava  the  pure  blood  becomes  mixed  with  that 
which  is  returning  from  the  lower  extremities,  and  is  carried 
through  the  right  auricle,  guided  by  the  Eustachian  valve,  and 
through  the  foramen  ovale  into  the  left  auricle.  From  the  left 
auricle  it  passes  into  the  left  ventricle,  and  from  the  left  ventri- 
cle into  the  aorta,  whence  it  is  distributed,  by  means  of  the  ca- 
rotid and  subclavian  arteries,  principally  to  the  head  and  upper 
extremities.  From  the  head  and  upper  extremities  the  impure 
blood  is  returned  by  the  superior  vena  cava  to  the  right  auri- 
cle ;  from  the  right  auricle  it  is  propelled  into  the  right  ventri- 
cle ;  and  from  the  right  ventricle  into  the  pulmonary  artery. 

In  the  adult,  the  blood  would  now  be  circulated  through  the 
lungs  and  decarbonized  ;  but  in  the  fcetus  the  lungs  are  solid, 
and  almost  impervious.  Only  a  small  quantity  of  the  blood 
passes  therefore  into  the  lungs  ;  the  greater  part  rushes  through 
the  ductus  arteriosus,  into  the  commencement  of  the  descend- 
injT  aorta. 

Passing  along  the  aorta,  a  small  quantity  of  the  impure  blood 
is  distributed  by  the  external  iliac  arteries  to  the  lower  extremi- 
ties; the  greater  portion  enters  the  internal  iliac?,  and  is  car- 
ried onwards  by  the  side  of  the  bladder,  and  upwards  along  the 
anterior  wall  of  the  abdomen,  and  through  the  umbilicus,  un- 

The  umbilical  vein  dividing  into  three  branches,  two  (4,  4,)  to  be  distribute:! 
to  the  liver,  and  one  (5),  the  ductus  venosus,  which  enters  the  inferior  vena 
cava  (6).  7.  The  portal  vein,  returning  the  blood  irom  the  intestines,  and 
uniting  with  the  right  hepatic  branch.  8.  The  right  auricle  ;  the  course  of 
the  blood  is  denoted  by  the  arrow,  proceeding  from  8  to  9,  the  left  auricle. 
10.  The  left  ventricle  :  the  blood  following  the  arroM'  to  the  arch  of  the  aorta 
(11),  to  be  distributed  through  the  branches  given  off  by  tbe  arch  to  the  head 
and  upper  extremities.  The  arrows  12  and  13  represent  the  return  of  the 
blood  from  the  head  and  upper  extremities  through  the  jugular  and  subclavi- 
an veins,  to  the  superior  vena  cava  (14),  to  the  right  auricle  (8),  and  in  the 
course  ol"  the  arrow  through  the  right  ventricle  (15),  to  the  pulnionnry  arte- 
ry (16).  17.  The  ductus  arteriosus,  which  appears  to  be  a  proper  continua- 
tion of  the  pulmonary  artery;  the  offsets  at  each  side  are  the  right  and  left 
pulmonary  artery  cut  off;  these  are  of  extremely  small  size  as  compared  with 
the  ductus  arteriosus.  The  ductus  arteriosus  joins  the  descending  aorta  (18, 
18),  which  divides  into  the  common  iliacs,  and  these  into  the  internal  iliacs, 
which  become  the  umbilical  arteries  (19).  and  return  the  blood  nlons  the  um- 
bilical cord  to  the  placenta;  while  the  other  divisions,  the  external  iliacs  (20), 
are  continued  into  the  lower  extremities.  The  arrows  at  the  termination  of 
these  vessels  mark  the  return  of  the  venous  blood  by  the  veins  to  the  inferior 
cava. 


326  THE    THOMSONIAN 

der  the  name  of  nfnhilical  arteries,  to  the  placenta,  to  which 
they  return  the  blood  that  has  been  circulated  through  the  sys- 
tem of  the  fostus. 

From  a  careful  consideration  of  this  circulation  we  shall  per- 
ceive;— 

1st.  That  the  pure  blood  from  the  placenta  is  distributed  in 
considerable  quantity  to  the  liver,  before  entering  the  general 
circulation.  Hence  arises  the  abundant  nutrition  of  that  or- 
gan, and  its  enormous  size,  in  comparison  with  the  other  vis- 
cera. 

2dly.  That  the  right  auricle  is  the  scene  of  meeting  of  a 
double  current ;  the  one  coming  from  the  inferior  cava,  the 
other  from  the  superior,  and  that  they  must  cross  eacii  other  in 
their  respective  course.  How  thisTcrossing  is  effected  the  theo- 
rist will  wonder;  not  so  the  practical  anatomist;  for  a  cursory 
examination  of  the  fostal  heart  will  show,  1.  That  the  direction 
of  entrance  of  the  two  vessels  is  so  opposite,  that  they  may  dis- 
charge their  currents  through  the  same  cavity  without  admix- 
ture. 2.  That  the  inferior  cava  opens  almost  directly  into  the 
left  auricle.  3.  That  by  the  aid  of  the  Eustachian  valve,  the 
current  in  the  inferior  cava  will  be  almost  entirely  excluded 
from  the  right  ventricle. 

3dly.  That  the  blood  which  circulates  through  the  arch  of 
the  aorta  comes  directly  from  the  placenta  ;  and  although  mix- 
ed with  the  impure  blood  of  the  inferior  cava,  yet  is  propelled 
in  so  great  abundance  to  the  head  and  upper  extremities,  as  to 
provide  for  the  increased  nutrition  of  these  important  parts,  and 
prepare  them,  by  their  greater  size  and  developement,  for  the 
functions  which  they  are  required  to  perform  at  birth. 

4thly.  That  the  blood  circulating  in  the  descending  aorta  is 
very  impure,  being  obtained  principally  from  the  returning  cur- 
rent in  the  superior  cava,  a  small  quantity  only  being  derived 
from  the  left  ventricle.  Yet  it  is  from  this  impure  blood  that 
the  nutrition  of  the  lower  extremities  is  provided.  Hence  we 
are  not  surprised  at  their  iusigniiicant  developement  at  birth  ; 
while  we  admire  the  providence  of  nature,  that  directs  the  nu- 
trient current  in  abundance  to  the  organs  of  sense,  of  prehen- 
sion and  of  deglutition,  so  necessary  even  at  the  instant  of  birth 
to  the  safety  and  welfare  of  the  creature. 

After  birth,  the  foroinen  ovale  becomes  gradually  closed  by 
a  membranous  layer,  which  is  developed  from  the  margins  of 
the  opening  from  below  upwards,  and  completely  separates  the 
two  auricles.  The  situation  of  the  foramen  is  seen  in  the  adult 
heart,  upon  the  septum  auricularum,  and  is  called  the  fossa 
ovalis  ;  the  projecting  margin  of  the  opening  forms  the  an7iu- 
lus  ovalis. 

As  soon  as  the  lungs  have  become  inflated,  by  the  first  spas- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  327 

mndic  act  of  inspiration,  the  blood  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
rushes  through  its  right  and  left  branches  into  the  lungs,  to  be 
returned  to  the  left  auricle  by  the  pulmonary  veins.  Thus  the 
pulmonary  circulation  is  established,  then  the  ductus  arterio- 
sus contracts,  and  degenerates  into  an  impervious  fibrous  cord, 
serving  in  after  life  merely  as  a  bond  of  union  between  the  left 
pulmonary  artery  and  the  concavity  of  the  arch  of  the  aorta. 

The  current  through  the  umbilical  cord  being  arrested,  the 
timhiUcal  arteries  likewise  contract  and  become  impervious, 
and  deo;encrate  into  the  umbilical  ligaments  of  the  bladder. 

The  umbilical  vein  and  ductus  venosus,  also  deprived  of 
their  circulating  current,  become  reduced  to  fibrons  cords,  the 
former  forming  the  round  ligauejit  of  the  liver,  and  the  latter 
a  fibrous  band,  which  may  be  traced  along  the  fissure  for  the 
ductus  venosus  to  the  inferior  vena  cava. 

Nervous  system. — -The  brain  is  very  soft,  alm.ost  pulpy,  and 
has  a  reddish  tint  throughout ;  the  difference  between  the  white 
and  grey  substance  is  not  well  marked.  The  nerves  are  firm, 
and  well  developed. 

ORGANS  OF  SENSE. 

Eye. — The  eyeballs  are  of  a  large  size  and  well  developed  at 
birth.  The  pupil  is  closed  by  a  vascular  membrane  called  the 
inembrana  piipillaris,  which  disappears  at  about  the  seventh 
month.  Sometimes  it  remains  permanently,  and  produces 
blindness.  It  consists  of  two  thin  membranous  layers,  between 
which  the  ciliary  arteries  are  prolonged  from  the  edge  of  the 
iris,  and  form  arches  by  returning  to  it  again,  without  anasto- 
mosing with  those  of  the  opposite  side. 

The  removal  of  the  membrane  lakes  place  by  the  contraction 
of  their  loops  towards  the  edge  of  the  pupil.  The  capsule  of 
the  lens  is  extremely  vascular. 

Ear. — The  ear  is  remarkable  for  its  early  developement ;  the 
labyrinth  and  ossicula  anditus  are  ossified  at  an  early  period 
and  the  latter  are  completely  formed  before  birth.  The  only 
parts  remaining  incomplete  are  the  mastoid  cells,  and  the  mea- 
tus auditorius.  The  membrana  tympani  in  the  fcetal  head  is 
very  oblique,  occupying  almost  the  basilar  surface  of  the  skull: 
hence  probably  arises  a  deficient  acuteness  in  the  perception  oi" 
sound.     It  is  also  extremely  vascular. 

Ao.5e.— The  sense  of  smell  is  very  imperfect  in  the  infant,  as 
may  be  inferred  from  the  small  capacity  of  the  nasal  fossaD,  and 
the  non-developement  of  the  ethmoid,  sphenoid,  frontal,'  and 
maxillary  sinuses. 

The  thyroid  gland  is  of  large  size  in  the  foetus,  and  is  deve- 


328  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

loped  by  two  lateral  halves,  which  approach  and  become  con- 
nected at  the  middle  line,  so  as  to  form  a  single  gland.  It  is 
doubtful  whether  it  performs  any  especial  function  in  foetal  life. 

THYMU,3  GLAND. 

The  thijmus  gland  consists  of  a  thoracic  and  a  cervical  por- 
tion on  each  side.  The  former  is  situated  in  the  anterior  me- 
diastinum, and  the  latter  is  placed  in  the  neck,  just  above  the 
first  bone  of  the  sternum,  and  behind  the  sterno-hyoidei  and 
sterno-thyifoidei  muscles.  It  extends  upwards  from  the  fourth 
rib  as  high  as  the  thyroid  gland,  resting  upon  the  pericardium, 
and  separated  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta  and  great  vessels  by 
the  thoracic  fascia  in  the  chest,  and  lying  on  each  side  of  the 
trachea  in  the  neck. 

Although  described  usually  as  a  sinple  gland,  it  consists  ac- 
tually of  two  lateral,  almost  symmetrical  glands,  connected  with 
each  other  by  cellular  tissue  only,  and  having  no  structural 
communication  ;  they  may  therefore  be  properly  called  a  right 
and  a  left  thymus  gland. 

Bstween  the  second  and  third  months  of  embryo  existence, 
the  thymus  is  so  small  as  to  be  only  ju?!t  perceptible,  and  con- 
tinues gradually  increasing  with  the  growth  of  the  foetus  until 
the  seventh.  At  the  eighth  month  it  is  large  ;  but  during  the 
ninth  it  undergoes  a  sudden  change,  assumes  a  greatly  increas- 
ed size,  and  at  birth  weighs  240  grains.  After  birth,  it  conti- 
nues to  enlarge  until  the  expiration  of  the  first  year,  when  it 
ceases  to  grow,  and  gradually  diminishes,  until  at  puberty  it 
has  almost  disappeared. 

The  thymus  is  a  conglomerate  gland,  being  composed  of  lo- 
bules disposed  in  a  spiral  form  around  a  central  cavity.     The 
lobules  are  held  together  by  a  firm  cellular  tissue  (reticulated),  . 
and  the  entire  gland  is  enclosed  in  a  coarse  cellular  ca7jsule. 

The  lobules  are  very  numerous,  and  vary  in  size  from  that 
of  the  head  of  a  pin  to  a  moderate  sized  pea.  Each  lobule  con- 
tains in  its  interior  a  small  cavity  or  secretory  cell,  and  several 
of  these  cells  open  into  a  small  pouch  which  is  situated  at  their 
base,  and  leads  to  the  central  cavity,  the  reservoir  of  ike  thy- 
mus. 

The  reservoir  is  lined  in  its  interior  by  a  vascular  mucous 
membrane,  which  is  raised  into  ridges  by  a  layer  of  ligamentous 
bands  situated  beneath  it.  The  ligamentous  bands  proceed  in 
various  directions,  and  encircle  the  open  mouths  (pores)  of  the 
secretory  cells  and  pouches.  This  ligamentous  layer  serves  to 
keep  the  lobules  together,  and  prevent  the  injurious  distention 
of  the  cavitv. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


329 


When  either  gland  is  carefully  unravelled,  by  removing  the 
cellular  capsule  and  vessels  and  dissecting  away  the  reticulated 
cellular  tissue  which  retains  the  lobules  in  contact,  the  reser- 
voir, from  beins;-  folded  in  a  serpentine  manner  upon  itself,  ad- 
mits of  being  drawn  out  into  a  lengthened  tubular  cord,  around 
which  the  lobules  are  clustered  in  spiral  manner,  and  resemble 
knots  upon  a  cord,  or  a  string  of  beads. 

The  reservoir,  pouches,  and  cells,  contain  a  white  fluid  like 
chyle,  or  like  cream 
bules. 


but  with  a  small  admixture  of  red  glo- 


PLATE  24.* 


*  A  Section  of  the  Thymus  Gland,  at  the  eighth  month,  showing  its  anato* 
my. — This  lis;ure,  and  the  succeeding,  were  drawn  from  two  of  Sir  Astley 
Cooper's  beautiful  preparations.  1.  The  cervical  portion*  of  the  gland  ;  the 
independence  of  the  two  lateral  glands  is  well  marked.  2.  Secretory  cells, 
seen  upon  the  cut  surface  of  the  section;  these  are  observed  in  all  parts  of  the 
section.  3,  3.  The  pores  or  openings  of  the  secretory  cells  or  pouches  ;  they 
are  seen  covering  the  whole  internal  surface  of  the  great  central  cavity  or  re- 
servoir. The  continuity  of  the  reservoir  in  the  lower  or  thoracic  portion  of 
the  gland  with  the  cervical  portion,  is  seen  in  the  figure. 


22 


330 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


In  an  examination  of  the  thymic  fluid,  plate  25.* 
made  with  a  microscope  nitignifying  500 
times  hnear  measure,  it  was  observed,  that 
the  corpuscules  were  very  numerous,  small- 
er than  the  blood  corpiiscules;  ({lobular  and 
oval  in  form,  irregular  in  outline,  variable 
in  size,  and  provided  with  a  small  central 
nucleus. 

In  the  human  foetus,  this  fluid  has  been 
found  by  Sir  Astley  in  too  small  proportion 
to  be  submitted  to  chemical  analysis.  But 
the  thymic  fluid  of  the  foetal  calf,  which  ex- 
ists in  great  abundance,  gave  the  following 
analytical  results  :  one  hundred  parts  of  the 
fluid  contained  sixteen  parts  of  solid  matter, 
which  consisted  of, 

Incipient  fibrine, 

Albumen, 

Mucus,  and  muco-extractive  matter, 

Muriate  and  phosphate  of  potass. 

Phosphate  of  soda. 

Phosphoric  acid,  a  trace. 
The  arteries  of  the  thymus  gland  are  de- 
rived from  the  internal  mammary  and  frcim 
the  superior  and  inferior  thyroid. 

The  veins  terminate  in  the  left  vena  in- 
nominata,  and  some  small  branches  in  the 
thyroid  veins. 

The  nerves  are  very  minute,  and  are  derived  chiefly  through 
the  internal  mammary  plexus,  from  the  superior  thoracic  gan- 
glion of  the  sympathetic. 

The  lymphatics  terminate  in  the  general  union  of  the  lym- 
phatic vessels  at  the  junction  of  the  internal  jugniar  and  sub- 
clavian veins.  Sir  Astley  Cooper  has  injected  them  only  once 
in  the  human  foetus,  but  in  the  calf  he  finds  two  hirge  lympha- 
tic ducts,  which  commence  in  the  upper  extremities  of  the 
glands,  and  pass  downwards,  to  terminate  at  the  junction  of  the 
jugular  and  subclavian  vein  at  each  side.  Thes'  vessels  he 
considers  the  ^'■absorbent  ducts  of  the  glands;  ^iJi!i/nic  ductsf 
they  are  the  carriers  of  the  fluid  from  the  thyuuis  into  the 
veins." 


•  The  Course  and  Tcrmitiation  of  the  Jtbsorbent  Ducts  of  tl;f  thymus  of  the 
calf. — 1.  The  two  internal  jugular  veins.  2.  Superior  venn  cava.  3.  The 
thoracic  duct,  dividing  into  two  branclie?,  which  re-unite  ])i.-'  lously  to  their 
termination  in  the  root  of  the  left  ju2u!ar  vein.  4.  The  Iv  c  thymic  ducts  ; 
that  on  the  left  side  enters  into  the  thoracic  duct,  and  that  c.ii  the  right  into 
the  root  of  the  right  jugular  vein. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  331 

Sir  Astley  concludes  his  anatomical  description  of  this  gland 
with  the  following  interesting  physiological  observation  : 

"  As  the  thymus  secretes  all  the  parts  of  the  blood,  viz.  albu- 
men, fibrine,  and  particles,  is  it  not  probable  that  the  gland  is 
designed  to  prepare  a  fluid  well  fitted  for  the  foetal  growth  and 
nourishment  from  the  blood  of  the  mothor,  before  the  birth  of 
the  fcEtus,  and,  consequently,  before  chyle  is  formed  from  food? 
and  this  process  continues  for  a  short  time  after  birth,  the  quan- 
tity of  fluid  secreted  from  the  thymus  gradually  declining,  as 
that  of  chylification  becomes  perfectly  established," 

FCETAL  LUNGS. 

The  liaiffs,  previously  to  the  act  of  inspiration,  are  dense  and 
solid  in  structure,  and  of  a  deep  red  color ;  their  specific  gravi- 
ty is  greater  than  water,  in  which  they  sink  to  j^the  bottom, 
whereas  lung  which  has  respired  will  float  upon  that  fluid. 
The  specific  gravity  is,  however,  no  test  of  the  real  weight  of 
the  lung,  the  respired  lung  being  actually  heavier  than  the  foe- 
tal. Thus  the  weight  of  the  foetal  lung,  at  about  the  middle 
period  of  uterine  life,  is  to  the  body  as  1  to  GU.  But  after  res- 
piration, the  relative  weight  of  the  lung  to  the  entire  body  is  as 
I  to  30. 

FCETAL  HEART. 

The  heart  of  the  foetus  is  large  in  proportion  to  the  size  of 
the  body ;  it  is  also  developed  very  early,  representing  at  first  a 
simple  vessel,  and  undergoing  various  degrees  of  complication 
until  it  arrives  at  the  compound  character  which  it  presents  af- 
ter birth.  T'he  two  ventricles  form,  at  one  period,  a  single  ca- 
vity, which  is  afterwards  divided  into  two  by  the  septum  ven- 
triculorum.  The  two  auricles  communicate  up  to  the  moment 
of  birth,  the  septum  being  incomplete,  and  leaving  a  large  open- 
ing between  them,  the  for  atfien  ovale. 

The  ductus  arteriosus  is  another  peculiarity  of  the  foetus 
connected  with  the  heart;  it  is  a  communication  between  the 
pulmonary  artery  and  the  aorta.  It  degenerates  into  a  fibrous 
cord  after  birth,  from  the  double  cause  of  a  diversion  in  the  cur- 
rent of  the  blood  towards  the  lungs,  and  from  the  pressure  of 
the  left  bronchus,  caused  by  its  distension  with  air. 

VISCERA  OP  THE  ABDOMEN. 

At  an  early  period  of  uterine  life,  and  sometimes  at  the  peri- 
od of  birth,  two  minute  fibrous  threads  may  be  seen,  passing 
from  the  umbilicus  to  the  mesentery.  These  are  the  remams 
of  the  omphalo-mesenteric  vessels. 

The  omphalo-mesenteric  are  the  first  developed  vessels  of 
the  germ-   they  ramify  upon  the  vesicula  umbilicalis,  or  yolk- 


332  THE    THOMSONIAN 

bag,  and  supply  the  newly  formed  alimentary  canal  of  the  em^ 
bryo.  From  them,  as  from  a  centre,  the  general  ch-culating" 
system  is  produced.  After  the  establishment  of  the  placental 
circulation,  they  cease  to  carry  blood,  and  dwindle  to  the  size 
of  mere  threads,  which  maybe  easily  demonstrated  in  the  early 
periods  of  uterine  life  ;  but  are  completely  removed,  except  un- 
der peculiar  cn-cumstances,  at  a  later  period. 

The  appendix  vcrmiformis  cceci  is  long  and  of  iar^e  size, 
and  is  continued  directly  from  the  central  part  of  the  cul-de-sac 
of  the  caecum,  of  which  it  appears  to  be  a  constricted  continua- 
tion. This  is  the  cliaracter  of  the  appendix  caDci  in  the  liigher 
quadrumana. 

The  large  intestines  are  filled  with  a  dark  green  viscous  se- 
cretion, called  meconium,  from  its  resemblance  to  the  inspissa- 
ted juice  of  the  poppy. 

FCETAL  LIVER. 

The  liver  is  the  first  formed  organ  in  the  embryo,  it  is  de- 
veloped from  the  alimentary  canal,  and  at  about  the  third  week 
fills  the  whole  abdomen,  and  is  one  half  the  weight  of  the  en- 
tire embryo.  At  the  fourth  month  the  liver  is  of  immense  size 
in  proportion  to  the  bulk  of  the  fcetus.  At  birth  it  is  of  very 
large  size,  and  occupies  the  wliole  upper  port  of  the  abdomen. 
The  left  lobe  is  as  large  as  the  right,  and  the  falciform  ligament 
corresponds  with  the  middle  line  of  the  body.  The  liver  dimi- 
nishes rapidly  after  birth,  probably  from  the  obliteration  of  the 
umbilical  vein. 

KIDNEYS  AND  SUPIIA-RENAL  CAP.SULES. 

^he  kidneys  present  a  lobulated  appearance  in  the  fcetns, 
which  is  the  permanent  type  amongst  some  animals,  as  in  the 
bear,  the  otter,  and  cetacea. 

The  supra-renal  capsules  are  organs  which  appear,  from 
their  early  and  considerable  developement,  to  belong  especially 
to  the  economy  of  the  fa3tus.  They  are  distinctly  formed  at  the 
second  month  of  embryo  life,  and  are  greater  in  size  and  weight 
than  the  kidneys.  At  the  fourth  month  they  are  equalled  in 
bulk  by  the  kidneys,  and  at  birth  they  are  about  one  third  less 
than  those  organs. 

VISCERA  OF  THE  PELVIS. 

The  bladder  in  the  fcetus  is  long  and  conical,  and  is  situated 
altogether  above  the  upper  border  of  the  pubis,  which  is  as  yet 
small  and  undeveloped.  It  is  indeed  an  abdominal  viscus,  and 
is  connected  superiorly  with  a  fibrous  cord  called  the  urachiis, 
of  which  it  appears  an  expansion. 

The  urachiis  is  continued  upwards  to  the  umbilicus,  and  be- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  333 

comes  connected  with  the  umbihcal  cord.  In  animals  it  is  a 
pervious  duct,  and  is  continuous  with  one  of  the  membranes  of 
the  embryo — the  allantois.  It  has  been  found  pervious  in  the 
human  foetus,  and  the  urine  has  been  passed  through  the  um- 
biUcus.  Calculous  concretions  have  also  been  found  in  its 
course. 

The  uterus  in  the  early  periods  of  embryo  existence  appears 
to  be  bifid,  tVom  tlie  large  size  of  the  Fallopian  tubes,  and  the 
small  dcvelopement  of  the  body  of  the  organ.  At  the  end  of 
the  fourth  month  the  body  assumes  a  larger  bulk,  and  the  bifid 
appearance  is  lost.  The  cervix  uteri  in  the  foetus  is  larger  than 
the  body  of  the  organ. 

The  ovaries  are  situated,  like  the  testicles,  in  the  lumbar  re- 
gion, near  to  the  kidneys,  and  descend  from  thence  gradually 
into  the  pelvis. 

TESTES. 

The  testicles  in  the  embryo  are  situated  in  the  lumbar  re- 
gions, immediately  below  the  kidneys.  The  spermatic  canal 
at  this  period  is  occupied  by  a  cellular  cord  of  considerable 
thickness,  called  the  gnbernaculum  testis.  The  cells  of  this 
structure  appear  to  be  filled  with  agelatenous  fluid;  and  its  use 
would  seem  to  be  to  keep  the  spermatic  canal  properly  dilated, 
and  to  direct  and  precede  the  testicle  in  its  course  downwards. 
The  upper  extremity  of  the  gubernaculum  is  attached  to  the 
posterior  body  of  the  testicle,  and  its  lower  end  is  connected 
with  the  cellular  interior  of  the  scrotum. 

The  descent  of  the  testicle  is  very  gradual  and  progressive. 
Between  the  fifth  and  sixth  month  it  has  reached  the  lower  part 
of  the  psoas  muscle,  and  during  the  seventh  it  makes  its  way 
through  the  spermatic  canal,  and  is  drawn  onwards  by  the  gu- 
bernaculum. 

While  situated  in  the  lumbar  region,  it  is  behind  the  perito- 
neum, and  is  covered  on  its  anterior  surface  and  sides  by  that 
membrane,  which  constitutes  its  proper  serous  covering,  the  tii- 
nica  vaginalis  propria.  As  it  descends  into  the  scrotum,  it 
carries  with  it  its  investing  peritoneum,  and  thus  forms  a  pouch 
of  serous  membrane,  which  communicates  with  the  cavity  of 
the  peritoneum.  This  pouch  being  constricted  by  the  sper- 
matic canal,  becomes  gradually  closed  from  above  downwards, 
until  it  leaves  only  a  small  bag,  which  surrounds  the  testicle, 
and  forms  the  tunica  vaginalis  rejlexa. 


334  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ON  THE  MUSCLES. 

Muscles  are  the  movino:  organs  of  the  animal  frame  ;  they 
constitute  by  their  size  and  number  the  great  bulk  of  the  body, 
upon  which  they  bestow  form  and  symmetry.  In  the  limbs, 
they  are  situated  around  the  bones,  which  they  invest  and  de- 
fend, and  they  form  to  some  of  the  joints  a  principal  protection. 
In  the  trunk,  they  are  spread  out  to  enclose  cavities,  and  con- 
stitute a  defensive  wall,  capable  of  yielding  to  internal  pressure, 
and  ao;ain  returnins:  to  its  orioinal  form. 

Their  color  presents  the  deep  red  which  is  characteristic  of 
flesh,  and  their  form  is  variously  modified,  to  execute  the  varied 
range  of  movements  which  they  are  required  to  effect. 

Muscle  is  composed  of  a  nun)ber  of  parallel  fibres  placed  side 
by  side,  and  supported  and  held  together  by  a  delicate  web  of 
cellular  tissue  ;  so  that  if  it  were  possible  to  remove  the  mus- 
cular substance,  there  would  remain  a  beautiful  cellular  frame- 
work, possessing  the  exact  form  and  size  of  the  muscle,  without 
its  color  and  solidity.  Towards  the  extremity  of  the  organ  the 
muscular  fibre  ceases,  and  the  cellular  structure  becomes  ag- 
gregated and  modified,  so  as  to  give  rise  to  those  glistening  fi- 
bres and  cords  by  which  the  muscle  is  tied  to  the  surface  of 
bone,  and  which  are  called  tendons.  Almost  every  muscle  in  the 
body  is  connected  with  bone,  either  by  tendinous  fibres,  or  by 
an  aggregation  of  those  fibres  constituting  a  tendon,  and  the 
union  is  so  firm  that  under  extreme  violence  the  bone  itself  ra- 
ther breaks  than  permits  the  separation  of  the  tendon  from  its 
attachment.  In  the  broad  muscles,  the  tendon  is  spread  so  as  to 
form  an  expansion  called  aponeurosis,  a  nerve  widely  spread  out. 

Muscles  present  various  modifications  in  the  arrangement  of 
their  fibres  in  relation  to  the  tendinous  structure.  Sometimes 
they  are  completely  longitudinal,  and  terminate  at  each  extre- 
mity in  tendon,  the  entire  muscle  being  fusiform  in  its  shape ; 
in  other  situations  they  are  disposed  of  like  the  rays  of  a  fan, 
converging  to  a  tendinous  point,  as  the  temporal,  pectoral,  glu- 
tei, <fcc.,  and  constitute  a  radiate  muscle.  Again  they  are  ^>en- 
viform,  converging  like  the  plumes  of  a  pen  to  one  side  of  a 
tendon  which  runs  the  whole  length  of  the  muscle,  as  in  the 
peronei;  or  bipenniform,  converging  to  both  sides  of  the  ten- 
don. In  other  muscles,  the  fibres  pass  obliquely  from  the  sur- 
face of  a  tendinous  expansion  spread  out  on  one  side,  to  that  of 
another  extended  on  the  opposite  side,  as  in  the  semimembra- 
nosus ;  or  they  are  composed  of  penniform  or  bipenniform  fas- 
ciculi, as  in  the  deltoid,  and  constitute  a  compound  muscle. 

The  nomenclature  of  the  muscles  is  defective  and  confused, 
and  is  generally  derived  from  some  prominent  character  which 
each  muscle  presents.    Thus,  some  are  named  from  their  situ- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  335 

aiion.  as  the  tibialis,  peroneus;  others  from  their  uses,  as  the 
flexors,  extensors,  adductors,  abductors,  levators,  tensors,  &c. 
Some  again  from  their  form,  as  the  trapezius,  triangularis,  del- 
toid, &c. :  and  otiiers  from  their  direction,  as  the  rectus,  ob- 
liquus,  transversalis,  etc.  Some  have  received  names  expres- 
sive  of  their  attachments,  as  the  sterno-mastoid,  sterno-hyoid, 
&c. ;  and  others  of  their  divisions,  as  the  biceps,  triceps,  digas- 
tricus,  complexus,  6cc. 

In  the  description  of  a  muscle,  we  express  its  attachment  by 
the  words  origin  and  insertion.  The  term  origin  is  generally 
applied  to  the  more  fixed  or  central  attachment,  or  to  the  point 
towards  which  the  motion  is  directed,  while  insertion  is  assign- 
ed to  the  more  movable  point,  or  to  that  most  distant  from  the 
centre;  but  there  are  many  exceptions  to  this  principle,  and  as 
many  muscles  pull  equally  by  both  extremities,  the  use  of  such 
terms  must  be  rejjarded  as  purely  arbitrary. 

In  structure,  muscle  is  composed  of  bundles  of  fibres  of  va- 
riable size  called  fasciculi,  and  is  enclosed  in  a  cellular  mem- 
branous investment  or  sheath,  M'hich  is  continuous  with  the 
cellular  frame  work  of  the  fibres.  Each  fasciculus  is  compos- 
ed of  a  number  of  smaller  bundles,  and  these  of  single  fibres, 
which  from  their  minute  size  and  independent  appearance  have 
been  distinguished  by  the  name  of  ultimate  fibres.  The  nlti- 
mate  fibre  is  found  by  microscopic  investigation  to  be  itself 
made  up  of  a  number  of  ultimate  fibrils,  enclosed  in  a  delicate 
sheath,  or  myolema.  Two  kinds  of  ultimate  muscular  fibres  ex- 
ist in  the  animal  economy,  viz.  that  of  voluntary  or  animal  life, 
and  that  of  involuntary  or  organic  life. 

Tb.Q  fibre  of  animal  life  is  recognized  from  being  marked 
by  transverse  and  slio-htly  waving  striae  ;  while  the  fibre  of  or- 
ganic life  is  known  by  the  negative  character  of  an  absence  of 
transverse  strise. 

The  ultimate  fibrils  are  minute,  beaded  or  varicose  filaments 
in  the  fibre  of  animal  life,  and  cylindrical  and  uniform  in  the 
organic  fibre. 

Muscles  are  divided  into  two  orreat  classes,  voluntary  and  in- 
voluntary, to  which  may  be  added  as  an  intermediate  and  con- 
necting link,  the  muscle  of  the  vascular  system — the  heart. 

The  voluntary,  or  system  of  animal  life,  is  developed  from 
the  external  or  serous  layer  of  the  germinal  membrane,  and 
comprehends  the  whole  of  ihe  muscles  of  the  limbs  and  of  the 
trunk.  The  involuntary,  or  organic  system,  is  developed  from 
the  internal  or  mucous  layer,  and  constitutes  the  thin  muscular 
structure  of  the  intestinal  canal,  bladder,  and  internal  organs  of 
generation.  At  the  commencement  of  the  alimentary  canal,  in 
the  Gjsophagus  and  near  its  termination  in  the  rectum,  the  mus- 
cular coat  is  formed  by  a  blending  of  the  fibres  of  both  classes. 


336  THE    THOiMSONIAN 

The  heart  is  developed  from  the  middle  or  vascular  layer  of  the 
germinal  membrane;  and  although  involuntary  in  its  action,  is 
composed  of  ultimate  fibres,  having  the  transverse  striae  of  the 
muscles  of  animal  life. 

The  muscles  may  be  arranged  in  conformity  with  the  gene- 
ral division  of  the  body,  into — 1.  those  of  the  head  and  neck  •, 
2.  those  of  the  trunk;  3.  those  of  the  upper  extremity ;  4.  those 
of  the  lower  extremity. 

MUSCLES  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK. 

The  muscles  of  the  head  and  neck  admit  of  a  subdivision  in- 
to those  of  the  head  and  face,  and  those  of  the  neck. 

Dissection. — The  occipito-fronlalis  is  to  be  dissected  by 
making  a  longitudinal  incision  along  the  vertex  of  the  head^ 
from  the  tubercle  on  the  occipital  bone  to  the  root  of  the  nose, 
and  a  second  incision  along  the  forehead  and  around  the  side 
of  the  head,  to  join  the  two  extremities  of  the  preceding.  Dis- 
sect the  integument  and  superficial  fascia  carefully  outwards, 
beginning  at  the  anterior  angle  of  the  flap,  where  the  muscular 
fibres  are  thickest,  and  remove  it  altogether.  This  dissection 
requires  care ;  for  the  muscle  is  very  thin,  and  v.'ithout  at- 
tention would  be  raised  with  the  integument:.  There  is  no 
deep  fascia  on  the  face  and  head,  nor  is  it  required  ;  for  here  the 
muscles  are  closely  applied  against  the  bones  upon  which  they 
depend  for  support,  whilst  in  the  extremities  the  support  is  de- 
rived from  the  dense  layer  of  fascia  by  which  they  are  invested, 
and  which  forms  for  each  a  distinct  sheath. 

The  occipito-frontalis  is  a  broad  musculo-tendinous  layer, 
which  covers  the  whole  of  one  side  of  the  vertex  of  the  skull, 
from  the  occiput  to  the  eyebrow.  It  arises  from  the  outer  two 
thirds  of  the  superior  curved  line  of  the  occipital  bone,  and  from 
the  mastoid  portion  of  the  temporal,  and  is  inserted  into  the  or- 
bicularis palpebrarum  muscle  and  nasal  tuberosity  of  the  frontal 
bone.  The  muscle  is  fleshy  in  front  over  the  frontal  bone,  and 
behind  over  the  oc^jpital,  the  two  portions  being  connected  by 
a  broad  aponeurosis.  The  two  muscles  cover  the  whole  of  the 
vertex  of  the  skull,  hence  its  designation  [falea  capitis.  They 
are  loosely  adherent  to  the  pericranium,  but  very  closely  to  the 
integument,  particularly  over  the  forefiead. 

Action. — to  raise  the  eyebrows,  thereby  throwing  the  integu- 
ment of  the  forehead  into  tranverse  wrinkles.  Siuie  persons 
have  the  power  of  moving  the  entire  scalp  upon  the  pericranium 
by  means  of  these  muscles. 

Dissection. — The  dissection  of  the  face  is  to  be  effected  by 
continuing  the  longitudinal  incision  of  the  vertex  of  the  previ- 
ous dissection  onwards  to  the  tip  of  the  nose,  and  tljence 
downwards  to  the  margin  of  the  upper  lip;  then  ca'  ly  an  inci- 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


337 


sion  along  the  margin  of  the  lip  to  the  angle  of  the  mouth,  and 
transversely  across  the  face  to  the  meatus  auditorius.  Lastly, 
divide  the  integument  in  front  of  the  external  ear  upwards  to 
the  transverse  incision  which  was  made  for  exposing  the  occi- 
pito  frontalis.  Dissect  the  integument  and  superficial  fascia 
from  tlie  region  included  by  these  incisions,  and  the  three  next 
groups  of  muscles  (see  4  on  plate  20)  will  be  brought  into  view. 

PLATE  26* 


Dissection. — To  open  the  orbit,  (pi.  27.)  the  calvarium  and 
braui  being  removed,  the  frontal  bone  must  be  sawn  through 
at  the  inner  extremity  of  the  orbital  rido^e,  and  externally  at  its 
outer  extremity.  The  roof  of  the  orbit  may  then  be  con)minu- 
ted  with  the  hammer,  a  process  easily  accomplished,  on  account 
of  the  thinness  of  the  orbital  plate  of  the  frontal  bone  and  lesser 
wing  of  the  sphenoid.  The  superciliary  portion  of  the  orbit 
may  now  be  driven  forwards  by  a  smart  blow,  and  the  broken 

•  The  Muscles  of  the  Head  and  Face. — 1.  The  frontal  portion  of  the  occipi- 
to-frontalis.  2.  Its  occipital  portion.  3.  Its  aponeurosis.  4.  The  orbicularis 
palpebrarum,  which  conceals  the  corrugator  supercilii  and  tensor  tarsi.  5. 
The  pyramidalis  nasi.  6.  The  compressor  nasi.  7.  The  orbicularis  oris.  8. 
The  levator  labii  superioris  alaeque  nasi.  9.  The  levator  labii  superioris  pro- 
prius;  the  lower  part  of  the  levator  ansuli  oris  is  seen  between  the  muscles 
10  and  II.  10.  The  z3-gomaticns  minor.  11.  The  z3-gomaticus  major.  12. The 
depressor  labii  inferioris.  13.  The  depressor  anguli  oris.  14.  The  levator 
menti.  15.  The  superficial  portion  of  the  masseter.  16.  Its  deep  portion. 
17.  The  attrahens  aurem.     ]8.  The  buccinator.     19.  Theattollens  aurcm.     20. 

The  temporal  fascia  which  covers  in  the  temporal  jmuscle.  21.  The  retra- 
heus  aurem.  22.  The  anterior  belly  of  the  digastricus  muscle  ;  the  tendon  is 
seen  passing  through  its  aponeurotic  pulley.      23,  The  stylo-hyoid  muscle, 

pierced  by  the  posterior  belly  of  the  digastricus.  24.  The  mylo-hyoideus 
muscle.  2.5.  The  upper  part  of  the  sternc-mastoid.  26.  The  upper  part  of 
the  trapezius. 


S38  THE  THOMSONIAN 

fragments  of  the  roof  of  the  orbit  removed.  The  periosteum 
will  then  be  exposed  unbroken  and  undisturbed.  Remove  the 
periosteum  from  the  whole  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  exposed 
orbit,  and  the  muscles  may  then  be  examined. 

Actions. — The  levator  palpebral  raises  the  upper  eyelid.  The 
four  recti,  acting  singly,  pull  the  eyeball  in  the  four  directions 
of  upwards,  downwards,  inwards,  and  outwards.  Acting  by- 
pairs,  they  carry  the  eyeball  in  the  diagonal  of  these  directions, 
viz.  upwards  and  inwards,  upwards  and  outwards,  downwards 
and  inwards,  or  downwards  and  outwards.  Acting  all  togeth- 
er, they  direcdy  retract  the  globe  within  the  orbit.  The  supe- 
rior oblique  muscle  acting  alone,  rolls  the  globe  inwards  and 
forwards,  and  carries  the  pupil  outwards  and  downwards  to  the 
lower  and  outer  angle  of  the  orbit.  The  inferior  oblique,  act- 
ing alone,  rolls  the  globe  outwards  and  backwards,  and  carries 
the  pupil  outwards  and  upwards,  to  the  upper  and  outer  angle 
of  the  eye.  Both  muscles  acting  together,  draw  the  eyeball  for- 
wards, and  give  the  pupil  that  slight  degree  of  eversion  which 
enables  it  to  admit  the  largest  field  of  vision. 

Dissection  (for  plate  28). — Make  an  incision  along  the  upper 
border  of  the  zigoma,  for  the  purpose  of  separating  the  temporal 
fascia  from  its  attachment.  Then  saw  through  the  zygomatic 
process  of  the  malar  bone,  and  through  the  rnot  of  the  zygoma, 
near  to  the  meatus  auditorius.  Draw  down  the  zygoma,  and 
with  it  the  origin  of  the  masseter,  and  dissect  the  latter  muscle 
away  from  the  ramus  and  angle  of  the  inferior  maxilla.     Now 

PLATE  27.* 


•  The  Muscles  of  the  Eyeball— the  view  being  taken  from  the  outer  side  of 
the  right  orbit.— 1.  A  small  fragment  of  the  sphenoid  bone  around  the  entrance 
of  the  optic  nerve  into  the  orbit,  2.  The  optic  nerve.  3.  The  globe  of  the 
eye.  4.  The  levator  palpebral  muscle.  5.  The  superior  oblique  muscle.  6. 
Its  cartilaginous  pulley.  7.  Its  reflected  tenddn.  8.  The  inferior  oblique 
muscle  ;  the  small  square  knob  at  its  commencement  is  a  piece  of  its  bony 
origin  broken  ofl'.  9.  The  superior  rectus.  10.  The  external  rectus,  almost 
concealed  by  the  optic  nerve.  11.  Part  of  the  internal  rectus,  showing  its  two 
heads  of  origin.  12.  The  extremity  of  the  external  rectus  at  its  insertion  ;  the 
intermediate  portion  of  the  muscle  having  been  removed.  13.  The  inferior 
rectus.  14.  The  tunica  albuginea.formed  by  the  expansion  of  the  tendons  of 
the  four  recti. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  339 

remove  the  temporal  fascia  from  the  rest  of  its  attachment,  and 
the  whole  of  the  temporal  muscle  will  be  exposed. 

Actions. — The   maxillary  miis-  plate  28.* 

cles  are  the  active  agents  in  masti- 
cation, and  form  an  apparatus  beau- 
tifully fitted  for  that  office.  The 
buccinator  circumscribes  the  cavity 
of  the  mouth,  and  with  the  aid  of 
tlie  tongue  keeps  the  food  under  the 
immediate  pressure  of  the  teeth.  By 
means  of  its  connection  with  the  su- 
perior constrictor  it  shortens  the  ca- 
vity of  the  pharynx,  from  before 
backwards,  and  becomes  an  important  auxiliary  in  deglutition. 
The  temporal,  the  masseter,  and  the  internal  pterygoid,  are  the 
bruising  muscle's,  drawing  the  lower  jaw  against  the  upper  with 
great  force.  The  two  latter,  by  the  obliquity  of  their  direction, 
assist  the  external  pterygoid  in  grinding  the  food,  by  carrying 
the  lower  jaw  forward  upon  the  upper;  the  jaw  being  brought 
back  again  by  the  deep  portion  of  the  masseter  and  posterior 
fibres  of  the  temporal.  The  whole  of  these  muscles,  acting  in 
succession  produce  a  rotary  movement  of  the  teeth  upon  each 
other,  which,  with  the  direct  action  of  the  lower  jaw  against 
the  i]pper,  effects  the  proper  mastication  of  the  food. 

Dissections  (for  plate  29). — The  dissection  of  the  neck  should 
be  commenced  by  making  an  incision  along  the  middle  line  of 
the  neck  from  the  chin  to  the  sternum,  and  bounding  it  superi- 
orly and  inferiorly  by  two  transverse  incisions,  the  superior  one 
baing  carried  along  the  margin  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  across  the 
mastoid  process  to  the  tubercle  on  the  occipital  bone,  the  inferi- 
or one  along  the  clavicle  to  the  acromion  process.  The  square 
flap  of  integument  thus  included  should  be  turned  back  from 
the  entire  side  of  the  neck,  which  brings  into  view  the  superfi- 
cial fascia,  and  on  the  removal  of  a  thin  layer  of  superficial  fas- 
cia the  platysma  myoides  will  be  exposed. 

The  sterno-hyoid,  sterno-thyroid,  thyro-hyoid  and  omo-hyoid 
muscles  are  brought  into  view  by  removing  the  deep  fascia  from 
off  the  front  of  the  neck  between  the  two  sterno-mastoid  mus- 
cles. The  omo-hyoid,  to  be  seen  in  its  whole  extent,  requires 
that  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle  be  divided  from  its  origin  and 
turned  aside. 

Actions. — The  sterno-mastoids  are  the  great  anterior  muscles 

•  The  two  Pterygoid  Muscles.  The  zygomatic  arch  and  the  greater  part  of 
the  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw  have  been  removed,  in  order  to  bring  these  mus- 
cles into  view. — 1.  The  spenoidal  origin  of  the  external  pterygoid  muscle. 
2.  Its  pterygoid  origin.    3.  The  internal  pterygoid  muscle. 


340 


THE   THOMSONIAN 


of  connection  between  the  thorax  and  the  head.  Both  muscles 
actino-  together  will  bow  the  head  directly  forwards.  The  cla- 
vicular portions,  acting  more  forcibly  than  the  sternal,  give  sta- 
bility and  steadiness  to  the  head  in  supporting  great  weights. 
Either  muscle  acting  singly  would  draw  the  head  towards  the 
shoulder  of  the  same  side,  and  carry  the  face  towards  the  oppo- 
site side. 

Actions. — The  sterno-hyoid.  sterno-thyroid,  thyro-hyoid  and 
omo-hyoid,  are  the  depressors  of  the  os  hyoides  and  larynx. 

The  digastricus,  the  stylo,  mylo,  and  genio  hyoids,  and  the 
genio-hyo-glossus,  act  upon  the  os  hyoides  when  the  lower  jaw 
is  closed,  and  upon  the  lower  jaw  when  the  os  hyoides  is  drawn 
downwards,  and  fixed  by  the  depressors  of  the  os  hyoides  and 
larynx. 

PLATE  29.* 


•  Tha  Muscles  of  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  Neck. — On  the  left  side  the  su- 
perficial muscles  are  seen,  and  on  the  right  the  deep.  1.  The  posterior  belly 
of  the  digastricus  muscle.  2.  Its  anterior  belly.  The  aponeurotic  pulley, 
through  which  its  tendon  is  seen  passing,  is  attached  to  tlie  body  of  the  os 
hyoides  (3).  4.  The  stylo-hyoideiis  muscle,  transfixed  by  the  posteror  belly 
of  the  digastricus.  5.  The  mylo-liyoideus.  G.  The  genio-hyoideus.  7.  The 
tongue.  .S.  The  hyo-glossus.  9.  The  stylo-glossus.  10.  The  styio-pharyn- 
geus.  11.  The  sterno-mastoid  muscle.  12.  Its  sternal  origin.  13.  Us  clavi- 
cular origin.  14.  The  sterno-hyoid.  1-5.  The  sterno-thyroid  of  the  right  side. 
16.  The  thyro  hyoid.  17.  The  hyoid  portion  of  the  onio-liyoid.  IS,  18.  Its 
scapular  portion;  on  the  left  side  the  tendon  of  the  muscle  is  seen  to  be  hound 
down  by  a  portion  of  the  deep  cervical  fascia.  19.  The  clavicular  portion  of 
the  trapezius.  20.  The  scalenus  anticus  of  the  right  side.  21.  The  scalenus 
posticus. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


341 


Dissection  (for  plate  30.)— The  digastncus,  slylo  hyoid,  my- 
lo-hyoid.  crenio-hyoid  and  jjenio-hyo-glossus,  are  best  dissected 
by  placing  a  high  block  beneath  the  neck,  and  throwmg  the 
head  backwards.  The  integument  has  aheady  been  dissected 
away,  and  the  removal  of  the  cellular  tissue  and  fat  brmgs  them 

clearly  into  view. 

Ac'lions.— The  ^enio-hvo-glossus  muscle  eflects  several 
movements  of  the  tongue,  as  might  be  expected  from  its  extent. 
When  the  tongue  is  steadied  and  pointed  by  the  other  muscles, 
the  posterior  fibres  of  the  genio-hyo-glossus  would  dart  it  from 
the  mouth,  wlnle  its  anterior  fibres  would  restore  it  to  its  origi- 
nal position.  The  whole  length  of  the  muscle  acting  upon  the 
tongue,  would  render  it  concave  along  the  middle  line,  and 
form  a  channel  for  the  current  of  fluid  towards  the  pharynx,  as 
in  sucking.  The  apex  of  the  tongue  is  directed  to  the  roof  of 
the  mouth,  and  rendered  convex  from  before  backwards  by  the 
hnguales.     The  hyo-glossi,  by  drawing  down  the  sides  of  the 

PLATE  30.* 


•  The  Styloid  Muscles,  and  the  Muscles  of  ike  Tongue. — 1.  A  portion  of  the 
lemporal  bone  of  the  left  side  of  the  skull,  including  the  styloid  and  mastoid 
processes,  and  meatus  auditorius  externus.  2,  2.  The  right  side  of  the  lower 
jaw,  divided  at  its  symphysis,  tlie  left  side  having  been  removed.  ^  '^'■" 
tongue.    4.  The  genio-hyoideus  muscle.      5.  The  genio-hyo-glossus. 


3.  The 
tongue.  4.  i  lie  genio-liyoideus  muscle.  0.  lUe  genio-tiyo-glossus.  6.  The 
hyo-glossus  muscle — its  basio-glcssu8  portion.  7.  Its  cerato-glossus  portion. 
8.  The  anterior  fibres  of  the  lingualis,  issuing  from  between  the  hyo-glossus 
and  genio-hyo-glcssus.  9.  The  stylo-glossus  muscle,  v^ith  a  small  portion  of 
the  stylo-maxillary  ligament.  10.  T!i*  stylo-hyoid.  11.  The  stylo-pharynge- 
us  muscle.  12.  The  oshyoides.  13.  The  thyro-hyoidean membrane.  14.Th« 
thyroid  cartiUlge.  15.  The  thjTO-hyoideus  muscle,  arising  from  the  oblique 
line  on  the  thyroid  cartilage.  16.  The  cricoid  cartilage.  17.  The  crico-tliy- 
toidean  membrane,  through  which  the  operation  of  laryngotomy  is  performed^ 
18.  The  trachea.     19.  The  commencement  of  the  eesophagus. 


342  THE    THOMSON  I  AN 

tonofae,  render  it  convex  along  the  middle  line.  It  is  drnwn 
upwards  at  its  base  by  the  palato-glossi,  and  backwards  or  to 
either  side  by  the  stylo-glossi.  Thus  the  whole  of  the  compli- 
cated movements  of  tlie  tongue  may  be  explained,  by  reasoning 
upon  the  direction  of  the  fibres  of  the  muscles,  and  their  proba- 
ble actions. 

Dissection  (for  plate  31). — To  dissect  the  pharynx,  the  tra- 
chea and  oesophagus  are  to  be  cut  through  at  the  lower  part  of 
the  neck,  and  drawn  upwards  by  dividing  the  loose  cellular  tis- 
sue which  connects  the  pharynx  to  the  vertebral  column.  The 
saw  is  then  to  be  applied  behind  the  styloid  processes,  and  the 
base  of  the  skull  sawn  through.  The  vessels  and  loose  struc- 
tures should  be  removed  from  the  preparation,  and  the  pharynx 
stuffed  with  tow  or  wool,  for  the  purpose  of  distending  it,  and 
rendering  the  muscles  more  easy  of  dissection. 

Actions. — The  three  constrictor  muscles  contract  upon  the 
morsel  of  food  as  soon  as  it  is  received  by  the  pharynx,  and 
convey  it  gradually  downwards  into  the  oesophagus.  The  sty- 
lo-pharyngei  draw  the  pharynx  upwards,  and  widen  it  laterally. 
The  palato-pharyngei  also  draw  it  upwards,  and  narrov/  the 
opening  of  the  fauces. 

PLATE  31*. 


•  A  Side  Vuv  of  the  Muscles  of  the  Pharynx. — 1.  The  trachea.  2.  The  cri- 
coid cartilage.  3.  The  crico-thyroid  piembrane.  4.  The  thyroid  cartilage. 
5.  The  thyro-hyoidean  membrane.  6.  The  os  hyoides.  7.  The  stylo-hyoid- 
ean  ligament.  8.  The  oesophagus.  9.  The  inferior  constrictor.  10.  The 
middle  constrictor.  11.  The  superior  constrictor.  12.  The  stylo-pharyneeus 
muscle  passing  down  between  the  superior  and  middle  constrictor.  13.  The 
upper  concave  border  of  the  superior  constrictor  ;  at  this  point  the  muscular 
fibres  of  the  pharynx  are  deficient.  14.  The  pterygo-maxillary  ligament.  15. 
The  buccinator  muscle.     16.  The  orbicularis  oris     17.  The  mylo-hyoideug. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


343 


Dissection  (for  plate  32).— To  plate  32*. 

examine  these  muscles,  the  pha- 
rynx must  be  opened  from  behind, 
and  the  mucous  membrane  care- 
fully removed  from  off  the  poste- 
rior surface  of  the  soft  palate.  The 
levator  palati  muscle  must  be  tur- 
ned down  from  its  orii^in  on  one 
side  and  removed,  and  the  superi- 
or constrictor  dissected  away  from 
its  pterygoid  origin,  to  bring  the 
tensor  palati  into  view. 

Actions. — The  levator  palati  raises  the  soft  palate,  while  the 
tensor  spreads  it  out  laterally  so  as  to  form  a  septum  between  the 
pharynx  and  posterior  nares  during  deglutition.  The  palato- 
glossus and  pharyngeus  constrict  the  opening  of  the  fauces, 
and  by  drawing  dowM  the  soft  palate  they  serve  to  press  the 
mass  of  food  from  the  dorsum  of  the  tongue  into  the  pharynx. 

Dissection  (for  plate  33). — The  muscles  have  already  been 
exposed,  by  the  removal  of  the  face  from  the  anterior  aspect  of 
the  vertebral  column. 

Actions. — The  rectos  anticus  major  and  minor  preserve  the 
equilibrium  of  the  head  upon  the  atlas;  and,  acting  conjointly 
with  the  longus  colli,  they  flex  and  rotate  the  head  and  the  cer- 
vical portion  of  the  vertebral  column.  The  scaleni  muscles, 
taking  their  fixed  point  from  below,  are  flexors  of  the  vertebral 
column  ;  and,  from  above,  elevators  of  the  ribs,  and  therefore 
inspiratory  muscles. 


*  The  Muscles  of  the  Soft  Palate. — 1.  A  transverse  section  through  the  mid- 
dle of  the  base  of  the  skull,  dividing  the  basilar  process  of  the  occipital  bone 
in  the  middle  line,  and  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone  at  each  side. 
2.  The  vomer,  covered  by  mucous  membrane  and  separating  the  two  posteri- 
or nares.  3,  3.  The  Eustachian  tubes.  4.  The  levator  palati  muscle  of  the 
left  side  ;  the  risht  has  been  removed.  5.  The  hamular  process  of  the  inter- 
nal pterygoid-plate  of  the  left  side,  around  which  the  aponeurosis  of  the  tensor 
palali  is  seen  turning.  6.  The  pterygo-maxillary  ligament.  7.  The  superior 
constrictor  muscle  of  the  left  side,  turned  aside.  8.  The  azygos  uvulae  mus- 
cle. 9.  The  internal  pterygoid  plate.  10.  The  external  pterygoid  plate.  11. 
The  tensor  palati  nauscle.  12.  Its  aponeurosis,  expanding  in  the  structure  of 
the  soft  palate.  13.  The  external  pterygoid  muscle.  14.  The  attachments  of 
two  pairs  of  muscles  cut  short.  The  superior  pair  belong  to  the  genio-hyo- 
glossi  muscles;  the  inferior  pair  to  the  genio-hyoidei.  15.  The  attachment 
of  the  mylo-hyoideus  of  one  side  and  part  of  the  opposite.  16.  The  anterior 
attachments  of  the  digastric  muscles.  17.  The  depression  on  the  lower  jaw, 
corresponding  with  the  submaxillary  gland.  The  depression  above  the  mylo- 
hyoideus  on  which  the  number  15  rest  corresponds  with  the  sublingual 
gland. 


344 


THE  TH0M30NIAN 
PLATE  33.* 


Dlsseciioiis  (for  plates  33  and  34).— The  muscles  of  tiie  first 
layer  are  to  be  dissected  by  making  an  incision  along  the  mid- 
dle line  of  the  back,  from  the  tubercle  on  the  occipital  bone  to 
tlie  coccyx.  From  the  upper  point  of  this  incision,  carry  a  se- 
cond along  the  side  of  the  neck,  to  the  middle  of  the  clavicle, 
Inferiorly,  an  incision  must  be  m.ade  from  the  extremity  of  the 
sacrum,  along  the  crest  of  the  ileum,  to  about  its  middle.  For 
convenience  of  dissection,  a  fourth  may  be  carried  from  the 
middle  of  the  spine  to  the  acromion  process.  The  integument 
and  superficial  fascia,  together,  are  to  de  dissected  off  the  mus- 
cles, in  the  course  of  their  fibres,  over  the  whole  of  this  region. 

The  second  layer  is  brought  into  view  by  dividing  the  two 
preceding  muscles,  near  to  their  insertion,  and  turning  them  to 
the  opposite  side. 

The  third  layer  consists  of  muscles  which  arise  from  the  spi- 
nous processes  of  ttie  vertebral  column,  and  pass  outwards.  It 
is  brought  into  view  by  dividing  the  levator  anguli  scapulae 
near  its  insertion,  and  reflecting  the  two  rhomboid  muscles  up- 
wards froui  their  insertion  into  the  scapula,  and  removing  them 
altofrether. 


•  The  Pravcrtehral  Group  of  Muscles  of  the  Neck. — 1.  The  rectus  anticus 
major  muscle.  2.  The  scalenus  anticus.  3.  The  lower  part  of  the  longus 
colli  of  the  light  side ;  it  is  concealed  superiorly  by  the  rectus  anticus  major. 
4.  The  rectus  anticus  minor.  5.  The  upper  portion  of  the  longus  colli  muscle. 
6.  Its  lower  portion  ;  the  figure  rests  upon  the  seventh  cervical  vertebra.  7. 
The  scalenus  posticus.  8.  The  rectus  lateralis  of  the  lef  side.t  9,  Oae  of  the 
intertransversalis  muscles. 


I 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


345 


B  The  two  serrati  and  two  splenii  must  be  removed  by  cuttin£r 
them  away  from  their  origins  and  insertions,  to  bring  the  fourth 
?ayer  into  view. 

PLATE  31* 


*  Tke  Urst  and  secend,  and  part  of  the  third  lay-er  of  Muscles  of  the  Back; 
Wit  first  layer  being  showa  upon  the  right,  and  the  second  on  the  left  side. — i 
I.  The  trapezius  muscle.  2.  The  tendinous  portion,  which,  with  a  corres- 
ponding portion  in  th€  opposite  muscle,  fonns  the  tendinous  ellipse  on  the 
back  of  the  neck.  2.  The  acromion  process  and  spine  of  the  scapula.  4.  The 
lalissimus  dorsi  muscle.  5.  The  deltoid.  6.  The  muscles  of  the  dorsum  of  the 
■scapula,  iiifra-spinatus,  teres  minor  and  teres  major.  7,  The  external  oblique 
muscle.  8.  The  gluteus  medius.  9.  The  glutei  maximi.  10.  The  lavator  an- 
guli  scapulae.  11.  The  rhomboideus  minor.  12.  The  rhomboiJeus  major.  13. 
The  splenius  capitis;  the  muscle  immediately  above  and  overlaid  by  the  sple- 
nius.  is  the  complexus.  14.  The  splenius  colli  only  parliully  seen  ;  the  common 
origin  of  the  splenius  is  seen  attached  to  the  spinous  processes  below  the  low- 
er border  of  the  rhomboideus  major.  15.  The  verte'bral -aponeurosis.  16.  The 
serralus  posticus  inferior.  17.  The  supra-spinatus  muscle,  IS.  The  infra-spi- 
nalus.  19.  The  teres  minor  muscle  20.  Tlie  teres  major.  21.  The  long  head 
of  the  triceps,  passing  between  the  teres  minor  and  major  to  the  upper  arm. 
.■22.  The  serratus  maguus,  proceeding  forwards  from  its  origin  at  the  base  of 
Che  •scapuliu    i23-.  The  iEternal  oblique  m\i«cle. 


S3 


346 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


The  muscles  of  the  preceding  Inyer  are  to  be  removed  by 
dividing  them  transversely  through  the  middle,  and  turning* 
one  extremity  upwards,  the  other  downwards.  In  this  way 
the  whole  of  the  muscles  of  the  Ibiirth  layer  may  be  g-ot  rid  of, 
and  the  remaining  muscles  of  the  spine  brought  into  a  state  to 
be  examined. 

The  semi-spinales  muscles  must  both  be  removed  to  obtain  a 
good  view  of  the  multitidas  spinse  which  lies  beneath  them,  and 
fills  up  the  concavity  between  the  spinous  and  transverse  pro- 
cesses, the  whole  length  of  the  vertebral  column. 

Plate  35.* 


*  The  fourth  and  fifth  and  fart  of  the  sixth  layer  of  the  Muscles  of  the  Back 
•1.  The  common  origin  of  the  erector  spinae  muscle.  2.  The  sacro-lumbalis. 
3.  The  longissimus  dorsi.  4.  The  spinalis  dorsi.  5.  The  cervicaiis  ascend- 
ens.  6.  The  transversalis  colli.  7.  The  Irachelo-mastoideus.  :S.  The  com- 
plexus.  9.  The  transversalis  colli,  showing  its  origin.  10.  The  semispinnlis 
dorii.  11.  The  semispinalis  colli.  12.  Tlie  rectus  posticus  minor.  13.  The 
rectus  posticus  major.  14.  The  obliquus  superior.  15.  The  obliquus  inferior. 
16.  The  multihdus  spinae.  17  The  levatores  costarum.  18.  lutertransver- 
sales.     19.  The  quadratus  lumborum. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  347 

Actions. — The  upper  fibres  of  the  trapezius  draw  the  shoul- 
der upwards  and  backwards ;  the  middle  fibres,  directly  back- 
wards ;  and  the  lower,  downwards  and  backwards.  The  lower 
fidres  also  act  by  producing  rotation  of  the  scapula  upon  the 
chest.  If  the  shoulder  be  fixed  the  upper  fibres  will  flex  the 
spine  towards  the  corresponding  side.  The  latissimus  dorsi  is 
a  muscle  of  the  arm,  drawing  it  backwards  and  downwards, 
and  at  the  same  time  rotating  it  inwards;  if  the  arm  be  fixed, 
tile  latissimus  dorsi  will  draw  the  spine  to  that  side,  and  rais- 
ing the  lower  ribs  be  an  inspiratory  muscle ;  and  if  both  arms 
be  fixed,  the  two  muscles  will  draw  the  whole  trunk  forwards, 
as  in  climbing  or  walking  on  crutches.  The  levator  anguli 
scapulas  lifts  the  upper  angle  of  the  scapula,  and  with  it  the 
entire  shoulder,  and  the  rhomboidei  carry  the  scapula  and 
shoulder  upwards  and  backwards. 

The  serrati  are  respiratory  muscles  acting  in  opposition  to 
each  other — the  serratus  posticus  superior,  drawing  the  ribs 
upwards,  and  thereby  expanding  the  chest ;  and  ihe  inferioi', 
drawing  the  lower  ribs  downwards  and  diminishing  the  cavity 
of  the  chest.  The  former  is  an  inspiratory,  the  latter  an  expi- 
ratory muscle.  The  splenii  muscles  of  one  side  draw  the  ver- 
tebral column  backwards  and  to  one  side,  and  rotate  the  head 
towards  the  corresponding  shoulder.  The  muscles  of  opposite 
sides  acting  together,  will  draw  the  head  directly  backwards. 
They  are  the  natural  antagonists  of  the  sterno-mastoid  mus- 
cles. 

The  sacro-lumbalis,  with  its  accessory  muscle,  the  lonfi^- 
simus  dorsi  and  spinalis  dorsi,  are  known  by  the  general  term 
oi erector  spine,  which  sufficiently  expresses  their  actions.  They 
keep  the  spine  supported  in  the  vertical  position  by  their  broad 
origin  from  below,  and  by  m.eans  of  their  insertion  by  distinct 
tendons  into  the  ribs  and  spinous  processes.  Being  made  up 
of  a  number  of  distinct  fasciculi,  which  alternate  in  their  ac- 
tions, the  spine  is  kept  erect  without  fatigue,  even  when  they 
have  to  counterbalance  a  corpulent  abdominal  developement. 
The  continuations  upwards  of  these  muscles  into  the  neck 
preserve  the  steadiness  and  uprightness  of  that  region.  When 
the  muscles  of  one  side  act  alone,  the  neck  is  rotated  upon  its 
axis.  The  complexus,  by  being  attached  to  the  occipital  bone 
draws  the  head  backwards,  and  counteracts  the  muscles  on  the 
anterior  part  of  the  neck.  It  assists  also  in  the  rotation  of  the 
head. 

The  semi-spinales  and  inultifidus  spine  muscles  act  directly 
on  the  vertebrae,  and  contribute  to  the  general  action  of  sup- 
porting the  vertebral  column  erect. 

The  four  little  muscles  situated  between  the  occiput  and  the 
two  first  vertebrce,  effect  the  various  movements  between  these 


348 


THE  THOMSONIAr? 


*  The  Muscles  of  the  ^interior  ^-Is/jcct  of  the  Trunk. — On  the  left  side  the 
superficial  layer  is  seen,  and  on  the  right  the  deeper  layer.  1.  The  peclora- 
Jis  major  muscle.  2.  The  deltoid  ;  the  interval  between  these  muscles 
lod?es  the  cephalic  vein.  3.  The  anterior  border  of  the  latissimus  dorsi. 
4.  The  serrations  of  the  serratus  magnus.  5.  The  subclavius  muscle  of  the 
rig^ht  side.  6.  The  pectoralis  minor.  7.  The  coraco-brachialis  muscle, 
8.  The  upper  part  of  the  biceps  muscle,  showing  its  Wo  heads.  9.  The 
coracoid  process  of  the  scapula.  10.  The  serratus  magnus  of  the  right 
side.  11.  The  external  intercostal  muscle  of  the  fifth  intercostal  space. 
12.  The  external  oblique  muscle.  13.  Its  aponeurosis,  the  median  line  to 
the  right  of  this  number  is  the  linea  alba  ;  the  fiexuous  line  to  its  left  is  the 
linea  semilunaris ;  and  the  transverse  lines  above  and  below  the  number,  the 
lina;  transverste  of  wliich  there  v/e.re  only  three  in  this  subject.  14.  Poupart's 
ligament.  13.  The  external  abdominal  ring ;  the  margin  above  (he  ring  is  the 
superior  or  internal  pillar ;  the  margin  below  the  ring,  the  inferior  or  external 
pillar;  the  curved  intercolumnar  fibres  are  seen  proceeding  upwards  from 
Poupart's  lisament  to  strengthen  the  ring.  The  numbers  14  and  \h  are  situ- 
ated upon  the  fascia  lata  of  the  thigh;  the  opening  immediately  to  the  right 
of  15  is  the  saphenous  openin?.  1(5.  The  rectus  muscle  of  the  right  side, 
brought  into  view  by  the  removal  of  the  anterior  segment  of  its  sheath  ;  the 
posterior  segment  of  its  sheath  with  the  divided  edge  of  the  anterior  segment. 
IT.  The  pyramidalis  muscle.  IS.  The  internal  oblique  muscle.  19.  The  con- 
joined tendon  of  the  internal  oblique  and  transVersaiis,  descending  behind 
Poupart's  ligament  to  the  pectineal  line.  20.  The  arch  formed  between  the 
lower  curved  border  of  the  internal  oblique  and  Poupart's  ligament ;  it  is  be 
neatli  tMs  arch  that  the  spermatic  cord  and  hernia  pass- 


MATERIA    MEDICA, 


349 


bones;  the  recti  prodncinjr  the  antero-posterior  actions,  and  the 
ohllqai  the  rotatory"  motions  of  tlie  atlas  on  the  axis. 

The  aclionsofthe  remaining  niusclesof  the  spine,  -the  supra 
and  inter-spinales  and  intertrausversales  are  expressed  in  their 
names. 

The  intercostal  muscles  raise  tlic  ribs  when  they  act  from 
above,  and  depress  them  when  they  take  their  fixed  point  from 
foelow.  They  are,  therefore,  botn  inspiratory  and  expiratory 
muscles. 

[The  preceding-  dissection  and  action  includes  plate  36.] 
PLATE  37.* 


*  Lateral  View  of  the  Trunk  of  the  Body,  showing  its  muscles,  and  particu- 
larly the  transversalis  abdominis. — 1.  The  costal  origin  of  the  latissimus  dor- 
si  muscle.  2.  The  serratus  mas^nus.  3.  The  upper  part  of  the  external  ob- 
lique muscle,  divided  in  the  direction  best  calculated  to  show  the  muscles  be- 
neath without  interfering  with  its  digitations  with  the  serratus  magnus.  4. 
Two  of  the  external  intercostal  muscles.  5.  Two  of  the  internal  intercostals. 
»).  The  transversalis  muscle.  7.  Its  posterior  aponeurosis.  S.  Its  anterior 
aponeurosis,  formina;  the  posterior  boundary  of  the  sheath  of  the  rectus.  9. 
The  lower  part,  of  the  left  rectus,  with  tiie  tipoueurosis  of  the  transversalis 
.passing  ia  front.  39.  The  riglit  ieetus  muscle.  11.  Th^e  arched  opening  left 
betvv^eeui  the  lower  border  nf  th(3  tranavcrsalis  muscle  and  Poupart's  ligament, 
through  which  the  spermatic  cord  and  hernia  pass.  12.  The  gluteous  maxi- 
mus,  attd  medius,  and  tensor  vagince  feraoris  muscles  invested  by  fascia  lata. 


350  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Dissection  (for  plate  37), — The  dissection  of  the  abdominal 
muscles  is  to  be  commenced  by  making  three  incisions  : — The 
first,  vertical,  in  the  middle  line,  from  over  the  lower  part  of 
the  sternum  to  the  pubes ;  the  second,  ohliqve^  from  umbilicus, 
upwards  and  outwards,  to  the  outer  side  of  the  chest,  as  high 
as  the  fifth  or  sixth  rib  ;  and  third,  obliqve,  from  the  umbilicus, 
downwards  and  outwards,  to  the  middle  of  the  crest  of  the 
ilium.  The  three  flaps  included  by  these  incisions  should 
theu  be  dissected  back  in  the  direction  of  the  fibres  of  the  ex- 
ternal oblique  muscle,  beginning  at  the  angle  of  each.  The 
integument  and  superficial  fascia  should  be  dissected  off  to- 
gether so  as  to  expose  the  fibres  of  the  muscle  at  once. 

If  the  external  oblique  muscle  be  dissected  on  both  sides,  a 
white  tendinous  line  will  be  seen  alon^  the  middle  of  the  abdo- 
men, extending  from  the  ensiform  cartilage  to  the  pubis  :  this  is 
the  linea  alba.  A  little  external  to  it,  on  each  side,  two  curved 
lines  will  be  observed  extending  from  the  sides  of  the  chest  ta 
tire  pubis,  and  bounding  the  recti  muscles :  these  are  the  linem 
semilunar es.  Some  transverse  lines,  lineee  transversal,  three 
or  four  in  number,  connect  the  lincce  semilunares  with  the  li- 
nea alba. 

The  external  oblique  is  now  to  be  removed  by  making  an  in- 
cision across  the  ribs,  just  below  its  origin,  to  its  posterior  bor- 
der, and  another  along  Poupart's  ligament  and  the  crest  of  the 
ilium.  Poupart's  ligament  should  be  left  entire,  as  it  gives  at- 
tachment to  the  next  muscles.  The  muscle  may  then  be  turn- 
ed forwards  towards  the  linea  alba,  or  removed  altogether. 

The  internal  oblique  muscle  is  to  be  removed  by  separating 
it  from  its  attachment  to  the  ribs  above,  and  to  the  crest  of  the 
ilium,  and  Poupart's  ligament  below.  It  should  be  divided  be- 
hind by  a  vertical  incision  extending  from  the  last  rib  to  the  crest 
of  the  ilium,  as  its  lumbar  attachment  cannot  at  present  be  exa- 
mined. The  muscle  is  then  to  be  turned  forwards.  Care  will  be 
required  in  performing  this  dissection,  from  the  difficulty  of  dis- 
tinguishing between  this  muscle  and  the  one  beneath.  A  thia 
layer  of  cellular  tissue  is  all  that  separates  them  for  the  greater 
part  of  their  extent.  Near  the  crest  of  the  ilium  the  circum- 
flex ilii  artery  ascends  between  the  two  muscles,  and  forms  a 
valuable  guide  to  their  separation.  Just  above  Poupart's  lig- 
ament they  are  so  closly  connected  that  it  is  impossible  to~  di- 
vide them. 

To  dissect  the  rectus  muscle,  the  sheath  should  be  opened 
by  a  vertical  incision  extending  from  over  the  cartilages  of  the 
lower  ribs  to  the  front  of  the  pubis.  The  sheath  may  then  be 
dissected  off  and  turned  to  either  side :  this  is  easily  done  ex- 
cepting at  the  linese  transversac,  where  a  close  adhesion  subsists 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


351 


between  the  muscle  and  the  external  boundary  of  the  sheath. 
The  sheath  contains  the  rectus  and  pyrimadahs  muscles. 

The  rectus  may  now  be  divided  across  the  middle,  and  the 
two  ends  drawn  aside  for  the  purpose  of  examining  the  mode 
of  formation  of  its  sheath. 

The  two  next  muscles  can  only  be  examined  when  the  whole 
of  the  viscera  are  removed.  To  see  thequadratus  lumborum, 
It  is  also  necessary  to  divide  and  draw  aside  the  psoas  muscle 
and  the  anterior  lamella  of  the  aponeurosis  of  the  transversalis. 

To  obtain  a  good  view  of  tlie  diaphragm,  the  peritoneum 
should  be  dissected  from  its  under  surface. 

PLATF  3S-* 


r^-^ 


*  Tlie  under  or  abdominal  side  of  the  Diaphragm.. — 1,  2,  3.  The  greater 
muscle  ;  the  ligure  1  rests  upon  the  central  leaflet  ol'  the  tendinous  centre ;  the 
number  2  on  the  left  or  smallest,  and  number  3  on  the  right  leaflet.  4.  The 
thin  fasciculus  which  arises  from  the  ensiform  cartilage  ;  a  small  triangular 
space  is  left  on  either  side  of  this  I'asciculus,  which  is  completed  only  by  the  se- 
rous membranes  of  the  abdomen  and  chest.  5.  The  ligamentum  arcuatum  ex- 
ternum of  the  left  side.  (J.  The  ligamentum  arcuatum  internum.  7.  A  small 
arched  opening  occasionally  found,  tlirough  which  the  lesser  splanchnic  nerve 
passes-  8.  The  right  or  larger  tendon  of  the  lesser  niuscle;  a  muscular  fasci- 
cuius  from  this  tendon  curves  to  the  left  side  of  the  greater  muscle,  between 
the  oesophageal  and  aorfic  openings.  9.  The  fourth  lumbar  vertebra.  10. 
The  left  or  shorter  tendon  of  tlie  lesser  muscle.  11.  The  aortic  opening 
through  which  the  aorta  is  seen  issuing.  12.  A  portion  of  the  (Esophagus  is- 
suing through  the  oesophageal  opening.  13.  The  opening  for  the  inferior  ve- 
na cava,  in  the  tendinous  centre  of  the  diaphragm.  14.  The  psoas  magnus 
muscle  passin?  beneath  the  ligamentum  arcuatum  internum  ;  it  has  been  re- 
moved on  the  opposite  side,  to  show  the  arch  more  distinctly.  15.  The  quad- 
ratus  lumborum  passing  beneath  the  ligamentum  arcuatum  externum  ;  this 
muscle  has  also  been  removed  on  the  left  side.  IG.  lutertransversales  mus- 
cles. 


352  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Actions. — The  externa)  obliqne  mnscle,  acting  singly,  vfordd 
draw  the  thorax  towards  the  pelvis,  and  twist  the  body  to  the- 
opposite  side.  Both  muscles,  acting  together,  would  flex  the- 
thorax  directly  on  the  pelvis.  Tiie  internal  oblique  of  one  side 
draws  the  chest  downwards  and  outwards  :  both  together  bend 
it  directly  forwards.  Either  transversalis  muscle,  acting  singly, 
will  diminish  the  size  of  the  abdomen  on  its  own  s-ide,  and  both 
together  will  constrict  the  entire  cylinder  of  the  cavity.  The 
recti  muscles,  assisted  by  the  pyramidales,  flex  the  thorax  upon 
tire  chest,  and,  through  the  medium  of  the  lineas  transversas, 
are  enabled  to  act  when  their  sheath  is  curved  inwards  by  the 
action  of  the  transversales.  The  pyramidales  are  tensors  of  the 
hnea  alba.  The  abdominal  are  expiratory  muscles,  and  the 
chief  agents  of  expulsion  ;  by  their  action  the  fostus  is  expelled 
from  the  uterus,  the  urine  from  the  bladder,  the  faeces  from  the 
rectum,  the  bile  from  the  gall-bladder,  the  ingesta  from  the  slo- 
maci'i  and  bowels  in  vomiting,  and  the  mucous  and  irritating 
substances  from  the  bronchial  tubes,  trachea,  and  nasal  passa- 
ges, during  couching  and  sneezing.  To  produce  these  efforts 
they  all  act  together.  Their  violent  and  continued  action  pro- 
duces hernia  ;  and,  actins"  spasmodically,  they  may  occasion 
rupture  of  the  viscera.  The  quadratus  lumborum  draws  the 
last  rib  downwards,  and  is  an  expiratory  muscle  ;  it  also  serves 
to  bend  the  vertebral  cohimn  to  one  or  the  other  side.  The 
psoas  parvus  is  a  tensor  of  the  iliac  fascia,  and,  taking  its  fixed 
origin  from  below,  it  may  assist  in  flexing  the  vertebral  columri 
forwards.  The  diaphragm  is  an  inspiratory  muscle,  and  the 
sole  agent  in  tranquil  inspiration.  When  in  action,  the  muscle 
is  drawn  downwards,  its  plane  being  rendered  oblique  from  the 
level  of  the  ensiform  cartilage,  to  the  upper  hmibar  vertebras. 
During  relaxation  it  is  convex,  and  encroaches  considerably  on 
the  cavity  of  the  chest,  particularly  at  the  sides,  where  it  cor- 
responds with  the  lungs.  It  assists  the  abdominal  muscles  pow- 
erfully in  expulsion,  every  act  of  that  kind  being  preceded  or 
accompanied  by  a  deep  inspiration.  Spasmodic  action  of  the 
diaphragm  produces  hiccough  and  sobbing,  and  its  rapid  alter- 
nation of  contraction  and  relaxation,  combined  with  laryngeal 
and  fascial  movements,  laughing  and  crying. 

Muscles  of  the  Perineum. 
The  muscles  of  the  perineum  are  situated  in  the  outlet  of  the 
pelvis,  and  consist  of  two  groups,  one  of  which  belongs  espe- 
cially to  the  organs  of  generation  and  urethra,  the  other  to  the 
termination  of  the  alimentary  canal.  To  these  mny  be  added, 
the  only  pair  of  muscles  which  is  proper  to  the  pelvis,  the  coc~ 
cygeus.     The  muscles  oi  this  region  in  the  male,  are,  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  333 

Accelerator  nrinse, 

Erector  penis, 
TransversLis  perinei, 
Compressor  urethree, 
Spincter  ani, 
Levator  ani, 
Coccygens. 

Dissection  (for  plate  39). — To  dissect  the  perineum,  the  sub- 
ject should  be  fixed  in  the  position  for  lithotomy,  that  is,  the 
hands  should  be  bound  to  the  soles  of  the  feet,  and  the  knees 
kept  apart.  An  easier  plan  is  the  drawing  of  the  feet  upwards 
by  means  of  a  cord  passed  through  a  hook  in  the  ceiling.  Both 
of  these  means  of  preparation  have  for  their  object  the  full  ex- 
posure of  the  perineum.  And  as  this  is  a  dissection  which  de- 
mands some  degree  of  delicacy  and  nice  manipulation,  a  strong 
light  should  be  thrown  upon  the  part.  Having  fixed  the  sub- 
ject, and  drawn  the  scrotum  upwards  by  means  of  a  string  or 
hook,  carry  an  incision  from  the  base  of  the  scrotum  along  the 
ramus  of  the  pubis  and  ischium  and  tuberosity  of  the  ischium, 
to  a  point  parallel  with  the  apex  of  the  coccyx  ;  then  describe  a 
curve  over  the  coccyx  to  the  same  point  on  the  opposite  side, 
and  continue  the  incision  onwards  along  the  opposite  tuberosity, 

PLATE  39.* 


*  The  Muscles  of  the  Perineum.. — 1.  The  accelleratores  urinas  muscles  j  Ihs 
figure  rests  upon  the  corpus  spongiosum  penis.  2.  The  corpus  cavernosum  of 
one  side.  3.  The  erector  penis  of  one  side.  4.  The  transversus  perinei  of 
one  side.  .5.  The  triangular  space  ihrougli  Mhich  the  deep  perineal  fascia  is 
seen.  6-  The  spliincter  ani ;  its  anterior  extremity  is  cut  off.  7.  The  levator 
ani  of  the  left  side  ;  the  large  space  between  the  tuberosity  of  the  iscliium  (8) 
and  the  anus,  is  the  ischio-rectal  fossa;  the  same  fossa  is  seen  upon  the  oppo- 
site  side.  9.  The  spine  of  the  ischium.  10.  The  left  cocygeus  muscle.  T!i€ 
boundaries  of  the  perineum  are  well  seen  in  this  engraving. 


354  THE    THOMSONIAN 

and  ramus  of  the  ischium,  and  ramus  of  the  pubis,  to  the  op- 
posite side  of  the  scrotum,  where  the  two  extremities  may  be 
connected  by  a  transv^erse  incision.  This  incision  will  com- 
pletely surround  the  perineum,  following  very  nearly  the  out- 
line of  its  boundaries.  Now  let  the  student  dissect  off  the  in- 
tegument carefully  from  the  whole  of  the  included  space,  and 
he  will  expose  the  fatty  cellular  structure  of  the  common  su- 
perficial fascia,  which  exactly  resembles  the  superficial  fascia 
in  every  other  situation.  The  common  superficial  fascia  is 
then  to  be  rmoved  to  the  same  extent,  exposing  the  superficial 
perineal  fascia.  This  layer  is  also  to  be  turned  aside,  when  the 
muscles  of  the  genital  region  of  the  perineum  will  be  brought 
into  view. 

Part  of  the  levator  ani  majr  be  seen  during  the  dissection  of 
the  anal  portion  of  the  perineum  by  removing  the  fat  which 
surrounds  the  termination  of  the  rectum.  But  to  study  the  en- 
tire muscle,  a  lateral  section  of  the  pelvis  must  be  made  by  saw- 
ing througii  the  pubis  a  little  to  one  side  of  the  symphysis,  se- 
parating the  bones  behind  at  the  sacro  iliac  symphysis,  and 
turning  down  the  bladder  and  rectum.  The  pelvic  fascia  is 
then  to  be  carefully  raised,  beginning  at  the  base  of  the  bladder 
and  proceeding  upwards,  until  the  whole  extent  of  the  muscle 
is  exposed. 

In  the  female  this  muscle  is  inserted  into  the  coccyx  and  fi- 
brous raphe — extremity  of  the  rectum  and  vagina. 

The  muscles  of  the  perineum  in  the  female  are  the  same  as 
in  the  male,  and  have  received  analagous  names.  They  are 
smaller  in  size,  and  are  modified  lo  suit  the  different  form  of 
the  organs. 

Actions. — The  acceleratores  urinse  being  continuous  at  the 
middle  line,  and  attached  on  each  side  to  the  bone,  by  means  of 
their  posterior  fibres  will  support  the  bulbous  portion  of  the 
urethra,  and  acting  suddenly  will  propel  the  semen  or  the  last 
drops  of  urine  from  the  canal.  The  middle  and  posterior  fi- 
bres, according  to  Krause,  contribute  towards  the  erection  of  the 
corpus  spongiosum,  by  producing  compression  upon  the  venous 
structure  of  the  bulb,  and  the  anterior  fibres,  according  to  Tyr- 
rell, assist  in  the  erection  of  the  entire  organ,  by  compressing 
the  vena  dorsalis,  by  means  of  their  insertion  into  the  fascia  pe- 
nis. The  erector  penis  becomes  entitled  to  its  name  from 
spreading  out  upon  the  dorsum  of  theoro-an  into  a  membranous 
expansion  (fascia  penis)  which,  according  to  Krause,  compress- 
es the  dorsal  vein  during  the  action  of  the  muscle,  and  espe- 
cially after  the  erection  of  the  orsan  has  commenced.  The 
transverse  muscles  serve  to  steady  the  tendinous  center,  that  the 
muscles  attached  to  it  may  obtain  a  firm  point  of  support.  Ac- 
cording to  Cruveilhier,  they  draw  the  anus  backwards  during 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  355 

the  expulsion  of  the  faeces,  and  antagonise  the  levatores  ani 
which  carry  the  anus  forwards.  The  compressor  urethrse  tak- 
ing its  fixed  point  from  the  ramus  of  the  ischium  at  each  side, 
can,  says  Mr.  Guthrie,  "  compress  the  urethra  so  as  to  close  it; 
I  conceiv^e  completely,  after  the  manner  of  a  sphincter."  The 
transverse  portion  will  also  have  a  tendency  to  dra\y  the  ure- 
thra downwards,  whilst  the  perpendicular  portion  will  draw  it 
upwards  towards  the  pubis.  The  inferior  fasciculus  of  the 
transverse  muscle,  enclosing  Cowper's  glands,  will  assist  those 
bodies  in  evacuating  their  secretion.  The  external  sphincter 
being  a  cutaneous  muscle  contracts  the  integument  aiound  the 
anus,  and  by  its  attachment  to  the  tendinous  centre,  and  to  the 
point  of  the  coccyx,  assists  the  levator  am  in  giving  support  to 
the  opening  din-ing  expulsive  eflbrts.  the  internal  sphincter 
contracts  the  extremity  of  the  cylinder  of  the  intestine.  The 
use  of  the  levator  ani  is  expressed  in  its  name.  It  is  the  antag- 
onist of  the  diaphragm  and  the  rest  of  the  expulsory  muscles, 
and  serves  to  support  the  rectum  and  vagina  during  their  ex- 
pulsive efforts.  The  levator  ani  acts  in  unison  with  the  dia- 
phragm, and  rises  and  falls  like  that  muscle  in  forcible  respira- 
tion. Yielding  to  the  propulsive  action  of  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles, it  enables  the  outlet  of  the  pelvis  to  bear  a  greater  force 
than  a  resisting  structure,  and  on  the  remission  of  such  actions, 
it  restores  the  perineum  to  its  original  form.  The  coccygei 
muscles  restore  the  coccyx  to  its  natural  position,  after  it  has 
been  pressed  backwards  during  defecation  or  during  parturition. 

MUSCLES  OF  THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY. 

Dissection. — Make  an  incision  along  the  line  of  the  clavicle- 
from  the  upper  part  of  the  sternum  to  the  acromion  process  ;  a 
second  along  the  lower  border  of  the  s^reat  pectoral  muscle, 
from  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum  to  the  insertion  of  its  ten- 
don into  the  humerus  ;  and  connect  the  two  by  a  third,  carried 
longitudinally  along  the  middle  of  the  sternum.  The  inte- 
gument and  superficial  fascia  are  to  be  dissected  together  from 
off  the  fibres  of  the  muscle,  and  always  in  the  direction  of  their 
course.  For  this  purpose  the  dissector,  if  he  have  the  right 
arm,  will  commence  with  the  lower  angle  of  the  flap;  if  the 
left,  with  the  upper  angle.  He  will  thus  expose  the  pectoralis 
major  mascle  in  its  whole  extent. 

Actions. — The  pectoralis  major  draws  the  arm  against  the 
thorax,  while  its  upper  fibres  assist  the  upper  part  of  the  trap- 
ezius in  raising  the  shoulder,  as  in  supporting  weight.  The 
lower  fibres  depress  the  shoulder  with  the  aid  of  the  latissimus 
dorsi.  Taking  its  fixed  point  from  the  shoulder,  the  pectoralis 
major  assists  the  pectoralis  minor,  subclavius,  aud  serratus  mag* 


356 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


nus,  in  drawins:  up  and  expanding  the  chest.  The  pectoralia 
minor,  in  addition  to  this  action,  draws  upon  the  coracoid  pro- 
cess, and  assists  in  rotating-  the  scapula  upon  the  chest.  The 
subclavins  draws  the  clavicle  downwards  and  lorwards,  and 
thereby  assists  in  steadying  the  shoulder.  All  the  muscles  of 
this  group  are  agents  in  forced  respiration,  but  are  unable  to 
act  until  the  shoulders  be  fixed. 

The  serratus  magnus  is  the  great  external  inspiratory  mus- 
cle, raising  the  ribs  when  the  shoulders  are  fixed,  and  thereby 
increasing  the  cavity  of  the  chest.  Acting  upon  the  scapula,  it 
draws  the  shoulder  forwards,  as  we  see  to  be  the  case  in  diseas- 
ed lungs,  where  the  chest  has  become  almost  fixed  from  appre- 
hension of  the  expanding  action  of  the  respiratory  muscles. 

The  subscapularis  rotates  the  head  of  the  humerus  inwards, 
and  is  a  powerful  defence  to  the  joint.  When  the  arm  is  rais- 
ed, it  draws  the  Immeris  downwards. 

PLATE  40.* 


Dissection  (for  plate  40). — The  co- 
raco-brachialis,  biceps,  and  brachialis 
anticus  are  exposed  on  the  removal  of 
the  integument  and  fascia  from  the  an- 
terior half  of  the  upper  arm,  and  clear- 
ing away  the  cellular  tissue. 

Actions. — The  coraco-brachialis  draws 
the  humeris  inwards,  and  assists  in  flex- 
ing it  upon  the  scapula.  The  biceps  and 
brachialis  anticus  are  flexors  of  the  fore 
arm,  and  the  former  a  supinator.  The 
brachialis  anticus  is  a  powerful  protec- 
tion to  the  elbow  joint. 


*  Thp.  Muscles  of  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  Upper  Jrm. — 1.  The  coracoid 
process  of  the  scapula.  2.  tlie  coraco-clavicular  ligament  (trapeziod)  passing 
upwards  to  the  scapular  end  of  the  clavicle.  3.  The  coraco-acromial  ligament 
passing  outwards  to  the  acromion.  4.  The  subscapularis  muscle.  5.  The 
teres  major.  6.  The  coraco-brachialis.  7.  The  biceps.  8.  The  upper  end  of 
the  radius.  9.  The  brachialis  anticus.  10.  The  internal  head  of  the  triceps. 
n.  Its  external  head.  12.  A  part  of  the  third,  or  middle  head.  13.  The  su- 
pinator longus  muscle  cut  off. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


357 


Difisection  (for  plate  41). — Remove  the  integument  and  fas 
cia  from  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  upper  arm. 

Actio7i. — The  triceps  is  an  extensor  of  the  fore  arm. 

Dissection  (for  plate  42). — These  muscles  are  seen  by  ma- 
kinjr  an  incision  throuoh  the  integument  alonjr  the  middle  line 


PLATE  41. 


PLATE  42.t 


*  A  Posterior  View  of  the  Upper  Arm,  showing  the  Triceps  Muscle. — 1.  Its 
external  head.  2.  Its  long,  oi-  scapular  liead.  3.  Its  internal,  or  short  head. 
4.  The  olecranon  process  of  the  ulna.  5.  the  radius.  6.  The  capsular  liga- 
ment of  the  shoulder  joint. 

t  A  Superficial  Layer  of  Muscles  of  the  Fore  Arm. — 1.  Tlie  lower  part  ot' 
the  biceps,  with  its  tendon.  2.  A  part  of  the  brachialis  amicus,  seen  beneath 
the  biceps.  3.  A  part  of  the  triceps.  4.  The  pronator  radii  teres.  5.  The 
flexor  carpi  radialis.  G.  The  palmaris  longns.  7.  One  cf  the  fasciculi  of  the 
flexor  sublimis  digitorum  ;  the  rest  of  the  mnsde  is  seen  beneath  the  tendons 
of  the  palmaris  longus  and  flexor  carpi  radialis.  8.  The  flexor  carpi  ulnaris- 
9.  The  palmar  fascia.  10.  The  palmaris  breris  muscle.  11.  The  abductor 
pollicis  muscle.  12.  One  portion  of  the  flexor  brevis  pollicis.  13.  The  supi- 
nator longus  muscle.  14.  The  extensor  ossis  metacarpi,  and  primi  iaternodii 
pollicis,  curving  around  the  lower  border  of  the  fore  arm. 


358 


THE  THOMSONIAN. 


of  the  fore  arm,  crossinof  each  extremity  by  a  transverse  incision, 
and  turning  aside  the  tiaps.  The  superficial  and  deep  fascia 
are  then  to  be  removed. 

Dissection  Jfor  plaie  43). — This  group  is  brought  into  view 
by  removing  the  flexor  subhmis,  and  drawing  aside  the  prona- 
tor radii  teres. 

Actions. — The  pronator  radii  teres  and  pronator  quadratus 

PLATE  43.*  PLATE  44.t 


*  The  Deep  Layer  of  Muscles  of  the  ForeJlrm. — 1.  Internal  lateral  ligament 
t)f  the  elbow  joint.  2.  The  anterior  ligament.  3.  The  orbicular  ligament  of 
the  head  of  the  radius.  4.  The  flexor  profundus  digitorum  muscle.  5.  The 
flexor  lonsus  polUcis.  6.  The  pronator  quadratus.  7.  The  abductor  poUicis 
muscle.  8.  The  dorsal  interosseous  muscle  of  the  middle  finger,  and  palmar 
interosseous  of  the  ring  finger.  9.  The  dorsal  interosseous  muscle  of  the  rin^ 
finger,  and  palmer  interosseous  of  the  little  finger. 

t  The  Superficiai  Layer  of  Muscles  on  the  Posterior  Aspect  of  the  Fore  ^rm. 
— 1.  The  lower  part  of  the  biceps.  2.  Part  of  the  brachialis  anticus.  3.  The 
lower  part  of  the  triceps,  inserted  into  the  olecranon.  4.  The  supinator  lon- 
gus.  5.  The  extensor  carpi  radialis  longius.  6.  The  extensor  carpi  radialis 
brevior.  7.  The  tendons  of  insertion  of  these  two  muscles.  8.  The  extensor 
communis  digitorum.  9.  The  extensor  minimi  digiti.  10.  The  extensor  carpi 
ulnaris.      11.  The  anconeus.      12.  Part  of  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.      13.  The 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


359 


PLATE  45. 


muscles  rotate  the  radius  upon  the  ulna,  and  render  the  hand 
prone.  The  remaining  muscles  are  flexors  : — two  flexors  of 
the  wrist,  flexor  carpi  radialis  and  uhiaris  ;  two  of  the  fingers, 
flexor  sublimis  and  profundus,  the  former  flexing  the  second 
phalanges,  the  latter  the  last;  one  flexor  of  the  last  phalanx  of 
the  thumb,  flexor  longus  pollicis.  The  palmaris  longus  is  a 
tensor  of  the  palmar  fascia. 

Dissection  (for  plate  44). — The  inte- 
gument is  to  be  divided  and  turned 
aside,  and  the  fasciae  removed  in  the 
same  manner  as  for  the  anterior  brachi- 
al region. 

This  muscle  must  be  divided  through 
the  middle,  and  the  two  ends  turned  to 
either  side,  to  expose  the  next  muscle. 

Dissection  (for  plate  45). — The  mus- 
cles of  the  superficial  layer  should  be  re- 
moved, in  order  to  bring  the  deep  group 
completely  into  view. 

Actions. — The  anconeus  is  associa- 
ted in  its  action  with  the  triceps  exten- 
sor cnbiti:  it  assists  in  extending  the 
fore  arm  upon  the  arm.  The  supinator 
longus  and  brevis  effect  the  supination 
of  the  fore  arm,  and  antagonize  the  two 
pronators.  The  extensor  carpi  radialis 
longior,  and  brevior,  and  ulnaris  extend 
the  wrist  in  opposition  to  the  two  flexors 
of  the  carpus.  The  extensor  communis 
digitorum  restores  the  fingers  to  the 
straight  position,  after  being  flexed  by 
the  two  flexors,  sublimis  and  profundus. 
The  extensor  ossis  mftacarpi,  primi  in- 
ternodii.  and  secundi  intornodii  pollicis, 
are  the  especial  extensors  of  the  thumb, 
and  serve  to  balance  the  actions  of  the 


extensor  ossis  metacarpi  and  primi  internodii  muscles  lying  to<^ether.  14, 
The  extensor  secundi  internodii ;  its  tendon  is  seen  crossing  the  two  tendons 
of  the  extensor  carpi  radialis  longior  and  brevior.  15.  The  posterior  annular 
ligament.  The  tendons  of  the  common  extensor  are  seen  upon  the  back  of 
the  hand,  and  theii-  distribution  on  the  dorsum  of  the  fingers. 

♦  The  Deep  Layer  of  Muscles  on  the  Posterior  Aspect  of  the  Fore  Arm  —1 
The  lower  part  of  the  humerus.  2.  The  olecranon.  3.  The  ulna.  4.  The 
anconeus  muscle.  5.  The  spinator  brevis  muscle,  6.  The  extensor  ossis  me- 
tacarpi pollicis.  7.  The  extensor  primi  internodii  pollicis.  8.  The  extensor 
secundi  internodii  pollicis.  9.  The  extensor  indicis.  10.  The  first  dorsal  inter- 
osseous muscle.  The  other  three  dorsal  interossei  are  seen  between  the  me- 
tacarpal bones  of  the  other  fingers. 


360 


THE   THOMSONIAN 


I 


flexor  ossis  metacarpi,  flexor  brevis,  and  flexor  longus  pollicis. 
The  extensor  indicis  gives  the  character  of  extension  to  the  in- 
dex finger,  and  is  hence  named  indicator,  and  the  extensor  mi- 
nimi digiti  suppUes  that  fing-er  with  the  power  of  exercismg  a 
distiuct  extension. 

PLATE  46.* 


DissBction  (for  plate  46.) — The  hand  is  best  dissected  by* 
making  an  incision  along  tlie  middle  of  the  palm,  from  the 
wrist  to  the  base  of  the  fingers,  and  crossing  it  at  each  extremi- 
ly  bf  a  transverse  incision,  then  tnrning  aside  the  flaps  of  inte- 
gument. For  exposing  tlie  muscles  of  the  radial  region,  the  re- 
moval of  the  integument  and  fascia  on  the  radial  side  will  be 
suflicient. 

The  flexor  ossis  metacarpi  may  now  be  divided  from  its  ori' 
gin  and  turned  aside,  in  order  to  show  the  next  muscle. 


•  The  Muscles  of  the  Hand.-^l.  The  annular  ligament.  2,  2.  The  origid 
end  insertion  of  Ihe  abductor  pollicis  muscle  ;  the  middle  portion  has  been  re* 
moved.  3.  The  flexor  ossis  metacarpi,  or  oppouens  pollicis.  4.  One  portion 
of  the  flexor  brevis  pollicis.  5.  The  deep  portion  of  the  flexor  brevis  pollicis. 
6.  The  adductor  pollicis.  7.  7.  The  lumbricales  muscles,  arising  from  the  ra- 
iHal  side  of  the  deep  flexor  tendons,  upon  which  the  numbe-s  are  placed.  The 
lendons  of  the  flexor  suhlimis  have  been  removed  from  the  palm  of  the 
Jiand.  8.  The  tendon  of  the  deep  flexor,  passing  between  the  two  terminal 
slips  of  the  tehdon  of  the  flexor  sublimis  to  reach  the  last  phalanx.  9.  The 
lendoft  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis,  passing  bctweeu  the  two  portions  of  the 
fiexor  brevis  to  the  last  phalanx.  10.  The  abductor  minimi  digiti.  11.  The 
tiexor  brevis  minimi  digiti.  The  edge  of  the  flexor  ossis  metacarpi,  or  abduc- 
tor minimi  digiti,  is  seen  projecting  beyond  the  inner  border  of  the  flexor 
brevis.  12.  The  prominence  of  the  pisiform  bone.  13.  The  first  dorsal  in- 
terosseous  mwscle. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  361 

Tarn  aside  the  ulnar  flap  of  integument  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand  ;  in  doing  this  a  small  subcutaneous  muscle,  the  palmaris 
brevis,  will  be  exposed.  After  examining  this  muscle,  remove 
it  with  the  deep  fascia,  in  order  to  bring  into  view  the  muscles 
of  the  little  finger. 

Actions. — The  actions  of  the  muscles  of  the  hand  are  ex- 
pressed in  their  names.  Those  of  the  radial  region  belong  to 
the  thumb,  and  provide  for  three  of  its  m%;vements,  abduction, 
adduction^  q.i\(\  flexion.  The  ulnar  group,  in  like  manner,  is 
subservient  to  the  same  motions  of  the  little  finger,  and  the  in- 
terossei  are  abductors  and  adductors  of  the  several  fingers. 
The  lumbricales  are  accessory  in  their  actions  to  the  deep  flex- 
ors: they  were  called  by  the  earlier  anatomists,  ftducincB;  i.  e. 
fiddler's  muscles,  from  an  idea  that  they  might  eflect  the  frac- 
tional movements  by  which  the  performer  is  enabled  to  produce 
the  various  notes  on  that  instrument. 

In  relation  to  the  axis  of  the  hand,  the  four  dorsal  interossei 
are  abductors,  and  the  three  palmar,  adductors.  It  will  there- 
fore be  seen  that  each  finger  is  provided  with  its  proper  adduc- 
tor and  abductor,  tv.'O  flexors  and  (with  the  exception  of  the 
middle  and  ring  fingers)  two  extensors.  The  thumb  has  more- 
over a  flexor  and  extensor  of  the  metacarpal  bone;  and  the  lit- 
tle finger  a  flexor  of  the  metacarpal  bone  without  an  extensor. 

MUSCLES  OF  THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY. 

Dissection  (for  plate  47). — The  subject  being  turned  on  its 
face,  and  a  block  placed  beneath  the  pubis  to  support  the  pel- 
vis, the  student  commences  the  dissection  of  this  region,  by 
carrying  an  incision  from  the  apex  of  the  coccyx  along  the 
crest  of  the  ileum  to  its  anterior  superior  spinous  process;  or 
vice  versa  if  he  be  on  the  left  side. 

He  then  makes  an  incision  from  the  posterior  fifth  of  the  crest 
of  the  ileum,  to  the  apex  of  the  trochanter  major — this  marks 
the  upper  border  of  the  gluteous  maximus ;  and  a  third  inci- 
sion from  the  apex  of  the  coccyx  along  the  fleshy  margin  of 
the  lower  border  of  the  gluteus  maximus,  to  the  outer  side  of 
the  thigh,  about  four  inches  below  the  apex  of  the  trochanter 
major.  He  then  reflects  the  integument,  superficial  fascia,  and 
deep  fascia,  which  latter  is  very  tliin  over  this  muscle,  from  the 
gluteus  maximus,  following  rigidly  the  course  of  its  fibres  ;  and 
having  exposed  the  muscle  in  its  entire  extent,  he  dissects  the 
integument  and  superficial  fascia  from  off  the  deep  fascia  which 
binds  down  the  gluteus  medius — the  other  portion  of  this  re- 
gion. 

The  gluteus  maximus  must  be  turned  down  from  its  origin, 
in  order  to  bring  the  next  muscles  into  view. 

24 


362 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


The  glutens  medius  should  now  be  removed  from  its  origin 
and  turned  down,  so  as  to  expose  the  next  which  is  situated  be- 
neath it. 

In  this  region  the  tendon  only  of  the  obturator  extenus  can  be 
seen,  situated  deeply  between  tlie  gemellus  inferior  and  the 
upper  border  of  the  quadratus  femoris.  To  expose  this  muscle 
fully,  it  is  necessary  to  dissect  it  Irom  the  anterior  part  of  the 
thigh,  after  the  removal  of  the  pectineus  and  adductor  longus 
and  brevis  muscles. 

Actions. — The  glutei  muscles  are  -abductors  of  the  thigh, 
when  they  take  their  fixed  point  from  the  pelvis.  Taking 
their  fixed  point  from  the  tliigh,  they  steady  the  pelvis  on  the 
head  of  the  femur— this  action  is  peculiarly  obvious  in  standing 
on  one  leg;  they  assist  also  in  carrying  the  leg  forward,  in  pro- 
gression. The  gluteus  minimus  being  attached  to  the  anterior 
border  of  the  trochanter  major,  rotates  the  limb  slightly  in- 
wards. The  gluteus  medius  and  maxiraus,  from  their  inser- 
lion  into  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  bone,  rotate  the  limb  out- 

PLATE  47.* 


*  The  Deep  Muscles  of  the  Gluteal  Region.— 1.  The  external  surface  of  the 
ilium.  2.  The  posterior  surface  of  the  sacrum.  3,  The  posterior  sacro-iliac 
ligaments.  4.  The  tuberosit)^  of  the  ischium.  .5.  The  sjreat  or  posterior  sa- 
cro-ischiatic  liijament.  6.  The  lesser  or  anterior  sacro-ischiatic  lisjament.  7. 
The  trochanter  major.  8.  The  gluteus  minimus.  9.  The  pyrilormis.  10. 
The  gemellus  superior.  11.  The  obturator  internus  muscle,  passing  out  of 
the  lesser  sacro-ischiatic  foramen.  12.  The  gemellus  inferior.'  13.  The  quad- 
ratus  femoris.  14.  The  upper  part  of  the  adductor  magnus.  15.  The  vastus 
externus.     1(3.  The  biceps.     17.  The  gracilis.     18.  The'  semi-tendinosus. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  363 

wards ;  the  latter  is,  moreover,  a  tensor  of  the  fascia  of  the  thigh. 
The  other  muscles  rotate  the  Hmb  outwards,  everting  the  knee 
and  foot ;  hence  they  are  named  external  rotators. 

Dissecthm  (for  plate  48). — Make  an  incision  along  the  hne 
of  Poupart's  ligament,  from  the  anterior  superior  spmous  pro- 
cess of  the  ileum  to  the  spine  of  the  pubis  ;  and  a  second,  from 
the  middle  of  the  precediu"^  down  the  inner  side  of  the  this;h, 
and  across  the  inner  condyle  of  the  femur,  to  the  head  of  the 
tibia,  where  it  may  be  bounded  by  a  transverse  incision.  Turn 
back  the  integument  from  the  whole  of  this  region,  and  exam- 
ine the  superficial  fascia,  which  is  next  to  be  removed  in  the 
same  manner.  After  the  deep  fascia  has  been  well  considered, 
it  is  likewise  to  be  removed,  by  dissecting  it  off  in  the  course  of 
the  fibres  of  the  muscles.  As  it  might  not  be  convenient  to  the 
junior  student  to  expose  so  large  a  surface  at  once  as  ordered  in 
this  dissection,  tfie  vertical  incision  may  be  crossed  by  one  or 
two  transverse  incisions,  as  may  be  deemed  most  proper. 

The  rectus  must  now  be  divided  through  its  middle,  and  the 
two  ends  turned  aside,  to  bring  clearly  into  view  the  next  mus- 
cles. 

The  muscles  of  the  internal  femoral  region  are  exposed  by 
the  removal  of  the  inner  flap  of  integument  recommended  in 
the  dissection  of  the  anterior  femoral  region.  The  iliacus  and 
psoas  arising  from  within  the  abdomen  can  only  be  seen  in 
their  entire  extent  after  the  removal  of  the  viscera  from  that  ca- 
vity. 

The  pectineus  must  be  divided  near  its  origin  and  turned 
outwards,  and  the  adductor  longus  through  its  middle,  turning 
its  ends  to  either  side,  to  bring  into  view  the  adductor  brevis. 

The  adductor  brevis  may  now  be  divided  from  its  origin  and 
turned  outwards,  or  its  inner  two  thirds  may  be  cut  away  en- 
tirely, when  the  adductor  magnus  muscle  will  be  exposed  in 
its  entire  extent. 

Actions. — The  tensor  vagina  femoris  renders  the  fascia  lata 
tense,  and  slightly  inverts  the  limb.  The  sartorius  flexes  the 
leg  upon  the  thigh;  and,  continuing  to  act,  the  thigh  upon  the 
pelvis,  at  the  same  time  carrying  the  leg  across  that  of  the  op- 
posite side,  into  the  position  in  which  tailors  sit ;  hence  its  name. 
Taking  its  fixed  point  from  below,  it  assists  tlie  extensor  mus- 
cles in  steadying  the  leg,  for  the  support  of  the  trunk.  The 
other  four  muscles  have  been  collectively  named  quadriceps 
extensor^  from  their  similarity  of  action.  They  extend  the  leg 
upon  the  thigh,  and  obtain  a  great  increase  of  power  by  their 
attachment  to  the  patella,  which  acts  as  a  fulcrum.  Takino- 
their  fixed  point  from  the  tibia,  they  steady  the  femur  upon  the 
leg  and  the  rectus,  by  being  attached  to  the  pelvis,  serves  to 
balance  the  trunk  upon  the  lower  extremity. 


364 


THE  THOMSONIAK 


The  iliac'ds,  psoas,  pectiiiciis,  and  adductor  loncfus  miiscfes, 
bend  the  thigh  upon  the  pelvis,  and,  at  tlie  same  time,  from 
the  obliquity  of  their  insertion  into  the  lesser  trochanter  and 
linea  aspera,  rotate  the  entire  limb  outwards:  the  pectineus 
and  adductors  adduct  the   thigh   powerhilly ;   and,  from  the 


PLATE  4S.* 


PLATE  49.1" 


•  The  Muscles  of  the  Anterior  Femoral  Region. — 1.  The  crest  of  the  ilium- 
2.  Its  anterior  superior  spinous  process.  3.  The  gluteus  medius.  4.  The  ten- 
sor vaginae  femoris  ;  its  insertion  into  the  fascia  lata  is  shown  inferiorly.  5. 
The  sartorius.  6.  The  rectus.  7.  The  vastus  externus.  8.  The  vastus  inter- 
nus.  9.  The  patella.  10.  The  iliacus  internus.  11.  The  psoas  magnus.  12. 
The  pectineus.  13.  The  adductor  longus.  14.  Part  of  the  abductor  magnus. 
15.  The  gracilis. 

t  The  Muscles  of  the  Posterior  Femoral  and  Gluteal  Region. — 1.  The  glu- 
teus medius.  2.  The  gluteus  maximus.  3.  The  vastus  externus  covered  in 
by  fascia  lata.  4.  The  long  head  of  the  biceps.  5.  Its  short  head.  6.  The 
semi-tendinosus.  7.  Semi-merabranos«s.  8.  The  gracilis.  9.  A  part  of  the 
inner  border  of  the  adductor  magnus.  10.  The  edge  of  the  sartorius.  11.  The 
popliteal  space.  12.  The  gnstrocaemius  muscle  ;  its  two  heads.  The  tendon 
of  the  biceps  forms  the  outer  hamstring  ;  and  the  sartorius,  with  the  tendons 
of  the  gracilis;  semi-tendinosus,  and  semi-membranosus,  the  inner  hamsli-ing. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  365 

manner  of  the  insertion  into  the  linea  aspera,  they  assist  in  ro- 
tating the  limb  outwards.  The  gracilis  is  likewise  an  adductor 
of  the  thigh  ;  but  contributes  also  to  the  flexion  of  the  leg,  by- 
its  attachment  to  the  inner  tuberosity  of  the  tibia. 

Dissection  (for  plate  49). — Remove  the  integument  and  fas- 
cia  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  thigh  by  two  flaps,  as  on  the 
anterior  rejrion,  and  turn  aside  the  orluteus  maximus  from  the 
upper  part ;  the  muscles  may  then  be  examuied. 

The  biceps,  and  semi-tendinosus  muscles,  must  be  dissected 
from  the  tuberosity  of  the  ischium,  to  bring  iuto  view  the  ori- 
gin of  the  semi-membranosus. 

The  tendons  of  the  semi-tendinosus  and  semi-membranosus, 
with  those  of  the  gracilis  and  sartorius,  form  the  inner  ham- 
string. 

If  the  semi-membranosus  muscle  be  turned  down  from  its 
origin,  the  student  will  bring  into  view  the  broad  and  radiated 
expanse  of  the  adductor  niagnus,  upon  which  the  three  flexor 
.muscles  above  described  rest. 

Actions. — These  three  hamstring  muscles  are  the  direct  flex- 
ors of  the  leg  upon  the  thigh  ;  and,  by  taking  their  origin  from 
below,  they  balance  the  pelvis  on  the  lower  extremities.  The 
biceps,  from  the  obliquity  of  its  direction,  everts  the  leg  when 
partly  flexed,  and  the  semi-tendinosus  turns  the  leg  inwards, 
when  in  the  same  state  of  flexion. 

Dissection  (for  plate  50.) — The  dissection  of  the  anterior  ti- 
bial region  is  to  be  commenced  by  carrying  an  incision  along 
the  middle  of  the  leg,  midway  between  the  tibia  and  the  fibula, 
from  the  knee  to  the  ankle,  and  bounding  it  inferiorly  by  a 
transverse  incision,  extending  from  one  malleolus  to  the  other. 
And  to  expose  the  tendons  on  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  the  longi- 
tudinal mcision  may  be  carried  onwards  to  the  outer  side  of  the 
base  of  the  great  toe,  and  be  terminated  by  another  incision  di- 
rected across  the  heads  of  the  metatarsal  bones. 

Actions. — The  tibialis  anticus  and  peroneus  tertius  are  direct 
dexors  of  the  tarsus  upon  the  leg;  acting  in  conjunction  with 
the  tibialis  posticus  they  direct  the  foot  inwards,  and  with  the 
peroneus  longus  and  brevis  outwards.  They  assist  also  in  pre- 
serving the  flatness  of  the  foot  during  progression.  The  ex- 
tensor longus  dio;itorum,  and  extensor  proprius  pollicis,  are 
direct  extensors  of  the  phalanges;  but  continuing  their  action, 
they  assist  the  tibialis  anticus  and  peroneus  tertius,  in  flexing 
the  entire  foot  upon  the  leg.  Taking  their  origin  from  below, 
they  increase  the  stability  of  the  ankle  joint. 

Dissection  (for  plate  51). — Make  an  incision  from  the  mid- 
dle of  the  popliteal  space  down  the  middle  of  the  posterior  part 


366 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


of  the  leg"  to  the  heel,  bounding  it  inferiorly  by  a  transverse  in^ 
cision  passing  between  the  two  malleoli,  1'nrn  aside  tbe  flaps 
of  integument  and  remove  the  foscice  from  the  whole  of  this  re- 
gion ;  the  gastrocnemius  muscle  will  then  be  exposed. 

Actions. — The  three  muscles  of  the  calf  draw  powerfully  on 
the  OS  calcis,  and  lift  the  heel ;  continuing  their  action,  they  raise 


PLATE  50. 


PLATE  51.t 


*  The  Muscles  of  the  .interior  Tibial  Region. — 1.  The  extensor  muscles  ia- 
serted  into  the  patella.  2.  The  subcutaneous  surface  of  the  tibia.  3.  The  ti- 
bialis amicus.  4.  The  extensor  communis  digitorum.  5.  The  extensor  pro- 
prius  pollicis.  6.  The  pcroneus  terlius.  7.  Tlie  pcroneus  longus.  8.  The 
peroneus  brevis.  9,  9.  Tlie  borders  of  the  soleus  muscle.  10.  A  part  of  the 
inner  belly  of  the  gastrocnemius.  1 1 .  The  extensor  brevis  digilorum  ;  the  tenr 
don  in  front  of  this  number  is  that  of  the  peroneus  tertius:  and  that  behind  it. 
the  tendon  of  the  peroneus  brevis. 

t  The  S\iperficial  Muscles  of  the  Posterior  Aspect  of  the  Leg.—I.  The  biceps 
muscle  forming  the  outer  hamstring.  2.  The  tendons  forming  the  inner  ham- 
string. 3.  the  popliteal  space.  4.  The  gastrocnemius  muscle.  .3,  5.  The  so- 
leus. 6.  The  tendo  Achillis.  7.  The  os  calcis.  8.  The  tendons  of  the  pero- 
neus longus  and  brevis  muscles,  passing  behind  the  outer  ankle.  9.  The  tea- 
dons  of  the  deep  layer,  passing  into  the  foot  behind  the  inner  ankle. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


367 


the  entire  bod}'-.  This  action  is  attained  by  means  of  a  lever  of 
the  second  power,  the  fnlcrnm  (the  toes)  being  atone  end,  the 
weight  (the  body  supported  on  the  tibia)  in  the  middle,  and  tlie 
power  (these  muscles)  at  the  other  extremity. 

They  are.  therefore,  the  walking  muscles,  and  perform  all 
movements  that  require  the  support  of  the  whole  body  from  the 
ground,  as  dancino;,  leaping,  &c.  Taking  their  fixed  point 
from  below,  they  steady  the  leg  upon  the  foot. 

Dissection  (for  plate  52).— After  the  removal  of  the  soleus  the 
deep  layer  will  be  found  bound  down  by  an  intermuscular  fas- 
cia, which  beitig  dissected  away  the  muscles  may  be  examined. 

The  flexor  longns  poUicis  must  now  be  re-     plate  52.* 
moved  from  its  ori^rin,  and  the  flexor  longns 
digitorum  drawn  aside,  to  brinij:  into  view  the 
entire  extent  of  the  tibialis  posticus. 

The  student  will  observe  that  the  two  latter 
muscles  chansfe  their  relative  position  to  each 
other  in  their  course.  Thus,  in  the  leg,  the 
position  of  the  three  muscles  from  within  out- 
wards, is  flexor  longns  digitorum,  tibialis  pos- 
ticus, flexor  longus  pollicis.  At  the  inner  mal- 
leolus, the  relation  of  the  tendons  is  tibialis 
posticus,  flexor  longus  digitorum,  both  in  the 
same  sheath ;  then  a  broad  groove,  which 
lodges  the  posterior  tibial  artery,  vena3  comi- 
tes,  and  nerve  ;  and  lastly,  the  flexor  longus 
pollicis. 

Actions. — Tlie  popliteus  is  a  flexor  of  the 
tibia  upon  the  thigh,  carrying  it  at  the  same 
time  inwards,  so  as  to  invert  the  leg.  The 
flexor  longus  pollicis,  and  flexor  longus  digito- 
rum are  the  long  flexors  of  the  toes  ;  their  ten- 
dons are  connected  in  the  foot  by  a  short  ten- 
dinous band,  hence  they  necessarily  act  toge- 
ther. The  tibialis  posticus  is  an  extensor  of 
the  tarsus  upon  the  leg,  and  an  antagonist  to 
the  tibialis  anticus.  It  combines  with  the  tibi- 
alis anticus  in  adduction  of  the  foot. 

*  The  Dee])  Layer  of  Muscles  of  the  Posterior  Tibial  Region. — 1.  The  lower 
extremity  of  the  femur,  2.  The  lignmentum  posticum  Winslowii.  3.  The 
tendon  of  the  semi-membranous  muscle,  (livid in?  into  its  three  slips.  4.  The 
internal  lateral  ligament  of  the  knee  joint.  5.  The  external  lateral  ligament. 
6.  The  popliteus  muscle.  7.  The  flc-xor  longus  digitorum.  8.  The  tibialis 
posticus,  i).  The  flexor  lonsrus  pollicis.  10.  The  peroneus  longus  muscle. 
11.  The  peroneus  brevis.  12.  The  lendo  Ac.hillis,  divided  at  its  insertion  into 
the  OS  ealcis.  1.3.  The  tendons  of  the  tibialis  posticus  and  flexor  longus  digi- 
torum muscles,  just  as  they  are  about  to  pass  beneath  the  internal  annular  li- 
gament of  the  ankle;  the  interval  between  the  latter  tendon  and  the  tendon  of 
the  flexor  longus  pollicis  is  occupied  by  the  posterior  tibial  vessels  and  nerve. 


368 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


PLATE  53. 


PLATE  54.t 


Dissection  (for  plate  53). 
The  sole  of  the  foot  is  best 
dissected  by  an  incision  a- 
roimd  the  heel,  and  along 
the  inner  and  outer  bor- 
ders of  the  foot,  to  the  great 
and  little  toes.  This  inci- 
sion should  divide  the  in- 
tegument and  superficial 
fascia,  and  both  together 
should  be  dissected  from 
the  deep  fascia,  as  far  for- 
ward as  the  base  of  the  pha- 
langes, where  they  may  be 
removed  from  the  foot  alto- 
gether. The  deep  fascia 
should  then  be  removed, 
and  the  first  layer  of  mus- 
cles will  be  brought  into 
view. 

The  three  preceding  muscles  (3,  4  and  5,  on  plate,)  must  be 
divided  from  their  origin,  and  anteriorly  through  their  tendons, 
and  removed,  in  order  to  bring  into  view  the  second  layer. 

Dissecton  (for  plate  54). — The  tendons  of  the  long  flexors 
and  the  muscles  connected  with  them  must  be  removed,  to  see 
clearly  the  attachments  of  the  third  layer. 

Actions. — All  the  preceding  muscles  act  upon  the  toes  ;  and 
the  movements  which  they  are  capable  of  executing,  may  be 
referred  to  four  heads,  viz.,  flexion,  extension,  adduction,  and 
abduction. 


*  First  Layer  of  Muscles  in  the  Sole  of  the  Foot. — This  la3'er  is  exposed  by 
the  removal  of  the  plantar  fascia.  1.  The  os  cnlcis.  2.  The  posterior  part  of 
the  plantar  fascia,  divided  transversely.  3.  The  abductor  pollicis.  4.  The 
abductor  minimi  digiti.  5.  The  flexor  brevis  digitorum.  6.  The  tendon  of  the 
flexor  longus  pollicis  muscle.  7,  7.  The  lumbricales.  On  the  second  and 
third  toes,  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  longus  digitorum  are  seen  passing  through 
the  bifurcation  of  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  brevis  digitorum. 

t  The  Third  and  a  part  of  the  Second  Layer  of  Muscles  of  the  Sole  of  the 
Foot. — 1.  The  divided  edge  of  the  plantar  fascia.  2.  The  musculur  accesso- 
rius.  3.  The  tendon  of  the  flexor  longus  digitorum,  previously  to  its  division. 
4.  The  tendon  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis.  5.  The  flexor  brevis  pollicis.  6. 
The  adductor  pollicis.  7.  The  flexor  brevis  minimi  digiti.  8.  The  transver. 
sus  pedis.  9.  Interossei  muscles,  plantar  and  dorsal.  10.  A  convex  ridge, 
formed  by  the  tendon  of  the  peroneus  longus  muscls  in  its  oblique  course 
across  the  foot. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  369 

ON  THE  FASCIiE. 

FASCIA  (fascia  a  bandage)  is  the  iiaiiie  assig;ned  to  laminae  of 
various  extent  and  thickness,  which  are  distributed  through 
the  different  regions  of  the  body,  for  the  purpose  of  investing 
or  protecting  the  softer  and  more  dehcate  organs.  From  a 
consideration  of  their  structure,  these  fasciae  may  be  arranged 
into  three  classes : — ceUular  fascia;,  cellulo-fibrous  fasciae  and 
tendino-fibrous  fasciae. 

The  cellular  fascia  is  best  illustrated  in  the  common  sub- 
cutaneous investment  of  the  entire  body,  the  superficial  lascia. 
This  structure  is  situated  immediatly  beneath  the  integument 
over  every  part  of  the  frame,  and  is  the  medium  of  connection 
between  that  layer  and  the  deeper  parts.  It  is  composed  of  cel- 
lular tissue  containing  in  its  areolae  a  considerable  abundance 
of  adipose  vesicles.  The  fat,  being  a  bad  conductor  of  caloric, 
serves  to  retain  the  warmth  of  the  body ;  while  it  forms  at  the 
same  time  a  yielding  tissue,  through  which  the  minute  vessels 
and  nerves  may  pass  to  the  papillary  layer  of  the  skin,  without 
incurring  the  risk  of  obstruction  from  injury  or  pressure  upon 
the  surface.  By  dissection,  the  superficial  fascia  may  be  separa- 
ted into  two  layers,  between  which  are  found  the  superficial  or 
cutaenous  vessels,  and  nerves;  as,  the  superficial  epigastric  ar- 
tery, the  saphenous  veins,  the  radial  and  uhiar  veins,  the  su- 
perficial lymphatic  vessels,  also  the  cutaneous  muscles,  as  tho 
platysma  myoides,  orbicularis  palpebrarum,  sphincter  ani,  (fcc. 
In  some  situations  where  the  depositions  of  fat  would  have  been 
injurious  to  the  functions  of  the  part,  the  cells  of  the  cellular 
fascia  are  moistened  by  a  serous  exhalation,  analogous  to  the 
secretion  of  serous  membranes,  as  in  the  eyelids  and  scrotum.. 

The  cellulo-fibrous  fascia  appears  to  result  from  a  simple 
condensation  of  cellular  tissue  deprived  of  its  fat,  and  intermin- 
gled with  strong  fibres  disposed  in  various  directions,  so  as  to 
constitute  an  inelastic  membrane  of  considerable  strength.  Of 
this  structure  is  the  deep  fascia  of  the  neck,  some  of  the  fascia3 
of  the  cavities  of  the  trunk,  as  the  thoracic  and  transversalis 
fasciae,  and  the  sheaths  of  vessels. 

The  tendino-fibrous  fascia  is  the  strongest  of  the  three  kinds 
of  investing  membrane  ;  it  is  composed  of  strong  tendinous  fi- 
bres, running  parallel  with  each  other,  and  connected  by  other 
fibres  of  the  same  kind  passing  in  different  directions.  When 
freshly  exposed,  it  is  brilliant  and  nacreous,  and  is  tough,  ine- 
lastic, and  unyielding.  In  the  limbs  it  forms  the  deep  fascia, 
enclosing  and  forming  distinct  sheaths  to  all  the  muscles  and 
tendons.  It  is  thick  upon  the  outer  and  least  protected  side  of 
the  limb,  and  thinner  upon  its  inner  side.  It  is  firmly  connec- 
ted to  the  bones  and  to  the  prominent  points  of  each  region,  as 
to  the  pelvis,  knee,  and  ankle,  in  the  lower,  and  to  the  claTiclej 


370 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


scapula,  elbow,  and  wrist  in  the  upper  extremity.  It  assists 
the  muscles  in  their  action,  by  keeping  up  a  tonic  pressure  on 
their  surface;  and  aids  materially  in  the  circulation  of  the  flu- 
ids in  opposition  to  the  laws  of  gravity;  and  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand  and  sole  of  the  foot  is  a  powerful  protection  to  the  struc- 
tures of  which  these  organs  are  composed.  In  some  situations 
its  tension  is  regulated  by  muscular  action,  as  by  the  tensor 
vaginae  femoris  and  glutens  inaximus  in  the  thigh,  and  by  the 
biceps  and  palmaris  longus  in  the  arm  ;  and  in  other  situations 
it  affords  an  extensive  surface  for  the  origin  of  the  fibres  of  mus- 
cles. 

The  fasciae  maybe  arranged  like  the  other  textures  of  the 
body  into — 1.  Those  of  the  head  and  neck.  2.  Those  of  the 
trunk.  3.  Those  of  the  upper  extremity.  4.  Those  of  the 
lower  extremity. 

FASCIA    OF    THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 

The  temporal  fascia  is  a  strong  tendino-fibrous  membrane 
which  covers  in  the  temporal  muscle  at  each  side  of  the  head, 
and  gives  origin  by  its  internal  surface  to  the  superior  muscu- 
lar fibres. 

PLATE  55.* 


*  A  Transverse  Section  of  the  Neck — showing  the  deep  cervical  fascia  and 
its  numerous  prolongations,  forming  sheaths  for  the  dillerent  muscles.  As 
the  figure  is  symmetrical,  the  figures  of  reference  are  placed  only  on  one  side. 
— ■!.  The  platisma  myoides.  2.  The  trapezius.  3.  The  ligamentum  nuchse, 
from  which  the  fascia  may  be  traced  forwards  beneath  the  trapezius,  enclos- 
ing the  other  muscles  of  the  neck.  4.  The  point  at  which  the  fascia  divides, 
to  form  a  sheath  for  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle  (o).  6.  The  point  of  rcunicn 
of  the  two  layers  of  the  sterno  mastoid  sheath.  7.  The  point  of  union  of  the 
deep  cervical  fa«cia  of  opposite  sides  of  the  neck.     8.  Section  of  the  sterno- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  371 

The  superficial  cervical  fascia  contains  between  its  layers 
the  platysma  myoides  muscle. 

The  deep  cervical  fascia  is  a  stron.o:  cellnlo-fibrons  layer 
which  invests  the  muscles  of  the  neck,  and  retains  and  supports 
the  vessels  and  nerves. 

FASCI-E    OF    THE    TRUNK. 

The  thoracic  fascia  is  a  dense  layer  of  cellulo-fibroiis  mem- 
brane stretched  horizontally  across  the  superior  opening  of  the 
thorax.  It  is  firmly  attached  to  the  concave  margin  of  the  first 
rib,  and  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  sternum. 

The  tlioracic  fascia  peribrms  three  important  offices,  viz. 

1.  It  forms  the  upper  boundary  of  the  chest,  as  tiie  diaphragm 
does  the  lower. 

2.  It  steadily  preserves  the  relative  situation  of  the  parts 
which  enter  and  quit  the  thoracic  openinsf. 

3.  It  attaches  and  supports  the  heart  in  its  situation,  through 
the  medium  of  its  connection  with  the  aorta  and  large  vessels 
which  are  placed  at  its  curvature. 

ABDOMINAL  FASCIA. 

The  lower  part  of  the  parietes  of  the  abdomen,  and  the  cavi- 
ty of  the  pelvis,  are  strengthened  by  a  layer  of  fascia  which 
lines  their  internal  surface,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  latter  cav- 
ity is  reflected  inwards  to  the  sides  of  the  bladder.  This  fascia 
is  continuous  throughout  the  whole  of  the  surface. 

The  fascia  transversalis  is  a  cellulo-fibrous  lamella,  which 
lines  the  inner  surface  of  the  transversalis  muscle. 

The  internal  abdominal  ring  is  situated  in  this  fascia,  at 
about  midway  between  the  spine  of  the  pubis,  and  the  anterior 
superior  spine  of  the  ilium,  and  half  an  inch  above  Poupart's 
ligament;  it  is  bounded  upon  its  inner  side  by  a  well-marked 
falciform  border,  but  is  ill  defined  around  its  outer  margin. 
From  the  circumference  of  this  ring  is  given  ofl!"an  infundibili- 
form  process  which  surrounds  the  testicle  and  spermatic  cord, 
constituting  the  fascia  propria  of  the  latter,  and  forms  the  first 
investment  to  the  sac  of  oblique  inguinal  hernia.  It  is  the 
strength  of  this  fascia,  in  the  interval  between  the  edge  of  the 

hj^oid.  9.  Omo-hyoid.  10.  Sterno-thjToid.  11.  The  lateral  lobe  of  the  thy- 
roid gland.  12.  The  trachea.  13.  The  ctsophagus.  14.  The  sheath  contain- 
ing  the  common  carotid  artery,  internal  jugular  vein,  and  pnenmogastric 
nerve.  1.3.  The  longus  colli.  The  nerve  in  front  of  the  sheath  of  this  muscle 
is  the  sympathetic.  16.  The  rectus  anticus  major.  17.  Scalenus  amicus.  IS. 
Scalenus  posticus.  19.  The  splenius  capitis.  20.  Splenius  colli.  21.  Levator 
anguli  scapulae.  22.  Complexus.  23.  Trachelo-mastoid.  24.  Transversalis 
colli.  2.5.  Cervicalis  ascendens.  26.  The  semi-spinalis  colli.  27.  The  multi- 
fidus  spina;.  2S.  A  cervical  vertebra.  The  transverse  processes  are  seen  to 
be  traversed  by  the  vertebral  artery  and  vein. 


372  THE    THOMSOiMAN 

rectus  and  the  internal  abdominal  ring,  that  defends  this  portion 
of  the  parietes  from  the  frequent  occurrence  of  direct  ins^uinal 
hernia. 

inguinaV.  hernia. 

Inguinal  hernia  is  of  two  kinds,  oblique,  and  direct. 

In  oblique  inguinal  hernia,  the  intestine  escapes  from  the 
cavity  of  the  abdomen  into  the  spermatic  canal,  through  the 
internal  abdominal  ring,  pressing  before  it  a  pouch  of  perito- 
neum which  constitutes  the  hernial  sac,  and  distending  the  in- 
fundibiliform  process  of  the  transversalis  fascia.  After  emerg- 
ing through  the  internal  abdominal  ring,  it  passes ^/vv^  beneath 
the  lower  and  arched  border  of  the  transversalis  muscle  ;  then 
beneath  the  lower  border  of  the  internal  oblique  muscle ;  and 
finally,  through  the  external  abdominal  ring  in  the  aponeurosis 
of  the  external  oblique.  From  the  transversalis  muscle  it  re- 
ceives no  investment ;  while  passing  beneath  the  lower  border 
of  the  internal  oblique,  it  obtains  the  cremaster  muscle ;  and, 
upon  escaping  at  the  external  abdominal  rmg,  receives  the  in- 
tercolumnar  fascia. 

The  spermatic  canal,  which,  in  the  normal  condition  of  the 
abdominal  parietes  serves  for  the  passage  of  the  spermatic  cord 
in  the  male,  and  the  round  ligament  with  its  vessels  in  the  fe- 
male, is  about  one  inch  and  a  half  in  length.  It  is  bounded  in 
front  by  the  aponeurosis  of  the  external  oblique  muscle ;  behind, 
by  the  transversalis  fascia,  and  by  the  conjoined  tendon  of  the 
internal  oblique  and  transversalis  muscle  ;  above,  by  the  arched 
borders  of  the  internal  oblique  and  transversalis;  below,  by  the 
grooved  border  of  Poupart's  ligament ;  and  at  each  extremity, 
by  one  of  the  abdominal  rings,  the  internal  ring  at  the  inner 
termination,  the  external  ring  at  the  outer  extremity. 

There  are  three  varieties  of  oblique  inguinal  hernia — com- 
mon, congenital,  and  encysted. 

Common  oblique  hernia,  is  that  which  has  been  described 
above. 

Congenital  hernia  results  from  the  nonclosure  of  the  pouch 
of  peritoneum  carried  downwards  into  the  scrotum  by  the  tes- 
ticle, during  its  descent  in  the  foetus. 

The  intestine  at  some  period  of  life  is  forced  into  this  canal, 
and  descends  through  it  into  the  tunica  vaginalis,  where  it  lies 
in  contact  with  the  testicle;  so  that  congenital  hernia  has  no 
proper  sac,  but  is  contained  within  the  tunica  vaginalis.  The 
other  coverings  are  the  same  as  those  of  common  inguinal  her- 
nia. 

Encysted  hernia  is  that  form  of  protrusion  in  which  the 
pouch  of  peritoneum  forming  the  tunica  vaginalis,  being  only 
partially  closed,  and  remaining  open  externally  to  the  abdomen, 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


373 


admits  of  the  hernia  passing  into  the  scrotum,  behind  the  tuni- 
ca vaginahs. 

Direct  ingidnal  hernia  has  receiveid  its  name  from  passing 
directly  through  the  external  abdpminal  ring,  and  forcing  be- 
lore  it  the  opposing  parietes,      jf 

Direct  inguinal  hernia  diif^re  from  obhque  in  never  attaining 
the  same  bulk. 

All  the  forms  of  inguinal  hernia  are  designated  scrotal,  when 
they  have  descended  into  that  cavity. 

The  fascia  iliaca  is  the  tendino-fibrous  investment  of  the 
psoas  and  ihacus  muscles;  and,  like  the  fascia  transversalis,  is 
thick  below,  and  becomes  gradually  thinner  as  it  ascends. 

The  fascia  pelvica  is  attached  to  the  inner  surface  of  the 
pubis  and  along  the  margin  of  the  brim  of  the  pelvis,  where  it 
is  continuous  with  the  iliac  fascia.  From  this  extensive  origin 
it  descends  into  the  pelvis  and  divides  into  two  layers  the  pelvic 
and  obturator. 

In  the  perinemn  there  are  two  fascise  of  much  importance, 
the  superficial  and  deep  perineal  fascia. 

The  superficial  j^erineal  fascia  is  a  thin  tendino-fibrous  lay- 

PLATE  56*. 


*  j1  transverse  Section  of  the  Pelvis — showing  the  distribution  of  the  pelvic 
fascia. — 1.  The  bladder  2.  The  vesiculGe  seminales,  divided  across.  3.  The 
rectum.  4.  The  iliac  fascia  covering  in  the  iliacus  and  psoas  muscles  (5); 
and  forming  a  sheath  for  the  external  iliac  vessels,  6.  7.  The  anteriorcrural 
nerve  excluded  from  the  sheath.  8.  The  pelvic  fascia.  9.  Its  ascending  lay- 
er, forming  the  lateral  ligament  of  the  bladder  of  one  side,  and  a  sheath  to  thi? 
vesical  plexus  of  veins.  10.  The  recto-vesical  fascia  of  Mr.  Tyrrell,  formed 
by  the  middle  layer.  11.  The  inferior  layer,  surrounding  the  rectum  and 
meeting  at  the  middle  line  with  the  fascia  of  the  opposite  side.  12.  The  le- 
vator ani  muscle.  13.  The  obturator  internus  muscle,  covered  in  by  the  ob- 
turator fascia,  which  also  forms  a  sheath  for  the  internal  pudic  vessels  and 
nerve,  14.  15.  The  layer  of  fascia  which  invests  the  under  surtace  of  the  le- 
vator ani  muscle^  the  anal  fascia. 


374 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


er,  which  covers  the  muscles  of  the  genital  portion  of  the  peri- 
neum and  the  root  of  the  penis. 

The  deep  perinial  fascia  (Camper's  hgament,  triangular  li- 
gament,) is  situated  behind  the  root  of  the  penis,  and  is  firmly 
stretclied  across  between  the  ramus  of  the  pubis  and  ischium 
of  each  side,  so  as  to  constitute  a  strong  septum  of  defence  to 
the  outlet  of  the  pelvis. 

FASCI.E  OF  THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY. 

The  superficial  fascia  of  the  upper  extremity  contains  be- 
tween its  layers  the  superficial  veins  and  lymphatics,  and  the 
superficial  nerves. 

The  deep  fascia  is  thin  over  the  deltoid  and  pectoralis  ma- 
jor muscles,  and  in  the  axillary  space,  but  thick  npon  the  dor- 
sum of  the  scapula,  where  it  binds  down  tlie  infra-spinatus  mus- 
cle. It  is  attached  to  the  clavicle,  acromion  process  and  spine 
of  the  scapula. 

The  tendons,  as  they  pass  beneath  the  annular  ligaments, 
are  surrounded  by  synovial  bursee.  The  dorsum  of  the  hand 
is  invested  by  a  thin  iascia,  which  is  continuous  with  the  pos- 
terior annular  ligament. 

The  j)almar  fascia  is  divided  into  three  portions.     A  cen- 

PLATE  57.* 


*  The  Pubic  Arch,  with  the  Attachments  of  the  Perineal  Fascia. — 1,  1,  1. 
The  superficial  perineal  fascia  divided  by  a  ^  sliaped  incision  into  three  flaps; 
the  lateral  flaps  are  turned  over  the  ramus  of  the  pubis  and  the  ischium  at 
each  side,  to  which  they  are  firmly  attached ;  the  posterior  flap  is  continuous 
with  the  deep  perineal  fascia.  2.  The  deep  perineal  fascia.  3.  The  opening 
for  the  passage  of  the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra,  previously  to  en. 
tering  tiie  bulb.  4.  Two  projections  of  the  anterior  layer  of  the  deep  perineal 
facia^  corresponding  with  Cowper's  glands. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


375 


tral  portion,  which  occupies  the  middle  of  the  palm,  and  two 
lateral  portions,  which  spread  out  over  the  sides  of  the  hand, 
and  are  continuous  with  tlie  dorsal  fascia. 

FASCIA  OF  THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY. 

The  superficial  fascia  contains  between  its  two  layers  the 
superficial  vessels  and  nerves  of  the  lower  extremity.  At  the 
groin  these  two  layers  are  separated  from  each  other  by  the  su- 
perficial lymphatic  glands  and  the  deeper  layer  is  attached  to 
Poupart's  ligament,  while  the  superficial  layer  is  continued  in- 
to the  superficial  fascia  of  the  abdomen. 

The  deep  fascia  of  the  thigh  is  named,  from  its  great  extent, 

PLATE  58.* 


*  A  Side  View  of  the  Viscera  of  the  Pelvis — showing  the  distribution  of  the 
perineal  and  pelvic  fasciae. — 1.  The  symphysis  pubis.  2.  The  bladder.  3. 
The  recto-vesical  fold  of  peritoneum,  passinj^;  from  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
rectum  to  the  posterior  part  cf  the  bladder;  from  the  upper  part  of  the  fun- 
dus of  the  bladder  it  is  reflected  upon  the  abdominal  parietes.  4.  The  ureter. 
5.  The  vas  deferens  crossing  the  direction  of  the  ureter.  6.  The  vesicula  se- 
minalis  of  the  right  side.  7,  7.  The  prostrate  gland  divided  by  a  longitudinal 
section.  8,  8.  The  section  of  a  ring  of  elastic  tissue  encircling  the  prostatic 
portion  of  the  urethra  at  its  commencement.  9.  The  prostatic  portion  of  the 
urethra.  10.  The  membranous  portion,  enclosed  by  the  compressor  urethrse 
muscle.      IL  The  commencement  of  tlie  corpus  spongiosum  penis,  the  bulb. 

12.  The  anterior  ligaments  of  the  bladder,  formed  by  the  reflection  of  the  pel- 
vic fascia,  from  the  internal  surface  of  the  os  pubis  to  the  neck  of  the  bladder. 

13.  The  edge  of  the  pelvic  fascia  at  the  point  where  it  is  reflected  upon  the 
rectum.  14.  An  interval  between  the  pelvic  fascia  and  the  deep  perineal  fas- 
cia, occupied  by  a  plexus  of  veins.  15.  The  deep  perineal  fascia;  its  two 
layers.  16.  Cowper's  gland  of  the  right  side,  situated  between  the  two  layers 
below  the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra.  17.  The  superficial  perineal 
fascia  ascending  in  front  of  the  root  of  the  penis  to  become  continuous  with 
the  dartos  of  the  scrotum  (18).  19.  The  layer  of  the  deep  fascia,  which  is 
prolonged  to  the  rectum.  20.  The  lower  part  of  the  levator  ani;  its  fibres  are 
concealed  by  the  anal  fascia.  21.  The  inferior  segment  of  the  funnel-shaped 
process  given  off  from  the  posterior  layer  of  the  deep  perineal  fascia,  which 
is  continuous  with  the  recto-vesical  fascia  of  Tyrrell.  The  attachment  of  this 
fascia  to  the  recto-vesical  fold  of  peritoneum  is  seen  at  22. 


376 


THE   TIIOMSONIAN 


tha  fascia  lata ;  it  is  thick  and  strong  upon  the  outer  side  of 
the  Hmb,  and  thinner  upon  its  inner  and  posterior  side. 

The  iliac  portion  of  the  upper  fascia  lata,  is  situated  upon 
the  JUac  side  of  the  sapheonus  opening.  It  is  attached  to  the 
crest  of  the  iUum  and  along  Poupart's  ligament,  to  the  spine  of 
the  pubis,  from  which  point  it  is  reflected  downwards  and  out- 
wards, and  forms  a  falciform  border,  which  constitutes  the  out- 
er boundary  of  the  saphenous  opening.  The  edge  of  this  bor- 
der immediately  overlays  and  is  reflected  upon  the  sheath  of 
the  femoral  vessels,  and  the  lower  extremity  of  the  curve  is 
continuous  with  the  pubic  portion. 

The  pubic  portion  is  attached  to  the  spine  of  the  pubis  and 
pectineal  line,  and  passing  outwards  behind  the  sheath  of  the 
femoral  vessels  divides  into  two  layers;  the  anterior  layer  is 
continuous  with  that  portion  of  the  iliac  fascia  which  forms  the 
sheath  of  the  iliacus  and  psoas  muscles,  and  the  posterior  layer 
is  lost  upon  the  capsule  of  the  hip  joint. 

PLATE  59.* 


*  A  Section  of  the  Structures  u-hich  pass  beneath  the  Femoral  Arch.  1.  Pou- 
part's ligament.  2,  2.  The  iliac  portion  of  the  fascia  lata,  attaclied  along  the 
margin  of  the  crest  of  the  ilium,  and  along  Poupart's  ligament,  to  the  spine  of 
the  pubis  (3).  4.  The  pubic  portion  of  the  fascia  lata,  continuous  at  3  with  the 
iliac  portion,  and  passing  outwards  behind  the  sheath  of  the  femoral  vessels 
to  its  outer  border  at  5,  Avhere  it  divides  into  two  layers ;  one  is  continuous 
with  the  sheath  of  the  psoas  (fi)  and  iliacus  (7),  and  the  other  (S)  is  lost  up- 
on the  capsule  of  the  hip  joint  (9).  10.  The  femoral  nerve,  enclosed  in  the 
sheath  of  the  psoas  and  iliacus.  11.  Gimbernat's  ligament.  12.  The  femoral 
ring,  within  the  femoral  sheath.  13.  The  femoral  vein.  14.  The  femoral 
artery.  The  two  vessels  and  the  ring  are  surrounded  by  the  femoral  sheath, 
and  tl-.eir  septa  are  sent  between  the  anterior  and  posterior  walls  of  the  sheath, 
dividing  the  artery  from  the  vein,  and  the  vein  from  the  femoral  ring. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  377 

ON  THE  ARTERIES. 

The  arteries  are  the  cyUndrical  tubes  which  convey  the 
blood  from  the  ventricles  of  the  heart  to  every  part  of  the  body. 
They  are  dense  in  structure,  and  preserve  for  the  most  part  the 
cyhndrical  form  when  emptied  of  their  blood,  which  is  their 
condition  after  death:  hence  they  were  considered  by  the  an- 
cietits,  as  the  vessels  for  the  transmission  of  the  vital  spirits,  and 
were  therefoje  named  arteries. 

The  artery  proceeding  from  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart 
contains  the  pure  or  arterial  blood,  which  is  distributed  through- 
out the  entire  system,  and  constitutes  with  its  returning  veins, 
the  greater  or  systemic  circulatiofi.  That  which  emanates 
from  the  right  ventricle,  conveys  the  impure  blood  to  the  lungs  ; 
and  with  its  corresponding  veins  establishes  the  lesser  or  pul- 
T^ionary  circulation. 

The  whole  of  the  arteries  of  the  systemic  circulation  proceed 
from  a  single  trunk,  named  the  aorta,  from  which  they  are  giv- 
en off  as  branches,  and  divide  and  subdivide  to  their  ultimate 
ramifications,  constituting  the  great  arterial  tree  which  per- 
vades by  its  minute  subdivisions,  every  part  of  the  animal  frame. 
The  mode  in  which  the  division  into  branches  takes  place  is 
deserving  of  remark.  From  the  aorta  the  branches  for  the 
most  part  pass  off  at  right  angles,  as  if  for  the  purpose  of  check- 
ing the  impetus,  with  which  the  blood  would  otherwise  rush 
along  their  cylinders  from  the  main  trunk;  but.  in  the  hmbs  a 
very  different  arrangement  is  adopted  ;  the  branches  are  given 
off  from  the  principal  artery  at  an  acute  angle,  so  that  no  impe- 
diment may  be  offered  to  the  free  circulation  of  the  vital  fluid. 
The  division  of  arteries  is  usually  dicliotomous,  as  of  the  aorta 
into  the  two  common  iliacs,  common  carotid  into  the  external 
and  internal,  &c. ;  but  in  some  few  instances  a  short  trunk 
divides  suddenly  into  several  branches  which  proceed  in  differ- 
ent directions ;  this  mode  of  division  is  termed  an  axis,  as  the 
thyroid  and  coeliac  axis. 

The  arteries  do  not  terminate  directly  in  veins ;  but  in  an 
intermediate  system  of  vessels,  which  from  their  minute  size, 
are  termed  capillaries.  The  capillaries  constitute  a  microsco- 
pic network,  which  is  distributed  through  every  part  of  the 
body,  so  as  to  render  it  impossible  to  introduce  the  smallest  nee- 
dle point  beneath  the  skin  without  wounding  several  of  these 
fine  vessels.  It  is  through  the  medium  of  the  capillaries,  that 
all  the  phenomena  of  nutrition  and  secretion  are  performed. 
They  are  remarkable  for  their  uniformity  of  diameter,  and  for 
the  constant  divisions  and  communications  which  take  place 
between  them  without  any  alteration  of  size.  They  inosculate 
on  otie  hand  with  the  terminal  ramusculi  of  the  arteries  ;  and 
on  the  other  with  the  minute  radicles  of  the  veins. 

25 


378  THE    TH0M30NIAN 

Arteries  are  composed  of  three  coats,  external,  niiddle,  and 
internal.  The  external  or  cellular  coat  is  firm  and  strong,  and 
serves  at  the  same  time  as  the  chief  means  of  resistance  of  the 
vessel,  and  of  connection  to  surrounding  parts.  It  consists  of 
condensed  cellular  tissue,  strengthened  by  an  interlacement  of 
glistening  fibres  which  partially  encircle  the  cylinder  of  the  tube 
in  an  oblique  direction.  Upon  the  surface  the  cellular  tissue  is 
loose,  to  permit  of  the  movements  of  the  artery  in  distension  and 
contraction. 

The  middle  or  Jibrous  coat  is  composed  of  yellowish  fibres 
of  elastic  tissue,  which  are  disposed  in  an  oblique  direction 
around  the  cylinder  of  the  vessel,  and  cross  each  other  in  their 
course.  This  coat  is  elastic  and  fragile,  and  thicker  than  the 
external  coat.  Its  elasticity  enables  the  vessel  to  accommodate 
itself  to  the  quantity  of  blood  which  it  may  contain  ;  and  its  fra- 
gility is  exhibited  in  some  cases  of  aneurism,  and  in  the  division 
of  the  two  internal  coats  in  ligature  of  an  artery. 

The  internal  coat  is  a  thin  serous  membrane  which  lines  the 
interior  of  the  artery,  and  gives  it  tlie  smooth  polish  which  that 
surface  presents.  It  is  continuous  with  the  lining  membrane 
of  the  heart,  and  through  the  medium  of  the  capillaries  with  the 
venous  system.  The  internal  is  connected  to  the  fibrous  coat 
by  a  close  cellular  tissue  which  is  very  liable  to  disease  and  de- 
positions of  various  kinds;  and  is  the  seat  of  the  first  changes 
which  precede  aneurism.  The  n  searches  of  Hcnle  have  de- 
monstrated an  epithelium,  composed  of  vesicles  and  scales,  with 
central  nuclei,  upon  thesurl'ace  of  this  internal  coat,  analagous 
to  the  epithelium  of  serous  and  mucous  membranes. 

The  arteries  in  their  distribution  through  the  body  are  inclu- 
ded in  a  loose  cellular  investment  which  separates  them  from 
the  surrounding  tissues,  and  is  called  a  sheath.  Around  the 
principal  vessels  the  sheath  is  an  important  structure  ;  it  is  com- 
posed of  cellulo-fibrous  tissue,  intermingled  with  tendinous  fi- 
bers, and  is  continuous  with  the  fascios  of  the  region  in  which 
the  arteries  are  situated,  as  v^^ith  the  thoracic  and  cervical  fascial 
in  the  neck,  transversalis  and  iliac  fasciee,  and  fascia  lata  in  the 
thigh,  &c.  The  sheath  of  the  arteries  contains  also  their  ac- 
companyinsf  veins,  and  sometimes  a  nerve. 

The  coats  of  arteries  are  supplied  with  blood  like  other  or- 
gans of  the  body,  and  the  vessels  which  are  distributed  to  them 
are  named  vasa  vasoriim.  They  are  also  provided  with 
nerves  ;  but  the  mode  of  distribution  of  these  nerves  is  at  present 
undiscovered. 

In  the  consideration  of  the  arteries,  we  shall  first  describe  the 
aorta,  and  the  branches  of  that  trunk,  with  their  subdivisions, 
which  together  constitute  the  efferent  portion  of  the  systemic 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


379 


circulation,  and  then  the  pulmonary  artery  as  the  efferent  trunk 
of  the  pulmonary  circulation. 

AORTA. 

The  aorta  arises  from  the  left  ventricle,  at  the  middle  of  the 
root  of  the  heart,  opposite  the  articulation  of  the  fourth  costal 
cartilage  with  the  sternum.  It  ascends  at  first  to  the  right,  then 
curves  backwards  and  to  the  left,  and  descends  on  the  left  side 
of  the  vertebral  column  to  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra.  Hence 
It  is  divided  into — ascending  arch — and  descending  aorta. 

PLATE  60.* 


*  The  Large  Vessels  which  proceed  from  the  root  of  the  heart,  with  their  Re- 
lations.— The  heart  has  been  removed.  1.  The  ascendins:  aorta.  2.  The 
arch.  3.  Tlie  thoracic  portion  of  the  descending  aorta.  4.  The  arteria  inno- 
mjaata  dividing  into  5,  the  right  carotid,  which  again  divides  at  6,  into  the  ex- 
ternal and  internal  carotids  ;  and  7,  the  right  subclavian  artery.  8.  The  axil- 
lary artery ;  its  extent  is  designated  by  a  dotted  line.  9.  The  brachial  artery. 
10.  The  riglit  pneumogastric  nerve,  running  by  the  side  of  the  common  caro- 
tid, in  front  of  the  right  subclavian  artery,  and  behind  the  root  of  the  right 
lung.  11.  The  left  common  carotid,  having  to  its  outer  side  the  left  pneumo- 
gastric nerve,  which  crosses  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  as  it  reaches  its  lower 
border  is  seen  to  give  ofi'the  left  recurrent  nerve.  12.  The  left  subclavian  ar- 
tery becoming  axillary,  and  brachial  in  its  course,  like  the  artery  of  the  oppo- 
site side.  13.  The  trunk  of  the  pulmonary  artery  connected  to  the  concavity 
of  the  arch  of  the  aorta  by  a  fibrous  cord,  the  remains  of  the  ductus  arterio- 
sus.    14.  The  left  pulmonary  artery.      15.  The  right  pulmonary  artery.     16. 


380  THE  TH0M90NIAN 

Relations. — The  ascendmg  aorta  has  in  relation  with  it,  in 
front,  the  trunk  of  the  puhnonary  artery,  thoracic  fascia,  and 
pericardium;  behind,  the  right  pulmonary  veins  and  artery^ 
to  the  right  side,  the  right  auricle  and  superior  cava;  and  Xo 
the  left,  the  left  auricle  and  the  trunk  of  the  pulmonary  artery. 

Arch. — The  upper  border  of  the  arch  is  parallel  with  the  up- 
per border  of  the  second  sterno-costal  articulation  of  the  right 
side  in  front,  and  the  second  dorsal  vertebra  behind,  and  termi- 
nates opposite  the  lower  border  of  the  third. 

The  anterior  surface  of  the  arch  is  crossed  by  the  left  pneu- 
mogastric  nerve,  and  by  the  cardiac  branches  of  that  nerve,  and 
of  the  sympathetic. 

The  posterior  surface  of  the  arch  is  in  relation  with  the  bi- 
furcation of  the  trachia  and  great  cardiac  plexus,  the  cardiac 
nerves,  left  recurrent  nerve,  and  the  thoracic  duet. 

The  superior  border  gives  off  the  three  great  arteries,  viz.  the 
innominata,  left  carotid,  and  left  subclavian. 

The  inferior  border,  or  concavity  of  the  arch,  is  in  relation 
with  the  remains  of  the  ductus  arteriosus,  the  cardiac  ganglion 
and  the  left  recurrent  nerve,  and  has  passing  beneath  it,  the 
right  pulmonary  artery  and  left  bronchus. 

The  descending  aorta  is  subdivided  in  correspondence  with 
the  two  great  cavities  of  the  trunk,  into  the  thoracic  and  abdo- 
minal aorta. 

The  thoracic  aorta  is  situated  to  the  left  side  of  the  vertebral 
column,  but  approaches  the  middle  line  as  it  descends,  and  at 
the  aortic  opening  of  the  diaphragm  is  altogether  in  front  of  the 
column.  After  entering  the  abdomen,  it  again  falls  back  to  the 
lelt  side. 

Relations. — It  is  in  relation,  behind,  with  the  vertebral  co- 
lumn and  lesser  vena  azygos  ;  in  front,  with  the  oesophagus 
and  right  pneumogastric  nerve  ;  (o  the  left  side  with  the  pleu- 
ra, and  to  the  right  with  the  thoracic  duct. 

The  abdominal  aorta  enters  the  abdomen  through  the  aortic 
opening  of  the  diaphragm,  and  descends,  lying  rather  to  the  left 
side  of  the  vertebral  column,  to  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra, 
where  it  divides  into  the  two  common  iliac  arteries. 

Relations. — It  is  crossed  in  front,  by  the  left  renal  vein,  pan- 
creas, transverse  duodenum,  and  mesentery,  and  is  embraced 
byjtlie  aortic  plexus;  and  behind  is  in  relation  with  the  thorac- 
ic duct,  receptaculum  chili,  and  left  lumbar  veins. 

The  trachea.  17.  The  right  bronchus.  18.  The  left  bronchus.  19,  19.  The 
pulmonary  veins.  17,  J5  and  19,  on  the  right  side,  and  14,  IS  and  19,  on  the 
left,  constitute  the  roots  of  the  corresponding  lungs,  and  the  relative  position 
of  these  vessels  is  carefully  preserved.  2(1.  Bronchial  arteries.  21,  21.  In- 
tercostal arteries  ;  the  branches  from  the  front  of  the  aorta  above  and  below 
the  number  3  are  pericardiac  and  oesophageal  branches. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  381 

On  its  left  side  is  the  left  semilunar  ganglion  and  sympathet- 
ic nerve  ;  and  on  the  right,  the  vena  cava,  right  semilunar  gan- 
glion, and  the  commencement  of  the  vena  azygos.  The  coro- 
nary  arteries  arise  from  tlie  aortic  sinuses  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  ascending  aorta,  immediately  above  the  free  margin 
of  the  semilunar  valves.  The  left,  or  anterior  coronary,  pass- 
es forwards,  between  the  puhnonary  artery  and  left  appendix 
auriculge,  and  divides  into  two  branches,  one  of  which  winds 
around  the  base  of  the  left  ventricle  in  the  auriculo-ventricular 
groove,  and  inosculates  with  the  right  coronary,  forming  an 
arterial  circle  around  the  base  of  the  heart,  while  the  other 
passes  along  the  line  of  union  of  the  two  ventricles,  upon  the 
anterior  aspect  of  the  heart,  to  its  apex,  where  it  anastomoses 
with  the  descending  branch  of  the  right  coronary.  It  supplies 
the  left  auricle  and  the  adjoining  sides  of  both  ventricles. 

The  right,  or  posterior  coronary,  passes  forwards,  between 
the  root  of  the  pulmonary  artery  and  the  right  auricle,  and 
winds  along  the  auriculo-ventricular  groove,  to  the  posterior 
median  furrow,  where  it  descends  upon  the  posterior  aspect  of 
the  heart  to  its  apex,  and  inosculates  with  the  left  coronary.  It 
is  distributed  to  the  right  auricle  and  to  the  posterior  surface  of 
both  ventricles,  and  sends  a  large  branch  along  the  sharp  mar- 
gin of  the  right  ventricle  to  the  apex  of  the  heart. 

ARTERIA  INNOMINATA. 

The  arteria  innominata  (plate  60,  No.  4,)  is  the  first  artery 
given  off  by  the  arch  of  the  aorta.  It  is  an  inch  and  a  half  in 
length,  and  ascends  obliquely  to  the  right  sterno-clavicular  ar- 
ticulation, where  it  divides  into  the  right  carotid  and  right  sub- 
clavian arteries. 

Relations. — It  is  in  relation,  in  front,  with  the  left  vena  in- 
nominata, and  the  origins  of  the  sterno-thyroid  and  sterno  hy- 
oid  muscles.  Behind,  with  the  trachea,  pneumogastric  nerve, 
and  cardiac  nerves  ;  externally,  with  the  right  vena  innomina- 
ta and  pleura;  and  internally,  with  the  origin  of  the  left  caro- 
tid. 

The  arteria  innominata  occasionally  gives  off  a  small  branch 
which  ascends  along  the  middle  of  the  trachea  to  the  thyroid 
gland.  This  branch  has  been  described  as  the  middle  thyroid 
artery,  and  a  knowledge  of  its  existence  is  extremely  important 
in.  performing  the  operation  of  tracheotomy. 

COM    MON  CAROTID  ARTERIES. 

The  common  corotid  arteries  arise,  the  right  from  the  bifur- 
cation of  the  arteria  innominata  opposite  the  right  sterno-clavi- 
cular articulation,  the  left  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta.  It  follows, 
therefore,  that  the  right  carotid  is  shorter  than  the  left;  it  is  al- 


382  THE  THOMSONIAN 

SO  more  anterior ;  and,  in  consequence  of  proceeding  from  a 
branch  instead  of  from  the  main  trunk,  it  is  larger  than  its  fel- 
low. 

The  right  common  carotid  artery  (plate  60,  No.  5,)  ascends 
the  neck  perpendicularly,  from  the  riijht  sterno-clavicnlar  arti- 
culation to  a  level  with  the  upper  border  of  the  thyroid  carti- 
lage, where  it  divides  into  the  external  and  internal  carotid. 

The  left  common  carotid  (pi.  60,  No.  11.)  passes  somewhat 
obliquely  outwards  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta  to  the  side  of  the 
neck,  and  thence  upwards  to  a  level  with  the  upper  border  of 
the  thyroid  cartilage,  where  it  divides  like  the  right  common  ca- 
rotid into  the  external  and  internal  carotid. 

Relations. — The  right  common  carotid  rests,  first,  upon  the 
longns  colli  muscle,  then  upon  the  rectus  anticus  major,  the 
sympathetic  nerve  being  interposed.  The  inferior  thyroid  ar- 
tery and  recurrent  laryngeal  nerve  pass  behind  it  at  its  lower 
part.  To  its  inner  side  is  the  trachea,  recurrent  laryngeal 
nerve,  and  larynx  ;  to  its  outer  side,  and  enclosed  in  the  same 
sheath,  the  jugular  vein  and  pneumogastric  nerve  ;  and  in 
front  the  sterno-thyroid,  sterno-hyoid,  sterno-mastoid,  omo-hy- 
oid  and  platisma  muscles,  and  the  descendens  noni  nerve.  The 
left  common  carotid,  in  addition  to  the  relations  just  enumerat- 
ed, which  are  common  to  both,  is  crossed  near  its  commence- 
ment by  the  left  vena  innominata;  it  lies  upon  the  trachea ; 
then  gets  to  its  side,  and  is  in  relation  with  the  oesophagus  and 
thoracic  duct. 

EXTERNAL  CAROTID  ARTERY. 

The  external  carotid  artery  ascends  perpendicularly  from 
opposite  the  upper  border  of  the  thyroid  cartilage,  to  the  space 
between  the  neck  of  the  lower  jaw  and  the  meatus  auditorius. 

Relations. — In  front  it  is  crossed  by  the  posterior  belly  of  the 
digastricus,  stylo-hyoideus  and  platysma  myoides  muscles ;  by 
the  lingual  nerve  near  its  origin  •,  higher  up  it  is  situated  in  the 
substance  of  the  parotid  gland,  and  is  crossed  by  the  facial  nerve. 
Behind,  it  is  separated  from  the  internal  carotid  by  the  stylo- 
pharyngeus  and  stylo-glossns  muscles,  glosso-pharyngeal  nerve, 
and  part  of  the  parotid  gland. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  external  carotid  are  ten  ia 
number,  and  may  be  arranged  into  three  groups,  viz. — Anteri- 
or, superior  thyroid,  lingual,  fascial ;  posterior,  mastoid,  occi- 
pital, posterior  auricular;  superior,  ascending  pharyngial, 
transverse  fascial,  temporal,  internal  maxillary. 

The  Sifpcrior  thyroid  artery  curves  downwards  to  the  thy- 
roid gland  to  which  it  is  distributed,  anastomosing  with  its  fel- 
low of  the  opposite  side,  and  with  the  inferior  thyroid  arteries. 

The  Lingual  artery  crosses  obliquely  the  great  cornu  of  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


383 


OS  hyoid;;?;  secondly,  it  passes  forwards  parallel  with  the  os 
hyoides  ;  thirdly,  it  ascends  to  the  under  surfoce  of  the  tongue  ; 
and  fourthly,  runs  forward  in  a  serpentine  direction  to  its  tip 
under  the  name  of  the  ranine  artery. 

Relations. — The  first  part  of  its  course  rests  upon  the  great 
cornu  of  the  os  hyoides,  and  the  origin  of  the  middle  constrictor 
muscle  of  the  pharynx  ;  the  second  is  situated  between  the  mid- 
dle constrictor  and  hyo-glossus  muscles,  the  latter  separating  it 
from  the  lingual  nerve  ;  in  the  third  part  of  its  course,  it  lies  be- 
tween the  hyo-glossus  and  genio-hyo  glossus;  and  in  the  fourth 
ranine  rests  upon  the  lingulis  to  the  tip  of  the  tongue. 

Facial  artery. — The  facial  artery  ascends  obhquely  to  the 
submaxillary  gland,  in  which  it  lies  embedded.  It  then  curves 
around  the  body  of  the  lower  jaw,  close  to  the  anterior  inferior 
angle  of  the  raasseter  muscle,  ascends  to  the  angle  of  the  mouth, 
and  thence  to  the  angle  of  the  eye,  where  it  is  named  the  angu- 
lar artery.     The  facial  artery  is  very  tortuous  in  its  course  over 

PLATE  61.* 


•  The  Carotid  Arteries,  with  the  Branches  of  the  External  Carotid.—!.  The 
common  carotid.  2.  The  external  carotid.  3.  The  internal  carotid.  4.  The 
carotid  foramen  in  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone.  5.  The  superior 
thyroid  artery.  6.  The  lingual  artery.  7.  The  fascial  artery.  8,  The  mas- 
toid  artery.  9.  The  occipital.  10.  The  posterior  auricular.  11.  The  trans- 
verse  fascial  artery.  12.  The  internal  maxillary.  13.  The  temporal.  14.  The 
ascending  pharyngeal  artery. 


384  THE  THOMSONIAN 

the  buccinator  muscle  to  accommodate  itself  to  the  movements 
of  the  jaws. 

Relations. — Below  the  jaw  it  passes  beneath  the  digastricus 
and  stylo-hyoid  muscles  ;  on  the  body  of  the  lower  jaw  it  is  co- 
vered by  the  platysma  myoides,  and  at  the  anjrle  of  the  mouth 
by  the  depressor  anguH  oris  and  zygomatic  muscles. 

The  Mastoid  artery  turns  downwards,  to  be  distributed  to 
the  sterno-mastoid  muscle,  and  the  lymphatic  glands  of  the 
neck;  sometimes  it  is  replaced  by  two  small  branches. 

The  Occipital  artery  passes  backwards  beneath  the  posteri- 
or belly  of  the  digastricus,  the  trachelo-mastoid,  and  sterno-mas- 
toid muscles,  to  the  occipital  jjroove  in  the  mastoid  portion  of 
the  temporal  bone.  It  then  ascends  between  the  splenius  and 
complexus  muscles,  and  is  distributed  upon  the  occiput,  anas- 
tomosing with  the  opposite  occipital,  the  posterior  auricular,  and 
temporal  arteries.  The  lingiud  nerve  curves  around  this  arte- 
ry, near  its  origin  from  the  external  carotid. 

The  Posterior  auricular  artery  arises  from  the  external  ca- 
rotid, above  the  digastric  and  stylo-hyoid  muscles,  and  ascends 
beneath  the  lower  border  of  the  parotid  gland,  and  behind  the 
concha,  to  be  distributed  to  the  external  ear  and  side  of  the 
head,  anastomosing  with  the  occipital  and  temporal  arteries; 
some  of  its  branches  pass  through  fissures  in  the  fibro-cartilage, 
to  be  distributed  to  the  anterior  surface  of  the  pinna.  The  an- 
terior auricular  arteries  are  branches  of  the  temporal. 

The  Ascending  pharyngeal  artery  arises  from  the  external 
carotid  near  to  its  bilurcation,  and  ascends  between  tlie  internal 
carotid  and  the  side  of  the  pharynx  to  the  base  of  the  skull, 
where  it  divides  into  branches  whicfi  enter  the  foramina  in  that 
region,  to  be  distributed  to  the  dura  mater.  It  supplies  the 
pharynx,  tonsils,  and  Eustachi.m  tube. 

The  Transversalis  fascei  arises  from  the  external  carotid, 
whilst  that  trunk  is  lodged  within  the  parotid  gland ;  it  crosses 
the  masseter  muscle,  lying  parallel  with  and  a  little  above  Ste- 
non'sdnct;  and  is  distributed  to  the  muscles  and  integument 
on  the  side  of  the  face,  inosculating  with  the  infra-orbital  and 
fascial  arteries. 

The  Temporal  artery  is  one  of  the  two  terminal  branches 
of  the  external  carotid.  It  ascends  over  the  root  of  the  zygo- 
ma ;  and  at  about  an  inch  and  a  half  above  the  zygomatic  arch 
divides  into  an  anterior  and  a  posterior  temporal  l)ranch.  The 
anterior  temporal  is  distributed  over  the  front  of  the  temple 
and  arch  of  the  skull,  and  anastomoses  with  the  opposite  ante- 
rior temporal,  and  with  the  supra-orbital  and  frontal  arteries. 
The  posterior  temporal  curves  upwards  and  backwards,  and 
inosculates  with  its  fellow  of  the  opposite  side,  with  the  posteri- 
or auricular  and  occipital  arteries. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  385 

The  trunk  of  the  temporal  artery  is  covered  in  by  the  parotid 
gland  and  attrahens  aurem  muscles,  and  rests  upon  the  tempo- 
ral facia. 

The  Internal  maxillary  artery  (pi.  6l,  No.  12,)  is  one  of  the 
two  terminal  branches  of  the  external  carotid.  Commencing 
in  the  substance  of  the  parotid  gland,  opposite  the  meatus  audi- 
torius  externus,  it  passes  in  the  first  instance  horizontally  for- 
wards behind  the  neck  of  the  lower  jaw  ;  it  next  ascends  ob- 
liquely between  the  two  pterygoid  muscles  to  the  upper  part  of 
the  tuberosity  of  the  superior  maxillary  bone  ;  and  between  the 
two  heads  of  the  external  pterygoid  muscle  bends  into  thesphe- 
no-maxillary  fossa.  The  artery  may,  therefore,  in  considera- 
tion of  its  course,  be  divided  into  three  portions — maxillary, 
pterygoid,  and  spheno-maxillary. 

Relations. — The  maxillary  portion  is  situated  between  the 
ramus  of  the  jaw  and  internal  lateral  ligament,  lying  parallel 
with  the  auricular  nerve  ;  the  jyierygoid  portion  between  the 
two  pterygoid  muscles,  and  between  the  gustatory  and  dental 
nerves.  The  pterygo-maxillary  portion  lies  between  the  two 
heads  of  the  external  pterygoid  muscle,  and  in  the  spheno-max- 
illary fossa  is  in  relation  with  Meckel's  ganglion. 

When  the  artery  passes  externally  to  the  external  pterygoid 
muscle,  it  lies  between  that  muscle  and  the  temporal,  and  passes 
between  the  two  heads  of  the  external  pterygoid. 

INTERNAL  CAROTID  ARTERY. 

The  Internal  carotid  artery  curves  slightly  outwards  from 
the  bifurcation  of  the  common  carotid,  and  then  ascends  nearly 
perpendicularly  to  the  carotid  foramen  in  the  petrous  bone.  It 
next  passes  inwards  along  the  carotid  canal,  forwards  by  the 
side  of  the  sella  turcia,  and  upwards  by  the  anterior  clinoid 
process,  where  it  pierces  the  dura  mater  and  divides  into  three 
terminal  branches. 

Relations. — In  the  consideration  of  its  connections,  the  artery 
isdivisible  into  cervical,  petrous,  cavernous  and  cerebral  portions. 

The  cervical  portion  is  in  relation  posteriorly  with  tlie  rectus 
anticus  major,  sympathetic  nerve,  pharyngeal  and  laryngeal 
nerves,  which  cross  behind  it,  and  near  the  carotid  foramen 
with  the  glosso-pharyngeal,  pneumogastric  and  lingual  nerves, 
and  partly  with  the  internal  jugular  vein.  Internally,  it  is  in 
relation  with  the  side  of  the  pharynx,  the  tonsil,  and  the  as- 
cending pharyngeal  artery.  Externally,  with  the  internal  ju- 
gular vein,  glosso-pharyngeal,  pneumogastric,  and  lingual 
nerves  ;  and  in  front,  with  the  stylo-glossus  and  stylopharyn- 
geus  muscles,  glosso-pharyngeal  nerve,  and  parotid  gland. 

The  petrous  portion  is  in  relation  with  the  carotid  plexus, 
and  is  covered  in  by  the  Casserian  ganglion. 


386 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


The  cavernous  portion  is  situated  in  the  inner  wall  of  the 
cavernous  sinus,  and  is  in  relation  by  its  outer  side  with  the 
lining  membrano.  of  the  sinus,  the  sixth  nerve,  and  the  ascend- 
ing branches  of  the  carotid  plexus.  The  third,  fourth,  and 
ophthalmic  nerves  are  placed  in  the  outer  wall  of  the  cavernous 
sinus,  and  are  separated  from  the  artery  by  the  Iming  mem- 
brane of  the  sinus. 

The  cerebral  portion  of  the  artery  is  lodged  in  the  fissure  of 
Sylvius. 

SUBCLAVIAN  ARTERY. 

The  Subclavian  artery,  on  the  right  side,  arises  from  the  ar- 
teria  innominata,  opposite  the  sterno-clavicular  articulation, 
and  on  the  left  I'rom  the  arch  of  the  aorta. 

The  course  of  the  subclavian  artery  is  divisible  into  three 
portions. 

The  first  portion,  on  the  right  side,  ascends  obliquely  out- 
wards to  the  inner  border  of  the  scalenus  anticus.  On  the  left 
side  it  ascends  perpendicularly  to  the  inner  border  of  that  mus- 
cle. The  second  portion  curves  outwards  behind  the  scalenus 
anticus ;  and  the  third  portion  passes  downwards  and  out- 
wards, beneath  the  clavicle,  to  the  lower  border  of  the  first  rib, 
where  it  becomes  the  axillary  artery. 

Relations. — The  first  portion,  on  the  right  side,  is  in  rela- 

PLATE  62.* 


•  The  Branches  of  the  right  Subclavian  Artery  .—I.  The  arteria  innominata. 
2.  The  rUht  carotid.  3.  The  first  portion  of  the  subclavian  artery.  4.  The 
second  portion.  5.  The  third  portion.  6.  The  vertebral  artery.  7.  The  in- 
ferior thyroid.  8.  The  ihyroid  axis.  9-  The  superficialis  cervicis.  10.  The 
profunda  cervicis.  11  The  posterior  scapular  or  transversalis  colli.  12.  The 
6upra-scapular.  13.  The  internal  mammary  artery.  14.  The  superior  inter- 
costal. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  387 

tion  in  front  with  the  internal  jucrular  and  subclavian  veins,  and 
is  crossed  by  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  cardiac  nerves,  and  phre- 
nic nerve.  Behind  and  beneath  it  is  invested  by  the  pleura, 
and  is  crossed  by  the  right  recurrent  laryngeal  nerve  and  ver- 
tebral vein.  The  first  portion  on  the  left  side  is  in  relation  in 
front  with  the  pleura,  the  vena  innoniinata,  the  pneumogastric 
and  phrenic  nerves  (which  lit»  parallel  to  it),  and  the  left  carotid 
artery.  To  its  inner  side,  is  the  oesophagus  ;  and  behind,  the 
thoracic  duct,  longus  colli,  and  vertebral  column. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  subclavian  are  given  off 
from  the  artery  before  it  arrives  at  the  margin  of  the  first  rib. 
The  profunda  cervicis  and  superior  intercostal  frequently  en- 
croach upon  the  second  portion,  and  in  varieties  of  origin  a 
branch  or  branches  may  be  found  proceeding  from  the  third 
portion. 

The  primary  branches  are  five  in  number,  the  three  first  be- 
ing ascending,  and  the  two  latter  descending.  They  are — the 
vertebral;  the  thyroid  axis  (inferior  thyroid,  supra-scapular,  pos- 
terior scapular,  superficialis  cervicis),  the  prol'unda  cervicis,  su- 
perior intercostal,  and  internal  mammary. 

The  Vertebral  artery  is  the  largest  of  the  branches  of  the 
subclavian  artery;  it  ascends  through  the  foramina  in  the  trans- 
verse processes  of  all  the  cervical  vertebreB,  excepting  the  last ; 
then  winds  backwards  around  the  articulating  process  of  the 
atlas;  and  piercing  the  dura  mater,  enters  the  skull  through  the 
foramen  masrnum.  The  two  arteries  unite  at  the  lower  border 
of  the  pons  Varolii,  to  form  the  basilar  artery. 

The  Basilar  artery,  so  named  from  its  position  at  the  base 
of  the  skull,  runs  forwards  to  the  upper  border  of  the  pons  Va- 
rolii, where  it  divides  into  four  ultimate  branches,  two  to  either 
side. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  vertebral  and  basilar  arte- 
ries are  the  following : 

Vertebral — lateral  spinal,  anterior  spinal,  posterior  spinal, 
posterior  meningeal,  inferior  cerebellar;  basilar — transverse, 
superior  cerebeller,  posterior  cerebral. 

The  lateral  spinal  branches  enter  the  intervertebral  forami- 
na, and  are  distributed  to  the  dura  mater  of  the  spinal  cord. 

The  anterior  spinal  is  a  small  branch  which  unites  with  its 
fellow  of  the  opposite  side,  on  the  front  of  the  medulla  oblongata. 
The  artery  formed  by  the  union  of  these  two  vessels  descends 
along  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  spinal  cord,  lo  which  it  distri- 
butes branches  as  far  as  the  cauda  equina. 

The  posterior  spinal  winds  around  the  medulla  oblongata, 
to  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  cord,  and  descends  on  either  side 
nearly  as  far  as  the  cauda  equina,  communicating  very  freely 
with  the  spinal  branches  of  the  intercostal  and  lumbar  arteries. 


388  '  THE  THOMSONIAN 

The  posterior  meningeal,  often  a  branch  of  the  inferior  ce- 
rebellar, is  a  small  branch  to  the  dura  mater,  hning  the  inferior 
occipital  fossae. 

The  inferior  cerebellar  arteries  wind  around  the  upper  part 
of  the  medulla  oblongata  to  the  under  surface  of  the  cerebel- 
lum, to  which  they  are  distributed. 

The  transverse  branches  of  the  basilar  artery  supply  the  pons 
Varolii,  and  adjacent  parts  of  the  brain. 

The  siiperior  cerebellar  arteries,  two  of  the  terminal  branch- 
es of  the  basilar,  are  distributed  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  ce- 
rebellum, inosculating^  with  the  inferior  cerebellar.  This  ar- 
tery gives  off  a  small  branch,  which  accompanies  the  seventh 
pair  of  nerves  into  the  meatus  auditorius  internus. 

The  posterior  cerebral  arteries,  the  other  terminal  branches 
of  the  basilar,  pass  off  on  each  side  to  the  posterior  lobes  of  the 
cerebrum,  and  communicate  on  the  corpus  collosum  with  the 
anterior  cerebral  arteries.  They  are  separated  from  the  supe- 
rior cerebellar  artery,  near  their  origin,  by  the  third  pair  of 
nerves,  and  are  in  close  relation  with-  the  fourth  pair,  in  their 
course  around  the  crura  cerebri.  Anteriorly,  near  their  origin, 
they  give  off  a  tufft  of  small  vessels,  which  enter  the  locus  per- 
foratus,  and  they  receive  the  posterior  communicating  arteries 
from  the  internal  carotid. 

The  Circle  of  Willis. — The  communications  established  be- 
tween the  anterior  cerebral  arteries  in  front,  and  the  internal 
carotids  and  posterior  cerebral  arteries  behind,  by  the  commu- 
nicating arteries,  constitute  the  Circle  of  Willis.  This  re- 
markable communication  at  the  base  of  the  brain  is  formed  by 
the  anterior  communicating  branch,  anterior  cerebrals,  and  in- 
ternal carotid  arteries  in  front,  and  by  the  posterior  communi- 
cating, posterior  cerebrals,  and  basilar  artery  behind. 

The  Thyroid  axis  is  a  short  trunk,  which  divides  almost 
immediately  after  its  origin  into  four  branches,  some  of  which 
are  occasionally  branches  of  the  subclavian  artery  itself 

The  Iiferior  thyroid  artery  ascends  obliquely  behind  the 
sheath  of  the  carotid  vessels,  to  the  inferior  part  of  the  thyroid 
gland,  to  which  it  is  distributed,  and  sends  branches  to  the  tra- 
chea, lower  part  of  the  larynx,  and  oesophagus.  It  is  in  rela- 
tion with  the  middle  cervical  ganglion  of  the  sympathetic,  which 
rests  upon  it. 

The  Supra-scapular  artery  passes  obliquely  backwards  be- 
hind the  clavicle,  and  over  the  lie:ament  of  the  notch,  to  the  su- 
pra-spinatus  fossa.  It  crosses  in  its  course  the  scalenus  anticus 
muscle,  phrenic  nerve  and  subclavian  artery,  is  distributed  to 
the  muscles  on  the  dorsum  of  the  scapula,  and  inosculates  with 
the  posterior  scapular,  and  beneath  the  acromion  process  with 
the  dorsal  branch  of  the  subscapular  artery. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


389 


The  Posterior  scapular  artery  passes  transversely  across 
the  subclavian  triangle  at  the  root  of  the  neck,  to  the  superior 
angle  of  the  scapula.  It  then  descends  along  the  posterior  bor- 
der to  its  inferior  angle,  where  it  inosculates  with  the  subsca- 
pular artery,  a  branch  of  the  axillary.  In  its  course  across  the 
neck  it  passes  in  front  of  the  scalenus  anticus,  and  across  the 
brachial  plexus;  in  the  rest  of  its  course,  it  is  covered  in  by  the 
trapezius,  levator  anguli  scapulae,  rhomboideus  minor,  and 
rhomboideus  major  muscles.  Sometimes  it  passes  behind  the 
scalenus  anticus,  and  between  the  nerves  which  constitute  the 
brachial  plexus. 

The  postersor  scapular  gives  branches  to  the  neck,  and  op- 

PLATE  .63.* 


*  The  Circle  of  Willis. — The  branches  of  the  arteries  have  references  only 
on  one  side,  on  account  of  their  symmetrical  distribution.  1.  The  vertebral 
arteries.  2.  The  two  anterior  spinal  branches  uniting  to  form  a  single  vessel. 
3.  One  of  the  posterior  spinal  arteries.  4.  The  posterior  meningeal.  5.  The 
inferior  cerebellar.  6.  The  basilar  artery  giving  ofl'its  transverse  branches  to 
either  side.  7.  The  superior  cerebellor  artery.  8.  The  posterior  cerebral. 
9.  The  posterior  communicating  branch  of  the  internal  carotid.  10.  The  inter- 
•nal  carotid  artery,  showing  the  curvatures  it  makes  within  the  skull.  11.  The 
ophthalmic  artery  divided  across.  12.  The  middle  cerebral  artery.  13.  The 
anterior  cerebral  arteries,  connected  by  14.  The  anterior  communicating  ar- 
tery. 


390  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

posite  the  angle  of  the  scapula  inosculates  with  the  profunda 
cervicis.  It  supplies  the  muscles  of  the  posterior  border  of  the 
scapula,  and  establishes  an  important  anastomotic  communica- 
tion between  the  branches  of  ihe  external  carotid,  subclavian, 
and  axillary  arteries. 

The  Saperjicialis  cervicis  artery  (cervicalis  anterior)  is  a 
small  vessel,  which  ascends  upon  the  anterior  tubercles  of  the 
transverse  processes  of  the  cervical  vertebrae,  and  distributes 
branches  to  the  deep  muscles  and  glands  of  the  neck. 

The  Profunda  cervicis  (cervicalis  posterior)  passes  back- 
wards between  the  transverse  processes  of  the  seventh  cervical 
and  first  dorsal  vertebra,  tind  then  ascends  the  back  part  of  the 
neck,  between  the  complexus  and  senii-spinalis  colli  muscles. 
It  inosculates  above  with  the  princeps  cervicis  of  the  occipital 
artery,  and  below  with  the  posterior  scapular. 

The  Superior  intercostal  artery  descends  behind  the  pleura 
upon  the  neck  of  the  first  two  ribs,  and  inosculates  with  the  first 
aortic  intercostals.  It  gives  ofi:'  two  branches  which  supply  the 
two  first  intercostal  spaces. 

The  Interjial  mammary  artery  descends  by  the  side  of  the 
sternum,  resting  upon  the  costal  cartilages,  to  the  diaphragm: 
it  then  pierces  the  anterior  fibres  of  the  diaphragm,  and  enters 
the  sheath  of  the  rectus,  where  it  inosculates  with  the  epigastric 
artery,  a  branch  of  the  external  iliac.  In  the  upper  part  of  its 
course  it  is  crossed  by  the  phrenic  nerve,  and  lower  down  lies 
between  the  triangularis  sterni  and  internal  intercostal  muscles. 

AXILLARY  ARTERY. 

The  axillary  artery  forms  a  gentle  curve  through  the  mid- 
dle of  the  axillary  space  from  the  lower  border  of  the  first  rib  to 
the  lower  border  of  the  latissimus  dorsi,  where  it  becomes  th# 
brachial. 

Relations. — After  emerging  from  beneath  the  margin  of  the 
costo-coracoid  membrane,  it  is  in  relation  with  the  axillary  vein, 
which  lies  at  first  to  the  inner  side,  and  then  in  front  of  the  ar- 
tery. Near  the  middle  of  the  axilla  it  is  embraced  by  the  two 
heads  of  the  median  nerve,  and  is  covered  in  by  the  pectoral 
muscles.  Upon  the  inner  or  thoracic  side  it  is  in  relation,  first 
with  the  first  intercostal  muscle  ;  it  next  rests  upon  the  first  ser- 
ration of  the  serratus  magjuis  ;  and  is  then  separated  from  the 
chest  by  the  brachial  plexus  of  nerves.  By  its  outer  or  Iiume- 
ral  side  it  is  at  first  separated  from  the  brachial  plexus  by  a  tri- 
angular cellular  interval ;  it  next  rests  against  the  tendon  of 
the  subscapularis  muscle;  and  thirdly,  upon  the  coraco-brachi- 
alis  muscle. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  axilliary  artery  are — the 
thoracico-acromialis,  superior  thoracic,  inferior  thoracic,  thora- 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


391 


cio-axillaris,  subscapular,  circumflex  anterior,  circumflex  pos- 
terior. 

The  thoracico-acromialis  and  superior  thoracic  are  found  in 
the  triangular  space  above  the  pectoralis  minor. 

The  inferior  thoracic  and  thoracio-axillaris,  below  the  pecto- 
ralis minor. 


And  the  three  remaining  branches 
below  the  lower  border  of  the  sub- 
scapularis. 

The  thoracio-acromialis  is  a  short 
trunk,  which  ascends  to  the  space 
above  the  pectoralis  minor  muscle, 
and  divides  into  three  branches — 
thoracic^  which  is  distributed  to  the 
pectoral  muscle  and  mammary  gland; 
acromial,  which  passes  outwards  to 
the  acromion,  and  inosculates  with 
the  branches  of  the  supra-scapular  ar- 
tery; and  descending^  which  follows 
the  interspace  between  the  deltoid 
and  pectoralis  major  muscles,  and  is 
in  relation  with  tlie  cephalic  vein. 

The  sAiperior  thoracic  (short)  runs 
along  the  upper  border  of  the  pec- 
otralis  minor,  and  is  distributed  to 
the  pectoral  muscles  and  mammary 
gland,  inosculating  with  the  inter- 
costal and  mammary  arteries. 

The  infer  or  thoracic  (long)  runs 
along  the  lower  border  of  the  pecto- 
ralis minor  and  is  distributed  to  the 
pectoral   and  serratus  muscles,  and 


PLATE  64.* 


•  The  Axillary  and  Brachial  Arteries,  with  their  Branches. — 1.  The  deltoid 
muscle.  2.  The  biceps.  3.  The  tendinous  process  given  off  from  the  tendon 
of  the  biceps,  to  the  deep  fascia  of  the  fore-arm.  It  is  this  process  which  se- 
parates the  median  basilic  vein  from  the  brachial  artery.  4.  The  cuter  bor- 
der of  the  brachialis  anticus  muscle.  5.  The  supinator  longus.  G.  Tlie  coraco- 
brachialis.  7.  The  middle  portion  of  the  triceps  muscle.  8.  Its  inner  head. 
9.  The  axillary  artery.  10.  The  brachial  artery;  a  dark  line  marks  the  limit 
between  these  two  vessels.  11.  The  thoracio-acromialis  artcr}' dividing  into 
its  three  branches;  the  number  rests  upon  the  coracoid  process.  12.  The  su- 
perior and  inferior  thoracic  arteries.  13.  The  serratus  magnus  muscle.  14. 
The  subscapular  artery.  The  posterior  circumflex  and  thoracio-axillaris 
branches  are  seen  in  the  figure  between  the  inferior  thoracic  and  subscapular. 
The  anterior  circumflex  is  observed  crossing  the  ncek  of  the  humerus  between 
the  two  heads  of  the  biceps.  15.  The  superior  profunda  artery.  16.  The  in- 
ferior profunda.  17.  The  anastoraotica  magna,  inosculating  inferiorly  with 
the  anterior  ulnar  recurrent.  IS.  The  termination  of  the  superior  profnndn, 
inosculatmg  with  the  radial  recurrent  in  the  interspace  between  the  brachia- 
lis anticus  and  supinator  longus. 


392  THE    THOMSONIAN 

mammary  gland,  inosculating  with  the  superior  thoracic,  intei- 
costal,  and  mammary  arteries. 

The  thoracio-axillaris  is  a  small  branch  distributed  to  the 
plexus  of  nerves  and  glands  in  the  axilla.  It  is  frequently  de- 
rived from  one  of  the  other  thoracic  branches. 

The  subscapular  artery^  the  largest  of  the  branches  of  the 
axillary,  runs  along  the  lower  border  of  the  subscapularis  mus- 
cle, to  the  inferior  angle  of  the  scapula,  where  it  inosculates 
with  the  posterior  scapular,  a  branch  of  the  subclavian.  It  sup- 
plies, in  its  course,  the  muscles  on  the  under  surface,  and  infe- 
rior border  of  the  scapula,  and  side  of  the  chest.  At  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  from  the  axillary,  it  gives  oif  a  large  branch,  the 
dorsalis  scapiUcB,  which  passes  backwards  through  the  triangu- 
lar space  bounded  by  the  teres  minor,  teres  major,  and  scapular 
head  of  the  triceps,  and  beneath  the  infra-spinatus  to  the  dor- 
sum of  the  scapula,  where  it  is  distributed,  inosculating  with 
the  suprascapular  and  posterior  scapular  arteries.  The  dorsalis 
scapulas  is  often  larger  than  the  trunk  from  which  it  arises. 

The  circumflex  arteries  wind  around  the  neck  of  the  hume- 
rus. The  anterior^  very  small,  passes  beneath  the  coraco-bra- 
chialis  and  short  head  of  the  biceps,  and  sends  a  branch  up- 
wards along  the  bicipital  groove  to  supply  the  shoulder-joint. 

The  jjosterior  circumflex,  of  larger  size,  passes  backwards 
through  the  quadrangular  space  bounded  by  the  teres  minor 
and  major,  the  scapular  head  of  the  triceps  and  the  humerus, 
and  is  distributed  to  the  deltoid  muscle  and  joint.  Sometimes 
this  artery  is  a  branch  of  the  superior  profunda  of  the  brachial. 
It  then  ascends  behind  the  tendon  of  the  teres  major,  and  is  dis- 
tributed to  the  deltoid  without  passing  through  the  quadrangu- 
lar space. 

BRACHIAL  ARTERY. 

The  brachial  artery  passes  down  the  inner  side  of  the  arm, 
from  the  lower  border  of  the  latissimus  dorsi,  to  the  bend  of  the 
elbow,  where  it  divides  into  the  radial  and  ulnar  arteries. 

Relations. — In  its  course  downwards,  it  rests  upon  the  cora- 
co-brachialis  muscle,  internal  head  of  the  triceps,  and  brachialis 
anticus.  To  its  inner  side  is  the  ulnar  nerve  ;  to  the  outer  side 
the  coraco-brachialis  and  biceps  muscles  ;  and  in  front,  it  has 
the  basilic  vein,  and  is  crossed  by  the  median  nerve.  Its  rela- 
tions within  its  sheath  are  the  vena3  comites. 

The  branches  of  the  brachial  artery  are — the  superior  pro- 
funda, inferior  profunda,  and  anastomotica  magna. 

The  superior  profunda  arises  opposite  the  lower  border' of 
the  latissimus  dorsi,  and  winds  around  the  humerus,  between 
the  triceps  and  the  bone,  to  the  space  between  the  brachialis 
anticus  and  supinator  longus,  where  it  inosculates  with  the  ra- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  393 

dial  recurrent  branch.  It  accompanies  the  musculo-spiral 
nerve.  In  its  course  it  js^ives  off  the  posterior  articular  artery, 
which  descends  to  the  elbow-joint,  and  a  more  superficial  branch 
which  inosculates  with  the  interosseous  articular  artery. 

The  inferior  profunda  arises  from  about  the  Iftiddle  third  of 
the  braciiial  artery,  and  descends  to  the  space  between  the  inner 
condyle  and  olecranon  in  company  with  the  ulnar  nerve,  where 
it  inosculates  with  the  posterior  ulnar  recurrent. 

The  anastomotica  magna  is  given  oif  nearly  at  right  angles 
from  the  brachial,  at  about  two  inches  above  the  joint.  It  pass- 
es directly  inwards,  and  divides  into  two  branches  which  inos- 
culate with  the  anterior  and  posterior  ulnar  recurrent  arteries 
and  inferior  profunda. 

Varieties  of  the  brachial  artery. — The  most  frequent  pecu- 
liarity in  the  distribution  oi  branches  from  this  artery  is  the  high 
division  of  the  radial,  which  arises  generally  from  about  the 
upper  third  of  the  brachial  artery,  and  descends  to  its  normal 
position  at  the  bend  of  the  elbow.  The  ulnar  artery  sometimes 
arises  from  the  brachial  at  about  two  inches  above  the  elbow, 
and  pursues  either  a  superficial  or  deep  course  to  the  wrist:  and 
in  more  than  one  instance  I  have  seen  the  interosseous  artery 
arise  from  the  brachial  a  little  above  the  bend  of  the  elbow. 

RADIAL  ARTERY. 

The  radial  artery.,  one  of  the  divisions  of  the  brachial,  ap- 
pears from  its  direction  to  be  almost  the  continuation  of  that 
trunk.  It  runs  along  the  radial  side  of  the  fore-arm,  from  the 
bend  of  the  elbow  to  the  wrist;  it  there  turns  around  the  base 
of  the  thumb,  beneath  its  extensor  tendons,  and  passes  between 
the  two  heads  of  the  first  dorsal  interosseous  muscle,  into  the 
palm  of  the  hand.  It  then  crosses  the  metacarpal  bones  to  the 
ulnar  side  of  the  hand,  forming  the  deep  palmar  arch,  and  ter- 
minates by  inosculating  with  the  superficial  palmar  arch. 

Ill  the  upper  half  of  its  course,  the  radial  artery  is  situated 
between  the  supinator  longus  muscle,  and  pronator  radii  teres ; 
in  the  lower  half,  between  the  tendons  of  the  supinator  longus 
and  flexor  carpi  radialis.  It  rests  in  its  course  downwards,  up- 
on the  tendon  of  the  biceps,  supinator  brevis,  pronator  radii  teres, 
radial  origin  of  the  flexor  sublimis,  flexor  longus  pollicis,  and 
pronator  quadratus;  and  is  covered  in  by  the  integument  and 
fiiscite.  At  the  wrist  it  is  situated  beneath  the  extensor  tendons 
of  the  thumb;  and  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  beneath  the  flexor 
tendons.  It  is  accompanied  by  venae  comites  throughout  its 
course,  and  for  its  middle  third  is  in  close  relation  with  the  ra- 
dial nerve. 

The  branches  of  the  radial  artery  may  be  arranged  in  three 
groups,  corresponding  with  the  three  regions,  the  fore-arm,  the 

26 


394 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


the  wrist,  and  the  hand  :  they  ar^i— fore- arm,  recurrent  radial, 
muscular;  ?^ri5^,  superficialis  vola;,  carpalis  anterior,  carpalis 
posterior,  metacarpalis,  dorsales  poilicis  ;  /ia?id,  princeps  polli- 
cis,  radialis  indicis,  interossese,  perforantes. 


ULNAR  ARTERY, 

The  ulnar  artery,  the  other  divis- 
ion of  the  brachial  artery,  crosses  the 
arm  obliquely  to  the  commencement 
of  its  middle  third  ;  it  then  runs  down 
the  ulnar  side  of  the  fore-arm  to  the 
wrist,  crosses  the  annular  ligament, 
and  forms  the  superficial  palmar  arch, 
which  terminates  by  inosculating 
with  the  superficial  is  vola3. 

Relations. — In  the  upper  or  ob- 
lique portion  of  its  course,  it  lies  be- 
tween the  superficial  and  deep  layers 
of  muscles  of  the  fore-arm.  In  the 
second  part  of  its  course,  it  is  placed 
between  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris  and 
flexor  sublimis  digitorum.  While 
crossing  the  annular  ligament,  it  is 
protected  from  injury  by  a  strong 
tendinous  arch,  thrown  over  it  from 
the  pisiform  bone;  and  in  the  palm 
it  rests  upon  the  tendons  of  the  flexor 
sublimis,  being  covered  in  by  the 
palmaris  brevis  muscle  and  palmar 
fliscia.  It  is  accompanied  in  its^course 
by  the  vence  comites,  and  is  in  rela- 
tion with  the  ulnar  nerve  for  the  low- 
er two  thirds  of  its  extent. 


PLATE  OO. 


•  The  .Arteries  of  the  Fore-^rm. — 1.  The  lower  part  of  the  biceps  muscle. 
2.  The  inner  condyle  of"  the  humerus,  with  the  humeral  origin  of  the  pronator 
radii  teres  and  flexor  carpi  radialis  rii^'idcd  across.  3.  The  deep  portion  of 
the  pronator  radii  teres.  4.  The  supinator  longus  muscle.  5.  The  flexor  lon- 
gus  poUicis.  6.  The  pronator  quadratus.  7.  The  flexor  profundus  digito- 
rum. 8.  The  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  9.  The  annular  lis;ament,  with  the  ten- 
dons passing  beneath  it  into  the  palm  of  the  hand  ;  the  figure  is  placed  on  tl:e 
tendon  of  the  palmaris  longus  muscle,  divided  close  to  its  insertion.  10.  The 
brachial  artery.  11.  The  anastomotica  magna,  inosculating  superiorly  with 
the  inferior  profunda,  and  inferiorly  with  the  anterior  ulnar  recurrent.  12. 
The  radial  artery.  13.  The  radial  recurrent  artery,  inosculating  with  the 
termination  of  the  superior  profunda.  14.  The  superficialis  volae.  15.  The 
ulnar  artery.  16.  Its  superficial  palmar  arch,  giving  oil'  digital  branches  to 
three  fingers  and  a  half.     17.  Branches  of  the  radial  artery,  supplying  one  fin- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  395 

The  branches  of  the  uhiar  artery  may  be  arranged  like  those 
of  the  radial,  into  three  groups:  those  of  the /ore-tf;w,  anterior 
and  posterior  ulnar  recurrent,  interosseous  (anterior  and  poste- 
rior), muscular;  icrist^  carpalis  (anterior  and  posterior);  hand, 
digit  ales. 

The  ninsailar  branches  supply  the  muscles  situated  along 
the  uhiar  border  of  the  fore-arm. 

l^'he  snperjicial  palmar  arch  receives  the  terminntion  of  the 
deep  palmar  arch  from  between  the  abductor  minimi  digiti  and 
flexor  brevis  minimi  digiti  near  their  origins,  and  terminates  by 
inosculating  with  the  superficiaHs  volas  upon  the  ball  of  the 
thumb.  The  communication  between  the  superficial  and  deep 
arch  is  generally  described  as  the  communicating  branch  of 
the  ulnar  artery. 

The  mode  of  distribution  of  the  arteries  to  the  hand  is  sub- 
ject to  great  variety. 

Branches  of  the  Thoracic  Aorta. — Bronchial,  oesophageal, 
and  intercostal. 

The  bronchial  arteries  are  four  in  number,  and  vary  both 
in  size  and  origin.  They  are  distributed  to  the  bronchial  glands 
and  tubes,  and  send  branches  to  the  O2sophao:us,  pericardium, 
and  left  auricle  of  the  heart.  These  are  the  nutritious  vessels 
of  the  lungs. 

The  cesophafreal  arteries  are  numerous  small  branches, 
which  are  distrbuted  to  the  oeosphagus,  and  establish  a  chain 
of  anastomosis  along  that  tube:  the  superior  inosculate  with 
oesophageal  branches  of  the  inferior  thyroid  arteries,  and  the 
inferior  with  similar  branches  of  the  phrenic  and  gastric  arteries. 

The  intercostal,  or  posterior  intercostal  arteries,  are  ten  in 
number  on  each  side,  the  two  superior  spaces  being  supplied  by 
the  superior  intercostal  artery,  a  branch  of  the  subclavian. 
The  ri^ht  intercostals  are  longer  than  the  left,  on  account  of  the 
position  of  the  aorta.  They  ascend  somewhat  obliquely  from 
their  origin,  and  cross  the  vertebral  column  behind  the  thoracic 
duct,  vena  azygos  major,  and  sympathetic  nerve,  to  the  inter- 
costal spaces,  the  left  passing  beneath  the  vena  nzj-gos  minor 
and  sympathetic.  In  the  intercostal  spaces,  or  rather,  upon  the 
external  intercostal  muscles,  each  artery  gives  off  a  dorsal 
branch  for  the  supply  of  the  spinal  cord  and  muscles  of  the  back. 
It  then  comes  into  relation  with  its  vein  and  nerve,  (he  former 
being  above,  and  the  latter  below,  and  divides  into  two  branch- 
es which  run  along  the  borders  of  the  contiguous  ribs  between 


ger  and  a  half.  IS.  The  posterior  ulnar  recurrent.  19.  The  anterior  inter- 
osseous  artery.  20.  The  posterior  interosseus,  as  it  is  passing  through  the 
interosseous  membrane. 


396 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


the  two  planes  of  intercostal  muscles,  and  anastomose  with  the 
anterior  intercostal  arteries,  branches  of  the  internal  mammary. 
The  branch  corresponding  with  the  lower  border  of  each  rib, 
is  the  larger  of  the  two.  They  are  protected  from  pressure  du- 
ring the  action  of  the  intercostal  muscles,  by  little  tendinous 
arches  thrown  across  and  attached  by  each  extremity  to  the 
bone. 

BRANCHES  OF  THE  ABDOMINAL  AORTA. 

Phrenic,  cogliac  axis  (gastric,  hepatic  and  splenic),  superior 
mesenteric,  spermatic,  inferior  mesenteric,  supra-renal,  renal, 
lumbar,  and  sacra-media. 

PLATE  66*. 


*  The  Abdominal  Aorta  with  its  Branches. — 1.  The  phrenic  arteries.  2.  The 
coeliac  axis.  3.  The  gastric  artery.  4.  The  hepatic  artery,  dividing  into  the 
right  and  left  hepatic  branches.  5.  The  splenic  artery,  passing  outwards  to 
the  spleen.  6.  The  supra-renal  artery  of  the  right  side.  7.  The  right  renal 
artery,  which  is  longer  than  the  left,  passing  outwards  to  the  right  kidney.    8. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


397 


The  phrenic  arteries  are  given  off  from  the  anterior  part  of 
the  aorta  as  soon  as  that  trunk  has  passed  through  the  aortic 
opening.  They  are  distributed  to  the  under  surface  of  the  di- 
aphragm, inosculating  with  branches  of  the  internal  mammary, 
inferior  intercostal,  epigastric,  oesophageal,  gastric,  hepatic,  and 
supra-renal  arteries.  They  are  frequently  derived  from  the 
coeliac  axis,  or  from  one  of  its  divisions,  and  sometimes  they 
give  off  tlie  supra-renal  arteries. 

The  coeliac  axis  is  the  first  single  trunk  given  off  from  the 

PLATE  67.* 


The  lumbar  arteries.  9.  The  superior  mesenteric  artery.  10.  the  two  sper. 
matic  arteries.      11.  The  inferior  mesenteric  artery.      12.  The  sacra  media. 

13.  The  common  iliacs.  14.  The  internal  iliac  of  the  right  side.  15.  The 
external  iliac  artery.  16.  The  epigastric  artery.  17.  The  circumilexa  ilii  ar- 
tery.    18.  The  femoral  artery. 

*  The  Distribution  of  the  Branches  of  the  Celiac  Axis. — 1.  The  liver.  2. 
Its  transverse  fissure.  .3.  The  gall  bladder.  4.  The  stomach.  5.  The  en- 
trance of  the  (Esophagus.  6.  The  pylorus.  7.  The  duodenum,  its  descending 
portion.  8.  The  transverse  portion  of  the  duodenum.  9.  The  pancreas.  10. 
The  spleen.      11.  The  aorta.      12.  The  ca-liac  axis.      13.  The  gastric  artery. 

14.  The  licpatic  artery.  15.  Its  pyloric  branch.  16.  The  gastro-duodena- 
lis.  17.  Tlie  gastro-epiploica  dextra.  18.  The  pancreatico-duodenalis,  inos- 
•culating  with  a  branch  from  the  superior  mesenteric  artery.  19.  The  division 
of  the  hepatic  artery  into  its  right  and  left  branches;  the  right  giving  oft'  the 
cystic  branch.  20.  The  splenic  artery,  traced  by  dotted  lines  behind  the  sto- 
mach to  the  spleen.  21.  The  gastro-epiploica  sinistra,  inosculating  along  the 
great  curvature  of  the  stomach  with  the  gastro-epiploica  dextra.  22.  The 
paucreatiea  magna.  23.  The  vasa  brevia  to  the  great  end  of  the  stomach,  in- 
osculating with  the  branches  of  the  gastric  artery.  24.  The  superior  mesen- 
teric artery,  emerging  from  between  the  pancreas  and  the  transverse  portion 
of  the  duodenum. 


398  THE  THOMSONIAN 

abdominal  aorta.  It  arises  opposite  the  upper  border  of  the  first 
lumbar  vertebra,  is  about  half  an  inch  in  length,  and  divides 
into  three  large  branches — gastric,  hepatic,  and  splenic. 

Relations. — The  trunk  of  the  coehac  axis  is  in  relation  on 
each  side  with  the  semihnmr  ganglion,  and  is  surrounded  by 
the  solar  plexus.  It  is  covered  in  and  concealed  in  the  exam- 
ination of  the  abdomen  by  the  lesser  omentum. 

The  gastric  artery^  the  smallest  of  the  three  branches  of  the 
cceliac  axis,  ascends  between  the  two  layers  of  lesser  omentum 
to  the  cardiac  orifice  of  the  stomach,  then  runs  along  the  lesser 
curvature  to  the  pylorus  and  inosculates  with  the  pyloric  branch 
of  the  hepatic.  It  is  distributed  to  the  lower  extremity  of  the 
oesophagus  and  lesser  curve  of  the  stonach,  anastomoses  with 
this  oesophageal  arteries  and  vasa  brevia  of  the  splenic  artery. 

The  hepatic  artery  curves  forwards,  and  ascends  along  the 
right  border  of  the  lesser  omentum  to  the  liver,  where  it  divides 
into  two  branches  (right  and  left),  which  enter  the  transverse 
fissure,  and  are  distributed  along  the  portal  canals  to  the  right 
and  left  lobes.  It  is  in  relation  in  the  right  border  of  the  lesser 
omentum,  with  the  ductus  communis  choledochus  and  portal 
vein,  and  is  surrounded  by  the  hepatic  plexus  of  nerves  and 
numerous  lymphatics. 

The  branches  are — the  pyloric,  gastro-duodenalis  (gastro-ep- 
iploica  dextra,  pancreatico-duodenalis),  and  cystic. 

The  splenic  artery,  the  largest  of  the  three  branches  of  the 
coeliac  axis,  passes  horizontally  to  the  left  along  the  upper  bor- 
der of  the  pancreas,  and  divides  into  five  or  six  large  branches 
which  are  distributed  to  the  spleen.  In  its  course  it  is  tortuous 
and  serpentine,  and  frequently  makes  several  complete  turns 
upon  itself.  It  is  accompanied  by  the  splenic  vein,  and  by  the 
splenic  plexus  of  nerves. 

The  branches  of  the  splenic  artery  are — pancreaticae  parvse, 
pancreatica  magna,  vasa  brevia,  and  gastro-epiploica  sanistra. 

The  siij)erior  mesenteric  artery,  the  second  of  the  single 
trunks,  and  the  largest  of  the  branches  of  the  abdominal  aorta, 
arises  immediately  below  the  coeliac  axis,  and  behind  the  pan- 
creas. It  then  passes  forwards  between  the  pancreas  and  trans- 
verse duodenum,  and  descends  within  the  layers  of  the  mesente- 
ry to  the  right  iliac  fossa,  where  it  terminates,  very  much  dimi- 
nished in  size.  It  forms  a  curve  in  its  course,  the  convexity 
being  directed  towards  the  left,  and  the  concavity  to  the  right; 
it  is  in  relation  near  its  commencement  with  the  portal  vein  ; 
and  is  accompanied  by  two  veins,  and  the  superior  mesenteric 
plexus  of  nerves. 

The  brajiches  of  the  superior  mesenteric  artery  are — the  va- 
sa intestini  tenuis,  ilio-colica,  colica  dextra,  and  colica  media. 

The  spermatic  arteries  are  two  small  vessels  which  arise 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


399 


from  the  front  of  the  aorta  below  the  superior  mesenteric  ;  from 
this  origin  each  artery  passes  obUquely  outwards,  and  accom- 
panies the  correspoadiiio-  ureter  along  the  front  of  the  psoas 
muscle  to  the  border  of  the  pelvis,  where  it  is  in  relation  with 
the  external  iliac.  It  is  then  directed  outwards  to  the  internal 
abdominal  riiis:,  and  follows  the  course  of  the  spermatic  cord 
along  the  spermatic  canal  and  through  the  scrotum  to  the  testi- 
cle, to  which  it  is  distributed.  The  right  spermatic  artery  lies 
in  front  of  the  vena  cava,  and  both  vessels  are  accompanied  by 
their  corresponduig  veins,  and  spermatic  plexuses  of  nerves. 

The  sperm  itic  arteries  in  the  female  descend  into  the  pelvis, 
and  pass  between  the  two  layers  of  the  broad  ligaments  of  the 

PLATE  68.* 


*  The  Coun.  ,,nl  Distribution  of  the  Superior  Mesenteric  Artery. — 1.  The 
dcsceudingpoiiiiMi  of  the  duodenum.  2.  The  transverse  portion.  3.  The  pan- 
creas. 4.  The  )  ■junum.  5.  The  ileum.  6.  The  caGcum.  7.  The  ascending 
colon.  8.  TIm;  ti-.insverse  colon.  9.  The  commencement  of  the  descending 
colon.  lU.  Tiie  -uperior  mesenteric  artery.  11.  The  colica  media.  12  The 
branch  which  i:M.-..-ulates  with  the  colica  sinistra-  13.  The  branch  of  the  me- 
senteric artery  'v  Inch  inosculotes  Avith  the  pancreatico-duodenalis.  14.  The 
colica  dextra.  I').  The  ilio-colica.  16,  16.  The  branches  from  the  convexity 
of  the  superior  mesenteric  to  the  small   imtestines. 


400 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Uterus,  to  be  distributed  to  the  ovaries,  Fallopean  tubes,  and 
round  ligaments,  along  which  they  are  continued  to  the  ingui- 
nal canal  and  labia  at  each  side. 

The  inferior  mesenteric  artery,  smaller  than  the  superior, 
arises  from  the  abdominal  aorta  about  two  inches  1  ckw  the  ori- 
gin of  that  vessel,  and  descends  between  the  layers  of  the  left 
mesocolon,  to  the  left  iliac  fossa,  where  it  divides  nito  three 
branches,  viz  : — the  colica  sinistra,  the  sigmoidesB,  nrid  superior 
hsemorroidal. 

The  supra-renal  are  two  small  vessels,  sometimes  branches, 

PLATE  69.* 


•  The  Distribution  and  Branches  of  the  Ivfcrior  Mesii:t(ric  Jfrtery. — 1,  I. 
The  superior  mesenteric  artery,  witli  its  lirnnclies  and  lie  FriKill  intestines 
turned  over  to  the  right  side.  2.  The  ca'ciuii  and  np^undi.x  (mri.  3.  Aseend- 
ing  colon.  4.  Transverse  colon.  5.  Descending  colcn.  r.  lis- sigmoid  fle:x- 
ure.  7.  The  rectum.  8  The  aorta.  9.  The  inferior  mesenteric  ai  w  ry.  10.  The 
colica  sinistra,  inosculating  with  11,  the  colica  media,  a  I  )pr di  ( f  l^e  superior 
mesenteric  artery.  12,  12.  Sigmoid  branches.  13.  Thesrifrirr  harmorahei- 
dal  artery.     14.  The  pancreas.     15.  The  descending  porticu  cf  lie  ducdeBura. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  401 

of  the  phrenic  or  renal  arteries,  distributed  to  the  supra-renal 
capsules. 

The  renal  arteries  (emulgent)  are  two  large  trunks  given  off 
from  the  sides  of  the  aorta,  immediately  below  the  superior  me- 
senteric artery ;  the  right  is  longer  than  the  left,  on  account  of 
the  position  of  the  aorta,  and  passes  behind  the  vena  cava  to 
the  kidney  of  that  side.  The  left  is  somewhat  higher  than  the 
right.  They  divide  into  several  large  branches  previously  to 
entering  the  kidney,  and  ramify  minutely  in  its  vascular  portion. 

The  lumbar  arteries  correspond  with  the  intercosta'.s  in  the 
chest;  they  are  five  in  number  on  each  side,  and  curve  around 
the  bodies  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  beneath  the  psoas  muscles, 
and  divide  into  two  branches,  one  of  which  passes  backwards 
between  the  transverse  processes  and  is  distributed  to  the  mus- 
cles of  the  back,  whilst  the  other  supplies  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles. 

The  sacra  media  arises  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  aorta, 
at  its  bifurcation,  and  descends  along  the  middle  of  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  sacrum  to  the  coccyx.  It  distributes  branches  to 
the  rectum  and  anterior  sacral  nerves,  and  inosculates  with  the 
lateral  sacral  arteries. 

Varieties  in  the  branches  of  the  abdominal  aorta. — The 
phrenic  arteries  are  very  rarely  both  derived  from  the  aorta. 
One  or  both  may  be  branches  of  the  caeliac  axis  ;  one  may  pro- 
ceed from  the  gastric  artery,  from  the  renal,  or  from  the  upper 
lumbar  artery.  There  are  occasionally  three  or  more  phrenic 
arteries.  The  coeliac  axis  is  very  variable  in  length,  and  gives 
off  its  branches  irregularly.  There  are  sometimes  two  or  even 
three  hepatic  arteries,  one  of  which  may  be  derived  from  the 
gastric  or  even  from  the  superior  mesenteric.  The  colica  me- 
dia is  sometimes  derived  from  the  hepatic  artery.  The  sper- 
matic arteries  are  very  variable  both  in  origin  and  number. 
The  right  spermatic  may  be  a  branch  of  the  renal  artery,  and 
the  left  a  branch  of  the  inferior  mesenteric.  The  ?upra-renal 
arteries  may  be  derived  from  the  phrenic  or  renal  arteries. 
The  renal  arteries  present  several  varieties  in  number;  there 
may  be  three  or  even  four  arteries  on  one  side,  and  one  only  on 
the  other.  When  there  are  several  renal  arteries  on  one  side, 
one  may  arise  from  the  common  iliac  artery. 

COMMON  ILIAC  ARTERIES. 

The  abdominal  aorta  divides  opposite  the  fourth  lumbar  ver- 
tebra into  the  two  common  iliac  arteries.  Sometimes  the  bifur- 
cation takes  place  as  high  as  the  third,  and  occasionally  as  low 
as  the  fifth  lumbar  vertebra.  The  common  iliac  arteries  are 
about  two  inches  and  a  half  in  length  ;  they  diverge  from  the 
termination  of  the  aorta,  and  pass  downwards  and  outwards  to 


402 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


the  margin  of  the  pelvis  opposite  the  sacro-iliac  symphyses, 
where  tliey  divide  into  the  internal  and  external  iliac  arteries. 

The  lafl  common  iliac  is  somewhat  longer  than  the  right 
and  forms  a  more  ohtiise  angle  with  the  termination  of  the 
aorta :  the  angle  of  bifurcation  is  greater  in  the  female  than  in 
the  male. 

Relations. — The  relations  of  the  two  arteries  are  different 
on  the  two  sides  of  the  body.  The  right  common  iliac  is  in 
relation  in  front  with  the  peritoneum,  and  is  crossed  near  its 
bifurcation  by  the  ureter.  It  is  in  relation  posteriorly  with  the 
two  common  iliac  veins,  and  externally  with  the  psoas  magnus. 
The  left  is  in  relation  in  front  with  the  peritoneum,  and  is 
crossed  by  the  rectum  and  inferior  mesenteric  artery,  and  at  its 
bifurcation  by  the  ureter.  It  is  in  relation  behind  with  the  left 
common  iliac  vein,  and  externally  with  the  psoas  magnus. 

INTERNAL  ILIAC  ARTERY. 

The  internal  iliac  artery  is  a  short  trunk,  which  descends 
obliquely  to  the  upper  margin  of  the  great  sacro  ischiatic  fora- 
men, and  divides  into  an  anterior  and  posterior  trunk. 

PLATE  70.* 


*  The  Distribution  and  Branches  of  the  Iliac  Arteries. — 1.  The  aorta.  2. 
The  left  common  iliac  arterj'.  3.  the  external  iliac.  4.  The  epigastric  arte- 
ry. 5.  The  circumflexa  ilii.  6.  The  internal  iliac  artery.  7.  Its  anterior 
trunk.  8.  Its  posterior  trunk.  9.  The  umbilical  artery  giving  ofl'  10,  the  su- 
perior vesical  artery.  After  the  origin  of  this  branch,  the  umbilical  artery 
becomes  converted  into  a  fibrous  cord — the  umbilical  ligament.  11.  The  in- 
ternal pudic  artery  passing  behind  t!ie  spine  of  the  ischium  (12)  and  lesser 
sacro-iscliiatic  ligament.  13.  The  middle  hremorrhoidal  a-tery.  14.  The  is- 
chiatic artery,  also  passing  behind  the  anterior  sacro  ischiatic  ligament  to  es- 
cape from  the  pelvis.  15.  Its  inferior  vesical  branch.  16.  The  illo  lumbar, 
the  first  branch  of  the  posterior  trunk  (8)  ascending  to  inosculate  with  the 
circumflexf  ilii  artery  (5)  and  form  an  arch  along  the  crest  of  the  ilium.  17. 
The  obturator  artery.  18.  The  lateral  sacral.  19.  The  gluteal  artery  escap- 
ing from  the  pelvis  through  the  upper  part  of  the  great  sacro-ischiatic  fora- 
men. 20.  The  sacra  ^j^jedia.  21.  The  right  common  iliac  artery  cut  off.  22. 
The  femoral  artery. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  403 

Relations. — This  artery  rests  externally  upon  the  sacral  plex- 
us and  origin  of  the  pyriformis  mnscle  ;  posteriorly  it  is  in  rela- 
tion with  the  internal  iliac  vein,  and  anteriorly  with  tiie  ureter. 

Branches. — The  brandies  of  the  anterior  trunk  are — the 
umbilical,  middle  vesical,  middle  htemorrhoidal,  ischiatic,  and 
internal  piidic. 

And  of  the  posterior  trunk,  the  ilio  lumbar,  obturator,  lateral 
sacra),  and  gluteal. 

The  isclualic  artery  is  one  of  the  terminal  branches  of  the 
anterior  division  of  the  internal  iliac.  It  passes  downwards 
between  the  posterior  border  of  the  levator  ani,  and  the  pyri- 
formis, to  the  lower  border  of  the  great  ischiatic  notch,  and  es- 
capes from  the  pelvis  below  the  pyriformis  muscle.  It  then 
descends  in  the  space  between  the  trochanter  major  and  the  tu- 
berosity of  the  ischium  in  company  with  the  ischi;uic  nerves 
and  divides  into  branches. 

Its  branches  within  the  pelvis  are  haemorrhoidal,  which  sup- 
ply the  rectum  conjointly  with  the  middle  haemorrhoidal  and 
sometimes  take  the  place  of  that  artery,  and  inferior  vesical, 
which  are  distributed  to  the  base  of  the  bladder,  vesiculee  sem- 
inales,  and  prostate  gland.  The  branches  external  to  the  pel- 
vis, are  four  in  number — coccygeal,  inferior  gluteal,  comes 
nervi  ischlatici,  and  muscular  branches. 

The  internal  pudic  artery,  the  other  terminal  branch  of  the 
anterior  trunk  of  the  internal  iliac,  descends  with  the  ischiatic 
artery  to  the  lower  border  of  the  great  ischiatic  foramen.  It 
emerges  from  the  pelvis  through  the  great  sacroischiatic  fora- 
men, below  the  pyriformis  muscle,  crosses  the  spine  of  the  is- 
chium, and  re  enters  the  pelvis  through  the  lesser  sacro  ischiat- 
ic foramen  ;  it  then  crosses  the  internal  obturator  muscle  to  the 
ramus  of  the  ischium,  being  situated  at  about  an  inch  from  the 
margin  of  the  tuberosity,  and  bound  down  by  the  obturator  fas- 
cia; it  next  ascends  the  ramus  ol  the  ischium,  enters  between 
the  two  layers  of  the  deep  perineal  fascia  lying  along  the  bor- 
der of  the  ramus  of  the  pubis,  and  at  the  symphysis  pierces  the 
anterior  layer  of  the  deep  perineal  fascia,  and,  very  much  di- 
minished in  size,  reaches  the  dorsum  of  the  penis,  along  which 
it  runs,  supplyins^  that  organ  under  the  name  of  dorsalis  penis. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  internal  pudic  aitery  with- 
in the  pelvis,  are  the  hasmorrhoidal,  which  supplies  the  middle 
of  the  rectum,  and  frequently  takes  the  place  of  the  middle  has- 
morroidai  branch  of  the  internal  iliac. 

The  branches  external  to  the  pelvis,  are,  the  external  haemor- 
rhoidal, snperficialis  perinei,  transversalis  perinei,  arteria  bul- 
bosi,  arteria  corporis  cavernosi,  and  arteria  dorsalis  p(  nis. 

The  internal  pudic  artery  is  smaller  in  the  female  tlian  in  the 
male;  its  branches,  with  their  distribution,  are  the  same.     The 


404 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


artery  of  the  bulb  supplies  the  vestibule  and  the  meatus  urina- 


rius. 


The  obturator  artery  passes  forwards  a  little  below  the  brim 
of  the  pelvis,  to  the  upper  border  of  the  obturator  foramen.  It 
there  escapes  from  the  pelvis  tlirough  a  tendinous  arch  formed 
by  the  obturator  membrane,  and  divides  into  two  branches; 
anterior,  which  rests  upon  the  adductor  brevis,  supplying  that 
muscle,  tor^ether  with  the  pectineus  and  adductor  longns  ;  and 
posterior,  which  follows  the  direction  of  the  obturator  externus 
muscle  to  the  space  between  the  gemellus  inferior  and  quadra- 
tus  femoris,  where  it  inosculates  with  the  ischiatic  artery.  It 
sends  a  branch  through  the  notch  in  the  acetabulum  to  the  hip- 
joint. 

The  lateral  sacral  is  a  small  artery  which  descends  along 
the  side  of  the  sacrum,  and  sends  branches  through  the  anterior 
sacral  foramina  to  supply  the  sacral  nerves.  It  inosculates 
with  the  sacra  media  and  with  its  fellow  of  the  opposite  side. 
There  are  generally  two  lateral  sacral  arteries  at  each  side. 

PLATE  71.* 


*  Tlic  Arteries  of  the  Perineum. — On  tlie  right  side  the  superficial  arteries 
are  seen,  and  on  the  left  the  deep.  1.  The  penis,  consisting  of  corpus  spongi- 
osum and  corpus  cavernosum.  The  crus  penis  on  the  left  side  is  cut  through- 
2.  The  acceleratores  urinie  muscles,  enclosing  the  bulbous  portion  of  the  cor- 
pus spongiosum.  3.  The  erector  penis,  spread  out  upon  the  crus  penis  of  the 
right  side.  4.  The  anus,  surrounded  by  tbe  sphincter  ani  muscle,  o.  The  ra- 
mus of  the  ischium  and  pubis.  6.  The  tuberosity  of  the  ischium.  7.  The  less- 
er sacro-ischiatic  ligament,  attached  by  its  small  extremity  to  the  spine  of  the 
ischium.  8.  The  coccyx.  9.  The  internal  pudic  artery,  crossing  the  spine  of 
the  ischium,  and  enteiing  the  perineum.  10.  External  hsemorrlioida  branch- 
es. 11.  The  superlicialis  perinei  artery,  giving  off  a  small  branch,  transversa- 
lis  perinei,  upon  the  transversus  perinei  muscle.  12.  The  same  artery  on  the 
left  side  cut  off.  13.  The  artery  of  the  bulb.  14.  The  two  terminal  branches 
of  the  internal  ptidic  artery;  one  is  seen  entering  the  divided  extremity  of  the 
crus  penis,  liie  artery  of  the  corpus  cavernosum  ;  the  other,  the  dorsalis  penis, 
ascends  upou  the  dorsum  of  the  organ. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  405 

*'  The  g-luteal  artery  is  the  continuation  of  the  posterior  trunk 
of  the  internal  ihac;  it  passes  backwards  through  the  upper 
part  of  the  great  sacro-ischiatic  foramen,  above  the  pyriformis 
muscle,  and  divides  into  three  branches — superficial,  deep  su- 
rior,  and  deep  inferior. 

The  uterine  and  vaginal  arteries  of  the  female  are  derived 
either  from  the  internal  iliac,  or  from  the  umbilical,  internal 
pudic,  or  ischiatic  arteries.  The  former  are  very  tortuous  in 
their  course,  and  ascend  between  the  layers  of  the  broad  liga- 
ment, to  be  distributed  to  the  uterus.  The  latter  ramify  upon 
the  exterior  of  the  vagina,  and  supply  its  mucous  membrane. 

Varieties  in  the  branches  of  the  internal  iliac. — The  most 
important  of  the  varieties  occurring  among  the  branches  is  the 
origin  of  the  dorsal  artery  of  the  penis  from  the  internal  iliac  or 
ischiatic.  The  artery  in  this  case  passes  forwards  by  the  side 
of  the  prostrate  gland,  and  through  the  upper  part  of  the  deep 
perineal  fascia.  It  would  be  endangered  in  the  operation  for 
hthotomy.  The  dorsal  artery  of  the  penis  is  semetimes  derived 
from  the  obturator,  and  sometimes  from  one  of  the  external 
pudic  arteries.  The  ariery  of  the  bulb,  in  its  normal  course, 
passes  almost  transversely  inwards  to  the  corpus  spongiosum. 
Occasionally,  however,  it  is  so  oblique  in  its  direction  as  to  ren- 
der its  division  in  lithotomy  unavoidable.  The  obturator  ar- 
tery may  be  very  small  or  altogether  wanting,  its  place  being 
supplied  by  a  branch  from  the  external  iliac  or  epigastric. 

EXTERNAL  ILIAC  ARTERY. 

The  external  iliac  artery  of  each  side  passes  obliquely  down- 
wards, along  the  iimer  border  of  the  psoas  muscle,  from  oppo- 
site the  sacro-iliac  symphysis  to  the  femoral  arch,  where  it  be- 
comes the  femoral  artery. 

Relations.— \i  is  in  relation,  in  front,  v/ith  the  peritoneum 
and  a  thin  layer  of  fascia,  derived  from  the  iliac  fascia  which 
surrounds  the  artery  and  vein.  At  its  commencement  it  is 
crossed  by  the  ureter,  and  near  its  termination  by  the  crural 
branch  of  the  genito-crural  nerve.  Externally,  it  lies  against 
the  psoas  muscle,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the  iliac  fascia  ; 
and  posteriorly  it  is  in  relation  with  the  external  iliac  vein, 
which  at  the  femoral  arch  becomes  placed  to  its  inner  side. 
The  artery  is  surrounded  throughout  the  whole  of  its  course 
by  lympliatic  vessels  and  glands. 

Branches. — Besides  several  small  branches  which  supply 
the  glands  surrounding  the  artery,  the  external  iliac  gives  off 
two  branches — the  epigastric  and  circumflexa  iiii. 

FEMORAL  ARTERY. 

Emerging  from  beneath  Poupart's  ligament,  the  external  iliac 
artery  enters  the  thigh  and  becomes  the  femoral.     The  femorat 


406 


THE    THOMSOiNIAN 


artery  passes  down  the  inner  side  of  the  thigh,  from  Poupart's 
ligament,  at  a  point  midway  between  the  anterior  superior  spi- 
nous process  of  the  ihum  and  symphysis  pubis,  to  the  hole  in 
the  adductor  magnus,  at  the  junction  of  the  middle  with  the  in- 
ferior third  of  the  thigh,  where  it  becomes  the  pophteal  artery. 


The  femoral  artery  and  vein  are 
enclosed  in  a  firm  sheath,  femoral 
or  crural  canal,  which  is  formed  for 
the  greater  part  of  its  extent  by  fi- 
brous and  cellular  tissue,  and  by  a 
process  of  fascia  sent  inwards  from 
the  fascia  lata.  Near  Poupart's  liga- 
ment this  sheath  is  much  larger  than 
the  vessels  it  contains,  and  is  conti- 
nuous with  the  fascia  transversalis, 
and  iliac  fascia.  If  the  sheath  be 
opened  at  this  point,  the  artery  will 
be  seen  to  be  situated  in  contact  with 
the  outer  wall  of  the  sheath.  The 
vein  lies  next  to  the  artery,  being  se- 
parated from  it  by  a  fibrous  septum, 
and  between  the  vein  and  the  inner 
wall  of  the  sheath,  and  divided  from 
the  vein  by  another  thin  fibrous  sep- 
tum, is  a  triangular  interval,  into 
which  the  sac  is  protruded  in  femo- 
ral hernia.  This  space  is  occupied 
in  the  normal  state  of  the  parts  by 
loose  cellular  tissue,  and  lymphatic 
vessels  which  pierce  the  inner  wall 
of  the  sheath  to  make  their  way  to  a 
gland,  situated  in  the  femoral  ring. 

Relations. — The  upper  third  of 
the  femoral  artery  is  superficial,  be- 
ing covered  only  by  the  integument 


PLATE  72.* 


*  View  of  the  interior  and  Inner  Aspect  of  the  Thigh — showing  the  Courts 
and  Branches  of  the  Femoral  Artery. — 1.  The  lower  part  of  the  aponeurosis 
of  the  external  oblique  muscle  ;  its  inferior  margin  is  Poupart's  ligament.  2. 
The  external  abdominal  ring.  3,3.  The  sartorius  muscle  ;  its  middle  portion 
lias  been  removed.  4.  The  rectus.  5.  The  vastus  internus.  6.  The  patella. 
7.  The  iliacus  and  psoas,  the  latter  being  nearest  the  artery.  8.  The  pectine- 
us.  9.  the  adductor  longus.  10.  Tiie  tendinous  canal  for  the  femoral  artery, 
formed  by  the  adductor  magnus,  and  vastus  internus  muscles.  11.  The  ad- 
ductor magnus.  12.  The  gracilis.  13.  The  tendon  of  the  semi-tcndinosus. 
14.  The  femoral  artery,  15.  The  superficial  circumfiexa  ilii,  taking  its  course 
along  the  line  of  Poupart's  ligament,  to  the  crest  of  the  ilium.  2.  The  super- 
ficial epigastric  artery.  16.  The  two  external  pudic  arteries,  superficial  and 
deep.    17.  The  profunda  artery,  giving  ofl"  18,  its  external  circumflex  branch  ; 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  407 

and  superficial  and  deep  fasciae.  The  lower  two  thirds  are 
covered  by  the  sartoriiis  muscle.  To  its  outer  side  the  artery 
is  first  ill  relation  with  the  psoas,  next  with  the  rectus,  and  then 
with  the  vastus  internus.  Behind,  it  rests  upon  the  inner  bor- 
der of  the  psoas  muscle  ;  it  is  next  separated  from  the  pectineus 
vein,  profunda  vein  and  artery,  and  then  lies  on  the  adductor 
by  the  femoral  longus  to  its  termination.  Near  the  lower  bor- 
der of  the  adductor  longus,  it  is  placed  in  an  aponeurotic  canal, 
formed  by  an  arch  of  tendinous  fibres,  thrown  from  the  border 
of  the  adductor  longus,  and  the  border  in  the  opening  of  the 
adductor  magnus,  to  the  side  of  the  vastus  internus. 

The  immediate  relations  of  the  artery,  are  the  femoral  vein 
and  two  saphenous  nerves.  The  vein  at  Pou part's  ligament 
lies  to  the  inner  side  of  the  artery,  but  lower  down  gets  altoge- 
ther behind  it.  The  short  saphenous  nerve  lies  to  the  outer 
side,  and  somewhat  upon  the  sheath  for  the  lower  two  thirds  of 
its  extent,  and  the  long  saphenous  is  situated  within  the  sheath 
for  the  same  extent. 

Branches. — The  branches  of  the  femoral  artery  are — the  su- 
perficial circumflexa  ilii,  superficial  epigastric,  superficial  ex- 
ternal and  deep  external  pudic,  profunda,  muscular,  and  anas- 
tomotica  magna. 

The  profunda  femoris  arises  from  the  femoral  artery  at  two 
inches  below  Poupart's  ligament;  it  passes  downwards  and 
backwards,  and  a  little  outwards,  behind  the  adductor  longus 
muscle,  pierces  the  adductor  magnus,  and  is  distributed  to  the 
flexor  muscles  of  the  leg. 

Relations. — In  its  course  downwards,  it  rests  successively 
upon  the  conjoined  tendon  of  the  psoas  and  iliacus,  the  pecti- 
neus, adductor  brevis,  and  adductor  magnus  muscles.  To  its 
outer  side,  the  tendinous  insertion  of  the  vastus  internus  mus- 
cle intervenes  between  it  and  the  femur,  and  in  front  it  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  femoral  artery  above  by  the  profunda  vein  and 
femoral  vein,  and  below  by  the  adductor  longus  muscle. 

Tiie  brandies  of  the  profunda  artery  are  the  external  and  in- 
teinal  circumflex,  and  three  perforating  arteries. 

POPLITEAL  ARTERY. 

The  popliteal  artery  commences  from  the  termination  of  the 
femoral,  at  the  opening  in  the  adductor  magnus  muscle,  and 
passes  obliquely  outwards  through  the  middle  of  the  popliteal 
space  to  the  lower  border  of  the  popliteus  muscle,  where  it  di- 
vides into  the  anterior  and  posterior  tibial  arteries. 

And  lower  down,  the  three  perforantes.  A  small  bend  of  the  internal  circum- 
flex artery  (S)  is  seen  behind  the  inner  margin  of  the  femoral,  just  below  the 
deep  external  pudic  artery.  19,  The  anastomotica  magna,  descending  to  the 
knee   upon  which  it  ramiiies. 


408 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


\ 


Relations. — In  its  course  downwards,  it  rests  first  on  the  fe- 
mur, then  on  the  posterior  ligament  of  the  knee  joint,  then  on 
the  fascia  covering  the  popliteus  muscle;  superficial  and  exter- 
nal to  it  is  the  popliteal  vein,  and  still  more  superficial  and  ex- 
ternal, the  popliteal  nerve. 

The  branches  of  the  popliteal  artery  are — the  superior  exter- 
nal and  internal  articular,  the  azygos  articular,  the  inferior  ex- 
ternal and  internal  articular,  and  the  sural. 

ANTERIOR  TIBIAL  ARTERY. 

The  anterior  tibial  artery  passes  forwards  between  the  two 
heads  of  the  tibialis  posticus  muscle,  and  through  the  opening 
in  the  upper  part  of  the  interosseous  membrane,  to  the  anterior 
tibial  region.  It  then  runs  down  the  anterior  aspect  of  the  leg 
to  the  ankle  joint,  where  it  becomes  the  dorsalis  pedis. 

Relations. — In  its  course  downwards,  it  plate  73.* 
rests  upon  the  interosseous  membrane,  the  IVT'T/'Z/Ji/ 
tibia,  and  the  anterior  ligament  of  the  joint.  ^  '  '  '■■^  ' 
In  the  upper  third  of  its  course  it  is  situated 
between  the  tibialis  anticus  and  extensor 
longus  digitorum;  lower  down,  between  the 
tibialis  anticus  and  extensor  proprius  polli- 
cis  ;  and  just  before  it  reaches  the  ankle  it  is 
crossed  by  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  pro- 
prius pollicis,  and  becomes  placed  between 
that  tendon  and  the  tendons  of  the  extensor 
longus  digitorum.  Its  immediate  relations 
are  the  venae  comites  and  the  anterior  tibial 
nerve,  which  lies  at  first  to  its  outer  side, 
and  at  about  the  middle  of  the  leg  becomes 
placed  superficially  to  the  artery. 

The  branches  of  the  anterior  tibial  artery 
are — the  recurrent,  muscular,  and  external 
and  internal  malleolar. 

The  dorsalis  pedis  artery  is  continued 
forwards  along  the  tibial  side  of  the  dorsum 
of  the  foot,  from  the  ankle  to  the  base  of  the 
metatarsal  bone  of  the  great  toe,  where  it  di- 
vides into  two  branches,  the  dorsalis  hallu- 
cis  and  communicating. 

Relations.— The  dorsalis  pedis  is  situated 
along  the  outer  border  of  the  tendon  of  the 
extensor  proprius  pollicis;  on  its  fibular  side 
is  the  innermost  tendon  of  the  extensor  lon- 
gus digitorum,  and  near  to  its  termination  it 


,»i' ' 


«f 


'/ 


// 


'M 


*  The  Anterior  .Aspect  of  the  Leg  and  Foot—showing  the  anterior  tibial  and 
dorsalis  pedis  arteries,  with  their  branches.— 1.  The  tendon  of  insertion  of  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


409 


i-s  crossed  by  the  inner  tendon  of  the  extensor  brevis  digitorum. 
It  is  accompanied  by  venae  comites,  and  has  the  continuation 
of  the  anterior  tibial  nerve  to  its  outer  side. 

The  branches  of  this  artery  are— the  tarsea,  the  metatarsea, 
(interossce)  the  dorsalis  hallucis  (collateral  digital),  and  the 
communicating. 

POSTERIOR  TIBIAL  ARTERY.  PLATE  74.* 

The  posterior  tibial  artery  passes  iHHf/iMilll  I 

obliquely  downwards  along  the  tibial 
side  of  the  leg,  from  the  lower  border 
of  the  popliteus  muscle  to  the  inner 
ankle,  where  it  divides  into  the  inter- 
nal and  external  plantar  arteries. 

Relations. — In  its  course  down- 
wards it  lies  first  upon  the  tibialis 
posticus,  next  upon  the  flexor  longus 
digitorum,  and  then  upon  the  tibia, 
and  is  covered  in  by  the  intermuscu- 
lar fascia.  It  is  accompanied  by  its  ^  /  ^i^ 
venae  comites,  and  by  the  posterior 
tibial  nerve,  which  lies  at  first  to  its  vW/Zi 
outer  side,  then  superficially  to  it, 
asd  again  to  its  outer  side. 

The  branches  of  the  posterior  ti- 
bial artery  are — the  peroneal,  muscu- 
lar, and  internal  and  external  plantar. 
The  peroneal  artery  is  given  off"  from 
the  posterior  tibial  at  about  two  inches 
below  the  lower  border  of  the  poplite- 
us muscle,  and  passes  obliquely  out- 
wards to  the  fibula.  It  then  runs 
downwards  along  the  inner  border  of 
the  fibula  to  its  lower  third,  where  it 
divides  into  the  anterior  and  posteri- 
or peroneal  artery. 


quadriceps  extensor  muscle.  2.  The  patella.  3.  The  tibia.  4.  The  extensor 
proprius  poUicis  muscle.  5.  The  extensor  longus  digitorum.  6.  The  peronei 
muscles.  7.  The  inner  belly  of  thelgastrocnemius  and  soleus.  8.  The  annular 
ligament,  beneath  which  the  tendons  and  anterior  tibial  artery  pass  into  the  dor- 
sum of  tiie  foot.  9.  Anterior  tibial  artery.  10.  Its  recurrent  branch,  inoscu- 
lating with  (2)  the  inferior  articular,  and  (1)  the  superior  articular  arteries, 
branches  of  the  popliteal.  11.  The  internal  malleolar  artery.  17.  The  exter- 
nal malleolar,  inosculating  wdth  the  anterior  peroneal  artery,  12.  13.  The 
dorsalis  pedis  artery.  14.  The  tarsea  and  metatarsea  arteries  ;  the  tarsea  is 
nearest  the  ankle,  the  metatarsea  is  seen  giving  off  interossas.  15.  The  dor- 
salis hallucis  artery.     16.  The  communicating  branch. 

*  ./?  Posterior  View  of  the  icg— showing  the  popliteal  and  posterior  tibial 
arteries.     1.  The  tendons  forming  the  inner  hamstring.    2.  The  tendon  of  the 

27 


410 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


PLATE  75.* 


Relations — The  peroneal  artery  rests  upon  the  tibialis  pos- 
ticus muscle,  and  is  covered  in  by  the  flexor  longus  pollicis, 
having  the  fibula  to  its  outer  side. 

The  branches  of  the  peroneal  artery  are  muscular  to  the 
neighboring  muscles,  and  the  two  terminal  branches  anterior 
and  posterior  peroneal. 

The  anterior  'peroneal  pierces  the 
interosseous  membrane  at  the  lower 
third  of  the  leg,  and  is  distributed  on 
the  front  of  the  outer  malleolus,  an- 
astomosing with  the  internal  malleo- 
lar and  tarsal  arteries. 

The  posterior  peroneal  continues 
onwards  to  the  posterior  aspect  of  the 
outer  malleolus,  anastomosing  with 
the  anterior  peroneal,  tarsal,  external 
plantar,  and  posterior  tibial  arteries. 

The  muscular  branches  of  the 
posterior  tibial  artery  are  distributed 
to  the  muscles  on  the  posterior  aspect 
of  the  leg. 

PLANTAR  ARTERIES. 

The  internal  jjlantar  artery  pro- 
ceeds from  the  bifurcation  of  the  pos- 
terior  tibial  at  the  inner  malleolus, 
and  passes  along  the  inner  border  of 


biceps  forming  the  outer  hamstring.  3.  The  popliteus  muscle.  4.  The  flex- 
or longus  digitorum.  5.  The  tibialis  posticus.  6.  The  fibula  ;  immediately 
below  the  figure  is  the  origin  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis ;  the  muscle  has 
been  removed  in  order  to  expose  the  peroneal  artery.  7.  Peronei  muscles. 
8.  .The  lower  part  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis  muscle,  with  its  tendon.  9. 
The  popliteal  artery,  giving  off  its  articular  and  muscular  branches  ;  the  two 
superior  articular  are  seen  in  the  upper  part  of  the  popliteal  space,  passing 
above  the  two  heads  of  the  gastrocnemius  muscle,  which  are  cut  through  near 
to  their  origin.  The  two  inferior  are  in  relation  with  the  poplitfus  muscle.  10. 
The  anterior  tibial  artery,  passing  through  the  angular  interspace  between  the 
two  heads  of  the  tibialis  posticus  muscle.  11.  The  posterior  tibial  artery. 
12.  The  relative  position  of  the  tendons  and  artery  at  the  inner  ankle,  from 
within  outwards,  previously  to  their  passing  beneath  the  internal  annular  li- 
gament. 13.  The  peroneal  artery,  dividing  into  two  branches  ;  the  anterior 
peroneal  is  seen  piercing  the  interosseous  membrane.  14.  The  posterior  pe- 
roneal. 

•  The  Arteries  of  the  Sole  of  the  Foot. — The  first  and  a  part  of  the  second 
layer  of  muscles  has  been  removed.  1.  The  under  and  posterior  part  of  the 
OS  calcis,  to  which  the  origins  of  the  first  layer  of  muscles  remain  attached. 
2.  The  musculus  accessorius.  3.  The  long  flexor  tendons.  4.  The  tendon  of 
the  peroneus  longus.  5.  The  termination  of  the  posterior  tibial  artery.  6. 
The  internal  plantar.  7.  The  external  plantar  artery.  8.  The  plantar  arch, 
giving  off  four  digital  branches,  which  pass  forwards  on  the  interosfiei  mus  - 
cles  to  divide  iato  collateral  branches. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  411 

the  foot,  between  the  abductor  pollicis  and  flexor  brevis  digito- 
rum  muscles,  supplying  the  inner  border  of  the  foot  and  great 
toe. 

The  external  plantar  artery,  much  larger  than  the  internal, 
passes  obliquely  outwards  between  the  first  and  second  layers 
of  the  plantar  muscles,  to  the  fifth  metatarsal  space.  It  then 
turns  horizontally  inwards,  between  the  second  and  third  lay- 
ers, to  the  first  metatarsal  space,  where  it  inosculates  with  the 
communicating  branch  from  the  dorsalis  pedis.  The  horizon- 
tal portion  ofthe  artery  describes  a  slight  curve,  having  the 
convexity  forwards  ;  this  is  the  plantar  arch. 

The  branches  of  the  external  plantar  artery  are— the  mus- 
cular, digital,  and  posterior  perforating. 

The  muscular  branches  are  distributed  to  the  muscles  in  the 
sole  of  the  foot. 

The  digital  branches  are  four  in  number  :  the  first  is  distri- 
buted to  the  outer  side  of  the  little  toe ;  the  three  others  pass 
fowards  to  the  cleft  between  the  toes,  and  divide  into  collateral 
branches,  which  supply  the  adjacent  sides  of  the  three  external 
toes,  and  the  outer  side  of  the  second. 

The  posterior  perforating  are  three  small  branches,  which 
pass  upwards  between  the  heads  of  the  three  external  dorsal  in- 
terossei  muscles,  to  inosculate  with  the  arch  formed  by  the  me- 
tatarsea  artery. 

PULMONARY  ARTERY. 

The  j)ulmonary  artery  arises  from  the  left  side  of  the  base  ©f 
the  right  ventricle  in  front  of  the  origin  of  the  aorta,  and  aseends 
obliquely  to  the  under  surface  of  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  where  it 
divides  into  the  right  and  left  pulmonary  arteries.  In  its  course 
upwards  and  backwards  it  inclines  to  the  left  side,  crossing  the 
commencement  of  the  aorta,  and  is  connected  to  the  under  sur- 
face of  the  arch  by  a  ligamentous  cord,  the  remains  of  the  duc- 
tus arteriosus. 

Relations. — It  is  enclosed  for  one  half  of  its  extent  by  the 
pericardium,  and  receives  the  attachment  of  the  fibrous  portion 
of  the  pericardium  by  its  upper  portion.  Behind  it  rests  against 
the  ascending  aorta;  on  either  side  is  the  appendix  of  the  cor- 
responding auricle  and  a  coronary  artery  ;  and  above,  the  card- 
iac ganglion  and  the  remains  of  the  ductus  arteriosus. 

The  right  jnilmonary  artery  passes  beneath  the  arch  and 
behind  the  ascendina:  aoita  and  in  the  root  of  the  lungs  divides 
into  three  branches  for  the  three  lobes. 

The  left  pulmonary  o-xXery  rather  larger  than  the  right,  passes 
in  front  of  the  descending  aorta,  to  the  root  of  the  left  lung  to 
which  It  is  distributed.  These  arteries  divide  and  subdivide 
in  the  structure  of  the  lungs,  and  terminate  in  capillary  vessels 


412  THE    THOMSONIAN 

which  form  a  network  around  the  bronchial  cells,  and  termi- 
nate in  the  radicles  of  the  puhnonary  veins. 

Relations. — In  the  root  of  the  right  lung  examined  from 
above  downwards,  the  pulmonary  artery  is  situated  between 
the  bronchus,  and  pulmonary  veins ;  the  former  being  above, 
the  latter  below;  while  in  the  left  lung  the  artery  is  the  highest, 
next  the  bronchus,  and  then  the  veins.  On  both  sides,  from 
before  backwards,  the  artery  is  situated  between  the  veins  and 
bronchus,  the  former  being  in  front,  and  the  latter  behind. 

OF  THE  VEINS. 

The  veins  are  the  vessels  which  return  the  blood  to  the  aur- 
icles of  the  heart,  after  it  has  been  circulated  by  the  arteries 
through  the  various  tissues  of  the  body.  They  are  much  thin- 
ner in  structure  than  the  arteries,  so  tliat  when  emptied  of  their 
blood  they  become  flattened  and  collapsed.  The  veins  of  the 
systemic  circulation  convey  the  dark-coloured  and  impure  or 
venous  blood,  from  the  capillary  syslem  to  the  right  auricle  of 
the  heart,  and  are  found  aft^r  death  to  be  more  or  less  distended 
with  that  fluid.  The  veins  of  the  puhnonary  circulation  resem- 
ble the  arteries  in  containing  uuring  life  the  pure  or  arterial 
blood,  which  they  transmit  from  the  capillaries  of  the  lungs  to 
the  left  auricle. 

The  veins  commence  by  minute  radicles  in  the  capillaries 
which  are  everywhere  distributed  through  the  texti  res  of  the 
body,  and  converge  to  constitute  larger  and  larger  branches, 
till  they  terminate  in  the  large  trunks  which  convey  the  venous 
blood  directly  to  the  heart.  In  diameter  they  are  much  larger 
than  the  arteries,  and  like  those  vessels  their  combined  arese 
would  constitute  a  cone,  whereof  the  apex  would  be  placed  at 
the  heart,  and  the  base  at  the  surface  of  the  body.  It  follows 
from  this  arrangement,  that  the  blood  in  returning  to  the  heart 
is  passing  from  a  larger  to  a  smaller  channel,  and  therefore  in- 
creases in  rapidity  during  its  course. 

Veins  admit  of  a  threefold  division,  into  superficial,  deep  and 
sinuses. 

The  superficial  veins  return  the  blood  from  the  integument 
and  superficial  structures,  and  take  their  course  between  th^ 
layers  of  the  superficial  fascia;  they  then  pierce  the  deep  fascia 
in  the  most  convenient  and  protected  situation,  and  terminate 
in  the  deep  veins.  They  are  unaccompanied  by  arteries,  and 
are  the  vessels  usually  selected  for  venesection. 

The  deep  veins  are  situated  among  the  deeper  structures  of 
the  body  and  generally  in  relation  with  the  arteries;  in  the 
limbs  they  are  enclosed  in  the  same  sheath  with  those  vessels, 
and  they  return  the  venous  blood  from  the  capillaries  of  the 
deep  tissues.    In  company  with  all  the  smaller,  and  also  with 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  415 

the  secondary  arteries,  as  the  brachial,  radial,  and  ulnar  in  the 
upper,  and  tibial  and  peroneal  in  the  lower  extremity,  there  are 
two  veins,  placed  one  on  each  side  of  the  artery,  and  named 
veticB  comites.  The  larger  arteries,  as  the  axillary,  subclavian, 
carotid,  popliteal  femoral,  &c.,  are  accompanied  by  a  single 
venous  trunk.  Sinuses  difler  from  veins  in  their  structure,  and 
also  in  their  mode  of  distribution,  being  confined  to  especial 
organs,  and  situated  within  their  substance.  The  principal 
venous  sinuses  are  those  of  the  dura  mater,  of  the  diploe,  of 
the  cancellous  structure  of  bones,  and  of  the  uterus. 

The  communications  between  veins  are  even  more  frequent 
than  those  of  arteries,  and  they  take  place  between  the  larger, 
as  well  as  among  the  smaller  vessels ;  the  venaj  comites  com- 
municate with  each  other  very  frequently  in  their  course,  by 
means  of  short  transverse  branches  which  pass  from  one  to  the 
other.  These  communications  are  strikingly  exhibited  in  the 
frequent  inosculations  of  the  spinal  veins,  and  in  the  various 
venous  plexuses,  as  the  spermatic  plexus,  vesical  plexus,  &c. 
The  office  of  these  inosculations  is  very  apparent,  as  tending  to 
obviate  the  obstructions  to  which  the  veins  are  particularly  lia- 
ble, from  the  thinness  of  their  coats,  and  from  their  inability  to 
overcome  much  impediment  by  the  force  of  their  current. 

Veins  are  composed  of  three  tunics,  external,  middle  and  ia- 
ternal. 

The  external,  or  cellular  coat,  is  dense  and  resisting,  and  re- 
sembles the  cellular  tunic  of  arteries.  The  middle  coat  is  fi- 
brous, like  that  of  arteries,  but  extremely  thin,  so  that  its  exist- 
ence is  questioned  by  some  anatomists.  The  internal  coat  is 
serous,  and  also  similar  to  that  of  arteries ;  it  is  continuous  with 
the  lining  membrane  of  the  heart  at  one  extremity,  and  with 
the  lining  of  the  capillaries  at  the  other. 

At  certain  intervals,  the  internal  coat  forms  folds  or  duplica- 
tures,  which  constitute  valves.  The  valves  of  veins  are  gene- 
rally composed  of  two  semilunar  folds,  one  on  each  side  of  the 
cylinder  of  the  vessel,  occasionally  of  a  single  duplicature,  hav- 
ing a  spiral  direction,  and  in  rare  instances  of  three.  The  free 
extremity  of  the  valvular  folds  is  concave,  and  directed  for- 
wards, so  that  while  the  current  of  blood  would  be  permitted 
to  flow  freely  towards  the  heart,  the  valves  would  become  dis- 
tended and  the  current  intercepted,  if  the  stream  became  retro- 
grade in  its  course.  Upon  the  cardiac  side  of  each  valve,  the 
vein  is  expanded  into  two  pouches  (sinuses),  corresponding 
with  the  segments  of  the  valves,  which  give  to  the  distended  or 
injected  vein  a  knotted  appearance.  The  valves  are  most  nu- 
merous in  the  veins  of  the  extremities,  particularly  in  the  deep- 
er veins,  and  they  are  generally  absent  in  the  smaller  veins  and 
in  the  veins  of  the  viscera,  as  in  the  portal  and  cerebral  veins ; 


414  THE  THOMSONIAN 

they  are  also  absent  in  the  large  trunks,  as  in  the  venae  cavse, 
venae  azygos,  innominatsB  and  iliac  veins. 

iSi7i7ises  are  venous  channels,  excavated  in  the  structure  of 
an  organ,  and  lined  by  the  internal  coat  of  the  veins :  of  this 
structure  are  the  sinuses  of  the  dura  mater,  whose  external  co- 
vering is  the  fibrous  membrane,  and  the  internal,  the  serous 
layer  of  the  veins.  The  external  investment  of  the  sinuses  of 
the  uterus  is  the  tissue  of  that  organ  ;  and  that  of  the  bones, 
the  lining  membrane  of  the  cells  and  canals. 

Veins,  like  arteries,  are  supplied  with  nutritious  vessels,  the 
vasa  vasorum ;  and  it  is  to  be  presumed  that  nervous  filaments 
are  distributed  to  their  coats. 

We  shall  describe  the  veins  according  to  the  primary  divi- 
sion of  the  body;  taking  first  those  of  the  head  and  neck,  next 
those  of  the  upper  extremity,  then  those  of  the  lower  extremity, 
and  lastly  the  veins  of  the  trunk. 

VEINS  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK. 

The  vems  of  the  head  and  neck  may  be  arranged  into  three 
groups,  viz.  1.  Veins  of  the  exterior  of  the  head.  2.  Veins  of 
the  diploe  and  interior  of  the  cranium.     3.  Veins  of  the  neck. 

The  veins  of  the  exterior  of  the  head  are — the  facial,  inter- 
nal maxillary,  temporal,  temporo-maxillary,  posterior  auricular, 
and  occipital. 

VEINS  OF  THE  DIPLOE. 

The  diploe  of  the  bones  of  the  head  is  furnished  in  the  adult 
with  irregular  sinuses,  which  are  formed  by  a  continuation  of 
the  serous  membrane  of  the  veins  into  the  osseous  canals  in 
which  they  are  lodged.  At  the  middle  period  of  life  these  si- 
nuses are  confined  to  the  particular  bones ;  but  in  old  age,  after 
the  ossification  of  the  sutures,  they  may  be  traced  from  one 
bone  to  the  next.  They  receive  their  blood  from  the  capilla- 
ries supplying  the  cellular  structure  of  the  diploe,  and  termi- 
nate externally  in  the  veins  of  the  pericranium,  and  internally 
in  the  veins  and  sinuses  of  the  dura  mater.  These  veins  are 
separated  from  the  bony  walls  of  the  canals  by  a  thin  layer  of 
marrow. 

CEREBRAL  AND  CEREBELLAR  VEINS. 

The  cerebral  veins  are  remarkable  for  the  absence  of  valves, 
and  for  the  extreme  tenuity  of  their  coats.  They  may  be  di- 
vided into  the  superficial,  and  deep  or  ventricular  veins. 

The  vena  Galeni  pass  backwards  in  the  structure  of  the  ve- 
lum interpositum  ;  and  escaping  through  the  fissure  of  Bichat, 
terminate  in  the  straight  sinus. 

The  cerebellar  veitis  are  disposed,  like  those  of  the  cere- 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


415 


brum,  on  the  surface  of  the  lobes  of  the  cerebellum ;  they  are 
situated,  some  upon  the  superior  and  some  upon  the  inferior 
surface,  while  others  occupy  the  borders  of  the  organ.  They 
terminate  in  the  lateral  and  petrosal  sinuses. 

SINUSES  OF  THE  DURA  MATER. 

The  sinuses  of  the  dura  mater  are  irregular  channels  formed 
by  the  splitting  of  the  layers  of  that  membrane,  and  lined  upon 
their  inner  surface  by  a  continuation  of  the  serous  layer  of  the 
veins.  They  may  be  divided  into  two  groups: — 1.  Those  si- 
tuated at  the  upper  and  back  part  of  the  skull.  2.  The  sinuses 
at  the  base  of  the  skuU. 

The  former  are — the  superior  and  inferior  longitudinal  si- 
nuses, the  straight  sinus,  and  the  occipital  and  lateral  sinuses. 

The  termination  of  the  superior  longitudinal  sinus  in  the  two 
lateral  sinuses,  forms  a  considerable  dilatation,  into  which  the 
straight  sinus  opens  from  the  front,  and  the  occipital  sinuses 
from  below.  This  dilation  is  named  the  torcular  Herophili, 
and  is  the  point  of  communication  of  six  sinuses — the  superior 
longitudinal,  two  lateral,  two  occipital,  and  the  straight. 

The  sinuses  of  the  base  of  the  skull  are — the  cavernous,  in- 
ferior petrosal,  circular^  superior  petrosal,  and  transverse. 

PLATE  76.* 


*  The  Sinuses  of  the  Upper  and  Back  part  of  the  Skull.—l.  The  superior 
longitudinal  sinus.  2,  2.  The  cerebral  veins  opening  into  the  sinus.  3.  The 
falx  cerebri.  4.  The  inferior  longitudinal  sinus.  5.  The  straight  or  fourth 
sinus.  6.  The  vense  Galeni.  7.  the  torcular  Herophili.  8.  The  two  lateral 
sinuses,  with  the  occipital  sinuses  between  them.  9.  The  termination  of  the 
inferior  petrosal  sinus  of  one  side.  10.  The  dilatations  corresponding  with  the 
jugular  fossae.     11.  The  internal  jugular  veins. 


416 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


VEINS  OF  THE  NECK. 

The  veins  of  the  neck  which  return  the  blood  from  the  hea'^ 
are — the  external,  anterior  and  internal  jugular,  and  the  verte- 
bral. 

VEINS  OF  THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY. 

The  veins  of  the  upper  extremity  are  the  deep  and  superfi- 
cial. The  deep  veins  accompany  the  branches  and  trunks  of 
the  arteries,  and  constitute  their  veiice.  coniites.  The  venae: 
comites  of  the  radial  and  ulnar  arteries  are  enclosed  in  the  same 
sheath  with  those  vessels,  and  terminate  at  the  bend  of  the  elbow 
in  the  brachial  veins.  The  brachial  vense  comites  are  situated 
one  on  each  side  of  the  artery,  and  open  into  the  axillary  vein; 
the  axillary  becomes  the  subclavian,  and  the  subclavian  unites 
with  the  internal  jugular  to  form  the  vena  innominata. 

The  superficial  veins  of  the  fore-arm  are — the  anterior  ulnar 
vein,  posterior  ulnar  vein,  basilic  vein,  radial  vein,  cephalic: 
vein,  median  vein,  median  basilic,  median  cephalic. 

PLATE  77* 


*  The  Sinuses  of  the  Base  of  the  Skull. — 1.  The  ophthalmic  Teins.  2.  The 
cavernous  sinus  of  one  side.  3.  The  circular  sinus ;  the  figure  occupies  the 
positicm  of  the  pituitary  gland  in  the  cella  turcica.  4.  The  inferior  petrosal 
sinus.  5.  The  transverse  or  anterior  occipital  sinus.  6.  The  superior  petrosal' 
sinus.  7.  The  internal  jugular  vein.  8.  The  foramen  magnum.  9.  The  o 
eipital  sinuses.    10.  The  torcular  Herophili.    11^  11.  The  lateral  sinases. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


417 


AXILLARY   VEIN. 


The  axillary  vein  is  formed  by  the  union  of  the  venae  comi- 
tes  of  the  brachial  artery  with  the  basilic  vein.  It  lies  in  front 
of  the  artery,  and  receives  numerous  branches  from  the  colla- 
teral veins  of  the  branches  of  the  axillary  artery,  and,  at  the 
lower  border  of  the  first  rib,  becomes  the  subclavian  vein. 


SDBCLAVIAN    VEIN. 

The  subclavian  vein  crosses  over  the  first  rib  and  beneath 
the  clavicle,  and  unites  with  the  internal  jugular  vein  to  form 
the  vena  innominata.  It  lies  at  first  in  front  of  the  subclavian 
artery,  and  then  in  front  of  the  scalenus  anticus,  which  sepa- 
rates it  from  that  vessel.  The  phre-  plate  78.* 
nic  and  pneumogastric  nerves  pass 
between  the  artery  and  vein.  The 
veins  opening  into  the  subclavian  are 
the  cephalic  below  the  clavicle,  and 
the  external  and  anterior  jugulars  a- 
bove  ;  occasionally  some  small  veins 
from  the  neighboring  parts  also  ter- 
minate in  it. 

VEINS   OF    THE    LOWER    EXTRE- 
MITY. 

The  veins  of  the  lower  extremity 
are  the  deep  and  superficial.  The 
deep  veins  accompany  the  branches 
of  the  arteries  in  pairs,  and  form  the 
vense  comites  of  the  anterior  and  pos- 
terior tibial  and  peroneal  arteries. 
These  veins  unite  in  the  popliteal  re- 
gion to  form  a  single  vein  of  large 
size — the  popliteal — which  success- 
ively becomes  in  its  course  the  femo- 
ral and  the  external  iliac  vein. 


•  The  Veins  of  the  Fore-Ann,  and  Bend  of  the  Elbow. — 1.  The  radial  vein. 
2.  The  cephalic  vein.  3.  The  anterior  ulnar  vein.  4.  The  posterior  ulnar. 
5.  The  trunk  formed  by  their  union.  6.  The  basilic  vein,  piercing  the  deep 
fascia  at  7.  8.  The  median  vein.  9.  A  communicating  branch  between  the 
deep  veins  of  the  fore-arm  and  the  median  vein.  10.  The  median  cephalic 
vein.  11.  The  median  basilic.  12.  A  slight  convexity  of  the  deep  fascia, 
formed  by  the  brachial  artery.  13.  The  process  of  fascia,  derived  from  tha 
tendon  of  the  biceps,  and  separating  the  median  basilic  vein  from  the  brachi- 
al artery.  14.  The  external  cutaneous  nerve_  piercing  the  deep  fascia,  and 
dividing  into  two  branches,  which  pass  behind  the  median  cephalic  vein.  15. 
The  internal  cutaneous  nerve,  dividing  into  branches,  which  pass  in  front  of 
the  median  basilic  vein.  16.  The  intercosto-humeral  cutaneous  nerve,  17. 
The  spiral  cutaneous  nerve,  a  branch  of  the  rausculo-spiral. 


418  THE   THOMSONIAN 

POPLITEAL    VEIN. 

The  popliteal  vein  ascends  through  the  popliteal  region,  ly- 
ing, in  the  first  instance,  directly  upon  the  artery,  and  then 
getting  somewhat  to  its  outer  side.  It  receives  several  muscu- 
lar and  articular  veins,  and  the  external  saphenous  vein.  The 
valves  in  this  vein  are  four  or  five  in  number. 

FEMORAL    VEIN. 

The  femoral  vein,  passing  through  the  opening  in  the  ad- 
ductor magnus  muscle,  ascends  the  thigh  in  the  sheath  of  the 
femoral  artery,  and  entering  the  pelvis  beneath  Poupart's  liga- 
ment, becomes  the  external  iliac  vein.  In  the  lower  part  of  its 
course  it  is  situated  upon  the  outer  side  of  the  artery,  it  then 
becomes  placed  behind  that  vessel,  and,  at  Poupart's  ligament, 
lies  to  its  inner  side.  It  receives  the  muscular  and  profunda 
veins,  and  through  the  saphenous  opening,  the  internal  saphe- 
nous vein.     The  valves  in  this  vein  are  four  or  five  in  number. 

VEINS  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

The  veins  of  the  trunk  may  be  divided  into — 1.  The  supe- 
rior vena  cava,  with  its  formative  branches.  2.  The  inferior 
vena  cava,  with  its  formative  branches.  3.  The  azygos  veins. 
4.  The  vertebral  and  spinal  veins.  5.  The  cardiac  veins.  6. 
The  portal  vein.     7.  The  pulmonary  veins. 

StJPEEIOR  VENA  CAVA. 

The  superior  cava  is  a  short  trunk  about  three  inches  in 
length,  formed  by  the  junction  of  the  two  venae  innominatae. 
It  descends  perpendicularly  on  the  right  side  of  the  mediastin- 
um, and  entering  the  pericardium  terminates  in  the  upper  part 
of  the  right  auricle. 

It  is  in  relation  in  front  with  the  thoracic  fascia^  which  sepa- 
rates it  from  the  thymus  gland,  and  with  the  pericardium  ;  be- 
hind, with  the  right  pulmonary  artery,  and  right  superior  pul- 
monary vein ;  internally,  with  the  ascending  aorta ;  and  exter- 
nally, with  the  right  phrenic  nerve,  and  right  lung.  Immedi- 
ately before  entering  the  pericardium  it  receives  the  vena  azygos 
major. 

INFERIOR    VENA    CAVA. 

The  inferior  vena  cava  is  formed  by  the  union  of  the  two 
common  iliac  veins,  upon  the  intervertebral  substance  between 
the  fourth  and  fifth  lumbar  vertebra?.  It  ascends  along  the 
front  of  the  vertebral  column,  on  the  right  side  of  the  abdomi- 
nal aorta,  and  passing  through  the  fissure  in  the  posterior  bor- 
der of  the  liver  and  the  quadrilateral  opening  in  the  tendinous 
centre  of  the  diaphragm,  terminates  in  the  inferior  and  poste- 
rior part  of  the  right  auricle.    There  are  no  valves  in  this  vein. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


419 


It  is  in  relation,  from  below  upwards,  in  front  with  the  me- 
sentery transverse  duodenum,  portal  vein,  pancreas  and  liver, 
which  nearly  and  sometimes  completely  surrounds  it;  behind, 
it  rests  upon  the  vertebral  column  and  right  crus  of  the  dia- 
phragm, from  which  it  is  separated  by  the  right  renal  and  lum- 
bar arteries ;  to  the  right  it  has  the 
peritoneum  and  sympathetic  nerve  ; 
and  to  the  left,  the  aorta. 

The  branches  which  the  inferior 
cava  receives  in  its  course,  are  the 
lumbar,  right  spermatic,  renal,  supra- 
renal, phrenic,  hepatic. 

AZYGOS  VEINS. 

The  azygos  veins  form  a  system 
of  communication  between  the  supe- 
rior and  inferior  vena  cava,  and  serve  ^ 
to  return  the  blood  from  that  part  of 
the  trunk  in  which  those  vessels  are 
deficient,  on  account  of  their  connec- 
tion with  the  heart.  This  system 
consists  of  three  vessels,  the  vena 
azygos  major,  vena  azygos  minor, 
superior  intercostal  vein. 

VERTEBRAL  AND  SPINAL 

VEINS. 

The  numerous  venous  plexuses  of 
the  vertebral  column  and  spinal  cord 
may  be  arranged  into  three  groups, 
the  dorsi-spinal,  meningo-rachidian, 
medulli-spinal. 

CARDIAC  VEINS. 

The  veins  returning  the  blood 
from  the  substance  of  the  heart,  are 
the  great  cardiac  vein,  posterior  car- 
diac veins,  anterior^cardiac  veins,  ve- 
nas  Thebesii. 


*  The  Veins  of  the  Trunk  and  Neck. — 1.  The  superior  vena  cava.  2.  The 
left  vena  innominata.  3.  The  right  vena  innominata.  4.  the  right  subclavian 
vein.  5.  The  internal  jugular  vein.  6.  The  external  jugular.  7.  The  ante- 
rior jugular.  8.  The  inferior  vena  cava.  9.  The  external  iliac  vein.  10.  The 
internal  iliac  vein.  11.  The  common  iliac  veins  ;  the  small  vein  between  these 
is  tlie  vena  sacra  media.  12,  12.  Lumbar  vein.  13.  The  right  spermatic 
vein.  14.  The  left  spermatic,  opening  into  the  left  renal  vein.  15.  The  right 
renal  vein.  16.  The  trunk  of  the  hepatic  veins.  17.  The  greater  vena  azy- 
gos,  commencing  inferiorly  in  the  lumbar  veins.  18.  The  lesser  vena  azj'gos, 
also  commencing  in  the  lumbar  veins.  19.  A  branch  of  communication  with 
the  left  renal  vein.  20.  The  termination  of  the  lesser  in  the  greater  vena 
azygos.  21.  The  superior  intercostal  vein,  communicating  inferiorly  with  the 
lesser  vena  azygos,  and  terminating  superiorly  in  the  left  vena  innominata. 


420 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


PORTAL  SYSTEM. 

The  portal  system  is  composed  of  four  large  veins,  which  re- 
turn the  blood  from  the  chylo-poietic  viscera;  they  are — the 
inferior  and  superior  mesenteric,  the  splenic,  .and  the  gastric 
veins. 

The  Vena  Portm,  formed  by  the  union  of  the  splenic  and 
superior  mesenteric  veins  behind  the  pancreas,  ascends  throuo-h 
the  right  border  of  the  lesser  omentum,  to  transverse  the  fissure 
of  the  liver,  where  it  divides  into  two  branches,  one  for  each  la- 
teral lobe.  In  the  right  border  of  the  lesser  omentum  it  is  situ- 
ated behind  and  between  the  hepatic  artery  and  ductus  commu- 
nis choledochus,  and  is  surrounded  by  the  hepatic  plexus  of 

PLATE  80*. 


•  The  Portal  Vein. — 1.  The  inferior  mesenteric  vein  ;  it  is  traced  by  means 
of  dotted  lines  behind  the  pancreas  (2),  to  terminate  in  the  splenic  vein  (3). 
4.  The  spleen.  5.  Gastric  veins,  opening  into  the  splenic  vein.  6.  The  supe- 
rior mesenteric  vein.  7.  The  descending  portion  of  the  duodenum.  8.  Its 
transverse  portion,  which  is  crossed  by  the  superior  mesenteric  vein  snd  part 
of  the  trunk  of  the  superior  mesenteric  artery.  9.  The  portal  vein.  10.  The 
hepatic  artery.  11.  The  ductus  communis  choledochus.  12.  The  division  of 
the  duct  and  vessels  at  the  transverse  fissure  of  tlie  liver.  13.  The  cystic 
duct  leading  to  the  gall-bladder. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  421 

nerves  and  lymphatics.  At  the  transverse  fissure,  each  prima- 
ry branch  divides  into  numerous  secondary  branches,  which 
ramify  through  the  portal  canals,  and  give  off  vaginal  and  in- 
terlobular veins,  which  terminate  in  the  lobular  venous  plexus 
of  the  lobules  of  the  liver.  The  portal  vein  within  the  liver 
receives  the  venous  blood  from  the  capillaries  of  the  hepatic 
artery. 

PULMONARY   VEINS. 

The  pulmonary  veins,  four  in  number,  return  the  arterial 
blood  from  the  lungs  to  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart ;  they  dif- 
fer from  the  veins  in  general,  in  the  area  of  their  cylmders, 
being  very  little  larger  than  the  corresponding  arteries,  and  ia 
accompanying  singly  each  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery. 
They  commence  in  the  capillaries  upon  the  parietes  of  the 
bronchial  cells,  and  unite  to  form  a  single  trunk  for  each  lobe. 
The  vein  of  the  middle  lobe  of  the  right  lung  unites  with  the 
superior  vein  so  as  to  form  the  two  trunks  which  open  into  the 
left  auricle.  Sometimes  they  remain  separate,  and  then  there 
are  three  pulmonary  veins  on  the  right  side.  The  right  pul- 
monary veins  pass  behind  the  superior  vena  cava  to  the  left 
auricle,  and  the  left  behind  the  pulmonary  artery ;  they  both 
pierce  the  pericardium.  Within  the  lung  the  branches  of  the 
pulmonary  veins  aie  behind  the  bronchial  tubes,  and  those  of 
the  pulmonary  artery  in  front ;  but  at  the  root  of  the  lungs  the 
veins  are  in  front,  next  the  arteries,  and  then  the  bronchi. 
There  are  no  valves  in  the  pulmonary  veins. 

OF  THE  LYMPHATICS. 

The  lymphatic  vessels,  or  absorbents,  have  received  their 
double  appellation  from  certain  phenomena  whicn  they  pre- 
sent ;  the  former  name  is  derivable  from  the  peculiar  limpid 
fluid  (lympha,  water)  which  they  convey;  and  the  latter,  from 
their  supposed  property  of  absorbing  foreign  substances  into 
the  system.  They  are  minute  and  delicate  vessels,  having  a 
knotted  appearance,  and  are  distributed  through  every  part  of 
the  body.  Their  office  is  to  collect  the  products  of  digestion. 
and  the  detrita  of  nutrition,  and  convey  them  into  the  venous 
circulation  near  to  the  heart. 

Lymphatic  vessels  commence  in  a  delicate  network  which  is 
distributed  upon  the  cutaneous  surface  of  the  body,  upon  the 
various  surfaces  of  organs  and  throughout  their  internal  struc- 
ture ;  and  from  this  network  the  lymphatic  vessels  proceed, 
nearly  in  straight  lines,  in  a  direction  towards  the  root  of  the 
neck.  In  their  course  they  are  intercepted  by  numerous  small 
oval  or  rounded  bodies — lymphatic  glands — in  which  the  en- 
tering or  inferent  vessels  ramify  to  an  extreme  minuteness, 


422  THE  THOMSOINIAN 

and  from  which  proceed  the  escaping  or  efferent  vessels  some- 
what larger  in  size  and  fewer  in  number,  to  be  again  and  again 
subdivided  in  other  glands,  and  a  little  more  increased  in  size. 

Lymphatic  vessels  admit  of  a  threefold  division  into  super- 
ficial, deep,  and  lacteals.  The  superficial  lymphatic  vessels, 
apon  the  surface  of  the  body,  follow  the  course  of  the  veins,  and 
pierce  the  deep  fascia  inconvenient  situations,  to  join  the  deep 
lymphatics.  Upon  the  surface  of  organs  they  converge  to  the 
nearest  lymphatic  trunks. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  glands  are  placed  in  the  most 
protected  situations  of  the  superficial  fascia,  as  in  the  hollow  of 
the  ham  and  groin  in  the  lower  extremity'',  and  upon  the  inner 
side  of  the  arm  in  the  upper  extremity.  The  deej)  lymphatics 
accompany  the  deeper  veins ;  those  from  the  lower  parts  of  the 
body  converging  to  the  numerous  glands  seated  around  the 
iliac  veins  and  inferior  vena  cava,  and  terminating:  in  a  larofe 
trunk  situated  upon  the  vertebral  column — the  thoracic  duck 
From  the  upper  part  of  the  trunk  on  the  left  side,  and  from  the 
left  side  of  the  head  and  neck,  they  also  proceed  to  the  thoracic 
duct.  Those  on  the  right  side  of  the  head  and  neck,  right 
opper  extremity,  and  right  side  of  the  thorax,  form  a  distinct 
duct  which  terminates  at  the  point  of  the  junction  of  the  subcla- 
vian with  the  internal  jugular  vein  on  the  right  side  of  the 
root  of  the  neck. 

The  lacteals  are  the  lymphatics  of  the  small  intestines;  they 
have  received  their  distinctive  appellation  from  conveying  the 
milk-like  product  of  digestion — the  chyle — to  the  great  centre 
of  the  lymphatic  system — the  thoracic  duct.  They  are  situated 
in  the  mesentery,  and  pass  through  the  numerous  mesenteric 
glands  in  their  course. 

The  communications  between  lymphatic  vessels  are  less  fre- 
quent than  those  of  arteries  or  veins ;  their  anastomoses  take 
place  ijy  means  of  branches  of  equal  calibre  that  unite  at  acute 
nngles,  and  constitute  a  combined  trunk  which  is  scarcely  larger 
than  either  of  the  single  branches  by  which  it  is  formed. 

Lymphatic  vessels  are  composed  of  two  coats ;  an  external  or 
cellular,  and  an  internal  or  serous. 

The  external  coat  resembles  the  external  tunic  of  veins  and 
arteries,  but  is  extremely  thin  and  dense.  The  internal  coat 
is  continuous  with  the  internal  lining  of  the  veins  ;  and,  like 
that  membrane,  is  most  probably  provided  with  an  epithelium. 
At  short  intervals  this  coat  forms  semilunar  folds  which  are 
disposed  in  pairs  in  the  cylinder  o(  the  vessel  and  constitute 
the  valves.  It  is  to  these  valves  which  are  extremely  nume- 
rous in  lymphatics,  that  their  peculiar  knotted  appearance  is 
due,  when  filled  with  injection. 

The  lymphatic  glands  are  small  oval  and  somewhat  flattened 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  423 

or  rounded  bodies,  composed  of  a  plexus  of  minute  lymphatic 
vessels,  associated  with  a  plexus  of  blood-vessels,  and  enclosed 
in  a  thin  cellular  capsule.  The  larger  glands  have  a  lobed  or 
cellular  appearance.  The  lymphatic  vessels  and  glands  are 
supplied  with  arteries,  veins,  and  nerves,  like  other  structures. 
I  shall  describe  the  lymphatic  vessels  and  glands  according 
to  the  arrangement  adopted  for  the  veins,  commencing  with 
those  of  the  head  and  neck,  and  proceeding  next  to  those  of  th** 
upper  extremity,  lower  extremity,  and  trunk. 

LYMPHATICS  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK, 

The  superficial  lymphatic  glands  of  the  head  and  face  are 
small  and  few  m  number  ;  they  are  the  occipital,  which  are 
situated  near  the  origin  of  the  occipito-frontalis  muscle  ;  poste- 
rior auricular,  behind  the  ear  ;  parotid,  in  the  parotid  gland  ; 
zygomatic,  in  the  zygomatic  fossa ;  buccal,  upon  the  buccinator 
muscle ;  and  submaxillary,  beneath  the  margin  of  the  lower 
jaw.     There  are  no  deep  lymphatic  glands  within  the  cranium. 

The  superficial  cervical  lymphatic  glands  are  few  in  number; 
they  are  situated  in  the  course  of  the  external  jugular  vein, 
between  the  sterno  mastoid  and  trapezius  muscles,  at  the  root  of 
the  neck  and  about  the  larynx. 

The  deep  cervical  glands  are  very  numerous  and  of  large 
size ;  they  are  situated  around  the  internal  jugular  vein  and 
sheath  of  the  carotid  arteries,  by  the  side  of  the  pharynx,  cbso- 
phagus,  and  trachea,  and  extend  from  the  base  of  the  skull  to 
the  root  of  the  neck,  where  they  are  continuous  with  the  lym- 
phatic vessels  and  glands  of  the  thorax. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  head  and  face  are 
disposed  in  three  groupes ;  occipital,  which  takes  the  course  of 
the  occipital  vein  to  the  occipital  and  deep  cervical  glands ; 
temporal,  which  follows  the  branches  of  the  temporal  vein  to 
the  parotid  and  deep  cervical  glands  ;  and  facial,  which  accom- 
panies the  facial  vein  to  the  submaxillary  lymphatic  glands. 

The  deep  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  head  are  the  meningeal 
and  cerebral ;  the  former  are  situated  in  connection  with  the 
meningeal  veins,  and  escape  through  foramina  at  the  base  of 
the  scull,  to  join  the  deep  cervical  glands.  The  cerebral  lym- 
phatics, accoiding  to  Fohmann,  are  situated  upon  the  surface 
of  the  pia  mater.  They  pass  most  probably  through  the  fora- 
mina at  the  base  of  the  skull,  to  terminate  in  the  deep  cervical 
glands. 

The  deep  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  face  proceed  from  the  nasa 
fosscc,  mouth,  and  pharynx,  and  terminate  in  the  submaxillary 
and  deep  cervical  glands. 

The  superficial  and  deep  cervical  lymphatic  vessels  of  the 


424  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

neck  accompany  the  jugular  veins,  passing  from  gland  to  gland, 
and  at  the  root  of  the  neck  communicate  with  the  thoracic  lym- 
phatic vessels,  and  terminate,  on  the  right  side,  in  the  ductus 
lymph aticus  dexter,  and,  on  the  left,  in  the  thoracic  duct,  near 
to  its  t«rmination. 

LYMPHATICS    OF   THE    UPPER    EXTREMITY. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  glands  of  the  arm  are  not  more 
than  four  or  five  in  number,  and  of  very  small  size.  One  or 
two  are  situated  near  the  median,  basilic,  and  cephalic  veins,  at 
tlie  bend  of  the  elbow  ;  and  one  or  two  near  to  the  basilic  vein, 
on  the  inner  side  of  the  upper  arm,  immediately  above  the 
elbow. 

The  deep  glands  in  the  fore-arm  are  excessively  small  and 
infrequent;  two  or  three  may  generally  be  found  in  the  course 
of  theradial  and  ulnar  vessel.  In  the  upper  arm  there  is  a  cliain 
of  small  glands,  accompanying  the  brachial  artery. 

The  axillary  glands  are  numerous  and  of  large  size.  Some 
are  closely  adherent  to  the  vessels,  some  are  disposed  in  the 
loose  cellular  tissue  of  the  axilla,  and  a  small  chain  may  \ie 
observed  extending  along  the  lower  border  of  the  pectoralis 
major  to  the  mammary  gland.  Two  or  three  subclavian  glands 
are  situated  beneath  the  clavicle,  and  serve  as  the  medium  of 
communication  between  the  axillary  and  deep  carvical  lym- 
phatic glands. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  upper  extremity 
commence  at  the  extremities  of  the  fingers,  and  pass  along  the 
borders  of  the  fingers  to  the  dorsum  of  the  hand  ;  they  next 
ascend  the  fore-arm,  some  on  its  posterior  and  some  on  its  ante- 
rior aspect,  observins:  particularly  the  direction  of  the  veins. 
At  the  bend  of  the  elbow  they  converge,  to  form  two  groups 
which  accompany  the  basilic  and  cephalic  veins.  The  lym- 
phatics of  the  basilic  group  communicate  with  the  glands,  situ- 
ated immediately  above  the  elbow,  and  ascend  to  join  the  axil- 
lary glands.  Those  of  the  cephalic  group  for  the  most  part 
cross  the  upper  part  of  the  biceps  muscle,  and  also  enter  the 
axilary  glands,  while  two  or  three  are  continued  onwards 
along  the  cephalic  vein,  in  the  interspace  between  the  pectoralis 
major  and  deltoid  muscle,  to  communicate  with  the  subclavian 
glands. 

The  deep  lymphatics  accompany  the  vessels  of  the  upper 
extremity,  and  communicate  occasionally  with  the  superficial 
lymphatics.  They  enter  the  axillary  and  subclavian  glands 
and,  at  the  root  of  the  neck,  terminate  on  the  left  side  in  the 
thoracic  duct,  and  on  the  right  side  in  the  ductus  lymphaticus 
dexter. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  425 

LYMPHATICS    OF    THE    LOWER    EXTREMITY. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  glands  of  the  lower  extremity  are 
those  of  the  groin,  the  inguinal,  and  one  or  two  situated  in  the 
superficial  fascia  of  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  thigh,  just  above 
the  popliteal  region. 

The  inguinal  glands  are  divisible  into  two  groups,  a  superior 
group  of  small  size,  situated  along  the  course  of  Poupart's  liga- 
ment, and  receiving  the  lymphatic  vessels  from  the  parietes  of 
the  abdomen  and  genital  organs ;  and  an  inferior  group  of 
larger  glands  clustered  around  the  internal  saphenous  vein  near 
to  its  termination,  and  receiving  the  superficial  lymphatic  ves- 
sels from  the  lower  extremity. 

The  deep  lymphatic  glands  are  the  anterior  tibial,  popliteal, 
deep  inguinal,  gluteal,  and  ischiatic. 

The  anterior  tibial  is  generally  a  single  gland,  placed  on  the 
interosseous  membrane,  by  the  side  of  the  anterior  tibial  artery 
in  the  upper  part  of  its  course. 

The  popliteal  glands,  four  or  five  in  number,  are  embedded 
in  the  loose  cellular  tissue  and  fat  of  the  popliteal  space. 

The  deep  inguinal  glands,  less  ntmierous  and  smaller  than 
the  superficial,  are  situated  near  the  femoral  vessels  in  the 
groin,  beneath  the  fascia  lata. 

The  gluteal  and  ischiatic  glands  are  placed  above  and  below 
the  pyriformis  muscle,  at  the  great  ischiatic  foramen. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  vessels  are  divisible  into  two 
groups,  internal  and  external.  The  internal  and  principal 
group,  commencing  on  the  dorsum  and  inner  side  of  the  foot, 
ascend  the  leg  by  the  side  of  the  internal  saphenous  vein,  and 
passing  behind  the  inner  condyle  of  the  femr.r,  follow  the  di- 
rection of  that  vein  to  the  groin,  Avhere  they  join  the  saphenous 
group  of  superficial  inguinal  glands.  The  greater  part  of  the 
afferent  vessels  from  these  glands  pierce  the  cribriform  fascia  of 
the  saphenous  opening  and  the  sheath  of  the  femoral  vessels  to 
join  the  lymphatic  gland  situated  in  the  femoral  ring,  which 
serves  to  establish  a  communication  between  the  lymphatics  of 
the  lower  extremity  and  those  of  the  trunk.  The  other  effer- 
ent vessels  pierce  the  fascia  lata,  to  join  the  deep  glands.  The 
vessels  which  pass  upwards  from  the  outer  side  of  the  dorsum 
of  the  foot,  ascend  upon  the  outer  side  of  the  leg,  and  curve  in- 
wards just  below  the  knee,  to  unite  with  the  lymphatics  of  the 
inner  side  of  the  thigh.  The  external  group  consists  of  a  few 
lymphatic  vessels  which  commence  upon  the  outer  side  of  the 
foot  and  posterior  part  of  the  ankle,  and  accompany  the  exter- 
nal  saphenous  vein  to  the  popliteal  region,  where  they  enter  the 
popliteal  glands. 

The  deep  lymphatic  vessels  accompany  the  deep  veins,  and 
communicate  with  the  various  glands  in  their  course.    After 

23 


426  THE  THOMSONIAN 

joining  the  deep  inguinal  glands,  they  pass  beneath  Ponpart's 
ligament,  to  communicate  with  the  numerous  glands  situated 
around  the  iliac  vessels.  The  deep  lymphatics  of  the  gUiteal 
region  follow  the  course  of  the  branches  of  the  gluteal  and  is- 
chiatic  arteries.  The  former  join  the  glands  situated  upon  the 
upper  border  of  the  pyriformis  muscle,  and  the  latter,  after  com- 
municating with  the  lymphatics  of  the  thigh,  enter  the  ischiat- 
ic  glands. 

LYMPHATICS  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

The  lymphatics  of  the  trunk  may  be  arranged  under  three 
heads — superficial,  deep,  and  visceral. 

The  superficial  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  upper  half  of  the 
trunk  pass  upwards  and  outwards  on  each  side,  and  converge, 
some  to  the  axillary  glands,  and  others  to  the  glands  at  the  root 
of  the  neck.  The  lymphatics  from  the  mammary  glands  fol- 
low the  lower  border  of  the  pectoralis  major,  communicating 
with  a  chain  of  lymphatic  glands,  to  the  axillary  glands.  The 
superficial  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  lower  half  of  the  trunk,  of 
the  gluteal  region,  perineum,  and  external  organs  ol  generation, 
converge  to  the  superior  group  of  superficial  inguinal  glands. 
Some  small  glands  are  situated  on  each  side  of  the  dorsal  vein 
of  the  penis,  from  which,  as  from  the  superficial  lymphatics,  the 
efferent  vessels  pass  into  the  superior  group  of  superficial  ingui- 
nal glands. 

The  deep  lymphatic  glands  of  the  thorax  are  the  intercostal, 
internal,  mammary,  anterior  mediastinal,  aud  posterior  medi- 
astinal. 

The  intercostal  glands  are  of  small  size,  and  are  situated  on 
each  side  of  the  vertebral  column,  near  the  articulations  of  the 
heads  of  the  ribs,  and  in  the  course  of  the  intercostal  arteries. 

The  internal  mammary  glands,  also  very  small,  are  placed 
in  the  intercostal  spaces,  by  the  side  of  the  iternal  mammary 
arteries. 

The  anterior  mediastinal  glands  occupy  he  loose  cellular 
tissue  of  the  anterior  mediastinum,  restinj.'  some  on  the  dia- 
phragm, but  the  greater  number  upon  the  irge  vessels  at  the 
root  of  the  heart. 

The  posterior  mediastinal  glands  are  .stuated  along  the 
course  of  the  aorta  and  oesophagus,  in  the  posterior  mediasti- 
num, and  communicate  above  with  the  dc  p  cervical  glands, 
on  each  side  with  the  intercostal,  and  belo\  with  the  abdomi- 
nal glands. 

The  deep  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  thorax  ore  the  intercostal, 
internal  mammary,  and  diaphragmatic. 

The  intercostal  lymphatic  vessels  follow  the  course  of  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  427 

arteries  of  the  same  name ;  and  reaching  the  vertebral  column, 
curve  downwards,  to  terminate  in  the  thoracic  duct. 

The  internal  mammary  lymphatics  commence  in  the  parietes 
of  the  abdomen  communicating  with  the  epigastric  lymphatics. 

They  ascend  by  the  side  of  the  internal  mammary  vessels, 
being  joined  in  their  course  by  the  anterior  intercostals,  and 
terminate  on  the  right  side  in  the  tributaries  of  the  ductus 
lymphaticus  dexter  ;  and  on  the  left  side  m  the  thoracic  duct. 
The  diaphragmatic  lymphatics  pursue  the  direction  of  the 
corresponding  veins,  and  terminate,  some  in  front  in  the  inter- 
nal mammary  vessels,  and  some  behind,  in  the  posterior  medi- 
astinal lymphatics. 

The  deep  lymphatic  glands  of  the  abdomen  are  the  lumbar 
glands;  they  are  very  numerous,  and  are  seated  around  the 
common  iliac  vessels,  the  aorta  and  vena  cava. 

The  deep  lymphatic  glands  of  the  pelvis  are  the  external 
iliac,  internal  iliac,  and  sacral. 

The  external  iliac  are  placed  around  the  external  iliac  ves- 
sels, being  in  continuation  by  one  extremity  with  the  femoral 
lymphatics,  and  by  the  other  with  the  lumbar  glands. 

The  internal  iliac  glands  are  situated  in  the  course  of  the 
internal  iliac  vessels,  and  the  sacral  glands  are  supported  by  the 
concave  surface  of  the  sacrum. 

The  deep  lymphatic  vessels  are  continued  upwards  from  the 
thigh,  beneath  Poupart's  ligament,  and  along  the  external  iliac 
vessels  to  the  lumbar  glands,  receivmg  in  their  course  the  epi- 
gastric, circumflex  ilii,  and  ilio-lumbar  lymphatic  vessels. 
Those  from  the  parietes  of  the  pelvis,  and  from  the  gluteal,  is- 
chiatic,  and  obturator  vessels,  follow  the  course  of  the  internal 
iliac  arteries,  and  unite  with  the  lumbar  lymphatics.  And  the 
lumbar  lymphatic  vessels,  after  receiving  all  the  lymphatics 
from  the  lower  extremities,  pelvis  and  loins,  terminate  by  seve- 
ral large  trunks  in  the  receptaculum  chyli. 

LYMPHATICS  OF  THE  VISCERA. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  lungs  are  distributed  over  eve- 
ry part  of  the  surface,  and  through  the  texture  of  these  organs, 
and  converge  to  the  numerous  glands  situated  around  the  bi- 
furcation of  the  trachea  and  roots  of  the  lungs — the  bronchial 
glands.  Some  of  these  glands,  of  small  size,  may  be  traced  in 
connection  with  the  bronchial  tubes,  for  some  distance  into  the 
lunfjs.  The  efferent  vessels  from  the  bronchial  glands  unite 
with  the  tracheal  and  oesophageal  glands,  and  terminate  princi- 
pally in  the  thoracic  duct  at  the  root  of  the  neck,  and  partly  in 
the  ductus  lymphaticus  dexter.  The  bronchial  glands,  in  the 
adult,  present  a  variable  tint  of  brown,  and  in  old  age  a  deep 
black  color.     In  infancy  they  have  none  of  this  pigment,  and 


428  THE   THOMSONIAN 

are  not  to  be  distinguished  from  lymphatic  glands  in  other  situ- 
ations. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  heart  originate  in  the  subse- 
rous cellular  tissue  of  the  surface,  and  in  the  deeper  tissues  of 
the  organ,  and  follow  the  course  of  the  vessels,  principally, 
alon<^'"  t1ie  right  border  of  the  heart  to  the  glands  situated  around 
the  arch  of  the  aorta  and  bronchial  glands,  whence  they  pro- 
ceed to  the  thoracic  duct. 

The  pericardiac  and  thymic  lymphatic  vessels  proceed  to 
join  the  anterior  mediastinal  and  bronchial  glands. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  liver  are  divisible  into  the  deep 
and  superficial.  The  former  take  their  course  through  the  por- 
tal canals,  and  through  the  right  border  of  the  lesser  omentum, 
to  the  lymphatic  glands,  situated  in  the  course  of  the  hepatic 
artery  and  along  the  lesser  curve  of  the  stomacfi.  The  super- 
ficial lymphatics  are  situated  in  the  cellular  structure  of  the 
proper  capsule,  over  the  whole  surliice  of  the  liver.  Those  of 
the  convex  surface  are  divided  into  two  sets — 1.  those  which 
pass  from  before  backwards  ;  2.  those  which  advance  from  be- 
hind forwards.  The  former  unite  to  form  trunks,  which  enter 
between  the  folds  of  the  lateral  ligaments  at  the  right  and  left 
extremities  of  the  organ,  and  of  the  coronary  ligament  in  the 
middle.  Some  of  these  pierce  the  diaphragm  and  join  the  pos- 
terior mediastinal  glands,  others  converge  to  the  lymphatic 
glands  situated  around  the  inferior  cava.  Those  which  pass 
from  behind  forwards  consist  of  two  groups ;  one  ascends  be- 
tween the  folds  of  the  broad  ligament,  and  perforates  the  dia- 
phragm, to  terminate  in  the  anterior  mediastinal  glands  ;  the 
other  curves  around  the  anterior  margin  of  the  liver,  to  its  con- 
cave surface,  and  from  thence  to  the  glands  in  the  right  border 
of  the  lesser  omentum.  The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  concave 
surface  are  variously  distributed,  according  to  their  position  ; 
those  from  the  rio;ht  lobe  terminate  in  the  lumbar  glands  ;  those 
from  the  gall  bladder,  which  are  large  and  form  a  remarkable 
plexus,  enter  the  glands  in  the  right  border  of  the  lesser  omen- 
tum; and  those  from  the  left  lobe  converge  to  the  lymphatic 
o-lands  situated  along  the  lesser  curve  of  the  stomach. 

The  lymphatic  glands  of  the  spleen  are  situated  around  its 
hilus,  and  those  of  the  pancreas  in  the  course  of  the  splenic 
vein.  The  lymphatic  vessels  of  these  organs  pass  through 
their  respective  glands,  and  join  the  aortic  glands,  previously  to 
terminating  in  the  thoracic  duct. 

The  lymphatic  glands  of  the  stomach  are  of  small  size,  and 
situated  along  the  lesser  and  greater  curves  of  that  organ.  The 
lymphatic  vessels,  as  in  other  viscera,  are  superficial  and  deep; 
the  former  originating  in  the  subserous,  and  the  latter  in  the 
submucous  tissue ;  they  pass  from  the  stomach  in  four  different 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


429 


directions :  some  ascend  to  the  glands  situated  along  the  lesser 
curve,  others  descend  to  those  occupying  the  greater  curve,  a 
third  set  passes  outwards  to  the  splenic  glands,  and  a  fourth  to 
the  glands  situated  near  the  pylorus  and  aortic  glands. 

The  lymphatic  glands  of  the  small  intestine  are  situated  be- 
tween the  layers  of  the  mesentery,  in  the  meshes  formed  by  the 
superior  mesenteric  artery,  and  thence  named  mesenteric 
glands.  These  glands  are  most  numerous  and  largest,  superi- 
orly, near  the  duodenum ;  and  inferiorly,  near  the  termination 
of  the  ileum. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  small  intestines  are  of  two  kinds 
— those  "of  the  structure  of  the  intestines,  which  ramify  upon  its 
surface  previously  to  entering  the  mesenteric  glands,  and  those 
which  commence  in  the  villi,  upon  the  surface  of  the  mucous 
membrane,  and  are  named  lacteals. 

The  lacteals,  according  to  the  most  recent  and  best  research- 
es, commence  in  the  centre  of  each  villus  as  a  blind  tubulus, 
which  opens  into  a  line  network,  situated  in  the  submucous  tis- 
sue. From  this  areolar  network  the  lacteal  vessels  proceed  to 
the  mesenteric  glands,  and  from  thence  to  the  thoracic  duct, 
in  which  they  terminate. 

The  lymphatic  glands  of  the  large  intestines  are  situated 
along  the  attached  margin  of  the  intestine,  in  the  meshes  form- 
ed by  the  arteries  previously  to  their  distribution.  The  lym- 
phatic vessels  take  their  course  in  two  different  directions,  those 
of  the  caecum,  ascending  and  transverse  colon,  after  traversing 
their  proper  trlands,  proceed  to  the  mesenteric,  and  those  of  the 
descending  colon  and  rectum  to  the  lumbar  glands. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  kidney  follow  the  direction  of 
the  blood  vessels  to  the  lumbar  ganglia  situated  around  the  aor- 
ta and  inferior  vena  cava ;  those  of  the  supra-renal  capsules, 
which  are  very  large  and  numerous,  terminate  in  the  renal 
lymphatics. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  viscera  of  the  pelvis  terminate 
in  the  sacral  and  lumbar  ganglia. 

The  lymphatic  vessels  of  the  testicle  take  the  course  of  the 
spermatic  cord,  where  they  are  of  large  size,  and  terminate  in 
the  lumbar  ffanglia. 

THORACIC  DUCT. 

The  thoracic  duct  commences  in  the  abdomen,  by  a  conside- 
rable and  somewhat  triangular  dilatation,  the  receptaculum  chy- 
li,  which  is  situated  upon  the  front  of  the  body  of  the  second 
lumbar  vertebra,  behind  and  between  the  aorta  and  inferior  ve- 
na cava,  and  close  to  the  tendon  of  the  right  crus  of  the  dia- 
phragm. From  the  upper  part  of  the  receptaculum  chyli  the 
thoracic  duct  ascends  through  the  aortic  opening  in  the  dia- 


430 


THE    THOMSOMAN 


PLATE  SI. 


phragm,  and  along  the  front  of  the  vertebral  column,  lying  be- 
tween the  thoracic  aorta  and  vena  azygos,  to  the  fourth  dorsal 
vertebra.  It  then  inclines  to  the  left  side,  passes  behind  the 
arch  of  the  aorta,  and  ascends 
by  the  side  of  the  ossophagus 
and  behind  the  perpendicular 
portion  of  the  left  subclavian  ar- 
tery to  the  root  of  the  neck  op- 
posite the  seventh  cervical  ver- 
tebra, where  it  makes  a  sudden 
curve  forwards  and  downwards, 
and  terminates  at  the  point  of 
junction  of  the  left  subclavian 
with  the  left  internal  jugular 
vein. 

The  thoracic  duct  is  equal  in 
size  to  the  diameter  of  a  goose- 
quill  at  its  commencement  from 
the  receptaculum  chyli,  dimin- 
ishes considerably  in  diameter 
towards  the  middle  of  the  poste- 
rior mediastinum,  and  again  be- 
comes dilated  near  its  termina- 
tion. At  about  the  middle  of 
its  course  it  frequently  divides 
into  two  branches  of  equal  size, 
which  reunite  after  a  short 
course  ;  and  sometimes  it  gives 
off  several  branches,  which  as- 
sume a  plexiform  arrangment  in 
this  situation.  Occasionally  the 
thoracic  duct  bifurcates  at  the 
upper  part  of  the  thorax  into 


•  The  Course  and  Termination  of  the  Thoracic  Duct. — 1,  The  arch  of  the 
aorta.  2.  The  thoracic  aorta.  3.  The  abdominal  aorta,  showing  its  principal 
branches  divided  near  their  origin.  4.  The  arleria  innominata,  dividing  into 
the  right  carotid  and  right  subclavian  arteries.  5.  The  left  carotid.  6.  The 
left  subclavian.  7.  The  superior  cava,  formed  by  the  union  of  8,  the  two  ve- 
na innominatai ;  and  these  by  the  junction  9,  of  the  internal  jugular  and 
subclavian  vein  at  each  side.  10.  The  greater  vena  azygos.  11.  The  termi- 
nation of  the  lesser  in  the  greater  vena  azygos.  12.  The  receptaculum  chyli ; 
several  lymphatic  trunks  are  seen  opening  into  it.  13.  The  thoracic  duct,  di- 
viding opposite  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  vertebra;  into  two  branches,  which 
60on  reunite.  The  course  of  the  duct  behind  the  arch  of  the  aorta  and  left 
subclavian  artery  is  shown  by  a  dotted  line.  14.  The  duct  making  its  turn  at 
the  root  of  the  neck,  and  receiving  several  lymphatic  trunks  previously  to  ter- 
minating in  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  junction  of  the  internal  jugular  and 
subclavian  vein.  15.  The  termination  of  the  trunk  of  the  ductus  lymphaticus 
dexter. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  431 

two  branches,  one  of  which  opens  into  the  point  of  junction  be- 
tween the  rii^ht  subclavian  and  jugular  veins,  while  the  other 
proceeds  to  the  normal  termination  of  the  duct  on  the  left  side. 
In  rare  instances  the  duct  has  been  found  to  terminate  in  the 
vena  azygos,  which  is  the  normal  destination  in  some  mamma- 
lia. 

The  thoracic  duct  presents  fewer  valves  in  its  course  than 
lympliatic  vessels  generally?' ;  at  its  termination  it  is  provided 
with  a  pair  of  semilunar  valves,  which  prevent  the  admission  of 
venous  blood  into  its  cylinder. 

Branches. — The  thoracic  duct  receives  at  its  commencement 
four  or  five  large  lymphatic  trunks  which  unite  to  form  the  re- 
ceptaculum  chyli ;  it  next  receives  the  trunks  of  the  lacteal  ves- 
sels. Within  the  thorax  it  is  joined  by  a  large  lymphatic  trunk 
from  the  liver,  and  in  its  course  through  the  posterior  medias- 
tinum receives  the  lymphatic  vessels  both  from  the  viscera  and 
from  the  parietes  of  the  thorax.  At  its  curve  forwards  in  the 
neck  it  is  joined  by  the  lymphatic  trunks  from  the  left  side  of 
the  head  and  neck,  left  upper  extremity,  and  from  the  upper 
part  of  the  thorax,  and  thoracic  viscera. 

The  ductus  lymphaticus  dexter  is  a  short  trunk,  which  re- 
ceives the  lymphatic  vessels  from  the  right  side  of  the  head  and 
neck,  right  upper  extremity  and  right  side  of  the  thorax,  and 
terminates  at  the  junction  of  the  right  subclavian  with  the  right 
internal  jugular  vein,  at  the  point  where  these  veins  unite  to 
form  the  right  vena  innominata.  It  is  provided  at  its  termina- 
tion with  a  jKiir  of  semilunar  valves  which  prevent  the  entranee 
of  blood  from  the  veins. 

ON  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

The  nervous  system  consists  of  a  central  organ,  the  cerebro- 
spinal centre  or  axis,  and  of  numerous  rounded  and  flattened 
white  cords,  the  nerves,  which  are  connected  by  one  extremity 
with  the  cerebro-spinal  centre,  and  by  the  other  are  distributed 
to  all  the  textures  of  the  body.  The  sympathetic  system  is  an 
exception  to  this  description  ;  for  in  place  of  one,  it  has  many 
small  centres,  which  are  called  ganglia,  and  which  communi- 
cate very  freely  with  the  cerebro-spinal  axis,  and  with  its 
nerves. 

The  cerebro-spinal  axis  consists  of  two  portions — the  brain, 
an  organ  of  large  size,  situated  within  the  skull,  and  the  spinal 
cord,  a  lengthened  portion  of  the  nervous  centre  continuous 
with  the  brain,  and  occupying  the  canal  of  the  vertebral  co- 
lumn. 

The  most  superficial  examination  of  the  brain  and  spinal 
cord  shows  them  to  be  composed  of  fibres,  which  in  some  situ- 
ations are  ranged  side  by  side  or  collected  into  bundles,  and  in 


432  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Other  situations  are  interlaced  at  various  angles  by  cross  fibres. 
The  fibres  are  collected  and  held  together  by  a  delicate  cellular 
web,  which  forms  the  bond  of  support  to  the  entire  organ.  It 
is  also  observed  that  the  cerebro-spinal  axis  presents  Two  sub- 
stances difl'ering  from  each  other  in  density  and  color — a  grey 
or  cineritious  or  cortical  substance,  and  a  white  or  medullary 
substance.  The  grey  substance  forms  a  thin  lamella  over  the 
entire  surface  of  the  convolutions  of  the  cerebrum,  and  the  la- 
mina3  of  the  cerebellum:  hence  it  has  been  named  conical ;  but 
it  is  likewise  situated  in  the  centre  of  the  spinal  cord  its  entire 
length,  and  may  thence  be  traced  through  the  medulla  oblong- 
ata, crura  cerebri,  thalami  optici,  and  corpora  striata  ;  it  enters 
also  into  the  composition  of  the  locus  perforatus,  tuber  cinere- 
um,  commissura  mollis,  pineal  gland,  and  corpus  rhomboide- 
iim. 

The  fibres  of  the  cerebro-spinal  axis  are  arranged  into  two 
classes,  diverging  and  converging.  The  diverging  fibres  pro- 
ceed from  the  medulla  oblongata,  and  diverge  to  every  part  of 
the  surface  of  the  brain  ;  while  the  converging  commence  up- 
on the  surfoce,  and  proceed  inwards  towards  the  centre,  so  as 
to  connect  the  diverging  fibres  of  opposite  sides.  In  certain 
parts  of  then'  course  the  diverging  fibres  are  separated  by  the 
grey  substance,  and  increase  in  number  so  as  to  form  a  body  of 
considerable  size,  which  is  called  a  ganglion.  The  position 
and  mutual  relations  of  these  fibres  and  ganglia  may  be  best  ex- 
plained by  reference  to  the  mode  of  developement  of  the  cere- 
bro-spiral  axis  in  animals  and  in  man. 

The  centre  of  the  nervous  system  in  the  lowest  animals  pos- 
sessed of  a  lengthened  axis,  presents  itself  in  the  form  of  a  dou- 
ble cord.  A  step  higher  in  the  animal  scale,  and  knots  or  gan- 
glia are  developed  upon  one  extremity  of  this  cord  ;  such  is  the 
most  rudimentary  condition  of  the  brain  in  the  lowest  forms  of 
vertebrata.  In  the  lowest  fishes,  the  anterior  extremity  of  the 
double  cord  displays  a  succession  of  five  pairs  of  ganglia.  The 
higher  fishes  and  amphibia  appear  to  have  a  different  disposi- 
tion of  these  primitive  ganglia.  The  first  two  have  become 
fused  into  a  single  ganglion,  and  then  follow  only  three  pairs  of 
symmetrical  ganglia.  But  if  the  larger  pair  be  unfolded  after 
being  hardened  in  alcohol,  it  will  then  be  seen  that  the  whole 
number  of  ganglia  exists,  but  that  four  have  become  concealed 
by  a  thin  covering  that  has  spread  across  them.  This  condi- 
tion of  the  brain  carries  us  upwards  in  the  animal  scale  even  to 
mammalia ;  i.  e.,  in  the  dog  or  cat  we  find,  first  a  single  gan- 
glion, the  cerebellum,  then  three  pairs  following  each  other  in 
succession  ;  and  if  we  unfold  the  middle  pair,  we  shall  be  at 
once  convinced  that  it  is  indeed  composed  of  two  pairs  of  pri- 
mitive ganglia  concealed  by  an  additional  developement.  Again 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  433 

it  will  be  observed,  that  the  primitive  ganglia  of  opposite  sides, 
at  first  separate  and  disjoined,  become  connected  by  means  of 
transverse  fibres  of  communication  (commissures,  commissura). 
The  office  of  these  commissures  is  the  association  in  function 
of  the  two  symmetrical  portions.  Hence  we  arrive  at  the  ge- 
neral and  important  conclusion,  that  the  brain  among  the  lower 
animals  consists  of  primitive  cords,  primitive  ganglia  upon 
those  cords,  and  commissures  which  connect  the  substances  of 
the  adjoining  ganglia,  and  associate  their  actions. 

In  the  deveiopement  of  the  cerebro-spinal  axis  in  man,  the 
earliest  indication  of  the  spinal  cord  is  presented  under  the  form 
of  a  pair  of  minute  longitudinal  filaments  placed  side  by  side. 
Upon  these,  towards  the  anterior  extrenity,  five  pairs  of  minute 
swellings  are  observed,  not  disposed  in  a  straight  line  as  in  fish- 
es, but  curved  upon  each  other  so  as  to  correspond  with  the  di- 
rection of  the  future  cranium.  The  posterior  pair  soon  becomes 
cemented  upon  the  middle  line,  forming  a  single  ganglion  ;  the 
second  pair  also  unite  with  each  other  ;  the  third  and  fourth 
pairs,  at  first  distinct,  are  speedily  veiled  by  a  lateral  deveiope- 
ment, which  arches  backwards  and  conceals  them ;  the  anteri- 
or pairs,  at  first  very  small,  decrease  in  size  and  become  almost 
lost  in  the  increased  deveiopement  of  the  preceding  pairs. 

We  see  here  a  chain  of  resemblances  corresponding  with  the 
progressive  deveiopement  observed  in  the  lower  animals  ;  the 
human  brain  is  passing  through  the  phases  of  improving  deve- 
iopement, which  distinguishes  the  lowest  from  the  lower  crea- 
tures ;  and  we  are  naturally  led  to  the  same  conclusion  with 
regard  to  the  architecture  of  the  human  brain,  that  we  were  led 
to  establish  as  the  principle  of  deveiopement  in  the  inferior  crea- 
tures— that  it  is  composed  of  primitive  cords,  primitive  ganglia 
upon  those  cords,  commissures  to  connect  those  ganglia,  and 
developements  from  those  ganglia. 

In  the  adult,  the  primitive  longitudinal  cords  have  become 
cemented  together,  to  form  the  spinal  cord.  But  at  the  upper 
extremity  they  separate  from  each  other,  under  the  name  of 
crura  cerebri.  The  first  pair  of  ganglia  developed  from  the 
primitive  cords,  have  grown  into  the  cerebellum  ;  the  second 
pair  (the  optic  lobes  of  animals)  have  become  the  corpora  quad- 
rigemina  of  man.  The  third  pair  (the  optic  thalami),  and  the 
fourth  (the  corpora  striata),  are  the  basis  of  the  hemispheres, 
which,  the  merest  lamina  in  the  fish,  has  become  the  largest 
portion  of  the  brain  of  man.  And  the  fifth  pair  (olfactory  lobes) 
so  large  in  the  lowest  forms,  has  dwindled  into  the  olfactory 
bulbs  of  man. 

The  white  substance  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  examined 
with  the  microscope,  is  found  to  consist  of  fibres  varying  in  dia- 
meter from  the  370th  to  the  184th  of  a  line.     These  fibres  aiQ 


S34  THE    TH0M30NIAN 

composed  of  a  thin  and  transparent  neurilema,  enclosing  a  soft 
homogenous  nervous  substance,  and  tliey  possess  a  remarkable 
tendency,  when  compressed,  to  assume  a  varicose  appearance. 
The  nervous  fibres  of  the  olfactory,  optic,  and  auditory  nerves, 
have  the  same  disposition  to  become  varicose  on  pressure.  The 
neurilema  of  the  primitive  fibre,  according  to  Fontana,  consisis 
of  two  layers,  of  which  the  internal  is  thin  and  transparent, 
and  the  external  ceUular  and  less  transparent. 

The  grey  substance  of  the  brain,  according  to  Valentin,  is 
composed  of  globules  of  considerable  size,  havinsf  a  central  nu- 
cleus, near  the  margin  of  which  is  another  smaller  nucleus, 
and  frequently  upon  the  surface  of  the  globule,  patches  of  pig- 
ment. The  various  shades  of  grey  observed  in  different  parts 
of  the  brain  depend  upon  the  greater  or  smaller  number  of  glo- 
bules existing  in  those  parts.  Two  kinds  of  grey  substance 
are  described  as  existing  in  the  spinal  cord  ;  the  one  is  the  or- 
dinary grey  matter  of  the  cord,  and  the  other  forms  part  of  the 
posterior  cornua.  The  former  resembles  the  grey  matter  of  the 
brain,  consisting  of  globules,  while  the  latter  is  composed  of 
small  bodies  resembling  the  blood  corpuscules  of  the  frog. 

The  nerves  are  divisible  mto  two  great  classes — those  which 
proceed  directly  from  the  cerebro-spinal  axis,  the  cranial  and 
spinal  nerv^es,  and  constitute  the  system  of  animal  life  ;  and 
those  which  originate  from  a  system  of  nervous  centres,  inde- 
pendent of  the  cerebro-spinal  axis,  but  closely  associated  with 
that  centre  by  numerous  communications,  the  sympathetic  sys- 
tem, or  system  of  organic  life. 

The  division  of  nerves  into  cranial  and  spinal  is  purely  arbi- 
trary, and  depends  upon  the  circumstance  of  the  former  pass- 
ing through  the  foramina  of  the  cranium,  and  the  latter  through 
those  of  the  vertebral  columm.  With  respect  to  origin,  all  the 
cranial  nerves,  with  the  exception  of  the  first  (olfactory),  pro- 
ceed from  the  spinal  cord,  or  from  its  immediate  continuation 
into  the  brain.  The  spinal  nerves  arise  by  two  roots — anteri- 
or, which  proceeds  from  the  anterior  segment  of  the  spinal 
cord,  and  possesses  a  motor  function — and  posterior,  which  is 
connected  with  the  posterior  segment,  and  bestows  the  faculty 
of  sensation.  The  motor  nerves  of  the  cranium  are  shown  by 
dissection  to  be  continuous  with  the  motor  portion  of  the  cord, 
and  form  one  system  with  the  motor  roots  of  the  spinal  cord  ; 
while  the  nerves  of  sensation,  always  excepting  the  olfactory, 
are  in  like  manner  traced  to  the  posterior  segment  of  the  cord, 
and  form  part  of  the  system  of  sensation. 

To  these  two  systems  a  third  has  been  added  by  sir  Charles 
Bell — the  respiratory  system — which  consists  of  nerves  associ- 
ated in  the  function  of  respiration,  and  arising  from  the  side  of 
the  upper  part  of  the  spinal  cord  in  one  continuous  line,  which 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  435 

was  thence  named,  by  that  distinguished  physiologist,  the  re- 
spiratory tract. 

Recent  researches  have  made  an  important  addition  to  our 
knowledge  of  the  mode  of  connection  of  the  nerves  with  the  spi- 
nal cord,  and  shown  that  both  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves,  as 
well  as  most  of  the  cerebral,  divide  into  two  sets  of  filaments 
upon  entering  the  cord,  one  set  being  connected  to  the  grey 
substance,  while  the  other  is  continuous  with  the  white  or  fi- 
brous part  of  the  cord. 

The  connection  of  a  nerve  with  the  cerebro-spinal  axis  is 
called,  for  the  convenience  of  description,  its  origin  ;  this  terra 
must  not,  however,  be  received  literally,  for  each  nerve  is  de- 
veloped in  the  precise  situation  which  it  occupies  in  the  body, 
and  with  the  same  relations  that  it  possesses  in  after  life.  In- 
deed, we  not  unfrequently  meet  with  instances  in  anencepha- 
lous  foetuses,  where  the  nerves  are  beautifully  and  completely 
formed,  while  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  are  wholly  wanting. 
The  word  origin  must,  therefore,  be  considered  as  a  relict  of 
the  darkness  of  preceding  ages,  when  the  cerebro-spinal  axis 
was  looked  upon  as  the  tree  from  which  the  nerves  pushed 
forth  as  branches.  In  their  distribution,  the  spinal  nerves  for 
the  most  part  follow  the  course  of  the  arteries,  particularly  in 
the  limbs,  where  they  lie  almost  constantly  to  the  outer  side 
and  superficially  to  the  vessels,  as  if  for  receiving  the  first  inti- 
mation of  danger,  and  communicating  it  to  the  muscles,  that 
they  may  instantly  remove  the  arteries  from  impending  injury. 

A  microscopic  examination  of  a  cerebro-spinal  nerve  shows 
it  to  be  composed  of  minute  fibres  resembling  those  of  the  brain, 
and  consisting  of  a  neurilema  enclosing  a  soft  homogenous  ner- 
vous substance.  The  chief  difference  between  the  fibres  of  the 
nerves  and  the  cerebral  fibres,  is  a  somewhat  greater  opacity 
and  more  2;ranular  appearance  of  the  contents  of  the  minute 
cylinders  of  the  former;  a  greater  thichness  of  their  neuri- 
lema, and  an  indisposition  to  the  formation  of  varicose  en- 
largements upon  compression.  The  neurilema  presents  the 
same  two  layers  which  exist  in  the  cerebral  fibres.  The  pri- 
mitive fibres,  or  filaments,  are  assembled  into  small  bundles  and 
enclosed  in  a  distinct  sheath,  constituting  a  funiculus;  the  fu- 
niculi are  collected  into  larger  bundles,  or  fosciculi,  arid  a  sin- 
gle or  a  number  of  fasciculi  connected  by  cellular  tissue,  and 
invested  by  a  membranous  sheath,  constitute  a  nerve.  The  fu- 
niculi, when  freshly  exposed,  present  a  peculiar  zigzag  line 
across  their  cylinder,  which  is  most  probably  produced  by  the 
arrangement  of  the  primitive  fibres,  or  possibly  by  some  condi- 
tion of  the  neurilema.  This  appearance  is  destroyed  by  mak- 
ing extension  upon  the  nerve. 

Communications  between  nerves  take  place  either  by  means 


436  THE    TIIOMSONIAN 

of  the  funiculi  composing  a  single  nerve,  or  of  the  fasciculi  in  a 
nervous  plexus.  In  these  communications,  there  is  no  fitsion 
of  nervous  substance,  the  cord  formed  by  any  two  funiculi  is 
constantly  enlarged,  and  corresponds  accurately  with  their  com- 
bined bulk. 

A  nervous  plexus  consists  in  a  communication  between  the 
fasciculi  and  funiculi  composing  the  nerves  which  are  associat- 
ed in  their  supply  of  a  limb  or  of  a  certain  region  of  the  body. 
During  this  communication  there  is  an  interchange  of  funiculi, 
aiid  with  the  funiculi  an  interchange  of  fibres. 

The  sympathetic  system  consists  of  numerous  ganglia,  of 
communicating  branches  passing  between  the  ganglia,  of  others 
passing  between  the  ganglia  and  the  cerebro-spinal  axis,  and  of 
branches  of  distribution  which  are  remarkable  for  their  frequent 
and  plexiform  communications.  The  sympathetic  nerves  also 
ditfer  from  other  nerves  in  their  color,  which  is  of  a  greyish 
pearly  tint.  Examined  with  the  microscope,  the  sympathetic 
nerves  are  seen  to  be  composed  of  an  admixture  of  grey  and 
white  fibres.  The  grey  are  much  smaller  than  the  white,  less 
transparent,  and  the  neurilema  is  less  easily  distinguishable 
from  its  contents.  Some  of  the  nerves  are  composed  of  grey  fi- 
bres only,  without  any  admixture  of  white.  The  sympathetic 
ganglia  contain  the  globules  observed  in  the  grey  substanqe  of 
the  brain  ;  they  are  firmer  in  structure  and  enclosed  in  a  strong 
investing  capsule.  The  fasciculi  of  fibres  entering  the  gangli- 
on become  divided  and  form  a  plexus  around  the  globules,  and 
then  converge  to  constitute  another  fasciculus,  by  which  they 
quit  the  ganglion. 

The  nervous  system  may  be  divided,  for  convenience  of  de- 
scription, into — 1.  The  brain.  2.  The  spinal  cord.  3.  The 
cranial  nerves.  4.  The  spinal  nerves.  5,  The  sympathetic 
system. 

THE  BRAIN. 

,  The  brain  is  a  collective  term,  which  signifies  those  parts  of 
the  nervous  system  exclusive  of  the  nerves  themselves  which 
are  contained  within  the  cranium;  they  are  the  cerebrum,  ce- 
rebellum, and  medulla  oblongata.  These  are  invested  and  pro- 
tected by  the  membranes  of  the  brain,  and  the  whole  together 
constitute  the  encephalon. 

Dissectioji. — To  examine  the  ence-phalon  with  its  meyn- 
branes,  the  upper  part'of  the  skull  must  be  removed  by  sawing 
through  the  external  table,  and  breaking  the  internal  table  with 
the  chisel  and  hammer.  After  the  calvariuin  has  been  loosen- 
ed all  round  it  will  require  a  considerable  degree  of  force  to  tear 
tlie  bone  away  from  the  dura  mater.     The  adhesion  is  particu- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  437 

larly  firm  at  the  sutures,  where  the  dura  mater  is  continuous 
with  a  membranous  layer  interposed  between  the  edges  of  the 
bones;  in  other  situations,  the  connection  results  from  nume- 
rous vessels  which  permeate  the  inner  table  of  the  skull.  The 
adhesion  subsisting  between  the  dura  mater  and  bone  is  greater 
in  the  young  subject  than  in  the  adult. 

Upon  being  torn  away,  the  internal  table  will  present  the 
deeply  grooved  and  ramified  channels,  corresponding  with  the 
branches  of  the  arteria  meniugea  media.  Along  the  middle 
line  will  be  seen  a  groove  corresponding  with  the  superior  lon- 
gitudinal sinus,  and  on  either  side  may  be  frequently  observed 
some  depressed  fossae,  corresponding  with  the  Pacchionian  bo- 
dies. 

The  membranes  of  the  encephalon  are,  the  dura  mater,  ar- 
achnoid membrane,  and  jna  mater. 

DURA    MATER. 

The  dura  mater  (so  named  from  a  supposition  that  it  was. 
the  source  of  all  the  fibrous  membranes  of  the  body),  is  the  firm, 
bluish,  fibrous  membrane,  which  is  exposed  on  the  removal  of 
the  calvarium.  It  lines  the  interior  of  the  skull  and  spinal  co- 
lumn, and  sends  processes  inwards,  for  the  support  and  protec- 
tion of  the  ditierent  parts  of  the  brain.  It  also  sends  processes 
externally,  which  form  sheaths  for  the  nerves  as  they  quit  the 
skull  and  spinal  column.  Its  external  surface  is  rough  and  fi- 
brous, and  corresponds  with  the  internal  table  of  the  skull. 
The  internal  surface  is  smooth,  and  lined  by  the  thin  varnish- 
like lamella  of  the  arachnoid  membrane.  The  latter  is  a  se- 
rous membrane.  Hence  the  dura  mater  becomes  a  fibro-serous 
membrane,  being  composed  of  its  own  proper  fibrous  structure. 
and  the  serous  layer  derived  from  the  arachnoid. 

The  glandular  Pacchioni  are  small,  round,  whitish  granu- 
lations, collected  in  clusters  of  variable  size.  They  are  found 
in  three  situations.  1.  On  the  inner  surface  of  the  dura  mater, 
near  the  superior  longitudinal  sinus;  when  of  large  size  they 
produce  absorption  of  the  dura  mater,  and  considerable  indent- 
ations of  the  inner  wall  of  the  skull.  2.  In  the  superior  longi- 
tudinal sinus.  3.  On  the  arachnoid  membrane,  investing  the 
pia  mater  near  to  the  margin  of  the  hemispheres. 

If  the  student  cut  through  one  side  of  the  dura  mater,  and 
turn  it  upwards  towards  the  middle  line,  he  will  observe  the 
smooth  internal  surface  of  the  dura  maier.  He  will  perceive 
also  the  large  cerebral  veins  filled  with  dark  blood,  passing 
from  behind  forwards  to  open  into  the  superior  longitudinal  si- 
nus, and  the  firm  connections  by  means  of  these  veins  and  the 
Pacchionian  bodies  between  the  opposed  surfaces  of  the  arach- 
noid membraoe. 


438  THE    THOMSONIAN 

If  he  separate  these  with  his  scalpel,  he  will  see  a  vertical 
layer  of  dura  mater  descending  between  the  hemispheres,  and 
if  he  draw  one  side  of  the  brain  a  Uttle  outwards,  he  will  dis- 
tinctly perceive  its  extent.     This  is  the  falx  cerebri. 

The  processes  of  dura  mater  which  are  sent  inwards  towards 
the  interior  of  the  skull,  are  the  falx  cerebri,  tentorium  cerebel- 
li,  and  falx  cerebelli. 

The  arteries  of  the  dura  mater  are — the 

Anterior  meningeal,  from  the  internal  carotid. 

Middle  meningeal  and  meningea  parva,  from  the  internal 
maxillary. 

Inferior  meningeal,  from  the  ascending  pharyngeal  and  occi- 
pital arteries. 

Posterior  meningeal,  from  the  vertebral. 

The  nerves  are  derived  from  the  nervi  moUes  and  vertebral 
plexus  of  the  sympathetic,  from  the  Casserian  ganglion,  the 
opthalmic  nerve,  and  sometimes  from  the  fourth.  The  branch- 
es from  the  two  last  are  given  off  while  the  nerves  are  situated 
by  the  side  of  the  sella  turcea;  they  are  recurrent,  and  pass 
backwards  between  the  layers  of  the  tentorium,  to  the  lining 
membrane  of  the  lateral  sinus. 

Arachnoid  Membrane. 

The  arachnoid,  so  named  from  its  extreme  tenuity,  is  the  se- 
rous membrane  of  the  cerebro-spinal  centre,  and,  like  other  se- 
rous membranes,  a  shut  sac.  It  envelopes  the  vein  and  spinal 
cord,  and  is  reflected  upon  the  inner  surface  of  the  dura  mater, 
giving  to  that  membrane  its  serous  investment. 

The  arachnoid  is  attached  to  the  surface  of  the  pia  mater  by 
n  loose  cellular  tissue,  the  sub-arachnoidean.  This  tissue  is  fi- 
lamentous at  the  base  of  the  brain,  between  the  hemispheres, 
and  around  the  spinal  cord,  where  the  arachnoid  is  disposed 
very  loosely. 

The  sub-arachnoidean  cellular  tissue  is  the  seat  of  an  abun- 
dant serous  secretion,  the  sub-arachnoidean  fluid,  which  fills 
all  the  vacuities  existing  between  the  arachnoid  and  pia  mater, 
and  distends  the  arachnoid  of  the  spinal  cord  so  completely,  as 
to  enable  it  to  occupy  the  whole  of  the  space  included  in  the 
sheath  of  dura  mater. 

The  arachnoid  also  secretes  a  serous  fluid  from  its  inner  sur- 
face, which  is  small  in  quantity  compared  with  the  sub-arach- 
noidean liquid. 

Pia  Mater. 

The  pia  mater  is  a  vascular  membrane,  composed  of  Innu- 
merable vessels  held  together  by  a  thin  cellular  layer.  It  in- 
vests the  whole  surface  of  the  brain,  dipping  into  its  convolu- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  439 

tions,  and  forming  a  fold  in  its  interior,  called  velum  interposi- 
tum.  It  also  forms  folds  in  other  situations,  as  in  the  fourth 
ventricle,  and  in  the  longitudinal  grooves  of  the  spinal  cord. 

The  pia  mater  is  the  nutrient  membrane  of  the  brain,  and 
derives  its  blood  from  the  internal  carotid  and  vertebral  arteries. 

Its  nerves  are  the  minute  filaments  of  the  sympathetic,  which 
accompany  the  branches  of  the  arteries. 

CEREBRUM. 

The  cerebrum  is  divided  into  two  hemispheres  by  the  great 
longitudinal  fissure,  which  lodges  the  falx  cerebri,  and  marks 
the  original  developement  of  the  brain  by  two  symmetrical 
halves. 

Each  hemisphere,  upon  its  under  surface,  admits  of  a  divi- 
sion into  three  lobes,  anterior,  middle,  and  posterior.  The  an- 
terior lobe  rests  upon  the  roof  of  the  orbit,  and  is  separated  from 
the  middle  by  the  fissure  of  Sylvius.  The  middle  lobe  is  re- 
ceived into  the  middle  fossa,  in  the  base  of  the  skull,  and  is  se- 
parated from  the  posterior  by  a  slight  impression  produced  by 
the  ridge  of  the  petrous  bone.  The  posterior  lobe  is  supportsd 
by  the  tentorium. 

Separate  carefully  the  two  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum,  and 
a  broad  band  of  white  substance  will  be  seen  to  connect  them. 
Remove  the  upper  part  of  each  hemisphere,  with  a  knife,  to  a 
level  with  this  white  layer,  and  the  appearance  resulting  from 
this  section  is  the  centrum  ovale  majus. 

The  centrum  ovale  majus  is  surrounded  by  a  thin  stratum 
of  grey  substance,  which  follows  in  a  zigzag  line  all  the  convo- 
lutions and  the  fissures  between  them.  In  ihe  middle  of  the 
centum  ovale  majus  is  the  broad  band  which  connects  the  two 
hemispheres  to  each  other,  the  corpus  callosum. 

If  an  incision  be  made  through  the  corpus  callosum  on  either 
side  of  the  raphe,  two  irregular  cavities  will  be  opened,  which 
extend  from  one  extremity  of  the  hemispheres  to  the  other ; 
these  are  the  lateral  ventricles.  To  expose  them  completely, 
the  upper  boundary  should  be  removed  with  the  scissors. 

Each  lateral  ventricle  is  divided  into  a  central  cavity,  and 
and  three  smaller  cavities  called  cornua.  The  anterior  cornu 
curves  forwards  and  outwards  in  the  anterior  lobe  ;  the  middle 
cornu  descends  into  the  middle  lobe;  and  the  posterior  cornn 
passes  backwards  in  the  posterior  lobe,  converging  towards  its 
fellow  of  the  opposite  side.  The  central  cavity  is  triangular  in 
its  form,  bounded  above  by  the  corpus  callosum ;  internally  by 
the  septum  lucidum,  which  separates  it  from  the  opposite  ven- 
tricle ;  and  below  by  the  following  parts,  taken  in  their  order 
of  position  from  before  backwards: — Corpus  striatum,  tenia  so- 


440 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


micircularis,  thalamus  opticus,  choroid  plexus,  corpus  fimbria- 
tum,  fornix. 

The  foramen  of  Monro  may  be  distinctly  seen  by  pulling 
slightly  on  the  choroid  plexus,  and  pressing  aside  the  septum 
lucidum  with  the  handle  of  the  knife.  It  is  situated  between 
the  under  surface  of  the  fornix,  and  the  anterior  extremities  of 
the  thalami  optici,  and  forms  a  transverse  communication  be- 
tween the  lateral  ventricles,  and  below  with  the  third  ventricle. 

The  fornix  is  a  white  layer  of  medullary  substance,  of  which 
a  portion  only  is  seen  in  this  view  of  the  ventricle. 

The  anterior  cornu  is  triangular  in  its  form,  sweeping  out- 
wards, and  terminating  by  a  point  in  the  anterior  lobe  of  the 
brain,  at  a  short  distance  only  from  its  surface. 

PLATE  82*. 


•  The  Lateral  Ventricles  of  the  Cerebrum. — 1,  1.  The  two  hemispheres,  cut 
down  to  a  level  with  the  corpus  callosum  so  as  to  constitute  the  centrum  ovalu 
majus.  The  surface  is  seen  to  be  studded  with  the  small  vascular  points — 
puncta  vasculosa — and  surrounded  by  a  narrow  margin  which  represents  the 
grey  substance.  2.  A  small  portion  of  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  corpus 
callosum.  3.  Its  posterior  boundary  ;  the  intermediate  portion  Torming  the 
roof  of  the  lateral  ventricles  has  been  removed,  so  as  to  completely  expose 
those  cavities.  4.  A  part  of  the  septum  lucidum,  showing  an  interspace  be- 
tw'een  its  layers — the  fifth  ventricle.  5  The  anterior  cornu  of  one  side.  6. 
The  commencement  of  the  middle  cornu.  7.  The  posterior  cornu.  8.  The 
corpus  striatum  of  one  ventricle.  9.  The  tenia  seinicircularis  covered  by  the 
vena  corporis  striati  and  tenia  Tarini.  10.  A  small  part  of  the  tlialamus  opti- 
cus. 11.  The  choroid  plexus.  This  plexus  communicates  with  that  of  the 
opposite  ventricle  through  the  foramen  of  Monro  ;  a  bristle  is  passed  through 
this  opening,  and  its  extremities  are  seen  res^ting  on  the  corpus  striatum  at 
each  side.  12.  The  fornix.  13.  The  commencement  of  the  hippocampus  ma- 
jor descending  into  the  middle  cornu.     14.  The  hippocampus  minor. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  441 

The  posterior  cornu,  or  digital  cavity,  curves  inwards  as  it 
extends  into  the  posterior  lobe  of  the  brain,  and  hkewise  termi- 
nates near  to  the  surface.  An  elevation  corresponding  with  a 
deep  sulcus  between  two  convolutions,  projects  into  the  floor  of 
this  cornu,  and  is  called  hippocampus  minor. 

The  middle,  or  descending  cornu,  in  descending  into  the 
middle  lobe  of  the  brain,  forms  a  very  considerable  curve,  and 
alters  its  direction  several  tunes  as  it  proceeds.  Hence  it  is  de- 
scribed as  passing  backwards  and  outwards  and  downwards, 
and  then  turning  forwards  and  inwards.  It  is  the  largest  of 
the  three  cornua. 

The  middle  cornu  should  now  be  laid  open,  by  inserting  the 
little  linger  into  its  cavity,  and  making  it  serve  as  a  director  for 
the  scalpel  in  cutting  away  the  side  of  the  hemisphere,  so  as  to 
expose  it  completely. 

Its  superior  boundary  is  formed  by  the  under  surface  of  the 
thalamus  opticus,  upon  whicli  are  the  two  projections  called 
corpus  geniculatum  internum  and  externum,  and  the  inferior 
wall,  by  the  various  parts  which  are  often  spoken  of  as  the  con- 
tents of  the  middle  cornu  :  these  are — the  hippocampus  major, 
pes  hippocampi,  pes  accessojius,  corpus  fimbriatum,  choroid 
plexus,  fascia  dentata,  and  transverse  fissure. 

Beneath  the  corpus  fimbriatum  will  be  likewise  seen  the 
transverse  fissure  of  the  brain.  It  is  through  this  fissure  that 
the  pia  mater  communicates  with  the  choroid  plexus,  and  the 
latter  obtains  its  supply  of  blood.  This  fissure  is  bounded  on 
one  side  by  the  corpus  fimbriatum,  and  on  the  other  by  the  un- 
der surface  of  the  tiialamus  opticus. 

The  internal  boundary  of  the  lateral  ventricle  is  the  septum 
lucidum.  This  septum  is  thin  and  semi-transparent,  and  con- 
sists of  two  laminae  of  cerebral  substance,  attached  above  to  the 
under  surface  of  the  corpus  callosum  at  its  anterior  part,  and 
below  to  the  fornix.  Between  the  two  layers  is  a  narrow  space, 
the  fifth  ventricle,  which  is  lined  by  a  proper  membrane. 

Beneath  the  fornix,  is  the  velum  interpositum,  a  reflection  of 
the  pia  mater  introduced  into  the  interior  of  the  brain  through 
the  transverse  fissure.  The  velum  is  connected  at  each  side 
with  the  choroid  plexus,  and  contains  within  its  two  layers  two 
large  veins,  the  venae  Galeni,  which  receive  the  blood  from  the 
ventricles,  and  terminate  posteriorly  in  the  straight  sinus.  Up- 
on the  under  surface  of  the  velum  interpositum  are  two  fringe- 
like  bodies,  which  project  into  the  third  ventricle.  These  are 
the  choroid  plexuses  of  the  third  ventricle. 

If  the  velum  interpositum  be  raised  and  turned  back — an  ope- 
ration which  must  be  conducted  with  eare,  particularly  at  its 
posterior  part,  where  it  invests  the  pineal  gland — the  thalami 
optici  and  the  cavity  of  the  third  ventricle  will  be  exposed. 

29 


442 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


The  third  ventricle  is  the  fissure  between  the  thalami  optici 
and  corpora  striata. 

It  is  crossed  by  three  commissures,  the  anterior,  middle,  and 
posterior;  and  between  these  are  two  spaces,  called  foramen 
commune  anterius  and  foramen  commune  posterius. 

Behind  the  third  ventricle  is  placed  the  quadrifid  ganghon 
called  optic  lobes  in  the  inferior  animals,  and  corpora  quadrige- 
mina  in  man.  The  two  anterior  of  these  bodies  are  the  larger, 
and  are  named  nates ;  the  two  posterior,  testes. 

Behind  the  corpora  quadrigemina  is  the  cerebellum,  and  be- 
neath the  cerebellum,  the  fourth  ventricle,  The  student  must 
therefore  divide  the  cerebellum  down  to  the  fourth  ventricle, 
and  turn  its  lobes  aside  to  examine  that  cavity. 

The  fourth  ventricle  is  the  ventricle  of  the  medulla  oblonga- 
ta, upon  the  posterior  surface  of  which  it  is  placed.     It  is  an 

PLATE  83.* 


•  The  Mesial  Surface  of  a  Longitudinal  Section  of  the  Brain. — The  incision 
has  been  carried  along  the  middle  line  ;  between  the  two  hemispheres  of  the 
cerebrum,  and  through  the  middle  of  the  cerebellum  and  medulla  oblongata. 
1.  The  inner  surface  of  the  left  hemisphere.  2.  The  divided  surface  of  the 
cerebellum,  showing  the  arbor  vitae.  3.  The  medulla  oblongata.  4.  The  cor- 
pus callosum,  rounded  before  to  terminate  in  the  base  of  the  brain,  and  be- 
hind, to  become  continuous  with  5,  the  fornix.  G.  One  of  the  crura  of  the  for- 
nix descendin'i  to  7,  one  of  the  corpora  albicantia.  8.  The  septum  lucidum. 
9.  The  velum  interpositum,  communicating  with  the  pia  mater  of  the  convo- 
lutions through  the  fissure  of  Bichat.  10.  Section  of  the  middle  ccmmissure 
situated  in  the  third  ventricle.  11.  Section  of  the  anterior  commissure.  12. 
Section  of  the  posterior  commissure.  The  interspace  between  10  and  11  is 
the  foramen  commune  anterius,  in  which  the  crus  of  the  fornix  (6)  is  situat- 
ed.    The  interspace  between    10  and  12  is  the  foramen  commune  posterius. 

13.  The  corpora  quadrigemina,  upon  which  is  seen  resting  the  pineal  gland, 

14.  15.  The  iter  a  tertio  ad  quartnm  ventriculum.  16.  The  fourth  ventricle. 
17.  The  pons  Varolii,  through  which  are  seen  passing  the  diverging  fibres  of 
the  corpora  pyramidalia.  18.  The  crus  cerebri  of  the  left  side,  with  the  third 
nerve  arising  from  it.  19.  The  tuber  cinerum,  from  which  projects  the  infun- 
dibulum,  having  the  pituitary  gland  appended  to  its  extremity.  20.  One  of 
the  optic  nerves.  21.  The  left  olfactory  nerve,  terminating  anteriorly  in  a 
rounded  bulb. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  443 

oblong  quadrilateral  cavity,  bounded  on  each  side  by  a  thick 
cord  passing  between  the  cerebellum  and  corpora  quadrigemi- 
na,  called  the  processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes,  and  by  the  corpus 
restilbrme.  It  is  covered  in  behind  by  the  arch  of  the  cerebel- 
lum, which  forms  three  remarkable  projections  in  its  cavity, 
named,  from  their  resemblance,  uvula  and  tonsils;  and  by  a 
thin  lamella  of  white  substance,  stretched  between  the  two  pro- 
cesses e  cerebello  ad  testes,  termed  the  valve  of  Vieussens. 

We  observe  within  the  fourth  ventricle,  the  choroid  plexuses, 
the  calamus  scriptorius,  and  linese  transversas. 

LINING  MEMBRANE  OF  THE  VENTRICLES. 

The  lining  membrane  of  the  ventricles  is  a  serous  layer, 
quite  distinct  from  the  arachnoid,  and  having  no  communica- 
tion with  it.  This  membrane  lines  the  whole  of  the  interior  of 
the  lateral  ventricles,  and  is  connected  above  and  below  to  the 
attached  border  of  the  choroid  plexus,  so  as  to  exclude  com- 
pletely all  communication  between  the  ventricles  and  the  exte- 
rior of  the  brain.  It  is  reflected  through  the  foramen  of  Monro 
on  each  side  into  the  third  ventricle,  which  it  invests  through- 
out. From  the  third  it  is  conducted  into  the  fourth  ventricle, 
through  the  iter  a  tertio  ad  quartum  ventriculum,  and  lines  its 
interior,  together  with  the  layer  of  pia  mater  which  forms  its 
inferior  boundary.  In  this  manner  a  perfect  communication  is 
established  between  all  the  ventricles,  with  the  exception  of  the 
fifth,  which  has  its  own  proper  membrane.  It  is  this  mem- 
brane which  gives  them  their  polished  surface,  and  transudes 
the  secretion  which  moistens  their  interior. 

CEREBELLUM. 

The  cerebellum,  according  to  Cruveilheir,  is  seven  times 
smaller  than  the  cerebrum.  Like  that  organ,  it  is  composed  of 
white  and  grey  substance,  whereof  the  grey  is  larger  in  propor- 
tion than  the  white.  Its  surface  is  formed  by  parallel  lamellae, 
separated  by  fissures  ;  and  at  intervals  deeper  fissures  exist, 
which  divide  it  into  larger  segments,  termed  lobules.  The  ce- 
rebellum is  divided  into  two  lateral  hemispheres,  or  lobes,  two 
minor  lobes,  called  superior  and  inferior  vermiform  processes, 
and  some  small  lobules. 

When  cut  into  vertically,  the  cerebellum  presents  the  appear- 
ance termed  arbor  vitae.  If  the  incision  be  made  through  the 
outer  third  of  the  organ,  a  grey  body,  surrounded  by  a  yellow 
zigzag  line  of  horny  structure,  will  be  seen  in  the  centre  of  the 
white  substance ;  this  is  the  corpus  rhomboideum,  or  ganglion 
of  the  cerebellum. 

The  cerebellum  is  associated  with  the  spinal  cord  and  cere- 


444  THE    THOMSONIAN 

brum  by  three  pairs  of  peduncles — the  corpora  resliformia.  pro- 
cessus e  cerebello  ad  testes,  and  crura  cerebelli. 

BASE  OF  THE  BRAIN. 

The  student  should  now  prepare  to  study  the  base  of  the 
brain.  For  this  purpose,  the  organ  should  be  turned  upon  its 
incised  surface  ;  and  if  the  dissection  has  hitherto  been  con- 
ducted with  care,  he  will  find  the  base  perfectly  uninjured. 
The  arachnoid  membrane,  some  parts  of  the  pia  mater,  and  the 

PLATE  84.* 


*  The  Under  Surface  or  Base  of  the  Brain. — 1.  The  anterior  lobe  of  one  he- 
misphere of  the  cerebrum.  2.  The  middle  lobe.  3.  Tbe  posterior  lobe,  al- 
most concealed  by  4,  the  lateral  lobe  of  the  cerebellum.  5.  The  inferior  ver- 
miform process  of  tlie  cerebellum.  6.  The  pneumogastric  lobule.  7.  The 
longitudinal  fissure.  8.  The  olfactory  nerves,  forming  their  bulbous  expan- 
sions. 9.  The  substantia  perforata  at  the  inner  termination  of  the  fissure  of 
Sylvius  ;  the  three  roots  of  the  olfactory  nerve  are  seen  upon  the  substantia 
perforata.  The  commencement  of  the  ti-ansverse  fissure  on  each  side  is  con- 
cealed by  the  inner  border  of  the  middle  lobe  10,  The  commissure  of  the 
optic  nerves.  11.  The  tuber  cinerum,  from  M'hich  the  iufundibulum  is  seen 
projecting.  12  The  corpora  albicantia.  13.  The  locus  perforatus,  bounded 
on  each  side  by  the  crura  cerebri,  and  by  the  third  nerve.  14.  The  pons  Va- 
rolii. 15.  The  crus  cerebelli  of  one  side.  16.  The  fifth  nerve  emerging  from 
the  anterior  border  of  the  crus  cerebelli ;  the  small  nerve  by  its  side  is  the 
fourth.  17.  The  sixth  pair  of  nerves.  18»  The  seventh  pair  of  nerves,  con- 
sisting of  the  auditory  and  facial.  19.  The  corpora  pyramidalia  of  the  medul- 
la oblongata  ;  the  corpus  olivare  and  part  of  the  corpus  restiforme  is  seen  at 
each  side.  Just  below  the  number  is  the  decussation  of  the  fibres  of  the  cor- 
pora pyramidalia.  20.  The  eighth  pair  of  nerves.  21.  The  ninth  or  lingual 
nerve.    22.  The  anterior  root  of  the  first  cervical  spinal  nerve. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


445 


circle  of  Willis,  must  be  carefully  cleared  away,  in  order  to  ex- 
pose all  the  structures.  These  he  will  find  arranged  in  the  fol- 
lowing order,  from  before  backwards : 

Lonoritudinal  fissure,  olfactory  nerves,  fissure  of  Sylvius, 
substantia  perforata,  commencement  of  the  transverse  fis- 
sure, optic  commissure,  tuber  cinereum,  infundibulum, 
corpora  albicantia,  locus  perforatus,  crura  cerebri,  pons 
varolii,  crura  cerebelli,  medulla  oblongata. 
On  each  side  of  the  longitudinal  fissure,  upon  the  under  sur- 
face of  eacfi  anterior  lobe,"is  the  olfactory  nerve,  with  its  bulb. 

Passing  backwards  on  each  side  beneath  the  edge  of  the  mid- 
dle lobe,  is  the  commencement  of  the  great  transverse  fissure, 

PLATE  85.* 


*  The  Base  of  the  Brain — upon  which  several  sections  have  been  made, 
showing  the  distribution  of  the  diverging  fibres. — 1.  The  medulla  oblongata. 
2.  One  half  of  the  pons  Varolii.  3.  The  crus  cerebri,  crossed  by  the  optic 
nerve,  (4),  and  spreading  out  into  the  substance  of  the  middle  lobe.  5.  The 
two  roots  of  the  optic  nerve  ;  the  nerves  about  the  crus  cerebri  and  cerebelli 
are  the  same  as  in  the  preceding  ligure.  6.  The  olfactory  nerve.  7.  The  cor- 
pora albicantia.  On  the  right  side  a  portion  of  the  brain  has  been  removed, 
to  show  the  distribution  of  the  diverging  fibres.  8.  The  fibres  of  the  corpus 
pyramidale  passing  through  the  substance  of  the  pons  Varolii.  9.  The  fibres 
passing  through  the  thalamus  opticus.  10.  The  fibres  passing  through  the 
corpus  striatum.  11.  Their  distribution  to  the  hemispheres.  12.  The  fifth 
nerve  ;  its  two  roots  may  be  traced,  the  one  forwards  to  the  fibres  of  the  cor- 
pus pyramidale,  the  other  backwards  to  the  corpus  restiforme.  13.  The  fibres 
of  the  corpus  pyramidale  which  pass  outwards  with  the  corpus  restiforme  in- 
to the  substance  of  the  coebellum;  these  are  the  arciform  fibres  of  Solly. 
14.  A  section  through  one  of  the  lateral  lobes  of  the  cerebellum,  showing  the 
corpus  rhomboideum  in  the  centre  of  its  white  substance  ;  the  arbor  vitse  is 
also  beautifully  seen.     15.  The  opposite  lobe  of  the  cerebeUura. 


446  THE  THOMSONIAN. 

which  extends  beneath  the  hemispheres  to  the  same  point  on 
the  opposite  side. 

The  po7is  Yarolii  is  the  commissure  of  the  cerebeUnm,  and 
associates  the  two  lateral  lobes  in  their  common  function. 
Resting  upon  the  pons,  near  its  posterior  border,  is  the  sixth 
pair  of  nerves.  On  the  anterior  border  of  the  crus  cerebelU,  at 
each  side,  is  the  thick  bundle  of  filaments  belonging  to  the  fifth 
nerve,  and,  lying  on  its  posterior  border,  the  seventh  pair  of 
nerves. 

Externally  to  the  corpora  pyramidalia,  are  two  oblong  and 
rounded  bodies,  supposed  to  resemble  olives  in  their  form,  and 
hence  called  corpora  olivaria.  This  is  the  ganglion  of  the  cor- 
pus olivare. 

Behind  the  corpus  olivare  is  a  narrow  white  band  which  de- 
scends along  the  side  of  the  medulla  oblongata  to  the  bottom  of 
the  lateral  sulcus.  This  is  the  situation  of  the  respiratory  tract 
of  sir  Charles  Bell. 

In  addition  to  the  diverging  fibres  which  constitute  both  the 
cerebrum  and  cerebellum,  by  their  increase  and  developement, 
another  set  of  fibres  are  found  to  exist,  which  have  for  their  of- 
fice the  association  of  the  symmetrical  halves,  and  distant  parts 
of  the  same  hemisphere. 

These  are  called  from  their  direction,  converging  fibres,  and 
from  their  office,  commissures.  They  are — the  corpus  callo- 
sum,  fornix,  septum  lucidum,  the  anterior,  middle  and  posterior 
commissures,  peduncles  of  the  pineal  gland,  processus  e  cere- 
bello  ad  testes,  valve  of  Vieussens,  and  pons  Yarolii. 

SPINAL   CORD. 

The  dissection  of  the  spinal  cord  requires  that  the  spinal  co- 
lumn should  be  opened  throughout  its  entire  length,  by  sawing 
through  the  laminae  of  the  vertebrae,  close  to  the  roots  of  the 
transverse  processes,  and  raising  the  arches  with  a  chisel,  after 
the  muscles  of  the  back  have  been  removed. 

The  spinal  column  contains  the  spinal  cord,  or  medulla  spi- 
nalis, the  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves,  and  the  membranes  of  the 
cord,  viz.  dura  mater,  arachnoid,  pia  mater,  and  membrana  den- 
tata. 

In  form,  the  spinal  cord  is  a  flattened  cylinder,  and  presents 
on  its  anterior  surface  a  groove,  which  extends  into  the  cord  to 
the  depth  of  one  third  of  its  diameter.  This  is  the  sulcus  lon- 
gitudinalis  anterior. 

On  the  posterior  surface  another  fissure  exists,  which  is  so 
narrow  as  to  be  hardly  perceptible  without  careful  examination. 
This  is  the  sulcus  longitudinalis  posterior. 

Two  other  lines  are  observed  on  the  medulla,  the  anterior 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


447 


and  posterior  sulci,  corresponding  with  the  attachment  of  the 
anterior  and  posterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves. 

These  sulci  divide  the  medulla  into  four  fascicuh,  or  cords, 
viz.— the  anterior,  lateral,  posterior,  and  median  posterior  co- 
lumns. 

CRANIAL  NERVES. 

There  are  nine  pairs  of  cranial  nerves.    Functionally  or  phy- 
sioloo-ically  they  are  divided  into  four  groups,  viz.— 1.  special 
se7ise—Q\(oiCtoij,  optic,  auditory;    2.  mo^ioM— motores  oculo- 
PLATE  86.* 


-V' 


♦  The  Anatomy  of  the  side  of  the  Neck,  showing  the  Nerves  of  the  Tongve. — 
1.  A  fragmeut  of  the  temporal  bone,  containing  the  meatus  anditorius  exter- 
nus,  mastoid,  and  styloid  process.  2.  The  st5'lo-hyoid  muscle.  3.  The  st5'lo- 
glossus.  4.  The  stylo-pharyngeus.  5.  The  tongue.  6.  The  hyo-glossus  mus- 
cle— its  two  portions.  7.  The  genio-hyo-glossus  muscle.  8.  The  genio-hyoi- 
deus  ;  they  both  arise  from  the  inner  surface  of  the  symphysis  of  the  lower 
jaw.  9.  The  steriio-hyoid  muscle.  10.  The  sterno-thy-roid.  11.  The  thyro- 
hyoid, upon  which  the  hyoid  branch  of  the  lyngual  nerve  is  seen  ramifying. 
12.  The  omo-hyoid  crossing  the  common  carotid  artery  (13),  and  internal  ju- 
gular vein  (14).  15.  The  external  carotid  giving  oil'  its  branches.  16.  The 
internal  carotid.  17.  The  gustatory  nerve  giving  ofl"  a  branch  to  the  submax- 
illary ganglion  (IS),  and  communicating  a  little  further  on  with  the  lingual 
nerve.  19.  The  submaxillary  or  Wharton's  duct,  passing  forwards  to  the  sub- 
lingual gland.  20.  The  glosso-pharyngeal  nerve.  21.  The  lingual  nerve, 
curving  around  the  occipital  artery.  22.  The  descendens  noni  nerve,  forming 
a  loup  with  (23)  the  communicans  noni,  a  branch  formed  bj^  two  filaments, 
one  from  the  second  and  one  from  the  third  cervical  nerve.  24.  The  pneumo- 
gastric  nerve,  emerging  from  between  the  internal  jugular  vein  and  common 
carotid  artery,  and  entering  the  chest.  25.  The  facial  nerve,  emerging  from 
the  stylo-mastoid  foramen,  and  crossing  the  external  carotid  artery. 


448 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


rum,  abdncentes,  lingual;  '^.respiration — patheticus,  fascial 
glosso-pharyngeal  (pheumogastric,  spinal  accessory) ;  A.sjnnal 
— trifacial. 

The  branches  of  the  lingual  (the  trne  motive  nerve  of  the 
tongue),  are — the  communicating  branches  with  the  pneumo- 
gastric,  spinal  accessory,  first  and  second  cervical,  and  sympa- 
thetic ;  the  descendent  noni,  hyoidean  branch,  and  communi- 
cating filaments  with  the  gustatory  nerve. 

The  branches  of  tlie  faded  nerve  are — the  tympanic,  com- 
municating, posterior  auricular,  digastric  stylo-hyoid,  tempore, 
and  cervico-facial. 

The  facial  nerve  has  been  named  the  sympatheticiis  mi- 

PLATE  ST.* 


*  The  Distribution  of  the  Facial  Nerve,  and  the  Branches  of  the  Cemcal 
Plexus. — 1  The  facial  nerve,  escaping  from  the  stylo-mastoid  foramen,  and 
crossing  the  ramus  of  the  lower  jaw;  the  parotid  gland  has  been  removed,  in 
order  to  sec  the  nerve  more  distinctly.  2.  The  posterior  auricular  branch  ; 
the  digastric  and  stylo-mastoid  filaments  are  seen  near  the  origin  of  this 
branch.  3.  Temporal  branches,  communicatinsr  with  (1)  the  branches  of  the 
frontal  nerve.  .5.  Facial  branches,  communicating  with  ((i)  the  infra-orbital 
nerve.  7.  Facial  branches,  communicating  with  (S)  the  mental  nerve.  9. 
Cervical  branches,  communicating  witli  (10)  the  superficialis  colli  nerve,  and 
forming  a  plexus  (11)  over  the  submaxillary  gland.  The  distribution  of  the 
branches  of  the  facial  in  a  iadiatc<l  direction  over  the  side  of  the  face  con- 
stitutes the  pes  anserinus.  12.  The  auricularis  ma<:nus  nerve,  one  of  the  as- 
cending branches  of  the  cervical  plexus.  13.  The  cccipitalis  minor,  ascending 
along  the  posterior  border  of  the  sterno-mastoid  muscle.  14.  The  superficial 
and  deep  descending  branches  of  the  cervical  plexus.  15.  The  spinal  acces- 
sory nerve,  giving  off  a  branch  to  the  external  surface  of  the  trapezius  muscle. 
16.  The  occipitalis  major  nerve,  a  posterior  branch  of  the  second  cervical 
nerve. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


449 


nor,  on  account  of  the  number 
of  communications  it  maintains 
with  other  nerves,  viz. — the  au- 
ditory nerve,  petrosal  branch  of 
Vidian,  otic  gangUon,  glosso- 
pharyngeal, pneumogastric,  an- 
terior auricular,  nuricularis 
magnus,  occipitalis  minor,  supra 
and  infra  orbital,  temporo-ma- 
lar,  buccal,  mental,  and  superli- 
cialis  colli. 

Tlie  eighth  pair  consists  of 
three  nerves,  theglosso-pharyn- 
geal,  pneumogastric,  and  spinal 
accessory. 

The  branches  of  the  glosso- 
pharyngeal  nerve  are — com- 
municating branches  with  the 
facial,  pneumogastric,  spinal  ac- 
cessory, and  sympathetic ;  the 
tympanic,  muscular,  and  pha- 
ryngeal. 

The  branches  of  the  pneumo- 
gastric nerve  are — communica- 
tinof  branches  with  the  facial, 
glosso-pharyngeal,  spmal  acces- 
sory, lingual,  and  sympathetic; 
the  pharyngeal,  superior  laryn- 
geal, cardiac,  inferior  or  recur- 
rent laryngeal,  anterior  and  pos- 
terior pulmonary,  oesophageal, 
and  gastric. 

The  branches  of  the  ophthal- 
mic nerve  are — the  frontal,  the 
lachrymal,  and  the  nasal. 


PLATE  88.* 


*  Origin  and.  Distribution  of  the  Eii^hth  Pair  of  Nerves. — 1.  The  Medulla 
oblongata.  2.  The  pons  Varolii.  3.  The  corpus  olivare.  4.  The  corpus  res- 
tiforrae.  5.  The  facial  nerve.  G.  The  origin  of  the  glosso-pharyngeal  nerve. 
7.  The  ganglion  of  Andersch.  8.  The  trunk  of  the  nerve.  9.  The  spinal  ac- 
cessory nerve.  10.  The  ganglion  of  tlie  pneumogastric  nerve.  11.  Its  plexi- 
form  ganglion.  12.  Its  trunk.  13.  Its  pharynseal  branch,  forming  the  pha- 
ringeal  plexus  (14),  assisted  by  a  branch  from  tha  tjlosso- pharyngeal  (8),  and 
one  from  the  superior  laryngeal  nerve  (15),  16.  Cardiac  branches.  17.  Ee> 
current  laryngeal  branch.  i8.  Anterior  pulmonary  branches  19.  Posterior 
pulmonary  branches.  20.  (Esophageal  plexus.  21.  Gastric  branches.  22. 
Origin  of  the  spinal  accessory  nerve.  23.  Its  branches  distributed  to  the  stej- 
no-mastoid  muscle.    24.  Its  branches  to  the  trapezius  muscle. 


450 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


Fifth  Pair  (trifacial). — This  nerve  is  analogous  to  the  spi- 
nal nerves  in  its  origin  by  two  roots  from  the  anterior  and  pos- 
terior columns  of  the  spinal  cord,  and  in  the  existence  of  a  gan- 
glion on  the  posterior  root.  Hence  it  ranges  with  the  spinal 
nerves,  and  is  considered  as  the  cranial  spinal  nerve. 

The  branches  of  the  nasal  nerve  withia  the  orbit  are,  tire 
ganglionic,  ciliary,  and  infra-trochlear ;  in  the  nose  it  gives  one 
or  two  filaments  to  the  anterior  ethmoidal  cells  and  frontal  si- 


nus. 


The  branches  of  the  superior  maxillary  nerve  are  divisible 
PLATE  89.* 


•  A  Diagram,  showing  the  Fifth  Pair  of  nerves,  with  its  Branches. — 1.  The 
origin  of  llie  nerve  by  two  roots.  2.  The  nerve  escaping  from  the  cms  cere- 
belli.  3.  The  Casserian  ganglion.  4.  Its  opthalmic  division.  5.  The  frontal 
nerve,  giving  off  the  supra-trochlear  branch,  and  escaping  on  the  forehead 
through  the  supra-orbital  foramen.  6.  The  lachrjmal  nerve.  7.  The  nasal 
nerve,  passing  at  8  through  the  anterior  ethmoidal  foromen,  and  giving  off  the 
infra-trochlear  branch.  9.  The  communication  of  the  nasal  nerve  with  the  ci- 
liary g-anglion.  10.  A  small  portion  of  the  third  nerve  witli  Avhich  the  gangli- 
on is  seen  communicating ;  the  ganglion  gives  off  the  ciliary  branches  from 
its  anterior  aspect.  11.  The  superior  maxillary  nerve.  12.  Its  orbital  branch. 
13.  The  two  branches  communicating  with  Meckel's  ganglion  ;  the  three 
branches  given  off  from  the  lower  part  of  tlie  ganglion  are  the  posterior  pala- 
tine nerves.  14.  14.  The  superior  dental  nerves,  posterior,  middle  and  ante- 
rior. 15.  The  infra-orbital  branches,  distributed  upon  the  cheek.  IG.  The 
inferior  maxillary  nerve.  17.  Its  anterior  or  muscular  trunk.  IS.  The  pos- 
terior trunk — the  two  divisions  separated  by  an  arrow.  19.  The  gustatory 
nerve.  20.  The  chorda  tympani  joining  it  at  an  acute  angle.  21.  The  sub- 
maxillary ganglion.  22.  The  inferior  dental  nerve.  23.  Its  mylo-hyoidean 
branch.  24.  The  auricular  nerve,  dividing  behind  the  articulation  of  the  low- 
er jaw,  to  reunite  and  form  a  single  trunk.  2.5.  Its  branch  of  communication 
with  the  facial  nerve.    26.  Us  temporal  branch. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  451 

into  three  groups  : — those  which  are  given  off  in  the  spheno- 
maxillary fossa  ;  those  in  the  infra-orbital  canal  ;  and  those  on 
the  face.  They  may  be  thus  arranged :  1st  group,  orbital,  two 
from  Meckel's  ganglion,  posterior  dental;  2d,  middle  and  ante- 
rior dental ;  3d,  muscular,  and  cutaneous. 

The  inferior  maxillary  is  the  largest  of  the  three  divisions 
of  the  fifth  nerve.  It  divides  into  two  trunks,  external  and  in- 
ternal, which  are  separated  from  each  other  by  the  external 
pterygoid  muscle. 

The  external  trunk  divides  into  five  branches,  which  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  muscles  of  the  temporo-maxillary  region  ;  they 
are — the  masseteric,  temporal,  buccal,  and  external  and  internal 
pterygoid. 

The  internal  trunk  divides  into  three  branches — the  gustato- 
ry, inferior  dental,  and  anterior  auricular, 

SPINAL  NERVES. 

There  are  thirty-one  pairs  of  spinal  nerves,  each  arising  by 
two  roots,  an  anterior  or  motor  root,  and  a  posterior  or  sensitive 
root. 

The  spinal  nerves  are  divided  into — cervical,  S  pairs  ;  dor- 
sal, 12  pairs  ;  lumbar,  5  pairs  ;  sacral,  6  pairs. 

The  cervical  jilexiis  is  formed  by  loops  of  communication 
which  pass  from  one  nerve  to  another. 

The  branches  of  the  cervical  plexus  may  be  arranged  into 
three  groups,  superficial  ascending,  superficial  descending,  and 
deep,  viz. — ascending,  superficialis  colli,  auricularis  magnus, 
occipitalis  minor;  descending,  acromiales,  claviculares  ;  deep^ 
communicating  branches,  muscular,  communicans  noni,  phre- 
nic. 

AXILLARY  PLEXUS. 

The  axillary  plexus  of  nerves  is  formed  by  communications 
between  the  anterior  branches  of  the  four  last  cervical  and  first 
dorsal  nerves. 

Its  branches  may  be  arranged  into  two  groups,  humeral  and 
descending; — humeral,  shoit  and  long  thoracic,  supra-scapu- 
lar and  subscapular;  descending  branches,  external  and  inter- 
nal cutaneous,  median,  ulnar,  musculo-spiral,  and  circumflex. 

The  branches  of  the  median  nerve  are — muscular,  anterior 
interosseous,  superficial  palmar,  digital. 

The  branches  of  the  idnar  nerve  are — muscular  in  the  up- 
per and  fore  arms,  dorsal  branch,  and  superficial  and  deep  pal- 
mar. 

The  branches  of  the  muscido-spiral  nerve  are — the  muscu- 
lar, spiral  cutaneous,  radial,  and  posterior  interosseous. 


452 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


DORSAL  NERVES. 

The  dorsal  nerves  are  twelve 
in  number  on  each  side ;  the 
first  appears  between  the  first 
and  second  dorsal  vertebrEe,  and 
the  last  between  the  twelfth  dor- 
sal and  first  lu  mbur.  Each  nerve 
as  soon  as  it  has  escaped  from 
the  intervertebral  foramen,  di- 
vides into  two  branches,  a  dor- 
sal branch  and  the  true  intercos- 
tal nerve. 

LUMBAR  NERVES. 

There  are  live  pairs  of  lum- 
bar nerves,  ol  which  the  first 
makes  its  appearance  between 
the  last  dorsal  and  first  lumbar 
vertebra,  and  the  last  between 
the  fifth  lumbar  and  the  base  of 
the  sacrum. 

The  lumbar  plexus  is  formed 
by  the  anterior  branches  of  the 
last  dorsal  and  four  upper  lum- 
bar nerves,  the  posterior  branch- 
es passing  backwards,  to  be  dis- 
tributed to  the  muscles  and  inte- 
gument of  the  loins. 

The  branches  of  this  plexus 
are — the  musculo  and  external 
cutaneous,  genito-crural,  crural, 
and  obturator. 


PLATE  90. 


*  The  Axillary  Plexvs  of  nerves,  with  its  Branches  and  their  Distribtttion.^ 
1.  The  axillary  plexus.  2.  The  sliorl  thoracic  nerves.  3.  The  long  thoracic 
or  external  respiratory  of  Bell.  4.  The  phrenic  nerve.  5.  The  suprascapular 
nerve.  6.  The  subscapular  nerves.  7.  The  external  cutaneous  nerve.  8.  The 
point  at  which  it  pierces  the  coraco-brachialis  muscle.  9.  The  internal  cuta- 
neous nerve;  the  point  at  which  it  pierces  the  deep  fascia.  10.  The  origin  of 
the  median  nerve  by  two  heads.  11  The  bend  of  tlie  elbow  where  the  medi- 
an passes  between  the  two  heads  of  the  pronator  radii  teres,  and  of  the  flexor 
sublimis  di^itorum.  12.  Its  muscular  branches.  13.  Its  anterior  interosseous 
branch.  11.  The  point  at  which  the  nerve  passes  beneath  the  annular  liga- 
ment, and  divides  into  five  terminal  branches.  J5.  The  ulnar  nerve,  giving 
off  several  muscular  branches  to  the  triceps.  10.  The  point  at  which  it  pass- 
es between  the  two  heads  of  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  17.  Its  dorsal  branch. 
18.  The  termination  of  the  nerve,  dividing  into  a.  supcrlicial  and  deep  palmar 
branch.  19.  The  musciilo-spiral  nerve.  20.  Muscular  brandies.  21.  Spinal 
cutaneous  nerve.  22.  The  posterior  interosseous  nerve  piercing  the  supinator 
brevis  muscle.  23.  The  radial  nerve.  The  two  last  nerves  are  the  terminal 
branches  of  the  musculo-spiral.  24.  The  point  at  which  the  radial  nerve 
fierces  the  deep  fascia.    25.  The  circumflex  nerve. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


453 


The  branches  of  the  crural  nerve 
are — some  muscular  twigs  to  the  psoas 
and  ihacus  muscles,  and  in  the  thigh, 
the  cutaneous,  muscular,  and  long  and 
short  saphenous  nerves. 

The  posterior  tibial  nerve  at  the  in- 
ner ankle  divides  into  the  internal  and 
external  plantar  nerves. 

Its  branches  are  few — intended  for 
the  supply  of  the  deep  layer  of  muscles 
of  the  leg. 

The  peroneal  nerve  gives  off  but  one 
branch  in  its  course,  the  commuuicans 
peronei,  which  unites  with  the  commu- 
nicans  poplitei,  to  form  the  external  sa- 
phenous nerve. 

The  peroneal  cutaneous  nerves  pass 
in  front  of  the  ankle  joint,  and  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  integument  of  the  foot 
and  of  the  toes  ;  the  external  supplying 
three  toes  and  a  half,  and  the  internal 
one  and  a  half. 


PLATE  91/ 


SYMPATHETIC  SYSTEM. 

The  sympathetic  system  consists  of 
a  series  of  ganglia  extending  along  each 
side  of  the  vertebral  column,  from  the 
head  to  the  coccyx,  communicating 
with  all  the  other  nerves  of  the  body, 
and  distributing  branches  to  all  the  in- 
ternal  organs  and  viscera. 

The  branches  of  distribution  accom- 
pany the  arteries  which  supply  the  dif- 
ferent organs ;  and  form  communica- 
tions around  them,  which  are  called 
plexuses,  and  take  the  name  of  the  artery 
with  which  they  are  associated.    All  the 


*  The  Lumbar  and  Sacral  Plexuses,  with  the  nerves  of  the  Lower  Extremity . 
— 1.  The  five  lumbar  nerves  ;  the  four  superior,  with  a  branch  from  the  last 
dorsal,  form  the  lumbar  plexus.  2.  The  four  upper  sacral  nerves,  which  with 
the  last  lumbar  form  the  sacral  plexus.  3.  The  two  musculo-cutaneous 
nerves,  branches  of  the  first  lumbar  nerve.  4.  The  external  cutaneous  nerve. 
5.  The  genito-crural  nerve.  6.  The  crural,  or  femoral  nerve.  7.  Its  muscular 
branches.  (S.  Its  cutaneous  branches,  middle  cutaneous.  9.  Its  descending, 
or  saphenous  branches.  10.  The  short  saphenous  nerve.  11.  The  Ion?,  or 
internal  saphenous.  12.  The  obturator  nerve.  13.  The  gluteal  nerve  ;  a 
branch  of  the  last  lumbar,  or  lumbo-sacral  nerve.  14.  The  internal  pudic 
nerve.  15.  The  lesser  ischiatic  nerve.  16.  The  greater  ischiatic  nerve.  17. 
The  popliteal  nerve.      18.  The  peroneal  nerve.      19.  The  muscular  branches 


454 


THE   THOMSONIAN 


internal  orofans  of  the  head,  neck  and  trunk,  are  supplied  with 
branches  from  the  sympathetic,  and  some  of  them  exclusively; 
hence  it  is  considered  a  nerve  of  organic  life. 

It  is  called  the  ganglionic  nerve,  from  the  circumstance  of 
being  formed  by  a  number  of  ganglia,  and  from  the  constant 
disposition  which  it  evinces,  in  its  distribution,  to  communicate 
and  form  small  knots  or  sfansflia. 

PLATE  92.* 


of  the  popliteal  nerve.  20.  The  posterior  tibial  nerve,  dividing  at  21  into  the 
two  plantar  nerves.  22.  The  external  saphenous,  nerve,  formed  by  the  union 
of  the  coramunicans  poplitei  and  communicans  peronei.  23.  The  anterior  ti- 
bial nerve.  24.  The  musculo-cutaneous  nerve,  piercing  the  deep  fascia,  and 
dividing  into  two  cutaneous  branches,  for  the  supply  of  the  dorsum  of  the 
foot. 

*  The  Cranial  Ganglia  of  the  Sympathetic  Nerve. — 1.  The  ganglion  of 
Ribes.  2.  The  lilament  by  which  it  communicates  with  the  carotid  plexus 
(3).  4.  The  ciliary  or  lenticular  ganglion,  giving  off  ciliary  branches  for  the 
supply  of  the  globe  of  the  eye.  5.  Part  of  the  inferior  division  of  the  third 
nerve,  receivins;  a  short  thick  branch  from  the  ganglion.  6.  Part  of  the  nasal 
nerve,  receiving  a  longer  branch  from  the  ganglion.  7.  A  slender  filament, 
sent  directly  backwards  from  the  ganglion  to  the  sympathetic  branches  in  the 
cavernous  sinus.  8.  Part  of  the  sixth  nerve  in  the  cavernous  sinus,  receiving 
two  branches  from  the  carotid  plexus.  9.  Meckel's  ganglion  (spheno-pala- 
tine).  10.  Its  ascending  branches,  communicating  with  the  superior  maxilla- 
ry nerve.  11.  Its  descending  branches,  the  posterior  palatine.  12.  Its  ante- 
rior branches,  spheno-palatine,  or  nasal.  13.  The  naso-palaline  branch,  one 
of  the  nasal  branches.  *  The  swelling  which  Cloquet  imagines  to  be  a  gan- 
glion. 14.  The  posterior  branch  of  the  ganglion,  the  Vidian  nerve.  15.  Its 
carotid  branch,  communicating  with  the  carotid  plexus.  16.  Its  petrosal 
branch,  joining  the  angular  bend  of  the  facial  nerve.  17.  The  facial  nerve. 
1*^.  The  chorda  tympani  nerve,  which  descends  to  join  the  gustatory  nerve.  19. 
Gustatory  nerve.  20.  Submaxillary  ganglion,  receiving  the  chorda  tympani 
nerve  from  the  gustatory.    21.  Superior  cervical  ganglion  of  the  sympathetic. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  455 

There  are  six  sympathetic  gangHa  in  the  head,  viz.  the  gan- 
gUon  of  Ribes ;  the  ciliary,  or  lenticular ;  the  naso-palatine,  or 
Cloquet's  ;  the  sphenopalatine,  or  Meckel's ;  the  submaxillary; 
and  the  otic,  or  Arnold's ;  three  in  the  neck — superior,  middle, 
and  inferior  ;  twelve  in  the  dorsal  region  ;  four  in  the  lumbar 
region,  and  four  or  five  in  the  sacral  region. 

Each  ganglion  may  be  considered  as  a  distinct  centre,  giving 
off  branches  in  four  different  directions,  viz.  superior,  or  ascend- 
ing, to  communicate  with  the  ganglion  above;  inferior,  or  de- 
scendmg,  to  communicate  with  the  ganglion  below  ;  external, 
to  communicate  with  the  spinal  nerves ;  and  internal,  to  com- 
municate with  the  sympathetic  filaments  of  the  opposite  side, 
and  to  be  distributed  to  the  viscera. 

CRANIAL  GANGLIA. 

Ganglion  of  Ribes,  ciliary,  or  lenticular  ganglion,  naso-pala- 
tine, or  Cloquet's  ganglion,  spheno-palatine,  or  Meckel's  gan- 
glion, submaxillary  ganglion,  otic,  or  Arnold's  ganglion. 

The  ganglion  of  Ribes  is  small,  situated  upon  the  anterior 
communicating  artery,  and  formed  by  the  the  union  of  the  sym- 
pathetic filaments  which  accompany  the  ramifications  of  the 
two  anterior  cerebral  arteries.  It  is  interesting  as  being  the  su- 
perior point  of  union  between  the  sympathetic  chains  of  oppo- 
site sides  of  the  body. 

The  ciliary  is  a  small  quadrangular  ganglion,  situated  with- 
in the  orbit,  between  the  optic  nerve  and  the  external  rectus. 

Its  branches  of  distribution  are  the  ciliary;  they  supply  the 
tunics  of  the  eye. 

The  7iaso-j)alati?ie  ganglion  (Cloquet's)  is  a  small  lengthened 
body,  situated  in  the  naso-palatme  canal. 

The  spheno-palatine  ganglion  (Meckel's)  occupies  the  sphe- 
no-maxillary  fossa,  and  is  of  considerable  size. 

Its  branches  are  divisible  into  four  groups — ascending  de- 
scending, anterior  or  internal,  and  posterior. 

The  branches  of  communication  are  two  small  ascending, 
and  the  posterior  branch,  or  vidian  nerve. 

The  siibfna.villarT/  gsiDgVion.  is  of  small  size  but  very  distinct, 
and  is  situated  in  the  submaxillary  gland. 

Its  branches  of  distribution  are  numerous,  and  ramify  upon 
the  ducts  of  the  gland,  and  upon  Wharton's  duct. 

The  otic  ganglion  (Arnold's)  is  a  small  red  body,  resting 
against  the  inner  surface  of  the  inferior  maxillary  nerve.  It  is 
closely  adherent  to  the  internal  pterygoid  nerve,  and  appears 
like  a  swelling  upon  that  branch. 

The  branches  of  the  otic  ganglion  are,  two  of  distribution 
and  five  of  communication. 


456  THE  THOMSONIAN 

CERVICAL  GANGLIA. 

The  superior  cervical  ganglion  is  long  and  fusiform,  of  a 
greyish  color,  and  smooth  on  the  surface,  and  of  considerable 
thickness.  It  is  a  single  branch,  whicli  ascends  by  the  side  of 
the  internal  carotid,  and  divides  into  two  branches,  which  en- 
ter the  carotid  canal  to  constitute  the  carotid  plexus. 

The  inferior  or  descending  branch,  sometimes  two,  is  the 
cord  of  communication  with  the  middle  cervical  ffanorlion. 

The  cardiac  nerves  are — the  superior,  middle,  and  inferior, 
with  their  branches,  plexuses,  &,c.  There  is  no  constancy  with 
reo^ard  to  the  ori2:in  and  course  of  these  nerves. 

THORACIC  GANGLIA. 

The  thoracic  ganglia  are  twelve  in  number  on  each  side. 
They  are  flattened  and  triangular  or  irregular  in  form,  and 
present  the  peculiar  grey  color  and  pearly  lustre  of  the  other 
sympathetic  ganglia.  They  rest  upon  the  heads  of  the  ribs, 
and  are  covered  in  by  the  pleura  costalis.  The  two  first  and 
the  last  ganglia  are  usually  the  largest. 

The  semilunar  ganglion  is  situated  by  the  side  of  the  coeliac 
axis,  and  communicates  with  the  ganglion  of  the  other  side,  so 
as  to  form  a  gangliform  cirlce,  from  which  branches  pass  off  in 
all  directions,  like  rays  from  a  centre.  Hence  the  entire  circle 
has  been  named  the  solar  plexus. 

From  the  solar  plexus  we  have  derived  the  phrenic,  gastric, 
hepatic,  splenic,  supra-renal  and  renal,  superior  and  inferior 
mesenteric,  and  the  spermatic  plexuses. 

LUMBAR  GANGLIA. 

The  lumbar  ganglia  are  four  in  number  on  each  side,  of  the 
peculiar  pearly  grey  color,  fusiform,  and  situated  upon  the  an- 
terior part  of  the  bodies  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae. 

The  aortic  plexus  is  formed  by  branches  from  the  lumbar 
ganglia,  and  receives  filaments  from  the  solar  and  superior  me- 
senteric plexuses. 

The  hypogastric  plexus  is  formed  by  the  termination  of  the 
aortic  plexus,  and  by  the  union  of  branches  from  the  lower 
lumbar  ganglia.  It  distributes  branches  to  all  the  viscera  of 
the  pelvis,  and  to  the  branches  of  the  internal  iliac  artery. 

SACRAL  GANGLIA. 

The  sacral  ganglia  are  four  or  five  in  number  on  each  side. 
They  are  situated  upon  the  sacrum,  close  to  the  anterior  sacral 
foramina,  and  resemble  the  lumbar  ganglia  in  form  and  mode 
of  connection,  although  they  are  much  smaller  in  size. 


MATERIA    MEDICA,  457 

3dly.  matter  organized  AND  ANIMATED. 

Or  man  possessing  his  faculties  under  the  influence  of  the  five  senses 

which  makes  him  subject  to  disease  and  death,  and  a  return  again 

to  matter,  to  assist  in  the  organization  and  animation  of  other 

BODIES, 

ORGANS  OF  SENSE. 

The  organs  of  sense,  the  instrumeiits  by  which  the  animai 
frame  is  brought  into  relation  with  surrounding  nature,  are  five 
in  number.  Four  of  these  organs  are  situated  within  the  head, 
viz.  the  apparatus  of  smell,  sight,  hearing,  and  taste,  and  the 
remaining  organ,  o( touch,  is  resident  in  the  sliin,  and  is  distri- 
buted over  the  entire  surface  of  the  body. 

THE  NOSE  AND  NASAL  FOSS^. 

The  organ  of  smell  consists  essentially  of  two  parts :  one 
external,  the  nose ;  the  other  internal,  the  nasal  fossas. 

The  nose  is  the  triangular  pyramid  projecting  from  the  cen- 
tre of  the  face,  immediately  above  the  upper  lip.  Superiorly, 
it  is  connected  with  the  forehead,  by  means  of  a  narrow  bridge  ; 
inferiorly,  it  presents  two  openings,  the  nostrils,  which  over- 
hang the  mouth,  and  are  so  constructed  that  the  odor  of  all 
substances  must  be  received  by  the  nose  before  they  can  be  in- 
troduced within  the  lips.  The  septum  between  the  openings 
of  the  nostrils  is  called  the  columna.  Their  entrance  is  guard- 
ed by  a  number  of  stiff  hairs,  which  project  across  the  open- 
ings, and  act  as  a  filter  in  preventing  the  introduction  of  foreio-n 
substances,  such  as  dust  or  insects,  with  the  current  of  air  in- 
tended for  respiration. 

The  anatomical  elements  of  which  the  nose  is  composed  are 
— 1.  Integument.  2.  Muscles.  3.  Bones.  4.  Fibro-cartila- 
2:es.     5.  Mucous  membrane.     6.  Vessels  and  nerves. 

1.  The  integument  forming  the  tip  and  wings  of  the  nose  is 
extremely  thick  and  dense,  so  as  to  be  with  difficulty  separated 
from  the  fibro-cartilage.  It  is  furnished  with  a  number  of  se- 
baceous follicles,  which  by  their  oily  secretion  protect  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  nose  in  excessive  alternations  of  temperature. 
The  sebaceous  matter  of  these  follicles  becomes  of  a  dark  color 
upon  the  surface,  from  the  attraction  of  the  carbonaceous  mat- 
ter floating  in  the  atmosphere :  hence  the  spotted  appearance 
which  the  tip  of  the  nose  presents  in  large  cities.  When  the 
integument  is  firmly  compressed,  the  inspissated  sebaceous  se- 
cretion is  squeezed  out  from  the  follicles,  and,  taking  the  cylin- 
drical form  of  their  excretory  ducts,  has  the  appearance  of  small 
white  maggots  with  black  heads. 

2.  The  muscles  are  brought  into  view  by  reflecting  the  inte- 
gument:   they  are  the  pyramidalis  nasi,  compressor  nasi,  leva- 

30 


458  THE    THOMSONIAN 

tor  labii  superioris  alasqne  nasi,  and  depressor  labii  superioris 
alaeque  nasi.  They  have  been  ah'eady  described  with  the  mus- 
cles of  the  face. 

3.  The  bones  of  the  nose  are  the  nasal,  and  nasal  processes 
of  the  superior  maxillary. 

4.  The  fibro-cartilages  s^ive  form  and  stability  to  the  outwork 
of  the  nose,  providing  at  the  same  time,  by  their  elasticity, 
against  injuries.     They  are  live  in  number — the 

Fibro-cartilage  of  the  septum, 
Two  lateral  tibro-cartilages, 
Two  alar  fibro-cartilages. 

The  fibro-cartilage  of  the  septum,  somewhat  triangular  in 
form,  divides  the  nose  into  its  two  nostrils.  It  is  coimected 
above  with  the  nasal  bones  and  lateral  fibro-cartilages  ;  behind, 
with  the  ethmoidal  septum  and  vomer ;  and  below,  with  the 
palate  processes  of  the  superior  maxillary  bones.  The  alar  fi- 
bro-cartilages and  columna  iiiove  freely  upon  the  fibro-cartilage 
of  the  septum,  bemg  but  loosely  connected  with  it  by  perichon- 
drium. 

The  lateral  fibro-cartilages  are  also  triangular  ;  they  are  con- 
nected, along  the  middle  line,  with  the  fibro-cartilage  of  the 
septum  ;  above,  with  the  nasal  bones  ;  behind,  with  the  nasal 
processes  of  the  superior  maxillary;  and  below,  with  the  alar 
fibro-cartilages. 

Alar  fibro-cartilages. — Each  of  these  cartilages  is  curved  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  correspond  with  the  opening  of  the  nos- 
tril, to  which  it  forms  a  kind  of  rim.  The  inner  portion  is 
loosely  connected  witli  the  same  part  of  the  opposite  cartilage, 
so  as  to  form  the  columna.  It  is  expanded  and  thickened  at 
the  point  of  the  nose,  to  constitute  the  lobe  ;  and,  upon  the  side, 
forms  a  curve  corresponding  with  the  form  of  I  he  ala.  This 
curve  is  prolonged  downwards  and  forwards  in  the  direction  of 
the  posterior  border  of  the  ala  by  three  or  four  small  fibro-carti- 
laginous  plates,  which  are  appendages  to  the  alar  fibro-carti- 
lage. 

The  whole  of  these  fibro-cartilages  are  connected  with  each 
other,  and  to  the  bones,  by  perichondrium,  which,  Irom  ita 
membranous  structure,  permits  of  the  freedom  of  motion  exist- 
ing between  them. 

5.  The  mucous  membrane,  lining  the  interior  of  the  nose,  is 
contitiuous  with  the  skin  externally,  and  with  the  pituitary 
membrane  of  the  nasal  fossas  within.  Around  the  entrance  of 
the  nostrils  it  is  provided  with  numerous  vibrissse. 

6.  Vessels  and  nerves. — The  arteries  of  the  nose  aie  the  la- 
teralis nasi  from  the  facial,  and  the  nasalis  septi  from  the  supe- 
rior coronary. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  459 

Its  nerves  are  the  facial,  infra-orbital,  and  nasal  branch  of  the 
ophthalmic. 

NASAL  FOSSJE. 

To  obtain  a  good  view  of  the  nasal  fossse,  the  face  must  be 
divided  through  the  nose  by  a  vertical  incision,  a  little  to  one 
side  of  the  middle  line. 

The  nasal  ibssge  are  two  irregular,  compressed,  cavities,  ex- 
tending backwards  from  the  nose  to  th«  pharynx.  They  are 
bounded,  superiorly,  by  the  sphenoid  and  ethmoid  bones.  Infe- 
riorly,  by  the  hard  palate;  and  in  the  middle  line  they  are  sepa- 
rated from  each  other  by  a  bony  and  fibro-cartilaginous  septum. 

Upon  the  outer  wall  of  each  fossae,  in  the  dried  skull,  are 
three  projecting  processes,  termed  spongy  bones.  The  two  su- 
perior belong  to  the  ethmoid,  the  inferior  is  a  separate  bone.  In 
the  fresh  fossae  these  are  covered  with  mucous  membrane,  and 
serve  to  increase  its  surface  by  their  projection  and  by  their 
convoluted  form.  The  space  intervenmg  between  the  two  su- 
perior spongy  bones  is  the  superior  meatus  ;  the  space  between 
the  middle  and  inferior  bones  is  the  middle  meatus  ;  and  that 
between  the  inferior  and  the  floor  of  the  fossa,  is  the  inferior 
meatus. 

These  meatuses  are  passages  which  extend  from  before  back- 
wards, and  it  is  in  rushing  through  and  amongst  these  that  the 
atmosphere  deposits  its  odorant  particles  upon  the  mucous 
membrane.  There  are  several  openings  into  the  nasal  fossae  : 
thus,  in  the  superior  meatus  are  the  openings  of  the  sphenoidal 
and  posterior  ethmoidal  cells  ;  in  the  middle,  the  anterior  eth- 
moidal cells,  the  frontal  sinuses,  and  the  antrum  maxillare;  and 
in  the  inferior  meatus,  the  termination  of  the  nasal  duct.  In 
the  dried  bone  are  two  additional  openings,  the  spheno-palatine 
and  the  anterior  palatine  foramen,  the  former  being  situated  in 
the  superior  and  the  latter  in  the  infertor  meatus. 

The  mucous  membrane  of  the  nasal  fossa  is  called  pituitary, 
or  Schneiderian.  The  former  name  being  derived  from  its  se- 
cretion, the  latter  from  Schneider,  Vv'^ho  was  the  first  to  show 
that  the  secretion  of  the  nose  proceeded  from  the  mucous  mem- 
brane, and  not  from  the  brain,  as  was  formerly  imagined.  It 
is  continuous  with  the  general  gastro-pulmonary  mucous  mem- 
brane, and  may  be  traced  through  the  openings  of  the  meatus- 
es, into  the  sphenoidal  and  ethmoidal  cells  ;  into  the  antrum 
maxillare ;  through  the  nasal  duct  to  the  surface  of  the  eye, 
where  it  is  continuous  with  the  conjunctiva ;  along  the  Eusta- 
chian tubes  into  the  tympanum  and  mastoid  cells,"^to  which  it 
forms  the  lining  membrane  ;  and  through  the  posterior  nares 
into  the  pharynx  and  mouth,  and  thence  through  the  lungs 
and  alimentary  canal. 


460  THE  THOMSONIAN 

The  surface  of  this  membrane  is  furnished  with  a  cohimnar 
epithehum  supporting  innumerable  cilia. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  arteries  of  the  nasal  fossae  are  the 
anterior  and  posterior  ethmoidal,  from  the  ophthalmic  artery ; 
and  spheno-palatme,  and  pterygo-palatine,  from  the  internal 
maxillary. 

The  nerves  are,  the  olfactory,  the  spheno-palatine  branches 
from  Meckel's  ganglion,  and  the  nasal  branch  of  the  ophthal- 
mic. The  ultimate  filaments  of  the  olfactory  nerve  terminate 
in  minute  papillae. 

THE  EYE,  WITH  ITS  APPENDAGES. 

The  form  of  the  eyeball  is  that  of  a  sphere,  having  the  seg- 
ment of  a  smaller  sphere  ingrafted  upon  its  anterior  surface, 
which  increases  its  antero-postcrior  diameter.  The  axes  of  the 
two  eyeballs  are  parallel  with  each  other,  but  do  not  correspond 
with  the  axes  of  the  orbits,  which  are  directed  outwards.  The 
optic  nerves  follow  the  direction  of  the  orbits,  and  therefore  en- 
ter the  eyeballs  to  their  nasal  side. 

The  globe  of  the  eye  is  composed  of  tunics  and  humors. 
The  tunics  are  three  in  number, 

1.  Sclerotic  and  cornea, 

2.  Choroid,  iris,  and  ciliary  processes, 

3.  Retina  and  zonula  ciliaris. 

The  humors  are  also  three — 

Aqueous, 
Crystalline  (lens), 
Vitreous. 

1.  The  sclerotic  and  cornea  form  the  external  tunic  of  the 
eyeball,  and  give  to  it  its  peculiar  form.  Four  fifths  of  the 
globe  are  invested  by  the  sclerotic,  the  remaining  fifth  by  the 
cornea. 

The  sclerotic  (hard)  is  a  dense  fibrous  membrane,  thicker  be- 
hind than  in  front.  It  is  continuous,  posteriorly,  with  the 
sheath  of  the  optic  nerve,  which  is  derived  from  the  dura  ma- 
ter, and  it  is  pierced  by  that  nerve,  as  well  as  by  the  ciliary 
nerves  and  arteries.  Anteriorly  it  presents  a  bevelled  edge, 
which  receives  the  cornea  in  the  same  way  that  a  watch  glass 
is  received  by  the  groove  in  its  case.  Its  anterior  surface  is  co- 
vered by  a  thin  tendinous  layer,  the  tunica  albuginea,  derived 
from  the  expansion  of  the  tendons  of  the  four  recti  muscles. 
By  its  posterior  surface  it  gives  attachment  to  the  two  oblique 
muscles.  The  tunica  albuginea  is  covered  for  a  part  of  its  ex- 
tent by  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  front  of  the  eye,  the  con- 
junctiva; and  by  reason  of  the  brilliancy  of  its  whiteness,  gives 
occasion  to  the  common  expression,  "  the  white  of  the  eye." 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


461 


At  the  entrance  of  the  optic  nerve,  the  sclerotic  forms  a  thin 
cribriform  lamella,  which  is  pierced  by  a  number  of  minute 
opening's  for  the  passage  of  the  nervous  filaments.  One  of 
these  openings,  larger  than  the  rest,  and  situated  in  the  centre 
of  the  lamella,  is  the  poms  opticus,  through  which  the  arteria 
centralis  retinas  enters  the  eye. 

The  cornea  is  the  transparent  projecting  layer  that  forms  the 
anterior  fifth  of  the  globe  of  the  eye.  In  its  form  it  resembles  a 
watch  glass.  In  structure  it  consists  of  five  or  six  thin  lamel- 
lae, connected  to  each  other  by  a  delicate  cellular  tissue.  It  is 
covered  by  the  conjunctiva  in  front,  and  lined  by  the  mem- 
brane of  the  aqueous  humor  behind.  By  its  edge,  which  is 
sharp  and  thin,  it  is  received  within  the  bevelled  border  of  the 
sclerotic,  to  which  it  is  very  firmly  attached.  It  is  thicker  than 
the  anterior  portion  of  the  sclerotic. 

The  cornea  is  not  perfectly  circular,  the  transverse  diameter 
being  slightly  greater  than  the  vertical.  This  form  is  parti- 
cularly evident  in  animals.     The  opacity  of  the  cornea,  pro- 

PLATE  93*. 


•  A  Longitudinal  Section  of  the  Globe  of  the  Eye. — 1.  The  sclerotic,  thicker 
behind  than  in  front.  2.  The  cornea,  received  within  the  anterior  margin  of 
the  sclerotic,  and  connected  with  it  by  means  of  a  bevelled  edge.  3.  The  cho- 
roid, connected  anteriorly  with  (4)  the  ciliary  ligament,  and  (5)  the  ciliary 
processes.  6.  The  iris.  7.  The  pupil.  S.  Tlie  third  layer  of  tlie  eye,  the  re- 
tina, terminating  anteriorly  by  an  abrupt  border  at  the  commencement  of  the 
ciliary  processes.  9.  The  canal  of  Petit,  which  encircles  the  lens  (12).  The 
thin  layer  in  front  of  this  canal  is  the  zonula  ciliaris,  a  prolongation  of  the 
vascular  layer  of  the  retina  to  the  lens.  10.  The  anterior  chamber  of  the  eye, 
containing  the  aqueous  humor  ;  the  lining  membrane  by  which  the  humor  is 
secreted,  is  represented  in  the  diagram.  11.  The  posterior  chamber.  12.  The 
lens,  more  convex  behind  than  before,  and  enclosed  in  its  proper  capsule. 
13.  The  vitreous  homor  enclosed  in  the  hyaloid  membrane,  and  in  cells  form- 
ed in  its  interior  by  that  membrane.  14.  A  tubular  sheath  of  the  hyaloid 
membrane,  which  serves  for  the  passage  of  the  artery  of  the  capsule  of  the 
lens.  15.  The  neurilema  of  the  optic  nerve.  16.  Tlie  arteria  centralis  reti- 
nae, embedded  in  its  centre. 


462  THE  THOMSONIAN 

diiced  by  pressure  on  the  globe,  results  from  the  infiltration  of 
fluid  into  the  cellular  tissue  connecting  its  layers.  This  ap- 
pearance cannot  be  produced  in  a  sound  living  eye. 

Dissection. — The  sclerotic  and  cornea  are  now  to  be  dissect- 
ed away  from  the  second  tunic  ;  this,  with  care,  may  be  easily 
performed,  the  only  connections  subsisting  between  them  being 
at  the  circumference  of  the  iris,  the  entrance  of  the  optic  nerve, 
and  the  perforation  of  the  ciliary  nerves  and  arteries.  Pinch 
up  a  fold  of  the  sclerotic  near  its  anterior  circumference,  and 
make  a  small  opening  into  it ;  then  raise  the  edge  of  the  tunic, 
and  with  a  pair  of  fine  scissors,  having  a  probe  point,  divide 
the  entire  circumference  of  the  sclerotic,  and  cut  it  away  bit  by 
bit.  Then  separate  it  from  its  attachment  around  the  circum- 
ference of  the  iris  by  a  gentle  pressure  with  the  edge  of  the 
knife.  The  dissection  of  the  eye  must  be  conducted  under  wa- 
ter. 

In  the  course  of  this  dissection  the  ciliary  nerves  and  long 
ciliary  arteries  will  be  seen  passing  forwards  between  the  scle- 
rotic and  choroid,  to  be  distributed  to  the  iris. 

2.  The  second  tunic  of  the  eyeball  is  formed  by  the  choroid, 
ciliary  ligament  and  iris,  the  ciliary  processes  being  an  appen- 
dage developed  from  its  inner  surface. 

The  choroid  is  a  vascular  membrane,  of  a  rich  chocolate- 
brown  color  upon  its  external  surface,  and  of  a  deep  black  color 
within.  It  is  connected  to  the  sclerotic  externally  by  an  ex- 
tremely fine  cellular  tissue,  and  by  the  passage  of  nerves  and 
vessels.  Internally  it  is  in  simple  contact  with  the  third  tunic 
of  the  eye,  the  retina.  It  is  pierced  posteriorly  for  the  passage 
of  the  optic  nerve,  and  is  connected  anteriorly  with  the  iris,  ci- 
liary process,  and  junction  of  the  cornea  and  sclerotic,  by  a 
dense  white  structure,  the  ciliary  ligament,  which  surrounds 
the  circumference  of  the  iris  like  a  ring. 

The  choroid  membrane  is  composed  of  three  layers: — I.  An 
external  or  venous,  which  consists  principally  of  veins  arrang- 
ed in  a  peculiar  manner  ;  hence  they  have  been  named  vense 
verticosae.  The  marking  upon  the  surface  of  the  membrane 
produced  by  these  veins  resembles  so  many  centres,  to  which  a 
number  of  curved  lines  converge  It  is  this  layer  which  is  con- 
nected with  the  ciliary  li2:ament.  2.  The  middle  or  arterial 
layer  is  formed  principally  by  the  ramifications  of  minute  arte- 
ries, and  secretes  upon  its  surface  the  pigmentum  nigrum.  It 
is  reflected  inwards  at  its  junction  with  the  ciliary  ligament,  so 
as  to  form  the  ciliary  processes.  3.  The  internal  layer  is  a  de- 
licate membrane,  which  presents  a  beautiful  appearance  beneath 
the  microscope  ;  it  is  composed  of  several  laminae  of  regular 
hexagonal  cells,  which  contain  the  granules  of  pigmentum  ni- 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


463 


grum,  and  are  arranged  so  as  to  resemble  a  tesselated  pave- 
ment. 

In  animals,  the  piCTmentum  nigrum,  upon  the  posterior  wall 
of  the  eyeball,  is  replaced  by  a  layer  of  considerable  extent,  and 
of  metalic  brilliancy,  called  the  tapetum. 

The  ciliary  ligament,  or  circle,  is  the  bond  of  union  between 
the  external  and  middle  tunics  of  the  eye,  and  serves  to  con- 
nect the  cornea  and  sclerotic  with  the  iris  and  external  layer  of 
the  clioroid.  It  is  also  the  point  to  which  the  ciliary  nerves 
and  vessels  proceed  previously  to  their  distribution,  and  it  re- 
iceives  the  anterior  ciliary  arteries  through  the  anterior  margui 
of  the  sclerotic.  A  minute  vascular  canal  is  situated  within 
the  ciliary  ligament,  called  the  ciliary  canal,  or  the  canal  of 
Fontana,  from  its  discoverer. 

The  iris  (rainbow)  is  so  named  from  its  variety  of  color  in 
different  individuals;  it  forms  a  septum  between  the  anterior 
and  posterior  chambers  of  the  eye,  and  is  pierced  in  its  centre 
by  a  circular  opening,  which  is  called  the  pupil.  By  its  pe- 
riphery it  is  cormected  with  the  ciliary  liijament,  and  by  its  in- 
ner circumfiennice  forms  the  margin  of  the  pupil;  its  anterior 
surface  looks  towards  the  cornea,  and  the  posterior  towards  the 
ciliary  process  and  lens. 

It  is  composed  of  two  layers,  an  anterior,  or  muscular,  con- 
sisting of  radiating  fibres,  which  converge  from  the  circumfe- 
rence towards  the  centre,  and  have  the  power  of  dilating  the 
pupil;  and  the  circular,  which  surroimd  the  pupil  like  a  sphinc- 
ter, and  by  their  action  produce  contraction  of  its  area.     The 

PLATE  94.* 


•  The  interior  Segment  of  a  Transverse  Section  of  the  Globe  of  the  Eye,  as 
seen  from  within.— I.  The  divided  edge  of  the  three" tunics  ;  sclerotic  choroid 
(the  darlclayer),  and  retina.  2.  The  pupil.  3.  The  iris.  4.  The  ciliary  pro- 
cesses.    5.  The  scalloped  anterior  border  of  the  retina. 


464  THE    THOMSONIAN 

posterior  layer  is  of  a  deep  purple  tint,  and  is  thence  named 
uvea,  from  its  resemblance  in  color  to  a  ripe  grape. 

The  ciliary  processes  may  be  seen  in  two  ways,  either  by  re- 
moving the  iris  from  its  attachment  to  the  ciliary  ligament, 
when  a  front  view  of  the  processes  will  be  obtained,  or  by  mak- 
ing a  transverse  section  through  the  globe  of  the  eye,  when 
they  may  be  examined  from  behind,  as  in  plate  94. 

The  ciliary  processes  consist  of  a  number  of  triangular  folds, 
formed  apparently  by  the  plaiting  of  the  internal  layer  of  the 
choroid.  They  are,  according  to  Zinn,  about  sixty  in  number, 
and  may  be  divided  into  large  and  small,  the  latter  being  situ- 
ated in  the  spaces  between  the  former.  The  periphery  is  con- 
nected with  the  ciliary  ligament,  and  is  continuous  with  the  in- 
ternal layer  of  the  choroid.  The  central  border  is  free,  and 
rests  against  the  circumference  of  the  lens.  The  anterior  sur- 
face corresponds  with  the  uvea;  the  posterior  receives  the  folds 
of  the  zonula  ciliaris  between  its  processes,  and  thus  establishes 
a  connection  between  the  choroid  and  the  third  tunic  of  the 
eye.  The  ciliary  processes  are  covered  with  a  thick  layer  of 
pigmentum  nigrum,  which  is  more  abundant  upon  them,  and 
upon  the  anterior  part  of  the  choroid,  than  upon  the  posterior. 
When  the  pigment  is  washed  ofF,  the  processes  are  of  a  whitish 
color. 

3.  The  third  tunic  of  the  eye  is  the  retina,  which  is  prolong- 
ed forwards  to  the  lens  by  the  zonula  ciliaris. 

Dissection. — If  after  the  preceding  dissection  the  choroid 
membrane  be  carefully  raised  and  removed,  the  eye  being  kept 
under  water,  the  retina  may  be  seen  very  distinctly. 

The  retina  is  composed  of  three  layers — 
External,  or  Jacob's  membrane, 
Middle.,  Nervous  membrane. 

Internal        Vascular  membrane. 

Jacob's  membrane  is  extremely  thin,  and  is  seen  as  a  fioccu- 
lent  film  when  the  eye  is  suspended  in  water.  Examined  by 
the  microscope,  it  is  seen  to  be  composed  of  granules  having  a 
tesselated  arrangement.  Dr.  Jacob  considers  it  a  serous  mem- 
brane. 

The  nervous  membrane  is  the  expansion  of  the  optic  nerve, 
and  forms  a  thin  semi-transparent  bluish  white  layer,  which 
envelopes  the  vitreous  humor,  and  extends  forwards  to  the 
commencement  of  the  ciliary  processes,  where  it  terminates  in 
an  abrupt  scalloped  margin. 

This  layer  has  been  observed  by  Treviranus  to  be  composed 
of  cylindrical  fibres,  which  proceed  from  the  optic  nerve  and 
bend  abruptly  inwards,  near  their  termination,  to  form  the  in- 
ternal papillary  layer,  which  lies  in  contact  with  the  hyaloid 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  465 

membrane ;  each  fibre  constituting  by  its  extremity  a  distinct 
papilla. 

The  vascular  membrane  consists  of  the  ramifications  of  a  mi- 
nute artery,  the  arteria  centralis  retiocC,  and  its  accompanying 
vein  ;  the  artery  pierces  the  optic  nerve  and  enters  the  globe  of 
the  eye  through  the  porus  opticus  in  the  centre  of  the  lamina 
cribrosa.  This  artery  may  be  seen  very  distinctly  by  making 
a  transverse  section  of  the  eyeball.  Its  branches  are  continu- 
ous anteriorly  with  the  zonula  ciliaris. 

This  vascular  layer  forms  distinct  sheaths  for  the  nervous 
papillas,  which  constitute  the  inner  surface  of  the  retina. 

The  retina  is  deficient  posteriorly  at  a  spot  corresponding 
with  the  axis  of  the  globe  of  the  eye.  This  spot  is.  called  the 
foramen  of  Soemmering,  and  is  surrounded  by  a  yellow  halo, 
the  limbus  luteus.  It  exists  only  in  animals  having  the  axis  of 
the  eyeballs  parallel  with  each  other,  as  man,  quadrumana,  and 
some  reptiles,  and  is  said  to  give  passage  to  a  small  lymphatic 
vessel. 

The  zonula  ciliaris  (zonula  of  Zinn)  is  a  thin  vascular  layer, 
which  connects  the  anterior  margin  of  the  retina  with  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  lens.  It  presents  upon  its  surface  a  number 
of  small  folds  corresponding  with  the  ciliary  processes,  between 
which  they  are  received.  These  processes  are  arranged  in  the 
form  of  rays  around  the  lens,  and  the  spaces  between  them  are 
stained   by  the  pigmentum  nigrum  of  the  ciliary  processes. 

PLATE  95.* 


The  Postenor  Segment  of  a  Transverse  Section  of  the  Globe  of  the  Eye 
as  seen  from  within.— 1.  The  divided  edge  of  the  three  tunics.  The  mem- 
brane covering  the  whole  internal  surface  is  the  retina.  2.  The  entrance  of 
the  optic  nerve  with  the  arteria  centralis  retinte  piercing  its  centre.  3,  3.  The 
ramifications  of  the  arteria  centralis.  4.  The  foramen  of  Soemmering,  in  the 
centre  of  the  axis  of  the  eye  ;  the  shade  from  the  sides  of  the  section  obscures 
the  limbus  luteus  which  surrounds  it.  5.  Folds  of  the  retina,  which  general- 
ly  obscure  the  foramen  of  Soemmering  after  the  eye  has  been  opened. 


4-66  THE  THOMSONIAN 

They  derive  their  vessels  from  the  vascular  layer  of  the  retina. 
The  under  surface  of  the  zonula  is  in  contact  witii  the  hyaloid 
membrane,  and  around  the  lens  forms  the  anterior  fluted  wall 
of  the  canal  of  Petit. 

The  cormection  between  these  folds  and  thecihary  processes 
maybe  very  easily  demonstrated  by  dividing  an  eye  transverse- 
ly into  two  portions,  then  raising  the  anterior  half,  and  allowing 
the  vitreous  humor  to  separate  from  its  attachment  by  its  own 
weight.  The  folds  of  the  zonula  will  then  be  seen  to  be  drawn 
out  from  between  the  folds  of  the  ciliary  processes. 

Humors. — The  aqueous  humor  is  situated  in  the  anterior 
and  posterior  chambers  of  the  eye. 

The  anterior  chamber  is  the  space  intervening  between  the 
cornea  in  front,  and  the  iris  and  pupil  behind. 

The  posterior  chamber,  smaller  than  tlie  anterior,  is  the  nar- 
row space  bounded  by  the  posterior  surface  of  the  iris  and  pu- 
pil in  front,  and  by  the  ciliary  processes  and  lens  behind. 

The  two  chambers  are  lined  by  a  thin  layer,  the  secreting 
membrane  of  the  aqueous  humor. 

The  vitreous  humor  forms  the  principal  bulk  of  the  globe  of 
the  eye.  It  is  enclosed  in  a  delicate  membrane,  the  hyaloid, 
which  sends  processes  into  its  interior,  forming  cells  in  which 
tbe  humor  is  retained.  A  small  artery  may  sometimes  be  traced 
through  the  centre  of  the  vitreous  humor  to  the  capsule  of  the 
lens ;  it  is  surrounded  by  a  tubular  sheath  of  the  hyaloid  mem- 
brane.    This  vessel  is  easily  injected  in  the  fcetus. 

The  crystalline  humor  or  lens  is  situated  immediately  behind 
the  pupil,  and  is  surrounded  by  the  ciliary  processes,  which 
slightly  overlap  its  margin.  It  is  more  convex  on  the  posterior 
than  on  the  anterior  surface,  and  is  embedded  in  the  anterior 
part  of  the  vitreous  humor,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  the 
hyaloid  membrane.  It  is  invested  by  a  proper  capsule,  which 
contains  a  small  quantity  of  fluid  called  liquor  Morgagni,  and 
is  retained  in  its  place  by  the  attachment  of  the  zonula  ciliaris. 

The  lens  consists  of  concentric  layers,  of  which  Ihe  external 
are  soft,  the  next  firmer,  and  the  central  form  a  hardened  nucle- 
us. These  layers  are  best  demonstrated  by  boiling,  or  by  im- 
mersion in  alcohol,  when  they  separate  easily  from  each  other. 
Another  division  of  the  lens  takes  place  at  the  same  time ;  it 
splits  into  three  triangular  segments  which  have  the  sharp  edge 
directed  towards  the  centre,  and  the  base  towards  the  circum- 
ference. The  concentric  lamellge  are  composed  of  minute  pa- 
rallel fibres,  which  are  united  with  each  other  by  means  of  scal- 
loped borders  ;  the  convexity  on  the  one  border  fitting  accu- 
rately the  concave  scallop  upon  the  other. 

Immediately  around  the  circumference  of  the  lens  is  a  trian- 
gular canal,  the  canal  of  Petit,  which  is  bounded  in  front  by 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  467 

the  flutings  of  the  zonula  ciharis ;  behind  by  the  hyaloid  mem- 
brane, and  within  by  tlie  border  of  the  lens. 
-  The  vessels  of  the  globe  of  the  eye  are  the  long  and  short 
and  anterior  ciliary  arteries,  and  the  arteria  centralis  retinae. 
The  long  ciliary  arteries,  two  in  number,  pierce  the  posterior 
part  of  the  sclerotic,  and  pass  forward  on  each  side,  between 
that  membrane  and  the  choroid,  to  the  ciliary  ligament,  where 
they  divide  into  two  branches,  which  are  distributed  to  the  iris. 
The  short  ciliary  arteries  pierce  the  posterior  part  of  the  scle- 
rotic coat,  and  are  distributed  to  the  internal  layer  of  the  cho- 
roid membrane.  The  anterior  ciliary  are  branches  of  the  mus- 
cular arteries.  They  enter  the  eye  through  the  anterior  part  of 
the  sclerotic,  and  are  distributed  to  the  iris.  It  is  the  increased 
number  of  these  arteries  in  iritis  that  forms  the  peculiar  red 
zone  around  the  circumference  of  the  cornea. 

The  arteria  centralis  retinas  enters  the  optic  nerve  at  about 
half  an  inch  from  the  globe  of  the  eye,  and  passing  through  the 
porus  opticus  is  distributed  upon  the  inner  snrfoce  of  the  reti- 
na, forming  its  vascular  layer ;  one  branch  pierces  the  centre  of 
the  vitreous  humor,  and  supplies  the  capsule  of  the  lens. 

The  nerves  of  the  eyeball  are  the  optic,  two  ciliary  nerves 
from  the  nasal  branch  of  the  opthalmic,  and  the  ciliary  nerves 
from  the  ciliary  ganglion. 

Observations. — The  sclerotic  is  a  tunic  of  protection,  and  the 
cornea  a  medium  for  the  transmission  of  light.  The  choroid 
supports  the  vessels  destined  for  the  nourishment  of  the  eye, 
and  by  its  pigmentum  nigrum  absorbs  all  loose  and  scattered 
rays  that  might  confuse  the  image  impressed  upon  the  retina. 
The  iris,  by  means  of  its  powers  of  expansion  and  contraction, 
regulates  the  quantity  of  light  admitted  through  the  pupil.  If 
the  iris  be  thin,  and  the  rays  of  light  pass  through  its  substance, 
they  are  immediately  absorbed  by  the  uvea;  and  if  that  layer 
be  insufficient,  they  are  taken  up  by  the  black  pigment  of  the 
ciliary  process. 

In  Albinoes,  where  there  is  an  absence  of  the  pigmentum  ni- 
grum, the  rays  of  light  traverse  the  iris  and  even  the  sclerotic, 
and  so  overwhelm  the  eye  with  light,  that  sight  is  destroyed, 
except  in  the  dimness  of  evening,  or  at  night. 

In  the  manufacture  of  optical  instruments,  care  is  taken  to 
color  their  interior  black,  with  the  same  object — the  absorption 
of  scattered  rays. 

The  transparent  lamellated  cornea  and  the  humors  of  the 
eye  have  for  their  office  the  refraction  of  the  rays  in  such  propor- 
tion as  to  direct  the  image  in  the  most  favorable  manner  up- 
on the  retina.  Where  the  refracting  medium  is  too  great,  as 
in  over  convexity  of  the  cornea  and  lens,  the  image  falls  short 


468  THE   THOMSONIAN 

of  the  retina  (near-sightedness) ;  and  where  it  is  too  little,  the 
imaf^e  is  thrown  beyond  the  nervons  membrane  (far-sightedness). 
These  conditions  are  rectified  by  the  use  of  spectacles,  which 
provide  a  differently  refracting  medium  external  to  the  eye,  and 
thereby  correct  the  transmission  of  light. 

APPENDAGES  OF  THE  EYE. 

The  appendages  of  the  eye  are  the  eyebrows,  eyelids,  con- 
junctiva, caruncula  laciiryumlis,  and  the  lachrymal  apparatus. 

The  eyebrows  are  two  projecting  arches  of  integument,  co- 
vered with  short  thick  hairs,  which  form  the  upper  boundary 
of  the  orbits.  They  are  connected  beneath  with  the  orbicula- 
ris, occipito-frontalis,  and  corrugator  supercilii  muscles  ;  their 
use  is  to  shade  the  eyes  from  a  too  vivid  light,  or  protect  them 
from  particles  of  dust  and  moisture  flowing  over  the  forehead. 

The  eyelids  are  two  valvular  layers  placed  in  front  of  the 
eye,  and  serve  to  defend  it  from  injury  by  their  closure.  When 
drawn  open,  they  leave  between  them  an  eliptic  space,  the  an- 
gles of  which  are  called  canthi.  Near  to  the  inner  canthus, 
two  small  projections  are  observed  on  both  lids,  upon  which 
are  seen  the  openings  of  the  lachrymal  ducts. 

The  eyelids  have,  entering  into  their  structure,  integument^ 
orbicularis  muscle^  tarsal  cartilages,  Meibomian  glands,  and 
conjunctiva. 

The  tegumentary  cellular  tissue  of  the  eyelids  is  remarkable 
for  its  looseness  and  for  the  entire  absence  of  adipose  substance. 
It  is  particularly  liable  to  serous  infiltration.  The  fibres  of  the 
orbicularis  muscle  covering  the  eyelids  are  extremely  thin  and 
pale. 

The  tarsal  cartilages  are  two  thin  lamellae  of  fibro-cartilage, 
which  give  form  and  support  to  the  eyelids.  The  superior  is 
of  a  semilunar  form,  broad  in  the  middle,  and  tapering  to  each 
extremity.  Its  lower  border  is  broad  and  flat,  its  upper  is  thin, 
and  gives  attachment  to  the  levator  palpebras  and  to  the  fibrous 
membrane  of  the  lids. 

The  inferior  fibro-cartilage  is  a  narrow  elliptical  band  situat- 
ed in  the  substance  of  the  lower  lid.  Its  upper  border  is  flat, 
and  corresponds  with  the  flat  edge  of  the  upper  cartilage.  The 
lower  is  held  in  its  place  by  the  fibrous  membrane.  The  car- 
tilages do  not  extend  quite  so  far  as  the  angles  of  the  lids. 

The  fibrous  membrane  of  the  lids  is  firmly  attached  to  the 
periosteum  around  the  margin  of  the  orbit  by  its  circumference, 
and  to  the  tarsal  cartilages  by  its  central  margin.  It  is  thick 
and  dense  on  the  outer  half  of  the  orbit,  but  becomes  thin  to  its 
inner  side.  Its  use  is  to  retain  the  tarsal  cartilages  in  their 
place,  and  give  support  to  the  lids  ;  hence  it  has  been  named 
the  broad  tarsal  ligament. 

The  Meibomian  glands  are  embedded  in  the  internal  surface 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  469 

of  the  cartilages,  and  are  very  distinctly  seen  on  examining  the 
inner  surface  of  the  lids.  They  have  the  appearance  of  paral- 
lel strings  of  pearls,  about  twenty  or  twenty-four  upon  each 
cartilage,  and  open  by  minute  foramina  upon  the  edges  of  the 
lids.  They  correspond  in  length  with  the  breadth  of  the  carti- 
lage, and  are  consequently  longer  in  the  upper  than  in  the  low- 
er lid. 

Each  gland  consists  of  a  single  lengthened  follicle  or  tube, 
into  which  a  number  of  small  chistered  follicles  open ;  the  lat- 
ter are  so  numerous  as  almost  to  conceal  the  tube  by  which  the 
secretion  is  poured  out  upon  the  margin  of  the  lids. 

The  edges  of  the  eyelids  are  furnished  with  a  triple  row  of 
long  thick  hairs,  which  curve  upwards  from  the  upper  lid,  and 
downwards  from  the  lower,  so  that  they  may  not  interlace  with 
each  other  in  the  closure  of  the  eyelids,  and  prove  an  impedi- 
ment to  the  opening  of  the  eyes.  These  are  the  eyelashes,  im- 
portant organs  of  defence  to  the  sensitive  surface  of  so  delicate 
an  organ  as  the  eye. 

The  conjunctiva  is  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  eye.  It  co- 
vers the  whole  of  its  anterior  surface,  and  is  then  reflected  up- 
on the  lids,  so  as  to  form  their  internal  layer.  It  is  very  thin, 
and  closely  adherent  where  it  covers  the  cornea,  and  no  vessels 
can  be  traced  into  it.  Upon  the  sclerotica  it  is  thicker  and  less 
adherent,  and  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  lids  is  connected  by 
loose  cellular  tissue.  It  is  continuous  with  the  general  gastro- 
pulmonary  mucous  membrane,  and  sympathises  in  its  aflec- 
tions,  as  may  be  observed  in  various  diseases.  From  the  sur- 
face of  the  eye  it  may  be  traced  through  the  lachrymal  ducts 
into  the  lachrymal  gland  ;  along  the  edges  of  the  lids  it  is  con- 
tinuous with  the  mucous  lining  of  the  Meibomian  glands,  and 
at  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye  may  be  followed  through  the  punc- 
ta  lachrymalia  into  the  lachrymal  sac,  and  thence  downwards 
through  the  nasal  duct  into  the  inferior  meatus  of  the  nose. 

This  membrane  is  coated  with  a  lamellated  epithelium,  com- 
posed of  vesicles  and  flattened,  scales,  with  central  nuclei. 

The  caruncula  lachrymalis  is  the  small  reddish  body  which 
occupies  the  inner  angle  or  canthus  of  the  eye.  In  health  it 
presents  a  bright  pink  tint,  in  sickness  it  loses  its  color  and  be- 
comes pale.  It  consists  of  an  assemblage  of  mucous  follicles, 
and  is  the  source  of  the  whitish  secretion  which  so  constantly 
forms  at  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye.  It  is  frequently  found 
studded  with  short  hairs. 

Immediately  to  the  outer  side  of  the  caruncula  is  a  slight  du- 
plicature  of  the  conjunctiva,  called  plica  semilunaris,  w-liich  is 
the  rudiment  of  the  third  lid  of  animals,  and  membrana  nictitans 
of  birds. 

Vessels  and  nerve.s. — The  palpebrse  are  supplied  internally 


470  THE    THOMSOMIAN 

with  arteries  from  the  ophthcahnic,  and  externally  from  the  fa- 
cial and  transverse  facial.  Their  nerves  are  branches  of  the 
fifth  and  of  the  facial. 

LACHRYMAL  APPARATUS. 

The  lachrymal  apparatus  consists  of  the  lachrymal  gland 
with  its  excretory  ducts  ;  the  puncta  lachrymalia,  and  lachry- 
mal ducts  ;    the  lachrymal  sac  and  nasal  duct. 

The  lachrymal  gland  is  a  small,  flattened  bilobate  body,  situ- 
ated at  the  upper  and  outer  angle  of  the  eye,  resting  upon  the 
eyeball  by  its  under  surface,  and  against  the  wall  of  the  orbit 
by  the  upper.  Its  secretion  is  poured  out  upon  the  surface  of 
the  conjunctiva  by  seven  small  excretory  ducts. 

Lachrymal  ducts. — Near  to  the  inner  canthus  are  two  slight 
projections  on  the  edges  of  the  eyelids.  These  are  the  lachry- 
mal tubercles  ;  and  upon  the  point  of  each  may  be  seen  a  smaJl 
opening,  the  punctam  lachrymals,  the  commencement  of  the 
corresponding  lachrymal  duct.  From  these  points  the  lachry- 
mal ducts  proceed  to  the  lachrymal  sac.  The  superior  duct  at 
first  ascends,  and  then  turns  suddenly  inwards  towards  the  sac, 
forming  an  abrupt  angle.  The  inferior  duct  forms  the  same 
kind  of  angle,  by  descending  at  first,  and  then  turning  abruptly 
inwards.  They  are  dense  and  elastic  in  structure,  and  remain 
constantly  open,  so  that  they  act  like  capillary  tubes  in  ab- 
sorbing the  tears  from  the  surface  of  the  eye.  The  two  fasci- 
culi of  the  tensor  tarsi  muscle  are  inserted  into  these  ducts,  and 
serve  to  draw  them  inwards. 

The  lachrymal  sac  is  the  upper  extremity  of  the  nasal  duct, 
and  is  scarcely  more  dilated  than  the  rest  of  the  canal.  It  is 
iodo-ed  in  the  groove  of  the  lachrymal  bone,  and  is  often  distin- 
guished internally  from  thenasal  duct  by  a  semilunar  or  circu- 
lar valve.  It  consists  of  mucous  membrane,  but  is  covered  in 
and  retained  in  its  place  by  a  fibrous  expansion,  derived  from 
the  tendon  of  the  orbicularis,  which  is  inserted  into  the  ridge 
on  the  lachrymal  bone  ;  it  is  also  covered  by  the  tensor  tarsi 
muscle,  which  arises  from  the  same  ridge,  and  in  its  action  up- 
on the  lachrymal  ducts  may  serve  to  compress  the  lachrymal 

sac. 

The  nasal  duct  is  a  short  canal,  directed  downwards,  back, 
wards,  and  a  little  inwards,  to  the  inferior  meatus  of  the  nose 
where  it  terminates  by  an  expanded  orifice.  It  is  lined  by  the' 
mucous  membrane,  which  is  continuous  with  the  conjunctiva 
above  and  the  pituitiary  membrane  of  the  nose  below.  Obstruc- 
tion from  inflammation  and  suppuration  of  the  duct  constitute 
the  disease  called  fistula  lachrymalis. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  lachrymal  gland  is  supplied  with 
blood  by  the  lachrymal  branch  of  the  ophthalmic  artery,  and 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  471 

with  nerves  by  the  lachrymal  branch  of  the  ophthalmic  and  or- 
bital branch  of  the  superior  maxillary. 

THE  ORGAN  OF  HEARING. 

The  ear  is  composed  of  three  parts.  1,  External  ear,  2, 
Middle  ear,  or  tympanum.     3.  Internal  ear,  or  labyrinth. 

The  external  ear  consists  of  two  portions,  the  pinna  and 
meatus;  the  former  representing  a  kind  of  funnel,  which  col- 
lects the  vibrations  of  the  atmosphere,  called  sounds,  and  the 
latter  a  tube  which  conveys  the  vibrations  to  the  tympanum. 

The  pinna  presents  a  number  of  folds  and  hollows  upon  its 
surface,  which  have  diflerent  names  assigned  to  them.  Thus 
the  external  folded  margin  is  called  the  helix  (a  fold).  The 
elevation  parallel  to  and  m  front  of  the  helix  is  called  antihelix 
(opposite).  The  pointed  process,  projecting  like  a  valve  over 
the  opening  of  the  ear  from  the  face,  is  called  the  tragus  (goal), 
probably  from  being  sometimes  covered  with  bristly  hair  like 
that  of  a  goat;  and  a  tubercle  opposite  to  this  is  the  antitragus. 
The  lower  dependent  and  fleshy  portion  of  the  pinna  is  the  lo- 
bulus.  The  space  between  the  helix  and  antihelix  is  named 
the  fossa  innominata.  Another  depression  is  observed  at  the 
upper  extremity  of  the  antihelix,  which  bifurcates  and  leaves  a 
triangular  space  between  its  branches,  called  the  scaphoid  fos- 
sa ;  and  the  large  central  space  to  which  all  the  channels  con- 
verge, is  the  concha,  which  opens  directly  into  the  meatus. 

The  pinna  is  composed  of  integument,  fibro-cartilas^e,  liga- 
ments, and  muscles. 

The  integument  is  thin,  and  closely  connected  with  the  fibro- 
cartilage. 

The  fibro-cartilage  gives  form  to  the  pinna,  and  is  folded  so 
as  to  produce  the  various  convexities  and  grooves  which  have 
been  described  upon  its  surface. 

The  helix  commences  in  the  concha,  and  partially  divides 
that  cavity  into  two  parts  ;  on  its  anterior  border  is  a  tubercle 
for  the  attachment  of  the  attrahens  aurem  muscle,  and  a  little 
above  this  a  small  vertical  fissure,  the  fissure  of  the  helix.  The 
termination  of  the  helix  and  antihelix  forms  a  lengthened  pro- 
cess, the  processus  caudatus,  which  is  separated  from  the  con- 
cha by  an  extensive  fissure.  Upon  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
tragus  is  another  fissure,  the  fissure  of  the  tragus,  and  in  the  lo- 
bulus  the  fibro-cartilage  is  wholly  deficient."  The  fibro-carti- 
lage of  the  meatus,  at  the  upper  and  anterior  part  of  the  cylin- 
der, is  divided  from  the  concha  by  a  fissure  which  is  closed  in 
the  entire  ear  by  ligamentous  fibres  ;  it  is  firmly  attached  at  its 
termination  to  the  processus  auditorius. 

The  ligaments  of  the  external  ear  are  those  which  attach  the 
pinna  to  the  side  of  the  head,  viz.  the  anterior,  posterior,  and  11- 


472 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


^ament  of  the  tragus  ;  and  those  of  the  fibro-cartilage,  which 
serve  to  preserve  its  folds  and  connect  the  opposite  margins  of 
the  fissures.  The  latter  are  two  in  number— the  ligament  be- 
tween the  concha  and  the  processus  caudatus,  and  the  broad 
ligament  which  extends  from  the  upper  margin  of  the  fibro- 
cartilao-e  of  the  tragus  to  the  helix,  and  completes  the  meatus, 
The^proper  muscles  of  the  pinna  are— the 

Major  helicis, 

Minor  helicis, 

Tragicus, 

Antitragicus, 

Transversus  auriculae. 

The  major  helicus  is  a  narrow  band  of  muscular  fibres,  situ- 
ated upon  the  anterior  border  of  the  helix,  just  above  the  tragus. 

PLATE  96.* 


•  A  Diagram  of  the  Ear. — p.  The  pinna,  t.  The  tj-mpanum.  I.  The  laby- 
rynth.  1.  The  upper  part  of  the  helix.  2.  The  antihelix.  3.  The  tragus.  4. 
The  antitragus.  5.  The  lobulus.  6.  The  concha.  7.  The  iipper  part  of  the 
fossa  innoininata.  8.  The  meatus.  9.  The  membrana  tjTiipani,  divided  by 
the  section.  10.  The  three  little  bones,  crossing  the  area  of  the  tympanum, 
malleus,  incus,  and  stapes  ;  the  foot  of  the  stapes  blocks  up  the  fenestra 
ovalis  upon  the  inner  wall  of  the  tympanum.  11.  The  promontory.  12.  The 
fenestra  rotunda  ;  the  dark  opening  above  the  ossicula  leads  into  the  mastoid 
cells.  13.  The  Eustachian  tube  ;  the  little  canal  upon  this  tube  contains  the 
tensor  lympani  muscle,  in  its  passage  to  the  tympanum.  14.  The  vestibule. 
15.  Thethree  semicircular  canals,  horizontal,  perpendicular  and  oblique.  16. 
The  ampulli£  upon  the  perpendicular  and  horizontal  canals.  17.  The  cochlea. 
IS.  The  convexities  of  the  two  tubuli  which  communicate  with  the  tympanum 
and  vestibule ;  the  one  is  the  scala  tympaui,  terminating  at  12;  the  other  io 
the  scala  vestibuli. 


i 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  473 

The  minor  helicis  is  placed  upon  the  posterior  border  of  the 
helix,  and  at  its  commencement  in  the  fossa  of  the  concha. 

The  tracrjcuf  is  a  thin  quadrilateral  layer  of  muscular  fibres, 
situated  npon  the  tragus. 

The  aniitragicus  arises  from  the  antitragus,  and  is  inserted 
into  the  posterior  extremity,  or  processus  caudatus  of  the  helix. 

The  transversus  auriculae,  partly  tendinous  and  partly  mus- 
cular, extends  transversely  from  the  convexity  of  the  concha  to 
that  of  (he  h.elix,  on  the  posterior  surface  of  the  pinna. 

These  muscles  are  rudimentary  in  the  human  ear,  and  de- 
serve only  the  titles  of  muscles  in  the  ears  of  animals.  Two 
other  muscles  are  described  by  Mr.  Tod,  the  obliquus  auris 
and  contractor  meatus,  or  trago-helicus. 

The  meatus  audiior'ms  is  a  canal  partly  cartilagenous  and 
partly  osseous,  about  an  inch  in  length,  which  extends  inv/ards 
and  a  little  forwards,  from  the  concha  to  the  tympanum.  It  is 
narrower  in  the  middle  than  at  each  extremity,  forms  an  oval 
cylinder,  the  Ions:  diameter  being  vertical,  and  is  slightly  curv- 
ed upon  itself,  the  concavity  looking  downwards. 

It  is  lined  by  an  extremely  thin  pouch  of  cuticle,  which, 
when  witlidrawn  after  maceration,  preserves  the  form  of  the 
meatus.  Some  stiff  short  hairs  are  also  found  in  its  interior, 
which  stretch  across  the  tube,  and  prevent  the  ingress  of  insects 
and  dust.  Beneath  the  cuticle  are  a  number  of  small  cerumi- 
nous  follicles,  which  secrete  the  wax  of  the  ear. 

Vessel>(  and  nerves. — The  piima  is  plentifully  supplied  with 
arteries,  by  the  anterior  auricular  from  the  temporal,  and  by 
the  posterior  auricular  from  the  external  carotid. 

Its  nerves  are  derived  from  the  auricular  branch  of  the  fifth, 
and  the  auricularis  magnus  of  the  cervical  plexus. 

Tympamnn — The  tympanum  is  an  irregular  bony  cavity, 
compressed  from  without  inwards,  and  situated  within  the  pe- 
trous bone.  It  is  bounded  exteriuilly  by  the  meatus  and  mem- 
braua  tympani;  internally  by  its  inner  wall,  and  in  its  circum- 
ference by  the  petrous  bone  and  mastoid  cells. 

The  membrana  tympani  is  stretched  obliquely  from  above 
downwards  across  the  extremity  of  the  meatus  auditorius.  and 
gives  attachment  by  its  centre  and  inner  surface  to  the  handle 
of  the  malleus.  It  is  depressed  towards  the  centre,  being  con- 
cave towards  the  meatus,  and  convex  towards  the  tympanum, 
and  is  composed  of  three  layers,  an  external  cuticular,  middle  fi- 
brous and  muscular,  and  internal  mucous,  derived  from  the 
mucous  lining  of  the  tympanum. 

The  tympanum  contains  three  email  bones,  ossicula  auditus, 
viz.  the  malleus,  incus,  and  stapes. 

The  malleus  (hammer)  consists  of  ahead,  neck,  handle  (ma- 
nubrium), .md  two  processes,  long  (gracilis),  and  short  (brevis). 

31 


474  THE    THOMSONIAN 

It  is  attached  by  the  manubrium  to  the  membrana  tympani,  be- 
ing enclosed  between  the  mucous  and  the  fibrous  layer,  and 
extending  by  its  extremity  to  near  the  middle  ofHhe  membrane. 
The  lono-  process  descends  to  the  fissura  Glaseri,  and  gives  at- 
tachment to  the  laxator  tym))ani  muscle.  Into  the  short  pro- 
cess is  inserted  the  tendon  of  the  tensor  tympani,  and  the  head 
of  the  bone  articulates  with  the  incus. 

The  incus  (anvil)  is  named  from  an  imagined  resemblance  to 
an  anvil.  It  has  also  been  likened  to  a  bicuspid  tootii,  having 
one  root  longer  and  widely  separated  from  the  other.  It  con- 
sists of  two  processes,  which  unite  nearly  at  right  angles,  and 
at  their  junction  form  a  flattened  body,  to  articulate  with  the 
head  of  the  malleus.  The  short  process  is  free  ;  the  long  pro- 
cess descends  nearly  parallel  with  the  handle  of  the  malleus, 
and  curves  inwards  near  to  its  termination.  At  its  extremity 
is  a  small  globular  projection,  the  os  orbiculare,  which  is  a  dis- 
tinct bone  in  the  foetus,  but  becomes  anchylosed  to  the  long 
process  of  the  incus  in  the  adult.  It  articulates  with  the  head 
of  the  stapes. 

The  stapes  is  shaped  like  a  stirrup,  to  which  it  bears  a  close 
resemblance.  Its  head  articulates  with  the  os  orbiculare,  and 
the  two  branches  are  connected  by  their  extremities  with  a  flat 
oval-shaped  plate,  representing  the  foot  of  the  stirrup,  which 
fits  accurately  the  opening  between  the  tympanum  and  the  ves- 
tibule, the  fenestra  ovalis.  The  neck  of  the  stapes  gives  attach- 
ment to  the  stapedius  muscle. 

The  muscles  of  the  tympanum  are  four  in  number — the 

Tensor  tympani, 
Laxator  tympani, 
Laxator  tympani  minor, 
Stapedius. 

The  tensor  tympani  arises  from  the  spinous  process  of  the 
sphenoid,  from  the  petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  and 
from  the  Eustachian  tube,  and  passes  forwards  in  a  distint  ca- 
nal, separated  from  the  tube  by  the  processus  cochlearifoimis, 
to  be  inserted  into  the  handle  of  the  malleus,  immediately  below 
the  commencement  of  the  processus  gracilis. 

The  laxator  tympani  arises  from  the  spinous  process  of  the 
sphenoid  bone,  and  passes  through  an  opening  in  the  fissura 
Glaseri,  to  be  inserted  into  the  long  process  of  the  malleus. 

The  laxator  tympani  minor  arises  from  the  upper  margin  of 
the  meatus,  and  is  inserted  into  the  handle  of  the  malleus,  near 
to  the  processus  brevis. 

The  stapedius  arises  from  the  interior  of  the  pyramid,  and 
escapes  from  its  summit,  to  be  inserted  into  the  neck  of  the 
stapes. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  475 

The  openings  in  the  tympanum  are  ten  in  number,  five  large 
and  five  small ;  they  are — 

Large  Openings.  Small  Openings. 

Meatus  auditorius,  Entrance  of  the  chorda  tympani. 

Fenestra  ovalis,  Exit  of  the  chorda  tympani, 

Fenestra  rotunda,  For  the  laxator  tympani. 

Mastoid  cells,  For  the  tensor  tympani, 

Eustachian  tube.  For  the  stapedius. 

The  opening  of  the  meatus  auditorius  has  been  previously 
described. 

The  fenestra  ovalis  is  an  oval  opening,  situated  in  the  upper 
part  of  the  inner  wall  of  the  tympanum,  directly  opposite  the 
meatus ;  it  is  the  opening  of  communication  between  the  tym- 
panum and  vestibule,  and  is  closed  by  the  foot  of  the  stapes  and 
by  the  lining  membranes  of  both  cavities. 

The  fenestra  rotunda  is  somewhat  triangular  in  its  form,  and 
situated  in  the  inner  wall  of  the  tympanum,  below  and  rather 
posterior  to  the  fenestra  ovalis,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  a 
bony  elevation  called  the  promontory.  It  serves  to  establish  a 
communication  between  the  tympanum  and  the  cochlea.  In 
the  fresh  subject  it  is  closed  by  a  proper  membrane,  as  well  as 
by  the  mucous  lining  of  both  cavities. 

The  mastoid  cells  are  very  numerous,  and  occupy  the  whole 
of  the  interior  of  the  mastoid  process,  and  part  of  the  petrous 
bone.  They  communicate  by  a  large  irregular  opening  with 
the  upper  and  posterior  circumference  of  the  tympanum. 

The  Eustachian  tube  is  a  canal  of  communication  extending 
obhqucly  between  the  pharynx  and  the  anterior  circumference 
of  the  tympanum.  In  structure  it  is  partl^^  fibro-cartilagenous 
and  partly  osseous,  is  broad  and  expanded  at  its  pharyngeal  ex- 
tremity, and  narrow  and  compressed  at  the  tympanum. 

The  smaller  openings  serve  for  the  transmission  of  the  chor- 
da tympani  nerve,  and  three  of  the  muscles  of  the  tympanum. 

The  opening  by  which  the  chorda  tympani  enters  the  tym- 
panum is  near  the  root  of  the  pyramid,  at  about  the  middle  of 
the  posterior  wall. 

The  opening  of  exit  for  the  chorda  tympani  is  at  the  fissura 
Glaseri  in  the  anterior  wall  of  the  tympanum. 

The  opening  for  the  laxator  tympani  muscle  is  also  situated 
in  the  fissura  Glaseri,  in  the  anterior  wall  of  the  tympanum. 

The  opening  lor  the  tensor  tympani  muscle  is  in  the  anterior 
wall,  immediately  above  the  opening  of  the  Eustachian  tube. 

The  opening  for  the  stapedius  muscle  is  at  the  apex  of  a  co- 
nical bony  eminence,  called  the  pyramid,  which  is  situated  on 
the  posterior  wall  of  the  tympanum,  immediately  behind  the  fe- 
nestra ovalis. 


476  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Directly  above  the  fenestra  ovalis  is  a  rounded  ridge  formed 
by  the  projection  of  the  aqiuicductus  Fallopii, 

Beneath  the  fenestra  ovalis,  and  separatin^r  it  from  the  fenes- 
tra rotuda,  is  the  promontory,  a  rounded  projection  cliannelled 
upon  its  surface  by  three  small  grooves,  which  lodge  the  three 
tympanic  branches  of  Jacobson's  nerve. 

The  foramina  and  processes  of  the  tympanum  may  be  ar- 
ranged, according  to  their  situation,  into  four  groups. 

1.  In  the  external  wall  is  the  meatus  auditorius,  closed  by 
the  membrana  tympani. 

2.  In  the  inner  wall,  from  above  downwards,  are  the 

Ridge  of  the  aquseductus  Fallopii, 

Fenestra  ovalis, 

Promontory, 

Grooves  for  Jacobson's  nerve. 

Fenestra  rotunda. 

3.  In  the  posterior  wall  are,  the 

Opening  of  the  mastoid  cells, 

Pyramid. 

Opening  for  the  stapedius, 

Apertura  chordae  (entrance). 

4.  In  the  anterior  wall  are,  the 

Eustachian  tube. 
Opening  for  the  tensor  tympani, 
Opening  for  the  laxator  tympani, 
Apertura  chorda3  (exit). 

The  tympanum  is  lined  by  a  vascular  mucous  membrane; 
which  invests  the  ossicula  and  chorda  tympani,  and  forms  the 
internal  layer  of  the  membrana  tympani.  From  the  tympanum 
it  is  reflected  into  the  mastoid  cells,  which  it  lines  throughout, 
and  passes  through  the  Eustachian  tube,  to  become  continuous 
with  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  pharynx. 

Vessels  and  nsrves. — The  arteries  of  the  tympanum  are  de- 
rived from  the  internal  maxillary,  internal  carotid,  and  posteri- 
or auricular. 

Its  nerves  are— 1.  Minute  branches  of  the  facial,  which  are 
distributed  to  the  muscles.  2.  The  chorda  tympani,  which 
leaves  the  facial  nerve  near  the  stylomastoid  foramen,  and  arch- 
es upwards  to  enter  the  tympanum  at  the  foot  of  the  pyramid  j 
it  then  passes  forwards  between  the  handle  of  the  malleus  and 
Ions:  process  of  the  incus,  to  the  opening  in  the  fissura  Glaseri. 
3.  The  tympanic  branches  of  Jacobson's  nerve,  which  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  membranes  of  the  fenestra  ovjilis  and  fenestra 
rotunda,  and  to  the  Eustachian  tube,  and  form  a  plexus  by 
communicating  with  the  carotid  plexus  and  otic  ganglion. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  477 

INTERNAL  EAR. 

The  internal  ear  is  called  labT/rinth,  from  the  complexity  of 
its  commanications;  It  consists  of  a  series  of  cavities  which  are 
channelled  through  the  substance  of  the  petrous  bone,  and  is 
situated  between  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum  and  the  meatus 
audi  tori  us  in  tern  us. 

The  labyrinth  consists  of  the 

Vestibule, 

Semicircular  canals, 
Cochlea. 

The  vestibule  is  a  small  oval  cavity,  situated  immediately 
■within  the  inner  wall  of  the  tympanum.  It  is  named  vestibule, 
from  being,  as  it  were,  the  hall  of  communication  between  the 
other  cavities  of  the  ear.  It  therefore  presents  a  number  of 
openings,  corresponding  with  these  different  cavities.  They 
may  be  arranged,  like  those  of  the  tympanum,  into  large  and 
small. 

The  large  openings  are  seven  in  number,  viz. — the 

Fenestra  ovalis, 

Scala  vestibuli. 

Five  openings  of  the  three  semicircular  canals. 

The  small  openings  are — the 

Aquoeductus  vestibuli, 

Openings  for  small  arteries, 

Three  openings  for  branches  of  the  auditory  nerve. 

The  fenestra  ovalis  is  closed  by  the  lining  membrane  of  the 
^ff-estibule,  and  by  the  foot  of  the  stapes.  It  is  the  opening  into 
the  tympanum. 

The  opening  of  the  scala  vestibuli  is  the  communication  be- 
tween the  vestibule  and  the  cochlea. 

The  aqus'.ductus  vestibuli  is  the  commencement  of  the  small 
canal  which  opens  upon  the  posterior  surface  of  the  petrous 
bone.  It  gives  passage  to  a  small  artery,  and  to  a  small  vein 
which  terminates  in  the  superior  petrosal  sinus. 

The  openings  for  the  arteries  and  nerves  are  situated  in  the 
internal  wall  of  the  vestibule,  and  correspond  with  the  termina- 
tion of  the  meatus  auditorius  internus. 

The  semicircular  canals  are  three  bony  passages  which 
communicate  with  the  vestibule ;  one  is  perpendicular.in  its  di- 
rection, and  corresponds  with  a  tubercle  upon  the  anterior  sur- 
face of  the  petrous  bone  ;  another  is  oblique;  and  the  third  ho- 
rizontal. Each  canal  presents  a  dilatation  at  one  extremity, 
which  is  called  ampulla.  The  two  undilated  extremities  of 
the  perpendicular  and  oblique  canals  unite  to  ibrm  a  single 


478  THE  THOMSONIAN 

tube ;  all  the  others  open  singly  into  the  vestibule — hence  the 
five  openings  of  the  three  canals. 

The  vestibule  contains  two  sacs,  forme(^  by  the  expansion  of 
the  auditory  nerve.  The  larger  of  these  is  the  utriculus  com- 
munis, the  smaller  the  sacculus  proprius.  The  semicircular 
canals  contain  tubes  of  nervous  membrane,  which  communi- 
cate with  the  utriculus  communis,  and  form  three  dilatations, 
corresponding  with  the  ampullae  at  the  extremities  of  the  ca- 
nals. These  sacs,  together  with  the  nervous  tubes  lodged  in 
the  canals,  contain  a  limpid  secretion,  which  is  called  liquor  of 
Cotunnius.  The  sacs  likewise  contain  a  calcareous  deposit, 
which  is  analogous  to  the  otolites,  or  calcareous  crystalline 
masses  found  in  the  vestibular  sacs  of  fishes. 

The  sacs  and  membranous  canals  do  not  completely  fill  the 
cavities  of  the  bone,  but  leave  a  space  which  is  occupied  by  an- 
other fluid,  the  liquor  of  Scarpa,  or  aqua  labyrinthi. 

The  cochlea  (snail  shell)  is  a  spiral  canal,  which  describes 
two  turns  and  a  half  round  a  central  pillar  which  is  called  mo- 
diolus. It  is  situated  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  petrous  bone, 
its  base  being  directed  backwards  and  inwards,  and  correspond- 
ing with  the  termination  of  the  cul-de-sac  of  the  meatus  audi- 
torius  internus. 

The  canal  of  the  cochlea  is  divided  into  two  equal  parts  by  a 
thin  bony  lamina  (lamina  spiralis),  which  is  wound  spirally 
around  the  modiolus.  The  two  half  canals,  thus  formed,  are 
called  scala  tympani  and  seal  a  vestibuli. 

At  the  apex  of  the  cochlea  the  two  scalae  communicate,  and 
form  a  dilated  cavity,  which  is  termed  the  cupola.  The  lami- 
na spiralis  is  not  continued  entirely  across  the  canal  of  the 
cochlea,  but  is  completed  by  the  mucous  membrane  which  lines 
its  interior.  Near  to  the  termination  of  tlie  scala  tympani  is 
the  opening  of  a  small  canal,  aquseductus  cochleae,  which  passes 
backwards  to  the  jugular  fossa.  It  transmits  a  small  vein  from 
the  cochlea,  which  opens  into  the  commencement  of  the  inter- 
nal jugular  vein. 

The  cavity  of  the  cochlea  is  lined  throughout  by  a  thin  mu- 
cous membrane,  which  is  continuous  with  that  of  the  vestibule, 
but  which  closes  the  fenestra  rotunda.  It  is  filled  with  the 
aqua  labyrinthi. 

The  openings  into  the  cochlea  are,  the  fenestra  rotunda  from 
the  tympanum,  the  opening  into  the  vestibule,  the  aquseductus 
cochleae,  and  the  openings  for  the  branches  of  the  auditory 
nerve. 

Auditory  nerve. — -When  the  auditory  nerve  reaches  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  meatus  auditorius  internus,  it  divides  into  two 
branches.  1.  The  larger,  or  anterior,  to  the  cochlea.  2.  The 
smaller,  or  posterior,  to  the  vestibule  and  semicircular  canals. 


MATERIA   MEDICA.  479 

The  Tintcrior  branch  divides  into  a  number  of  minute  fila- 
ments, which  pierce  the  base  of  the  cochlea,  and  expand  in  its 
mucous  lining;  others  enter  the  modiolus,  which  is  hollowed 
into  canals  to  receive  them,  and  pass  off  through  small  open- 
ings in  its  circumference,  to  spread  out  in  the  mucous  mem- 
brane covering  the  lamina  spiralis. 

The  posterior  or  vestibular  portion  of  the  nerve  divides  into 
three  branches,  which  are  distributed — 1.  The  larger,  to  form 
the  utriculus  communis  and  the  membranous  tubes  of  the  per- 
pendicular and  horizontal  canals.  2.  To  form  the  sacculus 
proprius.  3.  Tiie  smallest,  to  form  the  membranous  tube  of 
the  oblique  canal.  The  extremities  of  the  nervous  filaments, 
both  in  the  cochlea  and  vestibule,  form  a  papillary  layer  upon 
the  internal  surface  of  the  nervous  membrane,  like  that  of  the 
retina. 

The  arteries  of  the  labyrinth  are  derived  principally  from  the 
auditory  branch  of  the  superior  cerebellar  artery. 

ORGAN  OF  TASTE. 

The  tongue  is  composed  of  muscular  fibres,  which  are  dis- 
tributed in  layers  arranged  in  various  directions ;  thus  some  are 
disposed  longitudinally,  others  transversely,  others  again  ob- 
liquely and  vertically.  Between  the  muscular  fibres  is  a  consi- 
derable quantity  of  adipose  substance 

The  tongue  is  connected  posteriorly  with  the  os  hyoides  by 
muscular  attachment,  and  to  the  epiglottis  by  mucous  mem- 
brane, forming  the  three  folds  which  are  called  frena  epiglotti- 
dis.  On  either  side  it  is  held  in  connection  with  the  lower  jaw 
by  mucous  membrane,  and  in  front  a  fold  of  that  membrane  is 
formed  beneath  its  under  surface,  which  is  named  frajnum  lin- 
guaB, 

The  surface  of  the  tongue  is  covered  by  a  dense  layer  analo- 
gous to  the  corium  of  the  skin,  which  gives  support  to  the  pa- 
pillae. A  raphe  marks  the  middle  line  of  the  organ,  and  divides 
it  into  symmetrical  halves. 

The  papillcB  of  the  tongue  are — the 

Papillae  circumvallatoe, 
Papilla3  conicae, 
Papillae  filiformes, 
Papillae  fungiformes. 

The  papillae  circumvallatae  are  of  large  size,  and  from  fifteen 
to  twenty  in  number.  They  are  situated  on  the  dorsum  of  the 
tongue,  near  its  root,  and  form  a  row  upon  each  side,  which 
meets  its  fellow  at  its  middle  Jine,  like  the  two  branches  of  the 
letter  A.  Each  papilla  resembles  a  cone,  attached  by  the  apex 
to  the  bottom  of  a  cup-shaped  depression  ;   hence  they  are  also 


480  THE  THOMSOjSIAN 

named  papillaj  calyciforines.  This  ciip-sbaped  cavity  forms  a 
kind  of  fossa  around  the  papilla,  whence  their  name,  circum- 
vallata\ 

At  the  meeting  of  the  two  rows  of  these  papilla-  upon  the 
middle  of  the  root  of  the  tongue,  is  a  deep  mucous  follicle  call- 
ed foramen  caecum. 

The  papillffi  conicte  and  filiformes  cover  the  whole  surface 
of  the  tongue  in  front  of  the  circumvallatfie,  but  are  most  abun- 
dant near  its  apex.  They  are  conical  and  filiform  in  shape, 
and  have  their  points  directed  backwards. 

The  papilla?  fimgiformes  are  irregularly  dispersed  over  the 
dorsum  of  the  tongue,  and  are  easily  recognized  amongst  the 
other  papilla^  by  their  rounded  heads  and  larger  size.  A  num- 
ber of  tliese  papilUe  will  generally  be  observed  at  the  tip  of  the 
tongue. 

Behind  the  papilUic  circumvallatoe,  at  the  root  of  the  tongue, 
are  a  number  of  mucous  glands,  which  open  upon  the  surface. 
They  liave  been  improperly  described  as  papilUc  by  some  au- 
thors. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  tongue  is  abundantly  supphed 
with  blood  by  the  lingual  arteries. 

The  nerves  are  three  in  number,  and  of  larcje  size  : — 1.  The 
gustatory  branch  of  the  fifth,  which  is  distributed  to  the  papil- 
la, and  is  the  nerve  of  common  sensation  and  of  taste.  2.  The 
glosso-pharyngeal,  which  is  distributed  to  the  mucous  mem- 
brane, follicles,  and  glands  of  the  tongue,  is  a  nerve  of  sensa- 
tion and  motion  ;  it  also  serves  to  associate  the  touirue  with  the 
pharynx  and  larynx.  3.  The  liuijual,  which  is  the  motor 
nerve  of  the  tongue,  and  is  distributed  to  the  muscles. 

The  mucous  membrane,  which  invests  the  tongue,  is  conti- 
nuous with  the  cutis  along  the  margins  of  the  lips.  On  either 
side  of  the  fi'tenum  lingua-,  it  may  be  traced  through  the  sublin- 
gual ducts  into  tlie  sublingual  glands,  and  along  Wharton's 
ducts  into  the  submaxillary  glands  ;  from  the  sides  of  the  cheeks 
it  passes  through  the  openings  of  kStenton's  ducts  to  the  parotid 
gland  ;  in  the  fauces  it  forms  the  assemblage  of  follicles  called 
tonsils,  and  may  be  thence  traced  downwards  into  the  larynx 
and  pharynx,  where  it  is  continuous  with  the  general  gastro- 
pulmonary  mucous  membrane. 

Beneath  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth,  are  a  number 
of  small  glandular  granules,  which  pour  their  secretion  upon 
the  surface.  A  considerable  number  of  them  are  situated  with- 
in the  lips,  in  the  palate,  and  in  the  fioor  of  the  mouth.  They 
are  named  from  the  position  whith  they  may  chance  to  occu- 
py, labial,  palatine  glands,  dsc. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  481 

ORGAN  OF  TOUCH. 

The  skin  is  composed  of  three  layers,  viz. — the 

Cutis, 

Rete  mucosum, 

Cuticle. 

The  cutis  (dermis),  or  true  skin,  covers  the  entire  sursace  of 
the  body,  and  is  continuous  with  the  mucous  membrane  which 
lines  its  cavities.  It  consists  of  two  layers,  a  deep  one  called 
cnrium,  and  a  superiicial  or  papillary  layer. 

The  coriuni  is  the  base  of  support  to  the  skin,  and  owes  its 
density  of  structure  to  an  interlacement  of  fibrous  bands,  which 
form  a  firm  and  elastic  web.  By  its  under  surface  it  is  con- 
nected with  the  common  superficial  fascia  of  the  body,  and  pre- 
sents a  number  of  areolae,  in  which  are  lodged  small  masses  of 
adipose  tissue. 

PLATE  97.* 


Sip' 


^^ffe^^ 


'^■ 


*  The  Anatoimj  of  the  Skin. — 1.  The  cuticle,  showing  the  oblique  laminae  ot" 
which  it  is  composed,  and  the  imbricated  disposition  of  the  ridges  upon  its 
surface.  2.  The  rete  mucosum.  3.  Two  of  the  quadrilateral  papillary  mass- 
es, such  as  are  seen  in  the  palm  of  the  hand  or  sole  of  the  foot ;  tlie}'  arc  com- 
posed of  minute  conical  papillae.  4.  The  deeper  layer  of  the  cutis,  the  cori- 
um.  5.  Adipose  vesicles,  showing  their  appearance  beneath  the  microscope. 
6.  A  perspiratory  sland,  with  its  spiral  duct,  auch  as  is  seen  in  the  palm  of 
the  hand  or  sole  of  the  foot.  7.  Another  perspiratory  gland  with  a  slraiahter 
duct,  such  as  is  seen  in  the  scalp.  8.  Two  hairs  from  the  scalp,  enclosed  in 
their  follicles;  their  relative  depth  in  the  skin  is  preserved.  9.  A  pair  of  se- 
baceous glands,  opening  by  short  ducts  into  the  follicles  of  the  hair. 


482  THE    THOMSOMAN 

On  the  upper  surface,  the  fibres  are  more  closely  aggregated, 
and  form  a  smooth  plane  for  the  support  of  the  papillary  layer. 

The  corium  differs  very  much  in  thickness  in  different  parts 
of  the  body;  thus,  on  the  lips,  eyelids  and  scrotum,  it  is  ex- 
tremely thin.  On  the  head,  back,  soles  of  the  feet,  and  palms 
of  the  hand,  it  is  very  thick  ;  and  on  the  more  exposed  parts  of 
the  body  it  is  much  thicker  than  on  those  which  are  protected. 

The  papillary  layer  is  soft,  and  formed  by  minute  papilltfi, 
which  cover  every  part  of  its  surface.  On  the  body  generally, 
the  papilke  are  very  small  and  irregular  in  their  distribution  : 
they  are  best  seen  in  the  palm  of  the  hand  or  sole  of  the  foot, 
where  they  are  disposed  in  linear  ridges,  as  indicated  by  the 
markings  on  the  cuticle.  The  ridges  of  papille6  in  these  situa- 
tions are  separated  from  each  other  by  transverse  furrows  into 
small  quadrilateral  rounded  masses.  These  quadrilateral  mass- 
es are  each  composed  of  a  considerable  number  of  minute  pa- 
pilUr,  which  are  conical  in  form  and  variable  in  length,  one  or 
two  of  the  papillffi  in  each  mass  being  generally  longer  than 
the  rest.  In  the  middle  of  the  transverse  furrow,  between  the 
papilJEs,  is  the  opening  for  the  perspiratory  duct. 

The  papillte  beneath  the  nail  have  a  peculiar  form  and  ar- 
rangement. At  the  root  of  the  nail  they  are  numerous,  but 
small  and  very  vascular  ;  opposite  to  the  part  of  the  nail  called 
lunula,  they  are  scarcely  raised  above  the  surface,  and  less  vas- 
cular ;  but  beyond  this  point  they  form  lengthened  vascular 
plicffi,  which  afford  a  large  surface  for  secretion.  These 
lengthened  papillae  deposite  the  horny  secretion  in  longitudinal 
lamelkie,  which  give  to  the  nail  the  ribbed  appearance  which  it 
presents  upon  its  surface. 

Vessels  and  nerves. — The  papillae  are  abundantly  supplied 
with  vessels  and  nerves,  the  former  to  enable  them  to  perform 
the  office  of  secretion  in  the  production  of  the  cuticle,  the  latter 
to  give  them  the  sensibility  necessary  to  an  organ  of  touch. 

The  rete  mucosum  is  the  soft  medium  which  is  situated  be- 
tween the  papillary  surface  of  the  cutis  and  cuticle  ;  after  a 
careful  maceration,  it  may  be  separated  as  a  distinct  layer,  par- 
ticularly in  the  negro,  where  it  is  firmer  than  in  the  wliite  man, 
and  contains  the  coloring  matter  of  the  skin. 

The  name  rete  mucosum,  given  to  it  by  Malpighi,  conveys 
a  very  inaccurate  notion  of  its  structure  ;  for  it  is  neither  a  net- 
work, nor  is  it  mucous.  It  is  thin  upon  the  general  surface  of 
the  body,  but  is  thicker  in  the  palm  of  the  hand  and  sole  of  the 
foot,  and  presents  a  close  correspondence  with  the  thickness  of 
the  cuticle.  Examined  with  the  microscope,  it  is  seen  to  be 
moulded  accurately  upon  the  papilhe,  being  thick  in  the  spaces 
between  these,  and  thin  over  their  convexities;  hence  arises 
the  appearance  of  a  network.    In  the  rete  mucosum,  from  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  483 

hand  these  depressions  are  arranged  in  a  hnear  series,  as  are 
the  papilla? ;  in  other  situations  they  are  more  irregular,  but 
correspond  alway  with  the  distribution  of  the  papilUe. 

The  rete  mucosuni  is  the  freshly  secreted  layer  of  cuticle, 
and  gradually  hardens  as  it  approaches  the  surface.  It  has 
been  shown  to  be  composed  of  minute  oval  vesicular  cells, 
which  become  converted  in  the  hardened  cuticle  into  flattened 
scales,  each  containing  a  central  nucleus.  The  dark  pigment 
ot  the  negro  exists  in  the  form  of  small  granules  of  coloring 
matter. 

The  cuticle  (epidermis,  scarf-skin),  is  the  horny  unorganized 
lamella  which  covers  and  protects  the  entire  surface  of  the 
more  delicate  layers  of  the  skin.  In  situations  exposed  to  pres- 
sure, as  the  palm  of  the  hand  and  sole  of  the  foot,  it  is  very 
thick  ;  in  other  parts  it  forms  only  a  thin  layer.  The  cuticle 
is  marked  on  the  surface  by  a  network  of  lines  ;  these  are  more 
numerous  and  larger  near  to  joints,  where  they  form  deep 
wrinkles,  on  account  of  the  inelastic  nature  of  its  structure. 
Their  appearance  differs  in  different  regions  of  the  body;  but 
every  where  depends  upon  the  same  cause,  the  inelasticity  of 
the  cuticle.  At  the  entrance  to  the  cavities  of  the  body,  it  is 
continuous  with  the  epithelium,  or  cuticular  covering  of  the 
mucous  membrane. 

The  cuticle  is  secreted  by  the  cutis  in  the  form  of  laminae, 
the  innermost  and  last  secreted  layer  being  the  rete  mucosum. 
The  lamiucie  are  composed  of  minute  scales  with  central  nu- 
clei, and  are  disposed  obliquely,  so  as  to  project  by  their  free 
extremities  upon  the  surface  of  the  skin  ;  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand  and  sole  of  the  foot,  these  layers  correspond  with  the  ele- 
vations of  the  papillae,  and  present  an  imbricated  linear  surface. 
This  is  particularly  seen  on  the  points  of  the  fingers,  where  the 
rows  of  papillse  have  a  circular  arrangement. 

Upon  the  inner  surface  of  the  cuticle,  a  number  of  depres- 
sions and  linear  furrows  are  seen,  corresponding  with  the  pro- 
jections of  the  papilhe.  A  number  of  conical  processes  are  also 
observed  on  this  surface,  which  correspond  with  the  passage  of 
hairs  through  the  cuticle,  and  with  the  openings  of  the  perspi- 
ratory ducts. 

The  openings  in  the  cuticle  are  the  pores  or  openings  for  the 
perspiratory  ducts,  the  openings  for  the  passage  of  the  hairs, 
and  those  of  the  sebaceous  follicles. 

APPENDAGES  TO  THE  SKIN. 

The  appendages  to  the  skin  are  the  nails,  hairs,  sebaceous 
glands,  and  perspiratory  glands  and  ducts. 

The  7iails  are  parts  of  the  cuticle  secreted  in  the  same  man- 
ner, composed  of  the  same  material,  but  disposed  in  a  peculiar 


4B4  THE    THOMSONIAN 

way  to  serve  an  especial  purpose — the  protection  of  the  tactile 
extremities  of  the  fingers.  They  are  inserted  by  their  roots  into 
a  deep  groove  of  tlie  skin  (matrix),  and  are  firmly  attached  to 
the  papillary  snrface  by  the  close  connection  of  the  papillcE  with 
the  longitudinal  laniiniP.  The  white  semilunar  segment  near 
the  root  of  the  nail  is  called  the  lunula.  The  cuticle  is  closely 
connected  with  it  all  round,  and  in  maceration  the  nail  comes 
off  with  tliat  layer. 

The  hairs  have  a  very  dmerent  structure  and  arrangement 
from  that  of  the  nails  ;  they  are  inserted  for  a  considerable  depth 
within  the  integument,  and  terminate  in  conical  or  somewhat 
bulbous  roots.  Each  hair  is  enclosed  beneath  the  surface  by  a 
vascular  secretory  follicle,  which  regulates  its  form  during  its 
growth. 

Hairs  are  very  rarely  completely  cylindrical ;  they  are  gene- 
rally more  or  less  compressed,  and  somewhat  prismoid  in  form. 
The  transverse  section  is  reniform;  in  texture  it  is  dense  and 
homogeneous  towards  the  circumference,  and  porous  and  cel- 
lular in  the  centre,  like  the  pith  of  a  plant. 

The  sebaceous  glands  are  abundant  in  some  parts  of  the 
skin,  as  in  the  arm-pits,  the  nose,  &c.,  and  vary  in  complexity 
of  structure,  from  a  simple  pouch-like  tbllicle  to  a  lobulated 
gland.  At  the  extremity  of  the  nose  they  have  several  lobes  ; 
and  in  the  scalp  they  are  lobulated  like  a  bunch  of  grapes,  and 
terminate  in  the  follicles  of  the  hairs  near  the  surface  of  the  skin. 
They  secrete  an  oily  fluid,  which  is  poured  ont  npon  the  sur- 
face of  the  skin,  and  tends  to  preserve  the  flexibility  of  the  cu- 
ticle. 

The  perspiratory  ducts  are  minute  spiral  tubes  which  com- 
mence in  small  lobulated  glands,  situated  deeply  in  the  integu- 
ment beneath  the  corium  and  among  the  adipose  vesicles.  They 
are  easily  seen  by  examining  a  thm  perpendicular  section  of 
the  skin  from  the  palm  of  the  hand,  with  a  lens  of  moderate 
power.  Proceeding  from  the  glands,  the  ducts  ascend  through 
the  transverse  fissure,  between  the  quadrilateral  masses  of  pa- 
pillffi  and  through  the  rete  mucosum,  to  terminate  by  open  pores 
upon  the  surface  of  the  cuticle.  That  portion  of  the  tube  which 
is  situated  in  the  cuticle,  is  pretty  equally  spiral ;  but  that  be- 
low the  level  of  the  papillary  surface  is  very  irregularly  twist- 
ed, and  is  often  nearly  straight.  In  the  scalp  the  tubes  are  ser- 
pentine, or  but  slightly  curved. 

Tne  pores  are  best  observed  during  perspiratign,  when  the 
fluid  is  seen  oozing  through  their  minute  openings.  In  the 
hand  and  sole  of  the  foot  they  are  easily  seen  by  the  naked  eye 
without  this  assistance.  They  are  disposed  at  regular  distan- 
ces along  the  ridges  of  the  cuticle,  and  give  rise  to  the  appear- 
ance of  lines  cutting  the  ridges  transversely. 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


485 


INDEX. 


ATjclomcn, 

270 

Abdominal  regions, 

270 

Acini, 

294 

Alimentary  canal, 

276 

Ampulla, 

477 

Aravgdaloe, 

278 

Annulus  ovalis, 

253 

Antihelix, 

471 

Antitragus, 

47] 

Aorta,  abdominal, 

380 

arch, 

380 

ascending, 

380 

thoracic. 

380 

Aortic  sinuses, 

257 

Aponeurosis, 

334 

Appendices  epiploica?, 

275 

Appendix  vermiformis  cseci, 

2.81 

Aqua  la.byrinthi, 

478 

Aqueductus  cochleJE, 

478 

vestibuli. 

477 

Aqueous  humor, 

466 

Arachnoid  membrane. 

438 

Arbor  vitas. 

443 

uterina, 

319 

Arch,  femoral, 

376 

palmar  superficial. 

395 

Areola, 

322 

Artreies. — General  anatomy, 

377 

structure, 

377 

anastomotica  magna. 

393 

angular, 

383 

aorta, 

379 

articular  azygos. 

408 

inferior, 

408 

superior, 

408 

auricular  postreior. 

384 

axillary, 

390 

basilar, 

387 

brachial, 

392 

bronchial, 

395 

carotid  common. 

381 

external, 

382 

internal, 

385 

carpal  ulnar  anterior, 

394 

posterior, 

394 

radial  anterior, 

394 

posterior, 

394 

cerebellar  inferior. 

388 

superior. 

388 

cerebral  posterior, 

388 

cervicalis  anterior. 

390 

posterior. 

390 

circumflex  anterior. 

392 

external, 

407 

illi. 

405 

internal, 

407 

posterior, 

392 

superficialis, 

,    407 

coccygeal, 

403 

cosliac. 

397 

Arteries. — Colica  dextra,  398 

media,  398 

sinistra,  400 

coronaria  dextra,  381 

corporis  bulbosi,  403 

cavernosi,  403 

cystic,  398 

dorsaiis  carpi  radiaiis,  394 

pedis,  408 

penis,  403 

scapulae,  392 

epigastric,  405 

facia),  383 

femoral;  405 

gastric,  398 

gastro-duodenalis,  398 

epiploica  dextra,  398 

sinistra,  398 

gluteal,  405 

inferior,  405 

superior,  405 

hcemorrhoidal  external,  403 

superior,  400 

hepatic.  398 

ileo-colic.  398 

iliac,  common,  401 

external,  405 

internal,  401 

innominnti,  381 

intercostal,  395 

anterior,  390 

superior,  390 

inter-osseous,  395 

anterior,  395 

posterior,  395 

ischiatic,  403 

lyngua],  382 

lumbar,  401 

malleolar  external,  410 

interna],  410 

mammary  internal,  390 

mastoid,  384 

maxillary  internal,  385 

meningea  posterior,  388 

mesenteric  398 

inferior,  400 

metatarsea,  409 

obturator,  404 

occipital,  3S4 

ffisophaseal,  395 

pancreatica  magna,  398 

pancrealicffi  parvse,  398 

pancreatico-duodenalis,    398 

perforantes  femoralis,  '    407 

plantaris,        411 

perineal  superficial,  403 

peroneal,  409 

anterior,  410 

posterior.  410 

pharyngea  ascendens,       384 


486 


THE  THOMSON  IAN 


Akteries— Phrenic, 

397 

Bronchi, 

266 

plantar  external, 

411 

Bronchial  tubes. 

268 

internal, 

410 

Brunner's  glands. 

284 

popliteal. 

407 

Bulb  of  the  corpus  spongiosum, 

310 

profunda  cervicis, 

390 

Bulbous  part  of  the  urethra, 

313 

femoris, 

407 

Caecum, 

281 

inferior, 

393 

Calices, 

304 

superior, 

392 

Canal  of  Fontana, 

463 

pterygoid, 

385 

Petit, 

466 

pudic-internal, 

403 

Canthi, 

468 

pulmonary. 

411 

Capillaries, 

377 

pyloric, 

398 

Capitula  laryngis, 

261 

radial 

393 

Capsule  of  Glisson, 

293 

ranine. 

383 

Capsules  supra-renal. 

301 

recurrens  radialis, 

394 

Caput  gallinaginnis. 

312. 

tibialis. 

408 

Cardia, 

281 

ulnaris  ante- 

Caruncula lachrymalis 

469 

rior. 

395 

Carunculaj  myrtiformes. 

322 

posterior. 

,  395 

Centrum  ovale  majus. 

443 

renal, 

401 

Cerebellum, 

443 

sacra  media, 

401 

Cerebro-spinal  axis, 

431 

lateralis. 

404 

Cerebrum, 

439 

scapular  posterior, 

3S9 

Ceruminous  follicles, 

473 

sigmoid, 

400 

Cervical  ganglia. 

467 

spermatic, 

398 

Cheeks,  276, 

254 

spinal  anterior. 

387 

Chordae  tendineae. 

256 

lateral. 

387 

vocales, 

262 

posterior, 

387 

Choroid  membrane, 

462 

splenic, 

398 

plexus. 

441 

subclavian. 

386 

Ciliary  ligament, 

463 

subscapular, 

392 

processes. 

464 

superlicialis  cervicis, 

390 

Circle  of  Willis, 

388 

supra-renal, 

400 

Circulation,  adult. 

251 

supra-scapular, 

398 

foetal. 

324 

sural. 

408 

Clitoris, 

322 

tarsea. 

409 

Cochlea, 

478 

temporal, 

384 

Colon, 

282 

anterior. 

384 

Calumnse  Carneae,  257, 

254 

posterior. 

384 

Commissures  anterior. 

442 

thoracica  acromialis. 

390 

middle,  or  soft. 

442 

axillaris. 

390 

posterior. 

442 

inferior, 

390 

Concha, 

471 

superior, 

390 

Coni  renales. 

304 

thyroid  inferior. 

388 

vasculosi, 

316 

superior. 

382 

Conjunctiva, 

469 

tibialis  antica. 

407 

Converging  fibres, 

446 

postica. 

409 

Corium, 

481 

transversalis  faciei. 

384 

Cornea, 

461 

perinei. 

403 

Cornicula  larjTigis, 

261 

ulnar. 

394 

Corona  glandis. 

309 

umbilical. 

403 

Coronary  valve, 

253 

uterine,  405       vaginal. 

405 

Corpora  Arantii,  255, 

257 

vasa  brevia. 

398 

cavernosa. 

310 

intestini  tenuis. 

398 

olivaria. 

446 

vertebral, 

387 

pyramidalia. 

446 

vesical  inferior, 

403 

quadrigemina, 

442 

Arytenoid  cartilages, 

261 

striata. 

442 

glands. 

465 

Corpus  callosum, 

446 

Auricles  of  the  heart,  252, 

255 

cavernosum. 

310 

Auriculo-ventricular  openings. 

254 

fimbriatum. 

440 

Bladder, 

306 

luteum, 

320 

Brain, 

436 

rhomboideum, 

443 

MATERIA    MEDICA 


487 


Corpus  spongiosum, 

310 

Fibres  of  the  heart, 

257 

Cowper's  glands, 

313 

Fimbriae,  Fallopian, 

320 

Cricoid  cartilage, 

261 

Foetal  circulation, 

324 

Crico-thyroid  membrane, 

262 

Foetus,  anatomy  of. 

323 

Crura  cerebelli. 

444 

Follicles  of  Lieberkuhn, 

285 

penis, 

309 

Foramen  coecum, 

480 

Crystalline  lens, 

466 

commune  anterius. 

442 

Cuneiform  cartilages, 

261 

posterius, 

442 

Cupola, 

478 

of  Monro, 

440 

Cuticle, 

481 

Soemmering, 

465 

Cutis, 

481 

Winslow, 

274 

Cystic  duct,  299, 

481 

ovale, 

325 

Dartos, 

313 

saphenum. 

376 

Dermis, 

481 

Fornix, 

440 

Detrusor  urinae. 

307 

Fossa  navicularis  urethrse, 

313 

Diaphragm, 

351 

vaginae, 

321 

Ductus  arteriosus. 

325 

ovalis, 

253 

communis  choledochus, 

299 

Fourchette, 

321 

cysticus, 

299 

FrEena  epiglottidis. 

262 

ejaculatorius,  309, 

317 

Frtenum  labii  inferioris. 

276 

hepaticus, 

299 

linguae. 

276 

pancreaticus, 

300 

praeputtii. 

309 

prostaticus, 

309 

superioris. 

276 

venosus, 

325 

Gall  bladder. 

299 

Duodenum, 

281 

Ganglia  cervical. 

456 

Dura  mater. 

437 

lumbar. 

456 

Ear, 

471 

sacral. 

456 

Ejaculatory  duct, 

309 

semi-lunar, 

456 

Encephalon, 

436 

thoracic, 

410 

Epidermis, 

481 

Ganglion,  Arnold's, 

455 

Epididjmis, 

316 

cardiac. 

456 

Epigastric  region, 

270 

ciliary, 

455 

Epiglottic  gland. 

265 

Cloquet's, 

455 

Epiglottis, 

261 

lenticular. 

455 

Epithelium,  275, 

283 

Meckel's, 

455 

Erectile  tissue. 

310 

naso-palatine. 

455 

Eustachian  tube. 

475 

of  Ribes, 

455 

valve, 

253 

otic. 

455 

Eye, 

460 

spheno-palatine, 

455 

brows. 

468 

submaxillary. 

455 

globe. 

460 

Gland,  epiglottic, 

265 

lashes, 

468 

lachrymal,] 

470 

lids. 

468 

parotid, 

278 

Fallopian  tubes, 

320 

prostrate. 

308 

Falx  cerebeJli, 

438 

thymus, 

328 

carebri. 

438 

thyroid, 

266 

Facia,  general  anatomy, 

369 

Glands,  aggregate. 

285 

cervical  deep, 

374 

arytenoid. 

265 

superficial, 

374 

Brunner's. 

284 

denlata. 

441 

Cowper's, 

313 

iliaca, 

373 

duodenal. 

284 

lata. 

376 

gastric. 

284 

palmar, 

374 

inguinal. 

425 

pelvica. 

373 

lymphatic. 

421 

perineal  deep, 

373 

mammary. 

322 

superficial 

373 

Meibomian, 

469 

spermatica. 

314 

(Esophageal, 

284 

temporal, 

370 

Peyer's, 

285 

thoracic. 

371 

salivary. 

278 

transversalis, 

371 

solitary. 

285 

Fauces, 

278 

sublingual. 

279 

Femoral  arch. 

376 

submaxillary, 

278 

488 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Glaadulae  odorifcrae, 

309 

Liquor  Morgagni, 

466 

Pacchioni, 

437 

of  Scarpa, 

478 

Tysoni, 

309 

Liver, 

287 

Glans  clitoridis, 

321 

Lobes  of  the  liver, 

292 

penis, 

309 

Lobuli  testis, 

316 

Glisson's  capsule, 

293 

Lobulus  auris. 

471 

Globus  major  epidydimus, 

315 

Lobus  caudatus. 

290 

minor          do 

315 

quadratus, 

291 

Glottis, 

265 

Spigelii, 

291 

Gubeniaculum  testis, 

333 

Lumbar  regions, 

270 

Gums, 

277 

Lungs, 

267 

Hair, 

434 

Lunula, 

484 

Heart, 

250 

Lymphatic  glands  and  vessels, 

421 

Helix, 

471 

axillary, 

424 

Hepatic  ducts, 

295 

bronchial, 

428 

Hernia,  congenital, 

372 

cardiac. 

428 

direct, 

372 

head  and  neck. 

423 

encysted. 

372 

inguinal, 

425 

inguinal, 

372 

intestines. 

429 

Hilus  lienis, 

301 

kidney, 

429 

renalis, 

303 

lacteals, 

422 

Hippocampus  major, 

141 

liver, 

428 

minor, 

441 

lower  extremity. 

425 

Humors  of  the  eye. 

466 

lungs. 

427 

Hyaloid  membrane. 

466 

mesenteric. 

429 

Hymen, 

322 

pelvic  viscera. 

429 

Hypochondriac  regions, 

270 

spleen. 

428 

Hypogastric  region, 

270 

stomach, 

428 

Ileo  csecal  valve, 

233 

testicle. 

429 

Ileum, 

231 

trunk. 

426 

Iliac  regions. 

270 

upper  extremity. 

424 

Infundibula, 

304 

viscera. 

427 

Inguinal  region, 

270 

Malleus, 

473 

Intestinal  canal. 

276 

Mastoid  cells. 

475 

Iris, 

463 

Mammffi, 

322 

Isthmus  of  the  fauces, 

278 

Mammary  gland, 

322 

Jacob's  membrane, 

464 

Meatus  auditorius  cxternus. 

473 

Jejunum, 

231 

urinarius,  female. 

322 

Kidneys, 

302 

male, 

309 

Labia  majora, 

•  321 

Meatuses  of  the  narcs, 

459 

minora. 

321 

Meckel's  ganglion. 

455 

Labyrinth, 

477 

Mediastinum  anterior, 

270 

Lachrymal  ducts, 

470 

middle, 

270 

gland, 

470 

posterior, 

270 

sac, 

470 

testis, 

315 

Lacteals, 

429 

Meibomian  glands,                     ^ 

468 

Lacunar, 

313- 

Membrana  pigmenti. 

462 

Lamina  spiralis. 

478 

papillaris, 

327 

Larynx, 

260 

tympani. 

473 

Lens, 

466 

Membrane  choroid, 

462 

Ligaments,  crico-thyroidean. 

262 

hyaloid. 

166 

cpiglotlo-hyoidean, 

262 

Jacob's, 

464 

of  the  liver, 

288 

Membranous  part  of  the  urethra. 

312 

suspensorium  penis, 

309 

Mesenteric  glands. 

429 

thyro-arytenoid, 

262 

Mesentery, " 

275 

thyro-hyoidean, 

262 

Meso-cola, 

275 

Limbus  luteus 

465 

Meso-recium, 

275 

LinecE  alba, 

350 

Mitral  valves, 

256 

Linese  tranversfp, 

3r)0 

Mons  veneris. 

321 

semi-lunare§, 

350 

Mouth, 

276 

Lips, 

276 

Mucous  membrane,  structure, 

277 

Liquor  Cotunnii, 

478 

Muscles,  general  anatomy, 

334 

MATERIA    MEDICA. 


489 


Muscles,  accelerator  urinse, 
accessorious 
adductor  brevis, 
longus, 
anconeus, 
anti-lragicus, 
arytenoideus, 
aryteno-epiglottideus  su- 
perior and  inferior, 
brachialis  amicus, 
cervicalis  ascendens, 
coccygeus, 
complexus, 
compressor  urethrse, 
coraco-brachialis, 
lateralis, 

posticus, 
thyroideus, 
detrusor  urinse, 
digasti'icus, 
erector  penis, 
spinee, 
extensor  carpi  radialis 
brevior, 
carpi  radialis 

longior, 
carpi  ulnaris, 
flexor  carpi  radialis, 
ulnaris. 
digitorum  profun- 
dus, 

sublimis, 
lorigus  digitorum  pedis, 

policis  manus, 
gastrocnemius, 
gemellus  inferior, 
superior, 
genio-hyo-glossus, 

hyoideus, 
gluteus,  maximus, 
medius, 
minimus, 
gracilis, 
helicis  major, 
minor, 
iliacus, 
inter-spinales, 
inter-lransversales, 
latissimus  dorsi, 
laxator  tympani  major, 
minor, 
ievator  ani, 

glandulce  thyroideae, 
palpebrfE, 
longissimus  dorsi, 
multifidus  spinse, 
mylo-hyoideus, 
obturator  exturnus, 
»     occipito-frontalis, 
omo-hyoideus, 
palmaris  brevis, 
longus, 


353  Muscles,  pictineus,  364 

347  peroneus longus,  365 

361  poplitius,  367 

364  tertius,  365 
359  pronator  quadratus,  358 
472  radii  teres,  358 

263  psoas  magnus,  363 
quadratus  femoris,  362 

264  rectus  abdominis,  349 
356  sacro-Iumbalis,  347 
390  sartorius,  363 
353  semi-spinalis  colli,  346 
340  dorsi,  346 
353  membranosus,  365 
356  tendinosus,  365 
263  serratus  magnus,  356 
263  posticus  inferior,  347 
263  superior,  347 
306  sphincter  ani  externus,  355 
340  _  internus,  355 
353  spinalis  dorsi,  347 
347  stapedius,  474 

sterno-hyoideus,  340 

359  thyoideus,  340 

stylo-hyoideus,  340 

359  pharyngeus,  342 

359  subscapularis,  399 

359  supinator  radii  brevis,  359 

359  longus,  359 

tensor  tympani,  474 

359  vaginee  femoris,  363 

359  thyro-arytenoideus,  263 

367  epiglottideus,  263 

359  hyoideus,  349 

366  tibialis  anticus,  365 

362  posticus,  365 
362  tragicus,  470 
340  transversus  auriculse,  472 
340  perinei,  353 
361  trapezius,  347 

361  Musculi  pectinati,  256 

362  Nails,  483,      Nares,  280 

365  Nasal  duct,  ^7q 
472  fossffi,  459 
472  Nates  cerebri,  440 
362  Neuves,  general  anatomy,  43^ 
349  abducentes,  44g 
349  auditory,  447 
347  auricularis  anterior,  45i 
474  buccal,  45^ 
474  cardiac,  45g 
353  cardiacus  inferior,  455 
267  magnus,  456 
338  medius,  456 
347  superior,  455 
347  cervical,  455 
340  cervico-facial,  44s 
362  ciliary,  455 
336  circumflex,  452 
340  communicans  peronei,  453 
361  cranial,  447 
359  oural,  453 

32 


490 


THE    THOMSOJNIAN 


Nerves,  cutaneus  externus  brachi- 

alls, 
internus  brachi- 

alis, 
spiralis, 
dental  anterior, 
inferior, 
postei'ior, 
descendens  noni, 
dorsal, 
eighth  pair, 
facial, 
fifth  pair, 
first  pair, 
frontal, 

glosso-pharyngeal, 
gustatory, 
inferior  maxillary, 
infra-trochlear, 
inter-osseous  anterior, 
posterior, 
lachrymal, 
laryngeal  inferior, 
lingual, 
lumbar, 
masseteric, 
maxiUaris  inferior, 
superior, 
median, 

motores  oculorum, 
musculo-spiral, 
nasalj 
olfactory, 
ophthalmic, 
optic,  447,        orbital, 
palatine  posterior, 

anterior, 
palmaris  superficial, 
perineo-cutaneous, 
peroneal, 
pharyngeal, 
pneumo-gastric, 
pterygoid, 
radial, 
sacral, 
saphenous  long, 

short, 
spinal, 

accessory, 
subscapular, 
superficialis  colli, 
superior  maxillary, 
supra-scapular, 
sympatheticus  major, 
temporal, 
temporo-facial, 
thoracic  short, 
long, 
tibialis  posticus, 
trifacial, 
tympanic, 
ulnar, 


Nipple, 

322 

451 

Nose, 

457 

Nymphce, 

321 

451 

(Esophagus, 

m) 

451 

Omentum,  gastro-splenic, 

275 

451 

great. 

274 

451 

lesser, 

274 

451 

Omphalo-mesenteric  vessels, 

331 

448 

Optic  thalami, 

442 

452 

Orbiculare  os. 

474 

449 

Ossicula  auditus. 

473 

448 

Ovaries, 

320 

450 

Ovula  of  Naboth, 

319 

445 

Palate, 

277 

449 

Pancreas, 

300 

449 

Papillae  of  the  nail. 

482 

451 

skin, 

482 

451 

tongue, 

479 

450 

crJcyformes, 

480 

451 

circumvallata;, 

479 

451 

cornicffi . 

479 

449 

filiforraes. 

479 

448 

fungiformes. 

479 

448 

Parotid  gland, 

278 

452 

Penis, 

309 

339 

Pericardium, 

250 

451 

Peritoneum, 

272 

450 

Perspiratory  ducts, 

484 

451 

Peyer's  glands. 

285 

447 

Pharynx, 

280 

451 

Pia  mater. 

438 

455 

Pigmentum  nigrum. 

462 

445 

Pillars  of  the  palate, 

277 

449 

Pineal  gland, 

446 

450 

Pinna, 

471 

455 

Pituitary  membrane, 

459 

455 

Pleura  costalis, 

269 

451 

pulraonalis. 

269 

453 

Plexus,  aortic, 

456 

4gi 

axillary. 

451 

449 

cervical  anterior, 

451 

44S 

choroid. 

440 

339 

ccEliac, 

456 

451 

gastric, 

456 

456 

hepatic. 

456 

453 

hypogastric, 

456 

453 

lumbar.  452 

456 

451 

mesenteric  inferior. 

456 

451 

superior, 

456 

451 

phrenic, 

456 

451 

renal, 

456 

450 

sacral, 

456 

451 

solar, 

456 

453 

spermatic. 

456 

339 

splenic, 

455 

448 

supra-renal, 

456 

451 

Plica  semi-lunaris. 

469 

451 

Plicte  longitudinal, 

283 

453 

Pomum  Adami, 

260 

450 

Pons  Varolii, 

446 

449 

Pores, 

484 

451 

Porus  opticus. 

461 

MATERIA  MEDIC  A. 


491 


Poupart"s  ligament, 

363 

Prepuce, 

309 

Processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes, 

444 

Promontory, 

475 

Prostrate  gland. 

308 

Prostatic  part  of  the  urethra, 

311 

Pulmouarj'  artery, 

411 

sinuses, 

255 

veins. 

425 

Pylorus, 

281 

Receptaculum  chyli, 

429 

Rectum, 

282 

Rete  mucosum, 

481 

testis. 

316 

Retina, 

464 

Rima  glottidis, 

265 

Ring,  internal  abdominal, 

371 

Rugje, 

281 

Saceulus  laryngis, 

265 

Scala  tympani, 

478 

vestibuli, 

477 

Schneiderian  membrane, 

459 

Sclerotic  coat. 

460 

Scrotum, 

313 

Sebaceous  glands, 

484 

Semicircular  canals, 

477 

Semilunar- fibro-valves,  255, 

257 

Septum  auricularum. 

252 

ludicum. 

441 

pectinifcrme, 

310 

scroti. 

313 

Sigmoid  valves,  255, 

257 

Sinuses, 

415 

Sinus  aortic, 

257 

cavernous, 

415 

circular. 

415 

fourth, 

415 

lateral. 

415 

longitudinal  inferior. 

415 

superior, 

415 

occipital  anterior, 

415 

posterior, 

415 

petrosal  inferior, 

415 

superior, 

415 

pocularis. 

312 

pulmonary. 

255 

rectus  or  straight, 

415 

transverse, 

415 

Skin, 

481 

Socia  parotidis, 

278 

Soft  palate, 

277 

Spermatic  canal, 

372 

cord, 

314 

Spinal  cord. 

446 

nerves, 

451 

veins, 

419 

Spleen, 

301 

Spongy  part  of  the  urethra, 

312 

Stapes, 

474 

Stomach, 

281 

Sub-archnoiJean  fluid, 

438 

space, 

438 

Sublingual  gland, 

279 

Submaxillary  gland, 

278 

Sulcus  longitudinalis  hepatis. 

290 

transversus, 

290 

Superficial  facia, 

374 

Supra-renal  capsules, 

301 

Suspensory  ligament  of  the  liver. 

288 

penis, 

309 

S}'mpathetic  nerve, 

453 

Tapetum, 

463 

Tarsal  cartilages, 

468 

Tendon, 

334 

Tenia  semicircularis, 

439 

Testicles, 

313 

descent. 

333 

Thalami  optici. 

442 

Thoracic  duct, 

429 

Thorax, 

249 

Thymus  gland. 

328 

Thyro-hyoid  membrane, 

262 

ThjToid  cartilage, 

260 

gland,  227, 

266 

Tonsue, 

479 

Tonsils, 

278 

Torcular  Herophilli, 

415 

Trachea, 

266 

Tragus, 

471 

Trigone  vesicale, 

307 

Tuberculum  Loweri, 

253 

Tubuli  seminiferi. 

316 

uriniferi, 

303 

Tunica  albuginea  testis, 

316 

erythroides. 

314 

nervea. 

284 

vaginalis, 

315 

vasculosa  testis, 

316 

Tympanum, 

473 

Tyson's  glands. 

309 

TJ^ibilical  region. 

270 

TJrachus, 

306 

Ureter. 

304 

Urethra,  female., 

317 

male. 

311 

Uterus, 

318 

Utriculus  communis, 

478 

Uvea, 

464 

Uvula  palati, 

277 

vesicae, 

307 

Vagina, 

318 

Valve,  coronary. 

250 

Eustachian, 

253 

ilio-csecal. 

283 

mitral. 

256 

pyloric, 

285 

of  the  rectum, 

283 

semi-lunar. 

255 

tricuspid. 

254 

of  Vieussens, 

446 

Valvulse  conniventes, 

283 

Vasa  efTerentia, 

316 

lactea, 

429 

lymphatica, 

431 

492 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


Vasa  pampiniformia, 

314 

Veins,  portal, 

419 

recta, 

316 

pulmonary, 

419 

Vasculum  aberrans, 

317 

radial. 

416 

Vas  deferens,  317, 

314 

renal. 

419 

Veins, 

412 

saphenous  internal, 

418 

axillary, 

417 

spermatic. 

419 

azygos  major, 

419 

splenic. 

420 

minor, 

419 

subclavian. 

417 

basalic, 

416 

temporal. 

414 

cardiac, 

419 

temporo-maxillary. 

414 

cava  inferior, 

418 

ulnar  anterior, 

416 

superior, 

418 

posterior, 

416 

cephalic, 

416 

vertebral, 

419 

cerebellar, 

414 

Velum  interpositum. 

441 

cerebral, 

414 

pendulum  palati. 

277 

diploe, 

414 

VensB  Galeni, 

441 

dorsalis  penis. 

311 

vorticosa;, 

462 

dorsi-spinal, 

419 

Ventricles  of  the  brain. 

facial, 

414 

fifth. 

441 

femoral, 

418 

fourth. 

442 

Galeni, 

414 

lateral. 

439 

gastric, 

420 

third, 

442 

hepatic, 

419 

of  the  heart, 

256 

intercostal  superior, 

419 

larynx. 

265 

jugular  anterior 

416 

Vermiform  processes, 

443 

external. 

416 

Veru  montanum. 

312 

internal. 

416 

VesicuIoE  seminales. 

308 

maxillary  internal, 

414 

Vestibule, 

477 

median  basalic. 

416 

Vestibulum  vaginas. 

322 

cephalic, 

416 

Villi, 

284 

medulli-spinal, 

419 

Vitreous  humor, 

466 

mesenteric  inferior, 

420 

Vulva, 

321 

superior, 

420 

Wharton's  duct. 

279 

occipital, 

414 

Zonula  ciliaris, 

465 

popliteal, 

418 

of  Zinn, 

465 

MATERIA    MEDICA.  493 

HISTORY  OF  THE  EFFORTS  OF  DR.  SAMUEL 
THOMSON 

TO  SUSTAIN  HIS  SYSTEM  OP 

VITALITY    IN    MATTER. 

Of  all  the  reformers  in  the  science  of  medicine,  there  appears 
to  have  been  no  one  more  successfnl  in  perfecting  his  system  of 
practice,  and  receiving  the  congratulations  of  grateful  nations 
during  his  hfetime,  than  Samuel  Thomson. 

BIRTH  AND  PARENTAGE. 

This  man  was  born  in  the  town  of  Alstead,  in  the  state  of 
New-Hampshire,  Feb.  9th,  1769.  His*  parents  were  poor,  but 
industrious,  and  taught  their  son  to  imitate  their  habits  of  in- 
dustry and  economy  ;  and  over  his  principles  of  moral  honesty 
they  watched  with  unceasing  vigilance. 

The  father  of  young  Thomson  was  one  of  the  most  enter- 
prising and  determined  spirits  of  the  age,  and  bethought  every 
person  should  possess  the  same  indomitable  perseverance  as 
himself;  and  fortunately  for  future  generations,  he  succeeded 
in  imbuing  the  mind  and  composition  of  his  son  with  that  pe- 
culiar tact,  talent,  and  trait  of  character,  which  at  maturity  has 
rendered  him  one  of  the  greatest  benefactors  the  world  has  ever 
known. 

COMMENCES  AT  HARD  LABOR. 

At  a  very  early  age  (five  years)  he  was  put  to  hard  labor  up- 
on a  farm,  and  his  daily  task  was  always  better  fitted  for  those 
of  riper  years.  But  he  was  rigidly  required  to  perform  the 
amount  of  labor  allotted  to  him,  without  complaint ;  and  such 
was  the  severity  of  his  labor,  that  at  the  age  of  seven  years  he 
was  round  shouldered,  and  stooped  forward  like  a  hard  labor- 
ing old  man. 

The  writer  of  this  has  frequently  heard  him  say,  that  after 
having  performed  his  daily  task  he  has  been  sent  for  the  cows 
and  so  great  was  his  fatigue  of  body  from  labor,  that  on  sitting 
down  to  rest  he  would  unconsciously  fall  asleep,  and  that  his 
father  by  calling  to  him  has  awoke  him  at  the  distance  of  half 
a  mile,  so  sensitive  was  his  hearing  to  the  voice  of  his  father 
of  whom  he  lived  in  such  constant  fear,  on  account  of  the  se- 
verity of  his  punishment  at  the  slightest  offence. 

Under  such  a  tutor,  whose  severity  he  was  able  to  stand,  who 
will  wonder  that  Samuel  Thomson  had  a  robust  and  vigorous 
constitution  at  a  more  mature  age.  We  are  astonished  that  his 
constitution  and  health  were  not  entirely  destroyed  under  such 
severity. 


494  THE    THOMSONIAN 

Such  a  disciplinarian  as  the  father,  and  such  a  pupil  as  the 
son,  have  made  Samuel  Thomson  the  nondescript  that  we  find 
him.  For  where  can  we  find  a  match-mate  for  this  man  1  As 
it  has  terminated,  the  severity  of  his  parental  treatment  has  ma- 
tured a  firmness  of  muscle,  a  determination  of  spirit,  and  an  m- 
domitable  perseverance  and  an  untiring  industry,  that  knows 
not  the  meaning,  practically,  of  the  common  method  of  com- 
plaint, '"i  cannot  do  it  f^  but  I  will  iry^  v^^as  what  this  youth 
was  taught  to  say,  let  the  task  be  ever  so  onerous  ;  and  not  to 
give  up,  until  bodily  and  mental  efforts  had  proved,  by  actual 
application,  inadequate  to  the  task. 

Our  readers,  after  learning  the  early  history,  habits  and  in- 
dustry of  young  Thomson,  will  have  the  key  to  the  masterly 
secret,  why  he  in  after  l;fe  could,  without  complaint,  buffet  per- 
secution, imprisonment,  irons,  and  a  trial  for  life,  for  the  sake  of 
truth,  and  the  good  of  mankind. 

HIS  TALENT  FOR.  INVESTIGATION. 

At  a  very  early  age,  our  hero  evinced  a  disposition  to  exa- 
mine closely  the  works  and  mysteries  of  nature ;  for  as  he  had 
not  the  opportunity  for  book  knowledge  that  others  of  his  age 
were  permitted  to  enjoy,  the  deficiency  he  consequently  endea- 
vored fo  supply,  with  what  he  could  accumulate  by  observation. 

One  principle  v/hich  was  instilled  into  his  mind  in  youth, 
was  brought  into  active  requisition  in  more  mature  age.  That 
was,  not  to  take  for  fact,  all  that  was  told  for  truth.  Before  he 
believed  marvellous  stories,  his  philosophic  mind  was  brought 
into  active  operation  to  scan  the  rationale,  the  circumstances, 
consistency,  (fcc,  and  then  reason  dictated  whether  to  accept  or 
reject,  believe  or  disbelieve,  the  report.  And  when  the  mind 
was  once  settled  as  to  the  correctness  or  falsity  of  the  position 
assumed,  he  maintained  it,  through  good  or  evil  report.  And 
under  such  circumstances,  one  of  the  most  noble  traits  of  the 
character  of  Samuel  Thomson  was  made  manifest.  Where  the 
truth  v/as  concerned,  he  knew  no  fear ;  and  he  would  promul- 
gate it,  whether  unpopular  or  not.  He  would  attack  the  law- 
yer, minister,  doctor  or  statesman,  or  any  other  person,  without 
regard  to  place  or  station,  who  he  supposed  had  g-iven  counte- 
nance to  a  falsehood,  or  any  other  wrong  principle,  to  sustain 
power  or  honors,  or  to  acquire  wealth. 

EXAMINING  VEGETATION. 

While  upon  the  farm,  young  Thomson  was  constantly  tast- 
ing the  diflerent  vegetable  substances,  with  which  the  face  of 
nature  appeared  clad  during  their  appropriate  seasons.  Know- 
ing the  fact,  that  certain  plants  were  gathered  by  individuals, 
to  be  cured  for  medical  uses,  it  was  natural  for  him  to  enquire 
to  what  purposes  those  plants  were  applied,   the  diseases  to 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  495 

which  they  were  applicable,  (fcc,  and  such  was  his  tact  for  ac- 
quiring medical  facts,  and  treasuring  them  up  in  his  retentive 
memory,  that  at  the  age  of  sixteen  years  he  had  a  very  exten- 
sive knowledge  of  tlie  medical  virtues  of  most  of  the  plants  in 
his  vicinity. 

LOBELIA  INFLATA. 

Possessing  in  this  respect  many  advantages  over  the  other 
youth  of  his  age  in  his  neighborhood,  it  was  in  his  power  to 
I'lay  off  many  a  juvenile  trick  upon  his  more  unsuspecting 
playmates,  upon  wliom  the  emetic  properties  of  the  Lobelia  in- 
fiata  were  brought  into  requisition,  and  from  which  may  be 
dated  the  knowledge  of  the  useful  and  active  properties  of  that 
valuable  herb.  Thus  he  continued  to  store  away  in  his  active 
and  retentive  memory,  medical  facts  in  relation  to  the  proper- 
ties of  plants,  merely  as  sustenance  to  his  active  and  enquiring 
mind,  not  even  anticipating  that  future  generations  were  about 
to  tax  his  fund  of  medical  knowledge  for  the  good  of  posterity. 

MARRIAGE — BIRTH  OF  A  DAUGHTER — SICKNESS,  &C. 

On  the  7th  day  of  July,  1790,  Samuel  Thomson  was  united 
in  wedlock  with  Susanna  Allen,  of  Surry,  New- Hampshire.  On 
the  4th  of  July  following,  his  eldest  child  was  born.  Soon  af- 
ter, the  mother  went  into  fits,  and  notwithstanding  she  had  the 
attendance  of  six  of  the  best  medical  men  the  county  could  pro- 
duce, she  grew  worse,  and  a  seventh  doctor  was  sent  for  ;  but 
she  continued  to  grow  worse  under  their  care. 

DISAGREEMENT  AMONG  THE  DOCTORS. 

One  v/ould  give  her  medicine,  and  another  said  it  was  wrong; 
another  would  propose  to  bleed  her,  and  a  fourth  would  say  it 
would  kill  her;  and  this  is  a  fair  specimen  of  their  manage- 
ment of  the  patient,  and  treatment  to  each  other.  Thomson 
found  they  were  trying  their  experiments  upon  his'wife,  which 
so  much  dissatisfied  him,  that  he  dismissed  them  all  the  same 
night,  after  they  had  pronounced  her  incurable,  and  sent  for 
two  root  doctors,  by  whose  eftbrts  she  was  restored  to  feeble 
health. 

CASE  OP  COLIC. 

In  about  one  month  she  was  attacked  with  the  colic,  and  the 
two  physicians  were  employed  who  had  restored  her  in  her  for- 
mer sickness ;  but  the  disease  had  a  run  of  several  days,  in 
spite  of  their  efforts.  These  attacks  continued  once  a  month  or 
ofiener ;  and  it  was  attended  with  so  much  trouble  to  go  for  the 
doctors  so  often,  during  those  attacks,  that  Thomson  employed 
one  to  remove  into  a  house  upon  one  part  of  his  farm,  so  as  to 
have  him  at  hand  in  time  of  sickness. 


496  THE  THOMSOiNIAN 

BIRTH  OF  SECOND  CHILD — CASE  OF  SCARLET  FEVER. 

In  March,  1794,  Mrs.  Thomson  was  confined  with  her  se- 
cond child  (a  daughter),  but  received  no  other  medical  assist- 
ance than  that  of  her  husband,  with  the  advice  of  the  doctor 
who  resided  on  the  farm.  After  this  time,  she  was  never  at- 
tacked with  the  colic. 

When  this  child  was  two  years  old.  she  was  attacked  with 
canker  rash.  Dr.  Bliss,  who  resided  on  the  farm,  was  sent  for, 
and  he  said  she  had  that  disorder  as  bad  as  any  one  lie  ever 
saw.  He  tried  his  utmost  to  prevent  putrefaction  ;  and,  after 
usinof  his  best  exertions  without  doing-  any  good,  he  gave  her 
up  to  die.  She  was  senseless,  and  the  canker  was  to  be  seen 
in  her  mouth,  nose,  and  ears,  and  one  of  her  eyes  was  covered 
with  it,  and  closed.  The  other  eye  began  to  swell,  and  turn 
purple  also.  Thomson  asked  the  doctor  if  he  could  not  keep 
the  canker  out  of  the  other  eye  ;  he  said  it  would  be  of  no  use, 
for  she  could  not  live.  He  then  informed  the  doctor,  that  if 
he  (the  doctor)  could  do  no  more  for  the  child,  he  would  try 
himself,  as  he  found  that  without  itnmediate  assistance  the 
child  would  be  blind  with  both  eyes ;  and  she  was  so  much 
distressed  that  she  would  spring  up  in  bed,  in  struggling  for 
breath.  In  this  case  we  see  the  germ  of  Thomson's  steaming 
process. 

FIRST  TRIAL  OF  STAEBIING  IN  SICKNESS. 

He  sat  down  in  a  chair  and  held  the  child  in  his  lap,  and  put 
a  blanket  around  them  both,  and  Mrs.  Thomson  held  a  hot  spi- 
der or  shovel  between  his  feet,  and  he  poured  on  vinegar  to 
raise  a  steam,  and  kept  it  as  hot  as  she  could  bear  it,  changing 
them  as  often  as  they  became  cold  ;  and  by  following  this  plan 
about  twenty  minutes,  she  became  comfortable  and  breathed 
easy. 

COLD  WATER  FOR  INFLAMMATION. 

A  cloth  wet  with  cold  water  was  kept  upon  the  eyes,  chang- 
ing it  as  often  as  it  grew  warm.  Dr.  Thomson  informs  us, 
that  he  continued  this  steaming  process,  once  in  two  hours,  for 
about  one  week,  when  the  patient  began  to  gain.  Her  eyes 
came  open ;  the  one  that  was  worst  was  completely  covered 
with  canker,  and  as  white  as  paper. 

ASTRINGENTS  USED  FOR  CANKER. 

In  this  case,  we  see  the  first  use  of  the  astringent  wash,  or 
rough  medicine,  to  take  off  the  coat  of  canker  from  the  eyes, 
which  was  made  of  marsh-rosemary ;  and  when  the  scale  came 
off  the  right  eye,  the  sight  came  out  with  it,  and  it  entirely  pe- 
rished. The  left  eye  was  saved,  to  the  astonishment  of  all,  and 
especially  the  doctor,  who  said  she  was  saved  by  the  treatment 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  497 

received  from  the  young  iEsculapius,  who  first  found  out  the 
use  of  steamincr  and  cold  water,  as  an  application  in  this  case. 
After  this  successful  debut  in  the  healing  art,  we  are  informed 
that  he  found  by  experience  that  putting  a  hot  stone  into  a  ket- 
tle with  water  sufficient  partly  to  cover  it,  and  then  pouring  vi- 
negar on  the  stone,  was  an  improvement  in  steaming,  for  which 
hehad  abundant  occasion  in  after  years  in  his  own  family. 

THIRD  CHILD  BORN — LONG  FEVER,  &C. 

A  short  time  before  this  daughter  was  taken  sick,  the  third 
child,  a  son,  was  born,  and  was  very  weakly,  in  consequence 
of  the  mother's  having:,  previous  to  his  birth,  what  was  then 
called  the  three  months'  fever;  which  experience  gave  Thom- 
son a  good  knowledge  of  the  management  of  the  doctors  to  pro- 
long the  disease,  as  he  could  never  harbor  the  idea  that  a  doc- 
tor was  of  any  use,  if  the  fever  must  have  its  course,  and  nature 
perform  the  cure  in  the  end.  Yet  the  doctor  got  his  pay,  and 
the  credit  of  the  cure.  If  nature  was  sufficiently  strong  to  re- 
sist the  combined  attacks  of  the  disease  and  the  doctor,  they 
would  recover;  if  not,  they  would  run  down  in  what  was  call- 
ed the  galloping  consumption.  The  doctor  undertook  to  man- 
age with  Mrs,  Thomson,  but  her  husband  interfered,  and  dis- 
missed him.  As  soon  as  she  stopped  taking  his  medicines  she 
began  to  gain,  and  soon  got  about. 

CROUP,  OR  RATTLES. 

Vv'hen  this  son  was  about  six  weeks  old,  he  was  taken  with 
the  croup  or  rattles,  and  very  much  distressed,  so  that  he  could 
be  heard  all  over  the  house.  Not  yet  being  entirely  satisfied 
with  the  doctor's  skill,  he  was  sent  for  again,  and  attended  the 
child  until  about  ten  o'clock  at  night,  v/ithout  doing  any  good, 
and  he  then  left  for  home,  saying  that  tlie  child  would  not  live 
until  morning. 

RATTLE  snake's  OIL  FIRST  USED. 

Thomson's  inventive  genius  was  again  taxed,  to  do  for  the 
sick  what  those  who  professed  superior  skill  failed  in  perform- 
ing. We  are  informed,  that  in  this  case  he  had  recourse  to 
rattle  snake's  oil,  and  succeeded  in  making tlie  child  quite  com- 
fortable by  the  next  morning. 

Thomson's  medical  skill  appreciated. 

We  now  for  the  first  time  begin  to  see  the  medical  know- 
ledge of  Dr.  Thomson  appreciated  ;  as  we  are  told  that  the  doc- 
tor came  in  the  next  morning,  and  was  much  surprised  on  see- 
ing the  child  so  much  better,  and  wished  to  know  what  had 
wrought  the  change  ;  and  on  being  intormed,  appeared  much 
pleased  with  the  information ;  and  he  observed,  that  he  was 
willing  to  allow  that  the  greatest  knowledge  that  doctors  ever 


498 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


obtained,  was  either  by  accident  or  through  necessity.  So  the 
cure  which  was  discovered  for  this  desperate  disease  by  neces- 
sity, was  of  great  vaUie  both  to  the  doctor  and  himself  Yet 
we  are  informed  that  Thomson  was  charged  by  the  doctor  for 
his  useless  visit,  notwithstanding  the  information  he  gained  of 
the  experimenter. 

GATHERING  HOOTS  AND  HERES. 

After  his  great  success  in  his  own  family  in  time  of  sickness, 
we  are  informed  that  Dr.  Thomson  began  to  gather  all  kinds 
of  roots  and  herbs  in  the  proper  season,  and  prepare  them  for 
medicine,  to  prevent  as  well  as  to  cure  disease,  for  he  found  by 
experience  that  "an  ounce  of  prevention  was  worth  a  pound  of 
cure." 

NOT  EXPECTING  TO  PRACTICE. 

Dr.  Thomson  informs  us,  that  he  had  not  the  most  distant 
idea  of  engaging  in  the  practice  of  medicine,  more  than  to  as- 
sist those  of  his  own  family  in  time  of  sickness ;  and  little  did 
he  expect,  as  he  very  justly  remarks,  what  those  severe  trials 
and  sufierings  in  his  own  fan)ily  were  destined  to  bring  about. 
'•It  seemed,"  said  he,  "as  a  judgment  upon  me  and  my  family, 
for  some  one  living  with  me  v%^is  sick  most  of  the  time  while 
the  doctor  lived  on  the  farm,  which  was  seven  5'ears.  Since  I" 
have  had  more  experience,  and  become  better  acquainted  with 
the  subject,  I  am  satisfied  as  to  the  cause,  which  was  excessive 
bleeding,  and  taking  too  much  physic." 

After  the  doctor  had  removed  from  the  farm,  we  are  inform- 
ed that  he  had  but  little  sickness  in  his  family. 

SECOND  SON  BORN — NO  MIDWIFE. 

On  the  birth  of  his  second  son,  which  was  two  years  from 
that  of  the  first,  he  had  no  occasion  lor  adoctor.  Thomson  in- 
forms us,  that  his  wife  did  well,  and  the  child  was  much  more 
healthy  than  the  others  had  been ;  and  he  informs  us  also,  that 
he  has  never  employed  a  doctor  since,  as  he  had  found  from 
sad  experience  that  they  made  more  disease  than  they  cured. 

HIS  OWN  PHYSICIAN. 

When  any  of  his  family  were  taken  sick,  he  found  no  diffi- 
culty in  restoring  them  to  health,  from  the  fund  of  practical 
knowledge  which  he  had  acquired  from  the  more  desperate  cas- 
es of  disease  which  he  had  already  successfully  treated. 

INSTRUCTION  TO  CHILDREN. 

We  are  informed,  that  as  fast  as  his  children  arrived  to  years 
of  discretion,  they  were  instructed  how  to  avoid,  as  well  as  to 
cure  disease  ;  and  they  have  generally  enjoyed  good  health 
since. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  499 

BIRTH    OF  3d  son — -MIDWIFE   PRESENT — SEVERE    SICKN3SS. 

At  the  birth  of  his  third  son,  Thomson  informs  us,  he  em- 
ployed a  midwife,  and  soon  after  the  child  was  born  his  wife 
was  taken  with  ague  fits  and  cramp  in  the  stomach  ;  she  was 
in  great  distress,  and  they  were  all  much  alarmed  at  lier  situa- 
tion. "  I  proposed  to  make  use  of  some  of  my  medicines  (says 
Thomson),  but  it  was  strenuously  objected  to  by  the  midwife, 
who  said  she  wished  to  have  a  do8tor,  and  the  sooner  the  bet- 
ter. A  physician  was  immediately  sent  for,  and  I  proposed  to 
give  her  something  to  aflbrd  temporary  relief  until  the  doctor 
came ;  but  it  was  all  to  no  purpose,  the  midwife  would  not  hear 
to  it.  She  said  the  patient  was  in  a  very  dangerous  situation, 
and  not  more  than  one  in  twenty  lived  through  it,  and  proba- 
bly she  would  not  live  more  than  twenty-four  hours  from  that 
time." 

THE  WIFE  AGAIN  RESTORED,    AFTER  BEING  GIVEN  OVER 

FIFTH  CASE. 

The  man  who  went  for  the  doctor  having  returned  without 
him,  and  there  being  no  other  within  six  miles,  I  then,  (says 
he)  came  to  the  determination  of.  hearing  to  no  one's  advice, 
but  to  pursue  my  own  plan.  I  told  my  wife,  that  as  the  mid- 
wife said  she  could  not  Uve  more  than  twenty-four  hours,  there- 
fore there  would  not  be  much  hazard  in  my  attempting  to  re- 
lieve her.  I  gave  her  warm  medicines,  to  raise  the  inward 
heat,  and  then  applied  the  steam,  which  was  much  opposed  by 
the  midwife ;  but  I  persisted  in  it,  according  to  the  best  of  my 
judgment,  and  relieved  her  in  one  hour,  after  she  had  lain  in 
that  situation  about  four  hours,  without  any  thing  being  done, 
waiting  for  a  doctor.  The  midwife  expressed  much  astonish- 
ment at  the  success  attending:  my  efforts,  and  said  that  1  had 
saved  my  wife's  life,  for  she  was  certain  that  without  the  means 
I  had  used  she  could  not  have  lived.  She  continued  to  do  well 
and  soon  recovered. 

This  makes  the  fifth  time,  he  remarks,  that  I  had  applied  to 
the  mother  of  invention  for  assistance,  after  the  failure  of  oth- 
ers, and  in  all  of  them  was  completely  successful. 

HIS  SUCCESS  APPRECIATED. 

"  The  success  which  had  attended  my  efforts  in  my  own  fa- 
mily (he  observes)  caused  much  conversation  in  the  neighbor- 
hood, and  in  some  instances  I  was  employed  in  consequence  of 
my  successful  nursing,  and  in  all  cases  I  was  completely  trium- 
phant. 

BIRTH  OF  FIFTH  SON — THIRD  DAUGHTER,    &C. 

The  next  sickness  of  his  wife  took  place,  says  Thomson,  in 
1799 ;    and  in  about  two  years  after,  she  had  another  son,  and 


500  THE  THOMSONIAN 

did  well ;  making  in  all  five  sons  in  succession,  after  which  she 
had  another  daughter,  which  was  the  last  of  eight  children — 
five  sons  and  three  daughters.  "  The  different  circumstances 
through  which  I  passed  in  bringing  up  this  family  of  children, 
the  scenes  of  sickness  and  distress,  the  experience  acquired  of 
the  regular  practice,  and  the  success  attending  my  efforts  in 
time  of  disease,  are  the  occasion  of  my  mentioning  them  so  mi- 
nutely. The  knowledge  afid  experience,  however,  which  1 
gained  by  these  scenes,  1  have  reason  to  be  satisfied  with,  as  they 
have  proved  to  be  a  blessing,  not  only  to  me,  but  to  many  hun- 
dreds of  others,  who  have  been  relieved  from  sickness  and  dis- 
tress through  my  instrumentality.  And  I  hope  and  trust,  that 
it  will  eventually  be  the  cause  of  throwini];  off  the  veil  of  igno- 
rance from  the  eyes  of  the  good  people  of  ^this  country,  and  do- 
ing away  the  blind  confidence  they  are  so  much  in  the  habit  of 
placing  in  those  who  call  themselves  physicians;  who  fare 
sumptuously  every  day,  living  in  splendor  and  magnificence, 
supported  by  the  impositions  they  practise  upon  a  deluded  and 
credulous  people.  It  appears  to  me  that  the  physicians  have 
much  more  regard  for  their  own  interest  than  for  the  health 
and  happiness  of  those  who  are  so  unfortunate  as  to  have  any 
thing  to  do  with  them." 

KNOWLEDGE  ACQUIRED  BY  EXPERIMENTS  ON  OTHERS. 

"If  this  was  the  worst  side  of  the  picture,  it  might  be  borne 
with  more  patience  ;  but  their  practice  is  altogether  experimen- 
tal, to  try  the  effect  of  their  poisons  upon  their  patients ;  and  if 
they  happen  to  give  anymore  tlian  nature  can  bear,  they  either 
die,  or  become  miserable  invalids  for  life.  There  are  many 
physicians  within  my  knowledge  who  do  not  follow  the  fa- 
shionable practice  of  the  day,  but  are  governed  by  their  own 
judgment,  and  make  use  ot  vegetable  mc-dicines  of  our  own 
country,  with  the  mode  of  treatment  the  most  consistent  with 
nature.-' 

FIRST  CASE  OF  MEASLES. 

"Some  time  in  the  month  of  [November,  1802,  my  children 
were  taken  with  the  measles,  and  some  of  them  had  the  com- 
plaint very  bad.  The  want  of  the  knowledge  how  to  treat 
them,  gave  me  a  great  deal  of  trouble — much  more  than  it 
would  at  the  present  time — for  experience  has  taught  me  that 
they  are  very  easy  to  manage.  One  of  my  children  took  the 
disease  and  gave  it  to  the  resr,  and  I  think  we  had  four  down 
with  them  at  one  time.  My  third  son  had  the  disorder  very 
bad ;  they  would  not  come  out,  but  continued  in  the  system, 
and  he  turned  purple  and  became  stupid.  The  canker  was  in 
his  tliroat  and  mouth,  and  the  rosemary  would  have  no  effect. 
Putrid  symptoms  made  their  appearance,  and  I  was  then  under 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  501 

the  necessity  of  inventing  something  to  allay  those  symptoms 
and  remove  the  canker.  1  used  the  steam  of  vinegar  to  guard 
against  putrefaction,  and  gold  thread  (Coptis  trifolia)  with  red 
oak  acorns  (C^uercus  rubra),  pounded  and  steeped  together,  for 
the  canker.  This  remedy  had  the  desired  effect,  and  by  close 
attention  he  soon  began  to  improve." 

SECOND  ATTACK. 

"  The  second  son  was  attacked  nearly  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  first,  and  I  pursued  nearly  the  same  course  of  treatment, 
with  similar  success:  but  the  disease  had  so  affected  his  lungs 
that  I  feared  he  would  have  the  consumption.  He  could  not 
speak  aloud  for  three  weeks.  I  could  do  nothing  that  would 
help  him,  until  I  gave  him  several  potions  of  the  emetic  herb, 
(Lobelia  infiata)  which  relieved  him,  and  he  soon  got  well. 
During  this  sickness,  we  suffered  much  from  fatigue  and  want 
of  sleep,  for  neither  my  wife  nor  myself  had  our  clothes  off  for 
twelve  nights.  This  was  a  good  fortnight's  school  to  me,  in 
which  I  learned  much  of  the  nature  and  treatment  of  the  mea- 
sles, and  found  it  to  be  canker  and  putrefaction.  This  experi- 
ence enabled  me  to  relieve  many  others  of  this  complaint,  and 
likewise  of  the  canker  rash.  In  these  two  disorders,  and  the 
small  pox,  I  found  a  looking-glass,  in  which  may  be  seen  the 
nature  of  every  other  disease." 

.SMALL  POX. 

"  I  had  the  small  pox  in  1798,  and  examined  its  symptoms 
with  all  the  skill  I  was  capable  of,  to  ascertain  the  nature  of  the 
disease  ;  and  I  found  it  was  the  highest  stage  of  canker  and 
putrefaction  that  the  human  system  was  capable  of  bearing ; 
the  measles  the  next  in  point  of  virulence,  and  the  canker  rash, 
or  scarlet  fever,  the  least  of  the  three.  And  all  other  disorders 
partake  more  or  less  of  the  same,  which  I  am  satisfied  is  a  key 
to  the  whole  ;  for  by  knowing  how  to  cure  those  complaints, 
will  furnish  a  general  rule  by  which  all  other  complaints  may 
be  safely  treated  ;  as  the  same  means  that  will  put  out  a  large 
fire  will  extinguish  a  candle." 

MRS.  REDDING — CASE  OF  COLIC. 

"Soon  after  my  family  had  recovered  from  the  measles,  I 
was  sent  for  to  attend  a  woman  by  the  name  ©f  Redding,  who 
had  been  afflicted  with  the  colic  ibr  several  years,  and  could 
find  no  relief  from  the  doctors.  I  attended  her  .in  my  usual 
way,  and  found  that  canker  was  the  cause  of  her  complaint, 
and  in  a  very  short  time  restored  her  to  health,  insomuch  that 
she  has  never  had  another  attack  to  my  knowledge.  The  lady- 
was  restored  to  health  in  so  simple  a  manner  that  it  became  a 
subject  of  ridicule  ;   and  when  asked  about  her  situation,  she 


502  THE    THOMSONIAN 

was  ashamed  to  acknowledge  that  I  had  performed  the  cure. 
It  appeared  there  could  be  nothing  done  right  but  by  tho  regu- 
lar physicians.  I  attended  in  this  family  for  several  years,  and 
always  successfully;  but  my  treatment  was  so  simple,  and  my 
remedies  so  universally  known  to  the  people,  that  my  services 
were  not  considered  worthy  of  compensation.  Finding  that 
such  remuneration  would  not  support  my  family,  I  refused  en- 
tirely to  do  any  thing  more  for  them.  After  which  they  had 
plenty  of  sickness,  and  doctor's  bills  to  attend  to,  and  one  bill 
amounted  to  one  hundred  dollars;  while  I  did  not  received 
cent. 

MRS.  WETHERBEE's  CASE. 

I  was  soon  after  called  upon  to  attend  a  Mrs.  Wetherbee,  who 
had  been  troubled  with  violent  attacks  of  the  colic,  about  once 
a  month,  for  a  number  of  years,  and  having  heard  of  my  suc- 
cess in  the  Redding  family.  I  gave  her  the  medicine  to  re- 
move canker,  and  steamed  her,  which  relieved  her  in  one 
hour.  She  had  a  large  family  to  attend  to,  having  thirteen 
children,  and  before  she  gained  her  strength  she  had  another 
attack.  1  attended  her  again,  and  again  relieved  her.  But  she 
would  not  be  prudent,  so  as  to  gain  her  strength,  but  must  go 
to  work  again,  and  took  cold  and  had  a  third  attack.  Her  hus- 
band said  that  I  only  relieved  her  for  the  time,  but  did  not  re- 
move the  cause.  Consequently,  he  sent  for  a  physician  to  re- 
move the  complaint,  who  carried  her  through  a  course  of  mer- 
cury, which  reduced  her  to  that  degree  that  she  was  not  able  to 
attend  to  her  domestic  affairs  in  eight  weeks ;  and  then  he  de- 
cided that  she  had  the  consumption,  and  gave  her  over  to  die. 

After  the  doctor  had  left  her  to  die,  she  aofain  applied  to  me, 
but  I  declined  doing  any  thing  for  her,  as  I  knew  her  situation 
was  much  worse  than  when  the  doctor  commenced  with  her; 
and  should  I  fail  in  effecting  a  cure,  the  blame  would  all  be 
placed  to  my  account,  and  if  she  got  well  I  should  get  no  credit 
for  the  cure. 

One  day,  after  finishing  my  forenoon's  work,  on  going  to  din- 
ner I  found  her  at  my  house  waiting  for  me  to  come  home,  and 
she  entreated  so  hard  for  me  to  undertake  to  cure  her,  and 
seemed  to  have  so  m.uch  faith  of  ultimate  success,  that  I  con- 
sented, provided  she  would  come  to  my  house  and  stay  with 
my  wife,  I  would  do  the  best  I  could.  She  readily  consented, 
and  staid  but  three  days  with  us,  during  which  time  I  pursued 
my  usual  course  of  tieatment,  giving  her  things  to  remove 
the  canker,  and  steaming  to  promote  a  natural  perspiration  ; 
and  at  the  end  of  the  time  she  went  home,  taking  with  her 
some  medicine,  with  directions  how  to  manage  herself,  and  in 
a  short  time  entirely  recovered  her  health. 

Soon  after  this,  Mrs.  W.  had  another  child,  which  was  her 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  503 

last.  She  did  extremely  well,  and  never  had  another  attack  of 
the  colic.  Notwithstanding  she  was  restored  so  soon,  the  fa- 
mily were  hardly  willing  to  give  me  any  credit  for  the  cure,  or 
acknowledge  that  I  had  benefitted  her;  and  in  time  of  sickness 
they  never  would  send  for  me,  until  all  other  remedies  had 
failed. 

SICKNESS  OP  A  SON  OF  MRS.  WETHERBEE. 

In  about  one  year  after  this,  a  young  man,  one  of  this  family, 
about  16  years  of  age,  was  taken  with  a  fever,  and  it  was  not 
time  for  me  to  be  employed,  consequently  the  physician  was 
called  in  as  usual,  and  reduced  him  with  Mercury  and  other 
poisons,  to  that  degree  that  he  lingered  several  months,  grow- 
ing constantly  worse,  and  the  doctor  said  he  had  the  rheumatic 
fever,  and  afterwards  that  he  was  in  a  decline  or  consumption. 
The  mercury  had  settled  in  his  back  and  hips,  and  he  was  so 
stiff  that  he  could  not  bring  his  hands  lower  than  his  knees. 
The  doctor  now  gave  him  over  to  die — consequently  he  was  a 
fit  subject  for  me. 

DR.  THOMSON  SENT  FOR. 

His  parents  as  usual  called  upon  me,  and  out  of  pity  for  the 
young  man  I  agreed  to  take  him  home  to  my  house,  and  to  do 
the  best  I  could  for  him.  It  was  a  difficult  task,  'for  I  had  to 
bring  him  back  to  the  same  situation  he  was  in  when  he  had 
the  fever,  and  destroy  the  effects  of  the  poison,  and  regulate  the 
system  by  steaming,  to  produce  a  natural  perspiration.  By 
pursuing  this  plan,  and  living  such  articles  as  I  could  obtain 
to  restore  the  digestive  system,  in  two  months  he  was  com- 
pletely restored  to  health.  For  this  service  I  received  five  dol- 
lars, and  that  was  more  grudgingly  paid  than  the  fifty  dollars 
paid  the  doctor  for  making  him  sick. 

A  CASE  OF  CONSUMPTION. 

In  the  spring  of  1805,  I  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Woodstock,  in 
Vermont,  to  attend  a  young  woman  who  was  considered  in  a 
decline,  and  was  given  over  as  incurable  by  the  doctors.  I  at- 
tended her  about  one  week,  and  then  left  her  medicines  and 
started  for  home.  In  about  one  month  I  visited  her  again,  and 
found  her  so  much  better  that  she  was  able  to  ride  to  her  fa- 
ther's, which  was  a  distance  of  about  twenty  miles. 

DIFFIDENCE  OF  DR.  THOMSON. 

All  this  time  1  did  not  think  that  I  possessed  any  knowledge 
of  disease  or  of  medicine,  more  than  what  I  had  learned  by 
accident,  and  all  the  cases  I  had  attended  were  from  necessity. 
At  any  rate  the  success  attending  my  practice  created  much 
talk  and  it  was  known  for  fifty  miles  around  the  country,  and 
I  was  so  constantly  harrassed  that  I  found  it  impossible  to  at- 


504  THE    THOMSONIAN 

tend  to  my  farm  and  family  as  I  ou2:ht.  For  the  cases  I  had 
attended  I  had  received  very  htlle  compensation,  not  sufficient 
to  pay  me  for  my  time,  and  I  found  it  to  be  my  duty  to  give  up 
practice  entirely  or  to  make  a  business  of  it. 

CONSULTS    ABOUT    CONTINUING    HIS    PRACTICE. 

"  I  consulted  with  my  wife  and  advised  with  my  friends 
what  was  best  for  me  to  do,  and  they  all  agreed  that  as  it  seem- 
ed to  be  the  natural  turn  of  my  mind,  and  if  I  thought  myself 
capable  of  grappling  with  so  important  an  undertaking,  it 
would  be  best  to  let  my  own  judgment  govern  me  and  do  as  1 
thought  best,  I  finally  concluded  to  improve  the  talent  which 
the  God  of  nature  appeared  to  have  endowed  me  with  for  the 
good  of  mankind. 

IDEAS    OF    HIS    RECEIVING    AN    EDUCATION. 

"  Whether  I  should  have  been  any  more  useful,  had  it  been 
my  lot  to  have  been  educated,  and  learned  the  profession  in 
the  regular  and  fashionable  way,  I  cannot  say  ;  Init  am  inclin- 
ed to  think  my  usefulness  would  in  a  great  measure  have  been 
destroyed,  as  my  mind  would  then  have  been  guided  by  the 
acquired  knowledge  of  others,  instead  of  reason  and  philosophy 
which  I  took  lor  my  criterion,  and  by  which  I  was  never  de- 
ceived. 

TALENTS  OF  EDUCATED  AND  UNEDUCATED  MEN. 

"I  wish  my  readers  to  understand  that  I  do  not  intend  to 
convey  the  idea  that  learning  is  not  necessary  and  essential  in 
obtainuig  a  knowledge  of  any  profession  ;  but  that  going  to 
college  will  make  a  wise  man  of  a  fool  is  what  I  am  ready  to 
deny.  Or  that  a  man  cannot  be  useful  and  even  eminent  in 
his  profession,  or  in  the  arts  and  sciences,  without  a  classical 
education,  is  what  I  think  no  one  will  have  the  hardihood  to 
deny,  as  it  is  contrary  to  reason  and  common  sense  ;  as  some 
of  the  greatest  philosophers,  statesmen,  physicians  and  divines 
of  the  world  were  self-taught ;  and  who  have  done  more  good 
and  rendered  society  more  liappy  by  their  knowledge  than  a 
million  of  those  who  have  nothing  to  recommend  them  but  a 
head  stored  with  artificial  knowladge  to  the  exclusion  of  more 
rational  and  solid  information  acquired  from  a  useful  employ- 
ment." 

USE    OF    POISONS,    &C.    CONDEMNED    BY    THE    FACULTY. 

Amons:  the  practising  physicians  I  have  found,  I  believe  it  a 
well  known  fact,  that  those  who  were  really  great  in  their  pro- 
fession and  have  had  the  most  experience,  condemn  as  much 
as  I  do  the  fashionable  practice  of  the  present  day.  Such  phy- 
sicians use  but  very  litde  mercurial  poison,  but  confine  them- 
selves in  their  treatment  mostly  to  vegetable  simples  and  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  505 

use  of  such  things  as  will  promote  digestion  and  assist  nature  ; 
and  many  of  late  years  disapprove  entirely  of  bloodletting  and 
depletion  generally.  This  is  a  great  point  gained  in  the  prac- 
tice of  medicine.  I  have  become  acquainted  with  many  phy- 
sicians that  were  eminent  in  their  profession,  who  have  treated 
me  with  civility  and  have  heard  a  relation  of  my  experience 
with  apparent  pleasure,  especially  the  simple  relation  of  my 
method  of  treating  disease. 

THE    GREATEST    ABUSE    RECEIVED    WHERE    THE    MOST    GOOD 
"WAS    DONE. 

The  greatest  abuse  I  have  ever  received  was  where  I  had 
cured  the  patients  that  were  given  over  by  the  doctors  to  die, 
as  in  such  cases  no  abuse  has  been  spared  or  ridicule  wanting, 
that  would  in  the  least  forward  their  object  in  destroying  the 
confidence  of  the  people  in  me  and  my  practice. 

DETERMINES    TO    FOLLOW    THE    PRACTICE. 

After  I  had  come  to  the  determination  to  make  a  business  of 
the  medical  practice,  I  found  it  necessary  to  fix  upon  some  sys- 
tem or  plan  for  future  government  in  the  treatment  of  disease; 
as  what  I  had  done  has  been  as  it  were  from  accident,  and  the 
necessity  arising  out  of  the  particular  cases  that  came  under  my 
care,  without  any  fixed  plan.  I  deemed  it  necessary  not  only 
as  a  guide  to  myself,  but  that  whatever  discoveries  1  should 
make  in  future  in  ray  practice  might  be  so  adapted  to  my 
plan  that  ray  whole  system  might  be  easily  taught  to  others, 
and  preserved  for  the  benefit  of  the  world.  1  had  no  other  as- 
sistance than  my  own  observation  and  the  natural  reflections  of 
my  own  mind  unaided  by  learning  or  the  opinions  of  others. 
1  took  nature  for  my  guide,  and  experience  for  my  instructor, 
and  after  considering  every  part  of  the  subject  I  came  to  cer- 
tain conclusions  concerning  disease,  and  the  whole  animal  eco- 
nomy ;  which  more  than  forty  years'  experience  has  perfectly 
satisfied  me  is  the  only  correct  theory.  My  practice  has  been 
invariably  conformable  to  the  general  principles  upon  which 
my  system  is  founded,  and  in  no  instance  have  I  had  reason 
to  doubt  the  correctness  of  its  application  to  all  diseases  incident 
to  the  country,  when  properly  applied,  that  are  curable. 

THOMSONIAN    THEORY. 

That  all  diseases  are  the  effect  of  one  general  cause 
and  may  he  removed  by  one  general  remedy,  is  the  founda- 
tion upon  which  I  have  erected  my  fabric,  and  which  I  shall 
endeavor  to  explain  in  as  concise  a  manner  as  possible,  that 
my  readers  may  understand  and  be  convinced  of  its  correct- 
ness. J  I'ound  that  all  animal  bodies  were  composed  of  the  ele- 
ments, and  that  earth  and  water  were  the  solids,  and  air  and 
fire  or  heat  were  the  fluids,  and  a  proper  organization  and  a 

33 


506  THE    THOMSONIAN 

suitable  temperature  produced  life  and  nioiion  ;  that  cold  or 
measurably  the  absence  of  heat  was  the  cause  of  disease,  that 
to  restore  the  heat  or  animal  warmth  to  its  natural  standard 
was  the  only  way  that  health  and  strength  could  be  produced  ; 
and  that  after  restoring  the  natural  heat  of  the  body  by  clearing 
the  system  of  all  obstructions,  and  causing  a  natural  perspira- 
tion, the  stomach  would  digest  the  food  taken,  by  which  means 
the  whole  body  is  nourished  and  invigorated  and  the  heat  of 
the  body  or  nature  is  able  to  hold  its  supremacy.  1  found  that 
the  constitutions  of  all  mankind  were  generally  tlie  same,  and 
differing  only  in  the  temperament  of  the  same  materials  of 
which  they  were  composed.  It  appeared  also  clear  to  my  mind 
that  all  disease  originated  from  one  general  cause,  and  might 
be  cured  by  one  general  remedy  or  principle,  applied  in  a  great 
variety  of  forms  as  medicine  ;  and  that  a  state  of  perfect  health 
arises  from  a  due  balance  or  proper  temperature  of  the  elements  ; 
but  if  by  any  means  this  balance  or  equilibrium  is  destroyed, 
the  heat  of  the  body  is  wasted  and  more  or  less  diseased.  This 
is  always  the  case  in  a  partial  absence  of  the  active  element  or 
heat,  or  in  proportion  to  this  diminution  or  absence  the  oppos- 
ing principle,  or  cold,  is  received  into  the  system,  producing 
derangement  and  disease. 

COMMON    ORIGIN    OF    DISEASES. 

I  found  that  all  diseases  to  which  the  human  family  were 
subject  were,  however  various  the  symptoms  and  different  the 
names  by  which  they  were  called,  produced  directly  from  ob- 
structed perspiration,  which  is  always  produced  by  cold  or  the 
absence  of  a  suitable  degree  of  natural  vitality,  or  warmth 
above  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere ;  for  upon  the  Aeac/ 
and/a/Z,  as  an  engineer  or  miller  would  say,  depends  the  move- 
ment of  the  machine,  or  life  and  motion  in  the  human  body; 
and  if  there  is  a  natural  heat,  there  must  be  a  natural  perspira- 
tion. 

GENERAL    REMEDY. 

Having  fixed  upon  these  principles  as  the  only  solid  founda- 
tion upon  which  a  correct  and  true  knowledge  of  the  subject 
can  be  based,  my  next  business  was,  what  Kind  of  medicines 
and  treatment  would  best  answer  the  purpose,  in  conformity 
to  this  universal  plan  of  curing  disease. 

It  must  be  self-evident,  I  tliink,  to  every  one,  that  whatsoever 
course  will  restore  or  increase  the  natural  internal  warmth  of 
the  body,  if  not  to  exceed  100  deg.  Fahrenheit,  or  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  blood,  and  remove  all  obstructions  of  the  system,  re- 
store the  powers  of  digestion,  and  promote  a  natural  perspira- 
tion, is  universally  applicable  in  all  cases  of  disease,  and  there- 
fore may  be  considered  as  a  general  remedy. 


MATERIA    MEDICA  507 

EMETICS — IIVTERNAL    HEAT    OF    THE    BODY. 

The  first  and  most  important  consideration  was  to  find  a  me- 
dicine that  would  establish  a  natural  internal  heat,  so  as  to  give 
nature  its  command  over  the  body.  The  emetic  herb  (No.  1) 
Lobelia  injlata  I  found  would  effectually  cleanse  the  stomach, 
and  aid  in  raisino^  the  heat  and  promoting  perspiration  ;  but 
the  system  would  not  hold  it  a  sufficient  length  of  time  to  ef- 
fect the  desired  object.  It  was  like  a  fire  made  of  shavings — a 
heat  for  a  short  time,  then  it  would  go  out. 

After  much  trouble  and  experience,  and  trying  every  thing 
within  my  knowledge,  I  at  length  fixed  upon  the  medicine 
which  I  have  called  No.  2,  Cayenne  pepper  (or  capsicum),  for 
that  purpose ;  and  after  many  years  experience  in  its  use,  I  am 
perfectly  convinced  that  it  is  the  best  thing  that  can  be  used  to 
hold  the  heat  in  the  system  until  the  stomach  and  various  ave- 
nues of  the  body  are  cleared  of  their  obstructions,  so  as  to  pro- 
duce a  natural  digestion  of  the  food  which  will  nourish  the  bo- 
dy, establish  perspiration,  and  restore  the  health  of  the  patient. 
I  found  it  to  be  perfectly  safe  in  all  cases,  and  have  never 
known  any  bad  effects  to  arise  from  its  use. 

A    CURE    FOR    CANKER. 

My  next  grand  object  was  to  get  something  that  would  clear 
the  stomach  and  bowels  from  canker,  or  the  white  feverish  coat 
that  was  attached  to  the  mucous  membrane,  which  is  more  or 
less  affected  by  it  in  all  cases  of  disease  to  which  the  human  fa- 
mily are  subject.  Canker  and  putrefaction  are  caused  by  cold, 
or  want  of  heat ;  for  whenever  any  part  of  the  body  is  so  affect- 
ed with  the  cold  as  to  overpower  the  natural  heat,  putrefaction 
commences  ;  and  if  not  checked  by  medicine,  or  if  the  natural 
constitution  is  not  strong  enough  to  overcome  its  progress,  it 
will  communicate  with  the  blood,  when  death  will  end  the 
contest  between  the  heat  and  cold,  or  the  powers  of  life  and 
death,  by  deciding  in  favor  of  the  latter.  In  this  case,  too,  as 
in  the  others,  I  have  used  a  great  variety  of  articles  which  are 
useful  in  removing  this  feverish  coat  or  canker ;  but  my  prepa- 
ration called  No.  3,  is  the  best  for  that  purpose  of  any  remedy 
that  has  come  within  my  knowledge,  though  many  other  things 
may  be  used  to  good  effect,  which  will  be  described  in  their  ap- 
propriate place,  under  the  head  of  compounded  medicines. 

GENERAL    TREATMENT    OF    THE    SICK. 

My  general  plan  of  treatment  has  been  in  all  cases  of  disease 
to  cleanse  the  stomach  by  giving  an  emetic,  or  No.  1,  and  pro- 
duce as  great  an  internal  heat  as  I  could,  by  the  use  of  Cayenne 
pepper,  or  other  stimulants  under  the  head  of  No..  2 ;  and  when 
necessary  made  use  of  the  steam  bath,  in  which  1  always  found 
a  great  benefit,  especially  in  fevers.    After  this  I  gave  a  tea  made 


508  THE    THOMSONIAN 

of  a  compound  of  bayberry,  sumac,  hemlock  bark,  witch-hazle 
leaves,  red  raspberry  leaves,  and  marsh  rosemary,  or  a  combi- 
nation of  any  two  or  three  of  them,  as  directed  under  the  head 
of  No.  3  (see  directions),  to  clear  off  the  canker  ;  and  in  all 
cases  where  the  patient  had  not  become  so  low  that  the  consti- 
tution had  nothing  left  to  build  upon,  1  have  been  successful  in 
restoring  them  to  health* 

OBSERVATIONS    ON    FEVER. 

1  found  that  fever  was  a  disturbed  state  of  the  heat,  or  animal 
warmth,  or  more  properly,  that  it  was  caused  by  the  efforts 
■which  nature  makes  to  throw  off"  disease,  and  therefore  ought 
to  be  treated  as  a  friend,  and  not  as  an  enemy,  as  in  the  practice 
of  the  regular  physicians. 

ALL.  FEVEKS  PROCEED  FROM  THE  SAME  CAUSE. 

In  all  cases  of  disease,  I  have  always  found  there  is  more  or 
less  fever,  according  to  the  state  of  the  system ;  but  that  all  fe- 
vers proceed  from  the  same  cause,  differing  only  in  the  symp- 
toms, and  may  be  managed  and  brought  to  a  crisis  with  much 
less  trouble  than  is  generally  considered  practicable,  by  increas- 
ing the  internal  heat  or  temperature  of  the  body,  until  the  cold 
is  driven  out,  together  with  the  cause  of  it.  Thus,  by  keeping 
the  fountain  above  the  stream,  every  function  will  take  its  na- 
tural course,  and  free  the  body  of  every  obstruction. 

YELLOW  FEVER  IN  WALPOLE. 

In  the  year  1805,  a  very  alarming  disease  broke  out  in  the 
towns  of  Walpole  and  Alstead,  which  was  considered  the  yel- 
low fever,  and  was  fatal  to  many  who  were  attacked  with  it.  I 
was  called  on,  and  attended  with  very  great  success,  not  losing 
one  patient  that  came  under  my  care,  while  at  the  same  time 
nearly  one  half  of  those  who  had  regular  physicians  died.  This 
disease  prevailed  for  about  forty  days,  during  which  time  I  was 
at  home  but  eight  nights. 

UNREMITTED    ATTENTION — IMPROVEMENT    IN    PRACTICE. 

I  was  obliged  to  be  nurse  as  well  as  doctor,  and  to  do  every 
thing  myself,  for  the  people  had  no  knowledge  of  my  mode  of 
practice,  and  I  could  not  depend  upon  what  any  person  did  ex- 
cept what  was  done  under  my  immediate  inspection.  1  pursu- 
ed the  same  general  plan  that  I  had  before  adopted,  but  the  ex- 
perience 1  had  from  this  practice  suggested  to  me  many  im- 
provements which  I  had  not  before  thought  of,  as  respects  the 
manner  of  treatment  of  patients,  to  effect  the  object  I  aimed  at 
in  curing  the  disease,  which  was  to  produce  a  natural  perspira- 
tion. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  509 

BENEFIT    FROM    STEAMING. 

I  found  great  benefit  from  steaming  in  the  manner  I  had  dis- 
covered, and  practised  in  the  case  of  my  litde  daughter;  but  I 
found  that  putting  a  hot  stone  into  a  spider  or  iron  basin,  and 
then  wetting  the  top  of  the  stone  with  vinegar,  was  an  impor- 
tant improvement;  and  this  simple  method,  with  a  little  me- 
dicine of  my  own  preparing,  answered  a  much  better  purpose 
than  all  the  bleeding,  poisons,  or  physic,  of  the  doctors. 

INGRATITUDE    OF    CURED    PATIENTS.. 

While  I  was  attending  those  who  were  sick,  and  relieving 
their  distress,  they  were  ready  to  flatter,  and  give  me  great  cre- 
dit for  my  practice ;  but  after  I  had  nearly  worn  myself  out  in 
their  service  they  began  to  think  it  was  not  done  in  a  fashiona- 
ble way  ;  and  the  doctors  made  use  of  every  means  to  ridicule 
my  mode  of  treatment,  for  the  purpose  of  more  successfully 
maintaining  their  credit  and  ascendency  with  the  people.  This 
kind  of  treatment  I  did  not  then  understand  so  well  as  I  do 
now;  as  I  have  since  learned  from  hard  experience  how  to  ap- 
preciate reports  of  doctors,  when  excited  on  account  of  the  res- 
storation  of  their  old  abandoned  patients  to  health,  by  one  who 
does  not  believe  or  practice  in  their  peculiar  way. 

CALLED    A    QUACK. 

The  words  quack  and  quackery,  when  used  by  the  doctors 
against  me  had  a  very  important  charm  to  prejudice  the  people 
against  my  practice;  but  I  would  ask  the  candid  and  reflect- 
ing part  of  community,  which  is  the  greatest  quack,  the  one 
who  relieves  their  infirmities  by  simple  and  safe  means,  or  he 
who  administers  poisons  and  breaks  down  the  constitution  of 
the  patient,  and  leaves  death  to  relieve  them  from  pain,  and  to 
finish  the  cure  scientifically. 

CASE  OF  FAIRBANKS — BLEEDING  AT  THE  LUNGS. 

I  was  called  upon  to  attend  a  man  in  Walpole,  by  the  name 
of  Fairbanks ;  he  was  taken  with  bleeding  at  the  lungs.  I 
found  him  in  a  very  bad  condition ;  the  family  judged  that  he 
had  lost  nearly  six  quarts  of  blood  in  twenty-four  ho^rs.  He 
was  in  despair,  and  had  taken  leave  of  his  family,  as  they  con- 
sidered there  was  no  chance  for  his  living.  The  doctor  was 
with  him  when  1  first  entered  the  house,  but  he  immediately 
left.  1  found  the  patient  with  both  legs  corded,  and  the  first 
thing  I  did  was  to  take  ofl  the  cords,  and  leave  what  little  blood 
there  was  to  circulate  freely,  and  then  gave  him  medicine  to 
procure  as  great  an  internal  heat  as  I  could  possibly  produce. 
I  procured  a  lively  perspiration  to  start  from  every  part  of  the 
body,  and  then  gave  him  medicines  to  clear  away  the  canker, 
and  in  four  days  he  was  so  well  as  to  be  able  to  go  out  and  at- 
tend to  his  business. 


510  THE  THOMSONIAN 

CHILD-BED    FEVER — COKSUMPTIOIV— CANCER. 

In  October  of  the  same  year,  I  attended  a  Mrs.  Goodell,  of 
Walpole.  She  had  been  confined,  and  had  taken  cold.  The 
most  noted  doctors  in  town  had  attended  her  through  what  they 
called  a  fever,  and  she  was  then  pronounced  by  them  to  be  in 
a  decline.  After  three  months'  attendance,  they  said  she  was 
so  putrid  and  ulcerated  that  it  was  utterly  impossible  to  cure 
her.  She  had,  in  addition  to  her  other  difficulties,  a  cancer  on 
her  back.  In  this  desperate  situation,  it  was  thought  by  her 
friends  that  she  was  a  proper  subject  for  me  to  undertake  with. 
At  the  earnest  solicitation  of  her  husband  I  undertook  her  case, 
and  met  with  much  better  success  than  I  expected — as  in  four 
weeks  she  was  able  to  be  about  house,  and  do  some  work. 

CASE    OF    DROPSY. 

In  the  same  year,  1  was  sent  for  to  attend  a  woman  who  had 
been  in  a  dropsical  way  for  a  number  of  years.  The  disease 
had  of  late  gained  with  great  rapidity.  The  doctors  had  tried 
mercury,  which  had  very  nearly  proved  fatal  to  her;  for  I  was 
sent  for  in  great  haste,  with  a  request  that  I  would  attend  as 
quick  as  possible,  as  they  did  not  expect  the  patient  would  live 
through  the  day.  I  found  her  in  a  very  distressed  situation. 
She  said  it  appeared  to  her  as  if  she  was  full  of  scalding  water. 
She  began  to  turn  purple  in  spots,  and  it  was  expected  that 
mortifiication  had  taken  place.  In  the  first  place,  I  gave  her 
about  a  gill  of  chickberry  and  hemlock  distilled,  which  allayed 
the  heat  immediately.  This  answered  the  purpose  until  I 
could  clear  her  stomach,  and  by  the  greatest  exertions  and  the 
closest  attention  through  the  day,  I  was  enabled  to  relieve  her. 
I  attended  her  for  about  one  week,  and  she  was  so  far  recover- 
ed that  she  enjoyed  comfortable  health  for  twelve  years. 

INGRATITUDE    OF    PATIENT'S    FRIENDS. 

Notwithstauding  this  desperate  case  was  cured,  to  the  asto- 
nishment of  all,  the  doctors  had  so  much  influence  over  the 
people,  and  made  so  many  false  statements,  that  I  got  no  credit 
for  the  tease.  The  woman's  brother  said  that  her  husband 
wanted  to  kill  her,  or  he  would  not  have  sent  for  me.  Such 
ingratitude  was  discouraging,  but  it  did  not  prevent  me  from 
doing  my  duty. 

UNEXPECTED    PATIENT. 

A  short  time  from  this,  the  woman's  brother,  who  had  made 
the  speech  about  me,  was  taken  sick,  with  what  was  called  the 
yellow  fever,  and  sent  for  me.  I  attended,  and  asked  him  if  he 
wanted  to  die.  He  said,  no — why  do  you  ask  me  that?  I  told 
him,  the  language  which  he  had  used  respecting  my  attending 
his  sister,  led  me  to  suppose  he  wanted  to  die,  or  that  he  never 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  511 

would  have  sent  for  me,  if  he  had  believed  his  own  words.    He 
said  he  felt  difterent  now.    I  attended  him  through  the  day. 

JiEW    METHOD    OF    STEAMING. 

To  sweat  him,  I  took  hemlock  boughs,  and  j5ut  a  hot  stone 
in  the  middle  of  a  large  bundle  of  them,  wrapped  the  whole  in 
a  cloth,  and  poured  on  hot  water  until  1  raised  a  lively  steam, 
and  then  put  one  bunch  to  his  feet  and  another  near  his  body. 
I  gave  him  medicine  to  raise  the  inward  heat,  and  for  the  can- 
ker. After  attending  him  through  the  day  I  went  home,  and 
on  calling  to  sec  him  the  next  morning,  found  his  fever  had 
turned  and  he  was  quite  comfortable,  so  that  he  was  soon  about 
his  business. 

CASE    OF    A    CHILD. 

I  was  sent  for  about  this  time  to  go  to  the  town  of  Surry,  to 
see  a  child  which  was  taken  very  sick,  and  was  entirely  stupid. 
I  told  the  father  that  the  child  had  the  canker  very  bad,  but  I 
soon  relieved  it  with  my  usual  treatment. 

TWO    CASES    OP    FEVER. 

Being  sent  for  to  go  to  Walpole,  to  see  two  young  men  who 
had  been  taken  two  days  before  with  the  prevailing  fever,  I  left 
the  child,  with  directions  for  his  parents  how  to  proceed  with 
it.  I  found  the  young  men  laboring  under  violent  attacks  of 
the  fever.  They  had  a  brother  who  had  been  attended  by  the 
doctor  for  the  same  complaint  for  four  weeks,  and  was  just  able 
sit  up.  It  was  thought  by  those  who  witnessed  the  attacks  that 
the  last  were  as  violent  cases  as  the  other,  and  they  expressed 
a  strong  desire  that  the  young  men  might  not  be  kept  down  as 
long  as  their  brother  was.  I  was  as  anxious  as  they  were  for 
a  short  job,  and  exerted  all  my  powers  to  relieve  them,  which 
was  accomplished  that  night,  and  I  left  them  in  the  morning, 
quite  comtbrtable,  and  they  were  soon  able  to  attend  to  their 
work.  The  brother  who  was  attended  by  the  doctor  was  not 
able  to  do  any  labor  in  several  months. 

NO    COMPENSATION    RECEIVED. 

The  doctor  was  paid  a  heavy  bill,  but  my  cure  was  done  so 
quick  that  it  was  not  thought  worthy  of  notice,  and  I  never  o-ot 
one  cent  for  my  trouble. 

RETURN    TO    THE    CHILD. 

On  returning  to  the  child  I  left  the  day  before,  1  found  that 
the  doctor  had  been  there,  and  told  them  1  did  not  know  what 
was  the  matter  with  the  patient,  and  persuaded  them  to  give  him 
the  care  of  it.  He  filled  it  with  mercury  and  run  it  down ;  af- 
ter having  ijiven  as  much  mercury  inwardly  as  nature  would 
bear,  and  the  bowels  grew  silent,  he  then  rubbed  the  mercurial 
ointment  over  the  exterior  surface  of  the  bowels  as  long  as  it 


512  THE  THOMSONIAN 

would  absorb,  after  which  he  agreed  that  the  child  had  tiie  can- 
ker  very  badly;  but  he  still  persisted  in  the  same  course  of 
treatment,  until  the  child  wasted  away  and  died,  in  about  two 
months  after  it  was  taken  sick.  After  the  child  was  dead,  its 
parents  were  willins;  to  allow  that  I  understood  the  disorder 
best.  The  doctor  got  twenty-five  dollars  for  killing  the  child, 
but  I  got  nothinor  for  relieving  it. 

EXTRAORDINARY    CASE. 

There  was  brought  to  my  house  in  1805,  a  Mrs.  Richardson, 
from  Westford,  Vermont.  She  was  brought  all  the  way  in  her 
bed,  a  distance  of  130  miles,  and  was  attended  by  her  son  and 
daughter,  the  one  twenty  one  and  the  other  eighteen  years  of 
age.  The  mother  had  lain  in  her  bed  for  the  most  part  of  the 
time  for  ten  years.  The  best  physicians  in  that  part  of  the 
country  had  been  employed  without  advantage,  and  they  had 
spent  nearly  all  their  property.  I  undertook  with  her  more 
from  a  charitable  feeling  for  the  young  man  and  woman  than 
from  any  expectation  of  a  cure. 

The  young  man  stated  that  his  mother  had  been  for  a  year 
together  without  opening  her  eyes  ;  that  when  she  could  open 
them,  they  thought  heralmost  well.  She  was  perfectly  help- 
less, not  being  able  to  do  the  least  thing,  not  even  to  brush  off  a 
fly  from  her  face,  any  more  than  an  infant.  She  had  lain  so 
long  that  her  knee  joints  had  become  stiff. 

TREATMENT    OF    MRS.    RICHARDSON. 

I  began  with  her  by  cleansing  the  stomach  and  promoting 
perspiration,  after  which  I  tried  to  give  her  some  exercise.  The 
first  trial  was  made  by  putting  a  bed  upon  a  wheel  barrow  and 
laying  the  patient  upon  it,  when  I  would  run  her  about  until 
she  appeared  to  be  weary.  Sometimes  I  would  make  a  misstep 
and  fail,  pretendmg  that  I  had  hurt  me,  in  order  to  try  to  get 
her  to  move  herself,  by  frightening  her.  After  exercising  her 
in  this  way  for  a  few  days,  I  put  her  into  a  waggon,  sitting  on 
a  bed,  and  drove  her  about  in  that  manner,  and  when  her  joints 
became  more  limber  I  sat  her  on  the  seat  of  the  waggon.  She 
insisted  that  she  should  fall  off,  for  she  said  she  could  not  use 
her  feet ;  but  the  driver  would  sometimes  drive  on  sideling 
ground,  and  rather  than  turn  over  she  would  start  her  feet  un- 
expectedly. ^Vfter  exercising  her  in  this  manner  for  some  time, 
I  put  her  on  a  horse  behind  her  son.  She  at  first  insisted  that 
she  should  fall  off;  but  when  1  told  her  she  was  at  liberty  to 
fall  if  she  chose,  she  would  not,  and  would  rather  exert  herself 
to  hold  on.  AVhen  she  had  rode  in  this  way  a  few  times,  1  put 
her  on  a  horse  alone,  and  after  a  few  trials  she  would  ride  very 
well,  so  that  in  the  course  of  two  months  she  would  ride  four 
miles  out  and  back  every  day.    She  used  to  be  tired  after  riding, 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


513 


and  would  lie  down,  and  apparently  would  not  move  for  six 
hours  together.  I  continued  to  ffive  her  medicine,  to  keep  up 
a  perspiration  and  to  restore  the  digestive  powers  and  strength- 
en the  nervous  system. 

RETURNED    HOME,    WELL. 

I  attended  lier  in  this  way  for  three  months,  and  then  went 
with  herself  and  children  to  Manchester.  She  rode  upwards 
of  30  miles  in  a  day,  and  stood  the  journey  well. 

USUAL    PAYMENT. 

I  never  received  a  cent  for  the  trouble  and  expense  of  keep- 
ing them  for  three  months ;  but  I  accomplished  what  I  under- 
took, and  relieved  those  two  unfortunate  orphan  children  from 
their  burthen,  which  was  more  satisfaction  to  me  than  to  have 
received  a  large  sum  of  money  without  doing  any  good.  I  saw 
this  woman  three  years  after,  at  the  wedduig  of  her  son,  and 
she  was  quite  comfortable,  and  has  enjoyed  her  health  in  a  to- 
lerable degree  to  this  time  (1822,  date  of  the  1st  edition,)  being 
able  to  wait  upon  herself, 

A    CASE    OF    FITS. 

On  ray  return  from  Manchester,  I  stopped  in  the  afternoon  at 
a  meeting  in  Walpole  (it  being  Sabbath),  and  durmg  the  service 
a  young  woman  was  taken  in  a  fit,  and  carried  out  of  the 
church.  I  went  out  to  see  her,  and  found  that  she  had  been 
subject  to  fits  for  some  time.  She  was  much  bloated  and  very 
large,  weighing  about  three  hundred.  A  few  days  after,  her 
friends  brought  her  to  my  house,  and  were  very  urgent  that  I 
should  undertake  to  help  her ;  but  I  told  them  that  I  was  satis- 
fied that  it  would  be  a  very  difficult  undertaking,  and  that  1  did 
not  feel  willing  to  engage  in  it ;  but  they  were  so  urgent  that  I 
undertook  to  do  what  I  could  for  her. 

EFFECT    OF    MEDICINE AND    OF    PERSPIRATION. 

Every  time  she  took  medicine,  when  I  began  with  her,  she 
would  have  a  strong  convulsion  fit;  but  I  soon  got  her  to  sweat 
profusely,  and  her  fits  were  at  an  end.  By  persevering  in  my 
usual  way,  1  established  a  natural  perspiration,  and  her  other 
evacuations  became  regular;  she  was  reduced  in  size,  and  I 
have  never  heard  of  her  having  fits  since. 

CAUSE    OF    HER    FITS. 

The  cause  of  her  fits  was  taking  a  sudden  cold,  when  all 
perspiration  and  the  greater  part  of  the  other  evacuations  ceased. 

DYSENTERY    AND    CANCER. 

In  the  fall  of  1805, 1  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Richmond,  to  see 
the  family.of  Elder  Bowles,  who  were  all  sick  with  the  dysen- 
tery ;  and  Mrs.  Bowles  had  a  cancer  on  her  breast.     I  relieved 


514  THE  THOMSONIAN 

them  of  their  disorder  by  my  usual  mode  of  practice,  and  gave 
the  woman  medicine  for  the  cancer,  which  reUeved  her  also. 

CANCER    DISSOLVED. 

I  had  occasion  to  visit  her  again,  and  the  tumor  was  about 
the  size  of  an  egg]  but  by  following  my  directions  it  was  dis- 
solved without  causing  any  pain,  and  she  has  been  well  for 
twelve  years. 

SPOTTED    FEVER STEAMING    BY    DOCTORS. 

I  then  practiced  in  Royalton  and  Warwick,  and  in  my  usual 
way  of  sweating  for  the  spotted  fever,  which  became  known 
and  was  practiced  by  the  physicians  in  Petersham. 

CANCER — HOW    TREATED    BY    DOCTORS. 

After  returning  home,  I  was  sent  for  to  attend  a  woman  in 
the  neighborhood,  who  had  been  under  the  care  of  a  celebrated 
doctor  for  a  cancer  in  her  breast.  He  had  tortured  her  with 
his  caustics  until  her  breasts  were  burned  through  to  the  bone, 
and  by  its  corrosive  nature  had  caused  the  cords  to  draw  up 
into  knots.  He  had  also  burned  her  leg  to  the  tendons.  She 
had  been  under  his  care  eleven  weeks,  until  she  was  much 
wasted  away,  and  her  strength  nearly  gone. 

TAKEN  CHARGE  OF — CURED. 

In  this  situation,  the  doctor  was  willing  to  get  her  off  his 
hands,  and  wished  me  to  take  charge  of  her.  I  consented  and 
took  charge  of  her,  and  in  three  weeks  healed  up  her  sores  and 
cleared  her  of  her  humor  so  effectually  that  she  has  ever  since 
enjoyed  good  health. 

ANOTHER    LADY    RESTORED. 

While  attending  her,  I  cured  a  woman  from  Hillsborough, 
who  had  a  cancer  on  her  neck.  1  dissolved  the  tumor  and  cur- 
ed her,  by  the  use  of  the  cancer  balsam  and  the  common  course 
of  medicine,  and  she  has  enjoyed  good  health  ever  since. 

SUPPOSED    CASE    OF    POISON. 

I  attended  the  funeral  of  a  young  man  who  had  been  attend- 
ed by  a  physician  in  the  town  of  Alstead,  who  had  lost  about 
sixty  patients  in  the  town  in  a  short  time.  The  corpse  was 
badly  swelled,  so  that  it  was  difficult  to  screw  down  tlie  lid  of 
the  coftin.  This  patient  had  not  been  sick  but  about  twenty- 
four  hours  and  but  twelve  under  the  effects  of  the  medicine  of 
the  doctor  When  I  went  into  the  room  where  the  corpse  was 
the  doctor  followed  me  and  gave  directions  to  have  the  coffin 
secured,  so  as  to  prevent  the  corpse  from  being  seen,  and  then 
beo^an  to  insult  me  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  people.  He 
said  to  me  I  understand  you  have  a  patent  to  cure  such  disor- 
ders as  that,  pointing;  to  the  corpse.     1  said  no.  and  then  inti- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  515 

mated  what  I  thought  of  him.  He  put  on  an  air  of  great 
importance  and  said  to  me,  what  can  you  know  about  medi- 
cine. You  have  no  learning  ;  you  cannot  parse  one  sentence 
of  grammar.  1  repHed  that  I  did  not  know  that  grammar  was 
made  use  of  as  medicine  ;  but  if  the  operation  of  a  potion  of 
grammar  produce  symptoms  so  nearly  like  those  of  ratsbane  as 
what  appears  in  this  corpse,  I  have  no  inclination  to  know  the 
use  of  it.  This  unexpected  use  of  the  meaning  of  what  he  said 
displeased  the  medical  gentleman  very  much,  and  finding  that 
many  of  the  people  present  had  the  same  opinion  that  I  had, 
irritated  him  so  very  much  that  he  threatened  to  horsewhip  me, 
but  I  told  him  he  might  do  what  he  pleased  provided  he  did 
not  poison  me  with  his  grammar.  He  did  not  attempt  to  put 
his  threat  into  execution,  so  I  have  escaped  both  his  whip  and 
his  grammar.  I  have  been  more  particular  in  relating  these 
circumstances  in  order  to  show  my  reasons  for  refusing  to  prac- 
tice so  near  home  for  I  had  been  ni  constant  employment 
among  the  people  in  my  neighborhood  and  the  adjoining  towns 
and  country  for  four  or  five  years,  and  had  been  very  success- 
ful, not  havino;  lost  one  patient  during  the  whole  time.  My 
house  had  been  constantly  filled  with  patients  from  all  parts  of 
the  country,  for  which  I  had  received  little  or  no  compensa- 
tion for  my  services.  Myself  and  family  were  broken  down 
and  worn  out  with  nursing  and  attending  to  them  night  and 
day,  so  that  I  was  obliged  to  leave  home  to  free  myself  and  fa- 
mily from  so  heavy  a  burthen.  Besides,  I  felt  it  more  a  duty 
to  attend  the  people  in  those  parts  where  I  had  been  treated 
with  the  most  kindness  and  friendship  and  had  received  the 
most  assistance  in  a  pecuniary  point  of  view,  than  where  I  had 
received  little  from  those  whom  1  considered  under  the  great- 
est obligations  to  me. 

VISITS    KEW    YOUK THE    YELLOAV    FEVER,    ETC. 

In  1806  I  went  to  New  York  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining 
the  nature  of  the  yellow  fever,  and  on  my  arrival  put  up  with  a 
Mr.  Kavanagh  a  Roman  Catliolic,  and  I  soon  had  a  chance  to 
try  the  yellow  fever.  I  was  emploj/ed  to  attend  a  Mr.  McGow- 
an,  who  had  the  yellow  fever.  He  was  the  teacher  of  the  Ro- 
man Catholic  school  and  an  acquaintance  of  ]\Ir.  Kavanagh 
with  whom  I  boarded  and  who  recommended  him  to  my  care. 
He  was  attacked  about  noon,  was  very  cold,  and  had  no  pain  ; 
his  eyes  were  half  closed,  and  he  appeared  like  a  person  half 
way  between  sleeping  and  waking  ;  he  lost  so  mucli  strength 
in  two  hours  that  he  was  unable  to  walk  across  the  room  with- 
out staggering. 

TREATMENT  OF  YELLOW  FEVER. 

I  began  by  giving  him  Nos.  2  and  3,  to  raise  the  internal 
heat  and  to  clear  the  stomach,  and  in  one  hour  after  getting 


516  THE  THOMSONIAN 

him  warm  he  was  in  extreme  pain,  so  that  his  friends  were 
alarmed  about  him;  but  1  told  them  it  was  a  favorable  symp- 
tom. After  being  in  this  situation  about  one  hoar,  perspiration 
started,  and  the  next  day  he  was  out  about  his  business. 

The  efToct  in  this  case  was  precisely  similar  to  a  person's  be- 
ing recovered  after  having  been  drowned.  The  balance  of  in- 
ward warmth  above  that  of  the  external  atmosphere  having 
been  lost,  the  sensation  of  feeling  ceases,  and  of  course  there  is 
no  pain.  But  as  soon  as  the  vital  warmth  begins  to  gain  the 
ascendancy  so  as  to  contend  with  the  cold  successfully,  sensibi- 
lity returns,  then  the  pain  and  distress  commences,  and  will  be 
very  severe  until  the  victory  is  fully  established,  and  tlie  sur- 
plus of  vital  warmth  is  restored. 

MASTY    CASES    CURED. 

While  there,  I  attended  a  number  of  cases,  with  similar  suc- 
cess. 

FEVER    AND    AGUE INGRATITUDE. 

While  in  New- York,  I  attended  an  Irishman  by  the  name  of 
Doyle,  who  had  the  fever  and  ague.  This  disease  gives  a 
complete  view  of  my  theory  of  heat  and  cold,  for  it  is  about  an 
equal  balance  between  the  two,  the  heat  keepino;  a  little  the  up- 
per hand.  This  man  had  been  affected  for  four  months;  he 
had  the  fits  very  bad  daily.  I  commenced  by  giving  such  me- 
dicines as  I  usually  give  to  increase  the  heat  of  the  body,  and 
subdued  the  cold,  thus  establishing  the  surplus  of  vital  warmth, 
and  by  strictly  attendiuij  him  four  days  he  was  cured.  Being 
short  of  money,  I  asked  him  /or  some  compensation  for  my 
trouble,  but  iie  refused,  and  never  paid  me  a  cent.  He  said  he 
must  have  been  crettingf  better  before,  for  no  one  ever  heard  of 
such  a  disorder  being  cured  in  four  days, 

FRIENDSHIP    IN    ADVERSITY. 

A  gentleman  by  the  name  of  Quackenbush,  who  had  the 
care  of  the  states  prison,  learning  how  I  had  been  treated,  in- 
vited jno  to  o-o  and  tarry  with  him  while  I  remained  in  the  city, 
for  wliich  privilesje  I  felt  very  thankful.  I  was  treated  with 
much  kindness  by  himself  and  family,  for  which  they  have  my 
most  sincere  thanks. 

RETURN    HOME. 

On  the  16th  of  September  I  started  for  home,  and  arrived 
after  three  months'  absence.  After  my  return  I  was  frequently 
called  upon  to  attend  the  sick,  but  g;enerally  declined  on  ac- 
count of  the  treatment  received,  as  before  related,  in  relation  to 
pay. 

COMMENCES    COLLECTING    MEDICINE. 

In  November  I  went  to  Plumb  Island  to  collect  medicine.     I 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  517 

went  by  the  way  of  Newburyport,  and  after  being  on  the  Island 
three  or  four  days  and  procuring  the  requisite  quantity,  I  again 
returned  to  that  place, 

SUCCESSFUL    PRACTICE. 

While  I  was  there  in  a  store  in  conversation  with  several  in- 
dividuals, there  came  in  a  man  from  Salisbury  Mills,  by  the 
name  of  Osgood,  who  stated  that  he  was  unwell,  and  that  his 
wife  lay  at  the  point  of  death  with  the  lung  fever.  He  said 
that  she  had  been  attended  by  one  Dr.  French,  who  had  given 
her  over  to  die.  One  of  the  gentlemen  present  told  him  that  I 
was  a  doctor  and  used  the  medicine  of  our  own  country.  He 
asked  me  if  I  would  go  home  with  him  to  see  his  wife,  and  I 
told  him  I  would,  and  we  immediately  started  in  his  chaise  for 
home,  which  was  about  six  miles.  On  arriving  at  his  dwelling 
I  was  introduced  to  his  wife  as  a  Botanic  Doctor  and  he  asked 
her  if  she  was  willing  that  I  should  undertake  to  cure  her,  and 
she  said  yes,  provided  I  thought  there  was  a  chance.  I  com- 
menced with  her  in  my  usual  way,  and  in  about  fourteen  hours 
her  fever  turned,  and  the  next  day  she  was  comfortable  and 
soon  got  well. 

PUBLIC    SENTiaiENT. 

This  cure  was  much  talked  of  hi  the  neighborhood  and  was 
much  thought  of  by  the  people.  But  it  soon  came  to  the  ears 
of  Doctor  French  who  was  much  enraged  to  think  that  one  of 
his  patients  who  had  been  abandoned  as  incurable  should  be 
cured  by  one  whom  he  called  a  quack.  He  said  she  was  get- 
ting better  before  I  saw  her,  and  that  she  could  set  up  during 
the  day,  all  which  reports  were  promptly  denied  by  Osgood  and 
his  family. 

FURTHER    SUCCESS. 

While  I  was  waiting  for  a  team  which  I  expected  to  carry 
home  the  medicines  I  had  procured,  1  was  called  to  attend  se- 
veral cases  in  all  of  which  I  was  successful,  and  most  of  them 
were  such  as  had  been  given  over  by  the  doctors  to  die.  One 
of  the  cases  was  a  young  man  who  had  cut  three  of  his  fingers 
so  badly  as  to  lay  open  the  joints.  Dr.  French  had  attended 
him  three  weeks  and  he  was  then  so  bad  that  he  advised  that 
he  should  have  them  cut  off  as  the  only  alternative.  The 
young  man  applied  to  me.  I  told  him  that  if  they  were  mine  I 
should  not  be  willing  to  part  with  them  at  present.  He  request- 
ed that  I  would  undertake  his  case,  which  I  did,  and  commenc- 
ed by  clearing  the  wound  of  mercury  and  washing  it  with 
weak  lye.  I  then  put  on  some  drops  and  did  up  the  hand  with 
a  bandage  which  was  kept  wet  with  cold  water.  While  1  was 
dressing  his  hand  Doct.  French's  student  came  in  and  told  the 
young  man  that  I  should  spoil  his  hand,  but  I  told  him  I  was  ac- 


518  THE  THOMSONIAN 

countable  for  what  was  then  doing,  and  he  left  immediately, 
telling  the  patient  that  Doctor  French's  bill  must  be  paid  forth- 
with. In  ten  days  the  young  man  was  well  and  at  work  in  a 
nail  factory.  I  asked  him  what  Doct.  French  had  charged 
him  and  he  said  seventeen  dollars.  I  told  him  that  I  thought 
that  a  sufficient  charge  for  us  both,  and  should  charge  him 
nothing.  His  mother  was  a  poor  widow  depending  on  her  own 
exertions  and  that  of  her  son  for  a  living.  I  soon  after  return- 
ed home  to  the  great  disappointment  of  many  who  wished  ray 
assistance. 

VISITS    VERMONT CASE    OF    FITS,    ETC. 

In  the  winter  of  1807  I  went  to  Jericho,  Vermont,  to  visit 
my  fatlier's  family  who  resided  there.  While  1  was  there  I 
was  called  to  see  a  number  who  were  sick.  Among  them  was 
a  young  man  who  was  taken  with  cramp  convulsion  fits.  He 
was  taken  on  Sunday  and  continued  until  Tuesday.  He  was 
attended  by  the  best  doctors  in  that  vicinity  without  doing  him 
any  good.  They  could  not  make  their  medicine  operate,  and 
the  most  part  of  the  time  he  was  as  stiff  as  a  graven  image. 
He  was  at  length  given  over  to  die.  Now  came  my  turn  of 
course.  The  father  came  for  me,  and  just  as  we  entered  the 
room  he  went  into  a  fit.  His  feet  and  hands  were  drawn  to- 
wards his  body  ;  his  jaws  were  set ;  his  head  drawn  back  ;  and 
every  part  of  him  as  completely  fixed  as  a  statue.  The  first 
difficulty  was  to  get  him  to  take  medicine,  for  his  jaws  were 
set  as  tight  as  a  vice.  I  took  a  solution  of  No's.  1,  2,  and  6,  as 
strong  as  it  could  be  made,  then  put  my  finger  into  the  corner 
of  his  mouth  between  his  clieek  and  teeth,  and  poured  some  of 
it  in  as  well  as  I  could,  and  as  soon  as  it  touched  the  glands  at 
the  roots  of  the  tongue  his  jaws  came  open  and  he  swallowed 
some  of  the  medicine,  which  had  such  an  effect  upon  the  sto- 
mach that  all  the  spasms  left.  I  left  him  some  medicine  with 
directions  for  its  use,  and  he  soon  entirely  recovered  his  health. 
I  saw  him  three  years  after  and  he  told  me  he  had  never  had 
a  fit  since.  I  was  convinced  from  this  case  that  the  cause  of 
all  cramps  or  spasms  of  this  kind  were  seated  in  the  stomach, 
and  that  all  applications  for  relief  should  be  made  there,  as  it 
will  be  of  no  service  to  work  on  the  effect  while  the  cause  yet 
remains. 

CASE    OF    FEVER    SORE. 

I  was  also  called  to  see  the  son  of  Capt.  Lyman  of  Jericho, 
who  had  been  afflicted  with  a  fever  sore  for  seven  years.  All 
the  doctors  in  those  parts  had  a  hand  at  him.  It  was  their 
opinion  that  the  thigh  should  be  laid  open  and  the  bone  scrap- 
ed. I  told  him  I  did  not  see  how  that  could  be  done  without 
injury  to  the  great  artery,  [femoral,)  which  lay  close  to  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  519 

bone  where  they  must  cut.  He  was  satisfied  it  would  not  do, 
and  wished  me  to  attend  him.  I  told  the  father  that  it  was 
impossible  for  me  to  stay  there  and  attend  him,  but  if  his  son 
wanted  to  go  home  witli  me  I  would  make  a  trial  oi  what  I 
could  do  for  him  ;  to  which  they  all  consented,  and  the  young 
man  went  home  with  me.  I  began  by  giving  him  medicines 
to  correct  and  strengthen  the  stomach  and  digestive  system : 
batljing  the  sore  with  rheumatic  drops,  sometimes  bathing  with 
cold  water  to  strenjrthen  the  leg,  and  after  proceeding  in  this 
manner  about  one  month,  he  was  sufficiently  restored  to  do 
some  work.  He  remained  with  me  until  August  when  he  was 
entirely  cured,  so  that  he  was  able  to  return  to  his  father's  on 
foot,  a  distance  of  one  hundred  and  thirty  miles. 

GREAT  SUCCESS  IN  DYSENTERY. 

In  the  fall  of  this  year,  (1807,)  the  dysentery  or  camp  dis- 
temper as  it  was  called  became  epidemic  in  Jericho,  and  was 
attended  with  such  fatality  that  all  except  two  who  were  at- 
tended by  the  doctors  had  died,  having  lost  about  twenty  in  a 
short  time.  The  inhabitants  were  much  alarmed  and  held  a 
consultation  what  was  best  to  do.  and  being  informed  by  young 
Lyman  that  I  was  at  home,  they  came  to  the  conclusion  to  send 
an  express  after  me,  which  was  done,  and  I  immediately  made 
arrangements  to  comply  with  their  request.  In  twenty-four 
hours  after  1  started,  and  arrived  there  on  the  third  day  after, 
and  found  them  waiting  with  great  anxiety  for  me,  the  sick 
having  refused  to  take  any  thing  further  from  the  doctors.  I 
had  an  interview  with  the  select  men  of  the  town  who  had 
taken  upon  themselves  the  care  of  the  sick.  They  informed 
me  that  there  was  then  about  thirty  sick,  who  wished  my  assist- 
ance. I  agreed  to  take  charge  of  them,  on  condition,  that  I 
could  have  two  men  to  assist  me.  This  was  complied  with, 
and  I  commenced  my  practice  upon  thirty  in  the  course  of 
three  days.  The  disorder  was  the  most  distressing  of  any  that 
I  had  ever  witnessed.  One  man  had  been  speechless  for  G  hours, 
and  was  supposed  to  be  dying  ;  but  on  my  giving  him  medi- 
cine to  warm  him,  he  seemed  to  revive,  like  an  insect  that  had 
been  warmed  by  the  sun  after  having  laid  in  a  torpid  state 
through  the  winter. 

INVENTS  MEDICINE,  AS  REQUIRED. 

1  had  but  little  medicine  with  me,  and  had  to  use  such  as  I 
could  procure  in  the  place. 

CAUSE  OF  THE  DISEASE. 

I  found  the  cause  of  the  disease  to  be  coldness  and  canker ; 
the  digestive  powers  being  lost,  the  stomach  being  deranged  so 
that  the  system  could  not  hold  the  heat. 


520  THE    THOMSONIAN 

CANKER  MEDICINE,  ETC. 

I  made  use  of  red  peppers  steeped  in  sumac  tea,  sweetened, 
and  sometimes  the  bark  and  berries,  to  raise  the  heat  and  scour 
off  the  canker,  which  had  the  desired  effect.  After  taking  this 
tea,  those  who  were  strong  enough  I  placed  over  a  steam  as 
long  as  they  could  bear  it,  and  then  put  them  in  bed.  Those 
who  were  too  weak  to  stand,  I  managed  to  have  set  over  a 
steam,  and  repeated  as  often  as  occasion  required. 

SYRUP  FOR  DIGESTION. 

To  restore  the  digestive  powers,  I  made  use  of  cherry  stones. 
1  pounded  them  fine,  and  then  made  a  tea  of  black  birch  bark 
and  put  in  the  cherries,  and  made  a  syrup,  by  puttimg  from 
two  to  three  ounces  of  sugar  to  one  quart  of  the  liquor  ;  this 
was  given  freely,  and  answered  a  good  purpose. 

TOWN  CLEARED  OF  THE  DISEASE  IN  EIGHT  DAYS. 

I  continued  to  attend  upon  my  patients,  aided  by  those  ap- 
pointed to  assist  me,  and  in  eight  days  I  had  completely  sub- 
dued the  disease.  The  patients  all  recovered  except  two,  who 
were  dying  when  1  first  saw  them. 

MEDICINE  TO  NURSES. 

1  gave  the  same  medicine  to  the  nurses  and  those  exposed  to 
disease,  as  well  as  to  those  that  were  sick,  which  prevented 
them  from  having  the  disorder  :  for  the  same  remedy  that  will 
cure  disease  will  prevent  it. 

ATTENDANCE  IN  GEORGIA. 

After  finishing  my  practice  in  this  town,  I  was  sent  for  to  go 
to  the  town  of  Georgia,  about  thirty  miles  distant,  where  1  prac- 
ticed with  general  success  for  one  week,  and  then  returned  to 
Jericho.  Those  patients  I  left  were  comfortable,  and  soon  en- 
tirely recovered. 

DUE  CREDIT  GIVEN. 

The  doctors  were  not  well  pleased  on  account  of  my  inform- 
ing the  people  how  to  attend  themselves  ;  and  they  have  never 
required  their  assistance  in  that  disorder  since.  Due  credit 
was  awarded  me  for  my  medical  services  in  this  place. 

SPRAINED  ARM. 

About  this  time  I  was  called  to  see  a  young  man  in  the  town 
of  Bridgewater,  Vt.,  about  18  years  of  age,  who  had  lost  the  use 
of  his  arm  by  a  strain.  It  had  become  perfectly  useless,  and  he 
carried  it  in  a  sling.  His  health  was  also  bad.  As  I  could  not 
stay  to  attend  him,  he  was  carried  to  my  house.  1  began  with 
him  in  my  usual  way,  by  warming  the  stomach  and  restoring 
digestion,  and  bathed  his  arm  with  the  oil  of  spearmint,  and  in 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  521 

about  ten  days  he  was  sufficiently  restored  to  use  Iiis  arm  and 
do  some  work,  and  in  two  months  he  returned  home,  entirely 
cured. 

RHEUMATISM  CURED. 

In  the  spring  I  returned  to  Salisbury,  agreeable  to  promise 
the  preceding  foil.  On  my  way  I  stopped  at  Pelham.  The 
man  at  wliose  house  I  staid  insisted  that  I  should  go  and  see 
his  father  in-law,  who  had  the  rheumatism,  having  been  con- 
fined to  his  bed  for  two  months.  1  attended  him  three  days, 
when  he  was  able  to  walk  some  by  the  use  of  a  cane ;  he  was 
soon  restored  to  health. 

CASE  OF  CONSUMPTION DOCTOR  PRESENT. 

While  at  this  place,  I  was  sent  for  to  see  a  young  woman, 
sick  of  a  consumption.  She  had  a  long  time  been  attended  by 
a  doctor,  who  seemed  very  willing  for  my  advice.  I  carried 
her  through  with  a  course  of  my  medicine,  and  the  doctor  staid 
to  see  the  operation.  He  seemed  well  pleased  with  my  system 
of  practice,  and  gave  me  much  credit,  saying  that  I  was  the  first 
whom  he  ever  knew  who  could  make  his  medicine  do  as  he 
said  it  would. 

OTHEP^  CASES. 

I  was  also  sent  for  to  attend  several  other  cases  of  consump- 
tion, and  various  other  complaints,  in  all  of  which  I  was  suc- 
cessful. 

RECEPTION  AT  SALISBURY  MILLS — PRACTICE,  ETC. 

After  stopping  at  Pelham  several  weeks,  during  which  time 
I  had  as  much  l3usiness  as  I  could  attend  to,  I  went  to  Salisbu- 
ry Mills,  where  I  was  most  cordially  welcomed  by  my  old  pa- 
tients, which  T  had  attended  the  year  before.  1  was  called  up- 
on to  practice  here  and  at  Newburyport,  and  my  success  was  so 
great  that  the  physicians  and  their  friends  appeared  much 
alarmed,  and  they  did  all  they  could  to  injure  me  and  destroy 
the  credit  of  my  practice  with  the  people.  ^ 

EFFECT  OF  CURES. 

A  considerable  part  of  the  patients  that  were  put  under  my 
care  were  such  as  the  doctors  had  given  over,  and  their  beino- 
cured  by  me  had  a  bad  tendency  upon  their  practice,  as  it  open- 
ed the  eyes  of  the  people,  who  began  to  examine  and  compare 
the  two  systems  of  practice  in  point  of  success  ;  and  it  did  not 
require  a  long  time  for  them  to  judge  and  decide  between  the 
two  systems  of  medicine. 

PERSECUTION,  INSULT,  ETC. 

Among  the  doctors  who  appeared  the  most  inimical  towards 
me,  was  a  Dr.  French,  who  used  every  means  he  was  possess- 

34 


522  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ed  of  to  injure  me  in  connection  with  his  friends,  one  of  whom 
sent  for  me  to  come  and  give  a  calf  of  his  that  was  sick  a  green 
powder  and  a  sweat.  Knowing  that  his  object  was  to  insult 
me,  I  sent  back  word  for  him  to  employ  Dr.  French,  as  usual, 
and  if  he  could  not  cure  it,  I  would  ihen  attend  and  restore  it, 
as  I  was  in  the  habit  of  doing  with  the  rest  ot  his  patients.  It 
so  happened  that  the  calf  died.  Soon  after,  a  son  was  taken 
very  sick.  In  a  few  days  another  calf  was  found  dead  in  the 
pasture,  and  about  the  same  time  his  oldest  son  was  taken  sick. 
These  things  happened  in  such  an  unexpected  manner,  that  it 
set  this  man  a  thinking  of  his  abuse  towards  me,  and  his  con- 
science condemned  him,  and  he  had  the  folly  to  believe  it  was 
all  the  effect  of  witchcraft,  and  wished  to  make  his  peace  with 
me,  and  he  sent  word  that  if  I  would  let  his  family  alone  he 
would  never  do  or  say  any  thing  more  to  my  injury.  This 
treaty  I  readily  assented  to;  his  children  soon  after  got  well, 
and  providentially  it  so  operated  upon  him  as  to  keep  his  slan- 
derous tongue  still  in  relation  to  me. 

RETURNS  HOME — SUCCESSFUL  PRACTICE. 

I  soon  after  returned  home,  and  was  immediately  sent  for  to 
attend  the  sick,  and  was  generally  very  successful,  when  the 
dysentery  and  fever  were  most  prevalent,  never  foiling  in  any 
instance  of  giving  relief,  and  completely  putting  a  check  to 
those  alarming  epidemics,  which  caused  so  much  terror  in  ma- 
ny parts  of  the  country. 

RETURN  TO  SALISBURY — SICK  RELIEVED. 

In  the  year  ISOS  I  went  again  to  Salisbury  Mills,  and  on  my 
way  stopped  at  Pelham,  and  relieved  several  cases. 

On  my  arrival  at  Salisbury  Mills,  where  I  made  it  my  home, 
1  was  immediately  called  upon  to  practice  in  the  adjacent  town 
and  country.  Many  desperate  cases  came  from  different  parts, 
which  had  been  given  over  by  the  doctors  as  hopeless,  such  as 
humors,  dropsies,  mortifications,  felons,  consumptions,  &,c. 

"WONDER  AT  CURES. 

Fevers  were  so  quickly  cured,  and  with  so  little  trouble,  that 
many  were  unwilling  to  believe  that  they  had  the  disease.  My 
practice  s:ave  si^eneral  satisfaction,  and  was  considered  to  be  su- 
perior to  all  other  systems  known. 

VIOLENT  OPPOSITION. 

Dr.  French  appeared  to  be  much  enraged  at  my  success  with 
his  patients,  and  failing  to  destroy  the  confidence  which  the 
people  had  in  me,  be  then  attempted  to  frigiiten  me  by  threats. 

MEANNESS. 

He  would  frequently  cause  me  to  be  sent  for  in  great  haste 


^  MATERIA  MEDICA.  523 

to  attend  some  of  his  sick  neighbors,  but  I  saw  through  all  his 
tricks,  and  avoided  his  snares. 

GREAT   WICKEDNESS. 

It  seemed  that  if  he  failed  in  destroying  my  reputation,  he 
was  determined  to  destroy  me.  Being  one  day  at  Salisbury 
village,  in  company  with  Jeremiah  Eaton,  of  Exeter,  whose 
wife  was  then  under  my  care,  for  a  dropsical  complaint,  I  was 
sent  for  four  times  to  visit  a  young  man  at  the  house  of  Dr.  F. 
The  last  time,  a  man  came  on  horseback  in  the  greatest  haste, 
and  insisted  that  T  should  go  and  see  him,  I  asked  why  Dr. 
French  did  not  attend  him.  He  answered  that  the  young  man 
had  rather  have  me.  Being  convinced  of  a  trick,  I  refused  to 
go,  and  the  man  returned. 

PLOT  CONFESSED. 

In  a  short  time  Dr.  French  came  into  the  village,  and  Mr. 
Eaton  asked  him  what  was  the  matter  with  the  young  man  at 
his  house.  He  said  nothing,  and  that  he  was  as  well  as  any 
body.  Mr.  Eaton  then  asked  him  why  he  caused  me  to  be  sent 
for  so  many  times,  and  he  said,  to  see  if  I  dared  to  come  into 
his  neighborhood  to  doctor,  for  he  said  he  would  blow  out  my 
brains  if  I  came  upon  his  side  of  the  river. 

FRENCH  ARRESTED. 

Mr.  Eaton  and  others  of  my  friends  considered  my  life  in 
danger,  and  advised  nie  to  be  on  my  guard.  1  had  to  pass  his 
house  both  day  and  night,  and  it  was  not  deemed  safe  for  me  to 
go  alone;  consequently  I  had  some  one  to  accompany  me.  I 
continued  in  this  way  several  days,  when,  finding  his  malice 
against  me  as  great  as  ever,  I  had  him  arrested  and  put  under 
two  hundred  dollar  bonds  to  keep  the  peace,  and  appear  at  the 
next  court  of  common  pleas.  He  Appeared  at  court,  was  order- 
ed to  pay  the  costs,  and  discharged  from  bail. 

NETTLE  RASH — CURE. 

Rev.  Jabez  True,  of  Salisbury,  was  afflicted  with  the  nettle 
rash,  or  St.  Anthony's  fire.  It  was  caused  by  fighting  fire, 
about  25  years  before,  and  he  had  been  subject  to  breakino-  out 
ever  since,  which  at  times  was  very  painfiil,  as  it  felt  like  the 
stinging  of  bees,  and  would  swell  all  over  his  body.  The  doc- 
tors could  not  relieve  him.  I  told  him  that  he  had  heated 
himself  to  that  degree  that  there  was  nearly  a  balance  of  power 
between  the  outward  and  internal  heat,  and  then  cooling  him- 
self suddenly,  the  inward  heat  had  fallen  as  much  below  the 
natural  state  as  it  had  been  above  it  before,  and  the  only  way 
to  effect  a  cure  was  to  bring  him  into  the  same  state  as  he  was 
in  when  fighting  fire.  He  wished  me  to  undertake  his  case. 
I  carried  him  through  with  a  course  of  medicine,  and  made  use 


524  THE    THOMSONIAN 

of  every  means  in  my  power  to  raise  the  inward  heat,  pursu- 
ing my  plan  with  zeal  for  two  days,  when  he  became  alarmed, 
and  said  he  felt  as  if  he  should  die,  for  he  felt  the  same  as  when 
he  was  fightiuo^  the  fire.  I  then  kept  him  in  that  situation  as 
much  as  possible,  and  it  went  down  gradually,  so  as  to  hold  a 
natural  proportion  of  heat.  I  succeeded  completely  in  effecting 
a  cure,  and  he  has  enjoyed  good  health  ever  since. 

CONSUMPTION  CURED. 

I  attended  his  wife  at  the  same  lime,  who  had  been  long  in  a 
consumption,  and  had  been  given  over  by  the  doctors  to  die. 
She  was  perfectly  cured,  and  they  were  both  in  good  health  in 
1822,  and  ready  to  testify  to  the  truth  of  this  statement. 

CASE  OF  DROPSY. 

A  woman  by  the  name  of  Lifford  came  to  me  at  Salisbury 
Mills,  and  wished  me  to  attend  her.  She  was  very  poorly  with 
the  dropsy.  I  told  her  that  I  thought  her  case  was  very  bad, 
and  her  chance  was  so  slender  for  a  cure  that  I  advised  her  to 
go  home.  She  left,  as  1  supposed  for  home,  but  soon  returned, 
and  said  she  had  found  a  place  to  board,  and  a  young  woman 
had  ao-reed  to  nurse  h^r.  I  undertook  with  her,  as  1  could  not 
well  avoid  it.  I  gave  her  some  medicine  and  it  operated  favor- 
ably, and  I  then  gave  strict  orders  to  the  nurse  to  keep  up  a 
perspiration  through  the  night ;  bui  she  almost  totally  neglect- 
ed her  duty  to  the  sick,  for  the  sake  of  young  company.  On 
visiting  the  patient  in  the  morning,  I  found  my  directions  had 
been  disregarded.  The  lady  told  me  that  the  nurse  had  neg- 
lected her,  and  that  she  had  got  her  feet  out  of  bed ;  perspi- 
ration had  ceased,  and  other  symptoms  appeared  unfavorable. 
I  attended  her  through  the  day,  and  did  all  I  could  to  relieve 
her,  but  could  not  raise  a  perspiration  again.  She  continued 
until  about  midnight  the  following  night,  and  died.  My  hopes 
of  doing  her  good  were  small,  but  I  think  that  if  she  had  not 
been  neglected  by  the  nurse  there  might  have  been  a  chance 
for  her. 

The  loss  of  this  patient  caused  great  triumph  among  my  ene- 
mies, and  Dr.  French  tried  to  have  a  jury  on  the  !)ody,  but  he 
failed,  for  the  case  was  too  well  known,  and  all  cleared  me  of 
blame. 

The  nurse  said  that  1  had  done  all  I  could,  and  if  there  was 
any  blame  it  ought  to  fall  on  her,  and  not  on  me. 

PRIVILEGE  TO  KILL. 

This  fashionable  doctor  might  lose  half  of  his  patients  with 
impunity,  but  if  I  happened  to  lose  one  out  of  several  hundreds 
of  desperate  cases,  1  was  guilty  of  murder  in  their  estimation. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  525 

MRS.  EATON — OTHER  CASES. 

Mrs.  Eaton,  before  mentioned,  wlio  was  afflicted  with  drop- 
sy, remained  under  my  care  about  three  weeks,  and  was  reduc- 
ed in  size  eia:bt  inches.  She  then  returned  to  Exeter,  I  had 
several  cases  of  dropsy  and  consumption  from  the  same  town, 
about  this  time,  all  of  which  were  relieved.  As  soon  as  I  could 
get  my  patients  iu  a  proper  situation  to  leave,  1  went  to  Salis- 
bury Mills  and  commenced  practicing,  and  was  applied  to  from 
all  parts  of  the  adjacent  country.  I  had  not  as  many  to  attend 
to  as  in  some  places,  but  they  were  all  of  the  most  desperate 
character,  having  been  given  over  by  the  doctors  to  die,  in  all 
of  which  I  had  good  success. 

AN  HONEST  DOCTOR. 

Many  of  those  patients  had  been  attended  by  one  Dr.  Shep- 
herd, a  very  plain  and  candid  sort  of  a  man,  who  treated  me 
with  much  civility.  I  well  remember  his  first  remarks  to  me 
after  an  introduction.  "  Well,"  said  he,  "  what  are  you  doing 
here,  are  you  killing  or  curing  the  people?"  I  replied,  "you 
must  judge  about  that  yourself"  "Well,"  said  he,  "  I  will  watch 
you,  not  for  fear  of  your  doing  any  harm,  but  for  my  own  in- 
formation ;  I  wish  you  well,  and  will  do  you  all  the  good  I 
can."  I  alwaj'^s  found  him  candid,  friendly,  and  without  de- 
ceit. 

VISITED  AVITH  DR.  SHEPHERD — RHEUMATISM. 

Dr.  Shepherd  once  called  upon  me  to  visit  one  of  his  patients 
with  him  who  had  the  rheumatism  in  the  back  and  hips.  The 
doctor  had  attended  about  two  months,  and  said  he  had  killed 
the  pain,  but  his  back  was  stiff,  so  that  he  could  not  bring  his 
hands  below  the  knees. 

VISIT  RETURNED  IN  48  HOURS  BY  PATIENT. 

I  attended  him  about  forty  eight  hours,  and  then  went  with 
him  to  see  the  doctor,  which  was  half  a  mile.  The  doctor  ap- 
peared to  be  much  pleased  to  see  him  so  well,  and  to  have  the 
use  of  his  limbs,  for  he  could  stoop  and  use  them  as  well  as  ever 
he  could. 

Dr.  S.  frequently  came  to  visit  Mrs.  Eaton,  and  expressed 
much  astonishment  at  the  effect  of  the  medicine  upon  her,  as 
he  considered  the  dropsy  incurable. 

On  one  occasion,  after  finding  her  so  much  better,  (having 
been  reduced  in  size  over  fifteen  inches,)  he  expressed  himself 
with  much  warmth,  and  said  that  he  had  never  seen  the  like 
before,  and  wished  me  to  inform  him  how  it  was  done.  "  You 
know,  doctor,"  said  I,  "  that  the  fire  having  gone  out  the  water 
had  filled  the  body,  and  all  1  had  to  do  was  to  build  fire  sufli- 


526  THE    THOMSONIAN 

cient  to  boil  away  the  water."     This  reply  pleased  him  very 
much,  and  he  said  it  was  a  short  way  to  do  business. 

FIRST  CASE  OF  VENEREAL. 

While  practicing  in  Exeter,  I  had  a  patient  (a  woman  from 
Portsmouth)  who  had  the  venereal,  in  consequence  of  a  bad 
husband.  She  had  been  alttended  for  nearly  a  year  by  the 
doctors  in  Portsmouth,  who  had  filled  her  with  mercury  for  the 
purpose  of  curing  the  disorder,  until  the  remedy  was  worse  than 
the  disease.  Her  case  was  alarming  and  very  difficult;  she 
was  brought  on  a  bed,  being  unable  to  sit  up,  and  seemed  to  be 
one  mass  of  putrefaction.  I  proceeded  with  her  in  my  usual 
way  of  treating  old  disease  where  the  system  has  become  gene- 
rally disordered,  by  giving  medicine  to  promote  perspiration, 
steaming  to  throw  out  the  mercury  and  to  restore  the  digestive 
powers,  and  in  three  weeks  she  returned  home,  entirely  cured. 

SECOND  CASE — PERFECT  CURE,  ETC. 

Another  woman  came  to  me  from  the  same  place,  who  had 
been  sick  five  years,  which  had  been  in  consequence  of  having 
had  the  venereal.  The  doctors  had  filled  her  with  mercury,  to 
kill  the  disease,  as  they  called  it,  and  left  her  to  linger  out  a  mi- 
serable existence. 

When  she  stated  the  case  to  me,  I  felt  very  unwilling  to  un- 
dertake with  her,  apprehending  that  it  would  be  very  uncer- 
tain whether  a  cure  could  be  effected,  her  disease  had  been  of 
so  long  standing ;  but  she  insisted  that  I  should  not  put  her 
off.  I  at  length  commenced  upon  her,  and  after  three  weeks 
attendance  she  returned  home,  well ;  and  in  less  than  a  year 
she  had  two  children  at  a  birth.  Her  last  child  previous  to  the 
twins  was  born  eight  years  before. 

DISEASE  EASILY  CURED. 

This  disease  is  very  easily  cured  in  its  first  stages,  by  a  com- 
mon course  of  medicine,  being  nothing  more  than  a  high  stage 
of  canker  seated  in  the  glands  of  the  organs  of  generation  ;  and 
if  not  cured,  communicate  with  the  glands  of  the  throat  and 
other  parts.  Under  the  fashionable  treatment,  there  is  more 
difficulty  in  removing  the  mercury  from  the  body  of  one  in  this 
situation,  than  in  curing  a  dozen  who  have  not  taken  the  poi- 
son. 

CASE  OF  CONSUMPTION. 

While  in  Exeter,  a  young  man,  son  of  Col.  Nathaniel  Gil- 
man,  who  was  in  a  decline,  called  on  me  for  assistance.  He 
was  about  fourteen  years  of  age,  and  had  been  troubled  with 
bleeding  at  the  nose.  The  physicians  had  made  use  of  such 
powerful  astringents,  with  corrosive  sublimate  snuffed  into 
the  head,  that  the  blood  vessels  seemed  shrunk,  and  his  flesh 


,   '  MATERIA    MEDICA.  527 

had  wasted  away,  I  carried  him  through  with  a  course  of  me- 
dicine, and  gave  an  equal  circulation  of  blood  through  the  bo- 
dy, and  stopped  its  course  to  the  head;  then  raised  a  natural 
perspiration,  restored  the  digestive  system,  and  regulated  the 
body  generally,  so  that  it  might  receive  support  from  his  food 
and  not  medicine. 

PATtENT  RESTORED,  ETC. — FACULTY  ALARMED. 

In  a  short  time  he  recovered  his  health,  so  that  he  command- 
ed a  company  of  the  militia  at  the  alarm  at  Portsmouth  during 
the  war.  My  success  while  at  this  place  was  very  great,  and 
gained  me  much  credit  among  the  people  ;  but  the  faculty  were 
alarmed,  and  made  use  of  every  artifice  to  prejudce  tlie  public 
against  me. 

SCALD-IIEAD. 

A  son  of  John  Underwood,  of  Portsmouth,  was  brought  to 
me  while  at  Exeter,  who  had  what  was  called  a  scald-head. 
He  had  been  afflicted  with  it  for  nino  years.  The  doctors  had 
been  applied  to,  but  to  no  purpose;  and  when  the  boy  was 
brought  to  me,  the  father  agreed  to  pay  a  generous  price  if  I 
would  cure  him.  I  took  charge  of  him,  and  pursued  niy  usual 
course  of  treatment,  and  in  three  weeks  he  returned  home  well, 
and  has  not  since  had  any  appearance  of  the  disease. 

MORE  INGRATITUDE. 

This  man  never  paid  me  one  cent  for  this  service,  and  in  or- 
der to  make  a  refusal  to  pay  plausible,  he  tJirned  against  me  and 
my  practice,  although  he  had  acknowledged  that  I  had  saved 
the  life  of  his  son.  He  said  much  against  me  and  my  prac- 
tice, and  kept  r.way  many  that  might  have  been  cured.  At 
ienjjth  he  was  taken  sick  himself,  and  applied  to  my  agent  for 
relief,  and  was  restored  to  health. 

VENEREAL  PATIENT  KILLED  BY  DOCTORS. 

I  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Portsmouth  to  see  n  young  man  by 
the  name  of  Lebel',  who  was  in  a  very  dangerous  situation, 
supposed  by  his  friends  to  be  in  a  dying  state,  having  been  giv- 
en over  by  doctors  Cutler  and  Pierpont  at  ten  o'clock  that  morn- 
ing. I  arrived  about  two  in  the  afternoon.  He  had  been  at- 
tended by  the  doctors  for  about  a  month,  to  cure  the  venereal. 
They  had  filled  him  so  full  of  mercury  that  he  had  swollen  all 
over  with  the  poison.  The  doctors  pronounced  it  the  dropsy. 
His  legs  had  been  scarified  to  let  off  the  water ;  the  disorder 
had  gained  the  ascendency,  and  his  vigorous  constitution  had 
submitted. 

OPINION  OF  CASE. 

I  at  once  pronounced  his  case  to  be  a  desperate  one,  and  told 


528 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


the  French  counsel  who  had  the  care  of  him  that  I  could  give 
no  encouragement  that  1  could  do  him  any  good,  but  he  was 
very  anxious  that  I  should  make  a  trial,  I  told  him,  the  only 
chance  was  to  raise  a  perspiration,  and  that  twenty-four  liours 
would  determine  his  case,  for  he  would  be  better  in  that  time  or 
dead. 

PROMISED  REWARD. 

The  idea  of  a  perspiration  caused  him  to  urge  me  to  try,  and 
he  said  if  I  could  effecc  it  he  would  give  me  one  hundred  dol- 
lars— the  doctors  had  tried  a  month  and  could  not  succeed.  I 
gave  him  some  medicine,  then  put  on  the  clothes  by  degrees 
until  he  was  shielded  from  the  air,  and  he  sweat  freely  in  about 
one  hour. 

ANXIETY  OF  DOCTORS — PATIENT  BETTER. 

The  two  doctors  were  present,  and  astonished  at  my  success; 
they  walked  the  room,  talked  low,  and  then  v\rent  out.  I  staid 
with  him  until  six  o'clock,  and  the  symptoms  appeared  favora- 
ble; he  sweat  profusely,  and  spat  much  matter,  tinged  with 
blood.  I  told  the  nurse  to  keep  him  in  the  same  situation  until 
I  returned,  and  then  went  away  and  was  gone  about  one  hour, 
and  came  back  with  JMr.  Underwood. 

OUTRAGEOUS  TREATMENT. 

When  we  came  into  the  room  we  found  that  the  doctors  had 
taken  him  out  of  bed,  and  sat  him  in  a  chair  and  opened  the 
windows  to  let  a  draft  of  cold  air  strike  him.  I  told  them  that 
this  treatment  of  theirs  towards  the  man  would  cause  his  death, 
and  that  I  should  do  no  more  for  him,  and  should  now  consider 
him  as  their  patient.  It  appeared  they  were  in  trouble  because 
I  had  effected  in  one  hour  a  perspiration  which  they  had  failed 
in  doing  in  a  month. 

PATIENT  FAINTS — DIES. 

The  man  fainted  before  I  left  the  room.  I  went  home  with 
Mr.  Underwood,  and  left  them  to  pursue  their  own  course,  and 
the  man  died  before  morning. 

NO  PAY— VILLANY  OF  DOCTORS. 

I  received  no  compensation  for  my  trouble,  for  coming  fif- 
teen miles  and  returning  on  foot ;  and  besides,  afterwards  these 
two  doctors  came  forward  and  swore  that  I  killed  this  man, 
notwithstanding  they  had  given  him  over  to  die  the  morning 
before  I  saw  him,  and  they  had  taken  him  out  of  bed  as  before 
stated. 

On  being  informed  that  they  designed  to  support  a  com- 
plaint against  me,  I  obtained  several  depositions  of  persons  who 
were  knowing  to  the  facts,  to  counteract  their  statements.     On 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  529 

finding  that  I  was  about  to  oppose  them,  they  dropped  the  mat- 
ter. I  was  informed  that  in  their  deposition  they  set  forth  that 
my  medicine  was  of  a  poisonous  nature,  and  if  the  patients  did 
not  vomit  immediately  they  would  certainly  die. 

YELLOW  FEVER — PHYSIC  INJURIOUS. 

In  September,  1808,  I  was  called  to  Portsmouth  to  see  Rich- 
ard Rice,  Esq.,  who  was  sick  with  the  yellow  fever.  The  rea- 
son for  his  sending  for  me  was,  that  he  had  heard  that  I  sweat 
my  patients  to  death. 

PREVIOUS  TREATMENT. 

He  had  conceived  the  idea,  that  if  he  could  be  sweated  he 
should  be  better,  but  they  would  not  allow  him  to  keep  warm  \. 
they  kept  the  windows  and  doors  open,  and  had  scarcely  any 
clothing  upon  his  bed.  No  fire  was  allowed  in  the  room,  while 
he  was  shivering  with  the  cold.  The  plan  was  to  kill  the  fe- 
ver, and  to  effect  this  the  doctor  had  bled  him,  and  told  his  sis- 
ter that  he  had  given  him  as  much  arsenic  as  he  dared  to.  and 
if  that  did  not  answer  he  did  not  know  what  would. 

PATIENT  RELIEVED. 

I  began  to  give  him  medicine  a  little  before  night,  and  in  an 
hour  perspiration  took  place.  He  was  so  weak  that  he  was  un- 
able to  help  himself.  In  the  morning  the  doctor  proposed  to 
bleed  him,  but  he  was  dismissed.  I  was  with  him  until  his 
symptoms  were  favorable,  and  then  left  him  in  the  care  of  three 
persons  in  whom  I  could  confide. 

ATTEMPTS  TO  FRIGHTEN. 

After  I  was  gone,  Dr.  Bracket  came  into  the  room  where  the 
patient  was,  in  a  great  rage,  saying  they  were  killing  him,  for 
the  mortification  would  soon  take  place  in  consequence  of  keep- 
ing him  so  warm.  He  was  asked  by  one  present,  in  which 
case  was  mortification  most  likely  to  take  place — when  the 
blood  was  cold  and  thick,  or  when  warm  and  thin  ?  The  doctor 
would  not  answer.  Having  failed  in  his  plan  with  the  nurses, 
he  then  tried  to  frighten  the  wife  and  relations;  but  it  did  not 
answer — they  were  satisfied  with  the  treatment  he  was  receiv- 
ing. 

PATIENT  DERANGED — RELIEVED. 

The  patient  was  much  deranged  by  spells,  sometimes  ima- 
gined himself  a  lump  of  ice;  but  by  following  my  directions, 
and  keeping  up  a  perspiration,  by  morning  he  was  relieved  and 
had  become  sane.  He  had  no  pain,  except  in  the  lower  part  of 
his  bowels,  for  which  he  wished  a  dose  of  physic.  I  opposed 
the  physic,  being  confident  that  it  would  not  do  in  so  putrid  a 
case. 


530 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


PHYSIC  GIVEN — CONSEaUENCES. 

He  was  so  urgent  that  I  gave  him  a  small  dose,  which  ope- 
rated very  soon,  and  the  consequence  was,  it  reinforced  the 
disorder,  and  threw  him  into  the  greatest  distress.  He  asked 
for  more  physic,  but  I  told  him  I  would  not  give  him  any  more, 
being  convinced  of  the  impropriety  of  physic  in  such  a  case ;  and 
I  have  never  given  any  since.  It  checked  the  perspiration,  and 
drew  the  determining  powers  from  the  surface  inward,  so  that 
I  had  to  go  through  with  tlie  same  process  again  of  raising  the 
perspiration  and  vomiting,  which  was  much  more  difficult  than 
at  first,  and  it  was  with  the  utmost  attention  and  difficulty  that 
1  was  able  to  keep  off  the  mortification  for  twelve  hours.  All 
this  was  brought  about  by  taking  a  small  dose  of  physic. 

DIFFICULTY  RELIEVED. 

I  kept  up  the  perspiration  through  Friday  and  Saturday,  and 
on  Sunday  morning  when  I  called  to  see  him  he  was  up  and 
dressing,  I  asked  him  how  he  did,  and  he  replied.  "  I  am  as 
strong  as  you  are,"  and  took  me  under  the  arm  and  carried  me 
across  the  room.  On  Monday  he  was  down  on  the  wharf,  at- 
tending to  his  shipping  business. 

REMARKS  OF  THE  PEOPLE. 

This  case  created  much  excitement  with  those  by  whom  the 
facts  were  known.  Some  would  say,  how  can  this  man  be 
successful  in  practice,  when  he  has  no  learning  ?  (book  know- 
ledge.] Mr.  Rice  gave  me  much  credit  for  this  cure,  and  re- 
quested me  to  make  his  house  my  home  while  in  Portsmouth. 

THEORY  EXPLAINED. 

While  here,  I  was  introduced  to  Judge  Alexander  Rice,  of 
Kittery,  Maine,  a  gentleman  of  highly  respectable  standing  in 
that  vicinity.  Like  others.  Judge  Rice  could  not  see  how  so 
valuable  a  discovery  could  be  made  by  a  man  without  an  edu- 
cation. I  explained  the  philosophical  principles  of  my  practice 
to  him,  showing  him  how  every  thing  operated  under  the  ele- 
ments, and  by  one  acting  upon  another  causing  motion  ;  how 
fire,  water  and  air,  keep  every  thing  in  motion  ;  how  the  tem- 
perament of  the  body  by  adding  or  diminishing  the  heat  or  cold 
would  promote  life  or  death.  After  hearing  my  explanation, 
he  confessed  that  my  natural  medical  talent  was  of  more  value 
than  artificial  learning. 

CASE  OF  JUDGE  RICE,  ETC, 

Judge  Rice  then  made  known  to  me  his  infirmities,  and 
wished  that  I  would  take  care  of  his  family,  and  give  himself 
and  wife  such  information  as  would  enable  them  to  attend  up- 
on themselves  in  case  of  sickness.  I  carried  some  of  their  fa- 
mily through  with  courses  of  medicine,  Mrs.  Rice  being  very 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


5S1 


active,  and  anxious  to  gain  information,  after  whicli  she  under- 
took to  manage  the  business.  She  was  a  sound  woman  in 
judgment,  and  fearless  in  advocaling  correct  principles. 

SALT  RHEUM. 

After  Mrs.  Rice  had  been  satisfied  with  the  utility  of  my 
practice,  she  wished  me  to  attend  her  through  with  a  course  of 
medicine  for  a  bad  humor  called  the  salt  rheum,  which  she  had 
been  long  alHicted  with.  She  went  through  a  few  courses, 
which  effected  a  complete  cure. 

GOUT. 

xMajor  Rice  had  been  afflicted  for  a  number  of  years  with  se- 
vere turns  of  the  gout,  and  had  in  some  instances  been  confin- 
ed with  it  six  months  together,  and  for  six  weeks  not  able  to 
sit  up,  and  much  of  the  time  not  able  to  lift  his  hand  to  his 
head. 

PHYSICIANS'  TREATMENT,  ETC. 

He  had  constantly  been  under  the  care  of  one  of  the  most 
skillful  doctors  in  that  section  of  country,  who  would  bleed, 
blister  and  physic  him,  until  his  strength  was  exhausted;  after 
attending  him  in  this  way  through  the  winter,  they  would  tell 
him  that  he  must  wait  until  warm  weather  before  he  could  get 
about. 

OPER,ATION  OF  HIS  DISEASE. 

When  the  weather  became  warm,  he  would  crawl  out  to  the 
sunny  side  of  the  house,  and  in  this  way  he  gradually  gained 
his  health  and  strength.  After  this,  he  was  afflicted  with  a  vi- 
olent burning  in  the  stomach,  which  was  almost  as  troublesome 
as  the  gout. 

RELIEF  EASILY  OBTAINED. 

After  having  a  knowledge  of  my  practice  Major  Rice  never 
had  an  attack  of  the  gout  to  last  twenty-four  hours  before  he 
found  relief.  The  burning  at  the  stomach  troubled  him  but 
very  little  since  he  used  this  medicine. 

VALUE  OF  MEDICAL  KNOWLEDGE. 

This  gentleman  has  frequently  told  me,  that  if  he  could 
have  been  as  sure  of  relief  when  he  was  first  subject  to  this 
complaint,  as  he  is  now  certain  of  it  in  twenty-four  hours,  he 
would  have  been  willing  to  have  given  all  he  was  worth. 
Money  would  be  no  inducement  for  this  famJly  to  part  with  the 
knowledge  of  this  practice,  were  it  in  their  power  to  dispose  of 
their  information  in  relation  to  its  virtues. 

DYSENTERY. 

I  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Deerfield,  where  the  dysentery  pre- 


532  THE  THOMSONIAN 

vailed,  and  had  proved  very  mortal.  A  young  man  by  the 
name  of  Folsom  came  for  me,  and  lie  said  that  the  doctor  had 
lost  every  patient  he  had  attended ;  that  seven  had  died  and 
many  were  sick,  and  that  his  lather  and  two  brothers  were  that 
morning  given  over  by  the  doctors  to  die. 

The  young  man  appeared  so  anxious,  and  Vv'as  so  much 
frightened,  that  I  concluded  to  go  with  him.  The  distance  was 
twenty-eiofht  miles.  We  started  a  little  before  night,  and  ar- 
rived there  about  ten  o'clock. 

STATE  OF  THE  PATIENTS. 

I  found  the  father  and  two  sons  as  bad  as  they  could  be  and 
be  alive  ;  they  were  stupid  and  cold.  I  told  the  mother  that  it 
was  very  uncertain  whether  I  could  help  them.  She  begged 
me  to  save  her  husband's  life  if  possible.  I  could  not  tell  whe- 
ther they  were  dymg  or  whether  they  were  under  the  influence 
of  opium.  I  gave  them  medicine;  the  two  children  died  in 
about  three  hours,  but  Mr.  Folsom  soon  grew  better,  and  linal- 
ly  got  well.  I  attended  eighteen  in  all,  and  fifteen  of  them  re- 
covered. 

CHARGE  OF  MURDER,  ETC. 

Two  years  after  this,  the  death  of  these  three  children  was 
brought  against  me  by  the  doctors,  on  the  charge  of  murder. 
1  received  for  this  service  fifteen  dollars,  but  no  credit  given  tor 
the  fifteen  cures  out  of  eighteen  cases,  when  the  doctors  lost  all 
they  were  called  to  attend  ;  and  after  they  had  given  them  over 
to  die,  I  cured  one  of  them  twelve  hours  afterwards. 

After  I  left  the  place,  the  doctor  adopted  my  practice,  as  far 
as  he  knew  it,  particularly  sweating,  and  about  half  of  his  pa- 
tients lived. 

BALANCE  OF  POWER  TO  BE  OBSERVED. 

1  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Salisbury,  to  see  a  sick  child  who  had 
been  attended  by  a  lady  to  whom  I  had  given  information.  The 
lady  complained  that  the  child  would  not  hold  sufficient  warmth 
to  continue  the  perspiration.  On  seeing  the  child,  I  at  once 
found  out  the  difficulty.  It  was  this:  when  they  gave  medi- 
cines to  raise  the  inward  heat,  and  start  the  determining  power 
to  the  surface,  they  at  the  same  time  raised  the  heat  on  the  sur- 
face so  high  as  to  counteract  it. 

PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  OF  THEORY. 

After  explaining  the  dilficulty  to  them,  1  raised  up  the  child 
and  poured  on  it  a  pint  of  cold  vinegar,  and  it  immediately  re- 
vived, i  applied  no  more  outward  heat,  only  sufficient  to 
shield  it  from  the  outward  air,  and  gave  the  warm  medicines 
inwardly,  and  on  the  operation  of  which,  the  child  grew  cold, 


'iiw 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  5SS 

and  was  very  much  distressed.  As  soon  as  the  inward  heat  had 
o-ained  the  ascendency,  and  drove  tlie  cold  out  or  displaced  it, 
the  circulation  became  free,  and  the  child  was  relieved  from 
pain  and  fell  asleep.  The  next  day  the  heat  was  as  much  high- 
er than  what  was  natural  as  it  was  lower  the  day  before  ;  and 
when  tlie  equilibrium  of  warmth  had  taken  place  through  the 
system,  establishing  the  proper  balance  of  power,  the  child  gain- 
ed its  strength,  and  was  soon  restored  to  health. 

CONSUMPTION — SALT  RHEUM  —  SUGAR  OF  LEAD. 

In  the  fall  of  the  year  180S,  I  was  sent  for  to  go  to  Beverly, 
to  see  the  wife  of  a  Mr.  Appleton,  who  was  the  daughter  of  El- 
der Williams,  the  Baptist  minister  in  that  town,  and  was  very 
low  of  a  consumption.  She  had  formerly  been  afflicted  with 
the  salt  rheum  on  her  hands,  and  had  applied  to  a  doctor  for 
advice ;  lie  had  advised  her  to  make  use  of  a  sugar  of  lead 
wash,  which  drove  the  disease  to  her  lungs,  and  she  Iiad  been 
in  that  situation  for  a  long  time,  and  very  little  hopes  were  en- 
tertained of  her  ever  being  any  better.  I  carried  her  through  a 
course  of  the  medicine,  with  very  good  effect. 

I  remained  in  Beverly  about  a  week,  and  while  there  became 
acquainted  with  Mr.  Williams,  and  also  with  Mr.  William  Ray- 
mond, to  whom  I  gave  information  of  my  practice,  and  he  as- 
sisted me  to  attend  on  my  patients. 

I  then  returned  to  Portsmouth,  where  I  was  constantly  called 
to  practice,  and  had  the  most  desperate  cases  put  under  my 
care,  in  all  of  which  I  met  with  very  great  success. 

LOVETt's  case INTERESTING. 

W'hile  practicing  in  Beverly,  I  was  called  on  by  a  Mr.  Lovett 
to  attend  his  son,  who  was  sick,  as  tliey  supposed  with  a  bad  cold 
— some  thought  it  a  typhus  fever.  I  was  very  much  engaged  in 
attending  upon  the  sick  at  the  time,  and  could  not  attend,  and  he 
came  after  me  three  times  before  I  could  go.  On  seeing  him, 
found  that  he  complained  of  a  stiff  neck,  and  appeared  to  be  very 
stupid,  and  had  no  pain.  His  aunt,  who  was  his  nurse,  said  that 
he  would  certainly  die,  for  he  had  the  same  symptoms  as  his  mo- 
ther, who  died  a  short  time  before.  I  gave  some  medicine  which 
relieved  him,  the  next  day  carried  him  through  a  course  of  me- 
dicine, and  he  appeared  to  be  doing  well. 

Being  called  on  to  go  to  Salem,  I  left  him  in  the  care  of  Mr. 
Raymond,  with  particular  directions  to  keep  in  the  house  and 
not  expose  himself  This  was  on  Wednesday,  and  I  heard  no- 
thing from  him,  and  knew  not  but  that  he  was  doing  well,  till  the 
Sunday  afternoon  following,  when  I  was  informed  that  he  was 
worse.  I  immediately  enquired  of  Mr.  Raymond,  and  learned 
from  him,  that  he  got  so  much  better  that  he  had  been  down  to 
the  sea  side  and  returned  oq  Friday  night ;  that  the  weather  was 


53^  THE    THOMSONIAN 

very  cold,  being  in  the  month  of  December ;  that  he  had  been 
chilled  with  the  cold,  and  soon  after  his  return  had  been  taken 
very  ill ;  he  staid  with  him  on  Saturday  night, ;  that  he  had  not 
given  any  medicine,  thinking  he  was  too  dangerously  sick  for 
him  to  undertake  with. 

I  told  the  young  man's  father,  that  it  was  very  doubtful  whe- 
ther I  could  do  any  tiling  that  would  help  him,  but  that  I  would 
try,  and  do  what  I  could,  I  found  that  the  patient  was  so  far 
gone  that  the  medicine  would  have  no  effect,  and  in  two  hours 
told  him  that  I  could  not  help  his  son,  and  advised  him  to  call 
some  other  help.  This  was  said  in  the  presence  of  Elder  Wil- 
liams and  Mr.  Raymond.  Mr.  Lovett  made  answer,  that  if  I 
could  not  help  his  son  he  knew  of  none  who  could,  and  was  very 
desirous  for  me  to  stay  with  him  all  night,  which  1  did,  and  stood 
by  his  bed  the  whole  time.  He  was  much  deranged  till  morning, 
when  he  came  to  himself  and  was  quite  sensible,  I  again  re- 
quested the  father  to  send  for  some  other  doctor,  as  I  was  sensible 
that  I  could  do  nothing  for  him  that  would  be  of  any  benefit.  He 
immediately  sent  for  two  doctors,  and  as  soon  as  they  arrived  I 
left  him  in  their  care.  They  attended  him  till  the  next  night, 
about  ten  o'clock,  when  he  died. 

I  have  been  more  particular  in  giving  the  history  of  this  case, 
because  two  years  after  a  charge  was  brought  against  me  for 
murdering  this  young  man. 

The  father  and  friends  expressed  no  dissatisfaction  at  the  time 
in  regard  to  my  conduct,  except  they  thought  I  ought  not  to  have 
neglected  the  patient  so  long  ;  but  it  is  a  well  known  fact,  that  I 
attended  as  soon  as  I  knew  of  his  being  worse,  and  that  the  sole 
cause  of  his  second  attack  was  owing  to  his  going  out  and  expos- 
ing himself,  and  could  not  be  imputed  as  any  fault  of  mine. 

CONSUMPTION. 

In  the  latter  part  of  December,  1 808,  I  was  sent  for  to  attend 
Elder  Bolles,  the  Baptist  minister  of  Salem.  I  was  introduced  to 
him  by  Elder  Williams,  and  found  him  in  bed,  very  weak  and 
low,  in  the  last  stage  of  a  consumption — all  hopes  of  a  recovery 
were  at  an  end — his  doctors  left  him  as  incurable.  He  asked  my 
opinion  of  his  case  ;  1  told  him,  I  could  not  tell  whether  there 
was  a  possibility  of  a  cure  or  not  till  after  using  the  medicine, 
being  doubtful  whether  there  was  mortification  or  not. 

I  gave  his  friends  as  correct  an  account  of  his  disorder  and  the 
operation  of  the  medicine  as  I  could,  and  said  that  I  did  not  wish 
to  do  any  thincr  which  might  cause  reflections  hereafter;  but 
they  promised  that,  let  the  result  be  what  it  might,  they  should 
be  satisfied,  and  would  not  think  hard  of  me. 

On  these  conditions  I  undertook,  and  told  them  that  twenty- 
four  hours  time  would  decide  whether  he  lived  or  died.    I  began 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  535 

to  give  the  medicine  in  the  morning,  which  had  a  very  calm  and 
easy  operation.  The  emetic  operated  very  kindly,  and  threw 
off  his  stomach  a  large  quantity  of  cold  jelly,  like  the  white  of 
an  egg ;  the  perspiration  moved  gently  on,  and  was  free ;  the 
internal  heat  produced  by  the  medicine  fixed  the  determining 
power  to  the  surface,  and  threw  out  the  putrefaction  to  such  a  de- 
gree that  the  smell  was  very  oflensive.  Mr.  Bolles  had  a  brother 
present,  who  was  a  doctor;  he  said,  he  did  not  know  whether 
the  medicine  made  the  putrefaction,  or  whether  it  made  visible 
what  was  secreted  in  the  body  ;  but  he  was  soon  convinced  on 
that  head,  for  when  the  medicme  had  cleansed  him,  all  this  pu- 
trid smell  ceased.  While  the  medicine  was  in  the  greatest  ope- 
ration, the  perspiration  brought  out  the  putrefaction  to  such  a 
degree,  that  the  nurse  in  making  his  bed  was  so  affected  with  it, 
that  she  fainted  and  fell  on  the  floor. 

1  attended  on  him  for  about  three  weeks,  in  which  time  he  was 
able  to  set  up  two  or  three  hours  in  a  day  ;  his  food  nourished 
his  body,  and  his  strength  gained  very  fast  considering  the  un- 
favorable season  of  the  year.  I  gave  him  my  best  advice,  and 
left  directions  how  to  proceed,  and  returned  home  to  ray  fami- 
ly, to  spend  the  rest  of  the  winter  with  them.  I  returned  in 
the  spring  to  see  Mr.  Bolles,  and  found  him  so  far  recovered  as 
to  be  able  to  ride  out,  and  in  good  spirits.  He  soon  gained  his 
health,  and  is  now  [1835]  well,  and  ready  to  give  testimony  of 
the  facts  as  I  have  related  them. 

ANOTHER  SEVERE  CASE. 

In  the  season  of  1809  I  suffered  much.  In  the  first  part  of 
the  summer  I  attended  many  patients  with  old  complaints  ;  in 
particular,  one  case  that  I  shall  mention,  of  a  young  woman  of 
Kittery,  in  a  consumption.  She  had  been  confined  to  her 
house  four  months  ;  her  flesh  was  exhausted,  and  she  had  a  vi- 
olent stricture  of  the  lungs,  which  she  said  seemed  as  though 
there  was  a  string  that  drew  her  lungs  to  her  back.  This  caus- 
ed a  dry,  hacking  cough,  which  was  very  distressing.  I  could 
give  her  friends  no  encouragement  of  a  cure ;  but  the  youno- 
woman  and  her  family  were  so  urgent,  that  I  undertook  with 
her. 

Her  courage  was  very  great,  and  she  took  the  medicines  and 
followed  all  my  directions  with  great  perseverance.  She  said 
she  wished  that  it  might  either  kill  or  cure,  for  she  did  not  de- 
sire to  live  in  the  situation  she  was  then  in.  I  left  her  medi- 
cine and  directions,  and  occasionally  visited  her.  My  plan  of 
treatment  was  followed  with  much  attention  and  zeal  for  six 
months,  before  I  could  raise  an  inward  heat  that  would  hold 
more  than  six  hours.  She  then  had  what  was  called  a  settled 
fever,  and  1  gave  her  medicine  to  raise  as  great  an  internal  heat 


636  THE  THOMSONIAN 

as  I  possibly  could  ;  this  caused  much  alarm  among  her  friends, 
as  they  thought  she  would  certainly  die,  I  told  them  that  the 
heat-holding,  which  was  thf>  cause  of  the  fever,  was  the  first  fa- 
vorable symptom  that  I  had  seen  in  her  case.  She  soon  gain- 
ed her  health,  to  the  astonishment  of  all  iier  friends  and  ac- 
quaintances. 

She  continued  to  enjoy  good  health  till  the  next  season,  when 
she  had  another  turn  of  the  fever.  I  attended  her  in  my  usual 
way,  and  raised  the  heat  till  it  completely  overpowered  the  cold, 
when  she  was  entirely  cured,  and  has  ever  since  enjoyed  good 
health.     [1822.] 

DROPSY RICKETS. 

During  this  summer,  a  woman  applied  to  me  from  a  neigh- 
boring town,  who  had  the  dropsy — and  brought  with  her  a  lit- 
tle girl  who  had  the  rickets  very  badly,  so  that  she  was  grown 
much  out  of  shape.  I  carried  them  both  through  a  course  of 
the  medicine,  attended  them  for  three  or  four  weeks,  and  then 
gave  the  woman  information  hovv"  to  relieve  herself  and  the 
girl,  occasionally  visiting  them.  They  both  recovered  of  their 
complaints,  and  have  enjoyed  perfect  health  since. 

GRATEFUL  RETURNS. 

This  woman  paid  me  the  most  liberally  of  any  that  I  had  at- 
tended, and  has  on  all  occasions  manifested  her  gratitude  for 
the  assistance  I  afforded  her. 

CANCER. 

Another  woman  from  the  same  town  applied  to  me,  who  had 
a  cancer  on  her  breast.  She  had  been  under  the  care  of  seve- 
ral doctors,  who  had  by  their  course  of  practice  made  her  worse. 
I  undertook  with  her,  and  by  giving  medicine  to  check  the  can- 
ker and  promote  perspiration,  effectually  relieved  her  from  the 
disease. 

OTHER  CASES. 

Many  other  desperate  cases,  such  as  consumptions,  dropsies, 
cancers,  &c.,  most  of  which  had  been  given  over  by  the  doc- 
tors, were  attended  by  me  about  this  time,  which  it  will  be  un- 
necessary for  me  to  particularize;  all  of  them  were  either  com- 
pletely cured,  or  essentially  relieved  and  made  comfortable,  by 
the  system  of  practice. 

DEPLETION,  ETC. 

A  young  lady  applied  to  me,  who  had  been  much  troubled 
with  bleeding  at  the  stomach.  She  stated  to  me  that  she  had 
been  bled  by  the  doctors  forty-two  times  in  two  years,  and  that 
they  had  bled  her  seven  times  in  six  weeks.  So  much  blood 
had  been  taken  from  her,  that  the  blood  vessels  had  contracted 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  537 

in  such  a  manner  that  they  would  hold  very  little  blood  ;  and 
the  heat  being  thereby  so  much  diminished,  the  water  filled  the 
flesh,  and  what  little  blood  there  was  rushed  to  her  face,  while 
the  extremeties  were  cold.  This  produced  a  deceptive  ap- 
pearance of  health,  and  caused  those  who  judo;ed  by  outward 
appearances  to  doubt  whether  there  was  any  disease;  so  that 
she  had  not  only  to  bear  her  own  infirmities,  but  the  reproach- 
es of  her  acquaintances.  I  kindled  heat  enough  in  the  body  to 
throw  off  the  useless  water,  which  gave  the  blood  room  to  cir- 
culate through  the  whole  system,  instead  of  circulating,  as  it 
had  done  before,  only  in  the  large  blood  vessels  ;  and  they,  be- 
ing much  extended  by  not  having  heat  sufficient  to  give  it  mo- 
tion, has  lead  the  doctors  into  the  erroneous  idea  that  there  was 
too  much  blood,  and  a  resort  to  the  practice  of  bleeding,  which 
reduces  the  strength  of  the  patient,  and  increases  the  disease. 

There  is  no  such  thing  as  a  person  having  too  much  blood, 
no  more  than  there  is  of  having  too  much  bone,  or  too  much 
muscle,  or  sinews  ;  nature  contrives  all  things  right.  The 
blood  may  be  too  thick  so  as  not  to  circulate,  and  is  hable  to  be 
diseased,  like  all  other  parts  of  the  body ;  but  how  taking  part 
of  it  away  can  benefit  the  rest,  or  tend  in  any  way  to  remove 
the  disease,  is  what  I  could  never  reconcile  with  common  sense. 

After  I  had  carried  this  woman  through  a  full  operation  of 
the  medicine,  and  got  the  heat  to  hold,  so  as  to  produce  a  natu- 
ral perspu'ation,  she  at  once  exhibited  a  true  picture  of  her  situ- 
ation. Instead  of  appearing  to  be  so  fleshy  and  well  as  she  had 
done,  she  fell  away  and  became  quite  emaciated  ;  but  as  soon  as 
the  digestive  powers  were  restored,  so  that  food  could  nourish 
her  body,  she  gained  her  strength  and  flesh,  and  in  a  short  time 
was  completely  restored  to  health. 

SPOTTED  FEVER. 

I  was  about  this  time  called  to  attend  a  woman  who  was  ve- 
ry severely  attacked  with  the  spotted  fever.  The  first  notice  of 
it  was  a  pain  in  her  heel,  which  soon  moved  up  to  her  hips  and 
back,  and  from  thence  to  her  stomach  and  head,  so  that  in  fif- 
teen minutes  her  sight  was  gone,  and  in  less  than  half  an  hour 
she  was  senseless  and  cold.  About  this  time  1  saw  her,  and 
examined  well  the  cause  of  the  disease.  I  was  well  satisfied  it 
was  the  effect  of  cold  having  overpowered  the  inward  heat. 
By  confining  her  from  the  air,  giving  her  Nos.  1  and  2,  and 
keeping  her  in  a  moderate  steam,  she  in  a  short  time  came  to 
her  senses,  and  the  symptoms  were  exactly  similar  to  those  of 
a  drowned  person  coming  to,  after  having  life  suspended  by  be- 
ing under  water.  As  soon  as  the  perspiration  became  free,  all 
pain  ceased,  and   she  was  quite  comfortable;    in  twenty-four 

35 


538  THE    THOMSONIAN 

hours  the  disease  was  completely  removed,  and  she  was  able  to 
attend  to  her  work. 

ANOTHER  CASE. 

The  same  day  I  had  another  case,  of  a  child  which  the  doc- 
tor had  given  over.  When  I  catne  to  this  child  it  was  sense- 
less, and  i  expected  in  a  mortified  state.  I  gave  it  the  hotteet 
medicine  I  could  get,  with  the  emetic  ;  it  lay  about  six  hours 
silent,  before  the  medicine  had  kindled  heat  pnongh  to  cause 
morion  in  the  stomach  and  bowels,  when  it  began  to  revive, 
and  what  came  from  it  was  black  and  putrid  ;  the  bowels  just 
escaped  mortification.     The  child  was  soon  well. 

These  two  cases  were  both  cured  in  twenty-four  hours  time. 

REMARK  ON  SPOTTED  FEVER. 

When  the  spotted  fever  first  appeared  in  Portsmouth,  the 
doctors  had  five  cases,  and  all  of  them  died.  I  had  five  cases, 
and  all  of  them  lived.  Because  my  patients  did  not  die,  the 
doctors  said  they  did  not  have  the  fever.  In  this  they  had 
much  the  advantage  of  me,  for  there  could  be  no  doubt  of  theirs 
all  havmg  it,  as  death  was  in  most  of  the  cases  under  their  care 
on  their  side,  and  decided  the  question.  I  have  had  a  great 
number  of  cases  of  the  spotted  fever  under  my  care,  and  in  all 
of  them  used  the  remains  of  heat  as  a  friend,  by  kindhng  it  so 
as  to  produce  heat  enough  in  the  body  to  overpower  and  drive 
out  the  cold ;  and  have  never  failed  of  success,  where  there 
W£is  any  chance  of  a  cure. 

CAPT.  TRICKEY's  sickness  AND  DEATH. 

Some  time  this  season  I  was  sent  for  to  attend  Capt.  Trickey, 
who  was  very  sick.  I  examined  him  and  was  confident  that  I 
could  not  help  him,  and  took  my  hat  in  order  to  leave  the 
house.  His  family  insisted  on  my  stopping  and  doing  some- 
thin^  for  him,  but  I  told  them  that  I  thought  he  was  in  a  dying 
state,  and  medicine  woiild  do  him  no  good.  I  told  his  son,  that 
in  all  probability  he  would  not  be  alive  more  than  twenty-four 
hours,  and  that  he  had  better  go  for  some  other  help,  for  1  could 
do  him  no  good.  1  told  the  wife  that  1  should  give  no  medi- 
cine myself^  but  as  they  had  some  in  the  house  that  they  knew 
the  nature  of,  she  might  if  she  chose  give  some  ol  it  to  her  hus- 
band, which  she  did. 

Two  doctors  were  sent  for ;  the  first  one  that  arrived  bled 
him,  and  he  soon  breathed  very  short,  and  grew  worse :  the 
other  doctor  came,  and  said  that  his  breathing  short  was  in  con- 
sequence of  the  medicine  I  had  given  him  ;  but  by  this  he  did 
not  gain  credit,  for  all  the  family  knew  to  the  contrary,  and  the 
woman  soon  after  told  me  of  his  speech.  The  patient  continu- 
ed till  the  next  day  about  ten  o'clock,  and  died. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  539 

AGAIN  CHARGED  WITH    MURDER. 

As  soon  as  he  was  dead,  the  doctors  and  their  friends  spared 
no  pains  to  spread  the  report  in  every  direction  that  1  had  killed 
him. 

SUCCESS  AND  REMARKS. 

The  circumstance  of  the  death  of  Capt.  Trickey  was  seized 
upon  by  the  doctors  and  their  friends,  and  the  most  false  and 
absurd  representations  made  by  them  through  the  country,  with 
an  intention  of  stopping  my  practice,  by  gettintT  me  indicted  for 
murder,  or  to  drive  me  off:  but  my  friends  made  out  a  correct 
statement  of  the  facts  and  had  it  pubhslied,  which  put  a  stop  to 
their  career  for  that  time.  I  continued  my  practice,  and  had  a 
great  number  of  the  most  desperate  cases,  in  most  of  which  I 
was  successful. 

The  extraordinary  cures  I  had  performed,  had  the  tendency 
to  make  many  people  believe  that  I  could  cure  every  one  who 
had  life  in  them,  let  their  disease  be  ever  so  bad  ;  and  where  I 
attended  on  those  who  were  given  over  as  incurable,  and  they 
died,  whether  I  gave  them  any  medicine  or  not,  the  report  was 
immediately  circulated  that  they  were  killed  by  me;  at  the 
same  time  the  regular  doctors  would  lose  their  patients  every 
day,  without  any  notice  being  taken  of  it, 

REMARKS  ON  PRACTICE  AND  CURES. 

I  could  mention  a  great  number  of  cases  of  the  cures  that  I 
performed  if  1  thought  it  necessary ;  but  my  intention  is  to  give 
the  particulars  of  such  only  as  will  have  the  greatest  tendency 
to  convey  to  the  reader  the  most  correct  information  of  my  sys- 
tem of  practice,  without  repeating  any  that  were  treated  in  a 
similar  manner  to  those  already  given. 

I  shall  now  proceed  to  give  the  particulars  of  one  of  the  most 
important  circumstances  of  my  life,  in  as  correct  and  impartial 
a  manner  as  I  am  capable  of  doing  from  memory. 

[indictment  for  MURDER. 

After  practicing  in  those  parts  through  the  season  of  1809, 1 
went  home  to  Surry,  where  I  remained  a  few  weeks,  and  re- 
turned to  Salisbury.  On  my  way  there  I  made  several  stops  in 
different  places  where  I  had  before  practiced,  to  see  my  friends 
and  to  give  information  to  those  who  made  use  of  my  medicine 
and  practice.  On  my  arrival  at  Salisbury,  my  friends  inform- 
ed me  that  Dr.  French  had  been  very  busily  employed  in  my 
absence,  and  that  he  and  a  deacon  Pecker,  who  was  one  of  the 
grand  jury,  had  been  to  Salem,  to  the  court,  and  on  their  re- 
turn had  said  that  there  had  been  a  bill  of  indictment  found 
against  me  for  wilful  murder.  They  advised  me  to  go  off,  and 
keep  out  of  the  way ;   but  I  told  them  that  J  should  never  do 


640  THE  THOMSONIAN 

that,  for  if  they  had  found  a  bill  against  me,  the  government 
must  prove  the  charges,  or  I  niust  be    onorably  acquiued. 

About  ten  o'clock  at  night,  Dr.  French  came  to  the  place 
where  1  stopped,  with  a  constable,  and  made  me  a  prisoner  in 
behalf  of  the  commonwealth.  1  asked  the  constable  to  read  the 
warrant,  which  he  did.  By  this  1  found  that  Dr.  French  was 
the  only  complainant,  and  the  justice  who  granted  the  warrant 
ordered  me  before  him  to  be  examined  the  next  morning. 

French's  abuse. 

While  at  the  house,  and  a  prisoner,  Dr.  French  took  the  op- 
portunity to  abuse  and  insult  me  in  the  most  shameful  manner, 
without  any  provocation  on  my  part.  He  continued  his  abuse 
to  me  till  between  two  and  three  o'clock,  when  he  took  his 
horse  and  went  to  Salem  to  get  the  indictment. 

After  he  was  gone,  I  found  on  inquiry  of  the  constable,  that 
after  he  had  been  before  the  grand  jury  and  caused  me  to  be  in- 
dicted, he  came  home  before  the  bill  was  made  out,  and  finding 
that  I  was  at  Salisbury,  fearing  that  I  might  be  gone,  and  he 
should  miss  the  chance  of  gratifying  his  malicious  revenge 
against  me,  he  went  to  a  brother  doctor,  who  was  a  justice  of 
the  peace,  before  whom  he  made  oath,  that  he  had  probable 
cause  to  suspect,  and  did  suspect,  that  I  had  with  malice  afore- 
thought murdered  sundry  persons  in  the  course  of  the  year 
past,  whose  names  were  unknown  to  the  complainant ;  upon 
which  a  warrant  was  issued  against  me,  and  I  was  arrested  as 
before  stated,  in  order  to  detain  and  keep  me  in  custody  till  the 
indictment  could  be  obtained. 

ADVISED  TO  ESCAPE,  ETC. 

In  the  morning  I  was  brought  before  the  said  justice,  and  he 
not  being  ready  to  proceed  in  my  examination,  the  court  was 
adjourned  till  one  o'clock,  when  I  was  again  brought  before 
him,  and  he  said  he  could  not  try  me  till  the  complainant  was 
present,  and  adjourned  the  court  again  until  near  night.  The 
constable  took  me  to  his  house  in  the  mean  time,  and  put  me  in 
a  back  room  and  left  me  alone,  all  of  them  leaving  the  house. 
When  they  came  back,  some  of  them  asked  me  why  1  did  not 
make  my  escape,  which  I  might  easily  have  done  out  of  a  back 
window  ;  but  I  told  them  that  1  stood  in  no  fear  of  the  conse- 
quence, having  done  nothing  whereby  I  ought  to  be  punished: 
that  1  was  taken  up  as  a  malefactor,  and  was  determined  to  be 
convicted  as  such,  or  honorably  acquitted.  Just  before  night. 
Dr.  F''^nch  arrived  with  a  sheriff,  and  ordered  me  to  be  deli- 
vered up  by  the  constable  to  the  sherilT;  and  after  Dr.  French 
had  again  vented  his  spleen  upon  me  by  the  most  savage  abuse 
that  language  could  express,  saying  that  I  was  a  murderer,  and 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  541 

and  that  I  had  murdered  fifty,  and  he  could  prove  it ;   that  I 
should  be  either  hung  or  sent  to  the  state  prison  for  life. 

CONFINED  IN  A  DUNGEON  WITH  A  FELON,  ETC. 

1  was  then  put  in  irons  by  the  sheriff,  and  conveyed  to  the 
jail  in  Nevvburyport,  and  confined  in  a  dungeon,  with  a  man 
who  had  been  convicted  of  an  as&ault  on  a  girl  six  years  of  age, 
and  sentenced  to  solitary  confinement  for  one  year.  He  seem- 
ed to  be  glad  of  company,  and  reminded  me  of  the  old  saying, 
that  misery  loves  company.  I  was  not  allowed  a  chair  or  a  ta- 
ble, and  nothing  but  a  miserable  straw  bunk  on  the  floor,  with 
one  poor  blanket  which  had  never  been  washed.  I  was  put  in- 
to this  prison  on  the  10th  day  of  November,  1809  ;  the  weather 
was  very  cold,  and  no  fire,  and  not  even  the  light  of  the  sun  or 
a  candle ;  and  to  complete  the  whole,  the  filth  ran  from  the  up- 
per rooms  into  our  cell,  and  was  so  offensive  that  I  was  almost 
stifled  with  the  smell.  1  tried  to  rest  myself  as  well  as  I  could, 
but  got  no  sleep  that  night,  for  I  felt  something  crawling  over 
me,  which  caused  an  itching,  and  not  knowing  what  the  cause 
was,  inquired  of  my  fellow  sufferer ;  he  said  that  it  was  the  lice, 
and  that  there  were  enough  of  them  to  shingle  a  meeting- 
house. 

PRISON  DIET,  ETC. 

In  the  morning  there  was  just  light  enough  came  through  the 
iron  grates  to  show  the  horror  of  my  situation.  My  spirits  and 
the  justice  of  my  cause  prevented  me  from  making  any  lament- 
ation, and  I  bore  my  sufferings  without  complaint.  At  break- 
fast time  I  was  called  on  through  the  grates  to  take  our  mise- 
rable breakfast.  It  consisted  of  an  old  tin  pot  of  musty  coffee, 
without  sweetning  or  milk,  and  was  so  bad  as  to  be  unwhole- 
some ;  with  a  tin  pan  containing  a  hard  piece  of  Indian  bread, 
and  the  nape  of  a  fish,  which  was  so  hard  I  could  not  eat  it. 
This  had  to  serve  us  till  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  when 
we  had  about  an  equal  fare,  which  was  all  we  had  till  the  next 
morning. 

RELIEVED  BY  A  FRIEND. 

The  next  day  Mr.  Osgood  came  from  Salisbury  to  see  me, 
and  on  witnessing  my  miserable  situation,  he  was  so  much  af- 
fected that  he  could  hardly  speak.  He  brought  me  some  pro- 
visions, which  I  was  glad  to  receive;  and  when  I  described  to 
him  my  miserable  lodgings,  and  the  place  I  was  in,  he  wept 
like  a  child.  He  asked  liberty  of  the  jailer  to  furnish  me  with 
a  bed,  which  was  granted,  and  he  brought  me  one,  and  other 
things  to  make  me  comfortable.  The  next  day  I  wrote  letters 
to  my  family,  to  Dr.  Fuller,  and  to  Judge  Rice,  stating  to  them 
my  situation. 


542  THE  THOM SOMAN 

BED,  ETC.  SHARED  WITH   FELLOW-PRISONER. 

The  bed  which  was  brought  to  me  I  put  on  the  old  one,  and 
allowed  my  fellow-sufferer  a  part  of  it,  for  which  he  was  very- 
thankful.  I  had  provisions  enough  brought  me  by  my  friends 
for  us  both,  and  I  gave  him  what  1  did  not  want ;  the  crusts 
and  scraps  that  were  left  his  poor  wife  would  come  and  beg  and 
carry  to  her  starving  children,  who  were  dependent  on  her. 
Her  situation  and  that  of  her  husband  were  so  much  worse 
than  mine,  that  it  made  me  feel  more  reconciled  to  my  fate ; 
and  I  gave  her  all  I  could  spare,  besides  making  his  condition 
much  more  comfortable,  for  which  they  expressed  a  great  deal 
of  gratitude. 

COKSULTATION,    CONCLUSIOX,    ETC. 

In  a  few  days  after  my  confinement,  Judge  Rice  came  to  see 
me,  and  brought  a  lawyer  with  him.  On  consulting  upon  the 
case,  they  advised  me  to  petition  the  Judges  of  the  Supreme 
Court  to  hold  a  special  court  to  try  my  cause,  as  there  would 
be  no  court  held  by  law,  at  which  it  could  be  tried,  till  the  next 
fall,  and  as  there  could  be  no  bail  for  an  indictment  for  mur- 
der, 1  should  have  to  lay  in  prison  nearly  a  year,  whether  there 
was  any  thing  against  me  or  not. 

POLICY    OF    ENEMIES. 

This  was  the  policy  of  my  enemies,  thinking  that  they  could 
keep  me  in  prison  a  year,  or  in  all  probability  I  should  not  live 
that  time,  and  their  ends  would  be  fully  answered. 

TIME    FOR    TRIAL. 

I  sent  on  a  petition,  agreeable  to  the  advice  of  my  friends, 
and  Judge  Rice  undertook  to  attend  to  it  and  to  do  every  thing 
to  get  the  prayer  of  the  petition  granted.  He  followed  the  bu- 
siness up  with  great  zeal,  and  did  every  thing  that  could  be 
done  to  effect  the  object.  I  think  he  told  me  that  he  or  the  law- 
yer, Mr.  Bartlett,  had  rode  from  Newbury  port  to  Boston  fifteen 
times  in  the  course  of  three  weeks,  on  the  business.  At  length 
Judge  Parsons  agreed  to  hold  a  special  court  at  Salem,  on  the 
10th  day  of  December,  to  try  the  cause,  which  was  one  month 
from  the  day  I  was  committed.  My  friends  were  very  atten- 
tive and  zealous  in  my  cause,  and  every  preparation  was  made 
for  the  trial. 

COLD    WEATHER — BAD    AIR — FRIENDS    DEPART,    ETC. 

During  this  time  the  weather  was  very  cold,  and  I  suffered 
greatly  from  that  cause,  and  likewise  from  the  badness  of  the 
air  ui  our  miserable  cell,  so  that  I  had  not  much  life  or  ambi- 
tion. Many  of  my  friends  came  to  see  me,  and  some  were  per- 
mitted to  come  into  the  cell ;   but  the  air  was  so  bad  and  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  543 

smell  so  offensive  that  they  could  not  stay  long.  My  friend 
Dr.  Shephard  came  to  see  rae,  and  was  admitted  into  our  dun- 
geon. He  staid  a  short  time,  but  said  it  was  so  offensive  that 
he  must  leave  me  ;  that  he  would  not  stay  in  the  place  a  week 
for  all  Newburyport.  On  thanksgiving  day  we  were  taken  out 
of  our  cell  and  put  in  a  room  in  the  upper  story,  with  the  other 
prisoners,  and  took  supper  together  ;  they  consisted  of  murder- 
ers, robbers,  thieves,  and  poor  debtors.  All  of  us  tried  to  enjoy 
our  supper,  and  be  in  as  good  spirits  as  our  condition  would 
permit.  The  most  of  their  complaints  were  of  the  filthiness 
and  bad  condition  of  the  prison,  in  which  we  all  agreed.  Be- 
fore it  was  dark  my  companion  and  I  were  waited  upon  to  our 
filthy  den  again. 

There  was  nothing  in  the  room  to  sit  upon  higher  than  the 
thickness  of  our  bed,  and  when  I  wrote  any  thing  1  had  to  lay 
on  my  belly,  in  which  situation  I  wrote  the  Medical  Circular, 
and  several  other  pieces,  which  were  afterwards  printed. 

VISIT    FROM    SON-IN-LAW. 

After  I  had  been  in  prison  about  two  weeks,  my  son-in-law 
came  to  see  me.  I  had  before  sent  for  him  to  come  to  Ports- 
mouth on  some  business,  and  on  hearing  of  my  being  in  prison 
he  immediately  came  to  Newburyport  to  see  me.  He  seemed 
to  be  much  more  troubled  about  my  situation  than  I  was  my- 
self 

CONSCIOUS    INNOCENCE. 

I  felt  perfectly  conscious  of  my  innocence,  and  was  satisfied 
that  I  had  done  nothing  to  merit  such  treatment;  therefore  my 
mind  was  free  from  reproach ;  for  I  had  pursued  the  course 
of  duty,  which  I  conceived  was  allotted  tome  by  my  Maker, 
and  done  every  thing  in  ray  power  to  benefit  my  fellow  crea- 
tures. These  reflections  supported  me  in  my  troubles  and  per- 
secutions, and  1  was  perfectly  resigned  to  my  fate. 

INDICTMENT    READ,    ETC. 

About  this  time,  a  lawyer  came  into  the  prison  and  read  to 
me  the  indictment,  which  was  in  the  common  form,  that  I  with 
malice  aforethought,  not  having  the  fear  of  God  before  my 
eyes,  but  moved  by  the  instigation  of  the  devil,  did  kill  and 
murder  the  said  Lovett,  with  lobelia,  a  deadly  poison,  (fee;  but 
feeling  so  perfectly  innocent  of  the  charges  which  the  bill  al- 
leged against  me,  it  had  very  little  effect  upon  my  feelings ; 
knowing  them  to  be  false,  and  that  they  had  been  brought 
against  rae  by  my  enemies,  without  any  provocation  on  my 
part. 


04>4,  THE  THOMSON  IAN 

REMOVED    FROM    CELL — EFFECT    OF    FIRE    UPON    HIM. 

On  the  morning  of  the  day  that  was  appointed  for  me  to  be 
removed  to  Salem  for  trial,  I  was  taken  out  of  my  loathsome 
cell  by  the  jailor,  who  gave  me  water  to  wash  myself  with,  and 
I  was  permitted  to  take  my  breakfast  by  a  fire,  which  was  the 
first  time  I  had  seen  any  for  thirty  days,  and  could  not  bear  to 
sit  near  it,  in  consequence  of  its  causing  me  to  feel  faint.  As 
soon  as  1  had  eaten  my  breakfast,  the  iron  shackles  were 
brought  and  put  on  my  hands,  which  I  was  obliged  to  wear  till 
I  got  to  Salem.  The  weather  was  very  cold,  and  the  going 
bad,  but  we  stopped  but  once  on  the  way,  the  distance  being 
about  twenty-six  miles.  On  our  arrival,  I  was  delivered  over 
to  the  care  of  the  keeper  of  the  prison  in  Salem,  and  was  con- 
fined in  a  room  in  the  second  story,  which  was  more  comforta- 
ble than  the  one  I  had  left. 

TRIAL    PUT    OFF. 

1  was  soon  informed  that  Judge  Parsons  was  sick,  and  had 
put  off  my  trial  for  ten  days ;  so  I  had  to  reconcile  myself  to 
the  idea  of  being  confined  ten  days  more  without  fire.  How- 
ever 1  was  not  without  friends ;  Elder  Bolles  and  Capt.  Russell 
came  to  see  me  the  first  night,  and  Mrs.  Russell  sent  her  servant 
twice  every  day,  with  warm  coffee  and  other  things  for  my 
comfort,  for  which  1  have  always  been  grateful ;  and  Mrs.  Per- 
kins, whom  I  had  cured  of  a  dropsy,  sent  for  my  clothes  to 
wash  against  the  day  of  trial. 

ATTENTION    OF    FRIENDS — PREPARATION    FOR    TRIAL. 

Many  of  my  friends  came  to  Salem  to  attend  my  trial ;  some 
as  witnesses,  and  others  to  afford  me  any  assistance  in  their 
power.  A  few  days  before  my  trial.  Judge  Rice  and  Mr.  Bart- 
lett,  whom  I  had  employed  as  my  lawyer  held  a  consultation 
with  me  as  to  the  arrangements  necessary  to  be  made,  when  it 
was  decided  that  it  would  be  best  to  have  other  counsel,  and 
Mr.  Story  was  agreed  upon,  and  engaged  in  my  cause.  I  had 
also  engaged  Mr.  Bannister,  of  Newburyport,  to  assist  in  the  tri- 
al ;  but  he  was  of  no  benefit  to  me,  and  afterwards  sued  me  for 
fifty  dollars,  at  fifty  miles  distance,  to  put  me  to  great  expense. 

In  order  to  be  prepared  for  the  trial,  my  counsel  held  a  con- 
sultation together,  and  examined  the  principal  witnesses  in  tho 
defence.  Mr.  Bolles,  Judge  Rice,  and  several  others,  gave 
great  satisfaction  as  to  the  value  and  usefulness  of  the  medi- 
cine, and  the  variety  of  cures  that  had  been  performed  with  it 
within  their  knowledge.  Dr.  Fuller,  of  Milford,  N.  H.,  was 
present,  and  made  many  statements  in  my  favor,  as  to  the  va- 
hie  of  my  medicine,  and  advised  to  have  Dr.  Cutler,  of  Hamil- 
ton, summoned,  which  was  done.    Every  thing  was  done  by 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  545 

my  friends  that  was  in  their  power,  to  assist  me  and  give  me  a 
chance  for  a  fair  trial,  for  which  I  shall  always  feel  very  grate- 
ful. 

ARRAIGNED,    PLEADS    NOT    GUILTY. 

On  the  20th  of  December,  1809,  the  Supreme  Court  conven- 
ed for  my  trial,  at  which  Judge  Parsons  presided,  with  judges 
Sewall  and  Parker  assistant  judges.  The  case  was  called  about 
ten  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  the  chief  justice  ordered  me  to 
be  brought  from  the  prison  and  arraigned  for  trial.  1  was  at- 
tended by  two  constables,  one  on  my  right  and  the  other  on  my 
left,  in  which  situation  I  was  brought  from  the  jail  to  the  court 
house,  and  placed  in  the  bar.  The  court  house  was  so  crowd- 
ed with  the  people  that  it  was  with  much  difficulty  we  could 
get  in. 

After  I  was  placed  in  the  criminal  seat,  a  chair  was  handed 
me,  and  I  sat  down  to  wait  for  further  orders.  Here  I  was  the 
object  for  this  great  concourse  of  people  to  look  at — some  with 
pity,  others  with  scorn.  In  a  few  minutes  I  was  directed  to 
rise  and  hold  up  my  right  hand,  to  hear  the  indictment  read, 
which  the  grand  jury  had  upon  their  oaths  presented  against 
me.  I  was  then  directed  by  the  court  to  plead  to  the  indict- 
ment, guilty,  or  not  guilty;  1  plead  not  guilty,  and  the  usual 
forms  in  such  cases  were  passed  through,  the  jury  called  and 
sworn,  and  the  trial  commenced. 

TESTIMONY    OF    LOVETT. 

The  solicitor  general  arose,  and  opened  the  case  on  the  part 
of  the  commonwealth,  and  made  many  hard  statements  against 
me,  which  he  said  he  was  about  to  prove.  He  stated  that  1  had 
at  sundry  times  killed  my  patients  with  the  same  poison.  The 
first  witness  called  on  the  stand  on  the  part  of  the  government 
was  Mr.  Lovett,  the  father  of  the  young  man  that  I  was  accus- 
ed of  killing.  He  made  a  tolerable  fair  statement  of  the  affair 
in  general,  particularly  of  coming  after  me  several  times  before 
I  could  attend,  though  I  think  he  exaggerated  many  things 
against  me ;  and  1  also  thought  that  he  omitted  to  tell  many 
things  in  my  favor  that  must  have  been  within  his  knowledge; 
but  there  was  nothing  in  his  evidence  that  in  the  least  crimi- 
nated me,  or  supported  the  charges  in  the  indictment. 

DR.    HOWE     SWORN — LOBELIA — COURT    SURPRISED. 

The  next  witness  was  Dr.  Howe — called  to  prove  that  I  had 
administered  the  poison  alleged  in  the  indictment.  He  stated 
that  I  gave  the  poison  to  the  said  Lovett,  and  produced  a  sample 
of  it,  which  he  said  was  the  root  of  lobelia.  The  judge  asked 
him  if  he  was  positive  that  it  was  lobelia ;  he  said  it  was,  and 
that  1  called  it  coffee.     The  sample  was  handed  round  for  the 


546  THE    THOMSONIAN 

court  to  examine,  and  they  all  appeared  to  be  afraid  of  it:  and 
after  they  had  all  satisfied  their  curiosity  Judg^e  Rice  took  it  in 
his  hand  and  ate  it,  which  very  much  surprised  them.  The 
solicitor  general  asked  him  if  he  meant  to  poison  himself  in  the 
presence  of  the  court ;  he  said  it  would  not  hurt  him  to  eat  a 
peck  of  it,  which  seemed  to  strike  the  court  with  astonishment. 

CROSS    EXAMINED. 

Dr.  Howe  was  then  called  at  my  request  for  cross  examina- 
tion, and  Mr.  Story  asked  him  to  describe  lobelia,  how  it  look- 
ed when  s^rowing,  as  he  had  sworn  to  it  by  the  taste  and  smell. 
This  seemed  to  put  him  to  a  stand  ;  and  after  being-  silent  for 
several  minutes,  he  said  he  had  not  seen  any  so  long  he  should 
not  know  it  if  he  should  see  it  at  this  time.  This  so  complete- 
ly contradicted  and  did  away  all  that  he  had  before  stated,  that 
he  went  oif  the  stand  quite  cast  down. 

DR.    cutler's    testimony. 

Dr.  Cutler  was  called  on  to  inform  the  court  what  the  medi- 
cine was,  that  Dr.  Howe  had  so  positively  declared  to  be  lobe- 
lia, and  after  examining  it,  he  said  it  appeared  to  him  to  be 
marsh  rosemary — which  was  the  fact.  So  far,  all  they  had 
proved  against  me  was,  that  I  had  given  the  young  man  some 
marsh  rosemary — which  Dr.  Cutler  had  declared  to  be  a  good 
medicine. 

FALSE    SWEARING. 

Some  young  women  were  brought  forward  as  witnesses, 
whom  I  had  no  knowledge  of  ever  seeing  before.  One  of  them 
said  that  I  crowded  my  puke  down  Lovett's  throat,  and  he  cried 
murder  till  he  died.  This  was  well  known  to  be  a  falsehood, 
and  that  the  story  was  wholly  made  up  by  my  enemies,  as  well 
as  what  had  been  before  stated  by  those  women,  for  the  purpose 
of  tryine:  to  make  out  something  against  me.  I  had  two  unim- 
peachable witnesses  in  court,  ready  to  swear  that  I  never  saw 
the  young  man  for  more  than  fourteen  hours  before  he  died, 
during  all  which  time  he  was  in  the  care  of  Dr.  Howe ;  but  by 
not  bavins:  an  opportunity  to  make  my  defence,  in  consequence 
of  the  government  not  making  out  their  case  agamst  me,  could 
not  bring  them  forward. 

A    GOOD    WITNESS. 

John  Lemon  was  the  next  witness  brought  forward  by  the 
commonwealth,  and  was  directed  to  state  what  he  knew  about 
the  prisoner  at  the  bar.  He  stated,  that  he  had  been  out  of 
health  for  two  years,  being  much  troubled  with  a  pain  in  his 
breast ;  that  he  could  get  no  help  from  the  doctors ;  that  he  ap- 


MATERIA    MEDICA 


547 


plied  to  me  and  I  had  cured  him  in  one  week  ;  and  that  was  all 
he  knew  about  the  prisoner  at  the  bar. 


COURT    IMPATIENT. 


By  this  time,  Judge  Parsons  appeared  to  be  out  of  patience, 
and  said  he  wondered  what  they  had  for  a  grand  jury,  to  find 
a  bill  on  such  evidence.  The  solicitor  general  said  he  had 
more  evidence  which  he  wished  to  bring  forward. 


DR.    FRENCH    SWORN, 


Dr.  French  was  called,  and  as  he  had  been  the  most  busy 
actor  in  the  whole  business  of  getting  me  indicted,  and  had 
been  the  principal  cause,  by  his  own  evidence,  as  I  was  inform- 
ed, of  the  grand  jury  finding  a  bill  against  me,  it  was  expected 
that  his  testimony  now  would  be  sufficient  to  condemn  me  at 
once;  but  it  turned  out,  like  tlie  rest,  to  amount  to  nothing. 
He  was  asked  if  he  knew  the  prisoner  at  the  bar ;  he  said  he 
did.  He  was  then  directed  to  state  what  he  knew  about  him. 
He  said,  the  prisoner  had  practiced  in  the  part  of  the  country 
where  he  lived,  with  good  success,  and  his  medicine  was  harm- 
less, being  gathered  by  children  for  the  use  of  the  families. 


PROSECUTION    FAILS. 


The  judge  was  about  to  charge  the  jury,  when  the  solicitor 
general  arose,  and  said,  that  if  it  was  not  proved  to  be  murder, 
it  might  be  found  manslaughter.  The  judge  said,  you  have 
proved  nothing  against  the  man,  and  repeated,  that  he  wonder- 
ed what  they  had  for  a  grand  jury. 


CHARGE    TO    JURY. 


In  his  charge  to  the  jury,  the  judge  stated  that  the  prisoner 
had  broken  no  law,  common  or  statute,  and  quoted  Hale,  who 
says,  any  person  may  administer  medicine,  with  an  intention  to 
do  good ;  and  if  it  has  the  contrary  efiect  from  his  expectation, 
and  kills  the  patient,  it  is  not  murder,  nor  even  manslaughter. 
If  doctors  must  risk  the  lives  of  their  patients,  who  would  prac- 
tice? He  quoted  also  from  Blackstone,  who  says,  where  no 
malice  is,  no  action  lies. 

ACQUITTAL. 

The  charge  being  given  to  the  jury,  they  retired  about  five 
minutes,  and  returned  into  court,  and  gave  in  their  verdict  of 
not  guilty. 

REMARKS. 

I  was  thus  honorably  acquitted,  without  having  had  an  op- 
portunity to  have  my  witnesses  examined,  by  whom  I  expected 
to  have  proved  the  usefulness  and  importance  of  my  discovery 


548  THE    THOMSOMAN 

before  a  large  assembly  of  people,  by  the  testimony  of  about 
twenty-five  creditable  men,  who  were  present  at  the  trial,  be- 
sides contradicting  all  the  evidence  produced  against  me.  Af- 
ter the  trial  was  over,  I  was  invited  to  the  Sun  Tavern  to  sup- 
per, where  we  enjoyed  ourselves  for  the  evening.  When  we 
sat  down  to  the  table  several  doctors  were  present,  who  were  so 
offended  at  my  acquittal  that  they  left  the  table. 

ATTENTIONS    OF    FRIENDS IMPAIRED    HEALTH,    ETC. 

The  next  day  I  went  to  Salisbury,  and  stopped  with  Mr.  Os- 
good, where  I  was  first  arrested.  Mrs.  Osgood  and  a  young" 
woman  who  had  been  employed  by  me  as  a  nurse,  assisted  to 
clean  my  clothes  and  clear  me  of  some  troublesome  companions 
I  had  brought  with  me  from  the  prison,  and  when  I  had  paid  a 
visit  to  all  my  old  friends,  who  were  very  glad  to  see  me,  1 
went  to  Portsmouth,  to  recover  my  health,  which  was  very 
much  impaired  by  being  confined  forty  days  in  those  filthy  and 
cold  prisons,  in  the  coldest  part  of  a  remarkably  cold  winter. 
My  friends  attended  upon  me,  and  carried  me  through  a  regu- 
lar course  of  medicine  ;  but  the  first  operation  of  it  had  but  lit- 
tle effect,  in  consequence  of  my  blood  being  so  much  chilled, 
and  it  was  a  long  time  before  I  could  raise  a  perspiration  that 
would  hold. 

OBJECT    OF    THE    DOCTORS. 

I  am  confident  that  I  should  not  have  lived  through  the 
winter  in  prison,  and  believe  that  this  was  their  plan,  for  which 
purpose  they  had  me  indicted  for  murder,  knowing  that  in  that 
case  there  could  be  no  bail  taken,  and  that  as  there  v;ould  be 
no  court  at  which  I  could  be  tried  for  nearly  a  year,  I  should 
have  to  lay  in  prison  during  that  time,  and  that  I  should  proba- 
bly die  there  ;  or  in  any  case,  they  would  get  rid  of  me  for  one 
year  at  least,  whether  there  was  any  thing  proved  against  me 
or  not ;  and  in  that  time  the  doctors  and  their  dupes  would  be 
enabled  to  run  down  the  credit  of  my  medicine,  and  put  my 
practice  into  disrepute  among  the  people.  But  1  have  been  en- 
bled,  by  good  fortune  and  the  kind  assistance  of  my  friends,  to 
defeat  all  their  plans.  ' 

JUDGMENTS. 

Most  of  those  who  have  been  instrumental  in  trying  to  des- 
troy me  and  my  practice,  have  had  some  judgment  befall  them, 
as  a  reward  for  their  persecutions  and  malicious  conduct  to- 
wards me.  I  was  credibly  informed  that  Deacon  Pecker,  one 
of  the  grand  jury  that  found  the  bill  against  me,  went  with  Dr. 
French  to  hunt  up  evidence  to  come  before  himself,  in  order  to 
have  rae  indicted.    A  short  time  after  I  was  put  in  prison,  he 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  549 

had  a  stroke  of  the  palsy,  and  has  remained  ever  sinee  [1822,] 
with  one  half  of  his  body  and  limbs  useless.  Dr.  French,  one 
year  after  I  was  acquitted,  was  brought  to  the  same  bar  at  which 
I  was  placed,  and  convicted  for  robbing  a  grave  yard  of  a  dead 
body,  which  it  was  reported  he  sold  for  sixty  dollars.  He  lost 
all  his  credit,  and  was  obliged  to  quit  his  country. 

CALLED    TO    EASTPORT. 

About  the  first  of  June,  1811,  I  received  a  letter  from  East- 
port,  Me.,  where  I  had  been  the  fall  before,  and  shown  some  of 
my  mode  of  practice.  Some  of  the  people  in  that  place  were 
so  well  satisfied  with  it,  that  seven  men  had  subscribed  their 
names  to  the  letter,  requesting  me  to  come  there  and  practice  in 
the  fevers  which  prevailed  in  those  parts. 

I  left  the  care  of  my  business  at  Portsmouth  with  Mr.  Carpen- 
ter, my  student,  and  immediately  took  passage  for  Eastport, 
where  I  arrived  about  the  middle  of  June.  I  was  very  gladly 
received  by  those  who  wrote  to  me,  and  by  those  with  whom  I 
had  become  acquainted  when  there  before.  I  agreed  to  prac- 
tice under  the  protection  of  those  who  had  sent  for  me,  until  I 
had  convinced  them  of  its  utility,  to  which  they  consented,  and 
promised  me  all  the  assistance  in  their  power.  I  was  soon  call- 
ed on  to  practice,  and  had  all  the  most  desperate  cases  that 
could  be  found,  in  all  of  which  I  met  with  very  great  success. 

FIRST    CASES,    CONSUBIPTION. 

The  first  cases  I  attended  in  presence  of  the  committee  were 
five  desperate  cases  of  consumption.  These  patients  were  all 
relieved  in  three  weeks,  and  were  all  living  this  present  year, 
(1831). 

BRUISED    FOOT. 

While  attending  these  people,  I  was  called  upon  to  attend  a 
young  man  on  board  a  vessel,  who  had  his  foot  bruised  to  pieces 
by  a  block  falling  from  the  mast  head.  It  heins  done  five  days 
before  1  saw  him,  it  was  mortified,  and  the  wliole  body  in  con- 
vulsions. I  took  off  three  toes  and  set  the  fourth,  and  cured 
him  in  five  weeks  with  the  usual  practice. 

ATTEMPT    TO    MURDER,    AND    CONSEQUENCES. 

While  attending  him,  I  had  to  pass  a  doctor's  shop.  A  scythe 
was  thrown  at  me,  point  first,  about  two  rods.  It  passed  be- 
tween ray  feet,  without  doing  any  injury.  In  consequence 
of  this  assault,  I  sent  word  to  all  the  doctors  who  had  opposed 
me,  that  for  the  politeness  with  which  they  had  treated  me,  I 
would  compensate  them  by  taking  off  the  burden  of  being  call- 
ed up  at  night,  and  thus  breaking  their  rest,  and  would  give 


550  THE  THOMSONIAN 

them  a  chance  of  laying  in  bed  until  noon,  without  being  dis- 
turbed by  their  patients. 

CONFINEMENT. 

I  was  called  on,  the  night  following,  to  attend  a  woman  in 
child-bed.  1  attended  according  to  my  promise,  and  let  them 
rest;  and  if  1  had  retiiained  there,  they  miofht  fiave  rested  un- 
til the  present  time,  as  1  attended  to  all  branches  in  practice. 

NUMBER    OF    DOCTORS,    ETC. 

There  were,  I  think,  five  practicing  doctors  on  the  island, 
among  whom  my  success  in  curing  the  sick  caused  great  alarm, 
and  I  soon  experienced  the  same  determined  opposition  from 
them,  with  all  the  arts  and  plans  to  destroy  me  and  my  prac- 
tice, that  I  had  experienced  from  the  same  class  of  men  in  other 
places. 

1  shall  relate  the  particulars  of  some  of  the  cases  I  attended ; 
but  most  of  the  numerous  cases  which  I  had  under  mv  care 
were  so  nearly  similar  to  those  that  have  been  already  given, 
and  my  mode  of  treating  them  being  about  the  same,  that  it  will 
be  unnecessary  to  repeat  them, 

A    CA,SE    OF    DROPSY. 

1  was  sent  for  to  visit  a  Mrs.  Lovett,  who  was  the  daughter 
of  Mr.  Delisdernier,  at  whose  house  I  attended  her.  She  had 
the  dropsy,  and  had  been  under  the  care  of  one  ot  the  doctors, 
till  he  had  given  her  over  as  incurable.  1  went  to  see  her,  in 
company  with  the  doctor,  but  we  could  not  agree  as  to  the 
cause  and  remedy. 

OPINIONS    OF    THE    DOCTOR. 

I  asked  him  several  questions  concerning  the  power  of  the 
elements,  and  the  effect  of  heat  on  the  human  system.  He  an- 
swered, that  the  elements  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  case.  Af- 
ter giving  him  ray  ideas  on  the  subject,  which  all  appeared  to 
be  new  to  him,  I  told  him  that  the  contest  in  this  case  was  be- 
tween the  fire  and  water,  and  if  I  could  get  heat  enough  in 
the  body  to  make  the  water  volatile,  it  could  not  stay  there. 
He  said  that  any  thing  warm  would  not  answer  for  her.  I  then 
asked  him  how  he  thought  the  hottest  medicine  would  do  ;  he 
said  it  would  produce  immediate  death.  I  then  told  him,  that 
if  1  did  any  thing  for  her,  1  should  administer  the  hottest  medi- 
cine I  could  give. 

UNWILLING    TO    ATTEND    THE    PATIENT. 

Finding  there  would  be  a  disadvantage  on  my  part  in  doing 
any  thing  for  her,  as  the  doctor  and  I  could  not  agree,  I  left  th© 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  551 

house.  I  was  followed  by  the  father  and  mother  and  the  doc- 
tor, who  all  insisted  on  my  returtiinff,  but  I  told  them  that  not- 
withstanding the  doctor  had  given  her  ovw,  if  1  was  to  attend 
her  and  she  should  die  they  would  say  that  I  killed  her. 

OVERPERSUADED    TO    ATTE2VD. 

They  promised,  that  let  the  consequences  be  what  they  might 
no  blame  should  be  alleged  affainsr  me;  upon  which  1  agreed 
that  1  would  stop,  on  condition  that  two  of  my  (rieuds  should  be 
present  as  witnesses  to  what  was  said,  and  see  the  first  process 
of  the  medicine,  which  was  assented  to.  and  they  were  sent  for 
and  heard  the  statement  of  the  doctor  and  family. 

AS  OTHER    WITNESS. 

A  Capt.  Mitchell,  from  New  York,  was  also  present  and  heard 
the  conversation  between  me  and  the  doctor,  and  was  pleased 
with  the  principles  that  1  laid  down  so  much  that  he  expressed 
a  wish  to  be  present  and  see  the  operation  of  the  medicine,  and 
staid  accordingly. 

MANAGEMENT    OF    DOCTOR,    NURSE,    ETC. 

The  doctor  pretended  to  be  going  away  till  after  I  had  given 
the  first  medicine,  and  appeared  to  be  very  busy  going  out  and 
coming  in,  and  had  much  conversation  with  Mrs.  Lovcft,  the 
husband's  mother,  who  was  the  nurse.  After  the  first  medicine 
had  done,  which  operated  favorably,  I  gave  directions  what  to 
do,  and  particularly  to  keep  the  patient  in  a  perspiration  during 
the  night,  and  left  medicine  for  that  purpose.  We  then  went 
home. 

ORDERS    DISOBEYED — PATIENT    WORSE. 

In  the  morning  I  called  to  see  her,  and  to  my  surprise  found 
her  sitting  with  the  window  up,  and  exposed  to  the  air  as  much 
as  possible.  On  examination,  I  found  that  no  medicine  had 
been  used.  On  enquiry,  I  found  that  the  doctor  had  been  in 
frequently  to  see  her  ;  and  on  enquiry  why  they  had  not  fol- 
lowed my  directions,  the  nurse  appeared  to  be  very  cross,  and 
said  she  would  not  take  any  of  my  medicine.  I  told  them  that 
they  had  not  killed  her,  but  I  did  not  thank  them  for  their  good 
will  any  more  than  if  they  had  done  it. 

LEAVES AND  PERSUADED  TO  RETURN. 

I  was  about  leavins:  the  house,  as  I  found  my  directions 
would  not  be  attended  to  by  the  nurse,  but  Capt.  Mitchell  was 
very  urgent  for  me  to  continue.  I  told  him  that  if  he  would 
attend  upon  her  and  see  the  medicine  given  and  every  thing 
done  according  to  my  directions,  I  would  continue,  to  which 
he  agreed.    I  left  the  patient  in  his  care,  and  he  attended  her 


552  THE  THOMSOIVIAN 

faithfully  through  the  day;  at  night  I  visited  her,  and  found 

the  svvellin<?  besfan  to  abate.     He  continued  his  care  of  her.  and 

11-' 
m  three  days  she  was  able  to  go  up  and  down  stairs,  and  in 

one  week  she  was  well.  By  the  influence  of  the  doctor,  the 
woman  and  the  husband  all  turned  against  me,  and  I  never  re- 
ceived any  thing  for  my  trouble,  but  their  abusS'and  slander. 
The  woman's  father  and  Capt.  Mitchell  however,  gave  me  all 
credit  for  the  cure,  and  they  both  purchased  a  right. 

INFAMOUS    CONFESSION   OF    THE    NURSE. 

About  a  year  after,  at  a  private  assembly  of  women,  this  Mrs. 
Lovett,  the  mother-in-law  of  the  sick  woman,  gave  an  account 
of  the  whole  transaction,  and  stated  that  there  was  a  private  in- 
terview between  her  and  the  doctor,  and  it  was  agreed  to  go 
contrary  to  my  directions,  and  the  doctor  said  she  would  die  in 
the  course  of  the  night;  and  that  he  should  take  me  up  for 
murder,  and  that  she  must  be  an  evidence.  This  appeared  to 
be  almost  incredible,  that  they  should  be  so  void  of  all  human 
feelings,  as  to  be  willing  to  have  the  woman  die,  in  order  to 
have  the  opportunity  to  take  me  up  for  murder ;  but  two  wo- 
men who  were  present  when  she  told  the  story,  gave  their  de- 
positions proving  the  fact  as  above  stated. 

PRACTICE — SOCIETY    FORMED — LECTURES. 

I  continued  my  practice  on  the  Island,  at  Lubec,  and  on  the 
main,  paying  my  most  particular  attention  to  those  who  sent 
for  me,  and  wanted  information.  I  practised  under  their  in- 
spection about  five  weeks,  and  then  told  them  that  I  had  done 
enough  for  a  trial,  to  prove  the  use  of  the  medicine,  and  should 
do  no  more  till  I  knew  whether  a  Society  could  be  formed. 
They  expressed  their  entire  satisfaction,  and  wished  to  have  a 
Society  formed  ;  a  meeting  was  called  for  that  purpose,  and 
sixteen  signed  the  articles  at  the  first  meeting.  After  this  a 
meeting  was  held  every  week,  at  which  a  Lecture  was  given 
for  the  purpose  of  giving  information,  and  for  the  admission  of 
members  ;  and  eight  each  week  were  added  during  the  summer. 

RETURN    TO    PORTSMOUTH. 

In  the  fall  I  went  back  to  Portsmouth  to  attend  to  my  bu.si- 
ness  there,  and  see  to  the  Society  which  had  been  formed  in 
that  place. 

RETURN  TO  EASTPORT  WITH  STUDENT. 

After  staying  in  Portsmouth  a  few  weeks  to  give  information 
to  the  people,  and  procuring  a  stock  of  medicine,  I  made  ar- 
rangements to  return  to  Eastport ;  and  some  time  in  the  month 
of  October,  I  set  sail  for  that  place,  taking  with  me  my  stu- 
dent and  Stephen  Sewell.    On  my  arrival  I  introduced  Mr.  Car- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  553 

penter  as  my  student.  I  took  a  small  shop,  and  put  into  it 
a  good  assortment  of  medicine,  and  attended  to  practice  till  I 
had  got  Mr.  Carpenter  introduced  among  the  people. 

MRS.    LOVETT,    HER    MYSTERIOUS    ACTIONS,    ETC. 

While  practising  here,  I  frequently  heard  of  the  abuse  and 
scandal  towards  me  and  my  practice,  from  Mrs.  Lovett,  the  old 
woman  before  mentioned,  as  the  nurse  of  her  son's  wife,  whom 
I  cured  of  the  dropsy.  This  old  lady  was  a  singular  cha- 
racter, and  was  called  a  witch  by  the  people  ;  I  have  no  faith 
in  these  kind  of  things,  yet  her  conduct  and  certain  circum- 
stances that  took  place,  were  very  extraordinary,  and  puzzled 
and  astonished  me  more  than  any  thing  I  had  ever  met  with, 
and  which  I  have  never  been  able  to  account  for  to  this  day. 
Mr,  Carpenter  was  attending  a  man,  where  this  woman  often 
visited,  who  had  the  consumption,  and  his  child,  which  was 
sick  and  had  fits.  He  came  to  me  and  said  that  the  medicine 
he  gave  would  not  have  its  usual  effect ;  that  the  emetic,  in- 
stead of  causing  them  to  vomit,  would  make  them  choke  and 
almost  strangle. 

UNACCOUNTABLE    MYSTERIES   OF   PATIENTS. 

I  attended  them  myself,  and  on  giving  the  medicine,  it  would 
operate  on  the  man,  and  not  on  the  child  at  one  time,  and  the 
next  time  on  the  child  and  not  on  him.  Sometimes  the  child 
would  lay  in  fits  for  the  whole  night,  and  nothing  would  have 
any  effect  upon  it ;  in  the  morning  it  would  come  out  of  them 
and  appear  to  be  quite  bright  and  lively.  I  had  never  known 
the  medicine  to  fail  of  producing  some  effect  before,  where  the 
patient  was  not  so  far  gone  as  not  to  have  life  enough  left  to 
build  upon,  I  can  give  no  reason  for  this  strange  circumstance, 
satisfactory  to  myself,  or  which  would  be  thought  reasonable 
by  the  reader.  The  old  woman,  before  mentioned,  was  fre- 
quently in  and  out  of  the  house  where  the  man  and  child  were, 
and  seemed  to  be  very  much  interested  about  them  ;  when  she 
was  gone  the  child  would  frequently  go  into  violent  fits,  and 
when  I  steamed  it,  it  was  said  the  old  woman  would  be  in  great 
distress. 

WITCHCRAFT. 

It  caused  much  conversation  among  the  neighbors ;  they  be- 
lieved it  to  be  the  power  of  witchcraft ;  and  that  the  old  wo- 
man had  a  control  over  the  destinies  of  the  man  and  child,  and 
was  determined  to  destroy  them  in  order  to  get  her  revenge  on 
me,  I  have  no  belief  in  these  things;  but  must  confess  that 
her  strange  conduct,  and  the  extraordinary  circumstances  at- 
tending the  whole  affair,  baffled  me  mare  than  any  thing  I  had 

36 


554  THE  THOM SOMAN 

ever  met  with  before.  I  was  unable  to  do  any  thinjr  for  these 
two  patients,  except  sonnetimes  by  a  temporary  rehef.  They 
continiu'd  to  jrrow  worse,  and  finding  it  not  in  my  power  to  da 
them  any  good,  I  left  them,  and  they  both  soon  after  died. 

REMARKS. 

Whether  the  extraordinary  circumstances  attending  the  two 
case*  above  stated,  were  caused  by  a  stratagem  of  the  doctors, 
in  which  the  old  woman  was  mude  their  agent,  to  injure  me 
by  causuig  in  some  way  or  other  poisonous  medicines  to  be 
administered  to  them  in  order  to  prevent  my  medicine  from 
having  any  salutary  effect,  is  what  I  do  not  feel  disposed  to  as- 
sert as  a  fact ;  but  the  many  cases  in  which  I  have  been  cer- 
tain that  such  things  have  been  done  by  the  faculty,  and  their 
enmity  and  uniform  opposition  to  my  practice,  both  at  this 
place  and  elsewhere,  as  well  as  the  confession  made  by  the  old 
woman,  won'd  tend  strongly  to  confirm  such  a  belief.  I  could 
mention  a  ijreat  number  of  facts  in  addition  to  what  I  have 
said  in  regard  to  this  aflfiiir,  if  necessary,  which  appeared  very 
extraordinary  to  me  and  all  who  witnessed  them  ;  but  1  think 
that  enough  has  been  said  on  the  subject,  and  shall  leave  it  to 
the  public  to  decide  between  us. 

DOCTORS   OUT    OF    BUSINESS. 

There  were  five  doctors  at  Eastport  when  I  went  there,  who 
had  a  plenty  of  business  ;  but  my  success  was  so  great,  and  the 
people  became  so  well  satisfied  of  the  superiority  of  my  system 
of  practice  over  theirs,  that  they  were  soon  relieved  from  most 
of  their  labors  ;  and  m  a  short  time  afier,  three  of  them  had  to 
leave  the  place  for  want  of  employment. 

PATIENTS — RETURNS    '10    PORTSMOUTH. 

After  arranging  my  business,  I  concluded  to  return  to  Ports- 
mouth ;  a  short  time  before  I  came  away,  a  Mr.  Whitney  came 
to  me  for  assistance,  and  purchased  a  right.  About  the  same 
time  a  Mr.  McFaddeu  applied  also  f.ir  assistance,  who  had  the 
cousumption.  I  left  iheuj  both  under  the  care  of  Mr.  Carpen- 
ter, and  immediately  sailed  for  Portsmouth,  where  1  arrived  in 
safety. 

DECLARATION    OF    WAR. 

Soon  after  my  arrival  there  I  found  there  was  going  to  be  a 
war  with  Great  Brit.-^in  ;  in  consequence  of  whicli  I  reMirned 
immediately  back  to  Ea<tport  to  settle  my  affairs  in  that  place. 
In  a  short  time  after  my  arrival  there,  the  declaration  of  war 
came  on,  and  I  made  the  best  arrangements  of  my  business  1 
could,  leaviuo:  Mr.  Carpenter  with  directions  if  there  should  any 
thing  happen  in  consequence  of  the  war,  so  as  to  be  necessary 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  555 

for  him  to  leave  the  Island,  to  come  to  Portsmouth.  Before 
leavino^  the  place,  1  called  on  him  for  some  money,  and  all  he 
could  pay  ms  was  sixty-fonr  dollars,  whi^'Ji  was  but  one  dollar 
more  than  I  had  paid  for  his  board  and  shop  rent.  The  peo- 
ple were  in  such  confusion  it  was  impossible  to  get  a  settlement 
with  any  one.  I  left  Mr.  Whitney  and  Mr.  McFadden  in  his 
care,  and  left  the  Island  about  the  middle  of  June,  and  arrived 
in  Portsmouth  in  forty-eigfht  hours,  where  I  remained  the  great- 
er part  of  the  summer  ;  during-  which  time  I  liad  constant  prac- 
tice, and  formed  some  regulations  for  the  society,  which  was 
established  there,  for  the  purpose  of  greater  facility  in  commu- 
nicatmg  information  of  my  system  of  practice  to  the  people  who 
wished  my  assistance. 

PUBLISHES    HIS    BOOK    OF    DIRECTIONS. 

In  the  fall  of  this  year  I  published  my  pamphlet  of  directions, 
as  many  were  urgent  that  I  should  not  leave  the  place  destitute 
of  the  knowledge  of  my  practice  and  medicine.  Many  persons 
who  had  been  the  most  urgent  for  me  to  give  them  informa- 
tion, now  became  the  most  backward  and  complained  that  the 
restrictions  were  too  hard  with  regard  to  their  giving  the  in- 
formation to  others  ;  some  of  whom  had  never  done  the  least 
thing  to  support  the  practice  or  me. 

INGRATITUDE  FOR  BENEFITS  CONFERRED. 

When  any  of  them  were  sick  they  were  ready  enough  to  call 
on  me  for  assistance  ;  and  if  I  relieved  them  quick  they  thouo-ht 
it  worth  nothing,  and  they  run  out  against  my  practice,  saying 
I  deserved  no  pay.  This  sort  of  treatment  I  have  met  with 
from  a  cer'ain  class  of  people  in  all  places  where  I  have  prac- 
tised. I  was  treated  with  much  attention  when  they  were  in 
danger  from  sickness  ;  but  when  I  had  cured  them  I  was 
thought  no  more  of.  This  kind  of  ingratitude  I  have  experi- 
enced a  pretty  good  share  of  during  my  practice. 

ENEMIES    AND    FRIENDS. 

I  found  I  had  enemies  on  every  hand,  and  was  in  danger  of 
falling  by  some  one  of  them.  Every  thing  seemed  to  conspire 
against  me ;  but  I  had  some  friends  who  have  never  forsaken 
me;  my  courage  remained  good,  and  my  spirits  were  never 
depressed ;  and  it  appeared  to  me  that  the  more  troubles  I  had 
to  encounter,  the  more  iirmly  I  was  fixed  in  my  determination 
to  persevere  unto  the  last. 

DELIBERATIONS — OBTAINS    A    PATENT. 

When  I  had  maturely  considered  the  subject  in  all  its  bear- 
ings, and  exercised  my  best  abilities  in  devising  some  plan  by 
which  I  could  extricate  myself  from  the  dangers  which  threat- 


556  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ened  me  on  every  hand ;  and  to  prevent  those  rights  which 
twenty  year's  labor,  with  much  suffering  and  great  expense  had 
given  me  a  just  claim  to,  from  being  wrested  from  me  ;  I  final- 
ly came  to  the  conclusion  that  there  was  only  one  plan  for  me 
to  pursue  with  any  chance  of  success  ;  and  that  was  to  go  on 
to  Washington,  and  obtain  a  patent  for  my  discoveries ;  and 
put  myself  and  medicine  under  the  protection  of  the  laws  of 
my  country,  which  would  not  only  secure  to  me  the  exclusive 
right  to  my  system  and  medicine,  but  would  put  me  above  the 
reach  of  the  laws  of  any  state. 

STARTS    FOR   WASHINGTON. 

After  coming  to  the  conclusion  to  go  on  to  the  seat  of  Go- 
vernment and  apply  for  a  patent,  made  all  necessary  prepara- 
tion for  the  journey,  and  started  from  Portsmouth  on  the  7th  of 
February,  and  arrived  at  Washington  on  the  23d. 

CONSULTATION. 

The  next  day  after  my  arrival,  I  waited  on  Capt.  Nicholas 
Oilman,  of  Exeter,  showed  him  my  credentials,  and  asked  his 
advise,  what  I  must  do  to  obtain  my  object.  He  said  he  thought 
it  could  not  be  made  explicit  enough  to  combine  the  system 
and  practice,  without  being  too  long  ;  he  however  advised  me 
to  carry  my  petition  to  the  patent  office  ;  which  was  then  un- 
der the  control  of  Mr.  Monroe,  Secretary  of  State.  I  went  to 
the  patent  office,  and  found  that  Dr.  Thornton  was  the  clerk, 
and  presented  him  my  petition.  He  asked  me  many  questions, 
and  then  said  I  must  call  again  ;  I  called  again  the  next  day 
and  he  said  the  petition  was  not  right ;  that  I  must  specify  the 
medicine,  and  what  disorder  it  must  be  used  in  ;  he  said  that 
those  medicines  in  general  terms  to  cure  every  thing,  was 
quackery ;  that  I  must  particularly  designate  the  medicine,  and 
state  how  it  must  be  used,  and  in  what  disease. 

VISITS    GOV.    CHITTENDEN. 

1  then  waited  on  Martin  Chittenden,  late  Governor  of  Ver- 
mont, who  was  at  Washington,  and  asked  his  assistance  ;  he 
was  from  the  same  town  where  my  father  lived,  and  readily 
consented.  We  made  out  the  specification  in  as  correct  a  man- 
ner as  we  could,  and  the  next  day  I  carried  them  to  the  patent 
office,  and  gave  them  to  Dr.  Thornton. 

OBSTACLES  AT  THE  PATENT  OFFICE. 

He  complained  much  about  its  being  too  short  a  system,  and 
put  me  off  once  more.  I  applied  again  and  asked  him  for  my 
patent ;  but  he  said  I  had  not  got  the  botanic  names  for  the  ar- 
ticles, and  referred  me  to  Dr.  Mitchell  of  New  York,  who  was 
in  the  House  of  Representatives.    I   applied  to  him  and  re- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  557 

quested  him  to  give  the  botanic  names  to  the  articles  mention- 
ed in  my  petition.  He  wrote  them,  and  I  carried  them  to  Dr. 
Thornton  ;  but  he  was  unable  to  read  some  of  the  names,  one 
in  particular ;  he  said  I  must  go  again  to  Dr.  Mitchell,  and  get 
him  to  give  it  in  some  other  words,  and  not  tell  him  that  he 
could  not  read  it.  1  went,  and  the  doctor  wrote  the  same  word 
again,  and  then  wrote,  "  or  Snap-dragon  ;"  which  I  carried  to 
Dr.  Thornton,  and  requested  him  to  put  in  the  patent  my 
names,  and  recorded  it  for  himself,  snap-dragon,  or  any  other 
name  he  chose.  He  then  talked  about  sending  me  to  Phila- 
delphia, to  Dr.  Barton,  to  get  his  names. 

I  found  he  was  determined  to  give  me  all  the  trouble  he 
could,  and  if  possible  to  defeat  my  getting  a  patent,  and  I  inti- 
mated that  I  should  go  with  my  complaint  to  Mr.  Monroe,  up- 
on which  he  seemed  a  little  more  disposed  to  grant  my  request, 
and  said  he  would  do  without  Dr.  Barton's  names. 

PATENT    MADE   OUT. 

He  then  went  to  work  to  make  out  the  patent,  and  when  he 
came  to  the  article  of  myrrh,  he  found  much  fault  about  that 
and  said  it  was  good  for  nothing.  I  told  him  that  I  paid  for 
the  patent,  and  if  it  was  good  for  nothing  it  was  my  loss.  Af- 
ter much  trouble  I  got  it  made  out  according  to  my  request, 
and  the  medicine  to  be  used  in  fevers,  colics,  dysenteries,  and 
rheumatisms  ;  he  then  asked  me  if  I  wanted  any  additions,  and 
I  told  him  to  add,  "  the  three  first  numbers  may  be  used  in  any 
other  case  to  promote  perspiration,  or  as  an  emetic,"  which  he 
did.  I  then  had  to  go  to  the  treasury  office  and  pay  my  money 
and  bring  him  duplicate  receipts.  After  all  this  trouble,  I  at 
length  succeeded  in  obtaining  my  patent  according  to  my  re- 
quest, which  was  completed  and  delivered  to  me  on  the  third 
day  of  March,  1813. 

INTERVIEW  WITH  DRS.  RUSH  AND  BARTON. 

I  then  took  passage  in  the  stage  and  came  on  to  Philadelphia, 
where  1  remained  several  days,  for  the  purpose  of  seeing  doc- 
tors Rush  and  Barton,  to  confer  with  them  on  the  subject  of  in- 
troducing my  system  of  practice  to  the  world.  I  spent  conside- 
rable time  with  Dr.  Barton,  but  Dr.  Rush  was  so  much  engag- 
ed that  I  was  able  to  have  but  little  conversation  more  than  stat- 
ing my  business.  He  treated  me  with  much  politeness,  and 
said  that  whatever  Dr.  Barton  agreed  to  he  would  give  his  con- 
sent, so  that  my  business  was  chiefly  with  the  latter  gentleman. 
I  asked  him  many  questions  concerning  my  system  and  patent, 
and  requested  his  advice  of  the  best  mode  of  introducing  it.  He 
advised  me  to  make  friends  of  some  celebrated  doctors,  and  let 
them  try  the  medicine,  and  give  the  public  such  recommenda- 
tion of  it  as  they  should  deem  correct.    I  told  him  I  feared  that 


558  THE  THOMSONIAN 

if  I  should  do  so  they  would  take  the  discovery  to  themselves^ 
and  deprive  me  of  all  credit  or  benefit  from  my  labors,  and  ask- 
ed him  whether  he  thought  that  would  not  be  the  case.  He  said 
it  might  with  some,  but  he  thought  there  were  some  of  the  pro- 
fession honorable  enough  not  to  do  it.  I  asked  him  if  he  would 
make  a  trial  of  it  himself,  and  give  it  such  credit  as  he  should 
find  it  to  deserve.  He  said,  that  if  I  would  trust  it  in  his  hands 
he  should  be  pleased,  and  would  do  justice  to  me  and  the  cause. 
I  accordinsfly  left  some  of  the  medicine  with  him  with  directions 
how  to  use  it;  but  before  I  received  any  return  from  him  he 
and  Dr.  Rush  also  died  some  time  previous,  by  which  means  I 
was  deprived  of  ihe  influence  of  these  two  men,  which  I  was 
confident  would  otherwise  have  been  exerted  in  my  favor. 

DR.  barton's  admission. 

During  my  interviews  with  Dr.  Barton,  we  had  much  con- 
versation upon  the  subject  of  the  medical  skill,  and  he  being 
quite  sociable  and  pleasant,  I  expressed  myself  very  freely  upon 
the  fashionable  mode  of  practice  used  by  the  physicians  of  the 
present  day.  He  acknowledged  there  was  no  art  or  science  so 
uncultivated  as  that  of  medicine.  1  stated  to  him  pretty  fully 
my  opinion  of  bleeding  to  cure  disease,  and  pointed  out  its  in- 
consistency, inasmuch  as  the  same  method  was  made  use  of  to 
cure  a  sick  man  as  to  kill  a  well  beast.  He  laughed,  and  said 
it  was  strange  logic  enough. 

DR.  RUSH — TREATMENT  OF  YELLOW  FEVER,  ETC. 

While  I  was  in  the  city  of  Philadelphia  I  examined  into  their 
mode  of  treating  the  yellow  fever,  and  found,  to  my  astonish- 
ment, that  the  treatment  prescribed  by  Dr.  Rush  was  to  bleed 
twice  a  day  for  ten  days.  It  appeared  to  me  very  ex troardi na- 
ry, to  bleed  twenty  times  to  cure  the  most  fatal  disease  ever 
known  ;  and  I  am  confident  that  the  same  treatment  would  kill 
one  half  of  those  in  health.  This  absurd  practice  being  follow- 
ed by  the  more  ignorant  class  of  the  faculty,  merely  because  it 
has  been  recotnmended  in  some  particular  cases  by  a  great  man, 
has,  I  have  not  the  least  doubt,  destroyed  more  lives  than  have 
ever  been  destroyed  by  powder  and  ball  in  this  country  in  the 
same  time.  Those  I  met  in  the  streets  who  had  escaped  the 
pernicious  effect  of  bleeding,  mercury,  and  other  poisons,  car- 
ried death  in  their  countenance  ;  and  on  conversing  with  them 
they  said  they  had  never  been  well  since  they  had  the  fever ; 
that  they  took  so  much  mercury  and  opium  they  were  afraid 
they  were  in  a  decline. 

RETURN  TO  PORTSMOUTH. 

After  remaining  in  Philadelphia  about  two  weeks,  I  went  in 
the  stage  to  New- York,  where  1  obtained  a  passage  in  a  coast- 


MATERIA    MEDICA,  559 

€r,  and  arrived  at  Portsmouth  on  the  filth  day  of  April.  Ira- 
medirtiely  after  my  arrival  at  Portsmouth,  I  gave  notice  in  the 
newspapers  of  haviu^  obtained  a  patent,  and  forbid  all  persons 
trespassing  tipon  it,  under  the  penalty  of  the  law  in  such  cases 
provided. 

PRACTICE  IN  PORTLAND. 

After  goin,^  and  settling  my  business  in  Eastport,  I  returned 
again  to  Portsmouth,  where  I  stopped  but  a  short  time,  and 
taking  Mr.  Sewell  with  me,  went  to  Portland,  to  introduce  my 
practice.  On  our  arrival,  I  advertised  my  patent  in  the  news- 
papers, and  had  handbills  printed  and  circulated  among  th« 
people,  giving  the  conditions  on  which  1  should  practice,  and 
the  manner  of  selling  fiimily  rights  to  those  who  wished  the  use 
of  my  practice  and  medicine,  and  that  I  should  attend  in  no 
case  except  such  as  wished  to  purchase  the  rights,  to  give  them 
information,  and  prove  the  utility  of  the  medicine.  1  gave  the 
information  to  Mr.  Frickett,  where  we  boarded,  and  a  right  of 
using  the  medicnie  for  himself  and  family,  and  gave  informa- 
tion to  several  of  his  workmen.  Soon  after  making  myself 
known,  I  had  a  great  number  of  desperate  cases  put  under  my 
charge,  all  of  which  were  cured  or  essentially  relieved.  My 
success  in  the  castas  I  attended,  most  of  which  were  such  as  had 
been  given  over  by  the  doctors,  caused  grf at  alarm  among  those 
professional  gentlemen  styled  regular  physicians,  and  I  experi- 
enced the  same  opposition  fiom  them  that  1  had  met  with  in 
other  places.  I  was  followed  by  them  or  their  spies,  and  all 
kinds  of  false  and  ridiculous  reports  were  circulated  among  the 
people  to  frighten  them  and  prejudice  them  against  me  and  my 
medicine. 

PRECtNANCY — DROPSY — OVER  TIME. 

Soon  after  coming  to  this  place,  I  was  called  on  by  Capt. 
John  Alden  to  attend  his  wife,  who  was  in  a  very  alarming  si- 
tuation. She  was  in  a  state  of  pregnancy,  and  had  the  dropsy, 
and  was  then,  as  she  supposed,  several  weeks  over  her  time. 
She  had  been  in  the  same  situation  once  before,  and  was  deli- 
vered by  force,  and  came  very  near  losing  her  life.  The  doc- 
tors gave  it  as  their  opinion,  that  if  she  should  ever  be  so  again 
she  would  certainly  die.  I  told  him,  I  did  not  attend  on  any 
except  those  who  wished  to  purchase  the  right,  in  whichcases 
I  would  give  them  the  information.  I  explained  to  him  the 
principles  upon  which  my  system  was  founded,  and  he  pur- 
chased a  right,  after  which  I  attended  upon  his  wife,  and  found 
her  very  low ;  she  had  not  lain  in  bed  for  three  weeks,  being 
so  put  to  it  for  breath  when  she  lay  down,  she  was  obliged  to 
get  immediately  up  again. 


560  THE    THOMSONIAN 

CONFINEMENT — CURE. 

I  carried  her  through  a  course  of  the  medicine  three  times  in 
five  days,  during  which  she  was  reduced  in  size  about  eight 
inches.  Her  travail  then  came  on  natural,  and  in  about  two 
hours  she  was  delivered  of  a  daughter,  and  they  both  did  well. 
She  was  able  to  come  down  stairs  in  one  week,  and  in  two 
weeks  was  well  enough  to  be  about  the  house.  This  cure  so 
alarmed  the  doctors,  that  they  circulated  a  story  at  a  distance, 
where  the  facts  were  not  known,  that  I  was  so  ignorant  of  this 
woman's  situation  that  I  killed  her  immediately ;  but  the  wo- 
man and  her  husband  gave  me  all  credit  for  the  cure,  and  ap- 
peared very  grateful  to  me  for  it. 

SPOTTED  FEVER — VIOLENT  ATTACK — TREATMENT. 

During  the  summer,  a  son  of  Capt.  Alden  was  violently  seiz- 
ed with  the  spotted  fever.  He  was  taken  very  suddenly,  when 
at  the  pump  for  water,  fell,  and  was  brought  into  the  house 
senseless.  I  attended  him,  and  his  jaws  being  set,  administer- 
ed a  strong  solution  of  Nos.  1,  2,  and  6,  by  putting  my  finger 
between  his  cheek  and  teeth,  and  pouring  in  the  medicine  and 
squeezing  it  round  to  the  back  of  his  teeth  ;  and  as  soon  as  it 
reached  the  roots  of  his  tongue,  his  jaws  came  open.  I  then 
poured  down  more  of  the  medicine,  and  soon  after  swallowing 
it  his  senses  came  to  him  and  he  spoke  ;  he  appeared  to  be  like 
a  person  wakmg  out  of  sleep.  As  soon  as  the  warm  effect  of 
the  medicine  was  overjhe  relapsed,  and  life  seemed  to  go  down 
with  the  heat.  I  found  that  I  could  not  restore  him  till  I  could 
rarify  or  lighten  the  air.  I  laid  him  across  the  laps  of  three 
persons,  shielding  him  from  external  air  wiih  a  blanket,  and 
put  under  him  a  pan  with  a  hot  stone  in  it  about  half  immers- 
ed in  hot  water.  While  over  this  steam,  again  gave  the  medi- 
cine, which  raised  a  perspiration;  and  as  the  heat  raised  inside 
life  gained  in  proportion  ;  and  when  the  perspiration  had  gain- 
ed so  as  to  be  equal  to  a  state  of  health,  the  natural  vigor  of  life 
and  action  was  restored. 

RELAX  CASE — HIMSELF  ATTACKED — BUTTERNUT. 

I  was  called  on  to  attend  a  woman  who  had  a  relax,  and  in 
a  few  visits  restored  her  to  health.  One  night  about  midnight 
1  was  sent  for  to  visit  this  woman,  in  consequence  of  their  be- 
ing alarmed  about  her ;  the  cause  of  which  I  could  never  learn, 
for  on  my  arrival  she  was  as  well  as  usual. 

I  returned  immediately  home,  and  was  soon  after  taken  in  a 
violent  manner  with  the  same  disease,  and  was  so  bad  as  not  to 
be  able  to  do  any  thing  for  myself.  Mr.  Sewell  attended  upon 
me  and  did  all  he  could,  which  had  no  effect.  I  was  persuad- 
ed I  should  not  live  three  days  unless  I  could  get  some  relief. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  661 

1  had  no  pain,  and  every  thing  I  took  passed  through  me  in 
two  minutes.  Nothing  seemed  to  warm  me.  1  sent  and  ob- 
tained some  butternut  bark,  boiled  it,  and  took  some  as  strong 
as  it  could  be  made ;  as  soon  as  it  began  to  operate,  I  followed 
it  with  brandy  and  loaf  sugar,  burned  together  till  it  became  a 
syrup.  This  soon  put  me  in  pain  ;  I  then  followed  my  general 
rule  of  treatment,  and  was  soon  relieved, 

SORE  NOSE PATIENT  IN  DANGER. 

While  at  Portland,  I  was  sent  for  to  see  a  Mr.  Mason,  who 
was  very  sick,  and  it  was  expected  that  he  would  not  live 
through  the  night.  He  had  been  attended  by  the  doctors  of  the 
town,  for  a  sore  on  his  nose,  which  was  much  inflamed.  They 
had  given  him  so  much  saltpetre  to  kill  the  heat,  that  they  al- 
most killed  him.  I  had  the  hardest  trial  to  save  his  life  of  any 
one  1  ever  attended,  and  was  obliged  to  carry  him  through  a 
course  of  medicine  two  or  three  times  a  week  for  three  months, 
besides  visiting  him  every  day. 

DOCTORS  THREATEN. 

The  doctors  said  he  would  certainly  die,  and  if  he  did  tney 
meant  to  take  me  up  for  murder ;  and  every  means  were  resort- 
ed to,  by  discouraging  him  and  other  ways,  to  prevent  his  get- 
ting well ;  and  when  he  got  so  as  to  be  about,  and  it  was  decid- 
ed that  he  was  going  to  recover  under  the  operation  of  the  me- 
dicine, one  who  pretended  to  be  his  friend  gave  him  a  bottle  of 
pepper  vinegar. 

PEPPER  VINEGAR SUSPICION  OF  POISON. 

I  had  made  a  free  use  of  this  article  in  his  case,  and  he  took 
some  of  what  was  given  him  by  this  friend,  and  he  soon  grew 
worse.  The  man  who  gave  him  the  pepper  vinegar  often  en- 
quired how  he  did,  and  when  told  that  he  was  worse,  he  would 
say  that  I  should  kill  him.  1  could  not  ascertain  the  reason  of 
this  patient  being  affected  in  the  manner  he  was,  until  Mr.  Sew- 
ell  took  some  of  the  same,  and  was  immediately  taken  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  sick  man.  He  took  medicine  and  got  over 
it,  and  a  short  time  after  took  some  more  and  was  attacked  in  a 
similar  manner.  I  then  began  to  mistrust  that  there  was  some- 
thing in  the  pepper  vinegar,  and  on  examining  it  was  satisfied 
that  it -had  been  poisoned  to  destroy  the  patient,  in  order  to  take 
advantage  of  me.  I  was  obliged  to  carry  them  both  through  a 
course  of  medicine,  and  they  afterwards  had  no  such  turns. 

PATIENT  CURED. 

This  patient,  after  about  three  months'  close  attention,  gained 
so  as  to  enjoy  a  comfortable  state  of  health.    The  undertaking 


562  THE  THOMSONIAN 

was  very  tedious  on  my  part;  I  should  hardly  he  wiUing  to  go 
through  the  same  process  again,  for  any  sum  whatever. 

SALTPERTE  A  DANGKROUS  POISON — ANTIDOTE. 

The  destructive  effects  of  saltpetre  render  it  the  worst  of  any 
poison  that  I  ever  undertook  to  clear  the  system  of.  The  only 
method  I  have  found  successful,  is  to  give  Nos.  1  and  2,  and 
throw  all  ot  it  out  of  the  system  that  can  possibly  be  done,  and 
by  steaming  keep  the  heat  of  the  body  above  it.  All  other  poi- 
sons can  be  eradicated  by  the  common  course  of  medicine. 

EXTENDED  PRACTICE. 

I  was  called  on  to  attend  the  sick  from  all  quarters;  but  few 
of  them  were  able  to  purchas'^  the  information,  and  many  who 
had  it  have  never  paid  any  thing.  The  people  generally  were 
well  satisfied  with  its  utility;  my  friends  were  very  zealous  in 
introducing  it  among  the  people  ;  but  my  opponents  were  not 
slack  in  doing  every  thiuij  in  tht^ir  power  to  prejudice  the  pub- 
lic against  me  and  the  medicine.  The  doctors  seemed  much 
troubled  at  the  success  of  the  practice,  many  having  been  cured 
who  were  given  over  by  them. 

PATIENT  CURED — DOCTORS  OFFENDED. 

One  woman,  who  had  been  unable  to  walk  for  about  nine 
months  after  having  been  confined,  and  the  doctors  could  not 
help  her,  was  attended  by  Mr.  Sewell,  and  in  a  short  time  re- 
stored to  a  comfortable  state  of  health,  which  gave  them  great 
offence. 

PART  OF  TRIAL   PUBLISHED. 

Some  of  them  published  in  the  newspapers,  a  part  of  my  trial 
for  murder,  in  order  to  prejudice  the  public  against  me.  1  pre- 
pared an  answer,  but  they  had  so  much  influence  with  the 
printers  that  I  was  unable  to  get  it  inserted.  They  then  had 
the  meanness  to  circulate  the  report  that  I  acknowledged  the 
fact,  because  I  did  not  answer  their  statement.  Thus  have  the 
faculty  by  such  unprincipled  conduct  managed  to  keep  the  peo- 
ple blind  to  the  benefit  they  might  receive  from  the  use  of  the 
medicine,  for  the  purpose  of  keeping  up  their  own  credit,  and 
makinif  them  tributary  to  themselves,  without  regard  to  the 
public  good. 

SENT  FOR  TO  GO  TO  PHILADELPHIA. 

In  the  month  of  February,  1815,  1  had  an  application  to  go 
to  Philadelphia,  and  introduce  my  societies  and  system  of  prac- 
tice in  that  city.  Thinking  it  not  proper  to  go 'alone,  1  made 
an  ao-reemcnt  with  Mr.  John  Lock  to  go  with  me,  and  after  we 
got  every  thing  prepared  he  started  on  the  seventh  to  go  in  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  563 

Stage,  and  I  chose  to  go  by  water,  and  sailed  the  same  day  in  a 
vessel  for  New  York.  We  had  a  long  and  tedious  passage,  suf- 
fering very  much  from  the  cold.  We  had  a  gale  of  wind  which 
blew  us  off  into  the  2;nlf  stream,  and  we  were  200  miles  south 
of  our  port.  On  getting  into  a  warmer  latitude,  the  weather 
became  warmer,  when  we  were  enabled  to  get  clear  of  the  ice, 
with  which  the  vessel  was  much  burdened,  and  could  set  some 
sail,  and  we  arrived  at  New-York  after  a  very  rough  passage  of 
17  days. 

CASE  OF  FREEZING. 

During  the  passage,  one  of  the  crew  had  frozen  his  hands 
and  feet  very  badly,  and  when  we  had  got  where  the  weather 
became  warmer  he  was  in  the  most  extreme  pain.  He  said  that 
it  seemed  as  though  the  bones  of  his  hands  and  feet  were  com- 
ing in  pieces;  his  suffering  was  so  great  that  the  tears  would 
run  from  his  eyes  and  tlie  sweat  down  his  cheeks,  with  the  pain. 
I  was  requested  by  the  captain  and  crew  to  do  sometliing  to  re- 
Ueve  him.  I  agreed  to  do  the  best  I  could  for  him,  in  the  cold 
and  comfortless  situation  we  were  m.  There  was  no  place  to 
keep  a  tire  under  decks,  and  the  weather  was  so  rough  tliat  we 
could  seldom  keep  any  in  the  caboose  on  deck.  I  was  oblig- 
ed to  administer  the  medicine  according  to  my  judgment  in  the 
best  manner  1  could. 

TREATMENT  AND  CURE. 

In  the  first  place  I  procured  handkerchiefs  and  cloths  enough 
to  wrap  his  hands  and  feet  up  in  several  thicknesses,  then  wet 
them  well  with  cold  water,  and  put  him  in  his  berth,  covered 
well  with  blankets,  and  gave  him  the  warmest  medicine  to  take 
I  had  with  me,  and  repeated  it,  to  keep  the  inward  heat  sufR- 
cient  to  cause  a  free  circulation  in  the  limbs;  and  if  his  hands 
and  feet  grew  painful,  poured  cold  water  on  the  cloths;  and 
continued  this  course  of  treatment,  of  keeping  the  inward  heat 
above  the  outward,  by  raising  one  and  letting  down  the  other, 
till  1  got  the  fountain  above  the  stream,  and  in  about  two  hours 
freed  him  from  all  pain,  to  the  astonishment  of  all  the  hands  on 
board.  When  I  came  to  take  off  the  cloths,  the  blood  had  set- 
tled under  the  nails  and  under  the  skin,  which  came  off  without 
any  blister  being  raised,  and  before  we  arrived  at  New-York  he 
was  able  to  attend  his  watch. 

REMARKS  OF  CAPT.  AND  CREW. 

It  was  said  by  the  captain  and  crew  that  this  was  the  most 
ramarkable  cure  they  had  ever  known,  and  that  if  he  had  been 
attended  in  the  common  form  he  would  have  lust  his  toes  if  not 
his  feet,  besides  suffering  much  pain  and  a  long  confinement. 


564  THE    THOMSONIAN 

NO   MYSTERY  IN  THE  CASE. 

It  will  be  necessary  to  remark,  that  the  greatness  of  this  cure 
consisted  in  its  simplicity.  Any  person  could  have  performed 
the  same  who  had  come  to  years  of  discretion,  by  adopting  the 
same  plan,  and  many  times  be  the  means  of  saving  the  ampu- 
tation of  limbs.  There  is  no  mystery  in  it ;  the  whole  plan 
consists  in  keeping  the  determining  power  to  the  surface,  from 
the  fountain  of  the  body,  which  is  the  stomach,  from  which  all 
the  limbs  receive  their  support  and  warmth ;  and  when  you 
cannot  raise  the  fountain  sufficient  to  give  nature  its  proper 
course,  you  must  lower  the  stream,  or  outward  heat,  by  keep- 
ing down  the  heat  on  the  limbs,  and  raising  the  inward  heat, 
when  there  can  no  mortification  ever  return  from  the  Umbs  to 
the  body,  any  more  than  a  log  can  float  against  a  stream. 

DELIBERATION  BEFORE  TREATMENT. 

In  the  case  above  stated,  before  I  began  to  do  any  thing  for 
the  man,  I  duly  considered  his  situation.  He  had  been  almost 
chilled  to  death  by  the  extreme  cold  weather,  so  that  his  limbs 
had  very  little  warmth  from  the  body — not  enough  to  bring 
them  to  their  feeling.  Until  the  warm  weather  raised  a  fever 
on  the  limbs  faster  than  in  the  body,  and  in  proportion  as  the 
heat  in  the  extremities  is  raised  above  that  in  the  body,  by  ap- 
plying hot  poultices  or  other  similar  applications,  so  much  will 
the  whole  system  be  disordered,  and  the  parts  that  have  been 
injured  will  be  extremely  painful,  and  by  a  continued  applica- 
tion of  such  means  the  fever  or  outward  heat  will  increase,  by 
the  current  being  turned  inward,  till  mortification  takes  place, 
when  the  limbs  have  to  be  taken  off  to  save  life;  and  in  most 
cases  the  body  has  become  so  much  disordered  that  they  die  af- 
ter all.  This  may,  I  am  confident,  be  avoided,  by  understand- 
ing my  plan  of  treatment  and  pursuing  it  with  zeal,  particularly 
in  all  cases  of  burns  or  freezing. 

ARRIVAL  AT  PHILADELPHIA. 

On  my  arrival  at  New-York,  I  found  Mr.  Locke,  who  had 
been  waiting  for  me  ten  days.  The  next  morning  we  started 
in  the  stage  for  Philadelphia,  where  we  arrived  that  evening, 
and  went  to  a  boarding  house  where  we  put  up  for  the  night.  In 
the  morning  we  went  in  search  of  Elder  Plumer,  with  whom  1 
had  engaged  the  fall  before  to  goto  Philadelphia;  we  found 
him  in  the  course  of  the  forenoon,  and  he  expressed  much  joy 
at  our  arrival.  He  preached  a  lecture  that  evening,  and  ap- 
pointed a  meeting  at  the  same  place  the  next  evening  for  me, 
at  which  I  attended  and  gave  a  lecture.  A  large  collection  of 
people  attended  this  meeting,  and  I  gave  a  full  and  explicit  ex- 
planation of  the  principles  upon  which  my  system  is  founded. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  565 

MEDICAL  STUDENTS — ANECDOTE. 

There  were  two  medical  students  present,  and  while  I  was 
endeavoring  to  give  a  view  of  the  formation  of  the  animal  crea- 
tion out  of  the  tour  elements — that  heat  was  life  and  cold  death 
— and  that  the  blood  was  necessary  to  life,  as  being  the  nou- 
rishment of  the  flesh,  and  inasmuch  as  it  was  taken  away  so 
much  was  life  and  health  diminished — one  of  them  interrupted 
me,  and  said  that  cold  was  a  promotion  of  life,  and  that  bleed- 
ing was  beneficial  to  preserve  life  also.  I  answered  him  by 
stating,  that  admitting  his  doctrine  to  be  true,  an  animal  that 
had  the  blood  taken  from  it  and  was  frozen  would  be  the  liveli- 
est creature  in  the  world.  This  unexpected  retort  caused  a 
laugh,  and  the  two  medical  gentlemen  left  the  room.  I  then 
went  on  and  concluded  the  explanations  I  wished  to  make, 
which  gave  general  satisfaction  to  the  people  present,  and  six- 
teen signed  the  articles  of  agreement  that  night,  to  obtain  the 
knowledge  of  the  medicine  and  practice,  to  whom  I  engaged  to 
give  information  by  lectures.  We  remained  there  about  a 
week,  in  which  time  about  twenty  bought  the  right. 

VISITS  WASHINGTON. 

When  we  had  completed  our  business  at  Philadelphia,  we 
went  on  to  Washington,  where  we  remained  several  days,  and 
had  a  view  of  the  ruins  of  the  public  buildings  which  had  been 
destroyed  by  the  British  when  they  took  possession  of  that  city, 
about  six  months  previous  to  our  being  there. 

PIPSISSEWAY  USEFUL  IN  CANCERS. 

While  at  the  capitol,  I  had  an  interview  with  Gen.  Yarnum 
and  some  conversation  passed  between  us  concerning  the  pip- 
sisseway,  which  had  been  found  useful  in  a  case  of  cancer  for 
which  1  attended  his  wife,  when  practising  at  Pelham,  in  the 
year  1807,  He  said,  that  it  having  been  found  so  useful  in  all 
cancerous  cases,  he  thought  it  ought  to  be  published  in  the 
newspapers  or  almanacs,  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  were 
afiiicted  with  that  dangerous  disease,  and  expressed  a  wish  that 
I  would  do  it.  1  told  him  that  1  thought  it  would  be  better  for 
him  to  publish  it  than  for  me,  and  he  consented ;  and  the  next 
year  he  published  it  in  the  almanac,  which  was  the  cause  of 
much  speculation  in  this  herb. 

MARSH-ROSEMARY. 

In  the  fall  of  the  year  1815,  I  went  to  Cape  Cod  to  procure 
some  marsh-rosemary,  and  collected  a  quantity,  carried  it  to 
Portsmouth  and  prepared  it  for  use.  This  is  the  last  time  that 
I  have  collected  any  of  this  article,  and  as  it  becomes  scarce  I 
think  I  shall  make  no  more  use  of  it.    It  is  too  cold  and  bind- 


568  THE    THOMSONIAN 

SENT  FOR  IN  HASTE. 

Within  a  week  after  my  return  from  Cape  Cod,  I  received  a 
letter  from  Eastham,  to  go  there  as  soon  as  possible.  I  took  a 
stock  of  medicine  and  went  on  there  as  soon  as  I  could,  and  on 
my  arrival  found  that  the  fever  had  again  made  its  appear- 
ance among  the  people,  with  double  fatality.  1  soon  found 
enough  ready  to  purchase  the  twenty  rights,  for  which  I  had 
offered  to  sell  the  right  of  the  whole  town.  I  attended  on  ma- 
ny of  those  who  had  the  disease,  in  company  with  the  two  men 
who  had  purchased  the  right  of  me  when  there  before,  and  in- 
structed them  how  to  carry  a  patient  through  a  course  of  medi- 
cine, and  they  attended  and  gave  instruction  to  others.  When 
they  could  meet  together,  I  gave  information  by  lectures ;  those 
who  got  the  information  attended  wherever  they  were  wanted.  I 
pursued  my  usual  mode  of  treatment,  by  giving  the  medicine  to 
promote  a  free  perspiration,  and  when  necessary  steamed  and 
gave  injections,  cleansed  the  stomach  and  cleared  off  the  canker. 

GREAT  SUCCESS. 

The  success  in  curing  this  alarming  disease  was  very  great.  1 
staid  about  two  weeks,  during  which  time  there  were  attended 
with  my  medicine  thirty-four  cases,  of  whom  one  died,  and  the 
rest  got  well.  At  the  same  time,  of  those  who  were  attended  by 
the  regular  doctors,  eleven  out  of  twelve  died,  making  in  the 
whole  upwards  of  fifty  deaths  in  a  short  time  in  this  place,  which 
was  about  one  twelfth  part  of  the  mhabitants  who  were  at  home. 
The  truth  of  the  above  statements  is  authenticated  by  the  certifi- 
cates of  the  selectmen  of  the  town  and  other  respectable  inhabit- 
ants. 

ABUSE  REWARDED,  ETC. 

During  my  stay  this  time,  I  attended  the  husband  of  the  wo- 
man who  had  abused  me  when  here  before,  at  the  house  of  his 
sister.  She  came  there  while  1  was  attending  upon  her  husband, 
and  treated  me  and  him  in  a  most  abusive  manner,  saying  that 
she  would  sooner  die  than  take  any  of  my  medicine  or  have  any 
thing  to  do  with  me.  After  she  had  vented  her  spite  to  h.er  own 
satisfaction,  she  went  home,  was  taken  sick  on  the  way,  and  was 
one  of  the  last  who^lad  with  the  fever.  The  people  generally 
treated  me  with  greOTt«indness  and  respect,  and  took  great  in- 
terest in  my  cause ;  and  the  success  of  my  system  of  practice,  in 
relieving  them  from  this  alarming  disease,  gave  universal  satis- 
faction. 

I  formed  those  who  purchased  rights  into  a  society,  and  they 
chose  a  committee,  whom  I  authorized  as  agents  to  sell  rights  and 
medicine. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  569 

SOCIETIES — THEIR  CONSEQUENCES. 

I  have  formed  four  societies,  and  ^iveii  tliera  certain  privi- 
leo-es,  by  allowing  them  part  of  the  profits  on.  the  sale  of  rights 
and  medicine;  but  as  soon  as  there  were  any  funds,  it  has  al- 
ways created  uneasiness  among  the  members.  Some  of  the  ig- 
norant and  selfish  would  call  for  their  dividends,  as  though  it 
were  bank  stock,  instead  of  feeling  grateful  for  the  advantages 
they  enjoy  by  having  their  diseases  cured,  and  their  minds  re- 
lieved from  the  alarming  consequences  of  a  disease^  with  a  tri- 
fling expense. 

ONE  SOCIETY  ONLY. 

I  have  altered  my  plan,  and  now  have  but  one  society.  Ev- 
ery one  who  purchases  a  right  for  himself  and  family,  becomes 
a  member  of  the  Friendly  Botanic  Society,  and  is  entitled  to  all 
the  privilege  of  a  free  intercourse  with  each  other,  and  to  con- 
verse with  any  one  who  has  bought  a  right,  for  instruction  and 
assistance,  as  each  one  is  bound  to  give  his  assistance,  by  ad- 
vice or  otherwise,  when  called  on  by  a  member.  In  this  way, 
much  more  good  can  be  done,  and  there  will  be  much  more 
good  will  towards  each  other,  than  where  there  is  any  money 
depending. 

PRACTICED  THIRTY  YEARS. 

1  had  now  been  in  practice,  constantly  attending  upon  those 
laboring  under  disease,  whenever  called  on,  for  about  thirty 
years;  had  suifered  much,  both  in  body  and  mind,  from  the 
persecutions  1  had  met  with  and  my  unwearied  exertions  to  re- 
lieve the  sick  ;  and  to  establish  my  practice  upon  a  permanent 
basis,  that  the  people  might  be  satisfied  of  its  superiority  over 
that  which  is  practised  by  those  styled  regular  physicians,  put- 
ting it  in  their  power  to  become  their  own  physicians,  by  ena- 
bling every  one  to  relieve  themselves  and  friends  from  all  dis- 
eases incident  to  our  country,  by  making  use  of  those  vegetable 
medicines,  the  produce  of  our  own  country,  which  are  perfect- 
ly safe  and  easily  obtained  ;  and  which,  if  properly  understood, 
are  fully  sufficient  in  all  cases  of  disease,  where  there  can  be 
any  chance  of  cure,  without  any  danger  of  the  pernicious  and 
often  fatal  consequences  attending  the  administering  those  poi- 
sons that  the  fashionable  doctors  are  inHhe  habit  of  givino-  to 
their  patients. 

THE  SYSTEM — PRACTICE — ELIAS  SMITH,  AGENT. 

After  having  discovered  a  system,  and  by  much  labor  and 
constant  perseverance  reduced  it  to  practice,  in  a  manner  that 
had  o^iven  general  satisfaction  to  all  who  had  become  acquaint- 
ed with  it,  and  having  secured  the  same  by  patent,  in  order  that 

37 


570  THE  THOiVISOjNIAN 

I  might  reap  some  benefit  from  my  discovery,  to  support  me  in 
old  age  ;  having  by  a  long  series  of  attendance  on  the  sick,  both 
as  physician  and  nurse,  become  almost  worn  out,  1  came  to  the 
determination  to  appoint  some  suitable  person,  who  would  do 
justice  to  me  and  the  cause,  as  a  general  agent,  to  lake  the  lead 
in  practice,  and  give  the  necessary  information  to  those  who 
should  purcliase'the  rights,  which  would  enable  me  to  retire 
from  practice,  and  receive  a  share  of  the  profits  as  a  reward  for 
my  long  sufierings. 

After  considerable  inquiry,  1  became  acquainted  with  Elias 
Smith,  who  was  recommended  as  a  man  in  whom  I  could  con- 
fide, and  who  was  every  way  qualified  as  a  suitable  person  to 
engage  in  the  undertakmg.  I  found  him  in  Boston,  and  in  ve- 
ry poor  circumstances,  having  been  for  several  years  a  public 
preacher,  but  in  consequence  of  his  often  changing  his  religious 
principles,  and  engaging  in  different  projects  in  which  he  had 
been  unsuccessful,  he  was  now  without  a  society  or  any  visible 
means  of  supporting  himself  and  family.  He  readily  engaged 
with  me,  and  promised  to  do  every  thing  in  his  power  to  pro- 
mote my  interest,  and  extend  the  usefulness  of  my  system^  of 
practice. 

SALE  TO  SMITH — MISPLACED  CONFIDENCE. 

I  sold  him  a  family  right  in  December,  1816,  and  was  in  his 
family  during  the  winter,  for  the  purpose  of  instructing  him  in 
the  practice,  to  qualify  him  to  attend  upon  the  sick,  and  give 
information  to  others.  I  put  the  utmost  confidence  in  his  ho- 
nor, and  spared  no  pains  in  communicating  to  him,  without  re- 
serve, all  the  knowledge  1  had  gained  by  experience,  both  by 
practice  and  verbal  instruction,  under  the  expectation  that  when 
he  became  sufficienily  acquainted  with  the  system  and  prac- 
tice 1  should  be  rewarded  for  my  trouble,  by  his  faithfully  per- 
forming his  duty  towards  me,  according  to  his  promise. 

I  shall  make  no  remark  upon  my  being  disappointed  in  all^v 
my  expectations  in  regard  to  Mr.  Smith's  conduct,  and  the  treat- '^^^ 
ment  I  received  from  him,  after  ho  had  gained  a  knowledge  of  ^ 
the  practice  from  me,  to  enable  him  to  set  up  for  himself;    but  ^ 
shall  proceed  to  g-ive  a  short  account  of  what  took  place  during 
my  connection  with  him. 

BAD  CASE  OF  ITCH. 

The  first  case  1  attended  v;as  in  his  own  family.  The  son 
of  his  wife  had  the  itch  very  badly,  so  that  nearly  one  half  of 
him  was  a  raw  sore.  They  had  tried  the  usual  remedies  with- 
out any  benefit.  I  showed  him  the  use  of  No.  3,  to  wash  with, 
to  stop  the  smarting  of  the  sores  ;  then  took  some  rheumatic 
drops  and  added  about  one  fourth  part  of  the  spirits  of  turpen 


I 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  671 

tine  and  washed  him  with  it.  This  is  very  painful  when  aj>- 
piied  where  the  skin  is  off;  to  prevent  which,  mix  with  it  some 
of  the  wash  made  of  No.  3;  at  the  time  of  applying  the  above, 
give  some  of  the  composition,  especially  when  going  to  bed,  and 
occasionally  give  about  fifteen  of  the  drops,  shaken  together,  on 
loaf  sugar.  By  pursuing  this  treatment  one  week  this  boy  was 
entirely  cured. 

AGUE  IN  THE  FACE. 

The  next  case,  which  was  the  first  we  attended  together  out 
of  his  family,  was  a  young  woman  who  had  the  ague  in  her 
face.  1  showed  him  the  whole  process  of  curing  this  com- 
plaint, which  was  done  by  putting  a  small  quantity  of  No.  2  in 
a  cloth,  and  placing  it  between  her  cheek  and  teeth,  at  the  same 
time  giving  her  some  of  Nos.  2  and  3  to  take,  and  in  two  hours 
she  was  cured. 

BAD  CASE  OF  DROPSY. 

I  was  constantly  with  him  in  practice  from  February  until 
June,  during  which  time  we  attended  many  bad  cases,  with 
great  success. 

A  Mrs.  Grover,  who  had  the  dropsy,  came  to  his  house  to  be 
attended.  She  had  been  given  over  by  her  doctor  as  incurable, 
and  was  so  much  swelled  as  to  be  blind,  and  her  body  and  limbs 
in  proportion.  Mr.  Smith  undertook  her  case,  under  my  direc- 
tion, and  carried  her  through  a  course  of  the  medicine  daily  for 
nine  days,  and  then  occasionally  once  or  twice  a  week  till  she 
was  cured.  She  was  thus  attended  under  my  inspection  for 
three  weeks,  and  in  four  was  entirely  cured,  for  which  she  gave 
Mr.  Smith  about  forty  dollars.  In  this  case  I  did  a  great  part 
of  the  labor  and  he  got  the  pay. 

About  the  third  time  of  carrying  her  through  a  course  of  the 
medicine,  I  was  absent.  Her  symptoms  appeared  unfavorable, 
and  he  was  frightened ;  a  nurse  woman,  to  whom  1  had  given 
information,  and  who  had  more  experience  than  he  had,  came 
to  his  assistance,  and  by  using  injections  relieved  her,  and  pre- 
vented mortification. 

BAD  CASE,  CONSTIPATION — DYSENTERY — CURED. 

Another  case  was  of  a  man  who  came  (o  his  house,  who  was 
in  a  declining  way,  and  had  taken  a  great  quantity  of  physic 
before  he  came,  which  would  not  operate.  On  taking  my  medi- 
cine, as  he  began  to  be  warm  so  as  to  cause  motion  in  his  bow- 
els, the  physic  he  had  before  taken  operated,  and  run  him  down 
with  a  relax;  then  the  dysentery  set  in,  and  he  suffered  much 
with  pain,  and  had  discharges  of  blood.  1  gave  Mr.  Smith  di- 
rections to  use  injections,  to  clear  his  bowels  of  canker  and  pre- 


572  THE  THOMSONIAN 

vent  mortification,  but  he  neglected  it  until  I  told  him  three 
days  in  succession.  He  then  got  alarmed  and  sent  for  me,  but 
before  I  arrived  he  had  given  an  injection,  which  had  relieved 
the  patient.  He  remained  and  was  attended  about  three  weeks, 
and  went  home  in  a  comfortable  state  of  liealth.  He  paid  Mr. 
Smith  about  thirty  dollars. 

BAD  CASE  OF  RHEUMATISM. 

About  this  time  a  Mr.  Jennings  applied  to  Mr.  Smith,  having 
lost  the  use  of  one  of  iiis  arms  by  the  rheumatism.  He  had 
been  attended  by  a  doctor  for  more  than  nine  nwnths.  and  had 
been  given  over  as  incurable. 

ARM  PERISHED. 

His  arm  was  perished,  and  he  was  in  poor  circumstances, 
having  paid  all  he  had  to  the  doctor.  He  wanted  relief,  but 
said  he  could  pay  nothing  for  it  unless  he  was  cured,  so  that  he 
could  earn  something  by  his  labor.  Mr.  Smith  asked  me  if  1 
was  willing  to  assist  to  cure  him  on  these  terms,  to  which  I 
agreed.  We  carried  him  through  a  course  of  the  medicine  and 
steaming  twice  or  three  times  a  week  for  four  weeks,  when  a 
cure  was  effected.  The  last  time  he  was  carried  through  was 
on  election  day,  and  he  expressed  a  wish  to  go  on  the  common 
in  the  afternoon,  to  which  I  gave  encouragement. 

PEPPER  SAUCE ITS  EFFECT,  ETC. 

The  medicine  was  done  about  ten  o'clock — he  was  then 
steamed  and  washed  all  over  with  pepper  sauce.  He  complain- 
ed bitterly  of  the  heat,  and  threw  himself  upon  the  bed  ;  I  took 
a  spoonful  of  good  cayenne  and  put  in  two  spoonfuls  of  pepper 
sauce,  and  gave  it  to  him  to  take.  This  raised  the  inward  heat 
so  much  above  the  outward,  that  in  two  minutes  he  was  quite 
comfortable,  and  in  the  afternoon  he  went  on  the  common.  His 
arm  was  restored,  and  he  was  well  from  that  time.  He  after- 
wards, as  I  have  been  told,  paid  Mr.  Smith  forty  dollars  for  the 
cure. 

JOINTS  OUT  OF  PLACE. 

A  Mrs.  Burleigh  went  to  his  house  about  this  time,  who  had 
the  rheumatism  so  badly  that  her  joints  were  grown  out  of 
place,  and  I  assisted  in  attending  her.  She  had  never  taken 
much  medicine,  which  made  it  the  easier  to  cure  her,  as  we 
had  nothing  to  do  but  to  cure  the  disease,  without  having  to 
clear  the  system  of  poisonous  drugs,  as  is  the  case  with  most  of 
those  who  apply  for  relief  in  cases  of  long  standing.  She  was 
carried  through  the  course  of  medicine  several  times,  and 
steamed.  The  last  time  I  attended  her,  and  gave  the  medicine 
three  times,  as  usual,  which  raised  a  lively  perspiration  and  a 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  573 

fresh  color,  showing:  an  equal  and  natural  circulation,  but  did 
not  sicken  or  cause  her  to  vomit,  as  is  the  case  most  generally. 
I  mention  this  to  show  that  the  emetic  qualities  of  the  medicine 
will  not  operate  where  there  is  no  disease.  She  was  then  steam- 
ed and  washed,  and  went  out  of  doors,  being  entirely  cured  of 
her  complaint. 

LAUDANUM  TAKEN, 

About  this  time  Ira  Smith  came  home,  after  having  been  ab- 
sent about  four  years,  but  was  not  treated  with  that  affection  a 
child  expects  to  receive  in  a  father's  house  :  he  was  sent  off  to 
find  lodgings  wlwre  he  could.  About  twelve  o'clock  he  return- 
ed, not  being  able  to  obtain  lodgings,  and  called  up  a  young 
man  who  boarded  with  Mr.  Smith — he  took  a  phial  and  drank 
from  it,  and  soon  after  fell  on  the  floor. 

The  young  man  being  alarmed,  awoke  his  father;  and  in- 
formed him  of  the  circumstance,  but  before  he  got  to  his  son  he 
was  senseless,  and  stiff  in  every  joint.  I  was  in  bed  in  the 
house,  and  Mr.  Smith  came  to  me  and  requested  my  assistance, 
saying  that  he  expected  Ira  had  killed  himself  He  showed  me 
a  phial  and  asked  me  what  had  been  in  it ;  I  told  him  it  had  con- 
tained laudanum.  I  got  up  as  soon  as  possible,  and  on  going 
down,  met  Mr.  Smith  and  the  young  man,  bringing  Ira  up 
stairs. 

REMEDY — RELIEF. 

I  directed  them  to  lay  him  on  the  hearth,  and  took  a  bottle 
from  my  pocket,  which  contained  a  strong  preparation  of  Nos 
1,  2,  and  6 ;  took  his  head  between  my  knees,  his  jaws  being 
set,  and  put  my  finger  between  his  cheek  and  teeth,  and  poured 
in  some  of  the  medicine  from  the  bottle.  As  soon  as  it  reached 
the  glands  of  his  throat,  his  jaws  became  loosened,  and  he 
swallowed  some  of  it;  in  five  minutes  he  vomited — in  ten  he 
spoke — in  one  hour  he  was  clear  of  the  effects  of  the  opium — 
and  the  next  day  was  well. 

AGAIN  TAKES    LAUDANUM — DIES. 

About  four  years  after,  he  became  dejected,  in  consequence, 
as  hefsaid,  of  ill  treatment,  went  over  to  Charlestown,  took  a 
quantity  of  laudanum,  was  found  near  the  monument  sense- 
less, and  was  carried  to  the  alms-house,  where  he  died. 

A  CASE  OF  CROUP — EFFECT  OF  PHYSIC. 

I  went  home  to  attend  to  my  farm  and  get  in  my  hay,  after 
which  I  returned  to  Boston,  and  in  the  fall  went  to  Cape  Cod, 
and  on  my  return  to  Boston  I  found  Mr.  Smith's  youngest  child 
sick  with  the  quinsy,  or  rattles.  He  had  done  all  he  could  and 
given  it  over  to  die.    The  women  had  taken  charge  of  the  child 


574  THE  THOMSONIAN 

after  he  had  given  it  up,  and  had  given  it  some  physic.  I  told 
them  they  had  done  very  wrong  in  giving  physic,  for  it  was 
strictly  against  my  orders  ever  to  give  any  in  cases  where  there 
was  canker.  They  observed,  that  there  was  no  appearance 
of  canker.  1  told  them,  it  wonld  never  appear  when  they  gave 
physic,  for  it  would  remain  inside  till  mortification  decided  the 
contest. 

TREATMENT — RELIEF. 

I  began  with  the  child  by  giving  No.  2,  which  caused  violent 
struggles,  and  aroused  it  from  the  stupid  state  in  which  it  had 
lain,  until  the  moisture  appeared  in  the  mouth  ;  then  g-ave  some 
No.  3,  steeped,  and  Nos.  1  and  2,  to  start  the  canker  and  cause 
it  to  vomit. 

ACCUSED  OF  CRUELTY. 

The  women  who  were  present  accused  me  of  the  greatest 
cruelty,  because  I  brought  the  child  out  of  its  stupid  state,  and 
restored  its  sense  of  feeling,  by  which  the  life  of  the  child  was 
saved. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENT. 

The  next  morning  its  mouth  was  as  white  as  paper  with 
canker  ;  they  were  then  all  satisfied  that  I  knew  the  child's  si- 
tuation best,  and  that  I  had  saved  its  life.  I  considered  the 
child  so  much  relieved  that  the  father  and  mother  would  be 
able  to  restore  it  to  perfect  health — left  it  in  their  care  and  went 
out  of  town. 

AGAIN  GIVEN  OVER  TO  DIE. 

I  returned  the  next  day  about  noon,  and  found  that  they  had 
again  given  it  up  to  die.  Its  throat  was  so  filled  with  canker 
that  it  had  not  swallowed  any  thing  for  four  hours.  I  was  in 
suspense  whether  to  do  any  thing  for  the  child  or  not,  but  told 
the  father  and  mother  I  thought  ijf  it  was  mine  I  would  not  give 
it  up  yet :  they  v/ished  me  to  try. 

AGAIN  RELIEVED TREATMENT. 

1  took  some  small  quills  from  a  wing,  and  stripped  them  ex- 
cept about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  at  the  point,  tied  several  of 
them  together,  which  made  a  swab,  dipped  it  in  canker  tea, 
and  began  by  washing  the  mouth,  then  rinsing  it  with  cold  wa- 
ter ;  then  washed  it  vi^ith  the  tea  again,  putting  the  swab  down 
lower  in  the  throat,  which  caused  it  to  gag,  and  while  the 
throat  was  open  put  it  down  below  the  swallow,  and  took  off 
scales  of  canker,  then  rinsed  again  with  cold  water.  Soon  as 
!t  could  swallow,  gave  some  tea  of  No.  2,  a  tea  spoonful  at  a 
time,  and  it  soon  began  to  struggle  for  breath,  and  appeared  to 
be  in  great  distress,  similar  to  a  drowned  person  coming  to  life. 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A.  575 

CHILD  AGAIN  SAVED — CONFESSION  OF  FRIENDS. 

Ill  struwlins;  for  breath  it  discharged  considerable  phlegm 
from  its  lio'se  and  mouth  ;  I  then  gave  some  more  of  the  emetic 
with  canker  tea.  which  operated  favorably;  in  two  hours  it 
was  able  to  nurse,  and  it  soon  got  well,  to  the  joy  of  the  father 
and  mother— who  said  that  the  life  of  the  child  was  saved  by 
my  perseverance. 

BAD  MERCURIAL  CASE — TREATMENT — CURE. 

Soon  after  this  child  got  well,  which  was  in  the  fall  of  the 
year  1817,  Mr.  Smith  moved  to  Taunton.  Previous  to  his  re- 
moval, a  man  from  that  place,  by  the  name  of  Eddy,  applied  to 
him  to  be  cured  of  a  bad  humor  caused  by  taking  mercury.  I 
assisted  in  attending  upon  him  a  part  of  the  time.  Mr.  Smith 
began  with  him,  and  on  the  turn  of  the  disorder  the  man  and 
he  got  frightened  and  sent  for  me. 

He  had  been  kept  as  hot  as  he  could  bear,  with  the  medicine, 
for  six  liours,  which  increased  the  heat  of  the  body  sufficient  to 
overpower  the  cold,  the  heat  turned  inward  and  drove  the  cold 
on  the  outside.  This  produces  such  a  sudden  change  in  the 
whole  system,  that  a  person  unacquainted  with  the  practice 
would  suppose  they  were  dying;  but  there  is  no  danger  to  be 
apprehended,  if  proper  measures  are  taken  and  persevered  in 
by  keeping  up  the  inward  heat.  In  such  cases  steaming  is  al- 
most indispensable  ;  for  which  reason  1  have  been  obliged  to 
steam  the  patient  in  most  cases  where  the  complaint  has  been 
of  long  standing,  especially  when  much  mercury  has  been  tak- 
en, as  nothin?  will  make  it  active  but  heat.  This  man  soon 
got  well,  and  1  returned  home. 

INJURIES  SUSTAINED. 

It  has  been  my  misfortune  to  meet  with  not  only  opposition 
in  my  practice,  but  to  suffer  many  wrongs  from  some  of  those 
with  whom  1  have  had  dealings,  and  this  in  many  cases  where 
those  who  have  attempted  to  injure  me  were  among  those  that 
I  considered  under  obligations  to  me. 

LIBERALITY  IN  DEALING. 

In  selling  family  rights,  I  have  always  been  as  liberal  to  pur- 
chasers as  they  could  wish,  particularly  where  I  was  convinced 
their  circumstances  made  it  inconvenient  for  them  to  pay  the 
money  down  ;  and  I  have  been  in  the  habit  of  taking  notes, 
payable  at  a  convenient  time.  This  has  occasioned  me  consi- 
derable loss;  but  in  most  cases  the  purchasers  have  shewn  a 
disposition  to  pay  if  within  their  power — have  treated  me  with 
a  proper  respect,  and  have  been  grateful  for  the  favor.  With 
these  I  have  been  satisfied,  and  no  one  has  had  reason  to  com- 
plain of  my  want  of  generosity  towards  him. 


576  THE  THOMSONIAN 

UNGRATKFUL  RETURNS. 

There  have  been  some,  however,  who  have  taken  a  different 
course,  an  "  have  not.  only  refused  to  comply  with  their  con- 
tract, but  have,  notwithstanding^  they  have  continued  to  use  the 
medicine,  turned  against  me,  and  tried  to  do  me  all  the  harm  in 
their  power.  Such  conduct  has  caused  me  considerable  vexa- 
tion and  trouble. 

SUIT  ON  NOTE  FOR  A  RIGHT. 

I  put  one  of  the  notes  in  suit,  and  the  action  was  tried  before 
the  Boston  Police  Court.  The  defence  set  up  was,  that  the 
contract  was  void,  in  consequence  of  the  failure  of  the  patent ; 
and  also,  that  there  was  no  value  received. 

The  trial  was  before  Mr.  Justice  Orne,  and  was  managed  by 
Mr.  Morse  for  the  plaintiff;  and  Mr.  Merrill  for  the  defendant. 
The  Judge  seemed  unwilling  to  decide  alone,  and  the  case  was 
continued  for  argument  before  the  full  court. 

The  case  was  argued  before  the  three  judges,  who  all  agreed 
in  the  opinion  that  a  decision  of  the  Circuit  Court  did  not  affect 
the  patent  right,  but  was  a  mere  suspension,  in  consequence  of 
an  informality  in  the  specifications,  which  did  not  debar  me 
from  recovering  according  to  the  contract. 

SECOND  HEARING. 

After  this  decision,  another  hearing  was  had,  and  another  at- 
tempt made  to  prove  that  the  defendant  had  not  been  furnished 
by  me  with  the  necessary  information  to  enable  him  to  practice 
with  safety,  but  in  this  he  failed  altogether. 

IMPORTANT  TESTIMONY. 

In  the  course  of  the  trial,  a  great  number  of  gentlemen  of  un- 
doubted veracity  were  brought  forward  to  prove  the  utility  of 
my  system  of  practice,  who  gave  the  most  perfect  testimony  in 
its  favor.  Among  the  witnesses,  an  eminent  physician  of  Bos- 
ton volunt..rily  came  forward,  and  gave  a  very  fair  and  candid 
statement  in  favor  of  ils  utility,  the  value  of  my  discoveries,  and 
the  important  additions  1  had  made  to  the  materia  medica. 

TRIUMPHANT  RESULT. 

The  judge  took  several  days  to  make  up  his  judgment,  and 
finally  decided  in  my  favor,  giving  me  the  full  amount  of  my 
claim;  thus  settling  the  principle,  that  obligations  given  for  fa- 
mily rights  were  good  in  law. 

This  was  the  first  time  1  had  ever  had  a  chance  to  prove  the 
utility  of  my  medicine  and  system  of  practice  before  a  court  of 
law — having  always  before  been  prevented  by  some  manage- 
ment of  the  court. 


MATERIA    MEDICA 


577 


INDEX, 

To  the  Historical  Sketch  of  Saynuel  ThomsoiiL  Discoveries  and 
Early  Practice. 


ABUSE,  where  benefit  rec'd,  505 

by  Dr.  French,  540 

rewarded,  568 

Adversity,  friendship  in,  516 

Ague  in  the  lace,  treatment  of,  571 

BIRTH  and  parentage,  493 

of  daughter,  495 

second  do.  496 

third  child,  497 

fourth  do.  498 

Bleeding  at  the  lungs,  509 

Balance  of  power  to  be  observed,  532 

Bruised  foot,  549 

Barton,  Dr.,  admission  of,  558 

Butternut,  560 

COLIC,  49.5,  501,  502 

Canker,  496,  .507,  511,  520 

Croup,  497,573,  574 

Consultation  about  practice,  498 

Cayenne  pepper,  507 

Child-bed  fever,  510 

Child  saved,  opinion  of  friends,  575 

Compensation,  none  received,  511 

Consumption,  cases  of,  .503,  510, 

521,  524,  526,  .533,  534,  535,  549 
Case,  chronic  nervous,  Mrs.  Rich- 
ardson, 512,           cured,  513 
Cancer,  510,  514,  565 
how  treated  by  dcotors,  514 
Cut,  bad  case,  cure  of,  517 
Cures,  effect  of,  521 
wondered  at,  522 
Confinement,  550,  560 
Confession,  infamou?,  552 
Caution,  567 
Constipation,  treated,  571 
DOCTORS,  disagreement  among,  495 
honest,  525 
villany,  528 
their  object,  54S 
number  of,  §50 
opinion  of,  550 
management  of,  551 
out  of  business,  554 
threaten,  561 
offended,  562 
privileged  to  kill,  524 
Diseases,  common  origin  of,  506 
Dropsy,  cases  of  treatment,  510, 

524,  525,  536,  550,  559,  571 

Dysentery  ,513,  520,  571 

great  success  in,  520,  519 

bad  cases  in  Deerfield,  532 

cure  of,  519 

Digestion,  syrup  for,  520 

Depletion,  remarks  and  treatm't,  536 


EDUCATED  Men,  opinion  of,    504 
Emetics,  507 

FAMILY  Rights,  liberality  in,     575 
Fever  and  ague,  516 

Fever-sore,  treatment  of,  518 

French,  Dr.,  plot  by,  523 

Fits,  495,  513,  518 

Freezing,  treatment  and  cure,  563 
simplicity  of  cure,  re- 
marks, &c.  564 
Fever,  scarlet,  496 
long,  497 
observations  on,  508 
all  kinds  from  same  cause,  508 
yellow,  508,  515,  521 
treatment  of,  515,  558 
cured,  516 
physic  dangerous  in,  530 
two  cases  of,  511  tieated,  503 
lung.  517 
spotted  514 
severe  case  cured,  537 
very  bad  case  of  child,  538 
remarks  on,  538 
violent  case,  treatment,  560 
great  success  on  Cape  Cod,  566 
several  sick,  treatment  of, 

56'j,      567 
caution  in  attending,  567 

great  mortality  of,  567 

reappearance  of,  sent  for 

in  haste,  568 

great  success,  568 

GOUT,  how  treated  by  doctors,  531 
relieved,  531 

Gratitude,  536 

HEAT,  internal,  507 

INFLAMMATION,  cold  water 

for,  496 

Investigation,  talent  for,  494 

Ingratitude  of  cured  patients,  509, 

516,      576 
friends,  510,  527 

for  benefits  conferred,  555 
Injuries  sustained,  575 

Instruction  to  Judge  Rice,  Stc,      530 
Itch,  570 

JOINTS  out  of  place,  572 

Judgments,  548 

KNOWLEDGE,  acquired  by  ex- 
periments, 50O 
LABOR,  hard,  commences,  493 
Lobelia  first  used,                            495 
Laudanum  taken,  573 
relief  from,  573 
death  caused  by,  573 


578 


THE   THOMSONIAN 


Law- suit,  on  account  of  a  family 

riglit,  576 

first  lienring,  576 

second  hearing,  576 

important  testimony,        576 

triumphant  result,  576 

MARRIAGE,  495 

Measles,  case  and  treatment,  500,  501 

Medicine,  efl'ect  of,  513 

Medical  knowledge,  value  cf,         531 

Murder,  Thomson  charged  with, 

532,     539 
indicted  for,        539 
attempted  on,     549 
Mysterious  actions  of  Mrs.  Lov- 

ett,  553 

Mysteries,  unaccountable,  553 

Medical  students,  anecdote  of,        565 
IVIarsh  rosemary,  565 

substitute  for,    566 
Mortality,  great,  5'17 

Mercurial  sores,  575 

treatment  and  cure,         575 
NERVES,  medicine  for,  520 

Nettle  rash,  case  and  treatment,    523 
Nose,  sore,  dangerous,  561 

OPPOSITION,   violent,  by  Dr. 

French,  522 

Orders  disobeyed,  551 

PATIENT,  unexpected,  510 

Physicians,  blind  confidence  in,  500 
eminent  civility  of,  505 
alarmed,  527 

Poisons,  use  of  condemned,  504 

Perspiration,  effect  of,  513 

Poison,  supposed  case  of,  514 

Public  sentiment,  517 

Payment,  usual,  513,  528 

Practice,  successful,  517,  521 

and  cures,  remarks  on,     539 
in  Portland,  559 

extended,  562 

its  utility  proved  before 
a  court  of  law,  576 

Physic,  consequence  of,  530,  573 

People,  remarks  of,  530 

Pregnancy,  over  time,  559 

Pepper  vinegar,  poisoned,  561 

effects  on  patient, 
and  cure,  561 

Pipsissiway,  useful  in  cancers,       566 
Perished  arm,  572 

Pepper  sauce,  its  effects  in  bath- 
ing. 572 
QUACK,  Thomson  called,  509 
ROOTS  and  herbs,  gathering  of,  49S 
Rattle-snake's  oil,  first  used,  497 
Remedy,  general,  506 
Rheumatism,  521,525,  572 
Rickets,  533 
Rush,  Dr.  his  treatment  of  yellow 

fever,  558 


Relax,  case  of,  560 

Richardson,  Mrs.,  a  remarkable 

case,  512     cure.         513 

SCALD-HEAD,  '        527 

Steaming,  first  praticed,  496,  509 

benefit  of,  509 

new  method  of,  511 

when  established,  567 

by  the  doctors,  514 

Small  pox,  its  nature,  501 

Sprains,  treatment  of,  520 

Salt-rheum  treated,  531,  533 

sugar  of  lead  used,  533 

Sickness  and   death   of  Captain 

Tricky,  53S 

Salt-petre,  dangerous  poison,  562 

remedy  for,  562 

Society,  569 

Smith,  Elias,  agent,  570 

Sick,  treatment  of,  507 

THOMSON,  Samuel,  birth  and 

parentage,  493 

severe  parental  treat- 
ment, ^       493 
marriage,  birth  of  first 

daughter,  sickness,     495 
Mrs.,  confinement,  2d 

child,  496 

third  child  born,  497 

medical  skill  appreci- 
ated, 497 
not  expecting  to  prac- 
tice, 498 
second   son   born, — no 

midwife,  498 

his  own  physician,  498 

instruction  to  children,  498 
third  son  born,  &c.  499 

severe  sickness,  499 

restored  fifth  case  giv- 
en over,  499 
success  appreciated,       499 
fifth  son  and  3d  daugh- 
ter born,                       499 
diffidence,  503 
consults  about  practice,  504 
his  ideas  of  his  educa- 
tion, 504 
determines  to  practice,  505 
theory,  505 
unremitted  attention — 

improvement,  &c.        508 
his  reasons  for  leaving 

home,  515 

visits  New- York,  515 

returns  home,  516,  522 

collects  medicine,  516 

visits  Vermont,  518 

attends  sick  in  Georgia,  220 
at  Salisbury  Mills,  and 

practices  there,  521 

persecuted,  &c.  521 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


579 


Thomson,  S.  returns  to  Salisbury, 

522 

charged  with  murder. 

539 

theory  explained, 

530 

practical  application  of 

theory, 

532 

remarks  on  his  success, 

539 

indicted  for  murder, 

539 

advised  to  escape, 

540 

confined  in  a  dungeon, 

5^11 

fare  in  prison, 

541 

relieved  by  a  friend. 

541 

sympathy  for  fellow  pri- 

soner. 

542 

consultation — policy  of 

enemies. 

542 

time  for  trial,  bad  air  in 

prison,  &c. 

542 

visited  by  son-in-law. 

543 

indictment  read, 

543 

removed  from  cell — ef- 

fect of  fire. 

544 

trial  put  off — attention 

of  friends. 

544 

preparation  for  trial,  &c 

544 

arraigned  and  pleads. 

545 

testimony,  &,c.  545, 

546 

acquittal. 

547 

attention  of  friends, 

54.8 

health  impaired, 

548 

called  to  Eastport, 

549 

trouble  with  nurse  and 

doctor, 

551 

practice,  societies,  &.c. 

552 

returns   to  Portsmouth, 

552,  554, 

558 

returns  to  Eastport  witli 

I 

student, 

552 

Thomson  publishes  book  of  direc 
tions, 
enemies  and  friends, 
thoughts  of  a  patent, 
goes  to  Washington, 
consults  with  Gov.  Chit- 
tenden, 
difficulty  in  obtaining  his 

patent, 
interview  with  Drs.  Bar- 
ton and  Rush, 
trial  partly  published, 
starts  for  Philadelphia, 
arrives  at  do. 
visits  Washington, 
sent  for  in  haste, 
practiced  thirty  years, 
his  system,  agent,  &c. 
sale  to  Smith,  dishones- 
ty, &c. 
Treatment,  outrageous. 
Typhus  Fever, 

VEGETATION,    talent  for  in- 
vestigating, 
Venereal,  first  and  second  cases, 
easily  cured, 
patient  killed  by  doc- 
tors, 
Thomson's  opinion  of, 
relieved, 
WITCHCRAFT, 

remarks  on, 
War  declared, 
Witnesses  sworn, 

surprise  the  Judges, 
false  swearing  of, 
good, 


555 
455 
555 
556 

556 


557 
562 
562 
564 
565 
568 
569 
569 

570 
528 
533 

494 
526 
526 

.^27 
527 
528 
553 
554 
554 
545 
546 
546 
546 


680  THE  THOMSONIAN 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  VEGETABLE  SUBSTANCES 

USED  BY  SAMUEL  TH03IS0N,    TO  SUSTAIN  HIS  SYSTEM  OP 

VITALITY  IN  MATTER. 

We  shall  be  as  concise  in  our  description  of  the  different  ve- 
getaJDle  remedies  used  by  Dr.  Thomson  as  possible,  knowing  as 
we  do,  that  the  patrons  of  this  work  wish  his  experience,  and 
not  that  of  tlie  regular  physicians.  We  shall  endeavor,  there- 
fore, not  to  lumber  the  work  with  useless  remedies,  or  with  too 
many  of  those  of  others,  but  shall  confine  ourself  mostly  to  our 
own  experience,  and  to  Thomsonian  principles  and  treatment 
generally,  without  quoting  as  good  authority  those  whose  sys- 
tems of  practice  we  profess  to  have  passed  long  since  in  point  of 
correct  principles  and  practical  success.  Consequently,  we  do 
not  wish  to  retrace  our  steps,  and  again  pass  over  the  battle- 
field, for  the  sake  of  the  fight,  as  the  victory  has  already  been 
won,  and  the  laurels  acquired. 

For  what,  then,  shall  we  contend?  We  answer,  teach  the 
people  to  respect  themselves  and  their  own  judgment  in  rela- 
tion to  medicine,  and  to  keep  clear  of  the  ^l^^'  vegetable  and 
mineral  poisons  and  their  advocates,  „r^  for  the  sake  of  bo- 
dily health  and  domestic  peace. 

The  remedies  and  treatment  of  the  different  diseases  to  which 
we  are  subject  are  made  so  plain,  that  any  person  of  ordinary 
capacity  can,  by  following  the  rules  and  directions  in  this  work, 
practice  at  first  in  simple  forms  of  disease  successfully.  And  in 
the  most  violent  cases  with  much  better  success  than  attends 
the  practice  of  the  most  eminent  physician  of  the  old  school, 
whose  materia  medica  to  cure  the  sick  is  composed  of  the  most 
violent  vegetable  and  mineral  poisons — such  as  would  destroy 
the  most  robust  person  in  health,  and  such  as  the  wicked  have 
recourse  to,  to  destroy  the  lives  of  others  or  to  commit  suicide. 
If  arsenic,  nitre,  and  opium,  will  kill  those  in  health,  when  giv- 
en for  the  purpose  of  destruction,  will  they  cure  the  sick,  when 
given  by  a  man  of  learning,  on  account  of  his  diploma?  And 
if  red  raspberry,  witch-hazle,  and  sumac,  are  innocent  substan- 
ces by  nature,  can  they  be  made  poisons,  because  administered 
by  a  man  who  does  not  understand  latin,  and  has  not  obtained 
a  diploma? 


I.oIm'Ii:!    iiilhiia. 

///t//ti/t  I'r  U'i7t/  fi^/'/iic,',  /.'//I-  /'/ii//// 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  581 


LOBELIA    INFLATA— No.  1. 
Emetic  Herb — Indian  Tobacco — Eyebright^  (^'c. 

EMETIC,  STIMULANT,  EXPECTORANT,  DIAPHORETIC. 
To  cleanse  the  stomach,  remove  obstructions,  and  promote  perspiration. 

Lobelia  Inflata.  Herba  Semina.  The  herb  and  seed. — 
Calyx  five  cleft.  Corolla  irregular,  five  parted,  cleft  on  the  up- 
per side  nearly  to  the  base.  Anthers  united  into  a  tube.  Stig- 
ma two  lobed.  Capsule  inferior  or  semi-superior,  two  or  three 
celled,  two  valved  at  the  apex. 

The  lobelia  inflata  is  a  biennial,  indiginous  plant,  usually 
from  12  to  18  inches  in  height,  with  a  fibrous  root,  and  a  very 
hairy,  solitary,  erect,  and  angular  stem,  much  branched  about 
two  thirds  of  the  way.  rising  considerably  above  the  summit 
of  the  highest  branches.  The  leaves  are  scattered,  sessile, 
acute,  serrate,  oval,  and  hairy.  The  flowers  are  disposed  in 
numerous  leafy  terminal  racemes,  and  supported  on  short  foot- 
stalks. The  segments  of  the  calyx  are  linear  and  pointed.  The 
flower,  which  is  of  a  delicate  bluish  color,  has  a  border  labiate, 
the  upper  lip  beinsf  divided  into  two,  and  the  lower  into  three 
acute  segments.  The  pod  is  an  oval,  inflated  capsule,  crowned 
with  the  persistent  calyx,  and  containing  in  two  cells  numerous 
very  small  brown  seeds. 

The  lobelia  inflata  is  a  very  common  plant,  growing  in  pas- 
tures, on  the  road  side,  and  in  neglected  grain  fields,  through- 
out the  country.  Its  flowers  appear  towards  the  end  of  July, 
and  continue  to  expand  in  succession  until  the  occurrence  of 
frost.  When  wounded  or  broken,  the  plant  exudes  a  milky 
juice,  possessing  active  emetic  properties. 

All  parts  of  the  plant  are  possessed  of  medicinal  activity;  but 
the  seed,  leaves,  and  inflated  capsules,  are  all  that  are  used  as 
medicine  by  Dr.  Thomson. 

The  plant  should  be  collected  in  August  or  September,  when 
the  capsules  have  become  a  little  yellow.  Then  the  seed  is 
ripe.  The  stalk  should  be  separated  between  the  leavs  and  the 
roots,  and  the  herb  carefully  laid  upon  a  sheet,  thinly  spread 
out  to  dry,  in  order  to  preserve  the  seed,  leaves,  and  capsules. 
When  thoroughly  dried,  take  a  straight  stick  and  whip  the 
herb,  and  the  leaves  and  capsules  are  easily  separated  from  the 
stalks,  and  the  seeds  are  ejected  from  the  capsules,  all  of  wliich 
setde,  leaving  the  naked  stalks  uppermost,  which  may  be  re- 
moved, and  you  have  the  herb  and  seed  together.  Now  gather 
the  four  corners  of  the  sheet,  and  the  substance  settles  into  the 
centre.  Shake  the  sheet  latterally  several  times,  and  you  may 
then  remove  the  leaves  and  capsules,  and  have  the  pure  seed  at 


582  THE    THOMSONIAN 

the  bottom :  or  the  seed  may  be  sifted  through  a  fine  sieve,  to 
separate  it  from  the  herb.  The  seed  should  be  bottled  close, 
and  the  herb  may  be  kept  in  boxes,  all  of  which  should  be  dry. 

The  dried  leaves  of  lobelia  hav^e  a  slight  irritating  odor,  and 
when  chewed,  though  at  first  without  much  taste,  soon  produce 
a  burning,  acrid  impression  upon  the  posterior  parts  of  the 
tongue,  and  palate,  very  closely  resembling  that  occasioned  by 
tobacco,  and  attended  in  like  manner  with  a  flow  of  saliva,  and 
a  nauseous  effect  upon  the  stomach.  The  powder  is  of  a  green- 
ish color.  The  plant  yields  its  active  properties  readily  to  wa- 
ter and  alcohol;  and  water  distilled  from  it  retains  its  acrid 
taste.  The  lobelia  contains  a  volatile  oil,  upon  which  its  odor 
depends,  and  an  acrid  alkaline  principle,  to  which  its  effects 
upon  the  system  are  probably  ascribablc.  The  seed  contains  at 
least  twice  as  much  of  this  principle  in  proportion  as  the  whole 
plant. 

Lobelia  is  an  emetic,  and,  in  small  doses,  a  diaphoretic  and 
expectorant.  The  leaves  or  capsules,  chewed  for  a  short  time, 
occasion  giddiness,  headache,  tremors,  and  ultimately  nausea 
and  vomitina;.  When  swallowed  in  full  dose,  the  medicine  ge- 
nerally produces  vomiting,  attended  with  copious  perspiration, 
and  a  general  relaxation.  Its  effects  in  doses  too  large,  or  too 
often  repeated,  are  great  anxiety  and  extreme  prostration  of 
strength,  and  the  appearance  of  the  patient  is  very  alarming  to 
those  who  are  unacquainted  with  its  operation  ;  but  to  the  prac- 
titioner those  symptoms  are  almost  an  every  day  occurrence, 
consequently  it  gives  him  no  uneasiness  for  the  safety  of  the 
patient.  In  two  or  three  hours  the  patient  is  through  with  the 
operation,  and  possesses  as  much  vigor,  if  not  more,  than  im- 
mediately previous  to  the  commencement  of  the  course.  It  this 
mf'dicine  does  not  operate  as  an  emetic  after  being  taken  in  rea- 
sonable quantities,  in  from  three  to  five  hours,  it  will  pass  off 
the  same  as  any  other  harmless  substance,  and  leave  the  person 
with  a  full  flow  of  vigor  and  spirits,  the  same  as  if  it  had  not 
been  taken. 

Very  unlike  the  tartarized  antimony  or  ipecac,  is  the  ope- 
ration of  the  lobelia  inflata.  Those  articles,  when  taken  to 
cause  vomitinof,  and  foilmg  to  produce  the  desired  effect,  leave 
the  patient  with  a  distressing  nausea,  that  is  not  got  rid  of  ma- 
ny times  for  several  days.  Fatal  effects  are  frequently  the  re- 
sult of  taking  tartarized  antimony  in  too  large  quantities  ;  but 
safe  and  salutary  are  the  effects  of  the  lobelia,  in  almost  every 
form  that  it  can  be  used,  even  by  the  most  inexperienced  hand, 
if  he  but  follows  the  directions  for  its  use. 

The  first  knowledge  I  ever  had  of  it,  was  obtained  by  acci- 
dent more  than  fifty  years  ago,  and  I  never  had  any  informa- 
tion whatever  concerning  it,  except  what  I  have  gained  by  my 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  583 

own  experience.  A  great  deal  has  been  said  of  late  about  this 
plant,  both  in  its  favor  and  against  its  utility  as  a  medicine  ; 
but  all  that  the  faculty  have  said  or  published  concerning  it, 
only  shows  their  ignorance  on  the  subject ;  for  there  is  very 
little  truth  in  what  they  have  stated  concerning  its  medicinal 
properties,  except  where  tliey  admit  it  to  be  a  certain  cure  for 
the  asthma,  one  of  the  most  distressing  complaints  that  human 
nature  is  subject  to.  It  is  a  truth  which  cannot  be  disputed, 
that  all  they  have  known  about  this  article,  and  the  experi- 
ments that  have  been  made  to  ascertain  its  value,  originated  in 
my  making  use  of  it  in  my  practice. 

In  the  course  of  my  practice,  a  number  of  the  doctors  disco- 
vered that  tlie  medicme  I  made  use  of  produced  etfects  which 
astonished  them,  and  whicli  they  could  not  account  for.  This 
led  them  to  conclude,  that  because  it  was  so  powerful  in  re- 
moving disease,  it  must  be  poison.  This,  I  think,  can  be  very 
satisfactorily  accounted  for.  They  have  no  knowledge  of  any 
thing  in  their  system  which  is  capable  of  producing  a  powerful 
effect  upon  the  sick  except  what  is  poisonous,  and  therefore  na- 
turally form  their  opinions  agreeable  to  this  erroneous  theory. 

There  is  a  power  to  preserve  life,  and  a  power  to  produce 
death,  which  of  course  are  directly  opposed  to  each  other;  and 
whatever  tends  to  promote  life  cannot  produce  death,  let  its 
power  be  ever  so  great.  In  this  consists  all  the  difference  be- 
tween my  system  of  practice  and  that  of  the  learned  doctors. 

In  consequence  of  their  thus  forming  an  erroneous  opinion  of 
this  herb,  which  they  had  no  knowledge  of,  they  undertook  to 
represent  it  as  a  deadly  poison  ;  and  in  order  to  destroy  my 
practice  they  raised  a  hue-and-cry  about  my  Killing  my  patients 
by  administering  it  to  them.  Some  of  the  faculty  even  made 
oath  that  it  was  poison,  and  when  taken  into  the  stomach,  if  it 
did  not  cause  immediate  vomiting  it  was  certain  death.  It  is 
unnecessary  for  me  now  to  point  out  the  falsity  of  this,  for  the 
fact  is  pretty  well  known,  that  there  is  no  death  in  it ;  but  on 
the  contrary,  that  there  is  no  vegetable  that  the  earth  produces, 
more  harmless  in  its  effects  on  the  human  system,  and  no  one 
more  powerfid  in  removing  disease  and  pronjoting  health. 

There  is  no  mention  made  of  this  herb  by  any  author  that  1 
have  been  able  to  find,  previous  to  my  discovering  it,  excepting 
Linnaeus,  who  has  given  a  correct  description  of  it,  under  the 
luune  of  lobelia  infiata  ;  but  there  is  nothing  said  of  its  medical 
properties  ;  it  is  therefore  reasonable  to  conclude  that  they  were 
not  known  till  I  discovered  the  fact,  and  proved  the  plant  to  be 
useful. 

When  the  faculty  first  discovered  that  I  used  this  herb  in  my 
practice,  they  declared  it  to  be  a  deadly  poison  ;  and  while  per- 
secuting me  by  every  means  in  their  power,  and  representing 


584  THE    THOMSONIAN 

to  the  world  that  1  killed  my  patients  with  it,  they  were  very 
ready  to  call  it  my  medicine,  and  allow  it  to  be  my  discovery; 
but  since  their  ignorance  of  it  has  been  exposed,  and  they  find 
it  is  going  to  become  an  article  of  great  vakie,  an  attempt  seems 
to  beniaking  to  rob  me  of  all  the  credit  of  causing  its  value  to 
be  known,  and  the  profits  which  belong  to  me  for  the  discove- 
ry— in  which  some  who  have  been  instructed  by  me  are  ready 
to  join,  for  the  purpose  of  promoting  their  own  interest  at  my 
expense. 

Wliat  is  quoted  in  the  Dispensatory,  from  the  Rev,  Dr.  M. 
Culler,  concerning  this  herb,  is  in  general  correct,  particularly 
as  it  regards  its  being  a  specific  for  the  asthma,  though  he  la- 
bored under  many  mistaken  notions  about  its  effects  when  tak- 
en into  the  stomach.  He  says,  "if  the  quantity  be  a  little  in- 
creased, it  operates  as  an  emetic  and  then  as  a  cathartic,  its  ef- 
fects being  much  the  same  as  those  of  the  common  emetics  and 
cathartics?'  In  this  he  is  mistaken,  for  it  is  entirely  different 
from  any  other  emetic  known  ;  and  as  to  its  operating  as  a  ca- 
thartic, I  never  knew  it  to  have  such  an  effect  in  all  my  prac- 
tice. And  1  certamly  ought  to  know  something  about  it,  after 
having  made  use  of  it  for  more  than  forty  years,  and  adminis- 
tering it  in  every  form  and  manner  in  which  it  can  be  given, 
and  for  every  disease  that  has  come  within  my  knowledge. 

It  appears  that  all  the  knowledge  he  and  other  doctors  have 
got  of  this  herb's  being  useful  in  curing  disease,  particularly  in 
the  asthma,  was  obtained  from  me;  for  when  I  was  prosecuted 
I  was  obliged  to  expose  my  discoveries,  to  show  the  falsity  of 
the  indictment. 

Dr.  Cutler  was  broug'ht  forward  as  a  witness  at  my  trial,  to 
prove  the  virtues  of  this  plant  by  his  testimony — that  he  cured 
himself  of  the  asthma  with  it.  He  says,  the  first  information 
he  had  of  its  being  good  for  that  complaint,  was  from  Dr.  Dru- 
ry,  of  Marblehead.  In  the  fall  of  the  year  1807,  I  introduced 
the  emetic  herb,  tinctured  in  spirit,  for  the  asthma  and  other 
complaints  of  the  lungs,  and  cured  several  of  the  consumption. 
In  ISOS,  I  cured  a  woman  in  Newington  of  the  asthma,  who 
had  not  laiii  in  her  bed  for  six  months.  I  gatheied  some  of  the 
plants,  about  the  size  of  a  dollar,  bruised  them,  and  tinctured 
them  in  spirits,  gave  her  the  tincture,  and  she  lay  in  bed  the 
first  nio-ht.  I  showed  her  what  it  was,  and  how  to  prepare  and 
use  it,  aiid  by  taking  this  and  other  things  according  to  my  di- 
rection, she  enjoyed  a  comfortable  state  of  iiealth  for  twelve 
years,  and  has  not  been  obliged  to  sit  up  one  night  since.  The 
same  fall  I  used  it  in  Beverly  and  Salem  ;  and  there  can  be  no 
doubt  but  all  the  information  concerning  the  value  of  this  arti- 
cle was  obtained  from  my  practice. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  685 

After  Dr.  Cutler  had  ^r'ven  his  testimony  of  the  virtues  of 
this  herb,  and  ihe  doctors  have  become  convinced  of  iis  vahie, 
they^cotne  forward  and  say  it  is  ^ood  niedicuie  in  skiH'ul  hands. 
Who,  I  would  ask,  is  more  skilful  tiian  he  who  discovered  it, 
and  langht  ilieni  how  to  prepare  and  use  it  in  curing  one  of  the 
njost  distressing  compUiints  known  ?  If  it  is  a  good  medicine, 
it  is  mine,  and  i  ameniiiled  to  the  credit  of  brniijing  it  into  nse, 
and  have  paid  dear  f  >r  it ;  if  it  is  poison,  the  doctors  do  not 
need  it,  as  they  have  enough  of  that  now.  Dr.  Thacher  un- 
dertakes to  make  it  appear  that  the  fatal  effects  he  tells  about  its 
producing,  were  owing  to  the  qinmtity  given  ;  and  says  I  admi- 
iii><tered  a  tea  spoonful  of  the  powder;  and  when  he  conjes  to 
give  directions  for  usinjif  it,  says  that  from  ten  to  twenty  {Trains 
may  be  given  with  safety.  It  appears  strange  that  different 
terms  should  produce  such  different  effects  in  the  operation  of 
medicine.  If  a  tea  spoonful  is  given  by  an  empiric,  its  ef}c,cts 
are  Attal  ;  but  if  the  same  quantity  is  administered  by  a  learned 
doctor,  and  called  grains,  it  is  a  useful  medicine ! 

It  is  said  by  Dr.  Thncher,  that  it  was  employed  by  the  abo- 
rigines and  by  those  who  deal  in  Indian  remedies  ;  and  others 
who  attempt  to  rob  me  of  the  credit  of  the  discovery  affect  to 
believe  the  same  thing;  but  this  is  founded  altoirether  Uf)Oii 
conjecture,  for  they  cannot  produce  a  single  instance  of  its  hav- 
ing been  employed  as  a  medicine  till  I  made  use  of  it.  The 
fact  is,  it  is  a  new  article,  wholly  unknown  to  the  medical  fa- 
culty till  I  inirodiieed  it  into  use  ;  and  the  best  evidence  of  this 
is  that  they  are  now  ignorant  of  its  powers,  and  all  the  knciw- 
ledofe  they  have  of  it  has  been  obtained  from  my  practice.  It 
would  be  folly  for  me  to  deny,  tliat  it  may  have  been  used  by 
the  natives  of  this  country  ;  but  one  thing"  I  avn  certain  of,  that 
I  never  had  any  knowledire  of  their  using  it,  nor  ever  received 
any  information  concerning  it  from  them,  or  any  one  else. 

This  plant  is  common  in  all  parts  of  the  country.  Wfierever 
the  land  is  fertile  enough  to  yield  support  for  its  iiihabitans,  it 
may  be  found.  It  is  confined  to  no  soil  which  is  fit  for  culiiva- 
tion,  from  the  highest  mountains  to  the  lowest  valleys,  in  hot 
and  wet  seasons  it  is  most  plenty  on  dry  and  warm  lands ;  in 
hot  and  dry  seasons,  on  clayey  and  heavy  lands.  When  the 
season  is  cold,  either  wet  or  dry,  it  rarely  makes  its  appearance; 
and  if  the  summer  and  fall  are  very  dry  the  seed  does  not  come 
up,  and  of  course  there  will  be  very  little  to  be  found  the  next 
season. 

I  have  been  in  search  of  this  herb  from  Boston  to  Canada, 
and  was  not  able  to  collect  more  than  two  pounds,  and  in  some 
seasons  1  have  not  been  able  to  collect  any.  I  mention  this  to 
show  the  uncertainty  of  its  growth,  and  to  put  the  people  on 
then  guard  to  be  careful  and  lay  up  a  good  stock  of  it  when 

38 


686  THE  THOMSONIAN 

plenty.  In  the  year  1807.  if  I  had  offered  a  reward  of  a  thou- 
sand dollars  for  a  pound  of  this  herb  1  could  not  have  obtained 
it.  I  have  seen  the  time  when  1  would  have  given  two  dollars 
for  an  ounce  of  the  powder,  but  there  was  none  to  be  had ;  and 
this  fact  taught  me  to  lay  up  all  I  could  obtain  when  it  was 
plenty. 

In  seasons  when  this  herb  is  plenty,  it  may  be  found  growing 
in  highways  and  pastures,  by  the  side  of  old  turnpikes,  and  in 
stubble  land,  particularly  where  it  has  been  laid  down  to  grass 
the  year  before.  When  grass  is  scarce  it  is  eaten  by  cattle,  and 
is  hard  to  be  found  when  full  grown.  It  is  a  wild  plant,  and  a 
native  of  this  country ;  but  there  is  no  doubt  of  its  bemg  com- 
mon to  other  countries.  It  may  be  transplanted  and  cultivated 
in  gardens,  and  will  be  much  larger  and  more  vigorous  than 
when  growing  wild.  If  some  stalks  are  left,  it  will  sow  itself, 
and  probably  may  be  produced  from  the  seed  ;  but  how  long 
the  seeds  remain  in  the  ground  before  they  come  up,  I  do  not 
know,  having  made  no  experiments  to  ascertain  the  fact.  It 
is  certain  that  it  is  produced  from  the  seed,  and  there  is  no  good 
reason  to  suppose  that  it  may  not  be  cultivated  in  gardens  from 
the  seed,  as  well  as  other  vegetables.  I  think  it  most  probable, 
however,  from  the  nature  of  the  plant,  that  it  will  not  come  up 
till  the  seeds  have  laid  at  least  one  winter  in  the  ground. 

This  plant  is  different  in  one  very  important  particular  from 
all  others  that  1  have  a  knowledge  of,  and  that  is,  that  the  same 
quantity  will  produce  the  same  effect  in  all  stages  of  its  growth, 
from  its  first  appearance  till  it  comes  to  maturity.  But  the  best 
time  for  gathering  it,  as  has  before  been  mentioned,  is  when  the 
leaves  and  pods  begin  to  turn  yellow,  for  then  the  seed  is  ripe, 
and  you  have  all  that  can  be  had  of  the  plant.  It  should  then 
be  cut  and  kept  clean,  and  spread  in  a  large  chamber  or  loft  to 
dry,  where  it  is  open  to  the  air  in  the  day  time,  and  to  be  shut 
from  the  damp  air  during  the  night.  When  perfectly  dry,  shake 
out  the  seed,  and  sift  through  a  common  meal  sieve,  and  pre- 
serve it  by  itself;  then  beat  off  the  leaves  and  pods  from  the 
stalks,  and  preserve  them  clean. 

This  herb  may  be  prepared  for  use  in  three  different  ways, 
viz.  1st.  The  powdered  leaves  and  pods.  2d.  A  tincture, 
made  from  the  green  herb  with  spirit.  3d.  The  seeds  reduced 
to  a  fine  powder,  and  compounded  with  Nos.  2  and  6. 

Medical  uses. — 1.  After  the  leaves  and  pods  are  separated 
from  the  stalks,  grind  them  or  pound  them  in  a  mortar  to  a  fine 
powder,  sift  it  through  a  fine  sieve  and  preserve  it  from  the  air. 
This  is  the  most  common  preparation,  and  may  be  given  in 
many  diflferent  ways,  either  by  itself  or  compounded  with  other 
articles.  For  a  common  dose,  take  a  tea  spoonful  of  this  pow- 
der, with  the  same  quantity  of  sugar,  in  half  a  teacupiul  of 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  587 

warm  water,  or  a  tea  of  No.  3  may  be  used  instead  of  the  wa- 
ter ;  this  dose  may  be  taken  all  at  one  time,  or  at  three  times,  at 
intervals  often  minutes.  For  a  yonng  child,  strain  off  the  li- 
quor, and  give  a  part  as  circumstances  may  require. 

2.  To  prepare  the  tincture,  take  the  green  herb  in  any  stage 
of  its  growth  ;  if  the  small  plants  are  used,  take  roots  and  all, 
put  them  into  a  mortar  and  pound  them  fine,  then  add  the  same 
quantity  of  good  spirits  ;  when  well  pounded  and  worked  toge- 
ther, strain  it  through  a  fine  cloth  and  squeeze  and  press  it  hard 
to  get  out  all  the  juice ;  save  the  liquor  in  bottles  close  stopped 
for  use.  Good  vinegrar  or  pepper-sauce  may  be  used  instead  of 
the  spirit.  Prepared  in  this  manner,  it  is  an  effectual  counter- 
poison,  either  taken,  or  externally  applied.  It  is  also  an  excel- 
lent medicine  for  the  asthma,  and  all  complaints  of  the  lungs. 
This  is  the  only  way  in  which  the  doctors  have  made  use  of 
the  emetic  herb,  and  they  acknowledge  it  to  be  one  of  the  best 
remedies  in  many  complaints  that  has  been  found,  though  they 
know  but  little  about  it.  For  a  dose,  take  from  half  to  a  tea- 
spoonful.  Its  effects  will  be  more  certain,  if  about  the  same 
quantity  of  No.  2  is  added,  and  in  all  cases  where  there  are  ner- 
vous symptoms,  add  half  a  tea  spoonful  of  nerve  powder  to  the 
dose. 

3.  Reduce  the  seeds  to  a  fine  powder  in  a  mortar,  and  take 
.  half  an  ounce  of  this  powder,  or  about  a  large  spoonful,  with  the 

same  quantity  of  No.  2,  made  fine,  and  put  them  in  a  gill  of 
No.  6,  adding  a  tea  spoonful  of  nerve  powder,  to  be  kept  stop- 
ped in  a  bottle  for  use ;  when  taken,  to  be  well  shaken  together. 

This  preparation  is  for  the  most  violent  attacks  of  disease, 
such  as  lock-jaw,  bite  of  mad  dog,  drowned  persons,  fits,  spasms, 
and  in  all  cases  of  suspended  animation,  where  the  vital  spark 
is  nearly  extinct.  It  will  go  through  the  system  like  electrici- 
ty, giving  heat  and  life  to  every  part.  In  cases  where  spasms 
are  so  violent  that  the  persons  are  stiff,  and  the  jaws  become 
set,  by  pouring  some  of  this  liquid  into  the  mouth,  between  the 
cheek  and  teeth,  as  soon  as  it  touches  the  glands  at  the  roots  of 
the  tongue,  the  spasms  will  relax,  and  the  jaws  will  become 
loosened  so  that  the  mouth  will  open ;  then  give  a  dose  of  it 
and  as  soon  as  the  spasms  have  abated,  repeat  it,  and  after- 
wards give  a  tea  of  No.  3,  for  canker.  This  course  I  never 
knew  fail  of  giving  relief 

It  is  good  in  less  violent  cases,  to  bring  out  the  measles  and 
•small  pox;  and  if  applied  to  pimples,  warts,  <fcc.,  will  remove 
them.  I  have  cured  three  dogs  with  this  preparation,  which 
were  under  the  most  violent  symptoms  of  hydrophobia;  several 
of  my  agents  cured  patients  who  had  been  bitten  by  mad  dogs  ; 
and  I  have  not  the  least  doubt  of  its  being  a  specific  for  that 
disease.    For  a  dose,  take  a  tea  spoonful. 


588  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Much  has  been  said  of  the  power  of  the  emetic  herb,  and 
some  have  expressed  fears  of  it  on  that  account;  but  1  can  as- 
sure the  public,  that  there  is  not  the  least  danger  in  using  it.  1 
have  given  it  to  children  from  one  day  old  to  persons  of  eighty- 
years.  It  is  most  powerful  in  removing  disease,  but  inoffensive 
10  nature.  Its  operation  in  different  persons  is  accordmg  to 
their  different  tempers,  moving  with  the  natural  current  of  the 
animal  spirits. 

There  are  two  cases  where  this  medicine  will  not  operate, 
viz.  when  the  patient  is  dying,  and  wliere  there  is  no  death  ;  or 
in  other  words,  when  there  is  no  disease.  There  can  be  no 
war  where  there  is  no  enemy.  When  there  is  no  cold  in  the 
body  there  is  nothing  to  contend  against,  and  when  there  is  no 
heat  in  the  body,  there  is  nothing  to  kindle ;  in  either  case, 
therefore,  this  medicine  is  silent  and  harmless.  It  is  calculated 
to  remove  the  cause,  and  no  more — as  food  removes  hunger, 
and  drink,  thirst.  It  clears  all  obstructions  to  the  extremyt  es, 
without  regard  to  the  names  of  disease,  until  it  produces  an 
equilibrium  in  the  system,  and  will  be  felt  in  the  fingers  and 
toes,  producing  a  prickling  feeling  like  that  caused  by  a  knock 
on  the  elbow.  This  symptom  is  alarming  to  those  unacquaint- 
ed with  its  operation  ;  but  it  is  always  favorable,  being  a  cer- 
tain indication  of  the  turn  of  the  disorder,  and  they  generally 
gain  from  that  time. 

In  regard  to  the  quantity  to  be  given  as  a  dose,  it  is  a  matter 
of  less  consequence  than  is  generally  imagined.  The  most  im- 
portant thing  is  to  give  enough  to  produce  the  desired  effect. 
If  too  little  is  given,  it  will  worry  the  patient,  and  do  but  Httle 
good;  if  more  is  given  than  is  necessary,  the  surplus  will  be 
thrown  off,  and  is  only  a  waste  of  medicine,  I  have  given  di- 
rections what  I  consider  as  a  dose  in  common  cases,  of  the  dif- 
ferent preparations ;  but  still  it  must  be  left  to  the  judgment  of 
those  who  use  it,  how  much  to  give.  The  most  safe  way  will 
be  to  give  the  smallest  prescribed  dose  first,  then  repeat  it  till  it 
produces  the  desired  operation.  In  cases  where  the  stomach  is 
cold  and  very  foul,  its  operation  will  be  slow  and  uncertain,  iti 
which  case  give  No.  2,  which  will  assist  it  in  doing  its  work. 

When  this  medicine  is  given  to  patients  who  are  in  a  decline, 
or  are  laboring  under  diseases  of  long  standing,  the  symptoms 
indicating  a  crisis  will  not  take  place  till  they  have  been  carried 
through  from  three  to  eight  courses  of  the  medicine ;  and  the 
lower  they  have  been,  the  more  alarming  will  be  the  symptoms. 
1  have  seen  some  who  would  lay  for  two  hours,  and  sob  like  a 
child  that  had  been  punished,  not  able  to  speak  or  to  raise  their 
hand  to  their  head — and  the  next  day  be  about,  and  soon  get 
well. 
In  cases  where  they  have  taken  considerable  opium,  and  this 


MATERIA    MCDICA.  58^ 

medicine  is  administered,  it  will  in  its  operation  prodtice  the 
same  appearances  and  symptoms  that  are  produced  by  opinm 
when  first  ijiven,  which,  having  laid  dormant,  is  ronsed  into 
action  by  the  enlivening^  qualities  of  this  medicine,  and  they 
will  be  thrown  into  a  senseless  state;  the  whole  system  will  ex- 
hibit a  complete  mass  of  confusion,  tnmblina:  in  every  direction ; 
it  will  take  two  or  three  to  hold  them  on  the  bed  ;  they  ^row 
cold,  as  though  they  were  dying,  remamiiig  in  this  way  from 
two  to  eight  hours,  and  then  awake,  like  one  from  sleep  after  a 
good  nisfht's  rest — and  be  entirely  calm  and  sensible,  as  though 
nothiiia:  had  troubled  them.  It  is  seldom  they  have  more  than 
one  of  these  turns,  as  it  is  the  last  struggle  of  the  disease,  and 
they  generally  begin  to  recover  from  that  time. 

I  have  been  more  particular  in  describing  these  effects  of  the 
medicine,  as  they  are  very  alarming  to  those  unacquainted  with 
them,  in  order  to  show  that  there  is  no  danger  to  be  apprehend- 
ed, as  it  is  certain  evidence  of  a  favorable  turn  of  the  disease. 

The  emetic  herb  is  of  great  value  in  preventing  sickness,  as 
well  as  curing  it.  By  taking  a  dose  when  first  attacked  by  any 
complaint,  it  will  throw  it  off.  and  frequently  prevent  long  sick- 
ness. It  not  only  acts  as  an  emetic,  and  throws  off  the  stomach 
every  thing  that  nature  does  not  require  for  the  support  of  the 
system,  but  extends  its  effects  to  every  part  of  the  body.  It  is 
searching,  enlivening,  quickening,  and  has  great  power  in  re- 
moving all  obstructions ;  but  it  soon  exhausts  itself,  and  if  not 
followed  by  some  other  medicine,  to  hold  the  vital  heat  till  na- 
ture is  able  to  support  itself  by  digesting  the  food,  it  will  not  be 
sufficient  to  remove  a  disease  that  has  become  seated.  To  ef- 
fect this  important  object  put  me  to  much  trouble,  and  after  try- 
in?  many  ex|)eriments  to  get  something  that  would  afiswer  the 
purpose,  I  found  that  what  is  described  under  No.  2,  was  the 
best  and  only  medioine  within  my  knowledge,  that  would  hold 
the  heat  in  the  stomach,  and  not  evaporate;  and  by  givinj;  No. 
3,  to  remove  the  canker,  which  is  the  great  cause  of  disease, 
and  then  following  with  Nos.  4  and  5,  to  correct  the  bile,  re- 
store the  digestion  and  strengthen  the  system,  I  have  had  little 
trouble  in  effecting  a  cure. 

Properties.— haheha  inflata  is  an  emetic,  stimulant,  expecto- 
rant, and  diaphoretic.  For  further  description  of  the  valuable 
properties  of  the  lobelia  inflata,  see  compounds. 


590  THE    THOMSONIAN 

CAPSICUM  BACCATUM— No.  2. 

Cayenne,  West  India,  or  Bird  Pepper,  Chincopins. 

STIMULANT,.  APERIENT,    AROMATIC,  EXPECTORANT. 
To  raise  and  retain  the  vital  heat  of  the  body,  and  promote  free  perspiration. 

Capsicum  Baccatum.  Fructus.  The  fruit. —  Corolla, 
wheel-shaped.     Berry,  without  juice. 

There  are  several  species  of  capsicum  inhabiting  the  tropical 
Indies  and  America,  the  fruit  of  which,  differing  simply  in  the 
degree  of  pungency,  may  be  indiscriminately  employed. 

The  capsicum  baccatum,  or  bird  pepper,  and  the  capsicum 
frutescens,  yield  the  principal  part  of  the  Cayenne  pepper  that 
is  brought  from  the  East  and  West  Indies,  and  from  South 
America.  The  species  most  extensively  cultivated  in  Europe 
and  in  this  country,  is  the  capsicum  onnuum.  The  two  first 
are  very  shrubby  plants,  the  last  is  herbaceous  and  annual. 

Capsicum  Annuum. 

The  stem  of  this  plant  is  thick,  roundish,,  smooth  and  branch- 
ing, rising  from  12  to  36  inches,  and  supports  ovate,  pointed, 
smooth,  entire  leaves,  which  are  placed  irregularly  on  long  foot 
stalks.  The  flowers  are  white,  solitary,  and  stand  on  long  pe- 
duncles at  the  axils  of  the  leaves.  It  has  a  persistent  calyx, 
five  cleft  and  tubular  ;  the  corolla  monopetalous,  and  rather  of 
a  wheel-form,  with  the  limb  divided  into  five  pointed,  spread- 
ing and  plaited  segments,  with  short  filaments,  tapering,  and 
furnished  with  anthers  oblong;  the  germs  are  ovate,  support- 
ing a  style  that  is  slender,  and  longer  than  the  filaments,  and 
terminates  in  a  blunted  stigma. 

The  fruit  is  a  pod-like,  pendulous  berry,  smooth,  light  and 
shining,  of  a  brightish  scarlet,  or  sometimes  of  an  orange  color, 
with  several  cells,  containing  a  dry,  loose  pulp,  and  flat,  kid- 
ney-shaped seeds. 

This  plant  is  a  native  of  the  warmer  regions  of  Asia,  Africa, 
and  America,  and  is  cultivated  in  nearly  all  parts  of  the  world. 
It  is  abundant  in  this  country,  both  for  medicinal  and  other 
purposes.  It  flowers  during  the  summer  months,  and  the  fruit 
ripens  in  October. 

There  are  many  varieties  cultived  in  our  gardens,  which  dif- 
fer in  the  shape  of  the  fruit.  The  most  abundant  is  that  with 
a  large,  irregularly  ovate,  pendulous  berry,  rather  depressed  at 
the  extremity,  which  is  much  used  for  pickling  in  the  green 
state.  The  medicinal  variety,  are  those  with  a  long,  pointed, 
conical,  recurved  fruit,  not  much  thicker  than  the  finger.  We 
frequently  meet  with  spherical,  slightly  compressed,  small  ber- 
ries, not  much  exceeding  the  size  of  a  large  cherry.  When 
lipe  and  dry,  the  fruit  is  pulverized,  or  ground  into  a  fine  pow- 


I'npsii mil    Miiiiiuim. 
(inO/t'i  rr//  i>/-  (  'iiifrn/n'  ,'><•/'/>■ 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  691 

der,  and  brought  into  market  under  the  cognomen  of  red  or 
Cayenne  pepper.  The  markets  are  also  measurably  supplied 
by  importation  from  Africa  and  from  the  East  and  West  Indies. 
There  is  a  variety  of  capsicum,  of  very  small  and  exceedingly 
pungent  pods  or  berries,  which  has  recently  been  imported  from 
Liberia,  in  Africa. 

Pulverized  capsicum  is  generally  more  or  less  of  a  bright  red, 
yellow,  orange  or  straw  color,  which  is  subject  to  fade  upon  ex- 
posure to  the  light,  and  eventually  to  disappear.  The  aromatic 
odor  is  peculiar,  and  is  stronger  in  the  green,  or  new,  than  in 
the  dried  fruit.  It  is  bitter  in  taste,  pungent  and  acrid,  produc- 
ing a  burning  sensation  in  the  mouth  and  throat,  which  conti- 
nues for  some  time. 

Medical  use. — Cayenne  pepper  is  an  active  stimulant,  when 
swallowed  producing  a  severe  sense  of  heat  in  the  mouth  and 
stomach,  and  a  genial  glow  over  the  wiiole  system,  and  is  with- 
out narcotic  effect.  As  a  medicine,  it  is  useful  in  cases  of  en- 
feebled and  languid  stomach,  and  is  prescribed  with  happy  ef- 
fects in  most  of  the  chronic  diseases  of  our  country. 

I  never  had  any  knowledge  of  Cayenne  being  useful  as  a  me- 
dicine, or  that  it  had  ever  been  used  as  such,  till  I  discovered  it 
by  accident,  as  has  been  the  case  with  most  other  articles  used 
by  me.  After  I  had  fixed  upon  a  system  for  my  government 
in  practice,  I  found  much  difficulty  in  getting  something  that 
would  not  only  produce  a  strong  heat  in  the  body,  but  would 
retain  it  till  the  canker  could  be  removed,  and  the  digestive 
powers  restored,  so  that  the  food,  by  being  properly  digested, 
would  maintain  the  natural  heat.  I  tried  a  great  number  of  ar- 
ticles that  were  of  a  hot  nature,  but  could  fitid  nothing  which 
would  h  Id  the  heat  any  length  of  time.  I  made  use  of  gin- 
ger, mustard,  horse-radish,  peppermint,  butternut  bark,  and  ma- 
ny other  hot  things;  but  they  were  all  more  or  less  volatile, 
and  would  not  have  the  desired  effect.  With  these,  however, 
and  the  emetic  herb,  together  with  the  aid  of  steam,  1  was  ena- 
bled to  practice  with  pretty  oeneral  success. 

In  the  fall  of  the  year  1805,  I  was  out  in  search  of  umbil,  on 
a  mountain,  in  Walpole,  N.  H.  I  went  into  a  house  at  the  foot 
of  the  mountain  to  enquire  for  rattlesnake  oil ;  while  there,  I 
saw  a  large  siring  of  red  peppers  hanging  in  the  room,  which 
put  me  in  mind  of  what  I  had  been  a  long  time  in  search  of,  to 
retain  the  internal  heat.  I  knew  them  to  be  very  hot,  but  did 
not  know  of  what  nature.  I  obtained  these  peppers,  carried 
them  home,  reduced  them  to  powder,  and  took  some  of  it  my- 
self, and  foimd  it  to  answer  the  purpose  better  than  any  thing 
else  that  I  had  made  use  of  I  put  it  in  spirit  with  the  emetic 
herb,  and  wave  the  tincture,  mixed  in  a  tea  of  witch  hazle 
leaves,  and  found  that  it  would  retain  the  heat  in  the  stomach 


592  THE   THOMSONIaN 

after  piikinor,  and  preserve  the  strength  of  the  patient  in  propor- 
tion. I  made  use  of  it  in  different  ways  for  two  years,  and  al- 
ways with  good  success. 

In  the  fall  of  1807,  I  was  in  Newbnryport,  and  saw  a  bottle 
of  pepper-sauce,  being:  the  first  I  had  ever  seen.  I  bought  it 
and  carried  it  home,  got  some  of  the  same  kind  of  pepper  that 
was  dried,  which  I  piit  into  the  bottle ;  this  made  it  very  hot. 
On  njy  way  home,  was  taken  unwell,  and  was  quite  cold.  I 
took  a  swallow  from  the  bottle,  which  caused  violent  pain  for  a 
few  minutes,  when  it  produced  perspiration,  and  I  soon  grew 
easy.  I  afterwards  tried  it,  and  found  that  after  it  had  expelled 
the  cold  it  would  not  cause  pain.  From  these  experiments,  I 
became  coMviuced  that  this  kind  of  pepper  was  much  stronger, 
and  would  be  better  for  medical  use  than  the  common  red  pep- 
per. 

Soon  after  this,  1  was  again  in  Newbnryport,  and  made  en- 
quiry and  found  some  Cayeime,  but  it  was  prepared  with  salt 
for  table  use,  which  injured  it  for  medical  purposes.  1  tried  it 
by  tasting,  and  selected  that  which  hud  flir  least  salt  in  it.  I 
afterwards  made  use  of  this  article,  and  found  it  to  answer  all 
the  purposes  wished,  and  that  it  was  the  very  thing  I  had  long 
been  ifi  search  of. 

The  next  year  I  went  to  Portsmouth  and  made  enquiries  con- 
cerniu2:  Cayeime,  and  from  those  who  dealt  in  the  article  I 
learned  that  it  was  brought  to  this  country  from  D^*merara  and 
Jamaica,  prepared  only  for  table  use,  ;mcl  that  salt  wa.«  put  in 
to  preserve  it  and  make  it  more  pnliiteaMe.  1  h-eciinie  acquaint- 
ed with  a  French  gentleman  wlio  had  a  brother  in  Drriiafara, 
and  ni  tde  arransfejiients  with  him  to.spiid  to  his  brother  and  re- 
quest him  to  procure  some,  and  have  it  piepored  will  soul  s»lt. 
He  did  so,  and  sent  on  a  box  contaitjitig  about  eighty  pounds, 
in  a  pure  state.  I  sent  also  by  many  others,  who  were  going 
to  the  places  where  it  grows,  to  procurt^  all  they  could  ;  in  con- 
sequence of  which,  large  quantities  wore  iujpoitKj  into  Ports- 
month,  much  more  than  there  was  immediate  d<^niand  for.  I 
was  able  to  purchase  but  a  small  part  of  what  w;is  brought,  and 
it  was  bought  up  by  others  on  speculation,  and  sent  to  Boston. 
The  consequence  was,  that  the  price  was  so  much  reduced 
that  it  would  not  bring  the  first  cost,  which  put  a  stop  lo  its  be- 
ins:  imported,  and  it  has  since  been  very  scarce. 

When  I  first  began  to  use  this  article,  it  caused  much  talk 
among  the  people  in  Portsmouth  and  the  adjoining  towns;  the 
doctors  tried  to  frijjhten  them,  by  telling  them  that  I  made  use 
ofCayetme  pepper  as  a  medicine,  and  tltat  if  would  bt.rn  up 
the  stomach  and  lungs  as  bad  as  vitriol.  The  people  srenerally, 
however,  became  convinced  by  using  it,  that  what  the  doetors 
said  about  it  was  falsC;  and  it  only  proved  their  ignorance  of  its 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  593 

medicinal  virtues,  and  thfir  malis^nity  towards  me.  It  soon 
carne  into  ;gfenerjil  use,  and  the  knowledge  of  its  beinsf  useful  in 
curing  disease  was  spread  throuifh  all  the  country.  1  made  use 
of  it  in  curin<j  the  sported  fever,  and  where  it  was  known  it  was 
the  only  thing  depend'^d  on  for  that  disease. 

I  have  made  useof  C  lyenue  in  all  kinds  of  disease,  and  have 
given  it  to  patients  of  all  ages,  and  under  every  circumstance 
that  has  come  under  my  practice;  and  can  assure  the  public, 
that  it  is  perfectly  harmless,  never  haviujj  known  it  to  pnxJuce 
any  bad  effects  whatever.  It  is  no  doubt  the  most  powerful  sti- 
mulant known  ;  its  power  is  entirely  congenial  to  nature,  bein^ 
powerful  only  in  raising  and  maintaining  the  heat,  on  which 
life  depends.  It  is  extremely  pungent,  and  when  taken  sets  the 
mouth  as  it  were  on  fire ;  this  lasts,  however,  but  a  few  mitintes, 
and  I  consider  it  essentially  a  benefit,  for  its  effect  on  the  glands 
causes  the  saliva  to  flow  freely,  and  leaves  the  month  clean  and 
moist. 

The  only  preparation  necessary,  is  to  have  it  ground,  or 
pounded  to  a  fine  powder.  For  a  dose,  from  one  half  to  a  tea 
spoonful  may  be  taken,  in  hot  water,  sweetened  ;  or  the  same 
quantity  may  be  mixed  with  either  of  the  other  numbers  when 
taken,  it  will  produce  a  free  perspiration,  which  should  be 
kept  up  by  repeating  the  dose,  until  the  disease  is  removed.  A 
spoonful,  with  an  equal  quantity  of  common  salt,  put  into  a  gill 
of  vinegar,  makes  a  very  good  sauce  to  be  eaten  oti  meat,  and 
will  assist  the  appetite,  and  strensrthen  the  digestion.  One 
spoonful  of  this  preparation  tnay  be  taken  to  good  advanta<re, 
and  will  remove  faint,  sinkitig  feelings,  which  some  are  subject 
to,  especially  in  the  sprin<f  of  the  year.  Pepper-sauce  is  jjood 
for  the  same  purpose.  A  tea  spoonful  of  Cayenne  may  be  tak- 
en in  a  tumbler  of  cidf»r,  and  is  much  better  than  ardt-nt  spirits. 
There  is  scarcely  any  preparatiot)  of  medicine  that  1  make  use 
of,  in  which  I  do  not  put  some  of  this  article.  It  wili  cure  the 
ague  in  the  face,  by  taking  a  dose,  and  tying  a  small  qiiauiity 
in  a  fine  cloth  and  putting  it  between  the  clieek  and  teeth,  on  the 
side  that  is  affected,  sitting  by  the  fire,  covered  with  a  blanket. 
It  is  good  to  put  on  old  sores. 

RKD  PEPPERS. 

These  are  very  plenty  in  this  country,  being  cultivated  in 
gardens,  and  are  principally  made  use  of  for  pickling,  for  which 
purpose  the  pods  are  gathered  when  green  and  preserved  in  vi- 
neufar.  They  are  of  the  same  nature  as  Cayenne  pepper,  hut 
.  not  quite  so  strong,  and  are  the  best  substitute  for  that  article 
that  [  have  ever  found.  For  medical  use,  they  should  not  be 
gathered  till  ripe,  when  they  are  of  a  bright  red  color.  They 
should  be  reduced  to  a  fine  powder,  and  may  be  used  instead 
of  Cayenne,  when  that  article  cannot  be  obtained. 


594 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


ZINGIBER  OFFICINALE —No.  2,  continued. 

Coninion  Ginger. 

EXPECTORANT,    AROMATIC,    STIMULANT,    AND    CARMINATIVE. 
Its  uses  the  same  as  Cayenne,  but  less  active. 

Zingiber  Officinale.  Radix.  The  root. — 'The  flow- 
ers, spathaceous.  Inner  limb  of  the  corolla  with  one  lip.  An- 
ther, double,  with  a  simple  recurved  horn  at  the  end.  Germen, 
inferior.     IStyle  enclosed  in  the  furrow  formed  by  the  anther. 

The  ginger  root  is  creeping,  perenneal,  tuberous,  and  has  a 
stem  which  is  annual,  and  rises  two  or  three  feet  in  height,  and 
is  erect,  round,  solid,  and  enclosed  in  a  membranous  imbricated 
sheathingr. 

The  leaves  are  acute,  smooth,  lanceolate,  from  four  to  six 
inches  in  length,  by  about  an  inch  and  a  half  in  breadth,  and 
stand  irregularly  on  the  stalk.  The  flower  stalk  rises  by  the 
side  of  the  stem,  from  six  to  twelve  inches  high,  and  like  it  is 
clothed  with  accuminate  sheaths,  but  is  destitute  of  leaves,  and 
terminates  in  an  obtuse,  imbricated  spike. 

The  flowers  are  yellowish,  and  appear  several  at  a  time,  be- 
tween the  bracteal  scales. 

In  Hindostan,  this  plant  is  indigenous,  and  it  is  cultivated  in 
most  parts  of  the  East  Indies,  and  of  late  in  the  West  Indies  al- 
so, having  been  introduced  there  from  the  East. 

The  flowers  are  aromatic,  and  when  the  stems  are  bruised 
they  are  fragrant.  The  root  is  dug  for  use  when  about  a  year 
old.  The  crop  is  gathered  in  the  West  Indies  in  January  and 
February,  after  the  stems  have  decayed. 

After  being  cleansed,  the  root  is  scalded  in  boiling  water,  to 
prevent  its  growing,  and  is  then  dried  for  market.  Thus  pre- 
pared, it  is  the  ordinary  ginger  of  commerce.  It  is  mostly  im- 
ported from  Calcutta,  and  is  known  by  the  name  of  East  India 
ginger. 

In  the  West  Indies  another  quality  is  prepared,  by  taking  the 
best  roots  and  removing  their  epidermis  and  drying  them  care- 
fully in  the  sun.  This  is  the  lohite  ginger  of  the  shops,  and  is 
the  most  valuable.  It  comes  from  England,  where  it  under- 
goes further  preparation,  by  which  it  is  much  improved.  It  is 
called  in  this  country,  Jamaica  ginger.  The  root  is  frequently 
brought  from  the  West  Indies  in  a  green  state,  and  is  used  and 
sold  by  the  confectioners.  The  preserved  ginger  is  made  from 
young  and  tender  roots,  by  removing  their  cortical  covering, 
and  boiling  them  in  a  syrup  of  sugar.  It  is  translucent  and 
tender  when  good. 

The  green  roots  are  an  inch  or  more  in  length,  somewhat 
flat  on  their  upper  and  under  surface,  and  knotty,  and  branch- 
d  irregularly,  or  lobed — externally  of  an  ash  color,  internally 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A.  695 

fleshy  and  yellowish  white.    It  frequently  germinates  while  in 
the  shops. 

Medical  uses. — Ginger  is  a  pleasant  stimulant,  and  is  often 
given  to  remove  pain  from  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  the  de- 
ranged state  of  the  digestive  organs  attendant  upon  gont.  When 
chewed,  it  produces  a  copious  flow  of  sahva;  and  when  snufl"- 
ed  in  the  form  of  powder  it  excites  sneezing.  It  is  a  useful  re- 
medy in  paralysis  of  the  tongue  and  fauces.  It  may  bo  given 
in  powder  or  infusion.  The  dose  of  the  former  is  from  half  to  a 
tea  spoonful.  The  infusion  may  be  prepared  by  adding  half  an 
ounce  of  the  root  bruised  or  powdered  to  a  pint  of  boiling  wa- 
ter, and  may  be  given  in  doses  of  from  one  third  to  two  thirds 
of  a  tea  cup  full,  which  may  also  be  sweetened,  with  the  addi- 
tion af  a  little  milk,  which  will  render  it  very  palateable. 

This  article  may  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  Cayenne,  and 
stands  second  in  rank  to  the  peppers  for  its  stimulating  proper- 
ties, and  may  be  used  to  good  advantage  as  a  substitute,  when 
capsicum  cannot  be  procured. 

For  pulmonary  complaints,  it  has  been  proved  a  valuable  re- 
medy. The  writer  of  this  article  was  attacked  with  bleeding 
at  the  lungs.  In  addition  to  the  usual  courses  of  medicine,  he 
was  in  the  constant  use  of  this  article  as  a  substitute  for  stronger 
stimulants.  His  method  of  preparing  and  using  it  was,  to  se- 
lect the  best  and  most  perfectly  cured  roots,  and  remove  the  cu- 
ticle, or  the  outside  bark — then  divide  the  root  longitudinally 
through  the  centre,  and  put  one  half  into  his  mouth,  as  he 
would  tobacco;  and  the  saliva  would  be  immediately  excited, 
from  the  stimulus  which  he  swallowed,  thus  keeping  the 
mouth,  throat  and  stomach,  under  a  gentle  excitement ;  and  as 
the  root  became  soft  and  divided  by  maceration,  he  swallowed 
the  particles,  and  in  the  course  of  an  hour  or  two  it  was  gone, 
and  a^new  supply  was  taken  in  the  same  way;  thus  he  kept  in 
the  constant  use  of  this  plant  for  months,  until  the  difficulty 
was  entirely  eradicated  and  his  lungs  healed.  At  nio^ht  on  go- 
ing to  bed  he  would  take  a  piece  of  the  root  into  his  mouth, 
where  it  would  remain  until  the  next  morning,  and  before  leav- 
ing his  bed  he  would  masticate  and  swallow  what  remained  in 
his  mouth,  which  would  warm  his  stomach  and  lungs,  and  then 
on  leaving  his  bed  he  was  sufficiently  warm  to  prevent  taking 
cold.  Thus  was  a  constant  stimulant  kept  up  day  and  night 
for  months,  which  kept  the  animal  warmth  so  steady  and  regu- 
lar that  the  orifice  was  healed. 

Every  person  who  has  had  a  difficulty  of  the  lungs,  well 
knows  the  danger  that  is  attendant  upon  exposure,  in  this 
changeable  and  often  frigid  climate.  Those  who  have  been  re- 
stored to  health  from  that  complaint,  are  aware  of  the  great  dif- 
ficulty in  keeping  the  system  in  that  extremely  delicate  and  ge- 


596  THETHOMSONFAN 

nial  temperature,  so  hi<rhly  important  for  their  welfare.  Such 
patients  usually  have  had  recourse  to  the  West  India  climate, 
where  the  constant,  steady,  and  jrenial  rays,  of  a  tropical  sun, 
furnish  nearly  the  same  temperature  naturally  that  we  produce 
for  ourselves  artificially.  Why  shall  we  jro  to  the  West  Indies 
to  produce  a  change  in  the  system  by  the  natural  temperature, 
when  the  same  in  effect  can  be  brought  aboui  by  artificial  means 
in  our  own  climate?  The  experiments  upon  the  writer  justi- 
fied and  have  proved  his  theory  correct. 


PIPER  NIGRUM— No.  2,  continued. 
Black  Pepper. 

8TIMULAKT,  ASTRINGENT,  AND  AROMATIC. 
A  Bobstitnte  for  Cayenne  pepper — ^but  more  astriogent  and  less  actWe. 

Piper  Nigrum.  Baccce.  The  berries. — The  vine  of  the 
pepper  plant  is  perenneal,  with  a  smooth,  round,  woody  stem; 
with  swelling  joints,  branched,  and  from  twelve  to  lourteen 
feet  in  length.  The  leaves  are  broad,  ovate,  acuminate  and  en- 
tire, coriaceous,  seven  nerved,  very  smooth,  and  dark  green,  at- 
tached by  foot  stalks  to  the  joints  of  the  branches.  The  Jloip- 
ers  are  sessile,  white  and  small,  covering  a  cylindric  spadix  ve- 
ry tliickly,  and  succeeded  by  red  globular  berries,  when  ripe. 

This  vine  i-?  a  native  of  Cochin-China,  and  various  parts  of 
the  E  ist  Indies.  The  vine  is  cultivated  from  cuttiuifs,  and  is 
sustained  by  trees  or  props  of  various  kinds,  that  are  arranged 
for  the  purpose,  upon  which  it  is  trained  to  adhere.  In  from 
two  to  six  years  from  the  time  of  planting,  it  begins  to  bear. 
The  hfrries  are  gatfiered  from  the  vine  before  they  are  all  ripe, 
and  when  dried  become  wrinkled  and  black. 

The  white  pepper  is  the  berry  deprived  of  its  skin  when 
ripe,  by  maceration  in  water  and  subsequent  friction,  after 
which  It  is  dried.  The  peculiar  virtues  of  the  «?pice  are  less  in 
the  white  than  in  the  black  pepper,  and  it  is  but  little  used  in 
the  United  States. 

Prnpei  ties. — The  dried  berries  of  white  pepper  are  about  the 
size  of  small  peas,  hot  and  pungent,  of  an  aromatic  smell  and  a 
very  fiery  taste.     To  alcohol  or  water  they  yield  their  virtues. 

Medical  use. —  White  and  black  pepper  are  warm  and  active 
stimulants,  capable  of  produciuiJ:  irreat  internal  or  external  ex- 
citement, always  acting  with  great  enerjry,  on  whatever  part  it 
mfiy  be  applied  Its  medicinal  virtues  are,  to  create  perspira- 
tion, and  excite  the  surface,  and  torpid  stomach, and  to  remove 
flaiiilenee.  This  article,  is  frequently  used  for  the  cure  of  fe- 
ver and  ague.     When  perfectly  pure  it  is  inert.     This  may  be 


Myiic.i  cfrifern  . 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  571 

used  to  good  advantage  as  a  substitute  for  Cayenne,  when  that 
article  cannot  be  had.  Dose — from  a  fourth  to  a  tea  .spoonfnl. 
It  may  be  taken  in  the  berry  or  in  the  powder,  but  is  more  act- 
ive in  the  latter. 


REMEDIES  FOR  CANKER. 


MYRICA    CERIFERA.— No.3. 

Bay  berry — Candltberry —  Wax- Myrtle. 

ASTRINGENT,    STIMULANT,    EMETIC,    STERNUTATORY. 
To  cleanse  the  ■tomach  aod  t>owel8,  by  removing  the  canker. 

Myrica  Cerifera.  Cera — Cortex.  The  wax  and  bark, 
— This  is  adioBceons,  tetandrous  plant.  Aments,oh\oi\g.  Ca^ 
lyx^  ovate  scales.  Corolla,  none.  Fem  flower,  purple  and 
green.  Styles,  two.  Drupe,  one-seeded.  This  shrub  is  known 
by  its  wedge-shaped,  lanceolate  leaves,  and  by  its  lax  aments, 
and  its  spherical  naked  fruit. 

The  bayberry,  or  wax  myrtle,  is  an  aromatic  hush  or  shrub, 
growing  from  three  to  ten  feet  in  height,  and  is  found  in  almost 
all  parts  of  New-Kngland,  and  in  some  of  the  southern  states. 
The  fruit  is  closely  attached  to  the  stem  and  branches,  grows  in 
clusters,  of  a  greenish  color,  and  covered  with  a  continjj  of  wax, 
which  may  be  separated  in  hot  water  for  use.  The  bark  of  the 
root  possesses  medical  properties.  It  is  acrid  and  astringent, 
and  an  emetic  when  taken  in  large  doses. 

The  roots  should  be  dug  in  the  spring  before  it  puts  forth  its 
leaves,  and  cleansed  from  the  dust,  then  pounded  with  a  mallet 
or  hammer,  when  the  bark  will  peel  from  the  root  with  very 
little  trouble.  It  should  be  diied  in  a  chamber  or  loft  where  it 
will  not  be  exposed  to  the  weather,  and  when  perfectly  dry,  it 
should  be  ground  or  pulverised  to  a  fine  powder.  It  is  an  ex- 
cellent article,  and  its  ^rade  I  think  should  be  number  three,  in 
the  class  of  useful  medicines. 

This  valuable  article  may  be  taken  separately,  or  compound- 
ed with  other  substances,  and  is  the  best  remedy  for  canker  that 
I  have  ever  found.  It  is  highly  stimulating  and  very  pungent, 
pricking  the  glands,  and  causing  the  saliva  to  flow  freely.  It  is 
an  admirable  article  to  cleanse  the  teeth  and  mouth,  and  to  re- 
move the  scurvy  from  the  gums.  If  taken,  about  a  tea  spoon- 
ful of  the  fine  powder  in  water  once  a  day,  for  a  few  days  in 
succession,  it  removes  the  most  oflfensive  breath,  by  correcting 
the  secretions.    It  will  also  remove  the  water-brash — bad  taste 


598  THE    THOMSONIAN 

in  the  mouth — faintness  at  the  stomach,  recent  attacks  of  diar- 
rhoea, and  general  derangement  of  the  bowels.  Taken  as  snuff, 
it  clears  the  head  and  relieves  the  headache,  and  operates  as  a 
sternutatory,  causing  violent  sneezing.  When  the  stomach  is 
out  of  order,  its  operation  is  excellent  as  an  emetic.  For  a  dose, 
take  a  teaspoonful  or  more,  in  a  little  hot  water,  sweetened. 

The  process  of  collecting  the  wax  is  simple.  The  berries  are 
boiled  in  water,  and  the  wax,  melting  and  floating  on  the  sur- 
face, is  either  skimmed  off  and  strained,  or  allowed  to  concrete 
as  the  liquor  cools,  and  is  removed  in  the  solid  state.  To  ren- 
der it  pure,  it  is  again  melted  and  strained,  and  then  cast  into 
large  cakes.  It  is  collected  in  large  quantities  in  the  New-Eng- 
land states,  and  exported  to  other  parts  of  the  country.  Myrtle 
wax  is  of  a  pale  greenish  white  color,  more  brittle  than  bees- 
wax, or  a  slight  odor  and  bitterish  in  taste.  It  is  about  as  heavy 
as  water,  and  melts  at  106  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

Medical  tise. — This  variety  of  was  has  been  employed  in  this 
country  as  a  remedy  for  relax  and  dysentery,  and  great  benefit 
has  resulted  from  its  use  in  these  complaints.  The  method 
was  by  administering  the  wax,  either  grated  or  powdered  fine, 
in  tea  spoonful  doses,  in  a  mucillage,  or  syrup,  repeated  as  often 
as  necessary.  It  is  occasionally  substituted  by  druggists  for 
bees-wax  in  making  plasters,  and  is  used  in  the  preparation  of 
tapers  and  candles.  It  is  somewhat  fragrant  in  burning,  but 
emits  a  less  brilliant  light  than  lamp  oil.  The  bark  is  com- 
pounded into  composition  and  various  other  articles  for  canker. 


NYMPHJEA  ODORATA.— No.  3,  continued. 
White  Pond  Lily. 

ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    BITTER. 
To  clear  the  coats  of  the  stomach  and  bowels  of  canker. 

Nympb^a  Odorata.  Flores — Radix.  The  flowers  and 
roots. — Leaves,  round,  cordate,  entire,  sub-emarginate.  Lobes, 
spreading  asunder,  acuminate,  obtuse.  Petals,  equalling  the 
four  leaved  calyx.  Stamens,  from  sixteen  to  twenty,  radiating 
in  erectish  lines. 

The  white  pond  lily  is  an  indigenous,  herbaceous,  perennial 
plant,  growing  in  nearly  all  the  states,  in  small  sluggish  streams 
and  fresh  water  ponds.  It  is  much  celebrated  on  account  of 
the  beauty  and  delicious  odor  of  its  large  white  flower.  Its  root 
is  large  and  fleshy  when  green,  but  becomes  very  light  and 
spongy  by  drying.  It  is  very  astringent,  and  a  strong  bitter, 
and  contains  much  tanning  matter. 


Nyiii])liaea    odorata. 


u 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  599 

The  roots  should  be  dug  in  the  fall  of  the  year,  when  the 
ponds  are  low.  and  washed  clean,  and  split  into  strips  and  run 
upon  strings  or  spread  thin  to  dry,  in  the  same  manner  that  ap- 
ples are  dried  by  the  country  people.  After  it  has  become  tho- 
roughly dried,  it  should  be  pulverized  fine,  and  preserved  for 
use. 

From  the  astringent  properties  of  this  plant,  I  have  placed  it 
under  the  grand  division  of  No.  3,  and  next  in  rank  for  its  me 
dical  virtues  to  the  myrica  cerifera,  or  bayberry. 

Medical  use. — The  tiyniphaea  odorata  is  a  valuable  astrin- 
gent and  antiseptic,  useful  in  all  complaints  of  the  bowels,  giv- 
en either  in  infusion  alone,  or  compounded  with  other  articles. 

A  preparation  may  be  made  called  the  syrup  of  lilies^  in  the 
following  manner.  Take  a  handful  of  the  flowers,  steep  them 
moderately  in  a  quart  of  water,  over  a  slow  fire,  for  an  hour; 
then  strain,  and  sweeten  well  with  loaf  sugar,  grate  m  a  little 
nutmeg,  and  add  a  half  pint  of  brandy.  This  is  an  excellent 
article  for  children  when  teething,  or  in  looseness  of  the  bow- 
els. Mothers  will  find  this  an  excellent  remedy  also  for  what 
is  called  the  nursing  sore  mouth. 

A  strong  tea  of  the  root  is  one  of  the  best  articles  in  my  mate- 
ria medica  for  cleansing  old  sores,  ulcers,  and  even  fresh  wounds 
and  bruises.  Compounded  with  bayberry,  (myrica  cerifera) 
witch-hazle,  (hamamelis  virginica)  and  red  raspberry  leaves, 
it  is  extensively  used  for  enemas,  or  injections,  in  courses  of 
medicine.  In  poultices,  it  is  used  to  good  advantas^e,  prepared 
in  the  toUcwing  manner.  To  a  tea  spoonful  of  the  fine  pow- 
der, add  a  gill  of  boiling  water,  a  tea  spoonful  of  slippery  elm, 
(ulmus  fulva)  stir  well  together,  then  thicken  with  Indian  meal, 
or  what  is  better,  (if  they  can  be  had)  Boston  crackers  made  fine. 
This  poultice  may  be  applied  with  great  advantage  to  ulcers, 
old  sores,  biles,  whitlows,  and  fresh  bruises  or  cuts  where  there 
is  a  high  state  of  inflammation,  to  reduce  the  swelling.  In  all 
cases  it  is  an  excellent  sedative  to  ease  pain,  in  form  of  a  poul- 
tice. 


PINUS  CANADENSIS.— No.  3,  continued. 
Hemlock  Tree. 

ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    EXPECTORANT,    DIURETIC. 
For  canker,  compounded. 

PiNUS  Canadensis.      Cortex.     The  bark. Leaves.,  flat, 

denticulate,  two-ranked.  Strobiles,  ovate,  terminal,  scarcely- 
longer  than  the  leaves. 

Tftis  is  the  hemlock  spruce  of  the  United  States  and  Canada. 


600  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Whfin  fnll  grown,  it  is  often  from  seventy  to  one  hundred  and 
fifty  feet  high,  with  a  trunk  two  or  three  feet  in  diameter,  and 
of  nearly  the  same  size  for  two  thirds  of  its  lenjfth.  The  hranch- 
es  are  slender  and  dependent  at  tlieir  extremities.  Tlie  leaves 
are  six  or  eight  lines  in  length,  and  are  very  numerous,  flat, 
denticulate,  and  irregularly  arranged  in  two  rows.  The  ovate 
strohiles  are  longer  than  the  leaves,  and  situated  at  the  ends  uf 
the  branches. 

Ttie  hemlock  tree  is  abundant  in  the  eastern  states  and  the 
British  provinces,  and  is  also  found  in  the  mountainous  regions 
of  the  midd  e  and  western  states.  The  bark  is  much  used  in 
the  United  Slates  for  tanning.  Its  juice  is  much  less  abundant 
than  that  of  other  species  of  the  pine.  In  many  of  the  trees 
which  have  begun  to  decay,  the  juice  exudes  spontaneously, 
and  concretes  upon  the  bark,  by  the  partial  evaporation  of  its 
essential  oil.  Thus  encrusted,  the  bark  is  stripped  from  the 
tree,  broken  into  pieces,  and  boiled  in  water.  The  gum  melts 
and  rises  to  the  top  of  the  water  and  is  skimmed  off,  and  is  fre- 
quently further  purified  by  a  second  boihng;  it  is  then  brought 
to  market,  in  dark  brown  brittle  masses,  which  exhibit  small 
fragments  of  bark  scattered  through  the  substance.  From  this 
state  it  is  purified  by  the  druggists,  by  melting  and  strairijng  it 
through  canvas,  sackcloth,  or  a  fine  sieve.  Thus  prepared,  it 
is  of  a  dark  yellowish  brown  color,  and  becomes  more  so  by  ex- 
posure to  the  air.  It  contains  resin,  and  a  small  portion  of  es- 
sential oil.  This  substance  is  known  by  the  name  oi  hemlock 
gum. 

Medical  use. — The  bark  is  cleared  of  the  epidermis,  dried, 
pulverized,  and  compounded  in  various  ways.  See  composi- 
tion. 

The  hemlock  gum  maybe  made  emollient,  by  melting  it  and 
addmg  bees  wax  and  hog's  lard  or  sweet  oil ;  and  when  reduc- 
ed to  a  proper  consistency — not  too  soft — it  may  be  used  for 
strengthening  plasters.  And  by  adding  a  little  capsicum,  you 
make  an  excellent  rheumatic  plaster.  By  a  still  greater  reduc- 
tion with  lard,  and  the  addition  of  a  small  quantity  of  bees  wax 
and  a  little  balsam  of  fir,  it  makes  an  excellent  salve  for  cuts, 
bruises,  or  wounds,  A  tea  made  of  the  bousjhs  is  a  diuretic, 
and  is  very  strengthening  to  the  kidneys  and  small  of  the  back. 
The  boughs  may  also  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  hops  in  the 
preparation  of  small  beer,  and  furnish  an  excellent  addition  to 
what  is  generally  denominated  root  beer.  The  boughs  may  al- 
so be  boiled  down,  and  a  thick  resinous  extract  obtained,  that 
may  be  used  for  the  same  purposes  as  the  guio. 


Nl;illl'l'     llllKlllilllli 
.l/iit\/i    rmi limn/ .   Xm    f,iiriii/rr. 


MATERIA  Mr:DICA,  601 

STATICE  LIMONItJM.— No.  3,  continued. 
Marsh- Rosemary — Sea- Lavender. 

BITTER,    ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    AND    E3I0LLIENT. 
For  canker,  tbrusb,  sore  throat,  and  dysentery. 

Marsh-Rosemary.  Radix.  The  root. — CaZya:,  on e-leav- 
-ed,  entire,  plaited,  scariose.     Petals,  five,     iSeed.  one,  superior. 

This  is  a  maritime,  indis^enoiis,  perennial  plant,  growing  on 
salt  marshes,  and  has  thick  tufts  of  leaves,  which  are  obovate, 
obtuse,  entire,  mucronate,  smooth,  and  supported  on  long  slen- 
der foot-stalks.  The  leaves  are  flat  on  the  margin.  The  flow- 
er-stem is  round,  smooth,  and  a  foot  or  more  in  length,  and 
near  its  summit  sending  off  numerous  alternate  branches,  which 
terminate  in  spikes,  and  form  altogether  a  loose  panicle.  The 
flowers  are  small,  bluish  purple,  erect,  upon  one  side  only  of 
the  common  peduncle,  with  a  macronate  scaly  bract  at  the 
base  of  each — a  five  angled,  five  toothed  calyx,  and  spatulate, 
obtuse  petals. 

The  marsh-rosemary  grows  in  the  salt  marshes  along  the 
whole  extent  of  the  North  American  sea  coast.  It  flowers  in 
August  and  September.  The  root,  which  is  the  part  used  in 
medicine,  is  large,  spindle  shaped,  fleshy,  compact,  and  of  a 
purplish-brown  color.  It  is  bitter,  and  extremely  astringent  to 
the  taste.  It  contains  large  quantities  of  tannin  and  gallic  acid, 
and  some  common  salt.     Water  and  alcohol  extract  its  virtues. 

Medical  uses. — Statice  is  powerfully  astring-cnt,  and  in  the 
New  England  states  is  much  employed  for  medicinal  purposes. 
It  may  be  used  with  good  advantage  in  most  cases  where  any 
of  the  astringent  articles  under  the  head  of  No.  3  are  recom- 
mended. Its  most  popular  application  by  the  inhabitants  along 
the  sea  board  is  for  aphthous  and  ulcerative  affections  of  the 
mouth  and  fauces.  It  has  been  found  highly  useful  in  decoc- 
tion with  red  raspberry  and  sumac  leaves,  and  a  small  quanti- 
ty of  capsicum,  and  lobelia  sufficient  to  vomit,  for  the  cynanche 
maligna^  or  putrid  sore  throat.  An  infusion  of  the  roots  of 
this  plant  with  capsicum  and  witch-hazle  leaves,  and  a  small 
quantity  of  salt,  is  much  esteemed  as  a  gargle,  by  those  who 
have  used  it  for  that  distressino-  complaint.  A  strengthening 
plaster,  with  a  little  cayenne  added,  snugly  applied  to  the  neck 
and  covered  with  two  or  three  thicknesses  of  flannel,  is  a  very 
great  assistant  to  the  above  medicine  in  that  complaint. 


39 


St)2  THE    THOMSONIAIt 

RHUS  GLABRUM.— No.  3,  continued. 
Sleek  Sttmac. 

AST^RINGENT,    KEFRIGEKENT,    TONIC, 
To  scour  the  alimentary  canal  of  its  viscid  coating. 

Rhus  Glabrum,     Bacece — Folia — Cortex — Radix.     The- 
Berries,  leaves,  bark  and  seed. — The  calpx,  five  parted.     Pe- 
tals, five.     Berry,  small,  with  on-e  niici form  seed. 

Of  this  genus  there  are  several  species  which  possess  poison- 
ous properties,  and  should  be  carefully  distinguished  from  that' 
here  described.'  In  botany  they  are  more  particularly  designat- 
ed under  the  Head  o(  toxicodejidroii. 

Rhus  Glabrum. — This  species  of  rhus,  called  smooth  sumac, 
or  upland  sumac,  is  an  mdigenous  shrub,  from  six  to  fourteen 
feet  high,  with  a  stem  usually  much  bent,  knotty,  and  divided, 
into  numerous  branches,  which  are  covered  with  a  smooth, 
light  grey  bark.  The  leaves  are  situated  upon  smooth  petioles, 
and  consist  of  many  pairs  of  leafets  opposite,  with  an  odd  one 
at  the  extremity ;  all  of  which  are  serate,  lanceolate,  acuminate, 
glabrous,  green  on  the  upper  surface,  but  of  a  dusky  white 
beneath.  In  autumn  their  color  changes  to  red.  The  flow- 
ers are  reddish  green,  and  disposed  in  large,  terminal,  com- 
pound thyrses,  which  are  followed  by  dense  dusters  of  small 
crimson  berries,  covered  with  a  very  soft  down. 

This  shrub  is  found  in  all  the  northern  and  middle  states, 
growing  in  neglected  fields,  along  fences,  and  on  the  borders  of 
woods,  and  on  high  mountains.  The  flowers  appear  in  July 
and  August,  and  the  fruit  ripens  in  the  early  part  of  fall.  The 
leaves  and  bark  are  astringent,  and  much  used  m  tanning  mo- 
rocco leather,  and  in  dyeing  cloth.  Excrescences  are  produced 
under  the  leaves,  much  resembling  galls  in  character,  and  con- 
taining large  quantities  of  tannin.  These  have  been  used  as  a 
substitute  for  imported  galls,  and  are  said  to  be  preferable  in- 
every  respect.  They  may  be  collected  with  little  expense,  as 
they  are  produced  very  abundantly,  especially  in  the  western 
states.  The  bark,  leaves  and  berries,  are  used  in  the  Thomso- 
nian  practice.  The  berries  have  a  sour,  astringent,,  and  not 
unpleasant,  taste,  and  are  often  eaten,  with  no  bad  consequen- 
ces. 

Medical  uses. — Sumac  berries,  bark  and  leaves,  may  be  used 
as  medicine.  The  first  knowledge  I  had  of  the  virtues  of  this 
tree  was  in  1807,  when  in  Jericho,  Vermont,  attending  the 
dysentery.  I  was  much  in  want  of  something  to  clear  the  sto- 
mach and  bowels  of  canker  in  that  complaint.  While  in  search 
of  some  vegetable  substance  suitable  for  that  purpose,  I  acci- 
dentally tasted  the  sumac,  and  from  the  roughness  imparted  T 


S/iiA  IT  Srntt//  suf/ir/ii 


I;iiii:iinelis     xlr-K'niica. 
U'i/,/i  //me/ . 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  603 

was  at  once  satisfied  it  was  the  article  1  needed.  I  gathered  a 
quantity,  and  on  appHcation  it  more  than  answered  my  expect- 
ations ;  and  I  have  been  in  the  constant  use  of  it  since.  For 
medicine,  the  bark  should  be  gathered  when  full  of  sap — the 
leaves  when  full  grown,  and  the  berries  when  ripe.  They 
should  be  carefully  dried,  and  when  used  as  a  part  of  No.  3, 
should  be  powdered,  and  the  different  parts  used  altogether,  or 
alone.  The  bark  of  the  roots,  divested  of  the  epidermis,  or  out- 
er coat,  is  considered  almost  a  specific  in  the  sore  mouth  at- 
tending inordinate  mercurial  salivation. 

The  inner  bark  of  sumac  may  be  boiled  in  milk  and  used  to 
good  advantage  in  the  bloody  flux.  Used  in  this  way,  it  con- 
tains a  mucillage,  that  will  impart  a  soothing  sensation  to  the 
bowels,  that  is  very  agreeable  to  the  patient.  By  using  a  wine- 
glass of  equal  parts  of  gin  and  molasses  or  loaf  sugar,  while  un- 
der the  operation  of  the  above  preparation,  the  very  best  results 
may  be  anticipated.  The  gin  will  act  as  a  nervine,  and  will 
quiet  the  bowels,  and  stop  the  distressed,  forcing  sensation 
downwards;  and  thus,  while  under  this  influence,  the  healing 
properties  of  the  sumac  and  milk  are  left  to  act  upon  the  irrita- 
ble coats  of  the  bowels,  and  in  many  cases  the  force  of  the  dis- 
ease is  entirely  broken  before  the  antispasmodic  properties  of  the 
stimulant  have  left  the  body.  I  have  seen  patients  relieved 
from  this  distressing  disease  in  a  very  short  time  by  the  above 
treatment,  and  by  quieting  the  nervous  system,  they  were  com- 
pletely happy  in  mind,  and  relieved  in  body. 

I  have  also  used  the  red  raspberjy,  witch-hazle  leaves,  and 
the  Walpole  tea  [Cmnotlms  Americanus)  for  the  same  com- 
plaints, and  compounded  it  in  the  same  manner  and  form. 


HAMAMELIS  VIRGINICA.— No.  3,  continued. 

Witch-H(xzle. 

PITTEFt,    ASTRINGENT,    DISCUTIENT,    EXPECTORANT. 
To  remove  canker  from  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

Hamamelis  ViRGiNicA.  FoUa — Cortex.  The  leaves  and 
bark. — Leaves,  obovate,  acute,  toothed,  cordate,  with  a  small 
sinus.  Flowers  in  the  fall,  and  perfects  the  fruit  the  next  sum- 
mer.    A  shrub,  from  six  to  twelve  feet  high. 

Witch-hazle  is  an  indigenous  shrub,  growing  in  almost  all 
sections  of  North  America,  generally  on  stony  places  on  elevat- 
ed ground,  and  frequently  on  the  banks  of  streams,  or  borders 
of  swamps.  Its  yellow  flower  is  remarkable  for  its  late  appear- 
ance, which  expands  in  September  or  October,  and  continues 
till  late  in  the  fall.     The  fruit,  which  resembles  a  hazlenut,  ri- 


604  THE  THOMSONIAN 

pens  in  the  followino^  autumn,  and  is  frequently  mingled  on  the 
same  bush  with  the  new  blossoms.  The  bark  has  a  sweetish 
bitter,  pungent  and  astringent  taste. 

Medical  uses. — It  is  excellent  as  a  discutient,  applied  to 
painful  tumors,  and  other  cases  of  external  inflammation.  It  is 
used  in  the  form  of  poultices,  or  as  a  wash  in  decoction,  for 
hemorrhoidal  affections  and  ophthalmia.  The  leaves  possess 
the  same  qualities  as  the  bark,  and  may  be  given  in  decoction, 
internally,  for  bowel  complaints  and  hemorrhage.  The  seeds 
are  black  and  shinmg  externally,  white,  oily,  and  farinaceous 
within,  but  are  less  edible  than  the  hazlenut.  1  was  first  made 
acquainted  with  the  article  as  a  medicine  when  quite  young, 
and  have  continued  its  use  through  the  whole  course  of  my 
practice.  Its  value  consists  in  its  astringent,  stimulating,  and 
healing  properties. 

A  tea  of  the  leaves  maybe  used  freely  and  with  great  advan- 
tage, for  bleeding  at  the  stomach  and  lungs,  as  it  is  a  powerful 
styptic.  I  have  known  several  cases  cured,  by  chewing  the 
green  leaves  and  swallowing  the  juice.  In  some  cases  the  can- 
ker destroys  the  blood  vessels,  and  hemorrhage  and  ulceration 
take  place.  In  such  instances,  this  article  is  calculated,  if  judi- 
ciously applied,  to  remove  the  purulent  matter  and  keep  the  ori- 
fice cleansed  while  the  sore  is  healing.  I  have  made  much  use 
of  a  strong  tea  of  the  leaves  for  injections,  and  have  found  them 
serviceable  in  all  complaints  of  the  bowels.  For  the  piles,  bear- 
ing down  pains,  and  other  complaints  common  to  females,  this 
decoction,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  of  No.  2,  is  an  excellent 
remedy,  whether  for  abdominal  or  uterine  difficulties.  The 
medicine  must  be  applied  to  the  affected  parts  v;ith  the  appro- 
priate instruments.  The  bearing  down  pains  are  speedily  re- 
lieved by  such  a  course  of  treatment. 

Witch-hazle  leaves  may  be  used  in  connection  with  the  other 
articles  of  No.  3,  or  they  may  be  used  alone  as  a  substitute  for 
the  other  articles,  in  all  cases.  The  pulverized  leaves,  used  as 
snuflf,  are  an  excellent  remedy  for  bleeding  at  the  nose. 


RUBUS  STRIGOSUS.— No.  3,  continued. 
Red  Raspberry. 

ROUGH,  BITTER,  EXPECTORANT,  TONIC. 
To  remoTC  thrush,  discuss  ulcers,  and  cleanse  sores. 

RuBUS  Strigosus.  Folia.  The  leaves. — The  leaves  un- 
armed, rigidly  hispids ;  leafets  three,  or  pinnate-quinate,  oval,  at 
the  base  obtuse,  acuminate,  marked  with  lines,  and  white- 
downy  beneath.     Calyx,  acuminate.     Flowers,  axillary,  solita- 


i:- 


Rulxis  stri^'osus. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  605 

ry  at  the  ends  of  the  branches — white.  Peduncles  and  calyx^ 
hispid.     Berries,  red,  sweet.     Ascines,  very  slightly  attached. 

The  red  raspberry  leaves  and  berries  are  the  only  parts  of 
the  plant  used  by  me  as  medicine.  When  at  Eastport,  Me.,  in 
1811  or  12,  I  was  much  in  want  of  some  article  good  for  can- 
ker; so  I  had  recourse  to  my  nsnal  method,  of  tasting  and 
chewing,  to  ascertain  the  medical  virtues  of  plants.  1  found 
that  the  leaves  when  chewed  caused  a  rough  sensation  in  the 
month,  excited  the  salival  glands,  caused  a  free  expectoration, 
and  left  the  surface  of  the  mouth  moist,  pliable,  and  the  sense 
of  taste  as  acute  as  ever.  An  article  possessing  such  qualities, 
I  have  always  found  to  be  serviceable  in  all  cases  where  canker 
medicine  was  required.  I  gathered  a  quantity  of  the  leaves  at 
the  time  and  dried  them,  and  have  made  use  of  them  for  can- 
ker and  complaints  of  the  bowels,  with  great  success,  ever 
since.  For  relax  and  bowel  complaints  of  children,  and  in 
teething,  it  is  the  best  remedy  I  have  ever  found.  The  tea  giv- 
en in  drink  and  by  injections,  generally  affords  immediate  re- 
lief. 

Raspberry  leaves  may  be  used  freely  as  a  substitute  for  im- 
ported tea,  (thea  Chinensis)  with  no  apprehensions  of  danger. 
It  is  the  best  thing  for  a  wonan  in  travail  of  any  article  I  know 
of.  In  such  cases  it  should  be  given  in  strong  tea,  with  a  little 
of  No.  2,  sweetened.  It  will  bring  on  the  labor  pains  regular- 
ly, and  reduce  the  irregular  pains  to  order  and  regularity,  thus 
affording  rest  to  the  patient  in  the  intervals.  If  the  pains  are 
untimely,  it  will  quell  them.  If  timely  and  lingering,  give 
more  of  the  tea,  with  a  larger  quantity  of  No.  2,  and  umbil,  or 
nerve  powder.  This  will  assist  the  natural  functions  of  the  bo- 
dy, and  thus  hasten  the  labor.  And  if  this  is  given,  in  the  inter- 
vals the  patient  will  be  quiet,  and  rest  in  the  same  proportion  as 
the  labor  pains  were  severe.  Thus  the  woman's  strength  and 
courage  are  kept  up,  and  she  is  ready  to  meet  the  next  attack, 
thus  continuing  till  the  child  is  born. 

Should  a  relaxation  of  the  system  be  necessary  before  the 
child  is  born,  in  consequence  of  the  size  of  the  foetus,  or  of  the 
thick  set  frame  and  close  habit  of  body  of  the  woman,  add  to 
half  a  cup  of  this  tea  as  before  mentioned,  in  which  No.  2  and 
umbil  have  been  put,  a  teaspoonful  of  brown  emetic  (the  seeds 
of  the  lobelia  inflata  pulverized)  and  give  the  patient  this,  and 
if  necessary  an  injection  of  the  same  preparation.  Keep  the 
woman  covered  as  warm  as  may  be  comfortable,  and  these  are 
the  best  forceps  that  were  ever  applied,  to  bring  the  head  of  a 
child  through  a  contracted  pelvis. 

After  taking  the  lobelia  as  above  directed,  the  muscular  pow- 
er of  the  whole  system  is  relaxed,  and  with  the  general  relaxa- 
tion, lakes  place  that  of  the  cartilaginous  substances  of  the  bones 


606  THE  THOMSONIAN 

of  the  pelvis,  which  diiate  mechanically,  and  when  the  child 
is  born  they  contract  as  retrularly  to  their  places.  The  same  is 
also  the  case  with  the  uterus.  All  that  is  necessary  after  this 
medicine  has  prepared  the  patient,  is  for  the  midwife  to  direct 
the  head  of  the  foetus  to  and  within  the  bones  of  the  pelvis,  by 
elevating  or  depressing,  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  may 
require. 

After  the  child  is  born,  give  it  some  of  the  raspberry  leaf  tea 
occasionally,  sweetened,  with  milk.  This  will  prevent  the 
sore  mouth,  so  much  dreaded  by  mothers.  The  raspberry  tea 
is  also  good  as  a  wash  for  sore  nipples.  An  excellent  poultice 
for  burns  or  scalds  may  be  made,  by  taking  a  tea  of  this  article, 
and  thickening  it  with  fine  Indian  meal,  Boston  or  sponge 
crackers,  made  fine,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  slippery  elm. 
If  the  skin  is  off,  by  applying  this  poultice  or  washing  with  the 
tea,  the  smarting  will  be  stopped.  The  red  raspberry  may  be 
used  with  the  other  articles  of  No.  3,  or  it  may  be  substituted 
for  any  of  the  others,  or  be  used  by  itself,  to  good  effect.  Every 
family  ought  to  have  on  hand  a  supply  of  the  prepared  leaves, 
as  almost  a  universal  remedy. 


CEANOTHUS  AMERICANA.— No.  3,  continued. 
Red-Root^  American,  Walpole,  Liberty.,  or  New-Jersey  Tea. 

ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    E3I0LLIENT    AND    QUIETING. 
For  dysen(ery,  and  soreness  of  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

Ceanothus  Americana.  Folia — Radix — Semina.  The 
leaves,  roots,  and  seeds. — Leaves,  ovate,  acuminate,  serrate, 
three-nerved,  pubescent  beneath.  Panicles,  axillary,  long  pe- 
duncles, sub-corymbed. 

The  Walpole  ox  American  tea,  is  a  small,  indiginous  shrub, 
growing  on  pine  plains,  throughout  the  United  States.  The 
root  is  astringent,  and  imparts  a  red  color  to  water.  It  is  said 
to  be  useful  in  syphilitic  complaints,  in  which  it  is  given  in 
the  form  of  decoction,  made  in  the  proportion  of  one  ounce  of 
the  green  roots,  well  bruised,  put  into  one  pint  of  poft  hot  water. 
In  some  cases  it  is  a  purgative.  The  leaves  were  used  during 
the  revolutionary  war  as  a  substitute  for  tea. 

Medical  uses. — The  leaves  and  seeds  of  tliis  plant,  when 
bruised,  or  masticated  in  the  mouth,  are  astringent  and  mucila- 
ginous. For  the  summer  complaint,  or  looseness  of  the  bowels 
in  children,  this  is  an  admirable  remedy,  for  which  it  is  equal 
to  any  shrub  in  our  materia  medica.  In  taste,  it  somewhat  re- 
sembles the  Tkea  Bohea,  or  bohca  tea;  and  from  its  similarity 
to  that  article  in  its  aromatic  taste,  it  has  been  by  some  denomi- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  ^OT 

'-Slated  American  Bohea.  It  may  be  used  the  same  as  the  im- 
ported tea,  with  milk  and  sugar.  It  is  a  good  remedy,  with  the 
addition  of  a  Uttle  Cayenne,  employed  as  a  gargle,  for  aphthous, 
inflammatory  or  putrid  sore  throat,  and  also  in  sore  month.  It 
is  a  tonic,  and  not  only  useful  as  n  medicine,  but  is  a  cheap  and 
■healthy  substitute  for  imp  irted  tea.  For  the  dysentery  or  other 
cases  of  canker,  the  green  leaves  may  be  masticatt^d  and  swal- 
lowed in  substance,  or  tliey  may  be  stepped  and  the  tea  used  to 
good  advantage,  whether  green  or  dry.  The  leaves  may  be 
boiled  in  milk,  sweetened,  and  used  in  dysentery,  or  relaxed  stale 
of  the  bowels,  and  is  an  excellent  remedy  to  remove  any  kind 
of  soreness  of  the  bowels,  occasioned  by  too  great  an  irritation 
of  those  parts. 


ASTER  HYSSOPIFOLIUS— No.  3,  continued. 

Cocash — Squaw-  Weed — Starjlower. 

AROMATIC,    STIMULANT,    ASTRINGENT,    ANTISPASMODIC 
For  caaksr — but  less  used  ihaii  the  precediDg  articles  under  this  bead. 

Aster  Hyssopifolius.  R<idix.  The  root. — Leaves,  line- 
ar, lanceolate,  three-nerved,  punctate,  acute;  margin  scabrous- 
hranchlets,  level-topped,  corynibed,  compact.  Rays,  about  five 
■'flowered.  Calyx,  imbricate,  twice  as  short  as  the  disk,  from 
twelve  to  twenty-four  inches  high. 

The  Squaw-  Weed  grows  in  meadows,  on  the  margin  of  ri- 
vulets and  marshy  grounds.  The  flower  is  about  the  size  of  a 
sixpence,  including  disk  and  rays.  The  disk  is  yellow,  and 
the  rays  purple,  or  of  a  purplish  white.  It  blossoms  late  in  the 
iall,  the  flowers  remaining  until  the  frost  kills  the  rays,  which 
fall  ofl',  and  the  seed  is  perfected.  The  root  lives  throuo-h  the 
winter,  and  young  stalks  shoot  forth  in  the  spring. 

Medical  uses. — The  roots  and  top  are  used  as  medicine  •  the 
root  is  very  aromatic,  the  fragrance  much  resembling  casta?-  Ji- 
bber.    It  was  the  first  tiling  I  ever  knew  used  for  canker and 

was  given  to  me  when  I  had  the  canker  rash,  (scarlatina)  being 
ihen  considered  the  best  article  known  for  canker.  I  have  fre- 
quently used  it  for  that  complaim,  and  found  it  to  answer  an 
-excellent  purpose. 

Take  the  green  roots  and  leaves,  bruise  them  and  pour  on 

shot  water,  and  let  it  infuse  for  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes;    then 

pour  off,  and  add  sugar  and  milk.     By  adding  a  little  spirits  to 

the  tea  it  may  be  preserved,  and  is  a  good  remedy  for  rheumat- 

ac  and  nervous  aftections.     It  is  a  harmless  arti-cle,  and  may  be 


608  THE    THOMSONIAN 

used  freely.  Tinctured  in  spirits  and  water,  itmaFcesa  very 
good  bitter,  and  is  good  for  vertigo,  and  coldness  of  the  ixtre- 
mities. 


GUEM  VIRGINIANUM.— No.  3,  continned. 
Ave)is  Root — Chocolate  Root. 

BITTER,    ASTRINGENT,    AROMATIC,    AND    TONIC. 
To  be  used  for  canker,  and  general  derangement  of  the  digestive  organs. 

Geum  Virginianum.  Radix.  The  root. — This  plant  is- 
herbaceous  and  perennial,  with  branchins:,  erect,  slender,  hir- 
sute stems,  from  twelve  to  twenty  inches  hio^h.  The  leaves  ar& 
serrate,  hairy,  and  petiolate.  On  the  upper  part  of  the  stalk 
the  leaves  are  simple  and  pointed  ;  those  nearest  the  root,  pin- 
nate, with  two  pairs  of  leafets.  The  Jloivers  are  of  a  bright  yel- 
low color,  small,  and  situated  upon  erect,  terminal  peduncles. 
The  seeds  are  collected  in  a  roundish  cap-like  pod,  and  have  at 
the  top  a  naked  avv^n,  and  much  covered  at  the  apex. 

Medical  2f.ses. — This  root  is  much  prized  by  those  acquaint- 
ed with  its  properties,  fm*  its  tonic  and  astringent  virtues.  In 
the  Thomsonian  practice  it  is  used  with  those  articles  embrac- 
ed under  the  head  of  No.  3,  such  as  crane's-bill,  bnyberry,  witch 
hazle,  hemlock,  (fcc,  for  complaints  of  the  bowels,  dysentery, 
leuchorrhoea,  &c. 

The  root,  pulverized,  is  used  by  people  in  many  parts  of  the 
country  as  a  beverage  with  their  meals,  and  is  denominated 
chocolate,  from  its  flavor  reseiiiblinij  that  article  of  diet,  when 
prepared  with  milk  and  sugar.  Hence  is  called  by  some  cho- 
colate root. 

It  is  an  excellent  article  for  sore  mouth,  and  may  be  used  ta 
great  advantage  with  children  when  teething.  It  is  an  article 
well  deserving,  from  its  many  virtues,  to  be  called  ^'the  poor 
marl's  fi'iend"  as  there  is  scarcely  a  disease  that  a  person  can- 
be  troubled  with  in  which  the  chocolate  root  cannot  be  used 
with  profit  to  the  patient.  It  grows  in  moist  meadow  lands,  and 
is  generally  known,  even  by  children,  as  they  are  taught  from 
their  infancy  to  be  familiar  with  its  medicinal  virtues. 

A  teaspoonfnl  of  the  powder  may  be  put  into  half  a  teneup  of 
water  and  sweetened,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  milk,  in  which 
form  it  may  be  taken  either  as  an  article  of  diet  or  as  medicine. 
It  may  be  used  by  those  troubled  with  sore  mouth  or  dysentery 
in  the  root  in  its  green  state,  by  masticating  and  swallowing  the 
saliva  and  the  root  in  the  fine  substance  ;  or  it  may  be  made  in- 
to a  syrup,  by  putting  one  pound  of  the  green  root,  well  bruis- 
ed, into  one  gallon  of  water,  and  simmering  it  down  to  three 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


609 


quarts  ;  then  strain  off,  sweeten  well  with  loaf  sns^ar,  add  four 
ounces  of  allspice,  well  pulverized,  one  quart  of  4th  proof  Ja- 
maica rum,  and  one  teaspoonful  of  Cayenne  pepper. 

The  syrup  should  be  made  in  the  fall  or  spring,  before  the 
leaves  have  come  out  or  after  they  have  decayed,  as  the  root 
then  possesses  its  fnll  strength.  The  medicine  should  be  care- 
fully stopped  in  a  jug,  and  kept  constantly  on  hand  for  use,  buE 
especially  in  the  sprmg,  summer  and  autumn,  when  we  are  li- 
able to  be  attacked  whh  dysentery,  chronic  diarrhoeaj  dyspep- 
sia, <fcc. 


GERANIUM  BIACULATUM— No.  3,  continued. 
Cranesbill. 

ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    AND    BITTER. 
For  canker,  dysentery,  and  to  cleanse  the  i-tomach  and  bowels. 

Geranium  Maculatum.  Folia— Radix.  The  leaves  and 
root — Erect,  pubescent,  reversed.  »S7em,  dichotomous.  Leaves^ 
opposite,  three  or  five  parted,  upper  ones  sessile.  Peduncles, 
two-flowered.     Petals,  obovate. 

The  cranesbill  has  a  perennial,  fleshy  root,  which  sends  up 
annually  an  erect,  herbaceous  stem,  with  a  number  of  radical 
leaves.  The  stem  is  round,  branched,  from  twelve  to  twenty 
inches  high,  of  a  light  green  color,  and  thickly  covered  with  pe- 
tioles and  peduncles,  which  are  hirsute.  The  division  of  the 
leaves  is  into  several  lobes,  which  are  incised  and  hairy,  and  of 
a  light  green  color,  and  scattered  with  still  paler  spots.  The 
leaves  which  rise  from  the  root  aie  attached  by  foot-stalks,  six 
or  eight  inches  long.  The  flowers  are  usually  large  and  pur- 
ple. The  peduncles  spring  from  the  angle  of  the  stalk  and 
stem;  and  severally  support  two  flowers. 

The  cranesbill  is  indigenous  to  all  parts  of  the  United  States, 
in  woods,  meadows  and  hedges,  but  most  usually  in  moist  low 
grounds.  It  flowers  in  June  and  July.  The  roots  should  be 
gathered  in  the  fall. 

Medical  uses. — This  species  of  geranium  is  one  of  the  most 
powerful  astringents  with  which  we  are  acquainted,  and  may 
be  employed  for  all  the  purposes  that  any  of  the  articles  under 
No.  3  are  used.  The  absence  of  a  bad  taste,  renders  it  very  ser- 
viceable in  cases  of  infants,  or  persons  of  weak  and  debilitated 
stomachs.  It  is  an  excellent  article  for  cholera-infantum  in  its 
last  stages,  and  for  diarrhoea.  For  hemorrhage  of  the  lungs 
and  bowels  it  is  very  useful.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the 
condition  of  the  system  be  such  as  not  to  require  the  use  of  pow- 
erful astringents.    As  an  application  to  torpid  ulcers,  and  an  in- 


610  THE  THOMSONIAN 

jection  in  gleets  and  leiicorrhcca,  or  whites;  a  gargle  in  aph> 
thous  ulcerations,  or  putrid  sore  throat,  it  answers  as  valuable 
a  purpose  as  the  other  astringents — bayberry,  vvitch-hazle,  red 
raspberry,  &c.  It  is  considered  as  a  valuable  remedy  in  many 
parts  oi  the  country,  and  much  used  by  all  Thomsonians  who 
are  acquainted  with  its  virtues. 

For  a  dose,  take  a  teaspoonful  of  the  fine  powder  in  a  teacnp- 
ful  of  hot  water,  to  which  add  a  little  Cayenn<5,  and  sweeten, 
with  milk.  It  may  be  used  instead  of  composition,  or  any  of 
the  canker  remedies,  while  under  the  operation  of  courses  of 
medicine. 

It  may  be  simmered  with  honey  and  borax,  and  used  for  all 
inflammatory  difficulties  of  the  mouth  and  throat.  It  is  good 
for  old  ulcers,  which  may  be  washed  in  a  decoction  of  the  roots. 
It  is  an  excellent  article  to  sweeten  the  mouth  and  breath,  and 
to  cleanse  the  teeth  from  impurities,  by  its  rough  cleansing  pro- 
perties. 

Children  that  are  teething,  by  taking  a  weak  beverage  made 
of  this  root,  sweetened,  and  with  milk,  will  remain  healthy  m 
the  stomach  and  bowels. 


dUERCUS  RlJBRA.~No.  3,  continued. 
Black  Oak, 

BITTER,  ASTRINGENT,  SLIGHTLY  STIMULANT,  TONIC,  AND  AROMATIC. 
For  dysentery,  hemorrhage,  intormitteiits,  and  obstinate  diarrhoea. 

Q,UERCus  Rubra.  Cortex — Glans  iberica.  The  bark  and 
acorns. — Leaves,  long-petioled,  obUmg,  glabrous,  obtusely  sin- 
uate, lobes  acutish,  toothed,  setaceous-mucronate.  Caly-x,  sau- 
cer-form, smoothisli.     Acorns,  sub-ovate,  turgid. 

This  valuable  tree  is  indigenous  to  the  United  States,  and  is 
one  of  the  largest  of  the  American  forest.  It  frequently  attains 
the  height  of  from  seventy  to  one  hundred  feet.  Its  trunk  is 
covered  with  a  thick  bark,  of  a  dark  brown  color.  The  acorns 
are  round,  flattened  at  the  top,  and  placed  in  a  saucer-shaped 
cup. 

The  bark  of  black  oak  is  the  most  powerful  bitter  of  any  of 
the  species,  and  may  be  distinguished  by  its  coloring  the  saliva 
when  chewed. 

Medical  uses. — The  bark  of  the  oak  is  an  astring-ent  and 
feeble  tonic,  and  may  be  used  in  fever,  obstinate  diarrficea,  and 
scrofula.  It  may  be  compounded  with  bayberry,  hrujiock, 
witch-hazie  or  raspberry,  in  the  propoition  of  one  fourlli,  iuid 
used  in  all  cases  of  canker,  or  for  any  of  the  purposes  for  which 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  611 

any  article  of  No.  3  may  be  used;  or  as  one  of  the  ingredients 
of  composition  powders. 

The  acorns,  when  ripe,  may  he  pulverized  and  simmered  in 
honey,  with  a  little  Cayenne  or  guiwer,  and  used  for  sore  mouth, 
or  inflammatory  sore  throat,  and  is  also  good  for  cliildren  that 
are  troubled  with  looseness  of  the  bowels. 

The  White  Oak  [qitercus  alba)  possesses  nearly  the  same 
properties  as  the  querciis  rubra.  The  bark  of  both  is  valuable 
as  medicine,  and  should  be  gaihered,  dried,  and  pulverized  for 
use,  the  same  as  other  articles  of  the  kind.  The  acorns  may 
be  gathered,  when  ripe,  and  prepared  the  same  as  the  bark. 


SALVA  OFFICIiVALIS.— No.  3,  continued. 

Sage, 

TONIC,    ASTRINGENT,    AROMATIC,    AND    STIMULANT. 
To  ease  arterial  and  nervous  excitement,  and  quiet  tbe  mental  faculties. 

Salva  Officinalis.  Seininoi — Capsules — Folia — Can- 
lis.  The  seeds,  whorls,  leaves,  and  stalks. — Cali/.v,  subcam- 
panulate,  striate,  and  two-lipped,  above  thrne-toothed,  below  bi- 
fid. Corolla,  tube  widening  at  the  faux,  limb  bilabiate,  the  up- 
per lip  arched  and  emarginate,  the  lower,  three-lobed,  the  late- 
ral segments  narrower,  the  intermediate  one  larger  and  nearly 
round  (sometimes  crenale).  The  two  fertile  filaments  transe- 
versely  pedicellate. 

iSage  is  a  perennial  garden  plant,  from  twelve  to  twenty 
inches  high  ;  its  flowering  summit  and  leaves  have  a  strong, 
fragrant  odor,  and  a  warm,  bitter,  aromatic,  and  somewhat 
astringent  taste.  It  possesses  a  volatile  oil  which  may  be  pro- 
cured by  distillation  with  water,  and  contains  considerable 
camphor. 

Medical  Uses. — There  are  combined  in  sage  a  considerable 
degree  of  tonic  and  astringent  powers,  which  are  common  to 
most  aromatic  plants.  In  form  of  a  gargle,  when  combined 
with  alum  or  borax,  in  vinegar,  with  cayenne  and  honey,  it  is 
an  excellent  remedy  for  inflammation  of  the  throat  and  relaxa- 
tion of  the  uvula.  In  the  Thomsonian  practice,  sage  in  con- 
nection with  senna,  has  been  used  with  ijood  results.  While 
the  writer  was  in  practice  on  the  island  of  Nantucket,  in  1822, 
the  typhus  fever  was  epidemic  during  the  winter,  and  proved 
fatal  to  the  greater  part  of  those  who  were  attended  by  the  re- 
gular physicians.  One  family  in  particular,  lost  three  of  its 
members,  all  of  whom  were  under  a  high  state  of  mental  de- 
rangement, from  the  first  or  second  day  after  the  attack.     The 


612  THE  THOMSONIAN 

symptoms  were  pain  in  ihe  head,  back  and  limbs,  with  sore 
throat,  and  great  anxiety  and  nervons  excitabihty.  The  first 
lived  seven  d;iys,  the  second  four,  and  the  third  eleven.  The 
unremitted  attention  of  two  or  three  physicians,  cotild  afford 
no  relief.  After  the  decease  ot  the  last  child,  the  father  re- 
marked, that  shonld  another  member  of  his  family  be  attacked, 
he  should  employ  the  botanic  physician.  In  a  few  days,  the 
eldest  daughter  was  taken  with  precisely  the  same  symptoms  as 
the  others,  and  much  against  her  inclmation,  we  were  called. 
As  it  was  highly  important  for  the  safety  of  the  patient  that 
she  should  possess  her  mental  f^iculties  during  her  sickness,  in 
order  that  we  might  know  from  herself  the  situation  of  her 
system,  and  as  she  was  already  inclining  to  derangement,  our 
first  object  was  to  quiet  the  nervous  irritability  of  the  body,  and 
relieve  the  distress  in  the  head.  '^I'o  effect  which,  we  took  half 
an  ounce  of  sage,  half  an  ounce  of  semia,  (cassia  marilandica) 
and  put  the  two  articles  into  half  a  pint  of  boiling  water,  to 
which  we  added  one  teaspoonful  of  ginger.  The  articles  were 
simmered  together  about  twenty  minutes ;  then  half  the  quan- 
tity was  pourtid  off  and  administered  at  a  time,  when  cool 
enough  to  drink.  We  also  applied  to  the  neck  an  adhesive 
stimulating  plaster,  and  put  a  bottle  of  hot  water  to  the  feet. 
The  medicine  operated,  and  in  about  three  hours,  the  pain  in 
the  head  was  entirely  gone,  the  nervous  excitement  was  much 
reduced,  and  the  patient  felt  quite  comfortable.  Tonics  were 
next  given,  and  in  a  (e\v  days  she  was  restored  to  health  with- 
out at  any  time  losing  her  senses.  The  same  winter  we  at- 
tended five  patients  in  that  family,  three  of  the  typhus  fever, 
and  the  case  above  mentioned  is  a  fair  account  of  the  others. 
They  all  recovered  to  the  great  satisfiiction  of  their  parents.  I 
occasionally  sfave  a  light  emetic,  and  sometimes  ordered  an  in- 
jection of  milk,  in  which  were  cayenne  and  castor  oil:  this 
would  entirely  remove  the  stricture  of  the  bowels.  Cathartics 
and  astringents  were  given  in  such  proportions  as  to  produce 
just  a  healthy  motion  of  the  bowels,  consequently  the  head  was 
clear,  easy  and  comfortable.  Wlien  these  two  opposite  medi- 
cines were  given,  in  just  proportions  to  correct  the  action,  I 
found  no  danger  of  mortification,  or  of  any  other  injury  result- 
ing from  the  physic. 

In  putrid  difficulties,  sage  tea  may  be  used  with  great  advan- 
tage, as  an  antiseptic ;  and  if  an  aperient  were  to  be  used,  it 
should  be  of  oil  and  milk.  This  creates  an  agreeable  sensa- 
tion, and  renders  the  patient  comfortable.  In  all  cases  of  vio- 
lent diseases,  attended  with  insanity,  the  bowels  are  generally 
the  seat  of  the  disease,  attended  with  cold  feet  and  a  pressure  of 
blood  to  the  head.  In  sucfi  cases,  after  using  the  proper  reme- 
dies for  the  bowels  as  laxatives,  bathe  the  feet  in  hot  water,  and 


^ 


(liplonc     )>l;il)r;i. 
/><i/liif/i//.      S/nrii     /mil/ . 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


613 


rhus  you  will  much  assist  the  favorable  npeuition  of  the  Medi- 
cine.    Powerful  physic  should  never  be  giv.  n. 


BITTKilS  TO  CORRECT  THE  BSLE  A?;D 
UESTOllE  D5€JEST  ON. 


CHELOiNE  GLABRA.— No.  4. 
Balmony — Snalce-IIead — Bitter  Herb, 

STOMACHIC,    BITTER    TONIC, 
To  correct  the  bile,  and  assist  the  digestive  powers, 

Chelone  Glabra.  Flores — Folia.  The  flowers  and  the 
leaves. — The  leaves  opposite,  lance-oblong,  acuminate,  serrate. 
Spikes,  terminal,  dense-flowered ;   flowers  purplish  white. 

Chelone  Alba.     Leaves  sub-sessile,  flowers  white. 

Chelone  Purpurea.     Leaves  short-petioled,  flowers  purple. 

Chelone  Lanceolate.  Leaves  lanceolate,  acuminate,  serrate, 
sessile,  pubescent  beneath  :  segments  of  the  calyx,  oblong. 

These  diflerent  species  of  the  same  order  possess  nearly  the 
same  medical  properties.  The  chelone  glabra  grows  most 
abundantly  in  wet  mowing  lands,  or  by  the  side  of  brooks  or  ri- 
vulets. It  is  about  the  size  of  spearmint,  and  resembles  it  in 
height  and  in  the  shape  of  the  stallc  and  leaves.  The  leaves 
are  dark  green,  and  of  a  sweetish  bitter  taste.  The  white  flow- 
er is  of  a  singular  form,  resembling  a  snake's  head,  with  the 
mouth  open — hence  its  name. 

Medical  uses. — Tbe  balmony  is  a  bitter  of  the  first  order,  for 
correcting  the  morbid  secretions  of  the  bile,  removing  the  tor- 
pidity of  the  liver,  and  creating  an  appetite.  A  tea  made  of  the 
plant  may  be  used  alone,  or  with  any  of  the  articles  under  the 
head  of  No.  4 ;  all  of  which  are  calculated  to  restore  the  digest- 
ive powers. 


HYDRASTIS  CANADENSIS.— No.  4,  continued. 

Goldefi  Seal — Kercuma — Orange  Yellow,  or 
Turmerick  Root. 

TONIC,  STIMULANT,  BITTEK  AND  ASTRINGENT. 
To  restore  digestion,  and  correct  the  morbid  state  of  the  liver. 

Hydrastis  Canadensis.     Radix.   The  root. — Stem,  with 
two  opposite  leaves  above.     Leaves,  petioled,  emarginate  at  the 


614  THE  TIIOMSONIAiN 

base,   palmate,  serrate,  flashed.     Pedimclc,  terminal,  solitary, 
one-flowered.     Hoot,  yellow. 

Golden  /Seal  is  an  herbaceous,  annual,  and  indiginous 
plant,  growing  in  different  parts  of  the  United  States,  but  most- 
ly west  of  the  Allegliany  mountains.  It  flourishes  best  in  wet 
wood  lauds.  It  has  a  perennial  root,  and  an  herbaceous,  annual 
stem,  from  six  inches  to  one  foot  in  height,  with  two  unequal 
leaves,  and  a  single  terminal  whitish  or  rose-colored  flower. 
The  root  consists  of  a  tortuous  cordex.  and  numerous  long  fi- 
bres, and  is  of  a  bright  yellow  color.  It  is  juicy  when  newly 
dug,  and  its  weight  is  mucli  diminished  by  drying.  It  has  a 
strong  odor,  and  an  exceedingly  bitter  taste.  It  possesses  the 
ordinary  virtues  of  ve2;etable  bitters  in  a  great  degree,  and  is 
popularly  employed  as  a  useful  tonic  by  Thomsonian  physi- 
cians throughout  the  United  States.  In  form  of  an  infusion,  it 
has  been  much  used  in  the  western  states,  as  a  topical  applica- 
tion in  ophthalmia  (inflammation  of  the  eyes).  The  Indians 
are  said  to  have  employed  it  in  the  same  form  for  old  sores. 
They  also  use  the  juice  of  the  root  as  paint  and  for  coloring. 

Medical  iises. — F'^r  dyspeptics,  or  those  who  are  troubled 
with  indigestion,  a  teaspoonful  of  this  root  pulverized,  taken  in 
a  little  hot  water,  sweetened,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  Cay- 
enne, will  give  immediate  relief  from  the  distress  caused  by 
food  in  the  stomach.  It  is  an  excellent  corrector  of  the  bile, 
and  may  be  used  for  that  purpose.  Compounded  with  poplar 
bark,  one  part  of  golden  seal  and  two  of  poplar  bark,  four  parts 
of  good  sugar  and  one  eighth  part  Cayenne,  forms  a  compound 
that  is  valuable  in  every  family,  where  it  should  be  used. 
When  the  food  occasions  distress,  a  small  particle  of  this  pow- 
der— tlie  size  of  a  pea — will  remove  the  inquietude.  It  is  also 
good  in  cases  of  worms  in  children,  taken  in  hot  water.  It  is 
very  good  in  jaundice,  and  in  all  derangements  of  the  digestive 
organs.  In  colic,  it  may  be  used  to  good  effect.  If  you  have  a 
faint  sickening  sensation  at  the  stomach  and  no  appetite,  take  a 
little  of  this  in  hot  water,  sweet  wine,  or  cider.  In  fact,  if  yon 
wish  a  remedy  which  you  can  find  the  most  extensively  useful 
in  the  little  every  day  ills  to  which  we  all  are  liable,  keep  a  sup- 
ply of  this  medicine  on  hand. 


'f^0^Jlr'^''^^M 


ronnliis    Irrmiiloidi's. 


IHATERFA    MEDrCA  615 

POPULUS.~No.  4,  continued, 
American  Aspen — Poplar  Tree. 

TONIC,    AROMATIC,    BITTER,    APERIENT. 
To  restore  the  gall,  and  digestive  powers. 

Poplar. — Cortex.     Tlie  bark. 

There  are  ei^ht  different  species  of  the  poplar,  all  of  whicFi 
are  used  as  medicine,  hut  some  of  which  are  more  valuable  than 
ihe  others. 

Populus  tremvhids,  white  poplar,  or  American  aspen. 
The  leaves  are  heart-roundisli,  abruptly  acuminate,  tooth-ser- 
rulate, glabrous,  a  little  pubescent  at  the  margin,  with  two 
glands  at  the  base  on  the  upper  side.  Petioles,  compressed,  in 
the  young  stalk,  silky.  This  species  is  much  used  by  Thom- 
sonians. 

Populus  glandtdentata  (tree  poplar).  Leaves,  round-ovate, 
acute  unequally,  and  coarsely  sinuate,  toothed,  glabrous:  in  the 
young  state  villose.     Petioles,  compressed. 

Populus  pendnla  varies  from  the  last  species  by  the  branch- 
es being  pendulous,  or  sagging  heavily  down. 

Poptdus  betulifolia  (birch  leaf  poplar).  Leaves,  rhomboidal^ 
long-acuminate,  dentate,  glabrous;  young  branches  pilose. 

Populus  angulata  {hoXm  of  Gilead,  vv^ater-poplar,  or  cotton- 
wood).  Leaves,  ovate-deltoid,  acuminate,  obtusely  hook-tooth- 
ed, glabrous,  younger  ones  broad-cordate;  branches,  wing-an- 
gled. 

Medical  uses. — The  Balm  of  Gilead  is  much  used  by  many 
of  the  Thomsonian  practitioners,  in  a  preparation  for  a  cough, 
or  by  making  a  balsam  of  the  pulverized  buds.  We  have  used 
it  as  follows,  comf^nded  with  honey,  the  syrup  of  ginger, 
with  a  syrup  made  ^rcugar,  or  of  any  kind  of  preserves,  such 
as  peaches,  pine  apples,  raspberry,  blackberry,  quince,  plums, 
or  with  the  syrup  of  apple  sauce,  well  saturated.  Put  two 
ounces  of  the  buds,  made  fine,  into  one  pint  of  either  kind  of 
the  syrups  above  mentioned,  and  simmer  it  over  a  slow  fire 
from  fifteen  to  thirty  minutes,  and  when  cold  add  a  gill  of  4th 
proof  Jamaica  rum,  and  stop  it  tight  in  a  bottle  with  the  grain.s 
for  use.  It  is  good  for  coughs,  pain  in  the  side,  shortness  of 
breath,  spitting  blood,  and  in  many  cases  its  tonic  powers  ope- 
rate well  on  the  appetite. 

In  many  cases  the  balsam  will  be  too  strong  a  tonic  for  weak 
patients ;  in  such  cases  it  must  be  reduced,  by  taking  a  few 
drops,  in  soft  water,  warm.  In  ordinary  cases  it  may  be  taken 
from  half  to  a  teaspoonful.  In  a  great  variety  of  other  ways- 
this  valuable  balsam  may  be  taken. 

Populus  halsamifera  (balsam  poplar,  black  poplar,  tag  pop- 


616  THE   THOMSONIAN 

lar,  stinking  poplar).  Leaves,  ovate  acuminate,  with  dose- 
pressed  serratures,  white  and  net-veined  beneath  ;  bud  resin- 
ous. This  is  the  most  vahiable  species  of  all  tlie  poplars  lor  its 
own  tonic  properties.  The  bark  may  be  dried  and  pulverized 
for  use;  or  it  may  be  boiled  down,  and  an  extract  procured, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  articles  in  the  way  of  tonics 
or  bitters  of  any  in  the  Thomsonian  materia  medica. 

Medical  uses. — The  pulverized  bark  may  be  used  in  the 
composition  powders  to  good  advantaije.  Take  one  pound  of 
this  bark,  or  more  if  you  wish  to  make  it  bitter,  and  add  it  to 
the  composition,  as  prepared.     (See  preparations.) 

It  may  also  be  used  in  proportion  of  three  pounds  to  one  of 
golden  seal,  two  ounces  of  Cayenne,  and  eight  poutids  of  sugar, 
all  well  mixed.  This  compound  is  an  excellent  article  for  dys- 
pepsia, and  all  cases  of  indigestion.  It  may  be  taken  dry,  ii 
milk,  in  warm  water,  and  in  various  other  ways  ;  but  the  best 
manner  is  the  most  simple,  that  is,  dry  or  in  warm  water,  with 
milk  and  sugar.     Dose,  from  half  to  a  teaspoouful. 

For  the  aged  and  infirm,  where  the  vital  energy  is  fast  declin- 
ing, and  nature  needs  the  assistance  of  a  medicine  that  will  sup- 
port it,  the  same  as  a  staff  does  the  body,  this  article  will  serve 
for  that  purpose,  so  long  as  the  digestive  powers  can  be  braced 
up  to  support  the  body. 

When  a  person  has  arrived  at  maturity,  the  digestive  powers 
have  attained  their  highest  state  of  strength  or  perfection.  But 
they  now  begin  gradually  to  decay.  The  person  may  eat  the 
same  amount  of  food  as  formerly,  but  there  is  not  the  same  abi- 
lity to  extract  by  digestion  the  same  quantity  of  nourishment. 
As  digestion  continues  gradually  failing,  so  do  the  other  consti- 
tutional and  mental  powers  follow,  the  same  as  they  did  in  ar- 
riving at  maturity,  and  the  strength  and  substance  of  the  body 
which  were  accumulated  in  youth,  are  drawn  upon  to  support 
the  system.  When  the  digestive  powers  begin  to  decay,  we 
are  admonished  to  do  something  to  sustain  the  body  under  its 
consequent  dibility.  Two  different  methods  are  adopted.  One 
is  to  support  the  body  by  means  of  a  staff,  the  other  to  brace  up 
the  digestive  organs  by  means  of  internal  applications. 

By  these  two  methods  combined,  if  the  constitution  has  sus- 
tained no  material  injury,  the  person  may  live  and  make  him- 
self comfortable  to  a  great  age.  Take  good  care,  therefore,  to 
keep  the  gall  strong  and  healthy,  by  a  good  artificial  bitter,  as 
that  is  the  physic  of  the  body,  and  without  which  the  system  is 
soon  filled  up  or  obstructed,  from  a  costive  habit,  the  appetite 
impaired,  and  the  body  can  procure  but  little  nourishment  from 
the  food.  Assist  the  natural  stimulus  by  artificial  means,  as  its 
natural  means  of  production  fail,  which  is  the  proper  consump- 
tion of  food,  or  the  fuel  of  life.     Thus  keep  up  the  power,  or 


ropiilus    aiiRiilala. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  617 

a  head  of  steam,  or  vitality,  if  you  so  please  to  call  it,  to  operate 
upon  the  machinery. 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  that  every  person  should  become 
something  of  an  engineer,  in  order  to  work  systematically  and 
philosophically,  his  own  mortal  powers,  in  such  form  and  man- 
ner as  to  enjoy  in  the  greatest  possible  degree  the  blessings  of 
life,  the  pleasures  of  society,  and  the  beauties  and  grandeur  of 
the  celestial  as  well  as  terrestrial  works  of  creation. 

An  extract  is  made  from  this  bark,  that  is  very  useful  in  the 
form  of  pills.  It  is  also  used,  for  its  adhesive  properties,  in 
making  emetic  and  other  compound  pills,  used  in  our  practice. 


BERBERIS  VULGARIS.— No.  4,  continued. 

Barberry. 

REFRIGERENT,    ASTRINGENT,    ANTISCORBUTIC    AND    APERIENT. 
To  restore  digestion,  and  correct  the  morbid  secretions  of  the  blood  and  bile. 

Berberis  Vulgaris.  Bacca — Cortex — Radix.  The  ber- 
ries, bark,  and  root. — Branches,  punctate.  Prickles,  mostly  in 
thiees.     Leaves,  obovate.     Floioers,  racemed. 

This  bush  is  from  four  to  ten  feet  high,  and  grows  wild  in 
the  United  States,  and  in  many  parts  of  Europe,  and  is  fre- 
quently cultivated  for  its  berries,  which  grow  in  loose  clusters, 
are  oblong,  and  of  a  red  color,  have  a  pleasant  sour  and  rather 
an  astringent  taste,  and  contain  malic  and  citric  acids.  It  is  an- 
tiscorbutic, astringent  and  refrigerent,  and  is  frequently  used  in 
the  form  of  drink,  in  febrile  diseases  and  diarrhoeas.  A  plea- 
sant drink  is  made  from  the  juice,  and  the  berries  are  frequent- 
ly preserved  for  the  table.  The  bark  has  been  used  for  dyeing 
yellow,  and  also  much  employed  in  treating  the  jaundice.  The 
bark  owes  its  coloring  property  to  a  peculiar  crystalizable  prin- 
c  pie,  which  has  been  denominated  herherin,  and  which  is  said 
to  the  dose  of  from  one  fourth  to  a  teaspoonful,  or  from  three  to 
ten  grains,  to  act  as  a  tonic  and  a  purgative. 

Experienced  farmers  inform  us,  that  loheat  will  not  flourish 
successfully  within  forty  or  fifty  rods  of  where  this  bush  grows. 
The  filaments  of  this  shrub  have  a  remarkable  degree  of  irrita- 
bility; for  on  being  touched  near  the  base  with  the  point  of  a 
pin,  a  sudden  contraction  is  produced,  which  may  be  repeated 
several  times. 

Medical  uses. — The  berries,  which  are  pleasantly  acid,  and 
moderately  astringent,  are  of  use  in  biliary  fluxes,  and  in  most 
cases  where  acrimony,  heat  and  putridity  of  the  humors  predo- 
mitiiite.     The  syrup  of  the  fruit  preserved  makes  a  pleasant  re- 

40 


618  THE  THOMSONIAN 

frigerating  drink  for  patients  who  are  laboring  under  inflamma- 
tory fevers,  and  the  berries  when  thus  preserved  make  a  rare 
dehcacy  for  the  table,  and  are  useful  to  sharpen  the  appetite. 

The  bark  of  either  the  body  or  root  is  a  pungent  bitter,  and  a 
useful  medicine  to  correct  the  gall,  regulate  the  digestive  pow- 
ers, and  remove  a  costive  habit.  The  bark  should  be  collected 
at  the  proper  season,  carefully  dried  and  pulverized,  and  may 
be  used  as  a  part  of  No.  4  bitters. 

The  finely  pulverized  powder  is  a  cathartic,  in  teaspoon- 
ful  doses,  at  night  on  going  to  bed.  The  bark  of  this  shrub  is 
sometimes  used  in  cider  for  the  jaundice,  and  is  next  in  value 
to  golden  seal  and  poplar. 


APOCYNUM  ANDROSJ3MIFOLIUM.— No.  4, 

continued. 

Bitter  Root— Wandering  Milk- Weed— or  Dog^s  Bane  of 
the  Highlands. 

EMETIC,    CATHARTIC,    NARCOTIC,    HYDRAGOGUE. 
To  remove  costiveness,  and  correct  the  digestion. 

A.  AwDROSiEMiFonuM.  Radix.  The  root. — Calyx,  very 
small,  five-cleft,  persistent.  Corolla,  companulate,  half  five- 
cleft.  Lobes,  revolute,  furnished  at  the  base  with  five  dentoid 
glands,  alternating  with  the  stamens.  Anthers,  connivant,  sa- 
gitate,  cohering  to  the  stigma  by  the  middle.  Style,  obsolete. 
Stigma,  thick  and  acute.  Follicles,  long  and  linear.  Seeds, 
connose. 

The  dog  bane  or  bitter  root  is  an  indigenous,  perennial  plant, 
from  one  to  three  feet  in  height,  and  abounding  in  a  milky  and 
extremely  bitter  juice,  which  exudes  from  all  parts  of  the  plant 
when  wounded.  The  stem  is  very  straight  and  erect,  smooth 
below,  much  branched  above,  usually  of  a  reddish  color  on  the 
side  which  is  exposed  to  the  sun.  The  plant  is  covered  with  a 
very  tough  bark.  The  leaves  are  opposite,  ovate,  entire,  acute 
and  smooth  on  both  sides,  and  nearly  three  inches  in  length. 
The  flowers  are  reddish  white,  and  grow  in  loose,  axillary,  or 
terminal  cymes.  The  peduncles  have  small  acute  bracts.  The 
corolla  has  a  tube  longer  than  the  calyx,  and  a  spreading  bor- 
der. The  fruit  consists  of  a  set  of  long,  acute,  linear  follicles, 
containing  many  imbricated  seeds,  which  are  attached  to  a  re- 
ceptacle in  the  centre,  and  each  furnished  with  seed-down. 

The  plant  grows  in  all  parts  of  the  United  States.  It  is  found 
in  grain  fields,  and  grows  very  luxuriously  among  shrubs  and 
▼ines,  by  the  side  of  fences,  and  where  the  ground  is  most  neg- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  619 

lected.  It  flowers  in  June  and  July.  The  bark  of  the  root  is 
ihe  part  used  as  medicine.  This  is  large,  and  like  other  parts 
of  the  plant  contains  a  milky  juice.  Its  taste  is  unpleasant  and 
intensely  bitter.     The  pulverized  root  is  very  white. 

Medical  uses. — The  powder  of  the  newly  dried  root  acts  as 
a  sternutatory  when  taken  as  snufF,  and  as  an  emetic,  in  doses 
of  from  half  to  a  teaspoonful,  or  more.  In  small  quantities, 
sufficient  to  nauseate  the  stomach,  the  powders  are  an  excellent 
remedy  for  lues  veneria,  syphilis  or  venereal.  The  root  should 
be  dug  in  the  fall,  the  bark  bruised  off  and  carefully  dried,  after 
which  it  should  be  pulverized.  It  is  one  of  the  greatest  cor- 
rectors of  the  bile  that  is  used  in  our  system  of  practice,  except 
the  golden  seal  and  black  poplar.  For  regulating  the  bowels 
and  removing  a  costive  state,  its  operations  are  admirable.  It 
may  be  used  in  small  quantities  for  the  dropsy,  as  it  is  a  pow- 
erful hydragogue,  cathartic,  emetic  and  diuretic.  I  have  known 
a  dropsical  patient,  from  the  use  of  this  article  to  discharge  se- 
veral quarts  of  water  in  one  night.  It  is  also  a  sudorific,  as  it 
causes  copious  perspiration. 

Take  of  the  pulverized  bark  of  the  root,  one  ounce,  three 
fourths  of  an  ounce  of  witch-hazel  leaves,  and  one  fourth  of  an 
ounce  of  bayberry,  all  made  very  fine ;  mix,  and  they  make  a 
powerful  snuff,  for  catarrh,  and  other  difficulties  of  the  head. 
This  snufF  is  frequently  used  by  us  in  the  last  stages  of  acute 
diseases  with  small  children.  If  there  is  vital  energy  sufficient 
left  for  the  child  to  sneeze,  we  conclude  there  is  yet  hope  for  the 
little  patient.  This  is  the  best  way  to  test  the  immediate  vital 
action,  in  those  extreme  cases,  that  has  as  yet  been  discovered 
by  us.     No  injury  can  arise  from  a  trial  of  this  means. 


APOCYNUM  CANABINUM.— No.  4,  continued. 

Bitter  Root,  or  Wandering  Milk-  Weed,  or  Dog"  Bane  of  the 

River  lands. 

Properties  and  application — the  same  as  the  preceding  article. 

In  its  character,  this  plant  resembles  that  which  we  last  de- 
scribed ;  and  also  in  most  of  its  operations  upon  the  system. 
We  have  gathered  the  two  indiscriminately,  compounded  them 
together,  and  dealt  them  out  as  one  and  the  same  thing. 

Take  three  doses,  of  one  third  of  a  teaspoonful  each,  of  the 
powder,  in  a  little  hot  water,  once  in  two  or  three  hours,  and  it 
will  operate  as  a  cathartic  in  about  twelve  hours.  Care  should 
be  taken  that  the  quantity  be  not  too  large,  as  the  operation  as 
an  emetic  and  cathartic  is  exceedingly  powerful  in  such  cases. 
We  have  known  it  to  operate  as  an  emetic  for  eight  hours  in 
succession,  before  it  could  be  stopped. 


620  THE  THOMSON  I  AW 

ALETRIS  FERINOSA.— No.  4,  continued. 
Unicorn  Root — False  Aloe — Stargrass — Starwort,  (^c. 

TONIC,    BITTER,    EXPECTORANT,.  AND    SLIGHTLY    EMETIC,    AND    CATHAR- 
TIC. 
For  pain  in  the  side  or  breast,  cough,  and  torpid  liver. 

Aletris  Ferinosa. — Leaves,  linear,  lanceolate,  withering. 
at  the  tips.  Scape,  with  alternate,  pedicelled,  mostly  farinaceous 
flowers.     The  root  extremely  bitter. 

This  plant  is  found  in  almost  all  parts  of  the  country,  grow- 
ing  in  open  fields,  and  about  bordiers  of  pine  forests,  and  blos- 
soms in  June  and  July. 

Medical  tises. — The  unicorn  root  is  a  valuable  tonic,  and 
may  be  usefully  employed  for  similar  purposes  with  other  bit- 
ters of  the  same  class,  for  female  weaknesses,  and  pain  in  the 
side  and  breast. 

When  taken  in  large  quantities,  it  will  create  nausea  and  vo- 
miting, and  will  frequently  operate  as  a  cathartic.  The  pow- 
der may  be  used  in  doses  of  from  one  fourth  to  a  teaspoonfuL 
In  female  weakness  and  nervous  debility,  this  remedy  has  prov- 
ed itself  one  of  the  first  order.  In  cases  of  frequent  abortion, 
when  the  system  had  lost  its  tone  and  had  become  much  debi- 
litated, it  has  in  many  instances  afforded  permanent  relief.  We 
have  known  of  females  who  had  been  troubled  this  way,  being 
restored  to  such  a  degree  of  health  as  to  have  several  children 
added  to  the  family,  and  always  do  well  in  time  of  confine- 
ment, and  enjoy  good  health  afterwards. 

The  venerable  founder  of  the  Thomsonian  practice,  while 
in  the  state  of  Ohio,  a  few  years  since,  had  the  misfortune  to 
fall  and  break  three  of  his  ribs.  He  was  al!=o  otherwise  seri- 
ously injured  internally.  He  remained  very  feeble  for  several 
weeks,  having  a  distressing,  irritable,  dry  cough,  and  pain  in 
his  side,  and  he  could  findbut  temporary  relief,  until  he  began 
to  make  use  of  this  remedy,  which  immediately  cured  his 
cough,  strengthened  his  sides  and  lungs,  and  in  a  few  weeks  he 
found  himself  enjoying  excellent  health.  From  that  time  he 
has  been  in  the  habit  of  using  it  for  consumptive  patients,  with 
the  most  happy  results. 

It  is  the  belief  of  those  who  have  tried  it,  that  if  a  person  of 
feeble  constitution  exposes  himself  by  taking  a  severe  cold,  and 
makes  use  of  half  a  teaspoonful  of  this  powder,  in  a  little  hot 
water,  sweetened,  he  will  receive  no  injury  from  his  exposure. 
And  for  uterine  difficulties  it  has  not  its  equal  to  our  knowledge 
within  the  range  of  the  Thomsonian  materia  medica. 

It  may  be  used  alone  in  warm  water,  in  the  composition,  in 
wine  bitters,  in  the  No.  6.     Or  it  may  be  made  mto  a  syrup: 


\    MATERIA    MEDICA.  621 

and  the  weakly  female  who  makes  a  trial  of  this  remedy,  as  di- 
rected to  be  compounded,  will  in  it  find  her  reward. 


CORNUS  FLORIDA.— No.  4,  continued. 

Boxwood — Dogwood. 

ASTRINGNT,    TONIC,    EMMENAGOGUE. 
To  correct  a  morbid  state  of  the  stomach,  and  remove  Temale  ■weaknesses. 

CoRNus  P'lorida.  Plores — Cortex.  The  flowers  and  bark. 
— This  small  tree  is  indigenous,  and  usually  from  ten  to  twen- 
ty feet  high,  though  sometimes  more.  The  stem  generally  at- 
tains a  diameter  of  four  or  six  inches,  and  is  covered  with  a 
brownish  bark.  The  spreading  branches  are  regularly  dispos- 
ed, sometimes  in  fours,  nearly  in  the  form  of  crosses,  and  at 
other  times  opposite.  The  leaves  are  oval,  pointed,  dark  green, 
and  about  three  inches  long,  sulcated  on  the  upper  surface, 
whitish  beneath,  and  marked  with  parallel  veins.  The  latter 
part  of  the  summer,  they  are  marked,  or  speckled,  with  black 
spots,  and  in  cold  weather  the  leaves  assume  a  reddish  color. 
The  flowers  are  small,  yellowish  white,  and  collected  in  heads 
of  four  white,  obcordate  leaves,  notched  at  their  summit,  and 
tinged  with  red  or  purple.  This  involucre  constitutes  its  chief 
beauty,  and  the  flowers  contain  most  of  its  medical  virtues. 

The  dogivood  is  found  in  all  parts  of  the  Union,  but  is  most 
abundant  in  the  middle  states.  In  May  it  is  clothed  with  a  pro- 
fusion of  large  white  blossoms,  which  render  it  one  of  the  most 
conspicuous  ornaments  of  the  American  forest.  The  bark  is 
an  astringent  medicine,  and  is  good  for  intermittents.  The 
flowers  are  bitter,  and  are  the  part  generally  employed  as 
Thomsonian  medicine. 

Medico!  uses. — The  Cornus  Florida  is  tonic,  astringent,  and 
a  corrector  of  the  bile.  When  taken  internally,  in  sufficient 
quantities,  it  augments  the  frequency  and  strength  of  the  pulse, 
and  increases  animal  warmth.  The  properties  of  this  article 
closely  resemble  those  of  the  Peruvian  bark,  for  which  it  is  fre- 
quently substituted  in  intermittent  fevers. 

The  flowers  are  used  by  Thomsonian  practitioners  in  leucor- 
rhcea,  whites,  or  flu  or  albus,  to  great  advantage.  In  a  number 
of  cases  of  young  married  females,  which  have  come  under  our 
notice  and  treatment,  who  have  been  troubled  with  fluor  albus 
so  severely  that  they  were  dragging  out  a  miserable  existence, 
and  to  their  mortification  had  no  family,  in  consequence  of  the 
weak  state  of  the  system,  we  have  used  this  article  with  good 
success. 


622  THE    THOMSONIAN 

COPTIS  TRIFOLIA  — No.  4,  continued. 
Goldthread. 

TONIC,    AND    POWERFULLY    ASTRINGEKT. 

For  correcting  morbid  secretions,  of  a  torpid  liver  and  bile. 

CoPTis  Trifolia.  Radix.  The  root. — Scape,  one-flower- 
ed. Leaves,  tenate,  two  or  three  inches  long.  Roots,  filiform, 
golden  yellow. 

Goldthread  bears  considerable  resemblance  to  the  white 
strawberry  vine.  It  has  a  creeping,  perennial  root,  of  a  bright 
yellow  color,  from  which  it  derives  its  name.  The  goldthread 
is  a  native  of  the  northern  states.  It  grows  in  morasses,  and 
cold,  northern  regions,  and  abounds  in  the  British  provinces, 
and  in  the  hilly  districts  of  New-England.  It  blossoms  in  May 
or  June.  The  plant  possesses  great  bitterness,  but  the  root  is 
the  only  part  used  by  us  as  a  medicine. 

Medical  uses.  The  coptis  is  an  excellent  bitter,  closely  re- 
sembling golden-seal  and  barberry,  and  may  be  used  in  all  cases 
where  those  articles  have  been  recommended.  In  the  eastern 
states  it  is  much  used  for  apthous  ulcerations,  and  is  an  excel- 
lent substitute  for  the  bitters  before  n>entioned,  as  it  is  a  great 
corrector  of  the  gall.  It  is  an  excellent  gargle  for  sore  mouth 
and  throat.  Every  Thomsonian  physician  should  keep  a  sup- 
ply for  use. 


MARUBIUM  VULGARE— No.  4,  continued. 
Horehotmd. 

BITTER,    TONIC,    APERIENT,    EXPECTORANT. 
For  coughs,  asthma,  and  bleeding  or  weakoesa  of  the  lungs. 

Marubium  Vulgare.  lierha.  The  herb. — Horehound  has 
a  fibrous,  perennial  root,  and  several  annual  stems,  which  are 
erect,  very  downy,  and  from  ten  to  sixteen  inches  high. 

This  plant  is  a  native  of  both  Europe  and  America.  In  this 
country  it  grows  spontaneously,  along  road-sides  and  in  neg- 
lected fields.  It  flowers  in  July  and  August.  The  herb  has  a 
strong  bitter  taste,  and  rather  an  agreeable  odor,  which  is  much 
reduced  by  drying,  and  is  nearly  lost  by  being  long  kept.  Its 
bitter  taste  is  durable,  and  may  be  extracted  by  water  or  alcohol. 

Medical  uses. — Horehound  is  a  tonic  and  laxative,  and  may 
be  given  in  such  forms  and  quantities  as  to  increase  the  excre- 
tions in  the  skin  and  kidneys.  It  is  a  valuable  deobstruent,  to 
remove  obstructions,  and  is  good  in  inflammation  of  the  liver, 
jaundice,  menstrual  obstructions,  phthysis,  or  consumption  of 
the  lungs,  &.c. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  623 

A  tea  made  of  the  herb  and  sweetened  with  honey  is  a  valu- 
able remedy  for  asthma,  and  other  complaints  of  the  lungs.  It 
is  an  expectorant  and  stimulant.  A  syrup  made  of  the  herb 
will  remove  heaviness,  and  detach  from  the  mucous  membrane 
the  tough  cohesive  phlegm,  so  difficult  to  eject  from  the  lungs, 
and  which  reduces  consumptive  patients  so  rapidly.  Candy 
made  with  horehound  is  an  excellent  article  for  people  who 
have  become  hoarse,  from  whatever  cause,  or  for  those  whose 
vital  heat  is  so  much  reduced  that  the  saliva,  instead  of  retain- 
ing its  natural  consistency — nearly  that  of  warm  water — has  be- 
come thick  and  adhesive. 


SYMPHYTUM  OFFICINALE— No.  4,  continued. 

Comfrey. 

SLIGHTLY    ASTKINGENT,    TONIC,    AND    BITTER. 

For  female  complaints,  and  weakness  of  the  back  and  stomach. 

Symphytum  Officinals. — Radix.     The  root. 

Comfrey  is  a  perennial,  exotic  plant,  cultivated  in  gardens 
for  medical  use.  Its  root,  which  is  spindle-shaped,  branches, 
and  is  frequently  more  than  an  inch  thick,  and  ten  or  twelve 
long.  It  is  smooth  and  blackish  ;  white,  fleshy  and  juicy  with- 
in. It  becomes  wrinkled  by  drying,  and  of  a  firm,  horny  tex- 
ture, and  turns  dark  within.  It  has  a  mucilaginous,  inodorous, 
and  slightly  bitter  taste.  Among  its  qualities  are  mucilage  in 
abundance,  and  a  little  tannin.  It  is  highly  esteemed  as  a  re- 
medy for  female  weaknesses,  for  which  it  iias  but  few  equals. 
Its  virtues  are  chiefly  those  of  a  stimulant,  and  it  may  be  used 
as  a  substitute  for  marsh-mallows.  In  many  cough  mixtures  it 
is  one  of  the  principal  ingredients,  and  is  much  employed  in 
pectoral  affections,  such  as  catarrh  and  consumption.  It  may 
be  used  in  tea,  made  of  the  fresh  or  dried  roots.  This  root 
yields  a  larger  proportion  of  mucilage  to  water  than  the  mal- 
lows. 

Medical  uses. — Comfrey  roots,  after  having  been  boiled  soft, 
may  be  eaten  with  a  very  beneficial  effect,  by  females  who  are 
troubled  with  the  fluor  albus.  They  are  not  only  a  valuable 
medicine,  but  are  nearly  as  esculent  as  the  potatoe.  The  tea, 
sweetened,  is  a  good  article  for  a  weak  or  lame  back. 
,  Comfrey  syrup. — Take  a  large  handful  of  the  roots,  well 
cleansed,  boil  them  twenty  or  thirty  minutes  in  two  quarts  of 
soft  water,  pour  off"  the  liquor,  pulverize  the  roots,  and  work 
them  through  a  fine  sieve  into  the  liquor,  sweeten  well  with 
loaf  sugar,  grate  in  four  nutmegs,  beat  up  four  egjjs  and  stir  in 
when  the  syrup  is  cold;    then  add  two  quarts  ojf  best  Madeira 


624  THE    THOMSONIaN 

wine,  and  preserve  ;    let  it  be  shaken  when  used.     Dose,  from 
a  fourth  to  half  a  glass,  from  four  to  six  limes  a  day. 

This  is  one  of  the  best  syrups  for  weakly  females  I  ever  pre- 
pared. It  is  CTood  for  all  cases  of  debility  or  consumption,  and 
only  needs  a  fair  trial  to  establish  its  virtues. 


To  Restore  the  Digestive  Powers^  and  give  Tone  to  the 
Stomach  and  Boicels. 


AMYGDALUS  PERSICA.— No.  5. 

Peach  Tree. 

ANTHELMIC,    CATHAKTIC,    TONIC,    AND    STOMACHIC. 
To  restore  digestion  and  regulate  the  stomach  ami  bowels. 

Amygdalus  Persic  a. — Fructiis — Nuclei — Folia — Flores 
Cortex.  The  fruit,  kernels,  leaves,  flowers  and  bark. — Serra- 
turesof  the  leaves  all  acute.     Floioers,  sessile,  solitary,  exotic. 

Most  of  us  are  well  acquainted  with  the  appearance  of  the 
common  peach  tree.  Its  characteristics  are,  its  sessile,  solitary 
flower,  and  ail  the  serratures  of  the  leaves  acute.  Its  native 
country  is  not  certainly  known,  but  it  is  generally  supposed  to 
have  come  from  Persia.  Probably  in  no  other  country  it  at- 
tains as  great  perfection  in  the  quality  of  its  fruit  as  in  the 
United  States.  Among  our  summer  fruits,  peaches  may  justly 
be  ranked  as  one  of  the  first,  for  their  grateful  flavor  and  whole- 
some qualities.  The  peach  abounds  in  sacch;iriue  matter,  that 
renders  the  juice  liable  to  fermentation,  the  same  as  vinous  li- 
quors. A  liquor  is  distilled  from  them,  called  peach  brandy, 
which  is  much  used  in  the  western  states.  The  nut  of  the  fruit 
contains  a  kernel,  that  much  resembles,  in  appearance,  proper- 
ties and  nature,  the  bitter  almond,  for  which  they  are,  in  the 
Thomsonian  practice,  substituted.  The  leaves,  flowers,  and 
bark,  also,  have  the  odor  and  taste  of  the  bitter  almond,  from 
which  a  volatile  oil  may  be  distilled.  The  flowers,  kernel, 
bark  and  leaves,  are  used  in  our  practice. 

Medical  uses. — The  flowers  and  leaves  are  laxative,  and  a 
syrup  made  of  them  is  good  for  indigestion  and  costiveness. 
Take  one  ounce  of  the  flowers  and  steep  them  in  a  quart  of  wa- 
ter down  to  a  pint  and  a  half,  sweeten  it  well  with  loaf  sugar, 
add  half  a  pint  of  4th  proof  Jamaica  rum,  and  stop  it  close  in  a 
bottle  for  use.    If  more  strength  is  required,  the  leaves  and  ker- 


MATBRIA    MEDICA.  625 

nels  may  be  bruised  and  infused  with  the  flowers.  Or,  if  the 
flowers  are  not  to  be  had,  the  leaves,  bark  and  kernels,  or  either 
of  them,  may  be  prepared  alone. 

This  is  one  of  the  best  anthelmintics,  or  remedies  for 
worms  or  disordered  bowels  in  children,  that  can  be  prepared. 
It  is  also  good  for  children  when  teething.  And  the  same  re- 
medies that  are  good  for  children,  are  good  for  adults  in  the 
same  complaints. 

Dose,  from  half  to  a  wine-glass  full  for  an  adult,  and  for  child- 
ren a  table  spoonful — to  be  taken  two  or  three  times  a  day, 
before  eating.  Each  family,  if  possible,  should  have  a  supply 
of  this  medicine. 

The  leaves,  used  in  decoction,  are  a  gentle  aperient,  or  laxa- 
tive, and  are  a  great  regulator  of  the  digestive  powers  and  cos- 
tive habits.  It  is  also  a  sedative,  or  in  other  words  it  exerts  a 
calm  and  serene  influence  throughout  the  system,  and  is  calcu- 
lated to  ease  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

An  extract,  of  a  dark  resinous  color,  may  be  made  from  the 
leaves  or  bark,  that  is  much  used  as  an  aperient,  in  the  form  of 
pills,  and  may  be  usefully  employed,  on  account  of  its  adhesive 
properties,  in  compounding  pills. 

An  infusion  of  the  leaves  is  good  for  irritability  of  the  blad- 
der, vesica  Mri?iaria,  sickness  at  the  stomach,  and  whooping 
cough,  or  pei'tussis.  In  this  case,  if  the  syrup  does  not  afford 
relief,  give  from  half  to  a  pint,  in  the  course  of  a  day,  of  the 
strong  infusion  of  the  leaves,  in  small  doses. 

The  dried  fruit,  stewed  in  sugar,  is  an  excellent  article  of 
diet,  suitable  for  persons  in  almost  any  situation  of  health,  and 
more  especially  those  troubled  with  costiveness. 

The  ripe  fresh  peach  is  the  most  healthy  article  of  fruit  to  be 
found  in  this  country,  and  may  be  extensively  used  with  safety 
by  any  person  who  is  fond  of  it,  and  more  especially  those  who 
are  diseased,  as  it  has  been  recommended  by  us  to  numerous 
patients  who  have  labored  under  various  forms  of  disease,  and 
who  have  used  it  freely  without  any  injury.  Children  may  eat 
them  freely;  and  their  anthelmic,  or  worm  correcting  proper- 
ties, cause  them  to  receive  no  injury.  If  freely  used  by  child- 
ren, they  will  seldom  be  troubled  with  disordered  or  costive 
bowels. 

We  are  fully  satisfied  that  the  amygdalus  Persica,  or  peach 
tree,  is  one  of  the  most  extensively  useful  trees  in  the  United 
States ;  and  its  fruit  is  not  equalled  by  that  of  any  other,  for  its 
nourishing  and  correcting  medical  properties.  In  fact,  the 
the  peach  tree  would  furnish  almost  a  universal  catholicon,  so 
numerous  are  the  ways  in  which  its  virtues  may  benefit  the  hu- 
man family.  Persons  of  seventy  years  of  age,  who  have  al- 
ways been  accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  different  productions  of 


626 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


this  tree,  inform  us  that  they  never  knew  any  injury  to  result 
from  its  use.  This  we  consider  conchisive  evidence  of  its  ma- 
ny virtues. 


PRUNUS  VIRGINIANA.— No.  5,  continued. 
Black  Cherry —  Wild,  Rum,  or  Cabinet  Cherry. 

TONIC,    AROMATIC,    ASTRINGENT,    AND    SLIGHTLY   STIMULANT. 
To  correct  digestion,  and  restore  tone  to  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

Prunus  Virginiana.  BacccL — Cortex.  The  berries  and 
barit. — Racemes,  erect,  elonorated.  Leaves,  oval-oblong,  acumi- 
nate, unequally  double-toothed,  glabrous  both  sides.  Petioles, 
generally  bearing  four  glands. 

In  open  fields,  the  limbs  of  this  tree  spread  out  into  an  ele- 
gant oval  top ;  but  in  dense  forests,  it  grows  to  a  very  great 
height,  with  a  {ew  contracted  branches.  The  flowers  are  small, 
white,  and  collected  in  long  erect  racemes.  They  appear  in 
May,  and  are  followed  by  globular  drupes,  about  the  size  of  a 
pea,  and  when  ripe,  of  a  shining  blackish  purple  color. 

The  loild  cherry  is  one  of  the  largest  trees  of  the  American 
forest ;  sometimes  growing,  on  the  banks  of  large  rivers  in  the 
west,  from  seventy  to  upwards  of  one  hundred  feet  high;  with 
a  trunk,  from  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  in  circumference.  But  this 
tree  in  the  eastern  states,  is  of  much  less  dimensions.  In  open 
grounds  it  is  not  so  large  as  in  the  forest,  but  is  more  branched, 
often  appearing  with  an  elegant  conical  summit.  The  trunk 
is  very  regular  in  its  shape  and  is  covered  with  a  black,  rough 
bark,  which  is  easily  detached  in  thick  narrow  strips,  and  thus 
the  tree  may  be  distinguished,  when  the  leaves  are  too  high  for 
inspection. 

This  species  of  cherry  abounds  in  all  parts  of  the  United 
States,  but  flourishes  best  in  a  rich  soil  and  temperate  climate. 
It  is  much  valued  for  its  wood,  which  is  fine  grained,  compact, 
and  susceptible  of  a  high  polish,  is  of  a  redish  tint,  which  deep- 
ens with  age.  The  fruit  has  a  bitter,  tonic,  sweetish,  and 
astringent  taste ;  and  is  sometimes  used  to  give  a  flavor  to  spi- 
rituous liquors.  The  inner  bark  divested  of  the  epidermis  or 
cuticle,  is  the  part  used  as  medicine,  and  may  be  obtained  from 
any  part  of  the  tree,  but  that  from  the  roots  is  the  best.  The 
bark  should  be  used  when  fresh  from  the  tree,  as  it  possesses 
more  of  the  essential  oil  when  green. 

Properties. — Wild  cherry  bark  in  the  fresh  state  or  when 
boiled  in  water,  emits  an  odor  resembling  that  of  peach  leaves. 
Its  taste  is  agreeably  bitter  and  aromatic,  with  the  peculiar  fla- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  627 

vor  of  the  bitter  almond.  It  imparts  its  sensible  properties  to 
water,  either  cold  or  hot,  producing  a  clear  reddish  infusion,  re- 
sembling Madeira  wine  in  appearance.  Its  flavor,  as  well  as 
medical  virtues  are  much  injured  by  boiling,  in  consequence, 
partly,  of  the  volatilization  of  the  principle  upon  which  they 
depend;  and  partly  upon  a  chemical  change,  effected  by  the 
heat.  An  oil  can  be  extracted  from  the  fruit,  leaves  or  bark,  of 
a  light  straw  color,  volatile  in  its  nature,  and  very  closely  re- 
sembling in  its  properties,  the  volatile  oil  of  bitter  almonds. 

Medical  Uses. — The  bark  of  the  black  cherry  tree  is  one  of 
the  most  valuable  tonics  among  our  indigenous  remedies.  It 
has  also  the  power  of  calming  irritation,  and  diminishing  ner- 
vous excitability ;  and  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  treatment  of 
diseases  in  which  a  debilitated  state  of  the  stomach,  or  of  the 
system  at  large,  is  united  with  local  or  general  irritation.  When 
taken  in  large  quantities,  it  is  said  to  diminish,  perceptibly,  the 
action  of  the  heart.  If  the  cold  infusion  be  taken  in  large 
draughts  daily  for  several  days,  it  will  reduce  the  pulsation 
about  one  third.  This  remedy  is  highly  useful  in  consumptive 
complaints,  scrofula  and  jaundice.  In  general  debility,  it  has 
also  been  found  advantageous;  and  is  well  adapted  to  cases  of 
dyspepsia.  It  has  been  usefully  applied  in  intermittent  fever. 
It  may  be  used  in  powder  or  infusion  made  with  cold  water. 
The  cherries  may  be  dried  and  kept  for  use. 

Black  cherries  may  be  used  in  the  following  manner:  Take 
one  pound  of  cherries  in  their  natural  state,  well  pulverized,  a 
half  pound  of  black  poplar  bark — let  the  bark  be  boiled  in  one 
gallon  of  water,  strain,  and  sweeten  it  with  loaf  sugar;  grate 
in  two  nutmegs,  and  add  one  quart  of  Jamaica  rum,  fourth 
proof;  when  cold  stir  in  the  cherries  and  put  the  contents  into 
a  jug,  and  then  add  two  ounces  of  pulverized  gum  myrrh. 
Shake  it  well  every  day  for  a  week  and  it  is  fit  for  use.  Dose, 
from  a  fourth  to  half  a  wine  glass,  before  eating.  It  is  an  ex- 
cellent tonic,  and  may  be  used  in  all  cases  of  indigestion.  Good 
for  children  in  teething  or  bowel  complaints ;  regulate  your 
dose  according  to  their  age. 

Again. — The  pulverized  cherries  may  be  put  into  cold  wa- 
ter and  sweetened :  or  put  half  a  pound  of  cherries  into  warm 
water  and  add  some  scorched  Indian  meal,  and  a  little  yeast. 
This  makes  a  delicious  beer  to  be  used  in  hot  weather.  It  must 
be  kept  in  a  cool  place  to  prevent  its  souring. 


628  THE  THOMSONIAN 

AMYGDALUS  AMARA.— No.  5,  continued. 
Bitter  Almond. 

BITTER,    ASTRINGENT. 

Compounded  to  correct  digestion,  and  strengthen  the  stomach  and  bowels. 

Amygd.\lus  Amara. — Nuclea.     The  kernel. 

The  Almond  tree  is  trom  fifteen  to  twenty-five  feet  high,  and 
divides  into  numerous  branches.  The  leaves  stand  upon  foot- 
stalks, are  about  two  and  a  half  inches  long,  and  half  or  three 
quarters  of  an  inch  broad,  pointed  at  both  ends,  elliptical,  mi- 
nutely serrate,  and  with  the  lower  serratures  glandular,  and  of 
a  dark  green  color.  The  flowers  are  large,  varying  in  color 
from  red  to  white.  The  fruit  is  of  the  peach  species,  with  the 
covering  tough,  dry,  thin,  and  marked  with  a  longitudinal  fur- 
row, where  it  opens  when  ripe.  The  almond  is  found  within 
this  covering,  or  rough  shell. 

Medical  uses. — Bitter  almonds,  properly  compounded,  make 
an  excellent  tonic,  and  may  be  used  for  the  same  purposes  as 
peach  pits  and  cherry  stones  (see  No.  5,  syrup).  This  syrup  is 
prepared  as  follows :  Take  poplar  bark,  and  bark  of  the  root 
of  bayberry,  of  each  one  pound  ;  boil  them  in  two  gallons  of 
water;  strain  off,  and  add  seven  pounds  of  sugar;  then  scald 
and  skim,  and  add  half  a  pound  of  peach  meats,  bitter  almonds, 
or  black  cherry  stones,  pulverized.  When  cold,  add  one  gallon 
of  good  brandy,  and  stir  it  well  together.  If  put  into  different 
vessels,  let  the  sediment  be  proportionally  divided  amongst  it. 

This  compound  is  a  corrector  of  digestion,  is  good  to  strength- 
en the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  restore  health  to  the  patients, 
and  is  also  particularly  useful  in  dysentery  and  the  fluxes.  In 
a  relaxed  state  of  the  bowels,  a  tea  of  No.  3,  used  night  and 
morning,  and  this  syrup  through  the  day,  will  generally  restore 
the  patient.  By  using  these  medicines  occasionally,  when  ex- 
posed to  dysentery,  there  is  but  little  danger  of  taking  the  dis- 
ease. It  would  be  well  for  every  family  to  have  this  syrup  on 
hand,  ready  for  use,  in  case  of  any  debility  of  the  stomach  and 
bowels. 


MATERIA  MEmCA.  629 

To  prevent  Mortification,  and  remove  Colic,  Dysentery 
and  Rheumatism. 


BALSAMODENDRON  MYRRHA  — No.  6. 

Gutn  Myrrh. 

AROMATIC,    ASTRINGENT,    TONIC,    STIMULANT,    AND  ANTI- 
SEPTIC. 

To  give  tone  to  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  prevent  mortification. 

Balsamodendron   Myrrha. Succus  concretus.      The 

juice  dried  down. 

Myrrh,  as  we  learn  from  history,  has  been  used  for  medici- 
nal purposes,  from  the  earliest  ages  of  ihe  world.  But  of  the 
plant  very  little  has  been  known,  till  within  a  iew  years. 

Balsamodendron  Myrrh  is  a  small  stunted  tree,  with  a  trunk 
which  is  covered  with  a  greyish  bark,  and  furnished  with  small, 
shriveled  branches,  with  spines  at  the  termination.  The  leaves 
of  the  tree  are  obovate,  smooth,  blunt — obtusely  ternate  and 
denticulate  leaflets.  The  fruit  is  pointed  longitudinally,  fore- 
armed, of  brown  color,  and  at  the  base  is  surrounded  by  per- 
sistent calyx.  The  tree  grows  in  Arabia,  in  dwarfish  thickets. 
The  juice,  or  sap,  exudes  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  and  dries  up- 
on the  bark. 

The  India  and  Turkey  myrrh  are  the  varieties  known  in  our 
market.  That  from  India  is  said  to  be  collected  in  Abyssinia, 
while  the  Turkey  myrrh  is  brought  from  Arabia  and  Egypt. 
When  of  a  good  quality,  it  is  of  a  bright  reddish-yellow  color, 
of  a  strong,  peculiar,  fragrant  odor,  and  a  strong,  bitter,  aromat- 
ic taste.  It  is  very  brittle,  and  presents  shining  surfaces  when 
broken,  which,  when  in  large  masses,  are  irregular.  The 
Turkish  myrrh  is  the  best  that  is  imported  into  this  country. 

Medical  iises. — Myrrh  is  stimulant  and  tonic,  useful  to  the 
lungs,  and  strengthening  to  the  uterus.  It  is  employed  as  an 
emmenagogue  to  regulate  the  periodical  turns  of  females,  in  de- 
bilitated states  of  the  system,  in  the  absence  of  fever.  It  is  giv- 
en in  chronic  catarrh,  in  pulmonary  consumption,  and  other 
affections  where  the  secretion  of  mucous  is  abundant  but  too 
morbid  to  be  easily  expectorated  ;  in  chlorosis,  or  green  sick- 
ness, amenorrhoea,  or  obstruction  of  the  menses,  and  the  vari- 
ous affections  of  the  uterine  functions.  It  is  also  used  for 
spongy  gums,  aphthnus,  or  thrush,  sore  mouth  of  children,  and 
for  unhealthy  ulcers. 

It  may  be  tinctured  in  alcohol,  brandy,  or  Jamaica  rum,  in 


630  THE    THOMSONIAN 

the  proportion  of  one  pound  of  myrrh,  pulverized,  to  a  gallon 
of  the  spirits,  and  to  this  add  two  ounces  of  Cayenne,  and  two 
ounces  of  prickly  ash  seeds,  and  a  quarter  of  an  ounce  of  gum 
camphor,  made  line;  put  these  articles  into  a  jug,  and  let  them 
be  kept  gently  warm,  being  occasionally  shaken,  for  two  or 
three  days. 

These  drops  are  for  external  application,  in  such  cases  as 
rheumatism,  bruises,  sprains,  and  fresh  wounds.  Internally, 
for  colic,  dysentery,  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  for 
many  other  debilitating:  complaints. 

The  grains,  after  the  drops  have  been  removed,  may  be  com- 
pounded and  used  in  a  great  variety  of  ways,  and  to  great  ad- 
vantage. They  may  be  taken  and  put  into  a  kettle  (the  amount 
before  mentioned),  and  add  half  a  gallon  of  sweet  wine ;  boil 
them  for  ten  minutes — this  will  decompose  the  particles  of 
myrrh;  pour  off  the  wine,  and  add  when  cool  a  pint  and  a  half 
of  spirits:  sweeten  this,  and  you  have  an  excellent  article  for  a 
weak  stomach,  and  looseness  of  the  bowels. 

This  syrup  I  have  known,  when  given  in  doses  of  from  one 
fourth  to  half  a  wineglassful,  two  or  three  times  a  day,  to  pro- 
duce an  appetite  when  other  bitter  articles  would  not.  It  is  al- 
so good  for  diabetes,  or  continued  voidins:  of  urine. 

Take  two  large  table  spoonsful  of  the  above  mentioned  grains 
and  put  them  into  wine,  sufficient  to  make  the  mixture  about 
the  consistence  of  a  poultice ;  boil  it  two  or  three  minutes,  and 
the  myrrh  will  absorb  the  wine,  and  the  mass  will  become  of  a 
thick  adhesive  consistency.  Let  this  be  spread  upon  cloth  or 
leather,  and  applied  to  a  weak  or  lame  back,  a  lame  side,  or 
weak  Joints,  and  the  most  happy  results  may  be  anticipated. 

Myrrh  is  perhaps  the  most  powerful  antiseptic  known.  It 
has  been  celebrated  for  its  preserving  properties  from  the  earli- 
est ages  of  the  world.  The  scriptures  inform  us  that  myrrh 
was  one  of  the  constituents  used  in  ancient  times  for  embalm- 
ing the  dead;  and  we  have  frequently  seen  specimens  of  its 
preservative  powers,  which  have  been  removed  from  the  cata- 
combs of  Egypt,  that  were  supposed  to  have  been  embalmed  up- 
wards of  three  thousand  years.  If  such  are  the  preserving 
powers  of  myrrh  on  the  dead,  what  must  its  effects  be  on  the 
living? 

In  1832,  it  is  well  known,  that  we  were  scourged  with  the 
Asiatic  cholera ;  and  one  characteristic  of  the  disease  was  the 
rapid  decay  of  the  solids  as  well  as  fluids  of  the  body,  passed 
off  by  frequent  and  copious  aqueous  discharges  from  the  bow- 
els. Such  was  the  rapid  consumption  of  the  body,  that  a  fleshy 
person,  in  some  instances,  would  be  reduced  almost  to  a  skele- 
ton, and  even  unto  death,  in  from  twelve  to  eighteen  hours. 

On  examining  the  subject,  we  found  that  by  some  means  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  631 

atmosphere  was  surcharged  with  a  foreign  substance,  that  we 
thought  to  be  nitre,  which  destroyed  in  a  great  measure  the  ox- 
ygen, or  vital  principle  of  the  air,  and  at  every  respiration  the 
patient  retained  a  quantity  of  this  refrigerating  or  cooling  gas, 
and  threw  off  a  proportionate  quantity  of  the  oxygen  or  vital 
principle,  which  deficiency  was  not  made  up ;  and  by  these 
means  the  body  rapidly  lost  its  stimuUis  or  heat,  and  received  in 
its  stead  this  refri2:eratirig  gas ;  and  as  the  warmth  became  re- 
duced at  the  seat  of  vitality,  that  from  the  extremities  was  call- 
ed in,  and  thus  the  Hmbs  became  cold,  contracted  and  cramped. 
The  secretory  vessels  were  also  contracted,  and  forced  back  the 
perspirable  matter  into  the  body,  which  passed  rapidly  off  from 
the  bowels  in  discharges  somewhat  resembling  rice-water  ;  and 
at  the  same  time  the  absence  of  heat  in  the  extremities  caused 
a  contraction  of  the  muscles  and  violent  cramp,  until  in  a  short 
lime  death  usually  closed  the  scene. 

In  examining  the  subject  I  found,  as  I  thought,  the  first  diffi- 
culty in  the  atmosphere,  by  breathing  which  the  patient  could 
not  gel  that  quantity  of  oxygen  that  was  necessary  for  a  healthy 
action  ;  consequently,  some  artificial  means  must  be  used  to 
keep  up  the  vital  energy,  and  the  rapid  consumption  of  the 
flesh  must  be  stopped  by  some  preservative  article.  I  therefore 
prepared  the  following  compound  :  Pulverized  myrrh,  two 
ounces,  dissolved  in  one  pint  of  fourth  proof  Jamaica  rum;  to 
this  add  a  fourth  of  an  ounce  of  Cayenne,  steeped  in  two  or 
three  spoonsful  of  boiling  water  ;  and  then  to  this  add  half  a 
pint  of  molasses,  and  put  it  into  a  jug  or  bottle  for  use.  And 
in  its  application  my  most  sanguine  expectations  were  realized. 

I  gave  from  a  fourth  to  half  a  glass,  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case.  The  necessary  warmth  was  immediately 
restored  to  the  vitals,  and  from  them  it  spread  to  the  extremi- 
ties ;  perspiration  was  excited,  a  healthy  action  induced  through- 
out the  system,  and  thus  the  desolating  disease  was  stayed. 

Such  were  the  effects  of  this  medicine  in  Montreal,  where  I 
first  used  it,  that  it  was  soon  proclaimed  in  the  public  prints, 
from  Canada  to  New-Orleans,  and  appeared  to  be  a  standard 
remedy  on  the  Mississippi  and  Ohio  rivers,  for  this  terrible  dis- 
ease. 

The  more  this  valuable  article  (myrrh)  is  examined,  the  more 
medical  excellencies  are  discovered  in  its  properties.  This  is 
the  medical  giant  among  the  gums,  balsams,  and  aromatics  of 
the  vegetable  kingdom. 


632  THE    THOMSONIAN 


Antlsjyasmodics  and  JVcrvines. 

To  procure  rest  for  the  nervous  and  arterial  systems,  when  under  great  bo- 
dily or  mental  excitement,  from  disease  or  any  other  cause,  and  to  induce  re- 
freshing sleep,  without  the  use  of  narcotics,  such  as  opium,  morphine,  &c. — 
This  head  should  commend  itself  to  all  persons  of  strong  and  determined  pas- 
sions and  weak  bodies,  or  those  of  weak  nerves  and  strong  bodies. 


CYPRIPEDIUM. 

Ladies^  Slipper — American  Valerian,  or  Nerve  Root. 

ANTISPASMODIC,    SWEETISH   BITTER,    SLIGHTLY   TONIC,    AND 

NERVINE. 

To  quiet  mental  and  nervous  irritability,  and  procure  rest. 

Cypripedium. Flores — Folia — Radix.      The    flowers, 

leaves  and  roots. 

Cypripedium  candiditm  (white  ladies'  slipper).  The  stem, 
leafy :  leaves,  lance-oblong  ;  lobe  of  the  left  style,  lanceolate, 
obtnsish  ;  lip  compressed,  shorter  than  the  lanceolate  petals. 

Cypripedium,  parvilflorum  (common  ladies'  slipper).  Stem, 
leafy;  lobe  of  the  style,  trianpfular-oblonof,  acute;  outer  petals, 
oblong-ovate,  acuminate ;  inner  ones,  linear,  contorted ;  lip 
shorter  than  the  petals,  compressed. 

Cypripedium  jmhescens  (yellow  ladies'  slipper).  Stem, 
leafy;  lobe  of  the  style,  triangular-oblo  ig,  obtuse;  outer  petals, 
oblong-ovate,  acuminate;  inner  ones,  very  long,  linear,  con- 
torted; lip  compressed,  shorter  than  the  petals. 

Cypripedium,  spectahile  (red  or  gay  ladies'  slipper.)  Stem, 
leafy;  lobe  of  the  style,  oval-cordate,  obtuse;  outer  petals, 
broad-oval,  obtuse;  lip  longer  than  the  petals,  split  before, 

Cypripedium  acaide  (low  ladies'  slipper).  Scape,  leafless, 
one-flowered ;  leaves,  radical,  in  pairs,  oblong,  obtuse ;  lobe  of 
the  style,  round-rhomboid,  acuminate,  deflexed ;  lip  longer  than 
the  lanceolate  petals,  split  before. 

There  are  six  species  of  the  cypripedium,  or  ladies'  slipper, 
five  of  which  we  have  thought  worthy  of  a  description  in  this 
work,  as  they  all  possess  nearly  the  same  medical  properties, 
and  may  be  gathered,  pulverized,  and  used  indiscriminately  for 
the  same  complaints. 

The  roots  are  the  only  part  of  the  plant  that  is  generally 


('lIHipcrliiim    jniliosreiis 
/.iitii/  y/r/'prr.   Ainy    root 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  633 

used,  althouoh  considerable  medical  virtues  are  found  in  the 
stalks  and  leaves. 

The  roots  are  large,  fibrous,  and  clospsly  matted  together, 
eacli  fibre  originatin;j  in  a  solid  root,  parent,  or  centre,  which 
may  be  found  by  parting  the  closely  entwining  members  of  this 
truly  compact  family.  The  main  root  puts  forth  several  stalks, 
which  grow  about  one  foot  in  height, 

The  leaves  resemble  the  itch,  or  Indian  poke-weed,  or  vera- 
trum  viride,  but  are  not  as  large. 

The  sexual  character  of  the  different  plants  of  this  species  is 
distinguished  by  the  form  and  color  of  the  flowers.  The  flow- 
ers of  the  female  plant  are  red,  red  and  white,  and  white.  The 
red  has  but  two  leaves,  which  grow  out  of  the  ground  and  lean 
over  to  the  right  and  left,  from  between  which  a  single  stalk 
shoots  up,  to  the  heiijht  of  from  eight  to  ten  inches,  bearing  on 
its  top  the  flower,  which  is  of  a  very  singular  form,  and  from 
which  the  sexual  character  of  the  plant  is  known. 

The  red  and  white  and  white  ladies'  slipper  grows  only  in 
swamps  and  marshy  groimd,  and  is  found  to  produce  laro;er 
clusters  of  roots  than  the  yellow,  but  in  a  similar  form.  The 
top  of  the  yellow  is  similar  to  the  red  ladies'  slipper,  except  the 
color  of  the  flower. 

The  yellow  and  red  are  the  best  for  medicine.  The  root 
should  be  dug  in  the  spring  before  the  stalk  starts  (as  it  may  be 
easily  found  by  the  dead  stalk  of  the  previous  year),  or  in  the 
fi^U,  when  the  foliage  is  dead.  Then  the  whole  substance  of 
the  plant  is  concentrated  in  the  root.  If  dug  in  the  summer, 
when  the  sap  is  abroad  in  the  stalk  and  leaves,  the  roots  will 
nearly  all  dry  away.  When  procured,  it  should  be  washed 
clean  and  carefully  dried  and  pulverized,  and  sifted  through  a 
fine  sieve,  and  preserved  from  the  air,  for  use. 

Medical  uses. — Tin's  medicine  is  one  of  the  most  valuable 
nervines,  or  antispasmodics,  known.  I  have  used  it  nearly 
fifty  years,  and  hav^e  always  found  it  to  produce  the  most  bene- 
ficial effects  in  all  cases  of  nervous  disease  or  hysterical  affec- 
tions; in  fact,  it  would  be  difficult  for  the  Thomsonian  practi- 
tioner to  get  along  in  nervous  cases  without  this  valuable  ner- 
vine. It  is  an  iimocent  remedy,  destitute  of  narcotic  properties, 
and  may  be  used  in  all  cases  of  disease  with  safety,  and  is  much 
better  than  opium,  as  it  relieves  the  irritability  by  quieting  the 
nervous  system,  whereas  opium  relieves  by  deadening  in  a  great 
measure  the  natural  excitable  animal  functions. 

After  the  operations  of  the  nerve  powder,  the  patients  feel 
lively,  cheerful,  and  happy,  as  if  they  had  received  a  sub- 
stantial night's  rest,  after  great  fiiligue  of  both  body  and  mind. 
Whereas  the  opium  leaves  the  patient  dull,  heavy  and  prostrate, 
both  in  body  and  mind ;  stupid  in  action,  dull  iii  intellect,  sick 

41 


634  THE    THOMSONIAN 

at  the  stomach,  and  with  an  awful  foreboding  in  the  imagina- 
tion of  an  inexpUcable  somethinj,  that  never  had  and  never 
will  have  an  existence  this  side  of  the  grave;  to  relieve  which, 
another  dose  of  opium  must  be  taken;  and  thus  they  continue  to 
draof  out  a  miserable  existence,  neither  taking  pleasure  or  com- 
fort themselves,  nor  suffering  others  to  do  so,  and  running  gra- 
dually down,  and  finding  relief  only  in  death. 

Haifa  teaspoonful  of  this  medicine  may  be  taken  or  given  in 
a  glass  of  hot  water,  sweetened,  and  the  dose  repeated  if  neces- 
sary ;  or  the  same  quantity  niay  be  used  in  any  of  the  six  num- 
bers, or  taken  in  the  injections  ;  and  where  there  are  nervous 
symptoms  it  should  never  be  dispensed  with. 


FERULA  ASAFETIDA.— Antispasmodics  conti- 
nued. 

POWERFULLY    ANTISPASMODIC,    SLIGHTLY  ASTRINGENT,    EX- 
PECTORANT,   AND    GENTLY    LAXATIVE. 

To  quiet  nervous  imtability,   relieve  spasms,  hvsteria,  cramp,   convulsions; — regulates  and 
comforts  the  mind. 

AsAFETiDA. — The  root  of  asafetida  at  full  size  is  as  large  as 
a  man's  leg,  tapering,  and  perennial  ;  at  the  top  there  are  nu- 
merous strong  fibres;  externally  black — internally  white,  and 
abounding  in  an  excessively  fetid,  milky  juice.  The  leaves 
spring  directly  from  the  root,  and  are  from  seven  to  ten  in  num- 
ber, about  two  feet  in  length.  They  are  bipinnate,  smooth, 
with  the  leaflets  alternate,  sinuate  and  lobed,  sometimes  lanceo- 
late, of  a  dark  green  color,  and  of  an  exceedingly  feiid  smell. 
The  stem  rises  from  the  midst  of  the  leaves,  and  is  luxuriant, 
herbaceous,  ^from  five  to  ten  feet  in  height,  and  about  three 
inches  in  diameter  at  the  base,  smooth,  striated,  round,  erect, 
simple,  and  terminating  in  large  convex  umbels.  The  flowers 
are  light  yellow,  the  seeds  are  of  a  reddish  color,  oval,  flat,  and 
foliaceous.  The  leaves  are  said  to  differ  much  in  shape,  and 
the  character  of  its  fetid  product,  according  to  the  soil  on  which 
it  is  cultivated.  It  is  a  native  of  Persia,  and  flourishes  most 
abundantly  in  the  mountains.  The  inhabitants  of  that  country 
are  said  to  eat  it  when  young  and  tender,  and  sheep  eat  it  gree- 
dily. 

The  old  plant  is  the  most  productive,  and  it  is  not  considered 
worth  gathering  unless  it  is  four  or  five  years  old.  When  the 
leaves  begin  to  fade,  the  earth  about  the  top  of  the  root  is  re- 
moved, and  the  leaves  are  twisted  off  and  are  thrown  with  other 
vegetable  substances  over  the  root,  to  protect  it  from  the  heat 
of  the  sun.  After  a  few  days,  the  summit  of  thu  root  is  cut  off 
transversely,  and  the  juice,  which  exudes,  is  collected ;  and  then 
another  thin  slice  is  taken  off,  and  the  juice  is  agam  preserved. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  635 

This  course  is  continued  till  the  root  is  exhausted,  wliich  is  ge- 
nerally in  six  or  eio-ht  weeks.  The  sun  is  as  mu-cli  as  possible 
■excluded  from  the  root  while  the  process  of  gathering  is  going 
OR,     The  juice  when  collected  is  dried  in  the  sun. 

One  drachm  of  the  juice  fresh  from  the  root  will  diffuse  a 
more  powerful  effluvia  through  a  close  room  than  five  hun- 
■dred  pounds  of  the  article  as  generally  used.  The  gum  be- 
comes softened  by  heat  without  becoming  fluid,  and  is  very  dif- 
ficult to  pulverize.  It  is  inflammable,  and  burns  with  a  bril- 
liant lively  flame. 

Its  virtues  are  extracted  by  alcohol,  and  form  a  tincture, 
which  when  put  into  water  turns  it  white.  The  odor  of  asa- 
fetida  depends  upon  the  oil,  which  may  be  extracted  and  sepa- 
rated by  distillation,  in  water  or  alcohol,  when  it  is  of  an  ex- 
ceedingly offensive  taste,  bitter  and  acrid.  The  active  princi- 
ple IS  in  the  volatile  oil  and  the  resin. 

Medical  uses. — Asafetida  is  a  powerful  antispasmodic,  a  mo- 
•derate  stimulant,  feebly  laxative,  and  an  efficient  expectorant. 
It  is  employed  on  account  of  its  antispasmodic  properties,  in 
the  treatment  of  hypochondriasis,  hysteria,  convulsions,  spasms 
of  the  stomach  and  bowels,  nervous  disorders  which  accompa- 
ny nervous  dibility,  <fcc.  From  the  union  of  its  difftrent  pro- 
perties, or  of  the  expectorant  with  the  antispasmodic,  it  is  high- 
ly useful  in  difficulties  of  the  lungs,  whooping  cough,  asthma, 
•catarrh,  and  in  sinking  sensations.  It  may  be  given  instead  of 
nerve  powder,  and  also  used  for  constipation  and  flatulency. 
It  appears  to  have  been  known  in  the  east  from  the  earliest 
ages,  and  at  the  present  time  is  much  used  in  Persia  and  In- 
dia, as  a  condiment. 

Preparations  and  administration. — It  may  be  given  in  a 
pill,  the  size  of  a  small  pea,  or  in  powders,  from  five  to  ten 
grains,  or  the  tincture  may  be  used,  to  the  amount  of  one  or 
two  teaspoonsful,  in  any  simple  tea  or  in  the  form  of  injections. 
Take  half  an  ounce  of  the  gum,  ground  or  cut  fine,  and  the 
same  quantities  of  composition  and  nerve  powder,  mix  them 
well  together,  and  give  from  half  to  a  teaspoonful,  in  hot  wa- 
ter, for  violent  attacks  of  hysterics,  convulsions,  coughs,  spasms 
and  colic, 

AYe  can  add  our  testimony  to  the  happy  effects  of  this  reme- 
dy. Having  for  several  weeks  labored  under  severe  mental  ex- 
citement, the  virtues  of  the  nerve  powder  were  exhausted,  when 
this  remedy  was  recommended.  After  much  persuasion,  we 
were  induced  to  take  a  pill  at  night  on  going  to  bed,  but  howe- 
ver without  any  faith  in  the  virtues  of  the  article;  yet  notwith- 
standing, we  soon  fell  into  a  refreshing  sleep,  a  gentle  perspira- 
tion broke  out,  and  in  the  morning  we  awoke  from  as  comfort- 
able a  night's  rest  as  we  ever  enjoyed.    By  continuing  the 


636  THE  THOMSON  IAN 

use  of  the  pill  for  several  nijijhts,  our  mind  became  quiet,  our 
nervous  system  regular,  and  the  blessings  of  health  soon  re- 
turned. 

Though  its  odor  is  offensive,  the  medicine  ought  not  to  be 
eondemned. 


LAURUS  CAMPHORA.— Antispasmodics  conti- 
nued. 

Camphor. 

STIMULANT,    BITTER,    ANTISEPTIC,    AND    AROMATIC. 

To  promote  mental  exhilaration,  warratli  and  perspiration ;  to  remove  faintness,  and  give 
temporary  strength  and  tone  to  the  stomach. 

Laurus  Camphora.  Concretum  sui  generis,  or  a  peculiar 
concrete  substance. — Calyx,  none.  Coro//a,  calyciue,  six-part- 
ed. Nectary,  with  three  tv/o-bristled  glands,  surrounding 
the  germ.  Filaments,  interior,  glanduliferous.  Drupe,  one- 
seeded. 

It  is  said  that  camphor  is  not  confined  to  any  one  species  of 
plants,  but  is  widely  diffused,  and  existing  in  a  great  variety. 
In  the  roots  of  the  cinnamon,  cassia,  and  sassafras  laurels,  it 
may  be  found,  and  is  one  of  the  constituents  of  the  seeds  of  the 
cardamon  and  long  pepper  ;  it  also  exists  in  lavender,  pepper- 
mint, thyme,  sage,  rosemary,  &,c.  Its  properties  in  most  of 
those  plants  are  so  minute  as  to  render  it  unprofitable  to  extract 
them.  It  is  procured  from  the  cinnamon  tree  by  the  inhabit- 
ants of  Ceylon.  It  exudes  from  the  bark  of  a  tree  unknown  to 
botanists,  in  some  parts  of  South  America,  and  is  collected  by 
the  natives.  But  the  laurus  camphora,  and  the  dryobalanops 
camphora,  are  the  camphor  of  commerce. 

Laurus  camphora. — This  tree  is  an  evergreen  of  good  size, 
having  the  aspect  of  the  linden  tree,  with  a  straight  trunk  be- 
low, but  much  divided  above  into  branches,  which  are  covered 
with  a  greenish  smooth  bark.  The  leaves,  which  stand  upon 
long  foot-stalks,  are  smooth,  shining,  ribbed,  and  of  a  pale  green 
color,  tintjed  with  yellow  on  their  upper  surface,  and  from  two 
and  a  half  to  three  inches  long.  The  flowers  are  small,  white, 
and  well  collected  in  clusters,  which  are  supported  by  long  pe- 
duncles. It  has  a  red  berry,  much  resembling  that  of  the  cin- 
namon tree. 

The  tree  is  a  native  of  Asia,  growing  in  China  and  .Japan. 
All  parts  of  the  plant  are  impregnated  with  camphor,  and  it  is 
obtained  from  the  trunk,  branches  and  root,  by  sublimation. 
The  following  process  is  the  most  prevalent  method  of  obtain- 
ing it.  The  smaller  branches  and  roots  are  cut  into  small 
chips,  and  put  into  a  large  iron  vessel  with  a  little  water,  sur- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  637 

Younded  by  capitals  of  earthen,  furnished  with  a  hning  of  rye 
straw.  The  heat  is  then  applied  moderately,  and  the  camphor 
becomes  volatilized  by  the  steam  of  tiie  boiling  water,  rises,  and 
is  condensed  npon  the  straw  within  the  capitals. 

Dnjohalanops  camphora  is  another  species.  It  is  the  pro- 
duct of  a  tree  on  the  islands  of  Borneo  and  Sumatra.  The 
'^nm  concretes  in  longitudinal  cavities  in  the  heart  of  the  tree, 
in  masses  at  certain  distances  apart,  from  a  foot  to  a  foot  and  a 
half  long.  The  old  trees  are  the  most  prodnctive,  and  the  num- 
ber that  afford  quantities  of  the  drug  sufiicient  for  extracting  is 
small.  One  tree  will  yield  from  ten  to  twenty-five  pounds,  ac- 
cording to  its  size. 

There  is  produced  from  the  dryobalanops  an  oil,  called  the 
oil  of  camphor,  which  is  highly  valued  as  an  external  applica- 
tion in  rheumatism  and  other  painful  affections.  This  oil  is 
found  in  young  trees  v/hich  have  not  attained  sufficient  growth 
to  produce  camphor,  and  it  is  probably  the  fluid  slate  in  the  de- 
velopement  of  this  useful  substance,  as  it  occupies  the  same  ca- 
vities which  are  afterwards  filled  with  camphor.  It  holds  in 
solution  a  large  quantity  of  this  principle,  and  will  yield  an  in- 
ferior quantity  by  artificial  heat.  The  whole  tree  is  pervaded 
by  this  juice,  as  the  wood  retains  a  fragrant  smell,  and  is  there- 
fore the  less  liaV.e  to  the  attacks  of  insects,  on  account  of  which 
it  is  highly  estefcmed  for  cabinet  work',  &c. 

Medical  use^ — Tt  is  not  definitely  known  how  the  system  is 
affected  by  this  substance.  Its  most  powerful  influence  is  lelt 
upon  the  brain  directly,  and  tlience  to  the  nervous  system.  The 
circulation  which  it  always  affects  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  is 
probably  much  involved  through  the  agency  of  the  brain.  The 
effect  of  this  medicine  is  various,  as  the  quantity  is  increased  or 
diminished.  Given  in  moderation,  it  produces  mental  exhila- 
ration, and  in  a  healtbay  individual  an  increased  hrat  of  the  sur- 
face, and  perspiration.  It  increases  the  pulse  in  fullness  and 
force.  In  some,  it  appears  to  act  upon  the  urinary  and  genital 
organs,  producing  a  burning  sensation.  Experience  teaches, 
that  it  allays  nervous  irritation,  and  quiets  restlessness. 

In  large  doses  it  produces  giddiness,  and  displays  a  more  de- 
cided action  upon  the  brain,  creating  mental  confusion,  Avith  a 
disposition  to  sleep.  In  a  morbid  state  of  the  system,  it  relieves 
pain,  and  allays  spasmodic  action.  In  still  larger  doses,  it  oc- 
casions anxiety,  faintness,  vertigo,  nausea,  vomiting,  and  deli- 
rium, and  sometimes  even  death. 

Camphor  may  be  usefully  employed  as  one  of  the  constitu- 
ents of  the  hot  drops.  In  preparin^:  the  rheumatic  liniment  it 
imparts  a  stimulating,  aromatic  and  pleasant  flavor.  A  small 
particle  of  the  gum  may  le  used  to  advantasje  for  dispelling 
wind  from,  the  body.    It  is  a  pleasant  stimulant,  for  those  who 


638  THE   THOMSONIAH 

choose  it  in  preference  to  Cayenne,  to  expel  wind  from  the  stc*- 
mach  in  cases  of  dyspeptic  affections.  It  is  useful  to  preserve 
goods  or  clothing  from  moths.  If  put  into  closets  in  which  are 
preserves,  sugar,  or  any  kind  of  saccharine  substances,  it  will 
keep  off  the  small  ants  and  other  insects  that  are  troublesome 
in  hot  weather ;  and  for  this  purpose  alone  it  is  worthy  the  at- 
tention of  all  good  livers,  and  especially  epicures. 


ICHTODES  FCETIDUS  — Antispas:modics  conti- 
nued. 
Skunk  Cabbage. 

EMETIC,    NARCOTIC,    ANTISPASMODIC,    STIMULANT,    AND    EX- 
PECTORANT. 

To  quiet  the  nervous  system  in  hysterics — useful  in  catarrh,  chronic  rheumatism,  and  phthisis 
puhnonalis,  or  consumption. 

IcHTODES  FcETiDUs. — Radix.     The  root. 

The  skunk  cabbage  has  a  large  perennial  root,  abrupt,  and 
furnished  with  numerous  fibres,  which  penetrate  to  the  depth 
of  a  foot  or  more.  The  spathe,  which  appears  before  the 
leaves,  is  acuminate,  obovate,  obliquely  depressed  at  the  apex, 
auriculated  at  the  base,  folded  inward  at  the  edges,  and  of  a 
brownish  purple  color,  varied  with  spots  of  red,  yellow,  and 
green.  At  the  beginnmg  of  May,  the  leaves  are  fully  develop- 
ed, and  are  very  large,  being  from  twelve  to  eighteen  inches 
lonff,  and  from  nine  to  twelve  broad. 

This  plant  is  indigenous,  growing  abundantly  in  meadows, 
swamps  and  other  wet  places,  in  most  of  the  middle  and  north- 
ern states.  It  flowers  in  March  and  April,  and  in  lower  lati- 
tudes as  early  as  February.  The  fruit  is  quite  ripe,  and  the 
leaves  decay  before  the  end  of  August.  The  plant  is  very  con- 
spicuous, from  the  abundance  and  magnitude  of  its  leaves.  All 
parts  of  it  have  a  fetid,  disaoreeable  odor,  resembling  that  of  the 
offensive  animal  after  which  it  is  named.  This  odor  resides  in 
an  extremely  volatile  principle,  which  is  rapidly  dissipated  by 
heat,  and  diminished  by  desiccation.  The  root  is  t'e  part  usu- 
ally employed  in  medicine.  It  should  be  collected  in  autumn, 
or  early  in  the  spring,  and  dried  with  care. 

Medical  uses. — The  properties  of  this  root  are  stimulant,  an- 
tispasmodic, and  narcotic.  In  large  doses  it  occasions  nausea 
and  vomiting,  with  headache,  vertigo,  and  dimness  of  vision. 
It  is  useful  in  asthma,  chronic  catarrh,  chronic  rheumatism, 
and  hysteria.  The  pulverized  root  has  been  extensively  used 
in  the  Thomsonian  practice,  as  a  stimulant  and  expectorant  in 
their  cough  powders.  It  may  be  used  in  powder,  in  teaspoon- 
ijal  doses,  to  good  advantage,  taken  in  hot  water,  sweetened,  ov. 


Sol.iimiri    (/iili;iiii;ira. 
filtler  siieft,  Wiioi/i/  iii,)/i/  s/uii/f  . 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  639 

ill  the  syrup  of  any  kind  of  preserves,  or  mixed  with  honey.  It 
is  good  for  asthma,  couoh,  difficulties  of  the  hinsfs,  fits,  or  any 
spasmodic  affections.  It  may  be  used  in  small  doses  of  a  fourth 
of  a  teaspoonful.  and  be  taken  five  or  six  times  a  day,  in  any  of 
the  ways  before  mentioned. 

For  cough  or  dropsy,  it  had  better  be  taken  on  going  to  bed, 
in  hot  water,  placing  a  hot  stone  or  brick  or  jug  of  hot  water  at 
the  patient's  feet.  When  the  cough  is  light,  an  equal  quantity 
of  arum  triphillum^  or  Indian  hemp,  may  be  mixed  with  the 
skunk  cabbage,  and  the  same  quantity  prepared  and  taken  as 
above  directed  on  going  to  bed.  If  the  patient  is  troubled  with 
a  cough  during  the  night,  let  this  stand  by  the  bed,  where  he 
can  take  a  teaspoonful  occasionally. 


SOLANUM  DULCAMARA.— Antispasmodics  con- 
tinued. 
Bittersweet —  Woody  Nightshade. 

SEDATIVE,    DIURETIC,    NARCOTIC,    EMETIC,    AND    ANTISCOR- 
BUTIC. 

Used  mostly  by  Thomsonians  in  nerve  ointment,   to  remove  stiffness  of  the  joints,  callouses, 
strains,  and  relax  contracted  muscles. 

SoLANUM  Dulcamara. — Semina — Caulis — Cortex — Rad- 
ix.— The  seeds,  stalk,  bark'of  the  body,  and  root. — The  stem., 
unarmed,  woody,  climbing.  Lower  leaves,  mostly  cordate, 
glabrous;  upper  ones,  mostly  guitar-hastate.  Yew  flowered, 
corymbs  opposite  to  leaves.  This  is  the  true  bittersweet.  The 
celastnis  scandens  is  sometimes  mistaken  for  the  solatium. 

The  bittersweet  is  a  climbing  shrub,  from  six  to  ten  feet  high, 
with  a  slender,  branching,  woody  stem.  The  leaves  are  alter- 
nate, ovate,  petiolate,  pointed  and  smooth  ;  the  vines  soft,  and  of 
a  brownish  green  color.  The  flowers  are  arranged  in  elegant 
clusters,  standing  opposite  to  the  leaves.  The  calyx  is  small, 
rather  purplish,  and  divided  into  five  segments.  The  wheel- 
shaped  corolla  has  five  pointed  segments,  which  are  violet  blue, 
with  a  purple  vein  runninof  through  their  centre,  and  two  bright 
green  spots  at  the  base  of  each.  It  has  short  filaments,  and 
supports  large  erect,  yellow  anthers,  which  are  arranged  in  the 
form  of  a  cone,  completely  encircling  the  style.  The  oval- 
shaped  berries  are  of  a  bright  scarlet  color,  and  continue  to 
hang  upon  the  bush  in  beautiful  clusters,  after  the  leaves  have 
gone  to  decay. 

The  bittersweet  flourishes  best  in  damp  and  sheltered  places, 
as  on  the  banks  of  running  water,  among  thickets,  along  fences, 
and  in  moist  meadows.  It  abounds  throughout  the  United 
States,  and  is  in  bloom  in  July  and  August.     The  root,  stalk, 


640 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


and  berries,  possess  the  medical  properties  of  tlie  plant.  The 
berries  were  formerly  considered  poisonous,  and  were,  without 
cause,  thought  to  act  with  great  severity  upon  the  stomach  and 
bowels. 

After  the  fall  of  the  leaf  in  autumn,  bittersweet  should  be  ga- 
thered, the  twigs  as  well  as  the  bark  of  the  body  and  root.  The 
best  is  that  which  grows  on  high  and  dry  situations. 

Medical  uses. — The  properties  of  bittersweet  are  narcotic, 
with  the  power  of  increasing  the  secretions  of  the  kidneys  and 
skin.  In  several  instances,  we  have  observed  a  dark  purplish 
color  of  the  face  and  hands,  and  at  the  same  time  considerable 
languor  of  the  cn-culation.  when  the  system  was  under  its  in- 
fluence. 

Its  narcotic  effects  do  not  become  obvious,  unless  taken  in 
over  doses.  It  then  produces  faintness,  vertigo,  nausea,  vomit- 
ing, and  spasmodic  muscular  movements.  It  is  now  mostly 
confined  to  the  treatment  of  leprous  and  other  cutaneous  erup- 
tions, particularly  those  of  a  scaly  character.  Its  operation  up- 
on the  secretions  is  insufficient  to  account  for  its  favorable  ef- 
fects, and  we  must  therefore  ascribe  them  to  an  alterative  ac- 
tion. In  some  cases  it  has  been  beneficially  employed  in  chro- 
nic rheumatism. 

It  is  said  to  be  useful  (and  we  think,  from  its  properties,  with 
much  reason,)  in  mania  connected  with  strong  venereal  propen- 
sities. It  may  be  used  in  decoction,  of  which  take  a  foot-glass 
three  or  four  times  a  day,  and  increase  the  quantity  till  some 
slight  disorder  of  the  head  indicates  the  activity  of  the  medi- 
cine. 

In  cutaneous  affections,  a  strong  decoction  may  be  applied  to 
the  skin,  at  the  same  time  that  the  medicine  is  taken  internally. 
The  extract  may  also  be  taken,  in  doses  of  from  five  to  ten 
grains.  A  dose  of  the  powder  should  be  from  one  to  three  tea- 
spoonsful,  taken  in  warm  water. 

NERVE  OINTMENT. 

Take  of  the  bark  of  the  roots  of  bittersweet,  with  the  berries, 
two  parts;  wormwood  and  chamomile,  of  each  one  part;  all  of 
which  should  be  green — but  if  dry,  moistened  with  hot  water; 
put  one  pound  of  the  above  mixture,  after  being  well  bruised, 
into  one  gallon  of  porpoise  or  horse  oil,  or  any  other  soft  animal 
oil — simmer  them  over  a  slow  fire  for  twelve  lionrs,  then  strain 
off  and  add  one  ounce  of  spirits  of  turpentine  and  lialf  an  ounce 
of  the  spirits  of  camphor  for  each  pound  of  the  ointment. 

This  preparation  is  to  be  used  for  bruises,  sprains,  callous 
swellings,  stiff  joints,  and  corns.  It  should  be  rubbed  upon  the 
affected  part,  and  dried  in  by  the  fire,  or  by  holding  as  !irar  it 
as  can  be  borne,  some  heated  article;  after  which  put  bandages 


MATKKIA    MEDICA.  641 

of  flannel  about  the  part  and  keep  it  wnnn.     It  is  very  good  for 
cracked  liands,  or  roucrliness  upon  the  skin, 

But  a  more  pleasant  liniment  may  be  made  by  bruising  the 
root  and  simmerino-  it  in  fresh  butter,  after  which  scent  it  with 
l)ur2'amot,  or  any  kind  of  aromatic  oil  used  as  perfumery,  to 
render  the  smell  agfveeable, 


Antiscorbutic  /Remedies. 

This  head  should  commend  itself  to  all  scorbutic  cr-sej,  siicli  as  venereal, 
gout,  rheumatic,  scrofulous,  leprous,  nephritic,  and  all  difficulties  of  the  blood 
and  skin. 


ARCTIUlM  LAPPA. 
Burdock. 

ANTISCORBUTIC,    APERIE^^T,    SUIJOKIFIC,    DUPHOKETIC,    DIUr.ETlC,  AKD 

TONIC. 

To  cleanse  the  blood  of  morbid  humors,   the  seeds  and  root  stand  in  the  front  rank  of  llie 
antiscorbutic  remedies — also  in  all  such  diseases  as  gout,  venereal,  rheumatism,  scrofula,  ifec 

Arctium  Lappa,      r^emina — Folia — Radix. — The  seeds, 

leaves  cUid  root. The   cauline  leaves,    heart-form,   petioled. 

toothed.     Floioers,  pamcled,  globose.     Calyx,  smooth. 

The  burdock  is  a  very  common,  biennial  plant,  with  a  large, 
tapering  root,  from  twelve  to  eighteen  inches  long,  dark  brown 
externally,  but  very  white  and  spongy  within,  having  v;ithered 
scales  near  the  top.  The  stem  is  branching,  pubescent,  succu- 
lent, and  two  or  three  feet  in  length,  having  very  large  leaves, 
vvliich  are  dark  green  upon  their  upper  surffice,  wliitish  and 
downy  beneath,  and  have  very  long  foot  stalks.  The  flowers 
are  globose,  purple,  and  arranged  in  panicles.  The  imbricated 
calyx  consists  of  scales  with  extremities  that  are  hooked,  by 
which  they  attach  themselves  to  cloth  and  the  coats  of  various 
animals.  The  down  of  the  seed  is  prickly  and  rough  ;  the  bur 
many-seeded,  and  the  seeds  are  quadrangular. 

Burdock  is  abundant  in  this  country,  growing  in  pastures, 
fields,  and  along  the  road  side,  iti  cultivated  grounds,  and 
among  rubbish.  The  root  should  be  ^wg  in  the  sprino-.  before 
the  leaves  start,  or  in  llie  fall,  after  the  top  is  dead,  as  then  it 
possesses  the  full  strength  of  the  entire  plant.  The  odor  of  the 
root  is  weak,  but  unpleasant — the  taste  is  mucilaginons  and 
sweetish  bitter,  with  a  slight  degree  of  astrinaency.  "The  seeds 
contain  essential  oil,  and  are  aromatic,  bitterish  and  somewhat 
acrid. 


642  THE  THOMSOiMAN 

Medical  iises. — The  root  is  considered  sudorific,  diaphoretic 
and  aperient,  without  irritatins:  properties;  and  is  good  in  lep- 
rous, rheumatic,  scrofula,  scorbutic,  gouty,  venereal  and  neph- 
ritic atfections.  Perseverance  and  close  application  are  neces- 
sary in  order  that  the  system  may  feel  effectually  the  benefit  of 
this  antiscorbutic  remedy.  A  decoction  may  be  prepared,  by 
boiling  four  ounces  of  the  green  root  well  bruised  in  two  quarts 
of  water,  and  half  a  pint  of  it  taken  three  times  a  day. 

The  seeds  are  diuretic,  and  may  be  used  in  the  form  of  pow- 
der, of  which  a  teaspoonful  may  be  taken  two  or  three  times  a 
day.  The  leaves  may  also  be  used  to  great  advantage  as  drafts 
on  the  feet.  They  may  also  be  taken  green,  rolled,  and  satu- 
rated with  vinegar,  and  applied  as  warm  as  can  be  borne  on 
any  part  of  the  body  suffering  with  pain.  Remember  always 
to  apply  them  hot,  and  put  about  them  a  bandage  of  woollen 
cloth  or  flannel,  to  excite  perspiration.  The  leaves  may  be 
dried,  and  kept  for  applying  to  burns,  &c. 

No.  1.  Antiscorbutic  Syrup, 

Take  of  dock  roots  and  burdock  seeds,  each  one  pound; 
burdock  and  lovage  roots,  each  two  pounds  ;  American  senna 
and  green  ozier  bark,  each  one  and  a  half  pounds;  let  them  all 
be  green  as  possible,  bruise  them  thoroughly  together,  put  them 
into  a  large  kettle,  and  add  eight  gallons  of  soft  spring  water; 
boil  for  two  hours,  then  strain  off  and  add  one  gallon  of  molas- 
ses and  the  same  quantity  of  .Jamaica  rum;  shake  them  well 
together,  and  keep  it  tight  in  jugs  for  use. 

Dose,  from  a  quarter  to  one  glass,  from  four  to  six  times  a 
day. 

No.  2.  Antiscorbutic  Syrup — A  valuable  article. 

Take  of  the  yellow  or  narrow  dock  and  burdock  roots,  each 
one  pound  ;  burdock  seeds  and  American  senna,  of  each  one 
half  a  pound  ;  pulverize  and  mix  them  well  together,  and  then 
boil  in  ten  quarts  of  water  for  half  an  hour  ;  strain  off,  and  add 
half  a  gallon  of  brandy,  and  the  same  quantity  of  molasses. 
Keep  it  bottled  close  for  use.  This  is  one  of  the  best  antiscor 
butic  syrups  I  have  ever  made,  for  all  humors  of  the  body. 

Dose,  from  a  fourth  to  half  a  glass,  three  times  a  day,  or  less 
or  more,  according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  case. 

While  using  the  antiscorbutic  syrups,  purified  lime  water, 
made  from  oyster  shells,  should  be  freely  used.  The  above 
compound  embraces  the  most  powerful  antiscorbutics  known  to 
us  in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  These  receipts  are  of  incalcu- 
lable value  to  the  scorbutic  patient. 

The  articles  may  be  prepared  in  less  quantities,  by  observing 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  643 

ths  same  proportions.  If  all  the  articles  cannot  be  had,  make  a 
tea  of  such  as  you  can  procure,  and  use  that  instead  of  the  sy- 
rup. 


MACROTYS  SERPENTARIA.— Antiscorbutics 

continued. 

Black  Snakeroot — Cohosh. 

STIMULANT,    TONIC,    ANTISPASMODIC,    A    POWERFUL    EMMENAGOGUE, 
DIURETIC,    AND    ANTISCORBUTIC. 

For  stimulating  the  secretions  of  the  body,  expelling  rheumatic  pains,  and  removing  female 
obsl ructions,  anil  has  much  influence  over  the  nervous  and  arterial  systems. 

Macrotys  Serpentaria. — Radix.  The  root.  Calyoc, 
four  or  five  leaved.  Petals,  four  to  eiijht,  diformed,  thickish, 
sometimes  wanting.  Capsules,  one  to  five, ^oblong,  many-seed- 
ed.    Seeds,  squamose. 

The  black  cohosh  is  a  tall  herbaceous  plant,  from  six  to  eight 
feet  high,  with  a  perennial  root.  The  leaves  are  large,  consist- 
ing of  oblong,  ovate  leafets,  toothed  and  incised  at  the  edges. 
It  has  small  white  flowers,  disposed  in  a  long  terminal  raceme, 
with  occasionally  two  short  racemes  at  the  base.  The  calyx  is 
white,  deciduous  and  four-leaved.  The  petals  are  minute,  and 
shorter  than  the  stamens.  The  pistil  consists  of  a  sessile  stig- 
ma and  an  oval  germ.  The  fruit  is  an  ovate  capsule,  contaiti- 
ing  many  flat  seeds. 

The  black  snakeroot  grows  in  rocky  woodlands  throughout 
the  United  States,  and  flowers  in  July  and  August.  The  root 
is  the  only  part  used  as  medicine. 

Medical  xises. — The  properties  of  this  plant  are  stimulant, 
tonic,  and  have  a  powerful  action  on  the  secretions  of  the  uterus, 
kidneys,  skin,  and  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  lungs.  It  has 
a  strong  affinity  for  the  uterus,  and  exerts  great  influence  over 
the  nervous  and  arterial  systems. 

It  is  employed  in  cases  of  rheumatism,  dropsy,  hysterics,  and 
various  aflections  of  the  uterus,  and  consumption  of  the  lungs; 
in  such  cases  it  is  very  u.seful,  on  account  of  its  stimulating  and 
expectorating  qualities.  For  convulsions,  occasioned  by  peri- 
odical uterine  difficulties,  this  is  a  valuable  remedy.  For  rheu- 
matism, or  female  obstructions,  it  may  be  used  in  form  of  decoc- 
tion, or  as  bitters. 

Take  half  a  pound  of  the  roots,  and  bruise  them  well  in  a 
mortar,  pour  upon  them  one  pint  of  boiling  water,  let  it  steep 
for  ten  minutes,  then  pour  it  off  and  let  itcool ;  put  it  into  a 
jug  and  add  a  quart  of  good  Holland  gin  ;  let  it  stand  twelve 
hours,  to  extract  the  strength  of  the  roots,  being  often  shaken. 


644  THE  TliOMSOxNIAN 

Dose,  a  wineglussful,  from  tiiree  to  six  times  a  day.  It  will 
very  soon  boo-in  to  show  the  effects  of  its  activity;  if  in  female 
obstructions,  by  removino^thc  difficnity  ;  if  in  rheumatic  pains, 
in  easing  tlie  patient ;  and  so  on  for  the  variety  of  complaints 
in  which  it  is  beneficial. 

This  medicine  should  not  be  taken  by  females  in  a  state  of 
ntero  gestation,  as  it  will  produce  abortion,  and  consequent  de- 
bility, and  weakness  of  the  constitution. 


CHIMAPHILA  UMBELLATA  —Antiscorbutics 

continued. 

Princess  Pine — Pipsissewa — Bitter  Winiergr€e7i. 

ANTISCORBUTIC,    DIURETIC,    ASTPaNGENT,    TONIC,    AND    STIMULANT. 
Used  much  the  same  as  Bunlock,  Dock  and  Lovage. 

Chimafhila  Umbellata.  Seniina. — Herba — Radix.  The 
seeds,  herb,  and  root. —  Calyx,  five-toothed.  tStyle,  very  shorty 
immersed  in  the  germ.  Petals,  five.  Stigma,  annular,  orbi- 
cular, with  a  five-lobeddisk.  Filaments,  stipitate.  /S'^y/e,  dis- 
coid, ciliate.  Capsules,  five-celled,  opening  from  the  summits, 
margin  unconnected. 

The  Pipsissewa  is  an  evergreen,  with  a  small,  perennial, 
yellowish  root,  which  gives  ofl:' several  simple,  erect  stems,  from 
six  to  eight  inches  high.  Leaves,  wedge-shaped,  somewhat 
lanceolate,  serrate  and  smooth,  of  a  shining  green  color,  sup- 
ported upon  foot-stalks,  in  irregular  whorls.  The  flowers  are 
arranged  in  terminal  corymbs,  and  stand  upon  peduncles.  Tlie 
calyx  is  dividend  at  its  border  into  five  segments.  The  corolla 
is  composed  of  five  spreading  petals,  which  are  of  a  whitish  co- 
lor, tinged  with  red,  and  give  an  agreeable  odor.  It  has  ten 
stamens,  the  filaments  shorter  than  the  petals,  with  purple  an 
thers.  The  germ  is  depressed,  and  supports^a  thick  sessile  stig- 
ma, the  style  being  immersed  in  the  germ.  The  seeds  are  li- 
near, chaffy,  numerous,  and  enclosed  in  a  depressed,  roundish, 
five-celled  capsule,  with  the  persistent  cdyx  at  the  base. 

This  beautiful  plant  is  a  native  of  the  northern  and  middle 
states,  and  of  Europe  and  Asia.  It  is  found  in  all  parts  of  Ame- 
rica, and  extending  to  the  Pacific  ocean.  It  grows  in  a  loose, 
sandy  soil,  in  deep  shady  woods,  and  is  surrounded  by  decay- 
ing leaves.  It  flowers  in  June  and  July.  Every  part  of  the 
plant  is  possessed  of  active  properties. 

The  spotted  pipsissewa.,  Chimapkila  maculata,  possesses 
much  the  same  properties  as  the  one  above  descril;ed;  and  is  dis- 
tinguished from  it  by  the  character  of  the  leaves.  •  The  leaves 


MATERIA   MKDICA.  645 

of  the  maculata  are  lanceolate  and  round  at  the  base,  but  are 
broader  near  the  summit,  and  are  of  a  deep  olive  green  color^ 
striped  with  veins  of  a  greenish  white.  Those  of  the  nmbellata 
are  broadest  near  the  summit,  and  gradually  narrowing  to  the 
base,  and  of  a  dark  shining  green. 

Wh  n  dried  and  exposed  to  the  light,  the  color  fades  much, 
but  does  not  lose  its  greenisli  hue.  The  leaves  of  pipsissewa 
when  fresli  and  bruised  give  a  peculiar  odor,  and  have  a  plea- 
sant bitter,  astringent,  sweetish  taste.  The  roots  and  stems 
liave  a  considerable  degree  of  pungency.  Its  active  properties 
arc  imparted  to  boiling  water  and  alcohol. 

Medical  uses. — The  active  properties  of  this  valuable  plant 
are  tonic,  antiscorbutic,  and  astringent.  It  is  extensively  em- 
ployed in  rheumatism,  scrofula,  and  nephritic  or  kidney  com- 
plamts. 

We  have  been  in  tiio  use  of  this  plant  for  upwards  of  forty 
years,  in  dropsical,  cancerous,  and  other  sharp,  acrid,  scrofulous; 
complaints.  It  is  an  excellent  diuretic,  and  is  good  lor  dyspep- 
tics, and  for  general  dibility.  It  may  be  always  used  to  advan- 
tage in  difficulties  of  the  kidneys  and  bladder  ;  it  is  also  good  in 
cases  of  stone,  and  for  scrofula  before  and  after  ulceration,  as  it 
cleanses  the  blood,  and  reduces  the  quantity  of  bad  humor, 
which  causes  the  ulcers  ;  and  by  washing  the  sores  in  the  tea  it 
cleanses  them,  and  thus  facilitates  the  healing  process.  In  ob- 
stinate, ill-conditioned  ulcerations  and  cutaneous  eruptions,  it 
has  proved  itself  hiolily  valuable.  In  such  cases  it  is  used  in- 
ternally as  a  drink,  and  externally  as  a  wash. 

The  leaves  and  seeds  may  be  simmered  with  burdock  and 
lovage  seeds,  in  fresh  butter  or  lard,  with  a  little  beeswax,  and 
used  for  salt-rheum,  scald-head,  cracked  hands,  sore  nipples,  ul- 
cers and  old  sores.  Those  troubled  with  scrofula  should  use  a 
tea  of  the  leaves  constantly,  and  drink  nothing  else  till  the  diffi- 
culty is  removed.  It  may  be  made  into  beer,  with  green  osier, 
burdock  and  lovage,  roots  or  seeds. 

Take  one  pound  of  pipsissewa,  one  fourth  of  a  pound  of  fine 
ginger,  one  pound  of  green  ozier  bark,  a  fourth  of  a  pound  of 
burdock  seeds,  and  a  fourth  of  n  pound  of  lovage  seeds  ;  pul- 
verize the  whole  quantity,  and  put  it  mto  three  gallons  of  soft 
spring  water  and  boil  for  an  hour,  then  strain  ofi'and  press  out 
the  juice  and  sweeten  it  with  molasses  ;  \vhen  about  n-ilk  warm 
add  half  a  pint  of  yeast,  and  in  from  twelve  to  eighteen  hours  it 
is  fit  for  use.     This  is  a  valuable  beverage. 

If  the  burdock  and  lovage  seeds  cannot  be  had,  use  instead, 
one  pound  each  of  the  roots.  The  articles  ought  all  to  be  fresh 
gathered. 

Take  a  glass  of  this  six  or  eight  times  a  day,  unless  it  ope- 


646  THE   THOMSONIAN 

rates  too  severely.     In  all  cases,  the  quantity  to  be  taken  must 
■be  regulated  by  discretion. 


CORNUS  CIRCINATI.— Antiscorbutics  continued. 
Green  Osier — Round-leaved  Dogvjood. 

ANTISCORBUTIC,    BITTER,    ASTRINGENT,    AROMATIC    AND 

TONIC. 
To  strengthen  the  stomach  and  remove  scorbutic  difficulties. 

CoRNUS  CiRciNATi.  FoUa — Cortes.  The  leaves  and 
bark.  The  branches  v/arty.  Leaves  broad  oval,  acuminate, 
white — downy  beneath.  Cyme  much  spread.  About  eight  or 
ten  feet  high.  Berries  blue,  involucre,  usually  four-leaved. 
Petals  superior,  four  druped  with  a  two-celled  nut.  There 
are  several  different  species  of  the  Cornus  growing  in  this  vi- 
cinity ;  all  of  which  in  a  great  degree  resemble  each  other  in 
their  medical  properties. 

The  Cornits  circinati  is  a  shrub  from  eight  to  twelve  feet 
high.  The  branches  are  covered  with  small  excrescences  or 
warts  ;  the  leaves  are  large,  pointed,  with  rough  edges  ;  downy 
beneath.  It  has  large  white  ilowers  disposed  in  cymes.  The 
l)erries  are  blue.  This  tree  is  a  native  of  the  United  States, 
growing  from  the  Carolinas  to  the  British  Provinces,  on  the 
sides  of  hills  and  the  banks  of  rivers.  It  flowers  in  June  and 
July. 

Medical  nses. — The  bark  when  dried  is  of  a  whitish  ash 
<eolor,  and  when  powdered  resembles  that  of  the  bitter  root.  It 
has  an  astringent,  bitter,  and  aromatic  taste.  It  possesses  pro- 
perties very  similar  to  the  Cornus  Florida,  and  may  be  employ- 
ed in  the  same  way  as  a  substitute.  It  is  much  used  as  an  as- 
tringent and  tonic.  The  most  eligible  preparation  is  to  pour  a 
pint  of  boiling  water  on  two  ounces  of  the  bark,  fresh,  if  it  is  to 
be  had  ;  let  it  steep  half  an  hour,  and  take  of  it  a  wine  glass 
full  two  or  three  times  a  day.  A  tea  made  of  the  leaves  may 
be  used  to  advantage  as  a  constant  drink,  by  those  laboring  un- 
der scorbutic  difficulties.  The  leaves  rolled  to  make  them  soft 
and  wet  in  vinegar,  are  an  excellent  application  to  reduce  in- 
flammation, especially  that  of  the  eyes.  In  case  of  an  inflamed 
bruise,  if  the  leaves  are  prepared,  as  above  mentioned  and  ap- 
plied to  the  injurd  part,  at  the  same  time  giving  internally  com- 
position tea,  the  perspiration  will  start  beneath  the  leaves  and 
the  pain  will  be  removed.  They  are  a  valuable  article  and 
should  be  kept  on  hand. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  647 


Eye  Water  No.  1. 

Eye  water  may  be  prepared  by  putting  aliandful  of  the  bark 
from  the  tree  into  a  small  quantity  of  hot  water  ;  let  it  stand 
long  enough  to  be  well  saturated,  then  add  about  the  same 
quantity  of  fourth  proof  Jamaica  rum,  and  let  it  remain  for  two 
or  three  days,  then  strain  and  press  out  the  juice  from  the  baric 
and  preserve  for  use.  This  preparation  may  also  be  used  as  a 
wash  for  sores  to  reduce  the  inflammation.  Simmer  the  bark, 
when  bruised  fine,  in  fresh  butter  or  lard,  and  it  makes  an  ex- 
cellent soft  ointment  ior  old  sores,  cracked  hands,  sore  lips  or 
nipples  and  sore  eyes,  where  the  lashes  are  inflamed.  When 
made  into  an  ointment  or  syrup,  this  valuable  article  may  be 
used  advantageously  in  a  great  number  of  complaints,  especial- 
ly when  the  blood  is  impregnated  with  sharp  acrid  humors.  A 
fine  cool  beverage  may  be  made,  by  putting  the  green  leaves 
into  cold  spring  water  :  this  is  not  only  cooling  but  soothnig 
both  to  the  body  and  mind,  and  is  good  to  drink  in  putrid  and 
inflammatory  disorders. 

Eye  Water  No.  2. 

Take  of  the  fresh  gathered  bark  of  green  osier,  four  ounces, 
of  the  root  of  yellow  lily,  well  cleansed,  the  same  quantity, 
bruise  them  well  together,  and  steep  them  moderately  in  two 
quarts  of  soft  water,  in  a  stone  pot  for  three  hours,  stirring 
them  occasionally  ;  then  strain  oft'  and  add  two  ounces  of  fine 
loaf  sugar,  and  an  eighth  of  an  ounce  of  saleratus,  and  half  a 
pint  of  fourth  proof  Jamaica  rum.  A  small  piece  of  white  vit- 
riol half  the  size  of  a  walnut,  may  also  be  pulverized  and  add- 
ed ;  this  we  add  knowing  it  to  be  good  in  case  of  sore  eyes. 
This  wash  will  cleanse  the  eye  of  all  offensive  matter,  re- 
move the  itching  or  irritation,  and  restore  it  to  a  healthy  con- 
dition. If  too  strong  it  may  be  reduced.  To  be  used  nio-ht 
and  morning,  or  whenever  the  eye  is  irritable. 

Sore  eyes  are  generally  accompanied  with  a  torpid  state  of 
the  bowels,  which  causes  a  pressure  of  blood  and  other  fluids 
upon  the  ball  of  the  eye.  In  such  cases  use  injections  of  a  tea 
of  cayenne,  sweetened  with  molasses.  The  feet  may  be  bathed 
in  hot  water  and  liniment,  to  aid  in  equalizing  the  circulation. 

Ointment  for  Hemorhoides  or  Piles. 
Take  of  lovage  seed,  burdock  seed,  and  prickley  ash  bark, 
each  one  ounce;  bark  of  green  osier,  the  flowers  of  yarrow 
and  pipsessewa,  each  two  ounces ;  pulverize  and  simmer  all 
the  articles  well  together  in  two  pounds  of  fresh  butter  or  lard 
for  two  or  three  hours  over  a  slow  fire  ;  or  it  may  be  kept  in  a 
white  earthen  or  brass  vessel,  where  it  will  simmer  very  slow- 


64o  THE  THO.M60iN.'ArN 

\y  for  a  day  or  two,  in  order  that  all  the  strength  of  the  articles 
may  be  extracted  :  then  strtiin  and  press  out  all  the  liquor. 
This  is  a  very  valuable  article  for  the  piles,  and  every  species 
of  old  sores.  Before  using  it  let  tiie  sore  be  washed  with  cla- 
rified lime  water.  Tliis  is  also  an  e.xcellent  niutmenl  to  put 
upon  ihe  neck  and  breast  for  quuisy  or  putrid  sore  throat,  after 
which  put  a  flannel  about  the  neck.  It  is  also  good  for  stifi' 
joints  and  rheumatic  pains,  in  such  cases  add  a  little  cayenne. 
It  is  useful  to  be  applied  to  liie  back  of  females  who  are  irregu- 
lar in  their  menstrual  discharges.  Let  it  when  applied  always 
be  dried  in  by  the  fire  or  by  holding  near  some  heated  sub- 
stance.    Practitioners  should  always  keep  this  on  hand. 


RUMEX. — Antiscorbutics  continued. 
Docks. 

ANTISCORBUTIC,    APERIENT,    ASTRINGENT    AND    TONIC. 

Useful  in  scorbutic  and  other  complaints.    The  same  as  other  articles  under  this  head. 

Rum  EX  Aquaticus,       ) 

Brifanica.      K  Radix — Folia.     The  root  and  leaves. 
Obliisifolit/s,  ) 

There  are  six  species  of  dock,  all  possessing  nearly  the  same 
virtues,  so  much  so  that  we  think  it  unnecessary'"  to  define  the 
particular  qualities  of  the  different  species  separately.  They 
are  all  herbaceous,  with  long,  fleshy,  perennial  roots.  The 
flowers  are  axillary  or  terminal ;  some  of  (he  species  are  diss- 
cious  ;  but  all  of  them  have  perfect  flowers.  The  rumex 
aquaticus,  rumex  Britannica,  and  rumex  obtusifolius  are  the 
most  useful. 

The  properties  of  the  root  from  whatever  species  derived,  arc 
bitter  and  astringent,  with  but  little  odor.  It  yields  its  virtues 
to  water  and  alcohol,  rapidly.  The  leaves  of  the  docks  are 
edible  and  much  used  as  spinage,  in  the  spring,  when  they  are 
young  and  tender.  Tiiey  form  an  excellent  diet  in  scorbutic 
cases  and  are  usually  laxative.  The  roots  are  an  excellent  ar- 
ticle to  dye  yellow. 

Medical  uses. — The  medical  qualities  of  the  dock  roots  are 
anti-scorbutic,  astringent,  and  mildly  tonic.  They  also  possess 
alterative  properties  which  renders  them  very  useful  in  scorbir- 
tic  disorders  and  cutaneous  eruptions.  It  has  sometimes  proved 
useful,  compounded  with  bitter  root,  in  the  venereal  disease. 
It  has  from  long  use  proved  a  valuable  remedy  in  icthyosis. 
or  a  dry,  scaly,  scorbutic,  or  leprous  state  of  tlie  skin.  The 
roots  of  most  of  the  species  unite  a  tonic  with  a  laxative  astrin- 
fjfcnt  property,  much  resembling  that  of  rhubarb,  in  their  opera- 
tions.   . 


Mytiv.i   ,i;;iJc. 
Mnit/oii    leru.  Shy,-/  ,/,i/t .  //urr/t    mi/rl/e 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  649 

Dock  root  may  be  employed  to  the  best  advantage  made  into 
syrup,  but  it  may  be  given  in  the  form  of  decoction  or  powders. 
Four  ounces  may  be  bruised  and  steeped  in  a  quart  of  hot  wa- 
ter and  a  foot  glass  of  it  taken  six  or  eight  times  a  day.  The 
root  simmered  in  fresh  butter,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  fine 
lovage,  prickly  ash  and  burdock  seeds  makes  an  excellent 
ointment  for  the  itch  and  all  scorbutic  appearances  of  the  skin. 
While  using  this  ointment  the  body  should  be  washed  once  or 
twice  a  week  in  pure  lime  water,  diluted  with  whiskey  and 
soft  water.  This  will  neutralize  the  bad  humors  and  morbid 
matter  that  has  worked  out  upon  the  surface.  At  the  same 
time  take  a  wineglass  full  of  the  dock  tea  three  times  a  day, 
also  take  a  little  of  the  lime  water ;  the  one  will  purify  the 
blood,  the  other  will  neutralize  the  morbid  humors  of  the  body 
and  render  them  harmless.  The  dock  is  one  of  the  most  valu- 
able constituents  of  the  antiscorbutic  syrup.  (See  article  Bur- 
dock.) The  pulverized  root  is  also  a  good  dentrifice  for  the 
teeth  and  gums. 


MYRICA  GALE. — Antiscorbutics  continued. 
Meadow  Fern — Sweet  Gale — Bayhush. 

ANTISCORBUTIC,  AROMATIC,  AND  STIMULANT. 

For  all  poisonous  eruptions,  such  as  salt-rheum,  itch,  tetter,  erysipelas — or  for  sores  on  the 
lips,  ears,  face,  or  any  part  of  the  body. 

Myrica  Gale.  Semina — Fructus — Folia.  The  seed,  the 
fruit  and  leaves. — The  leaves,  wedge-lanceolate,  obtuse,  serrate 
at  the  apex.  Staminate  aments,  imbricate.  Scales,  acuminate, 
ciliate.     Fruit,  in  a  scaly  head. 

It  is  very  abundant  by  the  side  of  fresh  ponds  in  the  northern 
states,  and  especially  in  some  parts  of  Massashusetts.  This 
shrub  grows  in  thick  bunches  or  clusters,  and  is  from  two  to 
three  feet  high. 

When  the  leaves  have  fallen  from  the  shrub,  the  whole  of  its 
strength  seems  to  be  concentrated  in  the  bur  and  bud,  which, 
on  being  bruised,  exhibit  a  balsamic  or  resinous  substance,  re- 
sembling balm  of  Gilead  buds.  They  are  a  powerful  aromatic 
and  stimulant.  They  may  be  pulverized  fine  and  simmered  in 
cream,  or  lard,  or  fresh  butter,  which  makes  an  excellent  oint- 
ment for  cutaneous  eruptions. 

Medical  uses. — This  ointment  is  a  valuable  remedy  for  all 
cutaneous  eruptions,  and  especially  in  such  cases  as  are  men- 
tioned at  the  head  of  this  article.  It  is  also  good  for  all  kinds 
of  old  sores,  chapped  hands  and  feet,  sore  nipples,  and  burns,  if 
made  sufficiently  soft. 

42 


650  THE    THOMSOiMAN 

A  syrup  or  beer,  made  as  follows,  may  be  drank  while  the 
ointment  is  being  used. 

Take  two  pounds  of  the  leaves  of  meadow  fern,  boil  them  an 
hour  in  three  gallons  of  water ;  strain  off,  and  boil  in  this  de- 
coction half  a  pound  of  scorched  wheat  bran,  set  it  away  and 
let  it  cool  and  settle ;  then  strain  off,  and  heat  it  boiling  hot 
and  add  four  ounces  of  pulverized  burs  and  buds|of  the  same 
shrub,  and  let  them  simmer  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes ;  then  let 
it  cool  with  the  last  mentioned  ingredients  in  it.  "When  about 
blood  warm,  add  a  pint  of  good  yeast  and  half  a  gallon  of  mo- 
lasses. It  will  ferment,  and  in  about  twenty-four  hours  will  be 
fit  for  use. 

A  half  pint  of  this  may  be  taken  before  eating,  three  times  a 
day.  A  teaspnonful  of  cream  of  tartar  may  be  used  in  this 
drink  every  night  before  going  to  bed,  which  will  clear  the  bad 
humors  from  the  system  immediately.  A  wineglassful  of  the 
lime  water  may  be  used  once  or  twice  a  day. 

The  surface  of  the  body  may  be  bathed  occasionally  with 
lime  water  and  tmcture  of  lobelia,  to  remove  the  morbid  matter 
from  the  skin.  Ti:3  applicaton  is  very  useful  in  effecting  a 
cure. 


XANTHOXYLUM  FRAXINEUM.— Antiscorbut- 
ics continued. 
Prickly  Ash — Tooth-ache  Bush, 

ANTISCOKBUTIC,    ANTISPASMODIC,    STIMULANT,    AND    DIAPHORETIC. 
To  warm  and  invigorate  the  system,  and  remove  morbid  humors. 

Xanthoxylum  Fraxineum. — Flores,  Semi?ia,  Cortex, 
Radix.    The  flowers,  seed,  bark  and  root. 

The  prickly  ash  is  a  small,  shrub-like  tree,  from  eight  to 
twelve  feet  high,  with  spreading  branches,  which  are  thickly 
^studded  with  strong,  sharp,  thorn-like  prickles.  The  leaves  are 
pinnate,  consisting  of  several  pairs  of  leaflets,  and  a  terminal  one 
with  a  short  foot-stalk,  which  is  frequently  prickly  on  the  back, 
but  sometimes  unarmed.  The  leaflets  are  sessile,  ovate,  acute, 
and  sightly  downy  on  their  under  surface.  The  flowers  are 
small,  greenish,  and  are  disposed  in  umbels  near  the  base  of  the 
young  shoots.  The  capsules  are  of  a  greenish  red  color,  with 
two  valves,  and  one  oval,  blackish  seed. 

This  shrub  is  indigenous,  growing  in  moist,  shady  places, 
throughout  the  northern,  middle,  and  western  states.     Its  flow- 
ers appear  before  the  leaves,  in  April  and  May.     The  leaves, 
flowers  and  capsules,  have  an  aromatic  odor,  analogous  to  that 
of  the  oil  of  lemons.    The  flowers,  bark  and  seeds,  are  used  by 


JCiiiillioxiIiiiM    rr;txiiiciiiii 
/'ri(k/ii  r/.v/t 


MATERIA    MEDICA,  €61 

Thomsonian  practitioners.  The  bark  is  very  thin  and  brittle, 
-quite  inodorous,  and  of  a  taste  which  is  at  first  stimulant,  then 
sweetish,  slightly  aroraatic,  and  then  bitter,  and  ultimately  ac- 
rid. 

Medical  uses. — The  prickly  ash  is  an  active  stimulant,  pro- 
ducing when  swallowed  a  sense  of  heat,  with  some  arterial  ex- 
citement, and  a  tendency  to  perspiration.  The  berries  are  ve- 
ry pungent,  and  powerfully  stimulant,  as  also  are  the  bark  and 
flowers.  The  bark  and  seeds  should  be  pulverized  for  use.  It 
is  a  valuable  addition  to  bitter  compounds,  and  it  may  be  taken 
alone  in  hot  water  or  wine.  It  is  a  good  ingredient  in  the  wine 
bitters  ;  it  is  good  for  fever  and  ague,  for  which  it  is  much  used 
in  the  western  states;  and  it  is  also  good  for  cold  hands  and 
feet. 

It  is  an  antiscorbutic  and  antispasmodic  stimulant,  and  a  pow- 
erful diaphoretic.  If  a  person  is  habitually  cold,  or  troubled 
with  chills,  it  will  cause  a  genial  glow  of  warmth  to  pass  al- 
most imperceptibly  through  the  system. 

The  seeds,  pulverized  and  simmered  in  fresh  butter,  or  kept 
warm  for  three  or  four  days  in  any  soft  animal  oil,  make  an  ex- 
cellent rheumatic  ointment,  and  which  is  good  for  pains  in  the 
limbs,  back,  or  side.     Let  it  be  well  dried  in. 

For  inflammation  in  the  jaws,  or  toothache,  this  is  an  excel- 
lent article.  Let  a  poultice  of  it  be  applied  to  the  face,  and  at 
the  same  time  chew  a  few  of  the  seeds,  and  keep  them  by  the 
effected  part;  this  will  soon  afford  relief. 

The  tincture  of  the  bark  or  seeds,  reduced  with  twice  its 
quantity  of  water,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  alkali,  is  an  ex- 
tiellent  fomentation  for  bathing  the  surface  of  the  body  after 
steaming.  Thi?  is  particularly  useful  in  cases  of  rheumatism, 
where  the  tincture  may  be  used  in  its  full  strength.  Before  ap- 
plying this,  rub  the  skin  well  with  a  coarse  towel,  and  then  ap- 
ply it  with  much  friction. 

VALUABLE  SYRUP. 

W  Take  the  pulverized  seeds,  and  peach  meats,  of  each  two 
ounces,  put  them  into  one  pint  of  fourth  proof  Jamaica  rum, 
and  add  loaf  sugar  sufficient  to  make  it  of  the  consistency  of 
molasses.  This  is  one  of  the  best  remedies  for  syncope  or  faint- 
ness  used  in  the  Thomsonian  practice. 


652  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ACHILLEA  MILLEFOLIUM— Antiscorbutics 

continued. 
Yarrow — Mill/oil. 

SLI&H'SL.Y  AROMATIC,    BITTBE,   ASTRINGENT,    AND  MODERATELY   STIMIT- 

LANT. 

Used  in  rheumatic  affections  in  decoction,  and  for  sores  in  ointment. 

Achillea  Millefolium.  Flores — Folia — Radix.  The 
flowers,  leaves  and  root. — The  leaves,  tvvo-pinnatifid,  downy ; 
the  divisions  linear,  toothed,  mucronate.     Stem,  furrowed. 

Yarroio  is  a  perennial  herb,  common  to  Europe  and  Ameri- 
ca, growing  along  fences,  on  the  borders  of  woods,  in  old  fields 
and  in  highways.  It  is  from  twelve  to  eighteen  inches  high, 
and  is  known  by  its  doubly  pinnate,  divided  leaves.  Its  flow- 
ers appear  from  June  to  September.  The  flowers  and  leaves, 
which  are  used  as  medicine,  have  an  agreeable,  aromatic  odor, 
and  a  bitterish,  astringent,  pungent  taste. 

The  plant  owes  its  valuable  properties  to  a  volatile  oil,  which 
may  be  separated  by  distillation,  and  has  the  flavor  of  millfoil 
in  a  great  degree.  The  active  principles  can  be  extracted  by 
water  or  alcohol.  The  properties  of  the  herb  are  astringent, 
tonic,  and  aromatic.  It  has  been  used  in  intermittents,  and  as 
an  antispasmodic  in  colic,  and  various  nervous  affections.  It 
may  be  used  in  decoction.  The  oil  may  be  given  in  doses  of 
from  five  to  ten  drops. 

Medical  uses. — The  flowers  may  be  simmered  in  lard  or 
fresh  butter,  with  equal  quantities  of  green  ozier,  lovage  seeds, 
and  prickly  ash  bark,  first  being  bruised  in  a  mortar.  Strain 
and  press  out  all  the  ointment,  and  you  have  a  valuable  remedy 
for  piles,  either  internal  or  external.  For  internal  application, 
melt  it  and  apply  it  with  the  tip  of  a  goose  quill. 

It  is  good  for  all  kinds  of  inflammatory  sores,  sore  eyes,  salt- 
rheum,  and  cracked  hands. 


LIGUSTICUM  LEVISTICUM.— Antiscorbutics 

continued. 

Lovage — Smellag'e. 

stimulant,  aromatic,  carminative,  diaphoretic,  and 
emmenagogue. 

To  be  compounded  with  burdock,  and  used  for  scrofula,  venereal,  rheumatism,  and  female 

obstructions. 

LiGUSTicuM  Levisticum.  Semina — Folia — Radix.  The 
seed,  leaves  and  root. — The  leaves,  long,  numerous.  Leaflets, 
above,  gashed.    Strongly  aromatic,  especially  the  seeds. 


MATERIA    MKDICA*  653 

Lavage  is  a  perennial,  umbelliferous  plant,  growing  wild  in 
'the  northern  and  middle  states,  and  is  much  cultivated  in  gar- 
■dens.  It  has  a  strong,  aromatic  odor,  and  a  warm,  pungent 
taste.  It  emits  a  yellow,  opaque  juice,  when  wounded,  which 
dries  into  a  brownish,  resinous  substance.  The  roots,  stem, 
leaves  and  seeds,  all  have  been  employed;  but  the  seeds  have 
the  aromatic  and  antiscorbutic  properties  of  the  plant  in  the 
highest  degree.  They  are  somewhat  flattened,  small,  ovate, 
oblong,  strongly  ribbed,  and  of  a  yellowish  brown  color. 

The  medical  properties  of  lovage  closely  resemble  those  of 
angelica.  It  possesses  strong  stimulating  and  aromatic  proper- 
ties, and  has  been  employed  as  a  carminative,  diaphoretic,  and 
emmenagogue.  The  best  forms  to  use  it  in  are  syrups  and  in- 
fusions. 

Medical  uses. — This  article  maybe  usefully  employed  as  an 
antiscorbutic,  in  connection  with  burdock,  yellow  dock,  &,c. 
(See  burdock  syrup.)  A  quantity  of  the  root  may  be  bruised 
and  boiled  in  water,  one  pound  to  a  gallon,  for  fifteen  minutes; 
strain  off,  and  add  when  hot  a  quarter  of  a  pound  of  the  pul- 
verized seed,  sweeten  with  loaf  sugar,  and  add  three  pints  of 
the  best  West  India  rum.  Put  the  liquor  with  the  seeds  into  a 
jug,  and  stop  it  tight  for  use. 

This  is  an  excellent  remedy  for  females  who  have  taken  cold, 
and  their  monthly  turns  stopped ;  as  it  is  an  emmenagogue, 
and  stimulates  and  warms  the  whole  system — promoting  per- 
spiration and  an  active  circulation.  It  will  operate  well  in  cas- 
es of  venereal,  and  other  scrofulous  difficulties. 

ANTISCORBUTIC  SYRUP. 

Take  of  lovage  roots  and  angelica  roots,  each  half  a  pound  : 
of  lovage  seed,  angelica  seed,  and  senna,  each  one  fourth  of  a 
pound  ;  pulverize,  and  boil  in  two  gallons  of  water  for  fifteen 
minutes;  strain  off,  and  press  out  the  liquor,  and  sweeten  well 
with  loaf  sugar,  and  then  add  a  gallon  of  West  India  rum. 

This  is  an  excellent  article  for  a  suppression  of  the  menses, 
or  any  obstruction  or  irregularity  of  the  menstrual  discharge. 

Dose,  half  a  wineglassful  two  or  three  times  a  day. 


CUBEBA. — Antiscorbutics  continued. 
Cuhehs. 

AROMATIC,   ANT-ISCORBUTIC,  DIURETIC,   MODERATELY  STIMU- 
LANT, CARMINATIVE,  STOMACHIC,  AND  TONIC. 
A  good  remedy  in  gonorrlioea,  and  the  first  stages  of  syphilis. 

Piper  Cubeba. — Fritctus.     The  fruit. 
The  cuheh  is  a  perennial,  climbing,  vine,  with  a  smooth, 
pointed  stem,  with  entire,  oblong,  ovate,  or  lanceolate  leaves. 


654  THE    THOaiSONIAN 

which  in  the  old  vines  are  unequal  at  the  base,  less  than  an 
inch  long,  and  supported  upon  short  foot-stalks.  The  fruit  or 
berry  grows  in  chisters,  and  is  about  the  size  of  a  small  pea,  of 
a  brownish  grey  color,  and  has  a  short  stalk,  which  appears  to 
be  continuous,  with  raised  veins,  that  run  over  the  surface  of 
the  berry  like  net  work.  The  aromatic  flavor  of  the  berry  is 
agreeable  to  the  taste,  bitterish  and  camphorous,  leaving  in  the 
mouth  a  sense  of  coolness,  smilar  to  peppermint  oil.  The  pow- 
der is  dark  colored,  and  of  an  oily  appearance.  It  loses  its 
strength  when  exposed  for  any  length  of  time.  The  berries 
should  always  be  kept  whole  till  wanted  for  use. 

Medical  uses. — Cubebs  are  diuretic  and  stimulant,  acting 
with  considerable  force  upon  the  kidneys.  If  used  in  large 
quantities,  they  produce  headache  and  vertigo.  Nausea,  vomit- 
ing, and  a  gentle  purge,  are  the  attendant  consequences  of  their 
excessive  use ;  and  a  sense  of  coldness  is  experienced  in  the 
rectum  similar  to  that  produced  on  the  sense  of  taste.  This  ar- 
ticle has  long  been  used  in  the  East  Indies  for  gonorrhoea,, 
gleet,  and  is  a  grateful  stomachic,  tonic,  and  regulator  of  the 
digestive  organs. 

It  is  best  used  in  the  form  of  syrup,  compounded  with  equal 
quantities  of  burdock  seeds,  lovage  root,  green  osier  bark,, 
and  senna,  to  make  it  operate  more  eflectually.  A  half  of  a 
pound  of  each  may  be  put  into  two  gallons  of  soft  water  and 
boiled  one  hour,  then  strained  and  sweetened  with  molasses, 
with  the  addition  of  spirits  sufficient  to  prevent  its  becoming 
sour. 

Dose,  half  a  wineglassful  six  or  eight  times  a  day,  or  until  it 
operates  sufficiently;  then  graduate  its  use,  and  keep  up  a  gen- 
tle movement  of  the  bowels  until  the  disease  is  cured — during' 
which  time  a  teaspoonfiil  of  balsam  copaiva  may  be  used  two 
or  three  times  a  day,  or  till  a  slight  sense  of  weakness  is  felt  iu- 
the  back. 


Cathartics. 

Whatever  may  be  said  in  this  book  ia  relation  to  physic,  Trill  be  done  on 
the  responsibility  of  the  subscriber ;  for  it  is  well  known  that  Dr.  Samuel 
Thomson  is  against  the  extensive  use  of  cathartic  medicines  ;  consequentl.v 
the  part  we  have  taken  in  writing  the  articles  is  not  to  be  regarded  as  his 
opinions  ;  or  that  he  is  to  be  considered  inconsistent  in  his  views  for  what  wc 
have  done. 

We  have  selected  from  the  vegetable  kingdom,  some  of  the  most  soothing 
and  mild  cathartics,  'io  be  used  by  those  who  will,  if  they  cannot  obtain  a  gen 
tie  dose  of  physic  from  a  Thomsonian,  go  to  the  "regular  physician,"  and 
blindly  take  calomel,  croton  oil,  gamboge,  and  the  most  powerful,  drastic. 
and  deadly  drugs  that  are  to  be  found  in  the  shops ;  by  which  means  many 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  655 

times  lives  are  lost,  for  the  want  of  the  knowledge  of  a  simple  dose  of  peach- 
leaf  tea,  bitter  root,  senna,  or  castor  oil.  The  Thomsonian,  if  lie  wishes  to 
keep  his  patients,  and  be  enabled  to  save  them,  must,  if  it  be  necessary;  re- 
spect those  little  prejudices  to  which  the  mind  of  every  individual  is  more  or 
less  subject ;  and  which,  like  religious,  political,  or  any  other  preconceived 
opinions,  must  be  reasoned  rather  than  forced  out  of  them. 

It  is,  therefore,  to  protect  the  lives  and  health  of  the  unsuspecling,  that  the 
subject  of  physic  is  agitated  at  tliis  time  and  place.  J.  T. 


SOLANUM  LYCOPERSICUM. 

Tomato — Love  Apple. 

CATHARTIC,    DIURETIC,    CARMINATIVE,     TONIC,     DIAPHORETIC,    AND    STI- 
MULANT. 

To  correct  the  morbid  state  of  the  bowels,  the  secretions  of  the  liver,  aad  restore  the  di- 
gestive organs. 

Sor.ANUM  Lycopersicum.  Semina — Fnichis.  The  seed 
and  fruit. — The  stem,  unarmed.  Leaves,  pinnatifid,  gashed. 
Racemes,  two- parted,  leaflets.     Fruit,  glabrous,  torn  lose. 

The  tomato  is  a  plant  about  two  feet  high,  with  a  large  suc- 
culent stem  and  branches.  The  plant  collectively,  except  the 
fruit,  much  resembles  the  common  potato  vine.  The  fruit  is 
esculent,  and  much  used  for  culinary  as  well  as  medical  pur- 
poses. 

Medical  uses. — The  expressed  juice  of  the  tomato  has  prov- 
ed a  valuable  remedy  in  our  practice,  for  liver  complaints,  dys- 
pepsia, constipation  of  the  bowels,  and  obstruction  of  the  biliary 
ducts. 

Take  one  bushel  of  fresh  gathered  tomatoes,  bruise  and 
squeeze  out  the  juice  through  a  coarse  cloth  and  let  it  stand  for 
twelve  hours  ;  then  pour  off  the  juice  from  the  sediment,  and 
simmer  it  to  the  thickness  of  molasses  ;  then  take  out  what  you 
wish  for  syrup,  and  simmer  the  remainder  to  the  consistence  of 
tar,  and  form  it  into  pills.  Sweeten  the  syrup  with  molasses, 
and  add  sufficient  spirits  to  keep  it  from  souring. 

Dose — of  the  pills,  from  four  to  six  at  night,  and  varied  at 
discretion  ;  and  of  the  syrup,  from  half  to  a  wineglassful,  three 
or  four  times  a  day. 

A  lady  from  the  western  part  of  New-York'came  to  our  in- 
firmary, who  was  afflicted  with  a  general  dibility  of  the  whole 
system,  produced  by  a  confirmed  bilious  habit.  She  had  also 
experienced  three  paralytic  shocks,  which  had  affected  her  left 
side  and  eye :  her  distress  at  times  was  excruciating.  She  had 
for  a  few  months  before  coming  here  employed  a  very  judicious 
Thomsonian  practitioner,  who  was  very  faithful  in  his  attend- 


656  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ance,  having  administered  to  her  eigJUy-six  courses  of  medicine, 
with  but  temporary  relief.  We  commenced  giving-  her  tomato 
syrup,  about  a  wineglassful  three  times  a  day,  with  the  pills  at 
night,  and  occasionally  a  few  emetic  pills.  She  staid  with  us 
two  weeks,  in  that  time  taking  but  one  course  of  medicine  and 
one  emetic.  She  left,  feeling  much  better  than  after  taking  the 
eighty-six  courses  of  medicine.  This  improvement  we  attri- 
bute in  a  great  measure  to  the  active  properties  of  the  tomato. 


CASSIA  MARILANDICA.— Cathartics  continued. 
American  Senna. 

AN   EFFICIENT    AND    SAFE    CATHARTIC. 

Cassia  Marylandica.  Semina — Folia — Caulis.  The 
seeds,  leaves,  and  stalks. — Somewhat  glabrous.  The  leaves, 
in  eight-pairs,  lance-oblong,  mucronate.  Flowers,  in  axillary 
racemes,  and  in  terminal  panicles.     Lugum.es,  linear,  curved. 

It  grows  along  rivers,  and  on  alluvial  soil.  It  is  very  com- 
mon in  the  southern  and  middle  states.  It  flourishes  best  on 
the  banks  of  rivers,  and  in  a  low  moist  soil,  yet  it  is  sometimes 
found  on  elevated  places.  It  is  sometimes  cultivated  at  the 
north  for  medical  purposes. 

In  the  months  of  July  and  August  it  is  in  full  bloom,  and 
has  a  beautiful  appearance.  The  leaves,  for  use,  should  be 
collected  in  August  or  September,  and  dried  ;  they  are  brought 
into  our  markets  usually  compressed  into  cakes.  The  leaflets 
are  about  two  inches  long  and  half  an  inch  wide,  very  thin, 
and  of  a  green  color.  They  have  a  nauseous  taste,  and  feeble 
odor,  somewhat  resembling  senna. 

Medical  uses. — American  senna  is  an  alterative  and  safe  ca- 
thartic, closely  resembling  the  imported  kind  in  its  actions,  and 
may  be  used  instead  of  it  in  all  cases.  •  It  is  not  as  active,  and 
to  produce  an  equal  operation,  must  be  administered  in  doses 
about  one  third  larger.  It  is  habitually  used  by  many  as  one 
of  the  most  salutary  and  eflicient  cathartics  known. 

It  is  most  conveniently  given  in  form  of  infusion,  and  should 
combine  with  it  one  teaspoonful  of  ginger,  to  obviate  its  ten- 
dency to  produce  griping.  The  imported  senna  will  answer, 
when  the  domestic  cannot  be  obtained. 

The  best  way  to  prepare  it  for  use  is,  to  take  of  sage  half  an 
ounce,  and  add  it  to  the  same  quantity  of  senna,  with  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  ginger  ;  steep  in  a  half  pint  of  water  for  fifteen  mi- 
nutes, then  strain,  and  add  sugar  and  milk,  and  let  half  of  it  be 
taken  as  a  dose  on  going  to  bed. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  657 

This  is  the  most  valuable  medicine  to  clear  and  remove  dis- 
tress from  the  head  that  I  have  ever  found.     (See  article,  sage.) 

We  mention  this  article  on  account  of  its  salutary  effects  in 
combination  with  sage. 


OLEUM  RACINI.— Cathartics  continued. 
Castor  Oil. 

A  safe  and  mild  Cathartic,  evacuating  the  bowels  without  pain. 

Racinus  Communis. — Seminum  oleum.  The  oil  of  the 
seeds. 

The  palma  christa,  or  castor  oil  plant,  in  Asia  and  Africa, 
attains  the  size  of  a  tree  forty  or  fifty  feet  high  ;  while  in  Ame- 
rica it  is  an  annual  plant.  The  stem  is  of  vigorous  growth, 
erect,  round,  hollow,  smooth,  glaucous,  somewhat  purplish, 
towards  the  top  branching,  and  from  three  to  ten  feet  high. 
The  leaves  are  alternate,  petiolate,  or  supported  on  foot  stalks, 
inserted  into  the  lower  disk ;  palmate,  with  seven  or  nine  point- 
ed serrate  lobes,  smooth  on  both  sides,  and  of  a  bluish  green 
color.  The  flowers  are  monecious,  stand  on  jointed  peduncles, 
and  form  a  pyrimidal  terminal  raceme  of  which  the  lower  por- 
tion is  occupied  by  the  male  flower,  the  upper  by  the  female; 
both  are  destitute  of  corrolla.  In  the  male  flower  the  calyx  is 
divided  into  five  oval,  concave,  reflected,  purplish  segments, 
and  enclose  numerous  stamens  which  are  united  into  fascicula  at 
the  base.  In  the  female  the  calyx  has  three  or  five  narrow 
lanceolate  segments,  and  the  ovary  which  is  roundish  and  three 
sided,  supports  three  linear,  roundish  stigmas,  forked  at  their 
apex.  The  fruit  is  a  roundish,  glaucous  capsule,  with  three 
pointing  sides,  covered  with  three  tough  spines  and  divided 
into  three  cells,  each  containing  one  seed,  which  is  expelled  by 
the  bursting  of  the  capsule.  This  species  is  cultivated  largely 
in  the  United  States  and  more  especially  in  New  Jersey,  Penn- 
sylvania, Maryland,  Virginia,  and  the  states  bordering  on  the 
Ohio  river. 

The  seeds  are  about  the  size  of  a  small  bean,  oval,  shining, 
compressed,  and  of  a  greyish  ash  color,  marked  with  reddish 
brown  spots.  If  taken  internally  they  will  operate  powerfully 
as  a  cathartic  and  sometimes  as  an  emetic.  Two  or  three  are 
enough  to  operate  gently  and  seven  or  eight  will  act  with  great 
violence. 

Medical  uses. — The  best  quality  of  castor  oil  is  a  mild  ca- 
thartic, speedy  in  its  action,  usually  attended  with  little  or  no 
griping,  and  clearing  the  contents  of  the  bowels,  without  much 
increasing  the  alvine  secretions;  consequently  is  very  useful  in 
constipation,  where  there  are  collections  of  indurated  feces. 


658  THE    THOMSOJSIAN 

From  its  mucilage  it  is  used  with  much  advantage  in  costive 
habits,  and  is  advantageously  used  in  a  tea  of  composition.  It 
may  also  be  given  in  gin  sling  with  great  advantage.  When 
children  are  much  troubled  with  tough  phlegm  and  difficult 
respiration,  it  may  be  used  in  the  hot  sling  with  the  addition  o( 
a  little  cayenne.  Its  operations  carry  a  lively  warmth  through 
the  body,  much  to  the  relief  and  comfort  of  the  patient. 

In  giving  courses  of  medicine,  the  bowels  often  become  very 
much  constricted  or  bound  ;  this  will  often  soothe  and  remove 
the  obstructions,  and  thus  produce  immediate  relief,  and  render 
the  future  courses  much  more  efficient.  By  removing  from 
the  body  these  dry  morbid  secretions  with  the  use  of  castor  oil, 
and  keeping  up  the  animal  warmth  so  that  perspiration  may  be 
felt  in  the  palms  of  the  hands,  a  course  of  medicine  will  operate 
with  much  less  trouble,  thereby  producing  the  greatest  possible 
relief  to  the  patient.  In  a  great  variety  of  cases  of  croup  and 
quinsy  in  children,  by  the  use  of  this  medicine  in  connection 
with  the  composition,  cayenne  and  emetic,  we  have  succeeded 
in  relieving  every  case,  with  little  trouble,  and  to  the  great  sa- 
tisfaction of  all  concerned.  In  the  first  symptoms  of  croup,  use 
the  oil  in  hot  sling  with  the  addition  of  a  little  cayenne,  and  the 
relief  is  almost  certain.  It  carries  off  all  morbid  matter  from 
the  bowels,  and  throws  life,  vigor,  and  a  genial  glow  to  the 
lower  extremities,  thereby  relieving  the  head  and  removing  all 
tendency  to  hydrocephalis  or  dropsy  of  the  brain.  In  all  at- 
tacks of  disease  in  children,  great  care  should  be  exercised  to 
prevent  an  excess  of  circulation  to  the  head.  This  may  al- 
ways be  done  by  keeping  the  feet  warm  and  the  bowels  in  a 
regular  state,  for  which  purpose  observe  our  directions  in  the 
use  of  castor  oil,  to  temper  the  action  of  the  bowels,  but  judg- 
ment should  be  used  in  its  application.  In  all  cases  of  danger 
from  mortification,  no  cathartic  medicine  should  be  used,  nei- 
ther should  bayherry,  hemlock,  or  pond  lily  be  used  when 
there  is  great  constipation  of  the  bowels  or  costiveness.  Judg- 
ment is  necessary,  therefore,  in  the  use  of  all  medicines,  with- 
out which  the  most  innocent  substances  can  be  made  instru- 
ments to  produce  disease 


JUGLANS  CINERIA.— Cathartics  continued. 
Buttermit.     Oil  Nut. 

CATHARTIC,    EMETIC,    STIMULANT,    DIAPHORETIC,    AND 

EMMENAGOGUE. 

Used  in  coUc,  flatulency,  pain  in  the  stomach,  to  promote  perspiration  and  remorc  uterine 

difficulties. 

JuGLANs  CiNERiA. — Rttdicls  Hbcr.     The  inner  bark  of  the 
root. 


MATEniA  MEDICA.  659 

The  butternut  is  an  indigenous  forest  tree,  common  in  the 
middle,  northern,  and  eastern  states.  In  favorable  locations  as 
to  soil,  it  attains  a  great  size  of  trunk,  which  often  divides  into 
several  branches  but  a  few  feet  from  the  ground.  Tlie  top 
when  in  the  forest,  frequently  rises  to  the  height  of  sixty  or  se- 
venty feet.  The  male  and  female  flowers  are  distinct  on  the 
same  tree.  The  male  flowers  are  in  large  aments,  four  or  five 
inches  long,  hanging  down  by  the  sides  of  the  shoots,  of  the 
preceding  year's  growth.  The  female  flowers  are  at  the  end  of 
the  shoots  of  the  same  spring's  growth.  The  germ  is  surround- 
ed by  two  large  rose  colored  stigmas.  The  nuts  are  suspend- 
ed sometimes  by  a  thin  pliable  peduncle,  frequently  several  are 
attached  to  the  sides  of  the  same  one.  The  drupe,  when  ripe, 
is  oblong,  brown,  and  contains  a  hard,  dark  brown  pointed  nut, 
with  a  rough  and  deeply  furrowed  surface.  Tlie  kernel  is 
thick,  oily,  pleasant  to  the  taste,  and  nutricious. 

Medical  uses. — Butternut  is  a  mild  and  stimulating  cathar- 
tic, operating  with  little  or  no  irritation,  pain,  or  uneasiness  of 
the  bowels,  and  without  weakening  the  alimentary  canal  or  im- 
pairing digestion.  The  bark  taken  from  the  root  or  body  of 
the  tree  and  boiled  down  till  as  thick  as  tar,  may  be  made  into 
pills,  \n  which  form  they  may  be  used.  Or  a  syrup  may  be 
made  by  boiling  the  bark  or  the  buds  and  twigs,  and  adding 
one  third  molasses  and  a  little  W.  I.  rum.  This  syrup  is  good 
in  all  complaints  of  the  bowels,  and  for  worms  in  children. 
White  ash  and  balm  of  Gilead  bark  may  be  added  in  equal 
parts  and  made  into  a  syrup  or  pills.  By  bruising  the  green 
bark  and  applying  it  to  the  surface  a  blister  will  be  raised,  and 
those  who  may  wish  this  kind  of  treatment  can  thus  find  a 
cheap  article. 


RHAMNUS  CATHARTICUS.— Cathartics  con- 
tinued. 
Buck-  Thorn. 

BITTER,    DIURETIC,    EMETIC,    AND    AN   ACTIVE  HYDRAG0GUE> 

To  cleanse  the  bowels,  give  tone  to  the  stomach,  and  for  dropsy. 

Rhamnus  Cathauticus. — Bacca.     The  berries. 

The  buck-thorn  is  a  middling  sized  shrub,  from  ten  to  twelve 
feet  in  height.  The  leaves  are  situated  on  footstalks,  ovate,  and 
veined.  The  flowers  are  in  clusters  ;  small,  green,  peduncles 
with  a  calyx  four  cleft,  and  four  small  petals,  placed  in  the 
male  flower  back  of  the  stamens,  which  are  the  same  in  num- 
ber. The  berry  is  four-seeded.  Tliis  shrub  is  a  native  both  of 
Europe  and  America,  growing  wild  in  the  country.    It  flowers 


660  THE  THOMSONIAN 

in  May  and  June,  and  the  fruit  is  ripe  in  September,  and  are 
about  the  size  of  a  pea,  rounded,  somewhat  flattened  on  the 
summit,  smooth,  black  and  shining,  with  four  seeds.  Their 
taste  is  bitter,  acrid  and  nauseous. 

Medical  uses. — The  berries  and  expressed  juice  are  actively 
purgative.  They  are  apt  to  create  nausea  and  vomiting.  In 
their  operation  as  a  cathartic  they  will  create  griping  pain  in 
the  bowels  with  dryness  in  the  mouth  and  throat.  They  are 
by  many  considered  a  good  hydragogue  cathartic  in  dropsy, 
for  which  purpose  alone  they  should  be  used.  Senna,  castor 
oil,  and  butternut  are  far  superior  to  the  buck-thorn  berries,  but 
they  can  be  used  when  the  other  articles  cannot  be  had.  This 
article  should  not  be  used  in  case  of  a  relax,  dysentery,  or 
where  there  are  any  symptoms  of  mortification. 

For  other  Cathartic  substances,  see  cayenne  (capsicum)  590 ; 
populus  (poplar)  515  ;  bitter  root  (apocynum)  618,  619 ;  bar- 
berry (berberris)  617  ;  peach  (amygdalus)  624. 


Diuretics. 

The  articles  under  this  head  should  strongly  commend  themselves  to  all 
such  invalids  as  are  afflicted  with  stranguary,  gravel,  or  difficulties  of  the  kid' 
neys  and  bladder,  also  (oi  dropsy  and  female  obstructions. 


FRAGARIA  VIRGINIANA, 

Wild  )Strawberri/. 

DIURETIC,    TONIC,    DIAPHORETIC,    AND    ASTRINGENT. 
To  be  used  for  stranguary,  gravel,  or  difEculties  of  the  kidneys. 

FractAria  Virginiana.— i^n/c^w*,  Folia,  Caulis,  Radix. 
The  fruit,  leaves,  stalk  and  root.  The  cali/x  inferior,  ten-cleft, 
five  of  the  segments  alternately  smaller.  Petals  five.  Recep- 
tacle of  the  seed  ovate  and  deciduous,  becoming  a  berry.  iSeeds 
even. 

The  wild  straioherry  vines  are  creeping,  herbaceous  plants, 
often  sending  out  filiform  radicant  stems  in  all  directions, 
which  diminish  the  quantity  of  flowers  and  fruit;  leaves  ternate 
very  rarely  digitate-,  by  cultivation  sometimes  simple  stipules 
adante  to  the  petioles  ;  flowers  terminally  corymbose,  some- 
times dioecous,  receptacle  esculent. 

The  wild  strawberry  is  too  well  known  to  require  a  more 
minute  description.  It  is  common  in  almost  every  meadow,  on 
high  grounds^  in    pastures,   &c.,  and    is    known    by  almost 


(''llllllll      il|Kinil(: 

(oiiiinr/i    r/iiri:s 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  661 

every  person  in  the  country,  if  for  nothing  else,  for  its  delicious 
fruit. 

Medical  uses. — The  strawberry  vine  and  fruit  is  diuretic, 
gently  astringent,  diaphoretic,  moderately  tonic  and  stimulant. 
Its  diuretic  properties  are  mo&t  prominent  and  useful.  Take  a 
handful  of  the  leaves  and  the  more  of  the  fruit  the  better  and 
steep  in  a  quari  of  hot  water  ten  or  fifteen  minutes ;  let 
it  set  to  be  used  when  cold.  Let  this  be  used  as  constant  drink 
m  case  of  gravel  or  any  ulcers  or  urinary  difficulty  of  the 
kidneys  or  bladder.  Those  afiiicted  with  gravel  or  stranguary 
should  eat  plentifully  of  the  green  fruit,  or  if  not  in  the  season 
of  it  the  dry  fruit  or  preserves.  The  following  preparation 
should  be  kept  on  hand  for  use  in  violent  attacks  of  stranguary 
or  difiiculty  of  making  water. 

A  Diuretic  Compound. 

Fill  a  jug  as  full  as  it  can  be  crowded  of  the  strawberry 
vines,  leaves,  roots,  and  fruit,  if  any;  then  pour  into  the  jug  as 
much  good  Holland  gin  as  it  will  hold,  having  added  to  each 
gallon  of  gin  two  pounds  of  scalded  honey.  Let  it  stand  two 
weeks,  and  it  is  a  powerful  diuretic.  Dose  from  half  to  a  glass 
three  or  four  times  a  day. 

If  you  have  not  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  strawberry  vines, 
add  with  them  equal  parts  of  clivers,  hemlock  boughs,  or  juni- 
per tops  and  berries.  These  articles  may  be  used  alone  in  si- 
milar form  as  the  strawberry  vines,  always  remembering  to  use 
the  clarified  honey  to  sweeten  the  compound. 


GALIUM  APARINE.— Diuretics  continued. 

Clivers —  Cleavers. 

A    POWERFTTL   DIURETIC,    STIMULANT,^  DIAPHORETIC,    AND 

EMMENAGOGUE. 

To  be  used  for  stranguary,  gravel  or  dropsy,  as  prepared.    Not  to  be  used  in  diabetes. 

Galium  Aparine. — Semina,  Folia,  Caulis,  Radix.  The 
seed,  leaves,  stalk  and  root.  The  stem  limber,  scabrous  back- 
wards. Leaves  in  about  eights,  lance-Unear,  mucronate,  his- 
pid above,  margin  and  keel  prickly.  Branchlets  nearly  sim- 
ple, about  three  flowered.     Fruit,  hooked,  bristled. 

The  clivers  is  an  annual  plant  very  common  in  the  Unite£^ 
States,  growing  in  cultivated  open  fields,  along  fences,  by  the 
border  of  woods,  &.c.  It  has  a  bitter,  herbaceous,  and  some- 
what acrid  taste,  and  is  destitute  of  odor.  The  expressed  juice 
is  aperient,  diuretic,  and  antiscorbutic,  and  has  been  used  in 
dropsy,  scrofula,  and  scorbutic  eruptions. 


662  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Medical  uses. — The  juice  has  proven  useful  in  scorbutic 
eruptions,  for  which  two  ounces  may  be  taken  three  times  a 
day.  The  herb  when  green,  prepared  in  the  form  of  ointment 
or  infusion,  may  be  usefully  applied  to  scorbutic  difficulties  or 
swellings  upon  the  surface.  It  may  be  made  into  a  strong  tea 
and  be  freely  used  daily  as  a  beverage,  by  those  troubled  with 
calculous  ulcers,  gravel,  or  any  urinary  ditficulty.  It  is  also 
useful  in  dropsy,  as  it  operates  as  a  hydragogue,  a  gentle  ape- 
rient  and  diuretic;  it  is  also  very  useful  for  tho^e  who  are 
troubled  with  costiveness  and  torpidity  of  the  bowels. 

Syrup  for  Stranguary  and  Dropsy. 

Take  of  clivers,  parsley  root,  juniper  berries,  and  flax  seed, 
each  four  ounces  ;  bitter  root  one  ounce  ;  pulverize  separately 
very  fine  ;  take  tliree  gallons  of  pure  new  sweet  cider  direct 
from  the  press,  and  heat  it  moderately  in  a  kettle  till  the  scum 
rises,  v/hich  remove  and  then  let  it  boil  ;  put  in  your  pulveriz- 
ed articles  and  let  them  boil  together  for  fifteen  or  twenty  mi- 
nutes, then  set  it  off  and  add  while  yet  hot  two  ounces  of  gin- 
ger and  four  pounds  of  good  boiled  honey;  when  cold  put  it 
into  a  stone  jug,  and  add  one  quart  of  the  best  Holland  gin. 
The  ingredient  should  be  preserved  with  the  liquor. 

This  syrup  may  he  taken  from  a  fourth  to  a  wine  glass  full 
at  discretion.  It  is  good  for  all  cases  of  dropsy,  gravel,  stran- 
guary,  or  obstructed  perspiration,  or  female  obstructions.  This 
article  ought  to  be  kept  constantly  on  hand.  Its  properties  are 
hydragogue,  diuretic,  stimulant,  diaphoretic,  and  with  females 
^mmenaofoffue.     Not  to  be  used  in  diabetes. 


LACTUCA  ELONGATA.— Diuretics  continued. 

Wild  Lettuce. 

diuretic,  antiscorbutic,  moderately  antispasmodic, 
diaphoretic,  and  narcotic. 

For  complaints  of  the  kidneys  and  bladder,  dropsy,  scorbutic  difficulties,  and  constipation  of 

tlie  bowels, 

Lactuca  Elongata.  Herba.  The  herb. — Receptacle,  na- 
ked. Calyx,  imbricated,  cylindrical,  with  a  membranous  mar- 
gin.    Pappus,  simple,  stipitate. 

The  wild  lettuce  is  an  indigenous,  biennial  evergreen,  with 
a^slender  stem,  and  leaves  from  the  size  of  a  cent  to  that  of  a 
dollar,  and  much  resembling  the  common  lettuce.  It  grows  in 
deep  shady  woods,  and  may  generally  be  found  in  the  same 
kind  of  soil  and  locations  as  pipsissewa.     The  leaves,  when 


MATERIA  MED[CA.  GQ3 

wounded,  exude  a  milky  juice,  in  which  the  virtues  of  the  plant 
consist. 

Medical  uses. — The  juice  is  a  sedative,  narcotic,  and  gene- 
rally laxative,  powerfully  diuretic,  and  sli<^htly  diaphoretic.  It 
is  an  excellent  remedy  for  the  universal  dropsy,  operating  as  a 
powerful  hydragogue,  if  compounded  with  bitter  root,  in  pro- 
portion of  four  ounces  of  the  green  lettuce  to  one  of  bitter  root, 
pulverized  and  infused  in  half  a  gallon  of  spring  water;  adding 
Holland  gin  suflicient  to  prevent  its  souring. 

This  tea  may  be  taken  clear,  or  made  palatable  with  milk 
and  sugar.  Take  a  glass  from  three  to  six  times  a  day,  or  till 
it  operates  powerfully  as  a  cathartic. 

The  roots  of  the  lettuce  may  be  dried,  and  pulverized  wilh 
equal  quantities  of  pipsissewa,  and  used,  a  teaspoon ful  of  the 
mixture  in  a  glass  of  hot  water  three  times  a  day.  This  is  good 
for  all  scorbutic  complaints,  or  bad  humors  of  the  blood.  Sim- 
mered in  lard  or  fresh  butter,  it  is  good  for  old  sores  and  ulcers, 
and  by  adding  a  quantity  of  cayenne  while  simmering,  it  makes 
an  excellent  ointment  for  rheumatic  pains,  stiff  neck,  croup,  the 
quinsy,  sprains,  and  swellings  of  any  kind  about  the  joints. 


APIUM  PETROSELINUM.— Diuretics  continued. 

Parsleij. 

niURETIC,   APERIENT,    AROMATIC,    CARMINATIVE.    AND 
SLIGHTLY    STIMULANT. 

For  dropsy,  gravel,  and  obstruction  of  the  liver  aud  kidneys. 

Apium  Petroselinum. — Folia,  Radix.  The  leaves  and 
root. 

This  plant  has  a  round,  branching,  annual  stem,  with  a  bi- 
ennial root,  which  rises  about  two  feet.  The  plant  contains 
an  essential  oil,  to  which  it  owes  its  medical  virtues,  as  well 
as  its  use  in  culinary  purposes.  The  seed,  herb  and  root,  are 
all  possessed  of  strong  diuretic  properties,  and  have  an  aromatic 
taste. 

The  root  is  long  and  slender,  white  externally,  and  marked 
with  close  wrinkles ;  internally  white  and  fleshy,  the  phh  yel- 
lowish. It  has  a  sweetish,  aromatic  taste,  is  slightly  bitter  and 
ionic.     The  green  plant  should  be  used  for  medical  purposes. 

Medical  uses.— The  whole  plant  is  powerfully  diuretic,  and 
gently  aperient ;  useful  in  nephritic  difliculties,  and  dropsical 
habits.  It  may  be  used  in  the  form  of  infusion,  or  compounded 
with  bitter  root  and  golden  seal,  with  the  addition  of  spirits  to 
preserve  it,  when  it  makes  an  excellent  bitter. 


664  THE  THOMSONIAN 

A  COMPOUND  SYRUP. 

Take  of  parsley  roots,  tops  and  seeds,  half  a  pound,  the  same 
quantity  of  dandelion  roots  and  herb  ;  of  juniper  berries  a  fourth 
of  a  pound,  and  of  bitter  root  one  ounce  ;  pulverize  all  the  arti- 
cles well  together,  and  boil  in  two  gallons  of  water  down  to  six 
quarts;  strain  off,  and  press  the  grains,  then  add  one  quart  of 
Holland  gin,  one  gallon  of  fresh  new  cider  as  soon  as  it  has  fer- 
mented, three  pounds  of  boiled  honey,  two  ounces  of  good  gin- 
ger, and  two  ounces  of  prickly  ash  seeds.  Stop  it  tight  in  a 
stone  jug,  and  shake  it  three  or  four  times  a  day  for  a  week, 
and  it  is  fit  for  use. 

For  difficulties  of  the  kidneys  or  bladder,  or  dropsy,  and  cold 
feet  and  hands,  or  irregularities  in  the  menstrual  discharges, 
and  for  constipation  of  the  bowels,  this  will  prove  a  valuable 
article,  whenever  used. 


LEONTODON  TARAXACUM.— Diuretics  con- 
tinued. 
Dandelion. 

DIURETIC,  TONIC,  APERIENT,  AND  HYDRAGOGUE. 

For  dropsy — to  correct  the  liver  and  digestive  organs. 

Leontodon  Taraxacum.  Folia,  Radix.  The  leaves  and 
root.  Calyx,  double.  Receptacle,  naked.  Pappus,  stipitate, 
plumose.     Scape,  one-flowered.     Leaves,  runcinate. 

This  plant  is  naturalized,  and  is  a  genus  of  five  species  indi- 
genous to  Europe. 

The  leontodon  is  a  perennial,  herbaceous  plant,  with  a  fusi- 
form root.  The  leaves  are  long,  pinnatifid,  runcinate,  with 
toothed  divisions,  smooth,  and  of  a  dark  green  color.  The 
flower  stem  rises  six  or  eight  inches  high,  or  more,  from  the 
midst  of  the  leaves.  It  is  naked,  erect,  simple,  smooth  and  hol- 
low, and  terminates  by  a  large  yellow  flower,  which  closes  at 
night  and  expands  in  the  morning.  The  calx  is  double,  smooth, 
with  the  outer  scales  bent  downwards.  The  florets  are  ligu- 
late,  numerous  and  toothed  at  their  extremities.  The  Recepta- 
cle is  punctate  and  convex.  The  seed-down  stipitate  and  at 
maturity  is  so  light  and  feathery  as  to  be  easily  blown  away 
with  the  least  breath  of  air  with  the  seeds  attached,  and  is  thus 
transplanted  from  one  soil  to  another.  The  plant  has  a  milky, 
bitterish  juice,  diffused  throughout  all  its  parts  which  exudes 
when  it  is  wounded.  When  very  young  the  leaves  are  blanch- 
ed or  beautifully  white.  A  full  grown  and  fresh  root  is  fre- 
quently more  than  a  foot  long  and  as  thick  as  the  little  finger. 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  666 

slender,  round  and  tapering,  full  of  a  milky,  bitterish  juice,  of  a 
brown  color  outwardly,  but  white  within,  having  a  cord  run- 
ning through  the  centre.  When  dry,  it  is  much  wrinkled, 
shrunk  and  brittle,  and  on  being  broken  presents  a  shining,  re- 
sinous fracture.  It  has  a  sweetish-bitter,  herbaceous  taste.  It 
yields  its  medical  properties  to  boiling  water. 

Medical  uses. — The  dandelion  is  diuretic,  tonic,  and  aperi- 
ent, and  has  a  direct  action  upon  the  liver  and  kidneys,  excit- 
ing them,  when  languid,  to  action.  It  is  most  applicable  to  he- 
patic diseases,  and  derangement  of  the  digestive  organs  gene- 
rally. In  chronic  inflammation  of  the  liver  and  spleen,  in  cases 
of  deficient  biliary  secretions,  and  in  dropsical  affections  of  the 
abdominal  viscera,  it  is  capable  of  being  very  beneficial,  if  pro- 
perly applied.  From  experience  we  can  speak  decidedly  in  its 
favor.  It  is  usually  given  in  the  form  of  extract,  decoction,  or 
syrup. 

Four  ounces  of  the  green  root,  or  two  of  [the  dry,  may  be 
boiled  in  a  quart  of  water,  down  to  a  pint,  and  a  wineglassful 
be  given  six  or  eight  times  a  day. 

Syrup  op  Dandelions. — Foi'  Dropsy  or  Stranguary. 

Take  of  fresh  gathered  dandelions,  root  and  top,  one  pound, 
(or  if  dry,  two  pounds,)  of  dwarf  elder,  green,  two  pounds,  (or 
if  dry,  a  pound  and  a  half,)  one  pound  each  of  green  strawberry 
and  peach  leaves,  of  green  parsley,  root  and  top,  half  a  pound; 
bruise  all  these  articles  thoroughly,  and  put  them  into  four  gal- 
lons of  water,  and  simmer  them  down  to  three.  Strain  off  and 
sweeten  with  good  sugar,  put  it  into  a  clean  kettle  and  simmer 
till  the  scum  rises  and  then  remove  it.  Then  take  half  a  pound 
of  pumpkin  seeds,  three  fourths  of  a  pound  of  water  melon 
seeds,  four  ounces  of  juniper  berries,  and  two  ounces  of  bitter 
root;  pulverize  fine  and  add  them  to  the  syrup  when  it  com- 
mences to  boil,  which  it  should  continue  to  do  for  about  five 
minutes  after  they  are  added  ;  then  set  off,  skim  it,  and  add  one 
gallon  of  the  best  Holland  gin. 

Dose,  from  a  fourth  to  a  glass,  several  times  a  day. 

If  this  does  not  start  the  water,  it  is  doubtful  whether  any 
thing  will.  It  is  a  powerful  hydragogue,  diuretic,  diaphoretic, 
and  moderately  stimulant.  It  will  operate  more  effectually,  if 
the  patient  be  in  bed,  and  perspiration  excited  by  taking  stimu- 
lants, and  by  having  at  the  feet  a  steaming  stone  or  jug  of  hot 
water.  While  under  this  operation,  great  care  should  be  taken 
to  prevent  catching  cold. 


43 


666  THE  THOMSONIAN 

JUNIPERUS   COMMUNIS.— Diuretics  continued. 

Juniper. 

DIURETIC,  ANTISCORBUTIC,    SLIGHTLY    STIMULANT,  AND 
TONIC, 

For  all  difficulties  of  the  kidneys,  stranguarj',  gravel,  calcalas,  and  dropsy. 

JuNiPERus  Communis.  Bacca — the  berries.  Leaves,  in 
threes,  spreading,  macronate,  longer  than  the  berry. 

The  juniper  is  an  evergreen  shrub,  usually  small,  but  often 
attaining  to  the  height  of  ten  or  twelve  feet,  with  numerous  and 
spreading  branches.  The  leaves  are  small  and  narrow,  much 
longer  than  the  fruit,  sharply  pointed,  of  a  deep  green  color, 
spreading,  and  attached  to  the  branches  in  threes.  It  has  a  glo- 
bular berry,  formed  of  the  fleshy  scales  of  the  aments,  and  has 
three  angular  seeds. 

The  shrub  is  indiginous,  and  grows  in  New  Jersey,  from 
whence  the  berries  are  brought  to  market,  but  are  not  as  strong 
as  those  brought  from  France  and  Italy.  The  berries  impart 
their  virtues  to  water  and  alcohol,  and  are  much  used  by  distil- 
lers in  making  Holland  gin. 

Medical  uses. — The  berries  are  the  only  part  of  the  tree  used 
as  medicine,  and  are  a  stimulant  and  diuretic.  When  exten- 
sively used,  it  creates  a  disagreeable  sense  of  irritation  in  the 
urinary  passages.  The  berries  are  used  to  assist  more  power- 
ful diuretics  in  cases  of  dropsy.  They  have  also  been  used  in 
scorbutic  and  cutaneous  diseases,  and  as  a  tonic  in  correcting 
digestion.  Juniper  may  be  taken  in  infusion.  Bruise  two 
ounces,  and  put  it  into  a  quart  of  boiling  water  and  steep  it  for 
half  an  hour;  when  cool,  make  it  a  constant  drink,  unless  bad 
effects  should  result  from  its  excessive  use;  which  will  be  felt, 
if  any,  in  the  urethra  or  urinary  passages. 

A  STRONG  DIURETIC  SYRUP. 

Take  of  juniper  berries,  poplar  bark,  and  water  melon  or 
pumpkin  seeds,  each  half  a  pound,  hemlock  boughs  one  pound; 
bruise  all  the  articles  together,  and  boil  them  in  two  gallons  of 
pure  new  cider  for  half  an  hour  ;  strain  off,  and  sweeten  with 
boiled  honey  ;  then  add  half  a  pound  of  green  roots  of  horse-ra- 
dish, half  a  pound  of  pulverized  mustard  seed,  and  half  a  gal- 
lon of  best  Holland  gin.  Let  it  stand  in  a  stone  jug  for  two  or 
three  days,  being  often  shaken,  when  it  is  fit  for  use. 

Dose,  a  glass  two  or  three  times  a  day,  or  at  discretion.  It 
will  start  an  active  circulation  and  perspiration  through  the 
whole  body,  and  its  diuretic  properties  will  operate  admirably 
in  all  cases  of  dropsy,  stranguary,  gravel,  and  irregular  men- 
struation. 


MATERIA  MEDIC  A.  667 

Wor  a  Beer — Pat  the  five  ingredients  first  mentioned  in  the 
foregoing  preparation  into  four  gallons  of  water,  steep  for  two 
hours,  strain  off"  and  press  out  the  hquor,  sweeten  with  molas- 
ses, and  when  blood  warm  add  half  a  pint  of  yeast.  Let  it 
work  thoroughly,  and  it  is  a  valuable  drink  to  be  used  in  all 
difficulties  for  which  the  preceding  compound  is  recommended. 
The  horse-radish  and  mustard  may  be  added  at  the  time  when 
the  yeast  is,  tf  convenient. 

Note. — Hemlock  boughs  and  poplar  hark  possess  strong 
diuretic  properties,  and  maybe  used  wheu  the  other  articles 
cannot  be  had.     [See  pages  599  and  615.] 


Mucilaginous  Substances, 

FOR  CATAPLASMS,  OR  POULTICES— VALUABLE  EEMEDIES. 


CHEREVISI^  FERMENTUM. 

Yeast. 

ANTISEPTIC,  DEMULCENT,  MUCILAGINOUS,  AND  STIMULANT. 

To  be  used  as  a  cataplasm  upon  all  inflammatory  sores,  bruises  and  sprains,  and  to  prevent 

mortification. 

Yeast  is  a  frothy  substance,  made  of  hops  by  bakers  to  raise 
their  sponge  previous  to  baking,  and  by  brewers  for  the  fer- 
mentation of  beer.  It  rises  with  a  white  frothy  appearance  on 
the  top  of  beer,  and  is  also  produced  by  vinous  fermentation. 

Medical  uses. — Brewers'  yeast  has  been  highly  applauded 
as  a  remedy  for  mortification,  on  account  of  its  antiseptic  pro- 
perties. It  has  been  successfully  employed  in  contagious  dis- 
eases, in  yellow,  bilious,  spotted  and  typhus  fevers,  and  all  other 
febrile  complaints  attended  with  putrefaction.  In  cases  of  high 
febrile  excitement,  a  yeast  poultice  is  often  beneficial,  if  applied 
to  the  bowels.  It  may  also  be  used  in  cases  of  fractured  limbs, 
sprained  joints,  and  putrid  sores  and  ulcers,  to  great  advantage. 
In  cases  of  broken  limbs  or  sprained  joints,  where  the  inflam- 
mation is  high,  it  exerts  a  very  soothing  effect:  for  which  pur- 
pose spread  a  poultice  and  apply  it  completely  around  the  injur- 
ed part,  and  the  pain  will  very  soon  be  relieved.  As  a  poultice, 
it  may  be  combined  with  sponge  crackers  or  slippery  elm. 

Yeast  may  be  taken  for  the  dysentery,  to  the  amount  of  two 
or  three  ounces  hourly,  mixed  with  a  little  cayenne,  when  the 
bowels  are  in  a  putrid  state,  by  doing  which,  and  placing  & 
poultice  on  the  patient's  bowelij,  many  lives  have  been  saved. 


^6S  THE   THOMSaNlAN 

This  is  a  remedy  that  should  be  remembered  by  every  famify. 
Fresh  yeast  may  be  mixed  with  charcoal  pulverized  and  ap- 
plied to  putrid  sores,  or  may  be  taken  inwardly,  when  there  is 
danger  of  mortification  either  in  body  or  limb. 


IJLMUS  FULYA. 
SUjipery  Elm — Red  Elm. 

EMOLLIENT,  TONIC,  DEMULCENT,  AND  NUTRITIOUS. 
Internally  for  dysentery,  &c.,  externally  for  iuflanunation. 

Ulmus  Fulva.  Liber — the  inner  bark.  The  branches.,  sca- 
brous, whitish.  Leaves  ovate-oblong,  acuminate,  nearly  equal 
at  the  base,  unequally  serrate,  pubescent  both  sides,  very  scab- 
rous. Buds  tomentose,  with  very  dense  yellowish  wool.  Flow- 
ers sessile.  It  may  always  be  known  by  chewing  the  bark, 
which  is  very  mucilaginous. 

The  slippery  elm  is  a  lofty  tree,  from  fifty  to  one  hundred 
feet  high,  and  a  native  of  the  American  forest.  It  is  often  found 
in  the  northern  states,  but  flourishes  best  west  of  the  Alleghany 
mountains.  The  inner  bark  is  whitish,  and  is  the  only  part 
used  as  medicine. 

Medical  uses. — Slippery  elm  bark  is  an  excellent  mucilagi- 
nous substance,  applicable  in  all  cases  where  this  class  of  me- 
dicines may  be  used.  It  is  a  valuable  article  in  dysentery, 
diarrhoea,  and  diseases  of  the  urinary  passages.  It  has  been 
employed  in  leprous  and  herpetic  eruptions,  probably  from  its 
great  demulcent  properties.  It  is  highly  nutritions,  aud  we  are 
told  that  people  have  actually  subsisted  on  it  for  some  time, 
without  any  other  food. 

The  inner  bark  should  be  carefully  and  thoroughly  dried, 
and  pulverized  as  fine  as  wheat  flour.  If  for  internal  use,  mix 
a  teaspoonful  of  it  with  as  much  sugar,  add  a  little  cold  water 
and  stir  them  well  together,  and  then  add  hot  water  enough  to 
reduce  it  to  the  desired  consistency.  This  is  an  excellent  re- 
medy for  putrid  sore  throat,  after  having  used  No.  3,  to  clear 
away  the  canker.  The  elm  sooths  the  sores,  and  produces  a 
comfortable  sensation. 

Make  it  of  a  sufficient  thinness,  and  it  is  one  of  the  best  of 
drinks  to  be  used  constantly  by  the  sick. 

Slippery  elm  is  much  used  in  the  Thomsonian  practice  for 
poultices,  for  which  purpose  it  has  not  its  equal. 

POULTICES. 

Put  one  tablespoonful  of  fine  ginger  into  half  a  pint  of  hot 
water,  then  stir  in  Boston  or  sponge  crackers  that  have  been 


riate 


riimis    I'lihii. 


MATERIA    MEDIC  A.  669 

relied  or  pounded  fine  till  it  is  about  as  thick  as  molasses ;  then 
stir  in  gradually  a  tcaspoonful  of  fine  slippery  elm,  and  if  this 
does  not  make  it  thick  enough,  add  more  of  the  crackers.  If  it 
is  to  be  used  in  a  high  state  of  inflammation,  add  two  table- 
spoonfuls  of  soft  soap  and  one  of  fine  salt. 

This  poultice  should  be  kept  moist  by  occasionally  adding  a 
teaspoontul  of  warm  water  on  the  outside,  for  if  the  inflamma- 
tion is  se  high  as  to  dry  the  poultice  the  pain  will  increase. 

Leaviiig  out  the  soap  and  salt,  and  using  milk  instead  of  wa- 
ter, it  is  one  of  the  best  of  poultices  to  be  applied  to  burns,  felons 
and  old  sores,  as  it  will  ease  the  pain  almost  immediately.  The 
poultice  prepared  as  last  mentioned,  with  the  addition  of  a  little 
of  the  pulverized  root  of  yellow  lUy,  is  an  excellent  application 
to  draw  out  the  pain  from  all  kinds  of  ulcerations,  mercurial 
and  venereal  sores,  and  will  allay  inflammation  and  irritation 
at  once.  It  is  the  best  application  for  a  swelled  or  caked  breast; 
in  which  case  let  the  liquor  be  brewers'  yeast,  first  putting  the 
iily  root  and  slippery  elm  into  a  little  hot  water,  to  extract  the 
strength,  and  then  into  the  yeast,  after  which  add  the  crackers 
and  gipger. 

A  poultice  ought  to  be  changed  as  often  as  once  in  twelve 
hours,  or  oftener  if  there  is  much  inflammation.  Let  them  al- 
ways be  kept  moist  by  the  application  of  hot  water  or  milk  and 
water.     By  this  course  the  inflammation  will  be  soon  reduced. 

This  poultice  should  be  remembered  in  all  cases  of  burns, 
scalds  and  freezing,  as  it  afi'ords  relief  immediately  on  its  appli- 
cation. 


OSMUNDA  REGALIS. 

Bnck-Horn  Brake. 

MUCILAGINOUS  AND  TONIC. 
For  dyseotery,  or  any  soreness  of  the  intestinal  canaL 

OsitfUNDA  Regalis. — Radix — the  root.  Frond  bipinnate, 
terminating  in  several  racemes,  very  branching,  and  without 
hairs.  It  grows  on  damp  ground  and  meadows.  The  main 
root  is  in  shape  of  a  horn,  about  two  inches  long. 

Medical  uses. — The  root  of  the  buck  horn  brake  is  a  valua- 
ble article  in  dysentery,  or  a  sore,  tender  state  of  the  stomach 
and  bowels.  Steeped  in  hot  water  and  sweetened  with  loaf  su- 
gar, with  the  addition  of  Holland  gin  sufiicient  to  preserve  it, 
it  makes  an  excellent  article  to  be  used  in  the  cases  above  men- 
tioned, and  is  also  good  for  female  wealcnesses  and  general  de- 
bility. 


670  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Mucilaginous  Syrup,  for  Weakly  Females. 

Take  the  piths  of  the  roots  of  buck-horn  brake,  bruised;  pnJ 
them  irjto  a  stone  pot  and  add  water,  either  cold  or  hot;  beae 
with  a  spoon  until  it  is  of  the  consistence  of  the  white  of  an 
tgg.  Pour  off.  and  to  one  ga' Ion  add  two  pounds  of  white  su- 
gar, one  quart  best  brandy,  two  ounces  of  pulverized  caraway- 
seed,  and  one  glass  of  the  volatile  tincture. 

Use.^-For  weak,  nervous  patientSj  or  wmnen  in  child  bed. 


SESIMUM  ORIENTALE 

Beune  Plant. 

MUCILAGINOUS,  TONIC,  AND  EMOLIENT. 

For  dysentery,  disordered  bowels  with  children  when  teething: — in  poultices,  for  burns,  frozea 
limbs,  whitlows,  biles,  old  sores  of  any  kind,  and  good  to  allay  inflammation. 

Sesimum  Orientale.  Folia,  Oleum  Seminum — the 
leaves,  and  oil  of  the  seeds. 

The  henne  plant  of  the  United  States  is  a  branching,  annual 
plant,  from  four  to  five  feet  high,  having  opposite  petiolate 
leaves,  varying  in  their  shape  considerably.  Its  flowers  are 
reddish  white,  and  stand  upon  short  peduncles  near  the  inser- 
tion on  the  angle  of  the  leaves  with  the  stalk.  It  grows  princi- 
pally in  the  southern  states.  The  seeds  are  parched  by  the  ne- 
groes, and  used  as  food. 

Medical  uses. — The  seeds  and  leaves  yield  a  fixed  oil,  of  a 
mucilaginous  nature,  which  is  very  useful  in  all  diseases  of  the 
bowels.  It  has  a  sweetish  taste,  is  inodorous,  and  somewhat 
resembles  fresh  sweet  oil,  and  may  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  it 
in  all  cases.  It  is  an  excellent  article  to  soften  the  skin,  to  re- 
move cracks  from  the  hands  or  any  part  of  the  body,  and  for 
chafes,  especially  with  children. 

The  leaves  possess  an  abundance  of  gummy  matter,  which 
they  readily  impart  to  water,  forming  a  very  rich  mucilage, 
which  is  much  used  as  a  drink  at  the  south  in  complaints  where 
demulcents  are  useful,  such  as  cholera  infantum,  catarrh,  diar- 
rhoea, dysentery,  and  all  difficulties  of  the  kidneys  and  urinary 
passages. 

Two  of  the  leaves,  beat  rapidly  in  half  a  pint  of  cold  water, 
make  it  very  mucilaginous,  in  which  way  it  is  usually  prepar- 
ed for  internal  use.  If  the  leaves  are  dry,  they  must  be  put  in- 
to hot  water. 

The  pulverized  leaves,  with  the  addition  of  sponge  crackers 
and  a  little  ginger,  wet  with  warm  water,  make  an  excellent 
poultice  for  burns,  and  all  kmds  of  infl.uuinatory  sores.. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  671 

ALTH^A  ROSEA. 

Hollyhock. 

MUCILAGINOUS. 
In  poultices — or  internally  as  a  demulcent 

ALTHiEA  Rosea.  Flores—Xhe  flowers.  The  stem  erect. 
Leaves  rough,  heart-form,  five  to  seven-angled,  crenate. 

This  plant  is  cultivated  in  gardens  for  its  beauty,  as  well  as 
medical  properties. 

Medical  uses. — A  tea  of  the  hollyhock  flowers  may  be  era- 
ployed  in  inflammation  of  the  mucous  membrane  or  soreness  of 
any  part  of  the  alimentary  canal.  It  also  forms  the  mucilagi- 
nous part  of  the  conserve  of  hollyhock,  or  bread  of  life.  The 
leaves  pulverized  may  be  substituted  for  slippery  elm  in  poul- 
tices. 


TRIFOLIUM  PRATENSE. 

Red  Clover. 

DISCUTIENT,  stimulant,  AND  DEMULCENT. 
For  cancers,  and  other  scorbutic  difficulties. 

Trifolium  Pratense.  Flores,  Folia — the  flowers  and 
leaves.  Stalk  ascending,  smoothish.  Leaflets  ovate,  sub-en- 
tire. Stipules  awned.  Spikes  dense,  ovate.  Lower  tooth  of 
the  calyx  shorter  than  the  tube  of  the  corol,  and  longer  than 
the  other  teeth.  It  is  too  well  known  to  need  a  further  descrip- 
tion. 

CANCER  PLASTER, 

Take  a  brass  kettle  that  will  hold  eighteen  or  twenty  gallons 
and  fill  it  with  the  heads  of  red  clover,  pressed  close  together, 
with  some  heavy  substance  on  the  top  to  keep  them  down,  and 
pour  in  water  till  the  clover  is  covered.  Boil  it  one  hour  over 
a  lively  fire,  then  strain  off,  and  press  out  all  the  liquor  from 
the  clover.  Fill  the  kettle  again  with  fresh  clover,  boil  in  the 
liquor  that  was  obtained  from  the  first  boiling,  for  the  same 
length  of  time,  and  strain  off  as  before,  then  simmer  it  over  a 
slow  fire  till  it  is  about  the  consistence  of  tar,  when  it  is  fit  for 
use.  Great  care  should  be  taken  not  to  burn  it,  as  that  destroys 
in  a  great  measure  its  virtues. 

Medical  use. — This  salve  is  adhesive,  emollient,  and  anti- 
styptic,  ijood  for  old  sores,  cancers,  sore  lips,  (fcc.  When  used, 
it  should  be  spread  upon  a  piece  of  split  bladder,  or  on  the  mem- 
branous covering  of  suet,  lard,  or  tallow. 


672  THE    THOMSON  IAN 

ARUM  TRIPHILLUM. 

Wild  Turnip — Wake  Robin. 

MUCILAGINOUS,    EXPECTORANT,    STIMULANT,    AND    ANTISPAS- 
MODIC. 

For  all  difficulticB  of  the  lungs,  asthma,  raising  blood,  bronchial  afiections  of  the  throat,  or 
of  the  mucous  membraoe. 

Arum  Triphillum.     Radix — the  root. 

The  wild  turnip  has  a  tuberous  perennial  root,  which  sends- 
up  in  the  spring  a  large  colored  spathe,  flattened  and  bent  at  the 
top  like  a  hood,  and  supported  by  an  erect,  purplish  scape. 
The  spathe  has  within  it  a  club-shaped  spadix,  variegated, 
round  at  the  end.  At  the  base  it  is  surrounded  by  the  stamens, 
the  female  organs  being  below  the  male.  The  spathe,  spadix, 
and  germs,  are  converted  into  a  bunch  of  scarlet  berries.  The 
leaves  stand  on  long  sheathing  foot-stalks,  and  are  composed  of 
leaflsts,  paler  beneath  than  on  their  upper  surface,  and  in  time 
becoming  glaucous. 

There  are  several  varieties  of  the  arum,  known  by  the  dif- 
ferent color  of  the  spathe,  which  in  one  is  white,  in  another 
dark  purple,  and  in  a  third'green.  This  plant  is  a  native  of  the 
United  States,  growing  in  swamps,  along  ditches,  and  in  shady 
places.  All  parts  of  the  plant  are  stimulating,  but  the  root  is 
the  only  part  used  as  medicine.  The  root  is  roundish,  and 
flattened  at  the  top  and  bottom,  and  is  covered  with  a  loose, 
wrinkled,  blackish  epidermis.     Internally  it  is  white  and  solid. 

The  fresh  root  has  a  slight  odor  and  is  very  stimulating, 
creating  when  chewed  a  burning  sensation  in  the  throat  and 
mouth,  which  lasts  for  some  time,  and  leaves  a  sense  of  sore- 
ness. The  stimulating  quality  of  the  root  is  extremely  volatile, 
and  is  entirely  destroyed  by  heat.  The  root  becomes  in  a  great 
measure  inert  when  dried.  It  may  be  preserved  for  medical 
use,  fresh  for  a  year,  if  buried  in  dry  earth  or  sand. 

Medical  tises. — The  wild  turnip  in  its  fresh  state  is  a  power- 
ful stimulant  and  local  irritant,  possessing  tlie  power  of  stimu- 
lating the  secretions  of  the  lungs  and  skin.  It  is  an  excellent 
thing  for,  pain  in  the  bowels  and  colic. 

Its  pectoral  properties  have  proved  highly  beneficial  in  coughs, 
consumptions  of  the  lungs  and  asthma,  for  which  we  have  used 
it  for  more  than  forty  years.  The  root  should  be  dried,  pulver- 
ized, and  used  as  directed  under  the  head  of  cough  powders,  or 
it  may  be  given  in  honey,  in  the  syrup  of  preserves,  or  in  any 
other  saccharine  matter,  or  it  may  be  made  into  a  paste  with 
honey  or  syrup,  and  used  in  form  of  candy,  by  letting  the  sub- 
stance dissolve  gradually  on  the  tongue,  so  as  to  diffuse  its 
warmth  through  the  mouth,  and  thus  used  is  good  for  apthous 
sore  mouth  and  throat. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  673 

VALUABLE  COUGH  DROPS. 

Take  six  ounces  of  dried  wild  turnip,  well  pulverized,  stir  it 
into  one  pint  of  cold  water,  infuse  it  till  the  knobs,  or  small  ac- 
cumulations of  the  powders,  are  well  mingled  with  the  water, 
then  pour  on  half  a  gallon  of  boiling  water,  and  a  heaped  tea- 
spoonful  of  fine  cayenne  pepper,  half  a  gallon  of  molasses,  half 
a  gallon  of  Jamaica  rum,  one  pint  of  the  tincture  of  lobelia  and 
the  juice  of  half  a  dozen  best  Sicily  lemons. 

This  is  a  very  valuable  article  for  coughs,  raising  of  blood, 
asthma,  croup,  or  any  difficulty  of  the  lungs. 

A  small  vial  of  these  drops  should  be  carried  by  those  who 
are  affected  with  a  cough,  and  about  half  a  teaspoonful  taken 
at  a  time  whenever  there  is  an  irritation  in  the  throat,  or  an  in- 
clination to  cough.  This  will  keep  the  throat  and  lungs  under 
a  continual  stimulation  or  excitement,  by  which  means  expec- 
toration will  become  easy.  It  will  also  relieve  pain  in  the  side 
and  breast,  or  colic  pains  ;  and  is  a  valuable  remedy  for  many 
other  complaints  of  the  chest  besides  coughs. 


Powerful  Aromatics  and  Tonics. 

The  following  articles  are  some  of  the  most  powerful  aromatic,  astringent, 
and  tonic  substances,  combined  in  the  same  article,  with  which  M'e  are  ac- 
quainted. They  are  valuable  remedies  for  a  great  variety  of  diseases,  such 
as  female  weaknesses,  and  for  weak  and  debilitated  patients,  when  stomachic 
and  tonic  remedies  alone  are  wanted  to  give  action  and  strength  to  the  digest- 
ive system,  and  speedy  and  permanent  health  to  the  body.  In  all  cases  where 
the  disease  has  not  reached  its  crisis,  aromatic,  astringent  or  tonic  remedies, 
should  be  used  but  moderately,  in  form  of  syrups  or  cordials,  to  give  strength 
to  the  system,  as  they  are  liable  to  increase  and  aggravate  the  disease  if  giv- 
en freely.     This  should  be  remembered  by  the  practitioner. 


EUGENIA  CARYOPHYLLATA. 

Clove  Tree. 

This  is  the  name  of  the  tree  that  produces  the  clove.  It 
grows  in  the  East  Indies  and  the  Molucca  islands.  The  clove, 
which  is  the  calyx,  has  a  strong,  agreeable  smell,  and  a  bitter- 
ish, hot  taste.     Cloves  are  the  most  powerful  of  all  arorhatics. 

Medical  uses. — Cloves  may  be  used  with  other  articles,  not 
only  to  cover  a  disagreeable  taste,  but  by  their  heating  nature 
are  in  many  cases  very  serviceable.     They  are  usually  em- 


674  THE    THOMSOJIIAN 

ployed  in  preparincr  the  composition  powders.  They  may  be 
used  to  advantage  in  fever  and  a,s:ue.  They  will  usually  re- 
lieve the  toothache,  by  applying  a  little  of  the  oil  on  cotton,  or 
by  chewing  a  clove,  and  keeping  it  by  the  affected  tooth. 


MYRISTICA  MOSCHATA. 

Nutmeg  Tree. 

This  is  the  tree  which  produces  the  nutmeg  and  the  mace. 
The  tree  grows  in  the  East  Indies. 

The  nutmeg,  myristica,  nucleus,  is  aromatic,  anodyne,  sto- 
machic, and  astringent. 

Medical  uses. — Nutmegs  may  be  used  in  diarrhoea  and  dy- 
sentery, where  their  astringent  property  often  renders  them  ser- 
viceable. They  may  also  be  employed  in  all  cass  where  any  of 
the  aromatics  are  useful,  and  are  most  beneficial  in  syrups  for 
patients  who  are  weakly. 

MACE, 

Is  the  middle  bark  of  the  nutmeg.  When  dried,  it  is  of  a 
lively  yellow  reddish  color ;  its  qualities  are  nearly  the  same  as 
those  of  the  nutmeg,  but  it  is  less  astringent.  It  may  be  boiled 
in  milk,  and  is  very  useful  for  patients  who  are  weak  and  debi- 
litated. 

Medical  uses. — Mace  may  be  used  instead  of  nutmeg,  and 
is  to  most  people  more  agreeable. 


MYRTUS  PIMENTA. 

Allspice  Tree. 

The  fruit  of  the  spice  tree  is  moderately  warm,  of  an  agreea- 
ble flavor,  much  resembling  that  of  a  mixture  of  cloves,  cinna- 
mon and  nutmegs. 

Medical  uses. — Allspice  may  be  compounded  with  bitters 
and  powders,  to  give  them  an  agreeable  taste.  It  is  also  slight- 
ly a  stomachic. 

Boiled  in  milk,  it  is  good  for  children  with  the  bowel  com- 
plaint while  teething,  also  for  relax  and  dysentery,  and  for  weak- 
ly femafes,  if  it  is  made  into  syrup. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  675 

LAURUS  CINNAMOMUM. 

Cinnamon. 

This  is  the  name  of  the  tree  which  affords  the  cinnamon; 
bark.  Cinnamon  bark  is  one  of  the  most  grateful  of  the  aro- 
matics.  It  has  a  moderately  pungent  taste,  accompanied  vvitli 
a  considerable  degree  ot  sweetness. 

Medical  uses. — Cinnamon  is  a  good  cordial,  carminative  and 
restorative,  useful  to  be  mixed  with  the  diet  of  the  sick.  It  is 
also  good  to  compound  in  spice  bitters,  &c.,  and  will  check  vo- 
miting, and  sickness  at  the  stomach.  It  may  be  used  in  sub- 
stance, pulverized,  in  decoction,  or  in  form  of  essence.  Like 
the  preceding  articles,  the  cinnamon  is  good  for  diarrhoea  and 
dysentery,  either  compounded  in  syrup,  boiled  in  milk,  made 
into  a  tea,  or  chewed  in  substance. 


A  VALUABLE  AND  POWERFUL 

AROMATIC  COMPOUND, 

For  Weak,  Debilitated  Patients,  either  Male  or  Female. 

Take  of  cloves,  nutmegs,  unicorn  root,  and  golden  seal,  each 
two  ounces;  of  mace,  allspice,  cinnamon,  gum  arabic,  and  red 
oak  acorns,  divested  of  their  shells,  each  four  ounces,  cayenne 
pepper  half  an  ounce  ;  pulverize  them  all  very  fine  together, 
then  put  them  into  two  quarts  of  boiling  water,  simmer  and  stir 
them  well  together;  then  add  half  a  gallon  of  good  Jamaica 
rum,  one  gallon  of  good  port  wine,  four  pounds  of  loaf  sugar, 
and  two  pounds  of  buck-horn  brake  and  one  pound  of  green 
comfrey,  both  well  cleansed  and  pulverized ;  put  these  articles 
all  into  a  jug  together,  stop  it  tight,  and  let  it  be  shaken  two  or 
three  times  a  day  for  a  week. 

Take  from  a  tablespoonful  to  half  a  fflass.  Females  cannot 
find  an  equal  to  this  powerful  aromatic  tonic,  for  weakness  of 
the  back,  side  or  stomach. 

Be  careful  of  the  strength  of  this  remedy.  It  maybe  too 
powerful  for  many  who  are  very  weakly  ;  in  such  cases  com- 
mence with  half  a  tablespoonful,  and  increase  the  quantity  as 
the  patient  can  bear  it.  For  fiuor  albus,  or  any  other  fernak; 
weakness,  this  remedy  is  unrivalled. 

Note. — If  this  compound  is  found  to  be  too  strong,  add  one 
quart  more  of  Jamaica  rum,  and  half  a  gallon  of  port  wine. 
The  strength  may  thus  be  increased  or  diminished,  to  suit  the 
circumstances  of  the  case. 


676  THE   THOMSONIAN 

Balsams. 


PINUS  BALSAMEA. 

Fir  Tree — Balsam  Tree. 

BALSAMIC  AND  HEALING. 
For  cougfes,  affections  of  the  lungs,  and  both  internal  and  external  soreness. 

PiNus  Balsamea. — Leaves  flat,  emarginate  or  entire,  gla- 
cous  beneath,  sub-erect  above,  recurve-spreading.  Cones  cy- 
lindric,  erect.  Brads  abbreviated,  obovate,  long-mucronate, 
sub-serrulate. 

The  fir  tree  grows  wild  in  the  American  forests,  preferring 
damp  cold  swamps. 

Medical  uses, — The  balsam  fir  is  a  transparent  liquid,  which 
collects  in  blisters  on  the  trunk  and  branches.  It  has  a  plea- 
sant odor,  and  is  slightly  bitter.  It  may  be  profitably  employed 
as  a  plaster  on  wounds  or  cuts,  as  it  is  very  healing.  A  decoc- 
tion of  the  bark  or  the  balsam  may  be  used  in  all  cases  of  in- 
ternal soreness,  such  as  dysentery  and  affections  of  the  lungs. 
It  is  peculiarly  serviceable  in  cholera  infantum,  and  is  one  of 
the  principal  ingredients  of  the  yellow  salve. 


COPAIFERiE  OFFICINALIS. 

Balsam  Copaiva. 

This  is  the  name  of  a  tree  sfrowinof  in  Brazil,  from  which  the 
balsam  of  copaiva  is  obtained.  When  fresh,  this  balsam  is  a 
colorless  fluid,  but  in  time  it  acquires  a  yellowish  tinge.  It  is 
of  an  agreeable  smell,  and  bitterish  biting  taste,  which  is  very 
permanent  on  the  tongue. 

Medical  uses. — This  msy  be  used  for  the  same  purposes  as 
the  fir  balsam,  but  is  not  as  good.  It  has  been  much  employed 
in  the  venereal,  and  in  diseases  of  the  urinary  organs. 

For  a  dose,  take  from  six  drops  to  a  teaspoonful. 


Antacids. 

FOR  SOUR  STOMACH  OR  HEARTBURN. 
The  articles  under  this  head  should  commend  themselves  to  all  persons 
'that  are  troubled  with  a  deranged  state  of  the  stomach  and  digsstive  organs  5 
and  especially  to  high  livers  and  epicures  who  gratify  their  taste  rather  than 
the  convenience  of  the  stomach  and  organs  of  digestion.  The  consequences 
are  a  sour  stomach,  flatulency,  dyspeptic  affections,  gout,  corpulency,  arterial 
«nd  nervous  irritability;  all  of  which  are  produced  for  the  want  of  order  and 
regularity  with  regard  to  diet,  rest  and  exercise. 


MATERIA    MICmCA,  677 

The  following  articles  are  used  in  the  Thompsonian  practice  to  correct  aci- 
dities of  the  stomach,  and  facilitate  the  operation  of  emetics,  while  giving 
eourses  of  medicine. 


SOD^  CARBONAS. 

Carbonate  of  Soda. 

This  article  is  obtained  several  ways,  but  principally  from 
plants  growing  on  the  seacoast.  It  is  procured  by  lixiviation 
from  the  ashes  of  the  burnt  plants.  None  but  those  that  grow 
on  the  sea  shore  can  produce  it.  The  alkali  thus  produced  is 
more  or  less  pure,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  plant  from 
which  it  is  obtained.  But  the  greater  part  of  it  is  a  sub  carbo- 
nate of  soda. 

To  procure  pure  soda,  make  a  solution  of  the  pure  carbonate 
and  boil  it  with  half  its  weight  of  pure  lime,  and  after  it  has 
subsided  pour  off  the  pure  lye  and  evaporate  it  in  a  clear  iron 
or  silver  vessel  till  the  liquid  flows  quietly  like  oil ;  then  pour 
it  upon  a  polished  iron  plate,  and  it  concretes  into  a  hard  white 
cake,  which  must  be  immediately  broken  in  pieces  and  corked 
tight  in  bottles. 

Carbonate  of  soda  is  a  white  salt,  of  a  disagreeable  alkaline 
taste.  It  dissolves  very  readily  in  water,  but  is  nearly  insolu- 
ble in  alcohol.  It  is  incompatible  with  acids,  and  earthy  and 
metalic  salts. 

Medical  uses. — Carbonate  of  soda  is  an  antacid  and  resol- 
vent ;  useful  in  diseases  which  cause  acidity  of  the  stomach, 
such  as  dyspepsia,  gout,  or  any  other  affeetion  produced  by  ir- 
regulariry  or  intemperance  in  eating. 

It  may  be  given  in  form  of  powder  or  solution.  Dose  ;  the 
powder  may  be  given  in  doses  of  from  a  fourth  to  half  a  tea- 
apoonful  and  the  solution  in  about  three  times  the  quantity. 


MAGNESIiE. 

Magnesia, 

Pure  magnesia  is  a  very  light,  white,  inodorous  powder,  of 
a  feeble  alkaline  taste. 

Carbonate  of  Magnesia  sometimes  occurs  as  a  native  mine- 
ral,  but  is  more  usually  manufactured.  It  can  be  produced 
from  the  bittern  of  salt  works. 

To  make  pure  magnesia :  expose  carbonate  of  magnesia  in 
an  earthen  vessel  to  a  red  heat,  for  two  hours,  or  till  the  addi- 
tion of  vinegar  will  produce  no  effervescence. 


^8  THE  THOMSONIAN 

Medical  uses. — Magnesia  may  be  employed  as  an  antacid 
and  laxative,  in  dyspepsy,  sick  headache,  gout,  and  all  com- 
plaints accompanied  with  sourness  of  the  stomach  or  costive- 
ness  of  the  bowels. 

It  is  given  in  form  of  powders.  Dose,  from  ten  grains  to  a 
teaspoonful.  This  remedy  is  very  useful  for  females  in  utero- 
gestation,  to  correct  the  acidity  of  ihe  stomach  attendant  upon 
such  a  state,  and  has  a  tendency  to  keep  the  bowels  regular 
from  its  gently  laxative  properties. 


POTASSiE  CARBONAS  IMPURUS. 

Pearlash,  or  tmjjure  Carhonate  of  Potassa. 

Pearlash  is  of  a  white  color  usually  tinged  with  blue.  It 
has  a  burning  alkaUne  taste  but  no  smell.  It  is  soluble  in 
water. 

Pearl  and  potashes  are  procured  from  wood  by  lixiviation 
and  subsequent  evaporation. 

Medical  uses, — A  solution  of  pearlash  may  be  used  instead 
of  any  of  the  other  alkalies,  but  is  more  corrosive.  It  may  be 
prepared  for  use  similar  to  lime,  and  taken  in  about  half  the 
quantity,  or  let  the  strength  be  reduced  to  the  ability  of  the  sto- 
mach to  bear  it. 


POTASStE  bicarbonas. 

tSalccratus,  or  Bicarbonate  of  Potassa. 

This  article  is  the  same  as  the  preceding  one,  only  reduced 
to  a  greater  degree  of  purity. 

It  is  usually  in  the  form  of  white  chrystals,  having  the  form 
of  flat  irregular  prisms.  It  is  perfectly  inodorous.  It  is  solu- 
ble in  water  but  not  in  alcohol. 

Medical  uses. — It  may  be  given  in  solution,  formed  by  add- 
ing to  it  four  limes  its  bulk  of  cold  water,  for  acidities  of  the 
stomach  and  in  all  cases  where  any  of  the  alkalies  are  recom- 
mended.    Dose,  from  a  tea  to  a  table  spoonful. 


CALX. 

Lime. 
Lime  is  a  colorless  substance,  inodorous,  and  of  a  disagreea- 
ble alkaline  taste.     It  may  be  prepared  in  the  following  man- 
ner :     Take  of  limestone,   (Carara  marble,)    or   oyster  shells 
well  cleansed  in  hot  water,  any  desired  quantity  j  pulverize 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 


679 


and  heat  in  a  crucible  over  a  hot  fire  for  one  hour  or  till  the 
carbonic  acid  is  entirely  driven  off,  which  may  be  known  by 
the  addition  of  a  little  acetic  acid;  if  no  bubbles  of  gas  pass  off 
it  is  sufliciently  heated. 

To  form  lime  into  a  solution  for  use  :  add  one  ounce  of  lime 
to  one  quart  of  pure  soft  water,  stir  them  well  together,  cover 
the  vessel  and  let  it  stand  for  three  hours.  Keep  the  solution 
together  with  the  undissolved  lime,  in  a  bottle  closely  corked 
from  the  air. 

Lime  water  is  antacid,  tonic,  and  astringent. 

Medical  uses. — It  is  useful  in  acidity  of  the  stomach,  diar- 
rhosa,  and  in  some  cases  of  the  gravel.  By  giving  it  in  milk  its 
disagreeable  taste  is  entirely  covered.  It  is  an  excellent  wash 
in  case  of  scald  head  or  any  other  putrid  or  ulcerous  sores. 

Dose,  from  one  to  three  tablespoonsful. 

Important  to  be  remembered. 

N.  B. — If  at  any  time  any  of  these  alkalies  should  be  taken 
by  accident  or  design,  in  such  strength  as  to  create  great  dis- 
tress in  the  stomach,  they  can  be  neutralized  in  a  moment  by 
taking  a  small  draught  of  vinegar  or  cider.  Those  in  the  habit 
of  using  them  should  always  keep  in  mind  this  corrective  prin- 
ciple. 


CAUSTICS. 

AND    THEIR    INFLUENCE    UPON    FEVER    SORES    AND    INFLAM- 
MATORY   SWELLINGS    GENERALLY. 

In  the  treatment  of  boils,  felons,  whitlows,  or  any  inflamma- 
tory gathering,  where,  on  account  of  its  being  deeply  seated 
or  the  firm  texture  of  the  skin,  the  matter  is  with  difficulty 
brought  to  the  surface,  caustics  are  often  servicable ;  but  in- 
stead of  using  corrosive  or  poisonous  substances,  a  little  punk 
or  slow  match,  the  size  of  a  pea,  if  burnt  upon  the  centre  of 
the  diseased  place,  answers  every  purpose  ;  after  which  apply 
a  softening  poultice  to  ease  the  pain  and  promote  suppuration. 
The  method  of  performing  this  operation  is  as  follows  :  Take 
several  pieces  of  cloth,  wet  with  cold  water,  bits  of  an  old  hat, 
or  something  of  the  like,  let  a  hole  be  cut  through  them  the 
size  of  the  puncture  you  wish  to  make,  and  apply  them  to  the 
affected  part ;  then  fill  the  hole  with  a  piece  of  punk  and  set  fire 
to  it.  If  once  burning  does  not  make  the  puncture  deep  enough, 
repeat  it  till  it  does.  Then  apply  a  poultice  and  the  relief  is 
certain  and  almost  immediate.  This  is  the  safest  and  mildest 
caustic  that  is  in  use.  Warts  may  also  be  cured  in  the  same 
way. 


680  THE  THOMSONIAN 

The  indications  that  show  the  necessity  of  this  treatment  am 
an  excessive  distress,  extension  and  high  inflammation  and  a 
want  of  perspiration  in  the  diseased  parts.  In  all  gatherings 
of  an  inflammatory  nature  where  the  matter  escapes  with  diffi- 
cuhy  to  the  surface,  we  can  testify  to  the  beneficial  results  aris- 
ing from  the  use  of  this  caustic,  followed  by  the  application  of 
a  softening  poultice,  from  our  own  experience,  having  em- 
ployed the  same  treatment  on  ourself  in  case  of  a  fever  sore. 

N.  B.  Before  applying  this  caustic  let  a  cord  or  handkerchief 
be  tied  very  tightly  around  the  limb  on  both  sides  of  the  sore, 
to  prevent  as  much  as  possible  the  pain  from  being  communi- 
cated beyond  where  the  application  is  made.  By  so  doing  it 
causes  but  little  pain. 


Simj^le  Substances. 


Having  thus  far  given  the  most  important  articles  in  our  practice,  we  sub- 
join some  simple  remedies,  which  may  be  profitably  used  in  many  cases, 
and  which  may  be  substituted  for  the  more  important  ones  when  they  cannot 
be  obtained. 


Simple  Emetics. 

VERBENA  HASTATA. 

Blue  and  White  Vervain. 

SLIGHT  EMETIC,  BITTER  TONIC,  AND  COUNTER  POISON. 
For  an  emetic,  in  decoction.    For  poison,  boiled  in  milli. 

Verbena  Hastata.     Herba — the  herb. 

Erect,  tall.  Z/cat'e^  lanceolate,  acuminate,  gash-serrate;  low- 
er ones  sometimes  gash-hastate.  Spikes  linear,  panicled,  sub- 
imbricated. 

This  herb  grows  very  common  in  neglected  fields,  pastures, 
&c. 

Medical  uses. — Vervain  is'good  as  an  emetic,  and  in  that  re- 
spect ranks  next  to  lobelia.  The  two  may  be  mixed,  or  the 
vervain  may  be  used  alone  when  lobelia  cannot  be  had.  Ma- 
ny bad  cases  of  consumption  have  been  cured  by  this  article. 
It  is  also  a  good  counter  poison. 


MATERIA  MEDICA^  -681 

EUPATORIUM  PERFOLIATUM— Emetics 

continued. 
Thoroughioort — Boneset. 

MILDLY  EMETIC,  SUDORIFIC,  TONIC,  AND  EXPECTORANT. 

For  cougbs,  and  other  complaints  of  the  lungs. 

EupATORiuM  PerfoL'Iatum.  Herha — the  herb.  Leaves 
<Jonnate-perfoliate,  oblong-serrate,  rugose,  downy  beneath.  Sleni 
villose.     About  three  feet  hi^h. 

Tlioroughwort  is  a  very  common  herb,  growing  usually  near 
some  stagnant  pool  or  running  stream  of  water. 

Medical  uses. — Taken  in  form  of  hot  decoction,  it  operates 
as  an  emetic,  sudorific,  and  expectorant.  In  order  to  induce 
vomiting,  it  must  be  given  in  copious  draughts.  It  is  good  in 
complaints  of  the  lungs,  to  be  used  as  a  common  drink.  A  de- 
coction of  boneset,  taken  cold  in  repeated  small  doses,  will  ope- 
rate as  a  cathartic. 


SANGUINARIA  CANADENSIS.— Emetics  conti- 
nued. 

Blood- Root. 

EMETIC,  EXPECTORANT,  AND  EMMENAGOGUE. 

For  conghs,  influenza,  consumptions,  and  female  obstructions. 

Sanguinaria  Canadensis.  Radix — the  root.  Leaves 
sub-reniform,  sinuate-lobed.  /Scape  one-flowered.  A  variety, 
stenopetala,  has  linear  petals. 

Blood-root  grows  common  in  this  part  of  the  country.  Its 
most  favorable  location  is  on  the  borders  of  pine  or  hemlock 
woods. 

Medical  uses. — Blood-root  will  answer  as  an  emetic,  when 
lobelia  cannot  be  had.  It  may  be  used  in  tincture,  or  in  sub- 
stance, pulverized.  The  tincture,  in  teaspoonful  doses  once  in 
three  or  four  hours,  is  a  good  expectorant.  If  it  is  desired  to 
operate  as  an  emetic,  give  it  in  repeated  small  doses  at  intervals 
of  about  twenty  minutes,  till  it  creates  nausea.  In  large  doses 
it  exerts  a  powerful  influence  over  the  uterus,  and  has  been  em- 
ployed in  obstructed  and  deficient  menstruation.  In  uteroges- 
tatioa,  if  employed  at  all,  let  it  be  with  great  caution. 

Note. — Blood-root  taken  in  form  of  snufi"  will  often  cure  po- 
lypus in  the  nose;  and  when  they  have  been  extracted,  if  used 
freely,  it  will  generally  prevent  them  from  growing  again. 

43 


682  THE    THOMSONPAW 

Simjjle  Stimulants. 

The  following  articles  may  be  used  when  No.  2  cannot  be  had,  in  giving; 
ftourses  of  medicine. 


MENTHA  VIRIDIS. 

Spearmint. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,  ANTISPASMODIC,    TONIC,  AND  AS- 
TRINGENT. 

In  decoction,  to  promote  perspiration  aad  ease  pain. 

Mentha  Yiridi&.  Herha — the  herb.  Spikes  oblong,  in- 
terrupted. Leaves  lanceolate,  naked,  serrate,  sessile.  Stamens 
longer  than  the  corol. 

Spearmint  grows  in  low,  damp  places,  and  by  the  side  of 
brooks. 

Medical  uses. — The  whole  herb  may  be  cut  when  in  full 
bloom,  and  dried,  to  be  used  freely  as  a  pleasant  drink  in  any 
case  of  sickness.  Take  it  in  a  warm  decoction.  It  expels  wind 
from  the  stomach,  and  promotes  perspiration.  It  is  an  excel- 
lent article  to  settle  the  stomach,  and  stop  vomiting.  If  after 
taking  an  emetic  violent  vomiting  continues  or  if  it  is  caused 
by  any  other  means,  a  strong  tea  of  this  herb  will  usually  stop  it. 


MENTHA  PIPERITA.— Stimulants  continued. 

Peppermint. 
stimulant,  aromatic,  warm,  and  slightly  bitter. 

To  be  employed  much  the  game  as  spearmint. 

Mentha  Piperita.  Herha — the  herb.  Spikes  obtuse,  in- 
terrupted below.  Leaves  sub-ovate,  somewhat  glabrous,  peti- 
oled.     Stem  glabrous  at  the  base. 

Peppermint  is  usually  found  along  running  streams  of  water. 
It  is  very  odorous,  and  of  a  warming  nature. 

Medical  itses. — It  may  be  used  to  promote  perspiration,  but 
its  force  is  soon  exhausted.  In  light  colds,  and  slight  attacks 
of  disease,  a  free  use  of  this  herb,  at  the  same  time  being  warm 
in  bed,  will  often  effect  a  cure.  An  oil  is  distilled  from  it,  that 
may  be  taken  in  warm  water,  or  en  loaf  sugar,  for  pain  in  the 
stomach  and  bowels. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  683 

HEDEOMA  PULEGIOIDES.— stimulants  conti- 
nued. 
Perinyroyal. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,  WITH  A  PUNGENT,  MINT-LIKE  TASTE. 

For  flatulence,  colic,  sick  stomach,  and  to  regulate  the  action  of  other  medicines. 

Hedeoma  Pulegioides,  Ilerba — the  herb.  Pubescent. 
Leaves  oblong,  serrate.  Peduncles  axillary,  whorled.  Lower 
lip  of  the  calyx  with  two  ciliate  bristles.  Five  or  six  inches 
hiirh.  It  grows  by  the  way  side  and  in  neglected  fields  in  ail 
parts  of  the  country.  It  is  warming  and  cleansing  to  the  sto- 
mach, and  promotes  perspiration. 

Medical  uses. — Pennyroyal  is  a  valuable  article,  to  be  used 
in  decoction  freely  in  all  cases  of  sickness,  and  especially  while 
the  patient  is  under  the  operation  of  a  course  of  medicine.  It 
is  good  to  warm  the  stomach,  to  expel  wind,  promote  perspira- 
tion, and  if  taken  in  the  beginning  of  a  cold  it  will  break  it  up. 
Ai'i  oil  is  distilled  from  the  herb,  which  may  be  used  for  the 
same  purposes  as  the  decoction. 


COCHLERIA    ARMORACIA.— Stimulants  conti- 
nued. 
Horse  Radish. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,   STOMACHIC,  AND  PUNGENT. 

To  promote  appetite,  and  assist  digestion. 

CocHLEKiA  Armoracia.  Radix — the  rout.  Radicalleaves 
laiiCv:;olate,  crenate  ;  cauline  ones  gashed. 

ft  grows  wild  in  some  places,  but  is  principally  cultivated  in 
g.irdeiis.     It  flourishes  best  in  a  damp  soil. 

Medical  uses. — The  roots  may  be  given  to  promote  diges- 
tion, pickled  in  vinegar,  or  grated  in  water  to  remove  pain  in 
tiie  stomach  and  bowels.  The  leaves  are  sometimes  applied 
externaliy  to  ease  pain,  but  they  are  apt  to  raise  a  blister. 


SATUREJA  HORTENSIS.-Stimulants  continued. 
Summer  Savory. 

STIMULANT,  GENTLY  CARMINATIVE,  AND  AROMATIC. 

To  promote  perspiration,  and  assist  the  operation  of  emetics. 

Satureja  Hortensis.  Herba — the  herb.  Peduncles 
axillary,  somewhat  in  a  cyme.  Leaves  lanceolate,  entire. 
Stetn  brachitate. 


684  THE  THOMSONIAN 

This  herb  is  often  cultivated  in  gardens,  for  cuUnary  pur- 
poses. It  is  of  a  warming  nature,  and  possesses  an  agreeable 
flavor. 

Medical  uses. — In  decoction,  it  is  good  for  colds  and  to  clear 
the  stomach,  and  may  be  used  at  discretion  in  any  case  of  sick- 
ness as  a  substitute  for  composition. 

An  oil  is  distilled  from  this  herb,  which  is  an  excellent  arti- 
cle to  ease  the  tooth-ache.  Apply  it  to  the  affected  tooth  on  cot- 
ton. 


SINAPSIS  NIGRA.— Stimulants  continued. 
Mustard. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,  AND  PUNGENT. 

To  create  an  appetite,  and  assist  digestion. 

SiNAPSis  Nigra.  Folia,  Semina — the  leaves  and  seed. 
Silique  glabrous,  three-sided,  somewhat  smooth,  close  pressed 
to  the  stem.  Leaves  at  the  top,  lance-linear,  entire,  smooth. 
Naturalized. 

Mustard  is  cultivated  in  gardens,  and  principally  used  for 
culinary  purposes.  The  young  leaves  may  be  taken  in  vine- 
gar, and  the  seeds  may  be  pulverized  and  taken  instead  of  pep- 
per. 

Medical  uses. — Given  in  decoction,  it  eases  pain  in  the  sto- 
mach and  bowels,  expels  wind,  &.c.  it  may  be  used  both  in- 
ternally and  externally  for  rheumatism,  but  its  force  is  very 
soon  spent. 


NEPETA  CAT  ARIA.— Stimulants  continued. 
Catmint —  Catnip. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,  AND  SOMEWHAT  PUNGENT. 
For  colds,  and  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels  of  children. 

Nepeta  Cataria.  Herha — the  herb.  Flowers  in  whorled 
spikes.     Leaves  petioled,  cordate,  tooth-serrate. 

Catmint  is  a  very  common  herb,  growing  by  the  road  side 
and  along  hedges.     It  has  a  strong  and  not  a  disagreeable  odor. 

Medical  uses. — Catmint  may  be  given  in  decoction  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  any  of  the  other  mints.  It  may  be  used  in  poultices, 
and  is  good  for  worms  in  children,  and  is  also  serviceable  in 
hysterics  and  female  obstructions. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  685 

SOLIDAGO  ODORA.— Stimulants  continued. 
Golden  Rod — Sweet  scented  Golden  Rod. 

STIMULANT,  AROMATIC,  CARMINATIVE,  DIAPHORETIC,  AND 

DIURETIC. 

To  be  used  in  infusion,  when  under  the  operation  of  an  emetic,  &c. 

^  SoLiDAGo  Odora.  Hei'ba,  Plores — the  herb  and  flowers. 
Stem  erect,  pubescent.  Leaves  lance-linear,  entire,  glabrous, 
rough-edged.  Racemes  panicled.  The  upper  part  of  the  stem 
is  furrowed;  racemes  two  or  three  inches  long,  spreading  hori- 
zontally, each  generally  accompanied  by  a  leaf.  Bracts  ob- 
long, smooth.     Stalk  angular  and  rough. 

This  is  the  true  golden  rod  tea-plant.  The  flowers  dried 
make  a  pleasant  tea,  which  promotes  perspiration.  Its  taste  is 
sweet  and  spicy. 

Medical  uses. — It  may  be  used  in  decoction,  for  head-ache, 
or  substituted  for  any  kind  of  mint  tea.  The  distilled  oil  is 
good  to  scent  our  vegetable  snufF,  and  reduced  to  essence,  is 
serviceable  for  the  head-ache,  to  be  taken,  or  bathed  on  the  tem- 
ples. 


ANTHEMIS  CORTULA.— Stimulants  continued. 
Mayiveed —  Wild  Camomile. 

ANTISPASMODIC  AND    EMMENAGOGUE. 

Its  medical  virtues  the  same  as  camomile. 

Anthemis  Cortula.  Herha — the  herb.  Receptacle  co- 
nic; chaff  bristly.  >S'eerf  naked,  i^eares  two-pinnate.  Leaf- 
lets subulate,  three-parted. 

This  herb  grows  in  old  pasture  lands,  by  the  road  side,  and 
among  rubbish. 

Medical  uses. — Mayweed  is  good  to  be  taken  at  night  on  go- 
ing to  bed,  to  raise  a  perspiration,  and  assist  in  throwing  off  a 
cold.  To  aid  it,  let  a  hot  brick  or  stone  be  put  to  the  feet.  Let 
it  be  taken  in  form  of  tea,  as  hot  as  it  can  be  borne. 


ANTHEMIS  NOBILIS.— Stimulants  continued. 
Camo7nile. 

MILD  TONIC,  strengthening  TO  THE  STOMACH,  AND  DIU- 
RETIC. 

Useful  to  restore  lone  to  the  digestive  organs,  and  increase  the  appetite. 

Anthemis  Nobilis.     Herba,  Flores — the  herb  and  flow- 
ers.    Leaves  two-pinnate.     Leaflets  three-parted,  linear-subu- 


686  THE  THOMSO>'IAN 

late,  sub-villose.    Stem  branching  at  the  base.     Gives  out  a  fra- 
grant odor. 

Camomile  is  cnltivated  in  gardens,  as  well  for  its  agreeable 
odor  as  for  its  medical  properties. 

Medical  uses. — Camomile  is  good  as  an  external  application 
for  sprains,  bruises,  callouses,  corns,  shrunk  sinews,  &,c.  It  is 
a  pleasant  bitter,  good  for  the  stomach,  and  for  bowel  com- 
plaints. For  external  application,  let  the  herb  be  bruised  and 
applied  warm,  or  used  in  tea  as  a  wash ;  for  internal  use,  take 
it  in  form  of  decoction — both  herb  and  flowers. 


CHRYSANTHEMUM  PARTHENIUM.— Stimu- 
lants continued, 

Feverfew. 

A  MILD  TONIC,  AND  CORRECTOR  OF  DIGESTION. 

To  be  used  the  same  as  camomile. 

Chrysanthemum  Parthenium.  Herba — the  herb.  The 
leaves  petioled,  compound,  flat.  Leaflets  ovate,  gashed.  Pe- 
duncles branching,  corymbed.     Stem  erect. 

Medical  uses. — Feverfew  is  stimulating,  and  removes  ob- 
structions from  the  urinary  passages.  It  is  also  serviceable  in 
hysterics  and  all  female  obstructions.  It  should  be  taken  in  de- 
coction, either  alone  or  with  camomile.  The  whole  herb  is 
used. 


Simple  Tonics, 


BETULA  LENTA. 

Black  Birch — Spicy  Birch — Cherry  Birch. 
tonic,  mildly  astringent,  and  stomachic. 

To  strengthen  digestion,  and  for  all  complaints  of  the  bowels. 

Betula  Lenta.  Cortex — the  bark.  Leaves  heart-ovate, 
sharp-serrate,  acuminate;  nerves  and  petioles,  pilose  beneath. 
Scales  of  the  strobile  glabrous,  with  obtuse  equal  lobes,  having 
elevated  veins. 

This  is  a  large  tree,  common  in  the  American  forests.  Its 
bark  is  very  sweet  scented. 

Medical  uses. — Black  birch  bark,  in  decoction,  is  useful  in 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  687 

all  complaints  of  the  bowels,  and  in  all  cases  of  obstruction. 
Made  into  a  syrup,  with  peach  meats  or  cherry  stone  meats,  it 
is  an  excellent  article  to  promote  digestion,  and  to  use  as  a  ge- 
neral lestarative. 


PANAX  QUINQUEFOLI A.— Tonics  continued. 

Ginseng, 

TONIC,    NERVINE,    MILDLY    STIMULANT,    AND   A   SIALOGOGUE, 

Used  in  nervous  dibility,  either  alone  or  combined  with  other  articles  of  like  quality. 

Panax  QuiNauEFOLiA.  Radix — the  root.  Root  fticiform. 
Leaves  ternate,  quinate.  Leaflets  oval,  acuminate,  petioled. 
serrate. 

Ginseng  ^rows  common  in  most  parts  of  the  United  States, 
especially  in  Vermont.  It  is  found  in  deep  shady  forests.  This 
is  the  Chinese  panacea. 

Medical  uses. — This  may  be  employed  as  a  tonic  nervine, 
in  all  cases  of  debility.  The  best  form  of  administering  it,  is 
the  pulverized  root  in  decoction.  It  maybe  given  in  combina- 
tion with  other  nervines,  where  such  articles  are  needed.  It 
also  has  some  action  on  the  salivary  glands. 

Dose,  from  a  half  to  a  teaspoonful,  at  discretion. 


ANGELICA  ARCHANGELICA,— Tonics  conti- 
nued. 

Archangel. 

TONIC,  BITTER,  AND  BALSAMIC. 
To  correct  and  strengthen  digestion,  and  remove  cainker. 

Angelica  Arch  angelica.  Herba — ^the  herb.  This  is  a 
biennial  plant,  with  the  odd  terminal  leaf  lobed. 

Archangel  grows  among  grass  in  wet  lands,  and  by  the  side 
of  fields.  It  is  from  four  to  twelve  inches  high,  with  small 
leaves,  and  has  a  bur  which  contains  a  seed  at  each  joint  of  the 
stalk.  There  are  two  kinds,  that  look  much  alike  but  are  dif- 
ferent in  taste.  The  one  is  of  a  bitter,  the  other  of  a  rough  and 
balsamic  taste. 

Medical  uses. — Both  kinds  of  the  archangel  may  be  used  to- 
gether, in  decoction  or  syrup.  The  bitter  corrects  the  bile,  and 
the  rough  removes  the  canker.  Either  or  both  kinds  may  be 
profitably  used,  where  articles  of  like  properties  are  needed. 


6*^8'  THE  THOMSONIAN 

INULA   HELENIUM.— Tonics  continued. 
Elecampane. 

TONIC,  AND  EXPECTORANT. 

To  be  used  in  weakness  at  the  lungs,,  coughs,  and  consumption. 

Inula  Helenium.  Radix — the  root.  Leaves  claspin^^ 
ovate,  rugose,  toumentose  beneath.     Scales  of  the  calyx  ovate. 

This  is  a  common  plant,  growing  wild  along  the  road  side, 
and  in  neglected  places. 

Medical  uses. — A  syrup  made  of  the  root  is  an  excellent  ar- 
ticle for  a  cough,  or  any  debility  of  the  lungs.  Its  tonic  and 
expectorant  qualities  united  render  it  a  useful  article  in  such 
cases. 


VERBASCUM  THAPSUS.— Tonics  continued. 

Mullein. 

TONIC  INTERNALLY,  AND  EXTERNALLY  REDUCES  SWELLING, 

AND  RESTORES  CONTRACTED  SINEWS. 

Used  mostly  as  an  external'  application. 

Verkascum  Thapsus.  Semina.  Folia — the  seeds  and 
leaves.  Leaves  decurrent,  downy  both  sides.  Stem  generally 
simple,  though  sometimes  branched  above.  Flowers  in  a  cy- 
lindric  spike. 

Mullein  is  a  very  common  plant,  growing  on  poor,  sandy 
soil,  along  the  road  side,  &-c.     It  is  from  two  to  four  feet  high. 

Medical  uses. — The  leaves  bruised  and  applied  warm  are  a 
good  application  to  swellings  and  contracted  sinews.  An  oil  is 
also  obtained  from  the  seeds,  which  is  good  for  the  same  pur- 
poses. It  may  be  usefully  employed  compounded',  as  a  genial 
strengthening  plaster. 


OROBANCHE  UNIFLORA.^Tonics  continued. 
Birth-Root — Squaiv-Root. 

TONIC,  astringent,  AND  STYPTIC. 

For  slight  cases  of  debility,  bleeding  at  the  lungs,  and  female  complaints. 

Orobanche  Unifloka.  Radix — the  root.  /S'ca/Je  naked, 
one-flowered.  Calyx  without  bracts.  Corol  recurved.  It  is 
about  three  inches  high,  of  a  yellowish  white  color. 

Medical  uses. — Its  astringent  and  styptic  qualities  render  it 
useful  in  cases  of  bleeding  at  the  lungs  or  nose ;   for  the  first  of 


• 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  689 

which  let  it  be  taken  in  decoction,  and  for  the  last,  in  the  form 
of  snufF,  made  from  the  pulverized  root.  It  may  be  used  in 
cases  of  debility,  and  is  said  to  have  been  employed  by  the  In- 
dians in  child  birth. 


CENTAUREA  BENEDICTA— Tonics  continued. 
Blessed  Thistle. 

TONIC  AND  BITTER. 
To  strengthen  and  assist  the  digestive  organs. 

Centaurea  Benedicta.  Folia — the  leaves.  Leaves  se- 
rai-decurrent,  tooth-spinose.  Calyx  with  branched  spines.  It 
is  cultivated  in  gardens,  for  medical  purposes. 

Medical  uses. — It  is  a  good  corrector  of  the  bile  and  restorer 
of  digestion.  It  may  be  given  in  decoction,  or  the  leaves  may 
be  dried  and  pulverized  and  given  in  substance. 

The  hitter  thistle  much  resembles  the  above,  and  may  be 
employed  for  the  same  purposes,  and  in  the  same  way. 


ASARUM  CANADENSE.— Tonics  continued, 

Canada  Snake-Root. 

TONIC,  STIMULANT,  AND  AROMATIC. 
To  give  tone  and  strength  to  the  stomach. 

AsARUM  Canadense.  Radix — the  root.  Leaves  kidney- 
form,  in  pairs.  CaZy:?;  woolly,  deeply  three-parted ;  divisions 
sub-lanceolate,  reflected. 

It  grows  throughout  the  United  States,  in  woods  and  shady 
places. 

Medical  uses. — Canada  snake-root  may  be  used  as  a  tonic 
in  all  cases  of  debility.  It  may  be  given  either  in  decoction  or 
powders. 


POLYGONUM  PUNCTATUM— Tonics  continued. 
Smartweed —  Water  Pepper. 

TONIC  AND  STYPTIC. 
To  strengthen  the  digestive  organs,  and  stop  uterine  hemorrhage. 

Polygonum  Punctatum.      Herba — the   herb.      Stamens 
eight — styles  three.     Leaves  lanceolate,  glabrous.     Stipules 


690  THE    THOMSONIAN 

lax,   glabrous,   ciliate  at  the  apex,  spotted.     Spikes  filiform, 
weak,  somewhat  nodding.     Brads  remotely  alternate. 

This  is  a  very  common  plant,  growing  on  poor,  uncultivated 
lands.     It  is  from  one  to  two  feet  high. 

Medical  uses. — Smartweed  given  in  decoction  is  a  gentle  to- 
nic, but  is  chiefly  useful  to  prevent  uterine  hemorrhage — for 
which  purpose  let  it  be  ffiven  in  a  strong  tea,  made  palatable 
with  milk  and  sugar.  The  same  may  also  be  given  in  injec- 
tions, per  the  vagina. 


Simple  Bitters, 


ARTEMISIS  ABSYNTHIUM. 

Wormwood. 

BITTER,  TONIC. 
To  create  an  appetite,  and  assist  dige§tioi>, 

Artemisis  Absynthium.  Herha — the  herb.  The  stem 
branching,  panicled.  Leaves  hoary:  radical  ones  triply  pinna- 
tifid,  divisions,  lanceolate,  toothed,  obtuse;  cauline  ones  two- 
pinnatifid  or  pinnatifid,  divisions  lanceolate,  acutish  ;  floral 
ones  undivided,  lanceolate. 

Wormwood  is  abundant  in  the  eastern  states,  growing  by  the 
road  side  and  in  neglected  places. 

Medical  uses. — Wormwood  is  a  good  bitter,  to  create  an  ap- 
petite and  assist  the  digestive  organs.  It  may  be  given  in  de- 
coction or  in  the  form  of  tincture.  It  is  also  an  excellent  article 
to  apply  to  a  bruise  or  sprain. 


TANACETUM  VULGARE.— Bitters  continued. 
Tansey, 

A  STIMULATING  BITTER. 
For  stranguarj',  female  complaints,  &c. 

Tanacetum  Vulgare.  Herba—Xhe  herb.  Leaves  doubly 
pinnate,  gash-serrate.  It  has  a  very  strong  odor,  and  a  bitter 
and  somewhat  aromatic  taste.  It  grows  wild  in  highways,  and 
is  cultivated  in  gardens. 

Medical  uses. — It  is  used  in  decoction,  which  is  good  for 
weakness  in  the  back,  strangnary,  hysterics,  and  female  weak- 
nesses. The  green  leaves  bruised  are  a  good  application  to 
sprains  and  swellings. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  691 


INTRODUCTION 

TO  THE  THEORY  OF  DISEASE,  AND  THE  PREPARATION  AND 
USE  OF  MEDICINE. 

Practitioners  of  medicine  should  have  some  fixed  principles  by  which  their 
conduct  should  be  guided  in  time  of  sickness,  and  we  have  thought  it  advisa- 
ble to  lay  down  a  few  simple  rules,  to  be  observed  by  those  who  have  no  bet- 
ter guide. 

To  our  seniors  in  experience  and  practice,  of  course,  we  bow  with  due  de- 
ference, and  yield  the  palm  to  their  superior  medical  knowledge  in  all  matters 
pertaining  to  practice,  so  far  as  the  health  and  welfare  of  community  are  con- 
cerned. In  that  respect,  being  sensible  of  our  inability  to  compete  with  them 
successfully,  we  must  therefore  stand  subject  to  their  correction.  But  as  to 
our  experience,  such  as  it  is  "  give  we  unto  you."  J.  T. 


RULES  TO  BE  OBSERVED  BY  THE  PRACTITIONER, 

IN   THE   TREATMENT   OF  DISEASE. 

1.  At  the  commencement  of  an  attack  of  disease,  the  first  thing  to  be 
brought  to  mind  should  be,  what  has  caused  the  attaclc,  and  how  should 
it  be  treated,  and  how  removed. 

The  "  ways  and  means"  cause  much  trouble  and  speculation  with 
the  patient,  who  should  ever  be  alive  to  the  best  means  for  his  future  wel- 
fare. 

2.  One  of  the  fundamental  principles  in  the  Thorn sonian  practice  is, 
that  all  diseases  originate  from  the  same  cause,  directly  or  indirectly — 
that  is,  from  the  deranged  state  of  the  fluids  of  the  body,  by  the  absence 
of  heat,  or  loss  of  vitality  ;  which  produces  an  over  pressure  or  excess  of 
circulation  to  the  head,  and  a  proportionate  deficiency  in  the  feet. 

This  creates  derangement  in  the  organs  of  sense,  and  a  proportionate 
want  of  action  with  the  digestive  apparatus,  by  which  the  bowels  become 
constipated,  and  the  evacuations  of  the  body  are  much  obstructed,  for 
want  of  the  requisite  action  and  equilibrium  in  the  fluids,  and  the  conse- 
quent order  attendant  upon  such  a  state  of  things. 

3.  This  derangement  having  been  produced  by  the  loss  of  vitality,  or 
taking  cold,  and  the  consequent  absence  of  heat  at  the  lower  extremeties, 
and  an  excess  at  the  head  in  the  same  degree,  to  bring  about  an  equili- 
brium properly  through  the  system,  or  to  establish  order  where  there  is 
naught  but  disorder,  is  what  we  wish.  To  restore  warmth  to  the  feet 
and  reduce  the  pressure  upon  the  brain,  by  correcting  digestion,  promot- 
ing perspiration,  and  removing  obstructions  from  the  stomach,  bowels, 
and  their  dependencies,  is  the  proper  mode  to  effect  this  object. 

4.  The  best  method  yet  discovered  is  a  thorough  Thomsonian  course 
of  medicine,  when  properly  administered,  which  creates  a  healthy  circu- 
lating medium  in  the  lower  extremities,  equal  with  that  of  the  head,  and 
thus  produces  order  and  regularity  both  in  body  and  mind. 

5.  The  first  knowledge  with  a  practitioner  should  be  to  understand  the 
principles  or  cause  of  the  derangement,  disease,  or  loss  of  heat ;  and  se- 


692  THE    THOMSONIAN 

condly  the  proper  course  of  treatment  to  bring  the  deranged  parts  to  or- 
der by  restoring  the  vitality,  or  heat,  by  the  loss  of  which  the  whole  man 
has  become  diseased. 

6.  There  is  no  immediate  danger  in  any  case  where  the  veins  on  the 
patient's  hands  and  feet  are  full.  This  is  the  surest  test  by  which  a  prac- 
titioner may  determine  whether  or  not  his  patient  is  doing  well.  Or  a  long 
and  regular  respiration  will  indicate  the  same  state  of  the  body,  as  well 
as  a  regular  pulse. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  EQUALIZING  THE  CIRCULATION 

Through  the  system,  which  must  be  done  in  all  cases  of  disease,  to  restore 
the  patient  to  health. 

In  the  first  place,  put  the  feet  of  the  patient  into  water  as  hot  as  can  be 
borne,  increase  the  heat  by  adding  water  of  a  higher  temperature  until  a  co- 
pious perspiration  is  started  on  the  forehead  and  in  the  palms  of  the  hands; 
the  patient  may  be  in  the  bath  if  thought  necessary;  this  will  afford  some 
relief.  Then  take  brown  emetic,  cayenne,  composition,  and  nerve  pow- 
der, of  each  one  teaspoonful,  put  them  into  one  pint  of  boiling  water  and 
let  them  steep  for  ten  minutes;  sweeten  with  molasses,  and  let  half  the 
quantity  be  given  as  an  injection,  as  hot  as  it  can  be  borne,  and  let  the 
patient  retain  it  as  long  as  possible.  This  will  turn  the  excitement  from 
the  head  downwards  and  sickness  at  the  stomach  will  be  produced.  Then 
give  a  table  spoonful  of  the  tincture  of  lobelia  and  a  small  quantity  of 
cayenne,  in  some  simple  tea,  and  if  this  does  not  produce  sufficient  vo- 
miting repeat  the  dose. 

The  vomiting  will  be  easy,  the  veins  in  the  hands  and  feet  will  be  fill- 
ed, the  head,  in  consequence  of  the  equalization  of  the  circulation,  will 
be  relieved,  and  the  whole  system  will  become  quiet  and  easy. 

Let  these  directions  be  strictly  followed,  and  by  so  doing  I  hesitate  not 
to  say,  that  three  fourths  of  the  attacks  of  disease — such  as  colic,  dysen- 
tery, quinsy,  croup,  pleurisy,  head-ache,  liver  complaint,  &c. — might 
immediately  find  relief.  Let  every  practitioner  lay  up  these  remarks 
as  valuable  truths,  to  be  observed  in  all  cases  where  there  is  disease  or 
derangement  in  the  system,  in  attempting  to  afford  relief  or  perform  a 
cure. 

Order  must  be  brought  about  in  the  body  by  an  equalization  of  the  flu- 
ids, and  it  matters  but  little  how  that  is  effected — whether  by  a  course  of 
medicine,  steaming,  bathing  the  feet  in  hot  water,  an  emetic,  or  stimu- 
lating with  hot  liquor,  hot  medicines,  or  any  other  course  which  will  ef- 
fect this  relief  on  the  system.  To  accomplish  this  successfully  in  the 
greatest  number  of  cases  is  what  constitutes  the  eminent  physician. 


STEAM  OR  VAPOR  i;ATH. 

Steaming  is  an  important  part  of  the  Thomsonian  practice.  Many 
cases  which  prove  too  stubborn  for  the  medicine  unassisted  by  the  vapor 
bath,  are  through  its  agency  relieved.  In  all  diseases  where  the  vital  heat 
has  become  so  far  exhausted  as  not  to  be  rekindled  by  the  administration 
of  medicine,  steaming  is  indispensably  necessary.  In  all  cases  of  sus- 
pended animation,  a  gentle  bath  and  bathing  the  feet  in  hot  water,  should 
be  immediately  resorted  to.  In  cases  of  falls  and  bniises,  or  accidents  of 
the  like,  this  treatment  rarely  if  ever  fails  of  alTording  relief.  It  is  also 
useful  in  preventing  sickness  as  well  as  in  curing  it. 

When  a  person  has  taken  a  severe  cold,  and  disease  is  rapidly  getting 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  693 

• 

hold  of  the  system,  a  thorough  steaming,  as  heremafter  directed,  will  fre- 
quently tlirow  off  the  disorder.  Always  remember  while  givmg  the  va- 
por bath,  to  keep  up  the  internal  heat,  to  prevent  faintness  ;  ibr  which  pur- 
pose give  a  tea  of  cayenne,  or  of  any  other  warming  or  stimulating  article, 
with  occasionally  wetting  the  patient's  face  and  breast  in  tepid  water. 

The  most  convenient  and  effectual  way  to  administer  tlie  bath  is  to  liave 
a  box  constructed  for  that  purpose.  The  following  plan  is  perhaps  as 
good  as  any  Let  the  box  be  in  the  form  of  a  closet,  two  feet  four  inches 
deep,  two  feet  six  inches  wide,  and  six  feet  high.  It  should  be  elevated 
i'rom  the  floor  about  six  inches,  by  the  means  of  blocks  or  legs.  Let  the 
bottom  be  made  tight  and  in  form  of  a  sink,  with  a  vessel  underneath  to 
receive  the  condensed  water.  The  door  may  be  five  feet  and  a  half  high, 
and  one  foot  ten  inches  wide,  with  a  hole  for  ventilation  (before  which  let 
a  curtain  be  drawn)  six  by  nine  inches,  about  four  feet  from  the  bottom. 
Let  the  top  be  boarded  tight,  and  at  the  bottom,  immediately  above  the 
sink,  let  a  portable  floor,  or  a  board  eighteen  or  twenty  inches  wide,  be 
supported  by  means  of  elects  fastened  to  the  sides  of  the  box,  under  wliich 
let  the  steam  pass  in  by  means  of  a  lead  pipe. 

This  portable  floor  will  break  the  volume  of  the  steam,  cause  it  to  as- 
cend on  all  sides  of  the  patient,  and  prevent  its  burning  his  feet.  But 
where  a  box  cannot  be  had,  the  following  method  may  be  adopted. . 

Have  three  or  four  stones  or  bricks  heated,  and  let  the  patient  sit  in  a 
chair,  undressed,  with  a  blanket  around  him,  to  confine  the  vapor  and 
shield  him  from  the  air;  then  place  a  two  gallon  kettle  with  a  concave 
bottom,  with  about  one  quart  of  water,  between  the  feet  inside  of  the 
blanket — put  in  one  of  the  heated  stones,  and  as  soon  as  that  begins  to 
cool  put  in  another,  which  contmue  to  do  till  the  patient  is  sufficiently 
warm,  which  will  usually  be  in  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes. 

The  patient  may  stand  during  the  operation  in  this  way,  instead  of  sit- 
ting, if  able.  But  when  too  weak  either  to  stand  or  sit  over  the  steam,  it 
may  be  administered  in  bed,  by  heating  several  bricks,  wrapping  them  in 
wet  cloths  and  placing  them  around  hmi.  Or  a  better  plan  is,  to  have  a 
frame  made,  to  place  over  the  patient's  body  to  elevate  the  covermg,  and 
then  pass  (he  steam  into  the  bed  by  means  of  a  pipe. 

The  method  of  producing  the  steam,  in  order  to  administer  the  bath  in 
the  first  and  last  mentioned  ways,  may  be  as  follows :  Have  a  tin  or  cop- 
per boiler  constructed  in  forai  of  a  cylinder,  in  such  a  manner  as  for  the 
heat  to  pass  up  through  the  centre,  and  to  be  perfectly  air  tight  except 
one  tube  by  which  to  put  in  water^(to  which  a  tight  stopper  may  be  adapt- 
ed,) and  another  for  the  steam  to  pass  out  at,  on  which  a  pipe  must  be 
closely  fitted,  and  from  thence  passed  to  the  place  where  you  desire  to 
have  it.  The  boiler  may  be  filled  with  water,  and  placed  on  a  stove  or 
furnace.  As  soon  as  the  water  commences  boUing,  the  steam  will  pass 
out  of  the  tube  and  through  the  pipe  to  any  place  desired.  The  tempera- 
ture of  the  steam  will  be  regulated  by  that  of  the  fire  over  which  the 
boiler  is  placed,  and  must  be  adapted  to  the  patient's  strength  and  ability 
to  bear  it. 


TREATMENT  OF  DISEASE. 

In  all  cases  where  the  patient  has  little  or  no  appetite,  and  is  declining 
in  health  and  strength  for  the  want  of  support,  simple  treatment,  such  as 
tonics,  stomachics  and  soothing  medicines,  ought  to  be  used;  but  if  they 
fail  to  answer  the  purpose,  it  is  evident  that  the  system  is  laboring  under 
serious  difficulties,  and  that  the  patient  will  not  find  relief  until  the  ob- 
structions are  removed,  perspiration  made  free,  and  digestion  regulated. 


694  THE  THOMSON  I  AN 

In  such  cases,  the  articles  that  afforded  nourishment  in  health  produce 
excitement  and  irritation  in  the  stomach,  di.tre^s  in  the  head,  and  a  ge- 
neral derangement  througliout  the  internal  vi  cera,  the  arterial  and  ner- 
vous system,  and  a  feveri  h  excitement  on  the  surlace.  To  remove  this, 
we  point  out  the  following  phiin  and  s-imple  mode  by  which  all  curable 
forms  of  di  ea-e  may  be  treated  iucce,  sfully,  and  the  patient  restored  to 
health.  There  h  no  danger  attending  the  operation  of  the  medicines,  as 
in  the  regular  practice;  therefore  if  one  course  of  medicine  U  given  more 
than  was  actually  neces  aiy,  no  injury  will  result  to  the  patient,  and  the 
time  and  medicine  is  all  that  is  lo  t.  How  important,  then,  that  thorough 
treatment  should  be  observed,  when  s-.o  momentous  an  object  as  the  life 
and  health  of  the  patient  is  concerned. 

TO    BE   REMEMBEUED. 

In  all  cases  where  there  i^  inflanmiation  or  a  concentration  of  febrile 
excitement  to  any  particular  point,  ibr  in  tance  a  srprained  joint,  distress 
in  the  head,  inflammation  of  the  -lomach  and  bowels,  &c.,  the  cour  e  of 
medicine  will  remove  the  ob.  truction  by  equalizing  the  fluids  throughout 
the  system,  by  which  means  llie  patient  will  find  immediate  relief,  thus 
confirming  the  principle  of  the  unit  of  disease.  If  such  concentra- 
tio«  of  excitement  be  cau-ed  by  morbid  matter  being  received  into  the 
system  by  means  of  a  foetid  atmos})here,  bad  food  or  putrid  water,  one 
course  may  not  be  sufficient  to  exclude  all  the  morbid  poi  on  from  the 
secretory  vessels,  the  evidence  of  whicli  will  be  tlie  want  of  an  appetite, 
sickness  at  the  stomach,  weakness  in  the  limb-,  and  a  febiiie  excitement. 
If  so,  courses  should  be  repeated  at  suitable  intervals  of  time,  until  these 
symptoms  pass  away,  and  by  the  ciiculation  through  llie  body  being 
equalized  a  healthy  action  is  restored;  the  appetite  beccmes  gocd,  the 
digestive  organs  perform  their  natural  function-,  and  the  ;  leep  i-;  quiet. 
Courses  of  medicine  may  be  successfully  employed  to  remove  disticss 
and  ease  pain,  and  to  make  the  patient  comfortable  in  all  cases  of  uhit- 
loics,  felons,  biles,  brmses,  or  any  other  excessive  inflammafoiy  con- 
centration of  the  fluids  of  the  body  where  relief  cannot  be  found  from 
any  other  course  of  treatment. 

First,  soak  the  affected  part  in  lye  made  of  liard  wood  ashes,  then  ap- 
ply a  poultice  made  of  flax  seed,  or  yellow  lily,  or  made  of  bread  and 
milk,  which  should  be  kept  moirt  while  under  the  operation  of  the  course. 
This  will  relieve  the  distress  and  bring  the  sore  to  a  cri  is,  and  i ,  jierhaps 
the  surest  way  to  relieve  the  patient.  It  is  expected  that  all  simjde  means 
will  be  tried  before  the  course  is  resorted  to.  It  should  be  remembered 
that  all  diseases  are  brought  on  by  derangement  of  the  fluid-  of  the  body, 
and  that  all  diseases  can  be  cured  by  restoring  order  ard  reijTlarity  to 
said  fluids.  Courses  of  medicine  will  effect  this,  if  pioperly  administer- 
ed and  attended  to  in  season.  Where  tbere  is  distress  there  is  disorder 
and  a  derangement  of  the  fluid;,  and  consequently  a  restoration  of  order 
and  an  equalization  in  the  system,  will  afford  relief. 

In  reading  this  work,  do  not  forget  this  important  principle;  that  all 
diseases  herein  mentioned  are  brought  about  by  a  decreas*^  or  deiange- 
ment  of  the  vital  fluids  by  taking  cold  or  the  los:-  of  animal  waimth. 
And  that  the  name  of  the  complaint  depends  upon  what  part  of  the  body 
has  become  so  weak  as  to  be  affected.  If  the  lungs,  it  i^  consnmptirn, 
or  the  pleura,  pleurisy;  if  the  limbs,  it  is  rheumatism,  or  the  bowels,  clio- 
lic  or  cholera  morbus. 

But  after  all,  these  different  diseases  are  caused  by  the  partial  loss  of 
vitality  or  warmth,  and  all  may  be  removed  by  a  re-toration  of  the  viial 
energy,  and  removing  the  obstructions  which  the  disea  e  has  generated. 

It  is  thought  by  some  that  unless  the  physician  know  the  name  wliich 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  695 

has  been  given  to  the  disease  by  others^  he  cannot  treat  it  successfully. 
If  he  cannot  readily  call  to  mind  the  variety  of  names  so  profusely  lavish- 
ed by  the  reo;ular  physicians  upon  the  different  forms  of  disease  it  will 
not  prevent  his  medicine  from  having-  a  beneficial  effect,  nor  prove  that 
the  physician  has  not  valuable  practical  knoioledge,  which  is  after  all  the 
true  philosopher's  stone  of  which  the  patient  is  in  pursuit. 

Is  it  right  to  infer  that  because  a  man  cannot  command  all  the  names 
that  have  been  written  by  other  {)eople,  as  liable  to  errand  as  frail  as  him- 
self, that  he  cannot  by  practice,  know  the  use  of  medicine  or  the  nature 
of  disease :  or  because  he  cannot  give  the  respective  bones,  muscles,  li- 
gaments and  vessels  of  the  body  their  appropriate  names,  he  cannot  cure 
the  colic  or  dysentery. 

When  our  pilgrim  fathers  landed  at  Plymouth  the  aborigines  brought 
them  long  golden  ears,  of  a  vegetable  substance,  which  they  had  never 
seen  or  heard  of  before,  neither  had  the  great  or  learned  men  of  their 
father  land,  and  we  are  told  that  they  were  kept  from  starvation,  were 
nourished  and  rendered  comfortable  through  a  long  dreary  winter  by  the 
support  this  vegetable  substance  afforded,  furnished  by  illiterate  savages. 
Now  shall  we  deny  that  these  people  were  nourished  and  supported  by 
this  valuable  plant,  because  they  did  not  know  that  it  was  Indian  com, 
and  because  ii  was  furnished  by  those  illiterate  savages,  who  knew  not 
the  meaning  of  a  diploma  and  had  no  knowledge  of  the  Greek  or  Latin  lan- 
guages? Impossible!!  The  virtues  and  nutriment  were  in  the  corn,  and 
the  true  science  in  the  matter  was  in  having  the  knowledge  of  it.  In  this 
respect  the  savages  were  scientific  and  the  pilgrims  were  the  quacks, 
notwithstanding  their  boasted  knowledge  in  other  respects.  Give  us  more 
practical  knowledge  and  less  theorizing;  more  of  true  science  and  less 
speculation.  To  remove  the  infirmities  of  our  fellow  men,  give  us  more 
innocent  vegetable  substances  and  less  poisons.  Then  shall  we  be  led  to 
rejoice  over  the  bounties  of  Providence,  in  filling  the  soil  with  innocent 
remedies  that  the  poor  suffering-  sons  of  humanity  may  there  find  an  anti- 
dote for  every  bodily  ill. 


COURSES  OF  MEDICINE.    No.  1. 

First — To  prepare  for  the  course,  let  the  patient  take  a  dose  of  com^ 
position,  or  No.  &,  in  herb  tea,  hot,  then  go  into  the  bath  and  put  his 
feet  into  hot  water;  raise  the  heat  of  the  bath  to  about  100  or  110  deg. 
Fahrenheit.  After  a  lively  perspiration  starts,  and  the  veins  have  become 
full  upon  the  feet,  hands  and  temples,  and  the  pulse  much  quickened, 
say  to  95  or  100  per  minute,  take  a  quart  cup  of  cold  water  and  add  hot 
water  to  it  until  its  temperature  is  about  that  of  the  surrounding  atmo- 
sphere; then  open  the  door  of  tlie  bath,  and  have  the  feet  taken  out  of  the 
pail,  and  pour  your  water  over  the  head  and  shoulders,  completely 
drenching  the  whole  surface  of  the  body  and  limbs.  Then  let  the  patient 
step  out  of  the  bath  and  be  rubbed  with  a  coarse  napkin  or  towel.  The 
indications  of  a  healthy  action  now  are,  full  veins  on  the  extremities  and 
a  lively  red  ap'pearance  in  the  flesh  throughout  the  system.  Noav  let  the 
patient  go  into  a  warm  bed,  with  a  hot  stone,  brick  or  jug  of  hot  water 
at  his  feet. 

Secondly. — Take  two  ounces  of  No.  3,  or  canker  tea,  and  put  it  in  a 
quart  bowl,  and  pour  upon  it  one  pint  of  boiling  water;  let  it  steep  about 
ten  minutes,  strain  off  three  gills,  and  when  hot  add  two  teaspoonsful  of 
brown  emetic,  one  tea^poonful  of  cayenne,  one  teaspoonful  of  nerve 
powder,  and  if  it  is  a  putrid  ca-e,  one  tablespoonful  of  No.  6;  sweeten 
it  with  molasses  or  sugar.      Pour  off  a  wineglass  fall  of  this  comp- 


696 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


ound,  and  give  it  to  the  patient  as  soon  as  he  is  in  bed,  and  then 
let  half  a  pint  of  the  same  compound  be  given  as  an  injection. 
Let  two  or  three  wineglasses  more  be  given  with  about  half  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  emetic  in  each,  at  intervals  of  fifteen  minutes,  if  that  given 
first  does  not  operate  sufficiently.  While  under  the  operation  of  the 
course,  let  the  patient  drink  freely  of  a  tea  made  of  spearmint,  pepper- 
mint, pennyroyal,  or  summersavory,  and  also  of  milk  porridge  or  crust 
coffee,  which  will  nourish  and  invigorate  the  body. 

Thirdly. — In  from  three  to  six  hours  the  patient  will  generally  be 
through  with  vomiting  and  the  stomach  settled  :  then  let  bim  take  a 
second  bathing  precisely  similar  to  the  first ;  let  him  stay  in  ten  or  fifteen 
minutes,  remembering  to  shower  with  the  tempered  water  on  coming  out. 
Let  the  surface  of  tlie  body  be  mbbed  thoroughly  and  then  apply  to  it 
some  cold  whiskey  and  water,  to  completely  close  the  pores,  and  the  pa- 
tient may  then  dress  and  wash  his  hands  and  face  in  cold  water,  and  if 
the  stomach  and  bowels  have  been  thoroughly  cleansed,  he  will  feel  com- 
pletely well. 

Fourthly. — Let  the  patient  take  of  the  bitters  No.  4,  or  syrup  No.  5, 
to  restore  the  digestive  organs,  and  his  health  is  soon  restored. 

This  course  may  be  repeated  if  thought  advisable,  but  it  is  the  most 
powerful  one  that  is  usually  administered. 

Course  No.  2. 

In  case  of  inflammatory  sore  throat,  quinsy,  rattles  or  croup,  take  a 
dose  of  composition,  cayenne,  or  No.  6.,  then  take  a  bath  as  in  course 
No.  1.  Bathing  the  feet  alone  will  answer,  if  the  bath  cannot  be  handily 
applied :  then  give  one  fourth  of  a  glass  of  tincture  of  lobelia,  after  which 
give  an  injection  as  prepared  in  course  No.  1.  or  the  brown  emetic  may 
be  put  into  a  boiling  hot  tea  of  composition,  witchhazle,  or  red  raspberry 
leaves.  This  will  change  the  field  of  excitement  from  the  upper  to  the 
lower  extremities,  and  will  also  turn  the  pressure  of  blood  in  like  manner 
from  the  head,  lungs  and  neck  to  the  bowels  and  feet. 

In  all  cases  of  difficulties  or  inflammation  about  the  region  of  the  lungs 
or  head,  the  injection  should  be  made  sweet  with  molasses  to  loosen  the 
bowels,  and  very  stimulating  with  No.  2,  and  sufficiently  powerful  with 
brown  emetic  to  cause  the  patient  to  vomit,  and  should  contain  also  a 
teaspoonful  of  nerve  powder,  or  instead  thereof  two  teaspoonsful  of  the 
tincture  of  asafetida,  to  quiet  the  neiTous  system  while  under  the  ope- 
ration. Repeat  the  tincture  by  the  stomach,  if  the  injection  does  not 
cause  sufficient  vomiting,  and  immediate  relief  will  be  the  result,  unless 
the  patient  is  very  low,  or  beyond  the  reach  of  medicine. 

After  the  medicine  is  done  operating,  the  steam  may  be  applied  as  in 
course  No.  1 ;  the  body  bathed  with  whiskey  and  water,  and  the  feet 
and  legs  with  stimulating  liniment.  Put  a  stmiulating  plaster  about  the 
neck,  with  the  sides  notched,  so  that  it  may  extend  to  the  edge  of  the 
chin,  and  over  this  put  one  or  two  thicknesses  of  flannel  to  keep  the  neck 
warm.  The  same  plasters  may  also  be  applied  to  the  feet  to  good  ad- 
vantage. This  treatment  turns  the  circulation  so  completely  to  the  lower 
extremities  that  relief  is  almost  instantaneous.  In  the  recent  state  of  the 
disease  this  treatment  soon  brings  the  difficulty  to  a  crisis,  and  the  patient 
recovers  with  verj^  little  trouble.  In  cases  of  croup  or  rattles,  cloths  wet 
with  hot  whiskey  and  water  wrung  out  and  applied  to  the  bowels  as  hot 
as  can  be  bonie,  and  often  changed,  are  a  great  assistant  to  the  other 
treatment  in  restoring  the  lost  heat  or  vitality  by  absorption. 

With  such  practice  we  have  relieved  many  cases  of  violent  disease  of 
the  chest  and  head,  and  tliese  dii'ections  should  be  remembered  and  fol- 
lowed by  all  in  similar  cases. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  697 

Course   No.  3. 

There  are  various  forms  in  which  the  emetic  may  be  given.  A  light 
course  may  be  given  a  child ;  by  first  bathing  the  feet  in  hot  water  and 
giving  freely  of  penny  royal,  spearmint,  pepper  mint,  or  summer  savory 
tea,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  cayenne  and  lobelia  tincture.  Then  to 
a  cup  of  the  hot  tea  add  half  a  tea-spoonful  of  cayenne,  the  same  quanti- 
ty of^  brown  emetic,  and  a  tea-spoonful  of  the  tincture  of  asafoetida,  and 
give  it  as  an  injection.  It  vrAl  produce  copious  vomiting,  take  the  dis- 
tress from  the  head,  and  produce  immediate  relief. 

After  the  operation  the  body  of  the  child  may  be  bathed  thoroughly 
with  whiskey  and  water  about  blood  warm.  Put  on  clean,  warm,  dry 
clothes,  and  place  the  little  patient  in  bed,  and  it  will  feel  much  relieved 
and  refreshed. 

If  the  stomach  is  so  weak  or  irritable  as  to  reject  the  cayenne  or  eme- 
tic, given  as  above  dii-ected,  let  the  patient  drink  herb  tea  untU  the  sys- 
tem becomes  moist  with  perspiration,  then  give  the  emetic  in  form  of 
pills,  or  in  honey,  any  kind  Of  sweet  meats,  preserves  or  syrup,  or  in 
weak  pearlash  or  saleratus  water;  in  any  of  the  mint  teas  or  simple  drink ; 
or  it  may  be  given  in  toddy,  sling,  beer  or  cider.  It  may  also  be  taken 
in  lemonade  or  orange  juice  and  m  a  great  variety  of  other  ways. 

If  the  patient  is  determined  not  to  take  the  emetic,  he  may  be  de- 
ceived by  preparing  it  in  one  of  the  above  forms,  and  not  know  that  he 
has  taken  it  untill  it  begins  to  operate. 

Then  by  giving  the  herb  teas  or  composition,  a  thorough  course  may 
be  had  without  much  trouble.  But  if  the  child  detects  the  taste  of  the 
emetic  when  mixed  with  these  articles,  let  him  taste  of  some  of  the 
drinks  made  pleasant,  just  sufficient  to  produce  a  desire  for  more,  then 
put  in  your  emetic,  unnoticed  by  the  patient,  and  let  them  harry  to  drink 
it  before  the  taste  is  detected,  or  they  have  a  chance  to  know  what  it  is. 

Course   No.  4. 

Let  the  patient  take  of  composition  or  herb  tea'tili  an  easy  perspiration 
is  started,  then  administer  half  a  dozen  emetic  pills;  they  will  gradually 
dissolve,  and  the  secretions  will  take  up  their  emetic  properties  and  nau- 
sea will  be  continued  for  some  time  before  vomiting  takes  place.  If  the 
operation  is  not  sufficient,  an  injection  as  directed  in  Course  No.  1,  may 
be  administered,  or  instead  of  brown  emetic,  the  tincture  may  be  substi- 
tvited,  and  if  thought  advisable  a  half  dozen  more  pills  may  be  taken. 
This  will  generally  answer  the  purpose.  After  the  medicme  has  done 
operating,  take  a  vapor  bath  as  directed  in  Course  No.  1,  remembering 
if  the  circulation  is  not  good  m  the  extremities,  to  bathe  the  feet  in  hot 
water,  and  then  apply  to  the  feet  and  legs  the  stimulating  liniment. 

The  proper  application  of  these  courses  of  medicine,  in  the  various 
forms  of  disease  to  which  man  is  subject,  we  consider  the  key-stone  in 
the  grand  arch  and  superstructure  of  the  Thomsonian  system  of  practice ; 
for  without  the  lobelia,  cayenne  and  the  vapor  bath,  the  grand  bulwark 
of  the  system  would  be  wanting.  These  valuable  articles  stand  in  the 
front  and  foremost  rank  to  oppose  all  attacks,  stages  and  forms  of  disease 
to  which  frail  humanity  is  subject. 

ALKALIES 

To  remove  acidity  and  sweeten  the  stomach,  before,  at  the  time  and  after 

the  operation  of  the  Course  of  Medicine. 

STONE-LXME,    OR    LI31E    MADE    OF    OTSTER-SHELLS,    PEARLASH 
OR    SALERATUS. 

Take  half  a  pound  fresh  burned  lime  and  put  it  into  two  cpiarts  of  good, 
clear,  soft  water,  let  it  slack  and  stand  twenty-four  hours,  being  stirred 

45 


698  THE   THOMSONFAW 

three  or  four  times  during  the  first  six  or  eight  hours.  Then  remove  the 
scale  from  the  surface  and  bottle  what  wUl  run  off  clear  for  use.  Take 
from  half  to  a  glass  two  or  three  times  a  day.  If  it  is  too  strong,  reduce 
it  with  water.  Pearlash  or  saleratus  may  be  used  in  the  same  way.  If 
at  any  time  too  much  alkali  is  taken  and  distresses  the  stomach,  it  may 
be  neutralized  immediately  by  drinking  a  little  cider  or  vinegar,  and  the 
stomach  preserved  from  injury.  These  counter  substances,  or  irritants, 
should  ever  be  kept  in  mind  by  the  physician  fer  the  benefit  of  the  patient 
•when  using  either. 


ENEMAS,   OR  INJECTIONS. 

In  order  to  remove  a  disease,  the  medicine  raust  be  applied  to  the  part' 
where  the  cause  originated.  Therefore,  when  the  bowelk  are  concerned, 
either  directly  or  indirectly,  in  producing  the  disorder,  whatever  it  may- 
be,  injections  are  very  important. 

Where  an  evacuation  of  the  bowels  is  all  that  is  necessary,  a  tea  of  cay- 
enne, made  very  sweet  with  molasses,  will  answer  every  purpose.  But 
in  cases  Avhere  a  course  of  medicine  is  requisite,  the  most  usual  manner 
of  preparing  one  to  be  used  at  that  time,  is  to  make  a  strong  tea  of  com- 
position No.  3,  red  raspberry  or  witch  hazle  leaves;  strain  it,  and 
while  hot  add  half  a  teaspoonful  of  cayenne,  tw©  tablespaonsful  of  molas- 
ses, and  when  cool  enough  to  be  administered,  add  a  teaspoonful  of  nerve 
powder  and  the  same  quantity  of  the  tinctare  of  lobelia;  and  if  there  is 
danger  of  mortification,  add  a  tablespoonfal  of  No.  6.  In  cases  of  ex- 
ceeding pressure,  or  great  distress  in  the  head  or  breast,  add  to  the  injec- 
tion as  usually  prepared,  from  one  to  three  teaspoonfuls  of  brown  emetic, 
(pulverized  lobelia  seed)  and  bathe  the  feet  in  hot  water  and  liniment. 

In  case  of  dysentery,  or  any  local  disorder  of  the  bowels,  such  ailicles- 
ought  always  to  be  put  into  the  injections  as  are  useful  in  such  disorders, 
if  given  by  the  stomach. 

When  the  uterus  or  urinary  passages  are  affected,  injections  may  be 
given  to  these  parts  by  means  of  the  appropriate  sjTinges.  Tlie  quantity 
to  be  irsed  as  an  injection  of  the  bowels  should  be  from  a  giU  to  a  pint. 

Syringes  of  all  sizes,  and  for  all  the  different  purposes,  should  be  kept 
on  hand  by  every  practitioner. 

For  those  who  are  costive,  a  little  molasse-s  and  water,  with  the  addi- 
tion of  a  small  quantity  of  cayenne,  will  be  very  serviceable.  Or  instead 
of  that,  a  tea  made  of  ginger,  pennyroyal,  spearmint  or  peppermint,  may 
be  sweetened  with  molasses  and  used,  and  by  adding  cayenne  and  lobe- 
lia a  course  of  medicine  may  be  given.  A  little  warm  saap-suds  will  fre- 
quently answer  a  good  puipose  in  removing  costiveness,  and  create  quite 
a  natural  action  of  the  bowels. 

Note. — In  all  cases  of  pressure  in  the  eyes,  head,  breast  or  lungs,  in- 
jections should  be  used,  and  the  feet  bathed  if  necessary,  as  it  shows  a 
deranged  or  disordered  state  of  the  bowels,  and;  consequent  want  of  cir- 
culation in  the  feet. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  699 


iMEDICAL    COMPOUNDS, 


Preparations  of  Emetic. 


No.  1.— LOBELIA  INFLATA. 

1.  Take  of  the  leaves  of  lobelia  inflata,  finely  pulverized,  one  teaspoon- 
ful,  in  warm  water  sweetened,  or  in  a  tea  of  red  raspberry  leaves,  or  any 
tea  proper  for  removing  canker,  with  prepared  composition,  cayenne,  or 
hot  drops,  as  a  stimulant.  The  dose  is  to  be  repeated  tiU  the  desired  ef- 
fect is  produced. 

This  preparation  is  for  the  less  violent  attacks  of  disease. 

TO  PREPARE  LOBELIA  SEED  WITH  SUGAR. 

2.  Take  of  the  seeds  of  lobelia,  finely  pulverized,  one  pound,  and  one 
pound  of  white  sugar — pulverize  them  well  together  (the  sugar  being  de- 
signed to  absorb  the  oil);  then  add  a  quarter  of  a  pound  of  nerve  powder, 
half  a  pound  of  cayenne,  and  one  g-allon  of  improved  rheumatic  drops. 

Dose,  two  teaspoonsful  for  an  adult,  in  a  gill  of  bayberry  or  composi- 
tion tea. 

TO  PREPARE  THE  LEAVES  AND  PODS. 

2.  Separate  the  leaves  and  pods  from  the  stalks,  pulverize  and- sift  them; 
to  be  preserved  from  the  air. 

For  a  dose,  take  a  teaspoonful,  in  a  wineglassful  of  warm  tea  made  of 
cayenne,  or  No.  6,  or  spearmint,  peppermint  or  penny-royal  tea,  sweet- 
ened, or  instead,  the  same  quantity  of  any  of  the  siniple  or  canker  teas. 
Repeat  the  dose  at  intervals  of  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes  till  sufficient  vo- 
miting* has  been  produced.  If  the  patient  is  very  weak,  or  in  case  of  a 
child,  the  liquor  should  be  strained,  and  the  dose  moderated  according  to 
the  circumstances  and  age. 

TO  PREPARE  THE  TINCTURE. 

4.  Take  the  green  herb,  in  any  stage  of  its  growth,  (if  the  plants  are 
small  take  the  roots  also)  pound  them  fine,  and  put  them  into  an  equal 
quantity  of  fourth  proof  spirits;  let  it  saturate  thoroughly,  then  strain  and 
press  out  the  liquor,  to  be  preserved  closely  bottled  for  use. 

Good  vinegar  or  pepper  sauce  may  be  substituted  for  the  spirits.  This 
is  an  effectual  counter  poison,  either  internally  or  externally  applied.  It 
is  good  in  asthma,  consumption,  and  all  complaints  of  the  lungs. 

For  a  dose,  take  a  teaspoonful  once  in  twenty  minute?,  if  the  first  does 
not  have  the  desired  effect.  By  adding  a  little  cayenne,  and  in  neiTous 
cases  a  small  quantity  of  nerve  powder,  its  operations  will  be  more  ef- 
fectual. 

TO  COMPOUND  THE  THIRD  PREPARATION. 

5.  Take  of  the  lobelia  seeds  and  cayenne,  each  two  ounces,  finely  pul- 
verized, and  one  ounce  of  nerve  powder,  and  put  them  into  a  pint  of  No. 
6,  shake  them  well  together,  and  preserve  it  closely  corked  for  use. 


700  THE  THOMSONIAN 

This  is  for  the  most  violent  attacks  of  disease,  such  as  tetanus  or  lock- 
jaw, hydrophobia,  drowning,  fits,  spasms,  and  all  cases  of  suspended  ani- 
mation. In  all  cases  where  the  jaws  are  set,  pour  this  into  the  mouth, 
between  the  cheek  and  teeth,  and  the  muscles  will  relax  and  the  mouth 
will  soon  come  open.  It  goes  through  the  system  like  electricity,  giving 
heat  and  life  to  every  part. 

EMETIC  PILLS. 

6.  Take  an  ounce  of  the  extract  of  peach  leaves,  poplar  or  butternut 
bark,  one  teaspoonful  of  cayenne,  half  an  ounce  of  pulverized  lobelia 
seeds,  two  teaspoonsful  of  nerve  powder,  and  a  few  drops  of  the  oil  of 
pennyroyal,  spearmint,  or  peppermint;  mix  the  solid  articles  well  toge- 
ther, and  form  into  a  mass  with  the  extract.  If  too  soft,  add  more  of  the 
lobelia  and  nerve  powder;  if  too  hard,  add  more  of  the  extract.  Then 
make  it  into  pUls.  They  may  be  taken,  from  two  to  six  at  night,  on  go- 
ing to  bed. 

They  are  good  to  cleanse  the  stomach  of  morbid  matter,  to  cure  sick 
headache,  colic,  flatulency,  &c. 

Take  from  six  to  twelve,  and  drink  some  warm  herb  or  ginger  tea,  and 
they  will  operate  smartly  as  an  emetic.  This  is  about  as  easy  a  way  as  a 
lobelia  emetic  can  be  taken. 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  CHILDREN. 

When  emetics  are  given  to  children,  the  doses  must  be  regulated  ac- 
cording to  their  age.  The  best  general  directions  are,  to  steep  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  the  pulverized  herb  in  a  teacupful  of  hot  water,  with  a  little 
ginger,  strain  and  sweeten,  and  give  of  it  a  teaspoonful  once  in  ten  mi- 
nutes till  it  operates.  If  the  tincture  is  used,  a  teaspoonful  of  it  may  be 
put  into  a  wineglass  of  hot  water,  and  then  taken  as  above.  In  giving 
mediciiie  of  any  kind  to  children,  much  depends  on  the  discriminating 
judgment  of  the  practitioner. 

Note. — The  tincture  of  lobelia  is  one  of  the  best  remedies  in  use  for 
the  bites  of  poisonous  insects  or  reptiles;  also  for  inflammations,  cuts, 
bruises,  old  ulcers,  &c.  Put  three  or  four  thicknesses  of  cloth  upon  the 
wound,  and  keep  it  constantly  wet  with  the  tincture,  and  occasionally  let 
a  teaspoonful  be  taken  inwardly,  if  sick  at  the  stomach. 


Stimulants. 


No.  2.— CAYENNE  PEPPER, 

Capsicum  Baccatum,  and  Frutescens. 

These  are  active  stimulants,  and  the  best  things  known  to  raise  and  re- 
tain the  natural  heat  of  the  system.  They  are  powerfully  stimulating 
substances,  but  act  only  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  life.  They 
cleanse  the  salivary  glands,  promote  perspiration,  and  remove  obstruc- 
tions. A  decoction  of  cayenne  will  cure  the  colic  or  cholera  morbus,  re- 
move cramp,  or  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels,  in  the  last  of  which  it  is 
excellent  for  children,  boiled  in  milk;  and  should  always  be  used  in 
courses  of  medicine.     [See  page  590.] 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  701 

RED  PEPPER— Capsicum  Annuum. 

C03IM0N  GARDEN  PEPPEK. 

This  is  a  stimulating*  substance,  next  in  value  in  that  respect  to  cay- 
enne, for  which  it  may  be  substituted,  when  that  cannot  be  procured. 
[See  page  593.] 

BLACK  PEPPER— Piper  Nigrum. 
This  article  is  a  gentle  stimulant,  and  when  necessary  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  the  above.     Boiled  in  milk,  it  is  a  good  remedy  for  relax  and 
dysentery.     [See  page  596.] 

GINGER— Zingiber  Officinale. 

Ginger  is  a  stimulant,  useful  to  be  employed  in  all  cases  as  a  substitute 
for  the  above  articles,  Avhen  they  are  not  to  be  had.  It  answers  a  good 
purpose,  used  instead  of  composition  in  giving  courses  of  medicine,  when 
cayenne  cannot  be  obtained.  It  is  good  in  all  pulmonary  affections.  The 
root  may  be  chewed  as  a  substitute  for  tobacco,  and  is  very  useful  for 
bleeding  at  the  lungs,  asthmatic  difficulties,  flatulency,  pain  in  the  side, 
or  distress  from  food.     [See  page  594.] 

After  having  given  courses  of  medicine,  great  care  must  be  observed  to 
prevent  taking  cold,  and  to  keep  up  the  internal  heat  so  as  to  maintain 
perspiration,  which  can  be  done  by  giving  occasionally  a  little  of  No.  2, 
either  alone  or  combined  in  the  composition  powders;  and  courses  should 
be  occasionally  administered,  if  necessary,  until  all  symptoms  of  disease 
have  disappeared.  'It  is  better  to  apply  more  courses  than  are  wanted, 
than  that  one  should  be  neglected  that  is  necessary.  Be  vigilant  in  the 
use  of  the  medicine  till  out  of  danger. 


Astringents. 


No.  3.— THE  DIFFERENT  ARTICLES. 

BAYBERRY— Jfi/nca  Cerifera. 

This  is  an  excellent  remedy  for  canker,  and  is  good  for  derangement 
of  the  stomach  and  bowels.  By  using  it  as  a  dentifrice,  and  drinking  a 
little  of  the  tea  occasionally,  it  will  cleanse  the  teeth  and  gums,  and  pre- 
vent an  offensive  breath.  A  strong  tea  of  this  article  will  remove  the  ad- 
hesive matter  from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  and  intestines, 
and  create  an  appetite.  Taken  with  the  emetic,  it  is  very  useful  to  re- 
moke  canker.    It  is  an  excellent  sneezing  snuff.     [See  page  597.] 

WHITE  POND  LILY— NympJuBa  Odorata. 

An  excellent  article  for  derangement  of  the  bowels,  and  is  good  for 
canker  in  any  of  its  forms.  Made  into  syrup,  it  is  useful  for  children  in 
looseness  of  the  bowels  or  while  teething,  and  will  sweeten  the  mouth, 
and  cleanse  old  ulcers.  A  syrup  may  be  made  of  the  flowers  that  is  use- 
ful for  nursing  sore  mouth,  with  mothers  as  well  as  children.  [See 
page  598.] 

This  article  it  would  be  well  for  every  family  to  keep  on  hand. 


702  THE   THOMSONIAN 

HEMLOCK — Pinus  Canadensis. 

The  boughs  in  decoction  are  excellent  for  strengthening  the  back  and 
kidneys.  This  infusion  has  been  used  as  a  constant  drink  in  bilious  coun- 
tries, and  in  this  way  those  who  have  employod  it  have  avoided  the  dis- 
eases incident  to  such  places. 

By  boiling  the  boughs,  they  yield  an  extract  which  may  be  profitably 
employed  in  the  form  of  plasters. 

The  bark  is  a  good  astringent,  which  may  be  used  for  canker,  either 
alone  or  compounded  with  any  of  the  articles  under  this  head . 

The  gum  may  be  used  instead  of  rosin  in  strengthening  plasters,  and 
made  thin  by  the  addition  of  lard  and  a  little  cayenne,  is  very  useful  for 
rheumatism  or  weakness  of  the  back. 

MARSH  'ROSFMAUY—Statice  Limonium. 

Is  veiy  good  for  sore  mouth,  throat,  and  all  cases  of  canker.  It  is  much 
used  along  tlie  sea  board  for  thrush,  and  difficulties  of  the  stomach  and 
bowels.  Care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  not  too  drying  to  the  glands  of 
the  mouth  and  throat.     [See  page  601.] 

This  may  be  used  compounded  with  bayberry  or  witch  hazle  leaves  in 
courses  of  medicine,  or  for  injections  and  as  a  drink  for  canker. 

SUMAC— i2/ius  Glabrum. 

This  is  an  astringent  valuable  in  dysentery,  and  may  be  used  the  same 
as  bayberry,  for  which  it  may  be  substituted  in  courses  of  medicine  and 
all  cases  of  canker.  It  may  be  compounded  with  witch  hazel,  and  used 
generally  where  canker  medicine  should  be  employed,  especially  for 
children.  The  berries  may  be  compounded  with  red  raspberry  leaves, 
to  be  used  in  the  courses  of  medicine,  and  for  canker.     [See  page  602.] 

WITCH  RAZEL—Hamamelis  Virginica. 

In  decoction,  it  is  useful  for  bleeding  at  the  lungs,  stomach  or  bowels, 
and  in  snufif,  for  bleeding  at  the  nose.  This  valuable  article  maybe  used 
in  giving  courses  of  medicine  alone,  or  compounded  with  sumac  or  red 
raspberry.  It  is  very  serviceable  in  dysentery,  relax,  or  any  other  com- 
plaint of  the  bowels  or  stomach.  Chewing  the  leaves  alone  is  good  for 
sore  mouth.  A  wash  made  from  them*  is  excellent  to  cleanse  old  sores 
and  dry  up  ulcers  in  various  parts  of  the  body.     [See  page  603.] 

RED  RASPBERRY— /?u6us  Strigosus. 

Red  raspberry  leaves  are  an  excellent  substitute  for  imported  tea.  The 
decoction  is  a  valuable  remedy  for  canker  in  courses  of  medicine,  for  which 
purpose  it  may  be  used  instead  of  other  articles  vmder  this  head.  It  is 
good  for  sore  mouth;  and  made  into  a  poultice  it  is  a  first  rate  article  for 
scalds,  freezes,  old  sores,  &c.  A  tea  made  of  the  leaves  may  be  used  to 
great  advantage  during  hot  weather.  It  braces  up  the  body,  and  keeps 
off  faint  and  languid  feelings. 

Women,  for  some  time  previous  and  during  the  time  of  delivery,  should 
keep  on  hand  and  make  free  use  of  this  tea.  The  fruit  is  wholesome  and 
nutritious.     [See  page  604.] 

LIBERTY  TEA— Ceanothus  Jlmericana. 
This  plant  is  mucilaginous,  and  one  of  the  best  articles  in  use  for  sum- 
mer complaints,  and  is  also  good  for  sore  mouth  and  throat.  It  is  an  excel- 
lent tonic,  and  has  been  usefully  substituted  for  imported  tea.     It  should 
be  gathered  and  preserved,  to  be  used  in  the  complaints  incident  to  child- 


MATERIA  MEDICA*  703 

yen.    It  is  a  great  regulator  of  the  bowels,  and  used  in  tea  as  a  constant 
drink  is  valuable  for  dysentery  or  relax.     [See  page  606.] 

COCASH — JsUr  Hyssopifolius. 
Cocash  is  good  for  vertigo,  nervous  affections,  and  coldness  of  the  ex- 
tremities. It  may  be  profitably  employed  as  a  remedy  for  canker.  If 
bruised  and  put  into  gm,  it  makes  an  excellent  bitter,  useful  in  rheuma- 
tism and  nervous  affections.  People  in  vicinities  where  it  grows  should 
•gather  it  for  use.  In  bilious  countries  it  is  an  excellent  article  to  prevent 
fevers  and  bilious  complaints.     [See  page  607.] 

AVENS  'ROOT—Geum  Virginianum. 

This  article  is  good  in  canker  or  general  debility,  and  may  be  usefully 
Substituted  for  chocolate.  It  may  be  used  as  a  constant  drink  in  putrid 
complaints  to  advantage.  In  ague  countries,  if  constantly  employed,  it 
will  prevent  bilious  complaints,  as  well  as  a  disordered  state  of  the  bow- 
els. It  is  a  good  substitute  for  Peruvian  bark.  Its  tonic  powers  are  well 
known  to  the  people  in  the  neighborhoods  where  it  grows.  It  should  be 
preserved.     [See  page  608.] 

CRANESBILL —  Geranium  Maculatum. 

It  is  good  in  cholera  infantum,  hemorrhage  of  the  lungs  or  bowels,  and 
in  all  relaxed  debilitated  conditions  of  the  body.  This  article  is  much 
like  avens  root,  witch  hazel,  red  raspberry  and  sumac,  and  may  be  used 
in  like  manner.  It  is  very  useful,  simmered  in  honey,  for  sore  mouth  or 
'complaints  of  the  bowels.  A  quantity  of  this  root  should  be  gathered 
and  kept  on  hand  by  those  who  cannot  obtain  bayberry  bark,  to  be  used 
for  9i.milar  purposes.     [See  page  609.] 

BLACK  OAK— Quercus  Rubra. 

Useful  in  fever,  diarrhoea,  scrofula,  and  all  cases  of  canker.  The  acorns 
simmered  in  honey  are  good  for  sore  mouth  and  throat.  Care  should  be 
taken  that  this  article  is  not  given  too  strong,  as  it  may  create  too  great 
an  astringency  upon  the  glands  of  the  mouth  and  throat.  It  may  be  re- 
duced in  its  astringent  properties  by  the  use  of  sage,  avens  root  or  cranes- 
bill,  which  possess  nearly  the  same  qualities,  bat  are  not  so  strong  astrin- 
gents.    [See  page  610.] 

SAGE-^iS^aZwa  Officinalis: 

Sage  is  an  excellent  article  to  quiet  nervous  and  mental  excitement, 
and  prevent  putrifaction.  It  is  good  for  worms  or  bowel  complaints  in 
children.  It  is  also  a  valuable  article  to  clear  the  head,  when  used  in 
connection  with  senna — half  an  ounce  of  each  in  half  a  pint  of  hot  water, 
with  a  teaspoonful  of  ginger.  This  will  afford  great  relief  to  the  head  as 
soon  as  it  operates.  Simmered  with  borax  and  honey,  it  is  an  excellent 
wash  for  sore  mouth  in  children,  and  for  women  in  uterogestation.  Its 
trial  will  prove  its  virtues.  Sage  should  be  presei-ved  for  family  use. 
fSee  page  611.] 


COMPOUNDS  OF  NO.  3,— FOR  CANKER. 

1.  Take  equal  parts  of  bayberry  and  white  pond  lily  root,  pulverize 
fine,  and  mix  well  together.  Steep  one  ounce  in  a  pint  of  boiling  water, 
and  let  it  be  well  sweetened,  and  add  a  little  cayenne.  Of  this,  give  for 
a  dose  a  wineglassful,  and  repeat  it  at  discretion.    If  a  nervous  case,  add 


704-  THE    THOMSONIAN 

half  a  teaspoonful  of  nerve  powder,  and  from  one  to  two  teaspoonfuls  of 
asafetida. 

2.  Take  sumac,  red  raspberry  and  witch  hazel  leaves,  with  marsh- 
rosemary,  of  each  an  equal  quantity;  let  them  all  be  finely  pulverized 
and  well  mixed.     In  case  of  an  attack  of  cold  add  a  little  of  No.  2. 

To  be  taken  the  same  as  the  preceding^.  These  articles  may  be  used 
in  course,  and  separately  if  necessary. 

3.  Take  red  raspberry,  avens  root,  and  marsh-rosemary,  of  each  equal 
quantities,  tinely  pulverized ;  mix  the  articles  well  together,  and  they 
make  an  excellent  cankeT  remedy,  and  one  that  is  higlily  useful  in  diar- 
rhoea, and  all  relaxed  states  of  the  bowels. 

For  a  dose,  take  a  teaspoonful,  m  a  wineglassful  of  hot  water,  sweet- 
ened. 

4.  Take  cranesbill  and  witch  hazel,  equal  quantities  of  each,  and  half 
the  quantity  of  black  oak  bark,  well  rossed,  dried,  pulverized  and  mixed. 
This  may  be  used  in  the  same  way  and  for  the  same  purposes  as  the  one 
next  preceding.  Add  a  little  golden  seal,  and  it  makes  an  excellent  bit- 
ter. 

5.  Take  of  sage,  cocash  and  liberty  tea,  each  one  pound,  pulverize  and 
mis.  This  is  an  excellent  article  for  all  derangement  of  the  bowels, 
especially  where  it  is  attended  with  nervous  or  mental  excitement. 

Take  for  a  dose,  a  teaspoonful,  in  half  a  teacupful  of  hot  water,  repeat- 
ed as  often  as  the  circumstances  require. 

6.  Take  hemlock,  black  oak  and  baybeny  barks,  of  each  an  equal 
quantity;  let  them  all  be  finely  pulverized  and  well  mixed.  This  is  a 
powerful  astringent,  to  scour  the  canker  from  the  glands  and  mucous 
membrane  of  the  whole  alimentary  canal. 

Dose,  a  teaspoonful,  in  a  half  pint  of  hot  water,  sweetened.  This  must 
not  be  used  too  freely,  and  may  be  tempered  with  either  of  the  preceding 
articles  that  possess  less  astringent  power. 

These  different  compounds  may  be  used  in  courses. 

N.  B.  In  all  compounds  for  canker  or  cold,  a  little  cayenne  should  be 
added,  as  it  renders  the  medicine  much  more  effectual;  and  the  patient 
should  be,  when  the  medicine  is  used,  kept  warm  in  bed,  or  shielded  from 
the  air  by  an  over-coat  or  blanket. 

These  compounds  are  veiy  valuably,  and  should  be  kept  on  hand  by 
all  who  use  Thomsonian  medicme.      In  taking  these  medicines,  great' , 
care  should  be  observed  to  keep  from  taking  cold,  and  recovery  is  gene--^"*' 
rally  very  rapid. 

Let  the  patients  always  drink  freely  of  milk  porridge  or  other  nourish'  ^ 
ment  while  using  these  medicines,  if  they  have  an  inclination  to  eat;  but 
never  force  the  appetite,  as  nature  will  regulate  her  own  work.     By  forc- 
ing the  appetite,  you  generate  disease. 


Bitters. 


No.  4.— THE  DIFFERENT  ARTICLES. 

B ALMON Y—  Chelone  Glabra . 

This  is  a  bitter  of  the  first  order.  It  corrects  the  secretions  of  bilie, 
creates  an  appetite,  and  gives  health  and  activity  to  the  digestive  organs 
[See  page  613.] 


MATERIA    5IEDICA.  705 

GOLDEN  SEAL — Hydrastis  Canadensis. 

This  article  is  an  excellent  bitter  tonic,  to  be  used  for  dyspepsy,  and 
all  derangements  of  the  digestive  organs.     [See  page  613.] 

POPLAR— PopuZtts. 

An  excellent  remedy  for  indigestion  and  costlveness,  and  is  also  good 
for  urinary  difficulties,  in  combination  with  hemlock  boughs.  The  buds 
and  small  twigs  may  be  used  in  decoction  for  womas,  or  disordered  bow- 
els.    [See  page  615.] 

BARBERRY— ^eriens  Vulgaris. 
This  is  a  good  bitter  to  correct  the  gall  and  regulate  digestion,  and 
will  also  remove  costiveness.     It  is  gently  laxative.     [See  page  617.] 

BITTER  ROOT— ^pocj/num  Canabinum. 
It  will  remove  costiveness,  correct  tlie  secretions  of  gall,  and  remove 
obstructions  in  the  whole  alimentary  canal.     In  dropsical  cases  it  will 
operate  as  a  hydragogue  cathartic.     [See  page  619.] 

UNICORN  ROOT— jiletris  Ferinosa. 

Unicom  is  a  valuable  tonic,  and  may  be  employed  for  the  same  pur- 
poses as  the  other  articles  under  this  head.  It  is  peculiarly  serviceable 
in  female  weaknesses  and  nervous  debility,  and  is  an  excellent  article  for 
cough  and  pain  in  the  side.     [See  page  620] 

BOXWOOD— Comus  Florida. 

It  increases  the  animal  warmth,  strengthens  the  digestive  organs,  and 
obviates  female  weaknesses.     [See  page  621.] 

GOLD  THREAD— Cop< is  Trifolia. 

This  article  is  a  tonic  which  may  be  substituted  for  golden  sealer  bar- 
berry; and  its  astringent  properties  render  it  peculiarly  serviceable  for 
sore  mouth  or  throat,  when  used  with  honey  and  borax.    [See  page  622.] 

HOREHOUNI>— il/aru6iwm  Vulgare, 
This  herb  is  valuable  as  a  tonic,  and  may  be  used  to  great  advantage  in 
coughs,  consumptions,  and  general  debility.     [See  page  622.] 

*  COMFREY— Sj/mp/iyfitm  Officinale. 

A  tonic,  good  in  all  cases  where  mucilaginous  medicines  are  useful, 
but  more  especially  m  female  weaknesses.     [See  page  623.] 

COMPOUNDS  OF  No.  4. 

1 .  Take  balmony,  baybeiTy  and  poplar  bark,  each  equal  parts,  pulver- 
ized and  well  mixed.  To  one  ounce  of  tliis  compound  add  a  pint  of  boil- 
ing water  and  half  a  pint  of  spirits. 

Dose,  half  a  wineglassful  three  or  four  times  a  day. 
To  the  above  add  one  teaspoonful  of  cayenne  for  every  ounce  of  pow- 
der, and  it  makes  a  good  hot  bitter. 

2.  Take  of  golden  seal  half  an  ounce,  poplar  bark  one  ounce,  black 
cherry  bark  two  ounces,  nerve  powder  a  fourth  of  an  ounce,  and  half  a 
teaspoonful  of  cayenne;  let  them  be  pulverized  and  well  mixed.  To  an 
ounce  of  this  powder  add  half  a  pint  of  boiling  water,  one  ounce  of  loaf 
sugar,  and  one  pint  of  best  Holland  gin. 

Dose,  from  half  to  a  wineglassful,  at  discretion. 


706  THE  THOMSONIAN 

3.  Take  of  balmony  and  poplar  each  two  ounces,  bayberry  half  aft 
ounce,  black  birch  four  ounces;  pulverize  and  mix  well  together,  then 
work  in  a  fourth  of  an  ounce  of  cayenne  and  two  pounds  of  sugar. 

Take  a  teaspoonful  of  this  compound  night  and  morning,  in  a  little  hot 
water;  or  an  ounce  of  it  may  be  put  into  a  gill  of  boiling  water,  to  which 
add  one  pint  and  a  half  of  good  gin,  or  West  India  rum. 

Dose,  half  .a  wineglass,  two  or  Ihree  times  a  day. 

SPICE  BITTERS. 

1.  Take  of  fine  poplar  bark  one  pound,  balmony  seven  ounces,  bay^ 
berry  four  ounces,  ginger  four  ounces,  cayenne  one  ounce,  cloves  three 
ounces,  golden  seal  three  ounces,  sugar  two  pounds,  and  let  them  be  well 
mixed. 

2.  Take  of  poplar  bark  ten  jwunds,  bayberry  and  balmony  each  two 
pounds,  golden  seal  and  cl<»ves  each  one  pound,  cayenne  half  a  pound, 
and  sixteen  pounds  of  sugar.  Let  these  articles  all  be  made  fine  and 
well  mixed. 

Put  a  tablespoonful  of  this  compound  with  four  ounces  of  sugar  into  a 
quart  of  boiling  water.  Take  a  wineglassful  of  this  three  times  a  day 
before  eating.  This  is  a  good  bitter.  Or  a  teaspoonful  of  these  powders 
with  one  of  sugar,  may  be  taken  in  a  cup  of  hot  water;  or  one  ounce 
may  be  scalded  in  half  a  pint  of  hot  water,  and  put  into  a  quart  bottle, 
which  may  be  filled  with  good  Malaga  wine.  Prepared  in  this  way,  it 
is  an  excellent  bitter  for  weak  patients. 

WINE  BITTERS. 

Take  one  part  of  balmony  and  five  of  poplar  bark,  boil  in  water  suf- 
ficient to  strain  fi-om  one  pound  two  and  a  half  gallons  of  water,  to  which 
add  three  and  a  half  pounds  of  white  sugar,  and  two  and  a  half  ounces 
of  nerve  powder  while  hot,  strain  and  add  three  and  a  half  gallons  best 
Malaga  wine  and  one  quart  each  of  the  tincture  of  meadow  fern  and 
prickly  ash  seeds. 

2.  Take  five  pounds  of  poplar  bark  and  one  of  balmony,  boil  them  in  15 
gallons  of  water,  then  add  while  hot,  twenty  pounds  of  sugar  and  one 
pound  of  nerve  powder.  Strain  off  and  add  four  gallons  of  fourth  proof 
Jamaica  rum  or  brandy,  twenty  gallons  of  best  Malaga  wine,  and  one 
gallon  each  of  tincture  of  meadow  fem  and  prickly  ash  bark.  When 
cool  put  it  into  a  banel  and  it  is  fit  for  use. 

Dose,  from  half  to  a  wineglassful  three  times  a  day. 

RESTORATIVE  AND  RELAXING  BITTERS. 

Take  one  quart  of  beef's  gall,  one  gallon  best  Holland  gin,  and  one 
gallon  molasses;  mix  and  shake  them  well  together. 
Dose,  a  wineglassful  at  night  or  at  discretion. 

ASTRINGENT  BITTERS. 

Take  of  bayberry  two  pounds,  of  golden  seal  and  ginger  each  one 
pound,  cayenne  and  cloves  each  two  ounces;  all  finely  pulverized,  sifted 
and  well  mixed.     For  dyspeptics  with  relaxed  state  of  the  bowels. 

Dose,  a  teaspoonful  in  hot  ^vater  sweetened. 

DYSPEPTIC  POWDERS. 

Take  of  cayenne  four  ounces,  golden  seal  half  a  pound,  poplar  bark 
four  pounds  and  brown  sugar  eight  pounds :  let  them  all  be  made  fine  and 
well  mixed,  and  then  add  one  ounce  of  essence  of  pennyroyal,  to  be  well 
incorporated  with  the  other  articles.     This  is  good  for  distress  occasioned 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  707 

by  food,  for  colic,  flatulency  and  to  remove  faintness  at  the  stomach.  A 
teaspoonful  may  be  taken  in  a  cup  of  hot  water,  in  boiled  milk,  wine,  or 
when  more  convenient  in  a  glass  of  cold  water,  or  it  may  be  eaten 
dry.  It  will  remove  chills,  ague  and  cramps  from  the  system,  and  is  a 
a  very  valuable  article  to  be  kept  on  hand  for  use. 

WOMAN'S  FRIEND. 

Take  of  poplar  bark  five  pounds;  unicorn,  cinnamon,  golden  seal, 
and  cloves,  each  half  a  pound;  four  ounces  of  cayenne  and  eight  pounds 
of  sugar.  Let  them  all  be  made  fine  and  well  mixed.  This  is  an  excel- 
lent article  in  female  weaknesses,  to  prevent  abortion  and  to  be  used  at 
the  cessation  of  the  menses. 

A  teaspoonful  may  be  taken  in  a  gill  of  hot  water. 


To  Restore  Digestion, 


No.  5.    THE  DIFFERENT  ARTICLES. 

PEACH  TKEE—Amygdalus  Persica. 

This  is  an  excellent  article  in  a  great  variety  of  cases,  among  which 
are  weakness  of  the  digestive  organs,  disordered  bowels,  sickness  at  the 
stomach,  for  children  when  teething,  and  for  worms.     [See  page  624.] 

BLACK  CHERRY— Prtmws  Virginiana. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  articles  among  our  tonic  remedies,  and 
it  also  has  the  power  of  calming  irritation  and  diminishing  nervous  irrita- 
bility.    [See  page  626.] 

BITTER  ALMONB—j^mydalus  jimara. 

Good  in  all  cases  of  debility  of  the  stomach  and  bowels.  It  may  be 
used  alone,  or  in  combination  with  other  articles.     [See  page  628.] 

COMPOUNDS  OF  No.  5. 
SYRUP  FOR  WEAKLY  PATIENTS. 

Take  one  pound  each  of  the  roots  of  elecampane,  spicknard  and  com- 
frey,  and  half  a  pound  of  box-wood  flowers;  bruise  them  well  together  in 
a  mortar,  boil  in  two  gallons  of  water  one  hour,  strain  and  add  while  hot 
half  an  ounce  of  golden  seal,  two  ounces  of  dyspepsy  powders,  four  oun- 
ces of  prickly  ash  seed,  four  ounces  of  gum  arable,  the  same  quantity  of 
allspice,  two  ounces  of  slippery  elm  bark,  all  finely  pulverized,  and  eight 
pounds  of  loaf  sugar;  to  this  add  one  gallon  good  Holland  gin  and  half 
the  quantity  of  Madeira  wine. 

Stop  it  tight  in  bottles  for  use.  Dose,  from  a  fourth  to  a  wine-glass 
full  two  or  three  times  a  day. 

This  is  good  for  all  female  weaknesses,  and  is  very  strengthening  to  the 
loins  and  back. 

SYRUP  FOR   WEAKLY  FEMALES. 

Take  a  large  handful  of  green  comfrey  roots  well  cleansed  and  bruised; 

boil  them  in  two  quarts  of  water,  strain  off  and  press  out  the  liquor,  then 

grate  in  three  nutmegs,  add  one  ounce  of  dyspeptic  powders,  one  pound 

of  raisins  pulverized,  six  pounds  of  loaf  sugar,  one  pint  of  brandy  and  two 


708  THE  THOMSONIAN 

quarts  of  Madeira  wine.    When  cool  add  six  eggs  that  have  been  beaten 
fine,  and  let  it  be  well  stirred  together. 

This  is  a  valuable  article  for  female  weaknesses.  Dose,  a  wine-glass 
full  three  or  four  times  a  day. 

SYRUP  FOR  DYSENTERY. 

Take  of  bayberr)'  bark  and  sumach  leaves  each  one  ounce,  and  boil  in 
two  quarts  of  water,  one  hour,  strain  off  and  add  half  an  ounce  each  of 
golden  seal  and  cloves,  and  when  cool  one  pint  of  rheumatic  drops. 
This  is  an  excellent  article  for  looseness  of  the  bowels  and  indigestion. 

Dose,  from  one  to  four  table  spoonsful  three  times  a  day. 

SYRUP  TO  STRENGTHEN  THE  STOMACH  AND  BOWELS. 

Take  one  pound  each  of  poplar  bark  and  bayberry,  boil  them  in  two 
gallons  of  water,  strain  off  and  add  seven  pounds  of  good  sugar;  then 
scald  and  skim  it,  and  add  half  a  pound  of  peachmeats  or  the  same  quan- 
tity of  cheny-stone  meats,  pulverized.  When  cool  add  a  gallon  of 
good  brandy,  and  keep  it  in  bottles  for  use.  Dose,  half  a  wine-glass  full 
two  or  three  times  a  day. 

This  is  an  excellent  article  to  strengthen  the  stomach  and  bowels  and 
restore  weak  patients,  and  is  particularly  useful  in  dysenterj'.  It  is  a 
good  preventive  as  well  as  remedy  for  relax,  dysenteiy,  cholera  mor- 
bus, &c. 

MUCILAGINOUS  SYRUP. 

Take  the  pith  of  the  roots  of  buckhom  brake,  bruised;  put  them  into  a 
stone  pot,  and  add  water,  either  cold  or  hot;  beat  them  with  a  spoon  un- 
til it  is  of  the  consistence  of  the  white  of  an  egg.  Pour  oflf,  and  to  one 
gallon  add  two  pounds  white  sugar,  one  quart  best  brandy,  two  ounces 
caraway  seed  pulverized,  and  one  glass  of  the  volatile  tincture. 

Use,  for  weak  nervous  patients  and  child-bed  women. 

SYRUP  FOR  DYSENTERY,  OR  RELAX. 
Make  a  strong  decoction  of  baybeiry,  or  in  want  thereof  sumach,  or 
marsh  rosemary;  sti-ain,  and  wliile  hot  add  to  a  gallon  of  the  decoction 
two  pounds  of  brown  sugar.  When  cold  add  three  pints  of  hot  drops, 
(or  enough  to  prevent  its  souring.)  If  necessary,  add  more  of  the  hot 
drops  when  taken. 

DYSENTERY  SYRUP. 

Make  a  strong  decoction  of  equal  parts  of  fine  bayberry  and  sumach 
leaves.  To  one  gallon  of  the  decoction  add  two  pounds  of  sugar,  which 
has  been  dissolved,  boiled  and  skimmed;  one  ounce  of  golden  seal,  and 
half  an  ounce  of  cloves.  When  cold  add  three  quarts  and  a  half  rheu- 
matic drops. 

Dose,  from  a  tablespoonful  to  a  wineglass  two  or  three  times  a  day. 

SYRUP  FOR  RELAX,  OR  SUMMER  COMPLAINT. 

Take  of  poplar  bark,  black  cherry  bark,  of  the  gi-een  root,  and  balmo- 
ny,  each  one  pound;  of  golden  seal  and  hops,  each  half  a  pound;  boil 
these  mgredients  in  eight  gallons  of  water,  and  strain  off;  then  scald  and 
add  twenty-five  pounds  of  white  sugar;  take  off  the  scum,  and  add  while 
liot,  a  pound  of  cloves.     When  cool,  add  two  gallons  of  rheumatic  drops. 

Dose,  for  an  adult,  from  half  to  a  wineglassful,  at  discretion. 

ANTIDYSPEPTIC  RESTORATIVE. 
Take  of  poplar  bark  five  pounds ;   of  golden  seal  and  ginger,  each  two 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  709 

pounds;  ofbalmony,  umbil,  cloves,  unicom,  cinnamon,  and  cayenne, 
each  one  pound;  of  white  sugar  fifteen  pounds;  let  them  all  be  pulveriz- 
ed and  well  mixed. 

Dose,  a  teaspoonful,  in  a  tumbler  of  hot  water,  sweetened. 

For  Wixe  Bitters — Take  an  ounce  of  the  above  powders,  scald 
them  in  a  half  pint  of  hot  water,  put  them  into  a  quart  bottle,  fill  it  with 
best  sweet  Malaga  wine,  and  add  sugar  at  discretion. 

Dose,  from  half  to  a  wineglassful,  three  or  four  tunes  a  day. 

ANTIDYSPEPTIC  CONSERVE. 

Take  one  pound  of  fresh  blossoms  of  hollyhock,  or  of  dry  ones  moist- 
ened to  the  same  consistence  as  the  green,  pound  them  well  together 
in  a  mortar  ;  then  add  four  pounds  of  white  sugar — pound  until  a  paste  is 
formed — then  knead  or  work  in  with  a  pestle  the  following  powder,  made 
fine :  two  pounds  each  of  poplar  bark  and  ginger,  half  a  pound  each  of 
golden  seal,  balmony,  cloves,  slippery  elm  bark  and  cayenne.  When  it 
becomes  of  the  consistence  of  dough,  add  a  fourth  of  an  ounce  of  penny- 
royal, well  mixed.  Make  it  into  a  loaf,  or  pills,  or  any  other  form  you 
wish,  and  let  it  drj'  for  use. 

A  piece  of  this  may  be  dissolved  in  the  mouth,  and  swallowed  with  the 
saliva.  It  will  answer  as  a  good  substitute  for  tobacco.  This  is  a  pow- 
erful antidyspeptic  agent,  and  an  excellent  article  to  be  used  by  people  of 
weak,  debilitated,  and  consumptive  habits.  The  spring  is  the  best  time 
to  try  its  beneficial  effects.  People  then  are  apt  to  feel  weak  and  faint, 
from  the  imperfect  digestion  of  their  food,  produced  by  the  change  in  the 
atmosphere  or  other  causes.  .^ 

The  use  of  this  article  will  give  tone  to  and  brace  up  the  stomach,  and 
impart  to  a  person  a  vigorous  and  lively  sensation. 


Antiseptic  and  Stimulant. 


GUM  MYRRH — Balsamodendron  Myrrha. 

Myrrh  is  the  most  powerful  antiseptic  known,  and  is  on  that  account 
highly  serviceable  in  all  putrid  affections  whatever.  It  is  almost  a  cer- 
tain remedy  for  cholera,  and  all  cases  of  putridity  of  the  bowels.  It  is 
good  in  female  obstructions,  difficulties  of  the  lungs,  and  for  weak  joints, 
sprains  and  bruises.  Combined  with  alcohol  and  cayenne  is  the  most 
usual  form  of  using  it.     [See  page  629.] 

No.  6.    RHEUMATIC  OR  HOT  DROPS. 

IMPROVED  RHEUMATIC  DROPS. 

1.  Take  one  gallon  of  high  cheny  spirits,  one  pound  gum  myi*rh, 
four  ounces  golden  seal,  four  ounces  bayberry,  one  ounce  cayenne;  mix 
and  shake  once  a  day  for  several  days.  The  solid  articles  must  be  pul- 
verised. 

2.  Take  one  pound  of  gum  mjTrh  pulverized,  and  one  ounce  of  fine 
cayenne;  simmer  them  for  twenty  or  thirty  minutes  in  one  quart  of  sweet 
wine,  this  will  decompose  the  myrrh  rapidly.  Then  add  two  ounces  of 
pulverized  prickly  ash  seeds,  one  ounce  tincture  of  camphor,  one  gallon 
of  West  India  rum,  and  four  pounds  of  fine  loaf  sugar.  This  is  an  ex- 
cellent article  for  all  kinds  of  sprains,  for  a  weak  back,  &c.,  to  be  bathed 


710  THE  THOMSONIAN 

on  and  taken  internally.    It  is  also  a  valuable  remedy  for  relax,  dysen- 
tery, &c. 

3.  Take  one  gallon  of  any  kind  of  liig-h  wines,  one  pound  of  guni 
myrrh  made  fine,  and  one  ounce  of  cayenne;  put  them  into  a  stone  ju"" 
and  boil  it  for  a  few  minutes  in  a  kettle  of  water,  leaving  the  jug  un- 
corked. It  maybe  prepared  without  boiling  by  letting  it  stand  and  shak- 
ing it  two  or  three  times  a  day  for  a  week,  when  it  will  be  fit  for  use. 

These  drops  are  to  remove  pain  and  prevent  mortification,  either  inter- 
nally or  externally  applied. 

Dose,  from  a  tea  to  a  tablespoonful  in  a  little  hot  water,  or  given  in 
other  medicine. 

They  may  be  used  to  bathe  with  in  all  cases  of  external  swellings  or 
pain.  It  it  an  excellent  remedy  for  the  rheumatism,  in  which  case  take 
ateaspoonful  and  bathe  the  parts  affected.  It  will  relieve  headache  by  tak- 
ing a  dose ,  bathing  it  on  the  head  and  snuffing  it  up  (he  nose .  It  is  good  for 
bruises,  sprains,  swollen  joints,  and  old  sores;  it  will  allay  inflammation, 
reduce  swellings,  ease  pain  and  produce  a  tendency  to  heal.  There  is 
scarcely  a  complaint  in  which  this  may  not  be  used  to  advantage.  It  is 
the  best  preservative  against  mortification  I  have  ever  found. 

For  bathing,  in  rheumatism,  itch,  or  for  any  other  external  application, 
add  one  quarter  part  of  spirits  of  turpentine;  and  for  sprains  or  bruises, 
a  small  quantity  of  camphor  and  nerve  ointment  may  be  added. 

COMPOSITION  POWDERS— i^irsf  Preparation. 

Take  of  bayberry  two  pounds,  ginger  ose  pound,  cayenne  and  cloves 
each  two  ounces;  all  finely  pulverized  and  well  mixed. 

Second  Preparation. 
Take  of  baybeiTy,  ginger,  poplar  and  hemlock  bark  each  one  pound, 
of  red  or  white  oak  bark  half  a  pound,  three  ounces  of  cayenne  and  two 
of  cloves,  all  finely  pulverized  and  well  mixed. 

Third  Preparation. 
Take  two  pounds  each  of  bayberry  and  ginger,  one  pound  each  of  pop- 
lar and  oak  bark,  three  ounces  of  cayenne  and  two  of  cloves,  all  finely 
pulverized  and  well  mixed. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  USING. 

Let  either  of  these  compounds  be  taken  for  canker  and  to  promote  per- 
spiration, the  patient  being  shielded  from  the  air.  Dose,  a  tea-spoonful 
in  a  cup  of  hot  water,  sweetened. 

This  is  for  the  first  stages  and  less  violent  attacks  of  disease.  It  is  a 
valuable  medicine,  and  may  be  safely  employed  in  all  cases.  It  is  good 
for  relax,  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  to  remove  all  obstructions 
caused  by  cold.  A  few  doses  of  this,  the  patient  being  in  bed,  with  a 
steaming  stone  at  the  feet,  will  cure  a  bad  cold,  and  usually  throw  off 
disease  in  its  first  stages. 


JVervines. 


LADIES'  SLITVER—Cypripedium. 

This  is  an  excellent  article  in  all  spasmodic  nen'ous  or  hysterical  af- 
fections.   It  is  entirely  destitute  of  narcotic  properties  and  may  be  used 


MATERIA  MEUICA.  711 

with  freedom  and  safety  in  all  cases  of  disease.     After  its  operation  the 
patient  feels  cheerful  and  happy  in  belli  body  and  mind.     [See  page  632^1 

ASAFETID A— /"erwZa  jlsafatida.. 

This  article  is  powerfully  antispasmodic  expectorant  and  feebly  laxa- 
tive. It  is  very  useful  in  the  treatment  of  hypochondria,  hysteria,  con- 
vulsions, spasms  and  all  cases  of  nervous  debility.  From  the  union  of 
its  different  qualities  it  is  an  excellent  article  in  all  difficulties  of  the 
lungs.  It  may  be  substituted  for  the  faregoing,  and  is  also  a  valuable  ar- 
ticle in  constipation  and  flatulency.     [See  page  634.] 

CAMPHOR — Laurus  Ccmsphora. 

This  exerts  a  considerable  influence  over  the  brain  and  nervous  system. 
It  increases  the  heat  of  the  strrface,  promotes  perspiration,  strengthens 
the  pulse  and  allays  nervous  irritation.  It  expels  wind  from  the  stomach 
and  may  be  used  as  a  nervine  when  tbe  asafetida  and  valeiian  cannot  be 
Lad.     [See  page  636.] 

Note. — Holland  gin  is  an  excellent  nervine  and  may  be  used  in  all 
cases  of  nervous  initability  with  good  effect.  Let  it  be  prepared  in  form 
of  sling,  and  taken  hot  on  going  to  bed. 

SKUNK  CABBAGE— /dodes  Fatidus. 

This  is  an  antispasmodic  stimulant  and  narcotic,  and  is  good  for  all 
affections  of  the  lungs,  hysteria  and  rheumatism.  It  is  a  valuable  remedy 
for  coughs  and  dropsy.     [See  page  638.] 

BITTERSWEET— .SoZanwrn  Dulcamara. 

It  has  the  power  of  increasing  the  secretions  of  the  kidneys  and  skin, 
and  in  large  doses  produces  narcotic  effects.  It  is  useful  in  mania  and 
also  in  cutaneous  affections.  An  ointment  is  made  from  it  very  useful  ta 
remove  stiffness  of  the  joints  and  callouses,  and  also  for  spiains  and  re- 
laxed or  contracted  muscles.     [See  page  639.] 


Antiscorbutics, 


BURDOCK— ^rcfum  Lappa. 

This  root  is  sudorific,  diaphoretic  and  aperient,  withont  irritating  pro- 
perties, and  is  a  valuable  remedy  for  all  scorbutic  affections.  The  seeds 
are  diuretic  and  may  be  profitably  employed  where  such  articles  are  ne- 
cessar)'-,  and  also  to  cleanse  all  mipurities  from  the  blood.  The  leaves 
are  useful  in  drafts  and  may  be  applied  to  the  feet  or  amy  part  of  the  body 
suffering  with  pain.     [See  page  641.] 

BLACK  SNAKE  'ROOT—Macrotys  Serpmtaria. 

This  is  a  very  useful  article  in  rheumatism,  dropsy,  affections  of  the 
uterus  and  pulmonary  consumption.  It  exerts  a  great  influence  over 
the  nervous  and  arterial  systems,  and  increases  the  secretions  of  the  kid- 
neys and  skin.     [See  page  643.] 

PIPSISEWA  OR  PRINCESS  VlNE—ChimaphUa  Umbellata. 
Its  active  properties  are  antiscorbutic,  tonic  and  astringent,  and  is  good 


732  THE   THOMSONIAN 

in  rheumatism,   scrofula,  affections  of  the  kidney  and  all  scorbutic  diffi- 
culties.   £See  page  644.] 

GREEN  OSIER— Cornus  Cirdnali. 

Good  for  all  kinds  of  inflammation,  especially  of  the  e)'es.  It  strength- 
-ens  the  stomach  and  removes  scorbutic  difficulties.     [See  page  646.] 

BOCKS— Ramex. 

Very  useful  in  scorbutic  disorders  and  cutaneous  eruptions.  They  are 
antiscorbutic,  aperient  and  tonic ;  good  in  all  cases  where  any  articles 
under  this  head  may  be  used.     [See  page  648.] 

PRICKLY  ASH — Xanthoxylum  Fraxineum. 
This  is  an  antiscorbutic,  antispasmodic,  stimulant  and  diaphoretic;  good 
for  coldness  in  the  extremeties,  chills,  inflammation  in  the  face,  tooth- 
ache, &c.     [See  page  650.] 

YARROW— Achillea  MilUfolium. 

Internally,  yarrow  is  useful  in  nervous  affections,  colic,  and  intermit- 
tent fevers;  externally,  for  all  kinds  of  inflammatory  sores,  salt-rheum, 
cracked  hands  and  piles.     [See  page  6.52.] 

LOVAGE — Ligusticum  Levisticum. 

Good  for  scrofula,  venereal,  rheumatism,  and  female  obstructions. 
£See  page  652.] 

CVBEBS—Cuheba. 

This  is  a  grateful  tonic,  stomachic  and  regulator  of  the  digestive  or- 
gans. It  is  also  a  useful  remedy  in  gonorrhoea  and  first  stages  of  syphil- 
lis.     [See  page  653.] 

MEADOW  FERN— 3fyrica  Gale. 

Useful  in  salt-rheum,  tetter,  itch,  and  all  poisonous  eruptions  of  the 
skin.     [See  page  649.] 

FERN  OINTMENT. 

Take  of  the  leaves  of  meadow  fern,  the  buds  of  balm  of  Gilead,  and 
gum  myrrh,  of  each  equal  parts;  simmer  in  fresh  butter,  and  strain.  Let 
it  be  hardened  with  bayberry  tallow  and  rosin. 

DRINKS  FOR  BAD  HUMORS. 

Take  four  ounces  each  of  the  following  articles :  burdock  seeds,  prin- 
cess pine,  sarsaparilla  and  sassafras;  let  them  all  be  dry,  finely  pulver- 
ized and  well  mixed.  Steep  one  tablespoonful  in  a  pint  of  hot  water, 
and  let  it  be  used  as  a  constant  drink. 

DECOCTIONS  OF  SARSAPARILLA.  FOR  THE  BLOOD. 
Take  of  sarsaparilla  root  six  ounces,  soft  water  one  gallon.  After  ma- 
cerating in  boiling  water  for  two  hours,  then  take  out  the  root  and  bruise 
it;  add  it  again  to  the  liquor,  and  macerate  it  once  more  for  two  hours; 
then  boil  down  the  liquor  to  four  pints,  and  strain  it.  Take  from  a  gill 
to  half  a  pint  daily,  or  more  if  thought  advisable. 

COMPOUND  DECOCTION  OF  SARSAPARILLA. 

Take  of  sarsaparilla  root,  cut  and  bruised,  six  ounces;  the  bark  of  sas- 
safras root,  lignum  vitas  dust  (guaiacum  wood)  or  shavings,  liquorice 


MATER  FA  MEDICA,  713 

TDot,  of  each  one  ounce.     Bmise  them  well  tog-ether,  and  put  them  into 
^five  quarts  of  water,  and  let  it  steep  over  a  gentle  fire  for  six  hours;  then 

boil  down  the  liquors  to  one-half  or  to  five  pints, and  strain  off. 

Tlie  dose  is,  from  one  gill  to  half  a  pint  daily,  and  to  be  taken  for  all 

bad  humors. 

These  decoctions  arc  of  very  great  use  in  purifying-  the  blood,  and  re- 
solving obstructions  in  scorbutic  and  scrofulous  cases;  also  in  cutaneous 
cniptions,  and  many  other  diseases.  Obstinate  swellings,  that  have  re- 
sisted the  effects  of  other  remedies  for  upwards  of  twelve  months,  have 
been  cured  by  drinking  a  quart  of  this  decoction  daily  for  some  time. 

Decoctions  of  sar^aparilla  ought  to  be  made  fresh  every  day,  as  they 
very  soon  become  fetid  and  unfit  for  use. 

Whiletaking  this  tea,  the  courses  of  medicine  may  be  used  with  great 
advantage . 

ANTISCORBUTIC  DRINK, 
Meadow  fern  leaves  and  burs,  bruised  and  made  into  a  tea,  are  very 
useful  in  cleansing  the  blood  of  all  humors.     For  this  purpose,  it  is  more 
valuable  than  sarsaparilla. 


JPowerful  Antiscorbutic  Olntrncnt 


TOBACCO  OINTMENT— OR  UNGUENTUM  TABACI. 

Take  half  a  pound  of  the  leaves  of  tobacco,  one  pound  of  dock  roots, 
one  pound  of  lovAge  root;  bmi-e  the  leaves  and  roots  in  a  mortar,  and 
.put  them  into  two  gallons  of  soft  spring,  or  rain  water;  boil  for  one  hour, 
strain  off,  press  the  grains  and  simmer  the  liquor  down  to  the  thickness  of 
molasses,  then  add  two  pounds  of  fresh  lard,  four  ounces  of  beeewax,  and 
four  ounces  of  burgundy  pitch;  continue  a  moderate  heat  just  sufficient 
to  dry  away  the  moisture,  and  unite  the  compound  into  an  ointment  for  use. 

This  is  tbe  most  powerful  antiscorbutic  ointment  that  I  have  ever 
become  acquainted  with.  I  first  observed  the  salutary  operation  of  this 
valuable  ointment,  in  a  case  of  saltrheum  of  six  years  standing,  upon  the 
Island  of  Nantucket.  The  sore  embraced  the  whole  back  part  of  the 
head  from  the  crown  to  the  neck,  and  from  ear  to  ear.  So  severe  was 
the  irritation,  that  the  hands  of  the  child  were  muffled  to  restrain  him  from 
tearing  tiie  skin  seriou-ly  with  his  finger  nails.  Notwith-tanding  the 
hand;  were  shut  and  a  strong  cloth  put  over  and  tied  fast  about  the  wrist 
to  keep  his  fingers  thus  closely  confined,  on  going  to  bed  he  would  turn 
upon  his  face,  and  with  hi>hand;  thu;  muffled,  rub  off  the  scabs  from 
the  whole  suiface  of  the  sore,  and  the  blood  and  water  would  course  their 
way  down  to  the  back  of  the  neck,  staining  the  shirt  and  bed  clothes  very 
much  with  the  foul  ulcerous  matter. 

The  be  it  medical  as.istance  in  the  place  had  been  employed  for  three 
or  four  years,  but  to  no  advantage;  the  parents  completely  despairing 
of  the  child's  finding  any  benefit,  except  in  time  they  thought  he  might 
out  grow  it. 

By  the  application  of  this  ointment  the  sore  was  healed  entirely  in  three 
weeks.  In  a  month  or  two  after,  it  broke  out  again,  about  as  large  as  a 
cent;  the  ointment  wai  again  applied  and  the  sores  healed.  It  is  now 
about  eighteen  years  since,  and  the  sores  have  not  again  broken  out  to 
the  knowledge  of  the  writer. 

46 


714  THE    THOMSOiMAH 

A  second  case  of  the  same  complaint  I  had  about  one  year  after  the  «me 
before  mentioned,  which  was  the  most  violent  of  any  I  ever  saw,  as  there 
was  not  a  particle  of  the  natural  cuticle  or  skin  to  be  seen  above  the  chin ; 
in  fact  the  whole  surface  of  the  head  was  one  solid  mass  of  corruption > 
also  the  joints  of  the  shoulders,  elbows,  wrists,  hips,  knees,  and  ankles. 
The  only  sound  skin  was  to  be  found  on  the  body  and  between  ihe  joints. 
The  child  had  been  afflicted  with  this  complaint  near  three  years.  The 
mother  had  employed  the  best  physicians  in  the  place,  and  they  had  giv- 
en their  unremitting  attention  to  the  case  for  about  two  years  without  any 
perceptible  benefit. 

The  mother  having  heard  of  the  case  of  the  boy  whose  head  I  had  pre- 
viously cured,  as  before  mentioned,  after  being  atllicted  six  years,  she 
went  to  see  the  child,  and  examined  the  head,  for  her  own  satisfaction. 
On  her  return  home  I  was  sent  for.  I  went  immediately  to  the  house, 
and  after  the  usual  salutation  on  entering,  the  lady,  who  was  a  quakeress, 
said — Is  thee  Doctor  Thomson.''  That  is  my  name,  I  replied.  Well,  1 
have  been  to  see  Coffin's  child,  whom  thee  cured  of  the  salt-rheum,  and 
am  so  well  satisfied  with  thy  practice  in  that  case,  that  I  have  sent  for 
thee  to  see  if  thee  can  render  me  a  lilie  service  in  the  case  of  my  child . 
There  is  the  poor  distressed  object,  (pointing  to  the  cradle)  not  sick  at 
heart,  but  see  the  dreadful  state  of  his  face.  I  have  had  Dr.  G.  to  attend 
to  the  child  for  about  two  years  past,  and  I  will  give  thee  six  months  to 
effect  a  cure,  and  no  longer. 

I  remarked,  that  I  thought  she  ought  to  give  me  as  great  a  length  of 
time  as  doctor  G.,  if  I  effected  the  cure  :  but  not  so — six  months  was  my 
limit.  She  said  that  Dr.  G.  was  an  old  friend,  or  he  would  not  have  been 
favored  so  long. 

I  made  the  commencement,  and  in  three  months  the  sores  were  entire- 
ly healed,  and  the  face,  body  and  limbs,  were  without  a  scar;  and  it  ap- 
peared to  me  to  be  the  fairest  complexioned  child  I  ever  saw.  The  ope- 
ration of  the  medicine  seemed  to  improve  the  child  both  in  strength  and 
color  of  the  skin. 

I  have  cured  a  number  of  other  cases  of  salt-rheum  and  scorbutic  ulcers 
with  this  ointment. 

PREPARATIOIf   OF   THE  OINTMENT   BEFORE  USE. 

Take  a  lump  about  the  size  of  a  walnut,  and  mix  it  well  with  a  table- 
spoonful  of  hog's  lard,  or  about  three  parts  of  lard  to  one  of  ointment. 
Then  give  the  patient  some  prepared  composition,  hot  drops,  or  some- 
thing to  warm  the  stomach.  Then  wash  the  parts  affected  by  the  disease 
with  warm  soapsuds,  to  cleanse  the  same;  dry  them  off  with  a  cloth,  and 
take  a  portion  of  the  ointment  about  the  size  of  a  pea  and  iiib  it  over 
them,  and  so  continue  until  the  whole  surface  of  the  sores  is  saturated. 
Increase  the  strength  of  the  ointment  daily  until  you  are  enabled  to  apply 
it  in  full  force. 

In  a  few  minutes  after  the  application,  the  patient  will  begin  to  look 
pale,  grow  sick  at  the  stomach,  and  will  vomit  profusely,  if  the  ointment 
is  of  sufficient  strength,  by  which  means  the  whole  system,  both  internal- 
ly and  externally,  will  become  cleansed  by  its  use.  I  think  tliis  oint- 
ment the  most  powerful  antiscorbutic  that  can  be  applied  to  the  surface 
of  the  body,  as  it  purifies  the  skin  and  blood  at  the  same  time,  of  the 
sharp  acrid  humors. 

Those  who  have  cutaneous  eruptions  which  they  wish  to  be  rid  of,  will 
never  regret  the  application  of  this  remedy;  but  they  must  not  mind  the 
temporary  sickness  which  it  will  certainly  create,  as  there  is  no  danger, 
that  I  have  ever  known,  to  arise  from  its  effects,  which  are  the  same  pre- 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  715 

cisely  as  are  experienced  from  the  seed  of  the  lobelia  or  the  brown  emetic 
when  under  a  course  of  medicine. 

This  ointment  may  be  applied  to  the  neck  and  breast  of  children  to 
good  advantage  in  cases  of  the  croup.  It  is  also  good  for  old  ulcers,  fe- 
ver sores,  and  for  tetanus,  or  lockjaw,  by  bathing  the  parts  affected,  and 
drying  it  in  by  the  lire.  It  is  excellent  to  bathe  joints,  or  contracted 
muscles. 

There  is  no  sore  upon  the  surface  where  this  ointment  may  not  be  use- 
fully applied,  especially  if  it  cannot  be  healed  with  other  remedies  usual 
in  such  cases. 

Take  a  bath  three  or  four  times  a  week  and  cleanse  the  surface,  as  di- 
rected under  the  head  of  "  Treatment  of  the  Surface." 

N.  B.  Never  be  frightened  at  the  effect  of  this  ointment,  as  there  is  no 
danger  if  the  stomach  is  kept  warm  and  well  nourished  with  gmel. 

The  antiscorbutic  tea  may  be  used  daily  while  the  ointment  is  being 
applied. 


TREATMENT  OF  THE  SURFACE  AFTER  TAKING  A  BATH. 
for  the  benefit  of  scorbutic  patients. 

After  having  taken  a  bath  and  filled  the  extremities  with  an  active  cir- 
culation of  blood,  which  may  be  known  by  the  fulness  of  the  veins,  pour 
over  the  whole  body  a  quart  of  water,  with  the  chill  removed  sufficiently 
to  leave  it  gently  tepid,  or  about  the  temperature  of  the  air.  Then  rub 
the  body  with  a  napkin  severely,  so  much  so  as  to  create  a  cutaneous  ex- 
citement and  a  warm  glow  throughout  the  whole  exterior  system.  Thea 
take  four  ounces  of  the  tincture  of  lobelia,  and  dissolve  as  much  saleratus 
in  it  as  it  will  bear.  Pour  over  the  body  a  quantity  of  this  preparation, 
and  rub  it  in  with  the  hands,  and  upon  the  lunbs  also,  and  it  leaves  an  agree- 
able genial  glow,  that  is  very  pleasant  to  the  person  who  experiences  the 
operation.  It  clears  the  capillary  vessels,  and  is  an  excellent  thing  to 
correct  morbid  obstructions  of  the  perspiration. 

Where  the  external  surface  is  dry  and  inert  after  bathing,  and  applying 
the  cold  or  tepid  water  as  above  directed,  the  rheumatic  liniment  may  also 
be  used  thoroughly  over  the  body,  the  same  as  the  tmcture  was  applied, 
causing  a  lively  and  pleasant  glow,  that  is  very  useful  to  promote  perspi- 
ration, for  dyspeptic,  rheumatic  and  dropsical  habits 


ANTISCORBUTIC  POULTICE, 
For  Fever  Sores,   Whitlows,  Biles,  Old  Ulcerous  Sores,  King's  Fvil 

4-c. 

To  half  a  pint  of  hot  water,  add  two  heaping  tablespoonsful  of  fine  salt 
and  one  fablespoonful  each  of  cayenne  and  brown  emetic,  well  pulveriz- 
ed; stir  them  well  together,  and  add  one  gill  of  soft  soap,  one  tablespoon- 
ful  of  ginger,  the  same  quantity  of  slippery  elm  and  sponge  crackers,  and 
wheat  bread  or  Indian  meal  sufficient  to  make  it  of  a  proper  consistence. 

When  this  poultice  is  applied,  keep  it  moist  by  occasionally  wetting  it 
with  a  teaspoonful  of  water,  or  dipping  it  into  water.  Hot  medicine 
should  be  freely  taken,  to  prevent  the  difficulty  from  striking  to  the  sto- 
mach, and  to  prevent  faint  sinking  sensations,  and  loss  of  appetite. 

For  fever  sores,  old  ulcers,  rheumatism,  &c.,  this  remedy  has  not  its 
equal,  to  our  knowledge. 

When  there  is  much  distress  and  a  high  state  of  inflammation,  and  the 
sore  is  not  yet  opened,  much  relief  will  be  obtained  by  buiiiyrg  a  piece 


716  THE    THOMSONIAN 

of  punk  upon  the  part  (see  caustics,  page  679,)  and  (hen  applying  this 
poultice.     Almost  immediate  relief  from  distress  will  be  the  result. 

A  course  of  medicine  at  this  lime,  to  equalize  the  fluids  of  the  body, 
will  be  attended  with  the  mo>t  beneficial  res^ults.  We  have  cured  with 
this  poultice,  in  connection  with  courses  of  medicine,  a  case  of  hip  dis- 
ease of  twenty-seven  years  standing,  several  fever  sores  and  bad  ulcers,  be- 
sides dispersing  or  scattering  many  that  had  commenced,  on  various 
parts  of  the  body. 

A  very  bad  scorbutic  difficulty  was  cured  upon  a  young  man's  neck, 
extending  from  the  shoulder  across  the  breast  and  up  the  side  of  the  neck, 
to  the  upper  jaw  and  right  cheek.  This  case  had  been  given  over  by  the 
regular  faculty  as  incurable,  but  we  restored  him  to  good  health  by  the 
use  of  this  poultice,  accompanied  by  courses  and  the  antiscorbutic  syrup 
(see  page  642). 


OUTWARD  APPLICATION, 

WHILE  USING  THE  AKTISCORBUTIC  DRINKS. 

Make  as  strong  a  tincture  of  lobelia  inflata  as  you  can,  by  boiling  it  in 
water  and  then  putting  it  into  spirits.  Add  a  teaspoonful  of  saleratus  to  eve- 
ry four  ounces,  and  with  this  wash  the  parts  affected.  At  the  same  time 
make  a  daily  use  of  the  drinks,  and  the  good  etfects  will  soon  be  visible. 
After  taking  a  vapor  bath,  let  the  whole  body  be  bathed  Avith  this  article. 


TO  CURE  TETTER  IN  THE  FACE,  OR  BARBER'S  ITCH. 

Wajh  the  face  with  pure  lime  water  or  a  lye  made  of  hard  wood  ashes; 
let  it  dry,  then  neutralize  the  alkali  by  washing  with  good  vinegar.  The 
lye  kills  the  insect,  and  by  timely  application  the  vinegar  prevents  the 
corrosive  effects  of  the  alkali.  If  the  system  is  much  impregnated  with 
the  scrofulous  affection,  use  freely  of  the  antiscorbutic  syrups,  or  drinks 
to  cleanse  the  blood. 


Cathartics. 


We  wish  our  remarks  in  relation  to  cathartics,  on  page  654,  to  be  re- 
membered, as  we  do  not  wish  Dr.  Samuel  Thomson  to  be  held  accounta- 
ble for  what  we  may  say  in  relation  to  this  matter.  We  may  honestly 
differ  on  >his  subject,  but  peifectly  agree  that  if  people  will  take  such 
medicines,  let  them  be  of  the  most  gentle  kind,  such  as  peach  leaf  tea, 
pepper  pods,  beef's  gall,  castor  oil,  or  senna,  instead  of  calomel,  croton 
oil,  gamboge,  and  other  powerful  and  poisonous  drugs. 

Note. — Drastic  cathartics  should  be  used  in  no  case  where  there  is 
danger  of  mollification.  The  gall  cathartic  or  oil  may  be  used  to  advan- 
tage, compounded  with  rheumatic  drops  or  gin  sling,  in  case  of  relax  or 
dysentery.  Tlius  compounded,  they  soothe  the  bowels,  and  give  quiet  to 
the  arterial  and  nervous  systems,  producing  sleep  and  rest  to  the  patient. 


THE  NATURAL  PHYSIC  FOR  THE  BODY. 
After  the  natural  physic  of  the  body  which  is  the  gall,  has  exerted  its 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  717 

powers  and  has  failed  in  producing  that  healthy  action  in  the  stomach 
and  bowels  that  is  so  necessary,  the  next  nearest  to  the  natural  physic 
should  be  used.  Cathartics  should  never  be  used  if  we  have  any  more 
effectual  remedy.  After  the  gall  fails  in  producing  action  we  must  sub- 
stitute art.  Rye  and  Indian  bread  is  an  excellent  remedy;  let  it  be  con- 
stantly used  for  a  time,  and  for  a  change  if  necessary,  substitute  the 
bread  made  from  unbolted  wheat.  Another  good  remedy  is  a  greening 
apple  to  be  eaten  after  each  meal.  This  will  keep  the  bowels  in  regular 
order  longer  than  any  other  fruit  kind  that  can  be  preserved.  I  am  ac- 
quainted with  an  old  gentleman  in  this  city  whose  age  is  between  70  and 
80  years;  he  is  a  master  builder,  and  is  actively  engaged  in  his  profes- 
sion, and  to  appearance  you  would  not  suppose  him  over  55  or  60  years 
of  age.  He  takes  no  physic,  but  always  after  dinner  you  will  see  him 
eating  his  juicy  greening  apple,  which  he  thinks  is  the  best  physician  he 
can  employ.  This  man  has  quite  a  florid  countenance  and  lively  eyes, 
which  have  a  jf reat  antipathy  to  doctors.  This  case  is  a  practical  monu- 
ment of  the  salutary  effects  of  the  greening  apple  upon  the  bowels.  I 
here  take  the  liberty  to  recommend  for  the  good  of  others  his  practical 
knowledge  on  himself.  In  a  number  of  cases  I  have  seen  the  good  effects 
of  apples  for  costiveness. 

ANIMAL  PHYSIC— BEEF  GALL. 

Take  1  quart  of  beef  gall,  put  it  into  a  glass  bottle  of  3  or  4  gallons, 
then  add  one  gallon  of  the  best  Holland  gin,  and  one  gallon  of  Die  best 
sugar  house  molasses  ;  shake  it  well  together  and  scent  it  with  pennyroy- 
al. This  is  an  excellent  corrector  of  the  digestive  organs,  and  well  cal- 
culated to  remove  constipation  of  the  bowels  and  restore  their  natural 
action. 

APPLICATION. 

Take  from  half  to  one  glass  night  and  moming.  It  will  coirect  the 
digestion  and  remove  the  costive  state  of  the  bowels,  by  which  means 
the  appetite  is  sharpened,  the  circulation  quickened  in  the  extremities, 
and  thus  regulating  the  nervous  system,  thereby  making  the  mind  cheer- 
ful and  the  body  active,  and  establishing  a  regularity  through  the  system 
that  renders  life  pleasant  and  a  blessing. 

Beef  gall  may  be  dried  down  and  made  into  pills  and  used  to  great  ad- 
vantage ;  or  it  may  be  mixed  with  bitter  root  or  golden  seal,  which 
makes  a  very  valuable  pill. 

PEPPER  PODS. 

Take  at  night  on  going  to  bed  from  4  to  10  cayenne  pepper  pods  and 
they  will  generally  operate  during  the  night  or  next  morning.  The  op- 
eration of  these  pods  upon  the  bowels  of  dyspeptics  produce  happy  ef- 
fects upon  the  mind,  as  they  carry  warmth  and  activity  with  them,  dif- 
fusing a  lively  sensation  through  the  lower  extremities,  equalising  the 
circulation  throughout  the  body,  and  loosening  the  head  from  the  many 
bands  that  have  apparently  kept  the  mind  in  bondage  from  the  time  the 
costive  habit  commenced.  From  which  time  the  feet  became  cold  to 
excess,  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  head  became  excessively  hot  and 
oppressed  from  the  additional  circulation  from  the  feet,  which  was  forced 
to  the  head  by  the  torpidity  of  the  bowels.  When  the  bowels  become 
rio^ht  again,  the  feet  and  stomach  warm  and  active,  and  the  head  cool  as 
usual  when  in  health,  order  will  reign  once  more  throughout  the  whole 
body.     [See  page  590.] 


718  THE    THOMSONIAN 

PEACH— THE  FRUIT,  LEAVES,  FLOWERS  AND  BARK. 
Take  one  ounce  of  peach  flowers  or  leaves  and  put  them  into  three 
gills  of  water  J  let  it  simmer  at  a  moderate  heat  for  half  an  hour;  strain 
off  and  sweeten  it  with  sugar  and  add  a  little  milk.  Take  half  at  night 
and  if  necessary  take  the  balance  in  the  morning.  This  infusion  is  an 
excellent  corrector  of  the  digestion,  especially  for  children  when  teeth- 
ing, and  for  all  kinds  of  derangement  of  the  bowels  for  either  old  or 
young.  The  properties  of  the  peach  leaves  are  much  the  same  as  the  pit 
or  kernel.  A  free  use  of  ripe  and  mellow  peaches  will  produce  the  same 
effect  upon  the  bowels.  Children  who  are  troubled  with  a  bad  state  of 
the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  of  feeble  constitution,  should  make  free  use 
of  ripe  peaches,  and  a  great  benefit  will  be  derived  to  the  constitution. 
The  peach  bark  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose,  when  neither  the 
flowers,  leaves  nor  peaches  can  be  had.     See  page  624. 

CATHARTIC  COMPOUND. 

Take  four  ounces  bitter  root,  eight  ounces  peach  leaves  and  eight 
ounces  butternut  bark.  Bruize  the  articles  fine  in  a  mortar.  Put  them 
into  a  brass  kettle,  and  add  one  gallon  of  soft  spring  or  rain  water,  boil 
it  down  to  about  half  a  gallon,  then  strain  off  and  press  the  grains. 
Clean  out  the  kettle,  and  then  boil  it  again  down  to  about  one  pint.  Let 
it  stand  for  12  hours  and  settle ;  pour  off  the  clear  liquor,  and  to  this  decoc- 
tion add  a  like  quantity  of  fourth  proof  brandy,  and  the  same  quantity 
of  molasses.  Put  it  into  a  glass  bottle  or  stone  jug,  stop  it  tight  and 
shake  it  well,  and  it  is  fit  for  use. 

APPLICATION. 

Take  a  tea-spoonful  about  three  times  a  day,  twice  a  week,  and  it  avUI 
remove  flatulency  and  restore  order  where  disorder  was  prominent  before 
in  the  bowels.  The  stimulating  effects  of  the  butternut  will  remove  al- 
most all  kinds  of  cholic  pains.  Judgment  should  be  used  in  its  applica- 
tion, or  it  may  produce  a  reaction  in  the  bowels,  and  a  costive  habit  more 
violent  than  before.  Increase  or  diminish  the  quantity  according  to 
judgment. 

BITTER  ROOT— -■^poci/nMm  Canabinum. 

The  Apocynum  or  bitter  root  may  be  used  to  good  advantage  in  dys- 
peptic habits.  To  remove  costiveness,  it  has  not  its  equal  in  the  vegeta. 
ble  materia  medica.  It  may  be  taken  half  a  tea-spoonful  in  a  little  hot 
water,  in  composition  or  in  the  dyspepsia  powders  prepared,  and  in  fact 
in  any  manner  that  it  can  be  most  conveniently  swallowed  without  sick- 
ening the  stomach. 

For  confirmed  dyspeptics,  where  artificial  means  must  be  used  to  pro- 
duce action  in  the  bowels,  this  article  may  be  used  with  great  satisfac- 
tion to  the  patient;  for  when  taken  in  small  quantities,  say  quarter  of  a 
tea-spoonful  three  or  four  times  a  day,  it  will  require  some  days  for  the 
powerful  correction  properties  to  be  made  manifest,  and  then  they  are  sat- 
isfactory. 

BUTTERNUT— Jitg^ans  Cyneria. 

The  extract  of  the  butternut  bark  I  have  used  in  a  great  variety  of 
ways.  It  is  a  powerful  aiixiliary  in  the  third  preparation,  in  cramps,  con- 
vulsions, and  in  all  cases  of  suspended  animation.  I  first  used  this  com- 
pound in  Montreal,  in  cases  of  cholera  in  1832,  and  was  well  pleased 
with  its  lively,  searching  and  stimulating  effects,  as  it  would  start  a  mois- 
ture in  the  palms  of  the  hands  in  a  very  few  minutes,  relieving  all  pains 


MATERIA  MEDICA,  719 

and  cramps  in  the  extremities  in  much  less  time  than  the  preparation 
without  it. 

It  may  be  used  for  compounding;  emetic  pills,  together  with  brown 
emetic,  cayenne,  nerve  powder,  or  composition.  Regulating  the  strength 
of  the  pills  by  judgment. 

The  pills  may  be  made  with  a  little  No.  2,  and  used  for  cholie  pains, 
but  by  being  often  repeated,  the  cathartic  properties  are  lost,  and  a  se- 
vere costive  state  of  the  bowels  succeeds  the  operation.  Therefore,  as  a 
cathartic,  it  should  be  used  with  caution.  A  tea  made  of  the  green  bark 
sweetened,  will  generally  relieve  the  cholie  at  once. 

CASSIA  MARILANDICA— ^mencare  Senna. 

This  article  I  have  always  used  in  connection  Avith  sage  and  ginger. 
From  its  operations  I  have  witnessed  the  most  salutarj'  effects  in  cases  of 
violent  attacks  of  typhus  fever.  In  one  family  on  the  island  of  Nantuck- 
et, where  three  members  had  died  (two  sons  ane  one  daughter,)  one  in 
seven,  one  in  eleven,  and  tlie  last  in  four  days,  all  of  whom  were  labor- 
ing under  a  high  state  of  derangement  from  the  time  of  the  attack,  until 
death,  was  the  cause  why  tiie  father  commenced  with  me  at  the  time  the 
fourth  child  was  taken  sick.  The  t}'phus  fever  was  epidemic  and  very 
fatal  that  season,  and  the  regular  practice  was  attended  with  bad  success. 
The  patients  were  attacked  in  the  back  of  the  head,  neck,  and  small  of 
the  back,  and  immediately  lost  their  senses,  from  which  time  the  scene 
was  a  solemn  one  indeed.  I  had  five  patients  in  the  same  family,  three 
of  which  wei-e  of  the  typhus  fever.  My  commencement  was  to  put  half 
an  ounce  of  sage,  half  an  ounce  of  senna  and  one  tea-spoonful  of  ginger 
together,  and  steep  them  in  half  a  pint  of  hot  water  ten  minutes,  and  let 
the  patient  diink  half  of  the  tea.  This  relieved  the  pain  in  the  head  and 
back  as  soon  as  it  operated ;  they  had  no  more  pain,  and  the  medicines 
thus  restored  them  to  health  in  a  short  time,  without  the  loss  of  reason  for 
A  moment.     [See  page  656.] 

OLEUM  RICINI— Casfor  Oil. 

I  have  found  castor  oil  to  be  very  good  for  children,  when  the  bowels 
have  been  out  of  order.  Also  for  grown  persons,  but  in  all  cases  let  a  lit- 
tle composition  powders  be  used  to  warm  the  stomach  and  bowels,  if  ne- 
cessary' to  remove  pains. 

I  have  frequently  given  my  children  castor  oil  in  warm  gin  sling  sweet- 
ened, which  by  the  way  is  as  good  a  method  as  can  be  adopted.  The 
gin,  from  its  quieting  effects  upon  the  nerves,  subdues  all  pain  and  luls 
the  patient  to  sleep. 

After  such  an  operation,  or  at  the  time  the  oil  is  doing  its  office,  the 
composition,  cayenne  or  any  other  hot  medicine  may  be  use  dto  do  away 
the  pain,  if  any,' that  may  attend  the  operation.  Oil  may  be  judiciously 
used  in  boiled  milk,  with  part  of  a  glass  of  gin,  when  a  person  is  troubled 
with  the  piles.  The  operation  of  which  is  admirable,  as  the  person  can 
retire  to  bed  and  go  quietly  to  sleep.  For  a  grown  person,  put  half  a 
glass  of  oil  into  one  glass  of  sling;  stir  it  well  when  taken.  A  child  may 
take  a  table  spoonful  in  half  a  glass  of  hot  sling,  to  be  regulated  accord- 
ing to  the  age.  I  have  found  tliis  course  much  more  convenient  than  us- 
ing the  the  syringe,  and  certainly  much  more  to  the  satisfaction  of  the 
patients,  if  I  was  away  from  home.     [See  page  657.]j 

SUITABLE  PHYSIC 
JTor  those  troubled  with  Gravel,  Stranguary,  or  Urinary  Difficulties. 
Take  of  castor  oil  two  tablespoonsfid,  and  boiled  honey  two  teaspoons- 
f  ul,  put  them  into  a  teacup  that  has  been  warmed  by  being  in  hot  water  or 


TSO-  THE  THOMSONIAW 

near  a  fire ;  the  warmth  of  the  cup  will  make  the  oil  and  honey  very  thin^. 
which  must  be  stined  well  together  and  taken.  This  is  a  dose  for  a 
grown  person,  which  may  be  graduated  in  all  cases  to  suit  the  age.  A 
dose  of  composition  may  be  given  about  the  same  time;  this  will  carry 
life  and  vigor  through  the  bowels  and  urinary  passages,  and  is  not  sur- 
pas'T  iby  any  other  cathartic  we  have  ever  used.  Aside  from  its  cathar- 
tic properties,  it  is  very  useful  in  gravel  and  all  disorders  of  the  kidneys. 

PHYSIC.     Rhamnus  Caiharticus. 

Jiuckthom  Berries  for  a  cathartic,  may  be  used  to  good  advantage 
when  no  other  remedy  is  at  hand,  and  physic  is  required.  They  possess 
the  most  powerful  bitter  that  I  am  acquainted  with,  except  the  bitter 
root,  but  have  some  corrective  qualities  that  make  them  sometimes  use- 
ful. 

APPLICATION. 

Take  from  five  to  ten,  and  from  that  to  fifteen  or  twenty,  or  even  as 
high  as  forty  or  fifty  for  rugged  men,  have  been  used  before  an  operation 
has  been  produced.  But  generally  from  ten  to  twenty  are  a  sufficient 
dose.  They  may  be  taken  at  night,  on  going  to  bed,  or  at  any  other 
time  that  the  circumstances  of  the  case  may  require.  They  produce  lit- 
tle or  no  paini,  hence  they  are  more  valued  than  drastic  purges,  and  are 
attended  with  none  of  the  bad  consequences  peculiar  to  some  other  kinds, 
which  produce  nearly  as  much  pain  as  they  are  taken  to  remove. 

POWERFUL  STIMULATING  PHYSIC. 

Take  of  mandrake  root  and  butternut  bark,  each  half  a  pound;  bruise 
these  articles  well  in  a  mortar  together,  and  boil  it  in  half  a  gallon  of 
soft  spring  or  rain  water,  to  one  pint.  Strain  off  and  press  the  grains. 
Add  equal  quantities  of  molasses  and  fourth  proof  Jamaica  rum.  Put  it 
into  a  glass  bottle  and  shake  it  well  together;  stop  it  tight,  and  it  is  fit 
for  use. 

APPLTCATIOIV. 

Take  one  tablespoonful  for  a  grown  person,  and  a  teaspoonful  for  a 
child;  it  causes  no  pain.  This  has  proved  of  great  value  in  many  cos- 
tive habits,  for  colics  and  distress  in  the  head,  when  it  is  caused  by  con- 
stipation of  the  bowels. 

WHEN  SHOULD  CATHARTICS  BE  TAKEN. 
Physic  should  not  be  given  if  thought  advisable  until  twelve  hours  af- 
ter a  course  of  raedicme,  and  then  the  hot  medicine  should  be  freely  used, 
to  keep  up  internal  action  sufficient  to  overcome  the  bad  effects,  if  any^. 
arising  from  its  use. 

LAXATIVE   PILLS. 

Take  one  ounce  poplar  or  peach  extract,  half  an  ounce  of  rhubarb, 
half  an  ounce  Castile  soap,  half  an  ounce  of  bitter  root  and  half  an  ounce 
of  dried  beef's  gall ;  work  this  compound  well  together  and  add  a  little 
No.  2,  or  cayenne.  If  it  is  not  stiff  enough  to  pill,  work  in  rhubarb  and 
bitter  root,  of  each  equal  quantities,  till  it  be  of  sufficient  consistency  for 
pilling.  Make  it  into  pills.  Take  from  one  to  three  at  night;  they  will 
regulate  the  bowels  and  ease  the  head  of  unnecessar)'  pressure  and  con- 
fusion. 

These  pills  are  gently  laxative,  and  innocent,  where  people  wish  ca- 
thartic medicines;  and  will  obviate  the  necessity  of  any  calomel,  or  anr 
other  powerful  poisons. 


MATERIA  MEDICA-  721 

Diuretics. 


STRAWBERRY— /'rcgana  Virginiana. 

This  is  a  valuable  diuretic,  to  be  used  in  stranguary,  gravel,  and  dilli  ■ 
culties  of  the  kidneys.  It  is  also  diaphoretic,  moderately  tonic,  and  as- 
tringent.    [See  page  660.] 

CLIVERS — Galium  Jparine. 

A  powerful  diuretic,  emmenagogue,  stimulant,  and  diaphoretic;  to  be 
used  in  cases  of  calculous  ulcerations,  gravel,  urinary  difficulties,  and  fe- 
male obstructions.     [See  page  661.] 

WILD  LETTUCE— Zac^wca  Elongata. 

A  good  remedy  for  complaints  of  the  kidneys  and  bladder,  also  for 
dropsy,  scorbutic  ditfKiulties,  and  costiveness.     [See  page  662.] 

PARSLEY — Afium  Petroselmum. 

Parsley  is  good  for  dropsy,  gravel,  and  obstructions  of  the  liver  and 
kidneys.     [See  page  663.] 

DANDELION — Leontodon  Taraxacum. 

This  is  a  good  article  to  be  applied  as  a  remedy  for  derangement  of  the 
digestive  organs  and  the  urinary  apparatus.  It  is  good  in  chronic  intlam- 
mation  of  the  liver,  and  also  operates  as  a  hydragogue.     [See  page  664.}. 

JUNIPER — Juniperus  Communis. 

Useful  in  all  difficulties  of  the  kidneys,  stranguarj^,  dropsy,  gravel;  and 
in  cutaneous  and  scorbutic  affections.     [See  page  666.] 


RECEIPT  FOR  DROPSY,  STRANGUARY,  GRAVEL,  &c  \  i    ' 

Take  several  water-melons  and  bruise  them  fine,  then  put  the  macerat- 
ed pomice  into  a  flannel  or  canvas  bag  and  submit  it  to  a  heavy  pressure, 
to  extract  the  juice,  which  do  to  the  amount  of  two  gallons;  then  simmer 
it  down  to  one,  and  skim  it.  After  this  add  four  pounds  of  boiled  honey,^ 
and  the  whole  substance  of  eight  good  lemons,  well  bruised.  Put  this 
into  a  stone  jug,  add  an  ounce  of  fine  barberry  bark  and  half  an  ounce  of 
fine  bitter-root  (after  scalding  them  in  half  a  pint  of  boiling  water  to  ex- 
tract their  strength);  two  ounces  each  of  fine  mustard  and  ginger,  one 
pound  of  water-melon  seeds  bruised  fine,  and  half  a  gallon  of  first  quality 
of  Holland  gin.  Let  this  compound  be  shaken  together  daily  for  a  week, 
and  stopped  tight  for  use. 

Take  from  half  to  a  glass,  from  three  to  six  times  a  day,  as  the  patient 
is  able  to  bear  it. 

When  peaches  can  be  had,  the  fine  pulp  of  half  a  peck  of  the  first  qua- 
lity may  be  added,  with  more  melon  juice  and  gnn,  according  to  judg- 
ment, if  the  compound  be  too  thick.  This  remedy  needs  no  commenda- 
tion as  to  its  value.     The  proof  is  in  its  application. 

FOR  DROPSY. 

Take  four  ounces  each,  of  sassafras,  prickly  ash,  white  sumac,  and 
wMte  pine;    bruise  and  boil  in  two  gallons  of  water  down  to  a  quart. 


722  THE  THOMSOiMAN 

strain,  and  add  one  pint  of  best  Holland  gin  and  two  ounces  of  fine  mus- 
tard seed. 

Dose,  a  gill,  three  times  a  day. 

While  usin^  this,  bathe  the  feet  at  night  in  hot  water,  as  directed  on 
page  692,  with  the  use  of  stimulating  liniment. 

HONEY  A  REMEDY  FOR  THE  GRAVEL. 

By  using  half  honey  and  half  sugar  to  sweeten  the  tea  and  coffee  taken 
at  meals,  cases  of  gravel  may  often  be  cured,  without  any  other  treat- 
ment. 

A  better  remedy,  however,  is  to  make  a  strong  decoction  of  pipsissawa, 
to  which  add  for  every  quart  a  pint  of  good  Holland  gin,  and  sweeten  it 
well  with  honey.     This  is  valuable  in  all  complaints  of  the  kidneys. 

Dose,  a  wineglassful  three  times  a  day. 

FOR  OBSTRUCTIONS  OF  THE  KIDNEYS  OR  BLADDER. 

Take  half  a  pound  each,  of  pumpkin  seeds,  parsley  roots,  hemlock 
boughs,  poplar  bark  and  clives,  4oz.  ginger;  boil  this  compound  in  two  gal- 
lons of  Avater  down  to  one;  sweeten  with  honey,  and  add  half  a  gallon  of 
best  Holland  gin. 

Take  a  wineglassful  once  an  hour  till  relief  is  obtained.  Wliile  using 
this,  a  steaming  stone  may  be  placed  at  the  small  of  the  back. 

DIURETIC  BEVERAGE. 

Cranberry  vines  in  decoction  are  good  to  promote  the  discharge  of 
urine.  Whortleberry  bushes  and  fruit  used  in  the  same  way  are  goodkfor 
gravel  and  stoppage  of  the  urine.  Parsley  roots,  leaves  and  seed,  are  al- 
so good  for  the  same  purposes,  to  be  used  as  above.  A  tea  may  be  made 
■of  the  articles,  and  used  as  a  constant  drink. 

DIURETIC  COMPOUND. 

Pure  new  cider  is  an  excellent  diuretic,  and  may  be  profitably  com- 
pounded^ith  other  articles  for  that  purpose,  as  follows :  Put  into  a  two 
gallon  jug,  one  and  a  half  gallons  of  cider;  then  take  half  a  pound  each 
of  mustard  seed  and  horse  radish  roots,  made  fine,  and  four  ounces  of 
good  pure  ground  ginger;  put  these  articles  into  a  quart  of  pure  new  ci- 
der and  steep  them  for  ten  minutes;  when  cool,  add  it  to  the  contents  of 
the  jug,  and  shake  it  well  together. 

Dose,  a  wineglassful  several  times  a  day.  It  is  a  great  diuretic,  and  is 
excellent  for  the  dropsy. 

A  STRONG  DIURETIC  DRINK,  FOR  URINARY  DIFFICULTIES 
OR  DROPSY. 

Take  a  water-melon,  bruise  it  fine  and  press  out  the  juice;  sweeten  it 
with  boiled  honey,  and  then  add  the  substance  of  one  lemon,  and  enough 
Holland  gin  to  keep  it  from  souring.  Let  this  be  used  as  a  common  be- 
verage. 

A  large  quantity  of  this  juice  may  be  prepared  in  the  same  way  in  the 
season  of  melons,  and  preserved  for  use.  The  substance  may  be  reduced 
by  boiling  down  the  juice  to  the  consistencey  of  molasses,  and  preserved 
with  honey  and  gin. 

Of  this,  use  one  teaspoonful  or  more,  in  a  tumbler  of  soft  water,  seve- 
ral limes  a  day.  In  diseases  of  the  kidneys,  costiveness,  liver  complaint 
and  asthma,  this  article  will  produce  a  beneficial  effect. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  723 

SWEET  ELDER  TREE— Sambucus  Canadensis. 

It  has  been  remarked,  that  this  tree  is  a  whole  magazine  of  physic  for 
rustic  practitioners. 

A  syrup  may  be  made  of  the  ripe  berries,  with  the  addition  of  peach- 
meats  or  cherry-stone  meats,  with  brandy  sufficient  to  preserve  it,  which 
is  an  excellent  strengthening  and  restoring  medicine. 

The  berries  may  also  be  made  into  wine,  which  tastes  much  like  that 
made  from  grapes. 

The  bark  and  young  shoots  given  to  sheep,  will  cure  the  rot.  The 
buds  and  young  tendrils  make  good  pickles. 

By  whipping  fruit  trees  with  the  green  leaves,  it  will  prevent  insects 
from  troubling  them. 

An  infusion  of  the  leaves  in  water,  sprinkled  over  rose  buds  and  flower 
beds,  will  preserve  them  from  caterpillars. 

The  white  or  sweet  elder  is  the  kind  used . 


FOR  A  SUPPRESSION  OF  URINE, 

Take  a  little  spirits  of  turpentuie — a  few  drops  upon  sugar,  or  com- 
pounded with  honey  or  in  any  other  way. 


TO  CURE  DIABETES, 

OR  A  CONTINUAL  VOIDING   OF  URINE. 

Take  rosin  and  loaf  sugar  in  equal  quantities,  well  pulverized.  Dose, 
a  teaspoonful,  three  or  four  times  a  day. 

This  will  soon  put  a  stop  to  the  complaint,  unless  the  system  is  much 
reduced;  then  remedies  should  be  used  to  restore  and  regulate  the  action 
of  the  stomach  and  bowels.  Keeping  up  a  gentle  perspiration  will  usu- 
ally relieve  the  patient;  if  not,  the  tincture  of  kino  may  be  given,  in  tea- 
spoonful  doses,  in  composition  tea  or  hot  water,  from  two  to  six  times  a 
day. 


Mucilaginous  Substances. 

FOR  POULTICES  AND  INTERNAL  USE. 


YEAST — CherevisitB  fermentum. 
Yeast  is  an  excellent  article  to  be  used  in  cataplasms  or  poultices  on 
all  inflammatory  sores,  bruises,  broken  limbs,  putrid  ulcers  and  sprained 
joints.  It  may  also  be  internally  used  in  dysentery  and  all  cases  of  pu- 
tridity of  the  bowels.  Its  effect  is  very  cooling,  soothing,  and  agreeable. 
[See  page  667.] 

SLIPPERY  ELM— Ulmus  fulva. 

This  is  a  valuable  article  in  dysenteiy,  diarrhoea,  and  diseases  of  the 
urinary  passages.  In  poultices  it  is  very  servicable  to  apply  to  inflam- 
matory sores,  burns,  freezes,  and  all  kinds  of  ulceration.  [See  page 
668.] 


724  THE  THOMSONIAN 


BUCK-HORN  BRAKE— Osmunda  regalis. 

This  is  good  in  dysenter}',  or  a  sore,  tender  state  of  the  stomach  and 
bowels,  and  is  also  very  servicable  in  female  weaknesses  and  general 
debility.     [See  page  6(39.] 

BENNE  PLANT— SasimUOT  orientale. 

This  article  is  good  in  diseases  of  the  bowels  and  urinary  passages,  and 
may  be  also  profitably  employed  in  poultices  for  burns  and  iniiammator)' 
sores.     [See  page  670.] 

HOLLYHOCK— ^IthcBa  rosea. 

Hollyhock  is  good  for  soreness  in  any  part  of  the  alimentary  canal, 
and  may  be  substituted  for  slippery  elm  in  poultices.     [See  page  671.] 

RED  CLOYER—Trifolium  pratense. 

Good  for  cancers,  old  sores,  sore  lips,  and  scorbutic  difficulties.  [See 
page  671.] 

WILD  TURNIP— ^rum  Trifilum. 

This  article  stimulates  the  secretions  of  the  lungs  and  skin,  and  is  good 
for  pain  in  the  stomach  and  bowels.  It  is  very  servicable  in  connection 
with  other  articles  made  into  cough  drops.     [See  page  672.] 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  TREATING  WHITLOWS,  FELONS,  &c. 

W^hen  a  person  is  afflicted  with  felons,  whitlows,  or  any  ulceration  of 
the  like,  be  particular  to  keep  up  the  strength  and  quiet  of  the  nervous 
system  by  soothing  the  stomach  with  stimulents  and  tonics.  At  the 
same  time  apply  a  poultice  made  of  brown  emetic,  cayenne,  yellow  lily 
root,  with  yeast,  slippery  elm  or  flax  seed  for  mucilage  ;  to  each  half 
pint  of  the  poultice  add  two  spoonsful  of  fine  salt,  and  thicken  with  wheat 
bread  or  sponge  crackers,  and  with  a  little  ginger.  Apply  this  poultice 
warm,  and  let  the  patient  take  a  dose  of  composition  and  nerve  powder, 
and  then  go  to  bed  and  get  into  a  perspiration.  If  this  does  not  relieve 
administer  a  course  of  medicine,  apply  to  the  sore  the  antiscorbutic  poul- 
tice, and  keep  up  the  perspiration.  Tliis  is  almost  certain  to  produce 
relief. 

When  the  sore  commences,  apply  to  it  the  skin  of  the  inside  of  a  fresh 
raw  ego^  shell,  and  if  that  does  not  scatter  it  slack  a  piece  of  lime  upon 
the  part  atfected.     This  will  kill  the  skin  and  promote  suppuration. 

Smartweed  bruised  and  macerated  in  vinegar,  if  applied  to  felons  or 
whitlows  in  season,  will  prevent  them  from  coming  to  a  head. 

TO  CURE  WHITE  SWELLINGS. 

Take  a  green  comfrey  root  and  scrape  a  mass  the  size  of  an  e^rg  ;  to  this 
add  the  white  of  an  egg  well  beaten,  and  a  glass  of  fourth  proof  brandy; 
mix  them  till  they  are  of  the  consistence  of  a  poultice.  Let  a  plaster  of 
this  be  tightly  bound  on  the  sore,  and  renew  it  as  often  as  it  becomes  dry. 

This  plaster  may  be  preserved  in  a  tight  jar,  or  be  made  with  dry 
comfrey,  pulverized  instead  of  g  een. 

This  is  to  be  applied  also  in  case  of  leakage  o/  a  joint,  weak  back,  or 
weeping  sinew. 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


725 


HOW  TO  TREAT  CANKER  OR  MORTIFYING  SORES. 

While  the  patient  is  under  the  operation  of  a  course  of  medicine,  let 
the  sore  be  washed  with  soap  suds  ;  then  with  caidter  tea.  While  the 
sore  is  wet,  add  to  it  a  powder  of  iine  bayberry,  emetic,  cayenne,  and 
slippery  elm,  wet  and  mixed  together  ;  then  over  this  apply  a  poultice  of 
jj^inger  and  canker  tea.  This  will  have  a  decidedly  beneficial  effect,  and 
a  few  repetitions  of  it  will  generally  effect  a  cure. 

BILES. 
A  person  afflicted  with  biles  may  find  a  cure  by  drinking  burdock  tea, 
and  at  the  same  time  applying  spirits  of  turpentine  to  the  alfected  part. 
With  this  treatment  they  will  soon  become  dry  and  disappear. 

TO  REMOVE  INFLAMMATION  AND  HEAL  OLD  OR  RECENT 

SORES. 

Wash  the  affected  parts  with  soap  suds,  then  apply  several  thicknesses 
of  linen  cloth  wet  with  tinctuie  of  lobelia.  Keep  ihe  cloths  constantly 
wet  with  the  tincture,  and  the  sore  will  heal  rapidly  and  maturate  but 
little. 

A  VALUABLE  POULTICE 
For  Bruises,  Barns,  Freezes,  Sfc. 
In  a  moment  after  the  accident,  cut  from  the  centre  of  a  loaf  of  wheat 
bread  a  slice,  and  dip  it  into  brewer's  or  baker's  yeast,  and  let  it  remain 
till  well  saturated,  then  put  it  upon  the  part  affected.  This  is  much  the 
best  and  handiest  remedy  which  we  have  ever  found  in  the  above  com- 
plaints. 

>  If  the  yeast  cannot  be  had,  make  use  of  the  common  dried  emptyings, 
called  turnpike,  (which  almost  every  hou^e-wil'e  has  on  hand)  break 
them  up  fine  and  form  into  a  poultice.  If  that  is  not  to  be  had,  make 
use  of  the  kind  of  rising  used  in  the  family,  to  raise  bread  or  biscuit.  If 
that  is  not  on  hand,  and  cannot  be  had,  dip  a  slice  of  the  bread  into  pure 
soft  water  and  apply  that  to  the  sore;  always  remembering  to  keep  the 
poultice  wet.  Either  of  these  remedies  will  ease  the  pain  immediately, 
and  give  rest  and  quiet  to  the  patient.  This  remedy  should  be  kept  in 
mind  by  every  family,  in  case  of  accidents.  It  is  simple  but  effectual, 
and  Aviil  save  much  distress  if  applied  in  season. 


Diarrlioia  ami  Dysentery. 


FOR  RELAX  OR  DYSENTERY. 
Take  one  handful  each  of  red  raspberry  and  witch-hazel  leaves,  with 
four  ounces  of  pulverized  flax-seed.  Steep  them  for  one  hour  in  two 
quarts  of  water,  then  strain  off  and  sweeten  with  loaf  sugar.  Add  while  hot 
two  ounces  of  bayberry,  one  ounce  of  all -pice,  and  a  fourth  of  an  ounce 
of  cayenne  all  made  fine;  and  to  this  add  one  quart  of  Holland  gin. 
Do  56,  half  a  wine-glass  three  times  a  day,  the  patient  being  in  bed  if  pos- 
sible.    This  will  quiet  the  nervous  irritability  of  the  bowels. 

FOR  DYSENTERY—^  good  remedy  for  Children. 
Take  four  ounces  of  pulverized  flax-seed,  steep  for  twenty  minutes  in 
one  quart  of  boUing  water,   strain  off  and  add  one  pint  of  Holland  gin, 
one  pound  of  loaf  sugar,  and  grate  in,  while  hot,  three  nutmegs. 


726  THE   THOMSONIAN 

Dose,  from  half  to  a  j^lass  three  times  a  day.  If  the  bowels  arc  in  a 
cold  state,  while  using  tliis  article,  give  occasionally  an  injection  of  some 
nourishing  soup,  well  seasoned. 

DIARRHCEA — A  capital  remedy. 
I  have  seen  the  happiest  results  from  the  use  of  the  best  of  Holland  gin 
and  loaf  sugar,  or  gin  and  molasses,  if  sugar  cannot  be  had.  Take  half 
a  pint  of  the  best  Holland  gin,  and  half  a  pound  of  fine  loaf  sugar.  Let 
the  sugar  dissolve  in  the  gin.  Sliake  it  well  together  and  take  a  wine- 
glass, or  for  a  child  half  a  glass.  Let  a  grown  person  take  a  glass  and 
go  to  bed  and  put  a  warm  brick  to  the  feet;  the  anti-spasmodic  proper- 
ties of  the  gin  will  quiet  the  nervous  irritability  of  the  bowels,  and  ease 
the  pain.  If  the  bowels  be  in  a  bad  state,  or  much  clogged,  a  dose  of 
castor  oil  may  be  taken  in  boiled  milk.  This  will  remove  the  morbid 
matter,  and  the  gin  Avill  quiet  the  pain  of  the  bowels  to  a  charm.  The 
patient  can  take  a  refreshing  sleep^  after  which  take  a  bowl  of  chicken, 
veal,  beef,  or  oyster  soup  well  seasoned  with  pepper  and  salt.  After  the 
bowels  have  become  quiet,  a  tea  made  of  raspberi-y  or  witch-hazel  leaves 
may  be  taken  with  a  little  sugar,  milk  and  cayenne.  But  if  this  does  not 
effect  the  cure,  which  it  will  do  in  three  out  of  four  cases,  it  shows  that  a 
course  of  medicine  is  required  to  assist  it. 

RELAX  OR  DYSENTERY. 

FROST  GRAVES— Vitis  Cordifolia. 

Make  a  strong  tea  of  frost  grapes,  and  let  it  be  sweetened  and  taken 
by  the  person  afflicted.  The  taste  is  very  astringent,  rough  and  acid,  and 
will  operate  in  a  very  salutary  manner  upon  the  bowels,  in  the  first  stages 
of  the  relax. 

If  the  grapes  cannot  be  had,  the  tendrils  tliat  act  as  fingers  in  grasping 
and  retaining  hold  on  other  substances,  and  by  that  means  sustain  the 
vines  may  be  used  as  follows.  Take  a  handful  of  those  tendrils  and  bniise 
them  fine,  then  pour  on  one  pint  of  hot  water;  let  it  steep  for  fifteen  or 
twenty  minutes,  and  set  it  away  to  cool.  This  tea  is  an  astringent,  and 
may  be  used  for  constant  drink.  Or  the  tendrils  may  be  bruised  and 
boiled  in  milk,  in  which  state  it  will  afford  nourishment  with  its  medical 
virtues.  The  grapes  and  tendrils  may  be  made  into  a  syrup  with  flax- 
seed, bayberry  and  popple  bark,  sweetened  with  loaf  sugar  and  with  the 
addition  of  Holland  gin,  to  preserve  it  from  souring.  Take  a  glass  three 
or  four  times  a  day. 

FOR  RELAX. 

Pulverize  one  tea-spoonful  of  burnt  alum,  and  mix  it  well  with  a  table 
spoonful  of  fine  loaf  sugar.  Let  this  be  taken  from  half  to  a  tea-spoonful 
once  an  hour,  and  the  disease  soon  abates. 

FOR  RELAX  OR  DYSENTERY. 
Take  the  grains  from  the  bottom  of  a  jug,  where  a  gallon  of  rheumatic 
drops,  or  No.  6  has  been  made.  Put  these  grains  into  a  kettle  and  add 
one  quart  of  sweet  wine,  put  it  over  the  fire  and  let  it  boil  for  twenty  mi- 
nutes, when  it  will  be  seen  that  the  acid  has  dissolved  the  gum,  and  the 
wine  has  become  strongly  impregnated  with  it.  Strain  it  off  and  let 
it  stand  until  cold;  then  add  one  quart  more  of  sweet  wine,  sweeten  it 
well  with  loaf  sugar,  then  add  two  ounces  of  composition  powders  and 
one  quart  of  good  Holland  gin.  Put  into  a  jug,  shake  it  well  together 
and  stop  it  down  for  use.  Tliis  remedy  is  good  for  chroruc  debility  of 
the  bowels,  or  relax,  or  looseness  of  long  standing  in  consequence  of  in- 
digestion.    It  is  also  good  for  weakness  of  the  stomach,  occasioned  by 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  727 

long"  debility,  and  may  be  taken  by  all  classes  for  such  complaints.  For 
a  grown  person  take  from  half  to  a  glass  two  or  three  times  a  day,  or 
whenever  a  weakness  is  felt  at  the  stomach.  For  children  give  a  table- 
spoonful  just  before  eating,  as  it  will  then  sharpen  the  appetite.  It  is 
good  for  what  is  called  worm  complaints  in  children,  and  is  a  great  anti- 
septic to  prevent  mortification  in  the  boAvels. 

A  GOOD  REMEDY  FOR  DYSENTERY, 

AJ\D  A  GREAT  ANTISKPTIC. 

Take  one  teaspoonful  of  pulverized  maple  charcoal,  and  mix  with  it 
one  tablespoonful  of  molasses,  three  of  West  India  rum,  and  half  a  glass 
of  sweet  oil.  Let  half  of  this  be  taken  as  a  dose  for  an  adult,  to  be  re- 
peated, if  necessar}',  in  two  hours.  For  children  the  dose  may  be  gradu- 
ated aceordin"-  to  their  asfe. 


For  Pulmonar-y  Complaints. 


FOR  A  COUGH. 

Take  of  4th  proof  Jamaica  rum  one  pint,  good  sugar  house  molasses 
one  pint,  add  them  together  and  let  them  be  well  shaken.  This  article  is 
an  excellent  thing  to  keep  a  cotigh  loose,  and  is  a  great  tonic  for  the 
stomach,  as  the  writer  of  this  well  knows  from  experience.  He  took  a 
phial  of  this  compound  and  kept  it  in  his  pocket,  and  when  an  irritation 
was  felt  upon  the  lungs,  or  in  the  throat,  which  indicated  an  inclination 
to  cough,  a  small  sip  from  the  phial  would  at  once  allay  it  until  such  times 
as  he  had  time  and  convenience  to  attend  to  it,  once  or  twice  in  twenty-four 
hours,  and  then  in  a  warm  room.  Taking  care  of  the  pence  is  what 
makes  people  rich.  So  it  is  in  this  case  by  attending  to  these  slight  symp- 
toms of  irritation  in  tlie  throat  and  lungs  is  w^hat  produces  health.  This 
is  what  causes  the  consumption.  The  feet  should  in  such  cases  be  kept 
warm  without  fail,  with  cork  or  hat  soles  in  the  bottom  of  the  shoes  or 
boots,  and  a  piece  of  ginger  shovdd  be  constantly  kept  in  the  mouth  to 
keep  the  saliva  thin,  and  the  mucus  membrane  of  the  throat  and  lungs 
warm. 

A  VALUABLE  MIXTURE  FOR  COUGH. 

Take  of  hoarhound  and  red  cedar  bark  of  each  one  handful,  boil  it  in 
two  quarts  of  w'ater  down  to  one  pint  ;  then  add  one  pint  of  molasses, 
and  half  a  pint  of  West  India  rum.  Put  it  into  a  bottle  and  shake  it  well 
together,  and  stop  it  tight  for  use. 

Take  one  tablespoonful  three  times  a  day.  This  is  a  powerful  pecto- 
ral mixture,  and  has  affected  some  astonishing  cures  of  lung  complaints 
and  hoarseness.  It  is  well  calculated  to  keep  the  cough  loose,  that  the 
patient  may  raise  easy.  If  any  stimulating  medicine  should  be  wanted 
to  assist  in  expectoration  after  it  has  been  tried,  add  to  every  half  pint  of 
this  medicine,  one-fourth  of  an  ounce  of  pulverized  wake  robin,  or  wild 
turnip.  Tincture  of  lobelia  may  be  added;  also  cayenne,  if  a  greater 
stimulating  quality  is  wanted  to  assist  in  expectoration  in  the  morning,  or 
after  being  exposed  to  the  cold  at-  any  other  time.  This  remedy  is  well 
adapted  for  hoarse,  dry  coughs,  which  hard  laboring  people  are  subject 
to  at  times,  from  too  great  exposure  in  prosecuting  their  business. 


^28  THE  THOMSONIAN 

COUGH  DROPS. 
No.  1. 

Take  6  ounces  of  wake  robin  well  pulverized,  when  dry  ;  stir  the  fine 
powder  into  one  pint  of  cold  water,  rub  it  until  tlie  knobs  are  broken,  and 
it  becomes  a  paste  much  like  starch.  Then  pour  into  the  same  com- 
pound half  a  (gallon  of  water,  boiling  hot  ;  add  one  teaspoonful  of  line 
capsicum,  half  a  gallon  of  molasses,  and  half  a  gallon  of  4th  proof  Jamai- 
ca rum  ;  then  add  half  a  pint  of  tincture  of  the  green  herb  of  the  lobelia 
inflata ;  put  it  into  a  jug  or  glass  bottle ;  sliake  it  well  together  and  stop  it 
tight  for  use.  This  is  an  excellent  expectorant  mixture  for  coughs,  colds 
and  consumptions.  For  those  who  are  troubled  with  a  cough  a  small  phial 
of  tlii^  medicine  should  be  kept  in  the  pocket  and  taken  from  one-fourth 
to  half  a  teaspooafuU  at  a  time  and  often,  just  sufficieut  to  keep  the 
glands  of  the  mouth,  throat,  and  mucus  membrane  sufficiently  stimulated 
to  raise  easy  whatever  matter  may  have  accumulated. 

No.  2. 

Take  two  ounces  of  lettuce  seed,  bruise  it  in  a  mortar,  put  it  into  one 
quart  of  hot  water;  let  it  boil  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  then  strain  it  off; 
add  one  pint  of  strong  tincture  of  balm  of  Gilead,  one  pint  of  good  mo- 
lasses, and  two  ounces  of  wake  robin  well  pulverized,  four  ounces  of 
liquorice  stick  well  pulverized,  one  gill  of  tincture  of  emetic,  one  ounce 
cayenne,  and  scent  it  with  pennyroyal,  or  any  other  essence  you  may 
"fancy;  put  it  into  a  jug,  shake  it  well,  and  stop  it  tight  for  use. 

Take  a  phial  that  will  hold  two  ounces  and  keep  it  full  in  the  pocket  for 
use,  or  at  the  bed  side,  to  be  used  when  an  irritable  sensation  or  an  incli- 
nation to  cough  ii  felt  in  the  throat  or  upon  the  lungs.  Take  a  small  sip 
from  the  phial,  say  from  a  quarter  to  a  half  of  a  tea-poonful;  this  will  al- 
lay the  irritation  of  the  mucus  membrane,  and  will  loosen  the  phlegm  so 
that  it  may  be  ejected  from  the  lungs  with  little  effort.  Long  and  con- 
tinued spells  of  coughing  wear  out  the  lungs.  This  is  what  should  be 
guarded  against  by  every  consumptive  person. 

No.  3. 

Take  four  ounces  of  flax  seed  well  pulverized,  two  ounces  of  liquorice 
root  made  also  fine  ;  pour  upon  the  ingredient  one  quart  of  boiling  water, 
and  place  it  over  a  quick  fire  ;  let  it  boil  for  twenty  minutes;  strain  off; 
press  the  grains;  then  add  half  a  pound  of  good  honey,  and  half  a  pint  of 
pure  lemon  syrup;  simmer  it  over  a  slow  fire  for  ten  minutes;  skim  it; 
set  away  and  let  it  cool.  Then  add  1-16  oz.  good  cayenne,  one  gUl  of 
good  tincture  of  lobelia,  and  half  a  pint  of  4th  proof  Jamaica  rum.  Put 
it  into  a  glass  bottle  and  shake  it  well  together     Fit  for  use. 

APPLICATION. 

The  best  way  to  use  this  medicine  is  to  have  a  phial  of  about  2  ounces 
of  it  in  the  pocket.  When  any  irritation  is  felt  upon  the  lung^  or  in  the 
mucus  membrane,  take  a  small  sip  from  the  vial,  say  one  tea-poon- 
ful, and  so  continue  to  repeat  it  as  often  as  the  irritation  is  felt,  if  it  be 
fifty  times  a  day.  These  drops  are  veiy  valuable  in  recent  attacks  of 
cold  with  old  or  young.  They  arc  also  good  for  asthma,  croup,  or  any  dif- 
ficulty of  the  chest  or  lungs. 

N.  B.  A  tablespoonful  may  be  taken  on  going  to  bed,  and  it  may  also 
be  taken  during  the  night  if  necessary.  Let  a1able*;poonful  be  u-ed  in 
(lie  morning  on  leaving  the  bed.  It  should  be  also  taken  before  ex- 
posure to  cold,  and  after  such  exposure  to  keep  the  temperature  of  the 
lunjTs  even. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  729 

No  4. 
Take  four  ounces  of  liquorice  ball  and  eight  of  gum  Arabic,  dissolve 
them  in  two  quarts  of  soft  water  over  a  slow  fire,  then  add  half  a  gallon 
of  boiling  water,  with  two  ounces  of  dyspepsia  powders,  half  a  gallon  of 
molasses  and  the  same  quantity  of  wine  bitters,  which  have  been  mixed. 
Then  cut  up  six  lemons  and  macerate  them  well  in  half  a  gallon  of  alco- 
hol, to  extract  the  oil  from  the  skins,  and  form  a  strong  essence;  add  it 
to  the  other  ingredients  ;  then  put  in  one  quart  of  tincture  of  lobelia  and 
two  teaspoonsful  of  cayenne;  sliake  it  well  together  and  it  is  fit  for  use. 


A  VALUABLE  SYRUP  FOR  COUGHS. 

Take  one  pound  of  hoarhound,  broken  up  fine,  steep  it  in  two  quarts  of 
water  for  twelve  hours,  strain  off  and  boil  the  liquor  down  to  a  pint;  take 
two  ounces  of  skunk  cabbage  and  one  of  wild  turnip,  pulverize  and  boil 
for  two  hours  in  two  quarts  of  water,  and  when  cool  strain  off  and  mix  it 
with  the  decoction  of  hoarhound.  Then  add  two  quarts  of  fourth  proof 
spirits,  and  one  pound  each  of  boiled  honey  and  loaf  sugar.  Let  this 
compound  be  put  into  a  jug  and  boiled,  with  the  cork  left  out,  in  a  kettle 
of  water  for  half  an  hour,  when  it  will  be  fit  for  use. 

This  will  enable  a  person  afflicted  with  a  cough  to  raise  easy,  without 
injuring  the  membrane  of  the  lungs  or  throat. 

Dose  for  an  adult,  a  tablespoonful. 


Iji/iiments. 


RHEUMATIC  LINIMENT. 

Take  three  pounds  of  wliite  soap,  and  dissolve  it  in  two  quarts  of  rain 
or  soft  water,  by  boiling;  next,  dissolve  two  ounces  of  camphor,  one  do 
oil  of  rosemary,  and  half  an  ounce  of  oil  origanum,  in  one  gallon  of  high 
wines;  add  the  whole  compound  together  in  a  stone  jug.  Then  take  two 
ounces  of  good  cayenne  pepper  and  put  it  into  a  point  of  boiling  water, 
let  it  steep  over  a  hot  fire  for  ten  minutes,  then  pour  it  into  the  jug,  shake 
the  contents  well  together,  and  stop  it  close  for  use. 


APPLICATION. 


This  is  g;ood  for  rheumatism,  pains  in  the  side,  cold  feet,  head-ache, 
sprained  joints,  &c. 


HOW  TO  BATHE  THE  FEET  IN  HOT  WATER. 

A  USEFUL  METHOD  TO  REMOVE  ALL  RECENT  ATTACKS  OF 
DISEASE. 

Take  a  dose  of  the  prepared  composition,  then  put  the  feet  into  a  pail 
half  full  of  water,  as  hot  as  the  patient  can  bear  it,  having  the  body  well 
shielded  with  a  cloak  or  blanket  while  bathing.  Increase  the  tempera- 
ture, by  adding  more  hot  water,  by  pouring  it  in  on  one  side  of  the  pail, 
while  the  feet  are  still  in  the  vessel,  and  having  one  hand  in  the  water  in 
active  motion,  mingling  the  different  temperatures  as  fast  as  possible.    In 

47 


730  THE  THOMSONIAN 

ten  or  fifteen  minutes  the  patient  will  be  in  a  profuse  perspiration,  cTery 
part  of  the  body  being  full  of  heat,  and  an  active  cuculation. 

Continue  this  operation  until  the  perspiration  stands  upon  the  temples. 
On  the  upper  lip,  and  the  palms  of  the  hands,  and  the  veins  are  full  upon 
the  feet  and  the  back  of  the  hands.  These  are  symptoms  that  the  body  is 
sufficiently  warm.  Then  take  out  one  foot  and  wipe  it  diy  with  a  towel 
or  napkin,  and  bathe  the  foot  thoroughly  with  the  stimulating  liniment; 
then  put  on  the  stocking.     Treat  the  other  foot  in  the  same  manner. 

In  all  cases,  this  is  the  most  rapid  course  I  ever  adopted  to  fill  the  sys- 
tem universally  with  warmth,  and  to  produce  an  active  perspiration.  In 
all  violent  attacks  of  disease,  such  as  colic-,  pleurisy,  inflammatory 
rheumatism,  cramps,  lock-jaw,  croup,  quinsy,  &c.,  where  the  patient  re- 
quires immediate  relief  from  a  dangerous  disease,  this  is  preferable  to 
steaming.  But  steaming  is  the  best  course  that  can  be  adopted  to  clear 
the  skin  or  cutaneous  system  universally  of  the  morbid  matter  it  contains. 

Where  the  patient  is  subject  to  cold  feet  and  pains  in  the  head,  he  can 
make  a  great  improvement  to  his  steam  bath,  by  putting  his  feet  into  a 
pail  half  full  of  water  as  hot  as  he  can  bear.  AH  excessive  circulation  to 
the  head  will  be  speedily  removed  by  this  operation,  provided  the  bowels 
are  in  good  order,  and  the  whole  body  and  limbs  below  the  neck  are 
bathed  with  the  stimulating  liniment. 

STIMULATING  LINIMENT— AND  BATHING  THE  FEET. 

Melt  one  pound  of  white  soap  and  add  it  to  a  gallon  of  high  proof  whis- 
key; after  which,  take  two  ounces  of  cayenne  pepper  and  boil  it  in  half 
a  pint  of  water  for  five  or  ten  minutes,  then  add  it  to  the  whiskey,  toge- 
ther with  a  little  essence  of  hemlock,  and  it  is  fit  for  use.  Shake  it  well 
together  and  pour  it  off  into  phials. 

It  is  good  to  bathe  on  to  the  feet  when  cold,  also  over  the  body  after 
steaming. 

APPLICATION. 

It  is  an  excellent  article  in  a  great  variety  of  complaints,  such  as  cold 
feet  and  hands,  palsy,  numbness,  tooth-ache,  cramps,  pain  in  the  head, 
back  and  side,  and  rheumatism. 

When  a  person  is  troubled  with  head-ache,  or  any  uneasiness  about  the 
head  or  stomach,  by  bathing  the  feet  thoroughly  by  the  fire  before  going 
to  bed,  and  sit  with  the  legs  across  a  second  chair,  with  the  bottom  of  the 
feet  as  near  a  hot  fire  or  stove  as  can  be  borne,  with  a  screen  before  the 
face  and  head  to  shield  it,  much  relief  will  be  obtained ;  for  the  head  wUl 
be  relieved  at  once  if  the  bowels  are  right. 

VOLATILE  LINIMENT. 

Take  of  sweet  oil  six  ounces,  spirits  of  hartshorn  one  ounce,  oil  of  ori- 
ganum one  fourth  of  an  ounce,  shake  them  well  together  in  a  bottle,  and 
stop  it  tight  for  use. 

APPLICATION. 

Good  for  sprains,  bruises,  swellings,  and  local  pains. 

VOLATILE  LINIMENT, 

For  Violent  Sprains,  Rheumatic  Pains,  ^c. 
Take  fom*  ounces  of  sweet  oil,  and  one  ounce  of  spirits  of  hartshorn — 
shake  them  together  in  a  phial  for  use. 

APPLICATION. 

To  be  used  for  sprained  joints,  or  violent  attacks  of  pain  of  any  kind. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  731 

OCMPOUND  LINIMENT  OF  SOAP. 

Take  of  camphor  one  ounce,  soap  three  ounces,  spirits  of  rosemary  one 
tpint,  half  an  ounce  of  cayenne ;  digest  the  soap  and  cayenne  in  the  spirits 
of  rosemary  until  the  soap  is  dissolved,  and  add  to  it  the  camphor. 

APPLICATION. 

This  is  useful  to  excite  action  on  the  surface,  is  used  to  disperse  scro- 
fulous enlarg'ements,  and  is  good  to  moisten  flannel  to  apply  to  the  throat 
in  cases  of  quinsy,  pleurisy,  croup,  &c. 

LINIMENT  OF  LIME  WATER. 

Take  of  lime  water  three  ounces,  after  it  has  stood  long  enough  to  be- 
come perfectly  pure,  and  of  oli^e  or  linseed  oil  three  ounces;  mix  by 
shaking"  or  stirring  it  well  together,  and  it  fonns  a  kind  of  soap  of  a  whi- 
tish color  and  devoid  of  acrimony. 

APPIvICATlON. 

This  article  is  excellent  for  bums,  scalds,  chapped  hands  and  chafes. 
It  is  best  to  make  it  fresh  when  it  may  be  wanted. 


RHEUMATIC  LINIMENT. 

Take  Tialf  a  pint  of  the  small  inflated  buds  or  capsules  growing  upon 
the  sea  kelp,  or  sea  weed,  a  plenty  of  which  is  to  be  found  on  the  sea 
shore  of  the  northern  states;  put  these  buds  into  half  a  pint  of  fourth  proof 
brandy  and  heat  it  over  the  fire,  and  by  continual  stirring  it  will  become 
a  thick  jelly. 

This  is  for  bathing  the  stiff  backs,  joints,  &c.,  of  those  who  have  the 
rheumatism,  and  is  said  to  be  an  excellent  remedy. 

FOR  THE  CHRONIC  RHEUMATISM. 

Take  half  a  pound  of  black  cohosh  and  bruise  it  well  in  a  mortar,  pour 
"upon  it  one  pint  of  boiling  water,  let  it  steep  for  ten  minutes,  then  put  it 
into  a  jug,  and  add  one  quart  of  good  Holland  gin.  Let  it  stand  twelve 
hours,  to  impart  the  strength  of  the  roots  to  the  liquor,  and  shake  it  oftea 
together. 

Take  a  glass  three  times  a  day,  or  oftener  if  thought  advisable,  and  it 
will  very  soon  relieve  the  pain. 

This  remedy  sliould  not  be  taken  by  pregnant  women,  as  it  will  pro- 
duce abortion,  and  consequently  weaken  the  constitution. 

Note. — Take  one  tablespoonful  of  black  cohosh,  finely  pulverized, 
put  it  into  a  tea  cup,  and  fill  the  cup  half  full  of  boiling  water;  let  this 
he  taken  three  times  a  day,  and  it  will  generally  relieve  in  three  or  foiff 
days. 


VOLATILE  TINCTURE. 

To  one  quart  of  cherry  spirits,  add  two  ounces  of  cayenne,  and  whea 
settled  pour  off,  and  add  a  few  drops  of  the  oil  of  pennyroyal. 


VOLATILE  SALTS,  OR  HARTS-HORN. 
Take  of  crude  sal  almoniac  one  ounce,  of  pearlash  tAvo  ounces;  pound 
•each  by  itself,  mix  them  well  together,  and  keep  it  close  stopped  in  bot- 
tles for  use. 


7S2-  THE   THOMSONIAN 

By  moistening  it  with  essence,  the  strength  will  be  increased.     Appli- 
«d  to  the  nose,  this  is  good  for  faintness,  and  to  remove  pain  in  the  head. 


Ointments  and  Salves.. 


WAX  OINTMENT. 

Take  of  white  wax  four  ounces,  spermaceti  three  ounces,  olive  oil  one 
pint;  mix  them  together  over  a  slow  fire,  and  stir  them  very  briskly 
without  ceasing  until  they  are  cold. 

APPLICATION. 

This  ointment,  when  rubbed  over  the  face  and  hands  but  lightly,  pro- 
duces a  soft  smooth  surface,  very  agreeable  to  the  touch,  similar  to  the 
softest  silk.     It  also  removes  all  chaps  and  roughness  of  the  skin. 

It  makes  a  good  lip  salve,  and  is  also  good  for  sore  nipples,  for  which 
use  it  should  be  kept  by  those  who  may  want  such  a  remedy. 

SIMPLE  OINTMENTS. 
Take  of  olive  oil  five  ounces,  white  wax  two  ounces.     Melt  the  wax. 
in  the  oil  over  a  slow  fire,  and  set  it  away  to  cool  and  continue  to  stir  the 
compound  until  cold. 

APPLICATION. 

This  ointment  is  useful  for  chapped  hands  and  face,  and  is  an  excellent 
article  for  softening  the  skin. 

OINTMENT  OF  LARD. 

Take  of  hog's  lard  two  pounds,  rose  water  four  ounces.  Beat  the  lard 
with  the  rose  water  till  they  are  mixed ;  then  add  four  ounces  of  white 
wax,  and  melt  the  mixture  over  a  slow  fire,  and  set  it  apart,  that  the  wa- 
ter may  subside,  after  which  pour  ofif  the  ointment  from  the  water,  con- 
stantly stirring  it  until  it  be  cold. 

APPLICATION. 

Good'  for  softening  the  skin,  sore  nipples,  and  chapped  hands  and  face, 
and  is  good  for  chafes  in  the  groins,  or  any  other  part  of  the  body,  for 
both  young  and  old. 

BURN  OINTMENT. 
Take  of  beeswax  and  Burgundy  pitch  and  melt  them  together;   then  • 
mix  sweet  oil  luitil  the  compound  has  the  consistency  of  ointment. 

APPLICATION. 

This  salve  will  ease  the  pain  of  a  bum  almost  immediately  on  its  appli- 
cation, for  which  purpose  it  is  very  valuable.  It  is  also  good  for  fresb 
cuts,  or  wounds  and  bruises  of  the  flesh. 

OINTMENT  FOR  THE  PILES. 

Take  yarrow  blows,  and  simmer  them  in  fresh  butter,  and  annoint  the 
parts  affected.     [See  pages  647  and  652.]. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  733 

•OINTMENT  FOR  PILES,  POULTICE  AND  WASH  FOR  VENE- 
REAL. 

Simmer  together  two  ounces  of  the  toad  lily  root  (^Hemerocallis  flava) 
two  ounces  of  green  emetic  {lobelia  inflata),  and  a  piece  of  white  vitriol 
(^sulphate  of  zinc),  about  the  size  of  a  walnut,  finely  pulverized,  in  half 
a  pound  of  fresh  butter  ;  strain  off,  and  you  haVe  an  excellent  remedy  for 
syphilitic  sores. 

A  wash  may  be  made  of  the  same  articles  that  will  destroy  the  irrita- 
tion at  once.  It  may  be  injected  in  form  of  decoction  into  the  penis  in 
bad  cases  with  great  advantage. 

The  lily  root,  compounded  with  slippery  elm  and  sponge  crackers  to 
form  a  poultice,  may  be  applied  to  old  ulcerous  sores,  or  over  the  head 
of  the  penis,  from  which  it  will  soon  extract  the  morbid  poison,  if  fol- 
lowed up  daily.  An  injection  per  ani  may  be  usefidly  employed  once  or 
twice  a  day  while  the  poultices  are  used. 

This  remedy  should  be  remembered  by  practitioners  who  may  attend 
such  cases. 

OINTMENT  FOR  RELAXING  MUSCLES. 

Take  one  pint  of  angle  worms  and  simmer  them  two  hoursin  fresh  but- 
ter over  a  slow  fire,  then  strain  ofif  and  add  two  oimces  of  oil  of  origaniun, 
one  ounce  of  spirits  of  camphor,  and  a  fourth  of  an  ounce  of  fine  dust  of 
cayenne  pepper.  Stop  it  close  in  bottles  for  use.  If  the  fresh  butter 
cannot  be  had,  any  kind  of  soft  airimai  or  fish  oil  may  be  substituted. 

This  ointment  may  be  used  to  great  advantage  for  stifFjoints,  contract- 
ed muscles,  cramps,  or  lock  jaw,  or  in  any  disease  where  the  muscles  of 
the  body  are  violently  contracted.  It  should  be  rubbed  thoroug^ily  into 
the  part  and  dried  by  the  fire,  or  by  holding  as  near  it  as  can  be  borne 
some  heated  substance,  and  continue  rubbing  it  till  it  is  dry. 

Let  this  course  be  adopted  in  the  morning,  and  at  night  on  going  to 
bed.  Always  take  warming  medicines  before  this  application,  and  if  ne- 
cessary a  course  of  medicine. 

OINTMENT  FOR  SPRAINS,  SWELLINGS  AND  RHEUMATISM. 

Simmer  together  for  fifteen  ntinutes,  half  a  pound  of  neatsfoot  oil,  one 
gill  of  fourth  proof  brandy,  one  gill  of  spirits  of  turpentine,  and  half  an 
ounce  of  cayenne.  To  be  applied  hot  to  the  part  affected,  after  which 
wrap  it  in  flannel  bandages. 

Let  composition  or  hot  drops  be  taken,  to  keep  the  patient  from  feeling 
faint  or  weak  at  tlxe  stomach. 


FOR  SALT-RHEUM,  OR  SCALD  HEAD, 

Take  of  fresh  hog's  lard  and  of  tar  equal  quantities,  say  one  pint  of 
each;  put  them  into  one  pail  full  of  soft  rain  water,  boil  the  same  for  two 
hours;  keep  the  kettle  full  of  water,  when  done  boiling  set  it  away  and 
let  it  cool. 

APPLICATION. 

Spread  plasters  and  apply  to  the  sores.  The  happiest  results  have  at- 
tended the  use  of  this  ointment,  in  eruptive  sores,  such  as  above  men- 
tioned. 

'  FOR  SALT-RHEUM  OR  CUTANEOUS  DISEASES. 

'Take  of  the  Seneca  or  sweet  clover  one  handful,  and  lovage  one  hand- 
ful, bruise  them  together  and  simmer  them  in  fresh  butter  or  hog's  lard 


754  THE   THOMSO:\IAN 

for  three  hours,  or  until  the  moisture  is  dried  away,  or  the  oil  has  absori>- 
«d  the  virtues  of  the  herbs ;  strain  off,  and  press  the  g'rains. 

This  is  an  exellent  softening'  and  fragrant  ointment  for  any  eruption  of 
ttie  skin,  such  as  salt-rheum,  chaps,  or  cracked  hands,  or  for  scorbutic 
diseases  generally. 

SALT-RHEUM  WASH. 

Take  one  ounce  of  the  cow,  toad,  or  yellow  lily  root,  bruise  it  fine,  put 
it  into  half  a  pint  of  boiling  water,  let  it  steep  for  ten  minutes;  strain  off 
half  a  teacup  full  of  the  tea,  add  three  tablespoonsful  of  milk ;  it  is  thea 
fit  for  use. 

Next,  wash  the  part  diseased  with  soap  suds;  dry  off  the  sores — ^then 
wash  thoroughly  with  this  tea,  which  will  remove  the  peculiar  itching  or 
irritation,  and  will  purify  the  sore  by  its  roughness.  Next  put  over  the 
sore  three  thicknesses  of  linen  or  cotton  cloth,  wet  with  the  tea ;  conti- 
nue the  use  of  the  tea,  and  keep  the  cloth  and  sore  or  sores  thoroughly 
wet  day  and  night  until  they  are  healed. 

The  sOTes  should  be  cleansed  twice  every  twenty-four  hours,  or  oftener. 

The  yellow  or  cow  lily  is  a  great  counter-poison  to  all  irritating  ulcers, 
•r  sores  of  any  kind  upon  the  surface ;  and  is  one  of  the  best  remedies 
when  made  into  a  poultice  for  biles,  whitlows  or  felons,  and  to  cleanse 
©Id  sores  in  use. 


ADHESIVE,  OR  STICKING  PLASTER, 

Take  of  common  or  litharge  plaster,  five  ounces,  and  one  ounce  of 
white  rosin;  melt  them  together,  and  spread  the  liquid  compound  thin  on 
strips  of  linen  with  a  table  knife. 

APPLICATION. 

This  plaster  is  good  to  keep  the  lips  of  wounds  together,  that  they  may 
Real,  and  is  also  used  to  keep  on  dressings. 

STRENGTHENING  PLASTER. 

Melt  two  ounces  of  rosin  and  add  to  it  a  teaspoonful  of  cayenne  to  make 
£t  stimulating,  and  lard  sufficient  to  make  it  of  the  right  consistency, 
which  may  be  known  by  dipping  a  knife  or  spoon  into  it,  and  then  put- 
ting it  into  cold  water.    If  you  get  it  too  soft,  add  more  rosin. 

This  is  an  excellent  plaster  for  rheumatic  pains  in  the  back,  side,  or  ^^_ 
Embs.  Decayed  teeth  that  are  troublesome  may  be  filled  with  it,  anrf  I 
the  pain  relieved  immediately.  This  plaster  applied  to  the  face  or  breast 
is  excellent  for  the  coid  or  ague  affecting  those  parts,  and  if  applied  to 
the  face,  is  a  good  remedy  for  tic  doloreatix.  All  those  troubled  witb 
any  difficulty  in  which  we  have  recommended  this  plaster,  should  not  fail 
to  make  use  of  it,  as  we  can  assure  them  it  is  an  excellent  application  in 
all  such  cases. 

Plasters  should  be  raised  about  once  in  Uvo  days,  to  clear  the  morbid 
perspiration  from  the  surface  underneath,  and  give  ease  to  the  parts. 

BLACK  SALVE,  FOR  OLD  ULCEROUS  SORES. 

Take  half  a  pint  each  of  linseed  and  olive  oil,  and  half  a  pound  of  redi 
lead,  and  simmer  them  down  to  a  salve.     If  burnt  it  is  spoiled. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  efficient  plasters  we  have  ever  applied  to  old 
putrid  ulcers  that  have  resisted  the  effects  of  eveiy  other  remedj. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  735 

HEALING  SALVE. 

Take  one  pound  each  of  beeswax  and  salt  butter,  half  a  pound  of  tur- 
pentine, and  twelve  ounces  of  balsam  fir;  simmer  them  together,  strain 
oflf,  and  it  is  fit  for  use. 

It  is  good  to  heal  fresh  wounds,  bums,  scalds,  and  all  bad  sores. 

STRENGTHENING  PLASTER. 

Take  equal  quantities  of  burdock  and  mullein  leaves,  bruise  and  put 
them  into  a  kettle  with  a  sufficient  quantity  of  water,  boil  them  well;  then 
strain  and  press  out  the  liquor  and  boil  it  down  about  half  as  thick  as  mo- 
lasses; then  add  three  parts  of  rosin  and  one  of  turpentine,  and  simmer 
tUl  the  water  is  all  evaporated.  Put  it  into  cold  water,  and  work  it  with 
the  hands.     If  too  hard,  add  more  turpentine — if  too  soft,  more  rosin. 

This  is  good  for  weakness  in  the  back,  or  any  part  of  the  body. 


For  Catarrh. 

Pulverized  pipsissewa  may  be  used  alone,  as  snuff,  or  compounded 
with  equal  parts  of  bayberry  bark,  blood  root,  and  witch  hazel  leaves, 
finely  powdered.    Thus  compounded,  it  is  good  for  polypus  in  the  nose. 


Sore  Eyes. 


EYE  WATER. 

Take  of  unicorn,  goldenseal,  and  bethroot,  of  equal  quantities,  or  | 
of  an  ounce  each,  well  pulverized  ;  put  this  compound  into  a  phial  con- 
taining four  ounces  of  hot  drops  ;  shake  it  well  together  for  several  days 
in  order  that  the  drops  shall  extract  the  virtue  of  the  roots. 

APPLICATIOIf. 

Put  three  drops  of  this  compound  tincture  into  a  mixture  of  mUk  and  wa- 
ter of  equal  quantities,  and  dip  a  linen  rag  into  the  mixture  and  then 
close  the  eyes  and  wash  the  lashes  thoroughly,  by  which  means  the  medi- 
cine will  work  itself  into  the  eyes  and  produce  a  salutary  effect.  If  the 
internal  surface  of  the  eyelash  is  sore,  let  one  drop  or  more  fall  into  the 
eye.  Then  wet  two  or  three  thicknesses  of  linen  with  the  mixture,  and 
put  it  upon  the  eyes  on  going  to  bed,  and  put  a  few  extra  folds  wet  with 
cold  water  over  the  other  to  keep  it  moist  and  to  reduce  the  inflamma- 
tion ;  put  a  folded  handkerchief  about  the  head  to  keep  these  cloths  to 
the  eyes,  and  unless  the  difficulty  originate  from  the  body  this  remedy 
will  generally  effect  a  cure. 

This  is  also  a  good  application  for  sore  breasts. 

FOR  SORE  EYES. 

When  the  eyes  are  weak  or  inflamed  break  and  pour  out  an  &gg  fresh 
from  the  shell,  and  the  last  drops  of  the  white  may  be  dropped  into  the 
eyes.  In  two  or  three  days  they  will  become  strong  and  the  inflamma- 
tion will  be  removed.  This  remedy  is  excellent  for  weak  eyes  either  for 
young  or  old.     [See  page  647.] 


736  THE    THOMSONIAN 

CURE  FOR  FILM  IN  THE  EYE  OF  A  HORSE  OR  OX. 

Edward  S.  Jarvis,  Esq.  of  Surry,  Me.  in  a  letter  to  Mr.  Joseph  R. 
Newell,  proprietor  to  the  Boston  Agricultural  Warehouse,  states  as  fol- 
lows : 

Have  you  ever  heard  of  a  cure  for  a  film  on  the  eye  of  an  ox  or  a 
horse  .'*  I  was  told  of  one  eighteen  or  twenty  years  ago,  and  have  been 
in  the  practice  of  it  ever  since  with  perfect  success.  It  was  brought  to 
ray  mind  by  just  having  had  proof  of  its  successful  application  in  a  calf 
that  had  its  eye  hurt  by  a  blow  from  another  creature.  A  film  formed 
over  it  and  it  was  thought  its  eye  was  lost.  But  by  turning  into  the  op- 
posite ear,  a  great  spoonful  of  melted  hog's  fat,  it  was  cured  in  24  hours. 
I  do  not  pretend  to  account  for  this,  but  I  have  seen  it  tried  with  success 
so  often,  that  I  think  it  ought  to  be  made  public,  if  it  has  not  been  be- 
fore.    I  learned  it  from  an  Indian. 

N.  B.  The  above  remedy  we  give  as  we  find  it,  and  if  it  be  correct 
that  a  film  can  be  removed  by  such  means  from  the  eye  of  a  dumb  beast 
we  can  see  no  reason  why  the  human  species  may  not  be  benefitted  by 
the  same  means.     It  is  certainly  worthy  of  consideration.  J.  T. 


STEAMING 

A  great  improvement  for  persons  who  have  a  low  circulation,  and  a  heavy 
pressure  of  blood  to  the  head,  cold  feet,  and  a  bad  digestion. 

When  the  feet  are  cold  and  the  head  distressed,  or  the  veins  low  in 
the  feet  and  full  upon  the  temples,  let  the  person  when  he  goes  into  the 
bath,  put  his  feet  into  a  pail  half  full  of  water,  as  hot  as  he  can  bear  it. 
Let  the  temperature  of  this  water  be  raised  or  increased  by  the  addition 
of  more  hot  water,  as  fast  as  the  patient  can  bear  it,  at  the  same  time 
keeping  up  a  lively  steam  upon  the  body.  This  is  decidedly  the  best 
course  that  heat  can  be  applied  to  produce  a  uniform  circulation  through 
the  system.  When  the  bath  has  been  applied  a  sufficient  length  of  time, 
take  a  quart  of  cold  water  and  add  sutficient  hot  water  to  render  it  but 
one  or  two  degress  colder  than  the  air.  Pour  this  over  the  top  of  the 
head  and  all  over  the  body  and  limbs.  Wipe  off  with  a  cloth,  and  bathe 
the  feet,  legs  and  body  thoroughly  with  liniment. 

This  operation  will  give  new  life  and  vigor  to  the  body,  and  the  head 
will  be  much  improved  if  the  bowels  are  in  good  order  at  the  time. 


COUNTER  POISONS. 

To  cure  the  bites  of  snakes  of  various  kinds,  the  bifes  of  spiders,  stings 
of  bees,  and  other  poisonous  insects. 

Let  the  following  directions  be  attended  to,  as  soon  after  the  accident 
as  possible : 

Take  as  wide  a  mouth  bottle  as  possible,  that  will  hold  from  one  gill 
to  half  a  pint,  or  if  that  is  not  to  be  had,  a  gill  cup  or  wine  glass,  that  is 
perfectly  tight  except  at  the  top  ;  put  into  it  from  half  to  a  glass  of  the 
strong  spirits  of  camphor.  Then  put  the  mouth  of  the  bottle,  or  the  top 
of  the  cup  upon  tlie  wound  or  bite,  and  invert  it  bottom  side  up,  and 
keep  the  mouth  of  the  bottle  so  liaht  against  the  flesh  that  the  spirits  will 
rest  upon  the  wound,  and  not  leak  out  or  waste  away.  By  watching  the 
spirits  closely  you  will  perceive  a  movement  of  the  camphor  between  the 
flesh  and  upper  surface  of  the  liquid,  as  if  the  rarification  of  the  air  in  the 
bottle  and  the  counter  poisonous  qualities  of  the  camphor,  was  not  only 
neutralizing  the  virus  in  the  body  but  drawing  it  out  of  the  flesh  into  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  737 

bottle.     And  the  effect  is  almost  instantaneous  upon  the  patient.     Where 
there  was  pain  before,  now  ease,  quietude  and  peace  predominate. 

BY  JUDGE  UNDERWOOD. 

Rufus  Black,  of  Cherokee  county;  Alabama,  abotit  sixteen  years  of 
a^e  was  very  badly  bitten  on  the  top  of  his  foot  by  a  large  rattlesnake, 
which  instantly  appeared  to  be  progressing-  to  death.  His  father  being 
informed  that  Mrs.  Pattan  kept  the  tincture  of  lobelia,  lost  no  time  in 
applying  that  powerful  remedial  agent,  by  giving  the  youth  a  wineglass 
full  every  fifteen  minutes,  until  he  took  five,  which  vomited  him  copious- 
ly, and  so  completely  cured  him  that  he  walked  about  that  same  evening, 
and  enjoyed  company,  and  was  quite  well  the  next  day,  except  the  bit- 
ten spot  itself,  which  was  so  badly  bitten  that  a  large  plug  sloughed  out, 
and  he  is  perfectly  free  from  it  ever  since. — Southern  Botanico-Medical 
Journal. 

TO  EXTRACT  POISON  BY  SUCTION. 

We  are  informed  from  good  authority  that  in  three  separate  cases 
where  people  had  been  bitten  by  poisonous  serpents,  once  by  a  copper 
head  and  twice  by  rattle  snakes,  that  the  poison  was  readily  extracted  by 
a  person  applying  the  mouth  immediately  after  the  accident  to  the  wound, 
and  drawing  out  the  poison  by  suction. 


Remedies  icorthy  the  attention  of  Females. 


MOTHER'S  RELIEF. 

Take  two  pounds  of  partridge  beny  vines,  half  a  pound  each  of  high 
cranberry  or  cramp  bark  and  unicorn  root,  a  fourth  of  a  pound  of  blue 
cohosh  or  pappoose  root,  and  one  pound  each  of  flax  seed  and  red  rasp- 
beiTy  leaves  ;  let  as  many  of  these  articles  as  possible  be  green  and  all 
well  pulverized ;  boil  them  in  three  gallons  of  water  for  two  hours,  then 
strain  off  and  continue  to  simmer  till  it  is  reduced  to  a  gallon  and  a  half; 
then  add  four  pounds  of  loaf  sugar  and  half  a  gallon  of  good  Holland  gin. 

Let  half  a  glass  of  this  compound  be  taken  three  or  four  times  a  day, 
for  several  weeks  before  confinement.  This  will  strengthen  and  invigo- 
rate the  constitution  before  childbirth  so  that  the  mother  will  pass  the 
time  of  labor  with  little  danger,  and  will  be  less  liable  to  take  cold  after 
confinement.     This  article  should  be  used  by  every  prospective  mother. 

TO  CURE  THE  WHITES  OR  FLUOR  ALBUS. 

Put  one  handful  of  dog,  or  box  wood  blows,  (Cornus  J^lorida,)  into  a 
bowl ;  pour  on  sufficient  quantity  of  boiling  water  to  wet  them  thoroughly 
then  add  half  a  pint  of  good  Holland  gin.  Stop  it  tight  in  a  bottle  for 
use.  Take  from  half  to  a  glass  three  times  a  day  ;  increase  or  diminish 
the  quantity  as  circumstances  may  warrant. 

Tliis  remedy  has  cured  some  obstinate  cases  of  the  Fluor  ^Ibus  in 
this  city,  where  the  severity  of  (he  complaint  had  resisted  the  power  of 
every  other  remedy.  In  several  cases  where  females  had  been  sorely 
afflicted  for  several  years  after  being  married,  and  never  had  any  chil- 
dren, by  the  use  of  this  remedy  alone  they  have  been  restored  to 
health,  and  all  the  other  difficulties  obviated.  I  have  one  case  in  my 
minds  eye  who  had  been  weakly  for  several  years,  and  without  \  child. 


738  THE  THOMSONIAN 

and  about  ten  years  since  she  took  this  remedy,  and  I  believe  she  has 
been  rewarded  liberally  by  the  addition  of  six  new  members  to  her  fa- 
mily since.  Thus  you  see,  ladies,  you  can  choose  or  refuse  the  good 
thing's  of  this  life. 

FOR  FALLING  OF  THE  WOMB,  OR  PROLAPSUS  UTERL 
Burn  and  pulverize  white  beans,  and  make  a  beverage  of  it  the  same  as 
coffee.     Let  the  patient  use  this  as  a  constant  drink  for  a  week  or  two,  or 
till  the  cure  is  effected.     This  is  said  to  be  a  certain  remedy. 

A  USEFUL  SYRUP  FOR  WEAKLY  FEMALES. 

Take  one  handful  of  Spikenard  roots, 

do.        do,        Comfrey,        do. 

do.        do.        Sarsaparilla,  do. 

do.        do.        Smooth  leaf  plantain,  do. 

do.  do.  Black  alder  bark, 
bruise  the  roots  and  put  them  into  one  gallon  of  water  and  boil  them  for 
one  hour  ;  strain  off  and  add  two  poimds  of  loaf  sugar,  four  ounces  of 
ginger  and  one  of  rheubarb,  and  when  cool  one  quart  of  brandy;  stop  it 
close  in  a  jug  for  use.  Take  a  wineglass  about  thiee  times  a  day  before 
eating. 

FOR  BREEDING  OR  NURSING  SORE  MOUTH, 

OR    FOR    SORE    MOUTH    OF    ANY    KIND. 

Take  of  sage  one  ounce  and  boil  it  in  half  a  pint  of  water  to  one  gill ; 
strain  off  and  add  one  gill  of  good  honey,  after  it  has  been  boiled  and 
skimmed.  Then  add  half  an  ounce  of  borax  well  pulverized.  Let  the 
borax  be  dissolved  and  well  stirred  or  mixed  in  the  compound,  when  it  is 
fit  for  use.     Keep  it  in  a  bottle  stopped  tight. 

This  isgood  for  mothers  who  have  what  is  called  the  nursing  sore  mouth, 
or  for  women  who  are  in  the  family  way  when  the  mouth  is  sore.  It  is 
rough  and  will  collect  the  thick  phlegm  or  mucus  from  the  glands,  or  the 
fauces  or  throat ;  and  will  cleanse  the  sores  and  purify  the  breath.  It 
toughens  the  mouth  and  removes  all  soreness. 

Take  a  teaspoonful  and  gargle  the  moutli  and  throat  five  or  six  times  a 
day. 

POWDER  FOR  SORE  MOUTH. 

Take  marshrosemary,  bayberry,  chalk,  rosin  and  sumach  berries  of 
each  equal  quantities,  finely  pulverised.  To  this  add  as  much  white  su- 
gar as  all  the  rest;  let  them  be  well  mixed.  To  be  taken  into  the  mouth 
dry,  or  for  children  it  may  be  wet  or  made  into  tea. 

APPLICATION. 

These  powders  may  be  used  dry  in  the  mouth,  or  in  a  moist  state  for 
children.  Repeat  the  application  until  a  cure  is  performed.  If  too  dry- 
ing, double  the  quantity  of  sugar.  If  it  still  continues  too  drying,  double 
the  quantity  of  sumach  berries. 


FOR  SORE  NIPPLES.—^  useful  Plaster. 

Take  a  linen  cloth,  and  gather  the  comers  and  sew  them  in  such  a 
form  as  for  it  to  resemble  one  half  of  a  ball-cover,  or  so  that  it  will  fit  the 
breast  over  the  nipple.  Then  melt  wax  and  rub  it  over  the  inside  of  the 
case;  apply  several  thicknesses  of  the  wax,  until  the  case  becomes  well 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  739 

sattn-ated.  This  when  applied  will  cause  a  free  perspiration  of  the  breast, 
and  will  remove  agues  and  hard  bunches,  and  heal  all  sores  of  the  nipples 
by  constant  use. 

ANOTHER  REMEDY. 

Take  a  ball  of  beeswax  and  warm  it  so  that  it  becomes  pliable,  then 
work  out  a  plaster  in  form  and  shape  so  that  it  may  fit  snugly  upon  the 
breast,  about  three  inches  from  the  nipple  each  way;  let  this  be  used 
constantly  upon  the  breast  before  and  after  nursing,  and  a  moist  perspira- 
tion will  immediately  start  under  it,  and  there  will  be  no  sore  nipple,  nor 
inflamed,  caked,  or  broken  breasts.  The  bosom  of  the  dress  should  be 
so  snug  as  to  keep  the  plaster  so  close  to  the  breast  as  for  it  to  adhere  as 
tight  as  possible.    This  should  be  remembered  by  nursing  mothers. 

TO  PREVENT  SORE  NIPPLES  OR  BREASTS. 

Bathe  the  breasts  daily  before  confinement  with  beef  brine.  We  know 
this  to  be  a  valuable  preventive,  and  those  who  would  regard  their  com- 
fort after  confinement  should  not  neglect  this  precaution. 

FOR  SORE  NIPPLES. 

Take  a  handful  of  the  herb  pellitory  of  Spain,  (Parietaria  officinalis) 
and  simmer  it  in  butter  until  the  entire  strength  is  exhausted  from  the 
herb;  strain  off,  and  the  ointment  is  fit  for  use. 


FOR  INDIGESTION  AND  FEMALE  OBSTRUCTIONS. 

BROOK  LIME — Veronica  Beccabunga. 

This  article  is  said  to  be  a  valuable  remedy  for  indigestion  and  con- 
sumption. It  is  stimulating  and  is  good  in  form  of  bitters  to  regulate  the 
monthly  turns  with  females,  by  removing  obstructions. 

FOR  NERVOUS  IRRITABILITY  OF  WEAKLY  PATIENTS. 
MOTHERWORT— Zeonwrus  Cardiaca. 

Take  of  Motherwort  a  handful,  and  make  a  strong  tea,  and  let  it  be 
drank  hot  by  the  patient  on  going  to  bed,  or  when  the  spasms  come  on  ; 
this  will  produce  almost  immediate  relief  with  either  male  or  female. 

Feaverfew,  Mugwort,  or  double  or  single  Tansey,  will  produce  nearly 
the  same  effect. 


Miscellaneous. 


FOR  CHAPPED  HANDS  AND  FEET. 

To  cure  cracked  hands,  when  injured  by  lye  in  washing,  and  they  are 
very  painful — or  chapped  feet  in  the  spring  and  fall,  common  to  child- 
ren: 

Wash  the  hands  or  feet  clean,  dry  them  well  by  the  fire,  then  rub  them 
well  over  with  vinegar.  When  the  surface  is  diy,  wash  the  acid  off 
again  with  clean  warm  water,  and  when  dry  annoint  the  parts  with  cream ; 
but  if  that  cannot  be  had,  milk  may  be  substituted.     Rub  two  or  three 


740  THE  THOMSONIAN 

coats  over  the  parts  affected,  and  diy  it  in  by  the  fire;  thfe  pain  will  be 
relieved  at  once,  and  the  sores  will  immediately  heal  up. 

Those  who  are  in  the  habitual  use  of  lye,  potash,  or  any  other  coiTOsive 
substance,  will  do  well  to  remember  this  remedy. 

TO  PREVENT  TOOTH-ACHE. 

Bathe  tlie  tep  part  of  the  head  and  back  of  the  neck  in  cold  water  at 
every  time  you  wash.  Those  who  do  this,  will  generally  avoid  not  only 
the  tootli-ache,  but  also  the  head-ache. 

TO  RELIEVE  THE  TOOTH-ACHE. 
If  the  tooth  be  hollow,  roll  up  a  piece  of  cotton  the  size  of  the  orifice, 
and  wet  it  with  summer  savory  oil,  hot  drops,  spearmint  or  peppermint 
oil,  or  the  tincture  of  pepper,  and  press  it  snugly  into  the  tooth;  or  plug 
it  with  the  stimulating  strengthening  plaster,  after  having  cleansed  and 
dried  the  cavity  with  cotton.      This  will  generally  relieve.      [See  page 

If  the  tooth  is  not  hollow,  but  is  affected  with  the  ague  and  distress  in 
the  jaws,  make  a  small  bag  of  cayenne,  of  the  size  of  a  white  bean,  and 
place  is  between  the  teeth  and  cheek.  Take  some  warming  medicines, 
such  as  composition  or  cayenne  tea,  or  hot  drops;  this  will  Warm  the  sto- 
mach and  much  assist  in  affording  relief. 

FOR  THE  TEETH. 

Honey,  mixed  with  pure  pulverized  charcoal,  is  said  to  be  excellent 
to  cleanse  the  teeth  and  make  them  white.  Lime  water,  with  a  little  Pe- 
ruvian bark,  is  very  good  to  be  occasionally  used  by  those  who  have  de- 
fective teeth,  or  an  offensive  breath. 

SNUFF  FOR  POLYPUS  IN  THE  NOSE. 

Take  pulverized  blood  root  and  saturate  it  with  the  sap  of  the  black  ash 
tree,  tried  out  by  laying  a  green  stick  near  a  hot  fire.  Make  a  thick  paste 
of  these  articles,  then  dry  and  pulverize  it. 

This  snufF  may  be  taken  several  times  a  day.  A  small  quantity  of  bay- 
berry  may  be  added  to  the  blood  root,  which  will  be  some  improvement. 
The  sap  of  black  ash  may  also  be  used  to  advantage  alone,  or  with  hot 
drops,  by  snuffiing  it. 

When  a  polypus  has  been  extracted  from  the  nose,  a  free  use  of  this 
snuff  will  usually  prevent  it  from  growing  again. 

HOW  TO  MAKE  ESSENCE. 

To  make  any  kind  of  essence : — Add  a  teaspoonful  of  oil  to  a  pint  of 
fourth  proof  spirits,  and  shake  them  well  together. 

TO  REMOVE  A  TIGHT  RING  FROM  THE  FINGER. 

Thread  a  needle,  flat  in  the  eye,  with  a  strong  thread;  pass  the  needle 
with  care  under  the  ring  and  pull  the  tliread  through  a  few  inches  towards 
the  hand;  wrap  the  long  end  tightly  round  the  finger,  regularly,  down  to 
ihe  nails,  to  reduce  its  size.  Then  lay  hold  of  the  short  end  of  the  thread 
to  unwind  it.  The  lliread  pressing  against  the  ring  will  gradually  remove 
it  from  the  finger.  Tliis  unfailing  method  will  remove  the  tightest  ring 
without  difficulty,  however  swollen  the  finger  may  be. 

Flowers  deleterious  in  sleeping  apartments.     [See  page  69.] 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  741 

TO  EXPEL  INSECTS  FROM  THE  EAR. 

Insects  frequently  gain  access  to  the  ear,  and  create  excrutiating  dis- 
tress;^ to  remove  which,  pour  in  a  few  drops  of  alcohol,  brandy,  or  spirits 
of  camphor,  and  they  immediately  come  upon  the  surface. 

It  is  not  unfrequently  the  case,  that  both  children  and  grown  persons 
are  troubled  with  distress  in  the  head  from  this  cause,  when  they  suppose 
it  to  be  the  ear-ache. 

RECEIPT  FOR  TETTER. 

Take  half  a  pound  each  of  narrow  plantain,  lobelia  inflata,  narrow 
dock  roots  and  blood  root,  and  steep  them  in  half  a  gallon  of  good  vine- 
gar at  blood  heat  for  thirty  hours;  strain  off  and  press  the  grains. 

Take  emetic  pills  or  tincture  daily;  and  about  twice  a  week,  at  night, 
take  a  bath,  and  after  nabbing  the  surface  well  ihen  apply  tliis  wash  and 
let  it  dry.     It  may  be  used  several  times  a  day. 

FOR  FISTULA. 

Take  a  lump  of  salt  about  the  size  of  an  egg,  the  same  of  hard  soap; 
then  take  a  quantity  of  poke  root  {Phitalachia  decandria)  and  boil  it  se- 
parately until  it  becomes  a  syrup  of  about  one  pint;  then  mix  the  salt  and 
soap  with  it,  to  the  consistency  of  hard  soap.  Wash  the  parts  atfected 
night  and  morning  for  a  week  or  fortnight,  and  the  cure  is^  effected. 

TO  CURE  CORNS  ON  THE  TOES.     Clavus. 

Take  half  a  pint  of  water  cement  m  good  condition,  fresh-  from  the 
cask.  Wet  up  a  tablespoonful  and  put  it  in  form  of  a  poultice  upon  the 
com  just  before  going  to  bed  ;  keep  it  snug  during  the  night,  and  in  the 
morning  you  will  have  a  hard  lump  of  plaster,  to  remove  from  the  toe, 
the  corn  and  flesh  having  absorbed  the  moisture  of  the  poultice;  it  should 
be  borne  in  mind  that  the  cement  should  be  put  only  upon  the  upper  side 
of  the  toe,  or  the  side  affected,  as  it  would  be  difficult  to  remove,  if  the 
part  affected  should  be  encircled  entirely  with  it,  without  the  assistance 
of  a  hammer  or  some  heavy  instrument,  to  break  the  cement,  which 
might  be  attended  with  some  pain  to  the  individual.  Continue  to  apply 
tliis  preparation  for  about  one  week  and  the  clavus  part  will  detach  itself 
from  the  live  flesh,  and  by  the  application  of  a  little  oil  the  com  may  be 
removed  and  the  sore  healed. 

This  discovery  was  made  by  one  of  the  contractors  on  the  Croton  Wa- 
terworks accidentally.  One  of  the  laborers  who  was  mixing  the  water 
lime  or  cement  had  many  corns  upon  his  feet,  and  he  was  about  in  the 
mortar  in  his  bare  feet,  and  it  was  but  a  short  time  before  hi^  feet  were 
entirely  clear  of  those  troublesome  appendages. 

ANOTHER  REMEDY  FOR  CORNS. 

Soak  the  feet  well  in  hot  water  until  the  corns  become  soft,  then  shave 
them  down  to  the  quick.  Let  two  or  three  drops  of  tallow  hot  from  a 
candle  be  applied  to  the  com  ;  rub  it  well  in  ;  then  wind  a  strip  of  linen 
cloth  two  or  three  thicknesses  about  the  toe  and  make  it  fast  •  continue 
to  wear  this  cloth  until  it  wears  out  and  comes  oflf.  I  have  known  many 
corns  cured  from  this  remedy  alone. 

FOR  SCARLET  FEVER. 

A  very  simple  remedy  for  this  dreadful  disorder,  is  merely  a  mixture 
of  cayenne  pepper,  salt  and  vinegar,  used  as  a  gargle,  occasionally  swal- 
lowing a  teaspoonfuU. 


742  THE   THOMSON  IAN 

FOR  BLEEDING  AT  THE  NOSE. 

Great  relief  if  not  a  radical  cure  may  be  affected  by  bathing  the  feet 
in  stimulating  liniment,  and  using  snuff"  freely,  made  of  pulverized  Avitch 
hazel  leaves,  to  contract  the  blood  vessels  in  the  head. 

IMPORTANT  ADVICE  TO  YOUTH. 

Keep  the  head  cool,  the  feet  warm,  take  no  mineral  or  poisonous  me- 
dicine, and  bid  defiance  to  doctors. 

STEEL  BUSKS. 

It  is  extremely  probable  that  whatever  conducts  the  electricity  of  the 
body  from  it,  will  occasion  direct  debility.  With  this  view  I  have  long 
been  in  the  habit  of  causing  females  who  use  steel  supports  in  their  stays 
to  lay  them  altogether  aside. 

ASTHMA, 

We  learn  from  an  intelligent  friend  who  has  long  been  afflicted  with 
this  most  distressing  complaint,  that  the  fumes  of  burning  paper  saturat- 
ed with  a  solution  of  saltpetre  gives  him  perfect  relief.  He  keeps  a  quan- 
tity of  paper  which  he  been  simply  soaked  in  strong  saltpetre  water  and 
afterwards  dried,  constantly  on  hand,  and  on  the  recurrence  of  a  parox- 
ism obtains  almost  instant  relief  from  burning  half  a  sheet  or  a  sheet  in 
his  room.  Others  who  have  been  similarly  affected  have  tried  it,  with 
corresponding  benefit.  In  no  case  has  it  been  known  to  fail,  as  far  as  his 
information  extends. 

We  deem  the  testimony  sufficient  to  warrant  the  publication  of  the  pre- 
scription, which  certainly  has  the  merit  of  simplicity.  If  it  shall  prove 
generally  efficacious,  its  value  is  beyond  price.     It  can  be  readily  tested. 

We  think  the  leaves  or  lobelia  mflata  would  be  far  better,  and  less  dan- 
gerous to  the  health  of  the  patient. 


Miscellaneous  Observations, 

UPON  VARIOUS  SUBJECTS   CONNECTED    WITH    DISEASE    AND  ITS 
TREATMENT,    REMARKS,  &C. 


FOR  THE  QUINSY,  PUTRID  SORE  THROAT,  CROUP, 

Or  any  difficulty  or  inflammation  about  the  throat,  neck,  or  organs  of 
respiration,  occasioned  by  taking  cold,  or  pressure  of  blood  to  the  head. 

In  all  the  cases  above  mentioned,  the  difficulty  is  brought  on  from  the 
loss  of  animal  or  vital  warmth,  consequently  cold  feet,  costive  or  relaxed 
state  of  the  bowels,  attended  with  more  or  less  torpidity  of  the  stomach, 
and  digestive  apparatus;  and  a  consequent  excess  or  pressure  of  blood  to 
the  head. 

TREATMENT. 

Take  a  dose  of  composition,  and  get  the  body  into  a  comfortable  state 
as  regards  warmth ;  then  bathe  the  feet  in  as  hot  water  and  continue  to  in- 
crease the  temperature  until  the  heat  is  as  great  as  the  patient  can  bear. 
Continue  this  operation  for  twenty  or  thirty  minutes,  keeping  the  body 
well  shielded  from  the  air,  then  take  out  one  foot  and  wipe  it  diy  with  a 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  743 

cloth,  and  then  bathe  it  thoroughly  with  stimulating  liniment,  which  dry 
in  by  the  fire;  put  on  the  stocking,  then  take  out  the  other  foot  and  treat 
it  in  like  manner.  Let  the  patient  go  into  a  warm  bed,  with  a  hot  stone 
at  the  feet  to  keep  up  the  perspiration,  which  this  course  will  produce; 
then  make  an  injection  of  composition  or  No.  3,  moderate  in  point  of 
astringent  properties,  sweeten  with  molasses,  and  add  one  ounce  of  the 
strongest  kind  of  third  preparation.  Before  using  this,  the  bowels  may 
be  cleansed  by  administering  a  gentle  enema  of  warm  milk  and  water. 
After  which,  use  the  first  or  strong  hijection,  thoroughly  applied,  and 
when  it  operates  the  scene  of  excitement  is  changed  from  the  head  and 
neck  for  the  bowels  and  lower  extremities.  Now  administer  a  gentle 
emetic  of  the  green  herb,  which  will  operate  mildly  and  create  but  little 
excitement  in  the  stomach.  This  course  will  throw  the  blood  to  the  low- 
er extremities,- and  relieve  the  pressure  at  the  head  and  the  difficult  re- 
spiration. Now  take  two  ounces  of  the  strengthening  plaster  and  melt 
it;  add  one  teaspoonful  of  the  finest  and  best  cayenne  pepper,  stir  it  into 
the  plaster;  and  should  it  be  too  stiff,  add  a  little  hogs-lard,  which  will 
soften  it  to  a  suitable  consistency.  Next  cut  a  piece  of  leather  or  thick 
muslin,  so  that  it  will  fit  in  upon  the  throat  and  out  to  the  outer  edges  of 
the  lower  jaw  and  chin,  and  extending  down  the  throat  and  neck  about 
six  inches,  around  just  back  of  the  ears  on  each  side  of  the  face;  spread 
tlie  plaster  upon  this  cloth,  or  leather,  of  sufficient  tliickness,  and  put  up- 
on the  neck;  and  if  it  does  not  set  snug,  slit  it  under  the  chin  in  several 
places  until  it  will  lay  close  to  the  neck  and  chin  without  wrinkles.  This 
plaster  will  draw  out  the  inflammation  and  relieve  the  patient  almost  im- 
mediately. 

In  all  cases  of  croup,  cloths  v\Tung  out  of  hot  water  may  be  applied  to 
the  bowels  of  children  with  good  success,  to  assist  vitality  by  absorption, 
while  you  use  the  other  remedies. 

In  this  treatment,  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  great  benefit  derived, 
was  in  transferring  the  seat  of  excitement  from  the  upper  to  the  lower 
extremities  until  the  obstructions  above  were  removed,  which  requires 
but  a  short  time.  By  this  course  of  treatment  I  have  cured  many  serious 
difficulties  of  the  lungs  and  throat;  and  in  fact,  the  treatment  is  excellent 
in  any  case  of  disease,  as  all  require  an  equilibrium  in  the  circulation, 
and  this  is  one  of  the  most  effectual  ways  to  produce  so  desirable  a  result. 

In  all  cases  nourishment  should  be  freely  used,  such  as  milk  porridge, 
chicken  soup,  water  gruel,  beef  tea,  or  any  other  substance  of  which  the 
patient  is  fond,  as  it  strengthens  the  body  and  allows  the  medicine  to  pro- 
duce a  more  thorough  operation. 


TO  STOP  THE  LEAKAGE  OF  JOINT  WATER. 

In  case  a  joint  be  cut  so  that  the  water  exudes  from  the  wound,  the 
most  proper  treatment  is  to  wash  it  thoroughly  with  cold  water,  then  wipe 
dry  and  bathe  the  internal  surface  of  the  wound  with  hot  drops ;  then 
close  it  together  with  a  needle  and  thread;  bind  upon  the  sore  a  soft 
sponge,  which  will  dry  up  the  leakage  at  the  same  time  and  close  the  lips 
of  the  wound.  In  eighteen  or  twenty-four  hours  the  parts  will  be  badly 
swollen  in  consequence  of  the  internal  discharge  of  the  joint  water  into 
the  flesh,  which  will  cause  it  to  extend  and  be  extremely  painful;  then  a 
powerful  stimulant  or  draft  must  be  applied,  to  remove  through  the  pores 
the  matter  that  accumulates  in  the  flesh  until  the  sore  heals  at  the  bottom. 
The  limb  should  be  kept  very  still.  If  it  be  the  knee  or  ankle,  it  should 
be  placed  upon  a  pillow  in  a  chair  and  let  the  hot  medicines  be  taken 
freely  to  keep  up  a  perspiration,  which  will  remove  all  inflammation  in  a 


744  THE  THOMSONIAN 

few  days.  A  poultice  of  comfrey  and  white  turpentine  may  also  be  use- 
fully applied  to  the  wound.  In  a  few  days  the  sore  will  be  healed  at  the 
bottom,  provided  you  remove  the  matter  from  the  flesh  by  perspiration  as 
fast  as  it  accumulates  from  the  wound  internally.  Let  the  limb  be  kept 
elevated  and  still,  and  strais^ht  if  possible,  on  a  board. 

Scraped  sole  leather  applied  to  such  wounds  will  also  stop  the  leakage 
of  the  joint,  and  may  be  used  instead  of  the  sponge,  if  the  proper  means 
are  employed  to  keep  up  the  perspiration. 


RHEUMATIC  PAINS,  AND  DEBILITY  IN  THE  KNEES. 

A  gentleman  called  on  us,  who  was  troubled  with  great  weakness  in 
his  knees,  from  rheumatic  pains.  His  limbs  were  so  weak  that  he  was 
under  the  necessity  of  using  a  cane  in  each  hand.  He  said  that  liis  knees 
felt  as  if  the  joints  would  part  and  let  his  body  down,  whenever  he  at- 
tempted to  rise  from  his  chair,  which  he  could  do  only  with  the  assist- 
ance of  both  his  hands,  and  then  with  great  difficulty,  so  weak  were  the 
joints. 

TREATMEXT. 

I  made  a  long  bandage  of  cloth,  the  same  as  I  would  do  to  brace  up  a 
kroken  limb,  and  spread  the  whole  length  with  stimulating  plaster.  Then 
I  commenced  below  the  knee,  and  passed  the  plaster  entirely  around  the 
limb,  then  under  the  hollow  of  the  knee  and  around  the  limb  above  it,  ap- 
plying it  closely,  and  then  brought  it  around  again  directly  over  the  knee 
pan,  and  attached  it  by  the  adiiesive  properties  of  the  plaster  to  the  band- 
age on  the  side.  Thus  the  limb  was  braced  above,  below,  and  across  the 
joint,  which  served  as  artificial  support. 

The  other  limb  was  treated  in  the  same  way;  the  person  at  once  arose 
from  his  chair,  and  without  the  assistance  of  his  canes  walked  across  tlie 
room,  declaring  that  he  had  not  been  able  to  walk  with  so  much  strengUi 
and  ease  for  a  long  time. 


SETTING  A  BONE  IN  THE  FOOT. 

A  lady  by  accident  stepped  into  a  hole  and  sprained  or  turned  her  foot 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  injure  it,  so  that  she  was  not  able  to  walk  upon  it 
for  several  weeks.  She  employed  one  of  the  best  surgeons  in  the  place, 
who  applied  wormwood  and  vinegar,  and  a  great  variety  of  remedies,  but 
all  to  no  purpose.  It  was  badly  swollen,  and  she  was  obliged  while  sit- 
ting to  keep  it  elevated  on  a  chair,  being  unable  to  bear  it  on  the  floor. 
She  wished  us  to  relieve  her  if  possible.  We  examined  the  foot,  and  it 
appeared  to  us  that  the  metitarsal  bone  where  it  is  joined  to  the  first  pha- 
lanx of  the  little  toe  was  out  of  place,  for  when  she  put  it  down  she  said 
it  seemed  as  if  that  part  touched  the  floor  before  any  other  part  of  the 
foot. 

TREATMENT. 

We  put  her  foot  into  hot  water  and  bathed  it  thoroughly,  at  the  same 
time  giving  suitable  medicines  at  the  stomach,  thus  starting  an  active 
circulation  throughout  the  whole  system,  and  relaxing  the  muscles  and 
making  them  pliable,  and  then  applied  the  stimulating  liniment  to  the 
foot.  We  then  cut  out  a  piece  of  thin  board  about  the  size  and  just  in 
the  shape  of  the  bottom  of  the  foot,  hollowing  out  a  space  about  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  deep  directly  under  where  the  metitarsal  bone  would  come 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  745 

upon  the  surface  of  the  board.  We  then  made  a  bandage  about  two 
yards  in  length  and  rolled  it  ;  then  we  placed  the  bandage  across  in  front 
of  the  foot  and  carried  the  roll  back  and  around  just  above  the  heel;  then 
brought  it  forward  around  and  across  the  end  of  the  bandage  and  hollow 
of  the  foot,  about  which  we  passed  it  three  times,  drawing  it  very  closely 
each  time,  which  brought  the  outer  edges  of  the  foot  so  as  to  resemble  the 
hand  when  pressed  upon  the  sides,  forming  a  longitudinal  hollow  in  the 
centre.  The  board  was  then  applied  to  the  bottom  of  the  foot,  over  the 
bandage,  which  was  then  drawn  several  times  around  tlie  foot  and  board, 
together,  thus  bringing  down  the  foot  to  its  natural  position.  This  re-, 
duced  the  bones  to  their  natural  place ;  and  as  soon  as  the  operation  of 
dressing  was  over  with,  the  lady  arose  from  her  chair  and  walked,  for 
the  first  time  since  the  injury  had  been  received,  and  never  had  any  fur- 
ther trouble  with  it. 


TO  STRAIGHTEN  A  CROOKED  LEG  OR  STIFF  JOINT, 
When  caused  by  contracted  muscles. 

Give  the  stimulating  medicines  and  keep  up  an  active  circulation 
through  the  whole  body.  Bathe  the  feet  and  legs  in  hot  water,  in  order 
that  the  muscles  throughout  the  system  may  receive  as  much  warmth  as 
possible,  thus  becoming  very  elastic.  Wipe  the  parts  dry  and  bathe 
them  with  hot  drops  and  nerve  ointment  or  stimulating  liniment.  Then 
put  the  contracted  limb  while  yet  full  of  elasticity,  on  to  a  straight  board 
and  swathe  it  down  as  near  straight  as  practicable.  Continue  the  hot 
medicines,  and  bathing  the  limb  with  hot  water  and  ointment  at  night, 
and  with  the  ointment  alone  in  the  morning,  and  at  each  time  straight- 
ening the  joint  on  the  board  by  drawing  closer  the  swathe  or  bandage; 
the  same  may  also  be  done  at  noon. 

At  each  application  endeavor  to  bring  the  joint  a  little  straighter  or 
nearer  the  board  than  at  the  preceding  time.  By  following  this  course 
many  cases  of  crooked  limbs  may  be  made  straight. 


THE  FEET!     TAKE  CARE  OF  THE  FEET!! 
Let  this  be  remembered  by  all. 

This  important  admonition  cannot  be  repeated  too  often.  Three  quar- 
ters of  our  diseases  come  on  by  the  feet.  Young  ladies  get  the  consump- 
tion by  their  thin  slippers  and  silk  stockmgs.  They  expose  themselves 
in  the  ball  room  after  over  exercise,  by  sitting  down  where  it  is  cool. 
After  leaving  this  place  of  amusement  Ihey  communicate  to  the  body  a 
chill  that  is  most  pernicious  through  their  shoes.  Young  gentlemen  get 
the  rheumatism,  indigestion,  pleurisy  and  catarrh,  by  their  thin  pumps. 
Young  mothers  get  the  ague  in  the  breast,  the  milk  leg,  costive  habit, 
fever  and  dropsy,  by  the  extremities  becoming  too  cold  and  an  obstruct- 
ed perspiration  taking  place. 

Dyspepsia  and  nervous  debility  is  brought  on  by  the  feet  becoming 
cold,  the  circulation  becoming  thereby  crowded  to  the  head,  by  which 
means  the  bowels  and  stomach  suffer  for  the  want  of  an  active  circulation 
in  the  lower  extremities. 

THE    REMEDY. 

In  the  first  place  make  pride  bow  to  convenience,  comfort  and  health 
in  all  things.  In  the  second  place  see  what  the  wants  of  the  body  re- 
quire to  make  it  comfortable,  and  supply  those  wants  without  regard  to 

48 


746  THE  THOMSONIAN 

the  opinions  of  others.  Tliis  fear  of  what  Mr.  A.  i\Ir.  B.  or  Mrs.  C.  or 
D.  will  say,  is  what  has  killed  its  tens  of  thousands.  Therefore,  a  pei- 
iectly  independent  feeling  of  v/hat  others  may  say  or  think  as  to  our 
dress  and  appearance,  if  it  be  decent  and  comfortable,  is  one  of  the  first 
important  requisites  to  preserve  and  secure  health.  In  cold  weather  se- 
cure the  limbs  with  flannel  undergarments,  drawers,  and  woollen  stock- 
ings. Put  into  the  bottom  of  the  boots  or  shoes,  inside  next  to  the  feet, 
cork  soles  or  bottoms,  which  are  furnished  in  small  sheets  for  tlie  pur- 
pose and  may  be  trimmed  down  to  fit  the  bottom  of  the  boot  or  shoe. 
These  corks  will  keep  the  feet  dry  and  v.arm  and  if  the  water  soaks 
through  the  bottom  so  as  to  moisten  the  corks,  the  feet  will  remain  warm, 
as  the  cork  will  not  absorb  the  wet,  consequently  will  remain  dry.  Old 
hat  may  be  used  instead  of  cork,  as  a  substitute,  where  the  former  can- 
not be  had.  This  part  of  keeping  the  bottoms  of  the  feet  warm,  is  cf  the 
utmost  importance  to  preserve  the  body  from  disease,  and  more  especial- 
ly the  lungs,  liver,  and  digestive  powers.  Those  persons  who  take  vio- 
lent exercise  in  their  pumps  should  always  have  thick  shoes  or  boots  with 
cork  or  hat  soles,  to  protect  the  bottom  of  the  feet  against  the  cold  when 
about  to  be  exposed.  The  benefit  of  cork  soles  may  be  more  highly  ap- 
preciated by  those  who  have  been  subject  to  lung  complaints,  headache, 
cholic,  rheumatic  pains,  pleurisy,  &c,  than  those  who  enjoy  good  health, 
and  make  use  of  the  means  as  a  preventive  against  the  attack  of  those 
complaints.  The  feet  being  guarded  as  above  and  kept  warm,  the  body 
requires  less  clothing  to  keep  it  comfortable;  therefore  economy  as  well 
as  health  requires  that  the  feet  should  be  well  protected  against  the  cold. 


TO  PREVENT  FATIGUE  AFTER  EXCESSIVE  LABOR, 

Or  after  having  exhausted  the  vital  or  muscular  energy  by  excessive  per- 
spiration, before  and  after  the  commencement  of  chills. 
When  the  exercise  is  over,  do  not  sit  down  until  you  get  to  a  stove  or 
fire,  and  then  place  your  back  to  the  heat.  In  that  way  the  greatest  force 
of  the  heat  will  be  felt  between  the  shoulder  blades  and  down  the  back, 
so  that  the  medulla  spinalis,  or  spinal  manow,  Avill  receive  the  greatest 
possible  influence  from  its  direct  application.  The  quantity  of  warmth 
received  by  absoi-jjlion  by  the  spinalis  is  distributed  through  the  body  by 
the  nerves,  and  the  comfort  and  rest  experienced  by  the  person  through 
the  whole  syiitem  while  the  radiation  of  heat  is  in  process,  is  pleasant  be- 
yond conception. 

When  the  system  has  thus  replenished  its  vitality,  and  every  part  of  the 
body  has  become  warm,  a  scalding  sensation  is  experienced  on  the  back, 
to  show  that  the  system  is  as  full  of  warmth  as  the  wants  of  the  body  re- 
quire. 

The  absorbents  take  up  heat  so  rapidly  when  a  person  is  very  cold,  and 
the  system  is  filled  so  quick  with  the  warmth,  that  it  reacts  upon  the  sur- 
face, meets  the  direct  rays  of  heat,  and  creates  of  a  sudden,  a  sensation 
or  impression  that  the  back  is  burning  or  scalding.  When  the  last  de- 
scribed sensation  is  experienced,  those  who  will  be  at  the  trouble  will 
find  the  veins  full  of  blood,  both  in  the  hands  and  feet,  and  if  they  attempt 
to  exercise,  the  inconvenience  of  excessive  labor  will  hardly  be  felt,  and 
they  will  feel  much  refreshed  and  invigorated. 

Those  persons  who  are  troubled  with  lung  difficulties  will  experience 
lasting  benefit  by  the  frequent  apj)lication  of  this  warmth,  as  the  writer  of 
this  article  knows  by  experience. 

The  most  direct  way  to  affect  the  lungs  by  external  heat  is  by  the 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  747 

back ;   and  those  who  have  taken  serious  cold  may  be  benefitted  by  re- 
membering" these  admonitionSj  if  they  do  not  consider  them  too  simple. 


INJURIOUS  EFFECTS  OF  THE  YOUNG  SLEEPING  WITH 
AGED  PEOPLE. 

When  young  people  sleep  with  the  aged,  it  will  be  perceived  that  the 
senior  will  grow  vigorous,  whUe  the  younger  will  become  pale  and  wan 
In  appearance,  dejected  in  spirits,  and  enfeebled  in  constitution.  The 
old  person  literally  becomes  young,  and  the  young  one  old.  The  reason 
is  perfectly  plain.  The  two  becoming  bed-fellows,  an  equilibrium  soon 
takes  place  in  the  warmth  and  vigor  of  their  bodies.  Thus  tlie  old  per- 
son preys  upon  llie  vigorous  and  active  system  of  the  young,  by  absorp- 
tion, or  by  gi\'ing  new  life  to  the  old,  while  the  young  person  in  the  same 
degree  partakes  of  the  inert  principle  of  the  aged.  In  this  exchange, 
the  young  person  parts  with  that  principle  which  sustains  vitality  and 
prolongs  life,  and  obtains  the  infirmities  and  impotence  of  age.  In  a  de- 
gree it  may  be  truly  said,  it  is  life  to  the  aged,  and  death  to  the  young. 


HEALTHY  ABLUTIONS. 

Bathe  the  whole  surface  of  the  body  with  cold  water  ever}'  morning  on 
getting  out  of  bed,  then  rub  smartly  Avith  a  coarse  napkin  to  raise  a  cuta- 
neous excitement.  This  produces  a  healthy  action  upon  the  skin,  giving 
the  young  a  robust  constitution,  and  makes  the  aged  more  rugged,  and 
less  liable  to  suffer  from  fatigue  or  clianges  in  the  atmosphere. 

By  making  it  a  constant  practice,  the  muscular  system  will  become 
more  firm  and  solid,  the  person  will  be  mucli  less  liable  to  take  cold, 
will  require  less  clothing,  and  feel  moi-e  strength  and  animation.  This 
should  be  remembered  especially  by  weakly  females  and  all  debilitated 
persons ;  but  let  them  previous  to  the  bathing  take  wanning  medicines,  to 
prevent  taking  cold. 


SPRAINED  LIMB. 

It  may  be  thouglit  strange  by  some  that  an  emetic  should  relax  the  mus- 
cles of  a  sprained  joint,  and  reduce  its  swelling;  but  that  such  is  the  fact, 
we  can  testify  from  our  own  personal  experience. 

We  sprained  one  of  our  ankles  when  young,  which  became  so  much 
swollen  and  so  painful  that  we  were  unable  to  walk.  But  by  taking  an 
emetic  of  the  tincture  of  lobelia,  and  applying  a  cloth  wet  with  whiskey 
and  water  to  the  afiected  part,  in  six  hours  the  swelling  was  entirely  re- 
duced, and  we  were  .able  to  use  the  limb  comfortably. 

During  the  continuance  of  the  perspiration,  the  cloths  were  wet  several 
times,  the  fever  drying  them  rapidly. 


A  HEALTHY  BEVERAGE  FOR  LABORING  PERSONS. 
Put  two  tablespoonsful  of  brown  sugar  into  a  pint  of  cold  soft  water,  or 
the  best  drinking  water  you  have,  and  keep  it  for  a  constant  beverage  in 
hot  weather.  This  is  one  of  the  most  healthy  drinks  that  can  be  used  to 
keep  up  the  tone  of  the  system.  A  teaspooniul  of  ginger  should  be  add- 
ed, which  will  render  the  drink  more  desirable  either  in  hot  or  cold  wea- 
ther. In  the  warmest  weather  this  will  keep  the  body  cool  and  comfort- 
able, and  give  A-igor  to  the  system  and  an  ambition  for  business. 


748  THE    THOMSONIAN 

THE  VIRTUES  OF  HEMLOCK. 

TO  BE  REMEMBERED  IN   BILIOUS  COUNTRIES. 

In  imheallhy  countries  where  the  water  is  stagnant,  let  it  be  made  intc* 
tea,  by  having  hemlock  bouglis  boiled  in  it,  to  prevent  the  injurious  ef- 
fects of  the  water,  and  if  used  as  a  constant  drink  it  will  keep  ofl"  all  pu- 
trid disorders  incident  to  such  places. 

People  who  work  in  swamps,  or  low,  unhealthy  places,  by  using  this 
constantly  will  avoid  disease.     Tiy  the  experiment. 

RED  RASPBERRY  LEAVES— i?»5ws  Strigosus, 

A  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  IBIPORTED. 

TEA — Then  Chinensis.. 

We  have  been  in  the  habit  for  some  time  past  of  using  the  red  rasp- 
berry leaves  as  a  substitute  for  imported  tea,  and  most  of  our  people  pre- 
fer it.  We  think  the  flavor  superior,  and  certainly  the  article  is  far  more 
healthy.  The  two  kinds  of  tea  are  prepared  for  each  meal,  and  the  rasp- 
berry is  preferred  by  most  of  the  members  of  our  family. 

Let  our  readers  try  this  experiment  for  two  or  three  weeks,  and  our 
word  for  it,  they  will  anive  at  the  ^ame  conclusion  that  we  have. 

Children  and  others  who  make  use  of  this  tea  will  not  be  troubled  with 
diarrhoea,  dysenter)%  or  sore  throat  or  mouth. 


Ta  Practitioners. 


INTEMPERANCE. 

A  course  of  medicine  should  not  be  administered  to  any  person  wliile 
in  a  state  of  intoxication — as  the  volatile  properties  of  the  liquor  will  re- 
ceive a  fresh  impetus,  and  press  violently  into  the  head,  and  the  subject 
exhibit  the  wildest  paroxysms  of  madness,  Irom  the  use  of  the  steam  bath 
and  the  other  stimulating  applications  that  would  naturally  be  applied  by 
a  skillful  practitioner,  to  produce  a  salutaiy  operation  or  course. 

We  believe  that  there  is  danger  of  apoplexy  in  a  case  of  this  kind,  by 
too  great  a  pressure  of  stimulus  upon  the  brain.  The  stomach  should  be 
clear  of  alcohol  for  our  stimulating  treatment  to  produce  happy  results 
upon  the  constitution.  The  worst  effects  produced  upon  the  system,  to 
appearance,  are  by  the  application  of  the  vapor  bath.  In  some  cases  in 
which  it  has  been  used,  the  alcohol  has  become  so  volatile,  and  forced 
its  way  to  the  brain  with  such  rapidity,  that  the  patient  would  force  him- 
self from  the  bath,  and  it  woukl  require  the  strength  of  several  persons  t® 
keep  him  under  subjection. 

TO  CURE  INTEMPERANCE. 

People  who  have  been  subject  to  hard  drinking  should  not  be  broken 
ofT  too  suddenly,  as  it  will  prove  deleterious  to  health,  and  in  many  in- 
stances fatal  to  life.     Let  the  following  course  be  adopted. 

Take  a  quart  bottle  full  of  the  favorite  liquor  that  one  has  been  accus- 
tomed to  drink,  with  the  usual  strength.  Let  the  inebriate  take  his  glass 
as  usual,  then  let  his  friend  add  to  the  bottle  a  glass  of  water  for  each  one 
taken  out,;  and  so  continue  to  add  a  glass  of  water  as  oftf^n  as  he  takes  a 
glass  of  liquor,  by  which  means  the  spirit  is  gradually  reduced,  and  its 
consequent  stimulating  effects  upon  the  body  are  gone,  leaving  nature  to 
make  up  the  deficiency  in  vital  energy,  by  "an  appetite  and  suitable  nou- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  749 

rishment.     If  it  is  thought  proper,  a  tablespoonful  of  tJie  tincture  of  lo- 
belia may  be  added  to  the  bottle  at  the  time  the  water  is  put  in. 

In  no  instance  should  the  liquor  be  taken  away  at  once,  but  it  should 
be  done  by  degTces,  und  something  substituted  upon  which  nature  may 
rely  for  a  more  congenial  support.  Aged  persons,  in  this  case,  should 
be  dealt  with  very  cautiously. 

ANOTHER  EFFECTUAL  REMEDY. 

Whenever  the  time  arrives  that  the  thirst  or  hankering  for  tlie  liquor 
takes  place,  which  is  usually  about  the  time  for  taking  the  bitters,  (say 
eleven  o'clock)  substitute  milk  instead  of  the  liquor,  and  it  will  effectu- 
ally do  away  the  inclination  for  the  liquor  in  a  few  days.  Nature  re- 
ceives from  the  nourishment  of  the  milk  a  stimulus  far  more  genial  and 
lasting-  than  tliat  from  the  liquor.  The  body  will  be  invigorated,  the 
mind  made  clear,'and  perhaps  a  disconsolate  Avife  and  suffering  children 
made  happy. 


To  PiMic  Speakers, 

OR  TO  CLERGYMEN,  ORATORS  AND  LAWYERS.  j 

Take  care  of  your  animal  warmth  in  time  of  s'peaking,  or  supply  your- 
selves with  fuel  before  you  commence  the  voyage. 

Men  have  naturally  allotted  to  them  animal  warmth  sufficient  to  carry 
on  respiration  and  for  oral  purposes;  but  when  long  continued  or  animat- 
ed speaking  requires  an  extra  supply,  that  from  the  extremities  is  called 
an,  to  make  up  the  deficiency  at  the  vitals.  If  the  person  be  slender,  or 
thin  in  flesh,  his  warmth  is  soon  exhausted  by  excitement  and  rapid 
speaking,  and  he  becomes  weak  for  the  want  of  material  to  give  rarifica- 
tion  to  the  air  that  is  taken  in  by  respiration.  In  such  cases,  artificial 
means  should  be  resorted  to  in  order  to  give  the  system  a  supply  for  such 
emergencies. 

We  remember  the  case  of  a  reverend  gentleman,  who  was  slender  in 
body,  excitable,  and  nervous  in  temperament.  He  would  become  so^com- 
pletely  absoi'bed  with  his  subject,  and  engaged  when  preaching,  as  to 
use  up  the  natural  warmth  of  his  body  by  his  quick  respiration  and  rapid 
speaking.  From  being  pale,  his  countenance  would  become  lighted  up 
and  florid;  and  if  he  for  a  long  time  continued  speaking,  a  purple  hue  of 
the  countenance,  a  dulness  of  the  eye,  and  a  languor  of  the  body  would 
follow,  succeeded  by  fainting,  unless  he  had  presence  of  mind  sufficient 
lo  sit  down,  or  stop  in  season  to  prevent  it.  "  What  shall  I  do  to  avoid 
these  feelings?  said  he  to  me.  "  Open  your  mouth  less,  and  then  more 
temperately,  or  on  setting  out  carry  a  sufficient  supply  of  fuel  to  last  till 
you  have  amved  at  the  end  of  your  voyage,"  was  our  reply. 

"And  how,"  he  enquired,  "shall  I  supply  myself  with  this  fuel.'" 
"  Take  a  dose  of  cayenne  or  composition  when  you  go  into  the  desk." 
This  advice  he  followed;  and  to  our  enquiries,  soon  after,  what  was  the 
effect  of  our  advice,  he  replied,  "  I  could  perform,  it  seems  to  me,  if  ne 
cessary,  a  second  service  with  as  much  ease  as  the  first,  it  gives  me  such 
a  spring;  it  seems  as  if  I  was  almost  inspii-ed  with  new  life." 

So  we  admonish  j'ou,  gentlemen  clergymen,  orators  and  lawyers,  to 
iay  in  a  good  supply  of  fuel  before  you  commence  speaking. 


750  THE  THOMSONIAN 


Black  and  White  Populatlonj 

AND  THEIR  LIABILITY   TO  DISEASE  IW   BILIOUS  COUKTRIES- 
AIVD  HOT  CLIMATES. 


Why  are  the  while  population  in  tropical  countries  more  subject  to 
putrid  diseases  and  death  than  the  blacks  in  the  same  climate !  It  is  well 
known  that  the  white  people  of  high  northern  latitudes  cannot  live  under 
the  equator,  like  the  blacks  or  native  inhabitants,  without  being  subject 
to  >iolent  attacks  ol'  bilious  complaints,  such  as  yellow  and  bilious  fever, 
or  black  vomit,  until  after  they  have  become  accustomed  to  the  climate. 
Let  us  look  for  a  moment  at  their  different  complexions,  and  the  part  that 
color  acts  upon  the  system,  in  promoting  health  and  generating  disease. 

In  philosophy,  it  is  well  understood  that  black  will  absorb  the  rays  of 
heat  and  light,  and  that  white  will  reflect  them. 

Put  a  piece  each  of  black  and  white  clotli  upon  the  snow,  and  the  black 
will  make  its  way  to  the  ground,  while  the  snow  under  the  white  will 
hardly  become  affected  in  the  fame  temperature.  The  fact  is,  the  black 
cloth  absorbs  the  heat,  and  exiiausts  its  influence  as  fast  as  it  is  received 
upon  tlie  snow  beneath,  while  the  white  reflects  nearly  all  the  heat;  con- 
sequently the  snow  is  not  melted  in  the  same  degree  beneath.  The  same 
is  the  case  with  people.  The  blacks  absorb  sufficient  heat  from  the  sur- 
rounding elements  to  keep  up  vital  energy,  with  the  assistance  of  cay- 
enne pepper,  which  they  eat  in  abundance,  both  in  the  crude  state,  in 
soops,  and  in  many  other  forms,  whicli  enables  them  to  carry  on  respira- 
tion and  perspiration  with  a  great  degree  of  comfort  and  ease;  by  which 
means  tliey  throw  off  by  the  surface  a  large  quantity  of  morbid  matter, 
which  would  (where  there  was  not  sufficient  vital  heat  absorbed  to  keep 
up  the  proper  degree  of  circulation)  accumulate  within,  until  everj'  ave- 
nue of  the  body  Avould  become  full,  when  nature  would  make  a  powerful 
effort  by  evacuations  to  throw  it  off,  by  what  is  usually  termed  the  black 
vomit,  bilious  fluxes,  or  yellow  fever,  or  till  death  terminated  the  suffer- 
ings of  the  patient  by  mortificaiion.  Inasmuch  as  nature  is  not  able  to 
take  up  by  absorption  warmth  sulficient  to  carry  on  perspiration,  in  the 
same  proportion  should  the  person  make  up  the  deficiency  and  promote 
perspiration  by  the  use  of  pepper  or  some  other  stimulus,  to  promote  the 
secretions  or  evacuations  of  the  body  to  such  a  degree  as  to  throw  off  the 
excess  of  matter  that  the  perspiration  has  failed  in  disposing  of. 

The  white  man  reflects  the  heat,  consequently  vitality  cannot  be  kept 
up  but  by  tlie  assistance  of  forced  efforts  ;  he  becomes  faint  and  languid, 
with  a  loss  of  appetite.  The  stream  is  nearly  level  with  the  fountain,  or 
the  temperature  upon  the  surface  rises  nearly  as  high  as  that  within.  This 
will  soon  terminate  his  existence,  unless  by  taking  pepper  or  oilier  arti- 
ficial means  he  keeps  up  the  vital  heat,  or  keeps  down  to  a  proper  medi- 
um that  upon  the  surface;  thus  maintaining  a  gentle  moisture  and  a  re- 
quisite surplus  of  \-itality  to  sustain  respiration  witli  ea=e  until  the  person 
becomes  accustomed  to  the  climate,  by  changing  the  character  and  com- 
plexion measurably  of  the  surlace  from  a  light  to  a  dark  color. 

Mr.  Jefferson  once  remarked,  lliat  in  lime  the  blacks  would  have  full 
possession  of  the  bilious  portions  of  the  low  lands  in  the  eoulhern  states; 
and  the  reason  is  perfectly  plain.  Where  the  sun  pours  down  the  great- 
est power  of  its  rays  there  vegetalion  is  the  most  abundant  and  luxuriant. 
The  blacks  are  enlivened  and  invigorated  by  this  heat,  consequently  it  is 
a  means  of  increasint;  and  perpetuating  their  race ;  while  by  the  same  aii 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  751 

and  climate  the  whiles  are  enfeebled  both  in  body  and  mind,  and  there- 
fore will  decline  in  population  in  the  same  proportion  as  the  blacks  in- 
crease. 

Why  is  it  not  as  necessary  for  the  blacks  to  emigrate  north  during  the 
summer,  for  tiicir  health,  as  for  the  whites?  Are  they  not  by  their  habits 
equally  and  even  more  exposed  to  di-ease  ? 

The" amount  of  vegetation  that  is  constantly  going  to  decay,  is  much 
more  where  the  soil  is  rich  and  the  atmosphere  hot,  than  where  the  soil  is 
less  rich  and  the  atmosphere  more  temperate  and  healthy;  consequently, 
the  amount  of  morbid  poison  is  proportionately  larger  in  the  former  than 
in  the  latter  case,  and  of  course  more  unhealthy.  Such  a  place  is  best 
adapted  to  those  ])eople  whose  complexions  are  such  as  will  with  the 
greatest  facility  exhaust  by  perspiration  the  morbid  poison  received  by 
respiration.  This  is  the  case  with  the  blacks;  they  can  live  and  prosper  in 
the  everglades  of  Florida,  where  the  atmosphere  is  almost  present  death 
to  the  white  man,  who  cannot  Iceep  up  sufficient  vitality  to  eject  through 
the  skin,  the  morbid  poison  received  by  the  lungs  into  the  body  by  respi- 
ration; consequently  he  is  a  subject  for  bilious  or  yellow  fever,  black  vo- 
mit, &c. 

A  resort  to  high  lands  in  hot  weather  is  a  remedy  for  diseases  incident 
to  low  groimds;  but  in  all  cases  make  a  free  use  of  the  pepper. 

Let  these  our  views  of  the  operations  of  the  different  complexions,  and 
their  influence  upon  the  body,  be  thought  of  by  those  who  would  study 
the  cause  and  eifect  of  diseases  upon  the  human  system,  and  also  the  cli- 
mates best  adapted  to  both  health  and  disease,  and  our  errors  upon  the 
subject  corrected,  if  those  news  are  erroneous. 


INFLUENCE  OF  CLIMATE  UPON  MAN. 

The  effects  of  malaria  on  the  range  of  human  life,  maj-  be  illustrated 
by  a  few  facts.  M.  de  Warville  says  that  he  has  seen  in  the  dry,  healthy 
parts  of  America,  women  of  sixty  or  seventy  years  of  age,  with  an  air  of 
freshness,  and  sparkling  with  liealth;  and  (hat  in  many  places  one  person 
in  nine  attains  the  age  of  eighty  years ;  while  on  the  low  island  of  Oerlon 
M.  Moheau  states  that  there  are  not  more  than  live  or  six  octogenarians 
in  fourteen  thousand  inhabitants.  The  limit  of  life  in  Switzerland  is 
placed  by  M.  de  INIoine  at  eighty-six  years — wliile  in  Georgia,  it  is  stat- 
ed, that  white  females  born  there  very  seldom  attain  the  age  of  forty,  and 
men  rarely  that  of  fifty  years.  Out  of  a  thousand  persons  born  at  Vien- 
na half  of  them  do  not  live  to  be  two  years  of  age — whilst  in  the  province 
of  Vaud,  in  Switzerland,  five  hundred  out  of  a  thousand  persons  born 
there  live  to  be  forty-one  years  old.  At  Petersburg,  in  Virginia,  it  is  said 
that  no  white  person  born  there  has  ever  attained  the  usual  middle  age, 
and  then  the  body  appears  quite  decrepit  and  worn  down,  although  no 
severe  sickness  had  been  endured;  and  on  the  west  coast  of  Africa  wliite 
children  bom  there  seldom  attain  ten  years  of  age.  This  is  strongly  con- 
trasted with  the  health  of  the  people  of  the  capital  of  Nor^vay,  where  there 
is  but  one  physician  among  thirty  thousand  inhabitants. 

The  preceding  remarks  sufficiently  demonstrate  the  effects  of  climate 
and  soil  even  on  man,  who,  of  all  animals,  is  best  capable  of  defending 
himself  against  the  consequences  of  the  deleterious  elements ;  for  it  cannot 
be  denied,  that  in  some  countries  his  mind  as  well  as  his  body  arrives, 
with  great  rapidity  and  but  little  vigor,  at  maturity,  when,  without  any 
perceptible  intervening  period  of  manhood,  the  corporeal  structure  hast- 
ens in  an  equal  ratio  of  celerity  to  the  grave.     This  fact  is,  however,  but 


752 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


a  part  of  the  universal  law  of  nature — that  whatever  is  rapid  in  its  growth 
is  equally  speedy  in  its  dissolution.  The  horse  and  the  poplar  quickly 
reach  their  height,  gracefulness  and  beauty,  and  are  shortlived;  wliile 
the  elephant  and  the  oak  require  nearly  a  century  to  obtain  their  vastness, 
strength  and  grandeur,  and  flourish  in  all  the  pride  of  majesty  for  ages. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  NORTHERN  PEOPLE 

WHO   VISIT   LOW   LATITUDES  DURIKG   THE   SUMMER,  HOW   TO 
AVOID  BILIOUS  DISEASES. 

Wear  black  or  red  flannel  under  wrappers  and  draAvers,  fitted  as  snugly 
to  the  body  as  possible,  and  let  your  outside  garments  be  made  of  brown 
linen  or  black  bombazine.  By  this  course  the  body  will  absorb  suffi- 
cient heat  from  the  atmosphere,  by  the  aid  of  the  black,  to  keep  up  vital 
energy;  thus  you  will  in  a  great  measure  obviate  the  inconvenience  aris- 
ing from  a  light  complexion . 

Let  the  food  be  of  soups,  well  seasoned  with  pepper  and  salt,  and  take 
daily  a  few  pepper  pods,  and  you  will  be  likely  to  avoid  in  a  great  mea- 
sure the  horrors  of  the  diseases  incident  to  a  bilious  country. 

Let  the  clothes  be  often  changed,  and  a  great  regard  paid  to  cleanli- 
ness. 

Let  also  a  strong  pepper  sauce  be  freely  used,  made  of  a  wineglassful 
of  good  vinegar,  a  teaspoonful  of  the  best  cayenne,  and  two  teaspoonsful 
of  fine  salt.  Stir  this  well  together,  and  let  it  be  kept  in  a  phial  or  tea- 
cup for  use.  It  may  be  shaken  or  stirred  well  together,  and  a  teaspoon- 
ful taken  half  a  dozen  times  a  day.  Tliis  is  an  excellent  remedy  against 
all  putrid  difficulties  incident  to  low  bilious  countries. 


USEFUL  BEVERAGE. 

Again. — If  the  people  at  the  south  would  import  from  the  north  a  good 
supply  of  hemlock  boughs  {Pinus  Canadei^sis')  to  be  used  instead  of  tea 
during  the  summer  season  as  a  common  beverage,  they  would  not  be  as 
liable  to  the  attacks  of  putrid  complaints.  The  tea  may  be  made  of  the 
hemlock  in  the  most  stagnant  water,  if  it  be  well  boiled.  Let  it  stand 
for  a  constant  drink  or  beverage  during  the  day. 

Let  our  southern  friends  try  this  remedy  as  a  preventive  of  yellow,  bili- 
ous and  other  putrid  complaints,  and  they  will  not  regret  the  experiment. 

The  person  who  makes  use  of  this  tea,  will  not  take  cold  in  northern 
latitudes  by  ordinary  exposure  to  wet  or  cold.  It  acts  powerfully  upon 
the  kidneys,  and  is  a  valuable  diuretic. 


TTie  Asiatic  Cholera. 

A  PHILOSOPHICAL  THEORY. 


In  coming  before  the  community  with  a  theory  so  entirely  novel,  rela- 
tive to  the  cause  and  effects  of  a  disease,  which  the  most  learned  of  the 
known  world  have  thus  far  pronounced  as  being  beyond  human  research, 
we  do  it  with  a  consciousness  of  our  inability  to  do  justice  to  the  subject. 
We  are  therefore  in  hopes  that  our  more  enlightened  friends  will  have  the 
goodness  to  point  out  the  fallacy  of  our  reasoning,  if  we  are  in  error,  as 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  753 

we  are  ever  ready  to  confess  our  ignorance,  and  arc  always  r<;ady  to  ex- 
change it  for  an  equal  share  of  useful  knowledge,  from  whatever  source 
it  may  be  derived. 

We  have  always  been  doomed  to  accompany  the  unfortunate  few  that 
are  destined  to  stem  the  current  of  life,  against  the  torrent  of  prejudice 
and  abuse  thai  is  always  ready  to  break  like  a  mighty  cataract  upon  any 
who  presume  to  offer  an  opinion  that  shall  in  the  least  ditfer  from  the  old 
established  track.  But  our  destiny  has  been  so  long  established,  that  the 
arrows  of  persecution  and  the  darts  of  prejudice  have  lost  their  sting. 
We  give  our  opinion,  if  it  be  ever  so  erroneous;  for  how  can  our  tutors 
rectify  our  errors,  unless  they  are  acquainted  with  them?  We  therelbre 
advance  our  opinion,  but  shall  ever  claim  the  privilege  to  embrace  the 
principles  of  a  more  correct  theory,  as  soon  as  our  opponents  will  con- 
vince us  of  the  fallacy  of  our  arguments,  and  have  substituted  in  their 
stead  more  rational  ones. 

Man,  like  a  machine,  is  under  the  control  of  a  regulator,  and  that  re- 
gulator is  the  mind.  He  is  composed  of  the  elements,  and  his  existence 
IS  dependent  upon  a  certain  tone  or  temperament  the  composition  has  re- 
ceived. Like  a  commander  in  chief  of  an  army,  the  mind  commands  the 
members  of  the  body  individually  or  collectively.  If  the  eye,  as  the  sen- 
tinel of  the  body,  sees  the  danger,  the  mind  by  the  eye  is  ijiimediately 
informed  of  it,  and  the  limbs  are  directed  to  flee,  or  otherwise  act,  as  the 
emergency  of  the  case  may  require. 

Should  the  destruction  of  one  or  more  of  the  members  take  place,  and 
the  mind  remain  unimpaired,  we  should  perceive  at  once  the  disability  of 
the  body  to  perform  its  usual  functions.  The  mind  is  sensible  of  the  de- 
ficiency of  the  members  under  her  command,  or  of  the  body  coiporate, 
from  which  it  has  received  no  injury,  but  still  remains  as  strong  as  be- 
fore any  injury  was  received  by  the  confederation.  But  when  the  mind 
is  mpaired  by  loss  of  reason,  the  whole  body  corporate  suffers  compara- 
tive shipwreck,  in  consequence  of  the  guide  or  regulator  being  impaired 
or  gone.  It  is  like  a  ship  that  is  unmanageable — left  entirely  to  the  mer- 
cy of  the  waves — or  like  a  powerful  engine,  that  is  under  motion  with- 
out adequate  means  by  which  it  may  be  controlled. 

The  ear  can  hear,  the  eye  can  see,  the  nerves  feel,  ihe  limbs  act — ^but 
not  with  judgment,  without  the  direction  of  the  mind. 

The  principle  of  life  is  given  us,  and  the  desire  to  retain  it;  therefore 
when  danger  occurs  to  the  body  corporate,  we  have  a  greater  dread  of  it 
than  if  it  would  only  injure  a  part  of  the  confederation.  Like  fruit,  man 
comes  to  maturity  and  then  goes  to  decay;  and  the  means  that  will  con- 
tinue him  sound  and  prolong  his  days  for  the  longest  period,  are  what  he 
is  ever  in  pursuit  of. 

When  any  unusual  mortality  visits  his  neighborhood,  and  his  friends 
begin  rapidly  to  fall  around  him,  the  eyes  and  ears  inform  the  mind  of  the 
danger  of  the  body,  and  the  limbs  are  immediately  directed  to  flee  with 
the  body  to  a  safe  retreat. 

It  stands  us  all  in  hand  to  guard  ourselves  against  the  enemies  of  our 
existence;  and  being  philosophically  constructed,  it  is  important  to 
-search  out  the  immediate  and  remote  causes  of  any  calamity  that  may  at- 
tend us,  or  threaten  our  common  country,  and  to  reduce  the  cause  as  near 
to  a  mathematical  demonstration  as  the  circimistances  of  the  case  will 
admit,  in  order  not  only  to  shield  ourselves,  but  our  friends,  and  thereby 
furnish  the  means,  if  possible,  to  perpetuate  our  existence.  Fear  rests  on 
the  mind  in  proportion  as  the  place  where  the  person  resides  is  subject  to 
dangerous  or  pestilential  disease.  There  must  have  been  some  principle 
in  the  atmosphere  during  the  cholera,  which  was  more  destructive  to  hu- 
man life  than  at  other  times. 


754  THE    THOMSONIaN 

Therefore,  the  object  of  the  writer  now  is,  to  dwell  upon  the  immedi- 
ate and  remote  causes  of  the  Asiatic  cholera,  in  a  philosophical  point  of 
view,  and  endeavor  to  show  as  far  as  we  are  capable,  in  our  own  way,  by 
what  particular  agency  man  should  be  more  rapidly  cut  off  in  the  time  of 
cholera — during  that  fatal  season — than  at  any  other  time.  We  believe 
the  remote  cause  of  cholera  was  an  unusual  destmction  of  animal  and  ve- 
getable matter,  durhig-  violent  and  sudden  changes  of  the  weather;  and 
the  direct  cause,  the  excess  of  nitrous  or  morbid  gas,  that  was  extracted 
by  tlie  power  of  heat  from  the  decaving  mass,  during  the  summer  wea- 
ther. 

By  keeping  the  foregoing  views  in  mind  whilst  perusing  what  follows, 
the  reader  will  be  better  able  to  judge  of  the  philosophy  of  our  argument 
as  we  progress. 

It  will  be  remembered,  that  in  September,  October,  and  November, 
1831,  preceding  the  cholera,  we  had  our  finest  and  best  weather.  During 
that  season,  all  nature  appeared  beautiful  and  gay,  and  vegetation  was 
clothed  as  it  were  with  summer  verdure.  Insects  were  lively,  and  the 
whole  face  of  nature  was  clad  in  its  summer  garb  during  the  fall,  as 
late  as  about  the  20th  of  November,  when  winter  set  in.  To-day,  as  it 
were,  the  sap  of  the  plants  was  in  their  top,  and  there  was  no  visible  pre- 
paration for  winter,  as  would  naturally  be  expected  at  so  late  a  period 
during  common  seasons  in  the  same  month;  and  all  species  of  insects 
were  lively,  and  there  appeared  to  be  no  preparation  for  winter;  when  in 
an  hour,  as  it  were,  cold  weather  set  in.  The  change  was  so  great  that  the 
sap  m  plants  was  frozen,  by  which  they  were  destroyed  in  great  abun- 
dance, and  the  sap  in  young  fruit  trees,  in  many  instances,  was  frozen 
between  the  cam  and  the  wood,  by  which  the  bark  was  raised,  and  the 
tree  partly  or  entirely  destroyed.  In  that  way  young  trees  suffered  more 
from  the  20th  of  November  to  the  20th  of  June  following,  than  for  fifteen 
preceding  years. 

To  verify  this  statement,  we  have  only  to  say  to  the  horticulturist,  the 
gardener  or  the  farmer,  take  a  retrospective  view  of  the  fall  of  1S31  and 
Hie  winter  foUowmg,  and  see  if  cold  weather  was  not  more  destructive  to 
the  vegetable  matter  than  they  ever  knew  it  to  be  for  the  same  space  of 
time.  Myriads  of  insects  were  overtaken  and  destroyed,  in  consequence 
of  becoming  stiffened  by  the  cold  before  they  had  time  to  get  to  their 
winter  retreat.  We  presume  there  is  no  account  on  record  since  the  set- 
tlement of  North  America,  of  so  g-reat  a  phenomenon  in  the  weather  as 
took  place  in  the  latter  part  of  the  month  of  November  and  the  fore  part 
of  December,  1831.  The  severity  of  the  winter  of  1831-32  preceding  the 
cholera,  far  exceeded  any  winter  that  has  been  experienced  by  the  old- 
est inhabitants  of  the  country.  From  the  time  when  winter  set  in,  we  had 
no  weather  sufficiently  warm,  by  which  the  nitrous  gas  could  be  extract- 
ed from  the  substance  in  which  it  was  generated,  as  has  been  the  case  in 
regular  seasons.  For  in  common  seasons  there  is  warm  weather  enough 
in  each  month  to  exhale  the  poison  that  has  accumulated  during  the  same 
time,  which  is  done  gradually;  consequently  the  injury  to  the  inhabit- 
ants will  be  light  in  proportion  to  its  gradual  escape.  The  large  quanti- 
ties of  gas  which  are  exhaled  in  the  spring,  is  what  causes  the  peculiar 
fainlness  felt  at  that  time,  and  is  what  cuts  off  the  inhabitants,  and  espe- 
cially the  aged,  more  than  at  any  other  season  of  the  year.  In  the  fall, 
the  frosty  nights  and  hot  days  have  the  same  effect  upon  the  inhabitants, 
in  proportion  to  tlie  quantity  oi  tender  herbage  and  animal  matter  that  had 
suffered  by  the  frost,  the  poison  of  which  is  exhaled  during  the  hot  days, 
from  which  it  is  frequently  said  in  relation  to  consumptive  people,  if  they 
do  not  die  in  the  spring,  they  will  live  till  about  the  falling  of  the  leaves 
in  autumn. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  755 

The  large  quantity  of  matter  that  had  accumulated  in  co?isequcnce  of 
the  sudden  change  in  the  fall  of  1831,  and  the  long  and  severe  Avmter. 
throughout  the  country,  had  not  exhaled  its  malaria  or  poison  into  the  air, 
as  is  common,  in  consequence  of  the  severe  cold  weather;  and  the  accu- 
mulations of  six  months  were  to  be  disposed  of  when  hot  weather  set  in, 
about  the  middle  of  June,  1832.  The  exhalations  of  nitie  from  this  mass 
of  morbid  matter,  is  what  we  believe  destroyed  so  many  inhabitants  dur- 
ing tlie  cholera. 

Nitre  is  generated  in  the  greatest  abundance  in  valleys  and  low- 
grounds,  where  dead  animals  are  left  to  decay,  or  where  large  quantities 
of  vegetable  manure  liave  been  deposited,  or  on  the  banks  of  rivers,  in 
swamps  and  low  marshy  grounds ;  and  all  rich  soils  have  an  abundance  of 
it.  Fogs  in  loAy  lands  are  considered  unhealthy,  and  they  are  so,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  nitre  they  contain.  Nitre  is  the  most  powerful  refrigerent 
ever  used  in  medicine.  In  consequence  of  its  cooling  properties,  it  is 
administered  in  fever  powders  to  kill  the  fever,  so  called,  as  \i\n\  wamith 
cannot  exist  but  a  short  time  if  that  is  used  in  any  considerable  quanti- 
ties. The  effects  of  nitre,  or  salt-petre,  are  well  known  to  such  as  have 
by  mistake  taken  it  for  salts,  if  they  have  been  fortunate  enough  to  get 
rid  of  it  without  the  loss  of  life,  as  many  have  been  thus  killed.  The 
Edinburgh  Dispensatory  says  this  powerful  salt,  when  taken  inadvertent- 
ly, is  one  of  the  most  fatal  poisons. 

We  therefore  see  that  nitre  is  a  deadly  poison,  in  substance,  and  why 
not  in  gas,  in  proportion  to  its  density?*  It  is  always  found  in  caves, 
cellars,  valleys,  under  barns,  and  in  places  the  most  retired  from  the  rays 
of  the  sun.  Heat  is  the  only  thing  that  will  act  upon  it;  and  when  the 
gas  is  extracted,  it  fonns  the  heaviest  part  of  the  air,  and,  like  the  sub- 
stance from  which  it  is  taken,  seeks  the  low  grounds,  and  valle}'s,  and 
the  streams  of  water,  the  latter  of  which  it  follows,  and  is  emptied  into 
the  valleys  of  larger  streams,  each  of  which  contributes  its  part  of  the 
poisonous  fluid,  and  the  amount  is  in  proportion  to  the  extent  of  tenito- 
rj',  the  quantity  of  low  marshy  ground,  alluvial  soil,  and  of  animal  and 
vegetable  decomposition  from  which  the  water  has  flown. 

The  o-reater  the  number  of  streams  that  unite,  the  larger  and  more 
dense  the  quantity  of  nitrous  gas  which  settles  down  and  follows  the 
streams.  It  is  invisible  to  the  eye,  but  in  shape  and  movement  the  same 
as  fog  to  the  sense  of  sight. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  the  cholera  did  not  make  its  appearance  the 
first  waim  days — not  until  we  had  several  of  them — and  the  country  adja- 
cent had  sulRcient  time  to  give  out  gradually  her  poison,  and  it  had  float- 
ed down  the  valleys  upon  the  bosoms  of  the  streams,  and  become  united 
in  one  dense  body  of  gas,  in  the  valleys  of  the  Hudson,  St.  Lawrence, 
Ohio,  Missouri  and  Mississippi  rivers;  and  then  it  was  reported  that  the 
cholera  had  made  its  appearance  in  such  a  place,  on  such  a  day. 

And  in  our  opinion  the  disease  raged  until  the  countiy  had  exhaled  its 
excess  of  malaria;  and  as  the  nitre  diminished  in  quantity  through  the 
country,  the  supply  of  the  streams  was  less,  the  gas  became  less  dense, 
the  people  inhaled  a  less  quantity  of  poison  in  the  same  quantity  of  air; 
consequently  the  disease  began  to  subside,  gradually,  until  the  fountain 
was  dried  up  in  the  country,  when  the  effects  entirely  disappeared  in  the 
cities. 

The  effect  of  saltpetre  when  taken  in  too  large  quantities,  in  a  solution 


*  It  has  been  ascertained  by  a  system  of  experiments  in  England,  that  the  weitrht  of  atmos  - 
pheric  air  was  consiiicrably  greater  during  the  prevalence  i)f  the  cholera  in  thai  coniitrv  than 
usnal,  by  which  it  would  appear  that  gome  heavy  foreign  body  had  been  difl'uscd  through  the 
lower  regions  uf  the  atmotiptiere  about  that  period,  and  was  in  some  way  connected  with  that 
disease. 


756  THE    THOMSONIAN 

from  a  crude  state,  is  a  distressing'  chill  through  the  whole  system,  at- 
tended with  violent  cramps  at  the  stomach  and  limbs,  a  cold  sweat  upon 
the  body  and  extremities,  which  is  on  account  of  the  refrigcrent  qualities 
of  the  article,  which  is  rapidly  destroying  the  lire  of  life  or  the  vital  heat. 
The  temperature  of  the  surface  of  the  body  being  reduced  below  that  of 
the  air,  the  atmosphere  immediately  condenses  upon  the  body,  which  is 
the  cause  of  the  excessive  moisture  upon  the  skin,  a  purpleness  of  lips 
and  finger  nails,  a  contraction  of  the  skin  upon  the  hands  and  feet,  and 
death  terminates  the  life  of  the  poor  sufferer  in  a  very  short  time,  unless 
■some  very  active  stimulants,  antiseptics,  and  emetics  are  used  to  keep  up 
the  heat,  and  eject  the  morbid  matter  from  the  stomach. 

The  cholera  is  generated  under  the  same  principle,  according'  to  our 
theory,  in  receiving  the  nitre  in  fonn  of  gas  into  the  blood,  through  the 
lungs  gradually,  by  which  means  the  system  is  poisoned  equally  through- 
out, and  the  patient  does  not  suffer  the  distress  that  he  v.ould,  to  take  a 
dose  of  saltpetre  into  the  stomach,  when  hale  and  vigorous,  and  while  the 
person  was  yet  in  a  pure  atmosphere.  The  subjugation  of  the  principle 
of  life,  that  has  supported  a  large  muscular  system,  cannot  be  done  with- 
out a  powerful  struggle.  The  same  body  could  be  overcome  with  com- 
parative little  distress,  except  the  contraction  or  cramp  of  the  muscles, 
when  the  atmosphere  is  infected,  and  every  breath  is  reducing  the  princi- 
ple of  life  through  the  whole  body,  and,  of  course,  every  one  of  the  sens- 
es become  blunted  or  deadened,  in  proportion  as  the  fountain  or  vital 
principle  gives  away,  to  what  it  would  be  to  attack  it  in  full  vigor  of 
strength  with  saltpetre.  The  oxygen  of  the  blood  is  destroyed  by  the  intru- 
sion of  this  gas  upon  the  lungs,  the  blood  becomes  purple  and  thick,  the 
eyes  are  sunk  back  into  the  sockets,  and  nature  raises  a  feeble  effort  to 
remove  the  poison  from  the  system  by  vomiting  and  relax,  by  which 
means  the  vital  warmth  is  again  reduced,  in  raiifying  or  raising  the  heat 
of  tlie  fluids  to  the  temperature  of  the  vitals,  before  it  leaves  the  system. 
By  this  means  the  vital  heat  is  rapidly  carried  off,  and  to  make  up  the 
deficiency,  the  wamith  in  the  extremities  is  called  in  to  support  vital  ac- 
tion, which  leaves  the  flesh  to  contract,  the  muscles  to  cramp,  and  the 
quantity  of  water  which  has  been  thrown  into  the  extremities  by  the  heat, 
to  carry  on  perspiration,  is  drawn  back  into  the  body,  by  the  contraction 
of  the  flesh  from  the  surface,  when  the  heat  leaves  it  and  goes  off  in  what 
is  called  the  rice  water  discharges,  by  which  means  the  limbs  become 
much  reduced  in  size.  The  warmth  of  the  extremities  being  leftso  much 
below,  or  colder  than  the  temperature  upon  the  surface,  that  the  air  con- 
denses upon  the  skin,  in  what  is  called  the  cold  sticky  sweat.  This  prin- 
ciple may  be  strikingly  demonstrated,  by  putting  upon  the  table  in  a 
warm  day  in  the  summer,  two  tumblers,  one  fdled  with  hot  and  the  other 
with  cold  water;  the  latter  will  sweat,  the  air  having  condensed  upon  it, 
while  the  foimerwill  remain  dry.  Nitre  is  used  in  connection  with  salt, 
to  cure  meat,  and  those  who  are  in  the  habit  of  putting  up  hams,  know 
that  tlie  larger  the  quantity  of  nitre  used,  the  less  the  salt  will  take  hold, 
so  that  many  of  the  hams  after  being  smoked  will  taste  nearly  as  fresh  as 
the  meat  would  when  it  was  first  killed.  By  this  we  see  that  nitre  is  an 
anti-septic,  and  has  a  tendency  to  keep  the  flesh  from  decomposition.  In 
case  of  cholera,  whoever  saw  a  patient  that  had  mortified  or  become  pu- 
trid before  death,  or  that  had  any  visible  signs  of  mortification  before  it 
was  buried,  if  the  interment  took  place  within  six  or  twelve  hours  after 
death  .^  The  flesli  of  a  person  who  died  of  cholera,  was  several  degrees 
colder,  if  we  could  judge  from  the  touch,  than  one  who  had  died  from 
any  other  complaint.  It  felt  nearly  as  cold  as  a  stone,  the  fibre 
was  more  closely  concentrated  than  in  the  cases  of  death  from  other  dis- 
eases, all  of  which  we  attribute  to  the  refrigerent  properties  of  nitre.    The 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  757 

galvanic  battery  would  not  operate  upon  a  person  who  had  died  of  chole- 
ra, which  was  an  evidence  that  the  body  was  destitute  of  oxygen,  or 
electric  fluid. 

When  has  the  time  been  before,  or  since  1832,  that  there  was  as  little 
electric  fluid  in  the  air  ? — in  the  vicinity  of  Albany  we  had  but  two  or 
three  thunder  showers  during-  the  summer,  and  then  the  clouds  flew  hio-h 
and  with  l)ut  little  lightning-. — Tlie  heavens  were  of  a  death-like  hue  or  a 
whitish  yellow  color  fioni  the  horizon  to  tlic  zenith.  The  Aurora  Borea- 
lis,  or  northern  lights,  were  scarcely  visible  during  the  summer.  There 
was  none  of  the  florid  appearances  in  the  heavens  that  are  usually  disco- 
verable at  evening-  about  the  horizon  in  healtiiy  seasons. 

It  has  been  our  opinion,  and  the  facts  have  justified  the  ccnclusion, 
that  from  the  temperate  zone,  or  from  about  the  latitude  of  Philadelphia, 
north  and  south,  the  cholera  has  raged  with  gradually  increased  violence, 
and  as  far  north  as  Quebec,  and  south  to  New-Orleans,  we  are  all  too 
well  acquainted  with  the  fatality  that  attended  the  complaint  to  doubt  for 
a  moment  ils  wide  spread  sweep  of  destruction.  In  the  frigid  zone  the 
sudden  and  violent  changes  of  the  weather  must  have  had  a  powerful  ef- 
fect upon  animal  and  vegetable  matter,  and  in  proportion  as  it  was  de- 
stroyed, the  poison  would  arise  during  the  hot  weather  into  the  air,  and 
tlie  inhabitants  would  be  exposed  and  the  number  of  deaths  would  Ije  in 
proportion  toth«  quantity  of  matter  previously  destroyed.  At  the  south 
the  ricli  alluvial  soil  and  the  large  quantity  of  herbage  peculiar  to  that 
climate  shared  the  same  fate  as  vegetation  at  the  north.  Eut  if  any  thing-, 
the  south  has  a  greater  abundance  of  matter  to  generate  disease,  in  con- 
sequence of  having  a  greater  leng'th  of  time  for  the  growing  season  than 
at  the  north.  Therefore  the  air  will  be  filled  with  a  g:reater  quantity  of 
g-as,  and  a  fatality  will  attend  the  inhabitants  in  proportion  to  its  density. 
See  the  accounts  of  the  cholera  upon  the  borders  of  the  Mississippi,  Ohio 
and  Missouri,  and  at  the  north  upon  the  banks  of  the  St.  Lawrence. 

The  report  of  the  Massachusetts  IMedlcal  Society  published  in  1832, 
states  what  observation  has  taught  us  to  be  the  fact  in  this  countrv',  that 
in  the  East  Indies  the  cholera  avoided  the  hilly  countrj',  and  that  a  range 
of  mountains  would  arresi  its  progress  in  any  })articular  direction,  and 
after  a  long  prevalence  it  found  its  way  through  the  mountain  passes  and 
spread  itself  in  the  valleys  beyond ;  al.-o,  that  the  greater  part  of  the  pa- 
tients were  taken  during  the  night. 

Now,  according  to  our  theorj',  the  nitre  during  the  day  was  exhaled 
into  the  air  and  became  greatly  expanded,  so  that  the  quantity  inhaled  b}' 
the  breath  was  less  than  at  night,  when  the  absence  of  a  vertical  sun 
would  be  the  cause  of  a  heavj-  condensation  of  the  atmosphere,  which 
would  concentrate  the  gas  that  would  fall  in  heavy  masses  into  the  low 
lands,  and  heavy  dews  would  cause  the  g-as  to  become  more  compact, 
consequently  the  patient  whould  inhale  double  and  perhaps  treble  tlie  j^as 
in  the  same  quantity  of  air,  which  Avould  poison  his  system  universal!}-, 
by  means  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  every  part  being  reduced 
alike,  he  would  feel  no  pain  until  the  warmth  was  called  in  from  the 
limbs,  by  which  the  muscles  would  be  left  to  cramp  or  contract,  for  the 
want  of  the  expansive  power  of  heat. 

In  consequence  of  the  refrigercnt  properties  of  the  nitre,  the  vital  heat  or 
fire  of  life  is  fast  dwindling,  and  the  vital  principle  is  so  far  reduced  that 
the  remnant  of  warmth  is  not  able  to  expand  the  chest,  which  has  now 
become  much  contracted;  and  consequently  respiration  is  labored  and 
difficult,  and  the  patient  feels  as  if  a  heavy  weight  was  laying  upon  his 
breast;  and  as  life  ebbs  out  the  senses  leave  the  body,  and  sensation  gra- 
dually-,departs;  the  hearing  becomes  indistinct,  the  eyes  blind,  and  he 
dies  wiftjout  a  struggle,  unlike  a  death  produced  by  any  other  complaint, 


75u  THE  THO.MSONIAN 

imd  the  remains  show  marks  of  the  horror  that  dwelt  upon  the  patient's 
mind  while  in  life,  from  the  powerfully  contracted  state  of  the  muscular 
system,  which  liad  drawn  so  strongly  upon  the  most  delicate  and  sensible 
organs  of  the  body. 

It  may  be  asked,  if  our  theory  be  correct,  what  should  be  the  cause  of 
the  second  appearance  of  the  cholera  in  the  United  States,  along  the 
Mississippi,  Ohio  and  J^.Tissouri  rivers,  when  there  appeared  to  have  been 
no  uncouunon  change  ihe  fall  preceding,  like  that  of  1831.  To  this  we 
reply,  that  in  the  spring  of  1833,  when  those  rivers  broke  up,  the  banks 
were  overflown,  especially  those  of  Mississippi  and  Missouri,  to  a  greater 
extent,  as  we  have  been  informed,  than  for  several  years  before.  In 
some  places  the  country  was  inundated  for  many  miles  eacli  way  from 
the  beds  of  the  rivers,  and  the  water  carried  back  and  implanted  a  rich 
vegetable  loam,  or  earth  strongly  impregnatnd  with  nitre,  and  in  some 
instances  several  inches  deep.  When  (he  water  subsided,  this  alluvial 
coat  v.'as  left,  together  with  innumerable  small  ponds  of  water,  which  had 
settled  in  the  concavities  of  the  country  for  hundreds  of  miles  along  the 
rivers. 

It  is  well  known,  that  a  level  country  will  retain  large  collections 
of  water  after  the  rivers  have  fallen  within  the  limits  of  their  original 
banks.  The  water  is  dried  down;  the  poison  or  nitre  tliatis  embodied  in 
the  loam  in  large  quantities  is  more  condensed,  and  is  continually  reduc- 
ing, until  from  the  veiy  dregs  the  strong  nitrous  gas  is  exhaled  into  the  air; 
it  settles  upon  (he  stream  in  a  condensed  form,  and  floats  down,  inundat- 
ing the  cities;  and  as  soon  as  it  is  strong  enough,  nearly  every  person  of 
certain  habits  or  of  certain  temperaments  will  he  attacked,  and  the  worst 
in  body  will  die  first. 

In  such  cases,  it  has  generally  been  said  that  the  cholera  made  its  ap- 
pearance in  such  a  place  on  such  a  day,  and  it  continued  to  rage  with 
great  ^iolence  for  a  season,  and  when  the  filth  and  water  had  become  re- 
duced down,  and  the  loam  become  dry,  having  exhaled  all  its  moisture, 
(the  means  by  which  tlie  poison  escapes)  the  report  then  is,  that  the  cho- 
lera has  disappeared  as  suddenly  as  it  made  its  appearance. 


In  order  to  reduce  my  theory  to  matter  of  certainty,  as  nearly  as  possi- 
ble, I  had  recourse  to  experiments  with  tlie  thermometer,  both  before  and 
after  the  use  of  medicine,  and  tlie  folloAving  is  a  memorandum  taken  at 
the  time. 

The  course  was  to  observe  the  pomt  at  which  the  mercuiy  stood  in  the 
room;  then  I  vvould  draw  out  the  plate  from  the  case,  and  at  the  same 
lime  have  the  person  recline  upon  a  sofa,  upon  the  back,  and  take  the 
bulb  into  the  mouth,  ag-ainst  which  lie  would  steadily  eject  the  breath 
from  the  lungs,  and  in  about  five  minutes  the  mercury  would  rise  and  be- 
come stationary  at  the  point  of  standard  wamith  of  the  body,  which  would 
be  from  two  to' ten  degrees  above  the  surrounding  atmosphere,  in  propor- 
tion as  the  persons  enjoyed  different  degrees  of  health. 

Mr.  Benjamin  C.  True,  dye-cutter.  No.  7  Beaver  street,  near  its  junc- 
tion with  South  ]Markct  street,  came  to  me  in  July,  in  much  distress;  his 
•countenance  was  pale  and  ghastly,  his  cheek  bones  were  prominent;  his 
eyes  were  sunk  back  in  the  sockets,  and  he  was  attended  with  great  op- 
pressson  at  the  lungs  and  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  a  cold  sticky  sweat 
upon  the  surface.  He  had  been  run  down  to  this  state  in  about  ten  hours, 
and  his  symptoms  in  every  respect  were  those  of  an  approaching  cholera 
of  the  worst  kind.    I  informed  him,  that  before  I  gave  liim  medicine  1 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  759 

wished  to  tr}'  by  experiment  with  the  thermometer,  the  hci^-ht  of  the  ani-. 
mal  warmth  of  the  body,  to  which  he  readily  assented.  The  mercury  in 
the  room  stood  at  88  deg;rees  above  zero,  and  he  only  succeeded  to  raise 
it  to  92  degrees,  showing  ihe  small  difference  of  4  degrees  surplus  above 
the  sunounding  air.  I  then  gave  him  a  glass  of  the  cholera  medicine, 
and  in  about  thirty  minutes  it  had  wrought  so  much  of  a  change  as  to 
raise  the  veins  in  his  hands;  his  cheeks  and  lips  became  florid,  and  he 
felt  quite  smart.  I  then  tried  the  thermometer  again,  and  it  gradually 
rose  to  99  degrees,  showing  a  difference  or  gain  of  7  degrees  by  taking 
the  medicine,  or  11  degrees  suri)kis  above  the  snnounding  air,  instead  of 
4  degrees,  as  at  first.  He  had  no  trouble  after  the  first  day,  as  his  certi- 
ficate will  show. 

My  course  was  to  restore  the  heat  of  the  body  to  its  healthy  standard, 
as  in  the  case  of  True  and  others,  in  order  that  the  perspiration  might  re- 
turn to  the  surface,  and  the  heat  to  the  extremities,  by  which  means  the 
sweat  would  pass  off  from  the  body  through  the  pores,  instead  of  a  relax, 
which  would  stop,  and  the  cramp  would  cease  by  tJie  return  of  warmth  to 
the  muscles;  after  which,  any  gentle  course  that  would  clear  the  body  of 
the  morbid  matter  that  had  accumulated  during  the  indisposition,  would 
leave  the  system  in  a  healthy  state,  with  the  exception  of  the  debility  oc- 
casioned by  the  disease,  wdiich  would  soon  be  gone.  J.  T. 

Mhany,  Jan.  14,  1833. 
The  above  experiment  was  tried  upon  me  in  the  presence  of  several 
other  persons,  and  what  is  there  stated  I  declare  to  be  correct;  and  I  was 
much  astonished  at  the  immediate  relief  I  obtained,  and  was  more  so, 
when  I  saw  the  change  of  seven  degrees  in  the  temperature  of  my  system 
by  the  mercury.     I  had  no  more  trouble  after  the  first  day. 

B.  C.  TRUE. 

Jllhamj,  Jan.  14,  1833. 
I  was  present  and  witnessed  the  experiment  upon  Mr.  Trae,  and  from 
ocular  demonstration  know  it  to  be  correct.     I  also  had  a  similar  experi- 
ment tried  upon  me,  when  I  was  nearly  in  the  same  state  as  Mr.  T.,  and 
with  the  same  success. 

DAVID  BENSEN. 

Albany,  Jan.  14,  1833. 
We  saw  similar  experiments  tried  at  the  office  of  Dr.  Thomson,  Beaver 
street,  Albany,  and  with  similar  results  as  above. 

R.  E.  WARD, 
Of  the  firm  of  Many  ^  Ward,  84  Beaver  street. 
JAMES  HUNTER, 
Lata  Associate  Editor  of  the  Albany  Daily  Advertiser. 

Albany,  Jan.  14,  1833. 
I  have  seen  the  above  mentioned  experiments  satisfactorily  tried  re- 
peatedly, with  the  same  success  as  above,  and  they  appeared  to  me  to  be 
both  philosophical  and  conclusive. 

J.  W.  DOLBEAR. 


760  THE  THOMSOiMAN 


Useful  Observations^ 

TO  PEOPLE  OF  WARM  LATITUDES,  OR  LOW  BILIOUS 
COUNTRIES, 

WHICH  SHOULD  BE  REMKMBERED. 


MEDICINAL  PROPERTIES  OF  SALT. 

Dr.  Stevens,  an  eminent  physician  of  London,  has  recently  naade  cer- 
tain discoveries  relatincr  to  the  diseased  and  healthy  slate  ol"  the  blood, 
and  the  agency  of  salt  upon  the  circulation,  which  .seems  likely  to  pro- 
duce a  great  revolution  in  the  treatment  of  fevers,  and  malignant  diseases 
in  general. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  blood  of  the  arteries  is  of  a  bright  crimson 
color,  Avhile  that  of  the  veins,  which  is  returning  to  the  heart  after  having; 
spent  its  vivifying  influence,  is  of  a  dark  puiple.  According  to  Dr.  Ste- 
vens, the  bright  red  color,  the  vitality  and  the  stimulating  power  of  the 
arterial  blood,  are  all  dependent  on  the  quantity  of  salt  which  enters  into 
its  composition;  while  all  acids,  alkalies,  and  in  general  all  poisons,  tend 
to  blacken  the  blood,  to  reduce  its  stitnulating  powers,  and  of  course  to 
diminish  the  force  of  its  circulation.  The  purple  color  of  the  venous 
blood  is  owing  to  the  carbonic  acid  it  has  imbibed.  In  the  lungs,  the 
oxygen  of  the  atmosphere  removes  this  deleterious  acid,  and  the  circu- 
lating fluid  then  resumes  a  bright  scarlet  appearance. 

According  to  his  theory,  poisons,  and  those  malignant  disorders,  such 
as  the  marsh  fever,  yellow  fever,  &c.,  which  originate  from  the  patient 
having  imbibed  a  febrile  poison,  are,  in  their  very  first  stages,  accompa- 
nied with  a  blackness  and  stagnation  of  the  blood,  occasioned  by  the  de- 
struction of  its  saline  principle;  and  to  cure  the  patient,  this  saline  prin- 
ciple must  be  restored. 

Take,  for  instance,  the  bite  of  a  rattle-snake.  In  this  case,  the  poison 
of  the  serpent's  fang  mingles  with  the  circulation,  destroys  its  red  color 
and  its  vitality,  brings  on  blackness  of  the  blood,  stagnation  of  its  cur- 
rent, convulsions,  and  death.  The  unfailing  antidote,  which  experience 
has  taught  the  Indian  to  apply,  is  to  scarify  the  wound  to  the  bottom,  and 
fill  it  with  salt.  The  salt  is  taken  into  the  circulation,  restores  the  red- 
ness and  vitality  of  the  blood,  and  the  wound  soon  heals.  Malignant  fe- 
vers, and  other  malignant  disorders  operate  in  the  same  way.  They  be- 
gin by  destroying  the  color  and  vitality  of  the  blood,  and  reducing  it  to 
a  black  and  putiid  mass;  and,  says  Dr.  Stevens,  I  have  seen  patients  in 
the  last  stages  of  these  disorders,  recover  under  the  internal  use  of  large 
doses  of  common  salt,  and  other  saline  agents;  wheie  the  cases  were  at 
first  so  hopeless,  that  their  recovery  aftenvards  appeared  to  be  almost  a 
miracle. 

The  climate  fever  of  other  regions,  and  some  other  fevers  are  produced 
in  a  different  way.  A  cold  climate  requires  a  different  constitution  from 
a  warm  one.  In  cold  climates,  the  digestive  organs  are  more  vigorous, 
and  the  blood  is  rich,  stimulating,  and  full  of  salts.  The  blood  in  south- 
em  climates  is  of  a  less  brilliant  color,  thinner,  and  less  impregnated 
with  saline  substances.  When  the  constitution  of  a  northern  stranger  is 
suddenly  exposed  to  the  influence  of  a  southern  climate,  nature  hastens 
to  produce  the  necessary  change  in  his  circulation,  and  the  change  is  ge- 
nerally accompanied  with  an  awful  disease.  While  the  skin  performs  its 
functions  of  perspiration  there  is  no  danger;  but  the  moment  })erspiration 
becomes  obstructed,  from  imprudent  exposure  to  the  cold  night  air,  or 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  761 

any  other  cause,  the  fever  breaks  out.  The  reason  is,  that  the  blood  is 
too  stimulating,  too  full  of  salts,  and  the  danger  is,  that  this  operation  of 
nature  for  reducing  it  should  be  carried  too  far,  and  tlie  blood  so  much 
blackened  and  weakened  that  the  patient  dies  of  mere  exhaustion.  These 
disorders,  therefore,  according  to  Dr.  Stevens,  in  their  first  stages  require 
the  acid,  in  their  latter  the  saline  treatment. 

If  this  theory  of  Dr.  Stevens  be  true,  a  great  step  has  been  made  in  the 
treatment  of  febrile  and  malignant  disorders;  and  certainly  the  universal 
use  of  salt  as  an  indispensable  article  of  diet,  as  far  back  as  histoiy  car- 
ries us,  and  tlie  craving  which  animals  both  wild  and  tame  exhibit  for  it, 
would  tend  to  prove  that  this  condiment  has  some  universal  and  essential 
efifect  on  the  bodily  constitution. 

REMARKS. 

It  will  be  remembered,  that  in  our  cholera  treatise  we  attributed  the 
complaint  to  the  excess  of  nitrous  vapor,  that  had  been  exhaled  from  the 
great  quantity  of  animal  and  vegetable  matter  tliat  was  destroyed  the  pre- 
ceding fall,  and  that  the  gas,  being  the  heaviest  pail  of  the  air,  sought 
the  low  grounds,  or  valleys  of  streams,  upon  the  bosom  of  which  it  floated 
down,  and  its  density  and  fatality  was  in  proportion  to  the  extent  of  ter- 
ritory and  marshy  grounds  that  supplied  ihe  streams  with  water. 

^Ve  also  endeavored  to  show  that  nitre  was  a  powerful  refrigerant,  and 
had  a  tendency  to  destroy  animal  warmth,  for  which  purpose  it  was  used 
by  medical  men  to  kill  the  fever,  and  we  quoted  medical  works  to  prove 
our  position.  Also,  that  nitre  possessed  of  itself  a  piinciple  that  would 
destroy  salt  as  well  as  life.  To  prove  which,  we  mentioned  the  fact  of 
its  being  extensively  used  in  curing  hams,  by  the  nitre  preventing  the 
salt  from  taking  hold  as  it  would  if  the  salt-petre  had  not  been  used,  by 
which  means  the  hams  are  kept  much  more  fresh  than  if  they  had  beeii 
cured  by  salt  alone. 

The  places  where  nitre  is  generated  in  the  greatest  abundance  is  in 
swamps,  marshes,  and  upon  rich  alluvial  soils;  and  such  are  the  abiding 
places  of  yellow,  marsh,  bilious,  and  many  other  kinds  of  malignant  fe- 
vers, in  proportion  to  the  density  of  the  gas,  from  the  greater  or  less  quan- 
tity of  decomposition. 

The  air  is  impregnated  with  the  nitrous  gas  in  those  peculiar  low 
grounds;  the  person  inhales  constantly  its  deleterious  qualities  ;  and  the 
refrigerant  properties  of  the  nitre  not  only  destroy  the  oxygen  in  the  air, 
but  inhalinii'  it  upon  the  lungs,  the  salt  or  preservative  principle  of  the 
blood  is  destroyed,  the  blood  becomes  morbid,  and  thick  or  sizj-,  and 
of  a  dark  or  blackish  red  color,  and  thus  the  foundation  of  putrid  fevers 
is  laid. 

If  putrid  and  malignant  diseases  do  not  originate  entirely  from  the  ex- 
cess of  nitrous  gas  that  escapes  from  the  animal  and  vegetable  decompo- 
sition in  swamps  and  low  grounds,  by  destroying  the  stimulating  proper- 
lies  and  salts  of  the  blood,  and  by  infusing  a  great  quantity  of  nitre  into 
the  air  that  we  breathe,  how  does  it  happen  that  the  vellow  fever  and 
other  putrid  complaints  are  not  prevalent  upon  mountains  or  high  lands  I 
In  order  to  preserve  the  natural  temperature  of  the  blood,  we  should  in 
the  first  place  seek  a  pure  atmosphere,  by  resortuig  during  the  sultry 
seasons  to  high  grounds,  as  it  is  well  known  that  pestilentiaPdiscases  re- 
main in  the  valleys. 

It  is  also  a  well  known  fact,  tliat  where  pestilential  diseases  rage  with 
great  violence,  the  air  is  almost  entirely  destitute  of  electric  fluid,  whicli 
was  tlie  case  in  Albany  during  the  cholera,  as  we  had  but  a  trifle  of  thun- 
der or  lightning  during  the  prevalence  of  that  complaint.  It  was  also 
the  case  it  other  parts  of  the  country. 

49 


762  THE   THOMSONIAN 

We  believe  tliat  pestilential  diseases  of  every  grade  are  broug'ht  about 
by  animal  and  vegetable  decomposition,  in  its  various  stages  of  decay, 
some  of  wliich  are  more  iavorable  than  others.  For  instance,  there  is  a 
constant  growth  and  a  constant  decay,  in  nature,  in  process  at  the  same 
time;  and  it  is  in  the  power  of  the  elements  to  increase  or  decrease  tlie 
amount  of  disease,  in  proportion  as  the  seasons  are  regular  or  irregular. 
For  one  extreme  often  follows  another. 

If  we  have  an  unusual  space  of  dry  weather,  the  decayable  substances 
do  not  diminish  as  i'ast  as  if  we  had  alternately  dry  and  wet  weather.  For 
in  a  long  series  of  drj-  weather,  the  fluid  part  of  the  substances  which  are 
decaying  dries  up ;  and  should  a  drought  continue  for  a  number  of  weeks, 
the  stock  of  materials  for  decay  is  constantly  and  rapidly  accumulating, 
and  the  quantity  that  remained  when  the  drought  first  set  in  still  conti- 
nues nearly  in  llie  same  state  as  when  the  drought  overtook  it,  with  the 
exception  of  the  small  portion  of  moisture  which  it  had  formerly  con- 
tained, and  which  was  soon  annihilated,  leaving  the  substance  behind  to 
become  a  fresh  source  of  disease,  in  conjunction  v,'ith  the  increased  accu- 
mulations . 

In  what  we  call  regular  weather,  the  morbid  matter  which  accumulates 
by  nature,  except  in  some  extraordinary  cases,  evaporates  into  the  air 
nearly  as  fast  as  it  collects.  Thus  by  its  gradual  escape  the  atmosphere 
is  so  slightly  atfected,  that  the  quantity  inhaled  by  an  individual,  if  in 
health,  is  not  so  great  but  what  nature  in  her  daily  operations  works  it  off 
without  any  inconvenience  to  the  person;  consequently  he  does  not  think 
liimself  sick,  or  that  he  has  been  exposed  to  any  thing  that  is  deleterious. 
But  how  is  it  after  a  drought  of  several  weeks,  during  which  health  gene- 
rally pervaded  the  land?  As  soon  as  it  rains  any  ot^  consequence,  and 
the  sun  again  makes  his  appearance  in  all  his  splendor,  the  earth  emits  a 
hot  disagreeable  effluvia,  which  at  once  produces  the  head-aehe  and  a 
faint  sensation  at  the  stomach.  The  morbid  matter  that  was  on  hand  be- 
fore, and  what  has  accumulated  during  the  drought,  has  now  become  wet 
and  is  ready  to  exhale  into  the  air,  say  in  six  days,  what  ought  to  have 
been  escaping  for  six  weeks.  Tlius  the  atmosphere  becomes  at  once 
overcharged  with  that  peculiar  gas  or  poison  from  decayed  substances, 
and  the  system,  if  healthy,  is  more  active  in  absorbing  it  and  hastening' 
dissolution  than  if  it  had  been  in  a  morbid  state ;  and  it  has  a  tendeney  to 
carry  all  living  matter  with  it,  to  decay  or  death,  which  would  be  the 
case,  if  it  were  not  that  nature  has  implanted  m  every  man  a  desire  to 
live,  and  has  pointed  out  remedies  for  him  to  use  Avhen  this  enemy  to  his 
existence  attacks  him.  Notwithstanding  his  exertions,  in  proportion  as 
he  decays,  in  that  ratio  this  perpetual  curse  to  man  gets  the  upper  hand, 
imtil  he  is  cut  off  by  some  disease,  or  old  age  can  withstand  its  attacks  no 
longer,  and  he  sinks  in  death. 

The  climate  fevers  of  the  southern  region,  says  Dr.  Stevens,  are  pro- 
duced in  a  different  way;  a  cold  climate  requires  a  different  constitution 
from  a  warm  one.  We  should  like  for  Dr.  Stevens  to  inform  us  if  the 
greatest  number  of  attacks  by  fever  at  the  south  are  not  upon  the  low 
grounds  where  vegetation  is  the  most  abundant,  and  if  said  disease  is  not 
more  liable  to  attack  the  inhabitants  in  warm  weather,  when  the  vegeta- 
ble matter  is  in  its  most  rapid  state  of  decay.''  and  if  the  disease  will  not 
be  as  much  more  fatal  than  at  the  north  as  the  vegetable  substances  are 
more  plenty,  and  the  rays  of  the  vertical  sun  are  more  intensely  warm  to 
hasten  the  decay  ?  Also,  we  should  like  to  know  if  the  fever  mentioned 
by  the  Doctor  was  not  measurably  brought  about  by  the  deficiency  of 
vital  warmth,  which  a  northern  man  possesses  when  compared  to  a  West 
Indian,  which  could  not  increase  by  absorption  as  fast  as  he  gained  in 
latitude  traveling  south?    We  would  also  ask  if  the  facilities  of  tlie  skin 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  763 

:are  not  increased  in  absorbing  heat  as  the  skin  becomes  brown  or  dark 
colored;  also,  if  tlie  Spaniards,  Portuguese  and  West  Indians  are  not  in 
the  habit  of  replenishing-  the  vital  warmth,  inasmuch  as  they  are  overcome 
by  tlie  external  heat,  by  a  free  use  of  cayenne  peppers  and  salt  in  al- 
most every  kind  of  food  that  is  used  among  them;  such  as  soups  in  par- 
ticular ?  Also,  are  not  those  peppers  greatly  used  in  their  native  state, 
and  are  called  chincopins  by  the  Spaniards,  who  keep  them  in  their  pock- 
ets for  use,  much,  the  same  as  many  of  our  northern  people  do  tobacco  ? 

Dr.  S.  will  admit  we  presume,  that  black  will  absorb  heat  while  white 
reflects  it,  hence  the  peculiar  adaptation  of  the  tropical  climates  to  the 
black  population  and  higher  latitudes  to  tlie  white  population,  for  if  a 
white  man  cannot  absorb  warmth  fast  enough  to  keep  up  respiration,  the 
head  and  fall  is  lost  as  the  miller  would  say,  tlie  outward  and  inward  heat 
become  equal,  and  as  the  surplus  of  vitality  is  gone,  the  man  must  die. 
Wherever  the  yellow  fever  has  prevailed  at  the  south,  the  black  popula- 
tion, with  the  same  care,  have  never  been  cut  off  in  the  same  proportion 
as  the  whites.  The  blacks  make  free  use  of  cayenne  peppers  to  keep 
up  vital  energy  and  restore  their  health,  whde  the  whites  live  popular  and 
die  so,  by  the  free  use  of  calomel  and  other  poisons. 

The  white  missionaries,  who  a  few  years  since  went  to  the  colony  of 
Liberia,  were  very  soon  cut  otf  by  not  understanding  how  to  temper  them- 
selves to  the  climate,  or  in  consequence  of  not  adopting-  the  remedies  that 
the  blacks  have  recourse  to. 

"Again,"  says  the  Doctor,  "when  tlie  constitution  of  a  northern 
stranger  is  suddenly  exposed  to  the  influence  of  a  southern  climate,  na- 
ture hastens  to  produce  the  necessary  change  in  his  circulation,  and  the 
change  is  generally  accompanied  with  an  awful  disease."  The  doctor 
■does  not  inform  us  what  this  change  is,  and  how  it  is  brought  about.  But 
we  presume  the  man  having  left  a  high  for  a  low  latitude,  the  heat  is  in- 
creased upon  the  surface  much  faster  than  the  vitals  have  absorbed  it, 
consequently  in  proportion  as  the  heat  vitally  failed  in  keeping  up  by 
■absorption  with  the  increased  warmth,  so  much  cessation  of  motion  took 
place,  and  in  that  proportion  the  vital  heat  failed  in  rarifying  the  water 
and  other  morbid  matter,  and  throwing  Uiem  clear  from  the  skin  by  per- 
spiration; and  as  soon  as  the  heat  was  so  much  reduced  as  to  fail  in  per- 
forming the  office  of  rarification,  the  matter  that  should  have  escaped 
from  the  surface  stops  in  the  flesh  for  the  want  of  assistance,  the  skin  be- 
comes clogged,  dry  and  inflamed,  the  blood  thick  and  morbid,  the  sys- 
tem is  now  fast  filling  up,  and  the  patient  will  soon  cease  to  exist,  unless 
the  first  principle  that  was  lost,  that  is  the  heat,  can  be  aroused  to  action 
to  assist  the  body  in  expelling  the  load  with  which  it  is  incumbered  and 
■once  more  to  produce  a  free  perspiration,  and  by  the  use  of  other  appro- 
priate remedies  remove  the  morbid  matter  that  has  been  secreted  in  the 
body.  The  doctor  admits  that  while  the  skin  performs  its  functions  of 
perspiration  there  is  no  danger.  But  he  does  not  give  a  name  nor  a  clue 
to  it  that  we  may  Icnow  the  cause  why  the  skin  ceases  to  perspire.  Any 
of  us  know  when  we  are  sick  and  when  we  do  not  perspire;  we  also 
know  when  our  friends  are  dead ;  but  that  is  not  the  main  thing  we  wish 
to  know.  We  wish  to  learn  what  has  brought  about  this  change  so  tliat 
we  may  avoid  the  attacks  or  know  how  to  elfect  a  cure  when  once  we 
are  attacked. 

The  Doctor  says  that  a  northern  person's  blood  is  too  stimulating  and 
too  full  of  salt,  and  the  danger  is  lest  this  operation  of  nature  for  reduc- 
insi^  it  should  be  carried  too  far  and  the  blood  become  so  much  blackened 
and  weakened  that  the  patient  dies  from  mere  exhaustion.  Now  if  heat 
is  the  stimulant  or  principle  that  acts  upon  the  water  or  fluids  of  the  body 
to  produce  perspii-ation,  how  does  it  happen  that  a  northern  man  when  at- 


7G4  THE    THOMSONIAN 

tacked  at  the  south  with  the  fever  ceases  to  perspire,  if  he  has  too  much 
vital  stimuhint,  and  how  docs  it  happen  that  the  blood  beconaes  blacken- 
ed if  it  is  not  destitute  of  oxygen  or  heat,  or  nearly  of  the  same  tempe- 
rature as  the  surrounding  air?  Wc  think  if  the  Doctor  had  given  his 
southern  patients  all  the  salt  the  blood  contains  instead  of  taking  it  away, 
and  then  added  to  the  natural  stimulant  of  the  body  by  the  use  of  half  a 
dozen  West  India  pepper  pods  daily,  which  the  God  of  nature  lias  ex- 
pressly and  so  abundantly  furnished  there  lor  them,  the  perspiration 
Avould  not  have  ceased  so  soon,  neither  would  the  blood  have  become 
black  for  the  want  of  natural  stimulant  or  warmth. 

We  will  here  inform  the  Doctor  that  in  the  West  Indies  where  the  cay- 
enne pepper  is  used  the  most  freely,  there  the  diseases  peculiar  to  the 
climate  are  far  less  prevalent  than  where  they  are  not  used,  and  the  na- 
tive inhabitants  seldom,  if  ever,  have  an  attack  of  the  complaints  so  com- 
mon to  northern  peopie  there.  We  will  now  ask  the  Doctor  ii'it  would 
not  be  better  for  a  northern  person  to  adopt  the  habits  of  the  natives,  in 
relation  to  medicine,  who  have  tested  their  remedies  and  have  fully  tested 
tlieir  efficacy  and  safety  in  the  complaints  of  the  country. 

Under  all  these  considerations  we  would  like  to  know  if  it  is  not  the 
constant  inhalation  of  the  morbid  poison  in  its  greatest  strength  into  the 
system,  the  reason  why  the  common  age  of  man  in  tropical  countries 
rarely  exceeds  that  of  from  twenty  to  thirty  years,  while  in  Norway, 
Sweden,  Russia,  England  and  the  Northern  States  of  America,  they  at- 
tain that  of  from  lifty  to  seventy,  and  even  sometimes  to  an  hundred 
years  and  upwards. 

If  the  operations  of  the  vertical  sun  upon  animal  and  vegetable  decom- 
position is  not  the  cause  by  which  the  great  average  of  the  duration  of 
of  life  among  the  people  in  tropical  countries  falls  short  of  those  in 
higher  latitudes.  How  is  it  that  the  blacks  who  have  removed  from 
those  countries  to  higher  or  more  frigid  latitudes,  so  far  exceed  in  age 
those  of  their  own  countrj^men  who  remain  in  the  low  latitudes  and  even 
that  of  the  white  people  in  cold  countries. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  nurse  of  Gen.  Washington,  a  black  woman, 
reached  the  astonishing  age  of  one  hundred  and  sixly-five  years,  at  which 
age  she  was  exhibited  at  the  north,  and  it  is  also  true  that  a  much  larger 
proportion  of  blacks  at  the  north,  arrive  at  the  age  of  an  hundred,  than  of 
the  whites.  Such  we  believe  are  the  qualifies  of  a  light  and  dark  skin 
in  hot  and  cold  climates,  in  prolonghig  or  shortening  life. 

Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  emigrating  from  low  to  high  latitudes  pro- 
longs, while  that  from  high  to  low,  shortens  existence. 

Where  the  blessings  of  Providence  are  the  most  profuse,  man  is  per- 
mitted to  enjoy  them  the  least  length  of  time  ;  but  where  it  is  necessary 
for  him  to  stniggl*^  and  labor  the  most  unremittingly  for  an  existence^, 
there  his  life  is  prolonged  to  the  greatest  age. 


On  the  use. of  Physic  and  Intempej-atc  Indulgences; 

OR    A    COUIfSEL    OF    THE    SENSES 

UPON  THE  INDISCRETIONS  OF  THE  APPETITE. 


Cathartics,  the  same  as  evciy  other  substance,  have  their  good  and 
bad  qualities;  and  also  require  a  discriminating  mind  to  know  when  to 
use,  and  when  not  to  use  them.  Like  ever)'  other  article,  physic  may 
be  used  with  discretion  and  with  indiscretion.     We  may  as  well  say  that 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  765 

bread  is  not  healthy,  because  if  we  eat  a  loaf  of  it  we  are  made  sick 
(hereby,  consequently  a  small  quantity  is  injurious,  as  to  say  that  because 
peach  "leaves,  senna,  castor  oil,  or  pepper  pods,  in  improper  quantities, 
nnd  at  unsuitable  times,  Avill  do  injury,  tliat  there  is  no  valuable  proper- 
ties in  them,  when  g-iven  in  such  ([uantities  and  at  such  times,  as  expe- 
rience may  have  taug;ht  beneficial. 

Who  does  not  know  that  steaminp,-,  properly  administered  on  suitable 
occasions,  and  at  a  proper  temperature,  is  a  powerful  ag:ent  in  dispelling 
disease.  And  who  does  not  also  know  the  power  of  steam,  when  it  is 
not  subject  to  the  control  of  a  judicious  engineer,  has  destroj^ed  many 
thousand  lives.  Yet  shall  we  say  there  is  no  redeeming  properties  in  the 
power  of  tlie  steam  bath,  when  administered  to  the  sick  by  a  judicious 
practitioner  f 

These  remarks  in  relation  to  physic,  strongly  remind  us  of  the  rules 
and  regulations,  wliich  we  once  saw  placed  over  the  kitchen  table,  for  the 
observance  of  the  domestics,  at  the  residence  of  a  gentleman  in  Boston, 
Mass.  which  were  as  follows,  viz  : 

"  The  Ruhs  of  this  house. — Keep  every  thing  for  its  properuse  ;  keep 
every  thing  in  its  proper  place,  and  do  every  thing  in  its  proper  season." 

The  whole  theory  and  practice  of  physic  may  be  embodied  within  the 
above  rules  and  regulations.  Everything  in  nature  may  either  be  used 
in  season  or  out  of  season;  and  the  grand  secret  in  the  practice  of  medi- 
cine is  to  ascertain  the  appropriate  times  for  their  use.  The  knowledge 
of  this  fact  is  what  constitutes  the  skillful  practitioner  in  medicine. 

The  most  healthy  physic  is  that  which  is  the  most  natural  to  the  body. 
Hence  the  gall  in  sutficient  quantities  to  move  the  bowels  with  regulari- 
ty, Avithout  regard  to  the  quantity  or  quality  of  the  food  taken  in  the 
stomach,  is  the  best  physic,  and  while  that  remains  healthy  artificial 
means  to  assist  it  in  the  performance  of  its  office  are  unnecessa,ry. 

The  abuse  of  the  digestis'e  organs  by  crowding  the  stomach  with  too 
■great  a  mass  of  substances  for  its  disposal,  is  what  first  causes  them  to 
complain.  It  is  not  honoi-able  or  just  because  a  person  is  willing  to 
work  to  heap  upon  hira  the  labor  and  dnidcrery  which  two  or  three  in- 
dividuals ought  to  perform.  So  with  tiie  digestive  powers.  Because 
Ihej^  perfomi  their  task  with  cheerfulness  and  fidelity,  the  epicure  and 
gormandiser  have  no  mercy  upon  these  useful  servants,  but  will  crowd  the 
stomach  wiih  a  heterogenous  mass  to  be  disposed  of  by  them  Avith  great 
labor.  This  admirable  power  of  the  human  system  struggies  with  tlie 
acts  of  the  epicure,  until  overcome  by  excess  in  eating,  drinking  and 
other  intemperate  indulgences,  and  is  obliged  as  is  said  in  common  par- 
lance, to  beg  for  help,  that  a  little  mercy  may  be  shown  it  by  a  more 
temperate  mode  of  living,  or  that  some  assistance  shall  be  granted  to 
enable  it  to  perform  the  daily  task  which  until  this  time,  it  has  been  able 
to  accompFish  alone.  Until  this  time  the  mind  has  sided  with  the  appe- 
tite, and  the  two  united  in  overcoming  reason,  by  which  means  they  suc- 
ceeded in  imposing  upon  the  digestive  powers  to  a  most  unwarrantable 
€xtent.  The  mind  now  begins  to  find  that  it  has  not  the  capacity  to  act, 
and  its  domicilis  not  the  place  of  peace  and  quiet  which  it  was  once. 
The  appetite,  taste,  and  relish  have  become  vitiated,  the  feet  complain 
of  being  cold,  the  bowels  do  not  act,  and  a  derangement  exists  through- 
out the  body.  The  mind  and  the  appetite  being  now  made  uncomforta- 
ble in  their  respective  stations,  consent  to  call  a  council,  to  discuss  the 
various  causes  of  their  troubles;  and  for  the  first  time  call  in  the  aid 
of  reason,  ihe  digestion,  and  the  other  members  of  the  council. 

The  mind  first  breaks  silence  by  saying,  that  for  some  time  past  it  has 
not  found  that  degree  of  quietness  and  sercnitij  that  it  has  hitherto  been 
accustomed  to  enjoy  ;  thai  in  performing  its  daily  business  there  has 


766  THE  THOMSONIAIf 

been  a  degree  of  indecision  and  forgetfahiess  that  was  unacconntable  j, 
that  the  space  set  ajjart  for  its  exercise  seems  contracted,  and  there  ap- 
pears so  great  an  intrusion  upon  its  natural  rights  that  it  could  not  be 
tolerated  any  longer.  This  council,  therefore,  has  been  brought  toge- 
ther that  we  may  Icam  the  cause  and  correct  the  evil  if  possible. 

Yes,  says  the  Ta>te,  my  territory  has  been  invaded  in  the  same  way  as 
tliat  of  the  mind.  I  can  no  longer  enjoy  my  food  as  I  could  once.  That 
pleasure  which  I  was  accustomed  to  take  over  my  roast  beef,  turkies, 
ducks,  ham,  and  my  game  dishes,  are  not,  alas  .'  what  they  were  once 
to  me.  My  champaigne  and  other  wines,  do  not  open  with  that  delicious 
fragrance  and  flavor  with  which  they  have  heretofore  done. 

Yes,  responds  Mind,  my  rest  has  also  become  deficient,  and  what  I 
have  is  much  disturbed  by  frightful  orgies,  so  that  sleep  is  rendered  ra- 
ther a  curse  than  a  blessing. 

Well,  says  Reason,  I  thought  my  two  brethren  would  be  brought  up  on 
a  lee  shore  all  standing,  before  long,  and  would  be  willmg  to  consult  the 
res-t  of  the  cabinet,  after  they  had  run  riot  as  long  as  they  could  stand  it. 
I  must  confess  that   I  have  been  a  great  sufferer  in  this  business.     At 
times  I  could  hardly  perform  my  daily  avocations,  so  affected  has  my- 
judgment  been  in  consequence  of  the  imprudent  management  of  our  bre- 
thren. Mind  and  Taste.     Digestion  has  frequently  complained  to  me  of 
the  injustice  he  had  suffered  and  was  still  subject  to  from  your  iinprudenli 
and  dissipated  habits,  as  the  burden  he  labors  under  seriously  effects  us  all. 
That  is  a  fact,  says  Digestion :     Now  to  satisfy  you  on  that  point  just 
walk  into  your  laboratory  and  depository,  of  which  you  have  appointed 
me  the  keeper  and  chief  engineer,  and  see  how  you  think  I  can  work  and 
do  you  all  justice.     [Opens  the  door  into  the  depository  first.]     Now 
gentlemen,  Mind  and  Taste  have  continued  to  throw  a  great  mass  of  ma- 
terial into  the  depository  for  me  to  dispose  of,  for  a  long  time  past,  botb 
day  and  night.     When  I  was  young  and  vigorous  I  did  not  mind  it  so- 
much,  as  I  could  clear  it  away  by  working  over  hours  or  doing  two  days 
work  in  one,  or  working  both  night  and  day  without  rest.     This  I  have 
done  until  I  can  do  it  no  longer  for  the  want  of  my  proper  rest;  and  I 
even  fell  asleep  at  my  work  la*jt  night;  and  see  how  my  work  has  since 
accumulated.     It  is  impossible  for  me  to  dispose  of  the  whole  of  this  ex- 
cess quantity  in  the  laboratoiy  in  tlie  time  that  is  required — the  conse- 
quence is  that  it  will  spoil.     I  can  consume  more  material  in  twelve 
hours,  and  to  greater  satisfaction  and  profit  to  myself  and  you,  brethren, 
when  it  is  brought  in  to  me  at  suitable  times  and  in  quality  and  quantity, 
than  I  can  now  in  twenty-four  hours,  to  be  crowded  i»i  this  way.     Do  you 
not  know.  Taste  and  Mind,  that  if  you  crowd  your  stove  so  full  of  wood! 
that  there  is  no  room  for  the  workmen  to  exercise  or  the  air  to  circulate 
through  the  interstices  or  chinks,  that  it  will  not  bum,  and  that  the  smoke 
is  crowded  back  into  the  room,  to  the  great  annoyance  of  the  Avhole  fa- 
mily .''     You  must  know  this  fact.     Do  you  not  also  know,  that  by  taking: 
out  one  half  of  the  wood,  and  giving  room  for  the  workmen  to  operate  or 
the  air  to  circulate,  that  the  fire  will  burn  lively,  the  room  become  wirm, 
the  smoke  will  be  expelled,  to  the  great  satisfaction  of  the  inmates,  the 
ladies  in  particular.'    .By  this  process  you  see  that  thalf  a  stove  full  of 
fuel  make  the  inmates  cheerful  and  happy,  w-hile  a  full  stove  make  them 
as  miserable  as  smoke  and  the  want  of  fire  could  possibly  cause  them  to 
be.     In  the  first  instance  eveij  body  in  the  room  suffers,  because  MincS 
acted  without  consulting  Judgment.     In  the  latter  case  all  are  made  hap- 
py by  Mind  and  Judgment  acting  in  concert,  and  allowing  the  workmen 
time  to  rest  between  spells  in  supplying  the  stove,  while  the  heat  gene- 
rated from  the  fuel  subsides  to  that  point  where  ]\lind  and  Judgment 
think  it  sho'jJ.d  again  be  replenished.     Do  you  not  know,  my  brothc? 


1 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  767 

Taste,  that  you  furnished  tne  suflicient  work  last  night,  when  I  should 
Lave  been  at  rest,  to  employ  me  twelve  if  not  twenty-four  hours,  to  dis- 
pose of?  The  consequence  is  the  store  house  is  full,  the  workmen  are 
fatigued  out,  and  you  must  all  suffer  until  we  can  obtain  rest.  During- 
which  time  we  must  call  in  our  friend  Emeticus  or  Catharticus  to  give  u^ 
a  lift  and  clear  the  coast  once  more.  In  this  case  we  are  obliged  to  era- 
ploy  a  new  set  of  hands  to  work,  who  are  unacquainted  in  many  respects 
with  our  laboratory.  We  do  therefore  expect  when  we  get  at  our  busi- 
ness again,  to  tind  that  much  bad  work  has  been  done  by  these  strangers. 
But  even  in  this  case,  it  is  better  than  for  the  work  to  cease  entirely,  for 
my  friends  here  must  be  furnished  with  some  kind  of  support,  either  good 
or  bad.  Now  Taste  and  Mind,  I  will  be  your  faithful  servant  so  long  as 
you  counsel  with  judgment,  but  when  you  do  not  I  shall  call  in  my  friends 
here  who  have  assisted  me  in  this  case;  fori  cannot  do  as  I  could 
once  when  young  and  vigorous,  before  you  broke  my  constitution  by  re- 
quiring me  to  labor  botli  nig  lit  and  day,  and  without  rest;  and  by  Avhich 
means  I  have  been  rendered  in  a  great  measure  incompetent  to  perform 
my  duties,  without  artificial  assistance. 

Feet  and  Hands  said  they  had  suffered,  but  did  not  know  the  cause. 

The  whole  body  politic  assembled  in  council  concurred  in  tlie  opinion 
that  at  times  they  stood  in  need  of  support,  but  could  not  account  for  its 
absence. 

Those  inhabiting  the  region  of  the  bowels  complained  that  the  various 
avenues  of  the  body  were  clogged,  and  for  a  long  time  the  superintend- 
ent had  not  furnished  the  necessary  means  to  keep  them  cleansed  and  in 
order.  The  consequence  was  the  bloodvessels  were  so  crowded  that  the 
blood  was  forced  to  the  head  or  upper  part  of  the  body,  where  there  was 
more  space  for  a  free  circulation ;  consequently  the  extremities  were  left 
to  suffer  with  the  cold,  and  for  the  want  of  support. 

The  reason  why  Mind  and  Taste  found  themselves  so  discommoded, 
was  the  intrusion  upon  their  territory  by  the  blood  of  their  neighbors  of 
the  lower  extremities,  which  ceased  to  fulfil  its  ordinary-  duties,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  confusion  brought  about  by  their  own  bad  management 
in  not  consulting  Judgment  in  relation  to  food,  drink  rest,  and  such  oth- 
er matters  as  were  calculated  to  make  the  body  and  mind  happy. 


A"  PHILOSOPHICAL  AND  USEFUL  OPERATION. 

TRANSFUSION    OF    BLOOD    TO    SUSTAIN    LIFE. 

The  operation  of  transfusion,  or  blood  taken  from  a  man  and  injected 
into  the  veins  of  a  woman,  who  was  dying  of  hemonhage,  was  performed 
under  the  direction  of  Dr.  Bhmdell,  lecturer  on  physiology  and  midwife- 
ry, at  Guy's  Hospital,  London. 

A  poor  woman,  about  25  years  of  age,  was  attended,  whilst  in  labor, 
by  Mr.  Waller  of  Aldersgate  street.  Nothing  particular  occuired  during 
the  labor,  but  after  the  birth  of  the  child,  flooding  occurred  to  an  alarm- 
ing extent.  When  visited  by  Mr.  Waller,  the  patient's  pulse,  at  the 
wrist,  was  scarely  perceptible;  indeed,  at  times,  it  could  not  be  felt;  the 
lips  and  face  were  of  a  pallid  or  death  like  hue,  and  in  a  word,  the  taper 
of  life  was  but  faintly  glimmering. 

Under  these  circumstances,  it  occurred  to  Mr.  Waller  that  the  opera- 
tion of  transfusion  would  be  a  measure  to  rescue  the  patient  from  her  pe- 
rilous situation. 

Mr.  Blundell  was  sent  for,  and  upon  his  arrival  he  found  the  patient 
Siad  semewhat  rallied;  in  consequence  of  which  he  deemed  it  better  to 


768 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


delay  Ihe  performance  of  the  operaiion,  for,  as  Dr.  Blundell  observed  (o 
his  pupils,  this  operation  is  jusliriable  in  extreme  and  otherwise  desperate 
cases.  After  waiting  an  hour  the  patient  became  worse  ;  she  vomited, 
and  was  exceedingly  restless,  which  may  alsvays  be  regarded  as  a  very 
bad  symptom;  the  pulse  at  the  wrist  was  fluttering,  and  occasionally  not 
to  be  felt,  and  there  was  that  peculiar  expression  of  countenance  which 
can  hardly  be  described;  it  may  be  called  'death  in  the  face.'  It  did 
not  appear  proper  to  delay  tlie  operation,  which  was  therefore  commenc- 
ed as  follows : 

The  cephalic  vein  of  the  right  arm  was  laid  bare  to  the  extent  of  about 
an  inch,  and  a  blunt  pointed  bent  needle  was  passed  under  the  vein,  at 
the  lower  part  of  the  opening,  so  as  to  prevent  the  eiflux  of  blood.  The 
husband  of  the  patient,  a  robust  lieallhy  young  man,  was  now  called  in 
and  two  ounces  of  blood  was  taken  in  full  stream,  from  his  arm,  and  re- 
ceived into  a  conical  glass  tumbler.  An  opening  of  about  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  was  made  in  the  vein  of  the  patient,  and  by  means  of  a  syringe 
and  tube,  the  blood  abstracted  from  the  husband  was  somewhat  slowly 
thrown  in,  towards  the  heart.  No  very  obvious  efi'ects  were  produced 
from  this  supply  of  vital  fluid,  and  after  a  pause  of  one  or  two  minutes, 
two  other  ounces  of  blood  were  thrown  in;  soon  after  this  the  pulse  at 
the  wrist  intermitted,  and  there  was  slight  restlessness,  or  rather  desire 
to  change  posture,  but  these  symptoms  passed  away  in  the  space  of  two 
or  three  minutes.  In  consequence  of  the  recurrence  of  these  symptoms 
it  was  deemed  prudent  to  wait  awhile,  and  after  a  lapse  of  five  or  ten 
minutes  the  patient  was  evidently  rallying. 

From  this  period  the  patient  went  on  improving  and  had  not  a  single 
bad  symptom  which  could  be  attributable  to  the  operation;  the  functions 
of  respiration,  circulation,  and  of  the  chylopcetic  viscera,  were  duly  per- 
foniied;  the  temperature  of  the  surface  of  the  body  was  of  the  natural 
standard,  neither  was  there  any  subsequent  affection  of  tlie  sensorium; 
which  Dr.  Blundell  has  known  to  occur-  in  some  cases,  after  the  operation 
of  transfusion. 

The  syringe  employed  was  of  brass,  and  well  tinned  on  the  inside;  to 
the  mouth  of  the  syringe  a  pipe  was  fixed,  of  about  two  inches  in  length, 
of  the  size  of  a  crow's  quill,  shaped  like  a  pen  at  tlie  end,  but  with  a 
blunt  point. 

Before  the  blood  was  thrown  into  the  vein  of  the  patient,  all  air  was 
carefully  expelled  from  the  syringe,  by  placing  the  mouth  upwards,  and 
pushing  up  the  piston  until  the  blood  appeared  at  the  end  of  the  tube  at- 
tached to  the  syringe. 

Dr.  Blundell  observed,  this  case  demonstrated,  beyond  all  cavil,  that 
the  blood  of  a  man  may  be  injected,  by  means  of  a  syringe,  into  the 
veins  of  a  woman  exceedingly  reduced  from  haemorrhage,  without  caus- 
ing death.  Whether  the  syncope  which  occurred  after  the  injection  of 
the  blood,  was  the  result  of  the  operation,  or  of  the  previous  ha-morrhage, 
may  be  disputed  ;  and  admitting  the  syncojic  to  be  the  result  of  trans- 
fusion, we  should  be  no  more  justified  in  rejecting  the  operation  on  this 
account,  than  in  refusing  to  employ  the  lancet  in  other  cases,  because  it 
occasionally  produces  syncope. 

As  only  four  ounces  of  blood  were  injected,  Dr.  Blundell  admitted,  that 
it  might  be  fairlv  questioned  by  some,  whether  the  supply  of  so  small  a 
quantity  of  blood  really  saved  the  patient.  The  doctor,  however,  (and 
he  had  seen  a  great  deal  of  ha?morrhage,)  is  decidedly  of  opinion,  that 
this  timely  supply  of  vital  fluid  turned  the  scale  in  the  patient's  favor,  and 
rescued  her  from  death. 

This  case  was  related  by  Dr.  Blundell  in  one  of  his  lectures. 

N.  B.  We  think  this  treatment  philosophical,  and  is  well  calculated 


MATERIA  ftlEDICA.  769 

to  restore  patients  after  excessive  haemoiThag-e,  either  from  the  uterus, 
lun;^s,  or  any  other  way  that  blood  can  be  lost  from  the  body.  j.  t. 


SHEEPS'  PELT  USEFUL  IN  BRUISES. 

In  180S,  Marshal  Lannes  joined  the  French  army  in  the  Peninsula. 
In  crossin;:^  the  mountains  near  ■\Iondrao-on  his  horse  stumbled,  and  in 
attemptinij  to  rise  fell  on  hiai.  He  was  carried  to  Vittoria  in  a  state  of 
j^reat  danger  from  the  shock  and  the  pressure. 

Treatment. — A  large  slieep  was  immediately  flayed,  and  the  reeking 
skin  was  sown  round  the  Marshal's  body,  while  his  limbs  were  wrapped 
in  ^varm  llannels,  and  some  cups  of  weak  tea  were  given  him.  He  felt 
immediate  relief,  complaining  only  of  the  manner  in  which  the  skin 
seemed  to  attract  every  part  wherewith  it  was  in  contact.  In  the  course 
often  minutes  he  was  asleep.  When  life  awoke  the  body  was  slreaming 
with  perspiration.  The  dangerous  symptoms  were  relieved;  and  on  the 
tifth  day  he  was  able  to  command  at  the  celebrated  battle  of  Tudela,*  in 
which  40,000  men  under  Castanos  were  beaten  and  dispersed,  with  the 
loss  of  all  their  ammunition  and  baggage. 

N.  B.  There  is  now  living  and  in  health,  in  this  city,  (Albany,)  a  lady 
who,  at  the  age  of  eleven  years,  was  crushed  under  a  heavy  timber,  and 
.  whose  life  was  in  like  manner  preseived  by  the  immediate  application  of 
a  warm  pelt  hastily  stripped  from  a  sheep.  j.  t. 


INDIAN  REMEDY  AND  CURE  FOR  CONSU^^IPTION. 

We  copy  the  following  interesting  cure  from  the  travels  and  adven- 
tures of  Ross  Cox,  upon  the  Columbia  river,  and  among-  the  western 
tribes  of  Indians. 

"  The  Oakinagan  mode  of  curing  some  of  our  diseases  would  probably 
startle  many  of  the  faculty.  The  ibllov/ing  case  in  particular  passed  un- 
der my  own  observation : 

One  of  the  proprietors  had,  in  the  year  1814,  taken  as  a  wife  a  young 
and  beautiful  girl,  whose  father  had  been  one  of  the  early  partners,  and 
whose  mother  was  a  half  breed  (her  grandmother  having  beert  a  native 
of  the  Cree  tribe;)  so  that  although  not  a  pure  white,  she  was  fairer  than 
many  who  are  so  called  in  Europe.  He  proceeded  with  her  to  Fort 
George:  but  the  change  of  climate,  from  the  diy^  and  healthy  plains  of 
Fort  des  Prairie  to  the  gloomy  forests  and  incessant  rains  on  the  north- 
west coast,  was  too  much  for  her  delicate  frame,  and  she  fell  into  a  deep 
consumption.  As  a  last  resourse,  her  husband  determined  to  send  her  to 
Oakinagan  to  try  the  change  of  air,  and  requested  me  to  procure  her  ac- 
commodation at  that  place  for  the  summer.  This  I  easily  managed. 
She  was  accompanied  by  a  younger  sister,  and  an  old  female  attendant. 

For  some  days  after  her  arrival  we  were  in  houily  expectation  of  Iter 
death.  Her  legs  and  feet  were  much  swollen,  and  so  hard  tliat  the 
greatest  pressure  created  no  sensation  :  her  liair  liad  fiillen  off  in  such 
quantities  as  nearly  to  cause  baldness;  a  sable  shade  surrounded  her 
deeply  sunk  eyes.  She  was  in  fact  little  more  than  a  skeleton,  with 
scarcely  any  svmptoms  of  vitality,  and  her  whole  appearance  betokened 
approaching  dissolution.  Such  was  the  state  of  the  unfortunate  patient, 
when  an  old  Indian  who  had    for  some  days  observed  her  sitting  in  the 

'  Memoirs  de  Larrcy,  torn.  iii.  p.  24:3.  That  eminent  Surgeon  bad  learned  the  remedy  from 
the  Savasjes  of  Newfoundland,  who  had  applied  it  tn  some  sailors  whose  boat  bad  heen  brokcD 
to  pieces  and  themselves  dashed  by  the  waves  upon  their  coast 


770  THE  THOMSONIAN 

porch  door,  where  she  was  brought  supported  on  pillows  to  enjoy  Ihc 
fresh  air,  called  me  aside,  and  told  me  he  had  no  doubt  of  being-  able  to 
cure  her,  provided  I  sliould  aj^rce  to  his  plan;  but  added  that  he  would 
not  o^ive  any  explanation  of  the  means  he  intended  to  use,  for  fear  we 
miu;ht  laugh  at  him,  unless  we  consented  to  adopt  them.  We  accoi'ding- 
ly  held  a  consultation,  the  result  of  which  was,  that  the  Indian  should  be 
allowed  to  follow  his  own  method.  It  could  not  make  her  worse,  and 
there  was  a  possibilily  of  success. 

Traafment . — Having  acquainted  him  with  her  acquiescence,  he  im- 
mediately commenced  operations  by  seizing  an  ill-looking,  snarling,  cur 
dog  which  he  half  strangled;  after  which  he  deliberately  cut  its  throat. 
He  then  ripped  open  the  belly,  and  placed  the  legs  and  feet  of  the  pa- 
tient inside,  surrounded  by  the  warm  intestines,  in  which  position  he 
kept  them  until  the  carcass  became  cold.  He  then  took  them  out  and 
bandaged  them  with  warm  flannel  which  he  said  was  very  good.  The 
following  day  another  dog  lost  its  life,  and  a  similar  operation  was  per- 
formed. This  was  continued  for  some  time,  until  every  ill-disposed  cur 
in  the  village  had  disappeared  by  the  throat-cutting  knife  of  our  dog-de- 
stroying doctor,  and  we  were  obliged  to  purchase  some  of  a  superior 
breed.  While  she  was  undergoing  this  process  she  took,  in  addition  a 
small  quantity  of  bark  daily  in  a  glass  of  port  wine.  In  the  mean  time 
the  swelling  gradually  decreased,  the  fingers  lost  their  corpse-like  na- 
kedness, the  hectic  flushes  became  rarer,  and  "  that  most  pure  spirit  of 
sense,"  the  eye,  gave  evident  tokens  of  returning  animation.  When  her 
strength  permitted,  she  was  placed  on  the  carriage  of  a  brass  field  piece, 
supported  by  bolsters,  and  drawn  occasionally  a  mile  or  two  over  the 
prairie.  The  Indian  continued  at  intervals  to  repeat  Die  strange  applica- 
tion, until  the  swelling  had  entirely  disappeared,  and  enabled  her  once 
more  to  make  use  of  her  limbs. 

Two-and-thirty  dogs  lost  their  lives  in  bringing  about  this  extraordina- 
ry recovery,  and  among  them  might  truly  be  numbered 

Mongrel,  puppy,  whelp  and  hound, 
And  curs  of  low  degree. 

She  gradually  regained  possession  of  her  appetite;  and  when  her  hus- 
band arriyed  in  the  autumn  from  Fort  George,  for  the  purpose  of  cross- 
ing the  mountains,  she  was  strong  enough  to  accompany  him.  The  fol- 
lowing summer,  on  my  journey  across  the  continent,  I  met  them  at  Lac 
la  Pluie. — She  was  in  the  full  enjoyment  of  health,  and  *in  the  way  that 
ladies  like  to  be  who  love  their  lords.'  " 

Remarks. — It  will  be  observed  that  the  philosophical  theory  of 
Thomsonism  was  carried  out  in  the  above  case  in  replenishing  and  sus- 
taining vitality  by  receiving  animal  warmth  and  support  by  absorption 
from  the  bodies  of  animals  through  the  medium  of  the  feet.  This  case 
will  furnish  a  useful  study  for  all  practitioners.  Where  the  Thomsonian 
remedies  could  not  be  obtained  and  it  should  be  tliought  advisable  to 
trv  a  similar  experiment,  sheep  would  be  a  good  substitute  for  the  dogs. 
We  thinii  the  experiment  worthy  of  notice  and  trial.  It  shows  the  tmth 
and  philosophy  of  our  theory.  j.  t. 


REUNION  OF  FLESH  AFTER  COMPLETE  SEPARATION. 

The  Ossevatore  Medico  contains  a  curious,  and  what  it  affimis  to  be 
a  well  authenticated  case  of  reunion  of  the  nose,  after  complete  separa- 
tion.    The  patient,  a  woman  of  the  town,  had  the  whole  of  the  soft  part 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  771 

of  llie  nose  bitten  off  in  a  quarrel,  by  a  man.  She  was  immediately  car- 
ried before  the  commissary  of  police,  when  the  nose  was  dressed.  In 
three  hours  afterwards,  Dr.  Carlizze,  who  happened  to  come  in,  saw  the 
patient,  and  entreated  that  search  might  be  made  for  the  lost  nose.  This 
was  done,  and  two  and  a  half  hours  afterwards,  the  mutilated  portion  was 
found,  contracted,  and  all  covei'ed  with  filth.  The  Doctor,  however, 
washed  the  parts  clean,  and  applied  the  piece,  putting  in  a  few  points  of 
suture.  Tlie  dressings  were  not  removed  before  the  seventh  day,  when 
the  witnesses  observed,  with  great  satisfaction,  tliat  complete  reunion  hart 
taken  place.  In  thirty-seven  days,  the  cocatrix  was  perfectly  consolidat- 
ed. The  aspect  of  the  nose,  however,  was  most  disagreeable,  from  the 
color  of  its  tip,  which  presented  a  livid,  unhealthy  appearance.  A  solu- 
tion of  nitrate  of  silver  (moderately  strong)  was  applied  to  this  part,  and 
after  the  fall  of  the  eschar,  in  five  days,  the  nose  resumed  its  natuml  co- 
lor. 


CRIME  IN  FRANCE. 

A  French  periodical,  the  "Revue  Encyclopedique,"  contains  the  fol- 
lowing curious  facts  relating  to  crime  in  France  : 

"  Out  of  every  100  persons  accused,  61  are  regularly  condemned.  Out 
of  the  whole  population,  1  in  every  4,460  is  accused.  In  every  lOO 
crimes,  25  are  against  the  person,  and  seventy-five  against  property. 
Experience  shows  that  the  number  of  murders  is  annually  nearly  the 
same  ;  and  what  is  still  more  singular,  that  the  instruments  or  means 
employed,  are  also  in  the  same  proportion.  The  inclination  to  crime  is 
at  its  maximum  in  man  at  about  the  age  of  25;  in  woman  5  years  later 
The  proportion  of  men  and  women  accused  is  4  to  1. 

The  seasons  have  an  influence  on  crime.  In  summer  more  crimes 
are  committed  against  the  person,  fewer  against  properly  ;  the  reverse 
is  the  case  in  winter.  The  developement  of  the  inclination  to  crime 
agrees  very  perfectly  with  that  of  the  passions  and  physical  strength  ; 
and  on  the  other  hand  the  development  of  reason  tends  to  restrain  the  in- 
clination. The  greatest  physical  strength  of  man  is  developed  between 
the  ages  of  30  and  35,  and  the  greatest  mental  powers  between  the  ages 
of  45  and  50.  It  is  a  singular  contrast,  that  about  this  age,  we  find  men- 
tal alienation  the  most  frequent,  and  most  difficidt  to  remove." 


THOMSONIAN  PRACTICE.— LOSS  OF  BLOOD. 

Among  the  many  casualties  to  which  mankind  are  subject,  and  one 
more  to  be  dreaded  than  any  other,  is  the  excessive  loss  of  blood.  Wheri 
an  artery  or  vein  is  severed  upon  either  of  the  limbs  of  the  body,  so  that 
the  stream  of  life  is  rapidly  flowing,  and  the  vital  spark  fast  extinguish- 
ing, which  is  frequently  the  case  with  the  hardy  yeomanry  of  our  coun- 
try, who  are  accustomed  to  the  use  of  implements  of  husbandry  which 
wear  keen  edges,  a  speedy  and  effectual  remedy,  that  would  check  the 
crimson  current,  must  certainly  be  invaluable  to  them. 

Perhaps  it  will  be  regarded  almost  fabulous,  if  we  say  to  those  who  are 
liable  to  cuts  or  incised  wounds,  that  the  blood  may  be  stopped  with  the 
greatest  ease  by  the  following  method: 

If  the  wound  should  be  upon  the  foot,  and  the  arteries  are  cut  ever  so 
bad,  or  if  you  please  if  tlie  foot  is  severed  entirely  from  the  leg,  by  lying- 
down  upon  the  back  and  placing  the  wound  above  the  head,  the  blood 
will  im.mediately  cease  to  flow  from  the  wound.     Some  may  doubt  this 


772  THE    THOMSONIAN 

statement,  but  it  is  a  fact.     The  writer  of  this  article  has  had  the  blood 
stopped  in  several  instances  upon  himself  by  this  means. 

If  the  wound  is  upon  the  foot,  the  j)erson  should  lie  down  upon  his  back 
and  place  the  foot  higher  than  the  head,  upon  a  stool  or  chair;  and  if  it 
be  upon  the  hand  or  arm,  put  t!ie  wound  above  the  head,  and  the  blood 
cannot  run,  any  more  than  water  can  run  from  its  fountain  while  the 
stream  is  raised  above  it.  In  order  to  satisfy  the  incredulous  upon  this 
subject,  we  would  request  them  to  tiy  the  following  experiment.  When 
the  veins  in  the  hands  are  full,  and  appear  to  be  crowded,  which  is  per- 
ceptible to  any  person  who  can  discover  any  object  by  the  power  of  vi- 
jiion,  place  the  hand  in  a  perpendicular  position  above  the  head,  keeping- 
an  eye  upon  the  veins,  and  in  less  than  one  minute  the  blood  will  have  de- 
scended into  the  trunk  of  the  body,  and  the  veins  disappeared. 

When  a  person  has  received  an  injuiy  in  any  of  the  limbs,  and  a  resort 
to  this  experiment  is  nece^saiy  to  stop  bleeding,  let  the  wound  be  well 
washed  with  cold  water,  and  then  a  small  quantity  of  No.  6,  or  third  pre- 
paration, be  poured  upon  it,  dress  it  in  that  situation  before  it  is  removed 
from  the  elevated  position,  and  the  bleeding  will  instantly  stop.  But 
should  the  wound  be  very  bad,  the  limb  should  be  kept  in  that  position 
from  three  to  six  hours,  or  until  the  wound  has  become  a  little  closed  or 
dried  at  the  orifice.  J.  T. 


EXERCISE. 

A  certain  proportion  of  exercise  is  not  much  less  essential  to  a  healthy 
or  vigorous  constitution,  than  drink,  food  and  sleep;  for  we  see  that  peo- 
ple whose  inclination,  situation,  or  employment,  does  not  admit  of  exer- 
cise, soon  become  pale,  feeble,  and  disordered. 

Exercise  promotes  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  assists  digestion,  and 
encourages  perspiration;  all  of  which  are  in  a  degree  necessary  to  a  hale 
constitution. 

It  may  be  divided  into  two  species,  active  and  passive.  Of  the  former 
kind  are  walking,  running,  leaping,  swimming,  and  riding  on  horseback  : 
of  the  latter  are  "sailing,  swinging,  friction,  riding  in  caniages,  &c. 

There  is  one  species  of  passive  exercise  which  deserves  to  be  particu- 
larly mentioned  and  recomm.ended,  more  especially  as  it  often  becomes 
necessary,  and  is  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  aged  and  infirm,  and  such  as 
cannot  partake  of  any  of  the  active  kinds:  I  mean  friction;  which,  per- 
fomied  either  with  the  naked  hands,  flannels,  o-  flesh-bruslies,  may  not 
only  be  of  essential  service  to  those  of  that  description,  but,  by  promot- 
ing perspiration  and  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  it  often  becomes  useful 
in  arthritic,  rheumatic,  and  paralytic  disorders.  This  appears  to  have 
been  in  much  more  common  use,  both  as  a  preventive  and  remedy, 
ainong  the  ancients  and  moderns;   the  former  of  whom  called  it  chafing. 

The  effects  of  the  want  of  exercise  are  more  apparent  and  destructive, 
when  conjoined  with  high  living  and  strong  drink:  hence  the  gout  and 
many  other  diseases  are  generated;  indeed  so  evidently  so,  that  it  is  now 
become  almost  an  established  i^ict,  that  that  disorder  will  never  appear, 
where  sufficient  exercise,  with  abstinence  from  animal  food  and  wine,  is 
practised. 

It  is  a  fact  which  long  experience  has  taught,  that  idleness  and  luxury 
create  more  diseases  than  labor  and  industry;  which  shows  that  an  indo- 
lent and  inactive,  as  well  as  an  over-delicate  and  refined  mode  of  life,  is 
inimical  to  health  and  longevity ;  hence  the  greater  number  of  disorders 
in  cities,  where  the  inhabitants  live  high  and  use  but  little  exercise,  than 
m  countiy  places,  where  Uiey  labor  more  and  live  more  sparingly. 


MATERIA    MED  I CA.  i  i^ 


PERSPIRATION. 


Kell,  by  a  very  accurate  set  of  experiments,  ascertained  that  in  hi?» 
own  person  he  perspired  tliirty  ounces  in  twenty-four  hours.  Hales,  by 
experiments  equally  accurate,  found  tliat  a  sunflower,  of  the  weig-lit  of 
three  pounds  only,  throws  otf  twenty-two  ounces,  or  nearly  half  its  own 
weight,  in  the  same  period  of  time. 

But  wliat  is  perspirationl  Plain  as  the  answer  to  the  question  may  be 
to  a  portion  of  the  conmiunity,  by  many  it  is  not  understood  at  all.  Some 
attach  no  definite  idea  to  the  term.  Others  seein<^  the  word  experiment, 
and  several  fig-ures  in  the  same  connection,  conclude  at  once  tiiat  it  is  a 
something"  tedious  or  dilfic^t,  or  perhaps  beyond  their  comprehension, 
and  pass  it  over.  Others  still  have  no  idea  that  a  i)erson  perspires  at  all, 
except  when  that  profuse  discharge  takes  place  from  tlie  vessels,  com- 
monly known  by  the  name  of  sweating'. 

Now  sweating  is  only  an  increased  and  profuse  discbarge  from  the  ves- 
sels at  the  surface  of  the  skin,  of  the  same  fluid  which  is  passing  ofl', 
so  long  as  we  arc  in  health,  at  every  moment  of  our  lives.  If  we  sit  near 
a  white  wall  in  a  hot  summer's  day,  while  the  sun  is  shining  on  us  and 
the  wall,  we  may  see  the  shadows  of  masses  of  vapor  ascending  like 
smoke  on  the  Avail.  Or  take  a  looking-glass  and  hold  it  witliin  an  inch 
of  the  body  or  limbs  of  a  person,  and  you  will  soon  find  it  dimmed  by  a 
moisture.  Tiiat  this  effect  is  not  produced  by  our  breathing  is  plain,  be- 
cause if  we  bold  our  breath,  or  place  the  mirror  opposite  our  back,  the 
same  result  follows. 

The  truth  is,  that  every  square  inch  of  the  surface  of  the  human  body, 
except  perhaps  the  eye-balls,  nails,  &c.  has  in  it  thousands  (probably  tens 
of  thousands)  of  small  holes  or  pores,  from  which,  so  long-  as  we  are  in 
health,  a  vapor,  more  or  less  abundant,  according  to  circumstances,  is 
constantly  issuing.  To  check  this  moisture,  let  it  be  done  by  Avhat  means 
it  may,  and  let  it  remain  checked  for  a  considerable  time,  produces  mis- 
chief. Sometimes  the  evil  ap}>ears  in  the  form  that  we  call  colds;  at 
other  times  it  produces  rheumatism,  fevers,  and  consumption.  To  in- 
crease it  veiy  greatly  for  a  considerable  time,  so  that  a  person  Is  said  to 
sweat  profusely,  unless  done  for  the  purpose  of  removing  disease  which 
already  exists,  is  also  injurious  in  the  end. 

But  perspiiation  may  be  checked  or  rendered  profuse  in  a  great  manv 
ways.  We  do  not  believe  all  adults  ought  to  perspire  as  much  in  twenty- 
four  hours  as  Kell  says  he  did.  Still  they  ought  to  perspire  at  all  times, 
and  in  considerable  quantity;  and  wliether  the  pores  of  the  skin  are  stop- 
ped by  dirt,  or  by  uncleanly  garments,  or  by  great  cold  or  heat,  or  by 
sudden  chills,  the  consequence  in  time  may  be  equally  dreadful. 


DROAVNING. 

The  following  judicious  rules  were  drawn  up  by  Mr.  D.  0.  Edwards, 
of  Chelsea,  who  turned  his  attention  to  the  subject  from  having  recently 
witnessed  the  drowning  of  three  men  in  consequence  of  their  own  misdi- 
rected exertions.  His  belief  is  that  a  majority  of  the  deaths  of  this  kind 
arise  from  the  same  cause. 

Mules  to  govern  persons  loho  have  fallen  into  deep  imlcr. 

1.  As  soon  as  you  find  yourself  at  the  surface  of  the  water,  wlilther 
you  are  raised  by  your  buoyancy,  let  your  body  quietly  take  its  level, 
when  the  water  will  reach  a  little  above  your  chin. 

2.  Place  one  leg  a  little  forward  and  the  other  a  little  backward,  and 
stretch  out  your  arms  on  either  side,  keeping  them  under  the  water.     By 


774  THE    THOMSONIAN 

a  sU<.':ht  paddling  motion  you  may  rejjulate  Ihe  position  of  the  head,  and 
prevent  it  from  gravitating  downwards.  Make  no  efforts,  but  wait  tran- 
quilly until  succor  arrives.     Voii  cannot  sink. 

3.  Do  not  lay  hold  of  your  companion  or  assistant,  or  you  will  infallibly 
sink  him,  without  benefitting  yourself.  The  best  swimmer  has  no  more 
natural  buoyancy  tJian  yourself,  and  would  be  sunk  by  the  exertion  of  a 
very  little  force. 

4.  Be  periectly  passive  until  your  helper  seize  you  by  the  hind  locks 
of  your  hair.  Upon  this  endeavor  to  second  his  efforts  by  throwing  your- 
self on  your  back.  Hold  your  neck  stiif,  and  let  yoiu-  hind  head  sink  in- 
to the  water;  then  try  to  propel  yourself,  by 'slowly  and  regularly  kick- 
ing against  the  water. 

5.  Be  careful  to  keep  every  part  of  your  body  under  water,  except  your 
face. 

6.  If  two  or  more  persons  are  immersed  together,  let  them  keep  near 
«ach  other.  By  this  arrangement,  one  boat  may  save  the  whole  party  at 
once;  but  if  they  are  dispersed,  one  at  a  time  only  can  be  picked  up. 

Rales  to  gavcrn  persons  who  attempt  to  rescue  the  drowning. 

1.  In  removing  a  body  from  the  water,  whether  into  a  beat  or  drawing 
it  along  by  your  own  efforts,  always  keep  the  lace  upwards. 

2.  KecoUect  that  you  have  no  more  natural  buoyancy  than  the  person 
you  are  attempting  to  rescue;  therefore  do  not  attempt  to  raise  him  out  of 
the  water,  or  you  w  ill  sink  yourself.  By  a  gentle  traction  you  may  draw 
him  towards  the  boat  or  the  landing  place,  without  fatiguing  yourself. 

3.  Always  aim  at  seizing  the  hair  of  the  hind  head,  and  keep  the  nape 
of  the  neck  and  your  own  hand  under  water;  llius  you  insui'e  his  face  and 
your  own  above  the  surface. 

4.  Keep  your  most  powerful  arai  disengaged  for  swimming,  and  keep 
the  other  projected  forward,  having  hold,  as  already  directed,  of  the  hair 
of  his  hind  head.  In  this  way  you  maj^  advance  side  by  side,  he  floating 
supine  on  his  back,  and  you  prone  on  your  breast. 

5.  As  you  approach  the  persons  immersed,  let  them  know  by  a  shout: 
the  voice  reverberates  v/ith  double  distinctness  from  the  surface  of  the 
water,  and  the  prospect  of  approaching  aid  adds  to  the  confidence  and 
consequently  to  the  strength  of  the  distressed. 

6.  Let  all  your  movements  be  deliberate,  firm,  and  gentle. 

With  a  view  to  remove  apprehensions  about  the  weight  of  wet  clothes 
upon  a  person  ii^imersed  in  water,  Mr.  Edwards  says : 

To  ascertain  the  increase  of  weight  which  clothing  adds  to  the  body  in 
water,  I  made  an  experiment.  I  tied  up  into  a  bundle  a  complete  suit  of 
i-aiment,  consisting  of  a  cloth  surtout,  a  waistcoat  and  trowsers,  a  linen 
shirt,  a  pair  of  cotton  drawers,  a  pair  of  cotton  stockings,  and  a  pair  of 
Wellington  boots.  The  weight  of  the  bundle  when  dry  was  seven  pounds. 
It  was  kept  immersed  in  water,  and  under  a  heavy  weight,  for  an  hour, 
until  every  particle  of  air  was  expelled  from  the  interstices.  It  weighed 
in  the  water  just  one  pound.  Immediately  after  being  taken  out  of  the 
wator  it  weighed  twenty  .one  pounds. 

The  calculations  are  intended,  and  when  tested  by  personal  experi- 
ment ought  to  imbue  the  mind  of  every  man,  with  tiie  conviction — the 
firm  confident  conviction — that  he  is  naturally  buoyant  in  the  water.  For 
deducting  the  etTccts  of  fear  and  the  weight  of  clothing  from  the  fifteen 
pounds  of  sustaining  levity  belonging  to  Ihe  body  per  se,  the  remainder 
would  be  eleven  pounds  eiglit  ounces,  which  is  quite  enough  to  prevent 
the  immersion  of  the  breathing  appertures,  that  is,  the  mouth  and  nos- 
trils. 


MATERIA    JIEDICA.  775 

VALUABLE  DISCOVERY.— RESUSCITATION  OF  THE 
DROWNED, 

Recent  exi  raordinary  effects  of  Galvanism  in  Restoring  Life,  apparently 

extinct. 

The  following  are  a  series  of  very  interesting-  experiments,  made  by  a 
gentleman  named  Halsc,  of  Brent,  near  Ashburton,  England,  to  test  the 
power  of  galvanism  in  cases  of  suspended  animation  from  drowning. 

"  On  Thursday  last  one  of  my  spaniels  whelped,  having  a  litter  of  tliir- 
teen,  six  of  whicli  I  took  for  my  experiments.  I  drowned  three  of  tliem 
in  cold  water  and  kept  them  immersed  for  filleen  minutes,  at  which  time 
I  took  them  from  the  bucket  and  placed  ihem  in  front  of  a  good  fire.  No 
motion  could  be  perceived  in  either  of  them.  I  then  put  the  front  legs  of 
one  of  them  into  a  jar  containing  a  warm  solution  of  salt  and  water,  and 
its  hind  legs  in  a  similar  jar,  in  each  of  which  was  inserted  one  pole  of 
the  galvanic  battery;  the  whole  were  then  placed  near  the  fire. 

*'  The  position  of  the  dog  being  now  favorable  to  operate  upon,  without 
the  necessity  of  making  any  incisions  in  the  flesh,  I  passed  a  very  strong 
shock  through  its  body;  it  moved  its  hind  legs.  I  gave  it  another  shock, 
which  caused  its  tail  also  to  move.  I  now  passed  twenty  shocks  in  quick 
succession  through  its  body;  it  moved  every  limb,  its  mouth  opened,  and 
I  was  inclined  to  believe  that  the  dog  had  actually  come  to  life;  but  the 
moment  I  ceased  passing  the  shocks  the  dog  was  as  motionless  as  it  was 
previous  to  my  commencement.  Again  I  continued  the  shocks,  and  no- 
ticed that  there  was  more  moiion  in  tlie  limbs.  Considering  that  in  pro- 
poition  to  the  return  of  sensibility  these  shocks  would  be  too  powerful  for 
it,  I  decreased  the  intensity  of  them,  and  passed  many  hundreds  in  rapid 
succession.  I  continued  this  for  about  five  miiuites,  tlie  motion  of  the 
limbs  increasing  as  the  shocks  increased  in  number.  I  nov/  ceased;  the 
dog  still  moved;  it  was  restored  to  life.  I  placed  it  on  a  warm  flannel  in 
front  of  tlie  fire,  and  in  a  short  time  it  appeared  as  well  as  it  was  previous 
to  its  being  drowned ;  it  crawled  on  the  flannel,  and  made  the  noise  pe- 
culiar to  young  dogs. 

"  I  now  examined  the  two  other  dogs,  which  were  drowned  and  taken 
from  the  water  at  the  same  time  this  one  was.  They  were  both  dead — a 
plain  proof  that  it  was  entirely  owing  to  the  galvanic  fluid  that  life  was 
restored. 

The  other  three  dogs  I  droAvned  in  warm  water  and  kept  them  immers- 
ed for  forty  minutes,  at  which  time  all  motion  had  ceased.  Two  of  them 
I  laid  in  front  of  the  fire,  and  the  remaining  one  I  placed  in  the  jars  as  in 
the  preceding  experiment.  I  now  passed  a  few  shocks  of  weak  intensity 
through  the  body,  but  no  motion  was  perceptible.  I  therefore  increased 
the  intensity  of  them  considerably,  and  gave  the  shocks  in  quick  succes- 
sion. Every  limb  moved,  the  belly  protracted  and  again  collapsed,  and 
the  head  was  raised.  At  this  period  I  stopped  passing  the  shocks,  in  or- 
der to  see  if  there  was  any  motion  in  the  dog  when  not  under  the  galvanic 
influence:  there  was  none.  I  again  proceeded  with  the  shocks,  and  no- 
ticed that  tlie  limbs  moved  more  rapidly  than  before.  I  considered  it  ne- 
cessary to  decrease  the  intensity  and  increase  the  quantity  of  electric  flu- 
id, which  I  did,  so  much  as  to  be  enabled  to  perceive  a  slight  tremor  in 
the  dog.  I  continued  in  this  manner  for  about  five  minutes,  at  which 
time  I  removed  it  from  the  jars  and  placed  it  on  the  table.  It  ivas  a-livc. 
In  a  quarter  of  an  hour  it  appeared  to  be  perfectly  recovered. 

"  The  other  two  dogs  (which  were  not  allowed  to  get  cold  during  the 
whole  of  the  experiment)  were  now  examined;  no  moiion  whatever 
could  be  perceived.  I  tried  the  effect  of  galvanism  on  one  of  these,  and 
was  successful.     In  one  hour  after  this  I  operated  on  the  other  dog  also. 


77G  THE  THOMSONIAN 

hut  it  was  in  vain.     There  was  no  vigor  remaining  in  the  vital  powers; 
life  had  fled." 

REMARKS. 

It  will  he  perceived  tliat  the  treatment  of  the  dogs  above  mentioned  was 
strictly  Thomsonian.  The  immersion  of  the  feet  in  warm  water,  to  in- 
crease vitality  by  absorption,  is  agreeable  to  our  theory;  and  the  use  of 
galvanism  to  efTect  an  oscillation  of  the  lungs,  appears  to  be  an  improve- 
ment. A  warm  stimulating  injection  with  a  human  being,  we_  think 
would  also  be  an  improvement,  in  connection  with  the  applicatian  of  hot 
water  to  tlic  feet,  to  increase  the  vitality  or  warmth  more  rapidly  to 
that  degree  or  point  so  necessary  for  respiration,  in  order  to  facilitate 
the  j)rocess  of  breathing  as  soon  as  the  lungs  could  be  brought  into  ac- 
tion by  the  application  of  galvanism. 

In  the  case  of  a  drowned  person,  the  patient  should  be  laid  upon  a  bed, 
his  body  shielded  with  flannel,  his  head  and  shoulders  gently  elevated, 
and  his  feel  over  tlie  foot  of  the  bed,  immersed  in  a  pail  of  water,  as  hot 
as  can  be  borne  by  the  attendant.  Then  apply  your  remedies  as  rapidly 
as  judgment  may  dictate. 

This  is  similar  to  the  engineer  raising  a  head  of  steam  sufficient  to  ope- 
rate the  machine  as  soon  as  the  vahes  are  raised  by  artificial  power  to  let 
the  steam  in  upon  the  machinery. 

We  think  this  subject  should  be  investigated  by  all  Thomsonian  jirac- 
ti!ioners.  J.  T. 


TO  NERVOUS  PEOPLE. 

UNREASONABLE  FEAR  OF  THUNDER. 

A  young  man  who  for  some  yp^rs  was  so  terrified  by  thunder  and  light- 
ning as  to  be  upon  the  point  of  falling  into  fits  at  their  approach,  found 
very  great  benefit  from  the  following  reflections,  which  a  friend  sent  him 
for  his  most  serious  and  trequent  consideration. 

To  diminish  these  ungrounded  apprehensions,  the  timid  sliould  be  in- 
formed, that  of  750,000  persons  who  have  died  in  London  within  a  space 
of  thirty  years,  two  only  fell  victims  to  liglitning.  They  should  also  be 
informed,  that  they  unreasonably  prolong  their  fears  at  each  shock.  He 
who  has  time  to  dread  the  consequences  of  a  flash  of  lightning,  is  already 
out  of  its  reach. 

It  is  the  lightning  alone  that  can  hurt  us;  and  if  we  have  seen  it,  it  is 
folly  to  grow  pale,  and  tremble  by  the  clap  of  thunder,  and  to  stop  our 
ears  against  the  noise  which  announces  all  danger  to  be  past. 

The  greater  the  interval  between  the  thunder  and  the  lightning,  tlie 
more  removed  is  the  danger. 

If  with  our  finger  to  the  pulse  we  can  count  in  the  time  twelve  or  thir- 
teen pulsations,  we  calculate  the  storm  must  be  three  miles  distant.  But 
the  very  best  preventive  against  this  or  any  other  alarm,  is  the  testimony 
of  a  "ood  conscience. 


DIMIXUTION"  OF  ANIMAL  HEAT  IN  SLEEP. 

During  sleep,  or  dining  the  hours  in  which  sleep  usually  takes  place, 
the  temperature  of  the  body  falls  one  degree,  according  to  Magendie. 
The  cause  of  this  decrease  of  heat  is  to  be  sought  in  the  languid  state  of 
the  body  at  the  time,  all  the  vital  actions  being  carried  on  more  feebly, 
owing  to  the  abstraction  of  exciting  agents  and  the  exhaustion  consequent 
on  the  exercise  of  the  day. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  777 


Of  Wounds  and  Contusions. 

A  contusion  or  bruise  is  a  wound  internally,  and  does  not  communicate 
with  the  external  air.  Though  some  bruised  parts  are  not  attended  with 
the  tearing  or  lacerating  of  the  flesh,  yet  the  flesh  assumes  the  appear- 
ance of  black  and  blue,  showing  that  the  capillary  vessels  are  really  in- 
jured or  ruptured,  for  wMch  reason  the  two  are  classed  together. 

WOUNDS  MADE  BY  INCISION, 

Or  sharp  instruments,  attended  with  a  copious  flow  of  blood,  demand 
immediate  attention.  The  venous  and  arterial  blood  are  easily  distin- 
guished from  each  other — the  venous  blood  by  its  dark  red  color,  and  that 
of  the  arteries  from  its  bright  scarlet  appearance.  The  former  flows  in 
a  steady  stream,  while  the  latter  is  thrown  out  by  the  cardial  action,  with 
which  corresponds  the  vibration  of  the  pulse,  ejecting  the  blood  many 
feet  when  a  large  arterj'  is  severed.  When  the  arteries  are  very  small  the 
\ibration  of  the  pulse  is  scarcely  perceptible  in  the  stream  or  flow  from 
the  wound;  hence  many  times  it  is  difficult  to  determine  whether  an  ar- 
tery is  incised  or  not. 

MEDICAL,    TREATMENT. 

In  all  cases  the  wound  should  be  bathed  in  moderately  cold  water, 
and  thoroughly  cleansed  from  dirt  and  coagula,  if  there  be  any  within  the 
lips  or  orifice,  until  the  peculiar  aching  or  smarting  sensation  is  entirely 
gone.  Then  wipe  the  part  drj',  and  bathe  the  internal  and  external  sur- 
faces of  the  sore  with  No.  6,  or  rheumatic  drops.  Let  the  lips  be  pinch- 
ed together  with  t^e  thumb  and  fore  finger,  and  then  put  a  narrow  band- 
age close  about  the  sore,  and  make  it  fast.  Should  the  wound  be  on  the 
arm,  hand,  leg,  or  foot,  and  bleed  freely,  let  the  person  put  himself  in 
such  a  position  as  to  raise  the  wound  above  the  head,  and  the  bleeding 
will  stop  instantly,  when  it  should  be  dressed  in  that  position.  After  the 
first  dressing  there  will  be  but  very  little  inflammation  or  pain  in  the  sore. 
In  the  course  of  six  or  twelve  hours  the  bandage  may  be  taken  off",  and 
the  tiie  lips  of  the  wound  will  be  closely  diied  or  adhered  together.  Now 
wash  in  soap  suds  and  dry  off  with  a  cloth,  then  apply  a  plaster  of  yellow 
salve,  and  the  sore  will  mpidly  heal.  Should  the  patient  feel  faint  under 
the  first  dressing,  or  at  any  time  after  the  accident,  give  a  teaspoonful  of 
the  drops,  or  a  dose  of  the  prepared  composition  powders.  In  all  cases 
the  bowels  should  be  kept  in  good  order,  with  a  natural  flow  of  the  per- 
spirable matter  to  the  surface. 

TAKING  UP  AN  ARTERY. 
When  the  bleeding  is  profuse,  it  may  be  necessary  to  take  up  an  arte- 
ry. If  on  separating  the  lips  of  the  wound  the  artery  is  in  sight,  it  may 
be  seized  with  a  small  pair  of  pincers,  or  a  small  hook,  and  tied  with  a 
ligature  composed  of  two  or  three  threads  of  silk,  well  twisted  and  wax- 
ed. The  arteries  are  known  from  the  cunent  of  blood  ejected  by  every 
pulsation  of  the  heart.  Great  care  should  always  be  observed  while  tak- 
ing up  the  artery,  that  none  of  the  small  nerves  are  included,  which  are 
always  found  near  the  arteries. 

50 


778  THE    THOMSONIAN 

TO  STOP  BLOOD  IN  -ANY  OF  THE  LIMBS. 

If  a  person  has  wounded  himself  ever  so  severely  in  any  of  the  limhg. 
either  arms  or  legs,  and  he  puis  himself  in  a  position  to  place  the  parts 
Wounded  above  liis  head,  the  blood  will  cease  flowing  in  an  instant;  the 
same  as  a  stream  by  being  raised  above  the  fountain  will  flow  hack  to  it 
again.  In  that  position,  the  limb  may  be  bathed  with  cold  Avatcr  and 
cleansed,  as  before  described,  taking  up  the  arteries  if  necessary;  after 
which  bathe  with  drops  and  bandage  the  orifice  together,  and  in  a  few 
hours  the  lips  will  be  dried  or  attached  to  each  other.  There  will  be  but 
little  pain  or  inflammation.  Then  wash  with  soap  suds,  dry  with  a  cloth, 
and  apply  the  salve. 

Where  the  wound  is  very  serious,  it  may  be  necessary  to  keep  the  in- 
jured limb  above  the  head  most  of  the  time  for  several  days,  only  taking 
it  down  occasionally  for  a  few  minutes,  that  a  small  quantity  of  the  blood 
may  cii-culate  through  it,  thereby  keeping  the  activity  and  warnith  in  it, 
but  not  to  such  an  extent  as  to  re-open  the  blood  vessels  that  have  been 
closed  by  adhesion  by  the  above  treatment. 

WOUNDING  THE  PRINCIPAL  ARTERIES 

Or  blood  vessels  of  the  arm,  thigh,  or  neck,  is  attended  with  fatal  con- 
sequences, unless  a  tournequet  or  some  other  instrument  for  stopping  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  can  be  applied  to  the  part.  In  some  cases,  by 
applying  to  the  wound  alter  compressing  the  lips  together,  several  thick- 
nesses of  cotton  or  tow  batting,  and  then  tie  a  towel  or  handkerchief 
about  the  lim.b  as  close  to  the  body  as  possible,  awd  slip  through  the  loop 
a  loggel  and  twist  it  up  until  the  blood  vessels  are  so  completely  com- 
pressed as  to  stop  the  bleeding,  and  measurably  the  emission  of  blood  in- 
to the  limb.  By  this  means  the  blood  may  be  stopped  for  the  time;  but 
it  will  eventually  destroy  the  warmth  and  activity  of  the  limb  if  persisted 
in  for  any  great  length  of  time.  ^ 

THE  TOURNEQUET, 

Is  an  instmment  calculated  to  apply  to  and  tighten  a  ligature  about  a 
limb  near  the  body,  in  such  a  way  as  to  compress  all  the  blood  vessels 
and  arrest  bleeding  completely. 

The  tournequet  is  employed  by  surgeons  to  prevent  hemorrhage  while 
amputating  a  limb,  and  must  in  all  cases  be  put  between  the  wountl  and 
the  body.  The  instmments  used  by  surgeons  arc  too  expensive  for  fami- 
ly use  ;  but  the  field  tournequet,  consisting  of  a  single  strap,  with  a  pad 
adapted  to  the  purpose,  and  a  buckle — such  as  are  kept  for  field  ser\'ice 
in  the  army,  and  are  sold  in  the  shops — are  of  a  cheap  constmction,  and 
may  be  kept  for  use  in  families. 

STITCHING  WOUNDS. 

It  is  veiy  seldom  that  wounds  require  to  be  stitched,  except  on  the 
eyelids,  nose,  lips  or  ears,  where  adhesive  plasters  will  not  keep  the  lips 
of  Uie  wound  together.  It  occasionally  happens  (hat  a  wound  is  made 
several  inches  in  length.  The  stitches  should  be  in  the  various  angles, 
and  in  such  parts  as  the  judgment  may  dictate  as  best  calculated  to  bring 
the  lips  of  the  wound  closely  together,  to  good  advantage.  Strips  of  the 
sticking  plaster  applied  between  the  stitches  to  bring  the  i)arts  more 
closely  together,  may  be  used  with  propriety. 

TO  PREPARE  STITCHING  THREAD. 

Take  according  to  the  size  of  the  wound,  one,  two,  or  three  threads  of 
sewing  silk,  (the  white  is  best)  about  six  inches  in  length,  well  waxed; 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  779 

?f)lace  the  feread  through  the  eye  of  a  darning  needle,  if  there  be  no  sur- 
<;;eon's  needle  at  hand;  pass  the  needle  through  from  within  the  lips  of 
^he  wound  under  the  skin,  and  have  it  pass  up  through  the  skin  about 
half  an  inch  back  of  the  edge  of  the  orifice,  being  particular  to  include 
tlie  full  diickness  of  tlie  skin,  which  is  from  an  eighth  to  a  quarter  of  an 
inch,  in  the  different  parts.  Draw  through  the  ligature,  until  the  middle 
of  the  thread  rests  in  the  middle  of  the  wound;  then  detach  the  needle, 
and  thread  it  with  the  other  end  of  Uie  silk;  then  commence  in  the  wound 
below  tlie  skin  and  bring  it  out  in  the  same  manner  on  the  opposite  side. 
The  stitch  being  complete,  the  tying  of  the  ends  of  the  ligature  in  a  sin- 
\gle  or  sliding  knot  completes  the  work.  The  second  or  third  stitch  may 
be  taken  in  like  manner,  if  necessary. 

THE  STITCIIKS 

Should  never  be  tighter  than  barely  sufficient  to  cause  the  edges  of  the 
wound  to  touch  each  other  gently.  The  stiips  of  sticking  plaster  and  the 
'bandage  sliould  take  off  from  the  rest  of  the  wound  all  pressure  or  exces- 
sive confinement  of  the  sore.  If  the  parts  become  swelled  or  inflamed, 
the  stiches  should  be  cut  immediately;  or  as  the  i>arts  adhere  together  so 
-as  not  to  need  them,  the  thread  may  be  cut  and  drawn  out. 

OF  CONTUSIONS,  OR  SPRAINED  JOINTS. 
In  every  sprain  that  is  severe,  there  exists  an  internal  wound,  more  or 
iless  extensive;  hence  we  frequently  find  the  joints  weak  after  the  swell- 
ing is  gone.  In  such  cases,  the  ligaments  of  the  joint  are  more  or  less 
lacerated,  or  violently  distended.  Ligaments  that  have  had  their  elasti- 
■city  overdone,  recover  their  tone  very  slowly ;  consequently  the  joint  re- 
mains weak  for  along  time,  and  frequently  requires  artificial  support  for 
its  protection. 

THE  TREATMENT  OF  SPRAINS, 

The  relief  of  the  violent  pain  produced  by  the  overstretching  or  twist- 
ing of  the  ligament,  and  the  abatement  of  inflammation,  is  the  first  thing 
tol)e  attended  to. 

Take  some  ^ot  drops  or  composition,  to  prevent  fainting,  then  put  the 
foot  or  joint  injured  into  as  hot  water  as  the  patient  can  bear;  rub  it  tho- 
rougldy  while  in  the  water,  increase  the  heat  if  necessary,  and  in  ten  or 
fifteen  minutes  take  it  out,  wipe  it  dry,  and  bathe  with  stunulating  lini- 
ment or  hot  drops;  then  bandage  it  well  with  flannel,  in  such  form  as  to 
support  or  brace  the  joint;  then  let  the  patient  go  to  bed,  put  a  hot  brick 
or  stone  at  the  feet,  get  them  into  a  perspiration,  and  in  a  short  time  the 
pain  will  subside,  if  the  limb  is  kept  still. 

Should  the  inflammation  remain  high,  a  poultice  of  brewer's  yeast, 
placed  completely  around  the  joint  and  kept  moist,  will  ease  the  pain  al- 
most immediately.  Or  a  bread  and  milk  poultice  is  good.  Wormwood 
and  vinegar  may  be  used,  if  neither  of  the  above  remedies  can  be  had. 
Or  a  fresh  skin  from  the  back  of  a  sheep  or  other  animal,  applied  to  the 
sprain  when  it  is  warm  from  the  animal,  is  attended  with  the  happiest  re- 
sults, as  it  will  cause  the  part  to  perspire  freely,  and  ease  the  pain. 

If  the  sprain  is  very  bad,  and  the  inflammation  continues  to  progress 
towards  tlie  body,  an  emetic  or  a  course  of  medicine  should  be  taken, 
which  will  most  generally  arrest  its  progress,  and  force  the  swelling  back 
to  the  part  affected,  where  it  is  abated  by  the  poultices  and  fomentations, 
provided  the  patient  is  kept  in  a  profuse  perspimtion  throughout  the  body. 


780  THE  THOMSONIAIV 

THOMSONIAN  THEORY, 

OR  UNIT  OF  DISEASE. 


Dr.  Thomson's  principles  of  disease  are,  that  all  complaints  originate, 
directly  or  indirectl}',  from  the  same  cause.  That  cause  produces  de- 
rangement of  the  fluids  of  the  body,  and  that  form  of  disease  for  which 
the  body  appears  best  adapted.  The  taking  of  cold,  or  loss  of  vitality 
from  indigestion,  over  eating  or  drinking,  or  any  other  derangement  of 
the  functions  of  the  body,  are  the  causes  which  create  an  inability  to 
throw  an  active  and  healthy  circulation  to  the  lower  extremities,  in  such 
quantity  and  quality  as  is  necessary  to»  carry  on  perspiration  and  a  free 
and  easy  circulation  throughout  the  system. 

Vitality  being  thus  reduced,  is  not  capable  of  keeping  the  feet  from  be- 
ing cold  from  absence  of  heat,  which  in  turn  contracts  the  blood  vessels 
in  the  lower  extremities,  and  forces  the  quantity  of  blood  that  is  neces- 
saiy  for  their  support  to  the  head,  the  side,  upon  the  lungs,  or  to  that  part 
of  the  system  best  adapted  for  the  purpose;  thus  the  head,  or  the  part  upon 
which  {he  cold  or  disease  settles,  has  not  only  the  requisite  quantity  of 
circulation,  but  that  of  the  feet  also,  whicK  creates  distress,  in  conse- 
quence of  the  over  distention  of  the  vessels,  and  disease  is  the  result. 

The  name  of  the  disease  is  derived  from  the  part  where  the  greatest 
distress,  pressure,  or  distention  of  the  blood  vessels  has  been  experienced, 
for  the  want  of  a  suitable  circulation  in  the  feet;  thus  affording  relief  to 
those  parts  that  have  experienced  the  shock  by  full  blood  vessels  in  the 
feet.  If  the  cold  settles  upon  the  lungs,  it  is  consumption,  or  inflamma- 
tion of  the  lungs;  if  in  the  side,  pleurisy;  if  in  the  head,  head-ache;  if  in 
the  bowels,  cholic;  if  in  the  limbs,  rheumatism;  or  if  thrown  to  the  sur- 
face generally,  fever. 

After  all,  these  different  forms  and  names  of  disease  arose  from  the 
same  cause — the  derangement  in  consequence  of  taking  cold,  or  the  loss 
of  a  portion  of  vitality. 

And  they  may  all  be  removed,  by  restoring  an  equilibrium  of  the  fluids 
throu2,-h  the  body,  and  giving  to  every  department  its  due  proportion  of 
warmth  and  perspiration.  Remore  the  debilitj'  consequent  upon  the  de- 
rangement or  absence  of  heat,  and  the  system  assumes  once  nu)re  a  heal- 
thy action.  Each  member  then  becomes  obedient  to  the  power  that  com- 
mands in  that  particular  department;  and  order  ai\d  regularity  assume 
their  appropriate  control  throughout  the  body.  J.  T. 


DISEASE. 

The  different  names  which  the  unnatural  concentration  of  the  fluids  of 
the  body  have  received  from  their  location,  will  now  be  treated  on,  under 
their  appropiiate  heads  and  diflerent  names. 


Eruptive  Diseases, 

SMALL  VOX.— Variola. 

The  disease  of  variola,  or  small  pox,  which  a  centuty  ago  was  scarcely 
less  dreaded  than  the  plague  itself,  affords  a  memorable  example  of  the 
triumph  of  the  medical  art  over  what  appeared  to  be  an  inevitable  evil 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  781 

attRched  to  human  existence.  By  the  introduction  of  inoculation,  the 
disease  was  rendered  comparatively  safe  to  the  individual;  and  by  the 
substitution  of  the  vaccine  for  the  variolous  poison,  tins  benefit  has  been 
extended  to  the  community  at  large.  Some  time  must  be  allowed  for  the 
prejudices  of  mankind  to  subside,  but  we  have  every  reason  to  hope  tliat 
trllimately  this  destructive  scourge  will  be  banished  from  civilized  coun- 
tries. 

According  to  the  degree  of  violence  with  which  variola  exists,  it  con- 
stitutes two  varieties,  which,  although  evidently  belonging  to  tlie  same 
disease,  and  convertable  into  each  other,  differ  essentially  in  their  symp- 
toms, and  require  different  modes  of  treatment.  From  the  peculiar  ap- 
pearances of  tlie  eruption,  they  have  obtained  the  names  of  distinct  and 
confluent. 

The  first  attack  of  small  pox  is  marked  by  symptoms  of  general  fever, 
which  partake  of  the  inflammatory  4ype,  and  is  characterized  by  vomit- 
ing, and  by  pain  upon  pressing-  the  region  of  the  stomach.  On  the  third 
or  fourth  day  the  eruption  begins  to  appear  on  the  face,  and  in  about  two 
days  is  completely  over  the  body.  It  appears  in  the  form  of  small  red 
l^oints,  which  aftenv^rds  rise  into  pimples,  and  at  length,  by  the  fifth  or 
sixth  day,  are  converted  into  vesicles,  containing  a  light  yellow  fluid. 
These  vesicles  are  surrounded  by  an  inflamed  margin,  so  as  to  produce  a 
considerable  redness  over  ll.e  whole  surface  of  the  body  which  is  not  ac- 
tually occupied  by  the  vesicles  themselves;  and  all  the  soft  parts,  espe- 
cially the  face,  are  so  much  swollen  that  the  eyelids  are  often  completely 
closed.  About  the  eleventh  day  the  fluids  in  the  pustules  become  opaque, 
and  of  a  yollowish  color;  and  being  now  fully  matured,  the  vesicles  burst 
and  shrivel  up,  and  the  inflammation  gradually  subsides,  leaving  red 
marks  upon  the  skin,  which,  when  the  disease  has  been  violent,  are  suc- 
ceeded by  pits  or  depressions,  that  are  never  afterwards  obliterated.  The 
pusiles  on  the  other  parts  of  the  body  proceed  in  the  same  order  with  those 
on  the  face,  but  g6  tlirough  their  successive  stages  a  day  or  two  later, 
and  are  generally  attended  with  less  inflammation. 

In  the  distinct  and  less  violent  form  of  the  disease,  the  fever  abates 
when  the  eruption  is  completed,  and  seldom  returns  in  any  considerable 
degree;  but  in  the  confluent  variety,  what  is  called  tlie  secondary  fever 
comes  on  at  the  period  of  maturation,  which  is  often  equally  violent,  and 
is  indeed  more  to  be  dreaded  than  the  first,  or  the  eruptive  fever. 

All  the  symptoms  of  this  variety  are  more  urgent,  and  come  on  at  ear- 
Ker  periods,  although  at  the  same  distance  of  time  from  each  other;  the 
pustules  are  more  numerous,  so  as  to  run  into  each  otlier  and  form  patches 
of  continuous  suppuration,  while  at  the  same  time  they  are  less  elevated 
than  those  u\  the  distinct  kind,  and  have  less  inflammation  around  their 
margin.  The  fever  is  also  of  a  different  nature,  exhibiting  more  of  the 
typhoid  type,  and  the  system  in  general  seems  to  be  more  oppressed  and 
torpid,  and  to  be  less  capable  of  reaction. 

The  prognosis  of  the  disease  depends  very  much  on  the  nature  of  the 
variety  to  which  it  mclines;  for  while  in  the  distinct  small  pox  we  may 
generally  hope  for  a  favorable  issue,  the  confluent  is,  for  the  most  part, 
nearly  beyond  the  reach  of  medicine.  What  circumstance  it  is  that  pro- 
duces the  tvvo  varieties  we  know  not;  it  depends  in  a  great  degree  upon 
what  may  be  calif  d  the  prevailing  character  of  the  epidemic;  in  some  the 
distinct  and  in  others  the  confluent  being  the  most  frequent;  but  we  are 
not  able  to  connect  these  differences  in  the  nafui'e  of  the  epidemic  with 
any  external  circumstances,  or  with  any  peculiar  state  of  the  constitu- 
tution.  We  have  suflicient  evidence  that  it  does  not  depend  upon  any 
specific  difference,  or  the  nature  of  the  contagious  matter,  because  both 
the  varieties  are  capable  of  being  produced  from  the  same  soiu-ce  of  in- 
fection. 


782  THETHOMSONIArf 

Small  pox  IS  always  produced  by  its  own  specific  contasjion ;  and  vvhert 
once  the  inilividual  has  gone  throujjh  (he  disease,  in  however  slight  a  de- 
gree, he  is  secured  from  any  future  attack.  Upon  tliis  fact  is  founded 
the  practice  of  inoculation;  for  we  learn,  that  when  a  portion  of  (he 
matter  is  inserted  under  the  cuticle  it  will  communicate  a  much  milder 
disease  than  one  which  is  received  in  the  usual  way,  which  is  probably 
by  the  lunti^s. 

We  arc,  however,  totally  unable  to  explain  the  cause  of  this  differ- 
ence. The  relation  which  the  fever  bears  to  the  eruption,  or  the  degree 
in  which  one  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  cause  of  the  other,  is  a  point  that 
has  given  rise  to  much  speculation.  According  to  the  humoral  patholo- 
gy, the  eruption  was  thought  to  afford  a  remarkable  example  of  the  cri- 
tical discharge  of  an  offending  matter  from  the  system;  and  proceeding 
upon  til  is  principle,  the  great  object  of  tlie  practitioner  was  supposed  to- 
be  to  promote  tliis  discharge;  a  system  which  led  to  a  practice  precisely 
the  reverse  of  the  true  one,  and  which  must  no  doubt  have  proved  highly 
destructive. 

In  what  way  the  fever  operates,  or  what  is  the  pi-oximate  cause  of  the 
"disease  we  know  not;  but  it  appears  that  the  eruption  is  the  consequence 
of  the  fever,  and  that  whatever  diminishes  the  fever  diminishes  the  erup- 
tion also,  and  at  the  same  time  lessens  the  violence  of  the  disease. 

TREATMENT. 

The  Thomsonian  plan  of  treatment  is  founded  upon  the  principle,  that 
to  diminish  (he  febrile  action  in  (he  early  stages,  by  keeping  the  body 
very  temperate,  by  the  use  of  such  medicines  as  will  barely  keep  the  dis- 
ease from  striking  in  upon  (he  vitals,  is  all  that  is  necessary.  And  the 
patients  should  be  kept  in  a  temperature  as  low  as  can  be  made  consistenr 
with  their  comfort.  Perspiration  sliould  only  be  moderately  felt  in  tlie 
palms  of  the  hands;  but  by  sweating  to  excess  it  will  bring  out  the  dis- 
ease in  its  most  violent  forms,  spreading  and  uniting  in  one  vast  mass  of 
pustles  and  matter  throughout  the  surface  of  the  body;  and  when  the  cri- 
sis takes  place,  it  generally  destroys  the  patient.  When  if  the  patient 
had  been  .kept  in  a  moderate  temperature,  there  would  not  have  been 
found  upon  the  surface  so  much  perspirable  matter  to  unite  with  the  virus, 
and  thereby  augmenting  tlie  quantity  of  poison  ;  but  it  would  have  pass- 
ed off  by  other  means,  and  relieved  the  surface  in  the  same  proportion. 
The  main  thing  is  to  keep  down  the  febrile  excitement  upon  the  surface, 
and  in  the  proportion  that  this  is  done,  in  the  same  ratio  you  avoid  the 
pustles. 

In  the  distinct  variety,  all  direct  attempts  to  act  upon  the  eruption,  ex- 
cept so  far  as  we  can  subdue  the  fever,  are  at  least  useless,  if  not  posi- 
tively injurious ;  and  when  the  disease  has  run  through  its  course,  the 
powers  of  the  constitution  soon  return  to  their  accustomed  standard. 

In  the  confluent  small  pox  we  have  a  much  more  formidable  disease  to 
combat,  and  one  which  frequently  baffles  all  endeavors.  From  its  very 
commencement,  it  exhibits  symptoms  much  resembling  those  of  typhu."! 
fever;  the  cold  air  produces  a  dangerous  shock  to  the  oppressed  and  lan- 
guid powers  of  life.  Tlie  circumstance  which  renders  this  variety  of  the 
disease  so  critical  is,  Ihatwhcn  from  any  cause  the  eruption  suddenly  dis- 
appears— an  effect  which  sometimes  ensues  from  the  sudden  application 
of  cold  to  the  surface,  or  from  an  injudicious  use  of  purgatives,  the  vital 
powers  become  so  suddenly  oppressed  by  (he  reduc(ion  of  anfmal  warmth 
that  the  virus  strikes  in,  and  threatens  the  extinction  of  life  almost  imme- 
diately. 

When  this  is  the  case,  we  make  a  more  free  use  of  stimulants;  but 
great  experience  and  good  judgment  are  so  necessaay  in  a  case  of  thi.-v 


MATERIA    xMKDICA.  783 

kind,  Uiat  it  is  impossible  to  g'ive  directions,  as  we  could  if  the  patient 
were  before  us,  as  there  are  many  remeiWes  that  mi2:ht  be  applied  in  one 
stage  o{  the  disease  that  would  be  improper  in  another.  Hence  the  ne- 
cessity of  a  judicious  practitioner,  who  will  know  how  to  keep  the  sys- 
tem in  a  cool  and  temperate  state,  to  avoid  the  excessive  eruptive  putre- 
faction upon  the  surface.  For  it  is  much  better  for  the  patient,  to  let  the 
virus  remain  in  the  llesh,  and  work  it  off  moderately  by  other  means, 
than  that  it  should  make  its  appearance  upon  the  skin,  where  it  becomes 
subject  to  the  action  of  the  atmosphere,  by  which  the  poison  is  augment- 
ed in  a  len  fold  degree,  by  mingling  with  the  perspirable  matter,  and  the 
jeopardy  of  the  patient  is  increased  in  the  same  proportion. 

The  pustules  should  not  be  ruptured;  but  let  them  come  to  maturity  and 
separate  from  the  flesh,  which  is  the  proper  way  to  avoid  the  deleterious 
effects  that  would  othenvise  attend  the  welfare  of  the  patient.  The  prac- 
titioner must  bear  in  mmd,  tlvat  he  has  to  contend  on  the  one  hand  witli 
the  tendency  to  febrile  excitement,  and  on  the  other  to  the  state  of  ex- 
haustion which  generally  succeeds  the  former,  when  it  has  been  violent 
and  long  protracted. 

There  is  often  in  confluent  small  pox  a  state  of  restlessness  or  extreme 
agitation,  which  may  be  relieved  with  the  nerve  powder  in  a  little  com- 
position tea  or  asafetida. 

One  of  the  most  distressing  effects  of  the  confluent  small  pox  is  the  in- 
jury which  it  leaves  to  the  constitution  generally,  or  to  particular  organs, 
of  which  the  eyes  are  the  most  apt  to  suffer,  so  as  not  unfrequently  to 
produce  the  complete  loss  of  sight. 

In  conclusion. — The  small  pox  is  the  highest  state  of  canker  and  pu- 
trefaction which  the  human  body  is  capable  of  receiving,  and  is  the  most 
contao'ious,  being  taken  by  the  breath,  or  it  may  be  communicated  by 
inoculation,  in  which  case  it  is  not  so  violent  and  dangerous  as  Vihen  tak- 
en the  natural  way. 

The  distressing  and  often'^^fatal  consequences  that  have  happened  in 
cases  of  this  disease,  are  more  owing  to  the  manner  in  which  it  has  been 
treated  in  many  instances,  than  to  the  disease  itself.  The  fashionable 
mode  of  treatment  has  been,  to  give  physic  and  reduce  the  system  by  di- 
eting, and  keeping  the  patient  loo  cold.  A  judicious  medium  should  be 
observed  between  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold,  for  the  habitation  of  the 
patient.  You  do  not  wish  to  keep  him  so  hot  as  to  injure  him  by  enlarg- 
ing the  size  and  increasing  the  number  of  the  pustules  upon  the  surface 
by  perspiration  and  endanger  the  life  of  the  patient  by  excessive  putre- 
faction outwardly,  when  exposed  to  the  air;  neither  do  you  wish  to  keep 
him  so  cold  as  to  have  the  disease  strike  in  ntally,  and  by  that  means  to 
destroy  his  life.  Therefore  keep  a  moisture  gently  in  the  palms  of  the 
hands,  a  moderate  temperature  upon  the  surface;  keep  the  bowels  regu- 
lar by  a  proper  diet  and  without  physic;  let  his  exercise  be  lively,  for  a 
few  minutes  at  a  time,  if  able  to  be  out,  and  when  he  stops  to  rest,  to  sit 
or  stand,  let  it  be  where  the  wind  does  not  blow  on  him,  so  as  to  take 
cold.  If  he  is  not  able  to  be  out,  have  the  room  well  ventilated  as  often 
as  necessary,  and  keep  him  away  from  the  fire,  if  you  would  wish  to 
avoid  his  having  a  great  number  of  pock  pits  after  recover^-. 

At  no  time  sit  with  your  face  to  the  fire  while  the  pock  are  filling,  by 
which  you  will  avoid  the  disagreeable  appearance  of  a  pitted  face.  Let 
the  stimulating  medicines  be  sriven  moderately,  and,  if  necessary,  a  light 
emetic.  But  these  things  had  better  be  omitted,  if  possible,  until  after 
the  pustules  have  filled  and  the  disease  has  turned.  Then  a  full  course  of 
medicine  can  be  administered,  and  the  surface  of  the  body  cleansed. 
When  the  pock  ripens  and  peels  off,  a  little  wax  ointment  may  be  rubbed 
upon  the  sore  spot,  which  will  cause  it  to  heal,  and  create  a  smooth  skin. 


784  THE  THOMSONIAN 

^Regular  Treatment. — This  disease  would  be  treated  under  tlie  regu- 
lar practice,  by  the  nse  of  mercury,  opium,  anlimonials,  blisters,  nitre, 
and  salts,  with  the  application  of  ice,  and  exposure  to  the  cold.] 


CHICKEN  VOX.— Varicella. 

This  disease  is  sometimes  preceded  by  a  distinct  precursive  fever,  of 
the  same  general  character  with  that  which  announces  the  approach  of 
small. pox.  The  emption  appears  on  the  third  day,  in  small  inflamed 
spots,  on  the  back  and  breast.  In  a  few  hours  a  small  vesicle  rises  in 
tlieir  centre,  with  a  whitish  transparent  covering.  On  the  second  day  of 
the  eruption,  the  spots  assume  the  appearance  of  small  bladders,  iilled 
with  fluid.  Being-  pressed  with  the  finger,  they  are  found  soft  and  elas- 
tic. On  the  third  day  the  fluid  becomes  turbid,  and  on  the  fourth  some 
of  the  vesicles  begin  to  break  and  form  crusts,  while  the  contents  of  oth- 
ers condense  within  them.  The  diying  process  goes  on  rapidly,  and  by 
the  tenth  day  the  scabs  usually  fall  oft".  The  symptoms  of  fever  are  not 
observed  after  the  second  day  of  eruption. 

TREATMENT. 

Commence,  if  soon  after  the  symptoms  appear,  by  giving  a  dose  of 
composition  or  cayenne,  followed  by  canker  tea  and  No.  2.  If  the  dis- 
ease be  somewhat  advanced,  it  may  be  necessary  to  administer  the  usual 
course  of  medicine,  and  keep  up  the  perspiration  by  the  use  of  steaming 
stones  and  warm  teas.  If  tl>e  bowels  are  disordered,  administer  injec- 
tions. 

Under  this  treatment,  the  disorder  will  show  itself  on  the  surface,  and 
by  keeping  up  the  inward  heat,  nature  will  take  its  course,  and  the  dis- 
ease will  leave  the  body  without  any  difficulty. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Cooling  piu-gatives,  antimony,  nitre,  opium,  and 
leeches.] 


KINE  POX. —  Variolce.  Vaccince. 

This  disease  may  be  communicated  from  fresh  vesicles,  or  by  means 
of  the  dry  crusts  which  fall  off.  The  third  or  fourth  day  after  vaccina- 
tion, the  germ  of  the  vesicle  may  be  se<Mi  in  a  very  small  pimple  on  the 
surface  of  the  skin  at  the  place  of  operation.  The  vesicle  is  perfected, 
witli  the  upper  surface  depressed,  and  a  red  margin,  on  the  seventh  or 
eighth  day.  On  the  ninth  or  tenth  day,  the  margin  spreads,  the  parts  be- 
come swollen  and  painful,  and  the  axillary  glands  are  enlarged;  restless- 
ness, and  other  evidences  of  general  irritation  are  present.  At  this  time 
a  rash  is  sometimes  observable  on  the  chest  aral  neck.  The  vesicle  gra- 
dually becomes  flat  or  convex,  extends  in  size,  and  its  fluid  becomes 
opaque  and  viscid.  About  the  twelfth  day  the  areola  begins  to  fall,  the 
swelling  dijninishes,  and  the  vesicle  gradually  dries. 

(ji3=>  Vaccination  ought  not  to  be  performed  during  the  progress  of  the 
eruptions,  or  in  a  bad  state  of  health. 

TREATMENT. 

The  treatment  usually  should  be,  to  keep  the  pores  open,  and  guard 
ao-ainst  taking  cold.  But  if  cold  have  been  taken,  or  any  of  the  above 
symptoms  aggravated,  the  course  prescribed  for  chicken  pox  should  be 
administered,  more  or  less  vigorously,  according  to  the  condition  of  the 
patient. 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  785 

{^Regular  Treatment. — Under  the  regular  practice,  the  treatment  would 
be,  with  cooling  purgatives,  antimony,  and  nitre,] 


MEASLES.— Rubeola, 

This  disease,  communicated  by  contagion,  makes  its  appearance  from 
ten  to  fourteen  days  after  exposure.  The  commencing  symptoms  are,  a 
tickling  sensation  about  the  nostrils,  sneezing,  moistness  of  the  eyes,  and 
a  dry  husky  cough.  The  presence  of  fever  is  also  indicated.  On  the 
fourth  day  of  fever  the  eruption  usually  makes  its  appearance  in  deep  red 
pimples,  which  gradually  become  fainter  as  the  disease  advances,  and 
collect  in  patches  of  irregular  form,  while  the  space  between  them  ap- 
pears nearly  natural.  The  febrile  symptoms  are  sometmies  aggravated 
on  the  appearance  of  the  rash.  The  headache  and  fever  are  somewhat 
abated  in  tiie  morning,  but  increase  towards  night,  and  the  hoarseness 
and  cough  continue  while  the  eruption  lasts.  This  begins  to  subsitle  on 
the  third  or  fourth  day  from  its  appearance,  the  redness  diminishes,  the 
skin  looks  mealy  and  falls  off  in  fine  scales.  In  favorable  cases  the  other 
symptoms  now  subside,  but  sometimes  the  eyes  continue  inflamed,  and 
in  other  cases  the  cough  remains.  When  the  disease  has  been  very  se- 
severe  a  torpid,  lethargic  state  sometimes  follows  the  subsidence  of  the 
eruption. 

TREATMENT. 

In  treating  this  disease  the  principle  object  fo  be  had  in  view  is, 
to  keep  the  deteimination  to  the  surfiice,  and  thereby  bring  out  the  erup- 
tion and  prevent  its  striking  in.  For  this  purpose,  at  the  commence- 
ment hf  the  disease,  a  tea  of  composiiion  or  cayenne  should  be  adminis- 
tered, with  the  use  of  a  steaming  stone  at  the  feet,  and  other  means  by 
which  perspiration  may  be  promoted;  and  in  light  cases  these  means 
alone  will  usually,  with  proper  attention,  perform  a  cure.  But  if  the 
case  is  severe,  or  by  taking  cold  the  eruption  has  disappeared  from  the 
surface,  no  time  should  be  lost  in  bringing  active  means  to  the  aid  of 
nature.  To  throw  off  the  disease,  the  best  thing,  perhaps,  that  can  be 
done,  is  to  administer  a  full  course  of  medicine,  with  the  addition  of 
raising  a  brisker  steam  than  in  ordinary  cases,  and  a  plentiful  use  of 
cayenne  in  a  decoction  of  witch  hazel  or  red  raspberry.  Canker  tea 
should  be  used  freely  in  all  cases  of  the  measles,  and  while  under  the  op- 
eration of  a  course  of  medicine,  cider  may  be  taken  in  whicli  cajenne 
has  been  steeped,  or  the  patient  may  take  freely  of  pennyroyal  or  pepper- 
mint tea,  or  almost  any  grateful  drink.  Much  care  should  be  taken 
while  recovering  from  this  disease,  to  guard  against  taking  cold  or  over- 
doing. In  the  treatment  of  measles  some  people  are  of  the  opinion  that 
powerful  means  should  be  employed,  but  such  is  not  the  case  ;  mild 
usage  at  first  will,  if  persevered  in,  produce  the  desired  effect,  with  less 
inconvenience  to  the  patient  and  trouble  to  the  attendants. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  treatment  of  the  regular  practice  would 
be,  giving  opium,  cajomel,  nitre,  antimony,  digitalis,  aether,  and  ammo- 
Jiia,  with  the  addition  of  bleeding,  and  the  application  of  ice  water.] 


SCARLET  FEYER—Scarlatina. 
This  dangerous  and  formidable  affection  of  childhood,  when  epidemic, 
does   not  seem  to  be  dependent  for  its  production  on  contagion   alone. 
But  when  apparently  springing  from   contagion,  the  eruption  which  is 


786  THE  THOMSONIAN 

nearly  simiiUancous  with  tlio  fever,  appears  in  about  three  or  four  days 
after  exposure.  Thi*  consists  at  first  of  minute  red  spots,  but  soon 
spreads  into  a  general  flush,  chiefly  manifest  on  the  face  and  breast.  The 
flush  assumes  a  bright  scarlet  color,  not  seen  in  any  other  disease.  The 
throat  becomes  affected,  -which  may  happen  as  soon  or  even  before 
the  appearance  of  the  rash,  and  is  marked  b\^  difficulty  of  swallowing-, 
und  soreness.  The  tonsils  and  ncijjhboring  parts  of  the  passag'e  are 
swolen  and  intensely  re;',  and  in  a  short  time  patches  of  an  ashy  color 
appear.  As  the  swelling  and  ulceration  increase^  any  attempt  at  swal- 
lowing- is  attended  with  distress.  Duiing  this  stage  the  fever  docs  not 
permanently  diminish,  and  sufters  but  little  remission  ;  thirst  is  great, 
the  skin  hot,  headache  intense,  sleep  broken,  starting  and  twitching  of 
the  limbs,  and  frequently  delirium.  The  eruption,  perhaps  after  fading 
and  reappearing,  finally  subsides.  In  slight  cases  the  disease  terminates 
from  the  sixth  to  the  ninth  day,  by  the  ulcers  healing  and  relief  to  all  the 
symptoms.  But  death  may  lake  place  in  violent  cases  at  an  early  period 
or  the  fever  may  pass  into  a  typhoid  state,  with  symptoms  somewhat  re- 
sembling continued  fever  which  sometimes  continue  for  weeks,  from 
which  the  patient  usually  recovers.  This  disease  is  not  exclusively  con- 
fined to  children,  but  in  adults  more  frequently  attacks  women  than  men, 
and  its  severity  and  danger  are  augmented  by  age. 

TREATMENT. 

In  treating  scarlet  fever,  nearly  the  same  means  should  be  employed 
as  recommended  in  measles.  Beware  of  employing  physic  in  either 
case,  but  make  use  of  stimulating  injections,  keeping  up  a  gentle  mois- 
ture of  the  skin  and  the  strength  of  the  patient,  by  nourishing  broths  and 
gruel.  For  further  directions  see  page  496.  A  gargle  may  be  made  of 
cayenne,  salt,  and  vinegar,  and  ateaspoonful  used  occasionally  to  cleanse 
the  mouth  and  fauces  of  the  filthy  mucus,  and  to  remove  the  inflamma- 
tion in  the  throat. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blistering,  giving  tai-tarized  antimo- 
ny, aether,  and  muriatic  acid,  with  cold  applications.] 


MILIARY  FEVER  OR  SWEAT  ERUPTION— 7l/i7ians. 

The  oiigin  of  this  disease  is  indicated  by  its  name.  It  attacks  persons 
of  loose  fibre  and  indolent  habits,  from  lying  in  warm  apartments,  under 
too  much  clothing.  It  frequently  occurs  to  women  in  childbed.  Its  ap- 
pearance is  usually  marked  by  minute  red  spots,  much  like  the  eruptions 
of  measles.  The  sweat  which  attends  it  is  frequently  of  an  offensive 
odor,  it  is  troublesome  from  itching  and  tingling,  and  is  attended  with 
thirst,  heat  of  the  skin,  and  often  a  coated  tongue.  Its  duration  depends 
on  the  continuation  of  the  producing  causes.  The  fever  usually  precedes 
the  eniption,  continues  an  indefinite  time,  and  generally  terminates  in  a 
natural  sweat. 

TREATMENT. 

In  effecting  a  cure  of  this  disease  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  due  con- 
sideration to  cleanliness,  frequently  sponging  the  surface  of  the  body, 
with  the  addition  of  warming  stimulants  to  raise  the  vital  action.  If  the 
stomach  is  disordered  an  emetic  should  be  administered,  and  if  the  state 
of  the  bowels  are  impaired,  make  a  free  use  of  injections.  The  treat- 
ment to  be  employed  in  mild  cases  of  any  other  kind  of  eruption  will  be 
servicable  in  this  disease. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Blistering,  opium,  ammonia,  musk,  camphor.] 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  787 

NETTLE  RASH— Lriicaria. 

This  disease  is  distinguished  by  the  appearance  of  broad,  flat,  florid 
elevations  of  the  skm,  which  itch  and  tins;le,  appearing-  successively  in 
different  parts,  without  regidarity-  Its  moit  frequent  cause  is  the  pre- 
sence of  poisonous  substances  in  the  atomach.  It  sometimes  occurs  as 
an  emption,  fever  commencing  by  a  regular  chill — the  eruption  siiow- 
ng  itself  on  the  second  day. 

TREATMENT. 

Let  the  patient  avoid  such  articles  of  food  as  are  difficult  of  digestion, 
partaking  of  a  simple  diet,  composed  of  nourishing  soups,  gruels,  &c. 
This  treatment,  with  the  use  of  medicines  to  restore  a  healthy  action  of 
the  stomach  and  bowels,  which  have  been  mentioned  in  the  treatment  of 
similar  cases,  will  usually  in  a  short  time  have  the  desired  effect. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  treatment  of  the  regular  practice  is,  with 
mercury,  nitric  acid  and  bleeding,  with  cold  applications.] 


PRICKLEY  HEAT— Zic/iew. 

This  disease  is  caused  by  intense  and  long  continued  heat.  Its  distin- 
^;uishing  s)'mptoms  are  a  diffuse  eruption,  with  red  pimples  and  a  sense 
of  tingling  or  pricking.  It  is  attended  with  more  or  less  general  irrita- 
tion, and  sometimes  at  its  commencement  with  a  slight  fever.  In  the 
mQder  form  it  first  appears  with  distinct  red  blotches  on  the  cheeks,  chin, 
or  arms,  slightly  inflamed  at  their  base.  In  a  few  days  the  eruption 
spreads  over  the  neck,  body,  and  lower  extremities,  producing  a  sensa- 
tion of  itching;  often  aggravated  during  the  night.  In  a  week  or  ten 
days  the  eruption  fades  and  the  cuticle  separates  in  scurf.  This  is  the 
common  form,  but  we  sometimes  see  a  vivid  rash  thrown  out,  occasion- 
ally degenerating  into  wheals  like  the  nettle  rash,  which  remain  for  a 
considerable  time  unless  the  producing  cause  is  removed. 

TREATMENT. 

The  best  way  to  relieve  this  complaint  is  to  take  freely  of  hot  medi- 
cines and  excite  perspiration.  I\ub  the  surface  of  the  body,  after  the 
perspiration  has  ceased,  with  an  ointment  made  of  fresh  butter  or  cream, 
in  which  has  been  simmered  a  little  camphor,  pulverized  cubebs,  or  pep- 
permint. This  ointment  will  cause  a  cooling  sensation  upon  the  surface. 
If  this  does  not  relieve  take  a  course  of  medicine,  and  keep  up  the  heat 
until  the  alarming  symptoms  appear,  and  let  the  patient  cool  dowr*: 
very  gradually.     Tliis  generally  answers  in  the  worst  of  cases. 

[^Regular  Treatment. — Mercury,  tartarized  antimony,  with  cooling  lo- 
tions.] 


SHINGLES— CemgZe. 

This  disease  is  sometimes  preceded  by  some  constittrtional  affection. 
Tlie  first  local  symptoms  are  itcliing  and  tingling  of  some  parts  of  the 
body,  which  are  studded  with  small,  irregular,  red  patches,  a  little  dis- 
tance from  each  otlier,  covered  with  numerous  small  elevations.  In 
twenty-four  hours  they  have  enlarged  considerably,  and  contain  a  trans- 
parent, limpid  fluid.  It  usually  extends  in  strips  from  the  spine  towards 
the  breast  bone,  but  never  entirely  encircles  any  part  of  the  body.     In  a 


im 


THE    THOMSONfAN 


iew  days  some  of  the  vesicles  burst,  others  shrink  up  and  are  formed  in- 
to scabs,  then  fall  otFa«d  leave  an  inflamed  surface. 

TREATMENT. 

When  this  eruption  makes  its  appearance  keep  up  a  moderate  warmth 
throughout  the  system  by  the  use  of  the  warm  medicines.  Anoint  the 
surface  with  an  ointment  made  of  equal  parts  of  yellow  lily  roots  and 
■■;age,  simmered  in  fresh  butter  or  lard,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  borax 
or  alum.  Keep  up  the  temperature  as  before  mentioned,  and  drive  the 
difficulty  out,  and  dry  it  up  upon  the  surface  with  the  ointment;  it  will 
form  a  dry  scale  and  come  off. 

[Regular  Treatmejit. — Bieeding-,  antimojiy,  &c.,  with  cooling  purga- 
tives, and  refrigerant  ap|>lications.] 


TUNGWORM— Impetigo. 

This  disease  comes  on  with  an  itching  and  slight  local  inflammation. 
It  appears  in  patches  more  or  less  circular,  with  vesicles,  existing  prin- 
cipally on  the  margin  of  the  patches,  the  middle  portion  being  red,  ten- 
der, and  disposed  to  peel  in  scales.  A  single  patch  sometimes  runs 
through  its  course  in  from  one  to  six  days,  but  a  new  one  springs  up  in 
its  neigliborhood,  and  so  succeed  each  other  for  an  indefinite  period. 

TREATME  NT, 

This  disease  may  be  cured  frequently  by  the  use  of  tobacco  juice.  It 
may  also  be  relieved  by  washing  with  hardwood  ashes,  and  when  dry 
wash  with  vinegar.  It  may  also  be  washed  with  lime  water,  after  which 
Apply  the  vinegar,  and  when  the  surface  is  rough  from  the  application  of 
the  lye  and  vinegar  a  .soothing  ointment  may  be  used  made  of  the  burs  of 
meadow  fern  simmered  in  fresh  butter,  cream,  or  hog's  lard;  or  any 
otiier  softening  ointment  may  be  applied,  to  soften  and  sooth  tlie  rough 
and  irritated  surface. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  regailar  practice  is,  witli  mercurial  oint- 
ment, and  internally  with  calomel,  zinc,  and  lead.] 


ITCH-Psora. 

This  is  a  cutaneous  inflammation  without  fever,  consisting  of  vesicles 
containing  a  serous  fluid,  which  may  appear  on  any  i)art  of  the  body,  but 
most  commonly  in  the  flexures  of  the  joints,  and  between  the  fingers  and 
^ocs.  In  severe  cases  or  in  advanced  stages  the  vesicles  degenerate  into 
]iustules  containing  a  yellow  matter,  and  these  sometimes  uniting  form 
unsightly  blotches.  It  is  usually  received  by  contagion;  but  may  be 
generated  by  filthy  habits.  On  its  first  appearance  it  is  sometimes  taken 
for  other  eruptions,  but  on  minute  examination  can  easily  be  distin- 
guished. 

TREATMENT. 

An  ointment  made  of  narrow  dock,  simmered  with  fresh  butter,  with 
the  addition  of  a  little  sinrits  of  turpentine  and  sulphur  may  be  api)lied  to 
tbe  eruption  upon  the  surface  of  the  body.  Let  the  patient  take  some 
composition  powder  or  gin  sling  to  drive  out  the  disorder.  Gunpowder 
and  cream  is  a  good  remedy.     Spirits  of  turpentine  added  to  the  No.  6, 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  iiiV 

is  g^ooci,  all  of  which  should  be  applied  upon  the  body  warm  by  the  fire 
before  g'oingto  bed. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  treatment  with  the  regular  practice  woulrf 
be,  the  internal  use  of  mercury,  anmionia,  sulphuric  acid,  arsenic,  and 
digitalis,  with  the  external  application  of  any  of  these  articles  made  into 
salve.] 


Pebrile  Diseases^ 


The  symptoms  offerer  are  a  derangement  of  the  balance  of  power  in 
the  fluids  of  the  body.  The  consequence  is  the  heat  and  cold  no  longer 
correspond  with  their  usual  causes.  Cold  is  felt,  notwithstanding  the 
pressure  of  a  warm  atmosphere  and  abundance  of  clothing;  and  fever  in 
its  turn  is  felt,  notwithstanding  their  absence.  Together  with  this  there 
is  a  rapid  pulse,  headache,  and  frequently  nausea  at  the  stomach.  Fever 
in  this  sense  accompanies,  or  is  a  symptom  of  various  other  diseases, 
particularly  inflammations.  But  the  term  fever  or  general  fever  is  appli- 
cable to  a  state  in  which  the  febrile  action  is  dependent  on  no  external 
or  visible,  local  disease. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  treatment  of  fevers  by  the  regular  practice 
is  bleeding,  with  naercury,  nitre,  opium,  salts,  quinine,  and  sulphate  of 
copper.] 


INTERMITTENT  YEYER—Febris  Intermittens, 

A  regular  paroxysm  of  intermittent  fever  consists  of  three  stages.  The 
patient  exhibiting  at  first  languor,  debility,  unwillingness  to  move  and  a 
disposition  to  yawn  on  being  disturbed  as  if  aroused  from  sleep.  At  this 
period  the  extremities  will  be  found  colder  than  usual  although  no  dili'er- 
ence  in  the  temperature  is  visible  to  himself.  Presently  a  chill  com- 
mences, invading  the  back  and  then  the  rest  of  the  body,  with  a  sensa- 
tion or  creeping,  crawling,  or  tremor.  The  s*ate  of  chill  when  per- 
fect is  marked  by  extreme  cold,  which  requires  an  immediate  application 
of  warmth  to  raise  the  temperature,  of  the  body.  At  the  same  time  there 
is  a  degree  of  tremor  or  shivei-ing  usually  more  violent  than  the  impres- 
sions of  external  cold.  At  this  time  the  skin  is  warmer  than  usual  not- 
withstanding the  sensation  of  chill.  After  a  certain  time  the  sensation  of 
cold  begins  to  remit  and  occasional  hot  f}a:^hes  are  experienced.  This 
state  of  things  indicates  the  proximity  of  the 

Second  Stage — Which  by  degrees  commences  by  the  cessation  of  the 
cold,  and  an  unnatural  heat  ensues.  With  this  state  the  color  is  increas- 
ed over  many  parts  of  the  body,  and  especially  the  face,  which  become."* 
of  a  bright  scarlet  color,  the  skin  becoming  dry  and  disagreeable  to  the 
patient. 

The  third  Stage. — Perspiration  starts,  which  produces  gradual  relief 
to  the  patient  by  the  mitigation  of  the  febrile  symptoms.  The  surface  of 
the  body  becomes  cold,  the  countenance  gains  its  wonted  aspect,  and 
the  functions  for  the  most  part  return  to  their  natural  state. 

In  the  Cold  Stage  the  pulse  is  frequent,  small,  and  irregular,  the 
breathing  anxious  and  sighing,  attended  occasionally  with  couq-h. 

In  the  //of  Stage  the  pulse  becomes  regular,  hard  and  full,  and  in- 
creases in  those  qualities  till  the  sweat  begins  to  break  out.  The  respi- 
ration becomes  more  full  and  free  and  continues  frequent  and  anxious. 


790  THE  THOMSONIAN 

In  the  Sweating  Stage  the  pulse  becomes  soft  and  less  frequent  return- 
ing- gradually  to  its  natural  state,  and  the  anxiety  and  difficulty  of  breath- 
ing are  removed. 

The  appetite  fails  from  the  commencement  to  the  disappearance  of  the 
paroxysm,  and  in  g-eneral  llie  patient  has  a  great  aversion  to  food,  sick- 
ness at  the  stomach,  frequently  vomiting  a  tiilious  matter  in  both  the 
cold  and  hot  stages.  Thirst  and  excessive  dryness  in  the  month  and 
throat,  continue  during  the  paroxysm  of  fever,  but  subside  as  jierspiration 
ensues.  Lastly  headache,  attended  witli  a  peculiar  tlirobbing  of  the 
temples  and  back  of  the  head,  and  j^ain  in  the  limbs.  The  interval  be- 
tween the  paroxysms  of  an  intermittent,  is  a' period  of  comparative  health, 
and  the  term  of  time  between  those  paroxisms,  determine  the  type  of  the 
disease.  If  the  space  of  time  be  twenty-four  hours,  the  fever  is  termed 
quotidian,  or  daily;  if  forty-eight  hours,  so  that  the  second  paroxysm 
happens  on  the  third  day,  it  is  called  tertian ;  if  seventy-two  hours,  a 
quartan.  A  fever  having  but  one  paroxism  has  been  termed  ephemeral, 
and  was  once  called  the  sweating  sickness,  when  it  prevailed  in  England. 

TEEATMENT, 

A  thorough  course  of  medicine  and  a  continued  perspiration  will  fre- 
quentl}'  break  up  the  fever  in  twenty-four  hours.  Should  one  course  not 
>5ucceed,  apply  tiie  second,  and  so  continue  until  the  complaint  is  re- 
moved, making  use  of  the  bath  daily  to  throw  off  the  morbid  matter  that 
may  have  accumulated  upon  the  surface;  also  take  restorative  medicines 
for  the  digestive  powers  during  the  intervals.  These  fevers  may  all  be 
removed  by  simple  treatment. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  mercury,  jalap,  antimony,  copper, 
ammonia,  arsenic,  and  quinine.] 


YELLOW  FEVER— T't/p/nfs  Iderodes. 

The  symptoms  which  distinguish  this  from  other  fevers,  are  the  follow- 
ing :  Slight  chills  accompanied  with  faintings;  sickness  at  the  stomach 
constantly  from  the  first,  and  the  inclination  to  vomit  increases  with  the 
disease.  At  first  the  matter  vomited  is  yellow,  and  on  the  second  or 
third  day  it  is  green,  and  towards  the  fiital  termination  black,  or  of  a  slate 
color,  and  resembling  coffee  grounds  in  consistency.  The  yellow  color  of 
the  skin,  which  is  by  no  means  peculiar  to  this  disease,  is  first  develop- 
ed on  the  third  or  fourth  day,  in  the  eyes,  neck,  and  breast,  and  thence 
extends  over  the  rest  of  the  body,  which  in  fatal  cases  becomes  yellow 
ihroughout  ;  the  urine  is  of  a  dark  saffron  color;  the  tongue  is  covered 
with  a  moist  yellowish  white  coat,  then  it  becomes  more  dry  and  dis- 
colored, and  finally  quite  black. 

The  time  for  the  disease  to  reach  its  fatal  termination  is  various  ;  in 
some  instances  in  twenty-four  hours,  in  which  the  skin  is  less  strongly 
marked.  When  it  runs  four  or  five  days  it  exhibits  decided  remission, 
such  as  would  lead  a  person  not  experienced  to  anticipate  recovery  ;  but 
afterwards  the  spirits  and  strength  revive  only  a  few  hours  before  death. 
When  the  pecidiar  variety  above  mentioned  takes  place,  the  disease  al- 
most always  proves  fatal. 

TREAT3IENT. 

This  disease  should  be  treated  with  the  most  rigorous  course  of  medi- 
cine, and  a  continued  ]ierspiration  kept  up.  The  surface  should  often  be 
bathed  with  a  strong  alkaline  wash  made  of  hard  wood  ashes  put  into 
water  and  allowed  to  settle,  and  then  mixed  with  whiskey  or  West  India 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  791 

rum,  to  clear  (he  glutinous  substance  from  the  pores  and  prevent  an  ab- 
:5or})tion  of  the  morbid  matter  that  has  worked  out  by  perspiration.  Batl;^* 
should  be  used  daily,  and  the  temperature  of  the  system  g;enerallv  sliould 
be  kept  as  regular  and  as  near  that  of  health  as  artincial  means  will  per- 
mit. Soups  and  gruels  higldy  seasoned,  should  be  taken  as  food  and 
strong  tonic  mixtures,  such  as  bitters,  symps,  &c.to  strengthen,  should 
be  used  as  soon  as  the  state  of  the  stomach  will  permit  of  such  treatment. 
The  saline  properties  of  the  blood  becomes  much  reduced  by  tliis  dis- 
ease, by  which  means  the  system  becomes  very  putrid,  thei'efore  pepper 
and  salt  should  be  used  in  great  profusion  in  nourishment  after  thorough 
courses  of  medicine.     See  page  515. 

[JRes:ular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  mercun-,  jalap,  colocjrnth,  opium, 
and  cold  applications.] 


SPOTTED  FEYE'R—Tvphus  Gravlor. 

This  disease  derives  its  name  from  the  dark  colored  spots  it  exhibits 
upon  the  skin,  caused  by  the  extravasation  of  blood  beneath  the  cuticle. 
It  may  be  described  a  nervous  fever,  in  which  the  stage  of  reaction  i.s 
wanting,  attended  with  pain  in  the  head,  virtigo,  paroxysms  of  gastric 
sinking,  generally  with  a  slow  pulse,  and  no  febrile  sincll.  Petechial 
eruptions,  injection  of  the  capillaries,  coma,  delirium,  palpitation,  numb- 
ness and  sinking  after  evacuations,  are  more  common  than  in  anv  other 
febrile  disease.  It  bears  a  striking  resemblance  to  mali<xnant  cholera. 
It  varies  much  in  its  symptoms,  and  equally  as  much  in  the  time  of  du- 
ration. It  sometimes  resembles  common  nervous  fever,  at  others  low 
tj-phus,  while  at  other  times  it  is  attended  with  vomiting  and  diarrhoea. 
It  sometimes  continues  but  a  few  hours,  but  more  generally  five  or  seven 
days,  and  sometimes  two  or  three  weeks  and  even  occasionally  as  many 
months. 

TREATMENT. 

In  light  cases  it  is  generally  sufficient,  if  attended  to  in  season,  to  raise 
a  profuse  perspiration,  by  administering  composition  with  the  addition  ol 
cayenne  and  rheumatic  drops,  being  placed  over  a  lively  steam.  Then 
let  the  patient  be  placed  in  bed  with  a  steaming  stone  at  his  feet,  and 
occasionally  given  warm  tea  to  continue  the  perspiration.  But  in  more 
obstinate  cases,  or  when  the  disease  is  further  advanced,  in  addition  to 
the  above  treatment  give  strong  canker  tea,  and  when  the  perspiration  is 
free,  administer  an  emetic  of  lobelia,  in  three  different  doses,  once  in  fif- 
teen minutes.  When  under  this  operation  let  them  take  freely  of  any 
grateful  drink,  and  after  the  vomiting  has  ceased  give  them  milk  nor- 
ridge  or  water  gruel.  When  the  perspiration  is  nearly  done  and  their 
strength  somewhat  recovered,  steam  them  as  long  as" they  can  bear  it, 
then  rub  them  with  spirits  and  water  or  vinegar  ;  change  their  clotlies, 
and  let  them  sit  up  or  go  to  bed  as  their  strength  w  ill  permit.  When 
the  patient  is  so  weak  as  not  to  be  able  to  get  up  let  them  be  steamed  in 
bed  as  hot  as  they  can  bear  it,  then  rub  them  as  before  mentioned,  and 
change  their  clothes  and  bed  clothes.  The  last  direction  is  all  important, 
for  unless  all  the  clothes  that  have  been  around  them  are  changed  (hey 
will  absorb  a  part  of  the  filth  that  has  been  discharged  and  thus  add  to 
what  is  left  of  their  disorder.  Those  who  attend  upon  the  patient  are  in 
danger  of  inhaling  the  foul  vapor  and  thus  taking  the  disease  themselves, 
which  may  generally  be  prevented  by  taking  hot  bitters  or  chewing 
"■inffer  root 


792 


THK    THOMSONIAN 


If  the  above  treatment  on  (lie  first  trial  does  not  prove  sufficient  to 
throw  off  tiie  disease,  let  it  be  repeated  at  the  discretion  of  the  practi- 
tioner. Afterwards  use  restorative  medicines  as  in  other  cases  of  reco- 
very. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Tlie  treatment  of  the  regular  practice  is  bleed- 
ing-, blistering-,  with  calomel,  jalap,  antimony,  andaisenic] 


Enjsipdatous  Affections. 


ERYSIPELAS. 

This  is  an  eruptive  fever  of  a  typhoid  character,  most  frequently  oc- 
curring- to  those  of  advanced  life,  or  debilitated  constitutions.  Its  ap- 
proach is  insidious,  its  preceding-  fever  often  being-  xery  liojit.  Some- 
times there  are  chills  and  heat,  accompanied  by  drowsiness  and  even  de- 
lirium. About  the  third  day  there  is  a  redness  seen  on  some  parts  of  the 
person  affected.  At  first  this  is  very  indistinct,  but  it  gradually  spreads 
in  all  directions,  and  as  it  advances  becomes  prominent,  and  its  outlines 
more  perfectly  defined.  If  it  attacks  the  face,  the  nostrils  become  swol- 
len and  painful,  and  the  eyelids  often  enlarge  so  as  to  entirely  obstruct 
the  sight.  In  many  cases  only  one  side  is  affected,  when  the  boundary 
can  be  traced  along  the  ridge  of  the  nose,  dividing  the  chin,  lips,  and 
scalp,  in  the  centre.  The  features,  and  particularly  the  mouth,  are  often 
distorted.  The  morbid  action  involves  the  whole  thickness  of  the  true 
skin,  which  becomes  unnaturally  hard.  Blisters  begin  to  form  on  the 
.second  or  third  day.  The  matter  effused  is  yellowish  or  livid.  When 
blisters  do  not  appear,  the  skin  usuall^y  dries  in  fine  scales.  The  inflam- 
mation continues  from  eight  to  twelve  days,  during  which  time  the  erup- 
tion travails  over  different  parts.  As  it  ceases  to  spread  the  disease  sub- 
sides. 

The  symptoms  indicating  danger  are  delirium  and  drowsiness,  from 
which  the  patient  is  aroused  with  difficult}'. 

TREATMENT. 

This  difficulty  can  be  cured  by  making  use  of  emetic  pills  for  several 
days  in  succession,  and  taking  several  ste;im  baths;  after  which  take  a 
thorough  course  of  medicine  and  keep  up  the  perspiration,  until  the  dis- 
order comes  to  a  crisis,  has  a  regular  turn,  and  scales  off  in  a  dry  kind  of 
dust  from  the  surface. 

[Regular  Treatment. — The  regular  practice  is  bleeding-,  blistering, 
and  physic] 


POISONED  WOUNDS. 

The  mof^t  familiar  instances  of  poisoned  wounds,  are  those  inflicted  bv 
insects,  which  have  the  power  of  inserting  into  the  wound  some  peculiar 
fluid,  capable  of  j)roducing  a  specific  effect.  In  the  bee,  this  poison  lies 
in  a  small  bladder  at  the  base  of  the  sting-.  The  poison  flows  from  the 
vesicle  through  the  sting  at  the  moment  it  is  inserted;  and  the  mechanism 
in  all  venomous  animals  is  nearly  the  same.  The  inflammation  which  is 
produced  by  the  sting  of  any  of  the  smaller  insects,  generally  subsides  of 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  793 

itself;  but  in  some  instances,  when  it  was  inflicted  on  tender  parts,  it  has 
produced  danger,  and  even  sometimes  death.  The  most  severe  poisoned 
wounds  are  intlicted  by  the  rattle-snake,  viper,  scorpion,  &c. 

The  bite  of  these  animals  is  followed  by  local  pain,  svyelling,  redness, 
and  a  speedy  disorganization  and  effusion  of  the  blood.  Subsequently, 
the  pain  abates,  the  part  becomes  cold,  and  mortification  succeeds.  In 
severe  cases  the  symptoms  are,  prostration,  anxiety,  difficult  breathing, 
and  profuse  sweats.  In  advanced  stages,  the  skin  is  cold,  the  heart 
scarcely  pulsates,  the  stomach  retains  no  liquid,  and  delirium  soon  super- 
venes. The  consequences  which  follow  the  bites  of  venomous  snakes 
are,  however,  modified  by  a  variety  of  circumstances;  and  in  some  in- 
stances the  persons  have  escaped  with  trilling  inconvenience,  while  in 
others  death  has  taken  place  in  a  few  hours. 

TREAT3IEXT. 

Make  use  of  hot  medicines  to  keep  the  poison  as  much  as  possible  from 
the  stomach,  and  use  a  course  of  medicine  immediately  if  simples  fail  in 
answering  the  purpose.  Let  a  cloth  be  wet  with  the  tincture  of  emetic 
and  camphor  and  put  upon  the  wound,  and  keep  it  moist  with  the  same 
medicine.  This  will  act  as  a  neutralizer  of  the  poison,  and  by  the  use  of 
the  hot  medicines  the  stomach  will  become  strengthened  agamst  the  at- 
tacks of  the  virus  through  the  circulating  medium.  But  in  such  cases 
the  thorough  course  of  medicine,  with  the  above  application  of  camphor 
and  emetic,  is  the  surest  course  to  health  for  the  patient.  Perspiration  in 
all  cases  should  be  kept  free.  The  diet  should  be  light,  such  as  soups, 
g'ruel,  &c.  well  seasoned  with  pepper  and  salt — salt  of  itself  being  a  coun- 
ter poison.     Perspiration  will  exhaust  the  poison  through  the  skin. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  physic  and  opiates,  with  scarification 
and  caustics,  and  zinc,  vitriol  and  copper.] 


Diseases  of  the  Respiratory  Apparatus. 


C  AT  ARRH .— Catarrh  us . 

The  symptoms  or  causes  of  a  common  cold  require  no  description.  In 
itself  it  is  a  mild  degree  of  inflammation,  usually  commencing  in  the  mu- 
cous membrane  of  the  nose,  and  often  extending  through  the  fauces,  la- 
rynx, or  the  whole  length  of  the  air  passages.  Its  tendency  is  to  produce 
an  increased  and  vitiated  secretion  of  the  natural  mucus.  When  chiefly 
confined  to  the  larynx,  fauces,  and  nasal  cavities,  its  effect  scarcely  pro- 
duces any  febrile  action;  but  when  the  air  passages  are  involved,  the 
sympathetic  fever  is  often  quite  severe.  Catarrh  in  itself  is  very  rarely  a 
dangerous  affection. 

There  is  a  peculiar  form  of  chronic  catarrh,  the  obstinacy  of  which  de- 
pends on  a  dyspeptic  condition  of  the  stomach.  There  is  also  another 
form,  peculiar  to  elderly  people,  the  symptoms  of  which  are  an  habitual 
cough,  loose  expectoration,  occasional  hoarseness,  and  increased  secre- 
tion in  the  nose  and  fauces.     Tliis  is  its  most  obstinate  form. 

TREATMENT. 

Take  one  tablespoonful  of  the  composition  powders,  one  teaspoonful 
cayenne,  one  tablespoonful  fine  poplar  bark,  and  one  teaspoonful  golden 

51 


794  THE   THOMSONIAN 

seal;  mLx  this  compound  well  (ogether,  and  put  a  table  spoonful  into  a 
pint  of  boiling  water,  sweetened,  and  it  is  fit  for  use.  Take  a  wineglass- 
ful  six  or  eight  times  a  day.  Tins  will  raise  the  general  temperature  of 
the  body,  and  the  disease  in  the  head  will  heal. 

A  useful  snuff,  to  be  taken  while  using  this  medicine,  may  be  made  of 
one  part  fine  baybcrry  bark,  one  part  fine  bitter  root,  and  one  part  finely 
pulverized  witch  hazel  leaves. 

A  course  of  medicine  may  be  very  useful  in  two  or  three  days  after  the 
commencement  of  this  treatment;  and  let  it  be  repeated  if  the  improve- 
ment is  not  satisfactory.  Costiveness  should  be  attended  to  by  all  means, 
and  the  blood  made  to  circulate  freely  in  the  lower  extremities,  thereby 
reducing  the  pressure  from  the  vessels  in  the  head. 

[Regular  Treatment — The  regular  practice  is  bleeding,  blistering, 
mercury,  digitalis,  antimony  and  opium.] 


INFLUENZA.— Ct/ncc/ie  Pharyngce. 

This  is  a  febrile  disease,  accompanied  by  inflammation  of  the  fauces, 
the  air  passages,  and  more  or  less  the  substance  of  the  lungs.  Its  symp- 
toms are  those  of  catarrh,  in  addition  to  which  are  great  hoarseness, 
wheezing,  rapid  pulse,  hot  skin,  nauseous  stomach,  and  head-ache.  The 
fever  is  usually  regularly  lemittent,  but  occasionally  assumes  an  irregu- 
lar intermittent  type.  In  some  particular  epidemics  the  disease  has  been 
attended  with  cramp,  painful  cough,  extreme  debility,  and  delirium.  It 
is  sometimes  very  mortal  among  the  robust,  but  the  more  delicate,  espe- 
cially women  and  children,  usually  escape  with  a  lighter  paroxysm. 

TREATMENT. 

Bathe  the  feet  in  hot  water,  as  directed  for  pleurisy,  after  taking  a 
o-lass  of  composition;  after  bathing,  wipe  dry  and  make  use  of  the  stimu- 
lating liniment.  Then  put  the  patient  in  bed,  with  a  hot  brick  at  the  feet, 
to  draw  the  excessive  circulation  from  the  head  downwards.  Apply  a 
stimulating  or  strengthening  plaster  to  the  neck,  notched  at  the  sides  so 
that  it  may  extend  to  the  edge  of  the  chin;  put  over  this  two  or  three 
thicknesses  of  flannel.  By  this  treatment,  in  two  or  three  hours  the  in- 
flammation will  generally  be  reduced  in  a  great  measure,  and  the  patient 
relieved. 

When  the  case  is  very  bad,  after  bathing  the  feet  and  getting  the  plas- 
ter about  the  neck,  if  swallowing  is  difficult,  make  use  of  an  injection  of 
composition,  or  third  preparation,  sufficiently  strong  to  induce  vomiting. 
This  will  clear  away  all  obstructions,  and  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in 
swallowing  afterwards. 

This  course  of  treatment  is  useful  in  all  cases  where  there  is  an  excess- 
ive circulation  of  blood  in  the  head  or  upper  extremities. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blistering,  squills  and  antimony.] 


PLEURISY.— P/eun7is. 

An  attack  of  this  disease  is  usually  accompanied  with  acute  pain  in  (he 
chest.  The  pain  is  sometimes  dull  and  heavy,  at  others  acute,  and  is  al- 
ways increased  by  a  full  breath.  When  a  full  breath  is  inhaled,  a  cough, 
usually  short  and  dry,  is  produced.  Ordinary  breathing  is  attended  with 
soreness  or  pain.  The  pulse  is  hard  and  frequent,  while  the  other  symp- 
toms of  fever  are  not  generally  very  strong. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  795 

The  seat  of  this  disease  is  doubtless  the  pleura,  or  investing  membrane 
■of  tlie  lungs. 

TUEATMEWT. 

Take  a  dose  of  composition,  cayenne,  or  hot  drops ;  then  put  the  feet  in- 
to water  as  hot  as  the  patient  can  bear  it;  raise  the  temperature  by  adding 
hot  water,  keeping  it  as  hot  as  it  can  be  borne.  Keep  up  this  operation 
till  a  lively  perspiration  starts  in  the  palms  of  the  hands  and  on  the  fore- 
head. Tlien  wipe  the  feet  and  legs  dry  with  a  cloth,  thoroughly,  with 
the  stimulating  liniment.  This  treatment  will  equalize  the  heat  of  the 
body,  and  usually  relieve  the  pain  in  a  great  measure.  Then  put  the  pa- 
tient into  a  warm  bed,  with  a  hot  brick,  stone,  or  jug  of  water  at  his  feet. 
If  this  is  not  sufficient,  administer  an  emetic,  which  will  generally  afford 
relief;  but  if  it  does  not,  make  use  of  a  thorough  course  of  medicine. 

The  reason  why  we  do  not  direct  a  thorough  course  of  medicine  at  the 
commencement  is,  that  light  treatment  is  preferred  by  most  people  at 
lirst,  and  frequently  answers  the  purpose. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Copious  bleeding  and  blistering,  with  antimony 
and  opiates.] 


LUNG  FEYER.— Pneumonia. 

The  symptoms  of  lung  fever  are,  acute  ])ain  in  the  breast,  lassitude, 
loss  of  appetite,  usually  accompanied  with  chills,  and  sooner  or  later  with 
a  sense  of  tension,  or  weight  upon  the  part.  The  chill  is  succeeded  by 
great  heat,  then  an  acute  pain  attacks  ihe  chest,  usually  the  middle  of  one 
!;ide,  extending  even  to  the  collar  bone  and  shoulder.  The  breathing  is 
frequent  and  short;  a  hard,  painful  and  frequent  cough,  and  a  frothy  ex- 
pectoration, sometimes  tinged  with  blood,  sometimes  green  or  yellow, 
and  in  some  severe  cases  wholly  wanting.  The  pulse  is  very  uncertain; 
the  action  of  the  heart  is  strong,  and  sometimes  a  sensation  of  heat,  or 
burning.  The  countenance  is  flushed,  tumid,  and  the  lips  dark  and  livid; 
but  sometimes  general  paleness  and  a  contracted  aspect  indicate  a  col- 
lapse. Often  an  abundant  viscid  sweat  appears  about  the  neck  and  face, 
accompanied  with  a  hot  and  dry  state  of  the  other  parts  of  the  body.  The 
patient  manifests  an  aversion  and  hesitation  in  answering  questions.  The 
tongue  is  dry,  the  swallowing  is  ditiicult,  and  the  thirst  intense.  In  some 
x:;ases  the  only  posture  tolerable  is  on  the  back,  with  the  head  and  shoul- 
<lers  elevated;  but  more  usually  on  the  affected  side. 

The  above  symptoms  are  common  to  all  well  marked  cases;  but  in  its 
«iost  severe  form,  the  eyes  are  extremely  red  and  prominent,  the  tongue 
swells,  and  stupor  or  delirium  succeeds.  In  fatal  cases,  these  precursors 
of  death  appear  in  about  seven  days. 

TREATMENT. 

This  disease  shows  that  the  fluids  are  so  closely  confined  in  the  trunk 
of  the  body  that  there  is  danger  of  immediate  dissolution  by  mortification 
if  a  universal  and  free  circulation  is  not  effected.  Stimulating  medicines 
should  be  immediately  used,  to  create  an  active  circulation.  The  feet 
should  be  most  thoroughly  bathed  in  hot  water,  and  the  strongest  kind  of 
liniment  applied ;  then  the  patient  should  go  into  a  warm  bed,  with  a  hot 
stone  at  the  feet.  This  course  will  have  a  tendency  to  equalize  in  a  great 
measure  the  fluids  of  the  body.  Then  a  thorough  course  of  medicine  will 
produce  the  happiest  effects  to  the  patient.  The  diet  should  be  crust  cof- 
fee, with  milk  and  sugar,  and  milk  ponidge,  or  light  soups.  Tincture  of 
emetic  should  be  freely  used,  in  small  quantities,  to  make  the  expectora- 


796  THE  THOMSONIAN 

lion  free.     The  veins  in  the  hands  and  feet  should  be  kept  full.     This  is  a 
guide  to  the  practitioner  for  a  correct  temperature. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding',  with  nitre,  salts,  mercur)',  antimony, 
and  osthev.] 


CONSUyiPTlON .—Phthisis  Pulmonalis. 

This  disease  usually  comes  on  without  severe  inflammation,  and  ar- 
rives at  maturity  almost,  without  the  patient  suspecting  he  has  any  seri- 
ous disease.  The  tirst  symptom  is  a  slight,  short  cough,  soon  becoming 
habitual,  but  so  mild  as  to  lead  the  person  to  the  supposition  that  he  has 
no  settled  cough  whatever.  A  close  observer,  however,  mav  ascertain, 
that  the  breathing  is  easily  hurried  by  motion,  and  a  diminished  disposi- 
tion to  action,  attended  with  seme  emaciation. 

The  person  may  feel  no  aggravation  of  these  symptoms,  except  an  in- 
creased liability  to  cough  on  taking  cold  than  formerly,  for  even  a  year 
or  two;  but  the  cough  is  frequently  easily  relieved,  and  no  solicitude  is 
experienced.  The  cough  thus  far  is  usually  most  troublesome  on  lying- 
down  at  night,  but  frequently  not  attended  by  expectoration.  At  lengtli 
it  becomes  more  constant,  and  is  attended,  especially  in  the  morning, 
with  raising  phlegm  from  the  lungs.  The  discharge  gradually  becomes 
more  abundant,  less  transparent,  then  yellow  or  greenish,  and  finally  as- 
sumes a  corrupted  appearance.  The  pus  which  is  now  tiirown  up  is  mix- 
ed with  viscid  white  phlegm.  Weakness  and  emaciation  increase,  and 
breathing  is  more  laborious.  !Many  of  the  natural  secretions  are  check- 
ed; females,  especially,  perceive  a  change  of  system. 

Feverish  symptoms  are  now  manifested,  especially  towards  evening. 
The  hectic  fever  soon  observes  its  regular  periods — twice  in  twenty-four 
hours.  The  morning  fever  comes  on  about  noon,  then  somewhat  sub- 
sides, but  is  succeeded  by  another  paroxysm  towards  evening.  The 
morning  paroxysm  is  attended  with  a  flushed  cheek,  and  in  the  evening 
the  cold  stage  predominates.  Towards  the  termination  of  the  disease, 
abundant  sweats  follow  the  chills.  Pain  in  the  side  becomes  nearly  con- 
stant. Xight  sweats  are  a  prominent  symptom.  Spitting  of  blood  is  al- 
ways observed  in  some  stage  of  tlie  disease.  Finally,  the  feet  swell,  the 
tongue  is  red  and  clean,  and  the  eyes  assume  a  pearly  lustre.  Still  later, 
the  bowels  become  obstinately  loose,  eruptions  break  out  in  the  mouth, 
and  the  strength  is  rapidly  exhausted. 

TREATMENT. 

We  will  take  a  retrospective  view  of  this  disease  from  its  commence- 
ment, and  pass  through  its  various  stages  to  its  termination,  that  our  rea- 
soning may  be  understood. 

In  the  first  place,  our  subject  is  supposed  to  enjoy  s^ood  health,  and  by 
some  means  he  takes  cold,  by  which  the  vital  warmth  is  reduced;  and  as 
every  person  has  his  particular  weak  parts,  our  man  is  one  that  is  usually 
denominated  of  a  consumptive  habit,  a  slender  constitution,  although  the 
most  robust  are  not  entirely  free  from  the  liability  of  being  attacked  with 
this  complaint. 

The  person  takes  cold,  by  which  means  there  is  a  reduction  or  absence 
of  vital  warmth  upon  the  lungs,  in  consequence  of  which  the  glandular 
juices  and  saliva  generally  become  thick  and  adhesive,  in  proportion  to 
the  quantity  of  wamith  lost,  the  same  as  the  blood,  which  congeals  from 
the  loss  of  heat.  The  saliva  does  not  flow  free,  but  adheres  To  the  mu- 
cous membrane  over  the  small  vessels  that  have  omitted  it ;  and  a  con- 
stant inhalation  of  the  cold  atmosphere  renders  it  more  stiff  and  adhesive. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  797 

"which  confines  it  closely  to  the  small  vessels  from  which  it  has  emanat- 
ed. The  constant  emission  of  tliese  juices  from  the  glands  is  necessary, 
but  in  consequence  of  the  stiff"  adhesive  mass  with  which  they  are  now 
covered,  the  juices  cannot  readily  escape;  tlie  glands  become  so  much 
more  overcharged  and  distended  than  usual,  and  the  juices  pressing  to 
escape  from  their  confined  situation  in  the  vessels,  that  an  irritation,  or 
in  other  words  a  tickling  sensation  takes  place,  which  causes  an  involun- 
tary cough  to  assist  the  lungs  to  detach  tlie  matter.  The  more  the  per- 
son coughs,  the  more  cold  air  is  inhaled,  and  consequently  the  more  the 
juices  lose  the  warmth,  and  become  more  adhesive  and  stiff",  which  re- 
quires a  greater  effort  to  throw  it  off,  and  a  greater  degree  of  vital  heat  is 
forced  to  the  surface  by  the  additional  chill  received  by  the  respii-ation  at 
the  lungs. 

This  constant  receiving  by  hard  coughing  new  and  extra  supplies  of 
cold  air,  to  assist  in  detaching  the  mucus  from  the  mucous  membranes, 
and  the  effort  made  to  force  the  breath  from  the  body,  frets  the  membrane 
so  that  the  surface  is  removed,  leaving  the  lungs  sore,  and  suppuration 
now  begins  to  take  place.  The  sore  is  small  at  first,  to  be  sure,  and  if  it 
was  upon  the  surface  of  the  body,  where  a  plaster  could  be  applied  to 
keep  off  the  external  air,  it  would  soon  heal;  but  upon  the  lungs  such  a 
remedy  cannot  be  applied. 

How  natural  it  is,  if  we  bruise  or  injure  our  flesh  in  any  way,  to  put 
upon  it  a  plaster  of  some  kind,  in  order  that  it  may  heal.  And  why  is  it 
necessary  that  a  plaster  should  be  applied?  We  reply,  the  flesh  has  been 
used  to  a  shield,  to  protect  the  small  vessels  in  the  performance  of  their 
various  functions  from  the  action  of  the  external  air,  and  a  plaster  acts  as 
an  artificial  covering,  until  nature  is  able  to  restore  that  one  which  has 
been  injured  or  partially  destroyed. 

If  the  sore  is  left  exposed  to  the  air,  the  small  vessels  contract  at  the 
surface,  and  the  blood  stops  circulating  in  them,  by  which  means  the 
perspiration  measurably  stops  and  is  accumulating  in  a  body  within,  and 
the  flesh  upon  the  surface  puffs  up,  or  swells,  and  is  very  sore,  which  is 
not  the  case  to  so  great  an  extent  when  the  oily  texture  of  the  plaster  ad- 
heres around  the  sore,  to  guard  the  exposed  and  injured  vessels  in  the 
performance  of  their  duty,  md  retain  the  warmth  that  would  escape  from 
the  sore,  if  this  artificial  covering  was  not  present  to  protect  it. 

The  lungs  should  be  protected,  precisely  upon  the  same  principle  as  a 
.sore  upon  the  surface.  The  sore  is  kept  temperate  by  the  plaster,  which 
shields  it  from  the  various  changes  of  air  through  which  the  body  passes. 
The  sore  remains  constantly  warm,  while  the  little  machinery  is  carrying 
on  its  various  operations.  In  the  process  of  healing,  the  injured  parts  of 
the  flesh  maturate  and  adlierc  to  the  plaster,  and  should  be  removed  cer- 
tainly as  often  as  once  in  twenty-four  hours.  If  not,  an  uneasy,  itchino- 
sensation  takes  place,  to  show  the  person  that  the  vessels  are  becomino- 
overcharged,  and  should  be  relieved  by  removing  the  matter  and  renew- 
ing the  plaster;  and  this  is  a  warning  that  should  never  be  disregarded, 
as  the  sore  will  not  heal  from  such  time  until  the  matter  is  removed. 

So  with  the  lungs.  The  matter  must  be  removed  once  in  twenty-four 
hours,  or  the  patient  is  distressed.  The  situation  of  the  two  subjects  is 
similar,  but  the  sores  are  mot  alike  accessible  to  the  application  of  the 
same  remedies;  and  inasmuch  as  the  lungs  cannot  be  affected  by  such 
remedies  as  are  suitable  for  the  surface,  so  we  must  regulate  tJiat  element 
or  power  that  does  come  in  contact  with  them,  that  is,  the  air.  But  the 
air  should  be  made  temperate  in  its  natural  state,  without  destroying  any 
lof  the  principles  that  it  possesses  by  nature  for  our  good.  Or,  in  other 
■words,  the  oxygen  should  not  be  destroyed  by  any  means  whatever,  as 
Ih&t  is  the  life  of  the  air,  and  by  its  destruction,  by  an  iron  stove  or  stone 


798 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


coal  in  a  close  room,  the  air  would  become  dry,  and  the  patient  would 
receive  more  injury  than  if  ho  remained  subject  to  the  various  vicissitudes 
of  the  cold  air. 

We  must  be  constantly  breathing  and  receiving  upon  the  lungs  the  air 
that  surrounds  us.  Under  such  circumstances,  it  is  necessary  that  we 
get  into  that  kind  of  atmosphere  which  will  keep  the  lungs  in  a  temperate 
state  as  near  as  possible,  as  much  so  as  if  the  sore  was  upon  the  surface, 
comfortably  enclosed  by  a  genial  plaster. 

It  may  be  asked,  where  can  a  consumptive  person  find  such  air.^  To 
which  we  reply,  many  go  to  the  West  Indies,  where  it  is  to  be  found  for 
one  half  of  each  twenty-four  hours.  But  the  great  quantity  of  moisture 
that  is  exhaled  into  the  air  under  a  vertical  sun,  is  condensed  at  evening, 
and  returns  to  the  earth  in  the  form  of  water  or  dew,  and  impregnates  the 
atmosphere  with  such  excessive  humidity,  that  unless  the  patient  shuts, 
himself  up  in  a  tight  room,  and  has  a  liveiy  fire  burning,  to  keep  the  wa- 
ter in  the  form  of  aii-  in  the  room,  and  the  room  as  warm  as  the  air  was 
in  the  middle  of  the  day,  he  will  lose  all  at  night  which  he  gained  during- 
the  day. 

In  consequence  of  the  scarcity  of  fuel,  and  the  warmth  of  the  weather, 
in  the  West  Indies,  fires  are  seldom  in  use  during  the  evening  for  the  na- 
tive inhabitants,  and  a  person  from  the  north  w  ould  be  unwilling  to  make 
such  a  request  in  so  warm  a  climate;  consequently  he  would  lose  at 
night,  perhaps  through  diffidence,  what  he  bad  gained  through  the  day  by 
care.  And  after  a  stay  of  some  tliree,  four,  or  six  months,  he  returns  to 
his  friends,  much  worse,  and  in  a  state  that  soon  carries  liim  ofi"  by  con- 
sumption. 

Now  our  opinion  is,  the  man  should  never  have  left  home.  If  he  had 
wanted  a  West  India  climate,  it  should  have  been  manufactured  in  his 
own  house,  where  he  could  have  had  friends  who  regarded  his  restora- 
tion to  health  more  than  his  money.  For  when  he  thinks  he  is  travelling 
for  his  health,  he  labors  under  a  mistake.  He  only  travels  to  spend  his 
money;  and  many  of  those  he  employs  to  wait  upon  him  generally  do  his 
bidding  for  his  money,  and  would,  even  if  it  were  to  take  his  life. 

But  how  different  are  the  attentions  which  a  sick  man  receives  from  an 
affectionate  wife,  a  father,  motlier,  brother  or  sister,  whose  only  solici- 
tude is  for  the  recovery  of  their  friend's  heallli.  The  labor  and  attentions 
of  such  friends  are  not  measured  by  dollars  and  cents,  but  by  the  good 
they  may  bestow  upon  their  relative. 

Being  of  a  consumptive  habit  myself,  and  having  in  TS32  been  brought 
very  low  by  that  disease,  by  raising  })lood,  it  may  not  be  amiss  tor  me  to 
give  a  short  account  of  the  treatment  I  received. 

It  was  said  by  some  of  my  enemies,  "  If  Thomson's  medicine  is  good, 
let  us  now  see  the  effects  of  it  upon  himself."  I  will  not  say  as  one  of 
the  regular  physicians  did,  when  he  was  coughing  7ery  hard.  A  friend 
of  his  says,  "  What,  doctor,  do  you  suffer  yourself  to  cough  in  this  man- 
ner, and  have  so  much  good  medicine,  and  skill  to  use  it  too.'"  "0,"' 
says  the  doctor,  "  1  keep  that  for  my  patients;  and  indeed  I  had  rather 
give  you  half  a  dozen  doses  of  my  good-  medicine  than  to  take  one  my- 
self." 

But  to  the  point.  When  I  was  raising  blooi,  and  troubled  with  a  vio- 
lent cough  (which  were  brought  on  by  over  exertion  iix  time  of  llie  cho- 
lera) I  saw  the  necessity  of  a  temperate  air  in  the  room,  averaging  from 
75  to  90  degrees  of  Farenheit;  and  as  it  was  more  than  probable  that  my 
disease  came  on  by  the  t''eet,  by  standing  or  exposure  to  the  cold,  I  turn- 
ed my  attention  to  them,  and  bathed  tiiem  in  hot  water,  and  after  that  a 
coat  of  liniment,  keeping  a  proper  temperature  at  the  lungs  by  the  use  oi 
hot  medicines. 


MATERIA  MRDICA.  799 

I  was  very  particular  to  see  that  the  circulation  in  them  was  kept  good, 
or  in  other  words,  to  see  that  the  veins  were  kept  full  of  blood,  and  I  oc- 
casionally took  a  course  of  medicine,  to  remove  the  morbid  matter  frontj 
the  system.  Thus  the  system  was  kept  temperate,  the  excess  of  blood  or 
pressure  was  kept  from  the  head  and  lungs,  by  warm  feel.  The  air  that 
I  breathed  kept  my  lungs  in  nearly  the  same  slate  in  point  of  warnitli  (hat 
I  should  have  kept  a  sore  in,  upon  the  surface,  by  the  application  of  a  sti- 
mulating plaster. 

My  appetite  was  good,  and  I  eat  various  kinds  of  meat  and  sauce,  or 
such  as  I  had  an  inclination  for,  or  fmit  of  all  kinds  of  which  I  was  fond, 
such  as  damson  plums,  peaches,  Avater  and  musk  melons,  grapes,  pears, 
apples,  &c.,  some  of  which  were  unripe,  without  receiving  any  injury; 
and  indeed,  after  I  put  myself  into  the  state  above  mentioned,  I  seldom 
passed  a  moment  when  I  did  not  think  myself  rapidly  improving,  both  in 
strength  and  health.  My  cough  and  raising  diminished  daily,  in  propor- 
tion as  (he  wound  healed;  for  where  the  sore  is  closed  there  is  no  collec- 
tion of  matter,  consequently  there  is  no  occasion  for  an  effort  of  nature  to 
throw  it  off. 

During  the  time  I  confined  myself  to  my  room  in  the  above  tempera- 
ture of  air,  and  commenced  taking  medicines,  my  system  was  kept  so 
temperate  that  I  was  not  often  sensible  of  having  a  paroxysm  of  fever, 
which  invariably  attends  cases  of  consumption.  But  before  I  confined 
myself  I  had  them  daily,  and  generally  coughed  two  hours  on  going  to 
bed  at  night,  during  which  time,  and  in  the  morning,  I  would  raise  about 
half  a  pint  of  matter.  I  had  also  a  copious  weak  sweat,  so  called,  which 
debilitated  me  to  that  degree  that  I  could  scarcely  stand  without  help.  I 
was  restored  to  health  in  three  months.  J.  T. 

[Regular  Treatment — Would  have  been,  bleeding,  blistering,  digita- 
lis, prussic  acid,  sulphate  of  iron,  opium,  cinchona,  &,c.] 


SPITTING  OF  BLOOD.— ffcemopty sis. 
It  is  a  question  of  importance  to  detemiine  when  blood  is  ejected  from 
the  mouth,  from  whence  it  proceeds.  If  from  the  posterior  nostrils,  it  is 
easily  distinguished  by  the  facility  with  which  blood  appears  by  blowing 
the  nose.  If  from  the  Ihroat,  it  can  be  determined  by  ocular  inspection. 
If  from  the  stomach,  it  is  usually  raised  by  vomiting,  and  from  the  luno-s 
by  coughing;  yet  this  test  is  not  quite  certain.  When  the  blood  comes 
from  the  stomach,  it  is  usually  in  larger  quantities  than  when  from  the 
lungs.  The  blood  from  the  lungs  is  usually  florid,  and  mixed  with  froth, 
while  that  from  the  stomach  is  combined  with  substances  peculiar  to  that 
organ,  and  is  of  a  dark  color. 

TREATMENT. 

Bleeding  at  the  lungs  or  stomach  maybe  stopped  by  (he  use  of  a  stron"- 
dose  of  the  composition,  with  cayenne,  which  will  force  the  blood  into 
the  larger  vessels  of  the  extremities.  The  stimulating  treatment  should 
be  constantly  kept  up,  by  not  only  the  use  of  medicines,  but  by  bathing 
the  feet  in  hot  water,  and  after  that  with  stimulating  liniment,  to  keep  the 
blood  equal  through  the  body,  as  much  as  possible.  A  temperate  atmo- 
sphere should  also  be  kept  in  the  room  where  (he  patient  remains,  by  the 
use  of  a  good  fire  place  or  soap-stone  stove,  if  practicable.  As  a  West 
India  climate  is  beneficial  to  consumptive  people,  so  an  atmosphere  ma- 
nufactured of  a  West  India  temperature  is  good  for  consumptive  patients, 
if  rigidly  followed  up  by  the  sick  untU  the  internal  sores  are  healed.    All 


800  THE  THOMSONIAN 

internal  sores,  where  a  plaster  cannot  be  applied,  must  be  healed,  if  cur- 
ed at  all,  by  a  temperate  atmosphere. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,   digitalis,   opium,  and   sulphates  of 
iron,  zinc,  and  lead.] 


ASTHMA.— j^sihma. 

Asthma  is  a  difficulty  of  breathing,  usually  occuning  in  paroxysms,  in 
the  night  after  inters als  of  comfortable  health,  and  not  often  accompa- 
nied with  fever.  A  paroxysm  of  asthma  usually  comes  on  during  the 
soundness  of  sleep,  and  the  patient  is  awakened  with  a  sense  of  suffoca- 
tion and  constriction  across  the  chest.  He  is  obliged  to  sit  erect,  and  la- 
bors with  much  difficulty  for  breath.  The  breathing  is  accompanied  with 
a  constant  wheezing,  the  pulse  is  low,  the  heart  palpitates,  the  extremi- 
ties are  cold,  and  the  face  is  pale.  At  length  a  cough  occurs,  expecto- 
ration is  induced,  and  relief  is  usually  obtained.  A  paroxysm  generally 
continues  from  one  to  three  hours. 

TREATMENT. 

This  disease  may  always  be  measurably  relieved  by  putting  the  feet  in- 
to hot  water,  and  increasing  the  heat  until  perspiration  starts  upon  the 
temples  and  in  the  palms  of  the  hands.  Then  make  an  injection  of  mo- 
lasses and  water,  adding,  while  hot,  some  cayenne  and  a  teaspoonful  of 
brown  emetic,  to  change  the  excitement  from  the  lungs  below  to  the 
bowels,  and  till  the  blood  vessels  of  the  extremeties,  so  as  to  cause  a  free 
and  easy  perspiration,  which  will  always  be  the  case  when  the  costive 
habit  is  removed,  and  a  warm  and  active  state  of  the  bowels  ensues,  to- 
gether with  warm  extremities. 

A  teaspoonful  of  the  tincture  of  emetic  may  be  used  occasionally,  to 
create  sickness  at  the  stomach,  which,  together  with  the  brown  emetic 
injection,  will  generally  relieve  the  patient  very  soon,  by  sickness  and 
vomiting,  unless  he  is  aged  and  worn  down  with  disease.  In  such  cases, 
temporary  relief  may  be  experienced ;  but  the  air  vessels  of  the  lungs 
having  become  so  much  constricted,  from  long  continuance  of  the  com- 
plaint and  the  loss  of  the  natural  vital  energy,  the  moment  the  stimulating 
effects  of  ihe  medicine  cease  the  vessels  fall  back  to  the  old  standard,  na- 
ture not  being  sufficiently  strong  to  retain  what  was  acquired  by  the  ap- 
plication of  the  medicine. 

If  asthmatics  will  but  attend  to  keeping  the  feet  wairn  and  the  bowels 
regular,  respiration  will  be  free  and  easy.  It  should  always  be  remem- 
bered, that  respiration  cannot  be  regidar  without  suitable  warmth  in  the 
lower  extremities;  and  due  attention  should  be  paid  to  this  part  of  the 
body. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Opium,  stramonium,  tobacco,  foxglove,  aether, 
mercury,  with  bleeding  and  blistering.] 


ANGINA  PECTORIS.— ^nginosa. 

This  disease  usually  makes  its  attacks  while  a  person  is  exercising  after 
a  full  meal.  Severe  jiain  is  fell  in  the  front  of  the  breast,  extending  ge- 
nerally towards  the  left  shoulder,  thence  shooting  downwards  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  arm  and  hand.  The  pain  is  so  severe  as  immediately  to 
anest  the  patient.  In  a  few  moments  it  subsides,  but  occurs  again  at  ir- 
regular periods,  each  attack  lasting  longer  than  the  previous  one,  and  at 


MATERIA    MEDICA. 

length  they  are  accompanied  by  a  sense  of  suffocation.     When  once  ha- 
bitual, it  is  veiy  easily  excited. 

Tluis  this  disease  may  continue  for  several  years  with  no  other  marked 
effect  of  debilitated  health.  It  sometimes,  but  not  often,  subsides  spon- 
taneously. More  frequently,  the  paroxysms  continue  to  increase  with 
progressive  violence,  till  at  length  the  patient,  overcome  with  pain  and 
suffering,  in  all  the  agony  of  suffocation  breathes  his  last. 

TREATMENT. 

Equalizing  the  fluids  of  the  body  will  generally  relieve  this  complaint, 
if  done  by  a  thorough  course  of  medicine,  and  light  dieting.  The  sense 
of  suffocation  shows  the  want  of  circulation  in  the  feet,  and  an  excess  in 
the  regions  of  the  heart,  lungs,  and  head — to  which  the  attention  of  the 
physician  should  be  immediately  called. 

This  complaint  attacks  those  persons  who  may  be  denominated  of  a 
gouty  habit,  and  nearly  the  same  treatment  as  in  that  disease  will  answer 
the  purpose.  In  many  cases  it  is  brought  about  by  high  living,  and 
shoTjld  be  removed  by  the  opposite  couise,  provided  active  remedies  are 
not  used  for  an  immediate  cure. 

Substitute  crust  coffee,  milk  porridge,  soups,  and  cold  water,  for  beef 
steaks,  roasted  turkeys,  plum  puddings,  and  champagne. 

{^Regular  Treatment. — Cantharides,  sulphuric  aether,  ammonia,  tartar- 
ized  antimony,  mercury,  sulphate  of  iron,  and  blisters.] 


Diseases  of  the  Throat. 


MUMPS. —  Cynanche  ParotidcRa. 

This  disease,  which  is  an  inflammation  of  the  parotid  gland,  is  a  hard 
painful  swelling,  on  one  or  both  sides  of  the  neck,  behind  and  above  the 
angle  of  the  jaw.  It  is  not  very  tender,  neither  does  it  produce  much  fe- 
ver- After  increasing  three  or  four  days  the  swelling  gradually  subsides. 
It  is  most  common  in  children,  although  adults  are  sometimes  affected 
with  it. 

TREATMENT. 

Keep  the  feet  warm  by  bathing  with  liniment,  and  the  bowels  regular 
by  the  occasional  use  of  a  tablespoonful  of  castor  oil  in  a  cup  of  prepared 
composition.  Also,  put  a  stimulating  plaster  about  the  neck,  and  let  it 
extend  up  to  the  hair  in  front  of  the  ears.  This  will  reduce  the  swelling 
and  inflammation,  and  give  ease  to  the  patient.  A  warm  stone  should  be 
put  to  the  patient's  feet. 

Let  the  diet  be  light,  such  as  milk  porridge,  soups,  or  crust  coffee,  and 
be  particular  not  to  take  cold  during  the  continuance  of  the  complaint. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Cantharides,  ammonia,  tartarized  antimony, 
mercury,  cathartics,  and  blisters.] 


QUINSY. —  Cynanche  Maligna. 

Quinsy  commences  by  a  sense  of  uneasiness  in  the  throat,  soon  amount- 
ing to  soreness,  aggravated  by  every  attempt  at  swallowing.  The  tongue 
is  coated  white,  the  fauces  are  of  a  deep  scarlet  hue,  and  the  tonsils  so 


802  THE    THOMSOMAN 

much  enlarged  as  to  fill  up  i)arlially  or  wholly  the  interval  between  them 
and  the  uvula.  As  the  swelling  increases  the  gland  encroaches  upon  the 
uvula,  and  pushes  it  towards  the  opposite  side.  The  difficulty  in  swal- 
lowing- becomes  extreme,  and  when  attempted,  the  liquid  is  forced  into 
the  nostril.  In  very  bad  cases,  the  countenance  indicates  great  distress, 
breathing  is  difficult,  the  jaws  are  not  easily  separated,  and  the  voice  be- 
comes almost  inaudible.  But  death  seldom  occurs  from  this  disease 
alone. 

TREATMENT. 

This  complaint  should  be  treated  by  stimulating  the  lower  extremities 
to  action,  by  bathing  the  feet  in  hot  water  and  liniment,  then  keeping 
warm  in  bed.  If  the  case  is  severe,  make  an  injection  of  composition 
and  No.  3,  and  put  into  it  a  tcaspconful  of  cayenne,  and  two  tablespoon- 
fuls  of  the  third  preparation,  or  in  its  stead  one  teaspoonful  of  brown 
emetic,  scalded  in  the  tea  before  mentioned,  sweetened  with  molasses. 
Let  it  be  used  forcibl}',  and  kept  in  the  body  as  long  as  possible,  and  if 
it  excites  vomiting,  it  will  relieve  the  throat  and  head  at  once. 

This  complaint  should  be  treated  the  same  as  putrid  sore  throat,  the 
mumps,  and  other  complaints  of  the  chest,  neck  and  head.  I  again  re- 
peat, change  the  scene  of  excitement  from  the  upper  to  the  lower  extre- 
mities, and  all  will  be  well. 

{^Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  mercury,  jalap,  tartarized  antimo- 
ny, muriatic  acid,  and  ammonia.] 


CROUP. —  Cynanche  Trachealis. 

Croup  is  seldom  met  with,  except  in  children  under  six  years  of  age, 
and  most  usually  makes  its  attacks  in  changeable  weather. 

The  decisive  symptom  is  the  shrill  sound  produced  by  breathing.  Other 
marks  of  the  disease  are,  a  husky  cough,  a  deep  red  color  of  the  throat, 
and  an  appearance  of  pus  or  froth  at  the  roots  of  the  tongue.  The  dis- 
ease is  of  short  duration,  either  being  relieved  or  terminating  in  death  in 
a  few  hours.  In  its  most  dangerous  stage,  a  circumscribed  flush  appears 
on  the  cheeks,  accompanied  by  a  small  quick  pulse,  blood-shot  eyes,  &c. 
Cases  of  croup  in  adults  have  rarely  been  known. 


TREATMENT. 


Give  a  little  warm  medicine,  and  then  put  the  feet  into  hot  water,  and 
increase  the  temperature  by  adding  water,  keeping  it  as  hot  as  it  can  be 
borne.  Keep  the  feet  in  this  state  until  a  perspiration  starts  throughout 
the  system,  and  respiration  becomes  as  free  and  easy  as  circumstances 
will  permit.  Then  cemmence  by  giving  an  injection  of  emetic  and  cay- 
enne, as  strong  as  possible;  at  the  same  time  feed  the  child  with  warm 
tincture,  sweetened,  with  a  little  ginger,  spearmint,  peppermint,  or  pen- 
nyroyal tea,  vvliich  will  make  it  operate.  Place  the  patient  into  a  wairu 
bed,  and  jiut  a  stimulating  plaster  about  the  nr ck  and  over  the  stomach, 
a  hot  steam  stone  at  the  feet,  and  continue  to  feed  with  the  tincture  until 
it  has  operated  sufficiently.  Continue  a  moderate  temperature,  and  the 
patient  will  soon  find  relief 

The  first  stages  of  ci  oup  may  be  relieved  by  putting  a  plaster  upon  the 
breast  made  of  Scotch  snuff  and  hog's  lard .  This  will  sicken  the  stomach 
a  little,  and  loosen  the  phlegm;  and  by  the  use  of  a  little  tincture,  the 
child  will  vomit  and  find  immediate  relief. 

But  in  all  cases,  see  that  the  feet  are  suitably  warm  and  the  bowels  re- 


MATERIA    MED  I CA.  803 

ovular  and  active ;  this  will  cause  free  respiration,  and  clear  the  head  of 
distress,  thereby  avoiding  hydrocephalus,  or  dropsy  on  the  brain,  so 
called,  which  is  broug-ht  about  by  disordered  bowels  and  cold  extremi- 
ties, and  a  consequent  pressure  of  the  active  fluids  of  the  extremities  up- 
on the  brain. 

[Hegular  Treatment. — Bleeding  and  blistering,  with  antimony  and 
mercury.] 


Diseases  of  the  Abdomen. 


VOMITING  AND  PURGING.— CAoZera  Morbus. 

The  attack  of  this  disease  is  generally  sodden.  In  some  cases  it  is 
brought  on  by  pain,  lassitude  and  acid  eructations;  at  other  times  it  com- 
mences by  vomiting  and  purging,  the  purging  not  usually  commencing 
first.  The  matter  ejected,  besides  the  undigested  food,  if  any,  is  bile, 
varying  in  color  from  its  natural  yellow  to  a  green,  brown  or  black,  and 
mixed  with  mucus.  After  continuing  a  considerable  time,  the  discharg- 
es assume,  perhaps,  the  appearance  of  the  washings  of  fresh  meat.  It  is 
frequently  attended  with  spasms  in  the  abdomen  and  extremities,  and  the 
patient's  strength  is  soon  exhausted.  In  violent  cases,  collapse  succeeds, 
and  unless  relief  is  obtained,  death  in  a  few  hours  puts  an  end  to  the  suf- 
ferings of  the  patient. 

TREATBIENT. 

This  disease  may  generally  be  relieved  by  a  single  dose  of  composi- 
tion or  hot  drops.  If  this  does  not  answer,  bathe  the  feet  in  hot  water  and 
take  an  emetic,  or  a  thorough  coarse  of  medicine,  if  reqiured,  which  is- 
generally  etfectual. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blistering,  calomel,  opium,  and  car- 
bonate of  iron,  ice  water  internally,  and  ice  externally.} 


PURGING.— Z)wrrAa;a. 

Diarrhoea  is  an  increased,  loose  discharge  from  the  bowels,  the  mat- 
ter voided  usually  possessing  its  natural  color.  A  griping  pain  is  felt 
previous  to  each  discharge,  which  is  thereby  relieved.  There  is  a  mo- 
derate thirst,  an  impaired  appetite,  and  a  slight  tenderness  of  the  bowels. 
Its  most  frequent  causes  are  the  abuse  of  unripe  fruit,  atmospheric  chang- 
es, and  teething;  although  it  is  not  iinfrequently  induced  by  affections  of 
the  mind. 

TREATMENT. 

The  prepared  composition  is  good  for  this  complaint.  For  syrup,  fake 
an  ounce  of  bayberry,  an  ounce  of  poplar  bark,  made  fine,  an  ounce  of 
peach  meats  or  cherry  stones,  pulverized,  and  put  the  compound  into  one 
quart  of  boiling  water,  steeped  for  ten  minutes,  strained  off  and  sweeten- 
ed with  loaf  sugar,  and  add  half  a  pint  of  good  Jamaica  rum.  Take  one 
fourth  of  a  glass  three  or  four  times  a  day. 

Take  an  emetic  or  course  of  medicine  if  the  stomach  is  out  of  order. 

[Regular  Treatment — Opium,  antimony,  canlharides,  alum,  catechu, 
tincture  of  kino,  and  extract  of  logwood.] 


S04  THE    THOMSONIAN 

DYSENTERY.— Dysmfma. 

The  characteristics  of  dysentery  are,  an  earnest  desire  to  evacuate  the 
bowels,  succeeded  by  a  severe  straining,  which  expels  a  small  quantity 
of  matter,  unmixed  with  the  natural  discharge,  resembling  mucus;  the 
pain  ceases  for  the  moment,  but  is  soon  followed  by  the  same  desire  and 
discharge,  which  is  frequently  mixed  with  blood.  A  continual  fever  ac- 
companies this  disease,  and  as  it  advances  the  character  of  the  discharge 
has  the  appearance  of  matter  from  an  ulcer.     The  termination  is  various. 

TREATMEIVT, 

The  whole  nervous  system  should  be  quieted  as  soon  as  possible.  To 
effect  this,  the  patient  should  be  made  to  perspire  freely,  and  should  be 
kept  quiet  in  bed.  If  not  relieved  immediately,  give  a  thorough  course 
of  medicine,  and  the  bath.  A  tea,  made  of  witch  hazel  leaves,  red  rasp- 
berry leaves,  or  the  American  tea,  so  called,  would  be  of  great  service 
to  remove  the  canker  from  the  bowels;  and  the  astringency  of  those  arti- 
cles would  be  highly  favorable  to  check  the  disorder.  One  of  the  great- 
est thmgs  I  have  ever  used  to  quiet  the  irratibility  of  the  bowels,  is  to 
take  of  first  quality  Holland  gin,  one  pint,  good  molasses  one  pint,  and 
put  them  together,  and  add  half  an  ounce  of  dyspepsy  powders;  shake 
them  well  together,  and  stop  the  preparation  tight  in  a  jug  for  use. 

Take  from  a  fourth  to  half  a  glass,  and  keep  quiet  in  bed;  an  astonish- 
ing relief  is  thereby  acquired.  ^Vith  this  remedy  alone  I  have  relieved 
some  violent  cases  of  tliis  complaint. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Mercury,  bleeding,  antimony,  opium,  nitric 
acid,  catechu,  and  sulphate  of  iron.] 


COLIC— CoKca. 

Colic  is  distinguished  by  a  griping,  intermittent  pain  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  navel.  It  is  often  an  attendant  on  costiveness  and  flatulency;  but  as 
a  disease  by  itself,  its  cause  is  constriction  of  the  bowels,  which  may  be 
caused  by  crude,  indigestible  substances.  The  abuse  of  cathartics,  ap- 
plication of  too  great  cold  to  the  body  when  heated,  and  many  other  ways 
by  which  the  vital  action  is  reduced. 

TREATMENT. 

Much  the  same  as  cholera  morbus,  by  warming  the  stomach  with  com- 
position and  cayenne,  and  making  use  of  an  emetic,  and,  if  necessary,  a 
course  of  medicine. 

lUegular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  mercury,  jalap,  opium,  aether,  am- 
monia, and  tobacco.] 


PAINTER'S  COLIC. 

This  is  distinguished  from  the  common  form  of  colic,  by  being  caused 
by  the  absorption  of  lead  into  the  system;  by  the  pain  being  seated  in 
the  pit  of  the  stomach,  shooting  thence  in  all  directions,  and  sometunes 
extending  as  far  as  the  extremities;  by  a  great  external  sorene.ss;  and 
by  nausea  and  vomiting  on  tiie  second  or  third  day  after  the  attack.  In 
an  advanced  stage  of  this  disease,  palsy  of  the  upper  extremities  not  un- 
frequently  happens.  It  is  often  induced  by  sleeping  in  newly  painted 
rooms,  and  by  the  inlialation  of  the  oxyde  of  lead  by  those  who  are  en- 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  805 

gaded  in  mining-  or  purifying  the  ore,  and  from  the  same  cause  by  paint- 
ers. 

TREATMENT. 

The  same  as  colic,  except  that  the  person  should  use  milk  freely,  mu- 
cilage made  of  slippery  elm  and  other  substances,  to  overcome  as  much 
as  possible  the  deadly  sickness  at  the  stomach,  occasioned  by  the  dust  or 
the  paint,  until  the  poison  can  be  removed  out  of  the  body,  which  it  fre- 
quently takes  several  days  to  do. 

The  person  should  take  as  little  acid  as  possible  during*  the  paroxysms 
of  this  pain. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  antimony,  opium,  mercury,  tobacco 
and  colocynth.] 


LIVER  COMPLAINT.— /Tepafz/is. 

The  symptoms  of  liver  complaint  are,  chill  and  fever,  pain  in  the  right 
side,  under  the  arches  of  the  false  ribs,  accompanied  with  a  sense  of  ten- 
derness on  pressure;  the  skin  of  a  yellow,  sallow  appearance;  clay-co- 
lored stools;  a  furrowed  tongue,  thirst  and  nausea.  Some  variety,  how- 
ever, is  observed  in  the  attending  symptoms,  caused  by  the  seat  of  the 
inflammation.  The  suffering  of  the  patient  is  greatest,  when  its  seat  is 
the  surface  of  the  organ.  Chronic  inflammation  of  the  liver,  generally, 
grows  out  of  the  acute,  but  often  comes  on  insidiously.  The  pain  is  of- 
ten, not  severe  or  even  absent;  the  digestion  imperfect,  the  bowels  cos- 
tive, and  most  usually  attended  by  some  fever,  of  a  i-cmittent  character. 

TREATMENT. 

This  complaint  should  be  treated  by  giving  freely  of  the  emetic  pills 
for  several  days,  and  then  taking  a  course  of  medicine.  A  stimulating- 
plaster  should  be  put  upon  the  right  side,  directly  over  the  lower  lobe  of 
the  liver;  also,  one  may  be  used  to  much  advantage  between  the  shoul- 
ders. The  laxative  pills  may  be  freely  used,  to  keep  the  bowels  in  or- 
der, and  courses  of  medicine  as  often  as  necessary,  to  keep  the  circula- 
tion free  and  easy. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Blistering,  blefeding,  jalap,  mercury,  opiuniy 
antimony,  colocynth,  and  nitric  acid.] 


INFLAMMATION  OF  THE  KlBNEYS.—mphritis. 

This  disease  is  marked  by  pain  in  one  of  the  loins,  shooting  towards 
the  bladder,  vomiting,  numbness  of  the  affected  side,  desire  to  pass  urine 
constantly,  and  retraction  of  the  testicle.  It  is  usually  caused  by  ob- 
structions of  the  ureter,  but  sometimes  by  violence. 

TREATMENT. 

A  stimulating  or  sweating  plaster  may  be  applied  to  the  back,  directly 
over  the  kidneys.  Bathing  the  feet  in  hot  water,  and  then  with  liniment, 
to  equalize  the  fluids  of  the  body,  will  ease  the  distress,  and  relieve  in- 
flammation. 

Take  a  handful  of  strawberry  leaves  and  put  them  into  a  quart  of  soft 
water  and  steep  them  for  live  or  ten  minutes,  and  have  this  for  a  constant 
drink.  This  promotes  the  discharge  of  urine,  and  consequently  relieves 
inflammation.     The  bath  may  be  used  to  great  advantage.     Strawberrj"^ 


806  THE  THOMSONIAN 

■leaves  may  also  be  used  in  g-In,  in  form  of  tincture.  Tlie  fruit  is  also 
■g-ood  for  this  complaint.  A  tea  made  of  parsley  may  be  used  to  good 
advantage.  At  night,  a  hot  stone  may  be  placed  at  the  back  and  one  to 
the  feet,  to  promote  perspiration  and  ease  distress. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  opium,  and  jalap.] 


JAUNDICE.— /cfcrus.; 

Jaundice  is  distinguished  by  the  yellow  hue  of  the  skin,  clay-colored 
^ippearance  of  the  stool;  by  the  urine  tinging  linen  or  paper  yellow.  It 
is  brought  on  by  imprudent  diet,  by  drinking  cold  water  when  heated,  or 
by  excessive  mental  exertions.  Fulness  of  the  stomach  and  nausea  are 
felt  at  its  commencement.  An  increasing  pain  is  felt  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  liver,  shooting  towards  the  loins  or  the  left  shoulder.  As  the  disease 
jwogresses,  the  urine  often  assumes  a  dark  red  color,  like  venous  blood. 

TREATMEKT. 

In  this  disease,  at  first  a  thorough  course  of  medicine  may  be  used  to 
great  advantage;  after  whicJi  a  strong  bitter  may  be  made,  as  follows: 
one  teaspoonful  each  of  fine  golden  seal  and  poplar  bark,  with  a  little 
cayenne,  put  into  a  pint  of  liot  water,  sweetened.  Take  a  glass  three  or 
four  tunes  a  day.  The  dyspepsy  powder  may  be  used  to  great  advan- 
tage— say  half  a  teaspoonlul  in  a  little  milk,  hot  water,  cider  or  wine,  or 
they  may  be  eaten  dry,  half  a  teaspoonful  at  a  time,  wlien  a  faintness  is 
felt  at  the  stomach,  which  will  be  removed  at  once  by  its  use. 

Charcoal  and  milk  has  made  some  extraordinary  cures  of  this  com- 
plaint, which  I  am  knowing  to.     Repeat  the  course  if  necessary. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Mercury,  aether,  jalap,  ammonia,  opium,  mine- 
ral water,  and  electricity.] 


GALL-STONES— CaZcwZt. 

Gall-stones  are  bodies  of  brown  color,  rounded,  irregular  shape,  vary- 
•sng  in  size  from  that  of  a  small  hen's  egg  to  minute  particles.  They  usu- 
ally occur  in  the  gall  bladder,  but  occasionally  in  the  liver.  They  are 
most  generally  met  with  in  persons  of  indolent  habits,  and  in  women 
jmore  irequently  than  in  men.  Sometimes  they  occasion  but  very  little 
«listurbance,  while  at  others  they  give  rise  to  symptoms  much  resembling 
tliose  of  common  colic.  If  violent  pain  occurs  in  the  pit  of  the  stomach, 
accompanied  by  sickness  and  vomiting,  while  the  pulse  remain  natural, 
we  may  conclude  there  is  a  gall  stone  in  the  duct  of  the  gall  bladder, 
in  the  passage  of  the  stone  a  severe  pain  is  felt  when  it  enters  the  canal, 
and  when  it  passes  into  the  cavity  of  the  intestine. 

TREATMEKT. 

The  system  should  be  kept  under  a  continual  relaxation  from  the  free 
use  of  the  tincture  of  the  lobelia  to  facilitate  the  passage  of  the  stones. 
A  cold  state  of  the  system  creates  a  contraction  of  tiie  ducts,  and  the 
stone  is  thereby  more  rigidly  confined  to  its  position  and  of  course  is  not 
as  liable  to  pass  as  when  stimulants  arc  freely  used  and  the  system  is 
made  flexible  by  the  vapor  bath. 

Where  great  distress  is  experienced  a  thorough  course  of  medicine 
would  be  advisable,  and  the  brown  emetic  should  be  used  until  the  alarm- 


MATERIA  MEDICA. 


807 


ing  symptoms  are  brought  on,  which  will  create  a  more  general  relaxa- 
tion  than  any  other  course  ol"  treatment. 

The  bowels  should  be  kept  in  good  order,  either  by  dieting,  injections, 
figs,  or  castor  oil  taken  in  a  cup  oftlic  prepared  composition.  This  me- 
thod of  using  oil  does  away  witii  the  injurious  effects  of  the  physic,  and 
will  have  a  tendency  to  relieve  the  bowels  at  any  time  and  remove  a 
confirmed  constipation. 

[jRcgular  Treatment. — Mercury,  jalap,  rhubarb,  juniper  and  opium.] 


WORMS— Fernies. 

The  manner  in  which  worms  are  generated  in  the  liuman  body  remains 
as  yet  a  matter  of  obscurity.  The  principal  varieties  of  worms,  are  the 
long  round  worm,  several  kinds  of  tape  worms,  and  the  ascarides,  or 
thread  worm.  The  ascarides  are  found  in  the  rectum,  the  others  in  the 
intestines  and  stomach.  It  is  very  difficult  to  decide  as  to  the  presence 
or  absence  of  worms,  unless  they  are  voided  by  the  patient.  When  a 
child  under  ten  years  of  age  presents  a  wasting  of  the  body,  gnawing 
pains  in  the  stomach,  pale  countenance,  irritation  of  the  nostrils,  foetid 
breath,  and  disturbed  sleep,  we  may  suspect  the  presence  of  worms  in 
the  stomach.  With  the  ascarides  there  is  more  evidence  of  local,  and 
less  of  general  derangement.  Worms  have  been  known  to  produce  a 
cough. 

TREATMENT. 

The  worms  will  never  trouble  when  the  digestion  is  good  and  the  bow- 
els are  regular.  A  strong  tea  made  of  red  raspberry,  or  witch  hazel 
leaves,  or  sumach  leaves  and  bobs,  or  all  of  them  put  together  and 
sweetened,  with  the  addition  of  half  a  pint  of  cherry  stones  or  half  a  pound 
of  peach  meats  well  pulverized,  and  added  to  one  gallon  of  the  tea  and  well 
scalded  in  it.  This  makes  an  excellent  syrup  for  children  troubled  with 
disordered  bowels,  woims,  or  when  teething.  It  may  be  preserved  by 
the  addition  of  one  quart  of  W.  I.  rum,  and  put  into  bottles  for  use.  Take 
one-fourth  of  a  glass  three  or  four  times  a  day,  or  a  larger  quantity  may 
be  used  and  oftener  if  necessaiy. 

Ripe  peaches  are  an  excellent  remedy,  and  the  leaves  made  into  a  tea  and 
freely  used,  is  one  of  the  best  remedies  that  can  be  used  for  children  that 
have  disordered  bowels.  Garlicks  and  gin  have  been  used  with  ad  van- 
vantage  and  we  think  it  an  excellent  remedy.  Pulverize  one  ounce  of 
garlick  and  put  it  into  half  a  pint  of  good  gin;  give  from  a  teaspoonful 
to  a  tablespoonful  three  or  four  times  a  day. 

[Regular  Treatment. — ^Mercury,  jalap,  cowage,  aloes,  filings  of  tin, 
and  spirits  of  turpentine. 


Diseases  of  Fibrous   Tissue. 


RHEUMATISM— meumofismws. 

Acute  or  inflammatory  rheumatism  is  distinguished  by  pain  in  one  or 
more  of  the  large  joints,  which  is  increased  by  motion  or  exposure  to  the 
weather.  There  is  more  or  less  pain  in  the  adjacent  muscles  which  is 
increased  by  action.  They  are  swollen,  and  when  compressed  cause  un- 
easiness..    In  mild  cases,  although  motion  of  the  affected  parts  at  first 


808  THE    THOMSONIAN 

causes  pain,  yet  if  continued  the  pain  diminishes,  and  does  not  return 
till  after  a  period  of  rest.  This  disease  often  shifts  from  one  joint  or  part 
of  the  body  to  another.  The  surface  of  the  parts  affecled  is  usually 
swollen,  red  and  tender,  especially  the  joints  of  the  hands  and  feet. 
Those  who  have  been  once  afflicted  with  it  are  liable  to  experience  a 
recurrence  of  the  disease,  from  very  slight  causes. 

TREATMENT. 

This  disease  I  have  often  cured  by  bathing  the  feet  until  a  perspiration 
starts  over  the  body,  then  apply  to  the  joints  a  poultice  made  as  follows, 
viz: 

Put  two  tablespoonsful  of  fine  salt  into  half  a  pint  of  brewer's  or  bak- 
er's yeast,  or  of  water,  which  should  be  hot  ;  add  one  tablespoonful  of 
brown  emetic,  two  spoonsful  of  fine  cayenne  pepper;  let  these  articles  all 
be  put  into  the  water  when  it  is  hot,  then  add  a  teacupfull  of  soft  soap, 
thicken  with  slippery  elm  and  Indian  meal  or  sponge  crackers  to  the  con- 
sistency of  a  poultice,  apply  this  to  the  joints  and  keep  them  snug,  and 
moisten  when  dry  with  water.  Let  these  poultices  be  applied  while  the 
patient  is  in  bed,  and  put  a  hot  stone  at  the  feet;  keep  up  a  perspiration, 
and  relief  will  soon  be  obtained.  If  necessary  carry  the  person  through 
an  active  course  of  medicine. 

In  some  cases  the  stimulating  liniment  will  give  immediate  relief  if 
applied  to  the  joints,  and  flannel  wrapped  about  them.  In  other  cases 
apply  stimulating  plasters  made  of  the  common  strengthening  plaster  and 
No.  2  or  ca3'ennc. 

This  is  an  excellent  remedy  to  remove  pain  from  the  joints,  back, 
sides,  breast,  or  any  other  part  of  the  exterior  system. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blisters,  nitre,  aither,  antimony,  can- 
tharides,  opium,  ammonia,  turpenline,  and  sulphuric  acid. 


GOUT— Podagra. 

The  immediate  seat  of  the  gout  is  the  joints  of  the  extremities,  espe- 
cially of  the  feet.  Its  usual  cause  is  a  disordered  slate  of  the  digestive 
organs.  It  commonly  attacks  people  of  an  indolent  mode  of  life,  who 
are  of  a  sanguine  temperament,  a  full  habit,  and  who  are  accustomed  to 
eat  rich  and  highly  seasoned  food.  Its  commencement  is  usually  marked 
by  pain  in  the  ball  of  the  great  toe,  and  a  general  sense  of  chill;  as  the 
pain  advances,  the  chill  gives  place  to  heat,  and  the  usual  symptoms  of 
fever.  The  joint  becomes  much  swollen,  red  and  tense.  The  pain  and 
inflammation  continue,  perhaps,5for  tv/enty-four  hours,  then  terminate  in  a 
gentle  perspiration;  the  paroxysm  however  usually  comes  on  again  in  a 
short  time,  and  after,  in  a  few  days,  the  disease  may  seem  to  have  spent 
itself,  and  leave  the  patient  spontaneously;  but  sometimes  the  fits  con- 
tinue longer,  and  the  periods  of  relaxation  are  shorter,  so  that  the  affec- 
tion becomes  almost  constant.  In  later  stages  of  the  disease,  the  lower 
extremities  are  cold,  previous  to  the  commencement  of  pain,  which  fre- 
quently shifts  from  one  foot  to  the  other,  and  then  perhaps  both  are  af- 
fected at  once;  and  finally,  the  disease  not  unfrequently  becomes  nearly 
universal.  In  the  mean  time,  the  small  joints  of  the  fingers  and  toes  be- 
come envolved  in  a  whitish  deposite,  consisting  of  the  acids  of  the  urine 
combined  with  soda. 

TREATMENT. 

This  complaint  should  be  treated  the  same  as  inflammatory  rheumatism, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  809 

and  is  generally  relieved  with  as  little  trouble,  unless  it  be  a  chronic  case 
of  Ions:  standing,  when  thorough  baths  and  courses  of  medicine  should 
be  applied,  with  the  soap  and  salt  poultice  upon  the  part  affected,  which 
generally  produces  immediate  relief.  In  more  recent  stages,  bathing  the 
feet  in  hot  water  thoroughly,  wipe  dry,  and  apply  the  stimulating  lini- 
ment, and  let  the  patient  take  a  teaspoon  full  of  tincture  of  lobelia,  half 
a  dozen  times  a  day,  in  spearmint,  peppermint,  or  pennyroyal  tea, 
this  will  produce  the  desired  effect.  Should  the  tincture  operate  as  an 
emetic,  use  freely  of  the  herb  leas,  and  a  constant  improvement  may  be 
expected  from  this  course.  The  diet  may  be  light,  and  the  bowels  should 
be  kept  regular  by  the  use  of  injections,  and  other  loosening  remedies. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Blisters,  antimony,  opium,  cinchona,   aether, 
ammonia,  and  carbonate  of  iron.] 


ST.  VITUS'S  DANCE.— CAorea  Sancti  Viti. 

The  first  symptoms  of  this  disease  are  a  changeable  appetite,  inacti- 
vity, hardness  of  the  bowels,  costiveness,  and  slight  convidsive  motions 
of  the  muscles  of  the  face.  It  most  usually  attacks  females,  under  the 
age  of  fifteen.  The  advanced  stages  of  the  disease  are  marked  by  affec- 
tions of  the  muscles  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  of  the  extremities :  the  patient 
is  often  unable  to  walk  steadily;  and  whatever  part  of  the  body  he  wishes 
to  move,  the  muscles  necessary  to  be  called  into  action,  either  refuse  to 
obey  the  will,  or  obey  it  imperfectly,  and  by  jerks,  in  uncertain  direc- 
tions. Sometimes  the  speech  becomes  imperfect,  the  eye  loses  its  bright- 
ness, and  even  loss  of  mental  power  seems  to  follow.  The  whole  mus- 
cular system  is  never  simultaneously  affected,  and  in  some  instances, 
v/hen  one  part  is  incontrolable,  another  part  may  remain  perfectly 
natural. 

TREATMENT. 

This  complaint  is  generallj^  relieved  by  continued  perspiration,  keep- 
ing the  bowels  regular  and  the  feet  warm.  A  constant  sickness  or 
nasuea  at  the  stomach  should  be  kept  up  for  several  days,  as  well  as  a 
steady,  gentle  perspiration,  in  order  that  the  rigidity  of  the  muscles  may 
give  way,  and  a  relaxation  of  the  system  follow;  after  which,  brace  up 
the  system  moderately  and  regularly,  and  each  function  will  obey  the 
power  that  has  the  control  over  it.  A  steady  and  detemiined  course  and 
perseverance  should  be  pursued  in  such  cases,  if  the  practitioner  would 
expect  success. 

Steaming  and  bathing  the  body  and  extremities  with  stimulants,  and 
occasionally  v/ith  a  preparation  of  saleratus,  tincture  of  emetic,  and 
whiskey.  A  lively  friction  should  be  applied  to  the  body,  when  the  lini- 
ment or  tincture  is  used.  Dry  friction,  with  a  cloth  or  bare  hand,  may 
be  used  to  advantage,  two  or  three  times  a  day. 

It  must  always  be  remembered,  that  the  object  to  be  attained,  is  a  re- 
laxation of  the  muscles  in  the  first  place;  and  when  about  to  strengthen, 
do  it  slowly,  and  give  that  tone  and  stability  that  is  so  much  wanted  by 
the  deranged  and  disordered  nervous  and  muscular  systems. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Blistering,  cupping,  opium,  purgatives,  and 
cold  applications.] 

52 


810  THE    THOMSONIAN 

CONVULSIONS. 

The  symptoms  common  to  all  convulsions,  are  an  irregular  spasmodic 
action  of  some  of  the  muscles,  while  others  arc  forcibly  contracted;  an 
impaired  sensibility;  with  a  suspension  of  the  power  of  utterance. 

TREATMENT- 

Give  the  patient  tincture  of  nerve  powder  and  asafoetada  with  the  ad- 
dition of  a  little  cayenne  or  composition.  This  will  most  generally  re- 
lieve. If  not  give  from  a  teaspoonful  to  a  tablespoonful  of  the  third  pre- 
paration, and  put  the  feet  into  hot  water.  See  that  the  bowels  are  in 
good  order.     Tliis  will  generally  answer  the  purpose  and  give  relief. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding-,  blisters,  zinc,  musk,  opium,  and  cold 
applications.] 


EFILE?SY  .—Epilepsia. 

When  attacked  by  epilepsy  the  patient  suddenly  looses  all  sense  and 
power  of  motion ;  if  standing  he  is  immediately  prostrated  ;  he  is  then 
seized  by  violent  spasms,  moving  in  diiferent  directions  the  limbs  and 
trunk  of  his  body.  One  side  is  commonly  more  affected  than  the  other, 
the  muscles  of  the  eye  are  agitated,  so  that  the  lids  open  and  shut  con- 
tinually or  are  stretched  wide  open,  while  the  eyeballs  roll  in  every  direc- 
tion. The  mouth  foams,  the  face  is  hideously  distorted,  and  the  tong-ue 
protrudes  from  the  mouth.  The  muscular  power  is  often  enormously  de- 
veloped. These  fits  usually  commence  with  a  sudden  scream,  and  ter- 
minate in  sleep. 

TREATMENT. 

This  disease  should  be  treated  with  strong  anti-spasmodics  and  ner- 
vines, and  much  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  convidsions.  I  have  had  a 
nimiber  of  cases  of  this  complaint  and  of  lits  of  various  kinds,  and  have 
relieved  the  most  of  them.  It  was  done  by  giving  the  third  preparation 
and  calling  down  from  the  upper  extremities  to  the  feet  the  excess  of 
circulation,  which  would  give  ease  to  the  brain,  and  the  arterial  and 
nervous  system  would  become  reduced  and  the  patient  find  relief.  In 
three  fourths  of  all  fits,  spasms,  cramps,  convulsions,  &c.,  the  disease  is 
brought  on  by  an  excessive  circvdation  to  the  head  and  of  course  a  pro- 
portionate deficiency  at  the  feet;  and  when  the  fluids  are  e(]ualized  the 
patient  finds  immediate  relief.  To  do  which  our  most  powerful  stimu- 
lants, anti-spasmodics  and  nervines  are  brought  into  active  operation  in 
the  third  preparation,  cayenne,  nerve  powders,  and  asafetida. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blisters,  opium,  aither,  henbane, 
niusk,  iron,  zinc,  copper,  mercury,  and  jalap.] 


HYSTERICS.— ^(/siena. 

Hysterics  usually  occur  in  women  over  fifteen  years  of  age.  The 
fit  commences  with  a  severe  pain  in  the  head,  coldness  and  shivering 
over  the  whole  body,  and  a  quick  fluttering  pulse.  A  slight  pain  is  felt 
generally  in  the  left  side  of  the  abdomen,  from  which  place  a  ball  seems 
to  move  with  a  gmmbling  noise,  and  after  various  evolutions,  rises  into 
the  stomach  and  then  into  the  throat,  where  it  seems  to  remain  for  some 
time,  and  causes  a  sense  of  suifocation;  then  succeed  stupor,  insensibilir> 
ty  and  convulsions. 

Sometimes  the  patient  laughs  and  cries  in  the  same  breath;  beats  her 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  811 

breasts  and  shrieks,  although  not  entirely  deprived  of  consciousness. 
After  continuing  for  an  indefinite  length  of  time,  the  lits  are  either 
succeeded  by  a  lethargic  sleep,  or  leave  the  patient  in  a  state  of  entire  con- 
sciousness. 

TREATSIENT. 

This  disease  may  be  removed  by  equalizing  the  circulation  of  the  body 
by  a  thorough  course  of  medicine,  after  the  use  for  a  few  days  of  com- 
position and  nerve  powder,  and  bathing  the  feet  with  liniment,  and  the 
face  head  and  hands  in  cold  vinegar  or  with  cold  water  mixed  with  the 
spirits  of  camphor.  Injections  will  be  found  useful  when  the  bowels  are 
disordered.  Also,  female  injections  may  be  used  of  witch  hazel  or  red 
raspberry-  leaves,  made  into  a  tea  with  the  use  of  nerve  powder,  cayenne, 
and  emetic. 

A  tea  may  be  made  for  constant  drink  from  mothenvort,  Qconurus 
cardiaca,)  which  will  be  very  useful. 

A  pill  occasionally  may  be  used  of  the  size  of  a  small  pea,  made  from 
asafetida;  this  will  expel  the  wind  and  quiet  the  nerves  at  times  very 
much,  and  allow  the  patient  to  lind  rest  at  night.  We  have  personally 
experienced  the  happiest  effects  from  the  use  of  this  article  in  times  of 
great  nervous  excitement. 

iJRegular  Treatment — Bleeding,  blistering,  ammonia,  carbonate  of 
iron,  opium,  musk,  and  camphor.] 


CATALEPSY  OR  TRANCE.— Catalepsis. 

The  symptoms  which  distinguish  catalepsy,  are  absence  of  voluntary 
motion,  while  the  breathing  and  pulse  continue;  the  patient  remaining  in 
the  same  position  in  which  they  happen  to  be  taken  until  removed,  and  then 
remain  as  they  are  placed.  The  tit  commences  without  warning-,  lasting 
from  a  few  minutes  to  one,  two,  or  more  days,  and  usually  terminates 
with  sighing.  In  some  cases  the  breathing  and  pulse  are  so  feeble,  that 
the  patient  is  liable  to  be  taken  for  dead.  It  usually  attacks  females  of 
a  nervous  temperament. 

TREATMENT. 

The  feet  may  be  bathed  in  hot  water  until  the  absorbents  have  taken 
up  as  much  of  the  heat  as  possible  to  place  the  nervous  and  arterial  sys- 
tems in  a  slate  ready  to  become  more  active  if  possible.  Then  apply 
light  shocks  from  a  galvanic  batter)^  or  of  electricity,  and  increase  the 
power  as  the  patient  can  bear.  If  that  does  not  answer,  give  if  possible 
a  thorough  course  of  medicine,  and  change  the  seat  of  action  from  the 
head  to  the  feet. 

^Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blisters,  cathartics,  etc.] 


APOPLEXY.— ^popZma. 

Apoplexy  usually  attacks  persons  of  a  short  neck,  large  head  and  a 
corpulent  habit,  who  unite  great  mental  exertion  to  bodily  inactivity.  It 
does  not  often  occur  till  advanced  life,  and  most  often  to  those  wlio  make 
a  too  free  use  of  intoxicating  liquors.  Its  genei-al  symptoms  are  a  sud- 
den loss  of  sense  and  motion,  slow  pulse,  and  breathing,  attended  with  a 
snoring  sound. 

This  is  generally  brought  about  by  excessive  pressui-e  to  the  head 


812  THE    THOMSONIAN 

from  over  excitement.  Those  most  liable  to  be  afflicted  are  orators, 
statesmen,  members  of  the  bar,  or  clergymen.  They  are  often  cut  down 
when  speaking.  It  is  brought  on  by  a  gradual  loss  of  vitality,  which  is 
thrown  off  by  rarefaction  of  excessive  respiration,  which  exhausts  the 
regular  amount  of  vitality  used  in  ordinrry  business.  But  over  excite- 
ment in  an  orator  requires  an  over  exertion  in  point  of  argument  and 
language  to  convey  to  the  auditors  in  the  most  forcible  manner  his  senti- 
ments. When  the  lungs  have  exhausted  in  a  measure  the  quantity  of 
warmth  to  keep  them  in  motion,  a  supply  is  called  in  from  the  extremi- 
tities  to  make  up  the  deficiency,  and  this  in  its  turn  is  again  used  in  rari- 
faction  and  is  again  thrown  off.  In  calling  in  the  heat  in  this  manner 
the  blood  is  also  called  in,  and  so  it  continues  until  the  bloodvessels  in 
the  head  are  crowded  to  an  excessive  degree,  the  face  turns  purple,  the 
organs  of  sense  become  over  crowded,  and  vertigo  is  the  consequence  of 
dethroning  the  reasoning  faculties,  the  man  reels  and  falls  almost  sense- 
less and  lifeless. 

By  starting  the  blood  in  the  arm  a  temporary  vacuum  is  created  and 
the  pressure  upon  the  brain  is  not  quite  as  severe.  But  this  temporary 
relief  is  soon  overcome  by  the  cold  or  absence  of  heat  holding  the  power 
in  the  body.  The  eyes  are  blood  shot,  the  countenance  purple,  having 
the  appearance  of  strangulation  or  drowning.  So  close  is  the  compres- 
sion of  blood  in  the  region  of  the  heart,  brain,  and  lungs,  that  the  feet  and 
legs  exhibit  signs  of  immediate  dissolution,  by  a  cold,  death-like,  clam- 
my sweat,  and  the  skin  appears  shrunk  and  shriveled.  To  restore  the 
blood  back  to  the  lower,  and  relieve  the  pressure  upon  the  upper  or  su- 
perior extremities  or  organs,  is  what  Ave  wish  to  effect. 

TREATMENT. 

In  the  first  place  give  a  dose  of  cayenne  or  composition  as  strong  as 
possible,  then  put  the  feet  into  as  hot  water  as  can  be  borne  by  the  at- 
tendant, and  continue  to  rub  them  thoroughly,  and  as  soon  as  respiration 
becomes  more  easy,  give  warm  mint  tea  sweetened  with  sugar  and  milk, 
and  an  injection  made  very  stimulating  with  cayenne  and  active  as  an 
emetic  by  a  free  use  of  the  third  preparation,  and  make  it  produce  vo- 
miting if  possible. 

This  will  change  the  scene  of  excitement  from  the  head  to  the  oppo- 
site extremity;  put  a  steam  stone  or  brick  at  the  feet  and  frequently 
bathe  the  hands  and  temples  with  cold  vinegar  or  water.  This  will 
also  have  a  tendency  to  remove  in  a  measure  the  unnatural  excitement 
from  the  head  and  give  ease  to  the  blood  vessels  in  the  region  of  the 
brain. 

If  the  bowels  require  action,  a  couple  of  table  spoonsful  of  castor  oil 
in  a  dose  of  composition  or  cayenne  tea  will  have  the  most  happy  effect. 
Let  the  diet  for  a  day  or  two  be  thin  gruel  or  toast  water  sweetened  with 
sugar,  with  the  addition  of  milk:  also,  soups  may  be  used. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blisters,  antimony,  zinc,  jalap  and 
mercury.] 


PALSY  .—Paralysis 

Palsy  sometimes  originates  from  exposure  to  the  sun,  drinking  cold 
water  when  heated,  repelled  eruptions,  or  perhaps  more  frequently  from 
apoplexy.  The  attack  of  itself  is  sudden,  though  it  may  have  been  pre- 
ceded by  pain  in  the  head,  difficidty  of  moving  the  tongue,  and  loss  of 
perception  and  memory.     Palsy  is  frequently  local,  and  in  such  cases 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  813 

often  attacks  the  left  side.     This  disease  is  characterized  by  a  loss  of 
life  and  the  power  of  motion  in  the  affected  part. 

There  are  but  few  that  recover  entirely  from  this  dilficulty,  as  it  is  ge- 
nerally brought  on  by  old  age,  or  in  youn«"er  persons  from  overdoing  the 
natural  tone  of  the  system  by  some  species  of  intemperance,  either  in 
eating,  drinking,  exposure  to  the  cold,  or  to  the  heat  of  the  sun;  or  it 
may  be  produced  by  excessive  bleeding  and  taking  calomel,  and  thereby 
deadening  the  natural  functions  of  the  body,  and  causing  the  small  ba- 
lance of  active  fluids  to  press  heavily  upon  the  brain  by  which  means  an 
over  distension  of  tlie  blood  vessels  take  place  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
body,  and  a  degree  of  numbness  or  paralysis  in  the  extremities  for  the 
want  of  circulation  is  the  consequence,  by  which  means  the  nervous  and 
arterial  systems  become  so  much  deadened  to  the  sense  of  feeling  that 
the  numbness  is  experienced  in  the  head,  face,  and  on  one  side  of  the 
body,  from  its  tracing  the  nerves  from  tlie  seat  of  the  disease  into  the  live 
and  active  flesh. 

TREATBIENT. 

Bathing  and  active  friction  will  produce  temporary  relief  in  many 
cases.  Sometimes  patients  have  become  nearly  restored  to  health  by 
courses  of  medicine.  But  in  most  cases  where  this  disorder  has  once  at- 
tacked the  body  and  the  patient  recovered  to  tolerable  health,  the  effect 
is  manifest  to  an  observer  in  the  appearance  of  the  person,  countenance, 
or  in  the  walk. 

We  think  it  seldom  the  case  that  persons  entirely  recover  from  this 
complaint  when  once  attacked.  Powerful  courses  of  medicine  may  be 
applied,  putting  the  emetic  very  strong  into  the  injections,  and  let  the 
patient  take  lightly  of  the  tincture.  At  the  same  time  bathe  the  feet 
with  the  third  preparation  and  wrap  them  with  wet  cloths,  keeping  a  hot 
steam  stone  at  the  feet.  Take  6  or  8  cayenne  pepper  pods  two  or  three 
times  a  day. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Bleeding,  blisters,  cantharides,  ammonia,  ni- 
trate of  silver,  mercury  and  turpentine.] 


Prominent  Symptoms  and  Accidents, 


CELLULAR  DROPSY.— Anasarca. 
This  form  of  dropsy  usually  appears  in  the  lower  limbs,  marked  by 
cold  diffused  swelling,  which  on  being  pressed  leaves  the  impression  for 
a  considerable  time.  Its  progress  is  slow,  first  being  observed  about  the 
feet  or  ancles,  and  is  diminished  during  the  night,  or  when  in  a  recum- 
bent posture.  As  the  disease  advances  it  ascends,  sometimes  even  reach- 
ing the  face,  which  becomes  pale  and  bloated.  If  the  disease  continues, 
the  skin  of  the  legs  may  give  way,  and  the  fluid  ooze  out  in  drops. 

TREATMEXT. 

This  disease  may  be  successfully  treated  by  the  common  courses  of 
medicine.  While  under  the  course,  batlie  the  feet  and  legs  in  strong 
third  preparation,  rubbing  on  the  grains  thoroughly;  then  wrap  them  up 
in  towels  wet  with  cold  water,  and  keep  a  lively  steam  stone  at  the  feet 
during  the  operation  of  the  medicine,  and  wet  the  cloth  when  it  gets  dry, 
keeping  a  constant  sweat  upon  tlie  feet 


814  THE  THOMSOISIAN 

I  have  known  this  course  of  treatment  to  take  the  swelling-  entirely 
from  the  feet  and  lea^s  in  one  operation.  I  once  had  a  patient  so  bad  that 
the  feet  near  the  ankles  cracked  open,  down  the  side  of  the  foot,  nearly 
three  inches,  and  the  water  escaped  from  the  orifice;  the  flesh  turned 
black,  and  indicated  the  near  approach  of  mortification.  A  course  of 
medicine,  with  the  above  treatment  (applying-  the  third  preparation,  wet 
cloths,  and  steam  stone  at  the  feet,)  removed  not  only  the  water,  but  the 
entire  putrid  appearance  of  the  flesh. 

The  application  of  brewer's  yeast,  with  cayenne  and  emetic,  will  have 
the  same  effect. 

This  method  of  treating^  the  feet  is  most  admirable  also  in  its  effects  in 
cases  of  efout,  inflammatory  rheumatism,  or  any  bruise  or  other  disorder 
of  the  limbs,  as  it  removes  the  pain  immediately,  if  the  patient  is  under 
the  course  of  medicine. 

[Begular  Treatment. — Antimony,  copper,  mercury^  jalap,  gamboge 
juniper,  ammonia,  foxglove,  ajther,  tobacco,  and  cantharides.] 


WATER  IN  THE  BUAIN .—Hydrocephalus. 

This  disease  is  seldom  met  with  after  the  first  seven  years  of  life,  al- 
though it  has  sometimes  occurred  to  adults.  Its  first  symptoms  are,  irri- 
tation generally,  much  similar  to  that  produced  by  worms.  A  heaviness 
is  felt  in  the  head,  accompanied  by  pain  shooting  from  temple  to  temple; 
irregular  fever;  the  eyes  lose  their  brightness,  the  cheeks  are  pale;  the 
pulse  is  irregular  but  quick;  the  head  is  hot,  with  severe  pain  in  the  fore- 
head; and  as  the  disease  approaches  a  fatal  termination,  the  patient 
screams  suddenly,  throws  back  the  head,  and  is  taken  with  delirium,  vo- 
miting, and  convulsions. 

The  disease  usually  terminates  in  from  three  to  six  weeks  after  its  com- 
mencement; yet  it  sometimes  causes  death  in  two  or  three  days.  The 
chronic  form  may  continue  even  for  years.  This  disease  should  be  me- 
dically treated  in  its  first  stages,  if  possible, 

TREATMEIVT. 

This  complaint  originates  from  cold  extremities,  and  want  of  suitable 
action  in  the  bowels.  The  feet  should  be  bathed  (after  taking  some  pre- 
pared composition)  in  as  hot  water  as  the  patient  can  bear.  This  will 
measurably  relieve  the  head.  A  gentle  emetic  of  tincture  may  be  used, 
and  at  the  same  lime  make  use  of  an  injection  made  of  composition  pow- 
ders, or  of  red  raspberry  leaves,  witch  hazel  leaves,  or  of  the  American 
tea;  to  which  add  the  usual  quantity  of  cayenne  and  nerve  powder,  and 
two  tablespoonsful  of  the  third  preparation  of  the  lobelia,  well  shaken,  or 
one  teaspoonful  of  the  pulverized  seed,  scalded  in  the  tea.  When  admi- 
nistered, let  it  be  retained  by  the  patient  as  long  as  possible.  This  will 
change  the  field  of  excitement  fiom  the  upper  to  the  lower  extremities, 
and  will  in  a  great  measure  relieve  the  head,  if  the  patient  is  not  too  fa^r 
gone . 

This  injection  will  cause  vomiting,  by  excitement  in  the  bowels,  and 
will  most  generally  afford  immediate  relief. 

TViis  should  always  be  remembered  by  pracitioners — to  change  the  loca- 
tion of  the  excitement  from  the  upper  to  the  lower  extremities,  by  this 
course,  when  there  is  any  distress  in  the  head,  or  the  region  of  the  lungs, 
either  in  the  quinsy,  croup,  inflammatory  sore  throat,  or  asthma — remem- 
bering always  to  bathe  the  feet  in  the  stimulating  liniment,  to  keep  the 


MATERIA  MEDICA.  815 

excitement  in  the  extremities,  when  once  you  have  succeeded  in  your 
object. 

When  in  bed,  a  hot  stone  should  be  placed  at  the  feet. 

[Hegulnr  Treatment. — Bleeding,  mercury,  jalap,  gamboge,  with  elec- 
tricity and  cold  applications.] 


HEARTBURN.— Zimosis  Cardialgica. 

Heartburn  is  a  burning  sensation  at  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  accompa- 
nied by  eructations  of  an  acid  fluid.  It  commences  soon  after  eating, 
and  the  acid  raised  is  doubtless  generated  during  digestion.  Its  cause 
must  be  considered  a  derangement  of  the  digestive  organs. 

TREATMEIVT. 

A  costive  or  relaxed  state  of  the  bowels  will  produce  this  complaint, 
and  it  is  brought  about  by  a  deficiency  of  the  gall  to  act  upon  the  bowels. 

It  may  be  removed  by  using  a  lye  made  of  hard  wood  ashes,  and  al- 
lowed to  stand  and  purify;  or  clarified  lime  water,  made  of  rock  lime  or 
oyster  shell  lime,  may  be  used.  Take  of  the  clear  lye  or  water  from  half 
to  a  tablespoonful,  or  if  it  be  too  strong  reduce  it  by  adding  water.  This 
will  neutralize  the  acid.  A  strong  bitter  should  be  used  immediately  af- 
ter, to  restore  the  gall  and  powers  of  digestion.  An  emetic  would  be  of 
service,  to  throw  ofl"  the  matter  which  has  already  remained  too  long  in 
the  stomach.  This  alkali  may  be  used  daily  if  necessary.  Magnesia  is 
an  excellent  remedy,  especially  with  females  in  utero  gestation. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Jalap,  magnesia  and  ammonia.] 


WATERBRASH.— Pyrosis. 

Waterbrash  is  probably  produced  by  the  same  causes  which  produce 
heartburn;  and  the  eructations  occurring  when  the  stomach  is  empty, 
they  being  tasteless  and  in  larger  quantities,  constitute  the  only  material 
difiference  between  the  two  diseases. 

TREATMENT. 

This  is  generally  caused  by  the  want  of  a  suitable  degree  of  animal 
warmth  to  throw  ofifby  perspiration  the  excess  of  moisture  taken  into  the 
stomach.  It  may  be  removed  by  abstaining  measurably  from  drink  for 
a  time,  or  by  the  use  of  strong  stimulants,  such  as  cayenne  pepper,  com- 
position powders,  &c.,  to  throw  out  through  the  pores,  by  perspiration, 
that  which  is  raised  from  the  stomach  for  the  want  of  a  suitable  quantity 
of  animal  warmth  to  rarify  and  dispose  of  it  through  the  natural  channels. 
Medicines  should  be  used  daily  to  restore  digestion,  as  those  powers  are 
measurably  affected  by  this  complaint. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Mercury,  antimony,  colocynlh,  cinchona,  and 
sulphuric  acid.] 


FLATULENCE.— Zmosis  Flatus. 

This  disease  is  produced  by  a  weak  stomach,  and  it  consists  in  gas  be- 
ing formed  from  the  food — principally  carbonic  acid  gas — when  under 


816  THE  THOMSONIAN 

the  process  of  digestion,  which  cannot  take  place  when  the  digestive  or- 
gans are  healthy.  This  gas  is  retained  in  the  stomach,  causing-  the  abdo- 
men to  become  swollen  and  hard;  is  eriicted,  or  passed  downward. 

TREATMENT. 

A  little  cayenne,  ginger,  or  composition  tea,  will  relieve.  A  tea  made 
of  the  dyspepsia  powder,  or  spearmint,  peppermint,  pennyroyal,  sage,  or 
of  hemlock  boughs,  will  remove  it.  The  easiest  remedy  is,  to  take  as 
much  dyspepsy  powder  as  can  be  held  upon  the  point  of  a  penknife,  and 
it  will  relieve  pain  and  expel  wind  from  the  stomach  immediately.  With 
children,  a  little  hemlock,  peppermint,  or  pennyroyal  essence,  put  into 
warm  water,  sweetened,  with  a  little  milk,  and  given  warm,  will  act  like 
a  charm;   it  will  expel  the  wind,  and  put  the  child  to  sleep  immediately. 

{Regular  Treatment. — Tartarized  antimony,  chalk,  and  opium.] 


COSTIVENESS.— 06siipa«io. 

When  the  bowels  do  not  move  naturally,  as  often  as  once  in  twenty- 
four  hours,  we  denominate  it  costiveness.  Its  immediate  cause  is,  weak- 
ness of  the  bowels,  and  the  strength  of  the  gall  not  being  sufficient  to  cre- 
ate action;  which  may  be  produced  by  excessive  mental  exertion,  se- 
dentary habits,  inattention  to  regular  evacuations,  and  a  variety  of  other 
causes. 

TREATMENT. 

In  this  case  the  system  should  be  regulated  by  a  suitable  diet — brown 
bread,  crust  coflfee,  milk  porridge,  or  any  other  light  iood,  while  the  di- 
gestive powers  are  being  strengthened  by  bitters,  to  restore  the  gall  suffi- 
ciently for  it  to  act  upon  the  bowels. 

A  small  paper  of  the  dyspepsy  powders  may  be  earned  in  the  pocket, 
and  used  occasionally;  about  the  fourth  of  a  teaspoonful  will  remove  the 
faint  sinking  sensation  occasionally  felt  at  the  stomach. 

Laxative  pills  may  be  used,  made  of  equal  parts  of  dried  beef's  gall, 
rheubarb,  Castile  soap,  and  bitter  root,  with  the  addition  of  one  sixteenth 
part  of  cayenne,  and  pilled  in  the  poplar  or  peach  extract.  Take  from 
one  to  three  at  night.     This  is  an  excellent  article  for  costiveness. 

Or  a  pill  may  be  made  by  drying  down  tlie  tomato  juice  as  thick  as 
tar,  and  adding  rheubarb,  dried  bitter  root,  and  the  cayenne,  as  before 
mentioned.     Either  of  these  is  a  good  remedy. 

IRegular  Treatment. — Jalap,  sulphate  of  magnesia,  cassia,  rhubarb, 
and  mercury.] 


INDIGESTION.— Dyspepsia. 

This  disease  consists  in  the  incapacity  of  the  stomach  to  perform  its 
natural  functions.  Its  symptoms  are,  a  faint  sinking  sensation  through 
the  system,  especially  in  the  morning;  an  oppression  at  the  stomach  af- 
ter eating,  which  is  often  followed  by  a  great  desire  to  sleep;  a  heavy, 
dull  pain  about  the  head,  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  emaciation,  toge- 
ther wiih  a  long  train  of  other  symptoms,  which  the  frequency  of  the 
disease  at  the  present  day  renders  it  unnecessary  to  describe. 


TREATMENT. 


This  complaint  may  be  relieved  by  cleansing  the  stomach  by  emetics, 
and  making  a  tea  of  tlie  poplar  bark,  or  by  the  use  of  the  golden  seal  tea. 


MATEfllA  MEDICA.  817 

in  which  should  be  mingled  a  little  cayenne.  The  feet  and  legs  should 
be  bathed  in  hot  water,  and  thoroughly  rubbed  with  the  stimulating  lini- 
ment. By  continuing  the  friction  at  the  feet,  and  regulating  the  bowels, 
the  food  will  sit  better  upon  the  stomach  and  the  patient  will  be  relieved. 
In  extreme  cases,  courses  of  medicine  must  be  resorted  to,  to  clear  the 
morbid  matter  from  the  system.  A  light  diet  should  be  used  for  some 
time,  such  as  gruel,  crust  coffee,  sweetened,  with  milk,  and  brown  bread; 
or  rye  and  Indian  bread,  soda  crackers  and  milk,  pudding  and  milk,  sa- 
go, tapioca,  will  keep  the  bowels  loose. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Mercur}%  jalap,  aloes,  rhubarb,  soap,  magne- 
sia, cassia,  cinchonia,  iron,  &c.,  with  the  use  of  vinous  liquors.] 


SPONTANEOUS  VOMITING. 

Spontaneous  vomiting  is  often  a  salutary  effort  of  the  stomach  to  rid  it- 
self of  offending  matter.  Morbid  vomiting  is  sometimes  occasioned  by 
inflammation  of  the  stomach;  and  some  persons  vomit  on  very  slight  oc- 
casions, and  even  with  no  apparent  cause;  and  vomiting  may  continue  on 
the  administration  of  an  emetic,  after  it  has  produced  its  ordinary  effects. 

TREAT3IEXT. 

This  disease  may  be  cured,  by  assisting  nature  to  do  what  she  seems 
struggling  hard  to  perform.  If  there  was  nothing  offensive  upon  the  sto- 
mach, there  would  be  no  occasion  for  spontaneous  vomiting.  The  best 
way,  therefore,  is  to  give  an  emetic,  and  rid  the  system  of  the  offensive 
matter.  Frequently,  a  dose  of  prepared  composition  powders  will  an- 
swer. A  tea  made  of  cayenne  will  frequently  effect  the  object;  but  a 
more  thorough  emetic  will  be  the  most  likely  to  answer  the  purpose,  and 
is  the  surest  course. 

[Regular  Trealment. — Bleeding,  opium,  and  aether.] 


UlCCOVGU.— Singultus. 

Hiccough  has  its  seat  in  the  diaphragm,  and  is  a  spasmodic  affection  of 
that  organ,  though  its  cause  is  usually  an  irritation  of  the  stomach.  It  is 
frequently  induced  by  flatulence  and  overloading  the  stomach.  In  itself 
it  is  never  dangerous,  but  is  in  some  diseases  one  of  the  surest  signs  of 
approaching  dissolution. 

TREATMENT. 

A  warm  cup  of  mint  tea  will  frequently  relieve  this  complaint.  We 
have  known  it  to  stop  instantaneously  by  a  sudden  fright  while  the  parox- 
ysm was  on,  by  some  one  going  up  unperceived,  behind  the  person,  and 
giving  them  a  sudden  blow,  or  speak  sharp,  as  if  in  trouble.  With  the 
sick,  anti-spasmodics  should  be  used ;  such  as  asafetida,  nerve  powder. 
West  India  rum,  Holland  gin,  &c.,  in  small  quantities. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Opium,  aether,  musk,  sulphuric  acid,  blisters, 
and  cold  water.] 


CRAMP. 
Considered  alone,  cramp  is  never  dangerous.    It  is  most  usually  expe- 


818  THE  THOMSONIAN 

rienced  in  the  feet  and  calves  of  the  Ic^s,  though  any  part  of  the  body  is 
liable  to  be  affected  by  it.     It  consists  m  a  contraction  of  the  muscles. 

TREATMENT. 

Lively  friction,  if  in  the  limbs,  will  frequently  remove  the  cramp.  If 
more  powerful  means  are  required,  take  a  little  tincture  of  camphor, 
asafetida,  or  cayenne,  after  which  bathe  the  feet,  to  cause  a  general 
glow  to  pass  throughout  the  body. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Opium,  sether,  oil  of  amber,  jalap,  &c.,  with 
bleeding  and  electricity.] 


BLEEDING  FROiM  THE  ISiOSE.—Epistaxis. 

This  often  happens  in  catarrh,  and  may  be  induced  by  a  pressure  of 
blood  to  the  head,  and  a  variety  of  other  causes. 

TREATMENT. 

This  complaint  may  often  be  relieved  by  running,  or  violent  exercise, 
to  throw  the  blood  into  the  feet.  Putting  the  feet  into  hot  water,  and  a 
cloth  wet  in  cold  water,  applied  to  the  temples,  after  taking  a  dose  of 
warm  medicine.  If  this  does  not  relieve,  and  the  patient  is  in  danger, 
give  an  injection  of  composition,  made  strong  with  cayenne,  and  add, 
when  the  liquid  is  hot,  two  teaspoonsfuU  of  the  brown  emetic,  and  a 
table-spoon  full  of  the  third  preparation.  Let  tliis  be  gi\en  as  warm  as 
it  can  be  bome.  This  will  change  the  field  of  excitement  to  the  lower 
extremities,  and  the  vomiting  will  relieve  the  patient.  A  valuable  astrin- 
gent snuff  may  be  made  by  pulverising  witch-hazel  leaves  tine,  and 
using  it  when  bleeding. 

[JRegular  Treatment. — Alum,  zinc,  lead,  sulphuric  acid,  opium,  and 
muriate  of  iron.] 


STRANGUARY .—/scAuria  et  Bysuria. 

Stranguary  is  a  painful  emission  of  urine,  which  usually  flows  only  b} 
drops,  with  a  scalding  sensation.  Its  cause  is  doubtless  an  inflammation 
of  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  which  is  most  commonly  induced  by  the  ap- 

Klication  of  cantharides,  either  internally  or  in  the  form  of  blisters.     It 
as  also  in  a  few  cases  been  produced  by  colds. 

TREATMENT. 

Get  the  system  into  a  moderate  perspii-ation,  and  apply  a  hot  brick  to 
the  back,  and  use  the  diuretic  remedies  mentioned  under  the  head  of 
diuretics.  If  they  do  not  relieve,  take  the  course  of  medicine,  and  make 
a  free  use  of  a  tea  made  of  hemlock  boughs,  of  strawberry  leaves,  or  of 
wild  lettuce,  parsley  roots,  or  the  syrups  directed  to  be  made  under  the 
head  of  diuretics.  A  warm  plaster  may  be  applied  to  the  small  of  the 
back,  and  the  feet  should  be  stimulated,  to  call  down  the  circulation  from 
the  head,  and  create  activity  in  the  back  and  region  of  the  kidneys. 

The  most  simple  way  to  remove  this  disease,  is  to  heat  several  gallons 
of  water  to  a  boiling  temperature,  which  pour  into  ?  large  tub,  then  add 
cold  water  and  reduce  tlie  heat  to  that  point  so  that  it  can  be  borne  by 
the  patient  with  some  inconvenience.  Then  let  him  take  off  his  clothes 
and  sit  down  into  the  water,  which  should  come  up  above  the  navel,  com- 


MATERIA    MKDICA.  819 

pletely  immersing  the  small  of  (he  back.  Be  covered  with  a  blanket,  to 
keep  off  the  extenial  air.  This  will  relieve,  in  a  few  minutes,  all  distress 
occasioned  by  blisters,  or  from  any  other  cause  except  calculus  or  the 
stone,  and  will  then  afford  temporary  relief. 

\_Regalar  Treatment. — Opium,  aether,  balsum  copaiva,  tobacco,  mer- 
cury, and  the  use  of  the  catheter.] 


DIABETES.— -SaccAanne  Urine. 

This  disease  consists  in  an  excessive  discharge  of  urine.  Its  symptoms 
are,  thirst,  debility,  a  voracious  appetite,  a  drj',  harsh  skin,  a  clammy 
tongue,  and  general  debility. 

TREAT3IENT. 

The  perspirable  matter  has  turned  in,  and  passes  off"  by  the  urinary- 
organs  :  this  course  must  be  stopped  by  creating  an  active  circulation  to 
the  skin,  and  keeping  it  up  at  the  same  time  by  gi^T^ng  internally  some 
of  the  most  powerful  astringents  used  in  our  practice,  such  as  a  tea  made 
of  white  lily  roots,  witch-hazel  leaves,  or  tincture  of  kino,  made  strong, 
of  which  take  a  tea-spoon  full  two  or  three  times  a  day,  miless  it  dries 
the  mouth  too  much. 

In  the  first  stages,  it  may  be  cured  by  the  free  use  of  loaf  sugar  and 
rosin,  one  thiid  of  rosin  to  two  thirds  of  loaf  sugar,  made  fine — and  a 
teaspoonfuU  used  several  times  in  course  of  the  day.  A  tea  may  be 
made  of  avens-root,  or  cranes-bill,  which  will  be  sufficiently  astringent 
to  do  much  good  in  this  disease.  But  the  operation  of  a  full  course  of 
medicine,  and  a  continued  perspiration  for  some  time,  with  a  free  use  of 
astringents,  will  answer  the  purpose.  The  bowels  should  be  kept  in 
good  order. 

[Hegular  Treatment. — Nitric  acid,  ammonia,  bleeding,  alum,  zinc, 
and  opium.] 


GRAYEL.—Lithiasis. 

Gravel  is  produced  when  the  alkaline  matter  which  the  urine  contains 
bears  a  too  great  proportion  to  its  acid  principle,  to  be  kept  in  solution 
by  it:  in  that  case,  the  alkali  becomes  concreted,  usually  in  the  bladder. 
It  may  also  be  occasioned  when  the  acid  principle  exceeds  its  due  pro- 
portion in  relation  to  the  alkaline.  In  this  case,  the  deposite  is  com- 
monly made  in  the  bladder,  which  appears  in  the  form  of  red  sand,  but 
is  concreted  in  the  kidney,  from  whence  it  passes,  and  is  deposited  in  the 
bladder. 

Sometimes  a  nucleus  is  formed  of  these  deposites  in  the  bladder,  which 
becomes  solid,  and  attains  a  greater  or  less  size,  according  to  cii'cum- 
stances,  and  is  then  called  stone. 

TREATMENT. 

Take  two  pounds  of  wild  strawberry  leaves  and  vines,  and  fruit,  if  to 
be  had,  and  put  them  into  a  stone  jug,  and  add  two  gallons  of  the  best 
Holland  gin,  and  half  a  pound  of  parsley  roots,  and  quarter  of  a  pound 
of  juniper  benies,  all  pulverised,  and  sweeten  it  with  two  pounds  of 
boiled  strained  honey.  Let  this  compound  be  well  shaken  together,  and 
stopped  down  for  use.     Take  from  a  quarter  to  half  of  a  glass  two  or 


820  THE  THOMSONIAN 

three  limes  a  day.  It  is  an  excellent  remedy.  If  the  complaint  is  very 
distressing-,  a  steam  bath  may  be  applied,  and  the  patient  having  his  feet 
in  a  paU  of  water,  as  hot  as  he  can  bear  it,  until  the  circulation  in 
them  is  as  free  as  in  the  hands.  This  will  generally  relieve;  if  not,  the 
tincture  of  emetic  may  be  taken  to  relax  the  system,  and  at  the  same 
time,  all  the  drinks  taken  should  be  sweetened  with  clarified  or  boiled 
honey.  A  steaming  stone  or  brick  may  be  placed  to  the  small  of  the 
back,  as  hot  as  can  be  tolerated,  or  cloths  wet  with  hot  water,  applied  as 
frequent  as  they  become  coolish,  so  that  the  heat  can  be  increased  and 
comfortably  borne  by  the  patient,  may  be  used.  Spirits  of  turpentine 
may  be  taken  in  small  quantities,  upon  sugar,  with  much  advantage,  or 
mixed  with  boiled  honey. 

These  are  all  simple  means,  to  which  people  will  generally  have  re- 
course before  they  will  apply  more  thorough  remedies.  But  if  these 
things  fail,  (as  it  is  seldom  the  case  but  some  of  them  will  relieve  the 
patient,)  then  try  the  thorough  course  of  medicine,  applying  the  heat  to 
the  feet  by  hot  water  while  in  the  bath,  and  bathe  with  Ihument  when 
out.  A  tea  made  of  poplar  bark  may  be  constantly  used,  and  much 
benefit  will  be  derived:  also  hemlock  boughs  may  be  made  into  tea,  and 
freely  used  for  the  same  purpose,  with  advantage. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Opium,  aether,  turpentine,  soda,  lead,  and 
alum.] 


DROWNING. 

When,  by  immersion  in  water,  the  animal  functions  become  suspended, 
so  as  to  cause  death,  we  call  it  a  case  of  drowning. 

The  I'eason  why  immersion  in  water  causes  death,  is  supposed  to  be  the 
prevention  of  air  from  being  inhaled  into  the  lungs,  and  thus  the  blood  is 
not  changed  from  the  properties  of  venous  to  arterial,  but  is  passed  from 
the  left  side  of  the  heart  to  the  brain  in  the  venous  state,  in  such  quanti- 
ties as  to  impair  the  vital  power. 

TREATMENT. 

The  raising  of  the  temperature  of  the  body  should  be  as  nearly  natural 
as  possible,  that  is,  as  natural  and  uniformly  through  the  body.  The  heat 
may  be  raised  to  ninety-eight  degrees  of  Fahrenheit,  but  not  over  one 
hundred.  The  body  should  be  laid  upon  a  mattress,  between  blankets, 
the  head  and  shoulders  elevated — the  feet  extending  over  the  foot  of  the 
bed,  and  immersed  in  as  hot  water  as  the  attendant  can  bear,  in  order 
that  the  absorbents  may  raise  sufficient  heat  of  vitality  to  cause  respira- 
tion as  soon  as  the  lungs  can  be  moved  by  suitable  oscillations.  The 
evidence  of  improvement,  or  returning  life,  may  be  noticed  by  the  in- 
crease in  the  size  of  the  veins  in  the  hands  and  feet. 

While  the  feet  are  in  the  water  and  the  body  is  becoming  warm,  light 
shocks  may  be  applied  from  a  galvanic  battery  or  of  electricity,  which 
will  have  a  tendency  to  give  that  oscillating  motion  to  the  lungs  so  ne- 
cessary in  respiration.  As  soon  as  possible  pour  into  the  mouth  one  tea 
spoonful  of  the  third  preparation,  to  create  an  excitement  at  the  roots  of 
tlie  tongue  and  glands  of  the  Uliroat,  which  will  give  action.  If  the  pa- 
tient begins  to  recover  it  will  first  be  perceived  by  the  pulse  and  then  by 
respirations  "few  and  far  between."  In  this  case  the  efforts  should  be 
redoubled  to  apply  the  shock  of  galvanism  light  or  heavy  as  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case  will  waiTant.  Rub  the  feet  and  arms  to  increase  the 
circulation.     Do  not  suffer  any  thing  to  be  put  into  \he  mouth  that  would 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  821 

create  sh-angulation  with  those  that  are  well.  Do  not  snffer  any  hea\y 
weig-ht  to  lay  upon  the  breast  as  it  will  prevent  the  inflation  of  the  lungs, 
so  far  as  the  weight  is  concerned.  As  soon  as  tlie  patient  can  swallow, 
a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  third  preparation  should  be  a.dministered  to 
create  vomiting  and  thereby  throw  otf  all  foreign  matter  from  the  sto- 
mach, as  well  as  to  excite  i>erspiration,  to  quiet  the  nervous  system,  in- 
duce sleep  and  quietness,  and  restore  the  body  to  its  accustomed  vigor. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Inflation  of  the  lungs  by  the  bellows,  rolling  on 
barrels,  friction,  electricity,  bleeding,  with  the  use  of  stimulants.] 


HYDROPHOBIA.— Canme  Madness. 

This  disease  usually  arises  from  the  introduction  of  poison  into  the  sys- 
tem by  the  bite  of  a  rabid  animal,  though  perhaps  in  some  cases  it  arises 
spontaneously.  It  commences  with  great  anxiety,  timidity,  sighing, 
dryness  of  the  tongue,  a  horrible  sensation  when  attempting  to  swallow 
any  kind  of  liquid,  a  small  weak  pulse,  accompanied  with  slight  fever. 
As  it  progresses,  it  is  marked  by  continual  watching,  difficult  respira- 
tion, abhorrence  of  light  and  the  motion  of  the  air,  and  frothing  at  the 
mouth;  and  the  sufferer's  life  ^usually  tenninates  in  comiilsions. 

TREATMENT. 

The  patient  should  be  got  into  an  active  perspiration,  and  the  courses 
of  medicine  applied  daily,  and  the  tincture  of  emetic  should  be  used  free- 
ly at  intervals  until  nausea  is  induced.  Continue  this  course,  keeping  up 
a  moisture  upon  the  surface  and  a  regularity  of  the  bowels  until  all  symp- 
toms of  the  disease  disappear. 

Continued  perspiration  alone  has  cured  canine  madness  in  some  cases, 
but  this  cannot  be  continued  without  the  free  use  of  strong  counter-poi- 
sons, for  which  purpose  use  the  lobelia  in  tincture  or  as  an  emetic,  in  the 
course  of  medicine,  and  in  every  other  form  in  which  it  has  been  success- 
fully employed  in  other  complaints. 

A  number  of  cases  of  this  disease  have  been  cured  by  the  Thomsonian 
practice  after  having  been  given  up  as  incurable  under  the  regular  treat- 
ment, and  having  been  exercised  with  the  dreadful  paroxysms  incident  to 
that  complaint. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Copious  bleedings,  scarifying,  copper,  opium,. 
ammonia,  salts,  cold  bathing,  and  musk.] 


VENEREAL  DISEASE.— Syphilis. 

Syphilitic  poison  being  applied  to  a  part  which  is  soft  or  covered  with 
a  mucous  membrane,  or  otherwise  where  a  puncture  of  the  skin  exists, 
produces  an  ulceration  or  inflammation  of  the  part  to  which  it  was  com- 
municated. This  disease  may  remain  local,  or  it  may  nm  into  a  consti- 
tutional affection.  When  local ,  it  shows  itself  in  form  of  inflamed  ulcers, 
very  sore  and  painful,  unequally  rigid,  the  edges  prominent  and  of  an 
ash  color,  and  with  a  disposition  to  spread  rapidly  over  the  adjacent 
parts. 

When  constitutional,  the  fluids  throughout  the  whole  system  are  taint- 
ed, and  other  parts  of  the  body  besides  the  genital  organs  are  liable  to 
break  out  in  obstinate  ulcers,  or  a  sort  of  scrofulous  affection;  and  in  lliis 
form  of  the  disease,  unless  arrested  by  efficient  medical  treatment,  it 
sooner  or  later  proves  fatal. 


822 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


TREATMENT. 

Courses  of  medicine  should  be  used  two  or  three  times  in  the  course  of 
a  week,  and  the  tincture  of  lobelia  taken  at  intervals,  to  keep  the  sto- 
mach sickened.  The  evacuation  of  the  bowels  should  be  regular  and 
daily.  This  course  will  generally  relieve  all  distress.  Then  make  a  wash 
of  the  lobelia  and  yellow  lily  root.  This  tea  may  also  be  used  as  injec- 
tions lor  the  penis  or  per  ani  with  good  success. 

A  poultice  may  l)e  ^used  for  any  syphilitic  sores,  compounded  of  the 
lobelia  and  yellow  lily  root  tea,  thickened  with  slippery  elm  and  spong'e 
crackers,  or  Indian  meal.  If  these  articles  cannot  be  had,  make  use  of 
brewer's  or  baker's  yeast,  and  thicken  it  with  the  crackers  and  the  elm, 
with  the  addition  of  the  green  emetic.  This  will  draw  out  the  virus  and 
heal  the  sores.  Keeping  the  body  cool,  and  the  stomach  nauseated  by 
the  lobelia  or  bitter  root,  with  the  use  of  the  compounds  for  poultices  and 
injections,  there  will  not  be  much  dilficulty  with  the  patient. 

[Regular  Treatment. — Mercury,  opium,  salts,  nitre,  ammonia,  bal- 
sam copaiva,  lime  water,  light  diet,  and  cool  temperament.] 


TIC  BOVLOXJREVX.— Neuralgia. 

This  is  a  disorder  that  often  occurs  in  this  country.  It  attacks  the 
cheek  and  upper  jaw,  is  a  painful  affection  of  the  nerves,  and  takes  its 
name  from  its  sudden  and  excruciating  darts  of  pain.  The  distress  is 
frequently  most  intolerable  without  the  least  apparent  signs  of  any  affec- 
tion of  the  cheek,  teeth,  or  jaw.  It  is  oftentimes  by  unskilful  physicians 
attributed  to  the  teeth,  and  many  have  ver}'  injudiciously  extracted  all  on 
that  side;  but  it  is  never  succeeded  by  any  mitigation  of  the  pain.  It  is 
therefore  always  commendable  for  those  who  have  sound  teeth  in  their 
head,  to  let  them  remain  in  such  instances,  as  not  the  least  possible  be- 
nefit can  be  derived  from  their  extraction. 

TREATMENT. 

We  are  seldom  called  upon  to  meet  this  disease.  One  case  of  it  was 
treated  by  us  the  past  year,  it  was  that  of  a  young  lady  who  had  been 
seriously  afflicted  with  it  for  upwards  of  a  year,  so  that  at  times  she  could 
take  no  rest  day  nor  night.  We  commenced  our  treatment  by  giving  her 
compositition,  to  create  an  action  in  the  system,  and  bathing  the  feet  with 
stimulating  liniment,  to  take  the  pressure  from  the  head.  The  second 
■day  she  took  the  vapor  bath,  and  afterwards  four  or  five  emetic  pills  daily, 
which  sickened,  and  caused  slight  vomiting;  then  put  a  stimulating 
plaster  upon  the  cheek,  which  counteiacted  the  constringent  effects  the 
■cold  air  would  naturally  produce  while  taking  the  warm  nifdicine,  be- 
sides relaxing  the  muscles  so  as  to  aljate  the  pain.  For  four  or  five  of 
the  first  days  and  nights  she  was  constantly  exercised  with  the  most  in- 
tense pain  in  that  cheek.  We  then  administered  a  full  course  of  medi- 
cine, and  followed  up  the  bath  every  day,  with  bathing  the  feet  and  warm 
medicine  internally,  until  the  ninth  day,  when  she  returned  home  in  the 
steam-boat,  without  the  least  pain,  and  has  not  since,  we  leani,  been  af- 
flicted with  tlie  least  symptoms  of  the  tic  douloureux. 

We  should  not  feel  authorized  to  declare  that  the  above  course  would 
cure  every  case  of  the  complaint;  but  we  know  it  was  effectual  in  this 
instance,  and  this  shoidd  be  an  inducement  to  make  a  trial  of  it  in  other 
cases. 

N.  B. — We  have  had  several  cases  since  the  one  above  mentioned,  and 
have  generally  been  successful  with  them.  J.  T. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  823 

A  VALUABLE  SALVE, 
For  violent  Inflammatory  Sores,  Barns,  Canker  or  Fever  Sores,  Sfc. 

Take  of  beef's  gall,  and  dry  it  down  to  the  consistence  of  salve,  and 
apply  it  to  the  part  affected,  and  it  takes  out  the  inflammation  immediate- 
ly, and  prevents  the  contraction  of  the  muscles. 

This  is  a  much  better  remedy  for  old  sores  than  the  black  salve,  in 
which  is  compounded  the  red  lead,  mentioned  on  page  734,  and  should 
be  used  in  its  stead. 

[This  article  was  overlooked,  and  not  put  in  its  proper  place,  but  is  too 
valuable  to  be  entirely  omitted.] 


Cookery  for  tJie  Sick. 


After  a  satisfactory  operation  of  medicine,  the  next  most  important 
subject  to  be  attended  to  is  the  appetite.  The  food  should  be  light,  and 
such  as  to  set  well  upon  the  stomach,  for  which  purpose  we  have  selected 
the  following  articles. 

TO  MAKE  CHICKEN  BROTH. 

Dress  a  fowl;  wash  it  in  boiling  water,  with  a  portion  of  salt;  take 
eight  quarts  of  water,  and  four  or  six  ounces  of  pearl  barley;  boil  it  an 
hour  and  a  half;  put  in  the  fowl  and  boil  it,  with  the  addition  of  the  white 
of  leeks  and  parsley.  When  the  fowl  is  sufficiently  done,  add  a  pint  of 
sweet  milk;  let  it  just  come  to  the  boiling  point;  take  the  soup  oiT  the 
fire,  have  the  fowl  covered  with  a  small  quantity  of  good  butter  and  par- 
sley, with  a  few  pieces  of  lemon  peel.  A  little  pepper  and  salt  or  aro- 
matic s  may  be  added. 

ANOTHER  METHOD. 

Take  a  chicken  and  cut  it  in  pieces ;  put  the  gizzard  in  with  it,  opened 
and  cleaned,  but  not  peeled.  Boil  it  till  the  moat  drops  from  the  bone. 
Begin  to  give  the  broth  as  soon  as  there  is  any  strength  in  it;  and  when 
boiled,  edt  some  of  the  meat.  Let  it  be  well  seasoned.  This  may  be 
given  instead  of  milk  porridge,  and  is  very  good  for  weak  patients,  par- 
ticularly in  cases  of  dysentery. 

|jg  ANOTHER  METHOD. 

Put  the  body  and  legs  of  the  fowl,  after  taking  off  the  skin  and  rump, 
into  the  water  it  was  boiled  in,  with  one  blade  of  mace,  one  slice  of  onion 
and  ten  white  pepper  coins.  Simmer  till  the  broth  be  of  a  pleasant  fla- 
vor; if  not  water  enough,  add  a  little.  Beat  a  quarter  of  an  ounce  of 
sweet  almonds  with  a  teaspoonful  of  water,  fine;  broil  it  in  the  broth; 
strain,  and  when  cool  remove  the  fat. 

BEEF,  MUTTON,  AND  VEAL  BROTH. 

Put  two  pounds  of  lean  beef,  one  pound  of  scrag  of  veal,  one  pound  of 
scrag  of  mutton,  three  ounces  of  pearl  barley,  sweet  herbs,  and  ten  pep- 
per corns,  into  a  nice  tin  sauce-pan,  with  seven  quarts  of  water;  to  sim- 
mer to  three  or  four  quarts,  and  clear  from  the  fat  when  cold.  Add  one 
onion,  if  approved,  or  the  white  part  of  leeks. 

Soup  and  broth  made  of  different  meats  are  more  supporting  as  well  as 
better  flavored.      To  remove  the  fat,  take  it  off  when  cold,  as  clean  as 


824 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


possible ;  and  if  tliere  be  still  any  remaining,  lay  a  bit  of  clean  blotting 
or  cap  paper  on  the  broth  when  in  the  basin,  and  it  will  lake  up  ever}- 
particle. 

TO  MAKE  MILK  PORRIDGE. 

Put  a  quart  of  water  in  a  kettle,  with  a  proper  quantity  of  salt,  and 
while  heating  mix  a  gill  of  flour  in  a  bowl  with  water,  made  thick,  and 
when  the  water  is  boiling  hot  drop  this  into  it  with  a  spoon;  let  it  be  well 
boiled,  then  add  half  a  pint  of  milk.  This  is  to  be  eaten  while  under  the 
operation  of  the  medicine ;  and  is  also  good  food  for  the  sick  at  any  other 
time,  especial!}'  when  the  stomach  is  weak. 

ANOTHER   MKTHOD. 

Take  of  water  gruel,  when  it  has  stood  a  little  while  to  cool,  and  add 
half  the  quantity  of  unboiled  new  milk.     It  may  be  eaten  salted  or  fresh. 

Milk  poiTidge  is  exceedingly  cleansing,  and  easy  of  digestion,  and 
may  be  given  to  the  weakest  stomach  that  is  able  to  receive  food. 

WATER  GRUEL. 

Take  a  spoonful  and  a  half  or  fresh  ground  oatmeal,  mix  with  it  gra- 
dually a  quart  of  river  or  spring  water,  and  set  it  on  a  clear  fire.  When 
it  is  rising  or  just  ready  to  boil,  take  it  off  and  pour  it  from  one  basin  in- 
to another,  backwards  and  forwards  five  or  six  times;  then  set  it  on  the 
fire  agam  till  it  is  ready  to  boil,  but  before  it  does  boil  take  it  off  and  let 
it  stand  a  little  in  the  sauce-pan,  that  the  coarse  husks  of  the  oatmeal 
may  sink  to  the  bottom.  Then  pour  it  out,  add  a  little  salt,  and  let  it 
stand  to  cool. 

When  water  gniel  is  made  with  grits  it  must  boil  gently  for  some  time. 
The  longer  it  boils  the  more  it  will  jelly.  But  moderation  must  be  ob- 
served in  this  respect,  for  if  it  be  very  long  boiled  and  very  thick  it  will 
be  flat  and  heavy. 

A  mistaken  idea  very  generally  prevails,  that  water  gruel  is  not  nou- 
rishing. It  is,  on  the  contrary,  a  light,  nourishing  food,  good  either  in 
sickness  or  health,  both  for  young  or  old. 

TOAST  AND  WATER. 

Toast  a  thin  piece  of  bread,  at  a  distance  from  the  fire,  till  very  hard 
and  brown,  but  not  the  least  burnt;  then  put  it  into  a  jug  of  cold  water, 
cover  it  close,  and  let  it  stand  an  hour  before  it  is  used.  The  Avater  will 
be  of  a  fine  brown  color  if  properly  made. 

This  is  of  particular  use  in  weak  bowels,  and  by  the  addition  of  a  small 
portion  of  brandy  is  a  very  proper  drink  when  the  bowels  are  disordered . 

ORANGEADE  OR  LEMONADE. 
When  you  have  squeezed  out  the  juice,  pour  boiling  water  on  a  little 
of  the  peel  and  cover  it  close.  Boil  sugar  and  water  to  a  thin  syrup,  and 
skim  it  well.  When  thoroughly  cold,  mix  the  infusion,  the  sjTup  and 
juice,  with  as  much  more  water  as  will  make  it  a  rich  sherbet,  and  strain 
it  through  a  jelly  bag;  or  it  may  be  made  by  squeezing  the  juice,  strain- 
ing it,  and  adding  capillaire  and  water. 

RICE  MILK. 
To  four  large  spoonsful  of  whole  rice,  washed  very  clean  in  cold  water, 
add  a  quart  of  new  milk,  and  stew  them  very  gently  for  three  hours.    Let 
it  stand  in  a  basin  to  cool  before  it  is  used. 


MATERIA    xMEDICA. 


825 


GENERAL    INDEX. 


Vocabulary  of  Botanical  Terms,  page 

Index  of  Anatomy, 

Index  of  Dr.  Thomson's  early  practice. 


150 
485 
577       ♦ 


Abdomen,  diseases  of  the, 
Accidents,  Prominent  Symptoms 

and, 
Achillea  Millefolium,  652, 
Active,  the. 
Air, 

atmospheric, 
Aletris  Ferinosa,  620, 
Alkalies, 
Allspice, 

Altitude  and  location  of  Plants, 
Althaea  Rosea,  671, 
Alumina, 
American  Aspen, 
American  Senna,  656, 
Amygdalus  Persica,  624, 
Amara,  628, 
Anasarca, 

Anatomy,  outlines  of, 
Angelica  Archangelica, 
Angina  Pectori?, 
Animal  Physic, 
Animals,  on. 
Animation, 
Antacids, 
Anthemis  Cortula, 
Nobilis, 
Antidyspeptic  Restorative, 

(/Onserve, 
Antiseptics  709, 
Antiscorbutic  and   Compounds, 

712,  mk 

Antiscorbutics,  711,   ^m 
Antiscorbutic  Ointments, 
Antiseptics,  to  prevent  mortifica- 
tion, (No.  6,)  629, 
Antispasmodics, 
Apium  Petroselinum,  663, 
Apocynum  Andros'emifolium, 

Canabinum,  619, 
Apoplexia, 
Apoplexy, 
Archangel, 
Arctium  Lappa,  641, 
Aromatic  Compound, 
Aromatics  and  Tonics, 
Arrangement  of  this  Book, 
Arteries,  taking  up  of, 
wounding  of, 


S03 

813 

712 
189 
205 
205 
705 
697 
674 
118 
724 
175 
615 
719 
707 
707 
813 
211 
6S7 
800 
717 
204 
23 
676 
6S5 
(W) 
70S 
709 
727 

711 
04  J 
713 

709 
632 
721 
618 
705 
811 
811 
687 
711 
675 
673 

3 
777 
778 

53 


Artemisis  Asynthium,  690 

Artificial  Classes  and  Orders,  142, 143 


Arum  TriphilJum,  672, 

724 

Asafctida,  634, 

7n 

Asarum  Canadense, 

689 

Aster  Hyssopifolius,  607, 

703 

Asthma,  742, 

800 

Astringent  Compounds. 

703 

Avens  Root,  608, 

703 

Balmony,  613, 

704 

Balsam  Fir, 

676 

Copaiva, 

676 

Balsamodendron  Myrrha,  629, 

709 

Balsams, 

676 

Barber's  Itch, 

716 

Barberry,  617, 

705 

Barytes, 

171 

Bath,  steam  or  vapor. 

692 

Bathing  the  feet. 

729 

Bayberry.  597, 

701 

Baybush, 

649 

Benne  Plant,  670, 

724 

Berberis  Vulgaris, 

617 

Betula  Lenta, 

686 

Beverage,  a  healthy,  747, 

752 

Bile,  to  correct,  (No.  4,)  613. 

704 

Biles, 

725 

Birch,  black,  spicy,  or  cherry. 

686 

Birth  Root, 

688 

Bitter  Almond,  628, 

707 

Bitter  Herb, 

613 

Bitter  Root,  61S,  619,  705, 

718 

Bittersweet,  639, 

711 

Bitter  Wintergreen, 

644 

Bitters,  and  Compounds  of,  704 

} 

705,  706, 

690 

Bitters,  simple, 

690 

Black  and  White  Population,  lia- 

bilities to  disease. 

750 

Black  Snakeroot,  711, 

643 

Blackwell,  E., 

88 

Blain,  Dr.,  opinion  of. 

19 

Bleeding  at  the  nose,  742, 

818 

Bleeding,  how  to  stop. 

778 

Blessed  Thistle, 

689 

Blood  Root, 

681 

Blood,  transfusion  of, 

767 

loss  of, 

771 

Boneset, 

681 

826 


THE  THOMSON  I  AN 


Botanic  Terms,  a  Vocabulary  of, 
Botany, 

Improved  System  of, 
Boxwood,  (521, 
Bruises,  sheep's  pelts  for, 
Buck  Thorn,  720, 

Horn  Brake,  669, 
Buds  of  Plants, 
Burdock,  641, 
Susks  of  steel, 
Butternut,  718, 
Calculi, 
Caloric, 

theory  of, 

fluidity  of, 

radiation  of, 
Calx, 
Camomile, 

wild, 
Camphor,  636, 
Canada  Snakeroot, 
Cancer  Plaster, 
Canine  Madness, 
Canker,  remedies  for,  (No.  3,) 

797, 
Canker  Sores, 
Capsicum  Baccatum,  590, 

Annuum,  590, 
Carbonate  of  Soda, 
Cassia  Marylandica,  656, 
Castor  Oil,  657, 
Caialepsis, 
Catalepsy, 
Catarrh,  735, 
Catarrhus, 
Catesby,  M., 
Cathartics,  654, 
Catnip,  Catmint, 
Cathartic  Compound, 
Caustics, 
Cayenne, 

Ceanothus  Americana,  606, 
Ceingles, 
Celular  Dropsy, 
Centaurea  Benedicta, 
Chapped  Hands  and  Feet, 
Chelone  Glabra,  613, 
Cherevisise  Fermentum,  667, 
Cherry,  black,  or  wild. 
Chicken,  its  growth  from  the  egg. 
Chicken  Pox, 

Chimaphila  Umbellata,  644, 
Chincopins, 
Chocolate  Root, 
Cholera,  Asiatic, 
Cholera  Morbus, 
Chorea  Sancti  Viti, 
Chrysanthemum  Parthenium, 
Cinnamon, 

Circulation,  equalization  of, 
Classes,  artificial,  133, 
Cleavers. 


150 
30 
121 
705 
769 
659 
724 
61 
711 
742 
658 
806 
189 
195 
195 
199 
678 
685 
685 
711 
6S9 
671 
821 

701 
725 
700 
701 
677 
719 
719 
811 
811 
793 
793 
108 
716 
684 
718 
679 
590 
702 
787 
813 
689 
739 
704 
723 
026 
14 
784 
711 
590 
608 
752 
803 
809 
686 
675 
692 
142 
661 


Climate,  influence  of,              • 

751 

Clivers,  661, 

721 

Clove  Tree, 

673 

Cocash, 

607 

Cochleria  Armoracia, 

683 

Cohosh, 

643 

Cold,  artificial,  production  of. 

201 

Colic, 

804 

Painter's, 

804 

Colica, 

804 

Comfrey,  623, 

705 

Composition  Powders, 

710 

Compounds  of  No.  3, 

703 

No  4, 

705 

No.  5, 

707 

No.  6,  710, 

711 

Consumption,  769, 

796 

Contusions, 

779 

Convulsions, 

810 

Cookery  for  the  Sick, 

823 

Copaiferffi  ofticinalis. 

676 

Coptis  Trifolia,  622, 

705 

Corns  on  tiie  toes, 

741 

Cornus  Circinati,  646, 

712 

Cornus  Florida,  621, 

705 

Costiveness, 

816 

Cough  Mixture, 

727 

Drops,  673, 

728 

Syrup, 

729. 

Council  of  the  Senses, 

764 

Courses  of  Medicine, 

695 

Cramp, 

817 

CranesbiU,  609, 

703 

Crooked  Leg,  to  straighten. 

745 

Croup,  742, 

802 

Cubeba,  653, 

712 

Cubebs,  653, 

712 

Cutaneous  Diseases, 

733 

Cynanche  Pharyngaj, 

794 

Parotidgea, 

801 

Maligna, 

801 

Trachealis, 

802 

Cypripedium,  632, 

710 

Dandelion,  664. 

721 

Dedication,  ^Bf 

3 

Diabetes,  723pF 

819 

Diarrhoea, 

803 

Diarrhoea  and  Dysentery,  articles 

for,  725, 

'  708 

Digestive   powers,   to  restore. 

(No.  5,)  624, 

707 

Disease,  treatment  df. 

693 

Diseases, 

780 

eruptive. 

780 

Diuretic  Compounds, 

722 

Diuretics,  660,721, 

.722 

Docks,  648, 

712 

Dog's  Bane,  618, 

619 

Dogwood, 

621 

Dropsy,  721, 

813 

Drowned,  resuscitation  of  the 

775 

Drowning,  773, 

828 

MATERIA    MEDICA. 


827 


Dysentery,  804 
Dyspeptic  Powders,  706 
Dyspepsia,  816 
Earth  and  Water,  170 
Egg  and  its  vitality,  14 
Elder  Tree,  723 
Elecampane,  688 
Elm,  slippery,  or  red, 723,  668 
Emetic  Herb,  581 
Emetic  Pills,  700 
simpLe,  680 
Emetics,  preparation  of,  099 
Enemas,  698 
Epilepsia,  810 
Epilepsy  810 
Epistaxis,  818 
Erysipelas,  792 
Erysipelatous  Affections,  792 
Essence,  how  to  make,  740 
Eugenia  Caryoph)'llata,  673 
Eupatorium  Perfoliatum,  681 
Exercise,  772 
Eye,  film  in,  a  cure  for,  736 
Eyebri2;ht,  581 
Eye  Water,  647,  735 
Falling  of  the  AVomb,  738 
False  Aloes,  620 
Fatigue,  lo  prevent  after  excess- 
ive labor,  746 
Febrile  Diseases,  789 
Febris  Intermittens,  789 
Feet,  take  care  of  the,  743 
Felon,  how  treated,  724 
Females,  a  syrup  for,  738 
obstructions  for,  739 
Females,  remedies  for,  737 
Ferula  Asafoitida,  634,  711 
Feverfew,  686 
Fever,  Intermittent,  789 
Fibrous  Tissue,  diseases  of,  807 
Fistula,  741 
Fir  Tree,  676 
Fire,  189 
Flatulence  815 
Flesh,  reunion  of,  g|  770 
Flowers,  ^  76 
Fluor  A  Ibus,  a  cure  for,  737 
Foetus,  the  growth  of,  14 
Foot,  setting  a  bone  in  the,  744 
Fragaria  Virginiana,  660,  721 
France,  crime  in,  771 
Freezing  Mixtures,  201 
Galium  Aparine,  661,  721 
Gall  Stones,  806 
Gardens,  Botanical,  111 
Geranium  Maculatum,  609 
Gesner,  Conrad,  104 
Geum  Virginianum,  608,  703 
Ginger,  594,  701 
Ginseng,  687 
Glucina,  177 
Golden  Rod,  685 


Golden  Seal,  613,  705 

Goldthread,  622,  705 

Gout,  808 

Gravel,  722,  819 

Green  Osier,  646,  712 
Growth  and  extractive  malter  of 

vegetation,  165 

Hamamelis  Virginica,  603,  702 

Hoemoptysis,  799 

Healthy  Beverage,  747 

Heart,  1st  view  of,  246 

2d        do  247 

Heartburn,  815 

Heat,  theories  of,  189 

nature  of,  190 

methods  of  producing,  190 

general  effects  of,  191 

measurement  of,  192 

expansion,  exceptions  to,      192 

equal  distribution  of,  193 

propagation  of,  193 

conve5'ed  by  change  in  the 

situation  of  fluids,  194 
capacity  of  bodies  to  con- 
tain, 198 
Heat  Animal,  diminution  of,  in 

sleep,  776 
Hedeoma  Pulegioides,  683 
Hemlock,  599,  748,  742 
Hepatitis,  805 
Hiccough,  817 
Hollyhock,  671,  724 
Horehound,  622 
Horse  Radish,  683 
Hydrastis  Canadensis,  613,  705 
Hydrocephalus,  814 
Hydrophobia,  821 
Hysteria.  810 
Hysterics,  810 
Ichtodes  FcEtidus,  638 
Icterus,  806 
Illustrations  of  Anatomy  and  Bo- 
tany, 4,  5 
Impetigo,  788 
Important  to  be  remembered,  679 
Index,  Anatomical,  485 
of  Dr.  Thomson's  practice,  577 
Indian  Tobacco,  58I 
Indigestion,  816 
Inflammation  of  the  Kidneys,  805 
Influenza,  794 
Injections,  698 
Insects  in  the  ears,  741 
Intemperance,  748 
Introduction,  5,  691 
Inula  Helenium,  688 
Ischuria  et  Dysuria,  818 
Itch,  788 
Jaundice,  806 
Joints,  sprained,  779 
Juglans  Cineria,  658,  718 
Juniper,  666,  721 


828 


THE    THOMSONIAN 


Kercuma, 

Key  lo  the  Arrangement  of  this 

Book, 
Knee  JointS;  debility  of, 
Kine  Pox, 

Lactuea  eiongata,  662, 
Ladies'  Slipper,  632, 
Language  to  designate  Plants, 
Laurus  Camphora,  636, 
Laurus,  Cinnaraomum, 
Laxative  Pills, 
Leaf, 

Leakage  of  a  Joint,  to  stop, 
Leontodon  Taraxacum,  664, 
Leonurus  Cardiaca, 
Liberty  Tea,  606, 
Lichen, 
Light, 

nature  of, 

terms  of,  explained, 

sources  of, 

properties  of, 
Ligusticum  Levisticum,  652, 
Lily  while  pond, 
Lime,  173, 
Limosis  Cardialgica, 

Flatus, 
Liniments,  729,  730, 
Linneus, 

his  Classification, 
Lithiasis, 
Liver  Complaint, 
Lobelia  Inflata, 
Lovage,  652, 
Love  Apple, 
Lung  Fever, 

Macrotys  Serpenlaria,  643, 
Magnesia,  174, 
Merubium  Vulgare,  622, 
Marsh  Rosemary,  601, 
Matter, 

organized, 

passive  and  active,  170, 
Mayweed, 
Meadovs'  Fern,  649, 
Measles, 

Medical  Compounds, 
Mentha  piperita, 
Mentha  viridis, 
Merian,  M.  S., 
Miliaris, 
Miliary  Fever, 
Millfoil, 

Milkweed,  wandering,  618, 
Miscellaneous  Recipes, 
Mixtures,  freezing. 
Mother's  Relief, 
Mucilagenous  substaaces,  667, 
Mullein, 
Mumps, 
Mustard, 


613 

3 
744 
784 
721 
710 
117 
711 
675 
720 

64 
743 
721 
739 
702 
787 
202 
202 
203 
203 
203 
712 
598 
678 
815 
815 
731 

98 
132 
819 
805 
581 
712 
655 
795 
711 
677 
705 
702 
170 
211 
189 
6S5 
712 
785 
699 
682 
682 

89 
78& 
786 
652 
619 
73& 

m 

723 
688 
801 
684 


Myrica  Gale,  649, 

712 

Myristica  Moschata, 

674 

Myrrh,  629, 

709 

Myrtus  Pimenta, 

674 

Myrica  Cerifcra, 

.597 

Natural  Physic, 

716 

Nepeta  Cataria, 

684 

Nephritis, 

805 

Nerve  Root, 

632 

Ointment, 

640 

Nervines,  710, 

632 

Neivous  Irritability, 

739 

Nervous  People, 

776 

Nettle  Rash, 

787 

Neuralgia, 

822 

No.  1,  Emetics,  581, 

699 

2,  Stimulants,  590 

700 

3,,  Astrinsent's,  597, 

701 

4,  Bitters,  613, 

704 

5,  Restorative  Tonics,  024, 

707 

6,  Antiseptics,  629, 

709 

Northern  People,  directions  for, 

752 

Numerals,  Latin,  and  Greek, 

131 

Nutmeg, 

674 

Nyrnphsea  Odorata,  598, 

701 

Oak,  black,  610, 

703 

Avhite, 

611 

Observations,  useful, 

760 

Obstipatio, 

816 

Oil  Nut, 

658 

Oils  of  Plants, 

83 

Ointments,  647,  712,  713,  732, 

733 

Oleum  Ricini,  657, 

719 

Orders,  artificial,  137, 

143 

natural. 

144 

of  Linneus, 

144 

Orobanche  Uniflora, 

688 

Osmunda  Regalis, 

669 

Our  Countrywomen,  to, 

86 

Outlines  of  Linncus's  System  of 

Vcsretables, 

93 

Palsy, 

812 

Paralysis, 

815 

Parsley,  663, 

721 

Panax  Quinqiwfolia, 
Peach,  624,  7ff^ 

687 

718 

Pearlash, 

67S 

Pennyroyal, 

683 

Peppermint, 

682 

Pepper,  W.  f.  or  Bird,  590,  700, 

717 

Red, 

593 

Black,  701, 

596 

Perspiration, 

773 

Physic,  720, 

719 

Phthisis  Pulmonalis, 

796 

Piles, 

733 

Pinus,  Canadensis,  599, 

702 

Piper  Nigrum,  596, 

701 

Pipsissewa,  644, 

711 

Plants,  food  and  seed  of, 

38 

nourishment  of, 

41 

MATERIA   MEDICA. 


829 


Plants,  language  to  designate, 

117 

Respiration, 

decomposition  of, 

46 

Respiratory  Aparatus,   diseases 

seed  of, 

50 

of. 

anatomy  of,  51, 

M 

Restorative  Compounds, 

form  and  structure  of. 

60 

Rhamnus  Catharticus,  659, 

essential  oil  of. 

S3 

Rheumatic  Drops, 

classification  of, 

90 

Rheumatism,  731, 

location  of. 

118 

Rhcumatismus, 

germination  of, 

121 

Rhus  Glabriun, 

propagation  of, 

121 

Ringworm, 

increase  of. 

122 

Ring,  tight,  to  remove  from  the 

elementary  organs  of, 

123 

finger. 

calyx  of. 

123 

Round  leaved  Dogwood, 

corol  of, 

124 

Rubeola, 

stamen  of. 

125 

Rules  to  be  observed, 

pistil  of, 

125 

Rumex,  648,. 

pericarp  of. 

125 

Saccharine  Urine, 

seed  of, 

126 

Sage,  611, 

receptacle  of. 

12G 

St.  Vitus's  Dance. 

flowers  of. 

126 

Saleratus, 

inflorescence  of. 

127 

Salt,  medical  properties  of, 

roots  and  herbage  of, 

127 

Salt  Rheum,  733, 

stems  of, 

128 

Salva  Officinalis.  611, 

leaves  of, 

129 

Salves,  732,  734,  735, 

Plasters,  734, 

735 

Sanguinaria  Canadensis, 

Pleurisy, 

794 

Sarsaparilla, 

Pleuritis, 

794 

Satureja  Hortensis, 

Pneumonia, 

795 

"Scald-Head, 

Podagra, 

808 

Scarlatina, 

Poisons, 

736 

Scarlet  Fever,  741, 

Poisoned  Wounds, 

792 

Sea  Lavender, 

Poisons,  rules  for  avoiding. 

149 

Seed  of  plants, 

Poisons,  to  extract,  737, 

702 

Senna,  American, 

Polygonum  Punctatum, 

689 

Sesimum  Orientale,  670, 

Polypus, 

740 

Shingles, 

Poplar,  615, 

705 

Silica, 

Population,  white  and  black. 

750 

Sinapsis  Nigra, 

Populus,  615, 

705 

Singultus, 

Potassae  Carbonas  Imptsrus, 

678 

Skeleton, 

Bicarbonas, 

678 

plate  of  front  view. 

Poultices,  66S,  723,  725, 

715 

back  view, 

Practitioners,  to. 

748 

Skunk  Cabbage,  633, 

Prickly  Ash, 

650 

Sleeping,  the  young  with  the  old 

Prickly  Heat, 

787 

Small  Pox, 

Princess  Pine,  711,     ^ 
Prolapsus  Uteri, 

644 

Smart  Weed, 

738 

Smellage, 

Prunus,  Virginiana,  707, 

626 

Snake-head, 

Prominent  Symptoms  and  Acci- 

Soda:, 

dents, 

813 

Solanum  Dulcamara,  639, 

Psora, 

788 

Solanum  Lycopersicum, 

Public  Speakers,  to, 

749 

Solidago  Odora, 

Pulmonary  Complaints, 

727 

Solids,  conversion  of  to  a  gas- 

Pyrosis,, 815.          Purging, 

803 

eous  state, 

Quercus  Rubra,  610, 

703 

Sore  Eyes, 

Alba, 

611 

Sore  Mouth, 

Quinsy,  742, 

801 

Nipples,  73S, 

Reader,  to  the, 

4 

Throat, 

Rubus  Strigosus,  604, 

702 

Spearmint, 

Red  Clover, 

671 

Spice  Bitters, 

Red  Raspberry,  604, 

702 

Spitting  of  Blood, 

Refrigeration,  artificial. 

198 

Spotted  Fever, 

Relax,  70% 

726 

Sprained  Limb, 

17 

793 
707 
720 
709 
807 
807 
602 
788 

740 
646 
785 
691 
712 
819 
703 
809 
678 
760 
734 
703 
823 
681 
712 
€83 
733 
785 
785 
601 
38 
656 
724 
787 
176 
684 
817 
218 
228 
230 
711 
,  747 
780 
689 
652 
613 
677 
711 
655 
685 

196 
735 
738 
739 
742 
682 
706 
799 
791 
747 


830 


THE  THOMSONIAN 


Sprains, 

Squaw  Root, 

Squaw  Weed, 

Stamina  and  Fistula, 

Star  Flower, 

Star  Grass. 

Statice  Limonium,  601, 

Steaming, 

Stimulants,  682.  590, 

Stranguary,  719,  721, 

Strontia, 

Substances,  simple, 

Sumac,  602, 

Sweet  Gale, 

Symphytum  Officinalis,  623, 

Symptoms,  Prominent,  and  Acci- 
dents, 

Syphilis, 

Syrups,  642,  651,  653,  662,  664, 
665,  666.  707,  70S, 

Tanacetum  Vulgare, 

Tansey, 

Tea,  American,  or  Liberty, 

Teeth,  740'  Tetter, 

Theory,  Thomsonian, 

Thomsonian  Theory, 

Thorax,  view  of  by  plate, 

Throat,  diseases  of, 

Tic  Douloureux, 

To  be  remembered, 

Tomato, 

Tonics,  simple, 

Tooth  ache, 

Tooth-ache  Bush, 

Tournefort, 

Tournequet, 

Trance, 

Treatment  of  the  Surface, 

Trifolium  Pratense,  671, 

Trunk,  description  of  the, 
view  of  by  plate, 

Typhus  Icterodes, 
Gravior, 

Ulmus  Fulva,  668, 

Unicorn,  620, 

Urine,  suppression  of, 

Urticaria, 

Valerian, 

Vapor,  condensation  of, 

Varicell/, 

Variola, 

Vaccine, 

Vegetable  anatomy,  51, 
growth,  &.C., 
skeleton. 


779 

Vegetables,  Linneus'  systens^,  onl 

;. 

6SS 

lines  of,  93, 

132 

607 

Vegetables, 

203 

80 

Venereal,  733, 

821 

607 

Verbascum  Thapsus, 

688 

620 

Verbena  Hastata, 

680 

702 

Vermes, 

807 

736 

Veronica  Beccabunga, 

739 

700 

Vervain, 

680 

818 

Viscera,  internal,  1st  view, 

234 

172 

2d    do 

236 

680 

3d    do 

238 

702 

4th  do 

240 

649 

5th  do 

242 

705 

6th  do 

244 

Vitality, 

23 

813 

Vocabulary, 

150 

821 

Volatile  Tincture, 

731 

Salts, 

731 

738 

Vomiting  and  Purging, 

803 

690 

Vomiting,  spontaneous, 

817 

690 

Wake  Robin, 

672 

606 

Water,  71,  170, 

179 

741 

distilled. 

183 

780 

rain. 

185 

13 

ice  and  snow, 

185 

249 

spring. 

186 

801 

river. 

187 

822 

stagnated. 

188 

694 

Water  Pepper, 

689 

655 

Water  in  the  Brain, 

814 

686 

Brash, 

815 

740 

White  Swellings, 

724 

650 

Whitlows, 

724 

107 

Wild  Strawberry,  660, 

721 

778 

Lettuce,  662, 

721 

811 

Turnip, 

672 

715 

Camomile, 

685 

724 

Witch  Hazel,  603, 

702 

232 

Woman's  Friend, 

707 

248 

Women,  to  our  fair  country, 

86 

790 

Woody  Nightshade, 

639 

791 

AVorms, 

807 

723 

Wormwood, 

690 

705 

Wounds, 

777 

723 

stitching  of, 

778 

787 

Xanthoxylum  Fraxineum,  650, 

712 

632 

Yarrow,  652, 

712 

198 

Yeast,  667, 

723 

784 

Yellow  Fever, 

790 

780 

Yttria, 

178 

784 

Youth,  advice  to, 

742 

54 

Zingiber  Officinale,  594, 

701 

165 

Zirconia, 

1S7 

147 

NOTICE. 
The  Anatomical  Index  not  only  refers  to  pages,  but  is  also  a  complete  and' 
useful  Dictionary,  to  explain  all  Anatomical  Technicalities  to  which  a  refev 
ence  is  made.    See  page  485, 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  831 

IMPORTANT    N  O  T  I  C  b: . 

The  following  objections  to  the  different  articles  and  compounds  in  this 
book,  were  made  by  Dr.  Samuel  Thomson,  after  the  work  was  printed.  And 
in  justice  to  him,  and  out  of  respect  to  his  opinion,  we  insert  them  here,  that 
every  one  may  know  that  his  opinion  is  not  changed  in  relation  to  cathartics, 
and  that  what  is  said  upon  that  subject  is  done  on  our  own  responsibility,  and 
for  which  Dr.  Thomson  is  not  to  be  held  responsible.  The  following  are  the 
•objections,  viz. 

All  cathartic  medicine,  of  every  kind  ;  also,  the  compounding  of  the  black 
salve,  on  page  734  (for  which  we  have  inserted  a  substitute  on  page  823); 
borax  for  sore  mouth,  page  738;  maple  charcoal  to  prevent  mortification. 
page  727  ;  a  paper  saturated  with  salt  pelre,  and  burned,  to  relieve  asthma, 
page  742;  Peruvian  bark  to  clean  the  teeth,  page  740  ;  poke  root  made  into 
ointment  for  the  piles,  page  741 ;  sulphate  of  zinc  compounded  in  poultices 
for  sj'philitic  ulcers,  page  733  ;  burnt  alum  for  dysentery,  page  726  ;  tobacco 
ointment  for  salt  rheumj  page  713  ;  gin  to  quiet  nervous  irritability,  page  711; 
emetic  pills,  page  700  ;  asafetida  for  hysteria,  page  634  ;  blood  root  for  emet- 
ic, page  634;  black  cohosh  to  cure  rheumatism,  and  to  regulate  the  monthly 
turns  with  females,  page  643  ;  and,  page  695,  the  injection  should  be  given 
before  steaming. 

It  is  to  be  understood,  that  he  objects  to  the  use  of  those  articles,  in  every 
form  or  shape  whatever,  except  the  enemas.  JOHN  THOMSON. 

CORRESPONDENCE. 

We  subjoin  the  correspondence  between  his  Honor  the  Mayor  of  the  city  of 
Albany,  and  the  Rt.  Hon.  Horatio  Gates  of  Montreal,  Lower  Canada,  in  re- 
lation to  our  visit  to  that  Province  in  time  of  the  Cholera  in  1832,  and  our 
treatment  of  that  disease  while  at  the  latter  place. 

BOARD  OF  HEALTH,  ) 

City  of  Albany,  June  18th,  1832.  \ 

Horatio  Gates,  Esq. — The  bearer,  Dr.  John  Thomson,  of  this  city,  is  de- 
sirous of  proceeding  to  Canada,  in  order  to  attend  some  cases  of  cholera  now 
existing  in  your  city.  I  beg  leave  to  commend  him  to  your  favorable  consi- 
deration, and  ask  the  favor  that  you  will  give  him  anintroduction  to  your 
Board  of  health,  and  such  other  authorities  in  your  city,  as  may  be  thou,<'ht 
advisable.  Respectfully  Yours, 

JOHN  TOWNSEND,  Mayor  of  Albany. 

Montreal,  June  23,  18.32. 
Hon.  John  Tovvnsend — Sir:  Yours  by  the  hand  of  Dr.  John  Thomson, 
(by  whom  this  goes)  was  duly  received,  and  I  have  to  inform  you  that  he  has 
been  very  industrious  while  here  in  searching  out  cases  of  the  cholera,  most  of 
which,  however,  were  of  a  bad  type,  and  had  been  too  long  neglected  :  He 
has  prescribed  to  a  number  free  of  expense  such  medicines  as  he  brought 
with  him,  which  I  understand  he  makes,  and  from  the  testimony  of  two  or 
three  individuals  of  respectable  standing  who  accompanied  Dr.  Thompson, 
and  saw  him  administer  his  medicine,  together  with  my  own  personal  obser- 
vation, having  conversed  with  two  who  are  convalescent,  and  who  described 
the  relief  obtained  from  Dr.  Thomson's  prescriptions  as  almost  immediate 
and  complete.  I  cannot  but  think  good  may  result  by  his  practice  wherever 
that  terrible  disease,  the  Cholera,  prevails  ;  yet  as  I  have  no  knowledge  of 
the  science  of  medicine,  my  opinion  must  be  taken  for  what  it  is  worth. 

Yours,  HORATIO  GATES. 


^  OPINIONS 

Of  Medical  Men  and  of  tlie  Press  in  relulion  to  this  ¥ork, 

AND    THE 

THOMSONIAN    SYSTEM    OF    PRACTICE    GENERALLY. 


Extract  of  a  letter  from  Professor  Bankfton,  Dean  of  the  Southern  Medical 
College,  bearing  date 

FoKSYTH,  Ga,.,  August  14,  1841. 

Dear  Sir  : — Yours  of  the  2nd  has  duly  arrived  and  is  now  before  me  ;  as 
also  632  pages  of  your  new  work,  with  plates,  &c. ;  all  you  mention. 

It  affords  me  much  pleasure  to  see  issuing  from  the  press,  a  work  under 
Doctor  Thomson's  sanction,  of  the  appearance  and  character  of  the  Thomso- 
nian  Materia  Medica.  Such  a  work  has  long  been  wanted,  and  the  Thomso- 
nian  system  has  suffered  much  for  the  want  of  such  an  one.  Its  style  is  real- 
ly genteel — ^such  as  the  worth  of  the  cause  demands.  The  matter  I  consider 
well  arranged,  and  is  calculated  to  do  credit  to  the  writer  and  compiler.  The 
theory  I  conceive  to  be  good,  and  the  articles  of  medicine,  so  far  as  I  have 
seen,  will  meet  the  views  of  the  large  body  of  Thomsonians,  or  Eotanics.  if 
you  please.  The  plates,  both  anatomical  and  botanical,  are  neatly  executed, 
and  cannot  be  complained  of  by  any. 

In  a  word,  I  entertain  no  doubt  but  more  real  benefit  will  result  from  it, 
than  have  from  all  other  botanic  works  combined.  In  the  first  place,  its  ap- 
pearance will  command  the  attention  of  the  first  minds — sufficient,  no  doubt, 
to  secure  it  a  perusal — and  its  reasoning  is  such  as  to  convince.  I  think  it 
might  profitably  be  extended  oven  to  one  thousand  pages,  in  giving  the  parti- 
cular treatment  of  important  diseases. 

On  the  subject  of  evacuants  you  carry  the  thing  as  far  as  necessary,  and 
none  too  far.  Pliysiology  sustains  about  your  position  on  that  subject ;  and 
it  will,  I  doubt  not,  remove  the  cause  of  that  hair-breadth  splitting,  which  has 
seemed  to  give  you  so  much  trouble  at  the  North.  As  for  active  cathartics  I 
have  no  use,  but  to  excite  some  action  upon  the  bowels  is  as  necessary  as  up- 
on the  skin  in  many  diseases  ;  and  I  have  no  doubt  is  oftener  called  for  in  this 
climate  than  in  yours.  To  attempt  to  criticise  I  think  would  be  rather  a 
useless  business,  for  what  I  might  find  fault  with,  would  no  doubt,  please 
many  others.  I  conceive  the  arrangement  and  style  of  the  work  as  very  good, 
and  will  give  general  satisfaction  ;  it  carries  upon  its  face  the  evidence  of  no 
small  share  of  labor  in  so  short  a  time. 

Yours,  L.  BANKSTOJf. 

To  Doctor  John  Thomson,  Albany. 


MATERIA    MEDICA.  833 

From  the  Pougkkeepsie  Thomsonian,  edited  by  Doctor  Thomas  Lapham. 
THE  NEW  BOOK  AT  HAND. 

We  are  informed  that  Doct.  Thomson's  new  work  is  now  ready  for  bindin;^* 
It  contains  upwards  of  800  pages,  and  120  plates  and  cuts,  wliich  serve  to  il- 
lustrate in  a  familiar  manner  the  structure  of  the  human  bodj',  and  a  variety 
of  medicinal  plants,  See.  The  vegetable  remedies  are  represented  by  colored 
engravings,  which  are  neatly  executed. 

Many  have  been  anxious  to  have  this  work  completed,  and  at  the  same 
lime  some  have  almost  dreaded  its  appearance,  lest  it  should  cause  disturb- 
ance in  the  Thomsonian  ranks.  But  we  are  happy  to  inform  our  readers  that 
this  publication  will  probably  do  more  towards  harm.onizing  the  conflicting 
opinions  which  have  prevailed  for  some  time  past,  than  all  other  things  coni- 
bined.  We  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  to  say  that  Doctor  Thomson's  book 
is  perfectly  free  from  errors  ;  but  we  do  believe  that  it  will  meet  the  approba- 
tion of  Thomsonians  generally  in  this  state,  and  in  the  southern  and  western 
slates.  Both  parties  will  probably  rally  under  the  influence  of  this  produc- 
tion, and  again  acknowledge  Doctor  Thomson  as  their  leader  and  benefactor. 
We  cordiaiiy  unite  with  Professor  Bankston  in  the  opinion  that  this  book 
will  take  the  lead  of  all  botanical  works,  and  do  more  good  than  all 
of  them  put  together,  in  doing  away  with  that  hair-breadth  splitting  which 
has  caused  so  much  trouble  at  the  North.  V/e  presume  that  Doctor  Thom- 
son will  never  have  occasion  to  regret  the  time,  money  and  labor  spent  in 
getting  up  this  new  publication.  How  could  the  old  gentleman  spend  the 
evening  of  his  life  better,  or  more  satisfactory  to  himself  and  the  public,  than 
by  recording  in  a  plain  and  familiar  manner  his  experience  in  the  art  of  heal- 
ing for  half  a  century  ?  The  time  will  soon  arrive  v/hen  Doctor  Thomson's 
labors  will  be  appreciated  by  every  son  and  daughter  of  America,  and  all, 
without  a  dissenting  voice,  will  say  "  Well  done,  thou  good  and  faithful  ser- 
vant," &c. 


NOTE  BY  THE  EDITOR  OF  THIS  WORK. 

We  are  under  a  compliment  to  Dr.  A.  Curtiss,  Editor  of  the  Botanico  Medi- 
cal Recorder,  of  Cincinnatti,  Ohio,  for  a  very  flattering  notice  of  this  work, 
embracing  upwards  of  two  columns  of  his  valuable  and  extensively  useful 
paper.  The  article  has  been  mislaid,  which  is  our  apology  for  its  non-appear- 
ance at  this  time  and  place.  Also  to  several  other  periodicals  are  we  under  a 
like  indebtedness,  among  which  are  the  Southern  Botanical  Medical  Journal) 
published  by  the  Trustees  of  the  Medical  College,  Forsyth,  Ga.,  Professor 
Lee,  Editor;  the  Botanic  Sentinel,  Philadelphia,  Penn.j  the  Thomsonian 
Manual,  Boston,  Mass.  ;  and  the  editors  and  proprietors  of  the  other  nume- 
rous daily  and  weekly  publications  who  have  had  a  fatherly  care  over,  and 
have  noticed  and  encouraged  us,  b)'  their  favorable  opinion  as  we  have  pro- 
gressed, has  had  its  favorable  influence,  for  which  we  return  our  grateful  ac' 
knowledgements. 

Qcj- And  especially  do  we  render  our  acknowledgements  to  tlie  veyy  tal- 
EWTED  editors  and  proprietorx  of  the  Boston  Tkue  Thomsonian  ;  also,  to  the 
learned  "Professor"  ! !  of  the  tc?  Boston  DispensarYj/31  Lecturer  on  Physi- 
ology, the  Practice  of  Medicine,  etc.,  etc.,  who  have  rendered  signal  service  by 
their  frequent  notice  of  us,  our  venerable  Parent  and  our  Book  as  it  has 
progressed,  which  has  been  peculiarly  happy  in  its  influence,  in  bringing  it 
and  us  into  notice  so  extensively  throughout  the  United  States. 


83i  THE  TIIOMSONIAN 

From  the  Boston  Thomsonian  Manual  of  October  \st,  1840. 

It  is  with  much  pleasure  that  we  lay  before  our  readers  tlie  following  letter 
from  Benjamin  Wateiuiouse.  m.  d.,  ll.  d.,  Fellow  of  the  American  Academy 
af  Arts  and  Sciences  ;  of  the  Philosophical  Society  of  Philadelphia,  and  of 
Bath  and  Manchester,  En;^land  ;  Fellow  of  the  Medical  Society,  London,  of 
the  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Belles  Lettres,  Inscriptions,  and  Com- 
merce, Marseilles,  and  of  the  National  Medical  School  of  France,  and  late 
Professor  of  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  Physic  in  the  University  of  Cam- 
bridge, Mass. ;  which  last  high  and  responsible  station  he  held  for  about 
THIRTY  YEARS.  We  give  his  titles,  because  many  of  the  learned  faculty  when 
told  of  his  favorable  viev.s  of  Thomsonism,  pretend  that  they  Lave  never 
heard  of  the  man,  and  do  not  believe  what  is  asserted.  Dr.  Waterhouse  has 
been  acquainted  with  the  Thomsonian  System  for  many  years,  and  has  given 
repeated  testimonials  in  its  favor.  That  many  other  eminent  men  and  phy- 
sicians would  do  likewise,  had  they  the  same  moral  courage,  we  do  not  doubt. 

Cambridge,  Sept  24.  1S40. 

Sir — To  the  inquiries  respecting  the  System,  or  rather  the  Theory  and  prac- 
tice of  your  Father,  I  reply,  that  had  not  its  principles  been  founded  in  Truth 
and  Nature,  it  could  not  have  maintained  its  reputation  thus  far,  but  would 
long  since  have  been  swept  into  non-entity,  and  been  numbered  among  those 
things  which  rise  to-day,  and  are  vanished  to-morrow.  Yet  amidst  opposition 
and  even  persecution.  Dr.  Samuel  Thomson  has  the  solid  satisfaction  of  know- 
ing that  time  has  increased  its  reputation,  and  imparted  firmness  to  a  prac- 
tice hitherto  untried  among  us. 

Thomson  does  not  attempt  to  magnify  himself  bj'  the  arts  of  secrecy  ;  but 
performs  his  curative  process  openly,  and  fairly  appeals  to  his  patient's  feel- 
ings, and  the  judgment  of  his  friends,  to  pronounce  on  the  sick  man's  altera- 
tion for  the  better.  The  wonder  with  me  has  been  that  so  many  have  been 
effectually  relieved,  with  so  little  suffering. 

The  oldest  practitioners,  and  physicians  of  the  most  extensive  business,  are 
the  best  judges  of  its  success  :  For  my  part  I  know  no  victims  to  the  process 
under  consideration,  when  it  has  been  judiciously  and  fairly  conducied  ;  and 
I  confess  that  I  have  been  rather  surprised  that  so  many  have  been  relieved, 
who  have  long  suffered  under  the  hands  of  others. 

As  far  as  my  knowledge  extends,  I  consider  Dr.  Thomson  well  acquainted 
with  chronic  disorders  generally  ;  and  without  the  aid  of  scholastic  instruc- 
tion, he  has  made  his  M'ay,  by  the  force  of  his  own  genius,  and  peculiar  turn 
for  the  healing  art,  to  the  respectable  stand  he  now  occupies  in  the  medical 
world;  and  without  running  into  any  invidious  comparison  between  him  and 
others,  who  are  looking  at  the  same  object  and  traveling  the  same  way,  I  pro- 
nounce him  a  public  benefactor. 

I  remain  with  sentiments  of  respect  and  esteem,  vour  steady^  friend, 

BENJAMIN  AVATERHOUSE. 

To  Dr.  John  Thomson,  Albany,  N.  Y. 


Extract  of  a  Letter  dated  Columbus  Ohio,  Dec.  31,  1832. 

Dear  Sir — Dr.  Piatt  being  in  the  office.  I  saw  a  letter  he  had  written.  Ob- 
serving a  vacant  page,  I  thought  I  would  place  my  pen  to  paper — for  by  the 
mouth  of  two  or  three  witnesses  shall  every  word  be  established. 

I  have  been  more  than  forty  years  ensaged  in  the  regular  practice  of  medi- 
cine. I  was  a  surgeon  during  the  last  war  in  the  army  of  the  United  States. 
I  was  by  an  election  surgeon  (extraordinary)  to  the  Petcrsburgh  Volunteers 
and  Major  Stoddard's  two  companies  of  Artillery.  I  was  one  of  the  founders 
of  the  Western  Medical  Society  of  Pennsylvania,  and  also  am  a  member  of 
the  Medical  Society  of  the  State  of  Ohio. 

My  practice  has  been  extensive — my  experience  and  opportunity  for  obser- 
vation has  seldom  been  exceeded  :  but  I  venture  to  pledge  myself  upon  all  I 
hold  sacred  in  the  profussion,  that  in  my  estimation  the  discoveries  made  by 
your  honored  father,  have  a  decided  preference  and  stand  unrivalled  by  all 
that  bears  the  stamp  of  ancient  or  modern  skill.  The  number  of  literary 
friends  are  continually  on  the  increase.  T.  HERSEY. 

To  Doctor  JoH.N  Thomson,  Albany. 


University  of 
Connecticut 

Libraries 


